Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

  • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}152|cart{/j2store}
  • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
  • member rating average dollars saved: $97,499 Average $ Saved
  • member rating average days saved: 26 Average Days Saved
  • Parent Category Name: Development
  • Parent Category Link: /development
  • Your organization is looking to create consistency across all Agile teams to drive greater business results and alignment.
  • You are seeking to organically grow Agile capabilities within the organization through a set of support structures and facilitated through shared learning and capabilities.

Our Advice

Critical Insight

  • Social capital can be an enabler, but also a barrier. People can only manage a finite number of relationships; ensure that the connections the Center of Excellence (CoE) facilitates are purposeful.
  • Don’t over govern. Empowerment is critical to enable improvements; set boundaries and let teams work inside them with autonomy.
  • Legitimize through listening. A CoE will not be leveraged unless it aligns with the needs of its users. Invest the time to align with the functional expectations of your Agile teams.

Impact and Result

  • Create a set of service offerings aligned with both corporate objectives and the functional expectations of its customers to ensure broad support and utility of the invested resources.
  • Understand some of the cultural and processual challenges you will face when forming a center of excellence, and address them using Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model.

Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence Research & Tools

Start here – read the Executive Brief

Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build an Agile Center of Excellence, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

1. Strategically align the Center of Excellence

Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision.

  • Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – Phase 1: Strategically Align the Center of Excellence

2. Standardize the Center of Excellence’s service offerings

Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization.

  • Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – Phase 2: Standardize the Center of Excellence’s Service Offerings

3. Operate the Center of Excellence

Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change.

  • Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – Phase 3: Operationalize Your Agile Center of Excellence
  • ACE Satisfaction Survey
  • CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool
  • ACE Benefits Tracking Tool
  • ACE Communications Deck
[infographic]

Workshop: Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

1 Determine Vision of CoE

The Purpose

Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision.

Understand how your key stakeholders will impact the longevity of your CoE.

Determine your CoE structure and staff.

Key Benefits Achieved

Top-down alignment with strategic aims of the organization.

A set of high-level use cases to form the CoE’s service offerings around.

Visualization of key stakeholders, with their current and desired power and involvement documented.

Activities

1.1 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

1.2 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your Agile Center of Excellence (ACE) and business objectives.

1.3 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

Outputs

Prioritized business objectives

Business-aligned use cases to form CoE’s service offerings

Stakeholder map of key influencers

2 Define Service Offerings of CoE

The Purpose

Document the functional expectations of the Agile teams.

Refine your business-aligned use cases with your collected data to achieve both business and functional alignment.

Create a capability map that visualizes and prioritizes your key service offerings.

Key Benefits Achieved

Understanding of some of the identified concerns, pain points, and potential opportunities from your stakeholders.

Refined use cases that define the service offerings the CoE provides to its customers.

Prioritization for the creation of service offerings with a capability map.

Activities

2.1 Classified pains and opportunities.

2.2 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

2.3 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

Outputs

Classified pains and opportunities

Refined use cases based on pains and opportunities identified during ACE requirements gathering

ACE Capability Map

3 Define Engagement Plans

The Purpose

Align service offerings with an Agile adoption model so that teams have a structured way to build their skills.

Standardize the way your organization will interact with the Center of Excellence to ensure consistency in best practices.

Key Benefits Achieved

Mechanisms put in place for continual improvement and personal development for your Agile teams.

Interaction with the CoE is standardized via engagement plans to ensure consistency in best practices and predictability for resourcing purposes.

Activities

3.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

3.2 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

Outputs

Adoption-aligned service offerings

Role-based engagement plans

4 Define Metrics and Plan Communications

The Purpose

Develop a set of metrics for the CoE to monitor business-aligned outcomes with.

Key Benefits Achieved

The foundations of continuous improvement are established with a robust set of Agile metrics.

Activities

4.1 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

4.2 Define target ACE performance metrics.

4.3 Define Agile adoption metrics.

4.4 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile team.

4.5 Create a communication plan for change.

Outputs

Business objective-aligned metrics

CoE performance metrics

Agile adoption metrics

Assessment of organizational design

CoE communication plan

Further reading

Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

Achieve ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

"Inconsistent processes and practices used across Agile teams is frequently cited as a challenge to adopting and scaling Agile within organizations. (VersionOne’s 13th Annual State of Agile Report [N=1,319]) Creating an Agile Center of Excellence (ACE) is a popular way to try to impose structure and improve performance. However, simply establishing an ACE does not guarantee you will be successful with Agile. When setting up an ACE you must: Define ACE services based on identified stakeholder needs. Staff the ACE with respected, “hands on” people, who deliver identifiable value to your Agile teams. Continuously evolve ACE service offerings to maximize stakeholder satisfaction and value delivered."

Alex Ciraco, Research Director, Applications Practice Info-Tech Research Group

Our understanding of the problem

This Research Is Designed For:

  • A CIO who is looking for a way to optimize their Agile capabilities and ensure ongoing alignment with business objectives.
  • An applications director who is looking for mechanisms to inject continuous improvement into organization-wide Agile practices.

This Research Will Help You:

  • Align your Agile support structure with business objectives and the functional expectations of its users.
  • Standardize the ways in which Agile teams develop and learn to create consistency in purpose and execution.
  • Track and communicate successes to ensure the long-term viability of an Agile Center of Excellence (ACE).

This Research Will Also Assist

  • Project managers who are tasked with managing Agile projects.
  • Application development managers who are struggling with establishing consistency, transparency, and collaboration across their teams.

This Research Will Help Them:

  • Provide service offerings to their team members that will help them personally and collectively to develop desired skills.
  • Provide oversight and transparency into Agile projects and outcomes through ongoing monitoring.

Executive summary

Situation

  • Your organization has had some success with Agile, but needs to drive consistency across Agile teams for better business results and alignment.
  • You are seeking to organically grow Agile capabilities within the organization through a set of support services and facilitated through shared learning and capabilities.

Complication

  • Organizational constraints, culture clash, and lack of continuous top-down support are hampering your Agile growth and maturity.
  • Attempts to create consistency across Agile teams and processes fail to account for the expectations of users and stakeholders, leaving them detached from projects and creating resistance.

Resolution

  • Align the service offerings of your ACE with both corporate objectives and the functional expectations of its stakeholders to ensure broad support and utilization of the invested resources.
  • Understand some of the culture and process challenges you will face when forming an ACE, and address them using Info-Tech’s Agile adoption journey model.
  • Track the progress of the ACE and your Agile teams. Use this data to find root causes for issues, and ideate to implement solutions for challenges as they arise over time.
  • Effectively define and propagate improvements to your Agile teams in order to drive business-valued results.
  • Communicate progress to interested stakeholders to ensure long-term viability of the Center of Excellence (CoE).

Info-Tech Insight

  1. Define ACE services based on stakeholder needs.Don’t assume you know what your stakeholders need without talking to them.
  2. Staff the ACE strategically. Choose those who are thought leaders and proven change agents.
  3. Continuously improve based on metrics and feedback.Constantly monitor how your ACE is performing and adjust to feedback.

Info-Tech’s Agile Journey related Blueprints

1. Stabilize

Implement Agile Practices That Work

Begin your Agile transformation with a comprehensive readiness assessment and a pilot project to adopt Agile development practices and behaviors that fit.

2. Sustain

YOU ARE HERE

Spread Best Practices with an Agile Center of Excellence

Form an ACE to support Agile development at all levels of the organization with thought leadership, strategic development support & process innovation.

3. Scale

Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

Extend the benefits of your Agile pilot project into your organization by strategically scaling Agile initiatives that will meet stakeholders’ needs.

4. Satisfy

Transition to Product Delivery Introduce product-centric delivery practices to drive greater benefits and better delivery outcomes.

1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

2.1 Define an adoption plan for Agile teams

2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

2.3 Define metrics to measure success

3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives

Supporting Capabilities and Practices

Modernize Your SDLC

Remodel the stages of your lifecycle to standardize your definition of a successful product.

Build a Strong Foundation for Quality

Instill quality assurance practices and principles in each stage of your software development lifecycle.

Implement DevOps Practices That Work

Fix, deploy, and support applications quicker though development and operations collaboration.

What is an Agile Center of Excellence?

NOTE: Organizational change is hard and prone to failure. Determine your organization’s level of readiness for Agile transformation (and recommended actions) by completing Info-Tech’s Agile Transformation Readiness Tool.

An ACE amplifies good practices that have been successfully employed within your organization, effectively allowing you to extend the benefits obtained from your Agile pilot(s) to a wider audience.

From the viewpoint of the business, members of the ACE provide expertise and insights to the entire organization in order to facilitate Agile transformation and ensure standard application of Agile good practices.

From the viewpoint of your Agile teams, it provides a community of individuals that share experiences and lessons learned, propagate new ideas, and raise questions or concerns so that delivering business value is always top of mind.

An ACE provides the following:

  1. A mechanism to gather thought leadership to maximize the accessibility and reach of your Agile investment.
  2. A mechanism to share innovations and ideas to facilitate knowledge transfer and ensure broadly applicable innovations do not go to waste.
  3. Strategic alignment to ensure that Agile practices are driving value towards business objectives.
  4. Purposeful good practices to ensure that the service offerings provided align with expectations of both your Agile practitioners and stakeholders.

SIDEBAR: What is a Community of Practice? (And how does it differ from a CoE?)

Some organizations prefer Communities of Practice (CoP) to Centers of Excellence (CoE). CoPs are different from CoEs:

A CoP is an affiliation of people who share a common practice and who have a desire to further the practice itself … and of course to share knowledge, refine best practices, and introduce standards. CoPs are defined by their domain of interest, but the membership is a social structure comprised of volunteer practitioners

– Wenger, E., R. A. McDermott, et al. (2002) Cultivating communities of practice: A guide to managing knowledge, Harvard Business Press.

CoPs differ from a CoE mainly in that they tend to have no geographical boundaries, they hold no hierarchical power within a firm, and they definitely can never have structure determined by the company. However, one of the most obvious and telling differences lies in the stated motive of members – CoPs exist because they have active practitioner members who are passionate about a specific practice, and the goals of a CoP are to refine and improve their chosen domain of practice – and the members provide discretionary effort that is not paid for by the employer

– Matthew Loxton (June 1, 2011) CoP vs CoE – What’s the difference, and Why Should You Care?, Wordpress.com

What to know about CoPs:

  1. Less formal than a CoE
    • Loosely organized by volunteer practitioners who are interested in advancing the practice.
  2. Not the Authoritative Voice
    • Stakeholders engage the CoP voluntarily, and are not bound by them.
  3. Not funded by Organization
    • CoP members are typically volunteers who provide support in addition to their daily responsibilities.
  4. Not covered in this Blueprint
    • In depth analysis on CoPs is outside the scope of this Blueprint.

What does an ACE do? Six main functions derived from Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G Framework

  1. Learning
  • Provide training and development and enable engagement based on identified interaction points to foster organizational growth.
  • Tooling
    • Promote the use of standardized tooling to improve efficiency and consistency throughout the organization.
  • Supporting
    • Enable your Agile teams to access subject-matter expertise by facilitating knowledge transfer and documenting good practices.
  • Governing
    • Create operational boundaries for Agile teams, and monitor their progress and ability to meet business objectives within these boundaries.
  • Monitoring
    • Demonstrate the value the CoE is providing through effective metric setting and ongoing monitoring of Agile’s effectiveness.
  • Guiding
    • Provide guidance, methodology, and knowledge for teams to leverage to effectively meet organizational business objectives.
  • Many organizations encounter challenges to scaling Agile

    Tackle the following barriers to Agile adoption with a business-aligned ACE.

    List based on reported impediments from VersionOne’s 13th Annual State of Agile Report (N=1,319)

    1. Organizational culture at odds with Agile values
    • The ACE identifies and measures the value of Agile to build support from senior business leaders for shifting the organizational culture and achieving tangible business benefits.
  • General organizational resistance to change
    • Resistance comes from a lack of trust. Optimized value delivery from Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model will build the necessary social capital to drive cultural change.
  • Inadequate management support and sponsorship
    • Establishing an ACE will require senior management support and sponsorship. Its formation sends a strong signal to the organizational leadership that Agile is here to stay.
  • Lack of skills/experience with Agile methods
    • The ACE provides a vehicle to absorb external training into an internal development program so that Agile capabilities can be grown organically within the organization.
  • Inconsistent processes and practices across teams
    • The ACE provides support to individual Agile teams and will guide them to adopt consistent processes and practices which have a proven track record in the organization.
  • Insufficient training and education
    • The ACE will assist teams with obtaining the Agile skills training they need to be effective in the organization, and support a culture of continuous learning.
  • Overcome your Agile scaling challenges with a business aligned ACE

    An ACE drives consistency and transparency without sacrificing the ability to innovate. It can build on the success of your Agile pilot(s) by encouraging practices known to work in your organization.

    Support Agile Teams

    Provide services designed to inject evolving good practices into workflows and remove impediments or roadblocks from your Agile team’s ability to deliver value.

    Maintain Business Alignment

    Maintain alignment with corporate objectives without impeding business agility in the long term. The ACE functions as an interface layer so that changing expectations can be adapted without negatively impacting Agile teams.

    Facilitate Learning Events

    Avoid the risk of innovation and subject-matter expertise being lost or siloed by facilitating knowledge transfer and fostering a continuous learning environment.

    Govern Improvements

    Set baselines, monitor metrics, and run retrospectives to help govern process improvements and ensure that Agile teams are delivering expected benefits.

    Shift Culture

    Instill Agile thinking and behavior into the organization. The ACE must encourage innovation and be an effective agent for change.

    Use your ACE to go from “doing” Agile to “being” Agile

    Organizations that do Agile without embracing the changes in behavior will not reap the benefits.

    Doing what was done before

    • Processes and Tools
    • Comprehensive Documentation
    • Contract Negotiation
    • Following a Plan

    Being Prescriptive

    Going through the motions

    • Uses SCRUM and tools such as Jira
    • Plans multiple sprints in detail
    • Talks to stakeholders once in a release
    • Works off a fixed scope BRD

    Doing Agile

    Living the principles

    • Individuals and Interactions
    • Working Software
    • Customer Collaboration
    • Responding to Change

    Being Agile

    “(‘Doing Agile’ is) just some rituals but without significant change to support the real Agile approach as end-to-end, business integration, value focus, and team empowerment.” - Arie van Bennekum

    Establishing a CoE does not guarantee success

    Simply establishing a Center of Excellence for any discipline does not guarantee its success:

    The 2019 State of DevOps Report found that organizations which had established DevOps CoEs underperformed compared to organizations which adopted other approaches for driving DevOps transformation. (Accelerate State of DevOps Report 2019 [N=~1,000])

    Still, Agile Centers of Excellence can and do successfully drive Agile adoption in organizations. So what sets the successful examples apart from the others? Here’s what some have to say:

    The ACE must be staffed with qualified people with delivery experience! … [It is] effectively a consulting practice, that can evolve and continuously improve its services … These services are collectively about ‘enablement’ as an output, more than pure training … and above all, the ability to empirically measure the progress” – Paul Blaney, TD Bank

    “When leaders haven’t themselves understood and adopted Agile approaches, they may try to scale up Agile the way they have attacked other change initiatives: through top-down plans and directives. The track record is better when they behave like an Agile team. That means viewing various parts of the organization as their customers.” – HBR, “Agile at Scale”

    “the Agile CoE… is truly meant to be measured by the success of all the other groups, not their own…[it] is meant to be serving the teams and helping them improve, not by telling them what to do, but rather by listening, understanding and helping them adapt.” - Bart Gerardi, PMI

    The CoE must also avoid becoming static, as it’s crucial the team can adjust as quickly as business and customer needs change, and evolve the technology as necessary to remain competitive.” – Forbes, “RPA CoE (what you need to know)”

    "The best CoEs are formed from thought leaders and change agents within the CoE domain. They are the process and team innovators who will influence your CoE roadmap and success. Select individuals who feel passionate about Agile." – Hans Eckman, InfoTech

    To be successful with your ACE, do the following…

    Info-Tech Insight

    Simply establishing an Agile Center of Excellence does not guarantee its success. When setting up your ACE, optimize its impact on the organization by doing the following 3 things:

    1. Define ACE services based on stakeholder needs. Be sure to broadly survey your stakeholders and identify the ACE functions and services which will best meet their needs. ACE services must clearly deliver business value to the organization and the Agile teams it supports.
    2. Staff the ACE strategically. Select ACE team members who have real world, hands-on delivery experience, and are well respected by the Agile teams they will serve. Where possible, select internal thought leaders in your organization who have the credibility needed to effect positive change.
    3. Continuously improve ACE services based on metrics and feedback. The value your ACE brings to the organization must be clear and measurable, and do not assume that your functions and services will remain static. You must regularly monitor both your metrics and feedback from your Agile teams, and adjust ACE behavior to improve/maximize these over time.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    This blueprint will walk you through the steps needed to build the foundations for operational excellence within an Agile Center of Excellence.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Info-Tech’s Practice Adoption Journey

    Use Info-Tech’s Practice Adoption Journey model to establish your ACE. Building social capital (stakeholders’ trust in your ability to deliver positive outcomes) incrementally is vital to ensure that everyone is aligned to new mindsets and culture as your Agile practices scale.

    Trust & Competency ↓

    DEFINE

    Begin to document your development workflow or value chain, implement a tracking system for KPIs, and start gathering metrics and reporting them transparently to the appropriate stakeholders.

    ITERATE

    Use collected metrics and retrospectives to stabilize team performance by reducing areas of variability in your workflow and increasing the consistency at which targets are met.

    COLLABORATE

    Use information to support changes and adopt appropriate practices to make incremental improvements to the existing environment.

    EMPOWER

    Drive behavioral and cultural changes that will empower teams to be accountable for their own success and learning.

    INNOVATE

    Use your built-up trust and support practice innovation, driving the definition and adoption of new practices.

    Align your ACE with your organization’s strategy

    This research set will assist you with aligning your ACEs services to the objectives of the business in order to justify the resources and funding required by your Agile program.

    Business Objectives → Alignment ←ACE Functions

    Business justification to continue to fund a Center of Excellence can be a challenge, especially with traditional thinking and rigid stakeholders. Hit the ground running and show value to your key influencers through business alignment and metrics that will ensure that the ACE is worth continuous investment.

    Alignment leads to competitive advantage

    The pace of change in customer expectations, competitive landscapes, and business strategy is continuously increasing. It is critical to develop a method to facilitate ongoing alignment to shifting business and development expectations seamlessly and ensure that your Agile teams are able to deliver expected business value.

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Operating Model to define the service offerings of your ACE

    Understand where your inputs and outputs lie to create an accessible set of service offerings for your Agile teams.

    The image shows a graphic of the COE Operating Model, showing the inputs and outputs, including Other CoEs (at top); Stakeholder Needs (at left); Metrics and Feedback (at bottom); and ACE Functions and Services (at right)

    Continuously improve the ACE to ensure long-term viability

    Improvement involves the continuous evaluation of the performance of your teams, using well-defined metrics and reasonable benchmarks that are supplemented by analogies and root-cause analysis in retrospectives.

    Monitor

    Monitor your metrics to ensure desired benefits are being realized. The ACE is responsible for ensuring that expected Agile benefits are achievable and on track. Monitor against your defined baselines to create transparency and accountability for desired outcomes.

    Iterate

    Run retrospectives to drive improvements and fixes into Agile projects and processes. Metrics falling short of expectations must be diagnosed and their root causes found, and fixes need to be communicated and injected back into the larger organization.

    Define

    Define metrics and set targets that align with the goals of the ACE. These metrics represent the ACEs expected value to the organization and must be measured against on a regular basis to demonstrate value to your key stakeholders.

    Beware the common risks of implementing your ACE

    Culture clash between Agile teams and larger organization

    Agile leverages empowered teams, meritocracy, and broad collaboration for success, but typical organizations are siloed and hierarchical with top down decision making. There needs to be a plan to enable a smooth transition from the current state towards the Agile target state.

    Persistence of tribal knowledge

    Agile relies on easy and open knowledge sharing, but organizational knowledge can sit in siloes. Employees may also try to protect their expertise for job security. It is important to foster knowledge sharing to ensure that critical know-how is accessible and doesn’t leave the organization with the individual.

    Rigid management structures

    Rigidity in how managers operate (performance reviews, human resource management, etc.) can result in cultural rejection of Agile. People need to be assessed on how they enable their teams rather than as individual contributors. This can help ensure that they are given sufficient opportunities to succeed. More support and less strict governance is key.

    Breakdown due to distributed teams

    When face-to-face interactions are challenging, ensure that you invest in the right communication technologies and remove cultural and process impediments to facilitate organization-wide collaboration. Alternative approaches like using documentation or email will not provide the same experience and value as a face-to-face conversation.

    The State of Maine used an ACE to foster positive cultural change

    CASE STUDY

    Industry - Government

    Source - Cathy Novak, Agile Government Leadership

    The State of Maine’s Agile Center of Excellence

    “The Agile CoE in the State of Maine is completely focused on the discipline of the methodology. Every person who works with Agile, or wants to work with Agile, belongs to the CoE. Every member of the CoE tells the same story, approaches the methodology the same way, and uses the same tools. The CoE also functions as an Agile research lab, experimenting with different standards and tools.

    The usual tools of project management – mission, goals, roles, and a high-level definition of done – can be found in Maine’s Agile CoE. For story mapping, teams use sticky notes on a large wall or whiteboard. Demonstrating progress this way provides for positive team dynamics and a psychological bang. The State of Maine uses a project management framework that serves as its single source of truth. Everyone knows what’s going on at all times and understands the purpose of what they are doing. The Agile team is continually looking for components that can be reused across other agencies and programs.”

    Results:

    • Realized positive culture change, leading to more collaborative and supportive teams.
    • Increased visibility of Agile benefits across functional groups.
    • Standardized methodology across Agile teams and increased innovation and experimentation with new standards and tools.
    • Improved traceability of projects.
    • Increased visibility and ability to determine root causes of problems and right the course when outcomes are not meeting expectations.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence – project overview

    1. Strategically align the Center of Excellence 2. Standardize the CoEs service offerings 3. Operate the Center of Excellence
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE.

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE.

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams.

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan.

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success.

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE.

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives.

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE.

    Guided Implementations
    • Align your ACE with the business.
    • Align your ACE with its users.
    • Dissect the key attributes of Agile adoption.
    • Form engagement plans for your Agile teams.
    • Discuss effective ACE metrics.
    • Conduct a baseline assessment of your Agile environment.
    • Interface ACE with your change management function.
    • Build a communications deck for key stakeholders.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1: Strategically align the ACE Module 2: Standardize the offerings of the ACE Module 3: Prepare for organizational change
    Phase 1 Outcome: Create strategic alignment between the CoE and organizational goals.

    Phase 2 Outcome: Build engagement plans and key performance indicators based on a standardized Agile adoption plan.

    Phase 3 Outcome: Operate the CoEs monitoring function, identify improvements, and manage the change needed to continuously improve.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Module 1 Workshop Module 2 Workshop Module 3 Workshop Module 4
    Activities

    Determine vision of CoE

    1.1 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

    1.2 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives.

    1.3 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

    Define service offerings of CoE

    2.1 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities.

    2.2 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

    2.3 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

    Define engagement plans

    3.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

    3.2 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

    Define metrics and plan communications

    4.1 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

    4.2 Define target ACE performance metrics.

    4.3 Define Agile adoption metrics.

    4.4 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile team.

    4.5 Create a communication plan for change.

    Deliverables
    1. Prioritized business objectives
    2. Business-aligned use cases to form CoEs service offerings
    3. Prioritized list of stakeholders
    1. Classified pains and opportunities
    2. Refined use cases based on pains and opportunities identified during ACE requirements gathering
    3. ACE capability map
    1. Adoption-aligned service offerings
    2. Role-specific engagement plans
    1. Business objective-aligned metrics
    2. ACE performance metrics
    3. Agile adoption metrics
    4. Assessment of organization design
    5. ACE Communication Plan

    Phase 1

    Strategically Align the Center of Excellence

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Begin by strategically aligning your Center of Excellence

    The first step to creating a high-functioning ACE is to create alignment and consensus amongst your key stakeholders regarding its purpose. Engage in a set of activities to drill down into the organization’s goals and objectives in order to create a set of high-level use cases that will evolve into the service offerings of the ACE.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Strategically align the ACE

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 1

    Step 1.1: Determine the vision of your ACE

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Align your ACE with the business.

    Then complete these activities…

    1.1.1 Optional: Baseline your ACE maturity.

    1.1.2 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

    1.1.3 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives.

    1.1.4 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

    1.1.5 Select a centralized or decentralized model for your ACE.

    1.1.6 Staff your ACE strategically.

    Step 1.2: Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Align your ACE with its users.

    Then complete these activities…

    1.2.1 Form the Center of Excellence.

    1.2.2 Gather and document your existing Agile practices for the CoE.

    1.2.3 Interview stakeholders to align ACE requirements with functional expectations.

    1.2.4 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities.

    1.2.5 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

    1.2.6 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    • Aligning your ACE with the functional expectations of its users is just as critical as aligning with the business. Invest the time to understand how the ACE fits at all levels of the organization to ensure its highest effectiveness.

    Phase 1, Step 1: Determine the vision of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    1.1.1 Optional: Baseline your ACE maturity.

    1.1.2 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives.

    1.1.3 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives.

    1.1.4 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders.

    1.1.5 Select a centralized or decentralized model for your ACE.

    1.1.6 Staff your ACE strategically.

    Outcomes:

    • Gather your leadership to position the ACE and align it with business priorities.
    • Form a set of high-level use cases for services that will support the enablement of business priorities.
    • Map the stakeholders of the ACE to visualize expected influence and current support levels for your initiative.

    What does an ACE do? Six main functions derived from Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G Framework

    1. Learning
    • Provide training and development and enable engagement based on identified interaction points to foster organizational growth.
  • Tooling
    • Promote the use of standardized tooling to improve efficiency and consistency throughout the organization.
  • Supporting
    • Enable your Agile teams to access subject-matter expertise by facilitating knowledge transfer and documenting good practices.
  • Governing
    • Create operational boundaries for Agile teams, and monitor their progress and ability to meet business objectives within these boundaries.
  • Monitoring
    • Demonstrate the value the CoE is providing through effective metric setting and ongoing monitoring of Agile’s effectiveness.
  • Guiding
    • Provide guidance, methodology, and knowledge for teams to leverage to effectively meet organizational business objectives.
  • OPTIONAL: If you have an existing ACE, use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline current practices

    1.1.1 Existing CoE Maturity Assessment

    Purpose

    If you already have established an ACE, use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline its current maturity level (this will act as a baseline for comparison after you complete this Blueprint). Assessing your ACEs maturity lets you know where you currently are, and where to look for improvements.

    Steps

    1. Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to assess the maturity of your ACE.
    2. Complete the assessment tool with all members of your ACE team to determine your current Maturity score.
    3. Document the results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    The image is a screen capture of the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool

    Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool.

    Get your Agile leadership together and position the ACE

    Stakeholder Role Why they are essential players
    CIO/ Head of IT Program sponsor: Champion and set the tone for the Agile program. Critical in gaining and maintaining buy-in and momentum for the spread of Agile service offerings. The head of IT has insight and influence to drive buy-in from executive stakeholders and ensure the long-term viability of the ACE.
    Applications Director Program executor: Responsible for the formation of the CoE and will ensure the viability of the initial CoE objectives, use cases, and service offerings. Having a coordinator who is responsible for collating performance data, tracking results, and building data-driven action plans is essential to ensuring continuous success.
    Agile Subject-Matter Experts Program contributor: Provide information on the viability of Agile practices and help build capabilities on existing best practices. Agile’s success relies on adoption. Leverage the insights of people who have implemented and evangelized Agile within your organization to build on top of a working foundation.
    Functional Group Experts Program contributor: Provide information on the functional group’s typical processes and how Agile can achieve expected benefits. Agile’s primary function is to drive value to the business – it needs to align with the expected capabilities of existing functional groups in order to enhance them for the better.

    Align your ACE with your organization’s strategy

    This research set will assist you with aligning your ACEs services to the objectives of the business in order to justify the resources and funding required by your Agile program.

    Business Objectives → Alignment ←ACE Functions

    Business justification to continue to fund a Center of Excellence can be a challenge, especially with traditional thinking and rigid stakeholders. Hit the ground running and show value to your key influencers through business alignment and metrics that will ensure that the ACE is worth continuous investment.

    Alignment leads to competitive advantage

    The pace of change in customer expectations, competitive landscapes, and business strategy is continuously increasing. It is critical to develop a method to facilitate ongoing alignment to shifting business and development expectations seamlessly and ensure that your Agile teams are able to deliver expected business value.

    Activity: Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives

    1.1.2 2 Hours

    Input

    • Organizational business objectives

    Output

    • Prioritized business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. List the primary high-level business objectives that your organization aims to achieve over the course of the following year (focusing on those that ACE can impact/support).
    2. Prioritize these business objectives while considering the following:
    • Criticality of completion: How critical is the initiative in enabling the business to achieve its goals?
    • Transformational impact: To what degree is the foundational structure of the business affected by the initiative (rationale: Agile can support impact on transformational issues)?
  • Document the hypothesized role of Agile in supporting these business objectives. Take the top three prioritized objectives forward for the establishment of your ACE. While in future years or iterations you can inject more offerings, it is important to target your service offerings to specific critical business objectives to gain buy-in for long-term viability of the CoE.
  • Sample Business Objectives:

    • Increase customer satisfaction.
    • Reduce time-to-market of product releases.
    • Foster a strong organizational culture.
    • Innovate new feature sets to differentiate product. Increase utilization rates of services.
    • Reduce product delivery costs.
    • Effectively integrate teams from a merger.
    • Offer more training programs for personal development.
    • Undergo a digital transformation.

    Understand potential hurdles when attempting to align with business objectives

    While there is tremendous pressure to align IT functions and the business due to the accelerating pace of change and technology innovation, you need to be aware that there are limitations in achieving this goal. Keep these challenges at the top of mind as you bring together your stakeholders to position the service offerings of your ACE. It is beneficial to make your stakeholders self-aware of these biases as well, so they come to the table with an open mind and are willing to find common ground.

    The search for total alignment

    There are a plethora of moving pieces within an organization and total alignment is not a plausible outcome.

    The aim of a group should not be to achieve total alignment, but rather reframe and consider ways to ensure that stakeholders are content with the ways they interact and that misalignment does not occur due to transparency or communication issues.

    “The business” implies unity

    While it may seem like the business is one unified body, the reality is that the business can include individuals or groups (CEO, CFO, IT, etc.) with conflicting priorities. While there are shared business goals, these entities may all have competing visions of how to achieve them. Alignment means compromise and agreement more than it means accommodating all competing views.

    Cost vs. reputation

    There is a political component to alignment, and sometimes individual aspirations can impede collective gain.

    While the business side may be concerned with cost, those on the IT side of things can be concerned with taking on career-defining projects to bolster their own credentials. This conflict can lead to serious breakdowns in alignment.

    Panera Bread used Agile to adapt to changing business needs

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Food Services

    Source Scott Ambler and Associates, Case Study

    Challenge

    Being in an industry with high competition, Panera Bread needed to improve its ability to quickly deliver desired features to end customers and adapt to changing business demands from high internal growth.

    Solution

    Panera Bread engaged in an Agile transformation through a mixture of Agile coaching and workshops, absorbing best practices from these engagements to drive Agile delivery frameworks across the enterprise.

    Results

    Adopting Agile delivery practices resulted in increased frequency of solution delivery, improving the relationship between IT and the business. Business satisfaction increased both with the development process and the outcomes from delivery.

    The transparency that was needed to achieve alignment to rapidly changing business needs resulted in improved communication and broad-scale reduced risk for the organization.

    "Agile delivery changed perception entirely by building a level of transparency and accountability into not just our software development projects, but also in our everyday working relationships with our business stakeholders. The credibility gains this has provided our IT team has been immeasurable and immediate."

    – Mike Nettles, VP IT Process and Architecture, Panera Bread

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Operating Model to define the service offerings of your ACE

    Understand where your inputs and outputs lie to create an accessible set of service offerings for your Agile teams.

    Functional Input

    • Application Development
    • Project Management
    • CIO
    • Enterprise Architecture
    • Data Management
    • Security
    • Infrastructure & Operations
    • Who else?

    The image shows a graphic of the COE Operating Model, showing the inputs and outputs, including Other CoEs (at top); Stakeholder Needs (at left); Metrics and Feedback (at bottom); and ACE Functions and Services (at right)

    Input arrows represent functional group needs, feedback from Agile teams, and collaboration with other CoEs and CoPs

    Output arrows represent the services the CoE delivers and the benefits realized across the organization.

    ACE Operating Model: Governance & Metrics

    Governance & Metrics involves enabling success through the management of the ACEs resources and services, and ensuring that organizational structures evolve in concert with Agile growth and maturity. Your focus should be on governing, measuring, implementing, and empowering improvements.

    Effective governance will function to ensure the long-term effectiveness and viability of your ACE. Changes and improvements will happen continuously and you need a way to decide which to adopt as best practices.

    "Organizations have lengthy policies and procedures (e.g. code deployment, systems design, how requirements are gathered in a traditional setting) that need to be addressed when starting to implement an Agile Center of Excellence. Legacy ideas that end up having legacy policy are the ones that are going to create bottlenecks, waste resources, and disrupt your progress." – Doug Birgfeld, Senior Partner, Agile Wave

    Governance & Metrics

    • Manage organizational Agile standards, policies, and procedures.
    • Define organizational boundaries based on regulatory, compliance, and cultural requirements.
    • Ensure ongoing alignment of service offerings with business objectives.
    • Adapt organizational change management policies to reflect Agile practices.
    • CoE governance functions include:
      • Policy Management
      • Change Management
      • Risk Management
      • Stakeholder Management
      • Metrics/Feedback Monitoring

    ACE Operating Model: Services

    Services refers to the ability to deliver resourcing, guidance, and assistance across all Agile teams. By creating a set of shared services, you enable broad access to specialized resources, knowledge, and insights that will effectively scale to more teams and departments as Agile matures in your organization.

    A Services model:

    • Supports the organization by standardizing and centralizing service offerings, ensuring consistency of service delivery and accessibility across functional groups.
    • Provides a mechanism for efficient knowledge transfer and on-demand support.
    • Helps to drive productivity and project efficiencies through the organization by disseminating best practices.

    Services

    • Provide reference, support, and re-assurance to implement and adapt organizational best practices.
    • Interface relevant parties and facilitate knowledge transfer through shared learning and communities of practice.
    • Enable agreed-upon service levels through standardized support structures.
    • Shared services functions include:
      • Engagement Planning
      • Knowledge Management
      • Subject-Matter Expertise
      • Agile Team Evaluation

    ACE Operating Model: Technology

    Technology refers to a broad range of supporting tools to enable employees to complete their day-to-day tasks and effectively report on their outcomes. The key to technological support is to strike the right balance between flexibility and control based on your organization's internal and external constraints (policy, equipment, people, regulatory, etc.).

    "We sometimes forget the obvious truth that technology provides no value of its own; it is the application of technology to business opportunities that produces return on investment." – Robert McDowell, Author, In Search of Business Value

    Technology

    • Provide common software tools to enable alignment to organizational best practices.
    • Enable access to locally desired tools while considering organizational, technical, and scaling constraints.
    • Enable communication with a technical subject matter expert (SME).
    • Enable reporting consistency through training and maintenance of reporting mechanisms.
    • Technology functions can include:
      • Vendor Management
      • Application Support
      • Tooling Standards
      • Tooling Use Cases

    ACE Operating Model: Staff

    Staff is all about empowerment. The ACE should support and facilitate the sharing of ideas and knowledge sharing. Create processes and spaces where people are encouraged to come together, learn from, and share with each other. This setting will bring up new ideas to enhance productivity and efficiency in day-to-day activities while maintaining alignment with business objectives.

    "An Agile CoE is legitimized by its ability to create a space where people can come together, share, and learn from one another. By empowering teams to grow by themselves and then re-connect with each other you allow the creativity of your employees to flow back into the CoE." – Anonymous, Founder, Agile consultancy group

    Staff

    • Develop and provide training and day-to-day coaching that are aligned with organizational engagement and growth plans.
    • Include workflow change management to assist traditional roles with accommodating Agile practices.
    • Support the facilitation of knowledge transfer from localized Agile teams into other areas of the organization.
    • Achieve team buy-in and engagement with ACE services and capabilities. Provide a forum for collaboration and innovation.
    • People functions can include:
      • Onboarding
      • Coaching
      • Learning Facilitation

    Form use cases to align your ACE with business objectives

    What is a use case?

    A use case tells a story about how a system will be used to achieve a goal from the perspective of a user of that system. The people or other systems that interact with the use case are called “actors.” Use cases describe what a system must be able to do, not how it will do it.

    How does a use case play a role in building your ACE?

    Use cases are used to guide design by allowing you to highlight the intended function of a service provided by the Center of Excellence while maintaining a business focus. Jumping too quickly to a solution without fully understanding user and business needs leads to the loss of stakeholder buy-in and the Centers of Excellence rejection by teams.

    Hypothesized ACE user needs →Use Case←Business objective

    Activity: Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives

    1.1.3 2 Hours

    Input

    • Prioritized business objectives
    • ACE functions

    Output

    • ACE use cases

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Using your prioritized business objectives and the six functions of a CoE, create high-level use cases for each point of alignment that describe how the Center of Excellence will better facilitate the realization of that business objective.
    2. For each use case, define the following:
      • Name: Generalized title for the use case.
      • Description: A high-level description of the expected CoE action.
    AGILE CENTER OF EXCELLENCE FUNCTIONS:
    Guiding Learning Tooling Supporting Governing Monitoring
    BUSINESS OBJECTIVES Reduce time-to-market of product releases
    Reduce product delivery costs
    Effectively integrate teams from a merger

    Activity: Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives (continued)

    1.1.3 2 Hours

    The image shows the Reduce time-to-market of product releases row from the table in the previous section, filled in with sample information.

    Your goal should be to keep these as high level and generally applicable as possible as they provide an initial framework to further develop your service offerings. Begin to talk about the ways in which the ACE can support the realization of your business objectives and what those interactions may look like to customers of the ACE.

    Involve all relevant stakeholders to discuss the organizational goals and objectives of your ACE

    Avoid the rifts in stakeholder representation by ensuring you involve the relevant parties. Without representation and buy-in from all interested parties, your ACE may omit and fail to meet long-term organizational goals.

    By ensuring every group receives representation, your service offerings will speak for the broad organization and in turn meet the needs of the organization as a whole.

    • Business Units: Any functional groups that will be expected to engage with the ACE in order to achieve their business objectives.
    • Team Leads: Representation from the internal Agile community who is aware of the backgrounds, capabilities, and environments of their respective Agile teams.
    • Executive Sponsors: Those expected to evangelize and set the tone and direction for the ACE within the executive ranks of the organization. These roles are critical in gaining buy-in and maintaining momentum for ACE initiatives.

    Organization

    • ACE
      • Executive Sponsors
      • Team Leads
      • Business Units

    Activity: Prioritize your ACE stakeholders

    1.1.4 1 Hour

    Input

    • Prioritized business objectives

    Output

    • Prioritized list of stakeholders

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Using your prioritized business objectives, brainstorm, as a group, the potential list of stakeholders (representatives from business units, team leads, and executive sponsors) that would need to be involved in setting the tone and direction of your ACE.
    2. Evaluate each stakeholder in terms of power, involvement, impact, and support.
    • Power: How much influence does the stakeholder have? Enough to drive the CoE forward or into the ground?
    • Involvement: How interested is the stakeholder? How involved is the stakeholder in the project already?
    • Impact: To what degree will the stakeholder be impacted? Will this significantly change how they do their job?
    • Support: Is the stakeholder a supporter of the project? Neutral? A resister?
  • Map each stakeholder to an area on the power map on the next slide based on his or her level of power and involvement.
  • Vary the size of the circle to distinguish stakeholders that are highly impacted by the ACE from those who are not. Color each circle to show each stakeholder’s estimated or gauged level of support for the project.
  • Prioritize your ACE stakeholders (continued)

    1.1.4 1 Hour

    The image shows a matrix on the left, and a legend on the right. The matrix is labelled with Involvement at the bottom, and Power on the left side, and has the upper left quadrant labelled Keep Satisfied, the upper right quadrant labelled Key players, the lower right quadrant labelled Keep informed, and the lower left quadrant labelled Minimal effort.

    Should your ACE be Centralized or Decentralized?

    An ACE can be organized differently depending on your organization’s specific needs and culture.

    The SAFe Model:©

    “For smaller enterprises, a single centralized [ACE] can balance speed with economies of scale. However, in larger enterprises—typically those with more than 500 – 1,000 practitioners—it’s useful to consider employing either a decentralized model or a hub-and-spoke model.”

    The image shows 3 models: centralized, represented by a single large circle; decentralized, represented by 5 smaller circles; and hub-and-spoke, represented by a central circle, connected to 5 surrounding circles.

    © Scaled Agile, Inc.

    The Spotify Model:

    Spotify avoids using an ACE and instead spreads agile practices using Squads, Tribes, Chapters, Guilds, etc.

    It can be a challenging model to adopt because it is constantly changing, and must be fundamentally supported by your organization’s culture. (Linders, Ben. “Don't Copy the Spotify Model.” InfoQ.com. 6 Oct. 2016.)

    Detailed analysis of The Spotify Model is out of scope for this Blueprint.

    The image shows the Spotify model, with two sections, each labelled Tribe, and members from within each Tribe gathered together in a section labelled Guild.

    Activity: Select a Centralized or Decentralized ACE Model

    1.1.5 30 minutes

    Input

    • Prioritized business objectives
    • Use Cases
    • Organization qualities

    Output

    • Centralized or decentralized ACE model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Using your prioritized business objectives, your ACE use cases, your organization size, structure, and culture, brainstorm the relative pros and cons of a centralized vs decentralized ACE model.
    2. Consider this: to improve understanding and acceptance, ask participants who prefer a centralized model to brainstorm the pros and cons of a decentralized model, and vice-versa.
    3. Collectively decide whether your ACE should be centralized, decentralized or hub-and-spoke and document it.
    Centralized ACE Decentralized ACE
    Pros Cons Pros Cons
    Centralize Vs De-centralize Considerations Prioritized Business Objectives
    • Neutral (objectives don’t favor either model)
    • Neutral (objectives don’t favor either model)
    ACE Use Cases
    • Neutral (use cases don’t favor either model)
    • Neutral (use cases don’t favor either model)
    Organization Size
    • Org. is small enough for centralized ACE
    • Overkill for a small org. like ours
    Organization Structure
    • All development done in one location
    • Not all locations do development
    Organization Culture
    • All development done in one location
    • Decentralized ACE may have yield more buy-in

    SELECTED MODEL: Centralized ACE

    Activity: Staff your ACE strategically

    1.1.6 1 Hour

    Input

    • List of potential ACE staff

    Output

    • Rated list of ACE staff

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. Identify your list of potential ACE staff (this may be a combination of full time and contract staff).
    2. Add/modify/delete the rating criteria to meet your specific needs.
    3. Discuss and adjust the relative weightings of the rating criteria to best suit your organization’s needs.
    4. Rate each potential staff member and compare results to determine the best suited staff for your ACE.
    Candidate: Jane Doe
    Rating Criteria Criteria Weighting Candidate's Score (1-5)
    Candidate has strong theoretical knowledge of Agile. 8% 4
    Candidate has strong hands on experience with Agile. 18% 5
    Candidate has strong hands on experience with Agile. 10% 4
    Candidate is highly respected by the Agile teams. 18% 5
    Candidate is seen as a thought leader in the organization. 18% 5
    Candidate is seen as a change agent in the organization. 18% 5
    Candidate has strong desire to be member of ACE staff. 10% 3
    Total Weighted Score 4.6

    Phase 1, Step 2: Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    1.2.1 Form the Center of Excellence.

    1.2.2 Gather and document your existing Agile practices for the CoE.

    1.2.3 Interview stakeholders to align ACE requirements with functional expectations.

    1.2.4 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities.

    1.2.5 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services.

    1.2.6 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map.

    Outcomes:

    • Collect data regarding the functional expectations of the Agile teams.
    • Refine your business-aligned use cases with your collected data to achieve both business and functional alignment.
    • Create a capability map that visualizes and prioritizes your key service offerings.

    Structure your ACE with representation from all of your key stakeholders

    Now that you have a prioritized list of stakeholders, use their influence to position the ACE to ensure maximum representation with minimal bottlenecks.

    By operating within a group of your key players, you can legitimize your Center of Excellence by propagating the needs and interests of those who interface and evangelize the CoE within the larger organization.

    The group of key stakeholders will extend the business alignment you achieved earlier by refining your service offerings to meet the needs of the ACEs customers. Multiple representations at the table will generate a wide arrangement of valuable insights and perspectives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While holistic representation is necessary, ensure that the list is not too comprehensive and will not lead to progress roadblocks. The goal is to ensure that all factors relevant to the organization are represented; too many conflicting opinions may create an obstruction moving forward.

    ACE

    • Executive Sponsors
    • Team Leads
    • Business Units

    Determine how you will fund your ACE

    Choose the ACE funding model which is most aligned to your current system based on the scenarios provided below. Both models will offer the necessary support to ensure the success of your Agile program going forward.

    Funding Model Funding Scenario I Funding Scenario II
    Funded by the CIO Funded by the CIO office and a stated item within the general IT budget. Charged back to supported functional groups with all costs allocated to each functional group’s budget.
    Funded by the PMO Charged back to supported functional groups with all costs allocated to each functional group’s budget. Charged back to supported functional groups with all costs allocated to each functional group’s budget.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your funding model may add additional key influencers into the mix. After you choose your funding model, ensure that you review your stakeholder map and add anyone who will have a direct impact in the viability and stability of your ACE.

    Determine how you will govern your ACE

    An Agile Center of Excellence is unique in the way you must govern the actions of its customers. Enable “flexible governance” to ensure that Agile teams have the ability to locally optimize and innovate while still operating within expected boundaries.

    ACE Governing Body

    ↑ Agile Team → ACE ← Agile Team ↑

    Who should take on the governance role?

    The governing body can be the existing executive or standing committees, or a newly formed committee involving your key ACE influencers and stakeholders.

    Flexible governance means that your ACE set boundaries based on your cultural, regulatory, and compliance requirements, and your governance group monitors your Agile teams’ adherence to these boundaries.

    Governing Body Responsibilities

    • Review and approve ACE strategy annually and ensure that it is aligned with current business strategy.
    • Provide detailed quality information for board members.
    • Ensure that the ACE is adequately resourced and that the organization has the capacity to deliver the service offerings.
    • Assure that the ACE is delivering benefits and achieving targets.
    • Assure that the record keeping and reporting systems are capable of providing the information needed to properly assess the quality of service.

    Modify your resourcing strategy based on organizational need

    Your Agile Center of Excellence can be organized either in a dedicated or a virtual configuration, depending on your company’s organizational structure and complexity.

    There is no right answer to how your Center of Excellence should be resourced. Consider your existing organizational structure and culture, the quality of relationships between functional groups, and the typical budgetary factors that would weigh on choosing between a virtual and dedicated CoE structure.

    COE Advantages Disadvantages
    Virtual
    • No change in organization structure required, just additional task delegation to your Agile manager or program manager.
    • Less effort and cost to implement.
    • Investment in quality is proportional to return.
    • Resources are shared between practice areas, and initiatives will take longer to implement.
    • Development and enhancement of best practices can become difficult without a centralized knowledge repository.
    Dedicated
    • Demonstrates a commitment to the ACEs long-term existence.
    • Allows for dedicated maintenance of best practices.
    • Clear lines of accountability for Agile processes.
    • Ability to develop highly skilled employees as their responsibilities are not shared.
    • Requires dedicated resources that can in turn be more costly.
    • Requires strong relationships with the functional groups that interface with the ACE.

    Staffing the ACE: Understand virtual versus dedicated ACE organizational models

    Virtual CoE

    The image shows an organizational chart titled Virtual CoE, with Head of IT at the top, then PMO and CoE Lead/Apps Director at the next level. The chart shows that there is crossover between the CoE Lead's reports, and the PMO's, indicated through dotted lines that connect them.

    • Responsibilities for CoE are split and distributed throughout departments on a part-time basis.
    • CoE members from the PMO report to apps director who also functions as the CoE lead on a part-time basis.

    The image shows a organizational chart titled Dedicated CoE, with all CoE members under the CoE.

    • Requires re-organization and dedicated full-time staff to run the CoE with clear lines of responsibility and accountability.
    • Hiring or developing highly skilled employees who have a sole function to facilitate and monitor quality best practices within the IT department may be necessary.

    Activity: Form the Center of Excellence

    1.2.1 1 Hour

    Input

    • N/A

    Output

    • ACE governance and resourcing plan

    Materials

    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Agile leadership group
    1. As a group, discuss if there is an existing body that would be able to govern the Center of Excellence. This body will monitor progress on an ongoing basis and assess any change requests that would impact the CoEs operation or goals.
    • List current governing bodies that are closely aligned with your current Agile environment and determine if the group could take on additional responsibilities.
    • Alternatively, identify individuals who could form a new ACE governing body.
  • Using the results of Exercise 1.1.6 in Step 1, select the individuals who will participate in the Center of Excellence. As a rough rule of thumb for sizing, an ACE staffed with 3-5 people can support 8-12 Agile Teams.
  • Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Leverage your existing Agile practices and SMEs when establishing the ACE

    The synergy between Agile and CoE relies on its ability to build on existing best practices. Agile cannot grow without a solid foundation. ACE gives you the way to disseminate these practices and facilitate knowledge transfer from a centralized sharing environment. As part of defining your service offerings, engage with stakeholders across the organization to evaluate what is already documented so that it can be accommodated in the ACE.

    Documentation

    • Are there any existing templates that can be leveraged (e.g. resource planning, sprint planning)?
    • Are there any existing process documents that can be leveraged (e.g. SIPOC, program frameworks)?
    • Are there any existing standards documents the CoE can incorporate (e.g. policies, procedures, guidelines)?

    SMEs

    • Interview existing subject-matter experts that can give you an idea of your current pains and opportunities.
    • You already have feedback from those in your workshop group, so think about the rest of the organization:
      • Agile practitioners
      • Business stakeholders
      • Operations
      • Any other parties not represented in the workshop group

    Metrics

    • What are the current metrics being used to measure the success of Agile teams?
    • What metrics are currently being used to measure the completion of business objectives?
    • What tools or mediums are currently used for recording and communicating metrics?

    Info-Tech Insight

    When considering existing practices, it is important to evaluate the level of adherence to these practices. If they have been efficiently utilized, injecting them into ACE becomes an obvious decision. If they have been underutilized, however, it is important to understand why this occurred and discuss how you can drive higher adherence.

    Examples of existing documents to leverage

    People

    • Agile onboarding planning documents
    • Agile training documents
    • Organizational Agile manifesto
    • Team performance metrics dashboard
    • Stakeholder engagement and communication plan
    • Development team engagement plan
    • Organizational design and structure
    • Roles and responsibilities chart (i.e. RACI)
    • Compensation plan Resourcing plan

    Process

    • Tailored Scrum process
    • Requirements gathering process
    • Quality stage-gate checklist (including definitions of ready and done)
    • Business requirements document
    • Use case document
    • Business process diagrams
    • Entity relationship diagrams
    • Data flow diagrams
    • Solution or system architecture
    • Application documentation for deployment
    • Organizational and user change management plan
    • Disaster recovery and rollback process
    • Test case templates

    Technology

    • Code review policies and procedures
    • Systems design policies
    • Build, test, deploy, and rollback scripts
    • Coding guidelines
    • Data governance and management policies
    • Data definition and glossary
    • Request for proposals (RFPs)
    • Development tool standards and licensing agreements
    • Permission to development, testing, staging, and production environments
    • Application, system, and data integration policies

    Build upon the lessons learned from your Agile pilots

    The success of your Center of Excellence relies on the ability to build sound best practices within your organization’s context. Use your previous lessons learned and growing pains as shared knowledge of past Agile implementations within the ACE.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Draw on the experiences of your initial pilot where you learned how to adapt the Agile manifesto and practices to your specific context. These lessons will help onboard new teams to Agile since they will likely experience some of the same challenges.

    Download

    Documents for review include:

    • Tailored Scrum Process
    • Agile Pilot Metrics
    • Info-Tech’s Agile Pilot Playbook

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Draw on previous scaling Agile experiences to help understand how to interface, facilitate, and orchestrate cross-functional teams and stakeholders for large and complex projects. These lessons will help your ACE teams develop collaboration and problem-solving techniques involving roles with different priorities and lines of thinking.

    Download

    Documents for review include:

    • Agile Program Framework
    • Agile Pilot Program Metrics
    • Scaled Agile Development Process
    • Info-Tech’s Scaling Agile Playbook

    Activity: Gather and document your existing Agile practices for the CoE

    1.2.2 Variable time commitment based on current documentation state

    Input

    • Existing practices

    Output

    • Practices categorized within operating model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Compile a list of existing practices that will be shared by the Center of Excellence. Consider any documents, templates, or tools that are used regularly by Agile teams.
    2. Evaluate the level of adherence to use of the practices (whether the practice is complied with regularly or not) with a high, medium, or low. Low compliance will need a root-cause analysis to understand why and how to remedy the situation.
    3. Determine the best fit for each practice under the ACE operational model.
    Name Type Adherence Level CoE Best Fit Source
    1 Tailored Scrum process Process High Shared Services Internal Wiki
    2
    3

    Activity: Interview stakeholders to understand the ACE functional expectations

    1.2.3 30-60 Minutes per interview

    Interview Stakeholders (from both Agile teams and functional areas) on their needs from the ACE. Ensure you capture both pain points and opportunities. Capture these as either Common Agile needs or Functional needs. Document using the tables below:

    Common Agile Needs
    Common Agile Needs
    • Each Agile Team interprets Agile differently
    • Need common approach to Agile with a proven track record within the organization
    • Making sure all Team members have a good understanding of Agile
    • Common set of tool(s) with a proven track record, along with a strong understanding of how to use the tool(s) efficiently and effectively
    • Help troubleshooting process related questions
    • Assistance with addressing the individual short comings of each Agile Team
    • Determining what sort of help each Agile Team needs most
    • Better understanding of the role played by Scrum Master and associated good practices
    • When and how do security/privacy/regulatory requirements get incorporated into Agile projects
    Functional Needs Ent Arch Needs
    • How do we ensure Ent Arch has insight and influence on Agile software design
    • Better understanding of Agile process
    • How to measure compliance with reference architectures

    PMO Needs

    • Better understanding of Agile process
    • Understanding role of PM in Agile
    • Project status reports that determine current level of project risk
    • How does project governance apply on Agile projects
    • What deliverables/artifacts are produced by Agile projects and when are they completed

    Operations Needs

    • Alignment on approaches for doing releases
    • Impact of Agile on change management and support desk processes
    • How and when will installation and operation instructions be available in Agile

    Activity: Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities

    1.2.4 Half day

    Input

    • Identified requirements

    Output

    • Classified pains and opportunities

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Review the listed pain points from the data gathering process. Sort the pain points on sticky notes into technology, governance, people, and shared services.
    2. Consider opportunities under each defining element based on the identified business requirements.
    3. Document your findings.
    4. Discuss the results with the project team and prioritize the opportunities.
      • Where do the most pains occur?
      • What opportunities exist to alleviate pains?
    Governance Shared Services Technology People
    Pain Points
    Opportunities

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Activity: Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services

    1.2.5 1 Hour

    Input

    • Use cases from activity 1.1.2

    Output

    • Refined use cases based on data collection

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Refine your initial use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives using your classified pain points and opportunities.
    2. Add use cases to address newly realized pain points.
    3. Determine the functions and services the CoE can offer to address the identified requirements.
    4. Evaluate the outputs in the form of realized benefits and extracted inefficiencies.

    Possible ACE use cases:

    • Policy Management
    • Change Management
    • Risk Management
    • Stakeholder Management
    • Engagement Planning
    • Knowledge Management
    • Subject-Matter Expertise
    • Agile Team Evaluation
    • Operations Support
    • Onboarding
    • Coaching
    • Learning Facilitation
    • Communications Training
    • Vendor Management
    • Application Support
    • Tooling Standards

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Activity: Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map

    1.2.6 1 Hour

    Input

    • Use cases from activity 1.2.4

    Output

    • ACE capability map

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Review the refined and categorized list of service offerings.
    2. Determine how these new capabilities will add, remove, or enhance your existing service and capabilities.
    3. Categorize the capabilities into the following groups:
    • Governance and Metrics
    • Services
    • Staff
    • Technology
  • Label the estimated impact of the service offering based on your business priorities for the year. This will guide your strategy for implementing your Agile Center of Excellence moving forward.
  • Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Activity: Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map (continued)

    Governance

    Policy Management (Medium Potential)

    Change Management (High Potential)

    Risk Management (High Potential)

    Stakeholder Management (High Potential)

    Metrics/Feedback Monitoring (High Potential)

    Shared Services

    Engagement Planning (High Potential)

    Knowledge Management (High Potential)

    Subject-Matter Expertise (High Potential)

    Agile Team Evaluation (High Potential)

    Operations Support (High Potential)

    People

    Onboarding (Medium Potential)

    Coaching (High Potential)

    Learning Facilitation (High Potential)

    Internal Certification Program (Low Potential)

    Communications Training (Medium Potential)

    Technology

    Vendor Management (Medium Potential)

    Application Support (Low Potential)

    Tooling Standards (High Potential)

    Checkpoint: Are you ready to standardize your CoEs service offerings?

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Self-Auditing Guidelines

    • Have you identified and prioritized the key business objectives for the upcoming year that the ACE will align with?
    • Do you have a high-level set of use cases for points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives?
    • Have you mapped your stakeholders and identified the key players that will have an influence over the future success of your ACE?
    • Have you identified how your organization will fund, resource, and govern the ACE?
    • Have you collected data to understand the functional expectations of the users the ACE is intended to serve?
    • Have you refined your use cases to align with both business objectives and functional expectations?

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.2 Identify and prioritize organizational business objectives

    Our analyst team will help you organize and prioritize your business objectives for the year in order to ensure that the service offerings the ACE offers are delivering consistent business value.

    1.1.3 Form use cases for the points of alignment between your ACE and business objectives

    Our analyst team will help you turn your prioritized business objectives into a set of high-level use cases that will provide the foundation for defining user-aligned services.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.1.4 Prioritize your ACE stakeholders

    Our analysts will walk you through an exercise of mapping and prioritizing your Centers of Excellence stakeholders based on impact and power within so you can ensure appropriate presentation of interests within the organization.

    1.2.4 Form a solution matrix to organize your pain points and opportunities

    Our analyst team will help you solidify the direction of your Center of Excellence by overlaying your identified needs, pain points, and potential opportunities in a matrix guided by Info-Tech’s CoE operating model.

    1.2.5 Refine your use cases to identify your ACE functions and services

    Our analyst team will help you further refine your business-aligned use cases with the functional expectations from your Agile teams and stakeholders, ensuring the ACEs long-term utility.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    1.2.6 Visualize your ACE functions and service offerings with a capability map

    Our analysts will walk you through creating your Agile Centers of Excellence capability map and help you to prioritize which service offerings are critical to the success of your Agile teams in meeting their objectives.

    Phase 2

    Standardize the Centers of Excellence Service Offerings

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    The ACE needs to ensure consistency in service delivery

    Now that you have aligned the CoE to the business and functional expectations, you need to ensure its service offerings are consistently accessible. To effectively ensure accessibility and delegation of shared services in an efficient way, the CoE needs to have a consistent framework to deliver its services.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): 2

    Step 2.1: Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Dissect the key attributes of Agile adoption.

    Then complete these activities…

    2.1.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

    Step 2.2: Create an ACE engagement plan

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Form engagement plans for your Agile teams.

    Then complete these activities…

    2.2.1 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

    Step 2.3: Define metrics to measure success

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Discuss effective ACE metrics.

    Then complete these activities…

    2.3.1 Collect existing team-level metrics.

    2.3.2 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

    2.3.3 Define target ACE performance metrics.

    2.3.4 Define Agile adoption metrics.

    2.3.5 Consolidate metrics for stakeholder impact.

    2.3.6 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to monitor, evaluate, refine, and ensure continued business value.

    Phase 2 Results & Insights:

    • Standardizing your service offerings allows you to have direct influence on the dissemination of best practices.

    Phase 2, Step 1: Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    2.1.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model.

    Outcomes:

    • Refine your previously determined use cases within the Agile adoption model to ensure that teams can be assisted at any level of Agile adoption.
    • Understand the key attributes of Agile adoption and how they impact success.

    Understand the implementation challenges that the ACE may face

    Culture clash between ACE and larger organization

    It is important to carefully consider the compatibility between the current organizational culture and Agile moving forward. Agile compels empowered teams, meritocracy, and broad collaboration for success; while typical organizational structures are siloed and hierarchical and decisions are delegated from the top down.

    This is not to say that the culture of the ACE has to match the larger organizational culture; part of the overarching aim of the ACE is to evolve the current organizational culture for the better. The point is to ensure you enable a smooth transition with sufficient management support and a team of Agile champions.

    The changing role of middle management

    Very similar to the culture clash challenge, cultural rigidity in how middle managers operate (performance review, human resource management, etc.) can cause cultural rejection. They need to become enablers for high performance and give their teams the sufficient tools, skills, and opportunities to succeed and excel.

    What impedes Agile adoption?

    Based on a global survey of Agile practitioners (N=1,319)*:

    52% Organizational culture at odds with agile values

    44% Inadequate management support and sponsorship

    48% General organization resistance to change

    *Respondents were able to make multiple selections

    (13th Annual State of Agile Report, VersionOne, 2019)

    Build competency and trust through a structured Agile adoption plan

    The reality of cultural incompatibility between Agile and traditional organization structures necessitates a structured adoption plan. Systematically build competency so teams can consistently achieve project success and solidify trust in your teams’ ability to meet business needs with Agile.

    By incrementally gaining the trust of management as you build up your Agile capabilities, you enable a smooth cultural transition to an environment where teams are empowered, adapt quickly to changing needs, and are trusted to innovate and make successes out of their failures.

    Optimized value delivery occurs when there is a direct relationship between competency and trust. There will be unrealized value when competency or trust outweigh the other. That value loss increases as either dimension of adoption continues to grow faster than the other.

    The image shows a graph with Competency on the x-axis and Trust on the y-axis. There are 3 sections: Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3, in subsequently larger arches in the background of the graph. The graph shows two diagonal arrows, the bottom one labelled Current Value Delivery and the top one labelled Optimized Value Delivery. The space between the two arrows is labelled Value Loss.

    Use Info-Tech’s Practice Adoption Optimization Model to systematically increase your teams’ ability to deliver

    Using Info-Tech’s Practice adoption optimization model will ensure you incrementally build competency and trust to optimize your value delivery.

    Agile adoption at its core, is about building social capital. Your level of trust with key influencers increases as you continuously enhance your capabilities, enabling the necessary cultural changes away from traditional organizational structures.

    Trust & Competency ↓

    DEFINE

    Begin to document your development workflow or value chain, implement a tracking system for KPIs, and start gathering metrics and reporting them transparently to the appropriate stakeholders.

    ITERATE

    Use collected metrics and retrospectives to stabilize team performance by reducing areas of variability in your workflow and increasing the consistency at which targets are met.

    COLLABORATE

    Use information to support changes and adopt appropriate practices to make incremental improvements to the existing environment.

    EMPOWER

    Drive behavioral and cultural changes that will empower teams to be accountable for their own success and learning.

    INNOVATE

    Use your built-up trust and support practice innovation, driving the definition and adoption of new practices.

    Review these key attributes of Agile adoption

    Agile adoption is unique to every organization. Consider these key attributes within your own organizational context when thinking about levels of Agile adoption.

    Adoption Attributes

    Team Organization

    Considers the degree to which teams are able to self-organize based on internal organizational structures (hierarchy vs. meritocracy) and inter-team capabilities.

    Team Coordination

    Considers the degree to which teams can coordinate, both within and across functions.

    Business Alignment

    Considers the degree to which teams can understand and/or map to business objectives.

    Coaching

    Considers what kind of coaching/training is offered and how accessible the training is.

    Empowerment

    Considers the degree to which teams are able and capable to address project, process, and technical challenges without significant burden from process controls and bureaucracy.

    Failure Tolerance

    Considers the degree to which stakeholders are risk tolerant and if teams are capable of turning failures into learning outcomes.

    Why are these important?

    These key attributes function as qualities or characteristics that, when improved, will successively increase the degree to which the business trusts your Agile teams’ ability to meet their objectives.

    Systematically improving these attributes as you graduate levels of the adoption model allows the business to acclimatize to the increased capability the Agile team is offering, and the risk of culture clash with the larger organization decreases.

    Start to consider at what level of adoption each of your service offerings become useful. This will allow you to standardize the way your Agile teams interact with the CoE.

    Activity: Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model

    2.1.1 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • List of service offerings

    Output

    • Service offerings categorized within adoption model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team
    1. Gather the list of your categorized use cases.
    2. Based on Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model, categorize which use cases would be useful to help the Agile team graduate to the next level of adoption.
      • Conceptualize: Begin to document your workflow or value chain, implement a tracking system for KPIs, and gather metrics and report them transparently to the appropriate stakeholders.
      • Iterate: Use collected metrics to stabilize team performance by reducing areas of variability in your workflow and increasing the consistency at which targets are met.
      • Collaborate: Use information to drive changes and adopt appropriate Agile practices to make incremental improvements to the existing environment.
      • Empower: Drive behavioral and cultural changes that will empower teams to be accountable for their own successes given the appropriate resources.
      • Innovate: Use your built-up trust to begin to make calculated risks and innovate more, driving new best practices into the CoE.

    The same service offering could be offered at different levels of adoption. In these cases, you will need to re-visit the use case and differentiate how the service (if at all) will be delivered at different levels of adoption.

    1. Use this opportunity to brainstorm alternative or new use cases for any gaps identified. It is the CoEs goal to assist teams at every level of adoption to meet their business objectives. Use a different colored sticky note for these so you can re-visit and map out their inputs, outputs, metrics, etc.

    Activity: Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model (continued)

    2.1.1 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • List of service offerings

    Output

    • Service offerings categorized within adoption model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team

    Example:

    Service Offerings
    Level 5: Innovate
    Level 4: Empower
    Level 3: Collaborate Coaching -- Communications Training
    Level 2: Iterate Tooling Standards
    Level 1: Conceptualize

    Learning Facilitation

    Draw on the service offerings identified in activity 1.2.4

    Phase 2, Step 2: Create an ACE engagement plan

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    2.2.1 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption.

    Outcomes:

    • Understand the importance of aligning with the functional expectations of your ACE customers.
    • Understand the relationship between engagement and continuous improvement.
    • Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption to standardize the way customers interact with the ACE.

    Enable Agile teams to interface with ACE service offerings to meet their business objectives

    A Center of Excellence aligned with your service offerings is only valuable if your CoEs customers can effectively access those services. At this stage, you have invested in ensuring that your CoE aligns to your business objectives and that your service offerings align to its customers. Now you need to ensure that these services are accessible in the day-to-day operation of your Agile teams.

    Engagement Process → Service Offering

    Use backwards induction from your delivery method to the service offering. This is an effective method to determine the optimal engagement action for the CoE, as it considers the end customer as the driver for best action for every possible situation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your engagement process should be largely informed by your ACE users. Teams have constraints as well as in-the-trenches concerns and issues. If your service offerings don’t account for these, it can lead to rejection of the culture you are trying to inspire.

    Show the way, do not dictate

    Do not fix problems for your Agile teams, give them the tools and knowledge to fix the problems themselves.

    Facilitate learning to drive success

    A primary function of your ACE is to transfer knowledge to Agile teams to increase their capability to achieve desired outcomes.

    While this can take the form of coaching, training sessions, libraries, and wikis, a critical component of ACE is creating interactions where individuals from Agile teams can come together and share their knowledge.

    Ideas come from different experiences. By creating communities of practice (CoP) around topics that the ACE is tasked with supporting (e.g. Agile business analysts), you foster social learning and decrease the likelihood that change will result in some sort of cultural rejection.

    Consider whether creating CoPs would be beneficial in your organization’s context.

    "Communities of practice are a practical way to frame the task of managing knowledge. They provide a concrete organizational infrastructure for realizing the dream of a learning organization." – Etienne Wenger, Digital Habitats: Stewarding technology for communities

    A lack of top-down support will result in your ACE being underutilized

    Top-down support is critical to validate the CoE to its customers and ensure they feel compelled to engage with its services. Relevancy is a real concern for the long-term viability of a CoE and championing its use from a position of authority will legitimize its function and deter its fading from relevancy of day-to-day use for Agile teams.

    Although you are aligning your engagement processes to the customers of your Agile Center of Excellence, you still need your key influencers to champion its lasting organizational relevancy. Don’t let your employees think the ACE is just a coordinating body or a committee that is convenient but non-essential – make sure they know that it drives their own personal growth and makes everyone better as a collective.

    "Even if a CoE is positioned to meet a real organizational need, without some measure of top-down support, it faces an uphill battle to remain relevant and avoid becoming simply one more committee in the eyes of the wider organization. Support from the highest levels of the organization help fight the tendency of the larger organization to view the CoE as a committee with no teeth and tip the scales toward relevancy for the CoE." – Joe Shepley, VP and Practice Lead, Doculabs

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stimulate top-down support with internal certifications. This allows your employees to gain accreditation while at the same time encouraging top-down support and creating a compliance check for the continual delivery and acknowledgement of your evolving best practices.

    Ensure that best practices and lessons learned are injected back into the ACE

    For your employees to continuously improve, so must the Center of Excellence. Ensure the ACE has the appropriate mechanisms to absorb and disseminate best practices that emerge from knowledge transfer facilitation events.

    Facilitated Learning Session →Was the localized adaption well received by others in similar roles? →Document Localized Adaptation →Is there broad applicability and benefit to the proposed innovation? →CoE Absorbs as Best Practice

    Continuous improvement starts with the CoE

    While facilitating knowledge transfer is key, it is even more important that the Center of Excellence can take localized adaptations from Agile teams and standardize them as best practices when well received. If an individual were to leave without sharing their knowledge, the CoE and the larger organization will lose that knowledge and potential innovation opportunities.

    Experience matters

    To organically grow your ACE and be cost effective, you want your teams to continuously improve and to share that knowledge. As individual team members develop and climb the adoption model, they should participate as coaches and champions for less experienced groups so that their knowledge is reaching the widest audience possible.

    Case study: Agile learning at Spotify

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Digital Media

    Source Henrik Kniberg & Anders Ivarsson, 2012

    Methods of Agile learning at Spotify

    Spotify has continuously introduced innovative techniques to facilitate learning and ensure that that knowledge gets injected back into the organization. Some examples are the following:

    • Hack days: Self-organizing teams, referred to as squads, come together, try new ideas, and share them with their co-workers. This facilitates a way to stay up to date with new tools and techniques and land new product innovations.
    • Coaching: Every squad has access to an Agile coach to help inject best practices into their workflow – coaches run retrospectives, sprint planning meetings, facilitate one-on-one coaching, etc.
    • Tribes: Collections of squads that hold regular gatherings to show the rest of the tribe what they’ve been working on so others can learn from what they are doing.
    • Chapters: People with similar skills within a tribe come together to discuss their area of expertise and their specific challenges.
    • Guilds: A wide-reaching community of interest where members from different tribes can come together to share knowledge, tools, and codes, and practice (e.g. a tester guild, an Agile coaching guild).

    The image shows the Spotify model, with two sections, each labelled Tribe, and members from within each Tribe gathered together in a section labelled Guild.

    "As an example of guild work, we recently had a ‘Web Guild Unconference,’ an open space event where all web developers at Spotify gathered up in Stockholm to discuss challenges and solutions within their field."

    Activity: Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Input

    • Categorized use cases

    Output

    • Role-based engagement plans

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team
    1. On the top bar, define the role you are developing the engagement plan for. This will give you the ability to standardize service delivery across all individuals in similar roles.
    2. Import your categorized service offerings for each level of adoption that you think are applicable to the given role.
    3. Using backwards induction, determine the engagement processes that will ensure that those service offerings are accessible and fit the day-to-day operations of the role.
    4. Fill in the template available on the next slide with each role’s engagement plan.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Example engagement plan: Developer

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Role: Developer
    Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
    Service Offering
    1. Onboarding
    2. Coaching
    3. Learning Facilitation
    1. Tooling Standards
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Communications Training
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Subject-Matter Expertise
    2. Coaching
    1. Knowledge Management
    Engagement Process
    1. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    2. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    3. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 2, receive standard Agile tooling standards training.
    2. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 3, receive standard Agile communications training.
    2. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings
    1. Peer-based training on how to effectively self-organize.
    2. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    1. Review captured key learnings from last and have CoE review KPIs related to any area changed.

    Example engagement plan: Tester

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Role: Tester
    Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5
    Service Offering
    1. Onboarding
    2. Coaching
    1. Product Training
    2. Communications Training
    1. Communications Training
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Subject-Matter Expertise
    2. Coaching
    1. Tooling Standards
    2. Training
    3. Coaching
    Engagement Process
    1. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager.
    1. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    2. Provide training on effective methods for communicating with development teams based on organizational best practices.
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 3, receive standard training based on organizational testing best practices. Weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. Peer-to-peer training with level 5 certified coach.
    2. Based on service request or need identified by dev. manager. .
    1. Periodic updates of organizational tooling standards based on community of practice results.
    2. Automation training.
    3. Provide coaching to level 1 developers on a rotating basis to develop facilitation skills.

    Example engagement plan: Product Owner

    2.2.1 30 Minutes per role

    Role: Product Owner
    Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
    Service Offering
    1. Onboarding
    2. Coaching
    1. Coaching
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Coaching
    2. Communications Training
    3. Learning Facilitation
    1. Coaching
    2. Learning Facilitation
    1. Coaching
    2. Learning Facilitation
    Engagement Process
    1. Provide onboarding materials for Agile product owners.
    2. Provide bi-weekly reviews and subsequent guidance at the end of retrospective processes.
    1. Provide monthly reviews and subsequent guidance based on retrospective results.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings
    1. When determined to have graduated to level 3, receive standard training based on organizational testing best practices.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings.
    1. Provide monthly reviews and subsequent guidance based on retrospective results.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings
    1. Provide quarterly reviews and subsequent guidance based on retrospective results.
    2. Bi-weekly mandatory community of practice meetings

    Phase 2, Step 3: Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    2.3.1 Define existing team-level metrics.

    2.3.2 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives.

    2.3.3 Define target ACE performance metrics.

    2.3.4 Define Agile adoption metrics.

    2.3.5 Consolidate your metrics for stakeholder impact.

    2.3.6 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to monitor, evaluate, refine, and ensure continued business value.

    Outcomes:

    • Understand the importance of aligning with the functional expectations of your ACE customers.
    • Understand the relationship between engagement and continuous improvement.
    • Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption to standardize the way customers interact with the ACE.

    Craft metrics that will measure the success of your Agile teams

    Quantify measures that demonstrate the effectiveness of your ACE by establishing distinct metrics for each of your service offerings. This will ensure that you have full transparency over the outputs of your CoE and that your service offerings maintain relevance and are utilized.

    Questions to Ask

    1. What are leading indicators of improvements that directly affect the mandate of the CoE?
    2. How do you measure process efficiency and effectiveness?

    Creating meaningful metrics

    Specific

    Measureable

    Achievable

    Realistic

    Time-bound

    Follow the SMART framework when developing metrics for each service offering.

    Adhering to this methodology is a key component of the lean management methodology. This framework will help you avoid establishing general metrics that aren’t relevant.

    "It’s not about telling people what they are doing wrong. It’s about constantly steering everyone on the team in the direction of success, and never letting any individual compromise the progress of the team toward success." – Mary Poppendieck, qtd. in “Questioning Servant Leadership”

    For important advice on how to avoid the many risks associated with metrics, refer to Info-Tech’s Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively.

    Ensure your metrics are addressing criteria from different levels of stakeholders and enterprise context

    There will be a degree of overlap between the metrics from your business objectives, service offerings, and existing Agile teams. This is a positive thing. If a metric can speak to multiple benefits it is that much more powerful in commuting successes to your key stakeholders.

    Existing metrics

    Business objective metrics

    Service offering metrics

    Agile adoption metrics

    Finding points of overlap means that you have multiple stakeholders with a vested interest in the positive trend of a specific metric. These consolidated metrics will be fundamental for your CoE as they will help build consensus through communicating the success of the ACE in a common language for a diverse audience.

    Activity: Define existing team-level metrics

    2.3.1 1 Hour

    Input

    • Current metrics

    Output

    • Service offerings categorized within adoption model

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Team
    1. Gather any metrics related documentation that you collected during your requirements gathering in Phase 1.
    2. Collect team-level metrics for your existing Agile teams:
      • Examine outputs from any feedback mechanisms you have (satisfaction surveys, emails, existing SLAs, burndown charts, resourcing costs, licensing costs per sprint, etc.).
      • Look at historical trends and figures when available. Be careful of frequent anomalies as these may indicate a root cause that needs to be addressed.
      • Explore the definition of specific metrics across different functional teams to ensure consistency of measurement and reporting.
    Team Objective Expected Benefits Metrics
    Improve productivity
    • Improve transparency with business decisions
    • Team burndown and velocity
    • Number of releases per milestone
    Increase team morale and motivation
    • Teams are engaged and motivated to develop new opportunities to deliver more value quicker.
    • Team satisfaction with Agile environment
    • Degree of engagement in ceremonies
    Improve transparency with business decisions
    • Teams are engaged and motivated to develop new opportunities to deliver more value quicker.
    • Stakeholder satisfaction with completed product
    • Number of revisions to products in demonstrations

    Activity: Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives

    2.3.2 1 Hour

    Input

    • Organizational business objectives from Phase 1

    Output

    • Metrics aligned to organizational business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. List the business objectives that you determined in 1.1.2.
    2. Create a shortlist of expected benefits from those business objectives. These will help to drive metrics that align with the intended purpose of completing those business objectives, and affirm they are aligned to realizable benefits.
    3. Define metrics that speak to the benefits of your business objectives. While engaging in this process, ensure to document the collection method for each metrics.
    Business Objectives Expected Benefits Metrics
    Decrease time-to-market of product releases
    • Faster feedback from customers.
    • Increased customer satisfaction.
    • Competitive advantage.
    Decrease time-to-market of product releases
    • Alignment to organizational best practices.
    • Improved team productivity.
    • Greater collaboration across functional teams.
    • Policy and practice adherence and acknowledgement
    • Number of requests for ACE services
    • Number of suggestions to improve Agile best practices and ACE operations

    Activity: Define target ACE performance metrics

    2.3.3 1 Hour

    Input

    • Service offerings
    • Satisfaction surveys
    • Usage rates

    Output

    • CoE performance metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Define metrics to measure the success of each of your service offerings.
    2. Create a shortlist of expected benefits from those business objectives. These will help to drive metrics that align with the intended purpose of those service offerings, and affirm they are aligned to realizable benefits.
    3. Define metrics that speak to the benefits of your service offerings.
    4. Compare these to your team performance metrics.
    Service Offering Expected Benefits Metrics
    Knowledge management
    • Comprehensive knowledgebase that accommodates various company products and office locations.
    • Easily accessible resources.
    • Number of practices extracted from ACE and utilized
    • Frequency of updates to knowledgebase
    Tooling standards
    • Tools adhere to company policies, security guidelines, and regulations.
    • Improved support of tools and technologies.
    • Tools integrate and function well with enterprise systems.
    • Number of teams and functional groups using standardized tools
    • Number of supported standardized tools
    • Number of new tools added to the standards list
    • Number of tools removed from standards list

    Activity: Define Agile adoption metrics

    2.3.4 1 Hour

    Input

    • Agile adoption model

    Output

    • Agile adoption metrics
    1. Define metrics to measure the success of each of your service offerings.
    2. Create a shortlist of expected benefits from those business objectives. These will help to drive metrics that align with the intended purpose of those service offerings, and affirm they are aligned to realizable benefits.
    3. Define metrics that speak to the benefits of your service offerings.
    4. It is possible that you will need to adjust these metrics after baselines are established when you begin to operate the ACE. Keep this in mind moving forward.
    Adoption attributes Expected Benefits Metrics
    Team organization
    • Acquisition of the appropriate roles and skills to successfully deliver products.
    • Degree of flexibility to adjust team compositions on a per project basis
    Team coordination
    • Ability to successfully undertake large and complex projects involving multiple functional groups.
    • Number of ceremonies involving teams across functional groups
    Business alignment
    • Increased delivery of business value from process optimizations.
    • Number of business-objective metrics surpassing targets
    Coaching
    • Teams are regularly trained with new and better best practices.
    • Number of coaching and training requests
    Empowerment
    • Teams can easily and quickly modify processes to improve productivity without following a formal, rigorous process.
    • Number of implemented changes from team retrospectives
    Failure tolerance
    • Stakeholders trust teams will adjust when failures occur during a project.
    • Degree of stakeholder trust to address project issues quickly and effectively

    Activity: Consolidate your metrics for stakeholder impact

    2.3.5 30 Minutes

    Input

    • New and existing Agile metrics

    Output

    • Consolidated Agile metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Take all the metrics defined from the previous activities and compare them as a group.
    2. If there are overlapping metrics that are measuring similar outcomes or providing similar benefits, see if there is a way to merge them together so that a single metric can report outcomes to multiple stakeholders. This reduces the amount of resources invested in metrics gathering and helps to show consensus or alignment between multiple stakeholder interests.
    3. Compare these to your existing Agile metrics, and explore ways to consolidate existing metrics that are established with some of your new metrics. Established metrics are trusted and if they can be continued it can be viewed as beneficial from a consensus and consistency perspective to your stakeholders.

    Activity: Use Info-Tech’s ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to monitor, evaluate, refine, and ensure continued business value

    2.3.6 1 Hour

    Purpose

    The CoE governance team can use this tool to take ownership of the project’s benefits, track progress, and act on any necessary changes to address gaps. In the long term, it can be used to identify whether the team is ahead, on track, or lagging in terms of benefits realization.

    Steps

    1. Enter your identified metrics from the following activities into the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool.
    2. Input your baselines from your data collection (Phase 3) and a goal value for each metric.
    3. Document the results at key intervals as defined by the tool.
    4. Use the summary report to identify metrics that are not tracking well for root cause analysis and communicate with key stakeholders the outcomes of your Agile Center of Excellence based on your communication schedule from Phase 3, Step 3.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool.

    Checkpoint: Are you ready to operate your ACE?

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Self Auditing Guidelines

    • Have you categorized your ACE service offerings within Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model?
    • Have you formalized engagement plans to standardize the access to your service offerings?
    • Do you understand the function of learning events and their criticality to the function of the ACE?
    • Do you understand the key attributes of Agile adoption and how social capital leads to optimized value delivery?
    • Have you defined metrics for different goals (adoption, effective service offerings, business objectives) of the ACE?
    • Do your defined metrics align to the SMART framework?

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.1 Further categorize your use cases within the Agile adoption model

    Our analyst team will help you categorize the Centers of Excellence service offerings within Info-Tech’s Agile adoption model to help standardize the way your organization engages with the Center of Excellence.

    2.2.1 Create an engagement plan for each level of adoption

    Our analyst team will help you structure engagement plans for each role within your Agile environment to provide a standardized pathway to personal development and consistency in practice.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    2.3.2 Define metrics that align with your Agile business objectives

    Our analysts will walk you through defining a set of metrics that align with your Agile business objectives identified in Phase 1 of the blueprint so the CoEs monitoring function can ensure ongoing alignment during operation.

    2.3.3 Define target ACE performance metrics

    Our analysts will walk you through defining a set of metrics that monitors how successful the ACE has been at providing its services so that business and IT stakeholders can ensure the effectiveness of the ACE.

    2.3.4 Define Agile adoption metrics

    Our analyst team will help you through defining a set of metrics that aligns with your organization’s fit of the Agile adoption model in order to provide a mechanism to track the progress of Agile teams maturing in capability and organizational trust.

    Phase 3

    Operationalize Your Agile Center of Excellence

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Operate your ACE to drive optimized value from your Agile teams

    The final step is to engage in monitoring of your metrics program to identify areas for improvement. Using metrics as a driver for operating your ACE will allow you to identify and effectively manage needed change, as well as provide you with the data necessary to promote outcomes to your stakeholders to ensure the long-term viability of the ACE within your organization.

    Phase 1 - Strategically Align the CoE

    Create strategic alignment between the CoE and the organization’s goals, objectives, and vision. This alignment translates into the CoE mandate intended to enhance the way Agile will enable teams to meet business objectives.

    Phase 2 - Standardize the CoEs Service Offerings

    Build an engagement plan based on a standardized adoption model to ensure your CoE service offerings are accessible and consistent across the organization. Create and consolidate key performance indicators to measure the CoEs utility and whether or not the expected value is being translated to tangible results.

    Phase 3 - Operate the CoE

    Operate the CoE to provide service offerings to Agile teams, identify improvements to optimize the function of your Agile teams, and effectively manage and communicate change so that teams can grow within the Agile adoption model and optimize value delivery both within your Agile environment and across functions.

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Operate the CoE

    Proposed Time to Completion (in weeks): Variable depending on communication plan

    Step 3.1: Optimize the success of your ACE

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Conduct a baseline assessment of your Agile environment.

    Then complete these activities…

    3.1.1 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Satisfaction Survey to help establish your baseline.

    3.1.2 Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to measure the maturity level of your ACE.

    3.1.3 Prioritize ACE actions by monitoring your metrics.

    Step 3.2: Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    Start with an analyst kick off call:

    • Interface with the ACE with your change management function.

    Then complete these activities…

    3.2.1 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams.

    3.2.2 Determine the root cause of each metric falling short of expectations.

    3.2.3 Brainstorm solutions to identified issues.

    3.2.4 Review your metrics program.

    3.2.5 Create a communication plan for change.

    Step 3.3: Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Build a communications deck for key stakeholders.

    Then complete these activities…

    3.3.1 Use the outputs from your metrics tracking tool to communicate progress.

    3.3.2 Summarize adjustments in areas where the ACE fell short.

    3.3.3 Review the effectiveness of your service offerings.

    3.3.4 Evaluate your ACE Maturity.

    3.3.5 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Communications Deck to deliver your outcomes to the key stakeholders.

    Phase 3 Results & Insights:

    Inject improvements into your Agile environment with operational excellence. Plan changes and communicate them effectively, monitor outcomes on a regular basis, and keep stakeholders in the loop to ensure that their interests are being looked after to ensure long-term viability of the CoE.

    Phase 3, Step 1: Optimize the success of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Tools:

    3.1.1 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Satisfaction Survey to help establish your baseline.

    3.1.2 Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to measure the maturity level of your ACE.

    3.1.3 Prioritize ACE actions by monitoring your metrics.

    Outcomes:

    • Conduct a baseline assessment of your ACE to measure against using a variety of data sources, including interviews, satisfaction surveys, and historical data.
    • Use the Benefits Tracking Tool to start monitoring the outcomes of the ACE and to keep track of trends.

    Ensure the CoE is able to collect the necessary data to measure success

    Establish your collection process to ensure that the CoE has the necessary resources to collect metrics and monitor progress, that there is alignment on what data sources are to be used when collecting data, and that you know which stakeholder is interested in the outcomes of that metric.

    Responsibility

    • Does the CoE have enough manpower to collect the metrics and monitor them?
    • If automated through technology, is it clear who is responsible for its function?

    Source of metric

    • Is the method of data collection standardized so that multiple people could collect the data in the same way?

    Impacted stakeholder

    • Do you know which stakeholder is interested in this metric?
    • How often should the interested stakeholder be informed of progress?

    Intended function

    • What is the expected benefit of increasing this metric?
    • What does the metric intend to communicate to the stakeholder?

    Conduct a baseline assessment of your ACE to measure success

    Establishing the baseline performance of the ACE allows you to have a reasonable understanding of the impact it is having on meeting business objectives. Use user satisfaction surveys, stakeholder interviews, and any current metrics to establish a concept of how you are performing now. Setting new metrics can be a difficult task so it is important to collect as much current data as possible. After the metrics have been established and monitored for a period of time, you can revisit the targets you have set to ensure they are realistic and usable.

    Without a baseline, you cannot effectively:

    • Establish reasonable target metrics that reflect the performance of your Center of Excellence.
    • Identify, diagnose, and resolve any data that deviates from expected outcomes.
    • Measure ongoing business satisfaction given the level of service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Invest the needed time to baseline your activities. These data points are critical to diagnose successes and failures of the CoE moving forward, and you will need them to be able to refine your service offerings as business conditions or user expectations change. While it may seem like something you can breeze past, the investment is critical.

    Use a variety of sources to get the best picture of your current state; a combination of methods provides the richest insight

    Interviews

    What to do:

    • Conduct interviews (or focus groups) with key influencers and Agile team members.

    Benefits:

    • Data comes from key business decision makers.
    • Identify what is top of mind for your top-level stakeholders.
    • Ask follow-up questions for detail.

    Challenges:

    • This will only provide a very high-level view.
    • Interviewer biases may skew the results.

    Surveys

    What to do:

    • Distribute an Agile-specific stakeholder satisfaction survey. The survey should be specific to identify factors of your current environment.

    Benefits:

    • Every end user/business stakeholder will be able to provide feedback.
    • The survey will be simple to develop and distribute.

    Challenges:

    • Response rates can be low if stakeholders do not understand the value in their opinions.

    Historical Data

    What to do:

    • Collect and analyze existing Agile data such as past retrospectives, Agile team metrics, etc.

    Benefits:

    • Get a full overview of current service offerings, past issues, and current service delivery.
    • Allows you to get an objective view of what is really going on within your Agile teams.

    Challenges:

    • Requires a significant time investment and analytical skills to analyze the data and generate insights on business satisfaction and needs.

    Use Info-Tech’s ACE Satisfaction Survey to help establish your baseline

    3.1.1 Baseline satisfaction survey

    Purpose

    Conduct a user satisfaction survey prior to setting your baseline for your ACE. This will include high-level questions addressing your overall Agile environment and questions addressing teams’ current satisfaction with their processes and technology.

    Steps

    1. Modify the satisfaction survey template to suit your organization and the service offerings you have defined for the Agile Center of Excellence.
    2. Distribute the satisfaction survey to any users who are expected to interface with the ACE.
    3. Document the results and communicate them with the relevant key stakeholders.
    4. Combine these results with historical data points (if available) and stakeholder interviews to get a holistic picture of your current state.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Satisfaction Survey.

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to measure the maturity level of your ACE

    3.1.2 CoE maturity assessment

    Purpose

    Assessing your ACEs maturity lets you know where they currently are and what to track to get them to the next step. This will help ensure your ACE is following good practices and has the appropriate mechanisms in place to serve your stakeholders.

    Steps

    1. Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to assess the maturity of your ACE.
    2. Complete the assessment tool with all members of your ACE team to determine your maturity score.
    3. Document the results and communicate them with the relevant key stakeholders.
    4. Combine these results with historical data points (if available) and stakeholder interviews to get a holistic picture of your ACE maturity level.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool.

    Activity: Prioritize ACE actions by monitoring your metrics

    3.1.3 Variable time commitment

    Input

    • Metrics from ACE Benefits Tracking Tool

    Output

    • Prioritized actions for the ACE

    Materials

    • ACE Benefits Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Review your ACE Benefits Tracking Tool periodically (at the end of sprint cycles, quarterly, etc.) and document metrics that are trending or actively falling short of goals or expectations.
    2. Take the documented list and have the ACE staff consider what actions or decisions can be prioritized to help mend the identified gaps. Look for any trends that could potentially speak to a larger problem or a specific aspect of the ACE or the organizational Agile environment that is not functioning as expected.
    3. Take the opportunity to review metrics that are also tracking above expected value to see if there are any lessons learned that can be extended to other ACE service offerings (e.g. effective engagement or communication strategies) so that the organization can start to learn what is effective and what is not based on their internal struggles and challenges. Spreading successes is just as important as identifying challenges in a CoE model.

    Phase 3, Step 2: Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities:

    3.2.1 Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams.

    3.2.2 Determine the root cause of each metric falling short of expectations.

    3.2.3 Brainstorm solutions to identified issues

    3.2.4 Review your metrics program.

    3.2.5 Create a communication plan for change.

    Outcomes:

    • Understand how your existing change management process interfaces with the Center of Excellence.
    • Identify issues and ideate solutions to metrics falling short of expectations.
    • Create a communication plan to prepare groups for any necessary change.

    Manage the adaptation of teams as they adopt Agile capabilities

    As Agile spreads, be cognizant of your cultural tolerance to change and its ability to deliver on such change. Change will happen more frequently and continuously, and there may be conceptual (change tolerance) or capability (delivery tolerance) roadblocks along the way that will need to be addressed.

    The Agile adoption model will help to graduate both the tolerance to change and tolerance to deliver over time. As your level of competency to deliver change increases, organizational tolerance to change, especially amongst management, will increase as well. Remember that optimized value delivery comes from this careful balance of aptitude and trust.

    Tolerance to change

    Tolerance to change refers to the conceptual capacity of your people to consume and adopt change. Change tolerance may become a barrier to success because teams might be too engrained with current structures and processes and find any changes too disruptive and uncomfortable.

    Tolerance to deliver

    Tolerance to deliver refers to the capability to deliver on expected change. While teams may be tolerant, they may not have the necessary capacity, skills, or resources to deliver the necessary changes successfully. The ACE can help solve this problem with training and coaching, or possibly by obtaining outside help where necessary.

    Understand how the ACE interfaces with your current change management process

    As the ACE absorbs best practices and identifies areas for improvement, a change management process should be established to address the implementation and sustainability of change without introducing significant disruptions and costs.

    To manage a continuously changing environment, your ACE will need to align and coordinate with organizational change management processes. This process should be capable of evaluating and incorporating multiple change initiatives continuously.

    Desired changes will need to be validated, and localized adaptations will need to be disseminated to the larger organization, and current state policy and procedures will need to be amended as the adoption of Agile spreads and capabilities increase.

    The goal here is to have the ACE governance group identify and interface with parties relevant to successfully implementing any specific change.

    INFO-TECH RELATED RESEARCH:

    Strategy and Leadership: Optimize Change Management

    Optimize your stakeholder management process to identify, prioritize, and effectively manage key stakeholders.

    Where should your Agile change requests come from?

    Changes to the services, structure, or engagement model of your ACE can be triggered from various sources in your organization. You will see that proposed changes may be requested with the best intentions; however, the potential impacts they may have to other areas of the organization can be significant. Consult all sources of ACE change requests to obtain a consensus that your change requests will not deteriorate the ACEs performance and use.

    ACE Governance

    • Sources of ACE Change Requests
      • ACE Policies/Stakeholders
        • Triggers for Change:
          • Changes in business and functional group objectives.
          • Dependencies and legacy policies and procedures.
      • ACE Customers
        • Triggers for Change:
          • Retrospectives and post-mortems.
          • Poor fit of best practices to projects.
      • Metrics
        • Triggers for Change:
          • Performance falling short of expectations.
          • Lack of alignment with changing objectives.
      • Tools and Technologies
        • Triggers for Change:
          • New or enhanced tools and technologies.
          • Changes in development and technology standards.

    Note: Each source of ACE change requests may require a different change management process to evaluate and implement the change.

    Activity: Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams

    3.2.1 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • Understanding of team and organization structure

    Output

    • Current assessment of organizational design

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Development team
    1. Identify everyone who is directly or indirectly involved in projects completed by Agile teams. This can include those that are:
    • Informed of a project’s progress.
    • Expected to interface with the Agile team for solution delivery (e.g. DevOps).
    • Impacted by the success of the delivered solutions.
    • Responsible for the removal of impediments faced by the Agile team.
  • Indicate how each role interacts with the others and how frequently these interactions occur for a typical project. Do this by drawing a diagram on a whiteboard using labelled arrows to indicate types and frequency of interactions.
  • Identify the possible communication, collaboration, and alignment challenges the team will face when working with other groups.
  • Agile Team n
    Group Type of Interaction Potential challenges
    Operations
    • Release management
    • Past challenges transitioning to DevOps.
    • Communication barrier as an impediment.
    PMO
    • Planning
    • Product owner not located with team in organization.
    • PMO still primarily waterfall; need Agile training/coaching

    Activity: Determine the root cause of each metric falling short of expectations

    3.2.2 30 Minutes per metric

    Input

    • Metrics from Benefits Tracking Tool

    Output

    • Root causes to issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • ACE team
    1. Take each metric from the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool that is lagging behind or has missed expectations and conduct an analysis of why it is performing that way.
    2. Conduct individual webbing sessions to clarify the issues. The goal is to drive out the reasons why these issues are present or why scaling Agile may introduce additional challenges.
    3. Share and discuss these findings with the entire team.

    Example:

    • Lack of best-practice documentation
      • Why?
        • Knowledge siloed within teams
        • No centralized repository for best practices
          • Why?
            • No mechanisms to share between teams
              • Why? Root causes
                • Teams are not sharing localized adaptations
                • CoE is not effectively monitoring team communications
            • Access issues at team level to wiki
              • Why? Root causes
                • Administration issues with best-practice wiki
                • Lack of ACE visibility into wiki access

    Activity: Brainstorm solutions to identified issues

    3.2.3 30 Minutes per metric

    Input

    • Root causes of issues

    Output

    • Fixes and solutions to scaling Agile issues

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • Development team
    1. Using the results from your root-cause analysis, brainstorm potential solutions to the identified problems. Frame your brainstorming within the following perspectives: people, process, and technology. Map these solutions using the matrix below.
    2. Synthesize your ideas to create a consolidated list of initiatives.
      1. Highlight the solutions that can address multiple issues.
      2. Collaborate on how solutions can be consolidated into a single initiative.
    3. Write your synthesized solutions on sticky notes.
    SOLUTION CATEGORY
    People Process Technology
    ISSUES Poor face-to-face communication
    Lack of best-practice documentation

    Engage those teams affected by change early to ensure they are prepared

    Strategically managing change is an essential component to ensure that the ACE achieves its desired function. If the change that comes with adopting Agile best practices is going to impact other functions and change their expected workflows, ensure they are well prepared and the benefits for said changes are clearly communicated to them.

    Necessary change may be identified proactively (dependency assessments, system integrity, SME indicates need, etc.) or reactively (through retrospectives, discussions, completing root-cause analyses, etc.), but both types need to be handled the same way – through proper planning and communication with the affected parties.

    Plan any necessary change

    Understand the points where other groups will be affected by the adoption of Agile practices and recognize the potential challenges they may face. Plan changes to accommodate interactions between these groups without roadblocks or impediments.

    Communicate the change

    Structure a communication plan based on your identified challenges and proposed changes so that groups are well prepared to make the necessary adjustments to accommodate Agile workflows.

    Review and modify your metrics and baselines to ensure they are achievable in changing environments

    Consider the possible limitations that will exist from environmental complexities when measuring your Agile teams. Dependencies and legacy policies and procedures that pose a bottleneck to desired outcomes will need to be changed before teams can be measured justifiably. Take the time to ensure the metrics you crafted earlier are plausible in your current environment and there is not a need for transitional metrics.

    Are your metrics achievable?

    Specific

    Measureable

    Achievable

    • Adopting Agile is a journey, not just a destination. Ensure that the metrics a team is measured against reflect expectations for the team’s current level of Agile adoption and consider external dependencies that may limit their ability to achieve intended results.

    Realistic

    Time-bound

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use metrics as diagnostics, not as motivation. Teams will find ways to meet metrics they are measured by making sacrifices and taking unneeded risk to do so. To avoid dysfunction in your monitoring, use metrics as analytical tools to inform decision making, not as a yardstick for judgement.

    Activity: Review your metrics program

    3.2.4 Variable time commitment

    Input

    • Identified gaps
    • Agile team interaction points

    Output

    • ACE baselines
    • Past measurements

    Materials

    • ACE Benefits Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Now that you have identified gaps in your current state, see if those will have any impact on the achievability of your current metrics program.
    2. Review your root-cause analyses and brainstormed solutions, and hypothesize whether or not they will have any downstream impact to goal attainment. It is possible that there is no impact, but as cross-functional collaboration increases, the likelihood that groups will act as bottlenecks or impediments to expected performance will increase.
    3. Consider how any changes will impact the interaction points between teams based on the results from activity 3.2.1: Assess the interaction and communication points of your Agile teams. If there are too many negative impacts it may be a sign to re-consider the hypothesized solution to the problem and consider alternatives.
    4. In any cases where a metric has been altered, adjust its goal measurement to reflect its changes in the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool.

    Case study: Agile change at the GSA

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Government

    Source Navin Vembar, Agile Government Leadership

    Challenge

    The GSA is tasked with completed management of the Integrated Award Environment (IAE).

    • The IAE manages ten federal information technology systems that enable registering, searching, and applying for federal awards, as well as tracking them.
    • The IAE also manages the Federal Service Desk.

    The IAE staff had to find a way to break down the problem of modernization into manageable chunks that would demonstrate progress, but also had to be sure to capture a wide variety of user needs with the ability to respond to those needs throughout development.

    Had to work out the logistics of executing Agile change within the GSA, an agency that relies heavily on telework. In the case of modernization, they had a product owner in Florida while the development team was spread across the metro Washington, DC area.

    Solution

    Agile provided the ability to build incremental successes that allowed teams successful releases and built enthusiasm around the potential of adopting Agile practices offered.

    • GSA put in place an organization framework that allowed for planning of change at the portfolio level to enable the change necessary to allow for teams to execute tasks at the project level.
    • A four-year plan with incremental integration points allowed for larger changes on a quarterly basis while maintaining a bi-weekly sprint cycle.
    • They adopted IBM’s RTC tool for a Scrum board and on Adobe Connect for daily Scrum sessions to ensure transparency and effectiveness of outcomes across their collocated teams.

    Create a clear, concise communication plan

    Communication is key to avoid surprises and lost productivity created by the implementation of changes.

    User groups and the business need to be given sufficient notice of an impending change. Be concise, be comprehensive, and ensure that the message is reaching the right audience so that no one is blindsided and unable to deliver what is needed. This will allow them to make appropriate plans to accept the change, minimizing the impact of the change on productivity.

    Key Aspects of a Communication Plan

    • The method of communication (email, meetings, workshops, etc.).
    • The delivery strategy (who will deliver the message?).
    • The communication responsibility structure.
    • The communication frequency.
    • A feedback mechanism that allows you to review the effectiveness of your plan.
    • The message that you need to present.

    Communicating change

    • What is the change?
    • Why are we doing it?
    • How are we going to go about it?
    • What are we trying to achieve?
    • How often will we be updated?

    (Cornelius & Associates, The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change)

    Apply the following principles to enhance the clarity of your message

    1. Be Consistent
    • "This is important because..."
      • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
      • Test your communication and obtain feedback before delivering your message.
      • A lack of consistency can be perceived as deception.
  • Be Clear
    • "This means..."
      • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
      • Choice of language is important.
      • Don’t use jargon.
  • Be Relevant
    • "This affects you because..."
      • Talk about what matters to the audience.
      • Talk about what matters to the change initiative.
      • Tailor the details of the message to each audience’s specific concerns.
      • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
  • Be Concise
    • "In summary..."
      • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
  • Activity: Create a communication plan for change

    3.2.5 1.5 Hours

    Input

    • Desired messages
    • Stakeholder list

    Output

    • Communication plan

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • CoE
    1. Define the audience(s) for your communications. Consider who needs to be the audience of your different communication events and how it will impact them.
    2. Identify who the messenger will be to deliver the message.
    3. Identify your communication methods. Decide on the methods you will use to deliver each communication event. Your delivery method may vary depending on the audience it is targeting.
    4. Establish a timeline for communication releases. Set dates for your communication events. This can be recurring (weekly, monthly, etc.) or one-time events.
    5. Determine what the content of the message must include. Use the guidelines on the following slide to ensure the message is concise and impactful.

    Note: It is important to establish a feedback mechanism to ensure that the communication has been effective in communicating the change to the intended audiences. This can be incorporated into your ACE satisfaction surveys.

    Audience Messenger Format Timing Message
    Operations Development team Email
    • Monthly (major release)
    • Ad hoc (minor release and fixes)
    Build ready for release
    Key stakeholders CIO Meeting
    • Monthly unless dictated otherwise
    Updates on outcomes from past two sprint cycles

    Phase 3, Step 3: Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Phase 1

    1.1 Determine the vision of your ACE

    1.2 Define the service offerings of your ACE

    Phase 2

    2.1 Define an adoption plan for your Agile teams

    2.2 Create an ACE engagement plan

    2.3 Define metrics to measure success

    Phase 3

    3.1 Optimize the success of your ACE

    3.2 Plan change to enhance your Agile initiatives

    3.3 Conduct ongoing retrospectives of your ACE

    Activities/Tools:

    3.3.1 Use the outputs from your metrics tracking tool to communicate progress.

    3.3.2 Summarize adjustments in areas where the ACE fell short.

    3.3.3 Re-conduct satisfaction surveys and compare against your baseline.

    3.3.4 Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline current practices

    3.3.5 Use Info-Tech’s ACE Communications Deck to deliver your outcomes to the key stakeholders.

    Outcomes:

    • Conduct a retrospective of your ACE to enable the continuous improvement of your Agile program.
    • Structure a communications deck to communicate with stakeholders the outcomes from introducing the ACE to the organization.

    Reflect on your ACEs performance to lead the way to enterprise agility

    After functioning for a period of time, it is imperative to review the function of your ACE to ensure its continual alignment and see in what ways it can improve.

    At the end of the year, take the time to deliberately review and discuss:

    1. The effectiveness and use of your ACEs service offerings.
    2. What went well or wrong during the ACEs operation.
    3. What can be done differently to improve reach, usability, and effectiveness.
    4. Bring together Agile teams and discuss the processes they follow and inquire about suggestions for improvement.

    What is involved?

    • Use your metrics program to diagnose areas of issue and success. The diagnostic value of your metrics can help lead conversations with your Agile teams when attempting to inquire about suggestions for improvement.
    • Leverage your satisfaction surveys from the creation of your ACE and compare them against satisfaction surveys run after a year of operation. What are the lessons learned between then and now?
    • While it is primarily conducted by the ACE team, keep in mind it is a collaborative function and should involve all members, including Agile teams, product owners, Scrum masters, etc.

    Communicating with your key influencers is vital to ensure long-term operation of the ACE

    To ensure the long-term viability of your ACE and that your key influencers will continue funding, you need to demonstrate the ROI the Center of Excellence has provided.

    The overlying purpose of your ACE is to effectively align your Agile teams with corporate objectives. This means that there have to be communicable benefits that point to the effort and resources invested being valuable to the organization. Re-visit your prioritized stakeholder list and get ready to show them the impact the ACE has had on business outcomes.

    Communication with stakeholders is the primary method of building and developing a lasting relationship. Correct messaging can build bridges and tear down barriers, as well as soften opposition and bolster support.

    This section will help you to prepare an effective communication piece that summarizes the metrics stakeholders are interested in, as well as some success stories or benefits that are not communicable through metrics to provide extra context to ongoing successes of the ACE.

    INFO-TECH RELATED RESEARCH:

    Strategy and Leadership: Manage Stakeholder Relations

    Optimize your stakeholder management process to identify, prioritize, and effectively manage key stakeholders.

    Involve key stakeholders in your retrospectives to justify the funding for your ACE

    Those who fund the ACE have a large influence on the long-term success of your ACE. If you have not yet involved your stakeholders, you need to re-visit your organizational funding model for the ACE and ensure that your key stakeholders include the key decision makers for your funding. While they may have varying levels of interest and desires for granularity of data reporting, they need to at least be informed on a high level and kept as champions of the ACE so that there are no roadblocks to the long-term viability of this program.

    Keep this in mind as the ACE begins to demonstrate success, as it is not uncommon to have additional members added to your funding model as your service scales, especially in the chargeback models.

    As new key influencers are included, the ACEs governing group must ensure that collective interests may align and that more priorities don’t lead to derailment.

    The image shows a matrix. The matrix is labelled with Involvement at the bottom, and Power on the left side, and has the upper left quadrant labelled Keep Satisfied, the upper right quadrant labelled Key players, the lower right quadrant labelled Keep informed, and the lower left quadrant labelled Minimal effort. In the matric, there are several roles shown, with roles such as CFO, Apps Director, Funding Group, and CIO highlighted in the Key players section.

    Use the outputs from your metrics tracking tool to communicate progress

    3.3.1 1 Hour

    Use the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool to track the progress of your Agile environment to monitor whether or not the ACE is having a positive impact on the business’ ability to meet its objectives. The outputs will allow you to communicate incremental benefits that have been realized and point towards positive trends that will ensure the long-term buy-in of your key influencers.

    For communication purposes, use this tool to:

    • Re-visit who the impacted or interested stakeholders are so you can tailor your communications to be as impactful as possible for each key influencer of the ACE.

    The image shows a screen capture of the Agile CoE Metrics Tracking sheet.

    • Collate the benefits of the current projects undertaken by the Center of Excellence to give an overall recap of the ACEs impact.

    The image is a screen capture of the Summary Report sheet.

    Communicate where the ACE fell short

    Part of communicating the effectiveness of your ACE is to demonstrate that it is able to remedy projects and processes when they fall short of expectations and brainstorm solutions that effectively address these challenges. Take the opportunity to summarize where results were not as expected, and the ways in which the ACE used its influence or services to drive a positive outcome from a problem diagnosis. Stakeholders do not want a sugar-coated story – they want to see tangible results based on real scenarios.

    Summarizing failures will demonstrate to key influencers that:

    • You are not cherry-picking positive metrics to report and that the ACE faced challenges that it was able to overcome to drive positive business outcomes.
    • You are being transparent with the successes and challenges faced by the ACE, fostering increased trust within your stakeholders regarding the capabilities of Agile.
    • Resolution mechanisms are working as intended, successfully building failure tolerance and trust in change management policies and procedures.

    Activity: Summarize adjustments in areas where the ACE fell short

    3.3.2 15 Minutes per metric

    Input

    • Diagnosed problems from tracking tool
    • Root-cause analyses

    Output

    • Summary of change management successes

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • ACE
    1. Create a list of items from the ACE Benefits Tracking Tool that fell short of expectations or set goals.
    2. For each point, create a brief synopsis of the root-cause analysis completed and summarize the brainstormed solution and its success in remedying the issue. If this process is not complete, create a to-date summary of any progress.
    3. Choose two to three pointed success stories from this list that will communicate broad success to your set of stakeholders.
    Name of metric that fell short
    Baseline measurement 65% of users satisfied with ACE services.
    Goal measurement 80% of users satisfied with ACE services.
    Actual measurement 70% of users satisfied with ACE services.
    Results of root-cause analysis Onboarding was not extensive enough; teams were unaware of some of the services offered, rendering them unsatisfied.
    Proposed solution Revamp onboarding process to include capability map of service offered.
    Summary of success TBD

    Re-conduct surveys with the ACE Satisfaction Survey to review the effectiveness of your service offerings

    3.3.3 Re-conduct satisfaction surveys and compare against your baseline

    Purpose

    This satisfaction survey will give you a template to follow to monitor the effectiveness of your ACEs defined service offerings. The goal is to understand what worked, and what did not, so you can add, retract, or modify service offerings where necessary.

    Steps

    1. Re-use the satisfaction survey to measure the effectiveness of the service offerings. Add questions regarding specific service offerings where necessary.
    2. Cross-analyze your satisfaction survey with metrics tied to your service offerings to help understand the root cause of the issues.
    3. Use the root-cause analysis exercises from step 3.2 to find the root causes of issues.
    4. Create a set of recommendations to add, amend, or improve any existing service offerings.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Satisfaction Survey.

    Use Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to baseline current practices

    3.3.4 ACE Maturity Assessment

    Purpose

    Assess your ACEs maturity by using Info-Tech’s CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool. Assessing your ACEs maturity lets you know where you currently are, and where to look for improvements. Note that your optimal Maturity Level will depend on organizational specifics (e.g. a small organization with a handful of Agile Teams can be less mature than a large organization with hundreds of Agile Teams).

    Steps

    1. Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool to assess the maturity of your ACE.
    2. Complete the assessment tool with all members of your ACE team to determine your current Maturity score.
    3. Document the results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    Document results in the ACE Communications Deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the CoE Maturity Diagnostic Tool.

    Use Info-Tech’s ACE Communications Deck to deliver your outcomes to the key stakeholders

    3.3.5 Structure communications to each of your key stakeholders

    Purpose

    The ACE Communications Deck will give you a template to follow to effectively communicate with your stakeholders and ensure the long-term viability of your Agile Center of Excellence. Fill in the slides as instructed and provide each stakeholder with a targeted view of the successes of the ACE.

    Steps

    1. Determine who your target audience is for the Communications Deck – you may desire to create one for each of your key stakeholders as they may have different sets of interests.
    2. Fill out the ACE Communications Deck with the suggested inputs from the exercises you have completed during this research set.
    3. Review communications with members of the ACE to ensure that there are no communicable benefits that have been missed or omitted in the deck.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Download the ACE Communications Deck.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • An understanding of social capital as the key driver for organizational Agile success, and how it optimizes the value delivery of your Agile teams.
    • Importance of flexible governance to balance the benefits of localized adaptation and centralized control.
    • Alignment of service offerings with both business objectives and functional expectations as critical to ensuring long-term engagement with service offerings.

    Processes Optimized

    • Knowledge management and transfer of Agile best practices to new or existing Agile teams.
    • Optimization of service offerings for Agile teams based on organizational culture and objectives.
    • Change request optimization via interfacing ACE functions with existing change management processes.
    • Communication planning to ensure transparency during cross-functional collaboration.

    Deliverables Completed

    • A set of service offerings offered by the Center of Excellence that are aligned with the business, Agile teams, and related stakeholders.
    • Engagement plans for Agile team members based on a standardized adoption model to access the ACEs service offerings.
    • A suite of Agile metrics to measure effectiveness of Agile teams, the ACE itself, and its ability to deliver positive outcomes.
    • A communications plan to help create cross-functional transparency over pending changes as Agile spreads.
    • A communications deck to communicate Agile goals, actions, and outcomes to key stakeholders to ensure long-term viability of the CoE.

    Research contributors and experts

    Paul Blaney, Technology Delivery Executive, Thought Leader and passionate Agile Advocate

    Paul has been an Agile practitioner since the manifesto emerged some 20 years ago, applying and refining his views through real life experience at several organizations from startups to large enterprises. He has recently completed the successful build out of the inaugural Agile Delivery Centre of Excellence at TD bank in Toronto.

    John Munro, President Scrum Masters Inc.

    John Munro is the President of Scrum Masters Inc., a software optimization professional services firm using Agile, Scrum, and Lean to help North American firms “up skill” their software delivery people and processes. Scrum Masters’ unique, highly collaborative “Master Mind” consulting model leverages Agile/Lean experts on a biweekly basis to solve clients’ technical and process challenges.

    Doug Birgfeld, Senior Partner Agile Wave

    Doug has been a leader in building great teams, Agile project management, and business process innovation for over 20 years. As Senior Partner and Chief Evangelist at Agile Wave, his mission is to educate and to learn from all those who care about effective government delivery, nationally.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Agile is a cultural shift. Don't just do Agile, be Agile.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Improve Application Development Throughput

    Drive down your delivery time by eliminating development inefficiencies and bottlenecks while maintaining high quality.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Accelerate software deployment through Dev and Ops collaboration.

    Related Info-Tech research (continued)

    Maximize the Benefits from Enterprise Applications with a Center of Excellence

    Optimize your organization’s enterprise application capabilities with a refined and scalable methodology.

    Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program

    Be proactive; it costs exponentially more to fix a problem the longer it goes unnoticed.

    Optimize the Change Management Process

    Right-size your change management process.

    Improve Requirements Gathering

    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Bibliography

    Ambler, Scott. “Agile Requirements Change Management.” Agile Modeling. Scott Amber + Associates, 2014. Web. 12 Apr. 2016.

    Ambler, Scott. “Center of Excellence (CoEs).” Disciplined Agile 2.0: A Process Decision Framework for Enterprise I.T. Scott Amber + Associates. Web. 01 Apr. 2016.

    Ambler, Scott. “Transforming From Traditional to Disciplined Agile Delivery.” Case Study: Disciplined Agile Delivery Adoption. Scott Amber + Associates, 2013. Web.

    Beers, Rick. “IT – Business Alignment Why We Stumble and the Path Forward.” Oracle Corporation, July 2013. Web.

    Cornelius & Associates. “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, n.d. Web.

    Craig, William et al. “Generalized Criteria and Evaluation Method for Center of Excellence: A Preliminary Report.” Carnegie Mellon University Research Showcase @ CMU – Software Engineering Institute. Dec. 2009. Web. 20 Apr. 2016.

    Forsgren, Dr. Nicole et al (2019), Accelerate: State of DevOps 2019, Google, https://services.google.com/fh/files/misc/state-of-devops-2019.pdf

    Gerardi, Bart (2017), Agile Centers of Excellence, PMI Projectmanagement.com, https://www.projectmanagement.com/articles/405819/Agile-Centers-of-Excellence

    Gerardi, Bart (2017), Champions of Agile Adoption, PMI Projectmanagement.com, https://www.projectmanagement.com/articles/418151/Champions-of-Agile-Adoption

    Gerardi, Bart (2017), The Roles of an Agile COE, PMI Projectmanagement.com, https://www.projectmanagement.com/articles/413346/The-Roles-of-an-Agile-COE

    Hohl, P. et al. “Back to the future: origins and directions of the ‘Agile Manifesto’ – views of the originators.” Journal of Software Engineering Research and Development, vol. 6, no. 15, 2018. https://link.springer.com/article/10.1186/s40411-0...

    Kaltenecker, Sigi and Hundermark, Peter. “What Are Self-Organising Teams?” InfoQ. 18 July 2014. Web. 14 Apr. 2016.

    Kniberg, Henrik and Anderson Ivarsson. “Scaling Agile @ Spotify with Tribes, Squads, Chapters & Guilds.” Oct. 2012. Web. 30 Apr. 2016.

    Kumar, Alok et al. “Enterprise Agile Adoption: Challenges and Considerations.” Scrum Alliance. 30 Oct. 2014. Web. 30 May 2016.

    Levison, Mark. “Questioning Servant Leadership.” InfoQ, 4 Sept. 2008. Web. https://www.infoq.com/news/2008/09/servant_leadership/

    Linders, Ben. “Don't Copy the Spotify Model.” InfoQ.com. 6 Oct. 2016.

    Loxton, Matthew (June 1, 2011), CoP vs CoE – What’s the difference, and Why Should You Care?, Wordpress.com

    McDowell, Robert, and Bill Simon. In Search of Business Value: Ensuring a Return on Your Technology Investment. SelectBooks, 2010

    Novak, Cathy. “Case Study: Agile Government and the State of Maine.” Agile Government Leadership, n.d. Web.

    Pal, Nirmal and Daniel Pantaleo. “Services are the Language and Building Blocks of an Agile Enterprise.” The Agile Enterprise: Reinventing your Organization for Success in an On-Demand World. 6 Dec. 2015. Springer Science & Business Media.

    Rigby, Darrell K. et al (2018), Agile at Scale, Harvard Business Review, https://hbr.org/2018/05/agile-at-scale

    Scaledagileframework.com, Create a Lean-Agile Center of Excellence, Scaled Agile, Inc, https://www.scaledagileframework.com/lace/

    Shepley, Joe. “8 reasons COEs fail (Part 2).” Agile Ramblings, 22 Feb. 2010. https://joeshepley.com/2010/02/22/8-reasons-coes-fail-part-2/

    Stafford, Jan. “How upper management misconceptions foster Agile failures.” TechTarget. Web. 07 Mar. 2016.

    Taulli, Tom (2020), RPA Center Of Excellence (CoE): What You Need To Know For Success, Forbes.com, https://www.forbes.com/sites/tomtaulli/2020/01/25/rpa-center-of-excellence-coe-what-you-need-to-know-for-success/#24364620287a

    Telang, Mukta. “The CMMI Agile Adoption Model.” ScrumAlliance. 29 May 2015. Web. 15 Apr. 2016.

    VersionOne. “13th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne. 2019. Web.

    Vembar, Navin. “Case Study: Agile Government and the General Services Administration (Integrated Award Environment).” Agile Government Leadership, n.d. Web.

    Wenger, E., R. A. McDermott, et al. (2002), Cultivating communities of practice: A guide to managing knowledge, Harvard Business Press.

    Wenger, E., White, N., Smith, J.D. Digital Habitats; Stewarding Technology for Communities. Cpsquare (2009).

    Implement Infrastructure Shared Services

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}456|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Organizations have service duplications for unique needs. These duplications increase business expenditure.
    • Lack of collaboration between business units to share their services increases business cost and reduces business units’ faith to implement shared services.
    • Transitioning infrastructure to shared services is challenging for many organizations. It requires an accurate planning and efficient communication between participating business units.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identify your current process, tool, and people capabilities before implementing shared services. Understand the financial compensations prior to implementation and assess if your organization is ready for transitioning to shared services model.
    • Do not implement shared services when the nature of the services differs greatly between business units.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand benefits of shared services for the business and determine whether transitioning to shared services would benefit the organization.
    • Identify the best implementation plan based on goals, needs, and services.
    • Build a shared-services process to manage the plan and ensure its success.

    Implement Infrastructure Shared Services Research & Tools

    Start here – Read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement shared services, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Conduct gap analysis

    Identify benefits of shared services to your organization and define implementation challenges.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 1: Conduct Gap Analysis
    • Shared Services Implementation Executive Presentation
    • Shared Services Implementation Business Case Template
    • Shared Services Implementation Assessment Tool

    2. Choose the right path

    Identify your process and staff capabilities and discover which services will be transitioned to shared services plan. It will also help you to figure out the best model to choose.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 2: Choose the Right Path
    • Sample Enterprise Services

    3. Plan the transition

    Discuss an actionable plan to implement shared services to track the project. Walk through a communication plan to document the goals, progress, and expectations with customer stakeholders.

    • Implement Infrastructure Shared Services – Phase 3: Plan the Transition
    • Shared Services Implementation Roadmap Tool
    • Shared Services Implementation Customer Communication Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Infrastructure Shared Services

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Identify Challenges

    The Purpose

    Establish the need for change.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set a clear understanding about benefits of shared services to your organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify your organization’s main drivers for using a shared services model.

    1.2 Define if it is beneficial to implement shared services.

    Outputs

    Shared services mission

    Shared services goals

    2 Assess Your Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Become aware of challenges to implement shared services and your capabilities for such transition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Discover the primary challenges for transitioning to shared services, eliminate resistance factors, and identify your business potentials for implementation.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify your organization’s resistance to implement shared services.

    2.2 Assess process and people capabilities.

    Outputs

    Shared Services Business Case

    Shared Services Assessment

    3 Define the Model

    The Purpose

    Determine the shared services model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identify the core services to be shared and the best model that fits your organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Define core services that will be moved to shared services.

    3.2 Assess different models of shared services and pick the one that satisfies your goals and needs.

    Outputs

    List of services to be transferred to shared services

    Shared services model

    4 Implement and Communicate

    The Purpose

    Define and communicate the tasks to be delivered.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confidently approach key stakeholders to make the project a reality.

    Activities

    4.1 Define the roadmap for implementing shared services.

    4.2 Make a plan to communicate changes.

    Outputs

    List of initiatives to reach the target state, strategy risks, and their timelines

    Draft of a communication plan

    Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}579|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $357,799 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • Organizations need to innovate rapidly to respond to the changing forces in their industry, but their IT initiatives often fail to deliver meaningful outcomes.
    • Planners face challenges in understanding the relationships between the important customer-focused innovations they’re trying to introduce and the resources (capabilities) that make them possible, including applications, human resources, information, and processes. For example, are we risking the success of a new service offering by underpinning it with a legacy or manual solution?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Successful execution of business strategy requires planning that:

    1. Accurately reflects organizational capabilities.
    2. Is traceable so all levels can understand how decisions are made.
    3. Makes efficient use of organizational resources.

    To accomplish this, the business architect must engage stakeholders, model the business, and drive planning with business architecture.

    • Business architecture is often regarded as an IT function when its role and tools should be fixtures within the business planning and innovation practice.
    • Any size of organization – from start-ups to global enterprises -- can benefit from using a common language and modeling rigor to identify the opportunities that will produce the greatest impact and value.
    • You don’t need sophisticated modeling software to build an effective business architecture knowledgebase. In fact, the best format for engaging business stakeholders is intuitive visuals using business language.

    Impact and Result

    • Execute more quickly on innovation and transformation initiatives.
    • More effectively target investments in resources and IT according to what goals and requirements are most important.
    • Identify problematic areas (e.g. legacy applications, manual processes) that hinder the business strategy and create inefficiencies in our information technology operation.

    Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Map Your Business Architecture Deck – A step-by-step document that walks you through how to properly engage business and IT in applying a common language and process rigor to build key capabilities required to achieve innovation and growth goals.

    Build a structured, repeatable framework for both IT and business stakeholders to appraise the activities that deliver value to consumers; and assess the readiness of their capabilities to enable them.

    • Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy – Phases 1-3

    2. Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template – A best-of-breed template to help you build a clear, concise, and compelling strategy document for identifying and engaging stakeholders.

    This template helps you ensure that your business architecture practice receives the resources, visibility, and support it needs to be successful, by helping you develop a strategy to engage the key stakeholders involved.

    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template

    3. Value Stream Map Template – A template to walk through the value streams that are tied to your strategic goals.

    Record the complete value stream and decompose it into stages. Add a description of the expected outcome of the value stream and metrics for each stage.

    • Value Stream Map Template

    4. Value Stream Capability Mapping Template – A template to define capabilities and align them to selected value streams.

    Build a business capability model for the organization and map capabilities to the selected value stream.

    • Value Stream – Capability Mapping Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Discover the Business Context

    The Purpose

    Identify and consult stakeholders to discover the business goals and value proposition for the customer.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Engage stakeholders and SMEs in describing the business and its priorities and culture.

    Identify focus for the areas we will analyze and work on.

    Activities

    1.1 Select key stakeholders

    1.2 Plan for engaging stakeholders

    1.3 Gather business goals and priorities

    Outputs

    Stakeholder roles

    Engagement plan

    Business strategy, value proposition

    2 Define Value Streams

    The Purpose

    Describe the main value-adding activities of the business from the consumer’s point of view, e.g. provide product or service.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Shared understanding of why we build resources and do what we do.

    Starting point for analyzing resources and investing in innovation.

    Activities

    2.1 Define or update value streams

    2.2 Decompose selected value stream(s) into value stages and identify problematic areas and opportunities

    Outputs

    Value streams for the enterprise

    Value stages breakdown for selected value stream(s)

    3 Build Business Capability Map

    The Purpose

    Describe all the capabilities that make up an organization and enable the important customer-facing activities in the value streams.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Basis for understanding what resources the organization has and their ability to support its growth and success.

    Activities

    3.1 Define and describe all business capabilities (Level 1)

    3.2 Decompose and analyze capabilities for a selected priority value stream.

    Outputs

    Business Capability Map (Level 1)

    Business Capabilities Level 2 for selected value stream

    4 Develop a Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Use the Business Capability Map to identify key capabilities (e.g. cost advantage creator), and look more closely at what applications or information or business processes are doing to support or hinder that critical capability.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Basis for developing a roadmap of IT initiatives, focused on key business capabilities and business priorities.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify key capabilities (cost advantage creators, competitive advantage creators)

    4.2 Assess capabilities with the perspective of how well applications, business processes, or information support the capability and identify gaps

    4.3 Apply analysis tool to rank initiatives

    Outputs

    Business Capability Map with key capabilities: cost advantage creators and competitive advantage creators

    Assessment of applications or business processes or information for key capabilities

    Roadmap of IT initiatives

    Further reading

    Map Your Business Architecture to Define Your Strategy

    Plan your organization’s capabilities for best impact and value.

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech is a provider of best-practice IT research advisory services that make every IT leader’s job easier.

    35,000 members sharing best practices you can leverage Millions spent developing tools and templates annually Leverage direct access to over 100 analysts as an extension of your team Use our massive database of benchmarks and vendor assessments Get up to speed in a fraction of the time

    Analyst perspective

    Know your organization’s capabilities to build a digital and customer-driven culture.

    Business architecture provides a holistic and unified view of:

    • All the organization’s activities that provide value to their clients (value streams).
    • The resources that make them possible and effective (capabilities, i.e. its employees, software, processes, information).
    • How they inter-relate, i.e. depend on and impact each other to help deliver value.

    Without a business architecture it is difficult to see the connections between the business’s activities for the customer and the IT resources supporting them – to demonstrate that what we do in IT is customer-driven.

    As a map of your business, the business architecture is an essential input to the digital strategy:

    • Develop a plan to transform the business by investing in the most important capabilities.
    • Ensure project initiatives are aligned with business goals as they evolve.
    • Respond more quickly to customer requirements and to disruptions in the industry by streamlining operations and information sharing across the enterprise.

    Crystal Singh, Research Director, Data and Analytics

    Crystal Singh
    Research Director, Data and Analytics
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrea Malick, Research Director, Data and Analytics

    Andrea Malick
    Research Director, Data and Analytics
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach

    Organizations need to innovate rapidly to respond to ever-changing forces and demands in their industry. But they often fail to deliver meaningful outcomes from their IT initiatives within a reasonable time.

    Successful companies are transforming, i.e. adopting fluid strategies that direct their resources to customer-driven initiatives and execute more quickly on those initiatives. In a responsive and digital organization, strategies, capabilities, information, people, and technology are all aligned, so work and investment are consistently allocated to deliver maximum value.

    You don’t have a complete reference map of your organization’s capabilities on which to base strategic decisions.

    You don’t know how to prioritize and identify the capabilities that are essential for achieving the organization’s customer-driven objectives.

    You don’t have a shared enterprise vision, where everyone understands how the organization delivers value and to whom.

    Begin important business decisions with a map of your organization – a business reference architecture. Model the business in the form of architectural blueprints.

    Engage your stakeholders. Recognize the opportunity for mapping work, and identify and engage the right stakeholders.

    Drive business architecture forward to promote real value to the organization. Assess your current projects to determine if you are investing in the right capabilities. Conduct business capability assessments to identify opportunities and prioritize projects.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Business architecture is the set of strategic planning techniques that connects organization strategy to execution in a manner that is accurate and traceable and promotes the efficient use of organizational resources.

    Blueprint activities summary

    Phase Purpose Activity Outcome
    1. Business context:
    Identify organization goals, industry drivers, and regulatory requirements in consultation with business stakeholders.
    Identify forces within and outside the organization to consider when planning the focus and timing of digital growth, through conducting interviews and surveys and reviewing existing strategies. Business value canvas, business strategy on a page, customer journey
    2. Customer activities (value stream):
    What is the customer doing? What is our reason for being as a company? What products and services are we trying to deliver?
    Define or update value streams, e.g. purchase product from supplier, customer order, and deliver product to customer. Value streams enterprise-wide (there may be more than one set of value streams, e.g. a medical school and community clinic)
    Prioritize value streams:
    Select key value streams for deeper analysis and focus.
    Assess value streams. Priority value streams
    Value stages:
    Break down the selected value stream into its stages.
    Define stages for selected value streams. Selected value stream stages
    3. Business capability map, level 1 enterprise:
    What resources and capabilities at a high level do we have to support the value streams?
    Define or update the business capabilities that align with and support the value streams. Business capability map, enterprise-wide capabilities level 1
    Business capability map, level 2 for selected area:
    List resources and capabilities that we have at a more detailed level.
    Define or update business capabilities for selected value stream to level 2. Business capability map, selected value stream, capability level 2
    Heatmap Business Capability Map: Flag focus areas in supporting technology, applications, data and information.

    Info-Tech’s workshop methodology

    Day 1: Discover Business Context Day 2: Define Value Streams Day 3: Build Business Capability Map Day 4: Roadmap Business Architecture
    Phase Steps

    1.1 Collect corporate goals and strategies

    1.2 Identify stakeholders

    2.1 Build or update value streams

    2.2 Decompose selected value stream into value stages and analyze for opportunities

    3.1 Update business capabilities to level 1 for enterprise

    3.2 For selected value streams, break down level 1 to level 2

    3.3 Use business architecture to heatmap focus areas: technology, information, and processes

    3.4 Build roadmap of future business architecture initiatives

    Phase Outcomes
    • Organizational context and goals
    • Business strategy on a page, customer journey map, business model canvas
    • Roles and responsibilities
    • Value stream map and definitions
    • Selected value stream(s) decomposed into value stages
    • Enterprise business capabilities map to level 1
    • Business architecture to level 2 for prioritized value stream
    • Heatmap business architecture
    • Business architecture roadmap, select additional initiatives

    Key concepts for this blueprint

    INDUSTRY VALUE CHAIN DIGITAL TRANSFORMATION BUSINESS ARCHITECTURE
    A high-level analysis of how the industry creates value for the consumer as an overall end-to-end process. The adoption of digital technologies to innovate and re-invent existing business, talent ,and operating models to drive growth, business value, and improved customer experience. A holistic, multidimensional business view of capabilities, end-to-end value, and operating model in relation to the business strategy.
    INDUSTRY VALUE STREAM STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES CAPABILITY ASSESSMENTS
    A set of activities, tasks, and processes undertaken by a business or a business unit across the entire end-to-end business function to realize value. A set of standard objectives that most industry players will feature in their corporate plans. A heat-mapping effort to analyze the maturity and priority of each capability relative to the strategic priorities that they serve.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    1 Understand the business context and drivers
    Deepen your understanding of the organization’s priorities by gathering business strategies and goals. Talking to key stakeholders will allow you to get a holistic view of the business strategy and forces shaping the strategy, e.g. economy, workforce, and compliance.
    2 Define value streams; understand the value you provide
    Work with senior leadership to understand your customers’ experience with you and the ways your industry provides value to them.
    Assess the value streams for areas to explore and focus on.
    3 Customize the industry business architecture; develop business capability map
    Work with business architects and enterprise architects to customize Info-Tech’s business architecture for your industry as an enterprise-wide map of the organization and its capabilities.
    Extend the business capability map to more detail (Level 2) for the value stream stages you select to focus on.

    Business architecture is a planning function that connects strategy to execution

    Business architecture provides a framework that connects business strategy and IT strategy to project execution through a set of models that provide clarity and actionable insights. How well do you know your business?

    Business architecture is:

    • Inter-disciplinary: Business architecture is a core planning activity that supports all important decisions in the organization, for example, organizational resources planning. It’s not just about IT.
    • Foundational: The best way to answer the question, “Where do we start?” or “Where is our investment best directed?”, comes from knowing your organization, what its core functions and capabilities are (i.e. what’s important to us as an organization), and where there is work to do.
    • Connecting: Digital transformation and modernization cannot work with siloes. Connecting siloes means first knowing the organization and its functions and recognizing where the siloes are not communicating.

    Business architecture must be branded as a front-end planning function to be appropriately embedded in the organization’s planning process.

    Brand business architecture as an early planning pre-requisite on the basis of maintaining clarity of communication and spreading an accurate awareness of how strategic decisions are being made.

    As an organization moves from strategy toward execution, it is often unclear as to exactly how decisions pertaining to execution are being made, why priority is given to certain areas, and how the planning function operates.

    The business architect’s primary role is to model this process and document it.

    In doing so, the business architect creates a unified view as to how strategy connects to execution so it is clearly understood by all levels of the organization.

    Business architecture is part of the enterprise architecture framework

    Business Architecture
    Business strategy map Business model canvas Value streams
    Business capability map Business process flows Service portfolio
    Data Architecture Application Architecture Infrastructure Architecture
    Conceptual data model Application portfolio catalog Technology standards catalog
    Logical data model Application capability map Technology landscape
    Physical data model Application communication model Environments location model
    Data flow diagram Interface catalog Platform decomposition diagram
    Data lifecycle diagram Application use-case diagram Network computing / hardware diagram
    Security Architecture
    Enterprise security model Data security model Application security model

    Business architecture is a set of shared and practical views of the enterprise

    The key characteristic of the business architecture is that it represents real-world aspects of a business, along with how they interact.

    Many different views of an organization are typically developed. Each view is a diagram that illustrates a way of understanding the enterprise by highlighting specific information about it:

    • Business strategy view captures the tactical and strategic goals that drive an organization forward.
    • Business capabilities view describes the primary business functions of an enterprise and the pieces of the organization that perform those functions.
    • Value stream view defines the end-to-end set of activities that deliver value to external and internal stakeholders.
    • Business knowledge view establishes the shared semantics (e.g. customer, order, and supplier) within an organization and relationships between those semantics (e.g. customer name, order date, supplier name) – an information map.
    • Organizational view captures the relationships among roles, capabilities, and business units, the decomposition of those business units into subunits, and the internal or external management of those units.

    Business architect connects all the pieces

    The business owns the strategy and operating model; the business architect connects all the pieces together.

    R Business Architect (Responsible)
    A Business Unit Leads (Accountable)
    C Subject Matter Experts (Consulted)
    – Business Lines, Operations, Data, Technology Systems & Infrastructure Leads
    I Business Operators (Informed)
    – Process, Data, Technology Systems & Infrastructure

    Choose a key business challenge to address with business architecture

     Choose a key business challenge to address with business architecture

    Picking the right project is critical to setting the tone for business architecture work in the organization.

    Best practices for business architecture success

    Consider these best practices to maintain a high level of engagement from key stakeholders throughout the process of establishing or applying business architecture.

    Balance short-term cost savings with long-term benefits

    Participate in project governance to facilitate compliance

    Create a center of excellence to foster dialogue

    Identify strategic business objectives

    Value streams: Understand how you deliver value today

    It is important to understand the different value-generating activities that deliver an outcome for and from your customers.

    We do this by looking at value streams, which refer to the specific set of activities an industry player undertakes to create and capture value for and from the end consumer (and so the question to ask is, how do you make money as an organization?).

    Our approach helps you to strengthen and transform those value streams that generate the most value for your organization.

    Understand how you deliver value today

    An organization can have more than one set of streams.
    For example, an enterprise can provide both retail shopping and financial services, such as credit cards.

    Define the organization’s value streams

    • Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment an organization operates within. Value streams can extend beyond the organization into the supporting ecosystem, whereas business processes are contained within and the organization has complete control over them.
    • There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map. Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers. Info-Tech recommends identifying and organizing the value streams with customers and partners as end-value receivers.

    Example: Value stream descriptions for the retail industry

    Value Streams Create or Purchase the Product Manage Inventory Distribute Product Sell Product, Make Product Available to Customers
    • Product is developed before company sells it.
    • Make these products by obtaining raw materials from external suppliers or using their own resources.
    • Retailers purchase the products they are going to sell to customers from manufacturers or wholesale distributors.
    • Retailer success depends on its ability to source products that customers want and are willing to buy.
    • Inventory products are tracked as they arrive in the warehouse, counted, stored, and prepared for delivery.
    • Estimate the value of your inventory using retail inventory management software.
    • Optimizing distribution activities is an important capability for retailers. The right inventory needs to be at a particular store in the right quantities exactly when it is needed. This helps to maximize sales and minimize how much cash is held up in inventory.
    • Proper supply chain management can not only reduce costs for retailers but drive revenues by enhancing shopping experiences.
    • Once produced, retailers need to sell the products. This is done through many channels including physical stores, online, the mail, or catalogs.
    • After the sale, retailers typically have to deliver the product, provide customer care, and manage complaints.
    • Retailers can use loyalty programs, pricing, and promotions to foster repeat business.

    Value streams describe your core business

    Value streams describe your core business

    Value streams – the activities we do to provide value to customers – require business capabilities.

    Value streams are broken down further into value stages, for example, the Sell Product value stream has value stages Evaluate Options, Place Order, and Make Payment.

    Think of value streams as the core operations: the reason for your organization’s being. A professional consulting organization may have a legal team but it does not brand itself as a law firm. A core value stream is providing research products and services; a business capability that supports it is legal counsel.

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    The stages of a value stream are usually action-oriented statements or verbs that make up the individual steps involved throughout the scope of the value stream, e.g. Place Order or Make Payment.

    Each value stream should have a trigger or starting point and an end result for a client or receiver.

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    There should be measurable value or benefits at each stage. These are key performance indicators (KPIs). Spot problem areas in the stream.

    Value streams usually fall into one of these categories:

    1. Fulfillment of products and services
    2. Manufacturing
    3. Software products
    4. Supporting value streams (procurement of supplies, product planning)

    Value streams need capabilities

    • Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.
    • There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map. Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • There can be different end-value receivers. Info-Tech recommends identifying and organizing the value streams with customers and partners as end-value receivers.

    Value streams need business capabilities

    Business capabilities are built up to allow the business to perform the activities that bring value to customers. Map capabilities to the value-add activities in the value stream. Business capabilities lie at the top layer of the business architecture:

    • They are the most stable reference for planning organizations.
    • They make strategy more tangible.
    • If properly defined, they can help overcome organizational silos.

    Value streams need business capabilities

    Example business capability map – Higher Education

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Example business capability map for: Higher Education

    Example business capability map for Higher Education

    Example business capability map – Local Government

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Example business capability map for: Local Government

    Example business capability map for Local Government

    Value streams need business capabilities

    Value streams – the activities we do to provide value to customers – require business capabilities. Value streams are broken down further into value stages.

    Business capabilities are built up to allow the business to perform the activities that bring value to customers. Map capabilities to the activities in the value stage to spot opportunities and problems in delivering services and value.

    Business processes fulfill capabilities. They are a step-by-step description of who is performing what to achieve a goal. Capabilities consist of networks of processes and the resources – people, technology, materials – to execute them.

    Capability = Processes + Software, Infrastructure + People

    Prioritize a value stream and identify its supporting capabilities

    Prioritize your improvement objectives and business goals and identify a value stream to transform.

    Align the business objectives of your organization to your value streams (the critical actions that take place within your organization to add value to a customer).

    Prioritize a value stream to transform based on the number of priorities aligned to a value stream, and/or the business value (e.g. revenue, EBITDA earnings, competitive differentiation, or cost efficiency).

    Decompose the selected value stream into value stages.

    Align capabilities level 1 and 2 to value stages. One capability may support several value stages in the stream.

    Build a business architecture for the prioritized value stream with a map of business capabilities up to level 2.

    NOTE: We can’t map all capabilities all at once: business architecture is an ongoing practice; select key mapping initiatives each year based on business goals.

    Prioritize a value stream and identify its supporting capabilities

    Map business capabilities to Level 2

     Map business capabilities to Level 2

    Map capabilities to value stage

    Map capabilities to value stage

    Business value realization

    Business value defines the success criteria of an organization as manifested through organizational goals and outcomes, and it is interpreted from four perspectives:

    • Profit generation: The revenue generated from a business capability with a product that is enabled with modern technologies.
    • Cost reduction: The cost reduction when performing business capabilities with a product that is enabled with modern technologies.
    • Service enablement: The productivity and efficiency gains of internal business operations from products and capabilities enhanced with modern technologies.
    • Customer and market reach: The improved reach and insights of the business in existing or new markets.

    Business Value Matrix

    Value, goals, and outcomes cannot be achieved without business capabilities

    Break down your business goals into strategic and achievable initiatives focused on specific value streams and business capabilities.

    Business goals and outcomes

    Accelerate the process with an industry business architecture

    It’s never a good idea to start with a blank page.

    The business capability map available from Info-Tech and with industry standard models can be used as an accelerator. Assemble the relevant stakeholders – business unit leads and product/service owners – and modify the business capability map to suit your organization’s context.

    Acceleration path: Customize generic capability maps with the assistance of our industry analysts.

    Accelerate the process with an industry business architecture

    Identify goals and drivers

    Consider organizational goals and industry forces when planning.

    Business context Define value streams Build business capability map
    1.1 Select key stakeholders
    1.2 Collect and understand corporate goals
    2.1 Update or define value streams
    2.2 Decompose and analyze selected value stream
    3.1 Build level 1 capability map
    3.2 Build level 2 capability map
    3.3 Heatmap capability map
    3.4 Roadmap

    Use inputs from business goals and strategies to understand priorities.

    It is not necessary to have a comprehensive business strategy document to start – with key stakeholders, the business architect should be able to gather a one-page business value canvas or customer journey.

    Determine how the organization creates value

    Begin the process by identifying and locating the business mission and vision statements.

    What is business context?

    “The business context encompasses an understanding of the factors impacting the business from various perspectives, including how decisions are made and what the business is ultimately trying to achieve. The business context is used by IT to identify key implications for the execution of its strategic initiatives.”

    Source: Businesswire, 2018

    Identify the key stakeholders who can help you promote the value of business architecture

    First, as the CIO, you must engage executive stakeholders and secure their support.
    Focus on key players who have high power and high interest in business architecture.

    Engage the stakeholders who are impacted the most and have the power to impede the success of business architecture.

    For example, if the CFO – who has the power to block funding – is disengaged, business architecture will be put at risk.

    Use Info-Tech’s Stakeholder Power Map Template to help prioritize time spent with stakeholders.

    Sample power map

    Identify the key stakeholders concerned with the business architecture project

    A business architecture project may involve the following stakeholders:

    Business architecture project stakeholders

    You must identify who the stakeholders are for your business architecture work.

    Think about:

    • Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
    • Who will impact the business architecture work? Who will the work impact?
    • Who has vested interest in the success or failure of the practice?
    • Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help us be successful?

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Don’t focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups don’t fit the traditional structure.
    • Don’t ignore subject-matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.

    1.1 Identify and assemble key stakeholders

    1-3 hours

    Build an accurate depiction of the business.

    1. It is important to make sure the right stakeholders participate in this exercise. The exercise of identifying capabilities for an organization is very introspective and requires deep analysis.
    2. Consider:
      1. Who are the decision makers and key influencers?
      2. Who will impact the business capability work? Who has a vested interest in the success or failure of the outcome?
      3. Who has the skills and competencies necessary to help you be successful?
    3. Avoid:
      1. Don’t focus on the organizational structure and hierarchy. Often stakeholder groups don’t fit the traditional structure.
      2. Don’t ignore subject matter experts on either the business or IT side. You will need to consider both.
    Input Output
    • List of who is accountable for key business areas and decisions
    • Organizational chart
    • List of who has decision-making authority
    • A list of the key stakeholders
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Modeling software (e.g. Visio, ArchiMate)
    • Business capability map industry models
    • CIO
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Conduct interviews with the business to gather intelligence for strategy

    Talking to key stakeholders will allow you to get a holistic view of the business strategy.

    Stakeholder interviews provide holistic view of business strategy

    Build a strategy on a page through executive interviews and document reviews

    Understanding the business mandate and priorities ensures alignment across the enterprise.

    A business strategy must articulate the long-term destination the business is moving into. This illustration shapes all the strategies and activities in every other part of the business, including what IT capabilities and resources are required to support business goals. Ultimately, the benefits of a well-defined business strategy increase as the organization scales and as business units or functions are better equipped to align the strategic planning process in a manner that reflects the complexity of the organization.

    Using the Business Strategy on a Page canvas, consider the questions in each bucket to elicit the overall strategic context of the organization and uncover the right information to build your digital strategy. Interview key executives including your CEO, CIO, CMO, COO, CFO, and CRO, and review documents from your board or overall organizational strategy to uncover insights.

    Info-Tech Insight
    A well-articulated and clear business strategy helps different functional and business units work together and ensures that individual decisions support the overall direction of the business.

    Focus on business value and establish a common goal

    Business architecture is a strategic planning function and the focus must be on delivering business value.

    Examples business objectives:

    • Digitally transform the business, redefining its customer interactions.
    • Identify the root cause for escalating customer complaints and eroding satisfaction.
    • Identify reuse opportunities to increase operational efficiency.
    • Identify capabilities to efficiently leverage suppliers to handle demand fluctuations.

    Info-Tech Insight
    CIOs are ideally positioned to be the sponsors of business architecture given that their current top priorities are digital transformation, innovation catalyzation, and business alignment.

    1.2 Collect and understand business objectives

    1-3 hours

    Having a clear understanding of the business is crucial to executing on the strategic IT initiatives.

    1. Discover the strategic CIO initiatives your organization will pursue:
    • Schedule interviews.
    • Use the CIO Business Vision diagnostic or Business Context Discovery Tool.
  • Document the business goals.
  • Update and finalize business goals.
  • InputOutput
    • Existing business goals and strategies
    • Existing IT strategies
    • Interview findings
    • Diagnostic results
    • List of business goals
    • Strategy on a page
    • Business model canvas
    • Customer journey
    MaterialsParticipants
    • CIO Business Vision diagnostic
    • Interview questionnaire
    • CIO
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    CIO Business Vision Diagnostic

    CEO

    Vision

    Where do you want to go?
    What is the problem your organization is addressing?

    Mission/Mandate

    What do you do?
    How do you do?
    Whom do you do it for?

    Value Streams

    Why are you in business? What do you do?
    What products and services do you provide?
    Where has your business seen persistent demand?

    Key Products & Services

    What are your top three to five products and services?

    Key Customer Segments

    Who are you trying to serve or target?
    What are the customer segments that decide your value proposition?

    Value Proposition

    What is the value you deliver to your customers?

    Future Value Proposition

    What is your value proposition in three to five years’ time?

    Digital Experience Aspirations

    How can you create a more effective value stream?
    For example, greater value to customers or better supplier relationships.

    Business Resilience Aspirations

    How can you reduce business risks?
    For example, compliance, operational, security, or reputational.

    Sustainability (or ESG) Aspirations

    How can you deliver ESG and sustainability goals?

    Interview the following executives for each business goal area.

    CEO
    CRO
    COO

    Core Business Goals

    What are the core business goals to meet business objectives?

    Top Priorities & Initiatives

    What are the top initiatives and priorities over the planning horizon?

    Performance Insights/Metrics

    What do we need to achieve?
    How can the success be measured?

    CMO
    COO
    CFO

    Shared Business Goals

    What are the shared (operational) business goals to meet business objectives?

    Top Priorities & Initiatives

    What are the top initiatives and priorities over the planning horizon?

    Performance Insights/Metrics

    What do we need to achieve?
    How can the success be measured?

    CFO
    CIO
    COO
    CHRO

    Enabling Business Goals

    What are the enabling (supporting/enterprise) business goals to meet business objectives?

    Top Priorities & Initiatives

    What are the top initiatives and priorities over the planning horizon?

    Performance Insights/Metrics

    What do we need to achieve?
    How can the success be measured?

    Craft a strategy to increase stakeholder support and participation

    The BA practice’s supporters are potential champions who will help you market the value of BA; engage with them first to create positive momentum. Map out the concerns of each group of stakeholders so you can develop marketing tactics and communications vehicles to address them.

    Example Communication Strategy

    Stakeholder Concerns Tactics to Address Concerns Communication Vehicles Frequency
    Supporters
    (High Priority)
    • Build ability to execute BA techniques
    • Build executive support
    • Build understanding of how they can contribute to the success of the BA practice
    • Communicate the secured executive support
    • Help them apply BA techniques in their projects
    • Show examples of BA work (case studies)
    • Personalized meetings and interviews
    • Department/functional meetings
    • Communities of practice or centers of excellent (education and case studies)
    Bi-Monthly
    Indifferent
    (Medium Priority)
    • Build awareness and/or confidence
    • Feel like BA has nothing to do with them
    • Show quick wins and case studies
    • Centers of excellence (education and case studies
    • Use the support of the champions
    Quarterly
    Resistors
    (Medium Priority)
    • BA will cause delays
    • BA will step in their territory
    • BA’s scope is too broad
    • Lack of understanding
    • Prove the value of BA – case studies and metrics
    • Educate how BA complements their work
    • Educate them on the changes resulting from the BA practice’s work, and involve them in crafting the process
    • Individual meetings and interviews
    • Political jockeying
    • Use the support of the champions
    Tailored to individual groups

    1.3 Craft a strategy to increase stakeholder support and participation

    1-2 hours

    Now that you have organized and categorized your stakeholders based on their power, influence, interest, and knowledge of business architecture, it is time to brainstorm how you are going to gain their support and participation.

    Think about the following:

    • What are your stakeholders’ concerns?
    • How can you address them?
    • How will you deliver the message?
    • How often will you deliver the message?

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Your communication strategy development should be an iterative process. Do not assume to know the absolute best way to get through to every resistor right away. Instead, engage with your supporters for their input on how to communicate to resistors and repeat the process for indifferent stakeholders as well.
    Input Output
  • Stakeholder Engagement Map
    • Stakeholder Communications Strategy
    Materials Participants
    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template
    • A computer
    • A whiteboard and markers CIO
    • Business Architect
    • IT Department Leads

    Download the Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template for this project.

    Engaging the right stakeholders

    CASE STUDY

    Industry
    Financial - Banking

    Source
    Anonymous

    Situation Complication Result

    To achieve success with the business architecture initiative, the bank’s CIO needed to put together a plan to engage the right stakeholders in the process.

    Without the right stakeholders, the initiative would suffer from inadequate information and thus would run the risk of delivering an ineffective solution.

    The bank’s culture was resistant to change and each business unit had its own understanding of the business strategy. This was a big part of the problem that led to decreasing customer satisfaction.

    The CIO needed a unified vision for the business architecture practice involving people, process, and technology that all stakeholders could support.

    Starting with enlisting executive support in the form of a business sponsor, the CIO identified the rest of the key stakeholders, in this case, the business unit heads, who were necessary to engage for the initiative.

    Once identified, the CIO promoted the benefits of business architecture to each of the business unit heads while taking stock of their individual needs.

    1.4 Develop a plan to engage key stakeholders

    1 hour

    Using your stakeholder power map as a starting point, focus on the three most important quadrants: those that contain stakeholders you must keep informed, those to keep satisfied, and the key players.

    Plot the stakeholders from those quadrants on a stakeholder engagement map.

    Think about the following:

    • Who are your resistors? These individuals will actively detract from project’s success if you don’t address their concerns.
    • Who is indifferent? These individuals need to be educated more on the benefits of business architecture to have an opinion either way.
    • Who are your supporters? These individuals will support you and spread your message if you equip them to do so.

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Do not jump to addressing resistor concerns first. Instead, equip your supporters with the info they need to help your cause and gain positive momentum before approaching resistors.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder Engagement Map
    • Stakeholder Communications Strategy
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template
    • A computer
    • A whiteboard and markers
    • CIO
    • Business Architect
    • IT Department Leads

    Download the Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template for this project.

    1.5 Craft a strategy to increase stakeholder support and participation

    1-2 hours

    Now that you have organized and categorized your stakeholders based on their power, influence, interest, and knowledge of business architecture, it is time to brainstorm how you are going to gain their support and participation.

    Think about the following:

    • What are your stakeholders’ concerns?
    • How can you address them?
    • How will you deliver the message?
    • How often will you deliver the message?

    Avoid these common mistakes:

    • Your communication strategy development should be an iterative process. Do not assume to know the absolute best way to get through to every resistor right away. Instead, engage with your supporters for their input on how to communicate to resistors and repeat the process for indifferent stakeholders as well.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholder Engagement Map
    • Stakeholder Communications Strategy
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template
    • A computer
    • A whiteboard and markers
    • CIO
    • Business Architect
    • IT Department Leads

    Download the Stakeholder Engagement Strategy Template for this project.

    Define value streams

    Identify the core activities your organization does to provide value to your customers.

    Business context Define value streams Build business capability map

    1.1 Select key stakeholders
    1.2 Collect and understand corporate goals

    2.1 Update or define value streams
    2.2 Decompose and analyze selected value stream

    3.1 Build Level 1 capability map
    3.2 Build Level 2 capability map
    3.3 Heatmap capability map
    3.4 Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Note: It is recommended that you gather and leverage relevant industry standard business architecture models you may have available to you. Example: Info-Tech Industry Business Architecture, BIZBOK, APQC.
    • Defining or updating the organization’s value streams.
    • Selecting priority value streams for deeper analysis.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Business Architect, Enterprise Architect
    • Relevant Business Stakeholder(s): Business Unit Leads, Departmental Executives, Senior Mangers, Business Analysts

    Define the organization’s value streams

    • Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the marketplace by engaging in a set of interconnected activities. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment an organization operates within. Value streams can extend beyond the organization into the supporting ecosystem, whereas business processes are contained within and the organization has complete control over them.
    • There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams. Core value streams are mostly externally facing: they deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map. Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.
    • An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers. Info-Tech recommends identifying and organizing the value streams with customers and partners as end-value receivers.

    Connect business goals to value streams

    Example strategy map and value stream

    Identifying value streams

    Value streams connect business goals to organization’s value realization activities. They enable an organization to create and capture value in the market place by engaging in a set of interconnected activities.

    There are several key questions to ask when endeavoring to identify value streams.

    Key Questions
    • Who are your customers?
    • What are the benefits we deliver to them?
    • How do we deliver those benefits?
    • How does the customer receive the benefits?

    Example: Value stream descriptions for the retail industry

    Value StreamsCreate or Purchase ProductManage InventoryDistribute ProductSell Product
    • Retailers need to purchase the products they are going to sell to customers from manufacturers or wholesale distributors.
    • A retailer’s success depends on its ability to source products that customers want and are willing to buy.
    • In addition, they need to purchase the right amount and assortment of products based on anticipated demand.
    • The right inventory needs to be at a particular store in the right quantities exactly when it is needed. This helps to maximize sales and minimize how much cash is held up in inventory.
    • Inventory management includes tracking, ordering, and stocking products, e.g. raw materials, finished products, buffer inventory.
    • Optimizing distribution activities is important for retailers.
    • Proper supply chain management can not only reduce costs for retailers but also drive revenues by enhancing shopping experiences.
    • Distribution includes transportation, packaging and delivery.
    • As business becomes global, it is important to ensure the whole distribution channel is effective.
    • Once produced, retailers need to sell the products. This is done through many channels including physical stores, online, the mail, or catalogs.
    • After the sale, retailers typically have to deliver the product, provide customer care, and manage complaints.
    • Retailers can use loyalty programs, pricing, and promotions to foster repeat business.

    Value streams describe your core business

    Value streams – the activities we do to provide value to customers – require business capabilities.

    Value streams are broken down further into value stages, for example, Sell Product value stream has value stages Evaluate Options, Place Order, and Make Payment.

    Think of value streams as the core operations, the reason for our organization’s being. A professional consulting organization may have a legal team but it does not brand itself as a law firm. A core value stream is providing research products and services – a business capability that supports it is legal counsel.

    2.1 Define value streams

    1-3 hours

    Unify the organization’s perspective on how it creates value.

    1. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream. Validate the accuracy of the descriptions with your key stakeholders.
    2. Consider:
      1. How does the organization deliver those benefits?
      2. How does the customer receive the benefits?
      3. What is the scope of your value stream? What will trigger the stream to start and what will the final value be?
    3. Avoid: Don’t start with a blank page. Use Info-Tech’s business architecture models for sample value streams.
    Input Output
    • Business strategy or goals
    • Financial statements
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • List of organizational specific value streams
    • Detailed value stream definition(s)
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard / Kanban Board
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Info-Tech Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    See your Info-Tech Account Representative for access to the Reference Architecture Template

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    The stages of a value stream are usually action-oriented statements or verbs that make up the individual steps involved throughout the scope of the value stream, e.g. Place Order or Make Payment.

    Each value stream should have a trigger or starting point and an end result for a client or receiver.

    Decompose the value stream into stages

    There should be measurable value or benefits at each stage.
    These are key performance indicators (KPIs).
    Spot problem areas in the stream.

    Value streams usually fall into one of these categories:

    1. Fulfillment of products and services
    2. Manufacturing
    3. Software products
    4. Supporting value streams (procurement of supplies, product planning)

    Value stream and value stages examples

    Customer Acquisitions
    Identify Prospects > Contact Prospects > Verify Interests

    Sell Product
    Identify Options > Evaluate Options > Negotiate Price and Delivery Date > Place Order > Get Invoice > Make Payment

    Product Delivery
    Confirm Order > Plan Load > Receive Warehouse > Fill Order > Ship Order > Deliver Order > Invoice Customer

    Product Financing
    Initiate Loan Application > Decide on Application > Submit Documents > Review & Satisfy T&C > Finalize Documents > Conduct Funding > Conduct Funding Audits

    Product Release
    Ideate > Design > Build > Release

    Sell Product is a value stream, made up of value stages Identify options, Evaluate options, and so on.

    2.2 Decompose selected value streams

    1-3 hours

    Once we have a good understanding of our value streams, we need to decide which ones to focus on for deeper analysis and modeling, e.g. extend the business architecture to more detailed level 2 capabilities.

    Organization has goals and delivers products or services.

    1. Identify which value propositions are most important, e.g. be more productive or manage money more simply.
    2. Identify the value stream(s) that create the value proposition.
    3. Break the selected value stream into value stages.
    4. Analyze value stages for opportunities.

    Practical Guide to Agile Strategy Execution

    InputOutput
    • Value stream maps and definitions
    • Business goals, business model canvas, customer journey (value proposition) Selected value streams decomposed into value stages
    • Analysis of selected value streams for opportunities
    • Value stream map
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard / Kanban Board
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Build your value stream one layer at a time to ensure clarity and comprehensiveness

    The first step of creating a value stream is defining it.

    • In this step, you create the parameters around the value stream and document them in a list format.
    • This allows you to know where each value stream starts and ends and the unique value it provides.

    The second step is the value stream mapping.

    • The majority of the mapping is done here where you break down your value stream into each of its component stages.
    • Analysis of these stages allows for a deeper understanding of the value stream.
    • The mapping layer connects the value stream to organizational capabilities.

    Define the value streams that are tied to your strategic goals and document them in a list

    Title

    • Create a title for your value stream that indicates the value it achieves.
    • Ensure your title is clear and will be understood the same way across the organization.
    • The common naming convention for value streams is to use nouns, e.g. product purchase.

    Scope

    • Determine the scope of your value stream by defining the trigger to start the value stream and final value delivered to end the value stream.
    • Be precise with your trigger to ensure you do not mistakenly include actions that would not trigger your value stream.
    • A useful tip is creating a decision tree and outlining the path that results in your trigger.

    Objectives

    • Determine the objectives of the value stream by highlighting the outcome it delivers.
    • Identify the desired outcomes of the value stream from the perspective of your organization.

    Example Value Streams List

    Title Scope Objectives
    Sell Product From option identification to payment Revenue Growth

    Create a value stream map

    A Decompose the Value Stream Into Stages B Add the Customer Perspective
    • Determine the different stages that comprise the value stream.
    • Place the stages in the correct order.
    • Outline the likely sentiment and meaningful needs of the customer at each value stage.
    C Add the Expected Outcome D Define the Entry and Exit Criteria
    • Define the desired outcome of each stage from the perspective of the organization.
    • Define both the entry and exit criteria for each stage.
    • Note that the entry criteria of the first stage is what triggers the value stream.
    E Outline the Metrics F Assess the Stages
    • For each stage of the value stream, outline the metrics the organization can use to identify its ability to attain the desired outcome.
    • Assess how well each stage of the value stream is performing against its target metrics and use this as the basis to drill down into how/where improvements can be made.

    Decompose the value stream into its value stages

    The first step in creating a value stream map is breaking it up into its component stages.

    The stages of a value stream are usually action-oriented statements or verbs that make up the individual steps involved throughout the scope of the value stream.

    Illustration of decomposing value stream into its value stages

    The Benefit
    Segmenting your value stream into individual stages will give you a better understanding of the steps involved in creating value.

    Connect the stages of the value stream to a specific customer perspective

    Example of a sell product value stream

    The Benefit
    Adding the customer’s perspective will inform you of their priorities at each stage of the value stream.

    Connect the stages of the value stream to a desired outcome

    Example of a sell product value stream

    The Benefit
    Understanding the organization’s desired outcome at each stage of the value stream will help set objectives and establish metrics.

    Define the entry and exit criteria of each stage

    Example of entry and exit criteria for each stage

    The Benefit
    Establishing the entry and exit criteria for each stage will help you understand how the customer experience flows from one end of the stream to the other.

    Outline the key metric(s) for each stage

    Outline the key metrics for each stage

    The Benefit
    Setting metrics for each stage will facilitate the tracking of success and inform the business architecture practitioner of where investments should be made.

    Example value stream map: Sell Product

    Assess the stages of your value stream map to determine which capabilities to examine further

    To determine which specific business capabilities you should seek to assess and potentially refine, you must review performance toward target metrics at each stage of the value stream.

    Stages that are not performing to their targets should be examined further by assessing the capabilities that enable them.

    Value Stage Metric Description Metric Target Current Measure Meets Objective?
    Evaluate Options Number of Product Demonstrations 12,000/month 9,000/month No
    Identify Options Google Searches 100K/month 100K/month Yes
    Identify Options Product Mentions 1M/month 1M/month Yes
    Website Traffic (Hits)
    Average Deal Size
    Number of Deals
    Time to Complete an Order
    Percentage of Invoices Without Error
    Average Time to Acquire Payment in Full

    Determine the business capabilities that support the value stage corresponding with the failing metric

    Sell Product

    Identify Options > Evaluate Options > Negotiate Price and Delivery Date > Place Order > Get Invoice > Make Payment

    The value stage(s) that doesn’t meet its objective metrics should be examined further.

    • This is done through business capability mapping and assessment.
    • Starting at the highest level (level 0) view of a business, the business architecture practitioner must drill down into the lower level capabilities that support the specific value stage to diagnose/improve an issue.

    Info-Tech Insight
    In the absence of tangible metrics, you will have to make a qualitative judgement about which stage(s) of the value stream warrant further examination for problems and opportunities.

    Build business capability map

    Align supporting capabilities to priority activities.

    Business context Define value streams Build business capability map
    1.1 Select key stakeholders
    1.2 Collect and understand corporate goals
    2.1 Update or define value streams
    2.2 Decompose and analyze selected value stream
    3.1 Build Level 1 capability map
    3.2 Build Level 2 capability map
    3.3 Heatmap capability map
    3.4 Roadmap

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine which business capabilities support value streams
    • Accelerate the process with an industry reference architecture
    • Validate the business capability map
    • Establish level 2 capability

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Outcomes of this step

  • A validated level 1 business capability map
  • Level 2 capabilities for selected value stream(s)
  • Heatmapped business capability map
  • Business architecture initiatives roadmap
  • Develop a business capability map – level 1

    • Business architecture consists of a set of techniques to create multiple views of an organization; the primary view is known as a business capability map.
    • A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation and achieve outcomes, rather than how. Business capabilities are business terms defined using descriptive nouns such as “Marketing” or “Research and Development.” They represent stable business functions, are unique and independent of each other, and typically will have a defined business outcome. Business capabilities should not be defined as organizational units and are typically longer lasting than organizational structures.
    • A business capability mapping process should begin at the highest-level view of an organization, the level 1, which presents the entire business on a page.
    • An effective method of organizing business capabilities is to split them into logical groupings or categories. At the highest level, capabilities are either “core” (customer-facing functions) or “enabling” (supporting functions).
    • As a best practice, Info-Tech recommends dividing business capabilities into the categories illustrated to the right.

    The Business Capability Map is the primary visual representation of the organization’s key abilities or services that are delivered to stakeholders. This model forms the basis of strategic planning discussions.

    Example of a business capability map

    Example business capability map – Higher Education

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Example business capability map for: Higher Education

    Example business capability map for higher education

    Example business capability map – Local Government

    A business capability map can be thought of as a visual representation of your organization’s business capabilities and represents a view of what your data program must support.

    Validate your business capability map with the right stakeholders, including your executive team, business unit leaders, and/or other key stakeholders.

    Example business capability map for: Local Government

    Example business capability map for local government

    Map capabilities to value stage

    Example of a value stage

    Source: Lambert, “Practical Guide to Agile Strategy Execution”

    3.1 Build level 1 business capability map

    1-3 hours

    1. Analyze the value streams to identify and describe the organization’s capabilities that support them. This stage requires a good understanding of the business and will be a critical foundation for the business capability map. Use the reference business architecture’s business capability map for your industry for examples of level 1 and 2 business capabilities and the capability map template to work in.
    2. Avoid:
      1. Don’t repeat capabilities. Capabilities are typically mutually exclusive activities.
      2. Don’t include temporary initiatives. Capabilities should be stable over time. The people, processes, and technologies that support capabilities will change continuously.

    Ensure you engage with the right stakeholders:

    Don’t waste your efforts building an inaccurate depiction of the business: The exercise of identifying capabilities for an organization is very introspective and requires deep analysis.

    It is challenging to develop a common language that everyone will understand and be able to apply. Invest in the time to ensure the right stakeholders are brought into the fold and bring their business area expertise and understanding to the table.

    InputOutput
    • Existing business capability maps
    • Value stream map
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • Level 1 business capability map for enterprise
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Prioritize one value stream and build a business architecture to level 2 capabilities

    Prioritize your innovation objectives and business goals, and identify a value stream to transform.

    Align the innovation goals and business objectives of your organization to your value streams (the critical actions that take place within your organization to add value to a customer).
    Prioritize a value stream to transform based on the number of priorities aligned to a value stream and/or the business value (e.g. revenue, EBITDA earnings, competitive differentiation, or cost efficiency).
    Working alongside a business or enterprise architect, build a reference architecture for the prioritized value stream up to level 2.

    Example of a value stream to business architecture level 2 capabilities

    Info-Tech Insight
    To produce maximum impact, focus on value streams that provide two-thirds of your enterprise value (EBITDA earnings).

    From level 1 to level 2 business capabilities

    Example moving from level 1 to level 2 business capabilities

    3.2 Build level 2 business capability map

    1-3 hours

    It is only at level 2 and further that we can pinpoint the business capabilities – the exact resources, whether applications or data or processes – that we need to focus on to realize improvements in the organization’s performance and customer experience.

    1. Gather industry reference models and any existing business capability maps.
    2. For the selected value stream, further break down its level 1 business capabilities into level 2 capabilities.
    3. You can often represent the business capabilities on a single page, providing a holistic visual for decision makers.
    4. Use meaningful names for business capabilities so that planners, stakeholders, and subject matter experts can easily search the map.
    InputOutput
    • Existing business capability maps
    • Value stream map
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • Level 1 business capability map
    • Level 2 Business Capability Map for selected Value Stream
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details.
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Download: See your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

    3.3 Heatmap business capability map

    1-3 hours

    Determine the organization’s key capabilities.

    1. Determine cost advantage creators. If your organization has a cost advantage over competitors, the capabilities that enable it should be identified and prioritized. Highlight these capabilities and prioritize the programs that support them.
    2. Determine competitive advantage creators. If your organization does not have a cost advantage over competitors, determine if it can deliver differentiated end-customer experiences. Once you have identified the competitive advantages, understand which capabilities enable them. These capabilities are critical to the success of the organization and should be highly supported.
    3. Define key future state capabilities. In addition to the current and competitive advantage creators, the organization may have the intention to enhance new capabilities. Discuss and select the capabilities that will help drive the attainment of future goals.
    4. Assess how well information, applications, and processes support capabilities.
    InputOutput
    • Business capability map
    • Cost advantage creators
    • Competitive advantage creators
    • IT and business assessments
    • Key business capabilities
    • Business process review
    • Information assessment
    • Application assessment
    • List of IT implications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details.
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Download: See your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

    Business capability map: Education

    Illustrative example of a business capability map for education

    Define key capabilities

    Illustrative example of Define key capabilities

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Business process review

    Illustrative example of a business process review

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Information assessment

     Illustrative example of an Information assessment

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Application assessment

     Illustrative example of an Application assessment

    Note: Illustrative Example

    MoSCoW analysis for business capabilities

     Illustrative example of a MoSCoW analysis for business capabilities

    Note: Illustrative Example

    Ranked list of IT implications

    MoSCoW Rank IT Implication Value Stream Impacted Comments/Actions
    M [Implication] [Value Stream]
    M [Implication] [Value Stream]
    M [Implication] [Value Stream]
    S [Implication] [Value Stream]
    S [Implication] [Value Stream]
    S [Implication] [Value Stream]
    C [Implication] [Value Stream]
    C [Implication] [Value Stream]
    C [Implication] [Value Stream]
    W [Implication] [Value Stream]
    W [Implication] [Value Stream]
    W [Implication] [Value Stream]

    3.4 Roadmap business architecture initiatives

    1-3 hours

    Unify the organization’s perspective on how it creates value.

    1. Write a short description of the value stream that includes a statement about the value provided and a clear start and end for the value stream. Validate the accuracy of the descriptions with your key stakeholders.
    2. Consider:
      1. How does the organization deliver those benefits?
      2. How does the customer receive the benefits?
      3. What is the scope of your value stream? What will trigger the stream to start and what will the final value be?
    3. Don’t start with a blank page. Use Info-Tech’s business architecture models for sample value streams.
    InputOutput
    • Existing business capability maps
    • Value stream map
    • Info-Tech’s industry-specific business architecture
    • Level 1 business capability map
    • Heatmapped business capability map
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Reference Architecture Template – See your Account Representative for details.
    • Other industry standard reference architecture models: BIZBOK, APQC, etc.
    • Archi Models
    • Enterprise/Business Architect
    • Business Analysts
    • Business Unit Leads
    • CIO
    • Departmental Executives & Senior Managers

    Download: See your Account Representative for access to Info-Tech’s Reference Architecture Template

    Example: Business architecture deliverables

    Enterprise Architecture Domain Architectural View Selection
    Business Architecture Business strategy map Required
    Business Architecture Business model canvas Optional
    Business Architecture Value streams Required
    Business Architecture Business capability map Not Used
    Business Architecture Business process flows
    Business Architecture Service portfolio
    Data Architecture Conceptual data model
    Data Architecture Logical data model
    Data Architecture Physical data model
    Data Architecture Data flow diagram
    Data Architecture Data lineage diagram

    Tools and templates to compile and communicate your business architecture work

    The Industry Business Reference Architecture Template for your industry is a place for you to collect all of the activity outputs and outcomes you’ve completed for use in next-steps.

    Download the Industry Business Reference Architecture Template for your industry

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Name Role Organization
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader Research Analyst, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Ben Abrishami-Shirazi Technical Counselor, Enterprise Architecture Info-Tech Research Group
    Andrew Bailey Consulting, Manager Info-Tech Research Group
    Dana Dahar Research & Advisory Director, CIO / Digital Business Strategy Info-Tech Research Group
    Larry Fretz VP Info-Tech Research Group
    Shibly Hamidur Enterprise Architect Toronto Transit Commission (TTC)
    Rahul Jaiswal Principal Research Director, Industry Info-Tech Research Group
    John Kemp Executive Counselor, Executive Services Info-Tech Research Group
    Gerald Khoury Senior Executive Advisor Info-Tech Research Group
    Igor Ikonnikov Principal Advisory Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Daniel Lambert VP Benchmark Consulting
    Milena Litoiu Principal Research Director, Enterprise Architecture Info-Tech Research Group
    Andy Neill AVP Data & Analytics, Chief Enterprise Architect Info-Tech Research Group
    Rajesh Parab Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group
    Rick Pittman VP, Research Info-Tech Research Group
    Irina Sedenko Research Director, Data & Analytics Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    Andriole, Steve. “Why No One Understands Enterprise Architecture & Why Technology Abstractions Always Fail.” Forbes, 18 September 2020. Web.

    “APQC Process Classification Framework (PCF) – Retail.” American Productivity & Quality Center, 9 January 2019. Web.

    Brose, Cari. “Who’s on First? Architecture Roles and Responsibilities in SAFe.” Business Architecture Guild, 9 March 2017. Web.

    Burlton, Roger, Jim Ryne, and Daniel St. George. “Value Streams and Business Processes: The Business Architecture Perspective.” Business Architecture Guild, December 2019. Web.

    “Business Architecture: An overview of the business architecture professional.” Capstera, 5 January 2022. Web.

    Business Architecture Guild. “What is Business Architecture?” Business Analyst Mentor, 18 November 2022. Web.

    “Business Architecture Overview.” The Business Architecture Working Group of the Object Management Group (OMG), n.d. Web.

    “Delivering on your strategic vision.” The Business Architecture Guild, n.d. Web.

    Ecker, Grant. “Deploying business architecture.” LinkedIn, 11 November 2021. (Presentation)

    IRIS. “Retail Business Architecture Framework and Examples.” IRIS Business Architect, n.d. Web.

    IRIS. “What Is Business Architecture?” IRIS Business Architect, 8 May 2014. Web.

    IRIS. “Your Enterprise Architecture Practice Maturity 2021 Assessment.” IRIS Business Architect, 17 May 2021. Web.

    Khuen, Whynde. “How Business Architecture Breaks Down and Bridges Silos.” Biz Arch Mastery, January 2020. Web.

    Lambert, Daniel. “Practical Guide to Agile Strategy Execution.” 18 February 2020.

    Lankhorst, Marc, and Bernd Ihnen. “Mapping the BIZBOK Metamodel to the ArchiMate Language.” Bizzdesign, 2 September 2021. Web.

    Ramias, Alan, and Andrew Spanyi, “Demystifying the Relationship Between Processes and Capabilities: A Modest Proposal.” BPTrends, 2 February 2015. Web.

    Newman, Daniel. “NRF 2022: 4 Key Trends From This Year’s Big Show.” Forbes, 20 January 2022. Web.

    Research and Markets. “Define the Business Context Needed to Complete Strategic IT Initiatives: 2018 Blueprint.” Business Wire, 1 February 2018. Web.

    Sabanoglu, Tugba. “Retail market worldwide - Statistics & Facts.” Statista, 21 April 2022. Web.

    Spacey, John. “Capability vs Process.” Simplicable, 18 November 2016. Web.

    “The Definitive Guide to Business Capabilities.” LeanIX, n.d. Web.

    TOGAF 9. Version 9.1. The Open Group, 2011. Web.

    “What is Business Architecture?” STA Group, 2017. PDF.

    Whittie, Ralph. “The Business Architecture, Value Streams and Value Chains.” BA Institute, n.d. Web.

    The challenge of corporate security management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}41|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}41|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk

    Corporate security management is a vital aspect in every modern business, regardless of business area or size. At Tymans Group we offer expert security management consulting to help your business set up proper protocols and security programs. More elaborate information about our security management consulting services and solutions can be found below.

    Corporate security management components

    You may be experiencing one or more of the following:

    • The risk goals should support business goals. Your business cannot operate without security, and security is there to conduct business safely. 
    • Security governance supports security strategy and security management. These three components form a protective arch around your business. 
    • Governance and management are like the legislative branch and the executive branch. Governance tells people what to do, and management's job is to verify that they do it.

    Our advice with regards to corporate security management

    Insight

    To have a successful information security strategy, take these three factors into account:

    • Holistic: your view must include people, processes, and technology.
    • Risk awareness: Base your strategy on the actual risk profile of your company and then add the appropriate best practices.
    • Business-aligned: When your strategic security plan demonstrates alignment with the business goals and supports it, embedding will be much more straightforward.

    Impact and results of our corporate security management approach

    • The approach of our security management consulting company helps to provide a starting point for realistic governance and realistic corporate security management.
    • We help you by implementing security governance and managing it, taking into account your company's priorities, and keeping costs to a minimum.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within the corporate security management domain have access to:

    Get up to speed

    Read up on why you should build your customized corporate information security governance and management system. Review our methodology and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Align your security objectives with your business goals

    Determine the company's risk tolerance.

    • Implement a Security Governance and Management Program – Phase 1: Align Business Goals With Security Objectives (ppt)
    • Information Security Governance and Management Business Case (ppt)
    • Information Security Steering Committee Charter (doc)
    • Information Security Steering Committee RACI Chart (doc)
    • Security Risk Register Tool (xls)

    Build a practical governance framework for your company

    Our best-of-breed security framework makes you perform a gap analysis between where you are and where you want to be (your target state). Once you know that, you can define your goals and duties.

    • Implement a Security Governance and Management Program – Phase 2: Develop an Effective Governance Framework (ppt)
    • Information Security Charter (doc)
    • Security Governance Organizational Structure Template (doc)
    • Security Policy Hierarchy Diagram (ppt)
    • Security Governance Model Facilitation Questions (ppt)
    • Information Security Policy Charter Template (doc)
    • Information Security Governance Model Tool (Visio)
    • Pdf icon 20x20
    • Information Security Governance Model Tool (PDF)

    Now that you have built it, manage your governance framework.

    There are several essential management activities that we as a security management consulting company suggest you employ.

    • Implement a Security Governance and Management Program – Phase 3: Manage Your Governance Framework (ppt)
    • Security Metrics Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Information Security Service Catalog (xls)
    • Policy Exception Tracker (xls)
    • Information Security Policy Exception Request Form (doc)
    • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow (Visio)
    • Security Policy Exception Approval Workflow (PDF)
    • Business Goal Metrics Tracking Tool (xls)

    Book an online appointment for more advice

    We are happy to tell you more about our corporate security management solutions and help you set up fitting security objectives. As a security management consulting firm we offer solutions and advice, based on our own extensive experience, which are practical and people-orientated. Discover our services, which include data security management and incident management and book an online appointment with CEO Gert Taeymans to discuss any issues you may be facing regarding risk management or IT governance.

    cybersecurity

    Effectively Recognize IT Employees

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}547|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $100 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Engage
    • Parent Category Link: /engage
    • Even when organizations do have recognition programs, employees want more recognition than they currently receive.
    • In a recent study, McLean & Company found that 69% of IT employees surveyed felt they were not adequately praised and rewarded for superior work.
    • In a lot of cases, the issue with recognition programs isn’t that IT departments haven’t thought about the importance but rather that they haven’t focused on proper execution.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You’re busy – don’t make your recognition program more complicated than it needs to be. Focus on day-to-day ideas and actively embed recognition into your IT team’s culture.
    • Recognition is impactful independent of rewards (i.e. items with a monetary value), but rewarding employees without proper recognition can be counterproductive. Put recognition first and use rewards as a way to amplify its effectiveness.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech tools and guidance will help you develop a successful and sustainable recognition program aligned to strategic goals and values.
    • By focusing on three key elements – customization, alignment, and transparency – you can improve your recognition culture within four weeks, increasing employee engagement and productivity, improving relationships, and reducing turnover.

    Effectively Recognize IT Employees Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement an IT employee recognition program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Executive Brief
    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phases 1-3

    1. Assess the current recognition landscape

    Understand the current perceptions around recognition practices in the organization and determine the behaviors that your program will seek to recognize.

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phase 1: Assess the Current Recognition Landscape
    • IT Employee Recognition Survey Questions

    2. Design the recognition program

    Determine the structure and processes to enable effective recognition in your IT organization.

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phase 2: Design the Recognition Program
    • Employee Recognition Program Guide
    • Employee Recognition Ideas Catalog
    • Employee Recognition Nomination Form

    3. Implement the recognition program

    Rapidly build and roll out a recognition action and sustainment plan, including training managers to reinforce behavior with recognition.

    • Effectively Recognize IT Employees – Phase 3: Implement the Recognition Program
    • Recognition Action and Communication Plan
    • Manager Training: Reinforce Behavior With Recognition
    [infographic]

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}184|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $41,674 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy
    • Organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery practices. This form of delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

    Impact and Result

    • We will help you build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
    • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
      • A common definition of product.
      • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
      • Key challenges and benefits.
      • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
      • What you are asking of stakeholders.
      • A roadmap of how to get started.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Make the Case for Product Delivery Deck – A guide to help align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    This project will help you define “product” for your organization, define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery, understand the role of product ownership, lay out the case to your stakeholders, and communicate what comes next for your transition to product.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard

    2. Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template – A template to help you capture and detail your case for product delivery.

    Build a proposal deck to help make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template

    3. Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook – A tool to capture the results of exercises to build your case to change your product delivery method.

    This workbook is designed to capture the results of the exercises in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Storyboard. Each worksheet corresponds to an exercise in the storyboard. The workbook is also a living artifact that should be updated periodically as the needs of your team and organization change.

    • Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Table of Contents

    Define product

    Define your drivers and goals

    Understand the role of product ownership

    Communicate what comes next

    Make the case to your stakeholders

    Appendix: Additional research

    Appendix: Product delivery strategy communication

    Appendix: Manage stakeholder influence

    Appendix: Product owner capability details

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • Products are the lifeblood of an organization. They deliver the capabilities needed to deliver value to customers, internal users, and stakeholders.
    • Organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide with the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
    • You need to clearly convey the direction and strategy of your product portfolio to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
    Common Obstacles
    • IT organizations are traditionally organized to deliver initiatives in specific periods of time. This is in contention with product-centric delivery.
    • Product delivery acknowledges the reality that solutions of all shapes and sizes deliver continual and evolving business value over their lifetime.
    • Delivering multiple products together creates additional challenges because each product has its own pedigree, history, and goals.
    • Product owners struggle to prioritize changes to deliver product value. This creates a gap and conflict between product and enterprise goals.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Info-Tech will enable you to build a proposal deck to make the case to your stakeholders for product-centric delivery.
    • You will build this proposal deck by answering key questions about product-centric delivery so you can identify:
      • A common definition of product.
      • How this form of delivery differs from traditional project-centric approaches.
      • Key challenges and benefits.
      • The capabilities needed to effectively own products and deliver value.
      • What you are asking of stakeholders.
      • A roadmap of how to get started.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Delivering products doesn’t mean you will stop delivering projects! Product-centric delivery is intended to address the misalignment between the long-term delivery of value that organizations demand and the nature of traditional project-focused environments.

    Many executives perceive IT as being poorly aligned with business objectives

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey data highlights the importance of IT initiatives in supporting the business in achieving its strategic goals.

    However, Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (2021; N=58) data indicates that CEOs perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals.

    Info-Tech CEO-CIO Alignment Diagnostics, 2021 (N=58)

    40% Of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.

    34% Of business stakeholders are supporters of their IT departments (n=334).

    40% Of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Great technical solutions are not the primary driver of IT success. Focusing on delivery of digital products that align with organizational goals will produce improved outcomes and will foster an improved relationship between business and IT.

    Increase product success by involving IT, business, and customers in your product roadmaps, planning, and delivery

    Product management and delivery seek to promote improved relationships among IT, business, and customers, a critical driver for business satisfaction.

    IT

    Stock image of an IT professional.

    1

    Collaboration

    IT, business, and customers work together through all stages of the product lifecycle, from market research through the roadmapping and delivery processes and into maintenance and retirement. The goal is to ensure the risks and dependencies are realized before work is committed.

    Stakeholders, Customers, and Business

    Stock image of a business professional.

    2

    Communication

    Prioritize high-value modes of communication to break down existing silos and create common understanding and alignment across functions. This approach increases transparency and visibility across the entire product lifecycle.

    3

    Integration

    Explore methods to integrate the workflows, decision making, and toolsets among the business, IT, and customers. The goal is to become more reactive to changes in business and customer expectations and more proactive about market trends.

    Product does not mean the same thing to everyone

    Do not expect a universal definition of products.
    Every organization and industry has a different definition of what a product is. Organizations structure their people, processes, and technologies according to their definition of the products they manage. Conflicting product definitions between teams increase confusion and misalignment of product roadmaps.

    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

    Organizations need a common understanding of what a product is and how it pertains to the business.

    This understanding needs to be accepted across the organization.

    “There is not a lot of guidance in the industry on how to define [products]. This is dangerous because what will happen is that product backlogs will be formed in too many areas. All that does is create dependencies and coordination across teams … and backlogs.” (Chad Beier, “How Do You Define a Product?” Scrum.org)

    Products enable the long-term and continuous delivery of value

    Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum.

    Phase 1

    Build the case for product-centric delivery

    Phase 1
    1.1 Define product
    1.2 Define your drivers and goals
    1.3 Understand the role of product ownership
    1.4 Communicate what comes next
    1.5 Make the case to your stakeholders

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define product in your context.
    • Define your drivers and goals for moving to product delivery.
    • Understand the role of product ownership.
    • Communicate what comes next for your transition to product.
    • Lay out the case to your stakeholders.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 1.1

    Define product

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context
    • 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization
    • 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear definition of product in your organization’s context.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Exercise 1.1.1 Define “product” in your context

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Your enterprise/organizational definition of products and services

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Discuss what “product” means in your organization.
    2. Create a common, enterprise-wide definition for “product.”
    “A product [is] something (physical or not) that is created through a process and that provides benefits to a market.” (Mike Cohn, Founding Member of Agile Alliance and Scrum Alliance) “A product is something ... that is created and then made available to customers, usually with a distinct name or order number.” (TechTarget) “A product is the physical object ... , software or service from which customer gets direct utility plus a number of other factors, services, and perceptions that make the product useful, desirable [and] convenient.” (Mark Curphey)

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product-Centric Delivery Workbook.

    Example: What is a product?

    Not all organizations will define products in the same way. Take this as a general example:

    “A tangible solution, tool, or service (physical or digital) that enables the long-term and evolving delivery of value to customers and stakeholders based on business and user requirements.”

    Info-Tech Insight

    A proper definition of product recognizes three key facts:

    1. Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    2. Products are not just “apps” but can be software or services that drive the delivery of value.
    3. There is more than one stakeholder group that derives value from the product or service.
    Stock image of an open human head with gears and a city for a brain.

    How do we know what is a product?

    What isn’t a product:
    • Features (on their own)
    • Transactions
    • Unstructured data
    • One-time solutions
    • Non-repeatable processes
    • Solutions that have no users or consumers
    • People or teams
    You have a product if the given item...
    • Has end users or consumers
    • Delivers quantifiable value
    • Evolves or changes over time
    • Has predictable delivery
    • Has definable boundaries
    • Has a cost to produce and operate

    Exercise 1.1.2 Consider examples of what is (and is not) a product in your organization

    15 minutes

    Output: Examples of what is and isn’t a product in your specific context.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Leverage the definition you created in exercise 1.1.1 and the explanation on the slide What is a product?
    2. Pick examples that effectively show the difference between products and non-products and facilitate a conversation on the ones that seem to be on the line. Specific server instances, or instances of providing a service, are worthwhile examples to consider.
    3. From the list you come up with, take the top three examples and put them into the Make the Case for Product Delivery Presentation Template.
    Example:
    What isn’t a product?
    • Month-end SQL scripts to close the books
    • Support Engineer doing a password reset
    • Latest research project in R&D
    What is a product?
    • Self-service password reset portal
    • Oracle ERP installation
    • Microsoft Office 365

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Product delivery practices should consider everything required to support it, not just what users see.

    Cross-section of an iceberg above and below water with visible product delivery practices like 'Funding', 'External Relationships', and 'Stakeholder Management' above water and internal product delivery practices like 'Product Governance', 'Business Functionality', and 'R&D' under water. There are far more processes below the water.

    Products and services share the same foundation and best practices

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. Product is used for consistency but would apply to services as well.

    Product = Service

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:
    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Exercise 1.1.3 Identify the differences between project and product delivery

    30-60 minutes

    Output: List of differences between project and product delivery

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Consider project delivery and product delivery.
    2. Discuss what some differences are between the two.
      Note: This exercise is not about identifying the advantages and disadvantages of each style of delivery. This is to identify the variation between the two.
    Theme Project Delivery (Current) Product Delivery (Future)
    Timing Defined start and end Does not end until the product is no longer needed
    Funding Funding projects Funding products and teams
    Prioritization LoB sponsors Product owner
    Capacity Management Project management Managed by product team

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Project Product
    Fund projects — Funding –› Fund products or teams
    Line of business sponsor — Prioritization –› Product owner
    Makes specific changes to a product —Product management –› Improves product maturity and support
    Assignment of people to work — Work allocation –› Assignment of work to product teams
    Project manager manages — Capacity management –› Team manages capacity

    Info-Tech Insights

    • Product ownership should be one of your first areas of focus when transitioning from project to product delivery.
    • Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    Diagram laying out the lifecycles and roadmaps contributing to the 'Continuous delivery of value'. Beginning with 'Project Lifecycle' in which Projects with features and services end in a Product Release that is disconnected from the continuum. Then the 'Hybrid Lifecycle' and 'Product Lifecycle' which are connected by a 'Product Roadmap' and 'Product Backlog' have Product Releases that connect to the continuum. Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    The purpose of projects is to deliver the scope of a product release. The shift to product delivery leverages a product roadmap and backlog as the mechanism for defining and managing the scope of the release.

    Eventually, teams progress to continuous integration/continuous delivery (CI/CD) where they can release on demand or as scheduled, requiring org change management.

    Step 1.2

    Define your drivers and goals

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery
    • 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A clear understanding of your motivations and desired outcomes for moving to product delivery.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Exercise 1.2.1 Understand your drivers for product-centric delivery

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Organizational drivers to move to product-centric delivery.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify your pain points in the current delivery model.
    2. What is the root cause of these pain points?
    3. How will a product-centric delivery model fix the root cause (drivers)?
    Pain Points
    • Lack of ownership
    Root Causes
    • Siloed departments
    Drivers
    • Accountability

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Exercise 1.2.2 Define the goals for your product-centric organization

    30 minutes

    Output: Goals for product-centric delivery

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Review the differences between project and product delivery from exercise 1.1.3 and the list of drivers from exercise 1.2.1.
    2. Define your goals for achieving a product-centric organization.
      Note: Your drivers may have already covered the goals. If so, review if you would like to change the drivers based on your renewed understanding of the differences between project and product delivery.
    Pain Points
    • Lack of ownership
    Root Causes
    • Siloed departments
    Drivers
    • Accountability
    Goals
    • End-to-end ownership

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Step 1.3

    Understand the role of product ownership

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product owner capabilities that you agree are critical to start your product transformation.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Accountability for the delivery of value through product ownership is not optional

    Tree of 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities' leading to 'Product' through a 'Product Family'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    People treat the assignment of accountability for products (aka product ownership) as optional. Without assigning accountability up front, your transition to product delivery will stall. Accountable individuals will be focused on the core outcome for product delivery, which is the delivery of the right value, at the right time, to the right people.

    Description of the tree levels shown in the diagram on the left. First is 'Enterprise Goals and Priorities', led by 'Executive Leadership' using the 'Enterprise Strategic Roadmap'. Second is 'Product Family', led by 'Product Manager' using the 'Product Family Roadmap'. Last is 'Product', led by the 'Product Owner' using the 'Product Roadmap' and 'Backlog' on the strategic end, and 'Releases' on the Tactical end. In the holistic context, 'Product Family is considered 'Strategic' while 'Product' is 'Tactical'.

    Recognize the different product owner perspectives

    Business
    • Customer facing, revenue generating
    Technical
    • IT systems and tools
    Operations
    • Keep the lights on processes

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Recognize that product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their perspective.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.” (Robbin Schuurman, “Tips for Starting Product Owners”)

    Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

    As discussed in Build a Better Product Owner, most product owners operate with an incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization. 'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.
    Vision
    • Market Analysis
    • Business Alignment
    • Product Roadmap
    Leadership
    • Soft Skills
    • Collaboration
    • Decision Making
    Product Lifecycle Management
    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    Value Realization
    • KPIs
    • Financial Management
    • Business Model

    Details on product ownership capabilities can be found in the appendix.

    Exercise 1.3.1 Identify product ownership capabilities

    60 minutes

    Output: Product owner capability mapping

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Write down the capabilities product owners need to perform their duties (one per sticky note) in order to describe product ownership in your organization. Consider people, processes, and tools.
    2. Mark each capability with a plus (current capability), circle (some proficiency), or dash (missing capability).
    3. Discuss each capability and place on the appropriate quadrant.

    'Product Owner Capabilities': 'Vision', 'Leadership', 'Product Lifecycle Management', 'Value Realization'.

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Differentiate between product owners and product managers

    Product Owner (Tactical Focus)
    • Backlog management and prioritization
    • Epic/story definition, refinement in conjunction with business stakeholders
    • Sprint planning with Scrum Master
    • Working with Scrum Master to minimize disruption to team velocity
    • Ensuring alignment between business and Scrum teams during sprints
    • Profit and loss (P&L) product analysis and monitoring
    Product Manager (Strategic Focus)
    • Product strategy, positioning, and messaging
    • Product vision and product roadmap
    • Competitive analysis and positioning
    • New product innovation/definition
    • Release timing and focus (release themes)
    • Ongoing optimization of product-related marketing and sales activities
    • P&L product analysis and monitoring

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Product owner” and “product manager” are terms that should be adapted to fit your culture and product hierarchy. These are not management relationships but rather a way to structure related products and services that touch the same end users.

    Step 1.4

    Communicate what comes next

    Activities
    • 1.4.1 How do we get started?

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A now, next, later roadmap indicating your overall next steps.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Make a plan in order to make a plan!

    Consider some of the techniques you can use to validate your strategy.

    Cyclical diagram of the 'Continuous Delivery of Value' within 'Business Value'. Surrounding attributes are 'User Centric', 'Adaptable', 'Accessible', 'Private & Secured', 'Informative & Insightful', 'Seamless Application Connection', 'Relationship & Network Building', 'Fit for Purpose'.

    Go to your backlog and prioritize the elements that need to be answered sooner rather than later.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Regulatory requirements or questions to answer around accessibility, security, privacy.
    • Stress testing any new processes against situations that may occur.
    Learning Milestones

    The completion of a set of artifacts dedicated to validating business opportunities and hypotheses.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Align teams on product strategy prior to build
    • Market research and analysis
    • Dedicated feedback sessions
    • Provide information on feature requirements
    Stock image of people learning.
    Sprint Zero (AKA Project-before-the-project)

    The completion of a set of key planning activities, typically the first sprint.

    Possible areas of focus:

    • Focus on technical verification to enable product development alignment
    • Sign off on architectural questions or concerns
    Stock photo of a person writing on a board of sticky notes.

    The “Now, Next, Later” roadmap

    Use this when deadlines and delivery dates are not strict. This is best suited for brainstorming a product plan when dependency mapping is not required.

    • Now
      What are you going to do now?
    • Next
      What are you going to do very soon?
    • Later
      What are you going to do in the future?
    A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
    (Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

    Exercise 1.4.1 How do we get started?

    30-60 minutes

    Output: Product transformation critical steps and basic roadmap

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify what the critical steps are for the organization to embrace product-centric delivery.
    2. Group each critical step by how soon you need to address it:
      • Now: Let’s do this ASAP.
      • Next: Sometime very soon, let’s do these things.
      • Later: Much further off in the distance, let’s consider these things.
    A priority map laid out as a half rainbow with 'Now' as the inner, 'Next' as the middle, and 'Later' as the outer. Various 'Features', 'Releases', and an 'MVP' are mapped into the sections.
    (Source: “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples,” Scrum.org, 2017)

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Example

    Example table for listing tasks to complete Now, Next, or Later

    Step 1.5

    Make the case to your stakeholders

    Activities
    • 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders
    • 1.5.2 Build your pitch for product delivery

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A deliverable that helps make the case for product delivery.

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5

    Develop a stakeholder strategy to define your product owner landscape

    Stakeholder Influence

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

    Product teams operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    See the appendix for activities and guidance on how to devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

    Exercise 1.5.1 Identify what support you need from your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Output: Clear understanding of stakeholders, what they need from you, and what you need from them.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. If you don’t yet know who your stakeholders are, consider completing one or more of the stakeholder management exercises in the appendix.
    2. Identify your key stakeholders who have an interest in solution delivery.
    3. Consider their perspective on product-centric delivery. (For example: For head of support, what does solution delivery mean to them?)
    4. Identify what role each stakeholder would play in the transformation.
      • This role represents what you need from them for this transformation to product-centric delivery.
    Stakeholder
    What does solution delivery mean to them?
    What do you need from them in order to be successful?

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Exercise 1.5.2 Build your pitch deck

    30 minutes (and up)

    Output: A completed presentation to help you make the case for product delivery.

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Take the results from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook and transfer them into the presentation template.
    2. Follow the instructions on each page listed in the instruction bubbles to know what results to place where.
    3. This is meant to be a template; you are welcome to add and remove slides as needed to suit your audience!

    Sample of slides from the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook with instruction bubbles overlaid.

    Record the results in the Make the Case for Product Delivery Workbook.

    Appendix

    Additional research to start your journey

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product Delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    • Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    • Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    • Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    • Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    • Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    • Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    • Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    • Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Application Portfolio Management

    Application Portfolio Management (APM) Research Center

    • See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management for Small Enterprises

    • There is no one-size-fits-all rationalization. Tailor your framework to meet your goals.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    • Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Build an Application Rationalization Framework

    • Manage your application portfolio to minimize risk and maximize value.

    Modernize Your Applications

    • Justify modernizing your application portfolio from both business and technical perspectives.

    Review Your Application Strategy

    • Ensure your applications enable your business strategy.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    • Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Streamline Application Management

    • Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    • Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    • Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    • Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    • Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    • Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    • Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    • Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize IT Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    • Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    • Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Org Design and Performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    • Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    • Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    • Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    • Measure employee sentiment to drive IT performance

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    • Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Master Organizational Change Management Practices

    • PMOs, if you don't know who is responsible for org change, it's you.

    Appendix

    Product delivery strategy communication

    Product roadmaps guide delivery and communicate your strategy

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we demonstrate how the product roadmap is core to value realization. The product roadmap is your communicated path, and as a product owner, you use it to align teams and changes to your defined goals while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    Diagram on how to get from product owner capabilities to 'Business Value Realization' through 'Product Roadmap' with a 'Tiered Backlog', 'Delivery Capacity and Throughput' via a 'Product Delivery Pipeline'.
    (Adapted from: Pichler, “What Is Product Management?”)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The quality of your product backlog – and your ability to realize business value from your delivery pipeline – is directly related to the input, content, and prioritization of items in your product roadmap.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver.
    Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    Two-part diagram showing the 'Product Backlog' segmented into '1. Current: Features/ Stories', '2. Near-term: Capabilities', and '3. Future: Epics', and then the 'Product Roadmap' with the same segments placed into a timeline.

    Multiple roadmap views can communicate differently, yet tell the same truth

    Product managers and product owners have many responsibilities, and a roadmap can be a useful tool to complete those objectives through communication or organization of tasks.

    However, not all roadmaps address the correct audience and achieve those objectives. Care must be taken to align the view to the given audience.

    Pie Chart showing the surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap. From largest to smallest are 'Communicate a strategy', 'Plan and prioritize', 'Communicate milestones and releases', 'Get consensus on product direction', and 'Manage product backlog'.
    Surveyed most important reason for using a product roadmap (Source: ProductPlan, 2018)

    Audience
    Business/ IT leaders Users/Customers Delivery teams
    Roadmap View
    Portfolio Product Technology
    Objectives
    To provide a snapshot of the portfolio and priority apps To visualize and validate product strategy To coordinate and manage teams and show dev. progress
    Artifacts
    Line items or sections of the roadmap are made up of individual apps, and an artifact represents a disposition at its highest level. Artifacts are generally grouped by various product teams and consist of strategic goals and the features that realize those goals. Artifacts are grouped by the teams who deliver that work and consist of features and technical enablers that support those features.

    Appendix

    Managing stakeholder influence

    From Build a Better Product Owner

    Step 1.3 (from Build a Better Product Owner)

    Manage Stakeholder Influence

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers
    • 1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories
    • 1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders
    • 1.3.4 Delegation Poker: Reach better decisions

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    To be successful, product owners need to identify and manage all stakeholders for their products. This step will build a stakeholder map and strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers
    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers
    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization
    • Better understanding of decision-making approaches and delegation
    Product Owner Foundations
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3

    Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

    Stakeholder Influence

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner is able to accomplish.

    Product owners operate within this network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Without accomplishing these missing pieces, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

    Image of four puzzle pieces being put together, labelled 'Product Lifecycle', 'Project Delivery', 'Operational Support', 'and Stakeholder Management'.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Legend
    Black arrow with a solid line and single direction. Black arrows indicate the direction of professional influence
    Green arrow with a dashed line and bi-directional. Dashed green arrows indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates in. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Use “connectors” to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

    1.3.1 Visualize interrelationships to identify key influencers

    60 minutes

    Input: List of product stakeholders

    Output: Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      1. Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      2. Use dashed green arrows to indicate bidirectional, informal influence relationships.
    5. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps product owners categorize their stakeholders by their level or influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

    Stakeholder prioritization map split into four quadrants along two axes, 'Influence', and 'Ownership/Interest': 'Players' (high influence, high interest); 'Mediators' (high influence, low interest); 'Noisemakers' (low influence, high interest); 'Spectators' (low influence, low interest). Source: Info-Tech Research Group

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.
    • Players – players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    1.3.2 Group your product owners into categories

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder map

    Output: Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify your stakeholder’s interest in and influence on your Agile implementation as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
    Same stakeholder prioritization map as before but with example positions mapped onto it.
    Level of Influence
    • Power: Ability of a stakeholder to effect change.
    • Urgency: Degree of immediacy demanded.
    • Legitimacy: Perceived validity of stakeholder’s claim.
    • Volume: How loud their “voice” is or could become.
    • Contribution: What they have that is of value to you.
    Level of Interest

    How much are the stakeholder’s individual performance and goals directly tied to the success or failure of the product?

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Stakeholder prioritization table with 'Stakeholder Category' as row headers ('Player', 'Mediator', 'Noisemaker', 'Spectator') and 'Level of Support' as column headers ('Supporter', 'Evangelist', 'Neutral', 'Blocker'). Importance ratings are 'Critical', 'High', 'Medium', 'Low', and 'Irrelevant'.

    Consider the three dimensions for stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by rating the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would recommend your product? These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive the focus of your attention. The table to the right indicates how stakeholders are ranked.

    1.3.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    30 minutes

    Input: Stakeholder matrix, Stakeholder prioritization

    Output: Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers, Build a Better Product Owner Workbook

    Participants: Product owners, Product managers, Development team leads, Portfolio managers, Business analysts

    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: how likely is it that your stakeholder would endorse your product?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.
    3. Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.
    Stakeholder Category Level of Support Prioritization
    CMO Spectator Neutral Irrelevant
    CIO Player Supporter Critical

    Record the results in the Build a Better Product Owner Workbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Stakeholder strategy map assigning stakeholder strategies to stakeholder categories, as described in the adjacent table.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy Spectators and Noisemakers, while ensuring the needs of the Mediators and Players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence; high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve Players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence; low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence; high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using Mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence; low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Appendix

    Product owner capability details

    From Build a Better Product Owner

    Develop product owner capabilities

    Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

    Each capability has three components needed for successful product ownership.

    Definitions are on the following slides.

    Central diagram title 'Product Owner Capabilities'.

    Define the skills and activities in each component that are directly related to your product and culture.

    Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.
    Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'. Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

    Capabilities: Vision

    Market Analysis

    • Unique solution: Identify the target users and unique value your product provides that is not currently being met.
    • Market size: Define the size of your user base, segmentation, and potential growth.
    • Competitive analysis: Determine alternative solutions, products, or threats that affect adoption, usage, and retention.

    Business Alignment

    • SWOT analysis: Complete a SWOT analysis for your end-to-end product lifecycle. Use Info-Tech’s Business SWOT Analysis Template.
    • Enterprise alignment: Align product to enterprise goals, strategies, and constraints.
    • Delivery strategy: Develop a delivery strategy to achieve value quickly and adapt to internal and external changes.

    Product Roadmap

    • Roadmap strategy: Determine the duration, detail, and structure of your roadmap to accurately communicate your vision.
    • Value prioritization: Define criteria used to evaluate and sequence demand.
    • Go to market strategy: Create organizational change management, communications, and a user implementation approach.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data comes from many places and may still not tell the complete story.

    Capability 'Vision' with sub-capabilities 'Market Analysis, 'Business Alignment', and 'Product Roadmap'.

    “Customers are best heard through many ears.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Leadership

    Soft Skills

    • Communication: Maintain consistent, concise, and appropriate communication using SMART guidelines (specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely).
    • Integrity: Stick to your values, principles, and decision criteria for the product to build and maintain trust with your users and teams.
    • Influence: Manage stakeholders using influence and collaboration over contract negotiation.

    Collaboration

    • Stakeholder management: Build a communications strategy for each stakeholder group, tailored to individual stakeholders.
    • Relationship management: Use every interaction point to strengthen relationships, build trust, and empower teams.
    • Team development: Promote development through stretch goals and controlled risks to build team capabilities and performance.

    Decision Making

    • Prioritized criteria: Remove personal bias by basing decisions off data analysis and criteria.
    • Continuous improvement: Balance new features with the need to ensure quality and create an environment of continuous improvement.
    • Team empowerment/negotiation: Push decisions to teams closest to the problem and solution, using Delegation Poker to guide you.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners cannot be just a proxy for stakeholder decisions. The product owner owns product decisions and management of all stakeholders.

    Capability 'Leadership' with sub-capabilities 'Soft Skills', 'Collaboration', and 'Decision Making'.

    “Everything walks the walk. Everything talks the talk.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Product lifecycle management

    Plan

    • Product backlog: Follow a schedule for backlog intake, refinement, updates, and prioritization.
    • Journey map: Create an end-user journey map to guide adoption and loyalty.
    • Fit for purpose: Define expected value and intended use to ensure the product meets your end user’s needs.

    Build

    • Capacity management: Work with operations and delivery teams to ensure consistent and stable outcomes.
    • Release strategy: Build learning, release, and critical milestones into a repeatable release plan.
    • Compliance: Build policy compliance into delivery practices to ensure alignment and reduce avoidable risk (privacy, security).

    Run

    • Adoption: Focus attention on end-user adoption and proficiency to accelerate value and maximize retention.
    • Support: Build operational support and business continuity into every team.
    • Measure: Measure KPIs and validate expected value to ensure product alignment to goals and consistent product quality.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners must actively manage the full lifecycle of the product.

    Capability 'Product Lifecycle Management' with sub- capabilities 'Plan', 'Build', and 'Run'.

    “Pay fantastic attention to detail. Reward, recognize, celebrate.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Capabilities: Value realization

    Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

    • Usability and user satisfaction: Assess satisfaction through usage monitoring and end-user feedback.
    • Value validation: Directly measure performance against defined value proposition, goals, and predicted ROI.
    • Fit for purpose: Verify the product addresses the intended purpose better than other options.

    Financial Management

    • P&L: Manage each product as if it were its own business with profit and loss statements.
    • Acquisition cost/market growth: Define the cost of acquiring a new consumer, onboarding internal users, and increasing product usage.
    • User retention/market share: Verify product usage continues after adoption and solution reaches new user groups to increase value.

    Business Model

    • Defines value proposition: Dedicate your primary focus to understanding and defining the value your product will deliver.
    • Market strategy and goals: Define your acquisition, adoption, and retention plan for users.
    • Financial model: Build an end-to-end financial model and plan for the product and all related operational support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most organizations stop with on-time and on-budget. True financial alignment needs to define and manage the full lifecycle P&L.

    Capability 'Value Realization' with sub-capabilities 'KPIs', 'Financial Management', and 'Business Model'.

    “The competition is anyone the customer compares you with.” (Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom)

    Avoid common capability gaps

    Vision

    • Focusing solely on backlog refining (tactical only)
    • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
    • Operational support and execution
    • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
    • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

    Leadership

    • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
    • Using a command-and-control approach
    • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
    • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
    • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

    Product Lifecycle Management

    • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
    • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
    • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
    • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
    • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

    Value Realization

    • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
    • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
    • Skipping business plans and financial models
    • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
    • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Medium, Product Management Insider, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint, 2012. Web.

    Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, 2015. Web.

    Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group, 2005. Web.

    Cohn, Mike “What is a product?” Mountain Goat Software, 16 Sept. 2016, Web

    Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom. Bard Press, 1997. Print.

    Curphey, Mark, “Product Definition.” slideshare.net, 25 Feb. 2007. Web

    Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

    Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” Medium.com, 6 March 2017. Web.

    Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile Alliance, Agile2016, 2016. Web.

    Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” Medium.com, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Medium.com, 23 July 2018. Web.

    Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Management 3.0. “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams: Rich Mironov's Product Bytes.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 April 2014 . Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 March 2017. Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

    Radigan, Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

    Bibliography – Product Ownership

    Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin VOP #50, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

    “The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group, 2015. Web.

    Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

    Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

    Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium.com, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

    VersionOne. “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” Medium.com, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

    “How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 April 2017, Web.

    “Product Definition.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web

    Bibliography – Product Roadmap

    Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

    Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012, Herzlia, Israel, 2012 IEEE International Conference on Software Science, Technology and Engineering, 12 June 2012. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    “How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, Inc., 2017. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP)?” LEANSTACK, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

    “Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 Oct. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Emily Archer, Lead Business Analyst, Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency.

    Emily Archer
    Lead Business Analyst,
    Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

    Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

    Photo of David Berg, Founder & CTO, Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg
    Founder & CTO
    Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg is a product commercialization expert that has spent the last 20 years of his career delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world with the goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Blank photo template.

    Kathy Borneman
    Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

    Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

    Photo of Charlie Campbell, Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions.

    Charlie Campbell
    Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

    Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Yarrow Diamond, Sr. Director, Business Architecture, Financial Services.

    Yarrow Diamond
    Sr. Director, Business Architecture
    Financial Services

    Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

    Photo of Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA, Enterprise Business Systems Analyst, Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA
    Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,
    Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Kieran Gobey, Senior Consultant Professional Services, Blueprint Software Systems.

    Kieran Gobey
    Senior Consultant Professional Services
    Blueprint Software Systems

    Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations.

    Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

    Photo of Rupert Kainzbauer, VP Product, Digital Wallets, Paysafe Group.

    Rupert Kainzbauer
    VP Product, Digital Wallets
    Paysafe Group

    Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. Together with a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Saeed Khan, Founder, Transformation Labs.

    Saeed Khan
    Founder,
    Transformation Labs

    Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in both Canada and the US and has held a number of leadership roles in Product Management over that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005.

    Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders, the only global community of senior-level product executives.

    Photo of Hoi Kun Lo, Product Owner, Nielsen.

    Hoi Kun Lo
    Product Owner
    Nielsen

    Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL, and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Abhishek Mathur, Sr Director, Product Management, Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur
    Sr Director, Product Management
    Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

    Photo of Jeff Meister, Technology Advisor and Product Leader.

    Jeff Meister
    Technology Advisor and Product Leader

    Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations.

    Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements.

    Jeff holds a Bachelor of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Vincent Mirabelli, Principal, Global Project Synergy Group.

    Vincent Mirabelli
    Principal,
    Global Project Synergy Group

    With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

    Photo of Oz Nazili, VP, Product & Growth, TWG.

    Oz Nazili
    VP, Product & Growth
    TWG

    Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Mark Pearson, Principal IT Architect, First Data Corporation.

    Mark Pearson
    Principal IT Architect
    First Data Corporation

    Mark Pearson is an executive business leader grounded in the process, data, technology, and operations of software-driven business. He knows the enterprise software landscape and is skilled in product, technology, and operations design and delivery within information technology organizations, outsourcing firms, and software product companies.

    Photo of Brenda Peshak, Product Owner, Widget Industries, LLC.

    Brenda Peshak
    Product Owner,
    Widget Industries, LLC

    Brenda Peshak is skilled in business process, analytical skills, Microsoft Office Suite, communication, and customer relationship management (CRM). She is a strong product management professional with a Master’s focused in Business Leadership (MBL) from William Penn University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Mike Starkey, Director of Engineering, W.W. Grainger.

    Mike Starkey
    Director of Engineering
    W.W. Grainger

    Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

    Photo of Anant Tailor, Cofounder & Head of Product, Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor
    Cofounder & Head of Product
    Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes.

    Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries.

    Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor’s degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Angela Weller, Scrum Master, Businessolver.

    Angela Weller
    Scrum Master, Businessolver

    Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}426|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy
    • Traditional IT budgeting and procurement processes don't work for public cloud services.
    • The self-service nature of the cloud means that often the people provisioning cloud resources aren't accountable for the cost of those resources.
    • Without centralized control or oversight, organizations can quickly end up with massive Azure bills that exceed their IT salary cost.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Most engineers care more about speed of feature delivery and reliability of the system than they do about cost.
    • Often there are no consequences for overarchitecting or overspending on Azure.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient visibility into their Azure spend, making it impossible to establish accountability and controls.

    Impact and Result

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Establish visibility.
    • Develop processes, procedures, and policies.

    Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should take control of cloud costs, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a cost accountability framework

    Assess your current state, define your cost allocation model, and define roles and responsibilities.

    • Cloud Cost Management Worksheet
    • Cloud Cost Management Capability Assessment
    • Cloud Cost Management Policy
    • Cloud Cost Glossary of Terms

    2. Establish visibility

    Define dashboards and reports, and document account structure and tagging requirements.

    • Service Cost Cheat Sheet for Azure

    3. Define processes and procedures

    Establish governance for tagging and cost control, define process for right-sizing, and define process for purchasing commitment discounts.

    • Right-Sizing Workflow (Visio)
    • Right-Sizing Workflow (PDF)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (Visio)
    • Commitment Purchasing Workflow (PDF)

    4. Build an implementation plan

    Document process interactions, establish program KPIs, and build implementation roadmap and communication plan.

    • Cloud Cost Management Task List
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Take Control of Cloud Costs on Microsoft Azure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build a Cost Accountability Framework

    The Purpose

    Establish clear lines of accountability and document roles & responsibilities to effectively manage cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of key areas to focus on to improve cloud cost management capabilities.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current state

    1.2 Determine cloud cost model

    1.3 Define roles & responsibilities

    Outputs

    Cloud cost management capability assessment

    Cloud cost model

    Roles & responsibilities

    2 Establish Visibility

    The Purpose

    Establish visibility into cloud costs and drivers of those costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Better understanding of what is driving costs and how to keep them in check.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop architectural patterns

    2.2 Define dashboards and reports

    2.3 Define account structure

    2.4 Document tagging requirements

    Outputs

    Architectural patterns; service cost cheat sheet

    Dashboards and reports

    Account structure

    Tagging scheme

    3 Define Processes & Procedures

    The Purpose

    Develop processes, procedures, and policies to control cloud costs.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved capability of reducing costs.

    Documented processes & procedures for continuous improvement.

    Activities

    3.1 Establish governance for tagging

    3.2 Establish governance for costs

    3.3 Define right-sizing process

    3.4 Define purchasing process

    3.5 Define notification and alerts

    Outputs

    Tagging policy

    Cost control policy

    Right-sizing process

    Commitment purchasing process

    Notifications and alerts

    4 Build an Implementation Plan

    The Purpose

    Document next steps to implement & improve cloud cost management program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete roadmap to stand up and/or improve the cloud cost management program.

    Activities

    4.1 Document process interaction changes

    4.2 Define cloud cost program KPIs

    4.3 Build implementation roadmap

    4.4 Build communication plan

    Outputs

    Changes to process interactions

    Cloud cost program KPIs

    Implementation roadmap

    Communication plan

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}147|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $50,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Estimation and planning practices set and reinforce the expectations of product delivery, which is a key driver of IT satisfaction.
    • However, today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products and business needs create mounting pressure for teams to make accurate estimates with little knowledge of the problem or solution to it, risking poor-quality products.
    • Many organizations lack the critical foundations involved in making acceptable estimates in collaboration with the various perspectives and estimation stakeholders.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Estimation reflects your culture and operating model. The accuracy of your estimates is dependent on the roles involved, which is not encouraged in traditional and top-down methodologies. Stakeholders must respect and support the team’s estimates.
    • Estimates support value delivery. IT satisfaction is driven by the delivery of valuable products and services. Estimates set the appropriate stakeholder expectations to ensure successful delivery and make the right decisions.
    • Estimates are more than just guesses. They are tools used to make critical business, product, and technical decisions and inform how to best utilize resources and funding.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish the right expectations. Gain a grounded understanding of estimation value and limitations. Discuss estimation challenges to determine if poor practices and tactics are the root causes or symptoms.
    • Strengthen analysis and estimation practices. Obtain a thorough view of the product backlog item (PBI) through good analysis tactics. Incorporate multiple analysis and estimation tactics to verify and validate assumptions.
    • Incorporate estimates into your delivery lifecycle. Review and benchmark estimates, and update expectations as more is learned.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize your estimation practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Justify estimation optimization

    Set the right stakeholder expectations for your delivery estimates and plans.

    • Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence – Phase 1: Justify Estimation Optimization
    • Estimation Quick Reference Template

    2. Commit to achievable delivery

    Adopt the analysis, estimation, commitment, and communication tactics to successfully develop your delivery plan.

    • Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence – Phase 2: Commit to Achievable Delivery

    3. Mature your estimation practice

    Build your estimation optimization roadmap.

    • Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence – Phase 3: Mature Your Estimation Practice
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set the Context

    The Purpose

    Discuss the decisions that estimates will help make.

    Level set estimation expectations by clarifying what they can and cannot do.

    Review the current state of your estimation practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded understanding of estimation that is accepted by all audiences and stakeholders.

    Identification of whether estimation practices are the root cause of estimation challenges or a symptom of a different issue.

    Activities

    1.1 Define estimation expectations.

    1.2 Reveal your root cause challenges.

    Outputs

    Estimation expectations

    Root causes of estimation challenges

    2 Build Your Estimation Practice

    The Purpose

    Discuss the estimation and planning practices used in the industry.

    Define the appropriate tactics to use to make key business and delivery decisions.

    Simulate the tactics to verify and validate their fit with your teams.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of good practices that can improve the effectiveness of your estimates and plans.

    Practice using new tactics.

    Activities

    2.1 Ground estimation fundamentals.

    2.2 Strengthen your analysis tactics.

    2.3 Strengthen your estimation tactics.

    2.4 Commit and communicate delivery.

    2.5 Simulate your target state planning and estimation tactics.

    Outputs

    Estimation glossary and guiding principles

    Defined analysis tactics

    Defined estimation and consensus-building tactics

    Defined commitment and communication tactics

    Lessons learned

    3 Define Your Optimization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Review the scope and achievability of your improved estimation and planning practice.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Realistic and achievable estimation optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 Mature your estimation practice.

    Outputs

    Estimation optimization roadmap

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}351|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $133,318 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Product organizations are under pressure to align the value they provide to the organization’s goals and overall company vision.
    • You need to clearly convey your direction, strategy, and tactics to gain alignment, support, and funding from your organization.
    • Products require continuous additions and enhancements to sustain their value. This requires detailed, yet simple communication to a variety of stakeholders.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A vision without tactics is an unsubstantiated dream, while tactics without a vision is working without a purpose. You need to have a handle on both to achieve outcomes that are aligned with the needs of your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Recognize that a vision is only as good as the data that backs it up – lay out a comprehensive backlog with quality built-in that can be effectively communicated and understood through roadmaps.
    • Your intent is only a dream if it cannot be implemented – define what goes into a release plan via the release canvas.
    • Define a communication approach that lets everyone know where you are heading.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build a digital product vision that you can stand behind. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define a digital product vision

    Define a digital product vision that takes into account your objectives, business value, stakeholders, customers, and metrics.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 1: Define a Digital Product Vision
    • Digital Product Strategy Template
    • Digital Product Strategy Supporting Workbook

    2. Build a better backlog

    Build a structure for your backlog that supports your product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 2: Build a Better Backlog
    • Product Backlog Item Prioritization Tool

    3. Build a product roadmap

    Define standards, ownership for your backlog to effectively communicate your strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 3: Build a Product Roadmap
    • Product Roadmap Tool

    4. Release and deliver value

    Understand what to consider when planning your next release.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 4: Release and Deliver Value

    5. Communicate the strategy – make it happen

    Build a plan for communicating and updating your strategy and where to go next.

    • Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision – Phase 5: Communicate the Strategy – Make It Happen!

    Infographic

    Workshop: Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define a Digital Product Vision

    The Purpose

    Understand the elements of a good product vision and the pieces that back it up.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Provide a great foundation for an actionable vision and goals people can align to.

    Activities

    1.1 Build out the elements of an effective digital product vision

    Outputs

    Completed product vision definition for a familiar product via the product canvas

    2 Build a Better Backlog

    The Purpose

    Define the standards and approaches to populate your product backlog that support your vision and overall strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized backlog with quality throughout that enables alignment and the operationalization of the overall strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Introduction to key activities required to support your digital product vision

    2.2 What do we mean by a quality backlog?

    2.3 Explore backlog structure and standards

    2.4 Define backlog data, content, and quality filters

    Outputs

    Articulate the activities required to support the population and validation of your backlog

    An understanding of what it means to create a quality backlog (quality filters)

    Defining the structural elements of your backlog that need to be considered

    Defining the content of your backlog and quality standards

    3 Build a Product Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Define standards and procedures for creating and updating your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Enable your team to create a product roadmap to communicate your product strategy in support of your digital product vision.

    Activities

    3.1 Disambiguating backlogs vs. roadmaps

    3.2 Defining audiences, accountability, and roadmap communications

    3.3 Exploring roadmap visualizations

    Outputs

    Understand the difference between a roadmap and a backlog

    Roadmap standards and agreed-to accountability for roadmaps

    Understand the different ways to visualize your roadmap and select what is relevant to your context

    4 Define Your Release, Communication, and Next Steps

    The Purpose

    Build a release plan aligned to your roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand what goes into defining a release via the release canvas.

    Considerations in communication of your strategy.

    Understand how to frame your vision to enable the communication of your strategy (via an executive summary).

    Activities

    4.1 Lay out your release plan

    4.2 How to introduce your product vision

    4.3 Communicate changes to your strategy

    4.4 Where do we get started?

    Outputs

    Release canvas

    An executive summary used to introduce other parties to your product vision

    Specifics on communication of the changes to your roadmap

    Your first step to getting started

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}274|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $62,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture Domains
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-domains
    • A mature EA function is increasingly becoming an organizational priority to drive innovation, provide insight, and define digital capabilities.
    • Proliferation of digital technology has increased complexity, straining the EA function to deliver insights.
    • An EA tool increases the efficiency with which the EA function can deliver insights, but a large number of organizations have not a selected an EA tool that suits their needs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • EA tool value largely comes from tying organizational context and requirements to the selection process.
    • Organizations that have selected an EA tool often fail to have it adopted and show its true value. To ensure successful adoption and value delivery, the EA tool selection process must account for the needs of business stakeholders and tool users.

    Impact and Result

    • Link the need for the EA tool to your organization’s EA value proposition. The connection enables the EA tool to address the future needs of stakeholders and the design style of the EA team.
    • Use Info-Tech’s EA Solution Recommendation Tool to create a shortlist of EA tools that is suited to the preferences of the organization.
    • Gather additional information on the shortlist of EA tool vendors to narrow down the selection using the EA Tool Request for Information Template.

    Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should procure an EA tool in the digital age, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Executive Brief
    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phases 1-3

    1. Make the case

    Decide if an EA tool is needed in your organization and define the requirements of EA tool users.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 1: Make the Case
    • EA Value Proposition Template
    • EA Tool User Requirements Template

    2. Shortlist EA tools

    Determine your organization’s preferences in terms of product capabilities and vendor characteristics.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 2: Shortlist EA Tools
    • EA Solution Recommendation Tool

    3. Select and communicate the process

    Gather information on shortlisted vendors and make your final decision.

    • Select an EA Tool Based on Business and User Need – Phase 3: Select and Communicate the Process
    • EA Tool Request for Information Template
    • EA Tool Demo Script Template
    • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template
    • EA Tool Selection Process Template
    [infographic]

    Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}59|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $32,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Audit defense starts long before you get audited. Negotiating your vendors’ audit rights and maintaining a documented consolidated licensing position ensure that you are not blindsided by a sudden audit request.
    • Notification of an impending audit can cause panic. Don't panic. While the notification will be full of strong language, your best chance of success is to take control of the situation. Prepare a measured response that buys you enough time to get your house in order before you let the vendor in.
    • If a free software asset review sounds too good to be true, then it probably is. If a vendor or one of its partners offers up a free software asset management engagement, they aren’t doing so out of the goodness of their heart — they expect to recoup their costs (and then some) from identified license discrepancies.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The amount of business disruption depends on the scope of the audit, and the size and complexity of the organization coupled with the contractual audit clause in the contract.
    • These highly visible failures can be prevented through effective software asset management practices.
    • As complexity of licensing increases, so do penalties. If the environment is highly complex, prioritize effort by likelihood of audit and spend.
    • Ensure electronic records exist for license documentation to provide fast access for audit and information requests
    • Verify accuracy of discovered data. Ensure all devices on the network are being audited. Without a complete discovery process, data will always be inaccurate.

    Impact and Result

    • Being able to respond quickly with accurate data is critical. When deadlines are tight, and internal resources don’t exist, hire a third party as their experience will allow a faster response.
    • Negotiate terms of the audit such as deadlines, proof of license entitlement, and who will complete the audit.
    • Create a methodology to quickly and efficiently respond to audit requests.
    • Conduct annual internal audits.
    • Have a designated cross-functional IT audit team.
    • Prepare documentation in advance.
    • Manage audit logistics to minimize business disruption.
    • Dispute unwarranted findings.

    Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should be prepared and ready to defend against a software audit, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prevent an audit

    Begin your proactive audit management journey and leverage value from your software asset management program.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit – Phase 1: Prevent an Audit
    • Audit Defense Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Effective Licensing Position Tool
    • Audit Defence RACI Template

    2. Prepare for an audit

    Prepare for an audit by effectively scoping and consolidating organizational response.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit – Phase 2: Prepare for an Audit
    • Software Audit Scoping Email Template
    • Audit Defense Readiness Assessment

    3. Conduct the audit

    Execute the audit in a way that preserves valuable relationships while accounting for vendor specific criteria.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit – Phase 3: Conduct an Audit
    • Software Audit Launch Email Template

    4. Manage post-audit activities

    Conduct negotiations, settle on remuneration, and close out the audit.

    • Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit - Phase 4: Manage Post-Audit Activities
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Prepare and Defend Against a Software Audit

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prevent an Audit

    The Purpose

    Kick off the project

    Identify challenges and red flags

    Determine maturity and outline internal audit

    Clarify stakeholder responsibilities

    Build and structure audit team

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Leverage value from your audit management program

    Begin your proactive audit management journey

    A documented consolidated licensing position, which ensures that you are not blindsided by a sudden audit request

    Activities

    1.1 Perform a maturity assessment of the current environment

    1.2 Classify licensing contracts/vendors

    1.3 Conduct a software inventory

    1.4 Meter application usage

    1.5 Manual checks

    1.6 Gather software licensing data

    1.7 Reconcile licenses

    1.8 Create your audit team and assign accountability

    Outputs

    Maturity assessment

    Effective license position/license reconciliation

    Audit team RACI chart

    2 Prepare for an Audit

    The Purpose

    Create a strategy for audit response

    Know the types of requests

    Scope the engagement

    Understand scheduling challenges

    Know roles and responsibilities

    Understand common audit pitfalls

    Define audit goals

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Take control of the situation and prepare a measured response

    A dedicated team responsible for all audit-related activities

    A formalized audit plan containing team responsibilities and audit conduct policies

    Activities

    2.1 Use Info-Tech’s readiness assessment template

    2.2 Define the scope of the audit

    Outputs

    Readiness assessment

    Audit scoping email template

    3 Conduct the Audit

    The Purpose

    Overview of process conducted

    Kick-off and self-assessment

    Identify documentation requirements

    Prepare required documentation

    Data validation process

    Provide resources to enable the auditor

    Tailor audit management to vendor compliance position

    Enforce best-practice audit behaviors

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A successful audit with minimal impact on IT resources

    Reduced severity of audit findings

    Activities

    3.1 Communicate audit commencement to staff

    Outputs

    Audit launch email template

    4 Manage Post-Audit Activities

    The Purpose

    Clarify auditor findings and recommendations

    Access severity of audit findings

    Develop a plan for refuting unwarranted findings

    Disclose findings to management

    Analyze opportunities for remediation

    Provide remediation options and present potential solutions

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ensure your audit was productive and beneficial

    Improve your ability to manage audits

    Come to a consensus on which findings truly necessitate organizational change

    Activities

    4.1 Don't accept the penalties; negotiate with vendors

    4.2 Close the audit and assess the financial impact

    Outputs

    A consensus on which findings truly necessitate organizational change

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}201|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 3 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • The desire for rapid decision making is increasing and the complexity of data sources is growing; business users want access to several new data sources, but in a way that is controlled and easily consumable.
    • Organizations may understand the transformative potential of a big data initiative, but struggle to make the transition from the awareness of its importance to identifying a concrete use case for a pilot project.
    • The big data ecosystem is crowded and confusing, and a lack of understanding of that ecosystem may cause a paralysis for organizations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Big data is simply data. With technological advances, what was once considered big data is now more approachable for all organizations irrespective of size.
    • The variety element is the key to unlocking big data value. Drill down into your specific use cases more effectively by focusing on what kind of data you should use.
    • Big data is about deep analytics. Deep doesn’t mean difficult. Visualization of data, integrating new data, and understanding associations are ways to deepen your analytics.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish a foundational understanding of what big data entails and what the implications of its different elements are for your organization.
    • Confirm your current maturity for taking on a big data initiative, and make considerations for core data management practices in the context of incorporating big data.
    • Avoid boiling the ocean by pinpointing use cases by industry and functional unit, followed by identifying the most essential data sources and elements that will enable the initiative.
    • Leverage a repeatable pilot project framework to build out a successful first initiative and implement future projects en-route to evolving a big data program.

    Leverage Big Data by Starting Small Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should leverage big data, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Undergo big data education

    Build a foundational understanding of the current big data landscape.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 1: Undergo Big Data Education

    2. Assess big data readiness

    Appraise current capabilities for handling a big data initiative and revisit the key data management practices that will enable big data success.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 2: Assess Big Data Readiness
    • Big Data Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. Pinpoint a killer big data use case

    Armed with Info-Tech’s variety dimension framework, identify the top use cases and the data sources/elements that will power the initiative.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 3: Pinpoint a Killer Big Data Use Case
    • Big Data Use-Case Suggestion Tool

    4. Structure a big data proof-of-concept project

    Leverage a repeatable framework to detail the core components of the pilot project.

    • Leverage Big Data by Starting Small – Phase 4: Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project
    • Big Data Work Breakdown Structure Template
    • Data Scientist
    • Big Data Cost/Benefit Tool
    • Big Data Stakeholder Presentation Template
    • Big Data Communication Tracking Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Leverage Big Data by Starting Small

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Undergo Big Data Education

    The Purpose

    Understand the basic elements of big data and its relationship to traditional business intelligence.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common, foundational knowledge of what big data entails.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine which of the four Vs is most important to your organization.

    1.2 Explore new data through a social lens.

    1.3 Brainstorm new opportunities for enhancing current reporting assets with big data sources.

    Outputs

    Relative importance of the four Vs from IT and business perspectives

    High-level improvement ideas to report artifacts using new data sources

    2 Assess Your Big Data Readiness

    The Purpose

    Establish an understanding of current maturity for taking on big data, as well as revisiting essential data management practices.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Concrete idea of current capabilities.

    Recommended actions for developing big data maturity.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine your organization’s current big data maturity level.

    2.2 Plan for big data management.

    Outputs

    Established current state maturity

    Foundational understanding of data management practices in the context of a big data initiative

    3 Pinpoint Your Killer Big Data Use Case

    The Purpose

    Explore a plethora of potential use cases at the industry and business unit level, followed by using the variety element of big data to identify the highest value initiative(s) within your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    In-depth characterization of a pilot big data initiative that is thoroughly informed by the business context.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify big data use cases at the industry and/or departmental levels.

    3.2 Conduct big data brainstorming sessions in collaboration with business stakeholders to refine use cases.

    3.3 Revisit the variety dimension framework to scope your big data initiative in further detail.

    3.4 Create an organizational 4-column data flow model with your big data sources/elements.

    3.5 Evaluate data sources by considering business value and risk.

    3.6 Perform a value-effort assessment to prioritize your initiatives.

    Outputs

    Potential big data use cases

    Potential initiatives rooted in the business context and identification of valuable data sources

    Identification of specific data sources and data elements

    Characterization of data sources/elements by value and risk

    Prioritization of big data use cases

    4 Structure a Big Data Proof-of-Concept Project

    The Purpose

    Put together the core components of the pilot project and set the stage for enterprise-wide support.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A repeatable framework for implementing subsequent big data initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Construct a work breakdown structure for the pilot project.

    4.2 Determine your project’s need for a data scientist.

    4.3 Establish the staffing model for your pilot project.

    4.4 Perform a detailed cost/benefit analysis.

    4.5 Make architectural considerations for supporting the big data initiative.

    Outputs

    Comprehensive list of tasks for implementing the pilot project

    Decision on whether or not a data scientist is needed, and where data science capabilities will be sourced

    RACI chart for the project

    Big data pilot cost/benefit summary

    Customized, high-level architectural model that incorporates technologies that support big data

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}582|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
    • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
    • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Enterprise architecture is not a technical function – it should be business-value driven and forward looking, positioning organizational assets in favor of long-term strategy rather than short-term tactics.

    Impact and Result

    • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
    • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
    • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
    • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our Executive Brief to find out how implementing a successful enterprise architecture governance framework can benefit your organization.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Current State of EA Governance

    Identify the organization’s standing in terms of the enterprise architecture practice, and know the gaps and what the EA practice needs to fulfill to create a good governance framework.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 1: Current State of EA Governance
    • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    2. EA Fundamentals

    Understand the EA fundamentals and then refresh them to better align the EA practice with the organization and create business benefit.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 2: EA Fundamentals
    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template
    • EA Principles Template

    3. Engagement Model

    Analyze the IT operating model and identify EA’s role at each stage; refine it to promote effective EA engagement upfront in the early stages of the IT operating model.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 3: Engagement Model
    • EA Engagement Model Template

    4. EA Governing Bodies

    Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies, and creating an architecture review process.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 4: EA Governing Bodies
    • Architecture Board Charter Template
    • Architecture Review Process Template

    5. EA Policy

    Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 5: EA Policy
    • EA Policy Template
    • EA Assessment Checklist Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

    6. Architectural Standards

    Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability. Develop a process to update the architectural standards to ensure relevancy and promote process transparency.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 6: Architectural Standards
    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    7. Communication Plan

    Craft a plan to engage the relevant stakeholders, ascertain the benefits of the initiative, and identify the various communication methods in order to maximize the chances of success.

    • Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework – Phase 7: Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Current State of EA governance (Pre-workshop)

    The Purpose

    Conduct stakeholder interviews to understand current state of EA practice and prioritize gaps for EA governance based on organizational complexity.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized list of actions to arrive at the target state based on the complexity of the organization

    Activities

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity.

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps.

    1.4 Conduct senior management interviews.

    Outputs

    Organizational complexity score

    EA governance current state and prioritized list of EA governance component gaps

    Stakeholder perception of the EA practice

    2 EA Fundamentals and Engagement Model

    The Purpose

    Refine EA fundamentals to align the EA practice with the organization and identify EA touchpoints to provide guidance for projects.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment of EA goals and objectives with the goals and objectives of the organization

    Early involvement of EA in the IT operating model

    Activities

    2.1 Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools.

    2.2 Craft the EA vision and mission.

    2.3 Develop the EA principles.

    2.4 Identify the EA goals.

    2.5 Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

    Outputs

    EA vision and mission statement

    EA principles

    EA goals and measures

    Identified EA engagement touchpoints and EA level of involvement

    3 EA Governing Bodies

    The Purpose

    Set up EA governing bodies to provide guidance and foster a collaborative environment by identifying the correct number of EA governing bodies, defining the game plan to initialize the governing bodies and creating an architecture review process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models while no additional layers of bureaucracy are introduced

    Activities

    3.1 Identify the number of governing bodies.

    3.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.

    3.3 Define the architecture review process.

    Outputs

    Architecture board structure and coverage

    Identified architecture review template

    4 EA Policy

    The Purpose

    Create an EA policy to provide a set of guidelines designed to direct and constrain the architecture actions of the organization in the pursuit of its goals in order to improve architecture compliance and drive business value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved architecture compliance, which ties investments to business value and provides guidance to architecture practitioners

    Activities

    4.1 Define the scope.

    4.2 Identify the target audience.

    4.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.

    4.4 Craft an assessment checklist.

    Outputs

    Defined scope

    Inclusion and exclusion criteria for project review

    Architecture assessment checklist

    5 Architectural Standards and Communication Plan

    The Purpose

    Define architecture standards to facilitate information exchange, improve collaboration, and provide stability.

    Craft a communication plan to implement the new EA governance framework in order to maximize the chances of success.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Consistent development of architecture, increased information exchange between stakeholders

    Improved process transparency

    Improved stakeholder engagement

    Activities

    5.1 Identify and standardize EA work products.

    5.2 Classifying the architectural standards.

    5.3 Identifying the custodian of standards.

    5.4 Update the standards.

    5.5 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

    5.6 Create a communication plan.

    Outputs

    Identified set of EA work products to standardize

    Architecture information taxonomy

    Identified set of custodian of standards

    Standard update process

    List of EA governance initiatives

    Communication plan for EA governance initiatives

    Further reading

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Focus on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    "Enterprise architecture is not a technology concept, rather it is the foundation on which businesses orient themselves to create and capture value in the marketplace. Designing architecture is not a simple task and creating organizations for the future requires forward thinking and rigorous planning.

    Architecture processes that are supposed to help facilitate discussions and drive option analysis are often seen as an unnecessary overhead. The negative perception is due to enterprise architecture groups being overly prescriptive rather than providing a set of options that guide and constrain solutions at the same time.

    EA groups should do away with the direct and control mindset and change to a collaborate and mentor mindset. As part of the architecture governance, EA teams should provide an option set that constrains design choices, and also be open to changes to standards or best practices. "

    Gopi Bheemavarapu, Sr. Manager, CIO Advisory Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Understand the importance of enterprise architecture (EA) governance and how to apply it to guide architectural decisions.
    • Enhance your understanding of the organization’s current EA governance and identify areas for improvement.
    • Optimize your EA engagement model to maximize value creation.
    • Learn how to set up the optimal number of governance bodies in order to avoid bureaucratizing the organization.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Business Relationship Managers
    • Business Analysts
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers
    • IT Analysts
    • Quality Assurance Leads
    • Software Developers

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Give an overview of enterprise architecture governance
    • Clarity on the role of enterprise architecture team

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Deployed solutions do not meet business objectives resulting in expensive and extensive rework.
    • Each department acts independently without any regular EA touchpoints.
    • Organizations practice project-level architecture as opposed to enterprise architecture.

    Complication

    • EA governance is perceived as an unnecessary layer of bureaucracy because business benefits are poorly communicated.
    • The organization doesn’t have a formalized EA practice.
    • Where an EA practice exists, employees are unsure of EA’s roles and responsibilities.

    Resolution

    • Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.
    • Right-sized. Re-use existing process checkpoints, rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.
    • Defined and measured process. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.
    • Strike the right balance. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology imperatives.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enterprise architecture is critical to ensuring that an organization has the solid IT foundation it needs to efficiently enable the achievement of its current and future strategic goals rather than focusing on short-term tactical gains.

    What is enterprise architecture governance?

    An architecture governance process is the set of activities an organization executes to ensure that decisions are made and accountability is enforced during the execution of its architecture strategy. (Hopkins, “The Essential EA Toolkit.”)

    EA governance includes the following:

    • Implement a system of controls over the creation and monitoring of all architectural components.
    • Ensure effective introduction, implementation, and evolution of architectures within the organization.
    • Implement a system to ensure compliance with internal and external standards and regulatory obligations.
    • Develop practices that ensure accountability to a clearly identified stakeholder community, both inside and outside the organization.

    (TOGAF)

    IT governance sets direction through prioritization and decision making, and monitors overall IT performance.

    The image shows a circle set within a larger circle. The inner circle is connected to the bottom of the larger circle. The inner circle is labelled EA Governance and the larger circle is labelled IT Governance.

    EA governance ensures that optimal architectural design choices are being made that focus on long-term value creation.

    Harness the benefits of an optimized EA governance

    Core benefits of EA governance are seen through:

    Value creation

    Effective EA governance ensures alignment between organizational investments and corporate strategic goals and objectives.

    Cost reduction

    Architecture standards provide guidance to identify opportunities for reuse and eliminate redundancies in an organization.

    Risk optimization

    Architecture review processes and assessment checklists ensure that solutions are within the acceptable risk levels of the organization.

    EA governance is difficult to structure appropriately, but having an effective structure will allow you to:

    • Achieve business strategy through faster time-to-market innovations and capabilities.
    • Reduced transaction costs with more consistent business processes and information across business units.
    • Lower IT costs due to better traceability, faster design, and lower risk.
    • Link IT investments to organizational strategies and objectives
    • Integrate and institutionalizes IT best practices.
    • Enable the organization to take full advantage of its information, infrastructure, and hardware and software assets.
    • Support regulatory as well as best practice requirements such as auditability, security, responsibility, and accountability.

    Organizations that have implemented EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA programs

    Modern day CIOs of high-performing organizations use EA as a strategic planning discipline to improve business-IT alignment, enable innovation, and link business and IT strategies to execution.

    Recent Info-Tech research found that organizations that establish EA governance realize greater benefits from their EA initiatives.

    The image shows a bar graph, with Impact from EA on the Y-axis, and different initiatives listed on the X-axis. Each initiative has two bars connected to it, with a blue bar representing answers of No and the grey bar representing answers of Yes.

    (Info-Tech Research Group, N=89)

    Measure EA governance implementation effectiveness

    Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an “enabler” of business outcomes to senior executives.

    EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
    Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

    Enterprise Architecture Management

    • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

    IT Investment Portfolio Management

    • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

    Solution Development

    • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
    • Number of building blocks reused.

    Operations Management

    • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

    Business Value

    • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
    • Decreased time to production.
    • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

    An insurance provider adopts a value-focused, right-sized EA governance program

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The insurance sector has been undergoing major changes, and as a reaction, businesses within the sector have been embracing technology to provide innovative solutions.

    The head of EA in a major insurance provider (henceforth to be referred to as “INSPRO01”) was given the mandate to ensure that solutions are architected right the first time to maximize reuse and reduce technology debt. The EA group was at a critical point – to demonstrate business value or become irrelevant.

    Complication

    The project management office had been accountable for solution architecture and had placed emphasis on short-term project cost savings at the expense of long term durability.

    There was a lack of awareness of the Enterprise Architecture group within INSPRO01, and people misunderstood the roles and responsibilities of the EA team.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped define the responsibilities of the EA team and clarify the differences between the role of a Solution Architect vs. Enterprise Architect.

    The EA team was able to make the case for change in the project management practices to ensure architectures are reviewed and approved prior to implementation.

    As a result, INSPRO01 saw substantial increases in reuse opportunities and thereby derived more value from its technology investments.

    Success factors for EA governance

    The success of any EA governance initiative revolves around adopting best practices, setting up repeatable processes, and establishing appropriate controls.

    1. Develop best practices for managing architecture policies, procedures, roles, skills, and organizational structures.
    2. Establish organizational responsibilities and structures to support the architecture governance processes.
    3. Management of criteria for the control of the architecture governance processes, dispensations, compliance assessments, and SLAs.

    Info-Tech’s approach to EA governance

    Our best-practice approach is grounded in TOGAF and enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Value-focused. Focus EA governance on helping the organization achieve business benefits. Promote EA’s contribution in realizing business value.

    Right-sized. Insert EA governance into existing process checkpoints rather than creating new ones. Clearly define EA governance inclusion criteria for projects.

    Measured. Define metrics to measure EA’s performance, and integrate EA governance with other governance processes such as project governance. Also clearly define the EA governing bodies’ composition, domain, inputs, and outputs.

    Balanced. Adopt architecture principles that strikes the right balance between business and technology.

    Info-Tech’s EA governance framework

    Info-Tech’s architectural governance framework provides a value-focused, right-sized approach with a strong emphasis on process standardization, repeatability, and sustainability.

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    Use Info-Tech’s templates to complete this project

    1. Current state of EA governance
      • EA Capability - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
      • EA Governance Assessment Tool
    2. EA fundamentals
      • EA Vision and Mission Template
      • EA Goals and Measures Template
      • EA Principles Template
    3. Engagement model
      • EA Engagement Model Template
    4. EA governing bodies
      • Architecture Board Charter Template
      • Architecture Review Process Template
    5. EA policy
      • EA Policy Template
      • Architecture Assessment Checklist Template
      • Compliance Waiver Process Template
      • Compliance Waiver Form Template
    6. Architectural standards
      • Architecture Standards Update Process Template
    7. Communication Plan
      • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
      • EA Governance Framework Template

    As you move through the project, capture your progress with a summary in the EA Governance Framework Template.

    Download the EA Governance Framework Template document for use throughout this project.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (1/2)

    Current state of EA governance EA Fundamentals Engagement Model EA Governing Bodies
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

    2.1 Craft the EA vision and mission

    2.2 Develop the EA principles

    2.3 Identify the EA goals

    3.1 Build the case for EA engagement

    3.2 Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

    4.1 Identify the number of governing bodies

    4.2 Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies

    4.3 Define the architecture review process

    Guided Implementations
    • Determine organizational complexity
    • Assess current state of EA governance
    • Develop the EA fundamentals
    • Review the EA fundamentals
    • Review the current IT operating model
    • Determine the target engagement model
    • Identify architecture boards and develop charters
    • Develop an architecture review process

    Phase 1 Results:

    • EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment
    • EA governance assessment

    Phase 2 Results:

    • EA vision and mission
    • EA goals and measures
    • EA principles

    Phase 3 Results:

    • EA engagement model

    Phase 4 Results:

    • Architecture board charter
    • Architecture review process

    EA governance framework – phase-by-phase outline (2/2)

    EA Policy Architectural Standards Communication Plan
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    5.1 Define the scope of EA policy

    5.2 Identify the target audience

    5.3 Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria

    5.4 Craft an assessment checklist

    6.1 Identify and standardize EA work products

    6.2 Classify the architectural standards

    6.3 Identify the custodian of standards

    6.4 Update the standards

    7.1 List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative

    7.2 Identify stakeholders

    7.3 Create a communication plan

    Guided Implementations
    • EA policy, assessment checklists, and decision types
    • Compliance waivers
    • Understand architectural standards
    • EA repository and updating the standards
    • Create a communication plan
    • Review the communication plan

    Phase 5 Results:

    • EA policy
    • Architecture assessment checklist
    • Compliance waiver process
    • Compliance waiver form

    Phase 6 Results:

    • Architecture standards update process

    Phase 7 Results:

    • Communication plan
    • EA governance framework

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Pre-workshopWorkshop Day 1Workshop Day 2Workshop Day 3Workshop Day 4
    ActivitiesCurrent state of EA governance EA fundamentals and engagement model EA governing bodies EA policy Architectural standards and

    communication plan

    1.1 Determine organizational complexity

    1.2 Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components

    1.3 Identify and prioritize gaps

    1.4 Senior management interviews

    1. Review the output of the organizational complexity and EA assessment tools
    2. Craft the EA vision and mission
    3. Develop the EA principles.
    4. Identify the EA goals
    5. Identify EA engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model
    1. Identify the number of governing bodies
    2. Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
    3. Define the architecture review process
    1. Define the scope
    2. Identify the target audience
    3. Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
    4. Craft an assessment checklist
    1. Identify and standardize EA work products
    2. Classifying the architectural standards
    3. Identifying the custodian of standards
    4. Updating the standards
    5. List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
    6. Identify stakeholders
    7. Create a communication plan
    Deliverables
    1. EA Capability - risk and complexity assessment tool
    2. EA governance assessment tool
    1. EA vision and mission template
    2. EA goals and measures template
    3. EA principles template
    4. EA engagement model template
    1. Architecture board charter template
    2. Architecture review process template
    1. EA policy template
    2. Architecture assessment checklist template
    3. Compliance waiver process template
    4. Compliance waiver form template
    1. Architecture standards update process template
    2. Communication plan template

    Phase 1

    Current State of EA Governance

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Current State of EA Governance

    1. Current State of EA Governance
    2. EA Fundamentals
    3. Engagement Model
    4. EA Governing Bodies
    5. EA Policy
    6. Architectural Standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine organizational complexity
    • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components
    • Identify and prioritize gaps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Prioritized list of gaps

    Info-Tech Insight

    Correlation is not causation – an apparent problem might be a symptom rather than a cause. Assess the organization’s current EA governance to discover the root cause and go beyond the symptoms.

    Phase 1 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Current State of EA Governance

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 1.1: Determine organizational complexity

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss how to use Info-Tech’s EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool.
    • Discuss how to complete the inputs on the EA Governance Assessment Tool.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Conduct an assessment of your organization to determine its complexity.
    • Assess the state of EA governance within your organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool
    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Step 1.2: Assess current state of EA governance

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the output of the EA governance assessment and gather feedback on your goals for the EA practice.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Discuss whether you are ready to proceed with the project.
    • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Right-size EA governance based on organizational complexity

    Determining organizational complexity is not rocket science. Use Info-Tech’s tool to quantify the complexity and use it, along with common sense, to determine the appropriate level of architecture governance.

    Info-Tech’s methodology uses six factors to determine the complexity of the organization:

    1. The size of the organization, which can often be denoted by the revenue, headcount, number of applications in use, and geographical diversity.
    2. The solution alignment factor helps indicate the degree to which various projects map to the organization’s strategy.
    3. The size and complexity of the IT infrastructure and networks.
    4. The portfolio of applications maintained by the IT organization.
    5. Key changes within the organization such as M&A, regulatory changes, or a change in business or technology leadership.
    6. Other negative influences that can adversely affect the organization.

    Determine your organization’s level of complexity

    1.1 2 hours

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Capability section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Capability – Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool to facilitate a session on determining your organization’s complexity.

    Download EA Organizational - Risk and Complexity Assessment Tool

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the results in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Understand the components of effective EA governance

    EA governance is multi-faceted and it facilitates effective use of resources to meet organizational strategic objectives through well-defined structural elements.

    EA Governance

    • Fundamentals
    • Engagement Model
    • Policy
    • Governing Bodies
    • Architectural Standards

    Components of architecture governance

    1. EA vision, mission, goals, metrics, and principles that provide a direction for the EA practice.
    2. An engagement model showing where and in what fashion EA is engaged in the IT operating model.
    3. An architecture policy formulated and enforced by the architectural governing bodies to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.
    4. Governing bodies to assess projects for compliance and provide feedback.
    5. Architectural standards that codify the EA work products to ensure consistent development of architecture.

    Next Step: Based on the organization’s complexity, conduct a current state assessment of EA governance using Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool.

    Assess the components of EA governance in your organization

    1.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Governance section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the “EA Governance Assessment Tool” to facilitate a session on identifying the best practices to be applied in your organization.

    Download Info-Tech’s EA Governance Assessment Tool

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the identified best practices in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Conduct a current state assessment to identify limitations of the existing EA governance framework

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 was planning a major transformation initiative. The organization determined that EA is a strategic function.

    The CIO had pledged support to the EA group and had given them a mandate to deliver long-term strategic architecture.

    The business leaders did not trust the EA team and believed that lack of business skills in the group put the business transformation at risk.

    Complication

    The EA group had been traditionally seen as a technology organization that helps with software design.

    The EA team lacked understanding of the business and hence there had been no common language between business and technology.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped the EA team create a set of 10 architectural principles that are business-value driven rather than technical statements.

    The team socialized the principles with the business and technology stakeholders and got their approvals.

    By applying the business focused architectural principles, the EA team was able to connect with the business leaders and gain their support.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Determine organizational complexity.
    • Conduct an assessment of the EA governance components.
    • Identify and prioritize gaps.

    Outcomes

    • Organizational complexity assessment
    • EA governance capability assessment
    • A prioritized list of capability gaps

    Phase 2

    EA Fundamentals

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Fundamentals

    1. Current State of EA Governance
    2. EA Fundamentals
    3. Engagement Model
    4. EA Governing Bodies
    5. EA Policy
    6. Architectural Standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Craft the EA vision and mission
    • Develop the EA principles.
    • Identify the EA goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance

    Info-Tech Insight

    A house divided against itself cannot stand – ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned with the organization’s goals and objectives.

    Phase 2 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: EA Fundamentals

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

    Step 2.1: Develop the EA fundamentals

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss the importance of the EA fundamentals – vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
    • Understand how to align the EA vision, mission, goals, and measures to your organization’s vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Develop the EA vision statements.
    • Craft the EA mission statements.
    • Define EA goals and measures.
    • Adopt EA principles.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Principles Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template

    Step 2.2: Review the EA fundamentals

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the EA fundamentals in conjunction with the results of the EA governance assessment tool and gather feedback.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the EA vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles.
    • Review the list of tasks and plan your next steps.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Vision and Mission Template
    • EA Principles Template
    • EA Goals and Measures Template

    Fundamentals of an EA organization

    Vision, mission, goals and measures, and principles form the foundation of the EA function.

    Factors to consider when developing the vision and mission statements

    The vision and mission statements provide strategic direction to the EA team. These statements should be created based on the business and technology drivers in the organization.

    Business Drivers

    • Business drivers are factors that determine, or cause, an increase in value or major improvement of a business.
    • Examples of business drivers include:
      • Increased revenue
      • Customer retention
      • Salesforce effectiveness
      • Innovation

    Technology Drivers

    • Technology drivers are factors that are vital for the continued success and growth of a business using effective technologies.
    • Examples of technology drivers include:
      • Enterprise integration
      • Information security
      • Portability
      • Interoperability

    "The very essence of leadership is [that] you have a vision. It's got to be a vision you articulate clearly and forcefully on every occasion. You can't blow an uncertain trumpet." – Theodore Hesburgh

    Develop vision, mission, goals, measures, and principles to define the EA capability direction and purpose

    EA capability vision statement

    Articulates the desired future state of EA capability expressed in the present tense.

    • What will be the role of EA capability?
    • How will EA capability be perceived?

    Example: To be recognized by both the business and IT as a trusted partner that drives [Company Name]’s effectiveness, efficiency, and agility.

    EA capability mission statement

    Articulates the fundamental purpose of the EA capability.

    • Why does EA capability exist?
    • What does EA capability do to realize its vision?
    • Who are the key customers of the EA capability?

    Example: Define target enterprise architecture for [Company Name], identify solution opportunities, inform IT investment management, and direct solution development, acquisition, and operation compliance.

    EA capability goals and measures

    EA capability goals define specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. EA capability measures define how to validate the achievement of the EA capability goals.

    Example:

    Goal: Improve reuse of IT assets at [Company Name].

    Measures:

    • The number of building blocks available for reuse.
    • Percent of projects that utilized existing building blocks.
    • Estimated efficiency gain (= effort to create a building block * reuse count).

    EA principles

    EA principles are shared, long-lasting beliefs that guide the use of IT in constructing, transforming, and operating the enterprise by informing and restricting target-state enterprise architecture design, solution development, and procurement decisions.

    Example:

    • EA principle name: Reuse.
    • Statement: Maximize reuse of existing assets.
    • Rationale: Reuse prevents duplication of development and support efforts, increasing efficiency, and agility.
    • Implications: Define architecture and solution building blocks and ensure their consistent application.

    EA principles guide decision making

    Policies can be seen as “the letter of the law,” whereas EA principles summarize “the spirit of the law.”

    The image shows a graphic with EA Principles listed at the top, with an arrow pointing down to Decisions on the use of IT. At the bottom are domain-specific policies, with two arrows pointing upwards: the arrow on the left is labelled direct, and the arrow on the right is labelled control. The arrow points up to the label Decisions on the use of IT. On the left, there is an arrow pointing both up and down. At the top it is labelled The spirit of the law, and at the bottom, The letter of the law. On the right, there is another arrow pointing both up and down, labelled How should decisions be made at the top and labelled Who has the accountability and authority to make decisions? at the bottom.

    Define EA capability goals and related measures that resonate with EA capability stakeholders

    EA capability goals, i.e. specific desired outcomes of an EA management process execution. Use COBIT 5, APO03 process goals, and metrics as a starting point.

    The image shows a chart titled Manage Enterprise Architecture.

    Define relevant business value measures to collect indirect evidence of EA’s contribution to business benefits

    Define key operational measures for internal use by IT and EA practitioners. Also, define business value measures that communicate and demonstrate the value of EA as an enabler of business outcomes to senior executives.

    EA performance measures (lead, operational) EA value measures (lag)
    Application of EA management process EA’s contribution to IT performance EA’s contribution to business value

    Enterprise Architecture Management

    • Number of months since the last review of target state EA blueprints.

    IT Investment Portfolio Management

    • Percentage of projects that were identified and proposed by EA.

    Solution Development

    • Number of projects that passed EA reviews.
    • Number of building blocks reused.

    Operations Management

    • Reduction in the number of applications with overlapping functionality.

    Business Value

    • Lower non-discretionary IT spend.
    • Decreased time to production.
    • Higher satisfaction of IT-enabled services.

    Refine the organization’s EA fundamentals

    2.1 2 hrs

    Input

    • Group consensus on the current state of EA competencies.

    Output

    • A list of gaps that need to be addressed for EA governance competencies.

    Materials

    • Info-Tech’s EA assessment tool, a computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents with four sections highlighted, beginning with EA Vision Statement and ending with EA Goals and Measures.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the three templates and hold a working session to facilitate a session on creating EA fundamentals.

    Download the EA Vision and Mission Template, the EA Principles Template, and the EA Goals and Measures Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Document the final vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures within the EA Governance Framework.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Ensure that the EA fundamentals are aligned to the organizational needs

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The EA group at INSPRO01 was being pulled in multiple directions with requests ranging from architecture review to solution design to code reviews.

    Project level architecture was being practiced with no clarity on the end goal. This led to EA being viewed as just another IT function without any added benefits.

    Info-Tech recommended that the EA team ensure that the fundamentals (vision, mission, principles, goals, and measures) reflect what the team aspired to achieve before fixing any of the process concerns.

    Complication

    The EA team was mostly comprised of technical people and hence the best practices outlined were not driven by business value.

    The team had no documented vision and mission statements in place. In addition, the existing goals and measures were not tied to the business strategic objectives.

    The team had architectural principles documented, but there were too many and they were very technical in nature.

    Result

    With Info-Tech’s guidance, the team developed a vision and mission statement to succinctly communicate the purpose of the EA function.

    The team also reduced and simplified the EA principles to make sure they were value driven and communicated in business terms.

    Finally, the team proposed goals and measures to track the performance of the EA team.

    With the fundamentals in place, the team was able to show the value of EA and gain organization-wide acceptance.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Craft the EA vision and mission.
    • Develop the EA principles.
    • Identify the EA goals.

    Outcomes

    • Refined set of EA fundamentals to support the building of EA governance.

    Phase 3

    Engagement Model

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Engagement Model

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build the case for EA engagement
    • Engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
    • Target EA engagement model

    Info-Tech Insight

    Perform due diligence prior to decision making. Use the EA Engagement Model to promote conversations between stage gate meetings as opposed to having the conversation during the stage gate meetings.

    Phase 3 guided implementation outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: EA engagement model

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 3.1 Review the current IT operating model

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review Info-Tech’s IT operating model.
    • Understand how to document your organization’s IT operating model.
    • Document EA’s current role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document your organization’s IT operating model.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Engagement Model Template

    Step 3.2: Determine the target engagement model

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your organization’s current state IT operating model.
    • Review your EA’s role and responsibility at each stage of the IT operating model.
    • Document the role and responsibility of EA in the future state.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Document EA’s future role within each stage of your organization’s IT operating model.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Engagement Model Template.

    The three pillars of EA Engagement

    Effective EA engagement revolves around three basic principles – generating business benefits, creating adaptable models, and being able to replicate the process across the organization.

    Business Value Driven

    Focus on generating business value from organizational investments.

    Repeatable

    Process should be standardized, transparent, and repeatable so that it can be consistently applied across the organization.

    Flexible

    Accommodate the varying needs of projects of different sizes.

    Where these pillars meet: Advocates long-term strategic vs. short-term tactical solutions.

    EA interaction points within the IT operating model

    EA’s engagement in each stage within the plan, build, and run phases should be clearly defined and communicated.

    Plan Strategy Development Business Planning Conceptualization Portfolio Management
    Build Requirements Solution Design Application Development/ Procurement Quality Assurance
    Run Deploy Operate

    Document the organization’s current IT operating model

    3.1 2-3 hr

    Input

    • IT project lifecycle

    Output

    • Organization’s current IT operating model.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, IT department leads, business leaders.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to document the current IT operating model. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Map out the IT operating model.

    1. Find a project that was just deployed within the organization and backtrack every step of the way to the strategy development that resulted in the conception of the project.
    2. Interview the personnel involved with each step of the process to get a sense of whether or not projects usually move to deployment going through these steps.
    3. Review Info-Tech’s best-practice IT operating model presented in the EA Engagement Model Template, and add or remove any steps to the existing organization’s IT operating model as necessary. Document the finalized steps of the IT operating model.

    2. Determine EA’s current role in the operating model.

    1. Interview EA personnel through each step of the process and ask them their role. This is to get a sense of the type of input that EA is having into each step of the process.
    2. Using the EA Engagement Model Template, document the current role of EA in each step of the organization’s IT operation as you complete the interviews.

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template to document the organization’s current IT operating model.

    Define RACI in every stage of the IT operating model (e.g. EA role in strategy development phase of the IT operating model is presented below)

    Strategy Development

    Also known as strategic planning, strategy development is fundamental to creating and running a business. It involves the creation of a longer-term game plan or vision that sets specific goals and objectives for a business.

    R Those in charge of performing the task. These are the people actively involved in the completion of the required work. Business VPs, EA, IT directors R
    A The one ultimately answerable for the correct and thorough completion of the deliverable or task, and the one who delegates the work to those responsible. CEO A
    C Those whose opinions are sought before a decision is made, and with whom there is two-way communication. PMO, Line managers, etc. C
    I Those who are kept up to date on progress, and with whom there is one-way communication. Development managers, etc. I

    Next Step: Similarly define the RACI for each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

    Best practices on the role of EA within the IT operating model

    Plan

    Strategy Development

    C

    Business Planning

    C

    Conceptualization

    A

    Portfolio Management

    C

    Build

    Requirements

    C

    Solution Design

    R

    Application Development/ Procurement

    R

    Quality Assurance

    I

    Run

    Deploy

    I

    Operate

    I

    Next Step: Define the role of EA in each stage of the IT operating model; refer to the activity slide for prompts.

    Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

    3.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Organization’s IT operating model.

    Output

    • Organization’s EA engagement model.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business leaders, IT department leaders.

    The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Engagement Model Template with the EA Engagement Summary section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template and hold a working session to define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model.

    Download the EA Engagement Model Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Document the target state role of EA within the EA Governance Framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template


    Design an EA engagement model to formalize EA’s role within the IT operating model

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 had a high IT cost structure with looming technology debt due to a preference for short-term tactical gains over long-term solutions.

    The business satisfaction with IT was at an all-time low due to expensive solutions that did not meet business needs.

    INSPRO01’s technology landscape was in disarray with many overlapping systems and interoperability issues.

    Complication

    No single team within the organization had an end-to-end perspective all the way from strategy to project execution. A lot of information was being lost in handoffs between different teams.

    This led to inconsistent design/solution patterns being applied. Investment decisions had not been grounded in reality and this often led to cost overruns.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped INSPRO01 identify opportunities for EA team engagement at different stages of the IT operating model. EA’s role within each stage was clearly defined and documented.

    With Info-Tech’s help, the EA team successfully made the case for engagement upfront during strategy development rather than during project execution.

    The increased transparency enabled the EA team to ensure that investments were aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Build the case for EA engagement.
    • Identify engagement touchpoints within the IT operating model.

    Outcomes

    • Summary of the assessment of the current EA engagement model
    • Target EA engagement model

    Phase 4

    EA Governing Bodies

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Governing Bodies

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify the number of governing bodies
    • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies
    • Define the architecture review process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Charter definition for each EA governance board

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use architecture governance like a scalpel rather than a hatchet. Implement governing bodies to provide guidance rather than act as a police force.

    Phase 4 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 4: Create or identify EA governing bodies

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Step 4.1: Identify architecture boards and develop charters

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Understand the factors influencing the number of governing bodies required for an organization.
    • Understand the components of a governing body charter.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify how many governing bodies are needed.
    • Define EA governing body composition, meeting frequency, and domain of coverage.
    • Define the inputs and outputs of each EA governing body.
    • Identify mandatory inclusion criteria.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Board Charter Template

    Step 4.2: Develop an architecture review process

    Follow-up with an analyst call:

    • Review the number of boards identified for your organization and gather feedback.
    • Review the charters developed for each governing body and gather feedback.
    • Understand the various factors that impact the architecture review process.
    • Review Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the charters for governing bodies.
    • Develop the architecture review process for your organization.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Review Process Template

    Factors that determine the number of architectural boards required

    The primary purpose of architecture boards is to ensure that business benefits are maximized and solution design is within the options set forth by the architectural reference models without introducing additional layers of bureaucracy.

    The optimal number of architecture boards required in an organization is a function of the following factors:

    • EA organization model
      • Distributed
      • Federated
      • Centralized
    • Architecture domains Maturity of architecture domains
    • Project throughput

    Commonly observed architecture boards:

    • Architecture Review Board
    • Technical Architecture Committee
    • Data Architecture Review Board
    • Infrastructure Architecture Review Board
    • Security Architecture Review Board

    Info-Tech Insight

    Before building out a new governance board, start small by repurposing existing forums by adding architecture as an agenda item. As the items for review increase consider introducing dedicated governing bodies.

    EA organization model drives the architecture governance structure

    EA teams can be organized in three ways – distributed, federated, and centralized. Each model has its own strengths and weaknesses. EA governance must be structured in a way such that the strengths are harvested and the weaknesses are mitigated.

    Distributed Federated Centralized
    EA org. structure
    • No overarching EA team exists and segment architects report to line of business (LOB) executives.
    • A centralized EA team exists with segment architects reporting to LOB executives and dotted-line to head of (centralized) EA.
    • A centralized EA capability exists with enterprise architects reporting to the head of EA.
    Implications
    • Produces a fragmented and disjointed collection of architectures.
    • Economies of scale are not realized.
    • High cross-silo integration effort.
    • LOB-specific approach to EA.
    • Requires dual reporting relationships.
    • Additional effort is required to coordinate centralized EA policies and blueprints with segment EA policies and blueprints.
    • Accountabilities may be unclear.
    • Can be less responsive to individual LOB needs, because the centralized EA capability must analyze needs of multiple LOBs and various trade-off options to avoid specialized, one-off solutions.
    • May impede innovation.
    Architectural boards
    • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and common services.
    • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB-specific needs.
    • Cross LOB working groups to create architecture standards, patterns and common services.
    • Cross-enterprise boards to ensure adherence to enterprise standards and reduce integration costs.
    • Local boards to support responsiveness to LOB specific needs.
    • Enterprise working groups to create architecture standards, patterns, and all services.
    • Central board to ensure adherence to enterprise standards.

    Architecture domains influences the number of architecture boards required

    • An architecture review board (ARB) provides direction for domain-specific boards and acts as an escalation point. The ARB must have the right mix of both business and technology stakeholders.
    • Domain-specific boards provide a platform to have focused discussions on items specific to that domain.
    • Based on project throughput and the maturity of each domain, organizations would have to pick the optimal number of boards.
    • Architecture working groups provide a platform for cross-domain conversations to establish organization wide standards.
    Level 1 Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
    Level 2 Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
    Level 3 Architecture Working Groups Architects

    Create a game plan for the architecture boards

    • Start with a single board for each level – an architecture review board (ARB), a technical architecture committee (TAC), and architecture working groups.
    • As the organization matures and the number of requests to the TAC increase, consider creating domain-specific boards – such as business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, etc. – to handle architecture decisions pertaining to that domain.

    Start with this:

    Level 1 Architecture Review Board
    Level 2 Technical Architecture Committee
    Level 3 Architecture Working Groups

    Change to this:

    Architecture Review Board IT and Business Leaders
    Business Architecture Board Data Architecture Board Application Architecture Board Infrastructure Architecture Board Security Architecture Board IT and Business Managers
    Architecture Working Groups Architects

    Architecture boards have different objectives and activities

    The boards at each level should be set up with the correct agenda – ensure that the boards’ composition and activities reflect their objective. Use the entry criteria to communicate the agenda for their meetings.

    Architecture Review Board Technical Architecture Committee
    Objective
    • Evaluates business strategy, needs, and priorities, sets direction and acts as a decision making authority of the EA capability.
    • Directs the development of target state architecture.
    • Monitors performance and compliance of the architectural standards.
    • Monitor project solution architecture compliance to standards, regulations, EA principles, and target state EA blueprints.
    • Review EA compliance waiver requests, make recommendations, and escalate to the architecture review board (ARB).
    Composition
    • Business Leadership
    • IT Leadership
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Business Managers
    • IT Managers
    • Architects
    Activities
    • Review compliance of conceptual solution to standards.
    • Discuss the enterprise implications of the proposed solution.
    • Select and approve vendors.
    • Review detailed solution design.
    • Discuss the risks of the proposed solution.
    • Discuss the cost of the proposed solution.
    • Review and recommend vendors.
    Entry Criteria
    • Changes to IT Enterprise Technology Policy.
    • Changes to the technology management plan.
    • Approve changes to enterprise technology inventory/portfolio.
    • Ongoing operational cost impacts.
    • Detailed estimates for the solution are ready for review.
    • There are significant changes to protocols or technologies responsible for solution.
    • When the project is deviating from baselined architectures.

    Identify the number of governing bodies

    4.1 2 hrs

    Input

    • EA Vision and Mission
    • EA Engagement Model

    Output

    • A list of EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to identify the number of governing bodies. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Examine the EA organization models mentioned previously. Assess how your organization is structured, and identify whether your organization has a federated, distributed or centralized EA organization model.
    2. Reference the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide. Assess the architecture domains, and define how many there are in the organization.
    3. Architecture domains:
      1. If no defined architecture domains exist, model the number of governing bodies in the organization based on the “Start with this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
      2. If defined architecture domains do exist, model the number of governing bodies based on the “Change to this” scenario in the “Game plan for the architecture boards” slide.
    4. Name each governing body you have defined in the previous step. Download Info-Tech’s Architecture Board Charter Template for each domain you have named. Input the names into the title of each downloaded template.

    Download the Architecture Board Charter Template to document this activity.

    Defining the governing body charter

    The charter represents the agreement between the governing body and its stakeholders about the value proposition and obligations to the organization.

    1. Purpose: The reason for the existence of the governing body and its goals and objectives.
    2. Composition: The members who make up the committee and their roles and responsibilities in it.
    3. Frequency of meetings: The frequency at which the committee gathers to discuss items and make decisions.
    4. Entry/Exit Criteria: The criteria by which the committee selects items for review and items for which decisions can be taken.
    5. Inputs: Materials that are provided as inputs for review and decision making by the committee.
    6. Outputs: Materials that are provided by the committee after an item has been reviewed and the decision made.
    7. Activities: Actions undertaken by the committee to arrive at its decision.

    Define EA’s target role in each step of the IT operating model

    4.2 3 hrs

    Input

    • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

    Output

    • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents for the EA Governance Framework document, with the Architecture Board Charters highlighted.

    Step 1 Facilitate

    Hold a working session with the stakeholders to define the charter for each of the identified architecture boards.

    Download Architecture Board Charter Template

    Step 2 Summarize

    • Summarize the objectives of each board and reference the charter document within the EA Governance Framework.
    • Upload the final charter document to the team’s common repository.

    Update the EA Governance Framework document


    Considerations when creating an architecture review process

    • Ensure that architecture review happens at major milestones within the organization’s IT Operating Model such as the plan, build, and run phases.
    • In order to provide continuous engagement, make the EA group accountable for solution architecture in the plan phase. In the build phase, the EA group will be consulted while the solution architect will be responsible for the project solution architecture.

    Plan

    • Strategy Development
    • Business Planning
    • A - Conceptualization
    • Portfolio Management

    Build

    • Requirements
    • R - Solution Design
    • Application Development/ Procurement
    • Quality Assurance

    Run

    • Deploy
    • Operate

    Best-practice project architecture review process

    The best-practice model presented facilitates the creation of sound solution architecture through continuous engagement with the EA team and well-defined governance checkpoints.

    The image shows a graphic of the best-practice model. At the left, four categories are listed: Committees; EA; Project Team; LOB. At the top, three categories are listed: Plan; Build; Run. Within the area between these categories is a flow chart demonstrating the best-practice model and specific checkpoints throughout.

    Develop the architecture review process

    4.3 2 hours

    Input

    • A list of all EA governing bodies.
    • Info-Tech’s best practice architecture review process.

    Output

    • The new architecture review process.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Hold a working session with the participants to develop the architecture review process. Facilitate the activity using the following steps:

    1. Reference Info-Tech’s best-practice architecture review process embedded within the “Architecture Review Process Template” to gain an understanding of an ideal architecture review process.
    2. Identify the stages within the plan, build, and run phases where solution architecture reviews should occur, and identify the governing bodies involved in these reviews.
    3. As you go through these stages, record your findings in the Architecture Review Process Template.
    4. Connect the various activities leading to and from the architecture creation points to outline the review process.

    Download the Architecture Review Process Template for additional guidance regarding developing an architecture review process.

    Develop the architecture review process

    4.3 2 hrs

    Input

    • A list of all identified EA governing bodies.

    Output

    • Charters for each EA governing bodies.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents, with the Architecture Review Process highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download Architecture Review Process Template and facilitate a session to customize the best-practice model presented in the template.

    Download the Architecture Review Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the process changes and document the process flow in the EA Governance Framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Right-size EA governing bodies to reduce the perception of red tape

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    At INSPRO01, architecture governance boards were a bottleneck. The boards fielded all project requests, ranging from simple screen label changes to complex initiatives spanning multiple applications.

    These boards were designed as forums for technology discussions without any business stakeholder involvement.

    Complication

    INSPRO01’s management never gave buy-in to the architecture governance boards since their value was uncertain.

    Additionally, architectural reviews were perceived as an item to be checked off rather than a forum for getting feedback.

    Architectural exceptions were not being followed through due to the lack of a dispensation process.

    Result

    Info-Tech has helped the team define adaptable inclusion/exclusion criteria (based on project complexity) for each of the architectural governing boards.

    The EA team was able to make the case for business participation in the architecture forums to better align business and technology investment.

    An architecture dispensation process was created and operationalized. As a result architecture reviews became more transparent with well-defined next steps.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Identify the number of governing bodies.
    • Define the game plan to initialize the governing bodies.
    • Define the architecture review process.

    Outcomes

    • Charter definition for each EA governance board

    Phase 5

    EA Policy

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    EA Policy

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define the EA policy scope
    • Identify the target audience
    • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria
    • Create an assessment checklist

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leaders
    • Business Leaders
    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • The completed EA policy
    • Project assessment checklist
    • Defined assessment outcomes
    • Completed compliance waiver process

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use the EA policy to promote EA’s commitment to deliver value to business stakeholders through process transparency, stakeholder engagement, and compliance.

    Phase 5 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 5: EA Policy

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks

    Step 5.1–5.3: EA Policy, Assessment Checklists, and Decision Types

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss the three pillars of EA policy and its purpose.
    • Review the components of an effective EA policy.
    • Understand how to develop architecture assessment checklists.
    • Understand the assessment decision types.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Define purpose, scope, and audience of the EA policy.
    • Create a project assessment checklist.
    • Define the organization’s assessment decision type.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Policy Template
    • EA Assessment Checklist Template

    Step 5.4: Compliance Waivers

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review your draft EA policy and gather feedback.
    • Review your project assessment checklists and the assessment decision types.
    • Discuss the best-practice architecture compliance waiver process and how to tailor it to your organizational needs.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine the EA policy based on feedback gathered.
    • Create the compliance waiver process.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Compliance Waiver Process Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

    Three pillars of architecture policy

    Architecture policy is a set of guidelines, formulated and enforced by the governing bodies of an organization, to guide and constrain architectural choices in pursuit of strategic goals.

    Architecture compliance – promotes compliance to organizational standards through well-defined assessment checklists across architectural domains.

    Business value – ensures that investments are tied to business value by enforcing traceability to business capabilities.

    Architectural guidance – provides guidance to architecture practitioners on the application of the business and technology standards.

    Components of EA policy

    An enterprise architecture policy is an actionable document that can be applied to projects of varying complexity across the organization.

    1. Purpose and Scope: This EA policy document clearly defines the scope and the objectives of architecture reviews within an organization.
    2. Target Audience: The intended audience of the policy such as employees and partners.
    3. Architecture Assessment Checklist: A wide range of typical questions that may be used in conducting Architecture Compliance reviews, relating to various aspects of the architecture.
    4. Assessment Outcomes: The outcome of the architecture review process that determines the conformance of a project solution to the enterprise architecture standards.
    5. Compliance Waiver: Used when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

    Draft the purpose and scope of the EA policy

    5.1 2.5 hrs

    Input

    • A consensus on the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

    Output

    • Documented version of the purpose, scope, and audience for the EA policy.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Policy section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Policy Template and hold a working session to draft the EA policy.

    Download the EA Policy Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize purpose, scope, and intended audience of the policy in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the purpose, scope and intended audience.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Architecture assessment checklist

    Architecture assessment checklist is a list of future-looking criteria that a project will be assessed against. It provides a set of standards against which projects can be assessed in order to render a decision on whether or not the project can be greenlighted.

    Architecture checklists should be created for each EA domain since each domain provides guidance on specific aspects of the project.

    Sample Checklist Questions

    Business Architecture:

    • Is the project aligned to organizational strategic goals and objectives?
    • What are the business capabilities that the project supports? Is it creating new capabilities or supporting an existing one?

    Data Architecture:

    • What processes are in place to support data referential integrity and/or normalization?
    • What is the physical data model definition (derived from logical data models) used to design the database?

    Application Architecture:

    • Can this application be placed on an application server independent of all other applications? If not, explain the dependencies.
    • Can additional parallel application servers be easily added? If so, what is the load balancing mechanism?

    Infrastructure Architecture:

    • Does the solution provide high-availability and fault-tolerance that can recover from events within a datacenter?

    Security Architecture:

    • Have you ensured that the corporate security policies and guidelines to which you are designing are the latest versions?

    Create architectural assessment checklists

    5.2 2 hrs

    Input

    • Reference architecture models.

    Output

    • Architecture assessment checklist.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows a screenshot of the Table of Contents with the EA Assessment Checklist section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template and hold a working session to create the architectural assessment checklists.

    Download the EA Assessment Checklist Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize the major points of the checklists in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the detailed architecture assessment checklists.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Architecture assessment decision types

    • As a part of the proposed solution review, the governing bodies produce a decision indicating the compliance of the solution architecture with the enterprise standards.
    • Go, No Go, or Conditional are a sample set of decision outcomes available to the governing bodies.
    • On a conditional approval, the project team must file for a compliance waiver.

    Approved

    • The solution demonstrates substantial compliance with standards.
    • Negligible risk to the organization or minimal risks with sound plans of how to mitigate them.
    • Architectural approval to proceed with delivery type of work.

    Conditional Approval

    • The significant aspects of the solution have been addressed in a satisfactory manner.
    • Yet, there are some aspects of the solution that are not compliant with standards.
    • The architectural approval is conditional upon presenting the missing evidence within a minimal period of time determined.
    • The risk level may be acceptable to the organization from an overall IT governance perspective.

    Not Approved

    • The solution is not compliant with the standards.
    • Scheduled for a follow-up review.
    • Not recommended to proceed until the solution is more compliant with the standards.

    Best-practice architecture compliance waiver process

    Waivers are not permanent. Waiver terms must be documented for each waiver specifying:

    • Time period after which the architecture in question will be compliant with the enterprise architecture.
    • The modifications necessary to the enterprise architecture to accommodate the solution.

    The image shows a flow chart, split into 4 sections: Enterprise Architect; Solution Architect; TAC; ARB. To the right of these section labels, there is a flow chart that documents the waiver process.

    Create compliance waiver process

    5.4 3-4 hrs

    Input

    • A consensus on the compliance waiver process.

    Output

    • Documented compliance waiver process and form.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the Table of Contents with the Compliance Waiver Form section highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the EA compliance waiver template and hold a working session to customize the best-practice process to your organization’s needs.

    Download the EA Compliance Waiver Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    • Summarize the objectives and high-level process in the EA Governance Framework document.
    • Update the EA policy document with the compliance waiver process.
    • Upload the final policy document to the team’s common repository.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Creates an enterprise architecture policy to drive adoption

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    EA program adoption across INSPRO01 was at its lowest point due to a lack of transparency into the activities performed by the EA group.

    Often, projects ignored EA entirely as it was viewed as a nebulous and non-value-added activity that produced no measurable results.

    Complication

    There was very little documented information about the architecture assessment process and the standards against which project solution architectures were evaluated.

    Additionally, there were no well-defined outcomes for the assessment.

    Project groups were left speculating about the next steps and with little guidance on what to do after completing an assessment.

    Result

    Info-Tech helped the EA team create an EA policy containing architecture significance criteria, assessment checklists, and reference to the architecture review process.

    Additionally, the team also identified guidelines and detailed next steps for projects based on the outcome of the architecture assessment.

    These actions brought clarity to EA processes and fostered better engagement with the EA group.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Define the scope.
    • Identify the target audience.
    • Determine the inclusion and exclusion criteria.
    • Create an assessment checklist.

    Outcomes

    • The completed EA policy
    • Project assessment checklist
    • Defined assessment outcomes
    • Completed compliance waiver process

    Phase 6

    Architectural Standards

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Architectural Standards

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and standardize EA work products
    • Classify the architectural standards
    • Identify the custodian of standards
    • Update the standards

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • A standardized set of EA work products
    • A way to categorize and store EA work products
    • A defined method of updating standards

    Info-Tech Insight

    The architecture standard is the currency that facilitates information exchange between stakeholders. The primary purpose is to minimize transaction costs by providing a balance between stability and relevancy.

    Phase 6 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 6: Architectural standards

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Step 6.1: Understand Architectural Standards

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss architectural standards.
    • Know how to identify and define EA work products.
    • Understand the standard content of work products.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify and standardize EA work products.

    Step 6.2–6.3: EA Repository and Updating the Standards

    Review with analyst:

    • Review the standardized EA work products.
    • Discuss the principles of EA repository.
    • Discuss the Info-Tech best-practice model for updating architecture standards and how to tailor them to your organizational context.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build a folder structure for storing EA work products.
    • Use the Info-Tech best-practice architecture standards update process to develop your organization’s process for updating architecture standards.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    Recommended list of EA work products to standardize

    • EA work products listed below are typically produced as a part of the architecture lifecycle.
    • To ensure consistent development of architecture, the work products need to be standardized.
    • Consider standardizing both the naming conventions and the content of the work products.
    1. EA vision: A document containing the vision that provides the high-level aspiration of the capabilities and business value that EA will deliver.
    2. Statement of EA Work: The Statement of Architecture Work defines the scope and approach that will be used to complete an architecture project.
    3. Reference architectures: A reference architecture is a set of best-practice taxonomy that describes components and the conceptual structure of the model, as well as graphics, which provide a visual representation of the taxonomy to aid understanding. Reference architectures are created for each of the architecture domains.
    4. Solution proposal: The proposed project solution based on the EA guidelines and standards.
    5. Compliance assessment request: The document that contains the project solution architecture assessment details.
    6. Architecture change request: The request that initiates a change to architecture standards when existing standards can no longer meet the needs of the enterprise.
    7. Transition architecture: A transition architecture shows the enterprise at incremental states that reflect periods of transition that sit between the baseline and target architectures.
    8. Architectural roadmap: A roadmap that lists individual increments of change and lays them out on a timeline to show progression from the baseline architecture to the target architecture.
    9. EA compliance waiver request: A compliance waiver request that must be made when a solution or segment architecture is perceived to be non-compliant with the enterprise architecture.

    Standardize the content of each work product

    1. Purpose - The reason for the existence of the work product.
    2. Owner - The owner of this EA work product.
    3. Target Audience - The intended audience of the work product such as employees and partners.
    4. Naming Pattern - The pattern for the name of the work product as well as its file name.
    5. Table of Contents - The various sections of the work product.
    6. Review & Sign-Off Authority - The stakeholders who will review the work product and approve it.
    7. Repository Folder Location - The location where the work product will be stored.

    Identify and standardize work products

    6.1 3 hrs

    Input

    • List of various documents being produced by projects currently.

    Output

    • Standardized list of work products.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to identify and standardize work products. Facilitate the activity using the steps below.

    1. Identifying EA work products:
      1. Start by reviewing the list of all architecture-related documents presently produced in the organization. Any such deliverable with the following characteristics can be standardized:
        1. If it can be broken out and made into a standalone document.
        2. If it can be made into a fill-in form completed by others.
        3. If it is repetitive and requires iterative changes.
      2. Create a list of work products that your organization would like to standardize based on the characteristics above.
    2. The content and format of standardized EA work products:
      1. For each work product your organization wishes to standardize, look at its purpose and brainstorm the content needed to fulfill that purpose.
      2. After identifying the elements that need to be included in the work product to fulfill its purpose, order them logically for presentation purposes.
      3. In each section of the work product that need to be completed, include instructions on how to complete the section.
      4. Review the seven elements presented in the previous slide and include them in the work products.

    EA repository - information taxonomy

    As the EA function begins to grow and accumulates EA work products, having a well-designed folder structure helps you find the necessary information efficiently.

    Architecture meta-model

    Describes the organizationally tailored architecture framework.

    Architecture capability

    Defines the parameters, structures, and processes that support the enterprise architecture group.

    Architecture landscape

    An architectural presentation of assets in use by the enterprise at particular points in time.

    Standards information base

    Captures the standards with which new architectures and deployed services must comply.

    Reference library

    Provides guidelines, templates, patterns, and other forms of reference material to accelerate the creation of new architectures for the enterprise.

    Governance log

    Provides a record of governance activity across the enterprise.

    Create repository folder structure

    6.2 5-6 hrs

    Input

    • List of standardized work products.

    Output

    • EA work products mapped to a repository folder.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to create a repository structure. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

    1. Start with the taxonomy on the previous slide, and sort the existing work products into these six categories.
    2. Assess that the work products are sorted in a mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive fashion. This means that a certain work product that appears in one category should not appear in another category. As well, make sure these six categories capture all the existing work products.
    3. Based on the categorization of the work products, build a folder structure that follows these categories, which will allow for the work products to be accessed quickly and easily.

    Create a process to update EA work products

    • Architectural standards are not set in stone and should be reviewed and updated periodically.
    • The Architecture Review Board is the custodian for standards.
    • Any change to the standards need to be assessed thoroughly and must be communicated to all the impacted stakeholders.

    Architectural standards update process

    Identify

    • Identify changes to the standards

    Assess

    • Review and assess the impacts of the change

    Document

    • Document the change and update the standard

    Approve

    • Distribute the updated standards to key stakeholders for approval

    Communicate

    • Communicate the approved changes to impacted stakeholders

    Create a process to continually update standards

    6.3 1.5 hrs

    Input

    • The list of work products and its owners.

    Output

    • A documented work product update process.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, business line leads, IT department leads.

    The image shows the screenshot of the Table of Contents with the Standards Update Process highlighted.

    Step 1 - Facilitate

    Download the standards update process template and hold a working session to customize the best practice process to your organization’s needs.

    Download the Architecture Standards Update Process Template

    Step 2 - Summarize

    Summarize the objectives and the process flow in the EA governance framework document.

    Update the EA Governance Framework Template

    Create architectural standards to minimize transaction costs

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    INSPRO01 didn’t maintain any centralized standards and each project had its own solution/design work products based on the preference of the architect on the project. This led to multiple standards across the organization.

    Lack of consistency in architectural deliverables made the information hand-offs expensive.

    Complication

    INSPRO01 didn’t maintain the architectural documents in a central repository and the information was scattered across multiple project folders.

    This caused key stakeholders to make decisions based on incomplete information and resulted in constant revisions as new information became available.

    Result

    Info-Tech recommended that the EA team identify and standardize the various EA work products so that information was collected in a consistent manner across the organization.

    The team also recommended an information taxonomy to store the architectural deliverables and other collateral.

    This resulted in increased consistency and standardization leading to efficiency gains.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • Identify and standardize EA work products.
    • Classify the architectural standards.
    • Identify the custodian of standards.
    • Update the standards.

    Outcomes

    • A standardized set of EA work products
    • A way to categorize and store EA work products
    • A defined method of updating standards

    Phase 7

    Communication Plan

    Create a Right-Sized Enterprise Architecture Governance Framework

    Communication Plan

    1. Current state of EA governance
    2. EA fundamentals
    3. Engagement model
    4. EA governing bodies
    5. EA policy
    6. Architectural standards
    7. Communication Plan

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative
    • Identify stakeholders
    • Create a communication plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Head of Enterprise Architecture
    • Enterprise Architects
    • Domain Architects
    • Solution Architects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication Plan
    • EA Governance Framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    By failing to prepare, you are preparing to fail – maximize the likelihood of success for EA governance by engaging the relevant stakeholders and communicating the changes.

    Phase 7 guided implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 6: Operationalize the EA governance framework

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

    Step 7.1: Create a Communication Plan

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss how to communicate changes to stakeholders.
    • Discuss the purposes and benefits of the EA governance framework.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify the stakeholders affected by the EA governance transformations.
    • List the benefits of the proposed EA governance initiative.
    • Create a plan to communicate the changes to impacted stakeholders.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

    Step 7.2: Review the Communication Plan

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the communication plan and gather feedback on the proposed stakeholders.
    • Confer about the various methods of communicating change in an organization.
    • Discuss the uses of the EA Governance Framework.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Refine your communication plan and use it to engage with stakeholders to better serve customers.
    • Create the EA Governance Framework to accompany the communication plan in engaging stakeholders to better understand the value of EA.

    With these tools & templates:

    • EA Governance Communication Plan Template
    • EA Governance Framework Template

    Communicate changes to stakeholders

    The changes made to the EA governance components need to be reviewed, approved, and communicated to all of the impacted stakeholders.

    Deliverables to be reviewed:

    • Fundamentals
      • Vision and Mission
      • Goals and Measures
      • Principles
    • Architecture review process
    • Assessment checklists
    • Policy Governing body charters
    • Architectural standards

    Deliverable Review Process:

    Step 1: Hold a meeting with stakeholders to review, refine, and agree on the changes.

    Step 2: Obtain an official approval from the stakeholders.

    Step 3: Communicate the changes to the impacted stakeholders.

    Communicate the changes by creating an EA governance framework and communication plan

    7.1 3 hrs

    Input

    • EA governance deliverables.

    Output

    • EA Governance Framework
    • Communication Plan.

    Materials

    • A computer, and/or a whiteboard and marker.

    Participants

    • EA team, CIO, business line leads, IT department leads.

    Instructions:

    Hold a working session with the participants to create the EA governance framework as well as the communication plan. Facilitate the activity using the steps below:

    1. EA Governance Framework:
      1. The EA Governance Framework is a document that will help reference and cite all the materials created from this blueprint. Follow the instructions on the framework to complete.
    2. Communication Plan:
      1. Identify the stakeholders based on the EA governance deliverables.
      2. For each stakeholder identified, complete the “Communication Matrix” section in the EA Governance Communication Plan Template. Fill out the section based on the instructions in the template.
      3. As the stakeholders are identified based on the “Communication Matrix,” use the EA Governance Framework document to communicate the changes.

    Download the EA Governance Communication Plan Template and EA Governance Framework Template for additional instructions and to document your activities in this phase.

    Maximize the likelihood of success by communicating changes

    Case Study

    Industry Insurance

    Source Info-Tech

    Situation

    The EA group followed Info-Tech’s methodology to assess the current state and has identified areas for improvement.

    Best practices were adopted to fill the gaps identified.

    The team planned to communicate the changes to the technology leadership team and get approvals.

    As the EA team tried to roll out changes, they encountered resistance from various IT teams.

    Complication

    The team was not sure of how to communicate the changes to the business stakeholders.

    Result

    Info-Tech has helped the team conduct a thorough stakeholder analysis to identify all the stakeholders who would be impacted by the changes to the architecture governance framework.

    A comprehensive communication plan was developed that leveraged traditional email blasts, town hall meetings, and non-traditional methods such as team blogs.

    The team executed the communication plan and was able to manage the change effectively.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Key Activities

    • List the changes identified in the EA governance initiative.
    • Identify stakeholders.
    • Create a communication plan.
    • Compile the materials created in the blueprint to better communicate the value of EA governance.

    Outcomes

    • Communication plan
    • EA governance framework

    Bibliography

    Government of British Columbia. “Architecture and Standards Review Board.” Government of British Columbia. 2015. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.gov.bc.ca/cio/standards/asrb.page >

    Hopkins, Brian. “The Essential EA Toolkit Part 3 – An Architecture Governance Process.” Cio.com. Oct 2010. Web. April 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2372450/enterprise-architecture/the-essential-ea-toolkit-part-3---an-architecture-governance-process.html >

    Kantor, Bill. “How to Design a Successful RACI Project Plan.” CIO.com. May 2012. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.cio.com/article/2395825/project-management/how-to-design-a-successful-raci-project-plan.html >

    Sapient. “MIT Enterprise Architecture Guide.” Sapient. Sep 2004. Web. Jan 2016. < http://web.mit.edu/itag/eag/FullEnterpriseArchitectureGuide0.1.pdf >

    TOGAF. “Chapter 41: Architecture Repository.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap41.html >

    TOGAF. “Chapter 48: Architecture Compliance.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. < http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap48.html >

    TOGAF. “Version 9.1.” The Open Group. 2011. Web. Jan 2016. http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/

    United States Secret Service. “Enterprise Architecture Review Board.” United States Secret Service. Web. Jan 2016. < http://www.archives.gov/records-mgmt/toolkit/pdf/ID191.pdf >

    Virginia Information Technologies Agency. “Enterprise Architecture Policy.” Commonwealth of Virginia. Jul 2006. Web. Jan 2016. < https://www.vita.virginia.gov/uploadedfiles/vita_main_public/library/eapolicy200-00.pdf >

    Research contributors and experts

    Alan Mitchell, Senior Manager, Global Cities Centre of Excellence, KPMG

    Alan Mitchell has held numerous consulting positions before his role in Global Cities Centre of Excellence for KPMG. As a Consultant, he has had over 10 years of experience working with enterprise architecture related engagements. Further, he worked extensively with the public sector and prides himself on his knowledge of governance and how governance can generate value for an organization.

    Ian Gilmour, Associate Partner, EA advisory services, KPMG

    Ian Gilmour is the global lead for KPMG’s enterprise architecture method and Chief Architect for the KPMG Enterprise Reference Architecture for Health and Human Services. He has over 20 years of business design experience using enterprise architecture techniques. The key service areas that Ian focuses on are business architecture, IT-enabled business transformation, application portfolio rationalization, and the development of an enterprise architecture capability within client organizations.

    Djamel Djemaoun Hamidson, Senior Enterprise Architect, CBC/Radio-Canada

    Djamel Djemaoun is the Senior Enterprise Architect for CBC/Radio-Canada. He has over 15 years of Enterprise Architecture experience. Djamel’s areas of special include service-oriented architecture, enterprise architecture integration, business process management, business analytics, data modeling and analysis, and security and risk management.

    Sterling Bjorndahl, Director of Operations, eHealth Saskatchewan

    Sterling Bjorndahl is now the Action CIO for the Sun Country Regional Health Authority, and also assisting eHealth Saskatchewan grow its customer relationship management program. Sterling’s areas of expertise include IT strategy, enterprise architecture, ITIL, and business process management. He serves as the Chair on the Board of Directors for Gardiner Park Child Care.

    Huw Morgan, IT Research Executive, Enterprise Architect

    Huw Morgan has 10+ years experience as a Vice President or Chief Technology Officer in Canadian internet companies. As well, he possesses 20+ years experience in general IT management. Huw’s areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, integration, e-commerce, and business intelligence.

    Serge Parisien, Manager, Enterprise Architecture at Canada Mortgage Housing Corporation

    Serge Parisien is a seasoned IT leader with over 25 years of experience in the field of information technology governance and systems development in both the private and public sectors. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture, strategy, and project management.

    Alex Coleman, Chief Information Officer at Saskatchewan Workers’ Compensation Board

    Alex Coleman is a strategic, innovative, and results-driven business leader with a proven track record of 20+ years’ experience planning, developing, and implementing global business and technology solutions across multiple industries in the private, public, and not-for-profit sectors. Alex’s expertise includes program management, integration, and project management.

    L.C. (Skip) Lumley , Student of Enterprise and Business Architecture

    Skip Lumley was formerly a Senior Principle at KPMG Canada. He is now post-career and spends his time helping move enterprise business architecture practices forward. His areas of expertise include enterprise architecture program implementation and public sector enterprise architecture business development.

    Additional contributors

    • Tim Gangwish, Enterprise Architect at Elavon
    • Darryl Garmon, Senior Vice President at Elavon
    • Steve Ranaghan, EMEIA business engagement at Fujitsu

    Evolve Your Business Through Innovation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}330|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • Innovation teams are tasked with the responsibility of ensuring that their organizations are in the best position to succeed while the world is in a period of turmoil, chaos, and uncertainty.
    • CIOs have been expected to help the organization transition to remote work and collaboration instantaneously.
    • CEOs are under pressure to redesign, and in some cases reinvent, their business model to cope with and compete in a new normal.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    It is easy to get swept up during a crisis and cling to past notions of normal. Unfortunately, there is no controlling the fact that things have changed fundamentally, and it is now incumbent upon you to help your organization adapt and evolve. Treat this as an opportunity because that is precisely what this is.

    Impact and Result

    There are some lessons we can learn from innovators who have succeeded through past crises and from those who are succeeding now.

    There are a number of tactics an innovation team can employ to help their business evolve during this time:

    1. Double down on digital transformation (DX)
    2. Establish a foresight capability
    3. Become a platform for good

    Evolve Your Business Through Innovation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Evolve your business through innovation

    Download our guide to learn what you can do to evolve your business and innovate your way through uncertainty.

    • Evolve Your Business Through Innovation Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}331|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $111,064 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Project Management Office
    • Parent Category Link: /project-management-office
    • As an IT leader, you oversee a project environment in which the organizational demand for new products, services, and enhancements far outweighs IT’s resource capacity to adequately deliver on everything.
    • As a result, project throughput suffers. IT starts a lot of projects, but has constant difficulties delivering the bulk of them on time, on budget, in scope, and of high quality. What’s more, many of the projects that consume IT’s time are of questionable value to the business.
    • You need a project portfolio management (PPM) strategy to help bring order to IT’s project activity. With the right PPM strategy, you can ensure that you’re driving the throughput of the best projects and maximizing stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • IT leaders commonly conflate PPM and project management, falsely believing that they already have a PPM strategy via their project management playbook. While the tactical focus of project management can help ensure that individual projects are effectively planned, executed, and closed, it is no supplement for the insight into “the big picture” that a PPM strategy can provide.
    • Many organizations falter at PPM by mistaking a set of processes for a strategy. While processes are no doubt important, without an end in mind – such as that provided by a deliberate strategy – they inevitably devolve into inertia or confusion.
    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a PPM strategy. Without it, any efforts to reconcile supply and demand, and improve the strategic value of IT’s project activity, could be quashed by irresponsible, non-compliant stakeholders.

    Impact and Result

    • Manage the portfolio as more than just the sum of its parts. Create a coherent strategy to maximize the sum of values that projects deliver as a whole – as a project portfolio, rather than a collection of individual projects.
    • Get to value early. Info-Tech’s methodology tackles one of PPM’s most pressing challenges upfront by helping you to articulate a strategy and get executive buy-in for it before you define your process goals. When senior management understands why a PPM strategy is necessary and of value to them, the path to implementation is much more stable.
    • Create PPM processes you can sustain. Translate your PPM strategy into specific, tangible near-term and long-term goals, which are realized through a suite of project portfolio management processes tailored to your organization and its culture.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop a project portfolio management strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Executive Brief
    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phases 1-3

    1. Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization and get executive buy-in before you start to set PPM process goals.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 1: Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy
    • PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    • PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template

    2. Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    Use the advice and tools in this phase to align the PPM processes that make up the infrastructure around projects with your new PPM strategy.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 2: Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool

    3. Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Refine your PPM strategic plan with inputs from the previous phases by adding a cost-benefit analysis and PPM tool recommendation.

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy – Phase 3: Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan
    • Project Portfolio Analyst / PMO Analyst
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy

    The Purpose

    Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization and ensure executive buy-in.

    Set process goals to address PPM strategic expectations and steer the PPM strategic plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A right-sized PPM strategy complete with executive buy-in for it.

    A prioritized list of PPM process goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess leadership mandate.

    1.2 Determine potential resource capacity.

    1.3 Create a project inventory.

    1.4 Prepare to communicate your PPM strategy to key stakeholders.

    1.5 Translate each strategic goal into process goals.

    1.6 Set metrics and preliminary targets for PPM process goals.

    Outputs

    Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate

    Analysis of current project capacity

    Analysis of current project demand

    PPM Strategic Plan – Executive Brief

    PPM strategy-aligned process goals

    Metrics and long-term targets for PPM process goals

    2 Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals

    The Purpose

    Examine your current-state PPM processes and create a high-level description of the target-state process for each of the five PPM processes within Info-Tech’s PPM framework.

    Build a sound business case for implementing the new PPM strategy by documenting roles and responsibilities for key PPM activities as well as the time costs associated with them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Near-term and long-term goals as well as an organizationally specific wireframe for your PPM processes.

    Time cost assumptions for your proposed processes to ensure sustainability.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop and refine the project intake, prioritization, and approval process.

    2.2 Develop and refine the resource management process.

    2.3 Develop and refine the portfolio reporting process.

    2.4 Develop and refine the project closure process

    2.5 Develop and refine the benefits realization process.

    Outputs

    Process capability level

    Current-state PPM process description

    Retrospective examination of the current-state PPM process

    Action items to achieve the target states

    Time cost of the process at current and target states

    3 Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan

    The Purpose

    Perform a PPM tool analysis in order to determine the right tool to support your processes.

    Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio, as well as the estimated benefits of an optimized PPM strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A right-sized tool selection to help support your PPM strategy.

    A PPM strategy cost-benefit analysis.

    Activities

    3.1 Right-size the PPM tools for your processes.

    3.2 Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of implementing the new PPM strategy.

    3.3 Define roles and responsibilities for the new processes.

    3.4 Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan.

    Outputs

    Recommendation for a PPM tool

    Cost-benefit analysis

    Roles and responsibilities matrix for each PPM process

    An implementation timeline for your PPM strategy

    Further reading

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    Drive IT project throughput by throttling resource capacity.

    Analyst Perspective

    “Tactics without strategy is the noise before defeat.” – Sun Tzŭ

    "Organizations typically come to project portfolio management (PPM) with at least one of two misconceptions: (1) that PPM is synonymous with project management and (2) that a collection of PPM processes constitutes a PPM strategy.

    Both foundations are faulty: project management and PPM are separate disciplines with distinct goals and processes, and a set of processes do not comprise a strategy – they should flow from a strategy, not precede one. When built upon these foundations, the benefits of PPM go unrealized, as the means (i.e. project and portfolio processes) commonly eclipse the ends of a PPM strategy – e.g. a portfolio better aligned with business goals, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction, and so on.

    Start with the end in mind: articulate a PPM strategy that is truly project portfolio in nature, i.e. focused on the whole portfolio and not just the individual parts. Then, let your PPM strategy guide your process goals and help to drive successful outcomes, project after project." (Barry Cousins, Senior Director of Research, PMO Practice, Info-Tech Research Group)

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIOs who want to maximize IT’s fulfillment of both business strategic goals and operational needs.
    • CIOs who want to better manage the business and project sponsors’ expectations and satisfaction.
    • CIOs, PMO directors, and portfolio managers who want a strategy to set the best projects for the highest chance of success.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Get C-level buy-in on a strategy for managing the project portfolio and clarify their expectations on how it should be managed.
    • Draft strategy-aligned, high-level project portfolio management process description.
    • Put together a strategic plan for improving PPM processes to reclaim wasted project capacity and increase business satisfaction of IT.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Steering committee and C-suite management who want to maximize IT’s value to business.
    • Project sponsors who seek clarity and fairness on pushing their projects through a myriad of priorities and objectives.
    • CIOs, PMO directors, and portfolio managers who want to enable data-driven decisions from the portfolio owners.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Optimize IT’s added value to the business through project delivery.
    • Provide clarity on how IT’s project portfolio should be managed and the expectations for its management.
    • Improve project portfolio visibility by making trustworthy project portfolio data available, with which to steer the portfolio.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • As CIO, there are too many projects and not enough resource capacity to deliver projects on time, on budget, and in scope with high quality.
    • Prioritizing projects against one another is difficult in the face of conflicting priorities and agenda; therefore, projects with dubious value/benefits consume resource capacity.

    Complication

    • Not all IT projects carry a direct value to business; IT is accountable for keeping the lights on and it consumes a significant amount of resources.
    • Business and project sponsors approve projects without considering the scarcity of resource capacity and are frustrated when the projects fail to deliver or linger in the backlog.

    Resolution

    • Create a coherent strategy to maximize the total value that projects deliver as a whole portfolio, rather than a collection of individual projects.
    • Ensure that the steering committee or senior executive layer buys into the strategy by helping them understand why the said strategy is necessary, and more importantly, why the strategy is valuable to them.
    • Translate the strategic expectations to specific, tangible goals, which are realized through a suite of project portfolio management processes tailored to your organization and its culture.
    • Putting into place people, processes, and tools that are sustainable and manageable, plus a communication strategy to maintain the stakeholder buy-in.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Time is money; therefore, the portfolio manager is an accountant of time. It is the portfolio manager’s responsibility to provide the project portfolio owners with reliable data and close the loop on portfolio decisions.
    2. Business satisfaction is driven by delivering projects that align to and maximize business value. Use Info-Tech’s method for developing a PPM strategy and synchronize its definition of “best projects” with yours.

    Projects that deliver on strategic goals of the business is the #1 driver of business satisfaction for IT

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey (N=21,367) has identified a direct correlation between IT project success and overall business satisfaction with IT.

    Comparative rankings of IT services in two columns 'Reported Importance' and 'Actual Importance' with arrows showing where each service moved to in the 'Actual Importance' ranking. The highlighted move is 'Projects' from number 10 in 'Reported' to number 1 in 'Actual'. 'Reported' rankings from 1 to 12 are 'Network Infrastructure', 'Service Desk', 'Business Applications', 'Data Quality', Devices', 'Analytical Capability', 'Client-Facing Technology', 'Work Orders', 'Innovation Leadership', 'Projects', 'IT Policies', and 'Requirements Gathering'. 'Actual' rankings from 1 to 12 are 'Projects', 'Work Orders', 'Innovation Leadership', 'Business Applications', 'Requirements Gathering', 'Service Desk', 'Client-Facing Technology', 'Network Infrastructure', 'Analytical Capability', 'Data Quality', 'IT Policies', and 'Devices'.

    Reported Importance: Initially, when CIOs were asked to rank the importance of IT services, respondents ranked “projects” low on the list – 10 out of a possible 12.

    Actual Importance: Despite this low “reported importance,” of those organizations that were “satisfied” to “fully satisfied” with IT, the service that had the strongest correlation to high business satisfaction was “projects,” i.e. IT’s ability to help plan, support, and execute projects and initiatives that help the business achieve its strategic goals.

    On average, executives perceive IT as being poorly aligned with business strategy

    Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision Survey data highlights the importance of IT projects in supporting the business achieve its strategic goals. However, Info-Tech’s CEO-CIO Alignment Survey (N=124) data indicates that CEOs perceive IT to be poorly aligned to business’ strategic goals:

    • 43% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.
    • 60% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.
    • 80% of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.
    • 30% of business stakeholders* are supporters of their IT departments.
    • (Source: Info-Tech CIO/CEO Alignment Diagnostics, * N=32,536)

    Efforts to deliver on projects are largely hampered by causes of project failure outside a project manager’s control

    The most recent data from the Project Management Institute (PMI) shows that more projects are meeting their original goals and business intent and less projects are being deemed failures. However, at the same time, more projects are experiencing scope creep. Scope creeps result in schedule and cost overrun, which result in dissatisfied project sponsors, stakeholders, and project workers.

    Graph of data from Project Management Institute comparing projects from 2015 to 2017 that 'Met original goals/business intent', 'Experienced scope creep', and were 'Deemed failures'. Projects from the first two categories went up in 2017, while projects that were deemed failures went down.

    Meanwhile, the primary causes of project failures remain largely unchanged. Interestingly, most of these primary causes can be traced to sources outside of a project manager’s control, either entirely or in part. As a result, project management tactics and processes are limited in adequately addressing them.

    Relative rank

    Primary cause of project failure

    2015

    2016

    2017

    Trend

    Change in organization's priorities 1st 1st 1st Stable
    Inaccurate requirements gathering 2nd 3rd 2nd Stable
    Change in project objectives 3rd 2nd 3rd Stable
    Inadequate vision/goal for project 6th 5th 4th Rising
    Inadequate/poor communication 5th 7th 5th Stable
    Poor change management 11th 9th 6th Rising
    (Source: Project Management Institute, Pulse of the Profession, 2015-2017)

    Project portfolio management (PPM) can improve business alignment of projects and reduce chance of project failure

    PPM is about “doing the right things.”

    The PMI describes PPM as:

    Interrelated organizational processes by which an organization evaluates, selects, prioritizes, and allocates its limited internal resources to best accomplish organizational strategies consistent with its vision, mission, and values. (PMI, Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed.)

    Selecting and prioritizing projects with the strongest alignment to business strategy goals and ensuring that resources are properly allocated to deliver them, enable IT to:

    1. Improve business satisfaction and their perception of IT’s alignment with the business.
    2. Better engage the business and the project customers.
    3. Minimize the risk of project failure due to changing organizational/ project vision, goals, and objectives.

    "In today’s competitive business environment, a portfolio management process improves the linkage between corporate strategy and the selection of the ‘right’ projects for investment. It also provides focus, helping to ensure the most efficient and effective use of available resources." (Lou Pack, PMP, Senior VP, ICF International (PMI, 2015))

    PPM is a common area of shortcomings for IT, with much room for improvement

    Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Survey (N=879) shows that PPM tends to be regarded as neither an effective nor an important process amongst IT organizations.

    Two deviation from median charts highlighting Portfolio Management's ranking compared to other IT processes in 'Effectiveness scores' and 'Importance scores'. PPM ranks 37th out of 45 in Effectiveness and 33rd out of 45 in Importance.

    55% ... of IT organizations believe that their PPM processes are neither effective nor important.

    21% ... of IT organizations reported having no one responsible or accountable for PPM.

    62% ... of projects in organizations effective in PPM met/exceeded the expected ROI (PMI, 2015).

    In addition to PPM’s benefits, improving PPM processes presents an opportunity for getting ahead of the curve in the industry.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for developing a PPM strategy delivers extraordinary value, fast

    Our methodology is designed to tackle your hardest challenge first to deliver the highest-value part of the deliverable. For developing a PPM strategy, the biggest challenge is to get the buy-in of the executive layer.

    "Without senior management participation, PPM doesn’t work, and the organization is likely to end up with, or return to, a squeaky-wheel-gets-the-grease mindset for all those involved." (Mark Price Perry, Business Driven Project Portfolio Management)

    In the first step of the blueprint, you will be guided through the following steps:

    1. Choose the right PPM strategy: driven by the executives, supported by management.
    2. Objectively assess your current project portfolio with minimal effort to build a case for the PPM strategy.
    3. Engage the executive layer to get the critical prerequisite of a PPM strategy: their buy-in.

    A PPM strategic plan is the end deliverable of this blueprint. In the first step, download the pre-filled template with content that represents the most common case. Then, throughout the blueprint, customize with your data.

    Use this blueprint to develop, or refine, a PPM strategy that works for your organization

    Get buy-in for PPM strategy from decision makers.

    Buy-in from the owners of project portfolio (Steering Committee, C-suite management, etc.) is a critical prerequisite for any PPM strategy. This blueprint will give you the tools and templates to help you make your case and win the buy-in of portfolio owners.

    Connect strategic expectations to PPM process goals.

    This blueprint offers a methodology to translate the broad aim of PPM to practical, tactical goals of the five core PPM processes, as well as how to measure the results. Our methodology is supported with industry-leading frameworks, best practices, and our insider research.

    Develop your PPM processes.

    This blueprint takes you through a series of steps to translate the process goals into a high-level process description, as well as a business case and a roadmap for implementing the new PPM processes.

    Refine your PPM processes.

    Our methodology is also equally as applicable for making your existing PPM processes better, and help you draft a roadmap for improvement with well-defined goals, roles, and responsibilities.

    Info-Tech’s PPM model consists of five core processes

    There are five core processes in Info-Tech’s thought model for PPM.

    Info-Tech's Process Model detailing the steps and their importance in project portfolio management. Step 3: 'Status and Progress Reporting' sits above the others as a process of importance throughout the model. In the 'Intake' phase of the model are Step 1: 'Intake, Approval, and Prioritization' and Step 2: 'Resource Management'. In the 'Execution' phase is 'Project Management', the main highlighted section, and a part of Step 3, the overarching 'Status and Progress Reporting'. In the 'Closure' phase of the model are Step 4: 'Project Closure' and Step 5: 'Benefits Tracking'.

    These processes create an infrastructure around projects, which aims to enable:

    1. Initiation of the “best” projects with the right resources and project information.
    2. Timely and trustworthy reporting to facilitate the flow of information for better decision making.
    3. Proper closure of projects, releasing resources, and managing benefits realization.

    PPM has many moving pieces. To ensure that all of these processes work in harmony, you need a PPM strategy.

    De-couple project management from PPM to break down complexity and create flexibility

    Tailor project management (PM) processes to fit your projects.

    Info-Tech’s PPM thought model enables you to manage your project portfolio independent of your PM methodology or capability. Projects interact with PPM via:

    • A project charter that authorizes the use of resources and defines project benefits.
    • Status reports that feed up-to-date, trustworthy data to your project portfolio.
    • Acceptance of deliverables that enable proper project closure and benefits reporting.

    Info-Tech’s PPM strategy is applicable whether you use Agile, waterfall, or anything in between for PM.

    The process model from the previous page but with project management processes overlaid. The 'Intake' phase is covered by 'Project Charter'. The 'Execution' phase, or 'Project Management' is covered by 'Status report'. The 'Closure' phase is covered by 'Deliverable Acceptance'.

    Learn about project management approach for small projects in Info-Tech’s Tailor PM Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint.

    Sample of the Info-Tech blueprint 'Tailor PM Processes to Fit Your Projects'.

    Info-Tech’s approach to PPM is informed by industry best practices and rooted in practical insider research

    Info-Tech uses PMI and ISACA frameworks for areas of this research.

    Logo for 'Project Management Institute (PMI)'.' Logo for 'COBIT 5 an ISACA Framework'.
    PMI’s Standard for Portfolio Management, 3rd ed. is the leading industry framework, proving project portfolio management best practices and process guidelines. COBIT 5 is the leading framework for the governance and management of enterprise IT.

    In addition to industry-leading frameworks, our best-practice approach is enhanced by the insights and guidance from our analysts, industry experts, and our clients.

    Logo for 'Info-Tech Research Group'.

    33,000+ Our peer network of over 33,000 happy clients proves the effectiveness of our research.

    1000+ Our team conducts 1,000+ hours of primary and secondary research to ensure that our approach is enhanced by best practices.

    Re-position IT as the “facilitator of business projects” for PPM success

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Construction
    Source: Info-Tech Client

    Chaos in the project portfolio

    At first, there were no less than 14 teams of developers, each with their own methodologies and processes. Changes to projects were not managed. Only 35% of the projects were completed on time.

    Business drives, IT facilitates

    Anyone had the right to ask for something; however, converting ideas to a formal project demand required senior leadership within a business division getting on board with the idea.

    The CIO and senior leadership decided that projects, previously assigned to IT, were to be owned and driven by the business, as the projects are undertaken to serve its needs and rarely IT’s own. The rest of the organization understood that the business, not IT, was accountable for prioritizing project work: IT was re-positioned as a facilitator of business projects. While it was a long process, the result speaks for itself: 75% of projects were now being completed on time.

    Balancing the target mix of the project portfolio

    What about maintaining and feeding the IT infrastructure? The CIO reserved 40% of IT project capacity for “keeping the lights on,” and 20% for reactive, unplanned activities, with an aim to lower this percentage. With the rest of the time, IT facilitated business projects

    Three key drivers of project priority

    1. Does the project meet the overall company goals and objectives?
      “If they don't, we must ask why we are bothering with it.”
    2. Does the project address a regulatory or compliance need?
      “Half of our business is heavily regulated. We must focus on it.”
    3. Are there significant savings to be had?
      “Not soft; hard savings. Can we demonstrate that, after implementing this, can we see good hard results? And, can we measure it?”

    "Projects are dumped on IT, and the business abdicates responsibility. Flip that over, and say ‘that's your project’ and ‘how can we help you?’"

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members, who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Develop a PPM strategy – project overview

    1. Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    2. Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    3. Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization

    1.2 Translate PPM strategy expectations to specific process goals

    2.1 Develop and refine project intake, prioritization, and resource management processes

    2.2 Develop and refine portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes

    3.1 Select a right-sized PPM solution for supporting your new processes

    3.2 Finalize customizing your PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Guided Implementations

    • Scoping call: discuss current state of PPM and review strategy options.
    • How to wireframe realistic process goals, rooted in your PPM strategic expectations, that will be sustained by the organization.
    • Examine your current-state PPM process and create a high-level description of the target-state process for each of the five PPM processes (1-2 calls per each process).
    • Assess your PPM tool requirements to help support your processes.
    • Determine the costs and potential benefits of your PPM practice.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Set strategic expectations and realistic goals for the PPM strategy
    Module 2:
    Develop and refine strategy-aligned PPM processes
    Module 3:
    Compose your PPM strategic plan
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Analysis of the current state of PPM
    • Strategy-aligned goals and metrics for PPM processes
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • PPM capability levels
    • High-level descriptions of near- and long-term target state
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • PPM tool recommendations
    • Cost-benefit analysis
    • Customized PPM strategic plan

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1

    Workshop Day 2

    Workshop Day 3

    Workshop Day 4

    Workshop Day 5

    Get leadership buy-in for PPM strategy Set PPM process goals and metrics with strategic expectations Develop and Refine PPM processes Develop and Refine PPM processes Complete the PPM strategic plan

    Activities

    • 1.1 Assess leadership mandate.
    • 1.2 Determine potential resource capacity.
    • 1.3 Create a project inventory.
    • 1.4 Communicate your PPM strategy to key stakeholders.
    • 2.1 Translate each strategic goal into process goals.
    • 2.2 Set metrics and preliminary targets for PPM process goals.
    • 3.1 Develop and refine the project intake, prioritization, and approval process.
    • 3.2 Develop and refine the resource management process.
    • 4.1 Develop and refine the portfolio reporting process.
    • 4.2 Develop and refine the project closure process.
    • 4.3 Develop and refine the benefits realization process.
    • 5.1 Right-size the PPM tools for your processes.
    • 5.2 Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of implementing the new PPM strategy.
    • 5.3 Define roles and responsibilities for the new processes.

    Deliverables

    1. Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate
    2. Analysis of current project capacity
    3. Analysis of current project demand
    4. PPM Strategic Plan – Executive Brief
    1. PPM strategy-aligned process goals
    2. Metrics and long-term targets for PPM process goals
      For each of the five PPM processes:
    1. Process capability level
    2. Current-state PPM process description
    3. Retrospective examination of the current-state PPM process
    4. Action items to achieve the target states
    5. Time cost of the process at current and target states
    1. Recommendation for a PPM tool
    2. Cost-benefit analysis
    3. Roles and responsibilities matrix for each PPM process

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 1

    Get Executive Buy-In for Your PPM Strategy

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Get executive buy-in for your PPM strategy

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 1.1: Choose the right PPM strategy Step 1.2: Translate strategic expectations to process goals
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Scoping call to discuss the current state of PPM and review strategy options.
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Discuss how to wireframe realistic process goals, rooted in your PPM strategic expectations, that will be sustained by the organization.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Execute a leadership mandate survey.
    • Perform a high-level supply/demand analysis.
    • Prepare an executive presentation to get strategy buy-in.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Develop realistic process goals based in your PPM strategic expectations.
    • Set metrics and preliminary targets for your high-priority PPM process goals.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Phase 1 Results & Insights

    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are onboard before proceeding to implement your PPM strategy.

    Prepare to get to value early with step 1.1 of this blueprint

    The first step of this blueprint will help you define your PPM strategy and get executive buy-in for it using section one of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Where traditional models of consulting can take considerable amounts of time before delivering value to clients, Info-Tech’s methodology for developing a PPM strategy gets you to value fast.

    In the first step of this blueprint, you will define your PPM strategy and prepare an executive presentation to get buy-in for the strategy. The presentation can be prepared in just a few hours.

    • The activities in step 1.1 of this blueprint will help you customize the slides in section 1 of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    • Section one of the Template will then serve as your presentation document.

    Once you have received buy-in for your PPM strategy, the remainder of this blueprint will help you customize section 2 of the Template.

    • Section 2 of the Template will communicate:
      • Your processes and process goals.
      • Your near-term and long-term action items for implementing the strategy.
      • Your PPM tool requirements.
      • The costs and benefits of your PPM strategy.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Sample of Info-Tech's 'PPM Strategic Plan Template.'

    Step 1.1: Choose the right PPM strategy for your organization

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 3.1 3.2
    Choose the right PPM strategy Translate strategy into process goals Define intake & resource mgmt. processes Define reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processes Select a right-sized PPM solution Finalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Perform a leadership mandate survey.
    • Choose your PPM strategy.
    • Calculate your resource capacity for projects.
    • Determine overall organizational demand for projects.
    • Prepare an executive presentation of the PPM strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • A PPM strategy
    • A resource supply/project demand analysis
    • An executive brief presentation
    • Executive buy-in for the PPM strategy

    “Too many projects, not enough resources” is the reality of most IT environments

    In today’s organizations, the desires of business units for new products and enhancements, and the appetites of senior leadership to approve more and more projects for those products and services, far outstrips IT’s ability to realistically deliver on everything.

    The vast majority of IT departments lack the resourcing to meet project demand – especially given the fact that day-to-day operational demands frequently trump project work.

    As a result, project throughput suffers – and with it, IT's reputation within the organization.

    A visualization of 'Project Demand' versus 'Resource supply' utilizing courtroom scales with numerous project titles weighing down the 'Project Demand' side and silhouettes of three little people raised aloft on the 'Resource supply' side.

    In these environments, a PPM strategy is required.

    A PPM strategy should enable executive decision makers to make sense of the excess of demand and give IT the ability to prioritize those projects that are of the most strategic value to the business.

    With the right PPM strategy, IT can improve project outcomes across its portfolio and drive business value – all while improving the workloads of IT project staff.

    Info-Tech has two PPM strategy options that you can start to deploy today

    This step will help you choose the most suitable option, depending on your project pain points and current level of executive engagement in actively steering the portfolio.

    Option A:
    Top-Down, Executive Driven Strategy

    Option B:
    Bottom-Up, Project Manager Driven Strategy

    Goals of this approach:
    • This approach is intended to assist decision makers in their job: choosing the right projects, committing to timelines for those projects, and monitoring/directing their progress.
    Goals of this approach:
    • This approach is primarily intended to ensure that projects are well managed in a standardized manner in order to provide project managers with clear direction.
    Who this approach is for:
    • IT departments looking to improve alignment of project demand and resource capacity.
    • IT departments wanting to prioritize strategically valuable work.
    • IT departments with sufficient executive backing and engagement with the portfolio.
    Who this approach is for:
    • IT departments that would not the get support for a top-down approach due to a disengaged executive layer.
    • IT departments that already have a top-down PPM strategy and feel they are sufficiently resourced to confront project demand.

    Each of these strategy options is driven by a set of specific strategic expectations to help communicate your PPM goals. See the following slides for an articulation of each strategy option.

    A top-down, executive driven strategy is the optimal route, putting leadership in a position to best conduct the portfolio

    Option A: Top-Down, Executive Driven Strategy

    Strategic Expectations:

    • Project Throughput: Maximize throughput of the best projects.
    • Portfolio Visibility: Ensure visibility of current and pending projects.
    • Portfolio Responsiveness: Make the portfolio responsive to executive steering when new projects and changing priorities need rapid action.
    • Resource Utilization: Minimize resource waste and optimize the alignment of skills to assignments.
    • Benefits Realization: Clarify accountability for post-project benefits attainment for each project, and facilitate the process of tracking/reporting those benefits.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Serve the executive with insight before you impede the projects with governance. This strategy option is where Info-Tech sees the most PPM success. A strategy focused at improving decision making at the executive layer will both improve project outcomes and help alleviate project workloads.

    A bottom-up strategy can help project managers and teams succeed where insight into the big picture is lacking

    Option B: Bottom-Up, Project Manager Driven Strategy

    Strategic Expectations:

    • Project Management Governance: All projects consuming IT resources will be continually validated in terms of best-practice process compliance.
    • Project Risk Management: Identify risks and related mitigation approaches for all high-risk areas.
    • Stakeholder Management: Ensure that project stakeholders are identified and involved.
    • Project Manager Resourcing: Provide project managers as needed.
    • Project-Level Visibility: Provide access to the details of project management processes (planning and progress) as needed.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Right-size governance to maximize success. Project management and governance success don’t necessarily equal project success. Project management processes should be a means to an end (i.e. successful project outcomes), and not an end in themselves. Ensure the ends justify the means.

    Most recurring project challenges require a top-down portfolio management approach

    While project management is a key ingredient to project success, tying to solve endemic project problems with project management alone won’t improve results over the long term.

    Why Top-Down is a better starting point than Bottom-Up.

    The most common IT project problems – schedule and budget overruns, scope creep, and poor quality – can ultimately, in the vast majority of cases, be traced back to bad decisions made at the portfolio level:

    • The wrong projects get greenlighted.
    • Shifting leadership priorities and operational demands make project plans and estimated delivery dates obsolete from the start.
    • Too many projects get approved when there are not enough resources to effectively work on them all.

    No amount of project management rigor can help alleviate these common root causes of project failure.

    With a top-down PPM strategy, however, you can make sure that leadership is informed and engaged in making the right project decisions and that project managers and teams are situated for success.

    "There is nothing so useless as doing efficiently that which should not be done at all." (Peter Drucker (quoted in Lessing))

    Info-Tech Insight

    Get Strategic About Project Success.

    The difference between project management and project portfolio management comes down to doing things right vs. doing the right things. Both are important, no doubt; but doing the wrong things well doesn’t provide much value to the business in the long run.

    Get insight into the big picture with a top-down strategy before imposing more administrative overhead on project managers and leads.

    Perform a leadership mandate assessment to gauge executive needs and expectations

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.1 – 15 to 30 minutes (prep time) 10 to 20 minutes (execution time)

    INPUT: Leadership expectations for portfolio and project management.

    OUTPUT: Leadership mandate bar chart

    Materials: Tab 6 of Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), PPM strategy sponsor(s), CIO and other members of senior management

    Before choosing your strategy option, survey the organization’s leadership to assess what they’re expecting from the PPM strategy.

    Use the “Leadership Mandate Survey” (located on tab 6 of Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator) to assess the degree to which your leadership expects the PPM strategy to provide outcomes across the following capabilities: portfolio reporting, project governance, and project management.

    • Deploy the 12-question survey via individual one-on-one meetings or group working sessions with your boss (the PPM strategy sponsor) as well as with the CIO and other senior managers from within IT and the business.
      • If you cannot connect with the executive layer for this survey, do your best to estimate their responses to complete the survey.
    • The survey should help distinguish if executives are looking for portfolio management or project management. It should be one input that informs your choice of strategy option A or B.
      • If leadership is looking primarily for project management, you should proceed to Info-Tech’s Tailor Project Management Processes that Fit Your Projects blueprint.

    Refer to the next slide for assistance analyzing the outputs in tab 6 and using them to inform your choice of strategy.

    How to make use of the results of the leadership survey

    Two possible result scenarios of the leadership survey. There are two bar graphs titled 'Leadership Mandate', each with an explanation of the scenario they belong to. In Scenario 1, the 'Leadership Mandate' graph has a descending trend with 'Portfolio Reporting' at the highest level, 'Project Governance' in the middle, and 'Project Management' at the lowest level. 'A result like this, with a higher portfolio reporting score, shows a higher need for a top-down approach and demonstrates well-balanced expectations for a PPM strategy from the leadership. There is greater emphasis put on the portfolio than there is project governance or project management.' In Scenario 2, the 'Leadership Mandate' graph has an ascending trend with 'Portfolio Reporting' at the lowest level, 'Project Governance' in the middle, and 'Project Management' at the highest level. 'If your graph looks like this, your executive leadership has placed greater importance on project governance and management. Completing a top-down PPM strategy may not meet their expectations at this time. In this situation, a bottom-up approach may be more applicable.'

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Insert screenshots of the survey and the bar graph from tab 6 of the PPM High-Level Supply-Demand Calculator onto slides 7 and 8, “PPM Strategy Leadership Mandate,” of the PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Proceed with the right PPM strategy for your organization

    Based upon the results of the “Leadership Mandate Survey,” and your assessment of each strategy option as described in the previous slides, choose the strategy option that is right for your IT department/PMO at this time.

    "Without a strategic methodology, project portfolio planning is frustrating and has little chance of achieving exceptional business success." (G Wahl (quoted in Merkhofer))

    Option A:

    Those proceeding with Option A should continue with remainder of this blueprint. Update your strategy statement on slide 3 of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to reflect your choice

    Option B:

    Those proceeding with Option B should exit this blueprint and refer to Info-Tech’s Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects blueprint to help define a project management standard operating procedure.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. If you’re proceeding with Option A, update slide 4, “Project Portfolio Management Strategy,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to reflect your choice of PPM strategy. If you’re proceeding with Option B, you may want to include your strategy statement in your Project Management SOP Template.

    The success of your top-down strategy will hinge on the quality of your capacity awareness and resource utilization

    A PPM strategy should facilitate alignment between project demand with resource supply. Use Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator as a step towards this alignment.

    Info-Tech’s research shows that the ability to provide a centralized view of IT’s capacity for projects is one of the top PPM capabilities that contributes to overall project success.

    Accurate and reliable forecasts into IT’s capacity, coupled with an engaged executive layer making project approval and prioritization decisions based upon that capacity data, is the hallmark of an effective top-down PPM strategy.

    • Use Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator to help improve visibility (and with it, organizational understanding) into project demand and IT resource supply.
    • The Calculator will help you determine IT’s actual capacity for projects and analyze organizational demand by taking an inventory of active and backlog projects.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.

    Sample of Into-Tech's PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Where does the time go? The portfolio manager (or equivalent) should function as the accounting department for time, showing what’s available in IT’s human resources budget for projects and providing ongoing visibility into how that budget of time is being spent.

    Establish the total resource capacity of your portfolio

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 – 30 to 60 minutes

    INPUT: Staff resource types, Average work week, Estimated allocations

    OUTPUT: Breakdown of annual portfolio HR spend, Capacity pie chart

    Materials: PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator, tab 3

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), Resource and/or project managers

    Use tab 3 of the calculator to determine your actual HR portfolio budget for projects, relative to the organization’s non-project demands.

    • Tab 3 analyzes your resource supply asks you to consider how your staff spend their time weekly across four categories: out of office time, administrative time (e.g. meetings, training, checking email), keep-the-lights-on time (i.e. support and maintenance), and project time.
    • The screenshot below walks you through columns B to E of tab 3, which help calculate your potential capacity. This activity will continue on the next slide, where we will determine your realized capacity for project work from this potential capacity.
    Screenshot of tab 3 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 4 columns, 'Resource Type', '# People', 'Hours / Week', and 'Hours / Year', which are referred to in notes as columns B through E respectively. The note on 'Resource Type' reads '1. Compile a list of each of the roles within your department in column B'. The note on '# People' reads '2. In column C, provide the number of staff currently performing each role'. The note on 'Hours / Week' reads '3. In column D, provide a baseline for the number of hours in a typical work week for each role'. The note on 'Hours / Year' reads '4. Column E will auto-populate based on E and D. The total at the bottom of column E (row 26) constitutes your department’s total capacity'.

    Determine the project/non-project ratio for each role

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 (continued)

    The previous slide walked you through columns B to E of tab 3. This slide walks you through columns F to J, which ask you to consider how your potential capacity is spent.

    Screenshot of tab 3 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 6 columns, 'Hours / Year', 'Absence', 'Working Time / Year', 'Admin', 'KTLO', and 'Project Work', which, starting at 'Absence', are referred to in notes as columns F through J respectively. The note on 'Absence' reads '5. Enter the percentage of your total time across each role that is unavailable due to foreseeable out-of-office time (vacation, sick time, etc.) in column F. Industry standard runs anywhere from 12% to 16%, depending on your industry and geographical region'. The note on 'Working Time / Year' reads '6. Column G will auto-calculate to show your overall net capacity after out-of-office percentages have been taken off the top. These totals constitute your working time for the year'. The note on 'Admin' and 'KTLO' reads '6. Column G will auto-calculate to show your overall net capacity after out-of-office percentages have been taken off the top. These totals constitute your working time for the year'. The note on 'Project Work' reads '8. The project percentage in column J will auto-calculate based upon what’s leftover after your non-project working time allocations in columns H and I have been subtracted'.

    Review your annual portfolio capacity for projects

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.2 (continued)

    The previous slides walked you through the inputs for tab “3. Project Capacity.” This slide walks you through the outputs of the tab.

    Based upon the inputs from columns B to J, the rest of tab 3 analyzes how IT available time is spent across the time categories, highlighting how much of IT’s capacity is actually available for projects after admin work, support and maintenance work, and absences have been taken into account.

    A table and pie chart of output data from Tab 3 of the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. Pie segments are labelled 'Admin', 'Absence', 'Project Capacity', and 'Keep The Lights On'.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slide 10, “Current Project Capacity,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the outputs from tab 3 of the Calculator.

    Create an inventory of active and backlog projects to help gauge overall project demand

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.3 – 15 to 30 minutes

    INPUT: Number of active and backlog projects across different sizes

    OUTPUT: Total project demand in estimated hours of work effort

    Materials: PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator, tab 4

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent), Project managers

    Where tab 3 of the Calculator gave you visibility into your overall resource supply for projects, tab 4 will help you establish insight into the demand side.

    • Before starting on tab 4, be sure to enter the required project size data on the set-up tab.
    • Using a list of current active projects, categorize the items on the list by size: small, medium, large, and extra large. Enter the number of projects in each category of project in column C of tab 4.
    • Using a list of on-hold projects, or projects that have been approved but not started, categorize the list by size and enter the number of projects in each category in column D.
    • In column E, estimate the number of new requests and projects across each size that you anticipate being added to the portfolio/backlog in the next 12 months. Use historical data from the past 12 to 24 months to inform your estimates.
    • In column F, estimate the number of projects that you anticipate being completed in each size category in the next 12 months. Take the current state of active projects into account as you make your estimates, as well as throughput data from the previous 12 to 24 months.
    Screenshot of tab 4 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. It has 5 columns labelled 'Project Types' with values Small to Extra-Large, 'Number of active projects currently in the portfolio', 'Number of projects currently in the portfolio backlog', 'Number of new requests anticipated to be added to the portfolio/backlog in the next 12 months', and 'Number of projects expected to be delivered within the next 12 months'.

    Make supply and demand part of the conversation as you get buy-in for your top-down strategy

    Tab 5 of the Calculator is an output tab, visualizing the alignment (or lack thereof) of project demand and resource supply.

    Once tabs 3 and 4 are complete, use tab 5 to analyze the supply/demand data to help build your case for a top-down PPM strategy and get buy-in for it.

    Screenshots of Tab 5 in the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator. A bar chart obscures a table with the note 'The bar chart shows your estimated total project demand in person hours (in black) relative to your estimated total resource capacity for projects (in green)'. Notes on the table are 'The table below the bar chart shows your estimated annual project throughput rate (based upon the number of projects you estimated you would complete this year) as well as the rate at which portfolio demand will grow (based upon the number of new requests and projects you estimated for the next 12 months)' and 'If the “Total Estimated Project Demand (in hours) in 12 Months Time” number is more than your current demand levels, then you have a supply-demand problem that your PPM strategy will need to address'.

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slides 11 and 12, “Current Project Demand,” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the outputs from tabs 4 and 5 of the Calculator.

    Recommended: Complete Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard to measure your resource utilization

    Associated Activity icon Contact your rep or call 1-888-670-8889

    This step is highly recommended but not required. Call 1-888-670-8889 to inquire about or request the PPM Diagnostics.

    Info-Tech’s PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic provides a comprehensive view of your portfolio management strengths and weaknesses, including project portfolio management, project management, customer management, and resource utilization.

    Screenshots of Info-Tech's PPM Current State Scorecard diagnostic with a pie chart obscuring a table/key. The attached note reads 'In particular, the analysis of resource utilization in the PPM Current State Scorecard report, will help to complement the supply/demand analysis in the previous slides. The diagnostic will help you to analyze how, within that percentage of your overall capacity that is available for project work, your staff productively utilizes this time to successfully complete project tasks and how much of this time is lost within Info-Tech’s categories of resource waste.'

    Customize Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template. Update slides 14 and 15, “Current State Resource Utilization” of your PPM Strategic Plan Template to include the resource utilization outputs from your PPM Current State Scorecard.

    Finalize section one of the PPM Strategic Plan Template and prepare to communicate your strategy

    Associated Activity icon 1.1.4 – 10 to 30 minutes

    INPUT: The previous activities from this step

    OUTPUT: An presentation communication your PPM strategy

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template, section 1

    Participants: Portfolio manager (or equivalent)

    By now, you should be ready to complete section one of the PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    The purpose of this section of the Template is to capture the outputs of this step and use them to communicate the value of a top-down PPM strategy and to get buy-in for this strategy from senior management before you move forward to develop your PPM processes in the subsequent phases of this blueprint.

    • Within section one, update any of the text that is (in grey) to reflect the specifics of your organization – i.e. the name of your organization and department – and the specific outcomes of step 1.2 activities. In addition, replace the placeholders for a company logo with the logo of your company.
    • Replace the tool screenshots with the outputs from your version of the PPM High-Level Supply/Demand Calculator.
    • Proofread all of the text to ensure the content accurately reflects your outcomes. Edit the content as needed to more accurately reflect your outcomes.
    • Determine the audience for the presentation of your PPM strategy and make a logistical arrangement. Include PPM strategy sponsors, senior management from within IT and the business, and other important stakeholders.

    Get executive buy-in for your top-down PPM strategy

    Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are on board before preceding.

    You’re now ready to communicate your PPM strategy to your leadership team and other stakeholders.

    It is essential that you get preliminary buy-in for this strategy from the executive layer before you move forward to develop your PPM processes in the subsequent phases of this blueprint. Lack of executive engagement is one of the top barriers to PPM strategy success.

    • If you have gone through the preceding activities in this step, section one of your PPM Strategic Plan Template should now be ready to present.
    • As explained in 1.1.4, you should present this section to an audience of PPM strategy sponsors, C-suite executives, and other members of the senior management team.
    • Allow at least 60 minutes for the presentation – around 20 minutes to deliver the slide presentation and 40 minutes for discussion.
    • If you get sufficient buy-in by the end of the presentation, proceed to the next step of this blueprint. If buy-in is lacking, now might not be the right time for a top-down PPM strategy. Think about adopting a bottom-up approach until leadership is more engaged in the portfolio.

    "Gaining executive sponsorship early is key…It is important for the executives in your organization to understand that the PPM initiatives and the PMO organization are there to support (but never hinder) executive decision making." (KeyedIn Projects)

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Engage(d) sponsorship. According to Prosci, the top factor in contributing to the success of a change initiative is active and visible executive sponsorship. Use this meeting to communicate to your sponsor(s) the importance of their involvement in championing the PPM strategy.

    A PPM strategic plan elevates PMO’s status to a business strategic partner

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    The PMO operated in a way that is, in their self-assessment, reactive; project requests and capacity were not effectively managed. Perhaps due to this, the leadership team was not always visible, or regularly available, to PM leaders. This, in turn, complicated efforts to effectively manage their projects.

    Solution

    Establishing a simple prioritization methodology enabled the senior leadership to engage and effectively steer the project portfolio by strategic importance. The criteria and tool also gave the business units a clear understanding to promote the strategic value of each of their project requests.

    Results

    PM leaders now have the support and confidence of the senior leadership team to both proactively manage and deliver on strategic projects. This new prioritization model brought the PM Leader and senior leadership team in direct access with each other.

    "By implementing this new project intake and prioritization framework, we drastically improved our ability to predict, meet, and manage project requests and unit workload. We adopted a client-focused and client-centric approach that enabled all project participants to see their role and value in successful project delivery. We created methodologies that were easy to follow from the client participation perspective, but also as PM leaders, provided us with the metrics, planning, and proactive tools to meet and anticipate client project demand. The response from our clients was extremely positive, encouraging, and appreciative."

    Step 1.2: Translate PPM strategic expectations to process goals

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine process goals based upon your PPM strategy.
    • Set metrics and preliminary targets for your PPM processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Steering Committee
    • Business Unit Leaders
    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder-prioritized PPM process goals
    • Metrics and targets for high-priority process goals

    Use the PPM strategy to set the direction for PPM processes that make up the infrastructure around projects

    PPM strategy enables you to answer any and all of these questions in a way that is consistent, cohesive, and aligned with one another.

    Info-Tech's PPM Process Model from earlier with notes overlaid asking a series of questions. The questions for '1. Intake, Approval, and Prioritization' are 'Who can request a project? How do you request a project? Who decides what to fund? What is the target investment mix? How will they decide?' The questions for '2. Resource Management' are 'Who assigns the resources? Who feeds the data on resources? How do we make sure it’s valid? How do we handle contingencies when projects are late, or if availability changes?' The questions for '3. Status and Progress Reporting' are 'What project information that should be reported? Who reports on project status? When? How?' The questions between 'Project Management' and '4. Project Closure' are 'Who declares that a project is done? Who validates it? Who is this reported to? Who terminates low-value projects? How will they decide?' The questions for '5. Benefits Tracking' are 'How do we validate the project benefits from the original business case? How do we track the benefits? Who reports it? When?'

    Set process goals to address PPM strategic expectations and steer the PPM strategic plan

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.1 – 2 hours

    INPUT: PPM strategy & expectations, Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Prioritized list of strategy-aligned PPM process goals

    Materials: PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Participants: CIO, Steering Committee, Business Unit Leaders, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    This activity is designed for key departmental stakeholders to articulate how PPM processes should be developed or refined to meet the PPM strategic expectations.

    Participation of the key departmental stakeholders in this exercise is critical, e.g. CIO, Steering Committee, business unit leaders.

    Strategic Expectations x Processes = Process goals aligned to strategy
    Throughput Project Intake, Approval, & Prioritization
    Visibility Resource Management
    Responsiveness Status & Progress Reporting
    Resource Utilization Project Closure
    Benefits Benefits Realization

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy-Process Goals Translation Matrix Template.

    Use Info-Tech’s Translation Matrix to systematically articulate strategy-aligned PPM process goals

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.1 – PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix, tab 2

    Formula: To answer “[question]” in a way that we can [strategic expectation], it will be important to [process goal].

    Example 1:
    To answer the question “who can request a project, and how?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to standardize the project request process.

    Example 2:
    To answer the question “how will they decide what to fund?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to reach a consensus on project prioritization criteria.

    Example 3:
    To answer the question “how will we track the projected benefits?” in a way that we can maximize the throughput of the best projects, it will be important to double-check the validity of benefits before projects are approved.

    Screenshot of Tab 2 in Info-Tech's PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix tool. There is a table with notes overlaid 'Enter the process goals in the appropriate question–strategic expectation slot' and 'Assign a priority, from the most important (1) to the least important (5)'.

    Set metrics and preliminary targets for your high-priority PPM process goals

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.2 – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Prioritized list of strategy-aligned PPM process goals, Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Metrics and targets for high-priority PPM process goals

    Materials: PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix

    Participants: CIO, Steering Committee, Business Unit Leaders, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Your highest-priority process goals and their corresponding strategy expectations are displayed in tab 3 of the PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix template (example below).

    Through a group discussion, document what will be measured to decide the achievement of each process goal, as well as your current estimate and the long-term target. If necessary, adjust the approximate target duration.

    Screenshot of Tab 3 in Info-Tech's PPM Strategy-Process Translation Matrix tool. There is a table with 6 columns 'PPM Process', 'High-priority Process Goals', 'Strategy Expectation', 'How will you measure success?', 'Current Estimate', and 'Long-Term Target'; they are referred to in notes as columns B through G respectively. Overlaid notes are 'Columns C and D will auto-populate based upon your inputs from tab 2. The five PPM process areas are arranged vertically in column B and your top-five process goals from each area appear in column C.' 'Use column E to brainstorm how you might measure the success of each process goal at your organization. These can be tentative for now and refined over time.' 'Determine current metrics for each process goals and long-term target metrics in columns F and G.'

    Project-client-centered approach to PPM process design improves client satisfaction and team confidence

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    Reactive instead of proactive

    "We had no effective means of tracking project intake requests vs. capacity. We struggled using ad hoc processes and methods which worked to meet immediate needs, but we quickly realized that they were ineffective in tracking critical project metrics, key performance indicators (KPIs), or performance measures...In short, we were being reactive, instead of proactive."

    The result was a disorganized portfolio that led to low client satisfaction and team morale.

    Solution

    Examine processes “through the eyes of the client”

    With the guiding principle of “through the eyes of the client,” PPM processes and tools were developed to formalize project intake, prioritization, and capacity planning. All touchpoints between client and PPM processes were identified, and practices for managing client expectations were put in place. A client satisfaction survey was formulated as part of the post-project assessment and review.

    Results

    Client-centered processes improved client satisfaction and team confidence

    People, processes, and tools are now aligned to support client demand, manage client expectations, measure project KPIs, and perform post-project analysis. A standard for client satisfaction metrics was put in place. The overwhelmingly positive feedback has increased team confidence in their ability to deliver quality efforts.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 1.1.2 'Determine your actual resource capacity for projects'. Determine your actual resource capacity for projects

    Work with Info-Tech analysts to define your project vs. non-project ratio to help define how much of your overall resource capacity is actual available for projects.

    Sample of activity 1.2.1 'Set realistic PPM process goals'. Set realistic PPM process goals

    Leverage Info-Tech facilitators to help walk you through our PPM framework and define achievable process goals that are rooted in your current PPM maturity levels and organizational culture.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 2

    Align PPM Processes to Your Strategic Goals

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Align PPM processes to your strategic goals

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2-4 weeks
    Step 2.1: Develop intake & resource mgmt. processes Step 2.2: Define reporting, closure, & benefits processes
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Assess your current intake, prioritization, and resource management processes and wireframe a sustainable target state for each capability.
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Analyze your current portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes and wireframe a sustainable target state for each capability.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Set near-term and long-term goals.
    • Draft high-level steps within your target-state processes.
    • Document your process steps and roles and responsibilities.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Set near-term and long-term goals.
    • Draft high-level steps within your target-state processes.
    • Document your process steps and roles and responsibilities.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Phase 2 Results & Insights

    • The means of project and portfolio management (i.e. processes) shouldn’t eclipse the ends – strategic goals. Root your process in your PPM strategic goals to realize PPM benefits (e.g. optimized portfolio value, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction).

    Read first: Overview of the methodology for articulating new strategy-aligned PPM processes

    In the previous step of the blueprint, key department stakeholders established the PPM process goals, metrics, and targets in a way that aligns with the overall PPM strategy. In this phase, we draft a high-level description of the five PPM processes that reflect those goals using the following methodology:

    Methodology at a glance

    1. Articulate the current state of the process.
    2. Examine the process against the strategy-aligned goals.
    3. Create short- and long-term action items to refine the current process and meet the strategy-aligned targets.
    4. Develop a high-level target-state description of the PPM process.
    5. Estimate costs-in-use of the target-state process.

    Out-of-scope topics

    • Draft a detailed target-state description of the PPM process. Avoid falling into the “analysis paralysis” trap and keep the discussion focused on the overall PPM strategy.
    • PPM tools to support the process. This discussion will take place in the next phase of the blueprint.

    INPUT

    –›

    PROCESS

    –›

    OUTPUT

    • Strategy-aligned process goals, metrics, and targets (Activity 1.2.1)
    • Knowledge of current process
    • Knowledge of organizational culture and structure
    • Capability level assessment
    • Table-top design planning activity
    • Start-stop-continue retrospective
    • High-level description of the target state
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • High-level descriptions of current and target states
    • Short- and long-term action items for improving the process
    • Cost-in-use of the current- and target-state processes

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Build a sound business case for implementing the new PPM strategy with realistic costs and benefits of managing your project portfolio.

    Time spent on managing the project portfolio is an investment. Like any other business endeavors, the benefits must outweigh the costs to be worth doing.

    As you draft a high-level description of the PPM processes in this phase of the blueprint, use Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool to track the estimate the cost-in-use of the process. In the next phase, this information will be inform a cost-benefit analysis, which will be used to support your plan to implement the PPM strategy.

    Download Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Screenshots of Info-Tech's PPM Strategy Development Tool including a Cost-Benefit Analysis with tables and graphs.

    Step 2.1: Develop and refine project intake, prioritization, and resource management processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your process maturity.
    • Benchmark current processes against strategy-aligned goals.
    • Set near- and long-term action items.
    • Draft a high-level description of your target state.
    • Document your new processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Resource Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A definition of current and target state maturity levels for intake, prioritization, and resource management
    • Near-term and long-term process goals for intake, prioritization, and resource management
    • A high-level wireframe for your intake, prioritization, and resource management process steps

    Project intake, prioritization, and approval: Get projects with the highest value done first

    Give your organization the voice to say “no” (or “not yet”) to new projects.

    Questions

    • Who can request a project?
    • How do you request a project?
    • Who decides what to fund?
    • What is the target investment mix?
    • How will they decide?

    Benefits

    • Maximize value of time spent on project work by aligning projects with priorities and stakeholder needs.
    • Finish the projects you start by improving alignment of intake and prioritization with resource capacity.
    • Improve stakeholder satisfaction by managing expectations with consistent, streamlined processes.

    Challenges

    • Stakeholders who benefit from political or ad hoc prioritization processes will resist or circumvent formal intake processes.
    • Many organizations lack sufficient awareness of resource capacity necessary to align intake with availability.

    A graph highlighting the sweet spot of project intake decision making. The vertical axis is 'Rigor and Effort' increasing upward, and the horizontal axis is 'Quality and Effectiveness of Decisions' increasing to the right. The trend line starts at 'Gut Feel' with low 'Rigor and Effort', and gradually curves upward to 'Analysis Paralysis' at the top. A note with an arrow pointing to a midway point in the line reads 'The sweet spot changes between situations and types of decisions'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This process aims to control the project demand. A balance between rigor and flexibility is critical in order to avoid the “analysis paralysis” as much as the “gut feel” approach.

    Funnel project requests into a triage system for project intake

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for managing project intake.

    1. Requestor fills out form and submits the request into the funnel.
    2. Requests are triaged into the proper queue.
      1. Divert non-project request.
      2. Quickly assess value and urgency.
      3. Assign specialist to follow up on request.
      4. Inform the requestor.
    3. Business analyst starts to gather preliminary requirements.
      1. Follow up with sponsors to validate and define scope.
      2. Estimate size and determine project management rigor required.
      3. Start to develop an initial business case.
    4. Requestor is given realistic expectations for approval process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    An excess number of intake channels is the tell-tale sign of a project portfolio in distress. The PMO needs to exercise and enforce discipline on stakeholders. PMO should demand proper documentation and diligence from stakeholders before proceeding with requests.

    Maintain reliable resourcing data with a recurrent project intake, prioritization, and approval practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a five-step process for managing project intake, prioritization, and approval.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's five-step process for managing project intake. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Business Analysts', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Collect project requests' which involves 'Resources'. Step 2 is 'Screen project requests' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. A part of the step that may be applicable to some organizations is 'Concept approval' involving 'Governance Layer'. Step 3 is 'Develop business case' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. A part of the step that may be applicable to some organizations is 'Get a project sponsor' involving 'Governance Layer'. Step 4 is 'Prioritize project' which involves 'Business Analysts' and 'PMO'. Step 5 is 'Approve (greenlight) project' which involves 'Business Analysts', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer', with an attached note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date project portfolio information is available (project status, resource forecast, etc.)'. All of these steps lead to 'Initiate project, commit resources, etc.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    “Approval” can be a dangerous word in project and portfolio management. Use it carefully. Clarify precisely what is being “approved” at each step in the process, what is required to pass each gate, and how long the process will take.

    Determine your project intake, prioritization, and approval process maturity

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Project intake, prioritization, and approval capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the project intake, prioritization, and approval process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: Optimized We have effective intake processes with right-sized administrative overhead. Work is continuously prioritized to keep up with emerging challenges and opportunities.
    Capability Level 4: Aligned We have very strong intake processes. Project approvals are based on business cases and aligned with future resource capacity.
    Capability Level 3: Engaged Processes are in place to track project requests and follow up on them. Priorities are periodically re-evaluated, based largely on the best judgment of one or several executives.
    Capability Level 2: Defined Some processes are in place, but there is no capacity to say no to new projects. There is a backlog, but little or no method for grooming it.
    Capability Level 1: Unmanaged Our organization has no formal intake processes in place. Most work is done reactively, with little ability to prioritize project work proactively.

    Benchmark the current project intake, prioritization, and approval process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the intake, prioritization, and approval process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Simplify business cases
    • Send emails to requestor to manage expectations
    • Accept verbal project requests
    • Approve “pet projects”
    • Monthly prioritization meetings
    • Evaluate prioritization criteria

    Set near- and long-term action items for the project intake, prioritization, and approval process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Limit the number of channels available to request new projects.
    • Revise the intake form.
    • Establish a regular triage process.
    For example:
    • Establish a comprehensive scorecard and business case scoring process at the steering committee level.
    • Limit the rate of approval to be aligned with resource capacity.

    Review and customize slide 23, “Project intake, prioritization, and approval: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the intake, prioritization, and approval process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: project intake, prioritization, and approval
      Collect project requests –› Screen requests –› Develop business case –› Prioritize project –› Approve project

    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool; see next slide for instructions.

    Use the PPM Strategy Development Tool to track the time cost of the process

    Supporting Tool icon 2.1.1 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 3: Costing Assumptions

    Record the time cost of each high-level process task from Activity 2.1.1d.

    Screenshot of tab 3 from Info-Tech's PPM Strategy Development Tool with notes overlaid. Columns are 'ID', 'Task Description', 'Who does the task?', a super-column titled 'Current State' which includes 'How many times per year?', 'How many people?', and 'For how long?', a super-column titled 'Near-Term Target State' with the same three sub columns, and a super-column titled 'Long-Term Target State' with the same three sub columns. Notes for 'Who does the task?' read 'Choose executive, management or resource' and 'If task is done by more than one party, duplicate the task'. Notes for the 3 recurring sub columns are 'Estimate how many times in a year the task is performed (e.g. 120 project requests per year)', 'Indicate the number of people needed to perform the task each time', 'Estimate the average work-hours for the task… either in minutes or in hours', 'If a task is not applicable to a state (e.g. currently PMO does not screen project requests), leave the row blank', and 'For meetings, remember to indicate the number of people'.

    Document the high-level description for the new intake, prioritization, and approval process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.1e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new project intake, prioritization, and approval process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic document, for example:

    • Updated prioritization scorecard.
    • Roles and responsibility matrix, identifying consulted and informed parties.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Optimize Project Intake, Prioritization, and Approval blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 24, “Project intake, prioritization, and approval: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Clarity in project prioritization process leads to enterprise-wide buy-in

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    "Our challenge from the start was to better understand the strategic perspective and priorities of our client departments.

    In addition, much of the work requested was not aligned to corporate goals and efforts, and seemed to be contradictory, redundant, and lacking strategic focus."

    Complicating this challenge was the fact that work requests were being received via all means of communication, which made the monitoring and controlling of requests more difficult.

    Solution

    Client departments were consulted to improve the understanding of their strategic goals and priorities. Based on the consultation:

    • A new, enterprise-wide project prioritization criteria was developed.
    • Priority of project requests from all business areas are evaluated on a quarterly basis.
    • A prioritized list of projects are made available to the senior leadership team.

    Results

    "By creating and implementing a tool for departments to prioritize strategic efforts, we helped them consider the important overall project criteria and measure them uniformly, across all anticipated projects. This set a standard of assessment, prioritization, and ranking, which helped departments clearly see which efforts were supportive and matched their strategic goals."

    Resource management process ensures that projects get the resources they need

    Reclaim project capacity: properly allocate project work and establish more stable project timelines.

    Questions

    • Who assigns the resources?
    • Who feeds the data on resources?
    • How do we make sure it’s valid?
    • How do we handle contingencies when projects are late, or if availability changes?

    Benefits

    • Ensure that approved projects can be completed by aligning intake with real project capacity.
    • Reduce over-allocation of resources by allocating based on their proportion of project vs. non-project work.
    • Forecast future resource requirements by maintaining accurate resource capacity data.

    Challenges

    • Time tracking can be difficult when project workers balance project work with “keep the lights on” activities and other administrative work.
    • Continuous partial attention, interruptions, and distractions are a part of today’s reality that makes it very difficult to maximize productivity.
    A see-saw balancing 'Resource availability' on one side and 'Ongoing projects, Operational work, Administrative work, and Resource absence' on the other side.

    Maintain reliable resourcing data with a recurrent resource management practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a five-step process for resource management.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's five-step process for resource management. There are five groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Collect resource availability' which involves 'Resources' and 'Resource Managers'. Step 2 is 'Collect resource demand' which involves 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 3 is 'Identify need for reconciliation' which involves 'PMO'. Step 4 is 'Resolve conflicts and smoothen resource allocations' which involves 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 5 is 'Report resource allocations and forecast' which involves all groups, with an attached note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date information is available for project approval, portfolio reporting, closure, etc.'

    Info-Tech Insight

    This process aims to control the resource supply to meet the demand – project and non-project alike. Coordinate this process with the intake, approval, and prioritization process.

    Determine your resource management process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Resource management capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the resource management process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedOur organization has an accurate picture of project versus non-project work loads and allocates resources accordingly. We periodically reclaim lost capacity through organizational and behavioral change.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedWe have an accurate picture of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work. We allocate resources to these projects accordingly. We are checking in on project progress bi-weekly.
    Capability Level 3: PixelatedWe are allocating resources to projects and tracking progress monthly. We have a rough estimate of how much time is spent on project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 2: OpaqueWe match resources teams to projects and check in annually, but we do not forecast future resource needs or track project versus non-project work.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedOur organization expects projects to be finished, but there is no process in place for allocating resources or tracking project progress.

    Benchmark the current resource management process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the resource management process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Collect project actuals
    • Make enhancements to the PPM tool in use
    • Over allocating resources
    • “Around the room” reporting at monthly meeting
    • Send project updates before resource management meetings

    Set near- and long-term action items for the resource management process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Determine the percentage of project vs. non-project work through implementation of a weekly survey.
    For example:
    • Reduce resource waste to 6%.
    • Forecast resource requirements monthly.
    • Implement a mid-market PPM tool.

    Review and customize slide 26, “Resource management: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the resource management process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: resource management
      Collect resource availability –› Collect resource demand –› Identify need for reconciliation –› Resolve conflicts and over-allocation –› Update resource forecast


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?


    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new resource management process

    Associated Activity icon 2.1.2e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new resource management process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Resource management meeting agenda template
    • Roles and responsibility matrix, identifying consulted and informed parties

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Develop a Resource Management for the New Reality blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 27, “Resource management: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Step 2.2: Develop and refine portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine your process maturity.
    • Benchmark current processes against strategy-aligned goals.
    • Set near- and long-term action items.
    • Draft a high-level description of your target state.
    • Document your new processes.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • PMO Director/Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • Business Analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • A definition of current and target state maturity levels for portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization
    • Near-term and long-term process goals for portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization
    • A high-level wireframe for your portfolio reporting, project closure, and benefits realization process steps

    Portfolio reporting process makes trustworthy data accessible for informing decisions

    Giving stakeholders the ability to make informed decisions is the most important function of managing the project portfolio.

    Questions

    • What project information should be reported?
    • Who reports on project status?
    • When and how do we report on the status of the project portfolio?

    Benefits

    • Reporting is the linchpin of any successful PPM strategy.
    • Timely and accurate status reports enable decision makers to address issues risks and issues before they create bigger problems.
    • Executive visibility can be achieved with or without a commercial tool using spreadsheets, a content management system such as SharePoint, or a combination of tools you already have.

    Challenges

    • Trying to increase detailed visibility too fast leads to difficulty gathering and maintaining data. As a result, reporting is rarely accurate and people quickly lose trust in the portfolio.
    • If you are planning to adopt a commercial tool, Info-Tech strongly recommends validating your organization’s ability to maintain a consistent reporting process using simple tools before investing in a more sophisticated system.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you can only do one thing, establish frequently current reporting on project status. Reporting doesn’t have to be detailed or precise, as long as it’s accurate.

    Maintain reliable portfolio status data with a recurrent status and progress reporting practice

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for portfolio status and progress reporting.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for portfolio status and progress reporting. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Create project status reports' which involves 'Resources' and 'Project Managers'. Step 2 is 'Create a project portfolio status report' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', with a note that reads 'Ensure that up-to-date information is available for project approval, resource management, closure, etc.' Step 3 is 'Report on project portfolio status' which involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 4 is 'Act on portfolio steering decisions' which involves 'Resources', 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'.

    Start by establishing a regular reporting cadence with lightweight project status KPIs:

    Red Issue or risk that requires intervention For projects that are red or yellow, high-level status reports should be elaborated on with additional comments on budget, estimated hours/days until completion, etc.
    Yellow Issue or risk that stakeholders should be aware of
    Green No significant risks or issues

    Determine your resource management process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Portfolio reporting capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Kick-off the discussion about the portfolio reporting process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedWith the right tools, we can ensure that all projects are planned and maintained at a detailed task level with high-quality estimates, and that actual task progress is updated at least weekly.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedWe have the skills, knowledge, and resources needed to prepare a detailed cost-benefit analysis for all proposed projects. We track the progress throughout project execution.
    Capability Level 3: InterventionWith the right tools, we can ensure that project issues and risks are identified and addressed on a regular basis (e.g. at least monthly) for all projects.
    Capability Level 2: OversightWith the right tools, we can ensure that project status updates are revised on a regular basis (e.g. at least monthly) for all ongoing projects.
    Capability Level 1: ReactiveProject managers escalate issues directly with their direct supervisor or project sponsor because there is no formal PPM practice.

    Benchmark the current portfolio reporting process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the portfolio reporting process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Report on lightweight KPIs
    • Standardize the status reports
    • Project managers waiting too long before declaring a red status
    • Produce weekly project portfolio-wide report for senior leadership

    Set near- and long-term action items for the portfolio reporting process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Establish a reporting process that can be consistently maintained using lightweight KPIs.
    • Provide a simple dashboard that stakeholders can use to see their project status reports at a high level.
    For example:
    • Adopt a commercial tool for maintaining consistent status reports.
    • Support the tool with training and a mandate of adoption among all users.

    Review and customize slide 29, “Portfolio reporting: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the portfolio reporting process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: portfolio reporting
      Create project status reports –› Create a project portfolio status report –› Report on project portfolio status –› Act on portfolio steering decisions


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      InputWhat information do you need to perform the work?
      OutputWhat artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/TimingHow often, and when, will the work be performed?
      ResponsibilityWho will perform the work?
      AccountabilityWho will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new portfolio reporting process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.1e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new portfolio reporting process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated project status report template with new KPIs.
    • Documentation of requirements for improved PPM dashboards and reports.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 30, “Portfolio reporting: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Streamlined status reporting improves portfolio visibility for executives, enabling data-driven steering of the portfolio

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Public Administration
    Source: IAG / Info-Tech Interview

    Challenge

    The client had no effective real-time reporting in place to summarize their work efforts. In addition, the client struggled with managing existing resources against the ability to deliver on the requested project workload.

    Existing project reporting processes were manually intensive and lacked mature reporting capabilities.

    Solution

    Through a short and effective engagement, IAG conducted surveys and facilitated interviews to identify the information needed by each stakeholder. From this analysis and industry best practices, IAG developed scorecards, dashboards, and project summary reports tailored to the needs of each stakeholder group. This integrated reporting tool was then made available on a central portal for PPM stakeholders.

    Results

    Stakeholders can access project scorecard and dashboard reports that are available at any given time.

    Resource reporting enabled the PMO to better balance client demand with available project capacity and forecast any upcoming deficiencies in resourcing that affect project delivery.

    Project closure at the portfolio level controls throughput and responsiveness of the portfolio

    Take control over projects that linger on, projects that don’t provide value, and projects that do not align with changing organizational priority.

    Questions

    • Who declares that a project is done?
    • Who validates it?
    • Who is this reported to?
    • Who terminates low-value projects?
    • How will they decide that a project is too low value to continue?

    Benefits

    • Minimize post-implementation problems by ensuring clean handoffs, with clear responsibilities for ongoing support and maintenance.
    • Drive continuous improvement by capturing and applying lessons learned.
    • Increase the project portfolio’s responsiveness to change by responding to emerging opportunities and challenges.

    Challenges

    • Completion criteria and “definition of done” need to be well defined and done so at project initiation.
    • Scope changes need to be managed and documented throughout the project.
    • Portfolio responsiveness requires deep cultural changes that will be met with confusion and resistance from some stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although “change in organizational priority” is the most frequently cited cause of project failure (PMI Pulse of Profession, 2017), closing projects that don’t align with organizational priority ought to be a key PPM goal. Therefore, don’t think of it as project failure; instead, think of it as PPM success.

    Maintain the health of the project portfolio with a repeatable project closure process

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for project closure.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for project closure. There are five groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Resources', 'Resource Managers', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first steps are 'Complete project' which involves 'Project Managers', and 'Terminate low value projects' which involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 2 is 'Validate project closure' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', with a note that reads 'This includes facilitating the project sponsor sign-off, accepting and archiving lessons learned documents, etc.' The third steps are 'Conduct post-project work' which involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO', and 'Update resource availability' which includes 'Resource Managers'. Step 4 is 'Conduct post-implementation review' which involves all groups.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Post-implementation review checks which benefits (including those set out in the business case) have been achieved and identifies opportunities for further improvement. Without it, it can be difficult to demonstrate that investment in a project was worthwhile.

    Determine your project closure process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: Project closure capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the project closure process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedProject closure is centrally managed and supports post-project benefits tracking.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedProject closure is centrally managed at the portfolio level to ensure completion/acceptance criteria are satisfied.
    Capability Level 3: EngagedProject closure is confirmed at the portfolio level, but with minimal enforcement of satisfaction of completion/acceptance criteria.
    Capability Level 2: EncouragedProject managers often follow handoff and closure procedures, but project closure is not confirmed or governed at the portfolio level.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedProject closure is not governed at either the project or portfolio level.

    Benchmark the current project closure process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the project closure process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    Start Stop Continue
    • Conduct reprioritization of projects at a regular cadence
    • Prune projects every year
    • Waive post-implementation review for time-constrained projects
    • Collect project post-mortem reports and curate in PMO SharePoint

    Set near- and long-term action items for the project closure process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Begin establishing project closure criteria in the project initiation process.
    • Manage and document scope changes throughout the project.
    For example:
    • Institute a formal process to ensure that all projects are closed at the portfolio level and properly handed off to support and maintenance teams.

    Review and customize slide 32, “Project closure: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the project closure process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: project closure
      Complete or terminate projects –› Validate project closure –› Conduct post-project work –› Conduct post-implementation review


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      Input What information do you need to perform the work?
      Output What artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/Timing How often, and when, will the work be performed?
      Responsibility Who will perform the work?
      Accountability Who will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?


    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new project closure process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.2e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new project closure process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated project closure checklist.
    • Project value review meeting process document.
    • Post-implementation review process document.

    Info-Tech has several research notes that elaborate on aspects of project closure. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s research notes on project closure:

    • The Importance of Conducting a Post Implementation Review
    • Five Key Steps to Mastering Project Closure
    • ‘Governance’ Will Kill Your Projects

    Review and customize slide 33, “Project closure: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Validate the time and effort spent on projects with a benefits realization process

    Maximizing benefits from projects is the primary goal of PPM. Tracking and reporting on benefits post-project closes the loop on benefits.

    Questions

    • How do validate the project benefits from the original business case?
    • How do we track the benefits?
    • Who reports it? When?

    Benefits

    • Maximize benefits realization by identifying and addressing unforeseen issues or limitations to success.
    • Improve project approval and prioritization by improving validity of the business case definition process.

    Challenges

    • Project sponsors need to be willing to invest time – months and years post-project completion – to validate benefits realization.
    • Portfolio management needs to proactively work with sponsors to facilitate benefits tracking.
    • Business cases need to be well developed and documented to reflect real anticipated benefits.

    Too many projects fail to achieve the originally proposed benefits, and too few organizations are able to identify and address the root causes of those shortfalls.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In reality, benefits realization process extends across the entire project life cycle: during intake, during the execution of the project, and after project completion. Be mindful of this extended scope when you discuss benefits realization in the following activity.

    Keep project benefits front and center with a repeatable benefits realization process

    Info-Tech recommends following a four-step process for benefits realization.

    A diagram of Info-Tech's four-step process for benefits realization. There are four groups that may be involved in any one step, they are laid out on the side as row headers that each step's columns may fall into, 'Business Analysts', 'Project Managers', 'PMO', and 'Governance Layer'. The first step is 'Quantify and validate benefits in business case' which happens 'Before Project' and involves 'Business Analysts' and 'Project Managers'. Step 2 is 'Update projected project benefits' which happens 'During Project' and involves 'Project Managers' and 'PMO'. Step 3 is 'Hand-off benefits realization ownership' which happens at the end of project and involves 'Project Managers', 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'. Step 4 is 'Monitor and report on benefits' which happens 'After Project' and involves 'PMO' and 'Governance layer'.

    Info-Tech Insight

    At the heart of benefits realization is accountability: who is held accountable for projects that don’t realize the benefits and how? Without the buy-in from the entire executive layer team, addressing this issue is very difficult.

    Determine your benefits realization process capability level

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3a – 10 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational strategy and culture

    OUTPUT: benefits realization capability level

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Kick-off the discussion about the benefits realization process by reading the capability level descriptions below and discussing which level currently applies to you the most.

    Capability Level Descriptions

    Capability Level 5: OptimizedProject sponsors and key stakeholders are accountable for stated project benefits before, during and after the project. There is a process to maximize the realization of project benefits.
    Capability Level 4: AlignedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, updated when changes are made to the project, and monitored/reported after projects are completed.
    Capability Level 3: EngagedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, and there is a loosely defined process to report on benefits realization.
    Capability Level 2: DefinedProject benefits are forecasted and taken into account for approval, but there is no process to monitor whether the said benefits are realized.
    Capability Level 1: UnmanagedProjects are approved and initiated without discussing benefits.

    Benchmark the current benefits realization process against strategy-aligned goals

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3b – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Documentation describing the current process (e.g. standard operating procedures), Process goals from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Retrospective review of current process

    Materials: 4x6” recipe cards, Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Conduct a table-top planning exercise to map out the process currently in place.

    1. Use white 4”x6” recipe cards to write unique steps of a process. Use the benefits realization process from the previous slides as a guide.
    2. Use green cards to write artifacts or deliverables that result from a step.
    3. Use pink cards to write issues, problems, or risks.
    4. Discuss how the process could better achieve the strategy-aligned goals from activity 1.2.1. Keep a list of possible changes in the form of a start-stop-continue retrospective (example below) on a whiteboard.
    StartStopContinue
    • Require “hard monetary value” in business benefits
    • Send project updates before resource management meetings

    Set near- and long-term action items for the benefits realization process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3c – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: Outcome of the retrospective review, Process goals and metrics from activity 1.2.1

    OUTPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    Materials: Whiteboard

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Analyze each item in the start-stop-continue retrospective to compile a set of near-term and long-term action items.

    The near-term plan should include steps that are within the authority of the PMO and do not require approval or investment outside of that authority. The long-term plan should include steps that may require a longer approval process, buy-in of external stakeholders, and the investment of time and money.
    Near-Term Action Items Long-Term Action Items
    For example:
    • Create an “orientation for project sponsors” document.
    • Encourage project managers to re-validate project benefits on an ongoing basis and report any deviation.
    For example:
    • Recruit the finance department’s help in benefits tracking.
    • Require Finance’s sign-off on project benefits in business cases during intake.

    Review and customize slide 35, “Benefits realization: action items,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Draft a high-level description of the benefits realization process at a target state

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3d – 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Action items for evolving the process to a target state

    OUTPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    Materials: Whiteboard, PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    1. Break down the process into several tasks at a high level. Avoid getting into too much detail by limiting the number of steps.
    2. An example of high-level breakdown: benefits realization
      Validate benefits in business case –› Update project benefits during execution –› Hand-off benefits ownership –› Monitor and report on benefits


    3. Describe each task by answering the following questions. Document your response in the PPM Strategic Plan Template.
    4. Question

      Description

      InputWhat information do you need to perform the work?
      OutputWhat artifacts/deliverables are produced as a result?
      Frequency/TimingHow often, and when, will the work be performed?
      ResponsibilityWho will perform the work?
      AccountabilityWho will approve the work and assume the ownership of any decisions?

    5. Record the time cost of each process using the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Document the high-level description for the new benefits realization process

    Associated Activity icon 2.2.3e – 30 minutes - 1 hour

    INPUT: High-level description of the process at the target state

    OUTPUT: Updated PPM strategic plan

    Materials: PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager

    Update your PPM strategic plan with the new high-level description for the new benefits realization process. Depending on your current process capability level, you may wish to include additional information on your strategic plan, for example:

    • Updated business plan templates.
    • Communication plan for project sponsors.

    Info-Tech has a dedicated blueprint to help you develop the high-level process description into a fully operationalized process. Upon completion of this PPM strategy blueprint, speak to an Info-Tech account manager or analyst to get started.

    Read Info-Tech’s Establish the Benefits Realization Process blueprint.

    Review and customize slide 36, “Benefits realization: target state,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 2.1.1 'Align your project intake, prioritization, and approval process to the PPM strategy'. Align your project intake, prioritization, and approval process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.1.2 'Align your resource management process to the PPM strategy'. Align your resource management process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Sample of activity 2.2.1 'Align your portfolio reporting process to the PPM strategy'.Align your portfolio reporting process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.2.2 'Align your project closure process to the PPM strategy'.Align your project closure process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Sample of activity 2.2.3 'Align your benefits realization process to the PPM strategy'.Align your benefits realization process to the PPM strategy

    Examine the process at the current state and develop an action plan to improve it, with a high-level description of the process at a target state and its overhead costs. The outcome of this activity feeds into the overall PPM strategic plan.

    Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    PHASE 3

    Complete Your PPM Strategic Plan

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Complete your PPM strategic plan

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select a right-sized PPM solutionStep 3.2: Finalize your PPM Strategic Plan Template
    Work with an analyst to:
    • Assess your PPM tool requirements to help support your processes.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Determine the costs and potential benefits of your PPM strategy.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Determine the functionality requirements of the PPM solution.
    • Estimate your PPM tool budget.
    • Review the tool assessment.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio.
    • Estimate the benefits of the PPM strategy.
    • Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive implementation plan.
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    With these tools & templates:
    • PPM Strategy Development Tool
    • PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Phase 3 Insight:

    • Approach PPM as an evolving discipline that requires adaptability and long-term organizational change. Near-term process improvements should create stakeholder desire for better portfolio visibility and agility over the long term.

    Step 3.1: Select a right-sized PPM solution for supporting your new processes

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the functionality requirements of a PPM solution in the near and long terms.
    • Estimate your PPM tool budget.
    • Review tool assessment.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • List of functional requirements for a PPM solution
    • An estimate budget and cost for supporting a PPM tool in the near and long terms
    • PPM tool requirements for the near and long terms

    Right-size your PPM solution/tool to fit your PPM processes

    Avoid a common pitfall: the disconnect between PPM processes and PPM tools.

    PPM tools act as both a receptacle for portfolio data generated by your processes and a source of portfolio data to drive your processes forward. Therefore, choosing a suitable PPM tool is critical to the success of your PPM strategy:

    • PPM tool inputs must match the type, level of detail, and amount of portfolio data generated by your PPM processes.
    • PPM tool outputs must be useful, insightful, easy to access, and easy to understand for people who engage in your PPM processes.

    User adoption is an often cited cause of failed PPM tool implementation:

    "The biggest problem is getting the team to work with the tool. We need to make sure that we’re not wasting time delving too far down into the tool, yet putting enough information to get useful information back." (IT Director, Financial Services)

    This final step of the blueprint will discuss the choice of PPM tools to ensure the success of PPM strategy by avoiding the process-tool disconnect.

    Common pitfalls for PPM tools

    • Purchasing and implementing a PPM tool before the process is defined and accepted.
    • Poor expectation setting: inability of tools to perform the necessary analysis.
    • Underleveraged: low user/process adoption.
    • Poor integration with the corporate finance function.
    • (WGroup, 2017)

    Leverage PPM tools to get the information you need

    An optimized PPM solution is the vehicle that provides decision makers with four key pieces of information they require when making decisions for your project portfolio:

    • Historical Insight – inform decision makers about how much time and resources have been spent to date, and benchmark the accuracy of prior project estimates and resource allocations.
    • Forecasting – provide a trustworthy estimate of demand on resources and current projects.
    • Portfolio Analytics – analyze portfolio data and generate easy-to-consume reports that provide answers to questions such as:
      • How big is our overall portfolio?
      • How much money/resource time is available?
      • How efficiently are we using our resources?
    • Project Visibility – provide a trustworthy report on the status of current projects and the resources working on them.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without the proper information, decision makers are driving blind and are forced to make gut feel decisions as opposed to data-informed decisions. Implement a PPM solution to allocate projects properly and ensure time and money don’t vanish without being accounted for.

    Commercial PPM tools have more functionality but are more costly, complex, and difficult to adopt

    • Granular timesheet management
    • Workflow and team collaboration
    • Robust data and application integration
    • Advanced what-if planning
    • Mobile usability
    A map comparing commercial PPM tools by 'Functionality', 'Cost', and 'Difficulty to implement/adopt'. 'Functionality' and 'Difficulty to implement/adopt' share an axis and can be assumed to have a linear relationship. 'Spreadsheets' are low functionality and low cost. 'Google Sites' are low to middling functionality and low cost. 'SharePoint' is middling functionality with a slightly higher cost. The next three start at middling cost and above-average functionality and trend higher in both categories: 'Commercial Entry-Level PPM', 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM', and 'Commercial Enterprise PPM'.
    • Business case scoring and prioritization
    • Multi-user reporting and request portal
    • High-level resource management
    • Project status, cost, and risk tracking

    "Price tags [for PPM tools] vary considerably. Expensive products don't always provide more capability. Inexpensive products are generally low cost for good reason." (Merkhofer)

    Your PPM tool options are not limited to commercial offerings

    Despite the rapid growth in the commercial PPM tool market today, homegrown approaches like spreadsheets and intranet sites continue to be used as PPM tools.

    Kinds of PPM solutions used by Info-Tech clients

    A pie chart visualizing the kinds of PPM solutions that are used by Info-Tech clients. There are three sections, the largest of which is 'Spreadsheet-based, 46%', then 'Commercial, 33%', then 'No solution, 21%'. (Source: Info-Tech Research Group (2016), N=433)

    Category

    Characteristics

    PPM maturity

    Enterprise tool
    • Higher professional services requirements for enterprise deployment
    • Larger reference customers
    High
    Mid-market tool
    • Lower expectation of professional services engaged in initial deployment contract
    • Fewer globally recognizable reference clients
    • Faster deployments
    High
    Entry-level tool
    • Lower cost than mid-market & enterprise PPM tools
    • Limited configurability, reporting, and resource management functionalities
    • Compelling solutions to the organizations that wants to get a fast start to a trial deployment
    Intermediate
    Spreadsheet based
    • Little/no up-front cost, highly customizable to suit your organization’s needs
    • Varying degrees of sophistication
    • Few people in the organization may understand the logic behind the tool; knowledge may not be easily transferrable
    Intermediate Low

    Determine the functional requirements of the PPM solution

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.1 – 20 minutes

    INPUT: PPM strategic plan

    OUTPUT: Modified PPM strategic plan with a proposed choice of PPM tool

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, IT Managers

    Use the Tool Assessment tab (tab 4) of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool to rate and analyze functional requirements of your PPM solution.

    • Review the list of PPM features provided on column B of tab 4. You can add any desired features not listed.
    • Rate your near-term and long-term feature requirements using the drop-down menus in columns C and D. Your selections here will inform the tool selection bubble chart to the right of the features list.

    Screenshot showing the features list on tab 4 of the PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    Estimate your PPM tool budget

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.2 – 20 minutes

    INPUT: PPM strategic plan

    OUTPUT: Modified PPM strategic plan with a proposed choice of PPM tool

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: CIO, PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, IT Managers

    Enter the PPM tool budget information on the Tool Assessment tab of Info-Tech’s PPM Strategy Development Tool.

    • As a starting point, it can help to know that low-priced PPM tools cost around $1,000 per user per year. High-priced PPM tools cost around $3,000 per user per year.
    • Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)-based pricing for PPM solutions is increasingly popular. If you plan to purchase perpetual licensing, divide the total implementation and licensing cost by three years to be comparable with a three-year SaaS total cost of ownership analysis.

    Screenshot showing the tool assessment from the PPM Strategy Development Tool with 'Near-Term' and 'Long-Term' budget columns. Notes include 'Enter the number of fully licensed PPM users you expect to provision for and your estimated annual budget for a PPM tool', 'The tool assessment automatically calculates your annual budget per user, which is reflected in the bubble chart analysis (see next slide)'.

    Review the tool assessment graphic

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.3 – 20 minutes

    The map comparing commercial PPM tools from before, this time overlaid with 'Near-Term' and 'Long-Term' budgets as coloured circles. The vertical axis is 'Functionality Rating' and the horizontal axis is now 'Annual Cost/Budget per User'. 'Spreadsheets' are low functionality and low cost. 'Google Sites' are low to middling functionality and low cost. 'SharePoint' is middling functionality with a slightly higher cost. The 'Near-Term' budget circle covers those three tools. The next three start at middling cost and above-average functionality and trend higher in both categories: 'Commercial Entry-Level PPM', 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM', and 'Commercial Enterprise PPM'. The 'Long-Term' budget circle covers 'Commercial Mid-Market PPM'.

    If you are in one of the non-covered areas, consider revisiting your functional requirements and PPM strategy. You may need to lessen your expectations to be able to stay within your budget, or find a way to get more money.

    Keep in mind that the long-term goal can be to work towards a commercial tool, while the short-term goal would be to be able to maintain your portfolio in a simple spreadsheet first.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you choose a commercial solution, you will need to gain executive buy-in in order to implement the tool; proceed to near-term and long-term plans to get the ball rolling on this decision.

    Review and customize slide 37, “Tools for PPM: proposed near- and long-term solutions,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Grow your own, or select and implement, a PPM solution with Info-Tech

    Whether you choose spreadsheet-based or commercially available PPM solutions, use Info-Tech’s research for scoping, designing, and implementing them.

    Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint will help you implement a highly evolved spreadsheet-based PPM solution. It features the Portfolio Manager 2017, a Microsoft Excel-based workbook that leverages its business intelligence features to provide a basis for implementing a scalable, highly customizable PPM tool with useful and easy-to-manipulate analytics.

    Read Info-Tech’s Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint.

    Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a PPM Solution blueprint is part of our Vendor Landscape research. Make sense of the diversity of PPM solutions available in today’s market, and choose the most appropriate solutions for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.

    Read Info-Tech’s Select and Implement a PPM Solution blueprint.

    A right-sized PPM strategy leads to a right-sized portfolio management tool based on Info-Tech’s template

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Energy
    Source: Info-Tech Client

    “The approach makes it easy to run the portfolio without taking time away from the project themselves.” (IT Manager, Energy Resources Firm)

    Situation

    • A small IT department struggled with balancing project work with ongoing operational management and support work.
    • The department includes experienced and successful project managers and a mature, skilled team.
    • However, the nature of the department’s role has evolved to the point where the project and operational work demands have exceeded the available time.
    • Prioritization needed to become more centralized and formalized while management control of the work assignments became increasingly decentralized.

    Complication

    • Agile projects offer clear advantages by lightening the requirement for proactive planning. However, getting the staff to adapt would be challenging because of the overall workload and competing priorities.
    • Some of the team’s time needed to be carefully tracked and reported for time & materials-based billing, but the time sheet system was unsuited to their portfolio management needs.
    • Commercial PPM systems were ruled out because strict task management seemed unlikely to gain adoption.

    Resolution

    • The team deployed Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Workbook, based on a Microsoft Excel template, and the Grow Your Own PPM Solution blueprint.
    • For the first time, executive leadership was given a 12-month forecast of resource capacity based on existing and pending project commitments. The data behind the capacity forecast was based on allocating people to projects with a percentage of their time for each calendar month.
    • The data behind the forecast is high level but easily maintainable.

    Step 3.2: Finalize customizing your PPM Strategic Plan Template

    PHASE 1

    PHASE 2

    PHASE 3

    1.11.22.12.23.13.2
    Choose the right PPM strategyTranslate strategy into process goalsDefine intake & resource mgmt. processesDefine reporting, closure, & benefits mgmt. processesSelect a right-sized PPM solutionFinalize your PPM strategic plan

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine the costs of support your PPM strategic plan.
    • Estimate some of the benefits of your PPM strategic plan.
    • Perform a cost-benefit analysis.
    • Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager
    • Project Managers
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • A cost/benefit analyst
    • An implementation action plan
    • A finalized PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Estimate the total cost-in-use of managing the project portfolio

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.1 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 5: Costing Summary

    The time cost of PPM processes (tab 3) and PPM tool costs (tab 4) are summarized in this tab. Enter additional data to estimate the total PPM cost-in-use: the setup information and the current cost of PPM software tools.

    Screenshot of the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 5: Costing Summary. Notes include 'If unknown, the overall HR budget of your project portfolio can be estimated as: (# FTEs) * (fully-loaded FTE cost per hour) * 1800', 'This is your total PPM cost-in-use'.

    Estimate the benefits of managing the project portfolio

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.2 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions

    The benefits of PPM processes are estimated by projecting the sources of waste on your resource capacity.

    1. Estimate the current extent of waste on your resource capacity. If you have completed Info-Tech’s PPM Current Score Scorecard, enter the data from the report.
    2. Screenshot of a Waste Assessment pie chart from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions.
    3. Given your near- and long-term action items for improving PPM processes, estimate how each source of waste on your resource capacity will change.
    4. Screenshot of a Waste Assessment table titled 'These inputs represent the percentage of your overall portfolio budget that is wasted in each scenario' from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 6: Benefits Assumptions.

    Review the cost-benefit analysis results and update the PPM Strategic Plan Template

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.3 – PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 7: Conclusion Screenshot of a 'PPM Strategy Cost-Benefit Analysis' from the PPM Strategy Development Tool, Tab 7: Conclusion. It has tables on top and bar charts underneath.

    This tab summarizes the costs and benefits of your PPM strategic plan.

    • Costs are estimated from wasted project capacity and time spent on PPM process work.
    • Benefits are estimated from the project capacity to be reclaimed as a result of improvements in PPM.
    • Return on investment is calculated by dividing the value of project capacity to be reclaimed by investment in PPM in addition to the current-state cost.

    Capture this summary in your PPM strategic plan.

    Customize slides 40 and 41, “Return on PPM investment,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Determine who will be responsible for coordinating the flow, collection, and reporting of portfolio data

    Supporting Tool icon 3.2.3 – Project Portfolio/PMO Analyst Job Description

    You will need to determine responsibilities and accountabilities for portfolio management functions within your team.

    If you do not have a clearly identifiable portfolio manager at this time, you will need to clarify who will wear which hats in terms of facilitating intake and prioritization, high-level capacity awareness, and portfolio reporting.

    • Use Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template to help clarify some of the required responsibilities to support your PPM strategy.
      • If you need to bring in an additional staff member to help support the strategy, you can customize the job description template to help advertise the position. Simply edit the text in grey within the template.
    • If you have other PPM tasks that you need to define responsibilities for, you can use the RASCI chart on the final tab of the PPM Strategy Develop Tool.

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template.

    Sample of Info-Tech's Project Portfolio Analyst Job Description Template.

    Refine and consolidate the near-term action items into a cohesive plan

    Associated Activity icon 3.2.4 – 30 minutes

    INPUT: Near-term action items

    OUTPUT: Near-term action plan

    Materials: PPM Strategy Development Tool

    Participants: PMO Director/ Portfolio Manager, Project Managers, Resource Managers, Business Analysts

    Collect the near-term action items for each of the five PPM processes and arrange them into a table that outlines the near-term action plan. Once it is compiled, adjust the timeline and responsibility so that the plan is coherent and realistic as a whole.

    Example:

    Outcome

    Action required

    Timeline

    Responsibility

    Determine the percentage distribution of project vs. non-project work Run a time audit survey with all project resources 2 weeks Resource managers
    Test a simple dashboard for project status Pilot Info-Tech’s Portfolio Manager 2017 workbook 2 weeks PMO Director

    "There is a huge risk of taking on too much too soon, especially with the introduction of specific tools and tool sets. There is also an element of risk involved that can lead to failure and disappointment with PPM if these tools are not properly introduced and supported." (Jim Carse, Director of the Portfolio Office, Queen’s University)

    Review and customize slide 43, “Summary of near-term action plan,” in Info-Tech’s PPM Strategic Plan Template.

    Finalize and publish your PPM strategic plan

    Table of Contents

    Read over the document to ensure its completeness and consistency.

    At this point, you have a PPM strategic plan that is actionable and realistic, which addresses the goals set by the senior leadership.

    The executive brief establishes the need for PPM strategy, the goals and metrics are set by members of the senior leadership that gave the initial buy-in, and the target states of PPM processes that meet those goals are described. Finally, the costs and benefits of the improved PPM practice are laid out in a way that can be validated.

    The next step for your PPM strategy is to use this document as a foundation for implementing and operationalizing the target-state PPM processes.

    Review and publish the document for your executive layer and key project stakeholders. Solicit their feedback.

    Info-Tech has a library of blueprints that will guide you through each of the five processes. Contact your Info-Tech account manager or Info-Tech analyst to get started.

    • Project Portfolio Management Strategy
      • Strategic Expectations
      • Overview
    • Leadership Mandate
    • Project Demand and Resource Supply
    • The Current State of Resource Utilization
    • PPM Processes
      • Project intake, prioritization, and approval
      • Resource management
      • Portfolio reporting
      • Project closure
      • Benefits realization
      • Tools for PPM
    • The Economic Impact of PPM
    • PPM Strategy Next Steps

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of Barry Cousins.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Sample of activity 3.1 'Scope the right-sized PPM solution for your PPM strategy'. Scope the right-sized PPM solution for your PPM strategy

    Use the PPM Strategy Development Tool to quickly determine our near- and long-term recommendation for your PPM solution.

    Sample of activity 3.2 'Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of your PPM strategic plan'. Conduct a cost-benefit analysis of your PPM strategic plan

    Using the time cost estimates of each process and the requirement for a PPM tool, Info-Tech helps you quantify the overhead costs of PPM and estimate the monetary benefits of reclaimed project capacity for your project portfolio.

    Insight breakdown

    Insight 1

    • Executive layer buy-in is a critical prerequisite for the success of a top-down PPM strategy. Ensure your executives are on board before preceding to implement your PPM strategy.

    Insight 2

    • The means of project and portfolio management (i.e. processes) shouldn’t eclipse the ends – strategic goals. Root your process in your PPM strategic goals to realize PPM benefits (e.g. optimized portfolio value, improved project throughput, increased stakeholder satisfaction).

    Insight 3

    • Without the proper information, decision makers are driving blind and are forced to make gut-feel decisions as opposed to data-informed decisions. Implement a PPM solution to allocate projects properly and ensure time and money don’t vanish without being accounted for.

    Summary of accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Info-Tech’s thought model on PPM processes that create an infrastructure around projects
    • Your current state of project portfolio: project capacity vs. project demand
    • Importance of gaining executive buy-in for installing the PPM practice

    Processes Optimized

    • Project intake, prioritization, and approval process
    • Resource management process
    • Portfolio reporting process
    • Project closure process
    • Benefits realization process

    Deliverables Completed

    • Choice of PPM strategy and the leadership mandate
    • Analysis of current project capacity and demand
    • PPM process goals and metrics, aligned to meet PPM strategic expectations
    • PPM process capability levels
    • Retrospective examination of current state, near/long-term action items for improvement, and high-level descriptions of the five PPM processes
    • Recommendation of PPM tools to support the processes
    • Estimate of PPM overhead costs
    • Cost-benefit analysis of PPM practice
    • PPM strategic plan

    Related Info-Tech Research

    • Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    • Grow Your Own PPM Solution
    • Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization
    • Develop a Resource Management Strategy for the New Reality
    • Manage a Minimum-Viable PMO
    • Establish the Benefits Realization Process
    • Manage an Agile Portfolio
    • Establish the Benefits Realization Process
    • Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program
      The Project Portfolio Management Diagnostic Program is a low-effort, high-impact program designed to help project owners assess and improve their PPM practices. Gather and report on all aspects of your PPM environment in order to understand where you stand and how you can improve.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Kiron D. Bondale PMP, PMI-RMP, CDAP, CDAI, Senior Project Portfolio Management Professional Kiron D. Bondale PMP, PMI-RMP, CDAP, CDAI
    Senior Project Portfolio Management Professional

    Kiron has worked in the project management domain for more than fifteen years managing multiple projects, leading Project Management Offices (PMO) and providing project portfolio management consulting services to over a hundred clients across multiple industries. He has been an active member of the Project Management Institute (PMI) since 1999 and served as a volunteer director on the Board of the PMI Lakeshore Chapter for six years. Kiron has published articles on project and project portfolio management in multiple journals and has delivered over a hundred webinar presentations on a variety of PPM and PM topics and has presented at multiple industry conferences. Since 2009, Kiron has been blogging on a weekly basis on project management topics and responds to questions daily in the LinkedIn PMI Project, Program and Portfolio Management discussion group.

    Photo of Shaun Cahill, Project Manager, Queen’s University Shaun Cahill, Project Manager &
    Jim Carse, Director of the Project Portfolio Office
    Queen’s University

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Amy Fowler Stadler, Managing Partner, Lewis Fowler Amy Fowler Stadler, Managing Partner
    Lewis Fowler

    Amy has more than 20 years of experience in business and technology, most recently owning her own management consulting firm since 2002, focused on business transformation, technology enablement, and operational improvement. Prior to that, she was at CenturyLink (formerly Qwest) as an IT Director, Perot Systems in various roles, and Information Handling Services, Inc. as a Software Development Product Manager.

    Amy holds a bachelor’s degree in Computer Science with a minor in Business Communications and is also a 2015 Hall of Fame inductee to Illinois State University College of Applied Science and Technology.

    Photo of Rick Morris, President, R2 Consulting LLC Rick Morris, President
    R2 Consulting LLC

    Rick A. Morris, PMP, is a certified Scrum Agile Master, Human Behavior Consultant, best-selling author, mentor, and evangelist for project management. Rick is an accomplished project manager and public speaker. His appetite for knowledge and passion for the profession makes him an internationally sought after speaker delivering keynote presentations for large conferences and PMI events around the world. He holds the PMP (Project Management Professional), MPM (Masters of Project Management), Scrum Agile Master, OPM3, Six Sigma Green Belt, MCITP, MCTS, MCSE, TQM, ATM-S, ITIL, and ISO certifications, and is a John Maxwell Certified Speaker, Mentor, and Coach. Rick is the Owner of R2 Consulting, LLC and has worked for organizations such as GE, Xerox, and CA, and has consulted with numerous clients in a wide variety of industries including financial services, entertainment, construction, non-profit, hospitality, pharmaceutical, retail, and manufacturing.

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Terry Lee Ricci PgMP, PfMP, PMP, PPM Practice Lead, IAG Consulting Terry Lee Ricci PgMP, PfMP, PMP, PPM Practice Lead
    IAG Consulting

    Terry is passionate and highly skilled at PMO transformation, developing high-performing teams that sustain long-term business results. Terry has a reputation built upon integrity, resourcefulness, and respect. She has the vision to implement long and short-term strategies, meeting both current and evolving business needs.

    Change Management/Business transformation: Terry has extensive background in PMO strategy development aligned to corporate goals. Many years in the PMO organization integration/transformation building or overhauling programs and processes.

    Governance: Terry loves to monitor and measure performance and outcomes and uses her collaborative style to successfully bring simplicity to complexity (technology – people – process). Performance optimization results are easy to use and clearly define who is doing what across functions. End results consistently align to business strategy while mitigating risks effectively.

    Comprehensive: A “through the ranks” executive with a comprehensive understanding of PMO operations, high-performance teams, and the respective business units they support.

    Photo of Alana Ruckstuhl MSc, IT Project Officer, Federal Economic Development Agency for Southern Ontario Alana Ruckstuhl MSc, IT Project Officer
    Federal Economic Development Agency for Southern Ontario

    Research contributors and experts

    Photo of Jay Wardle, Director of the PMO, Red Wing Shoes Co. Jay Wardle, Director of the PMO
    Red Wing Shoes Co.
    Photo of Bob White, Vice President/Chief Information Officer, ALM Holding Company Bob White, Vice President/Chief Information Officer
    ALM Holding Company

    As vice president and chief information officer for ALM Holding Company, Bob White directs all technology activity and support for three main verticals: road construction, energy management, and delivery and transportation. He has been with ALM Holding Company for one and a half years, focusing on PPM process improvement, cybersecurity initiatives, and IT service management.

    Prior to joining ALM, Bob was executive vice president/chief information officer at Ashley Furniture Industries, Inc. where he led the strategic direction, implementation, and management of information technology throughout the company’s global operations. Bob has also held VP/CIO positions at the Stride Rite Corporation and Timex Corporation.

    Bob holds a Master’s degree in Operations Management from the University of Arkansas and a Bachelor of Science degree in Industrial Engineering from Southern Illinois University.

    Bibliography

    Bersin, Josh. “Time to Scrap Performance Appraisals?” Forbes Magazine, 5 June 2013. Web. 30 Oct 2013.

    Cheese, Peter et al. “Creating an Agile Organization.” Accenture, Oct. 2009. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Croxon, Bruce et al. “Dinner Series: Performance Management with Bruce Croxon from CBC's 'Dragon's Den'” HRPA Toronto Chapter. Sheraton Hotel, Toronto, ON. 12 Nov. 2013. Panel discussion.

    Culbert, Samuel. “10 Reasons to Get Rid of Performance Reviews.” Huffington Post Business, 18 Dec. 2012. Web. 28 Oct. 2013.

    Denning, Steve. “The Case Against Agile: Ten Perennial Management Objections.” Forbes Magazine, 17 Apr. 2012. Web. Nov. 2013.

    Estis, Ryan. “Blowing up the Performance Review: Interview with Adobe’s Donna Morris.” Ryan Estis & Associates, 17 June 2013. Web. Oct. 2013.

    Gallup, Inc. “Gallup Study: Engaged Employees Inspire Company Innovation.” Gallup Management Journal, 12 Oct. 2006. Web. 12 Jan 2012.

    Gartside, David et al. “Trends Reshaping the Future of HR.” Accenture, 2013. Web. 5 Nov. 2013.

    KeyedIn Solutions. “Why PPM and PMOs Fail.” KeyedIn Projects, 2013. Ebook.

    Lessing, Lawrence. Free Culture. Lulu Press Inc.: 30 July 2016.

    Merkhofer, Lee. “Keys to Implementing Project Portfolio Management.” Lee Merkhofer Consulting, 2017.

    Perry, Mark Price. Business Driven Project Portfolio Management. J Ross Pub: 17 May 2011.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2015: Capturing the Value of Project Management.” PMI, Feb. 2015. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2016: The High Cost of Low Performance.” PMI, 2016. Web.

    Project Management Institute. “Pulse of the Profession 2017: Success Rates Rise.” PMI, 2017. Web.

    Project Management Institute. The Standard for Portfolio Management – Third Edition. PMI: 1 Dec. 2012.

    WGroup. “Common Pitfalls in Project Portfolio Management – Part 2.” WGroup, 24 Jan. 2017. Web.

    Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}387|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • member rating average days saved: Read what our members are saying
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Data architecture projects have often failed in the past, causing businesses today to view the launch of a new project as a costly initiative with unclear business value.
    • New technologies in big data and analytics are requiring organizations to modernize their data architecture, but most organizations have failed to spend the time and effort refining the appropriate data models and blueprints that enable them to do so.
    • As the benefits for data architecture are often diffused across an organization’s information management practice, it can be difficult for the business to understand the value and necessity of data architecture.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • At the heart of tomorrow’s insights-driven enterprises is a modern data environment anchored in fit-for-purpose data architectures.
    • The role of traditional data architecture is transcending beyond organizational boundaries and its focus is shifting from “keeping the lights on” (i.e. operational data and BI) to providing game-changing insights gleaned from untapped big data.

    Impact and Result

    • Perform a diagnostic assessment of your present day architecture and identify the capabilities of your future “to be” environment to position your organization to capitalize on new opportunities in the data space.
    • Use Info-Tech’s program diagnostic assessment and guidance for developing a strategic roadmap to support your team in building a fit-for purpose data architecture practice.
    • Create a data delivery architecture that harmonizes traditional and modern architectural opportunities.

    Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your data architecture, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Develop a data architecture vision

    Plan your data architecture project and align it with the business and its strategic vision.

    • Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results – Phase 1: Develop a Data Architecture Vision
    • Modernize Data Architecture Project Charter
    • Data Architecture Strategic Planning Workbook

    2. Assess data architecture capabilities

    Evaluate the current and target capabilities of your data architecture, using the accompanying diagnostic assessment to identify performance gaps and build a fit-for-purpose practice.

    • Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results – Phase 2: Assess Data Architecture Capabilities
    • Data Architecture Assessment and Roadmap Tool
    • Initiative Definition Tool

    3. Develop a data architecture roadmap

    Translate your planned initiatives into a sequenced roadmap.

    • Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results – Phase 3: Develop a Data Architecture Roadmap
    • Modernize Data Architecture Roadmap Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Develop a Data Architecture (DA) Vision

    The Purpose

    Discuss key business drivers and strategies.

    Identify data strategies.

    Develop a data architecture vision.

    Assess data architecture practice capabilities. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A data architecture vision aligned with the business.

    A completed assessment of the organization’s current data architecture practice capabilities.

    Identification of "to be" data architecture practice capabilities.

    Identification of key gaps. 

    Activities

    1.1 Explain approach and value proposition

    1.2 Discuss business vision and key drivers

    1.3 Discover business pain points and needs

    1.4 Determine data strategies

    1.5 Assess DA practice capabilities

    Outputs

    Data strategies

    Data architecture vision

    Current and target capabilities for the modernized DA practice

    2 Assess DA Core Capabilities (Part 1)

    The Purpose

    Assess the enterprise data model (EDM).

    Assess current and target data warehouse, BI/analytics, and big data architectures.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed assessment of the organization’s current EDM, data warehouse, BI and analytics, and big data architectures.

    Identification of "to be" capabilities for the organization’s EDM, data warehouse, BI and analytics, and big data architectures.

    Identification of key gaps.

    Activities

    2.1 Present an overarching DA capability model

    2.2 Assess current and target EDM capabilities

    2.3 Assess current/target data warehouse, BI/analytics, and big data architectures

    2.4 Identify gaps and high level strategies

    Outputs

    Target capabilities for EDM

    Target capabilities for data warehouse architecture, BI architecture, and big data architecture

    3 Assess DA Core Capabilities (Part 2)

    The Purpose

    Assess EDM.

    Assess current/target MDM, metadata, data integration, and content architectures.

    Assess dynamic data models.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed assessment of the organization’s current MDM, metadata, data integration, and content architectures.

    Identification of “to be” capabilities for the organization’s MDM, metadata, data integration, and content architectures.

    Identification of key gaps.

    Activities

    3.1 Present an overarching DA capability model

    3.2 Assess current and target MDM, metadata, data integration, and content architectures

    3.3 Assess data lineage and data delivery model

    3.4 Identify gaps and high level strategies

    Outputs

    Target capabilities for MDM architecture, metadata architecture, data integration architecture, and document & content architecture

    Target capabilities for data lineage/delivery

    4 Analyze Gaps and Formulate Strategies

    The Purpose

    Map performance gaps and document key initiatives from the diagnostic assessment.

    Identify additional gaps and action items.

    Formulate strategies and initiatives to address priority gaps. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized gap analysis.

    Improvement initiatives and related strategies.

    Activities

    4.1 Map performance gaps to business vision, pain points, and needs

    4.2 Identify additional gaps

    4.3 Consolidate/rationalize/prioritize gaps

    4.4 Formulate strategies and actions to address gaps

    Outputs

    Prioritized gaps

    Data architecture modernization strategies

    5 Develop a Data Architecture Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Plot initiatives and strategies on a strategic roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A roadmap with prioritized and sequenced initiatives.

    Milestone plan.

    Executive report. 

    Activities

    5.1 Transform strategies into a plan of action

    5.2 Plot actions on a prioritized roadmap

    5.3 Identify and discuss next milestone plan

    5.4 Compile an executive report

    Outputs

    Data architecture modernization roadmap

    Data architecture assessment and roadmap report (from analyst team)

    Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}121|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Data can be valuable if used properly or dangerous when mishandled.
    • The organization needs to understand the value of their data before they can establish proper data management practice.
    • Data is not considered a capital asset unless there is a financial transaction (e.g. buying or selling data assets).
    • Data valuation is not easy, and it costs money to collect, store, and maintain data.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Data always outlives people, processes, and technology. They all come and go, while data remains.
    • Oil is a limited resource, data is not. Contrary to oil, data is likely to grow over time.
    • Data is likely to outlast all other current popular financial instruments including currency, assets, or commodities.
    • Data is used internally and externally and can easily be replicated or combined.
    • Data is beyond currency, assets, or commodities and needs to be a category of its own.

    Impact and Result

    • Every organization must calculate the value of their data. This will enable organizations to become truly data-driven.
    • Too much time has been spent arguing different methods of valuation. An organization must settle on valuation that is acceptable to all its stakeholders.
    • Align data governance and data management to data valuation. Often organizations struggle to justify data initiatives due to lack of visibility in data valuation.
    • Establish appropriate roles and responsibilities and ensure alignment to a common set of goals as a foundation to get the most accurate future data valuation for your organization.
    • Assess organization data assets and implementation roadmap that considers the necessary competencies and capabilities and their dependencies in moving towards the higher maturity of data assets.

    Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to understand the value associated with the organization's data. Review Info-Tech’s methodology for assessing data value and justifying your data initiatives with a value proposition.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Demystify data valuation

    Understand the benefits of data valuation.

    • Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated – Phase 1: Demystify Data Valuation

    2. Data value chain

    Learn about the data value chain framework and preview the step-by-step guide to start collecting data sources.

    • Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated – Phase 2: Data Value Chain

    3. Data value assessment

    Mature your data valuation by putting in the valuation dimensions and metrics. Establish documented results that can be leveraged to demonstrate value in your data assets.

    • Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated – Phase 3: Data Value Assessment
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Mandate Data Valuation Before It’s Mandated

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand the Value of Data Valuation

    The Purpose

    Explain data valuation approach and value proposition.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear understanding and case for data valuation.

    Activities

    1.1 Review common business data sources and how the organization will benefit from data valuation assessment.

    1.2 Understand Info-Tech’s data valuation framework.

    Outputs

    Organization data valuation priorities

    2 Capture Organization Data Value Chain

    The Purpose

    Capture data sources and data collection methods.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear understanding of the data value chain.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess data sources and data collection methods.

    2.2 Understand key insights and value proposition.

    2.3 Capture data value chain.

    Outputs

    Data Valuation Tool

    3 Data Valuation Framework

    The Purpose

    Leverage the data valuation framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Capture key data valuation dimensions and align with data value chain.

    Activities

    3.1 Introduce data valuation framework.

    3.2 Discuss key data valuation dimensions.

    3.3 Align data value dimension to data value chain.

    Outputs

    Data Valuation Tool

    4 Plan for Continuous Improvement

    The Purpose

    Improve organization’s data value.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Continue to improve data value.

    Activities

    4.1 Capture data valuation metrics.

    4.2 Define data valuation for continuous monitoring.

    4.3 Create a communication plan.

    4.4 Define a plan for continuous improvements.

    Outputs

    Data valuation metrics

    Data Valuation Communication Plan

    Become a Strategic CIO

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}80|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 15 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /it-strategy
    • As a CIO, you are currently operating in a stable and trusted IT environment, but you would like to advance your role to strategic business partner.
    • CIOs are often overlooked as a strategic partner by their peers, and therefore face the challenge of proving they deserve a seat at the table.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • To become a strategic business partner, you must think and act as a business person that works in IT, rather than an IT person that works for the business.
    • Career advancement is not a solo effort. Building relationships with your executive business stakeholders will be critical to becoming a respected business partner.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy to accelerate your career and become a strategic business partner. For a CIO to be considered a strategic business partner, he or she must be able to:
      • Act as a business person that works in IT, rather than an IT person that works for the business. This involves meeting executive stakeholder expectations, facilitating innovation, and managing stakeholder relationships.
      • Align IT with the customer. This involves providing business stakeholders with information to support stronger decision making, keeping up with disruptive technologies, and constantly adapting to the ever-changing end-customer needs.
      • Manage talent and change. This involves performing strategic workforce planning, and being actively engaged in identifying opportunities to introduce change in your organization, suggesting ways to improve, and then acting on them.

    Become a Strategic CIO Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should become a strategic CIO, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch

    Analyze strategic CIO competencies and assess business stakeholder satisfaction with IT using Info-Tech's CIO Business Vision Diagnostic and CXO-CIO Alignment Program.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 1: Launch

    2. Assess

    Evaluate strategic CIO competencies and business stakeholder relationships.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 2: Assess
    • CIO Strategic Competency Evaluation Tool
    • CIO Stakeholder Power Map Template

    3. Plan

    Create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 3: Plan
    • CIO Personal Development Plan
    • CIO Stakeholder Management Strategy Template

    4. Execute

    Develop a scorecard to track personal development initiatives.

    • Become a Strategic CIO – Phase 4: Execute
    • CIO Strategic Competency Scorecard
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Become a Strategic CIO

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Competencies & Stakeholder Relationships

    The Purpose

    Gather and review information from business stakeholders.

    Assess strategic CIO competencies and business stakeholder relationships.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gathered information to create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy.

    Analyzed the information from diagnostics and determined the appropriate next steps.

    Identified and prioritized strategic CIO competency gaps.

    Evaluated the power, impact, and support of key business stakeholders.

    Activities

    1.1 Conduct CIO Business Vision diagnostic

    1.2 Conduct CXO-CIO Alignment program

    1.3 Assess CIO competencies

    1.4 Assess business stakeholder relationships

    Outputs

    CIO Business Vision results

    CXO-CIO Alignment Program results

    CIO competency gaps

    Executive Stakeholder Power Map

    2 Take Control of Your Personal Development

    The Purpose

    Create a personal development plan and stakeholder management strategy.

    Track your personal development and establish checkpoints to revise initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Identified personal development and stakeholder engagement initiatives to bridge high priority competency gaps.

    Identified key performance indicators and benchmarks/targets to track competency development.

    Activities

    2.1 Create a personal development plan

    2.2 Create a stakeholder management strategy

    2.3 Establish key performance indicators and benchmarks/targets

    Outputs

    Personal Development Plan

    Stakeholder Management Strategy

    Strategic CIO Competency Scorecard

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}520|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn’t sustainable.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.
    • Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative, however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging, the tendency is to start with tech or compliance, however, starting with the people is key. It must be culture.
    • Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Impact and Result

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear ‘accessibility’ and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.
    • Build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Use this blueprint to narrow down the requirements for your organization and team while also clearly communicating why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization’s key objectives and initiatives.

    A step-by-step approach to walk you through understanding the IT accessibility compliance requirements, building your roadmap, and communicating with your department. This storyboard will help you figure out what’s needed from IT to support the business and launch accessibility with your team.

    • Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT – Phases 1-2

    2. IT Manager Meeting Template – A clear, concise, and compelling communication to introduce accessibility for your organization to IT managers and to facilitate their participation in building the roadmap.

    Accessibility compliance can be overwhelming at first. Use this template to simplify the requirements for the IT managers and build out a roadmap.

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    3. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool – This tool helps to decrease the overwhelm of accessibility compliance. Narrow down the list of controls needed to the ones that apply to your organization and to IT.

    Using the EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. Use this tool to build a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization.

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    4. Departmental Meeting Template – Cascade your communication down to the IT department with this facilitation guide for introducing accessibility and the roadmap to the entire IT team.

    Use this pre-built slide deck to customize your accessibility communication to the IT department. It will help you build a shared vision for accessibility, a current state picture, and plans to build to the target future state.

    • Departmental Meeting Template
    • Accessibility Quick Cards

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    Make accessibility accessible.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project.

    Accessibility is an organizational directive; however, IT plays a fundamental role in its success. As business partners require support and expertise to assist with their accessibility requirements IT needs to be ready to respond. Even if your organization hasn't fully committed to an accessibility standard, you can proactively get ready by planting the seeds to change the culture. By building understanding and awareness of the significant impact technology has on accessibility, you can start to change behaviors.

    Implementing an accessibility program requires many considerations: legal requirements; international guidelines, such as Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG); training for staff; ongoing improvement; and collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities. It can be overwhelming to know where to start. The tendency is to start with compliance, which is a fantastic first step. For a sustained program use, change management practices are needed to change behaviors and build inclusion for people with disabilities.

    15% of the world's population identify as having some form of a disability (not including others that are impacted, e.g. caretakers, family). Why would anyone want to alienate over 1.1 billion people?

    This is a picture of Heather Leier-Murray

    Heather Leier-Murray
    Senior Research Analyst, People & Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Disability is part of being human

    Merriam-Webster defines disability as a "physical, mental, cognitive, or developmental condition that impairs, interferes with, or limits a person's ability to engage in certain tasks or actions or participate in typical daily activities and interactions."(1)

    The World Health Organization points out that a crucial part of the definition of disability is that it's not just a health problem, but the environment impacts the experience and extent of disability. Inaccessibility creates barriers for full participation in society.(2)

    The likelihood of you experiencing a disability at some point in your life is very high, whether a physical or mental disability, seen or unseen, temporary or permanent, severe or mild.(2)

    Many people acquire disabilities as they age yet may not identify as "a person with a disability."3 Where life expectancies are over 70 years of age, 11.5% of life is spent living with a disability. (4)

    "Extreme personalization is becoming the primary difference in business success, and everyone wants to be a stakeholder in a company that provides processes, products, and services to employees and customers with equitable, person-centered experiences and allows for full participation where no one is left out."
    – Paudie Healy, CEO, Universal Access

    (1.) Merriam-Webster
    (2.) World Health Organization, 2022
    (3.) Digital Leaders, as cited in WAI, 2018
    (4.) Disabled World, as cited in WAI, 2018

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    You know the push for accessibility is coming in your organization. You might even have a program started or approval to build one. But you're not sure if you and your team are ready to support and enable the organization on its accessibility journey.

    Common Obstacles

    Understanding where to start, where accessibility lives, and if or when you're done can be overwhelmingly difficult. Accessibility is an organizational initiative that IT enables; being able to support the organization requires a level of understanding of common obstacles.

    • Determining IT requirements (legal and business needs) is overwhelming.
    • Prioritizing people in the process is often overlooked.
    • Mandating changes instead of motivating change isn't sustainable.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Prepare your people for accessibility and inclusion, even if your organization doesn't have a formal standard yet. Take your accessibility from mandate to movement, i.e. from Phase 1 - focused on compliance to Phase 2 - driven by experience for sustained change.

    • Use this blueprint to build your accessibility plan while prioritizing the necessary culture change.
    • Use change management and communication practices to elicit the behavior shift needed to sustain accessibility.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging because the tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help IT leaders who are looking to:

    • Determine accessibility requirements of IT based on the business' needs and priorities, and the existing standards and regulations.
    • Prepare the IT leaders to implement and sustain accessibility and prepare for the behavior shift that is necessary.
    • Build the plan for IT as it pertains to accessibility, including a list of business needs and priorities, and prioritization of accessibility initiatives that IT is responsible for.
    • Ensure that accessibility is sustained in the IT department by following phase 2 of this blueprint on using change management and communication to impact behavior and change the culture.

    90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2020

    Over 30% of those that claim to prioritize diversity are focused on compliance.
    Source: Harvard Business Review, 2022

    Accessibility is an organizational initiative

    Is IT ready and capable to enable it?

    • With increasing rates of lawsuits related to digital accessibility, more organizations are prioritizing initiatives to support increased accessibility. About 68% of Applause's survey respondents indicated that digital accessibility is a higher priority for their organization than it was last year.
    • This increase in priority will trickle into IT's tasks – get ahead and start working toward accessibility proactively so you're ready when business requests start coming in.

    A survey of nearly 1,800 respondents conducted by Applause found that:

    • 79% of respondents rated digital accessibility either a top priority or important for their organizations.
    • 42% of respondents indicated they have limited or no in-house expertise or resources to test accessibility.
      Source: Business Wire, May 2022

    How organizations prioritize digital accessibility

    • 43% rated accessibility as a top priority.
    • 36% rated accessibility as important.
    • Fewer than 5% rated accessibility as either low priority or not even on the radar.
    • More than 65% agreed or strongly agreed that accessibility is a higher priority than last year.

    Source: Angel Business Communications, 2022

    Why organizations address accessibility

    Top three reasons:

    1. 61% To comply with laws
    2. 62% To provide the best user experience
    3. 78% To include people with disabilities
      Source: Level Access, 2022

    Still, most businesses aren't meeting compliance standards. Even though legislation has been in place for over 30 years, a 2022 study by WebAIM of 1,000,000 homepages returned a 96.8% WCAG 2.0 failure rate.

    Source: Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 2022

    Info-Tech's approach to Initiate Digital Accessibility

    An image of the Business Case for Accessibility

    The Info-Tech difference:

    1. Phase 1 of this blueprint gets you started and helps you build a plan to get you to the initial compliance driven maturity level. It's focused more on standards and regulations than on the user and employee experience.
    2. Phase 2 takes you further in maturity and helps you become experience driven in your efforts. It focuses on building your accessibility maturity into the developing, defined, and managed levels, as well as balancing mandate and movement of the accessibility maturity continuum.

    Determining conformance seems overwhelming

    Unfortunately, it's the easier part.

    • Focus on local regulations and what corporate leaders are setting as accessibility standards for the organization. This will narrow down the scope of what compliance looks like for your team.
    • Look to best practices like WCAG guidelines to ensure digital assets are accessible and usable for all users. WCAG's international guideline outlines principles that can also aid in scoping.
    • In phase 1 of this blueprint, use the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto prioritize criteria and legislation for which IT is responsible.
    • Engage with business partners and other areas of the organization to figure out what is needed from IT. Accessibility is an organizational initiative; it shouldn't be on IT to figure it all out. Determine what your team is specifically responsible for before tackling it all.

    Motivating behavior change

    This is the hard part.

    Changing behaviors and mindsets is necessary to be experience driven and sustain accessibility.

    • Compliance is the minimum when it comes to accessibility, much like employment or labor regulations.
    • Making accessibility an organizational imperative is an iterative process. Managing the change is hard. People, culture, and behavior change matures accessibility from compliance driven to experience driven, increasing the benefits of accessibility.
    • Focus accessibility initiatives on improving the experience of everyone and improving engagement (customer and employee).
    • Being people focused and experience driven enables the organization to provide the best user experience and realize the benefits of accessibility.

    A picture of Jordyn Zimmerman

    "Compliance is the minimum. And when we look at web tech, people are still arguing about their positioning on the standards that need to be enforced in order to comply, forgetting that it isn't enough to comply."
    -- Jordyn Zimmerman, M.Ed., Director of Professional Development, The Nora Project, and Appointee, President's Committee for People with Intellectual Disabilities.

    This is an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework Table.

    To see more on the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework:

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    Think of accessibility like you think of IT security

    Use IT security concepts to build your accessibility program.

    • Risk management: identify and prioritize accessibility risks and implement controls to mitigate those risks.
    • Compliance: use an IT security-style compliance approach to ensure that the accessibility program is compliant with the many accessibility regulations and standards.
    • Defense in depth: implement multiple layers of accessibility controls to address different types of accessibility risks and issues.
    • Response and recovery: quickly and effectively respond to accessibility issues, minimizing the potential impact on the organization and its users.
    • End-user education: educate end users about accessibility best practices, such as how to use assistive technologies and how to report accessibility issues.
    • Monitor and audit: use monitoring and auditing tools to ensure that accessibility remains over time and to identify and address issues that arise.
    • Collaboration: ensure the accessibility program is effective and addresses the needs of all users by collaborating with accessibility experts and people with disabilities.

    "As an organization matures, the impact of accessibility shifts. A good company will think of security at the very beginning. The same needs to be applied to accessibility thinking. At the peak of accessibility maturity an organization will have people with disabilities involved at the outset."
    -- Cam Beaudoin, Owner, Accelerated Accessibility

    This is a picture of Cam Beaudoin

    Info-Tech's methodology for Initiate Digital Accessibility for IT

    1. Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    2. Change enablement of accessibility

    Phase Steps

    1. Determine accessibility requirements of IT
    2. Build the IT accessibility plan
    1. Build awareness
    2. Support new behaviors
    3. Continuous reinforcement

    Phase Outcomes

    List of business needs and priorities related to accessibility

    IT accessibility requirements for conformance

    Assessment of state of accessibility conformance

    Prioritization of accessibility initiatives for IT

    Remediation plan for IT related to accessibility conformance

    Accessibility commitment statement

    Team understanding of what, why, and how

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Sustainment plan

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Accessibility is a practice, not a project. Therefore, accessibility is an organizational initiative; however, IT support is critical. Use change management theory to guide the new behaviors, processes, and thinking to adopt accessibility beyond compliance. Determining where to start is challenging. The tendency is to start with tech or compliance; however, starting with the people is key. It must be a change in organizational culture.

    Insight 1

    Compliance is the minimum; people and behavior changes are the hardest part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility makes the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    Insight 2

    Think about accessibility like you think about IT security. Use IT security concepts that you and your team are already familiar with to initiate the accessibility program.

    Insight 3

    People are learning a new way to behave and think; this can be an unsettling period. Patience, education, communication, support, and time are keys for success of the implementation of accessibility. There is a transition period needed; people will gradually change their practices and attitudes. Celebrate small successes as they arise.

    Insight 4

    Accessibility isn't a project as there is no end. Effective planning and continuous reinforcement of "the new way of doing things" is necessary to enable accessibility as the new status quo.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    IT Manager Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to work with IT managers to build out the accessibility remediation plan and commitment statement.

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template
    Use this meeting slide deck to introduce the concept of accessibility and communicate IT goals and objectives.

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards
    Using the Info-Tech IT Management and Governance Framework to identify key activities to help improve and maintain the accessibility of your organization and your core IT processes.

    Key deliverable:

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool
    This tool will assist you in identifying remediation priorities applicable to your organization.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Know and understand your role and responsibility in accessibility implementation within the organization.
    • Provide effective support and excellent business service experience to internal stakeholders related to accessibility.
    • You will be set up to effectively support your team through the necessary behavior, process, and thinking changes.
    • Proactively prepare for accessibility requests that will be coming in.
    • Move beyond compliance to support your organization's sustainment of accessibility.
    • Don't lose out on a trillion-dollar market.
    • Don't miss opportunities to work with organizations because you're not accessible.
    • Enable and empower current employees with disabilities.
    • Minimize potential for negative brand reputation due to a lack of consideration for people with disabilities.
    • Decrease the risk of legal action being brought upon the organization.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Improve IT effectiveness and employee buy-in to change.

    Measuring the effectiveness of your program helps contribute to a culture of continuous improvement. Having consistent measures in place helps to inform decisions and enables your plan to be iterative to take advantage of emerging opportunities.

    Monitor employee engagement, overall stakeholder satisfaction with IT, and the overall end-customer satisfaction.

    Remember, accessibility is not a project – just because measures are positive does not mean your work is done.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish metrics for your organization.
    In phase 2, we will help you develop a sustainment for achieving those metrics.

    A screenshot of the slide titled Establish Baseline Metrics.

    Suggested Metrics
    • Overall end-customer satisfaction
    • Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled
    • Employee engagement
    • Overall compliance status

    Info-Tech's IT Metrics Library

    Executive brief case study

    INDUSTRY: Technology


    SOURCE: Microsoft.com
    https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessib...

    Microsoft

    Microsoft's accessibility journey starts with the goal of building a culture of accessibility and disability inclusion. They recognize that the starting point for the magnitude of organizational change is People.

    "Accessibility in Action Badge"

    Every employee at Microsoft is trained on accessibility to build understanding of why and how to be inclusive using accessibility. The program entails 90 minutes of virtual content.

    Microsoft treats accessibility and inclusion like a business, managing and measuring it to ensure sustained growth and success. They have worked over the years to bust systemic bias company-wide and to build a program with accessibility criteria that works for their business.

    Results

    The program Microsoft has built allows them to shift the accessibility lens earlier in their processes and listen to its users' needs. This allows them to continuously mature their accessibility program, which means continuously improving its users' experience.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided implementation

    What does a typical guided implementation (GI) on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2

    Call #1: Discuss motivation for the initiative and foundational knowledge requirements.
    Call #2: Discuss stakeholder analysis and business needs of IT.

    Call #3: Identify current maturity and IT accountabilities.
    Call #4: Discuss introduction to senior IT leaders and drivers.
    Call #5: Discuss manager meeting outline and slides.

    Call #6: Review key messages and next steps to prepare for departmental meeting.
    Call #7: Discuss post-meetings next steps and timelines.

    Call #8: Review sustainment plan and plan next steps.

    A GI is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is eight to ten calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Pre-Work

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Understand Your Legislative Environment

    Understand Your Current State

    Define the
    IT Target State

    Build the IT Accessibility Plan

    Prepare for Change Enablement

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up

    Activities

    0.1 Make a list of the legislation you need to comply with
    0.2 Seek legal counsel or and/or professional services' input on compliance
    0.3 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    0.4 Conduct stakeholder analysis

    1.1 Define the risks of inaction
    1.2 Review maturity assessment
    1.3 Conduct stakeholder focus group

    2.1 Define IT compliance accountabilities
    2.2 Define IT accessibility goals/objectives/ metrics
    2.3 Indicate the target-state maturity

    3.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation
    3.2 Decide on priorities
    3.3 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    4.1 Prepare the roadmap
    4.2 Prepare the communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables

    1. Legislative requirements for your organization
    2. List of stakeholders
    3. Completed maturity assessment.
    1. Defined risks of inaction
    2. Stakeholder analysis completed with business needs identified
    1. IT accessibility goals/objectives
    2. Target maturity
    1. Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool completed
    2. Accessibility commitment statement
    3. Current compliance and mitigation assessed
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan
    1. IT accessibility roadmap
    2. Communication plan

    Phase 1

    Planning IT's Accessibility Requirements.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    Initiate Digital Accessibility For IT

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analyzing stakeholders to determine accessibility needs of business for IT.
    • Determining accessibility compliance requirements of IT.
    • Build a manager communication deck.
    • Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation.
    • Prioritize and assign timelines.
    • Build a sunrise diagram to visualize your accessibility roadmap.
    • Write an IT accessibility commitment statement.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT leadership team
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Step 1.1

    Determine the accessibility requirements of IT.

    Activities

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT
    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)
    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance requirements
    1.1.4 Define target state
    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives
    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics
    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Prepare to support the organization with accessibility

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Business partners in other areas of the organization (e.g., HR, finance, communications)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder analysis with business needs listed
    • Defined target future state
    • List of goals and objectives
    • Key metrics
    • Communication deck for IT management rollout meeting

    While defining future state, consider your drivers

    The Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework identifies three key strategic drivers: compliance, experience, and incorporation.

    • Over 30% of organizations are focused on compliance, according to a 2022 survey by Harvard Business Review and Slack's Future Forum. The survey asked more than 10,000 workers in six countries about their organizations' approach to diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI).(2)
    • Even though 90% of companies claim to prioritize diversity, over 30% are focused on compliance.(1)

    1. Harvard Business Review, 2020
    2. Harvard Business Review, 2022

    31.6% of companies remain in the compliant stage where they are focused on DEI compliance and not on integrating DEI throughout the organization or on creating continual improvement, from Harvard Business Review 2022.

    Info-Tech accessibility maturity framework

    This is an image of Info-Tech's accessibility maturity framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT typically works through maturity frameworks from the bottom to the top, progressing at each level until they reach the end. When it comes to IT accessibility initiatives, being especially thorough, thoughtful, and collaborative is critical to success. This will mean spending more time in the Developing, Defined, and Managed levels of maturity rather than trying to reach Optimized as quickly as you can. This may feel contrary to what IT historically considers as a successful implementation.

    After initially ensuring your organization is compliant with regulations and standards, you will progress to building disciplined process and consistent standardized processes. Eventually you will build the ability for predictable process, and lastly, you'll optimize by continuously improving.

    Depending on the level of maturity you are trying to achieve, it could take months or even years to implement. The important thing to understand, however, is that accessibility work is never done.

    At all levels of the maturity framework, you must consider the interconnected aspects of people, process, and technology. However, as the organization progresses, the impact will shift from largely being focused on process and technology improvement to being focused on people.

    Align the benefits of program drivers to organizational goals or outcomes

    Although there will be various motivating factors, aligning the drivers of your accessibility program provides direction to the program. Connecting the advantages of program drivers to organizational goals builds the confidence of senior leaders and decision makers, increasing the continued commitment to invest in accessibility programming.

    This is an image of a table describing the maturity level; Description; Advantages, and Disadvantages for the three drivers: Compliance; Experience; and Incorporation.

    Accessibility maturity levels

    Driver Description Benefits
    Initial Compliance
    • Accessibility processes are mostly undocumented.
    • Accessibility happens mostly on a reactive or ad hoc basis.
    • No one is aware of who is responsible for accessibility or what role they play.
    • Heavily focused on complying with regulations and standards to decrease legal risk.
    • The organization is aware of the need for accessibility.
    • Legal risk is decreased.
    Developing Experience
    • The organization is starting to take steps to increase accessibility beyond compliance.
    • Lots of opportunity for improvement.
    • Defining and refining processes.
    • Working toward building a library of assistive tools.
    • Awareness of the need for accessibility is growing.
    • Process review for accessibility increases process efficiency through avoiding rework.
    Defined Experience
    • Accessibility processes are repeatable.
    • There is a tendency to resort to old habits under stress.
    • Tools are in place to facilitate accommodation.
    • Employees know accommodations are available to them.
    • Accessibility is becoming part of daily work.
    Managed Experience
    • Defined by effective accessibility controls, processes, and metrics.
    • Mostly anticipating preferences.
    • Roles and responsibilities are defined.
    • Disability is included as part of DEI.
    • Employees understand their role in accessibility.
    • Engagement is positively impacted.
    • Attraction and retention are positively impacted.
    Optimized Incorporation
    • Not the goal for every organization.
    • Characterized by a dramatic shift in organizational culture and a feeling of belonging.
    • Ongoing continuous improvement.
    • Seamless interactions with the organization for everyone.
    • Using feedback to inform future initiatives.
    • More likely to be innovative and inclusive, reach more people positively, and meet emerging global legal requirements.
    • Better equipped for success.

    Cheat sheet: Identify stakeholders

    Ask stakeholders, "Who else should I be talking to?" to discover additional stakeholders and ensure you don't miss anyone.

    Identify stakeholders through the following questions:

    Take a 360-degree view of potential internal and external stakeholders who might be impacted by the initiative.

    • Who in areas of influence will be adversely affected by potential environmental and social impacts of what you are doing?
    • At which stage will stakeholders be most affected (e.g. procurement, implementation, operations, decommissioning)?
    • Will other stakeholders emerge as the phases are started and completed?
    • Who is sponsoring the initiative?
    • Who benefits from the initiative?
    • Who is negatively impacted by the initiative?
    • Who can make approvals?
    • Who controls resources?
    • Who has specialist skills?
    • Who implements the changes?
    • Who are the owners, governors, customers, and suppliers of impacted capabilities or functions?
    • Executives
    • Peers
    • Direct reports
    • Partners
    • Customers
    • Subcontractors
    • Suppliers
    • Contractors
    • Lobby groups
    • Regulatory agencies

    Categorize your stakeholders with a stakeholder prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map help teams categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership.

    There are four areas in the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis for mediators; players; spectators; and noisemakers.
    • Players – Players have a high interest in the initiative and high influence to affect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediment to the objectives.
    • Mediators – Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers – Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively, but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators – Generally, spectators are apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Strategize to engage stakeholders by type

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks.

    By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, you can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy spectators and noisemakers while ensuring the needs of the mediators and players are met.

    Type Quadrant Actions
    Players High influence, high interest Actively Engage
    Keep them engaged through continuous involvement. Maintain their interest by demonstrating their value to its success.
    Mediators High influence, low interest Keep Satisfied
    They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust, and include them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.
    Noisemakers Low influence, high interest Keep InformedTry to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using mediators to help them.
    Spectators Low influence, low interest MonitorThey are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    1.1.1 Determine what the business needs from IT (stakeholder analysis)

    1.5 hours

    1. Consider all the potential individuals or groups of individuals who will be impacted or influence the accessibility needs of IT.
    2. List each of the stakeholders you identify. If in person, use sticky notes to define the target audiences. The individuals or group of individuals that potentially have needs from IT related to accessibility before, during, or after the initiative.
    3. As you list each stakeholder, consider how they perceive IT. This perception could impact how you choose to interact with them.
    4. For each stakeholder identified as potentially having a business need requirement for IT related to accessibility, conduct an analysis to understand their degree of influence or impact.
    5. Based on the stakeholder, the influence or impact of the business need can inform the interaction and prioritization of IT requirements.
    6. Update slide 9 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    Input

    • The change
    • Why the change is needed
    • Key stakeholder map from activity 2.1.1 of The Accessibility Business Case for IT (optional)

    Output

    • The degree of influence or impact each stakeholder has on accessibility needs from IT

    Materials

    • Stakeholder Management Analysis Tool (optional)

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • Business partners

    Proactively consider how accessibility could be received

    Think about the positive and negative reactions you could face about implementing accessibility.

    It's likely individuals will have an emotional reaction to change and may have different emotions at different times during the change process.
    Plan for how to leverage support and deal with resistance to change by assessing people's emotional responses:

    • What are possible questions, objections, suggestions, and concerns that might arise.
    • How will you respond to the possible questions and concerns.
    • Include proactive messaging in your communications that address possible objections.
    • Express an understanding for others point of views by re-positioning objections and suggestions as questions.

    This is an image of the 10 change chakras

    Determine your level of maturity

    Use Info-Tech's Accessibility Maturity Assessment.

    On the accessibility questionnaire, tab 2, choose the amount you agree or disagree with each statement. Answer the questions based on your knowledge of your current state organizationally.

    Once you've answered all the questions, see the results on the tab 3, Accessibility Results. You can see your overall maturity level and the maturity level for each of six dimensions that are necessary to increase the success of an accessibility program.

    Click through to tab 4, Recommendations, to see specific recommendations based on your results and proven research to progress through the maturity levels. Keep in mind that not all organizations will or should aspire to the "Optimize" maturity level.

    A series of three screenshots from the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    1.1.2 Complete the Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    1. Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment and save it with the date so that as you work on your accessibility program, you can reassess later and track your progress.
    2. Once you have saved the assessment, select the appropriate answer for each statement on tab 2, Accessibility Questions, based on your knowledge of the organization's approach.
    3. After reviewing all the accessibility statements, see your maturity level results on tab 3, Accessibility Results. Then see tab 4, Recommendations, for suggestions based on your answers.
    4. Document your accessibility maturity results on slides 12 and 13 of the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 17 of the Departmental Meeting Template.
    5. Use the maturity assessment results in activity 1.1.3.

    Input

    • Assess your current state of accessibility by choosing all the statements that apply to your organization

    Output

    • Identified accessibility maturity level

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • Project leader/sponsor
    • IT leadership team

    1.1.3 Determine IT compliance responsibilities

    1-3 hours

    Before you start this activity, you may need to discuss with your organization's legal counsel to determine the legislation that applies to your organization.

    1. Determine which controls apply to your organization based on your knowledge of the organization goals, stakeholders, and accessibility maturity target. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity model, use the Info-Tech resource from the Accessibility Business Case for IT(see previous two slides).
    2. Using the drop down in column J – Applies to My Org., select "Yes" or "No" for each control on each of the data entry tabs of the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool.
    3. For each control you have selected "Yes" for in column J, identify the control owner in column I.
    4. Update slide 10 in the IT Manager Meeting Template and slide 13 in the IT Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Local, regional, and/or global legislation and guidelines applicable to your organization
    • Organizational accessibility standard
    • Business needs list
    • Completed Accessibility Maturity Assessment (optional)

    Output

    • List of legislation and standards requirements that are narrowed based on organization need

    Materials

    • Accessibility Maturity Assessment
    • Accessibility Business Case Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader
    • Legal counsel

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    1.1.4 Conduct future-state analysis*

    Identify your target state of maturity.

      1. Provide the group with the accessibility maturity levels to review as well as the slides on the framework and drivers (slides 27-29).
      2. Ask the group to brainstorm pain points created by inaccessibility (e.g. challenges related to stakeholders, process issues).
      3. Next, discuss opportunities to be gained from improving these practices.
      4. Then, have everyone look at the accessibility maturity levels and, based on the descriptions, determine as a group the current maturity level of accessibility in your organization .
      5. Next, review the benefits listed on the accessibility maturity levels slide to those that you named in step 3 and determine which maturity level best describes your target state. Discuss as a group and agree on one desired maturity level to reach.
      6. Document your current and target states on slide 14 of the IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activities 2.1.2 and 2.1.3.

    Input

    • Accessibility maturity levels chart, framework, and drivers slides
    • Maturity level assessment results (optional)

    Output

    • Target maturity level documented

    Materials

    • Paper and pens
    • Handouts of maturity levels

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders

    What does a good goal look like?

    SMART is a common framework for setting effective goals. Make sure your goals satisfy these criteria to ensure you can achieve real results.

    Use the SMART framework to build effective goals.

    S

    Specific: Is the goal clear, concrete, and well defined?

    M

    Measurable: How will you know when the goal is met?

    A

    Achievable: Is the goal possible to achieve in a reasonable time?

    R

    Relevant: Does this goal align with your responsibilities and with departmental and organizational goals?

    T

    Time-based: Have you specified a time frame in which you aim to achieve the goal?

    1.1.5 Create a list of goals and objectives*

    Use the outcomes from activity 1.2.1.

    1. Using the information from activity 1.2.1, develop goals.
    2. Remember to use the SMART goal framework to build out each goal (see the previous slide for more information on SMART goals).
    3. Ensure each goal supports departmental and organizational goals to ensure it is meaningful.
    4. Document your goals and objectives on slides 6 and 9 in your IT Manager Meeting Template.

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.1.

    Input

    • Outcomes of activity 1.2.1
    • Organizational and departmental goals

    Output

    • Accessibility goals and objectives identified

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders

    Establish baseline metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    1. Progressing through the accessibility maturity model.
    2. Addressing accessibility earlier in processes with input from people with disabilities.
    3. Motivating behavior changes and culture that supports accessibility and disability inclusion.
    4. Ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.
    5. Focusing on experience and building a disability inclusive culture.
    Metric Definition Calculation
    Overall end-customer satisfaction The percentage of end customers who are satisfied with the IT department. Number of end customers who are satisfied / Total number of end customers
    Requests for accommodation or assistive technology fulfilled The percentage of accommodation/assistive technology requests fulfilled by the IT department. Number of requests fulfilled / Total number of requests
    Employee engagement The percentage of employees who are engaged within an organization. Number of employees who are engaged / Total number of employees
    Overall compliance status The percentage of accessibility controls in place in the IT department. The number of compliance controls in place / Total number of applicable accessibility controls

    1.1.6 Finalize key metrics*

    Finalize key metrics the organization will use to measure accessibility success.

    1. Brainstorm how you will measure the success of each goal you identified in the previous activity, based on the benefits, challenges, and risks you previously identified.
    2. Write each of the metric ideas down and finalize three to five key metrics which you will track. The metrics you choose should relate to the key challenges or risks you have identified and match your desired maturity level and driver.
    3. Document your key metrics on slide 15 of your IT Manager Meeting Templateand slide 23 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Accessibility challenges and benefits
    • Goals from activity 1.2.2

    Output

    • Three to five key metrics to track

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Project lead/sponsor

    *Note: If you've completed the Accessibility Business Case for IT blueprint you may already have this information compiled. Refer to activity 2.2.2.

    Use Info-Tech's template to communicate with IT managers

    Cascade messages down to IT managers next. This ensures they will have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others.

    Communicate with and build the accessibility plan with IT managers by customizing Info-Tech's IT Manager Meeting Template, which is designed to effectively convey your key messages. Tailor the template to suit your needs.

    It includes:

    • Project scope and objectives
    • Current state analysis
    • Compliance planning
    • Commitment statement drafting

    IT Manager Meeting Template

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    1.1.7 Prepare a meeting for IT managers

    Now that you understand your current and desired accessibility maturity, the next step is to communicate with IT managers and begin planning your initiatives.

    Know your audience:

    1. Consider who will be included in your presentation audience.
    2. You want your presentation to be succinct and hard-hitting. Managers are under huge demands and time is tight, they will lose interest if you drag out the delivery.
    3. Contain the presentation and planning activities to no more than an afternoon. You want to ensure adequate time for questions and answers, as well as the planning activities necessary to inform the roll out to the larger IT department later.
    4. Schedule a meeting with the IT managers.

    Download the IT Manager Meeting Template

    Input

    • Activity results

    Output

    • A completed presentation to communicate your accessibility initiatives to IT managers

    Materials

    • IT Manager Meeting Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Step 1.2

    Build the IT accessibility action plan.

    Activities

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    Planning IT's accessibility requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Priority controls and mitigation list with identified control owners.
    • IT accessibility commitment statement.
    • Draft visualization of roadmap/sunrise diagram.

    Involve managers in assessing current compliance

    To know what work needs to happen you need to know what's already happening.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.1.3 where you identified which controls apply to your organization.

    Have managers work in groups to identify which controls (of the applicable ones) are currently being met and which ones have an existing mitigation plan.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Based on EN 301 549 V3.2.1 (2021-03) as a basis for digital accessibility conformance. This tool is designed to assist you in building a priorities list of requirements that are applicable to your organization. EN 301 549 is currently the most robust accessibility regulation and encompasses other regulations within it. Although EN 301 549 is the European Standard, other countries are leaning on it as the standard they aspire to as well.

    This is an image of the Compliance Tracing Tool, with a green box drawn around the columns for Current Compliance, and Mitigation.

    1.2.1 Assess current accessibility compliance and mitigation

    1-3 hours

    1. Share the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool with the IT leaders and managers during the meeting with IT management that you scheduled in activity 1.1.7.
    2. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      1. Divide up the controls between the small groups to work on assessing current compliance and mitigation plans.
      2. For each control that is identified as applying to your organization, identify if there currently is compliance by selecting "yes" from the drop-down. For controls where the organization is not compliant, select "no" and identify if there is a mitigation plan in place by selecting "yes" or "no" in column L.
      3. Use the comments column to add any pertinent information regarding the control.

    Input

    • List of IT compliance requirements applicable to the org. from activities 1.1.2 and 1.1.3

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements that have current compliance or mitigation plans

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Involve managers in building accountability into the accessibility plan

    Building accountability into your compliance tracking will help ensure accessibility is prioritized.

    Use the spreadsheet from activity 1.3.1.

    Have managers work in the same groups to prioritize controls by assigning a quarterly timeline for compliance.

    An image of the Compliance Tracking tool, with the timeline column highlighted in green.

    1.2.2 Decide on your priorities

    1-3 hours

    1. In the same groups used in activity 1.2.1, prioritize the list of controls that have no compliance and no mitigation plan.
    2. As you work through the spreadsheet again, assign a timeline using the drop-down menu in column M for each control that applies to the organization and has no current compliance. Consider the following in your prioritization:
      1. Does the control impact customers or is it public-facing?
      2. What are the business needs related to accessibility?
      3. Does the team currently have the skills and knowledge needed to address the control?
      4. What future state accessibility maturity are you targeting?
    3. Be prepared to review with the larger group.

    Input

    • List from activity 1.2.1
    • Business needs from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • List of IT compliance requirements with accountability timelines

    Materials

    • Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Review your timeline

    Don't overload your team. Make sure the timelines assigned in the breakout groups make sense and are realistic.

    A screenshot of the Accessibility Compliance Dashboard.

    Download the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Tool

    Empty roadmap template

    An image of an empty Roadmap Template.

    1.2.3 Add priorities to the roadmap

    1 hour

    1. Using the information entered in the compliance tracking spreadsheet during activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2, build a visual representation to capture your strategic initiatives over time, using themes and timelines. Consider group initiatives in four categories, technology, people, process, and other.
    2. Copy and paste the controls onto the roadmap from the Accessibility Compliance Tracking Toolto the desired time quadrant on the roadmap.
    3. Set your desired timelines by changing the Q1-Q4 blocks (set the timelines that make sense for your situation).

    Input

    • Output of activity 1.2.2
    • Roadmap template
    • Other departmental project plans and timelines

    Output

    • Visual roadmap of accessibility compliance controls

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Communicate commitment

    Support people leaders in leading by example with an accessibility commitment statement.

    A commitment statement communicates why accessibility and disability inclusion are important and guides behaviors toward the ideal state. The statement will guide and align work, build accountability, and acknowledge the dedication of the leadership team to accessibility and disability inclusion. The statement will:

    • Publicly commit the team to fostering disability inclusivity.
    • Highlight related values and goals of the team or organization.
    • Set expectations.
    • Help build trust and increase feelings of belonging.
    • Connect the necessary changes (people, process, and technology related) to organization strategy.

    Take action! Writing the statement is only the first step. It takes more than words to build accessibility and make your work environment more disability inclusive.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier.

    Sample accessibility commitment statements

    theScore

    "theScore strives to provide products and services in a way that respects the dignity and independence of persons with disabilities. We are committed to giving persons with disabilities the same opportunity to access our products and services and allowing them to benefit from the same services, in the same place and in a similar way as other clients. We are also committed to meeting the needs of persons with disabilities in a timely manner, and we will meet applicable legislative requirements for preventing and removing barriers."(1)

    Apple Canada

    "Apple Canada is committed to ensuring equal access and participation for people with disabilities. Apple Canada is committed to treating people with disabilities in a way that allows them to maintain their dignity and independence. Apple Canada believes in integration and is committed to meeting the needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner. Apple Canada will do so by removing and preventing barriers to accessibility and meeting accessibility requirements under the AODA and provincial and federal laws across Canada." (2)

    Google Canada

    "We are committed to meeting the accessibility needs of people with disabilities in a timely manner, and will do so by identifying, preventing and removing barriers to accessibility, and by meeting the accessibility requirements under the AODA." (3)

    Source 1: theScore
    Source 2: Apple Canada
    Source 3: Google Canada.

    1.2.4 Write an IT accessibility commitment statement

    45 minutes

    1. As a group, brainstorm the key reasons and necessity for disability inclusion and accessibility for your organization, and the drivers and behaviors required. Record the ideas brainstormed by the group.
    2. Break into smaller groups or pairs (or if too small, continue as a single group):
      • Each group uses the brainstormed ideas to draft an accessibility commitment statement.
    3. Each smaller group shares their statement with the larger group and receives feedback. Smaller groups redraft their statements based on the feedback.
    4. Post each redrafted statement and provide each person two dot stickers to place on the two statements that resonate the most with them.
    5. Using the two statements with the highest number of dot votes, write the final accessibility commitment statement.
    6. Add the commitment statement to slide 18 of the Departmental Meeting Template.

    Input

    • Business objectives
    • Risks related to accessibility
    • Target future accessibility maturity

    Output

    • IT accessibility commitment statement

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Dot stickers or other voting mechanism

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Phase 2

    Change Enablement for Accessibility.

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Determine accessibility requirements of IT

    1.2 Build IT accessibility plan

    2.1 Build awareness

    2.2 Support new behaviors

    2.3 Continuous reinforcement

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Clarifying key messages
    • IT department accessibility presentation
    • Establishing a frequency and timeframe for communications
    • Obtaining feedback
    • Sustainment plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers
    • Other key business stakeholders
    • Marketing and communications team

    Be experience driven

    Building awareness and focusing on experience helps move along the accessibility maturity framework. Shifting from mandate to movement.

    In this phase, start to move beyond compliance. Build the IT team's understanding of accessibility, disability inclusion, and their role.
    Communicate the following messages to your team:

    • The motivation behind the change.
    • The reasons for the change.
    • And encourage feedback.

    Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    an image of the Info-Tech Accessibility Maturity Framework

    Info-Tech Insight

    Compliance is the minimum; the people and behavior changes are the harder part and have the largest impact on accessibility. Preparing for and building awareness of the reasons for accessibility make the necessary behavior changes easier. Communicate, communicate, and communicate some more.

    What is an organizational change?

    Before communicating, understand the degree of change.

    Incremental Change:

    • Changes made to improve current processes or systems (e.g. optimizing current technology).

    Transitional Change:

    • Changes that involve dismantling old systems and/or processes in favor of new ones (e.g. new product or services added).

    Transformational Change:

    • Significant change in organizational strategy or culture resulting in substantial shift in direction.

    Examples:

    • New or changed policy
    • Switching from on-premises to cloud-first infrastructure
    • Implementing ransomware risk controls
    • Implementing a Learning and Development Plan

    Examples:

    • Moving to an insourced or outsourced service desk
    • Developing a BI and analytics function
    • Integrating risk into organization risk
    • Developing a strategy (technology, architecture, security, data, service, infrastructure, application)

    Examples:

    • Organizational redesign
    • Acquisition or merger of another organization
    • Implementing a digital strategy
    • A new CEO or board taking over the organization's direction

    Consider the various impacts of the change

    Invest time at the start to develop a detailed understanding of the impact of the change. This will help to create a plan that will simplify the change and save time. Evaluate the impact from a people, process, and technology perspective.

    Leverage a design thinking principle: Empathize with the stakeholder – what will change?

    People

    Process Technology
    • Team structure
    • Reporting structure
    • Career paths
    • Job skills
    • Responsibilities
    • Company vision/mission
    • Number of FTE
    • Culture
    • Training required
    • Budget
    • Work location
    • Daily workflow
    • Working conditions
    • Work hours
    • Reward structure
    • Required number of completed tasks
    • Training required
    • Required tools
    • Required policies
    • Required systems
    • Training required

    Change depends on how well people understand it

    Help people internalize what they can do to make the organization more inclusive.

    Anticipate responses to change:

    1. Emotional reaction – different people require different styles of management to guide them through the change. Individual's may have different emotions at different times during the change process. The more easily you can identify persona characteristics, the better you can manage them.
    2. Level of impact – the higher level of change on an individual's day-to-day, the more difficult it will be to adjust to the change. The more impactful the change, the more time focused on people management.

    an image showing staff personas at different stages through the change process.

    Quickly assess the size of change by answering these questions:

    1. Will the change affect your staff's daily work?
    2. Is the change high urgency?
    3. Is there a change in reporting relationships?
    4. Is there a change in skills required for staff to be successful?
    5. Will the change modify entrenched cultural practices?
    6. Is there a change in the mission or vision of the role?

    If you answered "Yes" to two or more questions, the change is bigger than you think. Your staff will feel the impact.

    Ensure effective communication by focusing on four key elements

    1. Audience
    • Stakeholders (either groups or individuals) who will receive the communication.
  • Message
    • Information communicated to impacted stakeholders. Must be rooted in a purpose or intent.
  • Messenger
    • Person who delivers the communication to the audience. The communicator and owner are two different things.
  • Channel
    • Method or channel used to communicate to the audience.
  • Step 2.1

    Build awareness and define key messages for IT.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications (optional)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Key accessibility messages

    Determine the desired outcome of communicating within IT

    This phase is focused on communicating within IT. All communication has an overall goal. This outcome or purpose of communicating is often dependent on the type of influence the stakeholder wields within the organization as well as the type of impact the change will have on them. Consider each of the communication outcomes listed below.

    Communicating within IT

    • Obtain buy-in
    • Inform about the IT change
    • Create a training plan
    • Inform about department changes
    • Inform about organization changes
    • Inform about a crisis
    • Obtain adoption related to the change
    • Distribute key messages to change agents

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Departmental Meeting Template

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Accessibility Quick Cards

    Establish and define key messages based on organizational objectives

    What are key messages?

    1. Key messages guide all internal communications to ensure they are consistent, unified, and straightforward.
    2. Distill key messages down from organizational objectives and use them to reinforce the organization's strategic direction. Key messages should inspire employees to act in a way that will help the organization reach its objectives.

    How to establish key messages

    Ground key messages in organizational strategy and culture. These should be the first places you look to determine the organization's key messages:

    • Refer to organizational strategy documents. What needs to be reinforced in internal communications to ensure the organization can achieve its strategy? This is a key message.
    • Look at the organization's values. How do values guide how work should be done? Do employees need to behave in a certain way or keep a certain value top of mind? This is a key message.

    The intent of key messages is to convey important information in a way that is relatable and memorable, to promote reinforcement, and ultimately, to drive action.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Empathizing with the audience is key to anticipating and addressing objections as well as identifying benefits. Customize messaging based on audience attributes such as work model (e.g. hybrid), anticipated objections, what's in it for me?, and specific expectations.

    2.1.1 Clarify the key messages

    30 minutes

    1. Brainstorm the key stakeholders and target audiences you will likely need to communicate with to sustain the accessibility initiative (depending on the size of your group, you might break into pairs or smaller groups and each work on one target audience).
    2. Based on the outcome expected from engaging the target audience in communications, define one to five key messages that should be expressed about accessibility.
    3. The key messages should highlight benefits anticipated, concerns anticipated, details about the change, plan of action, or next steps. The goal here is to ensure the target audience is included in the communication process.
    4. The key messages should be focused on how the target audience receives a consistent message, especially if different communication messengers are involved.
    5. Document the key messages on Tab 3 of the Communications Planner Tool.

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcomes

    Output

    • Key messages to support a consistent approach

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT leadership team
    • Marketing/communications partner (optional)

    Step 2.2

    Support new behaviors.

    Activities

    2.2.1 Prepare for IT department meeting

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation

    2.2.3 Hold department meeting

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Entire IT department

    Outcomes of this step

    • IT departmental meeting slides
    • Accessibility quick cards
    • Task list of how each IT team will support the accessibility roadmap

    Key questions to answer with change communication

    To effectively communicate change, answer questions before they're asked, whenever possible. To do this, outline at each stage of the change process what's happening next for the audience, as well as answer other anticipated questions. Pair key questions with core messages.

    Examples of key questions by change stage include:

    The outline for each stage of the change process, showing what happens next.

    2.2.1 Prepare for the IT departmental meeting

    2 hours

    1. Download the IT Department Presentation Template and follow the instructions on each slide to update for your organization.
    2. Insert information on the current accessibility maturity level. If you haven't determined your current and future state maturity level, use the Info-Tech resource from The Accessibility Business Case for IT.
    3. Review the presentation with the information added.
    4. Consider what could be done to make the presentation better:
      1. Concise: Identify opportunities to remove unnecessary information.
      2. Clear: It uses only terms or language the target audience would understand.
      3. Relevant: It matters to the target audience and the problems they face.
      4. Consistent: The message could be repeated across audiences.
    5. Schedule a departmental meeting or add the presentation to an existing departmental meeting.

    Download the Departmental Presentation Template

    Input

    • Organizational accessibility risks
    • Accessibility maturity current state
    • Outputs from manager presentation
    • Key messages

    Output

    • Prepared presentation to introduce accessibility to the entire IT department

    Materials

    • Departmental Presentation Template

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ CAO/ initiative leader

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, frame – all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your presentation confidently. While this should be obvious, it is essential. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading from your slides. If there is text on a slide, paraphrase it while maintaining eye contact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren't engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    2.2.2 Practice delivery of your presentation and schedule department meeting

    45 minutes

    1. Take ten minutes to think about how to deliver your presentation. Where will you emphasize words, speak louder, softer, lean in, stand tall, make eye contact, etc.?
    2. Set a timer on your phone or watch. Record yourself if possible.
    3. Take a few seconds to center yourself and prepare to deliver your pitch.
    4. Practice delivery of your presentation out loud. Don't forget to use your body language and your voice to deliver.
    5. Listen to the recording. Are the ideas communicated correctly? Are you convinced?
    6. Review and repeat.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1
    • Best practices for delivering

    Output

    • An ability to deliver the presentation in a clear and concise manner that creates understanding

    Materials

    • Recorder
    • Timer

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    2.2.3 Lead the IT department meeting

    1–2 hours

    1. Gather the IT department in a manner appropriate for your organization and facilitate the meeting prepared in activity 2.2.1.
    2. Within the meeting, capture all key action items and outcomes from the Quick Cards Development and Roadmap Planning.
    3. Following the meeting, review the quick cards that everyone built and share these with all IT participants.
    4. Update your sunrise diagram to include any initiatives that came up in the team meetings to support moving to experiential.

    Input

    • Presentation deck from activity 2.2.1

    Output

    • A shared understanding of accessibility at your organization and everyone's role
    • Area task list (including behavior change needs)
    • Accessibility quick cards

    Materials

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative leader

    Download the Accessibility Quick Cards template

    Step 2.3

    Continuous reinforcement – keep the conversation going – sustain the change.

    Activities

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe for communications

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    2.3.3 Sustainment plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative lead
    • IT leadership team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assigned roles for ongoing program monitoring
    • Communication plan
    • Accessibility maturity monitoring plan
    • Program evaluation

    Communication is ongoing before, during, and after implementing a change initiative

    Just because you've rolled out the plan doesn't mean you can stop talking about it.

    An image of the five steps, with steps four and five highlighted in a green box. The five headings are: Identify and Prioritize; Prepare for initiative; Create a communication plan; Implement change; Sustain the desired outcome

    Don't forget: Cascade messages down through the organization to ensure those who need to deliver messages have time to internalize the change before communicating it to others. Include a mix of personal and organizational messages, but where possible, separate personal and organizational content into different communications.

    2.3.1 Establish a frequency and timeframe

    30 minutes

    1. For each row in Tab 3, determine how frequently that communication needs to take place and when that communication needs to be completed by.
      • Frequency: How often the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. one-time, monthly, as needed).
      • Timeframe: When the communication will be delivered to the audience (e.g. a planned period or a specific date).
    2. When selecting the timeframe, consider what dependencies need to take place prior to that communication. For example, IT employees should not be communicated with on anything that has not yet been approved by the CEO. Also consider when other communications might be taking place so that the message is not lost in the noise.
    3. For frequency, the only time that a communication needs to take place once is when presenting up to senior leaders of the organizations. And even then, it will sometimes require more than one conversation. Be mindful of this.

    Input

    • The change
    • Target audience
    • Communication outcome
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • Frequency and timeframe of the communication

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Ensure feedback mechanisms are in place

    Soliciting and acting on feedback involves employees in the decision-making process and demonstrates to them that their contributions matter.

    Make sure you have established feedback mechanisms to collect feedback on both the messages delivered and how they were delivered. Some ways to collect feedback include:

    • Evaluating intranet comments and interactions (e.g. likes, etc.) if this function is enabled.
    • Measuring comprehension and satisfaction through surveys and polls.
    • Looking for themes in the feedback and questions employees bring forward to managers during in-person briefings.

    Feedback Mechanisms:

    • CIO business vision survey
    • Engagement surveys
    • Focus groups
    • Suggestion boxes
    • Team meetings
    • Random sampling
    • Informal feedback
    • Direct feedback
    • Audience body language
    • Repeating the message back

    Gather feedback on plan and iterate

    Who

    The project team gathers feedback from:

    • As many members of impacted groups as possible, as it helps build broad buy-in for the plan.
    • All levels (e.g. frontline employees, managers, directors).

    What

    Gather feedback on:

    • How to implement tactics successfully.
    • The timing of implementation (helps inform the next slide).
    • The resources required (helps inform the next slide).
    • Potential unforeseen impacts, questions, and concerns.

    How

    • Use focus groups to gather feedback.
    • Adjust sustainment plan based on feedback.

    Use Info-Tech's Standard Focus Group Guide

    2.3.2 Obtain feedback and improve

    20 minutes

    1. Evenly distribute the number of rows in the communication plan to all those involved. Consider a metric that would help inform whether the communication outcome was achieved.
    2. For each row, identify a feedback mechanism (slide 75) that could be used to enable the collection and confirm a successful outcome.
    3. Come back as a group and validate the feedback mechanisms selected.
    4. The important aspect here is not just to measure if the desired outcome was achieved. If the desired outcome is not achieved, consider what you might do to change or enable better communication to that target audience.
    5. Every communication can be better. Feedback, whether it be tactical or strategic, will help inform methods to improve future communication activities.

    Input

    • Communication outcome
    • Target audience
    • Communication channel

    Output

    • A mechanism to measure communication feedback and adjust future communications when necessary

    Materials

    • Communications Planner Tool
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Changes based on those who would be relevant to your initiative

    Download the Communications Planner Tool

    Identify owners and assign other roles

    • Eventually there needs to be a hand off to leaders to sustain accessibility. Senior leaders continue to play the role of guide and facilitator, helping the team identify owners and transfer ownership.
    • Guide the team to work with owners to assign roles to other stakeholders. Spread responsibility across multiple people to avoid overload.

    R

    Responsible
    Carries out the work to implement the component (e.g. payroll manager).

    A

    Accountable
    Owner of the component and held accountable for its implementation (e.g. VP of finance).

    C

    Consulted
    Asked for feedback and input to modify sustainment tactics (e.g. sustainment planning team).

    I

    Informed
    Told about progress of implementation (senior leadership team, impacted staff).

    Identify required resources and secure budget

    Sustainment is critical to success of accessibility

    • This step (i.e. sustainment) often gets overlooked because leaders are focused on the implementation. It takes resources and budget to sustain a plan and change as well.
    • Resorting to the old way is more likely to occur when you don't plan to support sustainment with ongoing resources and budget that's required.

    Resources

    Identify resources required for sustainment components using metrics and input from implementation owners, subject matter experts, and frontline managers.

    For example:

    • Inventory
    • Collateral for communications
    • Technology
    • Physical space
    • People resources (FTE)

    Budget

    Estimate the budget required for resources based on past projects that used similar resources, and then estimate the time it will take until the change evolves into "business as usual" (e.g. 6 months, 12 months).

    Monitor accessibility maturity

    If you haven't already performed the Accessibility Maturity Assessment, complete it in the wake of the accessibility initiative to assess improvements and progress toward target future accessibility maturity.
    As your accessibility program starts to scale out over a range of projects, revisit the assessment on a quarterly or bi-annual basis to help focus your improvement efforts across the six accessibility categories.

    • Vendor relations
    • Products and services
    • Policy and process
    • Support and accommodation
    • Communication
    • People and culture

    Info-Tech Insight

    To drive continual improvement of your organizational accessibility and disability inclusion, continue to share progress, wins, challenges, feedback, and other accessibility related concerns with stakeholders. At the end of the day, IT's efforts to become a change leader and support organizational accessibility will come down to stakeholder perceptions based upon employee morale and benefits realized.

    Download the Accessibility Maturity Assessment

    An image of the maturity level bar graph.

    Evaluate and iterate the program on an ongoing basis

    1. Continually monitor the results of project metrics.
      • Track progress toward goals and metrics set at the beginning of the initiative to gauge the success of the program.
      • Analyze metrics at the work-unit level to highlight successes and challenges in accessibility and disability inclusion and the parameters around it for each impacted unit.
    2. Regularly gather feedback on program effectiveness using questions such as:
      • Has the desired culture been effectively communicated and leveraged, or has the culture changed?
      • Collect feedback through regular channels (e.g. manager check-ins) and set up a cadence to survey employees on the program (e.g. three months after rollout and then annually).
    3. Determine if changes to the program structure are needed.
      • Revisit the accessibility maturity framework and the compliance requirements of IT. Understand what is being experienced; it may be necessary to select a different target or adjust the parameters to mitigate the common challenges.
      • Evaluate the effectiveness of current internal processes to determine if the program would benefit from a dedicated resource.

    2.3.3 Sustain the change

    1. Identify who will own what pieces of the program going forward and assign roles to transition the initiative from implementation to the new normal.
    2. Continue to communicate with stakeholders about accessibility and disability inclusion initiatives, controls, and requirements.
    3. Identify required resources and secure any budget that will be needed to support the accessibility program. Think about employee training, consulting needs, assistive technology requirements, human resources (FTE), etc.
    4. Continue to monitor your accessibility maturity. Use the Accessibility Maturity Assessment tool to periodically evaluate progress on goals and targets. Also, use this tool to communicate progress with senior leaders and executives.
    5. Strive for continuous improvement by evaluating and iterating the program on an ongoing basis.

    Input

    • Activity outputs from this blueprint

    Output

    • Ongoing continuous improvement and progress related to accessibility
    • Demonstrable results

    Materials

    • n/a

    Participants

    • CIO/ head of IT/ initiative Lead
    • IT senior leaders
    • IT managers

    Related Info-Tech Research

    The Accessibility Business Case for IT

    • Take away the overwhelm that many feel when they hear "accessibility" and make the steps for your organization approachable.
    • Clearly communicate why accessibility is critical and how it supports the organization's key objectives and initiatives.
    • Understand your current state related to accessibility and identify areas for key initiatives to become part of the IT strategic roadmap.

    Lead Staff through Change

    • Anticipate and respond to staff questions about the change in order to keep messages consistent, organized, and clear.
    • Manage staff based on their specific concerns and change personas to get the best out of your team during the transition through change.
    • Maintain a feedback loop between staff, executives, and other departments in order to maintain the change momentum and reduce angst throughout the process.

    IT Diversity and Inclusion Tactics

    • Although inclusion is key to the success of a diversity and inclusion (D&I) strategy, the complexity of the concept makes it a daunting pursuit.
    • This is further complicated by the fact that creating inclusion is not a one-and-done exercise. Rather, it requires the ongoing commitment of employees and managers to reassess their own behaviors and to drive a cultural shift.

    Implement and Mature Your User Experience Design Practice

    • Create a practice that is focused on human outcomes; it starts and ends with the people you are designing for. This includes:
      • Establishing a practice with a common vision.
      • Enhancing the practice through four design factors.
      • Communicating a roadmap to improve your business through design.

    Works cited

    "2021 State of Digital Accessibility." Level Access, n.d. Accessed 10 Aug. 2022
    "Apple Canada Accessibility Policy & Plan." Apple Canada, 11 March 2019. .
    Casey, Caroline. "Do Your D&I Efforts Include People With Disabilities?" Harvard Business Review, 19 March 2020. Accessed 28 July 2022.
    Digitalisation World. "Organisations failing to meet digital accessibility standards." Angel Business Communications, 19 May 2022. Accessed Oct. 2022.
    "disability." Merriam-Webster.com Dictionary, Merriam-Webster, . Accessed 10 Aug. 2022.
    "Disability." World Health Organization, 2022. Accessed 10 Aug 2022.
    "Google Canada Corporation Accessibility Policy and Multi Year Plan." Google Canada, June 2020. .
    Hypercontext. "The State of High Performing Teams in Tech 2022." Hypercontext. 2022..
    Lay-Flurrie, Jenny. "Accessibility Evolution Model: Creating Clarity in your Accessibility Journey." Microsoft, 2023. <https://blogs.microsoft.com/accessibility/accessibility-evolution-model/>.
    Maguire, Jennifer. "Applause 2022 Global Accessibility Survey Reveals Organizations Prioritize Digital Accessibility but Fall Short of Conformance with WCAG 2.1 Standards." Business Wire, 19 May 2022. . Accessed 2 January 2023.
    "The Business Case for Digital Accessibility." W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI), 9 Nov. 2018. Accessed 4 Aug. 2022.
    "THESCORE's Commitment to Accessibility." theScore, May 2021. .
    "The WebAIM Million." Web AIM, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.
    Washington, Ella F. "The Five Stages of DEI Maturity." Harvard Business Review, November - December 2022. Accessed 7 Nov. 2022.
    Web AIM. "The WebAIM Million." Institute for Disability Research, Policy, and Practice, 31 March 2022. Accessed 28 Jul. 2022.

    How to build a Service Desk Chatbot POC

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}16|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}16|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: 11,197
    • member rating average days saved: 8
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

    The challenge

    Build a chatbot that creates value for your business

     

    • Ensure your chatbot meets your business needs.
    • Bring scalability to your customer service delivery in a cost-effective manner.
    • Measure your chatbot objectives with clear metrics.
    • Pre-determine your ticket categories to use during the proof of concept.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • Build your chatbot to create business value. Whether increasing service or resource efficiency, keep value creation in mind when making decisions with your proof of concept.

    Impact and results 

    • When implemented effectively, chatbots can help save costs, generate new revenue, and ultimately increase customer satisfaction for external and internal-facing customers.

    The roadmap

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you building a chatbot proof of concept is a good idea, review our methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you to successfully complete this project. Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Start here

    Form your chatbot strategy.

    Build the right metrics to measure the success of your chatbot POC

    • Chatbot ROI Calculator (xls)
    • Chatbot POC Metrics Tool (xls)

    Build the foundation for your chatbot.

    Architect the chatbot to maximize business value

    • Chatbot Conversation Tree Library

    Continue to improve your chatbot.

    Now take your chatbot proof of concept to production

    • Chatbot POC RACI (doc)
    • Chatbot POC Implementation Roadmap (xls)
    • Chatbot POC Communication Plan (doc)Chatbot ROI Calculator (xls)

    Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}536|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • COVID-19 is an unprecedented global pandemic. It’s creating significant challenges across every sector.
    • Collapse of financial markets and a steep decline in consumer confidence has most firms nervous about revenue shortfalls and cash burn rates.
    • The economic impact of COVID-19 is freezing IT budgets and sharply changing IT priorities.
    • The human impact of COVID-19 is likely to lead to staffing shortfalls and knowledge gaps.
    • COVID-19 may be in play for up to two years.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The challenges posed by the virus are compounded by the fact that consumer expectations for strong service delivery remain high:

    • Customers still expect timely, on-demand service from the businesses they engage with.
    • There is uncertainty about how to maintain strong, revenue-driving experiences when faced with the operational challenges posed by the virus.
    • COVID-19 is changing how organizations prioritize spending priorities within their CXM strategies.

    Impact and Result

    • Info-Tech recommends rapidly updating your strategy for customer experience management to ensure it can rise to the occasion.
    • Start by assessing the risk COVID-19 poses to your CXM approach and how it’ll impact marketing, sales, and customer service functions.
    • Implement actionable measures to blunt the threat of COVID-19 while protecting revenue, maintaining consistent product and service delivery, and improving the integrity of your brand. We’ll dive into five proven techniques in this brief!

    Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19 Research & Tools

    Start here

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should examine the impact of COVID-19 on customer experience strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Adapt Your Customer Experience Strategy to Successfully Weather COVID-19 Storyboard

    1. Assess the impact of COVID-19 on your CXM strategy

    Create a consolidated, updated view of your current customer experience management strategy and identify which elements can be capitalized on to dampen the impact of COVID-19 and which elements are vulnerabilities that the pandemic may threaten to exacerbate.

    2. Blunt the damage of COVID-19 with new CXM tactics

    Create a roadmap of business and technology initiatives through the lens of customer experience management that can be used to help your organization protect its revenue, maintain customer engagement, and enhance its brand integrity.

    [infographic]

    Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}315|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management

    Organizations wishing to mature their IT financial management (ITFM) maturity often face the following obstacles:

    • Unfamiliarity: Lack of knowledge and understanding related to ITFM maturity.
    • Shortsightedness: Randomly reacting to changing circumstances.
    • Exchange: Inability to consistently drive dialogues.
    • Perception: IT is perceived as a cost center instead of a trustworthy strategic partner.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    No matter where you currently stand in your ITFM practice, there is always room for improvement. Hence, a maturity assessment should be viewed as a self-improvement tool that is only valuable if you are willing to act on it.

    Impact and Result

    A mature ITFM practice leads to many benefits.

    • Foundation: Improved governance, skill sets, processes, and tools.
    • Data: An appropriate taxonomy/data model alongside accurate data for high-quality reporting and insights.
    • Language: A common vocabulary across the organization.
    • Organization Culture: Improved communication and collaboration between IT and business partners.

    Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively Storyboard – A framework and step-by-step methodology to assess your ITFM maturity.

    This research seeks to support IT leaders and ITFM practitioners in evaluating and improving their current maturity. It will help document both current and target states as well as prioritize focus areas for improvement.

    • Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively Storyboard

    2. IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool – A structured tool to help you assess your ITFM maturity.

    This Excel workbook guides IT finance practitioners to effectively assess their IT financial management practice. Incorporate the visual outputs into your final executive presentation document. Key activities include context setting, completing the assessment, and prioritizing focus areas based on results.

    • IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    3. IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template – A report summarizing your ITFM maturity assessment results to help you communicate with stakeholders.

    Use this template to document your final ITFM maturity outputs, including the current and target states and your identified priorities.

    • IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Assess Your IT Financial Management Maturity Effectively

    Influence your organization’s strategic direction.

    Analyst Perspective

    Make better informed data-driven business decisions.

    Technology has been evolving throughout the years, increasing complexity and investments, while putting more stress on operations and people involved. As an IT leader, you are now entrusted to run your outfit as a business, sit at the executive table as a true partner, and be involved in making decisions that best suit your organization. Therefore, you have an obligation to fulfill the needs of your end customers and live up to their expectations, which is not an easy task.

    IT financial management (ITFM) helps you generate value to your organization’s clientele by bringing necessary trade-offs to light, while driving effective dialogues with your business partners and leadership team.

    This research will focus on Info-Tech’s approach to ITFM maturity, aiming for a state of continuous improvement, where an organization can learn and grow as it adapts to change. As the ITFM practice matures, IT and business leaders will be able to better understand one another and together make better business decisions, driven by data.

    This client advisory presentation and accompanying tool seek to support IT leaders and ITFM practitioners in evaluating and improving their current maturity. It will help document both current and target states as well as prioritize focus areas for improvement.

    Photo of Bilal Alberto Saab, Research Director, IT Financial Management, Info-Tech Research Group. Bilal Alberto Saab
    Research Director, IT Financial Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    The value of ITFM is undermined

    ITFM is often discarded and not given enough importance and relevance due to the operational nature of IT, and the specialized skillset of its people, leading to several problems and challenges, such as:

    • Unfamiliarity: Lack of knowledge and understanding related to ITFM maturity.
    • Shortsightedness: Randomly reacting to changing circumstances.
    • Exchange: Inability to consistently drive dialogues.
    • Perception: IT is perceived as a cost center instead of a trustworthy strategic partner.

    Constructive dialogues with business partners are not the norm

    Business-driven conversations around financials (spending, cost, revenue) are a rarity in IT due to several factors, including:

    • Foundation: Weak governance, inadequate skillset, and less than perfect processes and tools.
    • Data: Lack of adequate taxonomy/data model, alongside inaccurate data leading to poor reporting and insights.
    • Language: Lack of a common vocabulary across the organization.
    • Organization culture: No alignment, alongside minimal communication and collaboration between IT and business partners.

    Follow Info-Tech’s approach to move up the ITFM maturity ladder

    Mature your ITFM practice by activating the means to make informed business decisions.

    Info-Tech’s methodology helps you move the dial by focusing on three maturity focus areas:

    • Build an ITFM Foundation
    • Manage and Monitor IT Spending
    • Bridge the Language Barrier

    Info-Tech Insight

    Influence your organization’s strategic direction by maturing your ITFM practice.

    What is ITFM?

    ITFM is not just about finance.

    • ITFM has evolved from traditional budgeting, accounting, and cost optimization; however, it is much more than those activities alone.
    • It starts with understanding the financial implications of technology by adopting different perspectives to become adept in communicating with various stakeholders, including finance, business partners, IT managers, and your CEO.
    • Armed with this knowledge, ITFM helps you address a variety of questions, such as:
      • How are technology funds being spent?
      • Which projects is IT prioritizing and why?
      • What are the resources needed to speed IT delivery?
      • What’s the value of IT within the organization?
    • ITFM’s main objective is thus to improve decision-making capabilities by facilitating communication between IT leaders and stakeholders, while enabling a customer focus attitude throughout the organization.

    “ITFM embeds technology in financial management practices. Through cost, demand, and value, ITFM brings technology and business together, forging the necessary relationships and starting the right conversations to enable the best decisions for the organization.”
    – Monica Braun, Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Your challenge

    IT leaders struggle to articulate and communicate business value.

    • IT spending is often questioned by different stakeholders, such as business partners and various IT business units. These questions, usually resulting from shifts in business needs, may revolve around investments, expenditures, services, and speed to market, among others. While IT may have an idea about its spending habits, aligning it to the business strategy may prove difficult.
    • IT staff often does not have access to, or knowledge of, the business model and its intricacies. In an operational environment, the focus tends to be on technical issues rather than overall value.
    • People tend to fear what they do not know. Some business managers may not be comfortable with technology. They do not recognize the implications and ramifications of certain implementations or understand the related terminology, which puts a strain on any conversation.

    “Value is not the numbers you visualize on a chart, it’s the dialogue this data generates with your business partners and leadership team.”
    – Dave Kish, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Technology is constantly evolving

    Increasing IT spending and decision-making complexity.

    Timeline of IT technology evolution, starting with 'Timesharing' in the 1980s to 'All Things Digital' in the 2020s. 'IT Spend Growth' grows from start to finish.

    Common obstacles

    IT leaders are not able to have constructive dialogues with their stakeholders.

    • The way IT funds are spent has changed significantly, moving from the purchase of discrete hardware and software tools to implementing data lakes, cloud solutions, the metaverse and blockchain. This implies larger investments and more critical decisions. Conversations around interoperability, integration, and service-based solutions that focus more on big-picture architecture than day-to-day operations have become the norm.
    • Speed to market is now a survival criterion for most organizations, requiring IT to shift rapidly based on changing priorities and customer expectations. This leads to the need for greater financial oversight, with the CFO as the gatekeeper. Today’s IT leaders need to possess both business and financial management savvy to justify their spending with various stakeholders.
    • Any IT budget increase is tied to expectations of greater value. Hence, the compelling demands for IT to prove its worth to the business. Promoting value comes in two ways: 1) objectively, based on data, KPIs, and return on investment; and 2) subjectively, based on stakeholder satisfaction, alongside relationships. Building trust, credibility, and confidence can go a long way.

    In a technology-driven world, advances come at a price. With greater spending required, more complex and difficult conversations arise.

    Constructive dialogues are key

    You don’t know what you don’t know.

    • IT, being historically focused on operations, has become a hub for technically savvy personnel. On the downside, technology departments are often alien to business, causing problems such as:
      • IT staff have no knowledge of the business model and lack customer focus.
      • Business is not comfortable with technology and related jargon.
    • The lack of two-way communication and business alignment is hence an important ramification. If the business does not understand technology, and IT does not speak in business terms, where does that lead us?
    • Poor data quality and governance practices, alongside overly manual processes can only exasperate the situation.

    IT Spending Survey

    79% of respondents believe that decisions taking too long to make is either a significant or somewhat of a challenge (Flexera 2022 Tech Spend Pulse; N=501).

    81% of respondents believe that ensuring spend efficiency (avoiding waste) is either a challenge or somewhat of a challenge (Flexera 2022 Tech Spend Pulse; N=501).

    ITFM is trailing behind

    IT leaders must learn to speak business.

    In today’s world, where organizations are driving customer experience through technology investments, having a seat at the table means IT leaders must be well versed in business language and practice, including solid financial management skills.

    However, IT staff across all industries aren’t very confident in how well IT is doing in managing its finances. This becomes evident after looking at three core processes:

    • Demonstrating IT’s value to the business.
    • Accounting of costs and budgets.
    • Optimizing costs to gain the best return on investment.

    Recent data from 4,137 respondents to Info-Tech’s IT Management & Governance Diagnostic shows that while most IT staff feel that these three financial management processes are important, notably fewer feel that IT management is effective at executing on them.

    IT leadership’s capabilities around fundamental cost data capture appear to be lagging, not to mention the essential value-added capabilities around optimizing costs and demonstrating IT’s contribution to business value.

    Bar charts comparing percentages of people who 'Agree process is important' and 'Agree process is effective' for three processes: Business Value, Cost & Budget Management, and Cost Optimization. In all instances, the importance outweighed the perceived effectiveness.
    Source: Info-Tech Research Group, IT Management & Governance Diagnostic, 2023.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    We take a holistic approach to ITFM and support you throughout your maturity journey.

    Visualization of the IT maturity levels with three goals at the bottom, 'Build am ITFM Foundation', 'Manage & Monitor IT Spending', and 'Bridge the Language Barrier'. The 5 levels, from bottom to top, are 'Nascent - Level 1, Inability to consistently deliver financial planning services', 'Cost Operator - Level 2, Rudimentary financial planning capabilities', 'Trusted Coordinator - Level 3, Enablement of business through cost-effective supply of technology', 'Value Optimizer - Level 4, Effective impact on business performance', and 'Strategic Partner - Level 5, Influence on the organization's strategic direction'.

    The Info-Tech difference:

    • Info-Tech has a methodology and set of tools that will help assess your ITFM maturity and take the first step in developing an improvement plan. We have identified three maturity focus areas:
      • Build an ITFM Foundation
      • Manage and Monitor IT Spending
      • Bridge the Language Barrier
    • No matter where you currently stand in your ITFM practice, there is always room for improvement. Hence, a maturity assessment should be viewed as a self-improvement tool, which is only valuable if you are willing to act on it.

    Note: See Appendix A for maturity level definitions and descriptions.

    Climb the maturity ladder

    By growing along three maturity focus areas.

    A diagram with '3 Maturity Focus Areas' and '9 Maturity Levers' within them. The first area is 'Build an ITFM Foundation' with levers 'Establish your Team', 'Set up your Governance Structure', and 'Adopt ITFM Processes & Tools'. The second area is 'Manage & Monitor IT Spending', with levers 'Standardize your Taxonomy & Data Model', 'Identify, Gather & Prepare your Data', and 'Analyze your Findings and Develop your Reports'. The third area is 'Bridge the Language Barrier' with levers 'Communicate your IT Spending', 'Educate the Masses', and 'Influence your Organization's Culture'.

    Info-Tech identified three maturity focus areas, each containing three levers.

    Identify where you stand across the nine maturity levers, detect the gaps, and determine your priorities as a first step to develop an improvement plan.

    Note: See Appendix B for maturity level definitions and descriptions per lever.

    Key project deliverables

    Each step of this activity is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template

    A template of an ITFM maturity assessment report that can be customized based on your own results.

    IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    A workbook including an ITFM maturity survey, generating a summary of your current state, target state, and priorities.

    Measure the value of this activity

    Reach your 12-month maturity target.

    • Determine your 12-month maturity target, identify your gaps, and set your priorities.
    • Use the ITFM maturity assessment to kickstart your improvement plan by developing actionable initiatives.
    • Implement your initiatives and monitor your progress to reach your 12-month target.

    Sample of a result page from the ITFM maturity assessment.

    Build your improvement plan and implement your initiatives to move the dial and climb the maturity ladder.

    Sample of a result page from the ITFM maturity assessment with a graph.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Step 1

    Prepare for the ITFM maturity assessment

    Content Overview

    1. Identify your stakeholders
    2. Set the context
    3. Determine the methodology
    4. Identify assessment takers

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • CFO/finance director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT audit lead
    • Other IT management

    1. Prepare to take the ITFM maturity assessment

    3 hours

    Input: Understanding your context, objectives, and methodology

    Output: ITFM maturity assessment stakeholders and their objectives, ITFM maturity assessment methodology, ITFM maturity assessment takers

    Materials: 1a. Prepare for Assessment tab in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants: CIO/IT director, CFO/finance director, IT finance lead, IT audit lead, Other IT management

    1. Identify your stakeholders and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool (see next slides). We recommend having representatives from different business units across the organization, most notably IT, IT finance, finance, and IT audit.
    2. Set the context with your stakeholders and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool. Discuss the reason behind taking the ITFM maturity assessment among the various stakeholders. Why do each of your stakeholders want to take the assessment? What are their main objectives? What would they like to achieve?
    3. Determine the methodology and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool. Discuss how you want to go about taking the assessment with your stakeholders. Do you want to have representatives from each business unit take the assessment individually, then share and discuss their findings? Do you prefer forming a working group with representatives from each business unit and go through the assessment together? Or does any of your stakeholders have a different suggestion? You will have to consider the effort, skillset, and knowledge required.
    4. Identify the assessment takers and document it in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool. Determine who will be taking the assessment (specific names of stakeholders). Consider their availability, knowledge, and skills.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Document your stakeholders, objectives, and methodology

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Prepare for Assessment worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to document stakeholders, objectives, and methodology (table range: columns B to G and rows 8 to 15).

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: 'Maturity Assessment Stakeholders'.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Text Enter the full name of each stakeholder on a separate row.
    D Text Enter the job title related to each stakeholder.
    E Text Enter the objective(s) related to each stakeholder.
    F Text Enter the agreed upon methodology.
    G Text Enter any notes or comments per stakeholder (optional).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the 1a. Prepare for Assessment tab.
    2. Enter the full names and job titles of the ITFM maturity assessment stakeholders.
    3. Document the maturity assessment objective of each of your stakeholders.
    4. Document the agreed-upon methodology.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Document your assessment takers

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Prepare for Assessment worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to document assessment takers (table range: columns B to E and rows 18 to 25).

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: 'Maturity Assessment Takers'.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Text Enter the full name of each assessment taker on a separate row.
    D Text Enter the job title related to each stakeholder to identify which party is being represented per assessment taker.
    E Text Enter any notes or comments per stakeholder (optional).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the 1a. Prepare for Assessment tab.
    2. Enter the full name of each assessment taker, along with the job title of the stakeholder they are representing.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Step 2

    Take the ITFM maturity assessment

    Content Overview

    1. Complete the survey
    2. Review your assessment results
    3. Determine your priorities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • CFO/finance director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT audit lead
    • Other IT management

    2. Take the ITFM maturity assessment

    3 hours

    Input: Understanding of your ITFM current state and 12-month target state, ITFM maturity assessment results

    Output: ITFM current- and target-state maturity levels, average scores, and variance, ITFM current- and target-state average scores, variance, and priority by maturity focus area and maturity lever

    Materials: 1b. Glossary, 2a. Assess ITFM Foundation, 2b. Assess Mngt. & Monitoring, 2c. Assess Language, and 3. Assessment Summary tabs in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool

    Participants: CIO/IT director, CFO/finance director, IT finance lead, IT audit lead, Other IT management

    1. Complete the survey: select the current and target state of each statement – refer to the glossary as needed for definitions of key terms – in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool (see next slides). There are three tabs (one per maturity focus area) with three tables each (nine maturity levers). Review and discuss statements with all assessment takers: consider variations, differing opinions, and reach an agreement on each statement inputs.
    2. Review assessment results: navigate to the Assessment Summary tab in the ITFM maturity assessment tool (see next slides) to view your results. Review and discuss with all assessment takers: consider any shocking output and adjust survey input if necessary.
    3. Determine your priorities: decide on the priority (Low/Medium/High) by maturity focus area and/or maturity lever. Rank your maturity focus area priorities from 1 to 3 and your maturity lever priorities from 1 to 9. Consider the feasibility in terms of timeframe, effort, and skillset required, positive and negative impacts on business and technology, likelihood of failure, and necessary approvals. Document your priorities in the ITFM maturity assessment tool (see next slides).
      Review and discuss priorities with all assessment takers: consider variations, differing opinions, and reach an agreement on each priority.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Complete the survey

    Excel workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Survey worksheets

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete the survey.

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: Survey worksheets.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: ITFM maturity statement to assess.
    D, E Dropdown Select the maturity levels of your current and target states. One of five maturity levels for each statement, from “1. Nonexistent” (lowest maturity) to “5. Advanced” (highest maturity).
    F, G, H Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: scores associated with your current and target state selection, along with related variance (column G – column F).
    I Text Enter any notes or comments per ITFM maturity statement (optional).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the survey tabs: 2a. Assess ITFM Foundation, 2b. Assess Management and Monitoring, and 2c. Assess Language.
    2. Select the appropriate current and target maturity levels.
    3. Add any notes or comments per ITFM maturity statement where necessary or helpful.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Review your overall result

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Assessment Summary worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to review your results.

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: Assessment Summary worksheet.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    K Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    L Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: Current State, Target State, and Variance entries. Please ignore the current state benchmark, it’s a placeholder for future reference.
    M Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: average overall maturity score for your Current State and Target State entries, along with related Variance.
    N, O Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: maturity level and related name based on the overall average score (column M), where level 1 corresponds to an average score less than or equal to 1.49, level 2 corresponds to an average score between 1.5 and 2.49 (inclusive), level 3 corresponds to an average score between 2.5 and 3.49 (inclusive), level 4 corresponds to an average score between 3.5 and 4.49 (inclusive), and level 5 corresponds to an average score between 4.5 and 5 (inclusive).
    P, Q Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: maturity definition and related description based on the maturity level (column N).

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to tab 3. Assessment Summary.
    2. Review your overall current state and target state result along with the corresponding variance.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Set your priorities

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Assessment Summary worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to review your results per maturity focus area and maturity lever, then prioritize accordingly.

    Example table from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool re: Assessment Summary worksheet.

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required.
    C Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: ITFM maturity focus area or lever, depending on the table.
    D Placeholder Ignore this column because it’s a placeholder for future reference.
    E, F, G Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: average score related to the current state and target state, along with the corresponding variance per maturity focus area or lever (depending on the table).
    H Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required: preliminary priority based on the average variance (column G), where Low corresponds to an average variance between 0 and 0.5 (inclusive), Medium corresponds to an average variance between 0.51 and 0.99 (inclusive), and High corresponds to an average variance greater than or equal to 1.
    J Dropdown Select your final priority (Low, Medium, or High) per ITFM maturity focus area or lever, depending on the table.
    K Whole Number Enter the appropriate rank based on your priorities; do not use the same number more than once. A whole number between 1 and 3 to rank ITFM maturity focus areas, and between 1 and 9 to rank ITFM maturity levers, depending on the table.

    Review the following in the Excel workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to tab 3. Assessment Summary.
    2. Review your current-state and target-state result along with the corresponding variance per maturity focus area and maturity lever.
    3. Select the appropriate priority for each maturity focus area and maturity lever.
    4. Enter a unique rank for each maturity focus area (1 to 3).
    5. Enter a unique rank for each maturity lever (1 to 9).

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    Step 3

    Communicate your ITFM maturity results

    Content Overview

    1. Review your assessment charts
    2. Customize the assessment report
    3. Communicate your results

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • CFO/finance director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT audit lead
    • Other IT management

    3. Communicate your ITFM maturity results

    3 hours

    Input: ITFM maturity assessment results

    Output: Customized ITFM maturity assessment report

    Materials: 3. Assessment Summary tab in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool, ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template

    Participants: CIO/IT director, CFO/finance director, IT finance lead, IT audit lead, Other IT management

    1. Review assessment charts: navigate to the Assessment Summary tab in the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool (see next slides) to view your results and related charts.
    2. Edit the report template: complete the template based on your results and priorities to develop your customized ITFM maturity assessment report (see next slide).
    3. Communicate results: communicate and deliberate the assessment results with assessment takers at a first stage, and with your stakeholders at a second stage. The objective is to agree on next steps, including developing an improvement plan.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Review assessment charts

    Excel Workbook: ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool – Assessment Summary worksheet

    Refer to the example below on charts depicting different views of the maturity assessment results across the three focus areas and nine levers.

    Samples of different tabs from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Tool: 'Assessment Summary tab: From cell B49 to cell M100' and 'Assessment Summary tab: From cell K13 to cell Q34'.

    From the Excel workbook, after completing your potential initiatives and filling all related entries in the Outline Initiatives tab:

    1. Navigate to tab 3. Assessment Summary.
    2. Review each of the charts.
    3. Navigate back to the survey tabs to examine, drill down, and amend individual entries as you deem necessary.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Tool

    TEMPLATE & EXAMPLE

    Customize your report

    PowerPoint presentation: ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template

    Refer to the example below on slides depicting different views of the maturity assessment results across the three maturity focus areas and nine maturity levers.

    Samples of different slides from the ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template, detailed below.

    Slide 6: Edit levels based on your assessment results. Copy and paste the appropriate maturity level definition and description from slide 4.

    Slide 7: Copy related charts from the assessment summary tab in the Excel workbook and remove the chart title. You can use the “Outer Offset: Bottom” shadow under shape effects on the chart.

    Slide 8: Copy related charts from the assessment summary tab in the Excel workbook and remove the chart title and legend. You can use the “Outer Offset: Center” shadow under shape effects on the chart.

    From the ITFM Maturity Assessment Report Template:

    1. Edit the report based on your results found in the assessment summary tab of the Excel workbook (see previous slide).
    2. Review slides 6 to 8 and bring necessary adjustments.

    Download the IT Financial Management Maturity Assessment Report Template

    Make informed business decisions

    Take a holistic approach to ITFM.

    • A thorough understanding of your technology spending in relation to business needs and drivers is essential to make informed decisions. As a trusted partner, you cannot have effective conversations around budgets and cost optimization without a solid foundation.
    • It is important to realize that ITFM is not a one-time exercise, but a continuous, sustainable process to educate (teach, mentor, and train), increase transparency, and assign responsibility.
    • Move up the ITFM maturity ladder by improving across three maturity focus areas:
      • Build an ITFM Foundation
      • Manage and Monitor IT Spending
      • Bridge the Language Barrier

    What’s Next?

    Communicate your maturity results with stakeholders and develop an actionable ITFM improvement plan.

    And remember, having informed discussions with your business partners and stakeholders, where technology helps propel your organization forward, is priceless!

    IT Financial Management Team

    Photo of Dave Kish, Practice Lead, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Dave Kish
    Practice Lead, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Jennifer Perrier
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Angie Reynolds, Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Angie Reynolds
    Principal Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Monica Braun, Research Director, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Monica Braun
    Research Director, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Rex Ding, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Rex Ding
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Aman Kumari, Research Specialist, ITFM Practice, Info-Tech Research Group. Aman Kumari
    Research Specialist, ITFM Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Amy Byalick, Vice President, IT Finance, Info-Tech Research Group. Amy Byalick
    Vice President, IT Finance
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Amy Byalick is an IT Finance practitioner with 15 years of experience supporting CIOs and IT leaders elevating the IT financial storytelling and unlocking insights. Amy is currently working at Johnson Controls as the VP, IT Finance, previously working at PepsiCo, AmerisourceBergen, and Jacobs.
    Photo of Carol Carr, Technical Counselor, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group. Carol Carr
    Technical Counselor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Scott Fairholm, Executive Counselor, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group. Scott Fairholm
    Executive Counselor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Gokul Rajan, Executive Counselor, Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group. Gokul Rajan
    Executive Counselor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Allison Kinnaird, Practice Lead, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group. Allison Kinnaird
    Practice Lead, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group
    Photo of Isabelle Hertanto, Practice Lead, Security & Privacy, Info-Tech Research Group. Isabelle Hertanto
    Practice Lead, Security & Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Sample of the IT spending transparency research. Achieve IT Spending Transparency

    Mature your ITFM practice by activating the means to make informed business decisions.

    Sample of the IT cost optimization roadmap research. Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Develop an IT cost optimization strategy based on your specific circumstances and timeline.

    Bibliography

    Eby, Kate. “The Complete Guide to Organizational Maturity: Models, Levels, and Assessments.” Smartsheet, 8 June 2022. Web.

    “Financial Management Maturity Model.” National Audit Office, n.d. Accessed 28 Apr. 2023.

    “ITFM/TBM Program Maturity Guide.” Nicus Software, n.d. Accessed 28 Apr. 2023.

    Jouravlev, Roman. "Service Financial Management: ITIL 4 Practice Guide." Axelos, 2020.

    McCarthy, Seamus. “Financial Management Maturity Model: A Good Practice Guide.” Office of the Comptroller & Auditor General, 26 June 2018. Web.

    “Principles for Effective Risk Data Aggregation and Risk Reporting.“ Bank for International Settlements, Jan. 2013. Web.

    “Role & Influence of the Technology Decision-Maker 2022.” Foundry, 2022. Web.

    Stackpole, Beth. “State of the CIO, 2022: Focus turns to IT fundamentals.” CIO, 21 March 2022. Web.

    “Tech Spend Pulse.” Flexera, 2022. Web.

    Appendix A

    Definition and Description
    Per Maturity Level

    ITFM maturity levels and definitions

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to consistently deliver financial planning services ITFM practices are almost inexistent. Only the most basic financial tasks and activities are being performed on an ad hoc basis to fulfill the Finance department’s requests.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Rudimentary financial planning capabilities. ITFM activities revolve around minimizing the IT budget as much as possible. ITFM practices are not well defined, and IT’s financial view is limited to day-to-day technical operations.
    IT is only involved in low complexity decision making, where financial conversations center on general ledger items and IT spending.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Enablement of business through cost-effective supply of technology. ITFM activities revolve around becoming a proficient and cost-effective technology supplier to business partners.
    ITFM practices are in place, with moderate coordination and adherence to execution. Various IT business units coordinate to produce a consolidated financial view focused on business services.
    IT is involved in moderate complexity decision making, as a technology subject matter expert, where financial conversations center on IT spending in relation to technology services or solutions provided to business partners.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Effective impact on business performance. ITFM activities revolve around optimizing existing technology investments to improve both IT and business performance.
    ITFM practices are well managed, established, documented, repeatable, and integrated as necessary across the organization. IT’s financial view tie technology investments to lines of business, business products, and business capabilities.
    Business partners are well informed on the technology mix and drive related discussion. IT is trusted to contribute to complex decision making around existing investments to cost-effectively plan initiatives, as well as enhance business performance.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Influence on the organization’s strategic direction. ITFM activities revolve around predicting the outcome of new or potential technology investments to continuously optimize business performance.
    ITFM practices are fully optimized, reviewed, and improved in a continuous and sustainable manner, and related execution is tracked by gathering qualitative and quantitative feedback. IT’s financial view is holistic and fully integrated with the business, with an outlook on innovation, growth, and strategic transformation.
    Business and IT leaders know the financial ramifications of every business and technology investment decision. IT is trusted to contribute to strategic decision making around potential and future investments to grow and transform the business.

    Appendix B

    Maturity Level Definitions and Descriptions
    Per Lever

    Establish your ITFM team

    Maturity focus area: Build an ITFM foundation.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide any type of financial insight.ITFM tasks, activities, and functions are not being met in any way, shape, or form.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide basic financial insights.There is no dedicated ITFM team.


    Basic ITFM tasks, activities, and functions are being performed on an ad hoc basis, such as high-level budget reporting.

    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide basic business insights.A dedicated team is fulfilling essential ITFM tasks, activities, and functions.


    ITFM team can combine and analyze financial and technology data to produce necessary reports.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide valuable business driven insights.A dedicated ITFM team with well-defined roles and responsibilities can provide effective advice to IT leaders, in a timely fashion, and positively influence IT decisions.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to influence both technology and business decisions.A dedicated and highly specialized ITFM team is trusted and valued by both IT and Business leaders.


    Insights provided by the ITFM team can influence and shape the organization’s strategy.

    Set up your governance structure

    Maturity focus area: Build an ITFM foundation

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to ensure any adherence to rules and regulations.ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to ensure basic adherence to rules and regulations.Basic ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are in place, developed on an ad hoc basis, with no apparent coherence or complete documentation.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to ensure compliance to rules and regulations, as well as accountability across ITFM processes.Essential ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are in place, coherent, and documented, aiming to (a) comply with rules and regulations, and (b) provide clear accountability.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to ensure compliance to rules and regulations, as well as structure, transparency, and business alignment across ITFM processes.ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are well defined, coherent, documented, and regularly reviewed, aiming to (a) comply with rules and regulations, (b) provide clear accountability, and (c) maintain business alignment.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to:
    • Ensure compliance to rules and regulations, as well as ITFM processes are transparent, structured, focused on business objectives, and support decision making.
    • Reinforce and shape the organization culture.
    ITFM frameworks, guidelines, policies, and procedures are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to (a) comply with rules and regulations, (b) provide clear accountability, (c) maintain business alignment, and (d) facilitate the decision-making process.


    Enforcement of the ITFM governance structure can influence the organization culture.

    Adopt ITFM processes and tools

    Maturity focus area: Build an ITFM foundation.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to deliver IT financial planning and performance output.ITFM processes and tools are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to deliver basic IT financial planning output.Basic ITFM processes and tools are in place, developed on an ad hoc basis, with no apparent coherence or complete documentation.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to deliver accurate IT financial output and basic IT performance output in a consistent cadence.Essential ITFM processes and tools are in place, coherent, and documented, aiming to (a) maintain integrity across activities, tasks, methodologies, data, and reports; (b) deliver IT financial planning and performance output needed by stakeholders; and (c) provide clear accountability. ITFM tools and processes are adopted by the ITFM team and some IT business units but are not fully integrated.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to deliver accurate IT financial planning and performance output at the needed level of detail to stakeholders in a consistent cadence.ITFM processes and tools are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to (a) maintain integrity across activities, tasks, methodologies, data, and reports; (b) deliver IT financial planning and performance output needed by stakeholders; (c) provide clear accountability; and (d) facilitate decision-making. ITFM tools and processes are adopted by IT and business partners but are not fully integrated.
    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to:
    • Deliver accurate IT financial planning and performance output at the needed level of detail to stakeholders.
    • Leverage IT financial planning and performance output in real time and when needed by stakeholders.
    ITFM processes and tools are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to (a) maintain integrity across activities, tasks, methodologies, data, and reports; (b) deliver IT financial planning and performance output needed by stakeholders; (c) provide clear accountability; and (d) facilitate decision making.


    ITFM processes and tools are automated to the full extent needed by the organization, utilized to their full potential, and integrated into a single enterprise platform, providing a holistic view of IT spending and IT performance.

    Standardize your taxonomy and data model

    Maturity focus area: Manage and monitor IT spending.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide transparency across technology spending.ITFM taxonomy and data model are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide transparency and support IT financial planning data, analysis, and reporting needs of finance stakeholders.ITFM taxonomy and data model are in place, developed on an ad hoc basis, with no apparent coherence or complete documentation, to comply with, and meet the needs of finance stakeholders.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide transparency and support IT financial planning and performance data, analysis, and reporting needs of IT and finance stakeholders.ITFM taxonomy and data model are in place, coherent, and documented to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders.
    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide transparency and support IT financial planning and performance data, analysis, and reporting needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.ITFM taxonomy and data model are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to provide (a) a holistic view of IT spending and IT performance, (b) visibility and transparency, (c) flexibility, and (d) valuable insights to facilitate data driven decision making.


    ITFM taxonomy and data model are standardized to meet the needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders, but not flexible enough to be adjusted in a timely fashion as needed.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to:
    • Provide transparency and support IT financial planning and performance data, analysis, and reporting needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.
    • Change to meet evolving needs.
    ITFM taxonomy and data model are complete, well defined, coherent, documented, continuously reviewed, and improved, aiming to provide (a) a holistic view of IT spending and IT performance, (b) visibility and transparency, (c) flexibility, and (d) valuable insights to facilitate data driven decision making.


    ITFM taxonomy and data model are standardized and meet the changing needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.

    Identify, gather, and prepare your data

    Maturity focus area: Manage and monitor IT spending.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide accurate and complete across technology spending.ITFM data needs and requirements are not understood.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide accurate, but incomplete IT financial planning data to meet the needs of finance stakeholders.Technology spending data is extracted, transformed, and loaded on an ad hoc basis to meet the needs of finance stakeholders.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide accurate and complete IT financial planning data to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders, but IT performance data remain incomplete.IT financial planning data is extracted, transformed, and loaded in a regular cadence to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders.


    IT financial planning data is (a) complete and accurate, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) regularly validated for inconsistencies, and (c) sourced from the organization’s system of record.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide accurate and complete IT financial planning and performance data to meet the needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.ITFM data needs and requirements are understood.


    ITFM data is extracted, transformed, and loaded in a regular cadence to meet the needs of IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.


    IT financial planning and performance data are (a) complete and accurate, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) regularly validated for inconsistencies, and (c) sourced from the organization’s system of record.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to provide accurate and complete IT financial planning and performance data real time and when needed by IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders.ITFM data needs and requirements are understood.


    IT financial planning and performance data are (a) complete and accurate, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) regularly validated for inconsistencies, (c) available and refreshed as needed, and (d) sourced from the organization’s system of record.

    Analyze your findings and develop your reports

    Maturity focus area: Manage and monitor IT spending.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide any type of financial insight.ITFM analysis and reports are not developed nor documented.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide basic financial insights.IT financial planning analysis is conducted on an ad hoc basis to meet the needs of finance stakeholders.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide basic financial planning and performance insights to meet the needs of IT and finance stakeholders.IT financial planning and performance analysis are methodical and rigorous, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.).


    IT financial planning and performance reports are accurate, precise, and methodical, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.).

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide practical insights and useful recommendations as needed by IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders to facilitate business decision making around technology investments.ITFM analysis and reports support business decision making around technology investments.


    IT financial planning and performance analysis are methodical and rigorous, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.).


    IT financial planning and performance reports are (a) accurate, precise, and methodical, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) fit for purpose, and (c) regularly validated for inconsistencies.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to provide practical insights and useful recommendations as needed by IT, finance, business, and executive stakeholders to facilitate strategic decision making.ITFM analysis and reports support strategic decision making.


    IT financial planning and performance analysis are methodical and rigorous, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), and consider multiple point of views (hypotheses, interpretations, opinions, etc.).


    IT financial planning and performance reports are (a) accurate, precise, and methodical, as defined in related control documents (guideline, policies, procedures, etc.), (b) fit for purpose, (c) comprehensive, and (d) regularly validated for inconsistencies.

    Communicate your IT spending

    Maturity focus area: Bridge the language barrier.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability of organization stakeholders to communicate and understand each other.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives do not understand one another, and cannot speak the same language.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to understand business and finance requirements.IT understands and meets business and financial planning requirements but does not communicate in a similar language.


    IT cannot influence finance or business decision making.

    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to understand the needs of different stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives and take part in decision making around technology spending.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives understand each other’s needs, but do not communicate in a common language.


    IT leaders provide insights as technology subject matter experts, where conversations center on IT spending in relation to technology services or solutions provided to business partners.


    IT can influence technology decisions around its own budget.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to communicate in a common vocabulary across the organization and take part in business decision making around technology investments.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives communicate in a common vocabulary and understand one another.


    IT and business leaders, along with their respective teams, collaborate frequently across various initiatives.


    IT leaders provide valuable insight to support and influence business decision making around existing technology investments.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to communicate in a common vocabulary across the organization and take part in strategic decision making.The organization stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives communicate in a common vocabulary and understand one another.


    IT and business leaders, along with their respective teams, collaborate frequently across various initiatives.


    IT leaders provide valuable insight to facilitate decision making around potential and future investments to grow and transform the business, thus influencing the organization’s overall strategic direction.

    Educate the masses

    Maturity focus area: Bridge the language barrier.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability of organization stakeholders to acquire knowledge.Educational resources are inexistent.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to acquire financial knowledge and understand financial concepts.IT leaders have access to educational resources to gain the financial knowledge necessary to perform their duties.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to acquire financial and business knowledge and understand related concepts.IT leaders and their respective teams have access to educational resources to gain the financial and business knowledge necessary to perform their duties.


    ITFM team has access to the necessary educational resources to keep up with changing financial regulations and technology developments.

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to acquire knowledge, across technology, business, and finance as needed by different organization stakeholders, and the leadership understand concepts across these various domains.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives have access to various educational resources to gain knowledge in different domains as needed.


    IT leaders have a good understanding of business and financial concepts.


    Business leaders have a good understanding of technology concepts.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to acquire knowledge, and understand concepts across technology, business, and finance as needed by different organization stakeholders.The organization promotes continuous learning through well designed programs including training, mentorship, and academic courses. Thus, stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives have access to various educational resources to gain knowledge in different domains as needed.


    IT leaders and their respective teams have a good understanding of business and financial concepts.


    Business leaders and their respective teams have a good understanding of technology concepts.

    Influence your organization’s culture

    Maturity focus area: Bridge the language barrier.

    Maturity Level

    Definition

    Description

    Nascent
    Level 1
    Inability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration and continuous improvement.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives operate in silos, and collaboration between different teams is inexistent.
    Cost Operator
    Level 2
    Ability to provide an environment of cooperation to meet the needs of IT, finance, and business leaders.IT, finance, and business leaders cooperate to meet financial planning requirements as necessary to perform their duties.
    Trusted Coordinator
    Level 3
    Ability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration across the organization.IT, finance, and business collaborate on various initiatives.

    ITFM employees are trusted and supported by their stakeholders (IT, finance, and business).

    Value Optimizer
    Level 4
    Ability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration and continuous improvement, where employees across the organization feel trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives support and promote continuous improvement, transparency practices, and collaboration across the organization.


    Employees are trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.

    Strategic Partner
    Level 5
    Ability to provide and foster an environment of collaboration and continuous improvement, where leaders are willing to change, and employees across the organization feel trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.Stakeholders including IT, finance, business, and executives support and promote continuous improvement, transparency practices, and collaboration across the organization.


    The organization’s leadership is adaptable and open to change.


    Employees are trusted, supported, empowered, and valued.

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}573|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Attract & Select
    • Parent Category Link: /attract-and-select

    Tech layoffs have been making the news over the past year, with thousands of Big Tech employees having been laid off. After years of record low unemployment in IT, many leaders are looking to take advantage of these layoffs to fill their talent gaps.

    However, IT leaders need to determine their response – wait and see the impact of the recession on budgets and candidate expectations, or dive in and secure great talent to execute today on strategic needs. This research is designed to help those IT leaders who are looking to take advantage employee effective talents to secure talent.

    • With the impact of the economic slowdown still unknown, the first question IT leaders need to ask is whether now is the time to act.
    • Even with these layoffs, IT unemployment rates are at record lows, with many organizations continuing to struggle to attract talent. While these layoffs have opened a window, IT leaders need to act quickly to secure great talent.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The “where has the talent gone?” puzzle has been solved. Many tech firms over-hired and were able to outcompete everyone, but it wasn’t sustainable. This correction won’t impact unemployment numbers in the short term – the job force is just in flux right now.

    Impact and Result

    This research is designed to help IT leaders understand the talent market and to provide winning tactics to those looking to take advantage of the layoffs to fill their hiring needs.

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Storyboard – A snapshot of the current talent market in IT and quick tactics IT leaders can employ to improve their hiring process to find and attract tech talent.

    Straightforward tactics you can execute to successfully recruit IT staff impacted by layoffs.

    • Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs Storyboard

    2. IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool – Use this tool to document the current and future talent acquisition process.

    To hire efficiently, create a clear, consistent talent acquisition process. The IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool will help to:

  • Map out the current talent acquisition workflow
  • Identify areas of opportunity and potential gaps in the current process
    • IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Take Advantage of Big Tech Layoffs

    Simple tactics to secure the right talent in times of economic uncertainty.

    Why are the layoffs making the news?

    After three years of record low unemployment rates in IT and organizations struggling to hire IT talent into their organization, the window appears to be opening with tens of thousands layoffs from Big Tech employers.

    Big brand organizations such as Microsoft, Alphabet, Amazon, Twitter, Netflix, and Meta have been hitting major newswires, but these layoffs aren't exclusive to the big names. We've also seen smaller high-growth tech organizations following suit. In fact, in 2022, it's estimated that there were more than 160,997 layoffs across over 1,045 tech organizations. This trend has continued into 2023. By mid-February 2023, there were already 108,754 employees laid off at 385 tech companies (Layoffs.fyi).(1)

    While some of these layoffs have been openly connected to economic slowdown, others are pointing to the layoffs being a correction for over-hiring during the pandemic. It is also important to note that many of these workers were not IT employees, as these organizations also saw cuts across other areas of the business such as sales, marketing, recruitment, and operations.

    (1)This global database is constantly being updated, and these numbers are changing on an ongoing basis. For up-to-date statistics, see https://layoffs.fyi

    While tech layoffs have been making the news, so far many of these layoffs have been a correction to over-hiring, with most employees laid off finding work, if they want it, within three months.

    IT leaders need to determine their response – wait and see the impact of the recession on budgets and candidate expectations or dive in and secure great talent to execute today on strategic needs.

    This research is designed to help IT leaders understand the talent market and provide winning strategies to those looking to take advantage of the layoffs to fill their hiring needs.

    Three key drivers for Big Tech layoffs

    Economic uncertainty

    Globally, economists are predicting an economic slowdown, though there is not a consistent prediction on the impact. We have seen an increase in interest rates and inflation, as well as reduced investment budgets.

    Over-hiring during the pandemic

    High growth and demand for digital technologies and services during the early pandemic led to over-hiring in the tech industry. Many organizations overestimated the future demand and had to rebalance staffing as a result.

    New automation investments

    Many tech organizations that have conducted layoffs are still in a growth mindset. This is demonstrated though new tech investments by these companies in products like chatbots and RPA to semi-automate processes to reduce the need for certain roles.

    Despite layoffs, the labor market remains competitive

    There were at least 160,997 layoffs from more than 1,045 tech companies last year (2022). (Layoffs.fyi reported as of Feb 21/2023)

    But just because Big Tech is laying people off doesn't mean the IT job market has cooled.

    Between January and October 2022 technology- focused job postings rose 25% compared to the same period in 2021, and there were more than 375,000 tech jobs posted in October of 2022.
    (Dice: Tech Jobs Report.)

    Info-Tech Insight

    The "where has the talent gone?" puzzle has been solved. Many tech firms over-hired and were able to outcompete everyone, but it wasn't sustainable. This correction won't impact unemployment numbers in the short term – the job force is just in flux right now.

    So far, many of the layoffs have been a market correction

    Tech Layoffs Since COVID-19

    This is an image of a combo line graph plotting the number of tech layoffs from Q1 2020 to Q4 2022.

    Source: Layoffs.fyi - Tech Layoff Tracker and Startup Layoff Lists

    Tech Companies Layoffs vs. Early Pandemic Hiring # of People

    This is an image of a bar graph plotting Tech Companies Layoffs vs. Early Pandemic Hiring # of People

    Source: Yahoo Finance. Q4 '19 to Q3 '22

    Tech Layoffs between 2020 Q3- 2022 Q1 remained very low across the sector. In fact, outside of the initial increase at the start of the pandemic, layoffs have remained at historic low levels of around 1% (HBR, 2023). While the layoffs look significant in isolation, when you compare these numbers to pandemic hiring and growth for these organizations, the figures are relatively small.

    The first question IT leaders need to ask is whether now is the time to act

    The big gamble many CIOs face is whether to strike now to secure talent or to wait to better understand the impact of the recession. While two-thirds of IT professionals are still expecting their budgets to increase in 2023, CIOs must account for the impact of inflation and the recession on their IT budgets and staffing decisions (see Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program).

    Ultimately, while unemployment is low today, it's common to see unemployment numbers drop right before a recession. If that is the case, then we will see more talent entering the market, possibly at more competitive salaries. But organizations that wait to hire risk not having the staff they need to execute on their strategy and finding themselves in a hiring freeze. CIOs need to decide on how to approach the economic uncertainty and where to place their bets.

    Looking ahead to 2023, how do you anticipate your IT spending will change compared to spending in 2022?

    This is an image of anticipated changes to IT spending compared to 2022 for the following categories: Decrease of more than 30%; Decrease between 16-30%; Decrease between 6-15%; Decrease between 1-5%; No Change; Increase between 1-5%; Increase between 6-15%; Increase between 16-30%; Increase of more than 30%

    Info-Tech's CEO-CIO Alignment Program

    Organizations ready to take advantage will need to act fast when layoffs happen

    Organizations looking to fill hiring needs or grow their IT/digital organization will need to be strategic and efficient when it comes to recruitment. Regardless of the number of layoffs, it continues to be an employee market when it comes to IT roles.

    While it is likely that the recession will impact unemployment rates, so far, the market remains hot, and the number of open roles continues to grow. This means that organizations that want to take advantage need to act quickly when news hits.

    Leaders not only need to compete with other organizations for talent, but the other challenge hiring organizations will need to compete with is that many in tech received generous severance packages and will be considering taking time off. To take advantage, leaders need to establish a plan and a clear employee value proposition to entice these highly skilled workers to get off the bench.

    Why you need to act fast:

    • Unemployment rates remain low:
      • Tech unemployment's rates in the US dropped to 1.5% in January 2023 (CompTIA), compared to overall unemployment which is at 3.4% in the US as of January 2023 (Yahoo Finance). While the layoffs look significant, we can see that many workers have been rehired into the labor market.
    • Long time-to-hire results in lost candidates:
      • According to Info-Tech's IT Talent Trend Report, 58% of IT leaders report time-to-hire is longer than two months. This timing increases for tech roles which require unique skills or higher seniority. IT leaders who can increase the timeline for their requirement process are much more likely to be able to take advantage of tech layoffs.

    IT must take a leading role in IT recruitment to take advantage of layoffs

    A personal connection is the differentiator when it comes to talent acquisition

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in talent acquisition and the effectiveness of this process in the IT department. The more involved they are, the higher the effectiveness.(1)

    More IT leadership involvement

    An image of two upward facing arrows. The left arrow is faded purple, and the right arrow is dark purple.

    Higher recruitment effectiveness

    Involved leaders see shorter times to hire

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in the talent acquisition process and time to fill vacant positions. The more involved they are, the shorter the time to hire.(2)

    Involved leaders are an integral part of effective IT departments

    There is a statistically significant relationship between IT leadership involvement in talent acquisition and overall IT department effectiveness. Those that are more involved have higher levels of effectiveness.(3)

    Increased IT Leadership in Recruitment Is Directly Correlated to Recruitment Effectiveness.

    This is an image of a combo bar graph plotting Overall Effectiveness for IT leadership involvement in recruitment.

    Focus your layoff recruitment strategy on critical and strategic roles

    If you are ready to take advantage of tech layoffs, focus hiring on critical and strategic roles, rather than your operational backfills. Roles related to security, cloud migration, data and analytics, and digital transformation are more likely to be shielded from budget cuts and are logical areas to focus on when looking to recruit from Big Tech organizations.

    Additionally, within the IT talent market, scarcity is focused in areas with specialized skill sets, such as security and architecture, which are dynamic and evolving faster than other skill sets. When looking to recruit in these areas, it's critical that you have a targeted recruitment approach; this is why tech layoffs represent a strong opportunity to secure talent in these specialized areas.

    ROLES DIFFICULT TO FILL

    An image of a bar graph plotting roles by difficulty to fill.

    Info-Tech Talent Trends 2022 Survey

    Four quick tactics to take advantage of Big Tech layoffs

    TALENT ACQUISITION PROCESS TO TAKE ADVANTAGE OF LAYOFFS

    This is an image of the talent acquisition process to take advantage of layoffs. It involves the following four steps: 1 Prepare organization and job ads for recruitment.  2 Actively track and scan for layoff activity.  3 Prioritize and screen candidates using salary benchmarks and keywords.  4 Eliminate all unnecessary hiring process steps.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2: IT job ad review.

    Call #4: Identify screening and sourcing opportunities.

    Call #5: Review your IT talent acquisition process.

    Call #3: Employee value proposition review.

    Call #7: Refine your talent acquisition process.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Tactics to take advantage of tech layoffs

    Activities

    1.1 Spot check your employee value proposition
    1.2 Update job advertisements
    1.3 Document your talent acquisition process
    1.4 Refine your talent acquisition process

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT executive leadership
    • IT hiring manager
    • Human resources
    • Marketing/public relations

    Outcomes of this step

    Streamlined talent acquisition process tailored to take advantage of tech layoffs.

    This is an image of the talent acquisition process to take advantage of layoffs. It involves the following fo steps: 1 Prepare organization and job ads for recrtment.  2 Actively track and scan for layoff aivity.  3 Prioritize and screen candidates using salary benchmarks and kwords.  4 Eliminate all unnecessary hiring process steps.

    Requisition: update job ads and secure approval to hire

    Critical steps:

    1. Ensure you have secured budget and hiring approval.
    2. Identify an IT recruitment partner within the IT organization who will be accountable for working with HR throughout the process and who will actively track and scan for recruitment opportunities.
    3. Update your IT job descriptions.
    4. Spot check your employee value proposition (EVP) to appeal to targeted candidates (Exercise 1.1).
    5. Write employee job ads for relevant skills and minimum viable experience (Exercise 1.2).
    6. Work with HR to develop your candidate outreach messages – ensure that your outreach is empathetic, aligns with your EVP, and focuses on welcoming them to apply to a role.

    The approval process to activate a requisition can be one of the longest stages in the talent acquisition process. Ensure all your roles are up to date and approved so you can trigger outreach as soon as news hits; otherwise, you'll be late before you've even begun.

    Your employee value proposition (EVP) is a key tool for attracting and retaining talent

    Any updates to your EVP need to be a genuine reflection of the employee experience at your organization – and should resonate internally and externally.

    Internal (retention) perspective: These characteristics help to retain new and existing talent by ensuring that new hires' expectations are met and that the EVP is experienced throughout the organization.

    External (attraction) perspective: These characteristics help to attract talent and are targeted so the right candidates are motivated to join, while those who aren't a good fit will self-select out.

    McLean & Company's Employee Value Proposition Framework

    This is an image of McLean & Company's Employee Value Proposition Framework.  It is divided into Retain and Attract.  under Retain, are the following three headings: Aligned; Accurate; Aspirational.  Under Attract are: Compelling; Clear; Comprehensive.

    Source: McLean & Company

    1.1 Spot check your EVP

    1-3 hours

    1. Review your existing IT employee value proposition. If you do not have an EVP, see Info-Tech's comprehensive research Improve the IT Recruitment Process to draft a new EVP.
    2. Invite a representative group of employees to participate in a working group to improve your employee value proposition. Ask each participant to brainstorm the top five things they value most about working at the organization.
    3. Consider the following categories: work environment, career advancement, benefits, and ESG and diversity impact. Brainstorm as a group if there is anything unique your organization offers with regard to these categories.
    4. Compare your notes to your existing EVP, identify up to four key statements to focus on for the EVP, ensuring that your EVP speaks to at least one of the categories above. Remove any statements that no longer speak to who you are as an organization or what you offer.

    Input

    • Existing employee value proposition
    • Employee Engagement Surveys (If Available)

    Output

    • Updated employee value proposition

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Job ad template

    Participants

    • Representative group of internal employees.
    • HR
    • Marketing/PR (if possible)

    Four critical factors considered by today's job seeker

    1. Be specific about remote work policies: Include verbiage about whether there is an option to work hybrid or remote. 81% of job seekers stated that whether a job is remote, hybrid, or in-person was a top factor in whether they'd accept an offer (Benefits Canada, 2022).
    2. Career advancement and stability: "37% of Gen Z employees and 25% of millennial employees are currently looking for a job that offers career progression transparency — or, in other words, a job with clear opportunities for growth. This is significantly higher than our findings for older generations Gen X (18%) and baby boomers (7%)," (Lattice, 2021).
    3. Unique benefits: Consider your unique benefits – it's not the Big Tech "fun perks" like slides and ping pong that drive interest. Employees are increasingly looking for roles with long-term benefits programs. 90% of job seekers consider higher pension contributions to be a key factor, and 85% are considering bonuses/profit sharing" (Benefits Canada, 2022). Candidates may accept lower total compensation in exchange for flexibility, culture, work/life balance that was lacking in the start-up scene or the mega-vendors' fast-paced world.
    4. ESG and diversity impact: Include details of how the candidate will make a societal impact through their role, and how the company is acting on climate and sustainability. "Nearly two in five [Gen Z's and millennials] say they have rejected a job or assignment because it did not align with their values," (Deloitte Global, 2022).

    Update or establish job ads for candidate outreach

    Take the time up front to update your IT job descriptions and to write effective job advertisements. A job advertisement is an external-facing document that advertises a position with the intent of attracting job applicants. It contains key elements from the job description as well as information on the organization and its EVP. A job description informs a job ad, it doesn't replace it.
    When updating job descriptions and job ads, it's critical that your requirements are an accurate representation of what you need in the position. For the job ads especially, focus on the minimum requirements for the role, highlight your employee value proposition, and ensure that they are using inclusive language.
    Don't be lulled into using a job description as a posting when there's a time crunch to fill a position – use your preparation time to complete this key step.

    Three tips to consider when building a job ad

    Include the minimum desired requirements

    Include the required skills, responsibilities, and certifications required. Instead of looking for a unicorn, look for what you need and a demonstrated ability to learn. 70% of business executives say they are getting creative about sourcing for skills rather than just considering job experience (Deloitte Insights, 2022).

    Strategically include certifications

    When including certifications, ensure you have validated the process to be certified – i.e. if you are hiring for a role with 3-5 years' experience, ensure that the certification does not take 5-10 years of experience be eligible.

    Use inclusive language

    Consider having a review group within your IT organization to ensure the language is inclusive, that the responsibilities don't read as overly complex, and that it is an accurate representation of the organization's culture.

    1.2 Update or build job ads

    1-3 hours

    1. Begin with a copy of the job ad you are looking to fill, if you haven't begun to draft the role, start with Info-Tech's Job Description Library and Info-Tech's Job Ad Template.
    2. Review the job accountabilities, rank each responsibility based on its importance and volume of work. Determine if there are any responsibilities that are uncommon to be executed by the role and remove unnecessary responsibilities.
    3. For each of the job accountabilities, identify if there is a level of experience, knowledge or competency that would be the minimum bar for a candidate. Remove technical skills, specific technologies, and competencies that aren't directly relevant to the role, responsibilities or values.
    4. Review the education and requirements, and ensure that any certification or educational background is truly needed or suggested.
    5. Use the checklist on the following tab to review and update your job ad.

    Input

    • Job description
    • Employee value proposition
    • Job ad template

    Output

    • Completed job ad

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Web share

    Participants

    • Representative group of internal employees.
    • HR
    • Marketing/PR (if possible)

    1.2 Job ad checklist:

    A job ad needs to be two things: effective and inclusive.

    Effective

    The job ad does include:

    The organization's logo.
    Description of the organization.
    Information about benefits.
    A link to the organization's website and social media platforms.
    Steps in the application process and what candidates can expect.

    The job ad:

    Paints an accurate picture of key aspects of the role.
    Tells a story to show potential candidates how the role and organization will fit into their career path (outlines potential career paths, growth opportunities, training, etc.).
    Does not contain too many details and tasks that would overwhelm applicants.
    Highlights the employer brand in a manner that conveys the EVP and markets the organization to attract potential applicants.
    Includes creative design or formatting to make the ad stand out.
    The job ad speaks to the audience by using targeted language (e.g. using creative language when recruiting for a creative role).
    The job ad has been reviewed by HR, Marketing, PR.

    Inclusive

    The job ad does NOT include:

    Industry jargon or abbreviations that are not spelled out.
    Personality characteristics and unnecessary adjectives that would deter qualified candidates (e.g. extroverted, aggressive, competitive).
    A list of specific academic disciplines or schools, GPA requirements, or inflated degree requirements.

    The job ad:

    Uses gender-neutral language and does not contain terms that indicate traits that are typically associated with a specific gender.
    Can be viewed and applications can be completed on mobile devices.
    Focuses on results, day-to-day requirements, competencies, and transferrable skills.
    Includes design that is accessible (e.g. alternative text is provided for images, clear posting structure with headings, color is not used to convey information).

    Sourcing: Set up news trackers and review layoff source lists

    • Set up news and social media trackers to track layoff updates, and ensure you have an IT staff member on standby to complete a more detailed opportunity analysis when layoffs happen.
    • Use layoff source lists such as Layoffs.fyi to actively track organizations that have laid people off, noting the industry, location, and numbers in order to identify potential candidates. Limit your future analysis to locations that would be geographically possible to hire from.
    • Review open-source lists of laid-off employees to quickly identify potential candidates for your organization.
    • Many organizations that have completed layoffs have established outplacement programs to help laid-off staff find new roles. Set a plan in motion with HR to reach out to organizations once a layoff has occurred to understand their layoff support program.

    The key to successful sourcing is for IT to take an active role in identifying which organizations impacted by layoffs would be a good fit, and to quickly respond by searching open-source lists and LinkedIn to reach out potential candidates.

    Consider leveraging open-source lists

    Layoffs.fyi has been tracking and reporting on layoffs since the start of COVID-19. While they are not an official source of information, the site has more than a million views per month and is a strong starting point for IT leaders looking to source candidates from tech layoffs beyond the big organizations that are making the news.

    The site offers a view of companies with layoffs by location, industry, and the source of the info. Additionally, it often lists the names and contact information of laid-off employees, which you can leverage to start your deeper LinkedIn outreach or candidate screening.

    This is an image of two screenshots of open source lists from Layoffs.fyi

    Screenshots from Layoffs.fyi.

    Screening: Prioritize by considering salary benchmarks and keywords

    • Determine a set of consistent pre-screening questions to leverage while screening candidates, which every candidate must answer, including knockout questions.
    • Prioritize by going for salary ranges you can afford: It is important to be aware of what companies are paying within the tech arena, so you know if your salary bands are within a competitive range.
    • Pre-screen resumes using appropriate keywords that are critical for the role, and widen the terms if you do not have enough candidates. Given the pool you are looking to recruit from, consider removing criteria specifically related to education or certifications; instead, prioritize skills and on-the-job experience.

    Screening is one of the most time-consuming stages of the TA process. For each open position, it can take 23 hours to screen resumes (Toolbox, 2021). In fact, 52% of TA leaders believe that screening candidates from a large pool of applicants is the hardest part of recruitment (Ideal, 2021).

    Compensation comparison reports

    Keep in mind that the market may be shifting rapidly as layoffs proliferate, so what the data shows, particularly on free-to-use sites with little data-checking, may not be current and may be overstated. Info-Tech does not provide salary analysis; however, there are publicly available reports and online websites with self-reported data.

    This list contains several market data sources for the tech industry, which may be a good starting point for comparison. Info-Tech is not affiliated with or endorsing any of these market data sources.

    Aon Global Cyber Security Compensation and Talent Survey
    Aon – Radford Surveys Radford Global Technology Survey
    Culpepper Comprehensive Compensation Survey Solution for Technology-Focused Companies
    Modis 2022 IT Compensation Guide
    Motion Recruitment 2023 Tech Salary Guide
    Mondo 2022 Salary Guide for roles & jobs across the technology, creative & digital marketing industries.
    Willis Towers Watson Willis Towers Watson Data Services - Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Artificial Intelligence and Digital Talent Survey Report - U.S.
    Michael Page Salary Guide 2022 for the Greater Toronto Area Technology Industry
    Willis Towers Watson Willis Towers Watson Data Services - Tech, Media, and Gaming
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Executive Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Middle Management, Professional and Support Survey Report - Canada
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Executive Survey Report - U.S.
    Willis Towers Watson 2022 Tech, Media and Gaming Middle Management, Professional and Support Survey Report - U.S.

    Work with your HR partner to streamline your talent acquisition process

    A slow talent acquisition process presents multiple risks to your ability to recruit. Candidates are likely having multiple hiring conversations, and you could lose a good candidate just by being slower than another organization. Additionally, long hiring processes are also an indicator of a high level of bureaucracy in an organization, which may turn off tech candidates who are used to faster-paced decision making.

    Reducing your time-to-hire needs to be a strategic priority, and companies that manage to do this are reaping the benefits: There is a statistically significant relationship between time to fill vacant positions and overall IT department effectiveness. The shorter the time to fill a position, the higher the effectiveness (Bika, 2019).

    Key Considerations for Optimizing your Talent Acquisition Process

    Key Considerations for Optimizing your Talent Acquisition Process

    Review the end-to-end experience

    50%

    of job seekers surveyed had "declined a job offer due to poor [candidate] experience," (Echevarria, 2020).

    Reduce the time to hire

    55%

    "of candidates believe that it should take one to two weeks from the first interview to being offered the job," (Duszyński, 2021).

    Be clear on Timelines

    83%

    "of candidates say it would greatly improve the overall experience if employers provided a clear timeline of the hiring process," (Miller, n.d.).

    Time to hire: Identify solutions to drive efficient hiring

    1. Document all steps between screening and hiring and remove any unnecessary steps.
    2. Create clearly defined interview guides to ensure consistent questioning by interviewers.
    3. Enable hiring managers to schedule their own interviews.
    4. Determine who needs to approve an offer. Streamline the number of approvals, if possible.
    5. Eliminate unnecessary background checks. Many companies have eliminated reference checks, for example, after determining that it was it was not adding value to their decision.
    6. Identify and track key metrics across your talent acquisition process.

    It is critical to partner with your HR department on optimizing this process, as they are typically the process owners and will have deep knowledge of the rationale for decisions. Together, you can identify some opportunities to streamline the process and improve the time to hire.

    4.1 Document your TA process

    1-3 hours

    1. If you have a documented talent acquisition process, begin with that; if not, open the IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool and map the stages of the talent acquisition process with your HR leader. Stages are the top level in the process (e.g. requisition, sourcing, screening).
    2. Identify all the stakeholders involved in IT talent acquisition and document these in the tool.
    3. Next, identify the steps required for each stage. These are more detailed actions that together will complete the stage (e.g. enter requisition into ATS, intake meeting). Ask subject matter experts to add steps to their portion of the process and document these in the cells.
    4. For each step in the stage, record the time required and the number of people who are involved.

    Input

    • Existing talent acquisition (TA) process document
    • Any TA process metrics
    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Output

    • Documented TA process

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • HR
    • IT leaders
    • Hiring manager

    Download the IT Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Example of steps in each stage of the TA process

    Activities

    Requisition

    Source

    Screen

    Interview & Assess

    Offer

    Background Check

    Vacancy identified Posted on website Resumes screened in system Interviews scheduled Offer letter drafted Reference checks conducted
    Requisition submitted Posted on job boards Resume screened by recruited First round interviews Offer letter sent Medical checks conducted
    Requisition approved Identification of layoff sources Resumed reviewed by hiring manager Assessment Negotiations Other background checks conducted
    Job description updated Review layoff source lists Screening calls Second round interview First date confirmed
    Job ad updated Screening questions developed Candidates selected
    Intake meeting

    4.2 Refine your TA process

    1-3 hours

    1. Collectively identify any:
      1. Inconsistent applications: Activities that are done differently by different participants.
      2. Bottlenecks: A place in the process where activity is constrained and holds up next steps.
      3. Errors: When a mistake occurs requiring extra time, resources, or rework.
      4. Lack of value: An activity that adds little to no value (often a legacy activity).
    2. Work with HR to identify any proposed solutions to improve consistency, reduce bottlenecks, errors, or eliminate steps that lack value. Document your proposed solutions in tab 3 of the IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool.
    3. Identify any new steps needed that would drive greater efficiency, including the tactics suggested in this research. Document any proposed solutions in tab 3.
    4. For each proposed solution, evaluate the general level of effort and impact required to move forward with that solution and select the appropriate classification from the drop-down.
    5. Determine if you will move forward with the proposed solution at this time. Update the TA workflow with your decisions.

    Input

    • Existing talent acquisition (TA) process document
    • Any TA process metrics
    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool

    Output

    • Documented TA process

    Materials

    • Info-Tech's Talent Acquisition Process Optimization Tool
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes

    Participants

    • HR
    • IT leaders
    • Hiring manager

    Use Info-Tech's IT Talent Acquisition Optimization Tool to document current challenges & target solutions.

    Map your process and identify opportunities to streamline

    This is an image of the talent aquisitions workflow page from Info-Tech's Map your process and identify opportunities to streamline

    Brainstorm and select solutions to improve your process

    This is an image of the Effort Analysis page from Info-Tech's Brainstorm and select solutions to improve your process

    Key considerations when optimizing your process

    • Put yourself in each stakeholder's shoes (candidate, HR, hiring manager). Think through what they need from the process.
    • Challenge assumptions and norms. It can be tempting to get caught up in "how we do it today." Think beyond how it is today.
    • Question timing of activities and events. Identify if they are occurring when they need to.
    • Rebalance work to align with priorities. Identify if work can be redistributed or condensed to use time more efficiently.
    • Distinguish when consistency will add value and when there should be process flexibility.
    • Question the value. For each activity, ask "What value does this activity add?"

    Select metrics to measure Talent Acquisition process improvement

    METRICS INFORMATION
    Metric Definition Calculation
    Average applicants per posting The average number of applicants received per post. Number of applications / Number of postings
    Average number of interviews for open job positions Average number of interviews for open job positions. Total number of interviews / Total number of open job positions
    Average external time to fill Average number of calendar days from when the requisition is issued to when a candidate accepts the position from outside the organization. External days to fill / External candidates
    Pipeline throughput Percentage of candidates advancing through to the next stage. (Number of candidates in chosen stage / Number of candidates in preceding stage) * 100
    External offer acceptance rate Percentage of job offers extended to external candidates that were accepted. (Number of job offers that are accepted / Number of job offers extended) * 100
    Percentage of target group hired The percentage of a target group that was hired. Number of FTE hired / Target number of FTE to be hired
    Average time to hire Average number of calendar days between first contact with the candidate and when they accept the offer. Sum of number of days between first contact and offer acceptance / External candidates
    Quality of hire Percentage of new hires achieving a satisfactory appraisal at their first assessment. New hires who achieve a satisfactory rating at their first appraisal / Total number of new hires
    Vacancy rate Percentage of positions being actively recruited for at the end of the reporting period. Count of vacant positions / (Headcount + Vacant positions)

    Bibliography

    "81% of Employees Factoring Hybrid Work Into Job Search: Survey." BenefitsCanada.com, 16 June 2022.
    Andre, Louie. "40 Notable Candidate Experience Statistics: 2023 Job Application Trends & Challenges." Financesonline.Com, 15 Mar. 2023.
    Bika, Nikoletta. "Key Hiring Metrics: Useful Benchmarks for Tech Roles." Recruiting Resources: How to Recruit and Hire Better, 10 Jan. 2019.
    "Bureau of Labor Statistics Labor Market Revisions Contribute to Conflicting Signals in Latest Tech Employment Data, CompTIA Analysis Finds." CompTIA, 3 Feb. 2023. Press release.
    Byrnes, Amy. "ICIMS Insights Workforce Report: Time to Press the Reset Button?" ICIMS | The Leading Cloud Recruiting Software, 1 Dec. 2022.
    Cantrell, Sue, et al. "The Skills-Based Organization: A New Operating Model for Work and the Workforce." Deloitte Insights, 8 Sept. 2022.
    deBara, Deanna. "Top Findings from Lattice's Career Progression Survey." Lattice, 13 Sept. 2021. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Duszyński, Maciej. "Candidate Experience Statistics (Survey of 1,000+ Americans)." Zety, 14 Oct. 2019.
    Duszyński, Maciej. "Candidate Experience Statistics." Zety, 2021.
    Echevarria, Desiree. "2020 Candidate Experience Report." Career Plug, 17 Mar. 2021.
    Ghosh, Prarthana. "Candidate Screening and Selection Process: The Complete Guide for 2021." Spiceworks, 26 Feb. 2021. Accessed 22 Jun. 2021
    "Introduction - Dice Tech Job Report: Tech Hiring Trends by Location, Industry, Role and Skill." Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Lee, Roger. "Tech Layoff Tracker and Startup Layoff Lists." Layoffs.fyi. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Miller, Kandace. "Candidate Experience And Engagement Metrics You Should Be Tracking." ConveyIQ, n.d. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    Min, Ji-A. "Resume Screening: A How-To Guide for Recruiters." Ideal, 15 Mar. 2021. Web.
    Palmeri, Shelby. "2023 Candidate Experience Research: Strategies for Recruiting." CareerPlug, 6 Feb. 2023.
    Semenova, Alexandra. "Jobs Report: U.S. Economy Adds 517,000 Jobs in January, Unemployment Rate Falls to 3.4% as Labor Market Stuns." Yahoo!Finance, 3 Feb. 2023.
    Sozzi, Brian. "Big Tech Layoffs: What Companies Such as Amazon and Meta Have in Common." Yahoo!News, 6 Feb. 2023.
    Tarki, Atta. "Despite Layoffs, It's Still a Workers' Labor Market." Harvard Business Review, 30 Jan. 2023.
    The Deloitte Global 2022 Gen Z and Millennial Survey. Deloitte Global, 2022. Accessed 16 Feb. 2023.
    "Uncover the Employee Value Proposition." McLean & Company, 21 Jun. 2022. Accessed 22 Feb. 2023.

    Select an Enterprise Application

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}588|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Enterprise Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /enterprise-applications
    • Organizations rarely have both the sufficient knowledge and resources to properly evaluate, select, and implement an enterprise application software (EAS), forcing them to turn to external partnerships.
    • Inadequate and incomplete requirements skew the EAS selection in one direction or another. Many EAS projects fail due to a lack of clear description and specification of functional requirements.
    • The EAS technology market is so vast that it becomes nearly impossible to know where to start or how to differentiate between vendors and products.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Accountability for EAS success is shared between IT and the business. There is no single owner of an EAS. A unified approach to building your strategy promotes an integrated roadmap so all stakeholders have clear direction on the future state.
    • While technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences, there are many other drivers of dissatisfaction. IT must stand shoulder-to-shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for enterprise applications.
    • EAS projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance and the criticality of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning business strategies with EAS capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and the business should happen daily. Alignment doesn’t just occur at the executive level but at each level of the organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Conduct an EAS project preparedness assessment as a means to ensure you maximize the value of your time, effort, and spending.
    • Gather the necessary resources to form the team to conduct the EAS selection.
    • Gett the proper EAS requirement landscape by mapping out business capabilities and processes, translating into prioritized EAS requirements.
    • Review SoftwareReviews vendor reports to shortlist vendors for your RFP process.
    • Use Info-Tech’s templates and tools to gather your EAS requirements, build your RFP and evaluation scorecard, and build a foundational EAS selection framework.

    Select an Enterprise Application Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Select an Enterprise Application Software Storyboard - A blueprint which prepares you for a proper and better enterprise application selection outcome.

    Properly selecting and implementing an enterprise application requires a proper structure. This blueprint guides you with a framework to help in such project, including steps such as assessing readiness, plan for the right resources, requirements gathering, shortlisting, obtaining and evaluating vendor responses, and preparing for implementation.

    • Select an Enterprise Application Software Storyboard

    2. Select an Enterprise Application Readiness Assessment Checklist – a checklist to assess your readiness towards moving ahead with the selection process.

    The EAS Readiness Checklist includes a list of essential tasks to be completed prior to the enterprise application selection and implementation project.

    • EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist

    3. ERP/HRIS/CRM Requirements Templates – a set of templates to help build a list of requirements and features for the selection process.

    These templates are specific to either ERP, HRIS, or CRM. Each template lists out a set of modules and features allowing you to easily build your requirements.

    • ERP Requirements Template
    • HRIS Requirements Template
    • CRM Requirements Template

    4. Vendor Solicitation (RFP) to Evaluation Suite of Tools – Use Info-Tech’s RFP, vendor response and evaluation tools and templates to increase your efficiency in your RFP and evaluation process.

    Configure this time-saving suite of tools to your organizational culture, needs, and most importantly the desired outcome of your RFP initiative.

    • EAS Request for Proposal Template
    • EAS Vendor Response Template
    • ERP Vendor Demonstration Script Template
    • HRIS Vendor Demonstration Script Template
    • CRM Vendor Demonstration Script Template
    • EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select an Enterprise Application

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Workshop debrief – Prepare for implementation

    The Purpose

    Review evaluation framework.

    Prepare for implementation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Activities

    1.1 Support the project team in establishing the evaluation framework.

    1.2 Discuss demo scripts scenarios.

    1.3 Discuss next steps and key items in preparation for the implementation.

    Outputs

    Evaluation framework considerations.

    Demo script considerations.

    RFP considerations.

    2 Workshop Preparation

    The Purpose

    The facilitator works with the team to verify organizational readiness for EAS project and form the EAS project team.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Level-set on organizational readiness for EAS

    Organizational project alignment

    Activities

    2.1 Introduce the workshop and complete an overview of activities.

    2.2 Complete organizational context assessment to level-set understanding.

    2.3 Complete EAS readiness assessment.

    2.4 Form EAS selection team.

    Outputs

    EAS readiness assessment

    Structured EAS selection team

    3 Mapping Capabilities to Prioritizing Requirements

    The Purpose

    Determine the business capabilities and process impacted by the EAS.

    Determine what the business needs to get out of the EAS solution.

    Build the selection roadmap and project plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business and ERP solution alignment

    Activities

    3.1 Map business capabilities/processes.

    3.2 Inventory application and data flow.

    3.3 List EAS requirements.

    3.4 Prioritize EAS requirements.

    Outputs

    Business capability/process map

    List or map of application + data flow

    Prioritized EAS requirements

    4 Vendor Landscape and your RFP

    The Purpose

    Understand EAS market product offerings.

    Readying key RFP aspects and expected vendor responses.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Shortlist of vendors to elicit RFP response.

    Translated EAS requirements into RFP.

    Activities

    4.1 Build RFP.

    4.2 Build vendor response template.

    Outputs

    Draft of RFP template.

    Draft of vendor response template.

    5 How to Evaluate Vendors

    The Purpose

    Prepare for demonstration and evaluation.

    Establish evaluation criteria.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Narrow your options for ERP selection to best-fit vendors.

    Activities

    5.1 Run an RFP evaluation simulation.

    5.2 Establish evaluation criteria.

    5.3 Customize the RFP and Demonstration and Scoring Tool.

    Outputs

    Draft of demo script template.

    Draft of evaluation criteria.

    Draft of RFP and Demonstration and Scoring Tool.

    Further reading

    Select an Enterprise Application

    Selecting a best-fit solution requires balancing needs, cost, and vendor capability.

    Analyst Perspective

    A foundational EAS strategy is critical to decision-making.

    Enterprise application software (EAS) is a core tool that a business leverages to accomplish its goals. An EAS that is doing its job well is invisible to the business. The challenges come when the tool is no longer invisible. It has become a source of friction in the functioning of the business.

    EAS systems are expensive, their benefits are difficult to quantify, and they often suffer from poor user satisfaction. Post-implementation, technology evolves, organizational goals change, and the health of the system is not monitored. This is complicated in today’s digital landscape with multiple integration points, siloed data, and competing priorities.

    Too often organizations jump into selecting replacement systems without understanding the needs of the organization. Alignment between business and IT is just one part of the overall strategy. Identifying key pain points and opportunities, assessed in the light of organizational strategy, will provide a strong foundation to the transformation of the EAS system. Learning about different vendor product offerings with a rigorous approach and evaluation framework will pave way for a better selection outcome.

    Hong Kwok, Research Director

    Hong Kwok
    Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge Common Obstacles Info-Tech’s Approach
    Selecting and implementing an EAS is one of the most expensive and time-consuming technology transformations an organization can undertake. EAS projects are notorious for time and budget overruns, with only a margin of the anticipated benefits being realized. Making the wrong technology selection or failing to plan for an EAS implementation has significant – and possibly career-ending – implications.

    The EAS technology market is so vast that it is nearly impossible to know where to start or how to differentiate between vendors and products.

    Inadequate and incomplete requirements skew the EAS selection in one direction to another. Many EAS projects fail due to a lack of clear description and specification of functional requirements.

    Organizations rarely have both the sufficient knowledge and resources to properly evaluate, select, and implement an EAS, forcing them to turn to external partnerships.

    EAS selection must be driven by your organization’s overall strategy. Ensure you are ready to embark on this journey with the right resources.

    Determine what EAS solution fits your organization through a structured requirement gathering process to a vendor evaluation framework.

    Ensure strong points of integration between EAS and other software such as ERP to HRIS. No EAS should live in isolation.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Accountability for EAS success is shared between IT and the business. There is no single owner of an EAS. A unified approach to building your strategy promotes an integrated roadmap so all stakeholders have clear direction on the future state.

    You are not just picking a piece of software, you are choosing a long-term technology partner

    Reasons for Selectin Chosen Software

    Decision making in selection often stands on functional fit; don’t forget to consider vendor fit.

    As the ERP technology market becomes increasingly saturated and difficult to decode, vendors are trying to get ahead by focusing on building a partnership, not just making a sale.

    68 % of organizations are satisfied with the overall ERP vendor experience, up from 54% in 2017.

    Panorama Consulting Solutions, “Report,” 2018

    What is an Enterprise Application?

    Our Definition: Enterprise Application Software (EAS) is a large software system that provides a broad and integrated set of features which supports a range of business operations and processes across an organization. The system is broadly deployed, provides a unified interface and data structure, allowing for higher business productivity and reporting efficiencies. Best known EAS solutions include Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP), Human Resource Information System (HRIS), and Customer Relationship Management (CRM).

    More focused EAS solutions may also bring benefits to your organization, depending on the scale of operations, complexity of operations, and functions. Here are some examples:

    PSA: Professional Services Automation
    SCMS: Supply Chain Management System
    WMS: Warehouse Management System
    EAM: Enterprise Asset Management
    PIMS: Product Information Management System
    MES: Manufacturing Execution System
    MA: Marketing Automation

    Our other Selection Framework

    When selecting personal or commodity applications, or mid-tier applications with spend below $100,000, use our Rapid Application Selection Framework.

    Download this tool

    Enterprise Applications Lifecycle Advisory Services

    Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

    Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

    What is EPR

    Enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems facilitate the flow of information across business units. They allow for the seamless integration of systems and create a holistic view of the enterprise to support decision making.

    In many organizations, the ERP system is considered the lifeblood of the enterprise. Problems with this key operational system will have a dramatic impact on the ability of the enterprise to survive and grow.

    An ERP system:

    • Automates processes, reducing the amount of manual, routine work.
    • Integrates with core modules, eliminating the fragmentation of systems.
    • Centralizes information for reporting from multiple parts of the value chain to a single point.
    ERP use cases: Product-centric
    Suitable for organizations that manufacture, assemble, distribute, or manage material goods.
    Service-centric
    Suitable for organizations that provide and manage field services and/or professional services.

    Human Resource Information System (HRIS)

    What is HRIS?

    An HRIS is used to acquire, store, manipulate, analyze, retrieve, and distribute information regarding an organization’s human resources. HRIS covers the entire employee lifecycle from recruit to retire.

    An HRIS:

    • Retains employee data in a single repository.
    • Enhances employee engagement through self-service and visibility into their records.
    • Enhances data security through role-based access control.
    • Eliminates manual processes and enables workflow automation.
    • Reduces transaction processing time and HR administrative tasks.
    • Presents an end-to-end, comprehensive view of all HR processes.
    • Reduces exposure to risk with compliance to rules and regulations.
    • Enhances the business’s reporting capability on various aspects of human capital.

    Human Resource Information System

    Customer relationship management (CRM)

    What is CRM?

    A CRM platform (or suite) is a core enterprise application that provides a broad feature set for supporting customer interaction processes, typically across marketing, sales and customer service. These suites supplant more basic applications for customer interaction management (such as the contact management module of an ERP or office productivity suite).

    A CRM suite provides many key capabilities, including but not limited to:

    • Account management
    • Order history tracking
    • Pipeline management
    • Case management
    • Campaign management
    • Reports and analytics
    • Customer journey execution

    A CRM provides a host of native capabilities, but many organizations elect to tightly integrate their CRM solution with other parts of their customer experience ecosystem to provide a 360-degree view of their customers.

    Customer relationship management

    The good EAS numbers

    There are many good reasons to support EAS implementation and use.

    92% of organizations report that CRM use is important for accomplishing revenue objectives.
    Source: Validity, 2020

    Almost 26% of companies implement HRIS is to obtain greater functionalities, while other main reasons are to increase efficiencies, support growth, and consolidate systems.
    Source: SoftwarePath, 2022

    Functionality of an ERP is believed to be the most important aspect by almost 40% of companies.
    Source: SelectHub, 2022

    The ugly EAS numbers

    Risks are high in EAS projects.

    Statistical analysis of ERP projects indicates rates of failure vary from 50 to 70 percent. Taking the low end of those analyst reports, one in two ERP projects is considered a failure.
    Source: Electric Journal of Information Systems Evaluation.

    46% of HR technology projects exceed their planned timelines.
    Source: Unleash, 2020

    Almost 70% of all CRM implementation projects do not meet expected objectives.
    Source: Future Computing and Informatics Journal

    Enterprise Application dissatisfaction

    Finance, IT, Sales, HR, and other users of the Enterprise Application system can only optimize with the full support of each other. Cooperation between departments is crucial when trying to improve the technology capabilities and customer interaction.

    Drivers of Dissatisfaction
    Business Data People and teams Technology
    • Misaligned objectives
    • Product fit
    • Changing priorities
    • Lack of metrics
    • Access to data
    • Data hygiene
    • Data literacy
    • One view of the customer
    • User adoption
    • Lack of IT support
    • Training (use of data and system)
    • Vendor relations
    • Systems integration
    • Multi-channel complexity
    • Capability shortfall
    • Lack of product support

    Info-Tech Insight
    While technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences, there are many other drivers of dissatisfaction. IT must stand shoulder-to-shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for Enterprise Applications.

    Case Study

    Align strategy and technology to meet consumer demand.

    NETFLIX

    INDUSTRY
    Entertainment

    SOURCE
    Forbes, 2017

    Challenge
    Beginning as a mail-out service, Netflix offered subscribers a catalog of videos to select from and have mailed to them directly. Customers no longer had to go to a retail store to rent a video. However, the lack of immediacy of direct mail as the distribution channel resulted in slow adoption.

    Blockbuster was the industry leader in video retail but was lagging in its response to industry, consumer, and technology trends around customer experience.

    Solution
    In response to the increasing presence of tech-savvy consumers on the internet, Netflix invested in developing an online platform as its primary distribution channel. The benefit of doing so was two-fold: passive brand advertising (by being present on the internet) and meeting customer demands for immediacy and convenience. Netflix also recognized the rising demand for personalized service and created an unprecedented, tailored customer experience.

    Results
    Netflix’s disruptive innovation is built on the foundation of great customer experience management. Netflix is now a $28 billion company, which is ten times what Blockbuster was worth.

    Netflix used disruptive technologies to innovatively build a customer experience that put it ahead of the long-time video rental industry leader, Blockbuster.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for selecting an Enterprise Application

    1. Build alignment and assemble the team 2. Define your EAS 3. Engage, evaluate, and select 4. Next steps
    Phase steps
    1. Aligning business and IT
    2. Readiness and resourcing
    1. Map capabilities
    2. List Requirements
    3. Prioritize requirements
    1. Know the products
    2. Engage the vendors
    3. Select properly
    1. Plan for implementation
    Phase outcomes Discuss organizational goals and how to advance those using the EA system. Identify gaps and remediation steps in preparation of the selection. Assemble the EA selection team. List and review business capabilities and translate into EAS requirements. Prioritize requirements for selection. Gain an understanding of the product offerings on the market. Engage the vendors through RFPs and conduct a proper evaluation with an objective evaluation criteria and framework. Review and discuss the different elements required in preparation for the implementation project.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    ERP/HRIS/CRM Requirements Template

    ERP Requirements Template

    Accelerate your requirement gathering with a pre-compiled list of common requirements.

    RFx Demo Scoring Tool

    RFx Demo Scoring Tool

    Quickly compare the vendors who respond to the RFx to identify the best fit for your needs.

    Key deliverable:

    RFx templates

    Use one of our templates to build a ready-for-distribution implementation partner RFx tailored to the unique success factors of your implementation.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to his the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between six to ten calls over the course of four to six months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Scoping call to understand the current situation.

    Call #2: Discuss readiness and resourcing needs.

    Call #3: Discuss the capabilities and application inventory.

    Call #4: Discuss requirement gathering and prioritization.

    Call #5: Go over SoftwareReviews and review draft RFx.

    Call #6: Discuss evaluation tool and evaluation process.

    Call #7: Discuss preparation for implementation.

    Workshop Overview

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Activities

    Organizational Strategic Needs

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Overview of the EAS Landscape

    1.2 Assess EAS project readiness

    1.3 Determine the members of the EAS selection team

    From Capabilities to Requirements

    2.1 Map business capabilities

    2.2 Inventory application and interactions

    2.3 Gather requirements

    2.4 Prioritize requirements

    Vendor Landscape and Your RFP

    3.1 Understanding product offerings

    3.2 Build a list of targeted vendors

    3.3 Build RFP

    3.4 Build vendor response template

    How to Evaluate Vendors

    4.1 Run a RFP evaluation simulation

    4.2 Build demo script

    4.3 Establish evaluation criteria

    Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    5.1 Clean up in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. EAS Readiness Checklist and remediation plan
    2. List of members in EAS selection team
    1. List of key business processes
    2. Inventory application and data flow map
    3. Prioritized EAS requirements
    1. Draft RFP template
    2. Draft vendor response template
    1. Draft demo script template
    2. Draft vendor evaluation tool
    1. Completed RFP template
    2. Completed vendor response template
    3. Completed demo script template
    4. Vendor evaluation plan

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 1

    Build alignment and assemble the Team

    Phase 1
    1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
    1.2 Validate Readiness
    1.3 Determine Resourcing

    Phase 2
    1.1 Capability Mapping
    1.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
    1.3 Requirements Prioritizing

    Phase 3
    3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
    3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
    3.3 Evaluation
    Select and Negotiate

    Phase 4
    4.1 Prepare for Implementation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Gain an understanding of recent EAS technology.

    Validate readiness before starting EAS selection.

    Assemble EAS selection team through identification of key players.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project, including:

    • CxO (e.g. CIO, CFO)
    • Departmental leaders
    • Project management team
    • Subject matter experts

    Select an Enterprise Application

    Create a compelling case that addresses strategic business objectives

    When someone at the organization asks you WHY, you need to deliver a compelling case. The ERP project will receive pushback, doubt, and resistance; if you can’t answer the question WHY, you will be left back-peddling.

    When faced with a challenge, prepare for the WHY.

    • Why do we need this?
    • Why are we spending all this money?
    • Why are we bothering?
    • Why is this important?
    • Why did we do it this way?
    • Why did we choose this vendor?

    Most organizations can answer “What?”

    Some organizations can answer “How?”

    Very few organizations have an answer for “Why?”

    Each stage of the project will be difficult and present its own unique challenges and failure points. Re-evaluate if you lose sight of WHY at any stage in the project.

    Ensure you have completed the necessary prerequisites for EAS selection

    Prior to embarking on selection, ensure you have set the right building blocks and completed the necessary prerequisites: your strategy and roadmap, and business case.

    STRATEGY & ROADMAP
    Whatever EAS is required, take the time to align your strategy and roadmap to business priorities. Right-size a technology strategy by assessing deployment model alternatives and future-state options with your EAS vision, operating model, and current-state assessment as inputs. Put your strategy to action with a living roadmap by following Info-Tech’s blueprint, Develop an Actionable Strategy and Roadmap.

    EAS BUSINESS CASE
    Use a business case to justify the business need for your EAS project and secure funding for moving forward with the proposal. A business case will further provide executive decision makers with the tools to compare and prioritize initiatives. Drive a consistent approach to promoting successful initiatives and holding the organization accountable to the projected benefits with Info-Tech’s blueprint, Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case.

    Align the EAS strategy with the corporate strategy

    Corporate strategy Unified strategy EAS strategy
    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and business aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.
    • EAS optimization can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate business objectives.
    • Communicates the organization’s budget and spending on EAS.
    • Identifies IT initiatives that will support the business and key EAS objectives.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for EAS initiatives.

    Info-Tech Insight
    EAS projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance and the criticality of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning business strategies with EAS capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and the business should happen daily. Alignment doesn’t just to occur at the executive level alone, but at each level of the organization.

    Understand how EAS fits into your wider IT organization

    Identify the IT drivers and opportunities to take advantage of when embarking on your EAS project.

    Greenfield or brownfield: Do you currently have an EAS? Do you have multiple EASs? What is the history of your EAS deployment? How customized is it?

    End of life: What lifecycle stage is it in?

    Utilization: Are there point solutions in your application portfolio that support some EAS capabilities? Is functionality duplicated and/or underutilized?

    Reason for change: What are your organizational drivers for this EAS project (e.g. acquisition/merger)?

    APPLICATION PORTFOLIO STRATEGY

    Business leaders need application managers to do more than support business operations. Applications must drive business growth, and application managers need their portfolios to be current and effective and to evolve continuously to support the business or risk being marginalized. Rationalize your applications with a roadmap that propels the business forward.

    Go to this link

    Before switching vendors, evaluate your existing EAS to see if it’s being underutilized or could use an upgrade

    The cost of switching vendors can be challenging, but it will depend entirely on the quality of data and whether it makes sense to keep it.

    • Achieving success when switching vendors first requires reflection. We need to ask why we are dissatisfied with our incumbent software.
    • If the product is old and inflexible, the answer may be obvious, but don’t be afraid to include your incumbent in your evaluation if your issues might be solved with an upgrade.
    • Look at your use-case requirements to see where you want to take the EAS solution and compare them to your incumbent’s roadmap. If they don’t match, switching vendors may be the only solution. If your roadmaps align, see if you’re fully leveraging the solution or will be able to start working through process improvements

    Fully leveraging your current software now will have two benefits:

    1 It may turn out that poor leveraging of your incumbent software was the problem all along; switching vendors won’t solve the problem by itself. As the data to the right shows, a fifth of SMEs and a quarter of large enterprises do not fully leverage their incumbent software.
    2 If you still decide to switch, you’ll be in a good negotiating position. If vendors can see you are engaged and fully leveraging your software, they will be less complacent during negotiations to win you over.
    20%
    Small/Medium
    Enterprises
    25%
    Large
    Enterprises
    only occasionally or rarely/never use their software

    Source: SoftwareReviews, 2020; N=45,027

    Info-Tech Insight
    Switching vendors won’t improve poor internal processes. To be fully successful and meet the goals of the business case, new software implementations must be accompanied by process review and improvement.

    Familiarize yourself with the EAS market

    How it got here Where it’s going
    • Acquisition and consolidation: The major vendors in the industry have grown over time through acquisition, particularly focusing on expanding products in industrial verticals.
    • Product stack: What it means is having to navigate complexity related to the product stack when thinking about EAS, which turns the conversation from EAS as a single product to EAS as a package of multiple products.
    • Modularity and interoperability: The benefit of the stack is that it often means modularity and the ability to implement parts of a solution or in an order that aligns to the customer’s needs. On the other hand, the stack is not always understood by or well communicated to the customer, and the interdependence of components often means they must be licensed together.
    • Customizable cloud: Software-as-a-Service in multitenant environments offers a hands-off value proposition, but increasingly customers are looking to customize their instances beyond the capability offered through configurability.
    • Best-of-breed consolidation: EAS vendors are continuing to consolidate functionality to increase interoperability and increase ease of integration. The market is rife with acquisitions and mergers, making the strong players even stronger.
    • Client experience: While most vendors now offer products that will meet the wide gamut of EAS business requirements, vendors are now paying extra attention to the client experience from partnership perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Evaluating the EAS vendor landscape is becoming increasingly difficult as the playing field evens out in terms of functionality offerings. As such, it is becoming increasingly important to more meticulously evaluate vendors themselves as part of the selection process. This is especially important in EAS projects, as they tend to be multi-year in nature and result in long-term vendor partnerships.

    What types of Enterprise solutions are at my disposal?

    IT leaders typically compare EAS on-premises with SaaS options, but there are actually four different deployment scenarios.

    1. On Premises 3. Proprietary Cloud 4. White-Label Cloud 2. SaaS
    • The traditional model for EAS deployment.
    • Upfront licensing term plus annual maintenance/ support fee.
    • Requires local server, database, and authentication.
    • Good support for industry modules.
    • Customizable.
    • EAS vendor hosts an instance of the EAS system in its own data center.
    • Patches may or may not be applied automatically.
    • Monthly per-user or traditional billing.
    • Otherwise, as with on premises.
    • EAS VAR or reseller hosts an instance of the EAS system in its own data center or in a public IaaS provider’s (e.g. Rackspace, Amazon EC2).
    • Otherwise, as with proprietary cloud.
    • Common model for cloud EAS.
    • All users share a single instance.
    • Patches and updates are applied automatically.
    • Monthly per-user fee.
    • Poor industry support.
    • Configurable but not customizable.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Cloud may apply in other ways to the EAS implementation. Most vendors offer particular EAS services delivered via the cloud. For example, some vendors offers CRM, project management, and payroll self-service as cloud-based options to augment on-premises ERP solutions.

    Know when to adopt and when to bypass cloud EAS

    Use the following guidelines to determine if your organization will benefit from the cloud, or if you should stick to a more traditional delivery model.

    Adopt a cloud-based EAS platform if you have: Do not adopt a cloud-based EAS platform if you have:
    Standard processes – Businesses that have standard, repeatable processes can benefit greatly from the cost savings that cloud provides, as the need for expensive customizations is greatly minimized. Highly regulated industry – Although there is no hard evidence that says cloud-based solutions are not able to support security or compliance needs, in certain industries such as banking or insurance, cloud is not the norm and may be a tough sell for IT.
    Lean IT operations – Organizations with lean IT or no formal IT departments supporting them will find SaaS EAS particularly appealing. Those with IT that can support day-to-day operations but are not prepared for disaster recovery should also consider cloud EAS, either hosted or SaaS-based. Unreliable network – If the business regularly faces network outages or remote employees have unreliable internet connections, a cloud-based solution may not be the best option. IT would face many complaints from disgruntled workers unable to access data.
    Mobile workforce – Telecommuting is becoming more common, as is the requirement for data to be readily available for those on the road. Using cloud is a good way to provide this functionality. Unsavvy workforce – Organizations that prefer to be late adopters of technology may face strong resistance to taking their software to the cloud. Some employees may not like the idea of using a browser to connect to the system.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Knowing when to choose a cloud EAS deployment comes down to two main factors: knowing the level of complexity required by the business, and knowing the available IT resources that can be dedicated to support and manage EAS.

    Consider 3 classic scenarios when evaluating cloud EAS

    Cloud EAS should be considered by all organizations, but these scenarios present the strongest opportunity.

    The Startup The Spinoff The Modernizer
    • There is no greenfield in ERP, but if you’re a startup, you’re quite close.
    • Given the virtually nonexistent IT department in startups, having an on-premises ERP can be daunting. A SaaS delivery model is usually the best choice in these scenarios. Even if the resources are available, they are better spent driving business growth.
    • Startups typically have less stringent industry requirements, making SaaS a more attractive option.
    • Though not entirely new companies, spinoffs or subsidiaries often have needs similar to those of startups but with an added integration requirement.
    • When it comes to ERP, the deployment type will depend on how resources are split with the parent company. If there is little to no IT support, then SaaS is ideal.
    • If the parent company is already using cloud ERP, whether SaaS, hosted, or an internal cloud, then it is often easy for the spinoff to gain access as well.
    • Companies with legacy systems that are not salvageable, or out-of-date point solutions that do not scale, have the opportunity to start from scratch.
    • Those looking at reducing capital expenses should consider SaaS and hosted ERP deployments.
    • Those looking at having state-of-the-art technology in-house should consider building an internal private cloud that supports their ERP deployment.

    Make sure you are ready to proceed with selection

    Organizational readiness is essential for maximizing the benefits realized from your ERP. Cover all critical elements of pre-work, resources, buy-in, and strategy and planning before embarking on ERP selection and/or implementation.

    Pre-work
    Current State Understanding
    Business Process Improvement
    Future State Vision

    Resources
    Project Team
    Governance Structures
    Third-Party Partners
    Cost and Budget

    Buy-in
    Goals and Objectives
    Exec Business Sponsorship
    Stakeholder Engagement
    Change Management

    STRATEGY and PLANNING
    ERP Strategy & Roadmap
    Risk Management
    Project Metrics

    Without a preparedness assessment, organizations end up wasting a lot of time on resolving gaps in planning that could have been mitigated upfront, which ultimately makes the implementation project more challenging.
    – Suanne McGrath-Kelly, President & Principal Consultant, Plan in Motion Inc., interviewed by Info-Tech, 2019.

    Assess your EAS readiness before moving forward

    To avoid common project pitfalls, complete the necessary prerequisites before proceeding with EAS. Consider whether the risks of proceeding unprepared fall within your organization’s risk tolerance. If they do not, pivot back to strategy.

    Preceding tasks Risks of proceeding unprepared
    Project Vision
    Project Scope
    EAS Business Case
    Current State Map
    Improvement Opportunity Analysis
    Future State Considerations
    Strategic Requirements
    Project Metrics and Benchmarks
    Risk Assessment
    EAS Strategic Roadmap
    EAS Project Work Initiatives
    Misalignment of project objectives
    Time and cost overruns
    Lack of executive buy-in or support
    Over- or under-investment in systems
    Unknown and unmet system requirements
    Product selection misfit
    Misalignment of requirements to needs
    Inability to measure project success
    Inability to proactively mitigate risk impact
    Lack of decision-making traceability
    Unclear expectations of tasks and roles

    1.2.1 Assess EAS selection readiness

    1 – 2 hours

    1. As a group, review Section 1 of the EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist with the core project team and/or project sponsor, item by item. For completed items, tick the corresponding checkbox. Document all incomplete items in the Readiness Remediation Plan table in the first column (“Incomplete Readiness Item”).
    2. For each incomplete item, use your discretion to determine whether the completion is critical in preparation for EAS selection and implementation. This may vary given the complexity of your EAS project. If the item is critical to the project, indicate this with “Y” in the second column (“Criticality (Y/N)”).
    3. For each critical item, reflect on the barriers that have prevented or are preventing its completion. Possible barriers include incomplete task dependencies, low value to effort determination, lack of organizational knowledge or resources, pressure of deadlines, etc. Document these barriers in the third column (“Barriers to Completion”).
    4. Determine a remediation approach for each barrier identified. Document the approach in the fourth column (“Remediation Approach”).
      1. For each remediation activity, designate a due date and remediation owner. Document this in the fifth column (“Due Date and Owner”).
      2. Carry out the remediation of critical tasks and return to this blueprint to kick-start your selection and implementation project.
    Input Output
    • EAS Foundation
    • EAS Strategy
    • Readiness remediation approach
    • Validation of ERP project readiness
    Materials Participants
    • EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist
    • Project sponsor
    • Core project team

    Download the EAS Readiness Assessment Checklist

    Build a well-balanced core team to see the project through

    Have a cross-departmental team define goals and objectives in order to significantly increase EAS success and improve communication.

    • Hold a meeting with Finance, Operations, and IT stakeholders. The overall objective of the meeting is to confirm that all parties agree on the goals and metrics that gauge success of the EAS project.
    • The kick-off process will significantly improve internal communications. Invite all impacted internal groups to work as a team to address any significant issues before the application process is formally activated.
    • Set up a quarterly review process to understand changing needs. This will change the way the EAS system will be utilized.

    “Each individual should understand at least one business area and have a hand in another.”
    – Mark Earley
    Senior Research Director,
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight
    An EAS selection and implementation requires more than just a procurement team. The core EAS project team should be cross-functional. .

    Be ready with a resourcing strategy for your EAS project

    EAS selection and implementation is a giant undertaking that can rarely be supported by internal resources alone.

    It is important to understand where your organization’s resourcing gaps are when embarking on a selection and implementation project. Once gaps are identified, the amount of external support needed from vendor(s), consultants, or system integrators can be determined.

    Select from the three most commonly used resourcing strategies for EAS selection and implementation projects:

    • Implement in-house using your own staff.
    • Implement using a combination of your own staff and professional services from the vendor(s) and/or system integrator (SI).
    • Implement using professional services.

    Build your implementation team

    Prioritize members from your core selection team. They will have strong insight into the tool and its envisioned position in the organization.

    General Roles

    1. Integration Specialists
    2. Solution or Enterprise Architects
    3. QA Engineer
    4. IT Service Management Team

    External Roles

    1. Vendor’s Implementation Team or Professional Services
    2. Systems Integrator (SI)

    Right-size the EAS selection team to ensure you get the right information but are still able to move ahead quickly

    Full-Time Resourcing: At least one member of these five team members must be allocated to the selection initiative as a full-time resource.

    IT Leader Technical Lead Business Analyst/
    Project Manager
    Business Lead Process Expert(s)
    This team member is an IT director or CIO who will provide sponsorship and oversight from the IT perspective. This team member will focus on application security, integration, and enterprise architecture. This team member elicits business needs and translates them into technology requirements. This team member will provide sponsorship from the business needs perspective. Typically, a CXO or SVP of a business function. These team members are the business process owners who will help steer the requirements and direction.

    Info-Tech Insight
    It is critical for the selection team to determine who has decision rights. Organizational culture will play the largest role in dictating which team member holds the final say for selection decisions. For more information on stakeholder management and involvement, see this guide.

    Complete the project timeline required during your selection phase

    Include as many steps as necessary to understand, validate, and compare vendor solutions so you can make a confident, well-informed decision.

    Use Info-Tech’s 15-Step Selection Process:

    1. Initiate procurement.
    2. Select procurement manager.
    3. Prepare for procurement; check that prerequisites are met.
    4. Select appropriate procurement vehicle (RFI, RFP, RFQ, etc.).
    5. Assemble procurement teams.
    6. Create procurement project plan.
    7. Identify and notify vendors about procurement.
    8. Configure procurement process.
    9. Gather requirements.
    10. Prioritize requirements.
    11. Build the procurement documentation package.
    12. Issue the procurement.
    13. Evaluate proposals.
    14. Evaluate vendor demos and reference checks.
    15. Recommend a vendor.

    Strengthen your procurement. If your organization lacks a clear selection process, refer to Info-Tech's Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process research to help construct a formal process for procuring application technology.

    Download the Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process

    Visualize what success looks like

    Understand how success metrics are relevant at each stage of strategy formation by keeping the end in mind. Apply a similar thought model to your other success metrics for a holistic evaluation of your strategy.

    Implementation
    Pre-Implementation Post-Implementation
    Baseline measure Strategic insight Strategic action Success measure End result
    Use data you already have. Any given pain point can act as your pre-implementation baseline. Previously, this measure may have been evaluated by asking “what?” or “how much?” Move away from looking at your baseline measure as transactional data, and incorporate the ability to generate strategic insight with your EAS. Change the questions you are asking to drive insights: “who?” “why?” and “how does it affect the business?” Support the business by putting your strategic analytics into action. Ensure there are capabilities built into your ERP to strategically address your baseline measure. Leverage these functions to act on your strategic insights. In the interest of IT and business alignment, speak the same language when measuring success. Use a business success measurement to determine the contribution made by your EAS strategy. Visualize your success in the context of the business as a whole. Projecting success in the interest of your stakeholders will gain and maintain buy-in, allowing you to leverage the strategic functionality of your new EAS.
    Example Time to Procure Delay in time to procure caused by bottleneck in requisition processing ERP used to create advanced workflows to streamline requisition approval process Time efficiencies gained free up employee time to focus on more strategic efforts Contributed to strategic operational innovation

    Prove the value of your EAS through metrics

    Establish baseline metrics early and measure throughout the project can iteratively prove the value of your EAS.

    Functional processes IT resource efficiency
    Functional benefits and efficiencies gained through effectively diagnosing and meeting business needs. Benefits enabled through reductions in IT system, network, and resource usage.
    Example metrics Record to report
    • Days to close month-end
    • Time to produce statements
    Market to order
    • Customer retention rate
    • Conversion/Cost per lead
    • Number of help desk requests
    • Number of active users
    • Time to resolution
    Quote to cash
    • Sales cycle duration
    • Cash conversion cycle
    Issue to resolution
    • # of returns
    • # of customer complaints
    • Time to resolve complaints
    Procure to pay
    • Average time to procure
    • Cycle time of purchase order
    Forecast to delivery
    • Variance of demand plan
    • Time to replenish inventory
    Plan to perform
    • Time to complete plan
    • Variance of plan to actual
    Hire to retire
    • Training $ per employee
    • Total overtime cost

    Improve baseline metrics through…

    1. Increased help desk efficiency. Through training of personnel and increased efficiency of processes.
    2. Increased level of self-service for end users. Implementation of functionality that matches business needs will increase the efficiency of functional business tasks.
    3. Decreased time to escalation. Knowing when to escalate tasks sooner can decrease wasted effort by tier-one workers.
    4. Automation of simple, repetitive tasks. Automation frees time for more important tasks.

    1.3.1 Assemble EAS selection team

    1 hour

    1. Working as a group, list key players in the organization that should be in EAS selection team.
    2. Determine the role of each member.
    3. Define the level of commitment each member can have on the EAS selection team. Keep in mind their availabilities during the selection process.
    4. Determine who has decision rights.
    Input Output
    • Knowledge of the team, governance structure, and organizational culture
    • List members in EAS selection team
    Materials Participants
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Executive sponsor
    • Core project team

    Phase 2

    Define your EAS

    Phase 1
    1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
    1.2 Validate Readiness
    1.3 Determine Resourcing

    Phase 2
    2.1 Capability Mapping
    2.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
    2.3 Requirements Prioritizing

    Phase 3
    3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
    3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
    3.3 Evaluation
    Select and Negotiate

    Phase 4
    4.1 Prepare for
    Implementation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Identifying business processes , inventory applications and data flows, gathering requirements and prioritizing them.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project including:

    • CxO (e.g. CIO, CFO)
    • Departmental leaders
    • Project management team
    • Subject matter experts
    • Core project team

    Select an Enterprise Application

    Leverage Info-Tech’s requirements gathering framework to serve as the basis for capturing your CRM requirements

    Requirements Gathering Framework

    Info-Tech’s Requirements Gathering Framework is a comprehensive approach to requirements management that can be scaled to any size of project or organization. This framework ensures that the application created will capture the needs of all stakeholders and deliver business value. Don’t treat elicitation, analysis, and validation in isolation: planning, monitoring, communicating, and managing must permeate all three stages in order to avoid makeshift solutions.

    Capability vs. process vs. feature

    Understanding the difference

    When examining HRMS optimization it is important to approach it from the appropriate layer.

    Capability:

    • The ability of an entity (e.g. organization or department) to achieve its objectives (APQC, 2017).
    • An ability that an organization, person, or system possesses. They are typically expressed in general and high-level terms and typically require a combination of organization, people, processes, and technology to achieve (TOGAF).

    Process:

    • Processes can be manual or technology enabled. A process is a series of interrelated activities that convert inputs into results (outputs).
    • Processes consume resources, require standards for repeatable performance, and respond to control systems that direct the quality, rate, and cost of performance. The same process can be highly effective in one circumstance and poorly effective in another with different systems, tools, knowledge, and people (APQC, 2017).

    Feature:

    • A distinguishing characteristic of a software item (e.g. performance, portability, or functionality) (IEEE, 2005).

    In today’s complex organizations, it can be difficult to understand where inefficiencies stem from and how performance can be enhanced.

    To fix problems and maximize efficiencies, organizations must examine business capabilities and processes to determine gaps and areas of lagging performance.

    Info-Tech’s HRIS framework and industry tools such as the APQC’s Process Classification Framework can help make sense of this.

    Process inventory

    Business capability map (Level 0)

    Business Capability Map

    If you do not have a documented process model, you can use the APQC Framework to help define your inventory of business processes.
    APQC’s Process Classification Framework is a taxonomy of cross-functional business processes intended to allow the objective comparison of organizational performance within and among organizations.

    In business architecture, the primary view of an organization is known as a business capability map.

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation rather than how.

    Business capabilities:

    • Represent stable business functions.
    • Are unique and independent of each other.
    • Will typically have a defined business outcome.

    A business capability map provides details that help the business architecture practitioner direct attention to a specific area of the business for further assessment.

    EAS process mapping

    Objectives The organization’s objectives are typically outcomes that the organization is looking to achieve as a result of the business strategy.
    Value Streams Value streams are external/internal processes that help the organization realize its goals.
    Capabilities The what: Business capabilities support value streams in the creation and capture of value.
    Processes The how: Business processes define how they will fulfill a given capability.

    The operating model

    An operating model is a framework that drives operating decisions. It helps to set the parameters for the scope of EAS and the processes that will be supported. The operating model will serve to group core operational processes. These groupings represent a set of interrelated, consecutive processes aimed at generating a common output.

    The value stream

    Value stream defined:

    Value Streams Design Product Produce Product Sell Product Customer Service
    • Manufacturers work proactively to design products and services that will meet consumer demand.
    • Products are driven by consumer demand and governmental regulations.
    • Production processes and labor costs are constantly analyzed for efficiencies and accuracies.
    • Quality of product and services are highly regulated through all levels of the supply chain.
    • Sales networks and sales staff deliver the product from the organization to the end consumer.
    • Marketing plays a key role throughout the value stream, connecting consumers’ wants and needs to the products and services offered.
    • Relationships with consumers continue after the sale of products and services.
    • Continued customer support and data mining is important to revenue streams.

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities in the marketplace. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment in which an organization operates.

    There are two types of value streams: core and support.

    • Core value streams are mostly external-facing. They deliver value to either external or internal customers and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
    • Support value streams are internal-facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.

    An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers.

    2.1.1 List your key processes

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, discuss the business capabilities, value streams, and business processes.
    2. For each capability determine the following:
      1. Is this capability applicable to our organization?
      2. What application, if any, supports this capability?
    3. Are there any missing capabilities to add?
    Input Output
    • Current systems
    • Key processes
    • APQC Framework
    • Organizational process map
    • List of key business processes
    Materials Participants
    • APQC Framework
    • Whiteboard, PowerPoint, or flip charts and markers
    • Primary stakeholders in each value stream supported by the EAS
    • Core project team

    Activity 2.1.1 – Process inventory

    Core finance Core HR Workforce management Talent Management Warehouse management Enterprise asset management
    Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology
    • General ledger
    • Accounts payable
    • Accounts receivable
    • GL consolidation
    • Cash management
    • Billing and invoicing
    • Expenses
    • Payroll accounting
    • Tax management
    • Reporting
    • Payroll administration
    • Benefits administration
    • Position management
    • Organizational structure
    • Core HR records
    • Time and attendance
    • Leave management
    • Scheduling
    • Performance management
    • Talent acquisition
    • Offboarding & onboarding
    • Plan layout
    • Manage inventory
    • Manage loading docks
    • Pick, pack, ship
    • Plan and manage workforce
    • Manage returns
    • Transfer product cross-dock
    • Asset lifecycle management
    • Supply chain management
    • Maintenance planning and scheduling
    Planning and budgeting Strategic HR Procurement Customer relationship management Facilities management Project management
    Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology Process Technology
    • Budget reporting
    • Variance analysis
    • Multi-year operating plan
    • Monthly forecasting
    • Annual operating plan
    • Compensation planning
    • Workforce planning
    • Succession planning
    • Supplier management
    • Purchase order management
    • Workflow approvals
    • Contract / tender management
    • Contact management
    • Activity management
    • Analytics
    • Plan and acquire
    • Asset maintenance
    • Disposal
    • Project management
    • Project costing
    • Budget control
    • Document management

    Gaining Enterprise Architecture Oversight during application selection yields better user satisfaction results

    Procurement/Legal Oversight and
    Low satisfaction with software selection High satisfaction with software selection
    Process % Used % Used Process
    Used ROI/Cost Benefit Analysis 42% 43% Used ROI/Cost-Benefit Analysis
    Used Formal Decision Criteria 39% 41% Used Formal Decision Criteria
    Approval 33% 37% Enterprise Architecture Oversight and Approval
    Security Oversight and Approval 27% 36% Security Oversight and Approval
    Used Third-Party Data Reports 26% 28% Procurement/Legal Oversight and Approval
    Enterprise Architecture Oversight and Approval 26% 28% Used Third-Party Data Reports
    Used a Consultant 21% 17% Used a Consultant

    High satisfaction was defined as a response of 8, 9, or 10 from the overall recommendation question. Low satisfaction was 7 or less.

    Source: SoftwareReviews, 2018

    Map data flow

    Example ERP data flow

    Example ERP data flow

    When assessing the current application portfolio that supports your EAS, the tendency will be to focus on the applications under the EAS umbrella. These relate mostly to marketing, sales, and customer service. Be sure to include systems that act as input to, or benefit due to outputs from EAS or similar applications.

    Be sure to include enterprise applications that are not included in the EAS application portfolio. Popular systems to consider for POIs include billing, directory services, content management, and collaboration tools.

    Integration is paramount: your EAS application often integrates with other applications within the organization. Create an integration map to reflect a system of record and the exchange of data. To increase customer engagement, channel integration is a must (i.e. with robust links to unified communications solutions, email, and VoIP telephony systems).

    Enterprise application landscape

    Enterprise application landscape

    2.1.2 Inventory applications and interactions

    1-3 hours

    1. Individually list all electronic systems involved in the EAS function of the organization.
    2. Document data flows into and out of each system to the EAS. Refer to the example on the previous slides (ERP data flow) and sample Enterprise Application map.
    3. Review the processes in place (look at each functional area, including data moving into and out of systems.) Document manual processes. Identify integration points. If flow charts exist for these processes, it may be useful to provide these to the participants.
    4. If possible, diagram the system. Include information direction flow.
    Input Output
    • Business process inventory
    • List of applications (if available)
    • Current systems
    • Data flow map
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard, markers
    • Internal requirements documentation tools (if available)
    • Business analyst(s)
    • Subject matter experts
    • Core project team (optional)

    Understand how to navigate the complex web of stakeholders in ERP requirements gathering

    Identify which stakeholders to include and what their level of involvement should be during requirements elicitation based on relevant topic expertise.

    Sponsor End user IT Business
    Description An internal stakeholder who has final sign-off on the ERP project. Frontline users of the ERP technology. Back-end support staff who are tasked with project planning, execution, and eventual system maintenance. Additional stakeholders who will be impacted by any ERP technology changes.
    Examples
    • CEO
    • CIO/CTO
    • COO
    • CFO
    • Warehouse personnel
    • Sales teams
    • HR admins
    • Applications manager
    • Vendor relationship manager(s)
    • Director, Procurement
    • VP, Marketing
    • Manager, HR
    Value Executive buy-in and support is essential to the success of the project. Often, the sponsor controls funding and resource allocation. End users determine the success of the system through user adoption. If the end user does not adopt the system, the system is deemed useless and benefits realization is poor. IT is likely to be responsible for more in-depth requirements gathering. IT possesses critical knowledge concerning system compatibility, integration, and data. Involving business stakeholders in the requirements gathering will ensure alignment between HR and organizational objectives.

    Stakeholder influence vs. interest

    Large-scale EAS projects require the involvement of many stakeholders from all corners and levels of the organization, including project sponsors, IT, end users, and business stakeholders. Consider the influence and interest of stakeholders in contributing to the requirements elicitation process and involve them accordingly.

    Chart of Stakeholder Involvement during selection

    Extract functional and non-functional requirements from the customer interaction business process diagrams

    Once the most significant processes have been mapped, the business requirements must be extracted from the maps and transformed into functional and non-functional requirements. The example below illustrates how to extract requirements from an insurance claim process for the Record Claim step.

    Task Input Output Risks Opportunities Condition Sample requirements
    Record customer service claim Customer email Case record
    • Agent accidentally misses the email and case is not submitted
    • Reduce time to populate customer’s claim information into the case
    • Automation of data capture and routing
    • Pre-population of the case with the email contents
    • Suggested routing based on nature of case
    • Multi-language support

    Business:

    • System requires email-to-case functionality

    Non-functional:

    • The cases must be supported in multiple languages

    Functional:

    • The case must support the following information:
      • Title
      • Customer
      • Subject
      • Case origin
      • Case type

    Example claims process

    2.2.1 Capture your EAS requirements

    Time required varies

    1. Focus groups of 10-20 individuals may be the best way to ensure complete coverage of business requirements for EAS. This group should be cross-functional, with manager- or director-level representation from the departments that have a vested interest in the EAS project.
    2. Use your organization’s standard internal tools or download Info-Tech’s ERP Requirements Template, HRIS Requirements Template, or CRM Requirements Template.
    3. Document the requirements from the elicitation sessions.
    • The core team of business analysts should be present throughout, and the sessions should be led by an experienced facilitator (such as a senior business analyst).
    • Requirements for EAS should focus on achieving the future state rather than replicating the current state.
    • The facilitator should steer the team toward requirements that are solution-agnostic (i.e. not coached in terms of a particular vendor or product). Focus on customer and internal personas to help drive requirements.
    Input Output
    • Business unit functional requirements
    • Business process inventory
    • Data flow map
    • Inventory of business requirements
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard, markers
    • Internal requirements documentation tools (if available)
    • Info-Tech’s ERP Requirements Template, HRIS Requirements Template, or CRM Requirements Template (optional)
    • Business analyst(s)
    • Project manager
    • Subject matter experts
    • Core project team (optional)

    Prioritize your EAS requirements to assist with the selection

    Requirements prioritization ensures that the ERP selection project team focuses on the right requirements when putting together the RFP.

    Prioritization is the process of ranking each requirement based on its importance to project success. Hold a meeting for the domain SMEs, implementation SMEs, project managers, and project sponsors to prioritize the requirements list. At the conclusion of the meeting, each requirement should be assigned a priority level. The implementation SMEs will use these priority levels to ensure efforts are targeted toward the proper requirements and to plan features available on each release.

    Use the MoSCoW Model of Prioritization to effectively order requirements.

    The MoSCoW Model of Prioritization
    Must have Requirements must be implemented for the solution to be considered successful.
    Should have Requirements that are high priority should be included in the solution if possible.
    Could have Requirements are desirable but not necessary and could be included if resources are available.
    Won't have Requirements won’t be in the next release, but will be considered for the future releases.

    The MoSCoW model was introduced by Dai Clegg of Oracle UK in 1994. MindTools.

    Base your prioritization on the right set of criteria

    Effective prioritization criteria

    Criteria Description
    Regulatory and legal compliance These requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Policy compliance Unless an internal policy can be altered or an exception can be made, these requirements will be considered mandatory.
    Business value significance Give a higher priority to high-value requirements.
    Business risk Any requirement with the potential to jeopardize the entire project should be given a high priority and implemented early.
    Likelihood of success Especially in “proof of concept” projects, it is recommended that requirements have good odds.
    Implementation complexity Give a higher priority to low implementation difficulty requirements.
    Alignment with strategy Give a higher priority to requirements that enable the corporate strategy.
    Urgency Prioritize requirements based on time sensitivity.
    Dependencies A requirement on its own may be low priority, but if it supports a high-priority requirement, then its priority must match it.

    2.3.1 Prioritize your solution requirements

    Time required varies

    1. Consolidate all duplicate requirements to form a mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive list of functional and non-functional requirements.
    2. Identify the significance of each requirement for your solution evaluation according to the MoSCoW model. Control the number of mandatory requirements you document. Too many mandatory requirements could create an unrealistic framework for evaluating solutions.
    3. Categorize your requirements and delineate between functional (i.e. capabilities the system will be able to perform) and non-functional (i.e. environmental conditions of the system, such as technical and security requirements).
    InputOutput
    • Inventory of business requirements
    • Inventory of business requirements with priorities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard, markers
    • Internal requirements documentation tools (if available)
    • Info-Tech’s ERP Requirements Template, HRIS Requirements Template, or CRM Requirements Template (optional)
    • Business analyst(s)
    • Project manager
    • Subject matter experts
    • Core project team

    Identify which vendors’ product and capabilities meet your must-have requirements

    Highlight must-haves in the RFP

    • Once you have prioritized your business requirements for the EAS initiative, it is time to package them into an RFP.
    • It is critical to highlight must-have requirements in the RFP document. Doing so immediately eliminates vendors who do not feel that their products are suitable for your needs.

    WATCH OUT!

    Many vendors will try to stretch their capabilities to fit your must-have requirements. Leverage vendor demos in the next stage of selection to quickly rule out products that do not cover your critical requirements.

    Identify key process areas where you require vendor knowledge

    Example of Key process areas

    Completing a process inventory and a list of EAS requirements often shows process areas that need updates and improvement. Take this opportunity to highlight areas where you would benefit from knowing about most recent best practices and technologies.

    Inquire about these when engaging the vendor to know their level of knowledge and how their products work best in your industry.

    General product knowledge requests are not enough. Be specific.

    Determine the product knowledge areas that are specific to your implementation.

    Product Knowledge Proof of Concept Development Customer Service Warehousing Core HR Other Overall
    Data Security *
    Process Improvements * *
    Configuration
    Data Architecture *
    Integration
    On premise Infrastructure
    Cloud Infrastructure *
    Other

    Identify the product knowledge that is required in relation to your implementation. This can include core product knowledge and should be related to larger infrastructure and organizational requirements.

    More than just functional requirements

    What to include What to look at What is differentiating
    • Remember to include must-have conditions that do not directly relate to the behavior or functionality of the EAS product, but rather describe environmental conditions under which the solution must remain effective or qualities that the systems must have.
    • These can include requirements related to capacity, speed, security, availability, and the information architecture and presentation of the user interface.
    • Consider the vendor’s overall ability to execute.
      • Are they financially stable?
      • Do they have the resources to execute?
      • Do they have the skills to execute?
      • Are they able to provide post-implementation support?
    • Vendors understand that SaaS isn’t for everyone. Deployment models are one way they will continue to differentiate themselves.
    • Some vendors choose to compete on breadth and others on depth of expertise in public, private, and hosted cloud offerings.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Be wary of sunsetting products! Selecting the EAS based on a good knowledge of the vendor’s roadmap allows for business operations to continue without having to repeat a selection and implementation project in the near future.

    Dominant use-case scenarios for potential ERP solutions

    While an organization may be both product- and service-centric, most organizations fall into one of the two categories.

    Use case: Public sector

    The service-centric ERP use case is suitable for most organizations in the public sector. With that in mind, consider ERP solutions that offer grant disbursements, fleet management, and staffing/resourcing capabilities.

    Product-centric ERP Service-centric ERP
    What it is The product-centric ERP is suitable for organizations that manufacture, assemble, distribute, or manage material goods throughout a product lifecycle. ERP vendors and/or products that align to this use case usually cater to industries such as manufacturing, retail, aerospace and defense, distribution, and food and beverage. The service-centric ERP use case is suitable for organizations that provide and manage field services and/or professional services throughout a project lifecycle. ERP vendors and/or products that align to this use case usually cater to industries such as utilities, maintenance and repair, government, education, and professional services (i.e. consulting, legal).
    How it works Product-centric ERP has strong functionality in supply chain management, manufacturing, procurement management, and material job and project management. Service-centric ERP has strong functionality in resource job and project management, service management, and customer relationship management.

    EAS table stakes vs differentiating features

    Make sure features align with your objectives first.

    What are table stakes / standard features?

    • For every type of EAS, such as ERP, HRIS, and CRM, certain features are standard, but that doesn’t mean they are all equal.
    • The existence of features doesn’t guarantee quality or functionality to the standards you need. Never assume that yes in a features list means you don’t need to ask for a demo.

    What is differentiating/additional feature?

    • Differentiating features take two forms:
      • Some platforms offer differentiating features that are vertical specific.
      • Other platforms offer differentiating features that are considered cutting edge. These cutting-edge features may become table stakes over time.
    • These features may increase productivity but also require process changes.

    Info-Tech Insight
    If table stakes are all you need from your EAS solution, the only true differentiator for the organization is price. Otherwise, dig deeper to find the best price to value for your needs. Remove the product from your shortlist if table stakes are not met!

    Reign-In Ballooning Scope for EAS Selection Projects

    Stretching the EAS beyond its core capabilities is a short-term solution for a long-term problem. Educate stakeholders about the limits of EAS technology.

    Common pitfalls for EAS selection

    • Tangential capabilities may require separate solutions. It is common for stakeholders to list features such as content management as part of the new EAS platform. While content management goes hand in hand with the EAS’s ability to manage customer interactions, document management is best handled by a standalone platform.

    Keeping stakeholders engaged and in line

    • Ballooning scope leads to stakeholder dissatisfaction. Appeasing stakeholders by over customizing the platform will lead to integration and headaches down the road.
    • Make sure stakeholders feel heard. Do not turn down ideas in the midst of an elicitation session. Once the requirements gathering sessions are completed, the project team has the opportunity to mark requirements as “out of scope”, and communicate the reasoning behind the decision.
    • Educate stakeholders on the core functionality of EAS. Many stakeholders do not know the best-fit use cases for EAS platforms. Help end users understand what EAS is good at, and where additional technologies will be needed.

    Phase 3

    Engage, Evaluate, and Finalize Selection

    Phase 1
    1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
    1.2 Validate Readiness
    1.3 Determine Resourcing

    Phase 2
    2.1 Capability Mapping
    2.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
    2.3 Requirements Prioritizing

    Phase 3
    3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
    3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
    3.3 Evaluation Select and Negotiate

    Phase 4
    4.1 Prepare for Implementation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    In this phase of the project, you will review your RFx and build an initial list of vendors/implementors to reach out to. The final step is to build your evaluation checklist for rating the incoming responses.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project including:

    • Evaluation team
    • Vendor management team
    • Project management team
    • Core project team

    Select an Enterprise Application

    Products and vendors demystified

    Knowing who can provide the solution will shorten the selection process and provide the most suitable set of features.

    The Product The Vendor The VAR
    A product is the software, hardware, add-ins, and any value-added services or tools that are bundled together, e.g. SAP Rise (see What is RISE with SAP), SAP S4/HANA, etc. A vendor can carry and sell multiple products or lines of products (e.g. Oracle sells Oracle Fusion and NetSuite, etc.). The Value-added reseller (VAR) can sell a pre-packaged / pre-configured product. VARs are usually partners of the vendor and typically provide other packaged services including system hosting, customization, implementation, and integrations.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Selecting an Enterprise Application is much more than just selecting a software or product; it is selecting a long-term platform and partner to help achieve long-term strategic goals. Refer to our blueprint Select an ERP Implementation Partner.

    Consolidating the vendor shortlist up-front reduces downstream effort

    Put the “short” back in shortlist!

    • Radically reduce effort by narrowing the field of potential vendors earlier in the selection process. Too many organizations don’t funnel their vendor shortlist until near the end of the selection process. The result is wasted time and effort evaluating options that are patently not a good fit.
    • Leverage external data (such as SoftwareReviews) and expert opinion to consolidate your shortlist into a smaller number of viable vendors before the investigative interview stage, and eliminate time spent evaluating dozens of RFP responses.
    • Having fewer RFP responses to evaluate means you will have more time to do greater due diligence.

    Review your use cases to start your shortlist

    Your Info-Tech analysts can help you narrow down the list of vendors that will meet your requirements.

    Next steps will include:

    1. Reviewing your requirements.
    2. Checking out SoftwareReviews.
    3. Creating the RFP.
    4. Conducting demos and detailed proposal reviews.
    5. Selecting and contracting with a finalist!

    Evaluate software category leaders through vendor rankings and awards

    SoftwareReviews

    The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

    The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

    Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

    Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals.

    Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization.

    Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process.

    User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

    SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech.

    Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech, and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. The insights of our expert analysts provide unparalleled support to our members at every step of their buying journey.

    CLICK HERE to access SoftwareReviews

    Comprehensive software reviews to make better IT decisions.

    We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    Case Study

    Manufacturer and retailer utilizes Info-Tech for goal of unifying four separate ERP systems

    INDUSTRY
    Manufacturing

    SOURCE
    Info-Tech Consulting

    Challenge Solution Results

    An amalgamation of eight different manufacturing, retail, and supply brands that operated four separate ERP systems and processes across the United States had poor visibility into operations.

    The organization had plans to unify the brands from a systems perspective and accommodate the company’s growth in a scalable and repeatable way.

    Info-Tech was previously engaged to perform an Establish a Concrete ERP Foundation workshop to set the groundwork for the eventual ERP selection.

    The organization engaged Info-Tech’s consulting group to assist in requirements gathering and RFP development.

    Info-Tech consultants traveled to five different states to gather ERP requirements from stakeholders and identify solution requirements.

    Info-Tech developed an ERP requirements matrix from the organization’s processes, including technical requirements and operations/support services.

    Info-Tech matched the organization with a use case and weighted requirements to assist in future scoring.

    An RFP was constructed using the organization’s requirements. and distributed to 10 qualified vendors for completion.

    Strengthen your RFP process with a thorough review

    Drive better sourcing outcomes.

    A quality SOW is the result of a quality RFI/RFP (RFx).

    Use Info-Tech’s RFP Review as a Service to review key items and ensure your RFP will generate quality responses and SOWs.

    • Is it well structured, with a consistent use of fonts and bullets?
    • Is it laid out in sections that are easily identifiable and that progress from high-level to more detailed information?
    • Can a vendor quickly identify the ten (or fewer) things that are most important to you?

    Contact Us

    3.2.1 Prepare the RFP

    1-2 hours

    1. Download Info-Tech’s ERP Request for Proposal Template or prepare internal best-practice RFP tools.
    2. Build your RFP.
      1. Complete the statement of work and general information sections to provide organizational context to your long-listed vendors.
      2. Outline the organization’s procurement instructions for vendors, including due diligence, assessment criteria, and dates.
      3. Input the business requirements document as created in Activity 1.3.1.
      4. Create a scenario overview to provide vendors with an opportunity to give an estimated price.
    3. Obtain approval for your RFP. Each organization has a unique procurement process; follow your own organization’s process as you submit your RFPs to vendors. Ensure compliance with your organization’s standard and gain approval for submitting your RFP.
    Input Output
    • Business requirements document
    • Procurement procedures
    • EAS RFP
    Materials Participants
    • Internal RFP tools/ templates (if available)
    • Info-Tech’s ERP RFP Template (optional)
    • Procurement SMEs
    • Project manager
    • Core project team (optional)

    Download the ERP Request for Proposal Template

    Streamline your evaluation of vendor responses

    Use Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template to standardize vendor responses.

    • Vendors tend to use their own standard templates when responding, which complicates evaluations.
    • Customize Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template to adjust for the scope and content of your project; input your organization’s procurement process and ERP requirements.
    • The template is meant to streamline the evaluation of vendor responses by ensuring you achieve comprehensiveness and consistency across all vendor responses. The template requires vendors to prove their organizational viability, understanding of the problem, and tested technology and implementation methodologies.

    Sections of the tool:

    1 Executive Summary

    2 About the Vendor

    3 Understanding of the Challenge

    4 Methodology

    5 Proposed Solution

    6 Project Plan and Timeline

    7 Vendor Qualifications

    8 References

    9 Additional Value-Added Services

    10 Additional Value-Added Goods

    For an explanation of how advanced features are determined, see Information Presentation – Feature Ranks (Stoplights) in the Appendix.

    What to look in vendor responses

    Vendor responses to an RFP can be very revealing about whether their product offering aligns with your EAS roadmap.

    Validate the vendor responses so that there are no misunderstandings with their offer. Here are key items to validate.

    Key items Why is this important?
    About the Vendor This is where the vendor will describe itself and prove its organizational viability.
    Understanding of the Challenge Demonstrating understanding of the problem is the first step in being able to provide a solution.
    Methodology Shows the vendor has a proven methodology to approach and solve the challenge.
    Proposed Solution Describes how the vendor will address the challenge. This is a very important section as it will articulate what you will receive from the vendor as a solution.
    Project Plan and Timeline Provides an overview of the project management methodology, phases of the project, and what will be delivered and when.
    Vendor Qualifications Provides evidence of prior experience with delivering similar projects for similar clients.
    References Provides contact information for individuals or organizations for which the vendor has worked and who can vouch for the experience and success of working with this vendor.
    Value-Added Services and Goods Allows vendors an opportunity to set themselves apart from the competition with additional services and/or goods applicable to your project but not covered elsewhere in the template.

    3.2.2 Build a vendor response template

    1-2 hours

    1. Download Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template.
    2. Validate that the provided template is comprehensive and will collect the information necessary for your organization to effectively evaluate the product and vendor and will inform a decision to invite the vendor in for a demonstration.
    3. Make the small customizations necessary to tailor the template to your organization (i.e. swap out “[Company X]” for your organization’s name).

    Download the ERP Vendor Response Template

    InputOutput
    • EAS RFP
    • ERP Vendor Response Template
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template
    • Procurement SMEs
    • Project manager
    • Core project team

    3.2.3 Evaluate RFP responses

    Varies

    1. Customize Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool to build a vendor and product evaluation framework for your EAS selection team.
    2. Review all RFP responses together with the core project team and stakeholders from procurement (if necessary).
    3. Input vendor solution information into the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool.
    4. Analyze the vendors against your evaluation framework by paying specific attention to costing, overall score, and evaluation notes and comments.
    5. Identify vendors with whom you wish to arrange vendor demonstration.
    6. Contact vendors and arrange briefings.
    InputOutput
    • EAS RFP
    • ERP Vendor Response Template
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Response Template
    • Procurement SMEs
    • Project manager
    • Core project team

    Download the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool

    Identify specific use cases and develop demonstration scenarios

    These techniques can be used to gather requirements now and for vendor demos during the evaluation stage.

    Describe use cases to indicate how the various processes will operate. This technique can help end-users describe what the solution must do without needing to know how to describe requirements. Outline scenarios based on these use cases for vendors to demonstrate how their solution can fulfill business requirements.

    Define
    Define objectives for each specific use case.

    Explore
    Explore the various process paths and alternate outcomes for each use case.

    Build
    Build the details of the scenarios to describe the roles of the people involved and the detailed process steps to be accomplished.

    Use
    For each scenario, outline the expected outputs and variations.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Do not exceed three vendors when selecting participants for a product demonstration. Each vendor demonstration should last between one day and one week, depending on the scope of the project. Exceeding the threshold of three vendors can be massively time consuming and yield diminishing returns.

    Conduct vendor demos that extend beyond baseline requirements

    • Demo scripts should focus on differentiating vendor processes and capabilities that contribute to achieving your business’ strategic objectives.
    • You want vendors to show you what differentiates them and what can they do that is specific to your industry.
    • Avoid focusing on baseline EAS capabilities. While this may drive consistency across demonstrations, you will not get a clear picture of how one vendor may align with your unique business needs.
    • Ask the vendor questions pertaining to the differentiating factors listed below. Consider if the differentiating factors are worthwhile over the baseline capabilities shown.
    Adhere to this framework when crafting your scenarios:
    Simple and straightforward Series of steps
    • A straightforward narrative of what you need the product to do.
    • Once written, scenarios should be circulated to key stakeholders in the organization for validation.
    • Demonstrate how a user would interact with the system.
    • Should not be an explanation of specific features/functions.
    Specific Suitable for your business
    • Demonstrate exactly what you need the system to do, but don’t get into implementation details – don’t go too far into the how.
    • Select only critical functions that must be demonstrated.
    • Scenarios should reflect current realities within the organization, while still allowing processes to be improved.

    Add your scenarios to Info-Tech’s sample EAS demo script

    Take a holistic approach to vendor and product evaluation

    Almost – or equally – as important as evaluating vendor feature capabilities is the need to evaluate vendor viability and non-functional aspects of the EAS solution. Include an evaluation of the following criteria in your vendor scoring methodology.

    Vendor capability Description
    Usability and Intuitiveness The degree to which the system interface is easy to use and intuitive to end users.
    Ease of IT Administration The degree to which the IT administrative interface is easy to use and intuitive to IT administrators.
    Ease of Data Integration The relative ease with which the system can be integrated with an organization’s existing application environment including legacy systems, point solutions, and other large enterprise applications.
    Ease of Customization The relative ease with which a system can be customized to accommodate niche or industry-specific business or functional needs.
    Vendor Support Options The availability of vendor support options including selection consulting, application development resources, implementation assistance, and ongoing support resources.
    Availability and Quality of Training The availability of quality training services and materials that will enable users to get the most out of the product selected.
    Product Strategy, Direction, and Rate of Improvement The vendor’s proven ability for constant product improvement, deliberate strategic direction, and overall commitment to research and development efforts in responding to emerging trends.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Evaluating the vendor capabilities, not just product capabilities, is particularly important with EAS solutions. EAS solutions are typically long-term commitments; ensure that your organization is teaming up with a vendor or provider that you feel you can work well with and depend on.

    Case Study

    Structured RFP and demo processes ease the pain of vendor evaluations during the selection phase.

    INDUSTRY
    Automotive

    SOURCE
    Research Interview

    Challenge Solution Results

    This company is one of the largest automotive manufacturers worldwide and has various manufacturing facilities and distribution centers across Canada.

    With over 8,000 employees, the company has a multifaceted health and safety program. While head office enabled and used the health and safety module within the existing HRIS, some divisions within the company found the system complex and were still relying heavily on manual entry spreadsheets for incident investigations. As a result, the company decided to explore other options.

    A project team was created, led by a project manager from head office’s IT department. The team also included health and safety specialists from across the organization, who served as subject matter experts.

    The team put together a project outline, a roadmap for required functionality, and a business case to present to senior leadership, highlighting benefits and potential payback.

    After acquiring executive sponsorship, the team developed a Request for Proposal that was sent to 11 vendors.

    Among the evaluation criteria set in the RFP, injury cost analysis and analytics on safety were identified as the most critical requirements. Based on this criteria, the team narrowed down the options to four RFP responses, which were opened to 16 different sites to ensure consensus across the company.

    The team developed demo scripts to guide the product demonstrations. They also built evaluation scorecards that were used to narrow down the selection to two vendors. Ultimately, the final selection decision came down to how well the vendors’ teams knew the business, and the vendor that demonstrated greater industry expertise was selected.

    3.2.4 Build a demo script for product demonstration evaluation

    1-2 hours

    1. With the EAS selection team, use Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Demonstration Script, HRIS Vendor Demonstration Script, or CRM Vendor Demonstration Script to write a demo script that reflects your organization’s EAS needs.
    2. Outline the logistics of the demonstration in the Introduction section of the template. Be sure to outline the total length of the demo and the amount of time that should be dedicated to the following:
      1. Product demonstration in response to the demo script.
      2. Showcase of unique product elements, not reflective of the demo script.
      3. Question and answer session.
      4. Breaks and other potential interruptions.
    3. Provide prompts for the vendor to display the capabilities by listing and describing usage scenarios by functional area. For example, when asking a vendor to demonstrate financial and accounting management capabilities, you may break scenarios out by task (e.g. general ledger, accounts payable) or user role (e.g. finance manager, administrator).

    Info-Tech Insight
    Challenge vendor project teams during product demonstrations. Asking the vendor to make adjustments or customizations on the fly will allow you to get an authentic feel for product capability and flexibility and for the degree of adaptability of the vendor project team. Ask the vendor to demonstrate how to do things not listed in your user scenarios, such as change system visualizations or design, change underlying data, add additional data sets, demonstrate collaboration capabilities, or trace an audit trail.

    3.2.4 Build a demo script for product demonstration evaluation

    Before the actual demonstrations, remember to communicate to the team the scenarios to be covered. Distribute the scripts ahead of the demonstrations so that the evaluation team know what is expected from the vendors.

    Input Output
    • Business requirements document
    • Logistical considerations
    • Usage scenarios by functional area
    • EAS demo script
    Materials Participants
    • Info-Tech’s ERP Vendor Demonstration Script, HRIS Vendor Demonstration Script, or CRM Vendor Demonstration Script
    • Business analyst(s)
    • Core project team

    A vendor scoring model provides a clear anchor point for your evaluation of EAS vendors based on a variety of inputs

    A vendor scoring model is a systematic method for effectively assessing competing vendors. A weighted-average scoring model is an approach that strikes a strong balance between rigor and evaluation speed.

    How do I build a scoring model? What are some of the best practices?
    • Start by shortlisting the key criteria you will use to evaluate your vendors. Functional capabilities should always be a critical category, but you’ll also want to look at criteria such as affordability, architectural fit, and vendor viability.
    • Depending on the complexity of the project, you may break down some criteria into sub-categories to assist with evaluation (for example, breaking down functional capabilities into constituent use cases so you can score each one).
    • One you’ve developed the key criteria for your project, the next step is weighting each criteria. Your weightings should reflect the priorities for the project at hand. For example, some projects may put more emphasis on affordability, others on vendor partnership.
    • Using the information collected in the subsequent phases of this blueprint, score each criteria from 1-100, then multiply by the weighting factor. Add up the weighted scores to arrive at the aggregate evaluation score for each vendor on your shortlist.
    • While the criteria for each project may vary, it’s helpful to have an inventory of repeatable criteria that can be used across application selection projects. The next slide contains an example that you can add or subtract from.
    • Don’t go overboard on the number of criteria: five to ten weighted criteria should be the norm for most projects. The more criteria (and sub-criteria) you must score against, the longer it will take to conduct your evaluation. Always remember – link the level of rigor to the size and complexity of your project! It’s possible to create a convoluted scoring model that takes significant time to fill out but yields little additional value.
    • Creation of the scoring model should be a consensus-driven activity between IT, procurement, and the key business stakeholders – it should not be built in isolation. Everyone should agree on the fundamental criteria and weights that are employed.
    • Consider using not just the outputs of investigative interviews and RFP responses to score vendors, but also third-party review services like SoftwareReviews.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Even the best scoring model will still involve some “art” rather than science – scoring categories such as vendor viability always entail a degree of subjective interpretation.

    Establish vendor evaluation criteria

    Vendor demonstrations are an integral part of the selection process. Having clearly defined selection criteria will help with setting up relevant demos and informing the vendor scorecards.

    Vendor evaluation criteria (weight)

    Functionality (30%) Ease of Use (25%)
    • Breadth of capability
    • Tactical capability
    • Operational capability
    • End-user usability
    • Administrative usability
    • UI attractiveness
    • Self-service options
    Cost (15%) Vendor (15%)
    • Maintenance
    • Support
    • Licensing
    • Implementation (internal and external costs)
    • Support model
    • Customer base
    • Sustainability
    • Product roadmap
    • Proof of concept
    • Implementation model
    Technology (15%)
    • Configurability options
    • Customization requirements
    • Deployment options
    • Security and authentication
    • Integration environment
    • Ubiquity of access (mobile)

    Info-Tech Insight
    Do not buy something that does not fit your functional needs just because it is the cheapest. ERP is a massive, long-term investment. If you purchase a system that does not contain the functionality that meets the organization’s business needs, not only will you face issues with user adoption, but you may also face having to revisit your ERP project down the road. In the end, this will cost you more than it will save you.

    Conduct client reference interviews to identify how other organizations have successfully used the vendor’s solution

    Request references from the vendors. Make sure the vendors deliver what they promise.

    Vendors are inevitably going to provide references that will give positive feedback, but don’t be afraid to dig into the interviews to understand some of the limitations related to the solution.

    • Even if a vendor is great for one client doesn’t necessarily mean it will fit for you. Ask the vendor to provide references from organizations in your own or a similar industry or from someone who has automated similar business processes or outlined similar expectations.
    • Use these reference calls as an opportunity to gain a more accurate understanding of the quality of the vendor’s service support and professional services.
    • If you are looking to include a high level of customization in your EAS solution, pay particular attention to this step and the client responses, as these will help you understand how easy a vendor is to work with.
    • Make the most of your client reference interviews by preparing your questions in advance and following a specific script.

    Sample Reference Check Questions

    Use Info-Tech’s Sample Reference Check Questions to provide a framework and starting point for your interviews with a vendor’s previous clients. Review the questions and customize to fit your needs.

    Determine costs of the solution

    Ensure the business case includes both internal and external costs related to the new EAS platform, allocating costs of project managers to improve accuracy of overall costs and level of success.

    EAS solutions include application costs and costs to design processes, install, and configure. These start-up costs can be a significant factor in whether the initial purchase is feasible.

    EAS vendor costs Internal costs
    • Application licensing
    • Implementation and configuration
    • Professional services
    • Maintenance and support
    • Training
    • Third-party add-ons
    • Data transformation
    • Integration
    • Project management
    • Business readiness
    • Change management
    • Resourcing (user groups, design/consulting, testing)
    • Training
    • Auditors (if regulatory requirements need vetting)
    When thinking about vendor costs, also consider the matching internal cost associated with the vendor activity (e.g. data cleansing, internal support). Project management is a top-five critical success factor at all stages of an enterprise application initiative from planning to post-implementation (Information Systems Frontiers). Ensuring that costs for such critical areas are accurately represented will contribute to success.

    Bring in the right resources to guarantee success. Work with the PMO or project manager to get creating the SOW.

    60% of IT projects are not finished “mostly or always” on time (Wellingtone, 2018).

    55% of IT personnel feel that the business objectives of their software projects are clear to them (Geneca, 2017).

    Download the blueprint Improve Your Statements of Work to Hold Your Vendors Accountable to define requirements for installation and configuration.

    3.3.1 Establish your evaluation criteria

    Time required varies

    Customize Info-Tech’s RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool to build an evaluation framework for vendor responses based on set criteria rather than relative comparisons.

    This tool allows you to evaluate whether your organization’s requirements have been met by the vendor RFP response and provides a location for comprehensive documentation of the RFP response and demonstration details, including costing and availability/quality of product features, architecture, and vendor support.

    Finally, the tool gives you the ability to evaluate your shortlisted vendors’ demonstrations.

    InputOutput
    • Business requirements document
    • Logistical considerations
    • Usage scenarios by functional area
    • EAS evaluation criteria
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool
    • Procurement SMEs
    • Core project team

    3.3.1 Establish your evaluation criteria

    Time required varies

    1. With the EAS selection team, brainstorm a list of criteria against which you are going to evaluate each vendor and product.
    2. Categorize each criteria into four to eight groups.
    3. Assign ranked weightings to each category of evaluation criteria. The weightings should add up to 100%. Be sure to identify which criteria are most important to your team by assigning higher weightings to those criteria. If you are having trouble assigning ranked weightings to criteria, take your team through an exercise of ranking pairs. For example, if deciding on the ranked importance of cost, ease of use, and vendor support, break down the discussion by addressing just two criteria at a time: “Between cost and ease of use, which is more important?” If cost is selected… “Between cost and vendor support, which is more important?” If cost is selected again, decide on your second and third rankings by addressing the remaining two criteria… “Between vendor support and ease of use, which is more important?”
    4. Document the final output from this activity as an input to your EAS selection. Optionally, record it in Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool.

    Download the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool

    Info-Tech Insight
    Do not reveal your evaluation criteria to vendors. Allowing vendors to see what matters most to your organization may sway their response and/or demo. Avoid this by keeping your decided evaluation criteria and weightings among your selection team only.

    3.3.2 Evaluate vendor product demonstrations

    Time required varies

    1. Using the demonstration script and vendor criteria previously established, customize Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool to build a scorecard that quickly evaluates vendor product demonstrations.
    2. Distribute the scorecard to every member of the team who is evaluating a particular demonstration.
    3. Evaluate each vendor product demonstration using the tool.
    4. Average all scores from each vendor demonstration to inform your selection decision. Note that the vendor with the highest overall score may not necessarily be the best fit for your organization.
    Input Output
    • Demonstration script
    • Evaluation criteria
    • ERP demonstration vendor scores
    Materials Participants
    • Info-Tech’s EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool
    • Core project team

    Download the EAS RFP and Demonstration Scoring Tool

    Decision Point: Select the Finalist

    After reviewing all vendor responses to your RFP, conducting vendor demos, and running a pilot project (if applicable) – the time has arrived to select your finalist.

    All core selection team members should hold a session to score each shortlisted vendor against the criteria enumerated on the previous slide, based on an in-depth review of proposals, the demo sessions, and any pilots or technical assessments.

    The vendor that scores the highest in aggregate is your finalist.

    Congratulations – you are now ready to proceed to final negotiation and inking a contract. This blueprint provides a detailed approach on the mechanics of a major vendor negotiation.

    Get the best value out from your EAS vendor. Negotiate on your own terms.

    Here are a few tips common to EAS vendors and its offerings.

    Vendors will give time-limited discounts to obtain your buy-in.

    • Depending on your procurement process, it is good practice to have at least two competing vendors in the running to obtain the best value.
    • Make sure that the package offered is coherent – that there are no gaps in the product offering.
    • Ask for access to a higher level of customer care or even developers to obtain quicker, specific support
    • Inquire about specific support and patching service, especially if you have customizations.
    • Ask for additional hours for training and support, pre- and post- implementation.
    • Think long-term – you want to have a good working relationship over the long haul, with a vendor that fits with your overall strategy, and not have to repeat and negotiate often.

    Use Info-Tech’s vendor services

    Info-Tech’s vendor management services has price benchmarks as well knowledgeable advisors who can help evaluate proposals to obtain the best value

    Speak to a vendor management services’ advisor today.

    Contact Us

    Communicate to the vendor whether they were accepted or rejected

    Communicate with each vendor following the demonstration and product evaluation. Ask follow-up questions, highlight areas of concern, and inform them of their status in the selection process.

    The RFP process is a standard business practice. As a customer, you are not under any obligation to educate the vendor as to the details of acceptance or rejection. However, consider every point of contact as an opportunity to build a strong network of potential vendors to help you acquire the best products for your organization.

    Use Info-Tech’s Vendor Communication Set template to communicate with the vendor following the demonstration and product evaluations. This set includes:

    Rejection Notice: Inform the vendor that they are no longer under consideration and highlight opportunities for future debrief.

    Approval Notice: Inform the vendor of its progress to the next stage of selection and identify next steps.

    Go to this link

    Phase 4

    Prepare for Implementation

    Phase 1
    1.1 Enterprise Application Landscape
    1.2 Validate Readiness
    1.3 Determine Resourcing

    Phase 2
    2.1 Capability Mapping
    2.2 Requirements Gathering Data Mapping
    2.3 Requirements Prioritizing

    Phase 3
    3.1 Understanding Product Offerings
    3.2 RFP & Demo Scripts
    3.3 Evaluation Select and Negotiate

    Phase 4
    4.1 Prepare for Implementation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Discussion on what it takes to transition to a proper implementation.

    Key stakeholders from the various areas of the business that will support the project including:

    • Project management team
    • Core project team

    Select an Enterprise Application

    Leverage Info-Tech’s research to plan and execute your EAS implementation

    Use Info-Tech Research Group’s three-phase implementation process to guide your own planning.

    Assess

    Prepare

    Govern and course correct

    Establish and execute an end-to-end, agile framework to succeed with the implementation of a major enterprise application.

    Visit this link

    External resources are available for implementations

    Organizations rarely have sufficient internal staffing to resource an EAS project on their own. Consider the options for closing the gap in internal resource availability.

    The most common project resourcing structures for enterprise projects are:

    Your own staff +

    1 Management Consultant

    2 Vendor Consultant

    3 System Integrator

    Consider the following:

    Internal vs. External Roles and Responsibilities

    Clearly delineate between internal and external team responsibilities and accountabilities, and communicate this to your technology partner upfront.

    Internal vs. External Accountabilities

    Accountability is different than responsibility. Your vendor or SI partner may be responsible for completing certain tasks, but be careful not to outsource accountability for the implementation – ultimately, the internal team will be accountable.

    Partner Implementation Methodologies

    Often vendors and/or SIs will have their own preferred implementation methodology. Consider the use of your partner's implementation methodology; however, you know what will work for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight
    When contemplating a resourcing structure, consider:

    • Availability of in-house implementation competencies and resources.
    • Timeline and constraints.
    • Integration environment complexity.

    Review your options for external resources

    Narrow your search for a management consultant, vendor consultant, or system integrator partner by understanding under which circumstances each would be most appropriate.

    When to choose… Management consultant Vendor consultant System integrators
    • There is an existing and trusted relationship.
    • Scope of work includes consideration of internal IT operations, costing, etc.
    • Organization requires external industry expertise for strategy formulation.
    • They will have a role in overall change management within the enterprise.
    • There are no concerns with overall IT processes or capabilities.
    • The project scope is restricted to a single technology or application.
    • There is minimal integration with other systems.
    • The consultant has no role in business process change.
    • They will be a specialist reporting to other consultants.
    • Project includes products from different vendors or multiple add-ons.
    • Extensive integration is required with legacy or other applications.
    • They will be responsible for outsourced operational support or development following implementation.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Depending on your internal resourcing constraints and IT maturity, you may need to work with multiple partners. If this is the case, just be aware that working with multiple partners can complicate vendor relationship management and makes having a dedicated vendor or partner relationship manager even more important.

    4.1.1 Establish team composition

    1 – 2 hours

    Utilize Info-Tech’s Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation to establish your team composition. Within that blueprint:

    1. Assess the skills necessary for an implementation. Inventory the competencies required for the implementation project team. Map your internal resources to each competency as applicable.
    2. Select your internal implementation team. Determine who needs to be involved closely with the implementation. Key stakeholders should also be considered as members of your implementation team.
    3. Identify the number of external consultants/support required for implementation. Consider your in-house skills, timeline considerations, integration environment complexity, and cost constraints as you make your team composition plan. Be sure to dedicate an internal resource to managing the vendor and partner relationships.
    4. Document the roles and responsibilities, accountabilities, and other expectations of your team as they relate to each step of the implementation.
    Input Output
    • Skills assessment
    • Stakeholder analysis
    • Vendor partner selection
    • Team composition
    Materials Participants
    • Sticky notes
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Project Team

    Governance and Management of Enterprise Software Implementation

    Follow our iterative methodology with a task list focused on the business must-have functionality to achieve rapid execution and to allow staff to return to their daily work sooner.

    Visit this link

    Ensure your implementation team has a high degree of trust and communication

    If external partners are needed, dedicate an internal resource to managing the vendor and partner relationships.

    Communication Proximity Trust
    Teams must have some type of communication strategy. This can be broken into:
    • Regularity: Having a set time each day to communicate progress and a set day to conduct retrospectives.
    • Ceremonies: Injecting awards and continually emphasizing delivery of value can encourage relationship building and constructive motivation.
    • Escalation: Voicing any concerns and having someone responsible for addressing those concerns.
    Distributed teams create complexity as communication can break down. This can be mitigated by:
    • Location: Placing teams in proximity can close the barrier of geographical distance and time zone differences.
    • Inclusion: Making a deliberate attempt to pull remote team members into discussions and ceremonies.
    • Communication tools: Having the right technology (e.g. video conference) can help bring teams closer together virtually.
    Members should trust that other members are contributing to the project and completing their required tasks on time. Trust can be developed and maintained by:
    • Accountability: Having frequent quality reviews and feedback sessions. As work becomes more transparent, people become more accountable.
    • Role clarity: Having a clear definition of what everyone’s role is.

    Create a formal communication process throughout the EAS implementation

    Establish a comprehensive communication process around the EAS enterprise roll-out to ensure that end users stay informed.

    The EAS kick-off meeting(s) should encompass:

    • Target business-user requirements
    • Target quality of service (QoS) metrics
    • Other IT department needs
    • Special consideration needs
    • Tangible business benefits of application
    • The high-level application overview

    The overall objective for inter-departmental EAS kick-off meetings is to confirm that all parties agree on certain key points and understand platform rationale and functionality.

    The kick-off process will significantly improve internal communications by inviting all affected internal IT groups, including business units, to work together to address significant issues before the application process is formally activated.

    Department groups or designated trainers should take the lead and implement a process for:

    • Scheduling EAS platform roll-out/kick-off meetings.
    • Soliciting preliminary input from the attending groups to develop further training plans.
    • Establishing communication paths and the key communication agents from each department who are responsible for keeping lines open moving forward.

    Plan for your implementation of EAS based on deployment model

    Place your EAS solution into your IT landscape by configuring and adjusting the tool based on your specific deployment method.

    On-Premises SaaS-based
    1. Identify custom features and configuration items
    2. Train developers and IT staff on new software investment
    3. Install software
    4. Configure software
    5. Test installation and configuration
    6. Test functionality
    1. Train developers and IT staff on new software investment
    2. Set up connectivity
    3. Identify VPN or internal solution
    4. Check firewalls
    5. Validate bandwidth regulations

    Integration is a top IT challenge and critical to the success of the EAS solution

    EAS solutions are most effective when they are integrated with ERP, HRIS, and CRM solutions.

    Data interchange between the EAS solution and other data sources is necessary Formulate a comprehensive map of the systems, hardware, and software with which the EAS solution must be able to integrate. Master data needs to constantly be synchronized; without this, you lose out on one of the primary benefits of integration. These connections should be bidirectional for maximum value (i.e. marketing data to the CRM, customer data to MMS).
    Specialized projects that include an intricate prospect or customer list and complex rules may need to be built by IT The more custom fields you have in your EAS and point solutions, the more schema mapping you will have to do. Include this information in the RFP to receive guidance from vendors regarding the ease with which integration can be achieved.
    Pay attention to legacy apps and databases If you have a legacy EAS and databases, more custom code will be required. Many vendors claim that custom integrations can be performed for most systems, but custom comes at a cost. Don’t just ask if they can integrate; ask how long it will take and for references from organizations which have been successful in this.

    Scenario: Failure to address EAS data integration will cost you in the long run

    A company spent $15 million implementing a new CRM system in the cloud and decided NOT to spend an additional $1.5 million to do a proper cloud DI tool procurement. The mounting costs followed.

    Cost element – Custom Data Integration $
    2 FTEs for double entry of sales order data $ 100,000/year
    One-time migration of product data to CRM $ 240,000 otc
    Product data maintenance $ 60,000/year
    Customer data synchronization interface build $ 60,000 otc
    Customer data interface maintenance $ 10,000/year
    Data quality issues $ 100,000/year
    New SaaS integration built in year 3 $ 300,000 otc
    New SaaS integration maintenance $ 150,000/year
    Cost element – Data Integration Tool $
    DI strategy and platform implementation $1,500,000 otc
    DI tool maintenance $ 15,000/year
    New SaaS integration point in year 3 $ 300,000 otc

    Comparison of Solution TCOs Chart

    Custom integration is costing this organization $300,000/year for one SaaS solution.

    The proposed integration solution would have paid for itself in 3-4 years and saved exponential costs in the long run.

    Proactively address data quality in the EAS during implementation

    Data quality is a make-or-break issue in an EAS platform; garbage in is garbage out.

    • EAS solutions are one of the leading offenders for generating poor quality data. As such, it’s important to have a plan in place for structuring your data architecture in such a way that poor data quality is minimized from the get-go.
    • Having a plan for data quality should precede data migration efforts; some types of poor data quality can be mitigated prior to migration.
    • There are five main types of poor-quality data found in EAS platforms.
      • Duplicate data: Duplicate records can be a major issue. Leverage dedicated de-dupe tools to eliminate them.
      • Stale data: Out-of-date customer information can reduce the usefulness of the platform. Use automated social listening tools to help keep data fresh.
      • Incomplete data: Records with missing info limit platform value. Specify data validation parameters to mandate that all fields are filled in.
      • Invalid and conflicting data: Can create cascading errors. Establishing conflict resolution rules in ETL tools for data integration can reduce issues.

    Info-Tech Insight
    If you have a complex EAS environment, appoint data stewards for each major domain and procure a de-dupe tool. As the complexity of EAS system-to-system integrations increase, so will the chance that data quality errors will crop up – for example, bi-directional POI with other sources of customer information dramatically increase the chances of conflicting/duplicate data.

    Profile data, eliminate dead weight, and enforce standards to protect data

    Identify and eliminate dead weight Poor data can originate in the firm’s EAS system. Custom queries, stored procedures, or profiling tools can be used to assess the key problem areas.
    Loose rules in the EAS system lead to records of no significant value in the database. Those rules need to be fixed, but if changes are made before the data is fixed, users could encounter database or application errors, which will reduce user confidence in the system.
    • Conduct a data flow analysis: map the path that data takes through the organization.
    • Use a mass cleanup to identify and destroy dead weight data. Merge duplicates either manually or with the aid of software tools. Delete incomplete data, taking care to reassign related data.
    • COTS packages typically allow power users to merge records without creating orphaned records in related tables, but custom-built applications typically require IT expertise.
    Create and enforce standards and policies Now that the data has been cleaned, it’s important to protect the system from relapsing.
    Work with business users to find out what types of data require validation and which fields should have changes audited. Whenever possible, implement drop-down lists to standardize values and make programming changes to ensure that truncation ceases.
    • Truncated data is usually caused by mismatches in data structures during either one-time data loads or ongoing data integrations.
    • Don’t go overboard on assigning required fields; users will just put key data in note fields.
    • Discourage the use of unstructured note fields: the data is effectively lost except if it gets subpoenaed.

    Info-Tech Insight
    Data quality concerns proliferate with the customization level of your platform. The more extensive the custom integration points and module/database extensions that you have made, the more you will need to have a plan in place for managing data quality from a reactive and proactive standpoint.

    Ensure requirements are met with robust user acceptance testing

    User acceptance testing (UAT) is a test procedure that helps to ensure end-user requirements are met. Test cases can reveal bugs before the suite is implemented.

    Five secrets of UAT success

    1 Create the plan With the information collected from requirements gathering, create the plan. Make sure this information is added to the main project plan documentation.
    2 Set the agenda The time allotted will vary depending on the functionality being tested. Ensure that the test schedule allows for the resolution of issues and discussion.
    3 Determine who will participate Work with relevant stakeholders to identify the people who can best contribute to system testing. Look for experienced power users who have been involved in earlier decision making about the system.
    4 Highlight acceptance criteria With the UAT group, pinpoint the criteria to determine system acceptability. Refer to requirements specified in use cases in the initial requirements-gathering stages of the project.
    5 Collect end user feedback Weaknesses in resolution workflow design, technical architecture, and existing customer service processes can be highlighted and improved with ongoing surveys and targeted interviews.

    Calculate post-deployment metrics to assess measurable value of the project

    Track the post-deployment results from the project and compare the metrics to the current state and target state.

    EAS selection and implementation metrics
    Description Formula Current or estimated Target Post-deployment
    End-user satisfaction # of satisfied users
    # of end users
    70% 90% 85%
    Percentage over/under estimated budget Amount spent – 100%
    Budget
    5% 0% 2%
    Percentage over/under estimated timeline Project length – 100%
    Estimated timeline
    10% -5% -10%
    EAS strategy metrics
    Description Formula Current or estimated Target Post-deployment
    Number of leads generated (per month) # of leads generated 150 200 250
    Average time to resolution (in minutes) Time spent on resolution
    # of resolutions
    30 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes
    Cost per interaction by campaign Total campaign spending
    # of customer interactions
    $17.00 $12.00 $12.00

    Continue to adapt your governance model

    Your EAS and applications environment will continue to evolve. Make sure your governance model is always ready to capture the everchanging needs.

    Business needs will not stop changing whether you have an ongoing EAS or other application project. It is thus important to keep your governance efficient and streamlined to capture these needs to then make the EAS continue deliver value and remain aligned to long-term corporate objectives.

    Visit this link

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Select an Enterprise Application

    EAS technology is critical to facilitating an organization’s flow of information across business units. It allows for seamless integration of systems and creates a holistic view of the enterprise to support decision making. Having a structured approach to gathering the necessary resources, defining key requirements, and engaging with the right shortlist of vendors to pick the best finalist is crucial.

    This selection guide allows organizations to execute a structured methodology for picking an EAS that aligns with their needs. This includes:

    • Alignment and prioritization of key business and technology drivers for an EAS selection.
    • Identification and prioritization of the EAS requirements.
    • Construction of a robust EAS RFP.
    • A strong market scan of key players.
    • A survey of crucial implementation considerations.

    This formal EAS selection initiative will drive business-IT alignment, identify data and integration priorities, and allow for the rollout of a platform that’s highly likely to satisfy all stakeholder needs.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors

    Name Title Organization
    Anonymous Anonymous Telecommunications industry
    Anonymous Anonymous Construction material industry
    Anonymous Anonymous Automotive industry
    Corey Tenenbaum Head of IT Taiga Motors
    Mark Earley Director, Consulting Info-Tech Research Group
    Ricardo di Olivera Research Director, Enterprise Applications Info-Tech Research Group

    Bibliography

    “2016 Report on ERP Systems and Enterprise Software.” Panorama Consulting Solutions, 2016. Web.

    “2018 Report on ERP Systems and Enterprise Software.” Panorama Consulting Solutions, 2018. Web.

    “2022 HRIS Software Report.” SoftwarePath, 2022 . Web

    Cross-Industry Process Classification Framework (PCF) Version 7.2.1. APQC, 26 Sept. 2019. Web.

    “Doomed From the Start? Why a Majority of Business and IT Teams Anticipate Their Software Development Projects Will Fail.” Geneca, 25 Jan. 2017. Web.

    Farhan, Marwa Salah, et al. “A Systematic Review for the Determination and Classification of the CRM Critical Success Factors Supporting with Their Metrics.” Future Computing and Informatics Journal, vol. 3, no. 2, Dec. 2018, pp. 398–416.

    Gheorghiu, Gabriel. “ERP Buyer’s Profile for Growing Companies.” SelectHub, 23 Sept. 2022. Web

    “Process Frameworks.” APQC, 4 Nov. 2020. Web.

    “Process vs. Capability: Understanding the Difference.” APCQ, 2017. Web.

    Savolainen, Juha, et al. “Transitioning from Product Line Requirements to Product Line Architecture.” 29th Annual International Computer Software and Applications Conference (COMPSAC'05), IEEE, vol. 1, 2005, pp. 186-195, doi: 10.1109/COMPSAC.2005.160

    Saxena, Deepak, and Joe McDonagh. "Evaluating ERP Implementations: The Case for a Lifecycle based Interpretive Approach." Electronic Journal of Information Systems Evaluation 22.1 (2019): pp29-37.

    “SOA Reference Architecture – Capabilities and the SOA RA.” The Open Group, TOGAF, n.d. Web.

    Smith, Anthony. “How To Create A Customer-Obsessed Company Like Netflix.” Forbes, 12 Dec. 2017. Web.

    "The Moscow Method", MindTools. Web.

    “The State of CRM Data Management 2020.” Validity, 2020. Web.

    “The State of Project Management Annual Survey 2018.” Wellingtone, 2018. Web.

    “Why HR Projects Fail.” Unleash, 2021. Web

    Application Development Quality

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}26|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}26|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Applications
    • Parent Category Link: /applications
    Apply quality assurance across your critical development process steps to secure quality to product delivery

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}58|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 10 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Impact and Result

    Use Info-Tech’s ready-made dashboards for executives to ensure you:

    • Speak to the right audience
    • About the right things
    • In the right quantity
    • Using the right measures
    • At the right time.

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish High-Value IT Performance Metrics and Dashboards – a document that walks you through Info-Tech’s ready-made IT dashboards.

    This blueprint guides you through reviewing Info-Tech’s IT dashboards for your audience and organization, then walks you through practical exercises to customize the dashboards to your audience and organization. The blueprint also gives practical guidance for delivering your dashboards and actioning your metrics.

    • Establish High-Value IT Performance Metrics and Dashboards Storyboard

    2. Info-Tech IT Dashboards and Guide – Ready-made IT dashboards for the CIO to communicate to the CXO.

    IT dashboards with visuals and metrics that are aligned and organized by CIO priority and that allow you to customize with your own data, eliminating 80% of the dashboard design work.

    • Info-Tech IT Dashboards and Guide

    3. IT Dashboard Workbook – A step-by-step tool to identify audience needs, translate needs into metrics, design your dashboard, and track/action your metrics.

    The IT Dashboard Workbook accompanies the Establish High Value IT Metrics and Dashboards blueprint and guides you through customizing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to your audience, crafting your messages, delivering your dashboards to your audience, actioning metrics results, and addressing audience feedback.

    • Info-Tech IT Dashboards Workbook

    4. IT Metrics Library

    Reference the IT Metrics Library for ideas on metrics to use and how to measure them.

    • IT Metrics Library

    5. HR Metrics Library

    Reference the HR Metrics Library for ideas on metrics to use and how to measure them.

    • HR Metrics Library

    Infographic

    Workshop: Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Test Info-tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs and Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    The Purpose

    Introduce the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to give the participants an idea of how they can be used in their organization.

    Understand the importance of starting with the audience and understanding audience needs before thinking about data and metrics.

    Explain how audience needs translate into metrics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of where to begin when it comes to considering dashboards and metrics (the audience).

    Identified audience and needs and derived metrics from those identified needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the info-Tech IT Dashboards and document impressions for your organization.

    1.2 Identify your audience and their attributes.

    1.3 Identify timeline and deadlines for dashboards.

    1.4 Identify and prioritize audience needs and desired outcomes.

    1.5 Associate metrics to each need.

    1.6 Identify a dashboard for each metric.

    Outputs

    Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards.

    Completed Tabs 2 and 3 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    2 Inventory Your Data and Assess Data Quality and Readiness

    The Purpose

    Provide guidance on how to derive metrics and assess data.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the importance of considering how you will measure each metric and get the data.

    Understand that measuring data can be costly and that sometimes you just can’t afford to get the measure or you can’t get the data period because the data isn’t there.

    Understand how to assess data quality and readiness.

    Activities

    2.1 Complete a data inventory for each metric on each dashboard: determine how you will measure the metric, the KPI, any observation biases, the location of the data, the type of source, the owner, and the security/compliance requirements.

    2.2 Assess data quality for availability, accuracy, and standardization.

    2.3 Assess data readiness and the frequency of measurement and reporting.

    Outputs

    Completed Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    3 Design and Build Your Dashboards

    The Purpose

    Guide participants in customizing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with the data identified in previous steps.

    This step may vary as some participants may not need to alter the Info-Tech IT Dashboards other than to add their own data.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of how to customize the dashboards to the participants’ organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Revisit the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and use the identified metrics to determine what should change in them.

    3.2 Build your dashboards by editing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your changes as planned in Step 3.1.

    Outputs

    Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs.

    Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Finalized dashboards.

    4 Deliver Your Dashboard and Plan to Action Metrics

    The Purpose

    Guide participants in learning how to create a story around the dashboards.

    Guide participants in planning to action metrics and where to record results.

    Guide participants in how to address results of metrics and feedback from audience about dashboards.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Participants understand how to speak to their dashboards.

    Participants understand how to action metrics results and feedback about dashboards.

    Activities

    4.1 Craft your story.

    4.2 Practice delivering your story.

    4.3 Plan to action your metrics.

    4.4 Understand how to record and address your results.

    Outputs

    Completed Tabs 6 and 7 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    5 Next Steps and Wrap-Up

    The Purpose

    Finalize work outstanding from previous steps and answer any questions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Participants have thought about and documented how to customize the Info-Tech IT Dashboards to use in their organization, and they have everything they need to customize the dashboards with their own metrics and visuals (if necessary).

    Activities

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Outputs

    Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization.

    Completed IT Dashboard Workbook

    Further reading

    Establish High-Value IT Performance Dashboards and Metrics

    Spend less time struggling with visuals and more time communicating about what matters to your executives.

    Analyst Perspective

    A dashboard is a communication tool that helps executives make data-driven decisions

    CIOs naturally gravitate toward data and data analysis. This is their strength. They lean into this strength, using data to drive decisions, track performance, and set targets because they know good data drives good decisions.

    However, when it comes to interpreting and communicating this complex information to executives who may be less familiar with data, CIOs struggle, often falling back on showing IT activity level data instead of what the executives care about. This results in missed opportunities to tell IT’s unique story, secure funding, reveal important trends, or highlight key opportunities for the organization.

    Break through these traditional barriers by using Info-Tech’s ready-made IT dashboards. Spend less time agonizing over visuals and layout and more time concentrating on delivering IT information that moves the organization forward.

    Photo of Diana MacPherson
    Diana MacPherson
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    While most CIOs understand the importance of using metrics to measure IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress, when it comes to creating dashboards to communicate these metrics, they:

    • Concentrate on the data instead of the audience.
    • Display information specific to IT activities instead of showing how IT addresses business goals and problems.
    • Use overly complicated, out of context graphs that crowd the dashboard and confuse the viewer.

    Common Obstacles

    CIOs often experience these challenges because they:

    • Have a natural bias toward data and see it as the whole story instead of a supporting character in a larger narrative.
    • Assume that the IT activity metrics that are easy to get and useful to them are equally interesting to all their stakeholders.
    • Do not have experience communicating visually to an audience unfamiliar with IT operations or lingo.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Use Info-Tech’s ready-made dashboards for executives to ensure you:

    • Speak to the right audience
    • About the right things
    • In the right quantity
    • Using the right measures
    • At the right time

    Info-Tech Insight

    The purpose of a dashboard is to drive decision making. A well designed dashboard presents relevant, clear, concise insights that help executives make data-driven decisions.

    Your challenge

    CIOs struggle to select the right metrics and dashboards to communicate IT’s accomplishments, needs, and progress to their executives. CIOs:

    • Fail to tailor metrics to their audience, often presenting graphs that are familiar and useful to them, but not their executives. This results in dashboards full of IT activities that executives neither understand nor find valuable.
    • Do not consider the timeliness of their metrics, which has the same effect as not tailoring their metrics: the executives do not care about the metrics they are shown.
    • Present too many metrics, which not only clutters the board but also dilutes the message the CIO needs to communicate.
    • Do not act on the results of their metrics and show progress, which makes metrics meaningless. Why measure something if you won’t act on the results?

    The bottom line: CIOs often communicate to the wrong audience, about the wrong things, in the wrong amount, using the wrong metrics, at the wrong time.

    In a survey of 500 executives, organizations that struggled with dashboards identified the reasons as:
    61% Inadequate context
    54% Information overload

    — Source: Exasol

    CXOs and CIOs agree that IT performance metrics need improvement

    When asked which performance indicators should be implemented in your business, CXOs and CIOs both agree that IT needs to improve its metrics across several activity areas: technology performance, cost and salary, and risk.

    A diagram that shows performance indicators and metrics from cxo and cio.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards center key metrics around these activities ensuring you align your metrics to the needs of your CXO audience.

    Info-Tech CEO/CIO Alignment Survey Benchmark Report n=666

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by the top CIO priorities

    The top six areas that a CIO needs to prioritize and measure outcomes, no matter your organization or industry, are:

    • Managing to a budget: Reducing operational costs and increasing strategic IT spend
    • Customer/constituent satisfaction: Directly and indirectly impacting customer experience.
    • Risk management: Actively knowing and mitigating threats to the organization.
    • Delivering on business objectives: Aligning IT initiatives to the vision of the organization.
    • Employee engagement: Creating an IT workforce of engaged and purpose-driven people.
    • Business leadership relations: Establishing a network of influential business leaders.

    Deliver High-Value IT Dashboards to Your Executives

    A diagram that shows Delivering High-Value IT Dashboards to Your Executives

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Deliver High-Value Dashboards to Your Executives

    A diagram that shows High-Value Dashboard Process.

    Executives recognize the benefits of dashboards:
    87% of respondents to an Exasol study agreed that their organization’s leadership team would make more data-driven decisions if insights were presented in a simpler and more understandable way
    (Source: Exasol)

    The Info-Tech difference:

    We created dashboards for you so you don’t have to!

    1. Eliminate 80% of the dashboard design work by selecting from our ready-made Info-Tech IT Dashboards.
    2. Use our IT Dashboard Workbook to adjust the dashboards to your audience and organization.
    3. Follow our blueprint and IT Dashboard Workbook tool to craft, and deliver your dashboard to your CXO team, then action feedback from your audience to continuously improve.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for establishing high-value dashboards

    1. Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs

    Phase Steps

    1. Validate Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience
    2. Identify and Document Your Audience’s Needs

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    2. Completed Tabs 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    2. Translate Audience Needs into Metrics

    Phase Steps

    1. Review Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience
    2. Derive Metrics from Audience Needs
    3. Associate metrics to Dashboards

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Tab 3 of IT Dashboard Workbook

    3. Ready Your Data for Dashboards

    Phase Steps

    1. Assess Data Inventory
    2. Assess Data Quality
    3. Assess Data Readiness
    4. Assess Data Frequency

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs
    2. Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook
    3. Finalized dashboards

    4. Build and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Phase Steps

    1. Design Your Dashboard
    2. Update Your Dashboards
    3. Craft Your Story and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Tab 5 and 6 of IT Dashboard Workbook and finalized dashboards

    5. Plan, Record, and Action Your Metrics

    Phase Steps

    1. Plan How to Record Metrics
    2. Record and Action Metrics

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization
    2. Completed IT Dashboard Workbook

    How to Use This Blueprint

    Choose the path that works for you

    A diagram that shows path of using this blueprint.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards address several needs:

    1. New to dashboards and metrics and not sure where to begin? Let the phases in the blueprint guide you in using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards to create your own dashboards.
    2. Already know who your audience is and what you want to show? Augment the Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards framework with your own data and visuals.
    3. Already have a tool you would like to use? Use the Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards as a design document to customize your tool.

    Insight Summary

    The need for easy-to-consume data is on the rise making dashboards a vital data communication tool.

    70%: Of employees will be expected to use data heavily by 2025, an increase from 40% in 2018.
    — Source: Tableau

    Overarching insight

    A dashboard’s primary purpose is to drive action. It may also serve secondary purposes to update, educate, and communicate, but if a dashboard does not drive action, it is not serving its purpose.

    Insight 1

    Start with the audience. Resist the urge to start with the data. Think about who your audience is, what internal and external environmental factors influence them, what problems they need to solve, what goals they need to achieve, then tailor the metrics and dashboards to suit.

    Insight 2

    Avoid showing IT activity-level metrics. Instead use CIO priority-based metrics to report on what matters to the organization. The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by the CIO priorities: risks, financials, talent, and strategic initiatives.

    Insight 3

    Dashboards show the what not the why. Do not assume your audience will draw the same conclusions from your graphs and charts as you do. Provide the why by interpreting the results, adding insights and calls to action, and marking key areas for discussion.

    Insight 4

    A dashboard is a communication tool and should reflect the characteristics of good communication. Be clear, concise, consistent, and relevant.

    Insight 5

    Action your data. Act and report progress on your metrics. Gathering metrics has a cost, so if you do not plan to action a metric, do not measure it.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Photo of Dashboards

    Key deliverable: Dashboards

    Ready-made risk, financials, talent, and strategic initiatives dashboards that organize your data in a visually appealing way so you can concentrate on the metrics and communication.

    Photo of IT Dashboard Workbook

    IT Dashboard Workbook

    The IT Dashboard Workbook keeps all your metrics, data, and dashboard work in one handy file!

    Photo of IT Dashboard Guide

    IT Dashboard Guide

    The IT Dashboard Guide provides the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and information about how to use them.

    Blueprint benefits

    CIO Benefits

    • Reduces the burden of figuring out what metrics to show executives and how to categorize and arrange the visuals.
    • Increases audience engagement through tools and methods that guide CIOs through tailoring metrics and dashboards to audience needs.
    • Simplifies CIO messages so executives better understand IT needs and value.
    • Provides CIOs with the tools to demonstrate transparency and competency to executive leaders.
    • Provides tools and techniques for regular review and action planning of metrics results, which leads to improved performance, efficiency, and effectiveness.

    Business Benefits

    • Provides a richer understanding of the IT landscape and a clearer connection of how IT needs and issues impact the organization.
    • Increases understanding of the IT team’s contribution to achieving business outcomes.
    • Provides visibility into IT and business trends.
    • Speeds up decision making by providing insights and interpretations to complex situations.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Realize measurable benefits after using Info-Tech’s approach:

    Determining what you should measure, what visuals you should use, and how you should organize your visuals, is time consuming. Calculate the time it has taken you to research what metrics you should show, create the visuals, figure out how to categorize the visuals, and layout your visuals. Typically, this takes about 480 hours of time. Use the ready-made Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook to quickly put together a set of dashboards to present your CXO. Using these tools will save approximately 480 hours.

    A study at the University of Minnesota shows that visual presentations are 43% more effective at persuading their audiences (Bonsignore). Estimate how persuasive you are now by averaging how often you have convinced your audience to take a specific course of action. After using the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and visual story telling techniques described in this blueprint, average again. You should be 43% more persuasive.

    Further value comes from making decisions faster. Baseline how long it takes, on average, for your executive team to make a decision before using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards then time how long decisions take when you use your Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. Your audience should reach decisions 21% faster according to studies at Stanford University and the Wharton School if business (Bonsignore).

    Case Study

    Visuals don’t have to be fancy to communicate clear messages.

    • Industry: Construction
    • Source: Anonymous interview participant

    Challenge

    Year after year, the CIO of a construction company attended business planning with the Board to secure funding for the year. One year, the CEO interrupted and said, “You're asking me for £17 million. You asked me for £14 million last year and you asked me for £12 million the year before that. I don't quite understand what we get for our money.”

    The CEO could not understand how fixing laptops would cost £17 million and for years no one had been able to justify the IT spend.

    Solutions

    The CIO worked with his team to produce a simple one-page bubble diagram representing each IT department. Each bubble included the total costs to deliver the service, along with the number of employees. The larger the bubble, the higher the cost. The CIO brought each bubble to life as he explained to the Board what each department did.

    The Board saw, for example, that IT had architects who thought about the design of a service, where it was going, the life cycle of that service, and the new products that were coming out. They understood what those services cost and knew how many architects IT had to provide for those services.

    Recommendations

    The CEO remarked that he finally understood why the CIO needed £17 million. He even saw that the costs for some IT departments were low for the amount of people and offered to pay IT staff more (something the CIO had requested for years).

    Each year the CIO used the same slide to justify IT costs and when the CIO needed further investment for things like security or new products, an upgrade, or end of life support, the sign-offs came very quickly because the Board understood what IT was doing and that IT wasn't a bottomless pit.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation
    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop
    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting
    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A diagram that shows Guided Implementation in 5 phases.

    Workshop overview

    Day 1: Test Info-tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs and Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    Activities
    1.1 Review the info-Tech IT Dashboards and document impressions for your organization.
    1.2 Identify your audience’s attributes.
    1.3 Identify timeline and deadlines for dashboards.
    1.4 Identify and prioritize audience needs and desired outcomes.
    1.5 Associate metrics to each need.
    1.6 Identify a dashboard for each metric.

    Deliverables
    1. Initial impressions of Info-Tech IT Dashboards.
    2. Completed Tabs 2 and 3 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 2: Inventory Your Data; Assess Data Quality and Readiness

    Activities
    2.1 Complete a data inventory for each metric on each dashboard: determine how you will measure the metric, the KPI, any observation biases, the location of the data, the type of source, and the owner and security/compliance requirements.
    2.2 Assess data quality for availability, accuracy, and standardization.
    2.3 Assess data readiness and frequency of measurement and reporting.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 3: Design and Build Your Dashboards

    Activities
    3.1 Revisit the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and use the identified metrics to determine what should change on the dashboards.
    3.2 Build your dashboards by editing the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your changes as planned in Step 3.1.

    Deliverables
    1. Assessed Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience’s needs.
    2. Completed Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    3. Finalized dashboards.

    Day 4: Deliver Your Dashboard and Plan to Action Metrics

    Activities
    4.1 Craft your story.
    4.2 Practice delivering your story.
    4.3 Plan to action your metrics.
    4.4 Understand how to record and address your results.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed Tabs 6 and 7 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Day 5: Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities
    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days
    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Completed IT Dashboards tailored to your organization.
    2. Completed IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    What is an IT dashboard?

    A photo of Risks - Protect the Organization. A photo of Financials: Transparent, fiscal responsibility
    A photo of talent attrat and retain top talent A photo of Strategic Initiatives: Deliver Value to Customers.

    An IT dashboard is…
    a visual representation of data, and its main purpose is to drive actions. Well-designed dashboards use an easy to consume presentation style free of clutter. They present their audience with a curated set of visuals that present meaningful metrics to their audience.

    Dashboards can be both automatically or manually updated and can show information that is dynamic or a snapshot in time.

    Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Review the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    We created dashboards so you don’t have to.

    A photo of Risks - Protect the Organization. A photo of Financials: Transparent, fiscal responsibility A photo of talent attrat and retain top talent A photo of Strategic Initiatives: Deliver Value to Customers.

    Use the link below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and consider the following:

    1. What are your initial reactions to the dashboards?
    2. Are the visuals appealing? If so, what makes them appealing?
    3. Can you use these dashboards in your organization? What makes them usable?
    4. How would you use these dashboards to speak your own IT information to your audience?

    Download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Why Use Dashboards When We Have Data?

    How graphics affect us

    Cognitively

    • Engage our imagination
    • Stimulate the brain
    • Heighten creative thinking
    • Enhance or affect emotions

    Emotionally

    • Enhance comprehension
    • Increase recollection
    • Elevate communication
    • Improve retention

    Visual clues

    • Help decode text
    • Attract attention
    • Increase memory

    Persuasion

    • 43% more effective than text alone

    — Source: (Vogel et al.)

    Phase 1

    Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Documenting impressions for using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for your audience.
    • Documenting your audience and their needs and metrics for your IT dashboards

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Info-Tech IT Dashboard organization and audience

    We created a compelling way to organize IT dashboards so you don’t have to. The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO Priorities, and these are consistent irrespective of industry or organization. This is a constant that you can organize your metrics around.

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Dashboard Customization

    The categories represent a constant around which you can change the order; for example, if your CXO is more focused on Financials, you can switch the Financials dashboard to appear first.

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards are aimed at a CXO audience so if your audience is the CXO, then you may decide to change very little, but you can customize any visual to appeal to your audience.

    Phase 1 will get you started with your audience.

    Always start with the audience

    …and not the data!

    Reliable, accurate data plays a critical role in dashboards, but data is only worthwhile if it is relevant to the audience who consumes it, and dashboards are only as meaningful as the data and metrics they represent.

    Instead of starting with the data, start with the audience. The more IT understands about the audience, the more relevant the metrics will be to their audience and the more aligned leadership will be with IT.

    Don’t forget yourself and who you are. Your audience will have certain preconceived notions about who you are and what you do. Consider these when you think about what you want your audience to know.

    46% executives identify lack of customization to individual user needs as a reason they struggle with dashboards.
    — Source: (Exasol)

    Resist the Data-First Temptation

    If you find yourself thinking about data and you haven’t thought about your audience, pull yourself back to the audience.

    Ask first Ask later
    Who is this dashboard for? What data should I show?
    How will the audience use the dashboard to make decisions? Where do I get the data?
    How can I show what matters to the audience? How much effort is required to get the data?

    Meaningful measures rely on understanding your audience and their needs

    It is crucial to think about who your audience is so that you can translate their needs into metrics and create meaningful visuals for your dashboards.

    A diagram that highlights step 1-3 of understanding your audience in the high-value dashboard process.

    Step 1.1

    Review and Validate Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards for Your Audience

    Activities:
    1.1.1 Examine Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 1.1 & 1.2 to Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Info-Tech dashboards reviewed for your organization’s audience.

    1.1.1 Examine the Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    30 minutes

    1. If you haven’t already downloaded the Info-Tech IT Dashboards, click the link below to download.
    2. Complete a quick review of the dashboards and consider how your audience would receive them.
    3. Document your thoughts, with special emphasis on your audience in the Info-Tech Dashboard Impressions slide.

    A diagram that shows Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Reviewing visuals can help you think about how your audience will respond to them

    Jot down your thoughts below. You can refer to this later as you consider your audience.

    Consider:

    • Who is your dashboard audience?
    • Are their needs different from the Info-Tech IT Dashboard audience’s? If so, how?
    • Will the visuals work for your audience on each dashboard?
    • Will the order of the dashboards work for your audience?
    • What is missing?

    Step 1.2

    Identify and Document Your Audience’s Needs

    Activities:
    1.2.1 Document your audience’s needs in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 1.1 & 1.2 to Test Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards Against Your Audience’s Needs.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Audience details documented in IT Dashboard Workbook

    Identify Your Audience and dig deeper to understand their needs

    Connect with your audience

    • Who is your audience?
    • What does your audience care about? What matters to them?
    • How is their individual success measured? What are their key performance indicators (KPIs)?
    • Connect the challenges and pain points of your audience to how IT can help alleviate those pain points:
      • For example, poor financial performance could be due to a lack of digitization. Identify areas where IT can help alleviate this issue.
      • Try to uncover the root cause behind the need. Root causes are often tied to broad organizational objectives, so think about how IT can impact those objectives.

    Validate the needs you’ve uncovered with the audience to ensure you have not misinterpreted them and clarify the desired timeline and deadline for the dashboard.

    Document audiences and needs on Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    Typical Audience Needs
    Senior Leadership
    • Inform strategic planning and track progress toward objectives.
    • Understand critical challenges.
    • Ensure risks are managed.
    • Ensure budgets are managed.
    Board of Directors
    • Understand organizational risks.
    • Ensure organization is fiscally healthy.
    Business Partners
    • Support strategic workforce planning.
    • Surface upcoming risks to workforce.
    CFO
    • IT Spend
    • Budget Health and Risks

    Prioritize and select audience needs that your dashboard will address

    Prioritize needs by asking:

    • Which needs represent the largest value to the entire organization (i.e. needs that impact more of the organization than just the audience)?
    • Which needs will have the largest impact on the audience’s success?
    • Which needs are likely to drive action (e.g. if supporting a decision, is the audience likely to be amenable to changing the way they make that decision based on the data)?

    Select three to five of the highest priority needs for each audience to include on a dashboard.

    Prioritize needs on Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook

    A diagram that shows 3 tiers of high priority, medium priority, and low priority.

    1.2.1 Document Your Audience Needs in the IT Dashboard Workbook

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 2. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove after you have completed your updates.

    A table of documenting audience, including key attributes, desired timeline, deadline, needs, and priority.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Phase 2

    Translate Audience Needs Into Metrics

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Revisiting the Info-Tech IT Dashboards for your audience.
    • Documenting your prioritized audience’s needs and the desired outcome of each in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Linking audience needs to metrics has positive outcomes

    When you present metrics that your audience cares about, you:

    • Deliver real value and demonstrate IT’s value as a trusted partner.
    • Improve the relationship between the business and IT.
    • Enlighten the business about what IT does and how it is connected to the organization.

    29% of respondents to The Economist Intelligence Unit survey cited inadequate collaboration between IT and the business as one of the top barriers to the organization’s digital objectives.
    — Source: Watson, Morag W., et al.

    Dashboard Customization

    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards use measures for each dashboard that correspond with what the audience (CXO) cares about. You can find these measures in the IT Dashboard Workbook. If your audience is the CXO, you may have to change a little but you should still validate the needs and metrics in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Phase 2 covers the process of translating needs into metrics.

    Once you know what your audience needs, you know what to measure

    A diagram that highlights step 4-5 of knowing your audience needs in the high-value dashboard process.

    Step 2.1

    Document Desired Outcomes for Each Prioritized Audience Need

    Activities:
    2.1.1 Compare the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with your audience’s needs.
    2.1.2 Document prioritized audience needs and the desired outcome of each in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Understanding of how well Info-Tech IT Dashboards address audience needs.
    • Documented desired outcomes for each audience need.

    2.1.1 Revisit Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards and Review for Your Audience

    30 minutes

    1. If you haven’t already downloaded the Info-Tech IT Dashboards, click the link below to download.
    2. Click the link below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook.
    3. Recall your first impressions of the dashboards that you recorded on earlier in Phase 1 and open up the audience and needs information you documented in Tab 2 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    4. Compare the dashboards with your audience’s needs that you documented on Tab 2.
    5. Record any updates to your thoughts or impressions on the next slide. Think about any changes to the dashboards that you would make so that you can reference it when you build the dashboards.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    The Info-Tech IT Dashboards contain a set of monthly metrics tailored toward a CXO audience.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Knowing what your audience needs, do the metrics the visuals reflect address them?

    Any changes to the Info-Tech IT Dashboards?

    Consider:

    • Are your audience’s needs already reflected in the visuals in each of the dashboards? If so, validate this in the next activity by reviewing the prioritized needs, desired outcomes, and associated metrics already documented in the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    • Are there any visuals your audience would need that you don’t see reflected in the dashboards? Write them here to use in the next exercise.

    Desired outcomes make identifying metrics easier

    When it’s not immediately apparent what the link between needs and metrics is, brainstorm desired outcomes.

    A diagram that shows an example of desired outcomes

    2.1.2 Document your audience’s desired outcome per prioritized need

    Now that you’ve examined the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and considered the needs of your audience, it is time to understand the outcomes and goals of each need so that you can translate your audience’s needs into metrics.

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 3. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove it after you have completed your updates.

    A diagram that shows desired outcome per prioritized need

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Deriving Meaningful Metrics

    Once you know the desired outcomes, you can identify meaningful metrics

    A diagram of an example of meaningful metrics.

    Common Metrics Mistakes

    Avoid the following oversights when selecting your metrics.

    A diagram that shows 7 metrics mistakes

    Step 2.2

    Derive Metrics From Audience Needs

    Activities:
    2.2.1 Derive metrics using the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented metrics for audience needs.

    2.2.1 Derive metrics from desired outcomes

    Now that you have completed the desired outcomes, you can determine if you are meeting those desired outcomes. If you struggle with the metrics, revisit the desired outcomes. It could be that they are not measurable or are not specific enough.

    2 hours

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 3. The workbook contains pre-populated text that reflects information about Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the pre-populated text as reference as you identify your own audience then remove it after you have completed your updates.

    A diagram that shows derive metrics from desired outcomes

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Download IT Metrics Library

    Download HR Metrics Library

    Step 2.3

    Associate Metrics to Dashboards

    Activities:
    2.3.1 Review the metrics and identify which dashboard they should appear on.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 2.1 to 2.3 to translate audience needs into metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Metrics associated to each dashboard.

    2.3.1 Associate metrics to dashboards

    30 minutes

    Once you have identified all your metrics from Step 2.2, identify which dashboard they should appear on. As with all activities, if the Info-Tech IT Dashboard meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information.

    A diagram that shows associate metrics to dashboards

    Phase 3

    Ready Your Data for Dashboards

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Inventorying your data
    • Assessing your data quality
    • Determining data readiness
    • Determining data measurement frequency

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Can you measure your metrics?

    Once appropriate service metrics are derived from business objectives, the next step is to determine how easily you can get your metric.

    A diagram that highlights step 5 of measuring your metrics in the high-value dashboard process.

    Make sure you select data that your audience trusts

    40% of organizations say individuals within the business do not trust data insights.
    — Source: Experian, 2020

    Phase 3 covers the process of identifying data for each metric, creating a data inventory, assessing the readiness of your data, and documenting the frequency of measuring your data. Once complete, you will have a guide to help you add data to your dashboards.

    Step 3.1

    Assess Data Inventory

    Activities:
    3.1.1 Download the IT Dashboard Workbook and complete the data inventory section on Tab 4.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data inventory for each metric.

    3.1.1 Data Inventory

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 4. The pre-populated text is arranged into the tables according to the dashboard they appear on; you may need to scroll down to see all the dashboard tables.

    Create a data inventory by placing each metric identified on Tab 3 into the corresponding dashboard table. Complete each column as described below.

    A diagram that shows 9 columns of data inventory.

    Metrics Libraries: Use the IT Metrics Library and HR Metrics Library for ideas for metrics to use and how to measure them.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.2

    Assess Data Quality

    Activities:
    3.2.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to complete an assessment of data quality on Tab 4.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data quality assessment for each metric.

    3.2.1 Assess Data Quality

    1 hour

    Document the data quality on Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook by filling in the data availability, data accuracy, and data standardization columns as described below.

    A diagram that shows data availability, data accuracy, and data standardization columns.

    Data quality is a struggle for many organizations. Consider how much uncertainty you can tolerate and what would be required to improve your data quality to an acceptable level. Consider cost, technological resources, people resources, and time required.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.3

    Assess Data Readiness

    Activities:
    3.3.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to determine the readiness of your data.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to ready your data for dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented data readiness for each metric

    3.3.1 Determine Data Readiness

    1 hour

    Once the data quality has been documented and examined, complete the Data Readiness section of Tab 4 in the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook. Select a readiness classification using the definitions below. Use the readiness of your data to determine the level of effort required to obtain the data and consider the constraints and cost/ROI to implement new technology or revise processes and data gathering to produce the data.

    A diagram that shows data readiness section

    Remember: Although in most cases, simple formulas that can be easily understood are the best approach, both because effort is lower and data that is not manipulated is more trustworthy, do not abandon data because it is not perfect but instead plan to make it easier to obtain.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 3.4

    Assess Data Frequency

    Activities:
    3.4.1 Use the IT Dashboard Workbook to determine the readiness of your data and how frequently you will measure your data.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 3.1 to 3.4 to assess data inventory, quality, and readiness.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented frequency of measurement for each metric.

    3.4.1 Document Planned Frequency of measurement

    10 minutes

    Document the planned frequency of measurement for all your metrics on Tab 4 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    For each metric, determine how often you will need to refresh it on the dashboard and select a frequency from the drop down. The Info-tech IT Dashboards assume a monthly refresh.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Phase 4

    Build and Deliver Your Dashboards

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Designing your dashboards
    • Updating your dashboards
    • Crafting your story
    • Delivering your dashboards

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Using your dashboard to tell your story with visuals

    Now that you have linked metrics to the needs of your audience and you understand how to get your data, it is time to start building your dashboards.

    A diagram that highlights step 6 of creating meaningful visuals in the high-value dashboard process.

    Using visual language

    • Shortens meetings by 24%
    • Increases the ability to reach consensus by 21%
    • Strengthens persuasiveness by 43%

    — Source: American Management Association

    Phase 4 guides you through using the Info-Tech IT Dashboard visuals for your audience’s needs and your story.

    Step 4.1

    Design Your Dashboard

    Activities:
    4.1.1 Plan and validate dashboard metrics, data, level of effort and visuals.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Identified and validated metrics, data, and visuals for your IT dashboards.

    Use clear visuals that avoid distracting the audience

    Which visual is better to present?

    Sample A:
    A photo of Sample A visuals

    Sample B:
    A diagram Sample B visuals

    Select the appropriate visuals

    Identify the purpose of the visualization. Determine which of the four categories below aligns with the story and choose the appropriate visual to display the data.

    Relationship

    A photo of Scatterplots
    Scatterplots

    • Used to show relationships between two variables.
    • Can be difficult to interpret for audiences that are not familiar with them.

    Distribution

    A photo of Histogram
    Histogram

    • Use a histogram to show spread of a given numeric variable.
    • Can be used to organize groups of data points.
    • Requires continuous data.
    • Can make comparisons difficult.

    A photo of Scatterplot
    Scatterplot

    • Can show correlation between variables.
    • Show each data plot, making it easier to compare.

    Composition

    A photo of Pie chart
    Pie chart

    • Use pie charts to show different categories.
    • Avoid pie charts with numerous slices.
    • Provide numbers alongside slices, as it can be difficult to compare slices based on size alone.

    A photo of Table
    Table

    • Use tables when there are a large number of categories.
    • Presents information in a simple way.

    Comparison

    A photo of Bar graph
    Bar graph

    • Use to compare categories.
    • Easy to understand, familiar format.

    A photo of Line chart
    Line chart

    • Use to show trends or changes over time.
    • Clear and easy to analyze.

    (Calzon)

    Examples of data visualization

    To compare categories, use a bar chart:
    2 examples of bar chart
    Conclusion: Visualizing the spend in various areas helps prioritize.


    To show trends, use a line graph:
    An example of line graph.
    Conclusion: Overlaying a trend line on revenue per employee helps justify headcount costs.


    To show simple results, text is sometimes more clear:
    A diagram that shows examples of text and graphics.
    Conclusion: Text with meaningful graphics conveys messages quickly.


    To display relative percentages of values, use a pie chart:
    An example of pie chart.
    Conclusion: Displaying proportions in a pie chart gives an at-a-glance understanding of the amount any area uses.

    Choose effective colors and design

    Select colors that will enhance the story

    • Use color strategically to help draw the audience’s attention and highlight key information.
    • Choose two to three colors to use consistently throughout the dashboard, as too many colors will be distracting to the audience.
    • Use colors that connect with the audience (e.g., organization or department colors).
    • Don’t use colors that are too similar in shade or brightness level, as those with colorblindness might have difficulty discerning them.

    Keep the design simple and clear

    • Leave white space to separate sections and keep the dashboard simple.
    • Don’t measure everything; show just enough to address the audience’s needs.
    • Use blank space between data points to provide natural contrast (e.g., leaving space between each bar on a bar graph). Don’t rely on contrast between colors to separate data (Miller).
    • Label each data point directly instead of using a separate key, so anyone who has difficulty discerning color can still interpret the data (Miller).

    Example

    A example that shows colours and design of a chart.

    Checklist to build compelling visuals in your presentation

    Leverage this checklist to ensure you are creating the perfect visuals and graphs for your presentation.

    Checklist:

    • Do the visuals grab the audience’s attention?
    • Will the visuals mislead the audience/confuse them?
    • Do the visuals facilitate data comparison or highlight trends and differences in a more effective manner than words?
    • Do the visuals present information simply, cleanly, and accurately?
    • Do the visuals illustrate messages and themes from the accompanying text?

    4.1.1 Plan and validate your dashboard visuals

    1 hour

    Click the links below to download the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and the IT Dashboard Workbook. Open the IT Dashboard Workbook and select Tab 5. For each dashboard, represented by its own table, open the corresponding Info-Tech IT Dashboard as reference.

    A diagram of dashboard and its considerations when selecting visuals.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 4.2

    Update Your Dashboards

    Activities:
    4.2.1 Update the visuals on the Info-Tech IT Dashboards with data and visuals identified in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Dashboards updated with your visuals, metrics, and data identified in the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    4.2.1 Update visuals with your own data

    2 hours

    1. Get the data that you identified in Tab 4 and Tab 5 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.
    2. Click the link below to go to the Info-Tech IT Dashboards and follow the instructions to update the visuals.

    Do not worry about the Key Insights or Calls to Action; you will create this in the next step when you plan your story.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboards

    Step 4.3

    Craft Your Story and Deliver Your Dashboards

    Activities:
    4.3.1 Craft Your Story
    4.3.2 Finalize Your Dashboards
    4.3.3 Practice Delivering Your Story With Your Dashboards

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 4.1 to 4.3 to build and deliver your dashboards.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Documented situations, key insights, and calls to action for each dashboard/visual.
    • A story to tell for each dashboard.
    • Understanding of how to practice delivering the dashboards using stories.

    Stories are more easily understood and more likely to drive decisions

    IT dashboards are valuable tools to provide insights that drive decision making.

    • Monitor: Track and report on strategic areas IT supports.
    • Provide insights: sPresent important data and information to audiences in a clear and efficient way.

    “Data storytelling is a universal language that everyone can understand – from people in STEM to arts and psychology.” — Peter Jackson, Chief Data and Analytics Officer at Exasol

    Storytelling provides context, helping the audience understand and connect with data and metrics.

    • 93% of respondents (business leaders and data professionals) agreed that decisions made as a result of successful data storytelling have the potential to help increase revenue.
    • 92% of respondents agreed that data storytelling was critical to communicate insights effectively.
    • 87% percent of respondents agreed that leadership teams would make more data-driven decisions if insights gathered from data were presented more simply.

    — Exasol

    For more visual guidance, download the IT Dashboard Guide

    Include all the following pieces in your message for an effective communication

    A diagram of an effective message, including consistent, clearn, relevant, and concise.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Time is a non-renewable resource. The message crafted must be considered a value-adding communication to your audience.

    Enable good communication with these components

    Be Consistent

    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
    • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.

    Be Clear

    • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
    • Avoid jargon.

    Be Relevant

    • Talk about what matters to the audience.
    • Tailor the details of the message to the audience’s specific concerns.
    • IT thinks in processes but wider audiences focus mostly on results; talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be understood, but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “What’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.

    Be Concise

    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.
    • If you provide more information than necessary, the clarity and consistency of the message can be lost.

    Draft the core messages to communicate

    1. Hook your audience: Use a compelling introduction that ensures your target audience cares about the message. Start with a story or metaphor and then support with the data on your dashboard. Avoid rushing in with data first.
    2. Demonstrate you can help: Let the audience know that based on the unique problem, you can help. There is value in engaging and working with you further.
    3. Write for the ear: Use concise and clear sentences, avoid technological language, and when you read it aloud ensure it sounds like how you would normally speak.
    4. Interpret visuals for your audience: Do not assume they will reach the same conclusions as you. For example, walk them through what a chart shows even if the axes are labeled, tell them what a trend line indicates or what the comparison between two data points means.
    5. Identify a couple of key insights: Think about one or two key takeaways you want your audience to leave with.
    6. Finish with a call to action: Your concluding statement should not be a thank-you but a call to action that ignites how your audience will behave after the communication. Dashboards exist to drive decisions, so if you have no call to action, you should ask if you need to include the visual.

    4.3.1 Craft Your Story

    1 hour

    Click the link below to download the IT Dashboard Workbook and open the file. Select Tab 6. The workbook contains grey text that reflects a sample story about the Info-Tech IT Dashboards. You may want to keep the sample text as reference, then remove after you have entered your information.

    A diagram of dashboard to craft your story.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    4.3.2 Finalize Your Dashboards

    30 minutes

    1. Take the Key Insights and Calls to Action that you documented in Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook and place them in their corresponding dashboard.
    2. Add any text to your dashboard as necessary but only if the visual requires more information. You can add explanations more effectively during the presentation.

    A diagram that shows strategic initiatives: deliver value to customers.

    Tip: Aim to be brief and concise with any text. Dashboards simplify information and too much text can clutter the visuals and obscure the message.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    4.3.3 Practice Delivering Your Story With Your Dashboards

    1 hour

    Ideally you can present your dashboard to your audience so that you are available to clarify questions and add a layer of interpretation that would crowd out boards if added as text.

    1. To prepare to tell your story, consult the Situation, Key Insights, and Call to Action sections that you documented for each dashboard in Tab 6 of the Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook.
    2. Practice your messages as you walk through your dashboards. The next two slides provide delivery guidance.
    3. Once you deliver your dashboards, update Tab 6 with audience feedback. Often dashboards are iterative and when your audience sees them, they are usually inspired to think about what else they would like to see. This is good and shows your audience is engaged!

    Don’t overwhelm your audience with information and data. You spent time to craft your dashboards so that they are clear and concise, so spend time practicing delivering a message that matches your clear, concise dashboards

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Hone presentation skills before meeting with key stakeholders

    Using voice and body

    Think about the message you are trying to convey and how your body can support that delivery. Hands, stance, and frame all have an impact on what might be conveyed.

    If you want your audience to lean in and be eager about your next point, consider using a pause or softer voice and volume.

    Be professional and confident

    State the main points of your dashboard confidently. While this should be obvious, it needs to be stated explicitly. Your audience should be able to clearly see that you believe the points you are stating.

    Present in a way that is genuine to you and your voice. Whether you have an energetic personality or a calm and composed personality, the presentation should be authentic to you.

    Connect with your audience

    Look each member of the audience in the eye at least once during your presentation or if you are presenting remotely, look into the camera. Avoid looking at the ceiling, the back wall, or the floor. Your audience should feel engaged – this is essential to keeping their attention.

    Avoid reading the text from your dashboard, and instead paraphrase it while maintaining eye/camera contact.

    Info-Tech Insight

    You are responsible for the response of your audience. If they aren’t engaged, it is on you as the communicator.

    Communication Delivery Checklist

    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to team members or coaches?
    • Have you practiced delivering the communication to someone with little to no technology background?
    • Are you making yourself open to feedback and improvement opportunities?
    • If the communication is derailed from your plan, are you prepared to handle that change?
    • Can you deliver the communication without reading your notes word for word?
    • Have you adapted your voice throughout the communication to highlight specific components you want the audience to focus on?
    • Are you presenting in a way that is genuine to you and your personality?
    • Can you communicate the message within the time allotted?
    • Are you moving in an appropriate manner based on your communication (e.g., toward the screen, across the stage, hand gestures)
    • Do you have room for feedback on the dashboards? Solicit feedback with your audience after the meeting and record it in Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook.

    Phase 5

    Plan, record, and action your metrics

    A diagram that shows phase 1 to 5.

    This phase will walk you through the following:

    • Planning to track your metrics
    • Recording your metrics
    • Actioning your metrics

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Actioning your metrics to drive results

    To deliver real value from your dashboards, you need to do something with the results.

    Don’t fail on execution! The whole reason you labor to create inviting visuals and meaningful metrics is to action those metrics. The metrics results inform your entire story! It’s important to plan and do, but everything is lost if you fail to check and act.

    70%: of survey respondents say that managers do not get insights from performance metrics to improve strategic decision making.
    60%: of survey respondents say that operational teams do not get insights to improve operation decision making.

    (Bernard Marr)

    “Metrics aren’t a passive measure of progress but an active part of an organization’s everyday management….Applying the “plan–do–check–act” feedback loop…helps teams learn from their mistakes and identify good ideas that can be applied elsewhere”

    (McKinsey)

    Step 5.1

    Plan How to Record Metrics

    Activities:
    5.1.1 For each dashboard, add a baseline and target to existing metrics and KPIs.

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 5.1 to 5.2 to plan, record, and action your metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Baselines and targets identified and recorded for each metric.

    5.1.1 Identify Baselines and Targets

    1 hour

    To action your metrics, you must first establish what your baselines and targets are so that you can determine if you are on track.

    To establish baselines:
    If you do not have a baseline. Run your metric to establish one.

    To establish targets:

    • Use historical data and trends of performance.
    • If you do not have historical data, establish an initial target based on stakeholder-identified requirements and expectations.
    • You can also run the metrics report over a defined period of time and use the baseline level of achievement to establish an initial target.
    • The target may not always be a number – it could be a trend. The initial target may be changed after review with stakeholders.

    Actions for Success:
    How will you ensure you can get this metric? For example, if you would like to measure delivered value, to make sure the metric is measurable, you will need to ensure that measures of success are documented for an imitative and then measured once complete.

    • If you need help with Action plans, the IT Metrics Library includes action plans for all of its metrics that may help

    A diagram of identify metrics and to identify baselines and targets.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Step 5.2

    Record and Action Metrics

    Activities:
    5.2.1 Record and Action Results

    • Note, the Info-Tech IT Dashboards are organized by CIO priorities – Risk, Financials, Talent, and Strategic Initiatives – and address the needs of the CXO audience. The IT Dashboard Workbook is pre-populated with this information.
    • If this meets your audience’s needs, you do not have to edit this content and can instead use the pre-populated information. You may wish to review the information to ensure it is still valid for your audience.

    A diagram that shows step 5.1 to 5.2 to plan, record, and action your metrics.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Senior IT leadership
    • Dashboard SMEs

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Understanding of what and where to record metrics once run.

    5.2.1 Record and Action Results

    1 hour

    After analyzing your results, use this information to update your dashboards. Revisit Tab 6 of the IT Dashboard Workbook to update your story. Remember to record any audience feedback about the dashboards in the Audience Feedback section.

    Action your measures as well as your metrics

    What should be measured can change over time as your organization matures and the business environment changes. Understanding what creates business value for your organization is critical. If metrics need to be changed, record metrics actions under Identified Actions on Tab 7. A metric will need to be addressed in one of the following ways:

    • Added: A new metric is required or an existing metric needs large-scale changes (example: calculation method or scope).
    • Changed: A minor change is required to the presentation format or data. Note: a major change in a metric would be performed through the Add option.
    • Removed: The metric is no longer required, and it needs to be removed from reporting and data gathering. A final report date for that metric should be determined.
    • Maintained: The metric is still useful and no changes are required to the metric, its measurement, or how it’s reported.

    A diagram of record results and identify how to address results.

    Don’t be discouraged if you need to update your metrics a few times before you get it right. It can take some trial and error to find the measures that best indicate the health of what you are measuring.

    Download Info-Tech IT Dashboard Workbook

    Tips for actioning results

    Sometimes actioning your metrics results requires more analysis

    If a metric deviates from your target, you may need to analyze how to correct the issue then run the metric again to see if the results have improved.

    Identify Root Cause
    Root Cause Analysis can include problem exploration techniques like The 5 Whys, fishbone diagrams, or affinity mapping.

    Select a Solution
    Once you have identified a possible root cause, use the same technique to brainstorm and select a solution then re-run your metrics.

    Consider Tension Metrics
    Consider tension metrics when selecting a solution. Will improving one area affect another? A car can go faster but it will consume more fuel – a project can be delivered faster but it may affect the quality.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    1. Using this blueprint and the IT Dashboard Workbook, you validated and customized the dashboards for your audience and organization, which reduced or eliminated time spent searching for and organizing your own visuals.
    2. You documented your dashboards’ story so you are ready to present them to your audience.
    3. You assessed the data for your dashboards and you built a metrics action-tracking plan to maintain your dashboards’ metrics.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through an Info-Tech workshop or Guided Implementation.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    A photo of Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    Review the Info-Tech IT Dashboards
    Determine how you can use the Info-Tech IT Dashboards in your organization and the anticipated level of customization.

    A photo of the IT Dashboard Workbook
    Plan your dashboards
    Complete the IT Dashboard Workbook to help plan your dashboards using Info-Tech’s IT Dashboards.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of John Corrado
    John Corrado
    Head of IT
    X4 Pharmaceuticals

    As head of IT, John is charged with the creation of strategic IT initiatives that align with X4s vision, mission, culture, and long-term goals and is responsible for the organization’s systems, security, and infrastructure. He works closely developing partnerships with X4tizens across the organization to deliver value through innovative programs and services.

    Photo of Grant Frost
    Grant Frost
    Chief Information & Security Officer
    Niagara Catholic School Board

    Grant Frost is an experienced executive, information technologist and security strategist with extensive experience in both the public and private sector. Grant is known for, and has extensive experience in, IT transformation and the ability to increase capability while decreasing cost in IT services.

    Photo of Nick Scozzaro
    Nick Scozzaro
    CEO and Co-Founder of MobiStream and ShadowHQ
    ShadowHQ

    Nick got his start in software development and mobility working at BlackBerry where he developed a deep understanding of the technology landscape and of what is involved in both modernizing legacy systems and integrating new ones. Working with experts across multiple industries, he innovated, learned, strategized, and ultimately helped push the boundaries of what was possible.

    Photo of Joseph Sanders
    Joseph Sanders
    Managing Director of Technology/Cyber Security Services
    Kentucky Housing Corporation

    In his current role Joe oversees all IT Operations/Applications Services that are used to provide services and support to the citizens of Kentucky. Joe has 30+ years of leadership experience and has held several executive roles in the public and private sector. He has been a keynote speaker for various companies including HP, IBM, and Oracle.

    Photo of Jochen Sievert
    Jochen Sievert
    Director Performance Excellence & IT
    Zeon Chemicals

    Jochen moved to the USA from Duesseldorf, Germany in 2010 to join Zeon Chemicals as their IT Manager. Prior to Zeon, Jochen has held various technical positions at Novell, Microsoft, IBM, and Metro Management Systems.

    Info-Tech Contributors

    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst
    Donna Bales, Principal Research Director
    Shashi Bellamkonda, Principal Research Director
    John Burwash, Executive Counselor
    Tony Denford, Research Lead
    Jody Gunderman, Senior Executive Advisor
    Tom Hawley, Managing Partner
    Mike Higginbotham, Executive Counselor
    Valence Howden, Principal Research Director
    Dave Kish, Practice Lead
    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead
    Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director
    Gary Rietz, Executive Counselor
    Steve Schmidt, Senior Managing Partner
    Aaron Shum, Vice President, Security & Privacy
    Ian Tyler-Clarke, Executive Counselor

    Plus, an additional four contributors who wish to remain anonymous.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Photo of Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    Build an IT Risk Taxonomy

    Use this blueprint as a baseline to build a customized IT risk taxonomy suitable for your organization.

    Photo of Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    This blueprint will help you identify the KPIs that matter to your organization.

    Photo of Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    Develop Meaningful Service Metrics

    This blueprint will help you Identify the appropriate service metrics based on stakeholder needs.

    Photo of IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking

    IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking

    Use this benchmarking service to capture, analyze, and communicate your IT spending and staffing.

    Photo of Key Metrics for Every CIO

    Key Metrics for Every CIO

    This short research piece highlights the top metrics for every CIO, how those align to your CIO priorities, and action steps against those metrics.

    Photo of Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

    Present Security to Executive Stakeholders

    This blueprint helps you identify communication drivers and goals and collect data to support your presentation. It provides checklists for building and delivering a captivating security presentation.

    Bibliography

    “10 Signs You Are Sitting on a Pile of Data Debt.” Experian, n.d. Web.

    “From the What to the Why: How Data Storytelling Is Key to Success.” Exasol, 2021. Web.

    Bonsignore, Marian. “Using Visual Language to Create the Case for Change.” Amarican Management Association. Accessed 19 Apr. 2023.

    Calzon, Bernardita. “Top 25 Dashboard Design Principles, Best Practices & How To’s.” Datapine, 5 Apr. 2023.

    “Data Literacy.” Tableau, n.d. Accessed 3 May 2023.

    “KPIs Don’t Improve Decision-Making In Most Organizations.” LinkedIn, n.d. Accessed 2 May 2023.

    Miller, Amanda. “A Comprehensive Guide to Accessible Data Visualization.” Betterment, 2020. Accessed May 2022.

    “Performance Management: Why Keeping Score Is so Important, and so Hard.” McKinsey. Accessed 2 May 2023.

    Vogel, Douglas, et al. Persuasion and the Role of Visual Presentation Support: The UM/3M Study. Management Information Systems Research Center School of Management University of Minnesota, 1986.

    Watson, Morag W., et al. ”IT’s Changing Mandate in an Age of Disruption.” The Economist Intelligence Unit Limited, 2021.

    IT Risk management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}40|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}40|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk
    Mitigation is about balance: take a cost-focused approach to risk management.

    Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}527|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Rising customer expectations and competitive pressures have accelerated the pace at which organizations are turning to digital transformation to drive revenue or cut costs.
    • Many digital strategies are not put into action, and instead sit on the shelf. A digital strategy that is not translated into specific projects and initiatives will provide no value to the organization.
    • Executing a digital strategy is easier said than done: IT often lacks the necessary framework to create a roadmap, or fails to understand how new applications can enable the vision outlined in the strategy.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A digital strategy needs a clear roadmap to succeed. Too many digital strategies are lofty statements of objective with no clear avenue for actual execution: create a digital strategy application roadmap to avoid this pitfall.
    • Understand the art of execution. Application capabilities are rapidly evolving: IT must stand ready to educate the business on how new applications can be used to pursue the digital strategy.

    Impact and Result

    • IT must work with the business to parse specific technology drivers from the digital strategy, distill strategic requirements, and create a prescriptive roadmap of initiatives that will close the gaps between the current state and the target state outlined in the digital strategy. Doing so well is a path to the CIO’s office.
    • To better serve the organization, IT leaders must stay abreast of key application capabilities and trends. Exciting new developments such as artificial intelligence, IoT, and machine learning have opened up new avenues for process digitization, but IT leaders need to make a concerted effort to understand what modern applications bring to the table for technology enablement of the digital strategy.
    • Taking an agile approach to application roadmap development will help to provide a clear path forward for tackling digital strategy execution, while also allowing for flexibility to update and iterate as the internal and external environment changes.

    Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should have a structured approach to translating your digital strategy to specific application initiatives, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Parse digital strategy drivers

    Parse specific technology drivers out of the formal enterprise digital strategy.

    • Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution – Phase 1: Parse Your Digital Strategy for Critical Technology Drivers

    2. Map drivers to enabling technologies

    Review and understand potential enabling applications.

    • Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution – Phase 2: Map Your Drivers to Enabling Applications

    3. Create the application roadmap to support the digital strategy

    Use the drivers and an understanding of enabling applications to put together an execution roadmap that will support the digital strategy.

    • Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution – Phase 3: Create an Application Roadmap That Supports the Digital Strategy
    • Digital Strategy Roadmap Tool
    • Application Roadmap Presentation Template
    • Digital Strategy Communication and Execution Plan Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Validate the Digital Strategy

    The Purpose

    Review and validate the formal enterprise digital strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confirmation of the goals, objectives, and direction of the organization’s digital strategy.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the initial digital strategy.

    1.2 Determine gaps.

    1.3 Refine digital strategy scope and vision.

    1.4 Finalize digital strategy and validate with stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Validated digital strategy

    2 Parse Critical Technology Drivers

    The Purpose

    Enumerate relevant technology drivers from the digital strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of technology drivers to pursue based on goals articulated in the digital strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify affected process domains.

    2.2 Brainstorm impacts of digital strategy on technology enablement.

    2.3 Distill critical technology drivers.

    2.4 Identify KPIs for each driver.

    Outputs

    Affected process domains (based on APQC)

    Critical technology drivers for the digital strategy

    3 Map Drivers to Enabling Applications

    The Purpose

    Relate your digital strategy drivers to specific, actionable application areas.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand the interplay between the digital strategy and impacted application domains.

    Activities

    3.1 Build and review current application inventory for digital.

    3.2 Execute fit-gap analysis between drivers and current state inventory.

    3.3 Pair technology drivers to specific enabling application categories.

    Outputs

    Current-state application inventory

    Fit-gap analysis

    4 Understand Applications

    The Purpose

    Understand how different applications support the digital strategy.

    Understand the art of the possible.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of how applications are evolving from a features and capabilities perspective, and how this pertains to digital strategy enablement.

    Activities

    4.1 Application spotlight: customer experience.

    4.2 Application spotlight: content and collaboration.

    4.3 Application spotlight: business intelligence.

    4.4 Application spotlight: enterprise resource planning.

    Outputs

    Application spotlights

    5 Build the Digital Application Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Create a concrete, actionable roadmap of application and technology initiatives to move the digital strategy forward.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear, concise articulation of application roadmap for supporting digital that can be communicated to the business.

    Activities

    5.1 Build list of enabling projects and applications.

    5.2 Create prioritization criteria.

    5.3 Build the digital strategy application roadmap.

    5.4 Socialize the roadmap.

    5.5 Delineate responsibility for roadmap execution.

    Outputs

    Application roadmap for the digital strategy

    RACI chart for digital strategy roadmap execution

    Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}440|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $125,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 29 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • The number of IT project resources and the quantity of IT projects and tasks can no longer be recorded, prioritized, and tracked using non-commercial project portfolio management (PPM) solutions.
    • Your organization has attained a moderate level of PPM maturity.
    • You have sufficient financial and technical resources to purchase a commercial PPM solution.
    • There is a wide variety of commercial PPM solutions; different kinds of PPM solutions are more appropriate for organizations of a certain size and a certain PPM maturity level than others.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Implementations of PPM solutions are often unsuccessful resulting in wasted time and resources; failing to achieve sustainable adoption of the tool is a widespread pain point.
    • The costs of PPM solutions do not end after the implementation and subscription invoices are paid. Have realistic expectations about the time required to use and maintain PPM solutions to ensure success.
    • PPM solutions help PMOs serve the organization’s core decision makers. Success depends on improved service to these stakeholders.

    Impact and Result

    • Using Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape and PPM solution use cases, you will be able to make sense of the diversity of PPM solutions available in today’s market and choose the most appropriate solution for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.
    • Info-Tech’s blueprint for a PPM solution selection and implementation project will provide you with a variety of tools and templates.
    • A carefully planned out and executed selection and implementation process will help ensure your organization can maximize the value of your project portfolio and will allow the PMO to improve portfolio stakeholder satisfaction.

    Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement a commercial PPM solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the PPM solution project and collect requirements

    Create a PPM solution selection and implementation project charter and gather your organizations business and technical requirements.

    • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 1: Launch the PPM Solution Project and Collect Requirements
    • PPM Solution Project Charter Template
    • PPM Implementation Work Breakdown Structure
    • PPM Solution Requirements Gathering Tool
    • PPM Solution Cost-of-Use Estimation Tool
    • PPM Solution RFP Template
    • PPM Solution Success Metrics Workbook
    • PPM Solution Use-Case Fit Assessment Tool

    2. Select a PPM solution

    Select the most appropriate PPM solution for your organization by using Info-Tech’s PPM solution Vendor Landscape and use cases to help you create a vendor shortlist, produce an RFP, and establish evaluation criteria for ranking your shortlisted solutions.

    • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 2: Select a PPM Solution
    • PPM Vendor Shortlist & Detailed Feature Analysis Tool
    • PPM Solution Vendor Response Template
    • PPM Solution Evaluation & RFP Scoring Tool
    • PPM Solution Vendor Demo Script

    3. Plan the PPM solution implementation

    Plan a PPM solution implementation that will result in long-term sustainable adoption of the tool and that will allow the PMO to meet the needs of core project portfolio stakeholders.

    • Select and Implement a PPM Solution – Phase 3: Plan the PPM Solution Implementation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select and Implement an IT PPM Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the PPM Solution Project and Gather Requirements

    The Purpose

    Create a PPM solution selection and implementation project charter.

    Gather the business and technical requirements for the PPM solution.

    Establish clear and measurable success criteria for your PPM solution project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Comprehensive project plan

    Comprehensive and organized record of the various PPM solution requirements

    A record of PPM solution project goals and criteria that can be used in the future to establish the success of the project

    Activities

    1.1 Brainstorm, refine, and prioritize your PPM solution needs

    1.2 Stakeholder identification exercise

    1.3 Project charter work session

    1.4 Requirements gathering work session

    1.5 PPM solution success metrics workbook session

    Outputs

    High-level outline of PPM solution requirements

    Stakeholder consultation plan

    A draft project charter and action plan to fill in project charter gaps

    A draft requirements workbook and action plan to fill in requirement gathering gaps

    A PPM project success metrics workbook that can be used during and after the project

    2 Select a PPM Solution

    The Purpose

    Identify the PPM solutions that are most appropriate for your organization’s size and level of PPM maturity.

    Create a PPM solution and vendor shortlist.

    Create a request for proposal (RFP).

    Create a PPM solution scoring and evaluation tool.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of the PPM solution market and the various features available

    An informed shortlist of PPM vendors

    An organized and focused method for evaluating the often long and complex responses to the RFP that vendors provide

    The groundwork for an informed and defensible selection of a PPM solution for your organization

    Activities

    2.1 Assess the size of your organization and the level of PPM maturity to select the most appropriate use case

    2.2 PPM solution requirements and criteria ranking activity

    2.3 An RFP working session

    2.4 Build an RFP evaluation tool

    Outputs

    Identification of the most appropriate use case in Info-Tech’s Vendor Landscape

    A refined and organized list of the core features that will be included in the RFP

    A draft RFP with an action plan to fill in any RFP gaps

    An Excel tool that can be used to compare and evaluate vendors’ responses to the RFP

    3 Prepare for the PPM Solution Implementation

    The Purpose

    To think ahead to the eventual implementation of the solution that will occur once the selection phase is completed

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of key insights and steps that will help avoid mistakes resulting in poor adoption or PPM solutions that end up producing little tangible value

    Activities

    3.1 Outline high-level implementation stages

    3.2 Organizational change management strategy session

    3.3 A PPM project success metrics planning session

    Outputs

    High-level implementation tasks and milestones

    A RACI chart for core implementation tasks

    A high-level PPM solution implementation organizational change management strategy

    A RACI chart for core organizational change management tasks related to the PPM solution implementation

    A PPM project success metrics schedule and plan

    Proactively Identify and Mitigate Vendor Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}227|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • IT priorities are focused on daily tasks, pushing risk management to secondary importance and diverging from a proactive environment.
    • IT leaders are relying on an increasing number of third-party technology vendors and outsourcing key functions to meet the rapid pace of change within IT.
    • Risk levels can fluctuate over the course of the partnership, requiring manual process checks and/or automated solutions.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Every IT vendor carries risks that have business implications. These legal, financial, security, and operational risks could inhibit business continuity and IT can’t wait until an issue arises to act.
    • Making intelligent decisions about risks without knowing what their financial impact will be is difficult. Risk impact must be quantified.
    • You don’t know what you don’t know, and what you don’t know, can hurt you. To find hidden risks, you must use a structured risk identification method.

    Impact and Result

    • A thorough risk assessment in the selection phase is your first line of defense. If you follow the principles of vendor risk management, you can mitigate collateral losses following an adverse event.
    • Make a conscious decision whether to accept the risk based on time, priority, and impact. Spend the required time to correctly identify and enact defined vendor management processes that determine spend categories and appropriately evaluate potential and preferred suppliers. Ensure you accurately assess the partnership potential.
    • Take a proactive stance against IT threats and vulnerabilities by identifying and assessing IT’s most significant risks before they happen.

    Proactively Identify and Mitigate Vendor Risk Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to create a vendor risk management program that minimizes your organization’s vulnerability and mitigates adverse scenarios.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Review vendor risk fundamentals and establish governance

    Review IT vendor risk fundamentals and establish a risk governance framework.

    • Proactively Identify and Mitigate Vendor Risk – Phase 1: Review Vendor Risk Fundamentals and Establish Governance
    • Vendor Risk Management Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Vendor Risk Management Program Manual
    • Risk Event Action Plan

    2. Assess vendor risk and define your response strategy

    Categorize, prioritize, and assess your vendor risks. Follow up with creating effective response strategies.

    • Proactively Identify and Mitigate Vendor Risk – Phase 2: Assess Vendor Risk and Define Your Response Strategy
    • Vendor Classification Model Tool
    • Vendor Risk Profile and Assessment Tool
    • Risk Costing Tool
    • Risk Register Tool

    3. Monitor, communicate, and improve IT vendor risk process

    Assign accountability and responsibilities to formalize ongoing risk monitoring. Communicate your findings to management and share the plan moving forward.

    • Proactively Identify and Mitigate Vendor Risk – Phase 3: Monitor, Communicate, and Improve IT Vendor Risk Process
    • Risk Report
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Proactively Identify and Mitigate Vendor Risk

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare for the Workshop

    The Purpose

    To prepare the team for the workshop.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Avoids delays and interruptions once the workshop is in progress.

    Activities

    1.1 Send workshop agenda to all participants.

    1.2 Prepare list of vendors and review any contracts provided by them.

    1.3 Review current risk management process.

    Outputs

    All necessary participants assembled

    List of vendors and vendor contracts

    Understanding of current risk management process

    2 Review Vendor Risk Fundamentals and Establish Governance

    The Purpose

    Review IT vendor risk fundamentals.

    Assess current maturity and set risk management program goals.

    Engage stakeholders and establish a risk governance framework.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of organizational risk culture and the corresponding risk threshold.

    Obstacles to effective IT risk management identified.

    Attainable goals to increase maturity established.

    Understanding of the gap to achieve vendor risk readiness.

    Activities

    2.1 Brainstorm vendor-related risks.

    2.2 Assess current program maturity.

    2.3 Identify obstacles and pain points.

    2.4 Develop risk management goals.

    2.5 Develop key risk indicators (KRIs) and escalation protocols.

    2.6 Gain stakeholders’ perspective.

    Outputs

    Vendor risk management maturity assessment

    Goals for vendor risk management

    Stakeholders’ opinions

    3 Assess Vendor Risk and Define Your Response Strategy

    The Purpose

    Categorize vendors.

    Prioritize assessed risks.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Risk events prioritized according to risk severity – as defined by the business.

    Activities

    3.1 Categorize vendors.

    3.2 Map vendor infrastructure.

    3.3 Prioritize vendors.

    3.4 Identify risk contributing factors.

    3.5 Assess risk exposure.

    3.6 Calculate expected cost.

    3.7 Identify risk events.

    3.8 Input risks into the Risk Register Tool.

    Outputs

    Vendors classified and prioritized

    Vendor risk exposure

    Expected cost calculation

    4 Assess Vendor Risk and Define Your Response Strategy (continued)

    The Purpose

    Determine risk threshold and contract clause relating to risk prevention.

    Identify and assess risk response actions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Thorough analysis has been conducted on the value and effectiveness of risk responses for high-severity risk events.

    Risk response strategies have been identified for all key risks.

    Authoritative risk response recommendations can be made to senior leadership.

    Activities

    4.1 Determine the threshold for (un)acceptable risk.

    4.2 Match elements of the contract to related vendor risks.

    4.3 Identify and assess risk responses.

    Outputs

    Thresholds for (un)acceptable risk

    Risk responses

    5 Monitor, Communicate, and Improve IT Vendor Risk Process

    The Purpose

    Communicate top risks to management.

    Assign accountabilities and responsibilities for risk management process.

    Establish monitoring schedule.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Risk monitoring responsibilities are established.

    Transparent accountabilities and established ongoing improvement of the vendor risk management program.

    Activities

    5.1 Create a stakeholder map.

    5.2 Complete RACI chart.

    5.3 Establish the reporting schedule.

    5.4 Finalize the vendor risk management program.

    Outputs

    Stakeholder map

    Assigned accountability for risk management

    Established monitoring schedule

    Risk report

    Vendor Risk Management Program Manual

    The Complete Manual for Layoffs

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}514|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $30,999 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead

    When the economy is negatively influenced by factors beyond any organization’s control, the impact can be felt almost immediately on the bottom line. This decline in revenue as a result of a weakening economy will force organizations to reconsider every dollar they spend.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The remote work environment many organizations find themselves in adds a layer of complexity to the already sensitive process of laying off employees.
    • Carrying out layoffs must be done while keeping personal contact as your first priority. That personal contact should be the basis for all subsequent communication with laid-off and remaining staff, even after layoffs have occurred.

    Impact and Result

    By following our process, we can provide your organization with the direction, tools, and best practices to lay off employees. This will need to be done with careful consideration into your organization’s short- and longer-term strategic goals.

    The Complete Manual for Layoffs Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare for layoffs

    Understand the most effective cost-cutting solutions and set layoff policies and guidelines.

    • The Complete Manual for Layoffs Storyboard
    • Layoffs SWOT Analysis Template
    • Redeployment and Layoff Strategy Workbook
    • Sample Layoffs Policy
    • Cost-Cutting Planning Tool
    • Termination Costing Tool

    2. Objectively identify employees

    Develop an objective layoff selection method and plan for the transfer of essential responsibilities.

    • Workforce Planning Tool
    • Employee Layoff Selection Tool

    3. Prepare to meet with employees

    Plan logistics, training, and a post-layoff plan communication.

    • Termination Logistics Tool
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Risk Assessment Tool
    • IT Knowledge Transfer Plan Template
    • IT Knowledge Identification Interview Guide Template
    • Knowledge Transfer Job Aid
    • Layoffs Communication Package

    4. Meet with employees

    Collaborate with necessary departments and deliver layoffs notices.

    • Employee Departure Checklist Tool

    5. Monitor and manage departmental effectiveness

    Plan communications for affected employee groups and monitor organizational performance.

    • Ten Ways to Connect With Your Employees
    • Creating Connections
    [infographic]

    Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}306|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $68,332 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 22 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Voice & Video Management
    • Parent Category Link: /voice-video-management
    • Organizations are losing productivity from managing the limitations of yesterday’s technology. The business is changing and the current communications solution no longer adequately connects end users.
    • Old communications technology, including legacy telephony systems, disjointed messaging and communication or collaboration mediums, and unintuitive video conferencing, deteriorates the ability of users to work together in a productive manner.
    • You need a solution that meets budgetary requirements and improves internal and external communication, productivity, and the ability to work together.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Project scope and assessment will take more time than you initially anticipate. Poorly defined technical requirements can result in failure to meet the needs of the business. Defining project scope and assessing the existing solution is 60% of project time. Being thorough here will make the difference moving forward.
    • Even when the project is about modernizing technology, it’s not really about the technology. The requirements of your people and the processes you want to maintain or reform should be the influential factors in your decisions on technology.
    • Gaining business buy-in can be difficult for projects that the business doesn’t equate with directly driving revenue. Ensure your IT team communicates with the business throughout the process and establishes business requirements. Framing conversations in a “business first, IT second” way is crucial to speaking in a language the business will understand.

    Impact and Result

    • Define a comprehensive set of requirements (across people, process, and technology) at the start of the project. Communication solutions are long-term commitments and mistakes in planning will be amplified during implementation.
    • Analyze the pros and cons of each deployment option and identify a communications solution that balances your budget and communications objectives and requirements.
    • Create an effective RFP by outlining your specific business and technical needs and goals.
    • Make the case for your communications infrastructure modernization project and be prepared to support it.

    Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your communications and collaboration infrastructure, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess communications infrastructure

    Evaluate the infrastructure requirements and the ability to undergo modernization from legacy technology.

    • Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure – Phase 1: Assess Communications Infrastructure
    • Communications Infrastructure Roadmap Tool
    • Team Skills Inventory Tool
    • MACD Workflow Mapping Template - Visio
    • MACD Workflow Mapping Template - PDF

    2. Define the target state

    Build and document a formal set of business requirements using Info-Tech's pre-populated template after identifying stakeholders, aligning business and user needs, and evaluating deployment options.

    • Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure – Phase 2: Define the Target State
    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Communications Infrastructure Stakeholder Focus Group Guide
    • IP Telephony and UC End-User Survey Questions
    • Enterprise Communication and Collaboration System Business Requirements Document
    • Communications TCO-ROI Comparison Calculator

    3. Advance the project

    Draft an RFP for a UC solution and gain project approval using Info-Tech’s executive presentation deck.

    • Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure – Phase 3: Advance the Project
    • Unified Communications Solution RFP Template
    • Modernize Communications Infrastructure Executive Presentation
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Communications and Collaboration Infrastructure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Communications Infrastructure

    The Purpose

    Identify pain points.

    Build a skills inventory.

    Define and rationalize template configuration needs.

    Define standard service requests and map workflow.

    Discuss/examine site type(s) and existing technology.

    Determine network state and readiness.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    IT skills & process understanding.

    Documentation reflecting communications infrastructure.

    Reviewed network readiness.

    Completed current state analysis.

    Activities

    1.1 Build a skills inventory.

    1.2 Document move, add, change, delete (MACD) processes.

    1.3 List relevant communications and collaboration technologies.

    1.4 Review network readiness checklist.

    Outputs

    Clearly documented understanding of available skills

    Documented process maps

    Complete list of relevant communications and collaboration technologies

    Completed readiness checklist

    2 Learn and Evaluate Options to Define the Future

    The Purpose

    Hold focus group meeting.

    Define business needs and goals.

    Define solution options.

    Evaluate options.

    Discuss business value and readiness for each option.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed value and readiness assessment.

    Current targets for service and deployment models.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct internal focus group.

    2.2 Align business needs and goals.

    2.3 Evaluate deployment options.

    Outputs

    Understanding of user needs, wants, and satisfaction with current solution

    Assessment of business needs and goals

    Understanding of potential future-state solution options

    3 Identify and Close the Gaps

    The Purpose

    Identify gaps.

    Examine and evaluate ways to remedy gaps.

    Determine specific business requirements and introduce draft of business requirements document.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed description of future state.

    Identification of gaps.

    Identification of key business requirements.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify gaps and brainstorm gap remedies.

    3.2 Complete business requirements document.

    Outputs

    Well-defined gaps and remedies

    List of specific business requirements

    4 Build the Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Introduce Unified Communications Solution RFP Template.

    Develop statement of work (SOW).

    Document technical requirements.

    Complete cost-benefit analysis.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Unified Communications RFP.

    Documented technical requirements.

    Activities

    4.1 Draft RFP (SOW, tech requirements, etc.).

    4.2 Conduct cost-benefit analysis.

    Outputs

    Ready to release RFP

    Completed cost-benefit analysis

    Establish a Foresight Capability

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}88|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • To be recognized and validated as a forward-thinking CIO, you must establish a structured approach to innovation that considers external trends as well as internal processes.
    • The CEO is expecting an investment in IT innovation to yield either cost reduction or revenue growth, but growth cannot happen without opportunity identification.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Technological innovation is disrupting business models – and it’s happening faster than organizations can react.
    • Smaller, more agile organizations have an advantage because they have less resources tied to existing operations and can move faster.

    Impact and Result

    • Be the disruptor, not the disrupted. This blueprint will help you plan proactively and identify opportunities before your competitors.
    • Strategic foresight gives you the tools you need to effectively process the signals in your environment, build an understanding of relevant trends, and turn this understanding into action.

    Establish a Foresight Capability Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to effectively apply strategic foresight, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Signal gathering

    Develop a better understanding of your external environment and build a database of signals.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 1: Signal Gathering
    • Foresight Process Tool

    2. Trends and drivers

    Select and analyze trends to uncover drivers.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 2: Trends and Drivers

    3. Scenario building

    Use trends and drivers to build plausible scenarios and brainstorm strategic initiatives.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 3: Scenario Building

    4. Idea selection

    Apply the wind tunneling technique to assess strategic initiatives and determine which are most likely to succeed in the face of uncertainty.

    • Establish a Foresight Capability – Phase 4: Idea Selection
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish a Foresight Capability

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Pre-workshop – Gather Signals and Build a Repository

    The Purpose

    Note: this is preparation for the workshop and is not offered onsite.

    Gather relevant signals that will inform your organization about what is happening in the external competitive environment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of the competitive landscape.

    Activities

    1.1 Gather relevant signals.

    1.2 Store signals in a repository for quick and easy recall during the workshop.

    Outputs

    A set of signal items ready for analysis

    2 Identify Trends and Uncover Drivers

    The Purpose

    Uncover trends in your environment and assess their potential impact.

    Determine the causal forces behind relevant trends to inform strategic decisions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of the underlying causal forces that are influencing a trend that is affecting your organization.

    Activities

    2.1 Cluster signals into trends.

    2.2 Analyze trend impact and select a key trend.

    2.3 Perform causal analysis.

    2.4 Select drivers.

    Outputs

    A collection of relevant trends with a key trend selected

    A set of drivers influencing the key trend with primary drivers selected

    3 Build Scenarios and Ideate

    The Purpose

    Leverage your understanding of trends and drivers to build plausible scenarios and apply them as a canvas for ideation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A set of potential responses or reactions to trends that are affecting your organization.

    Activities

    3.1 Build scenarios.

    3.2 Brainstorm potential strategic initiatives (ideation).

    Outputs

    Four plausible scenarios for ideation purposes

    A potential strategic initiative that addresses each scenario

    4 Apply Wind Tunneling and Select Ideas

    The Purpose

    Assess the various ideas based on which are most likely to succeed in the face of uncertainty.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An idea that you have tested in terms of risk and uncertainty.

    An idea that can be developed and pitched to the business or stored for later use. 

    Activities

    4.1 Assign probabilities to scenarios.

    4.2 Apply wind tunneling.

    4.3 Select ideas.

    4.4 Discuss next steps and prototyping.

    Outputs

    A strategic initiative (idea) that is ready to move into prototyping

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}493|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourced projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and the quality of support. 
    • Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and a decrease of end-user satisfaction.
    • A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and return the confidence of end users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Outsourcing is easy. Realizing the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.
    • You don’t need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.
    • If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that it comes at a cost. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don’t end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Impact and Result

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gain.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk Deck – A step-by-step document to walk you through building a strategy for efficient service desk outsourcing.

    This storyboard will help you craft a project charter, create an RFP, and outline strategies to build a long-term relationship with the vendor.

    • Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk – Storyboard
    • Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    2. Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template and Requirements Library – Best-of-breed templates to help you determine processes and build a strategy to outsource them.

    These templates will help you determine your service desk requirements and document your proposed service desk outsourcing strategy.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template

    3. Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template – A structured document to help you outline expectations and communicate requirements to managed service providers.

    This template will allow you to create a detailed RFP for your outsourcing agreement, document the statement of work, provide service overview, record exit conditions, and document licensing model and estimated pricing.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    4. Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template and Scoring Tool – Materials to help you conduct efficient briefings and select the best vendor to fulfill your service desk requirements.

    Use the Reference Interview Template to outline a list of questions for interviewing current/previous customers of your candidate vendors. These interviews will help you with unbiased vendor scoring. The RFP Vendor Scoring Tool will help you facilitate vendor briefings with your list of questions and score candidate vendors efficiently through quantifying evaluations.

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    Define Requirements for Outsourcing the Service Desk

    Prepare your RFP for long-term success, not short-term gains

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Outsource services with your eyes wide open.

    Cost reduction has traditionally been an incentive for outsourcing the service desk. This is especially the case for organizations that don't have minimal processes in place and those that need resources and skills to fill gaps.

    Although cost reduction is usually the main reason to outsource the service desk, in most cases service desk outsourcing increases the cost in a short run. But without a proper model, you will only outsource your problems rather than solving them. A successful outsourcing strategy follows a comprehensive plan that defines objectives, assigns accountabilities, and sets expectations for service delivery prior to vendor outreach.

    For outsourcing the service desk, you should plan ahead, work as a group, define requirements, prepare a strong RFP, and contemplate tension metrics to ensure continual improvement. As you build a project charter to outline your strategy for outsourcing your IT services, ensure you focus on better customer service instead of cost optimization. Ensure that the outsourcer can support your demands, considering your long-term achievement.

    Think about outsourcing like a marriage deed. Take into account building a good relationship before beginning the contract, ensure to include expectations in the agreement, and make it possible to exit the agreement if expectations are not satisfied or service improvement is not achieved.

    This is a picture of Mahmoud Ramin, PhD, Senior Research Analyst, Infrastructure and Operations, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mahmoud Ramin, PhD
    Senior Research Analyst
    Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In organizations where technical support is viewed as non-strategic, many see outsourcing as a cost-effective way to provide this support. However, outsourcing projects often fall short of their goals in terms of cost savings and quality of support.

    Common Obstacles

    Significant administrative work and up-front costs are required to outsource the service desk, and poor planning often results in project failure and the decrease of end-user satisfaction.

    A complete turnover of the service desk can result in lost knowledge and control over processes, and organizations without an exit strategy can struggle to bring their service desk back in house and reestablish the confidence of end users.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    • First decide if outsourcing is the correct step; there may be more preliminary work to do beforehand.
    • Assess requirements and make necessary adjustments before developing an outsource RFP.
    • Clearly define the project and produce an RFP to provide to vendors.
    • Plan for long-term success, not short-term gains.
    • Prepare to retain some of the higher-level service desk work.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that need to:

    • Outsource the service desk or portions of service management to improve service delivery.
    • Improve and repatriate existing outsourcing outcomes by becoming more engaged in the management of the function. Regular reviews of performance metrics, staffing, escalation, knowledge base content, and customer satisfaction are critical.
    • Understand the impact that outsourcing would have on the service desk.
    • Understand the potential benefits that outsourcing can bring to the organization.

    This image contains a donut chart with the following information: Salaries and Benefits - 68.50%; Technology - 9.30%; Office Space and Facilities Expense - 14.90%; Travel, Training, and Office Supplies - 7.30%

    Source: HDI 2017

    About 68.5% of the service desk fund is allocated to agent salaries, while only 9.3% of the service desk fund is spent on technology. The high ratio of salaries and expenses over other expense drives organizations to outsource their service desk without taking other considerations into account.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The outsourcing contract must preserve your control, possession, and ownership of the intellectual property involved in the service desk operation. From the beginning of the process, repatriation should be viewed as a possibility and preserved as a capability.

    Your challenge

    This research helps organizations who would like to achieve these goals:

    • Determine objectives and requirements to outsource the service desk.
    • Develop a project charter and build an outsourcing strategy to efficiently define processes to reduce risk of failure.
    • Build an outsourcing RFP and conduct interviews to identify the best candidate for service delivery.
    • Build a long-term relationship with an outsourcing vendor, making sure the vendor is able to satisfy all requirements.
    • Include a continual improvement plan in the outsourcing strategy and contain the option upon service delivery dissatisfaction.

    New hires require between 10 and 80 hours of training (Forward Bpo Inc., 2019).

    A benchmark study by Zendesk from 45,000 companies reveals that timely resolution of issues and 24/7 service are the biggest factors in customer service experience.

    This image contains a bar graph with the following data: Timely issue resolution; 24/7 support; Friendly agent; Desired contact method; Not to repeat info; Proactive support; Self-serve; Call back; Rewards & freebies

    These factors push many businesses to consider service desk outsourcing to vendors that have capabilities to fulfill such requirements.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • In most cases, organizations must perform significant administrative work before they can make a move. Those that fail to properly prepare impede a smooth transition, the success of the vendor, and the ability to repatriate.
    • Successful outsourcing comes from the recognition that an organization is experiencing complete turnover of its service desk staff. These organizations engage the vendor to transition knowledge and process to ensure continuity of quality.
    • IT realizes the most profound hidden costs of outsourcing when the rate of ticket escalation increases, diminishing the capacity of senior technical staff for strategic project work.

    Many organizations may not get the value they expect from outsourcing in their first year.

    Common Reasons:

    • Overall lack of due diligence in the outsourcing process
    • Unsuitable or unclear service transition plan
    • Poor service provider selection and management

    Poor transition planning results in delayed benefits and a poor relationship with your outsourcing service provider. A poor relationship with your service provider results in poor communication and knowledge transfer.

    Key components of a successful plan:

    1. Determine goals and identify requirements before developing an RFP.
    2. Finalize your outsourcing project charter and get ready for vendor evaluation.
    3. Assess and select the most appropriate provider; manage the transition and vendor relationship.

    Outsource the service desk properly, and you could see a wide range of benefits

    Service Desk Outsourcing: Ability to scale up/down; Reduce fixed costs; Refocus IT efforts on core activities; Access to up-to-date technology; Adhere to  ITSM best practices; Increased process optimization; Focus IT efforts on advanced expertise; Reframe to shift-left;

    Info-Tech Insight

    In your service desk outsourcing strategy, rethink downsizing first-level IT service staff. This can be an opportunity to reassign resources to more valuable roles, such as asset management, development or project backlog. Your current service desk staff are most likely familiar with the current technology, processes, and regulations within IT. Consider the ways to better use your existing resources before reducing headcount.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Determine Goals

    Conduct activities in the blueprint to pinpoint your current challenges with the service desk and find out objectives to outsource customer service.

    Define Requirements

    You need to be clear about the processes that will be outsourced. Considering your objectives, we'll help you discover the processes to outsource, to help you achieve your goals.

    Develop RFP

    Your expectations should be documented in a formal proposal to help vendors provide solid information about how they will satisfy your requirements and what their plan is.

    Build Long-Term Relationship

    Make sure to plan for continual improvement by setting expectations, tracking the services with proper metrics, and using efficient communication with the provider. Think about the rainy day and include exit conditions for ending the relationship if needed.

    Info-Tech's methodology

    1. Define the Goal

    2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    3. Develop an RFP and Make a Long-Term Relationship

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    Phase Outcomes

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vision and Goals

    Service Desk Processes to Outsource

    Outsourcing Roles and Responsibilities

    Outsourcing Risks and Constraints

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP

    Continual Improvement Plan

    Exit Strategy

    This is an image of the strategy which you will use to build your requirements for outsourcing the service desk.  it includes: 1. Define the Goal; 2. Design an Outsourcing Strategy; 3. Develop RFP and long-term relationship.

    Insight summary

    Focus on value

    Outsourcing is easy. Realizing all of the expected cost, quality, and focus benefits is hard. Successful outsourcing without being directly involved in service desk management is almost impossible.

    Define outsourcing requirements

    You don't need to standardize before you outsource, but you still need to conduct your due diligence. If you outsource without thinking about how you want the future to work, you will likely be unsatisfied with the result.

    Don't focus on cost

    If cost is your only driver for outsourcing, understand that there will be other challenges. Customer service quality will likely be less, and your outsourcer may not add on frills such as Continual Improvement. Be careful that your specialists don't end up spending more time working on incidents and service requests.

    Emphasize on customer service

    A bad outsourcer relationship will result in low business satisfaction with IT overall. The service desk is the face of IT, and if users are dissatisfied with the service desk, then they are much likelier to be dissatisfied with IT overall.

    Vendors are not magicians

    They have standards in place to help them succeed. Determine ITSM best practices, define your requirements, and adjust process workflows accordingly. Your staff and end users will have a much easier transition once outsourcing proceeds.

    Plan ahead to guarantee success

    Identify outsourcing goals, plan for service and system integrations, document standard incidents and requests, and track tension metrics to make sure the vendor does the work efficiently. Aim for building a long-term relationship but contemplate potential exit strategy.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Service Desk Outsourcing Requirements Database Library

    Use this library to guide you through processes to outsource

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Use this template to craft a proposal for outsourcing your service desk

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template

    Use this template to verify vendor claims on service delivery with pervious or current customers

    This is a screenshot from the Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Service Desk Outsourcing Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Use this tool to evaluate RFP submissions

    Key deliverable:

    This is a screenshot from the key deliverable, Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Document your project scope and outsourcing strategy in this template to organize the project for efficient resource and requirement allocation

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    Business Benefits

    • Determine current challenges with the service desk and identify services to outsource.
    • Make the project charter for an efficient outsourcing strategy that will lead to higher satisfaction from IT.
    • Select the best outsource vendor that will satisfy most of the identified requirements.
    • Reduce the risk of project failure with efficient planning.
    • Understand potential feasibility of service desk outsourcing and its possible impact on business satisfaction.
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through a better service delivery.
    • Conduct more efficient resource allocation with outsourcing customer service.
    • Develop a long-term relationship between the enterprise and vendor through a continual improvement plan.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Call #1: Scope your specific challenges and objectives

    Call #3: Identify project stakeholders, and potential risks and constraints

    Call #5: Create a detailed RFP

    Call #6: Identify strategy risks.

    Call #2: Assess outsourcing feasibility and processes to outsourceCall #4: Create a list of metrics to ensure efficient reporting

    Call #7: Prepare for vendor briefing and scoring each vendor

    Call #8: Build a communication plan

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 10 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Define the goal

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Analysis outsourcing objectives
    • Assess outsourcing feasibility
    • Identify services and processes to outsource

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 1.1

    Identify goals and objectives

    Activities

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1.1.2 Document the benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1.1.3 Identify your outsourcing vision and goals

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure your mission statement

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach your outsourcing objectives

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of strengths and weaknesses of the service desk
    • Challenges with the service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk outsourcing vision and goals
    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk
    • Mission statement

    What is your rationale to outsource the service desk?

    Potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk:

    • Bring in the expertise and knowledge to manage tickets according to best-practice guidelines
    • Reduce the timeline to response and resolution
    • Improve IT productivity
    • Enhance IT services and improve performance
    • Augment relationship between IT and business through service-level improvement
    • Free up the internal team and focus IT on complex projects and higher priority tasks
    • Speed up service desk optimization
    • Improve end-user satisfaction through efficient IT services
    • Reduce impact of incidents through effective incident management
    • Increase service consistency via turnover reduction
    • Expand coverage hour and access points
    • Expand languages to service different geographical areas

    1.1.1 Find out why you want to outsource your service desk

    1 hour

    Service desk is the face of IT. Service desk improvement increases IT efficiency, lowers operation costs, and enhances business satisfaction.

    Common challenges that result in deciding to outsource the service desk are:

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    ChallengeExample
    Lack of tier 1 supportStartup does not have a dedicated service desk to handle incidents and provide services to end users.
    Inefficient ticket handlingMTTR is very high and end users are frustrated with their issues not getting solved quickly. Even if they call service desk, they are put on hold for a long time. Due to these inefficiencies, their daily work is greatly impacted.
    Restricted service hoursCompany headquartered in Texas does not have resources to provide 24/7 IT service. When users in the East Asia branch have a laptop issue, they must wait until the next day to get response from IT. This has diminished their satisfaction.
    Restricted languagesCompany X is headquartered in New York. An end user not fluent in English from Madrid calls in for support. It takes five minutes for the agent to understand the issue and log a ticket.
    Ticket backlogIT is in firefighting mode, very busy with taking care of critical incidents and requests from upper management. Almost no one is committed to the SLA because of their limited availability.

    Brainstorm your challenges with the service desk. Why have you decided to outsource your service desk? Use the above table as a sample.

    1.1.2 Document benefits of outsourcing your service desk

    1 hour

    1. Review the challenges with your current service desk identified in activity 1.1.1.
    2. Discuss possible ways to tackle these challenges. Be specific and determine ways to resolve these issues if you were to do it internally.
    3. Determine potential benefits of outsourcing the service desk to IT, business, and end users.
    4. For each benefit, describe dependencies. For instance, to reduce the number of direct calls (benefit), users should have access to service desk as a single point of contact (dependency).
    5. Document this activity in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Input

    • List of challenges with the current service desk from activity 1.1.1

    Output

    • Benefits of outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Why should you not consider cost reduction as a primary incentive to outsourcing the service desk?

    Assume that some of the costs will not go away with outsourcing

    When you outsource, the vendor's staff tend to gradually become less effective as:

    • They are managed by metrics to reduce costs by escalating sooner, reducing talk time, and proposing questionable solutions.
    • Turnover results in new employees that get insufficient training.

    You must actively manage the vendor to identify and resolve these issues. Many organizations find that service desk management takes more time after they outsource.

    You need to keep spending on service desk management, and you may not get away from technology infrastructure spending.

    Info-Tech Insight

    In their first year, almost 42% of Info-Tech's clients do not get the real value of outsourcing services as expected. This iss primarily because of misalignment of organizational goals with outcomes of the outsourced services.

    Consider the hidden costs of outsourcing

    Expected Costs

    Unexpected Costs

    Example

    Transition CostsSeverance and staff retention
    • Cost to adapt to vendor standards
    • Training cost of vendor staff
    • Lost productivity
    • Format for requirements
    • Training report developers to work with vendor systems
    FeesPrice of the engagement
    • Extra fees for additional services
    • Extra charges for uploading data to cloud storage
    • Portal access
    Management CostsTime directing account
    • Time directly managing vendor staff
    • Checking deliverables for errors
    • Disputing penalty amounts
    Rework CostsDowntime, defect rate, etc. (quality metrics measured in SLAs)
    • Time spent adapting deliverables for unanticipated requirements
    • Time spent assuring the quality and usefulness of deliverables
    • Completing quality assurance and updating knowledgebase articles
    • Adapting reporting for presentation to stakeholders

    Determine strategies to avoid each hidden cost

    Costs related to transitioning into the engagementAdapting to standards and training costs

    Adapting to standards: Define the process improvements you will need to work with each potential vendor.

    Training costs for vendor staff: Reduce training costs by keeping the same vendor staff on all of your projects.

    Fee-related costs

    Fees for additional services (that you thought were included)

    Carefully review each proposed statement of work to identify and reduce extra fees. Understand why extra fees occur in the SLA, the contract, and the proposed statement of work, and take steps to protect yourself and the vendor.

    Management-related costs

    Direct management of vendor staff and dispute resolution

    Direct management of vendor staff: Avoid excessive management costs by defining a two-tier management structure on both sides of the engagement.

    Time spent resolving disputes: Avoid prolonged resolution costs by defining terms of divorce for the engagement up front.

    Rework costs

    Unanticipated requirements and integration with existing systems

    Unanticipated requirements: Use a two-stage process to define requirements, starting with business people and then with review by technical staff.

    Integration with existing systems: Obtain a commitment from vendors that deliverables will conform to standards at points of integration with your systems.

    Your outsourcing strategy should address the reasons you decided to outsource

    A clear vision of strategic objectives prior to entering an outsourcing agreement will allow you to clearly communicate these objectives to the Managed Service Provider (MSP) and use them as a contracted basis for the relationship.

    • Define the business' overall approach to outsourcing along with the priorities, rules, and principles that will drive the outsourcing strategy and every subsequent outsourcing decision and activity.
    • Define specific business, service, and technical goals for the outsourcing project and relevant measures of success.

    "People often don't have a clear direction around what they're trying to accomplish. The strategic goals should be documented. Is this a cost-savings exercise? Is it because you're deficient in one area? Is it because you don't have the tools or expertise to run the service desk yourself? Figure out what problem you're trying to solve by outsourcing, then build your strategy around that.
    – Jeremy Gagne, Application Support Delivery Manager, Allegis Group

    Most organizations are driven to consider outsourcing their service desk hoping to improve the following:

    • Ability to scale (train people and acquire skills)
    • Focus on core competencies
    • Decrease capital costs
    • Access latest technology without large investment
    • Resolve labor force constraints
    • Gain access to special expertise without paying a full salary
    • Save money overall

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use your goals and objectives as a management tool. Clearly outline your desired project outcomes to both your in-house team and the vendor during implementation and monitoring. It will allow a common ground to unite both parties as the project progresses.

    Mitigate pitfalls that lay in the way of desired outcomes of outsourcing

    Desired outcomePitfalls to overcome
    IT can focus on core competencies and strategic initiatives rather than break-fix tasks.Escalation to second- and third-level support usually increases when the first level has been outsourced. Outsourcers will have less experience with your typical incidents and will give up on trying to solve some issues more quickly than your internal level-one staff.
    Low outsourcing costs compared to the costs needed to employ internal employees in the same role. Due to lack of incentive to decrease ticket volume, costs are likely to increase. As a result, organizations often find themselves paying more overall for an outsourced service desk than if they had a few dedicated IT service desk employees in-house.
    Improved employee morale as a result of being able to focus on more interesting tasks.Management often expects existing employee morale to increase as a result of shifting their focus to core and strategic tasks, but the fear of diminished job security often spreads to the remaining non-level-one employees.

    1.1.3 Identify outsourcing vision and goals

    Identify the goals and objectives of outsourcing to inform your strategy.

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Service Desk Team

    1-2 hours

    1. Meet with key business stakeholders and the service desk staff who were involved in the decision to outsource.
    2. As a group, review the results from activity 1.1.1 (challenges with current service desk operations) and identify the goals and objectives of the outsourcing initiative.
    3. Determine the key performance indicator (KPI) for each goal.
    4. Identify the impacted stakeholder/s for each goal.
    5. Discuss checkpoint schedule for each goal to make sure the list stays updated.

    Use the sample table as a starting point:

    1. Document your table in the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.
    IDGoal DescriptionKPIImpacted StakeholdersCheckpoint Schedule
    1Provide capacity to take calls outside of current service desk work hours
    • Decreased in time to response
    • Decreased time to resolve
    • IT Entire organization
    • Every month
    2Take calls in different languages
    • Improved service delivery in different geographical regions
    • Improved end-user satisfaction
    • End users
    • Every month
    3Provide field support at remote sites with no IT presence without having to fly out an employee
    • 40% faster incident resolution and request fulfillment
    • Entire organization
    • Every month
    4Improve ease of management by vendor helping with managing and optimizing service desk tasks
    • Improved service management efficiency
    • Entire organization
    • Every 3 months

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Evaluate organizational demographics to assess outsourcing rationale

    The size, complexity, and maturity of your organization are good indicators of service desk direction with regards to outsourcing.

    Organization Size

    • As more devices, applications, systems, and users are added to the mix, vendor costs will increase but their ability to meet business needs will decrease.
    • Small organizations are often either rejected by vendors for being too small or locked into a contract that is overkill for their actual needs (and budget).

    Complexity

    • Highly customized environments and organizations with specialized applications or stringent regulatory requirements are very difficult to outsource for a reasonable cost and acceptable quality.
    • In these cases, the vendor is required to train skilled support or ends up escalating more tickets back to second- and third-level support.

    Requirements

    • Organizations looking to outsource must have defined outsourcing requirements before looking at vendors.
    • Without a requirement assessment, the vendor won't have guidelines to follow and you won't be able to measure their adherence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Although less adherence to service desk best practices can be one of the main incentives to outsourcing the service desk, IT should have minimal processes in place to be able to set expectations with targeting vendors.

    1.1.4 Prioritize service desk outsourcing goals to help structure mission statement

    0.5-1 hour

    The evaluation process for outsourcing the service desk should be done very carefully. Project leaders should make sure they won't panic internal resources and impact their performance through the transition period.

    If the outsourcing process is rushed, it will result in poor evaluation, inefficient decision making, and project failure.

    1. Refer to results in activity 1.1.3. Discuss the service desk outsourcing goals once again.
    2. Brainstorm the most important objectives. Use sticky notes to prioritize the items from the most important to the least important.
    3. Edit the order accordingly.

    Input

    • Project goals from activity 1.1.3

    Output

    • Prioritized list of outsourcing goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Sticky notes
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.1.5 Craft a mission statement that demonstrates your decision to reach outsourcing objectives

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager

    0.5-1 hour

    The IT mission statement specifies the function's purpose or reason for being. The mission should guide each day's activities and decisions. The mission statement should use simple and concise terminology and speak loudly and clearly, generating enthusiasm for the organization.

    Strong IT mission statements:

    • Articulate the IT function's purpose and reason for existence
    • Describe what the IT function does to achieve its vision
    • Define the customers of the IT function
    • Can be described as:
      • Compelling
      • Easy to grasp
      • Sharply focused
      • Inspirational
      • Memorable
      • Concise

    Sample mission statements:

    • To help fulfill organizational goals, IT has decided to empower business stakeholders with outsourcing the service desk.
    • To support efficient IT service provision, better collaboration, and effective communication, [Company Name] has decided to outsource the service desk.
    • [Company Name] plans to outsource the service desk so it can identify bottlenecks and inefficiencies with current service desk processes and enable [Company Name] to innovate and support business growth.
    • Considering the goals and benefits determined in the previous activities, outline a mission statement.
    • Document your outsourcing mission statement in the "Project Overview" section of the Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 1.2

    Assess outsourcing feasibility

    Activities

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    1.2.2 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    1.2.3 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    1.2.4 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    Define the goal

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk tasks and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Infrastructure Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • End-user satisfaction with the service desk
    • List of processes and services to outsource

    1.2.1 Create a baseline of customer experience

    Solicit targeted department feedback on IT's core service capabilities, communications, and business enablement from end users. Use this feedback to assess end-user satisfaction with each service, broken down by department and seniority level.

    1. Complete an end-user satisfaction survey to define the current state of your IT services, including service desk (timeliness and effectiveness). With Info-Tech's end-user satisfaction program, an analyst will help you set up the diagnostic and will go through the report with you.
    2. Evaluate survey results.
    3. Communicate survey results with team leads and discuss the satisfaction rates and comments of the end users.
    4. Schedule to launch another survey one year after outsourcing the service desk.
    5. Your results will be compared to the following year's results to analyze the overall success/failure of your outsourcing project.

    A decrease of business and end-user satisfaction is a big drive to outsourcing the service desk. Conduct a customer service survey to discover your end-user experience prior to and after outsourcing the service desk.

    Don't get caught believing common misconceptions: outsourcing doesn't mean sending away all the work

    First-time outsourcers often assume they are transferring most of the operations over to the vendor, but this is often not the case.

    1. Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.
    2. Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.
    3. The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications (and for customized applications if you'll pay for it). However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite, and that service is very expensive to outsource.
    4. Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Switching to a vendor won't necessarily improve your service desk maturity

    You should have minimal requirements before moving.

    Whether managing in-house or outsourcing, it is your job to ensure core issues have been clarified, processes defined, and standards maintained. If your processes are ad-hoc or non-existent right now, outsourcing won't fix them.

    You must have the following in place before looking to outsource:

    • Defined reporting needs and plans
    • Formalized skill-set requirements
    • Problem management and escalation guidelines
    • Ticket templates and classification rules
    • Workflow details
    • Knowledge base standards

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you expect your problems to disappear with outsourcing, they might just get worse.

    Define long-term requirements

    Anticipate growth throughout the lifecycle of your outsourcing contract and build that into the RFP

    • Most outsourcing agreements typically last three to five years. In that time, you risk outgrowing your service provider by neglecting to define your long-term service desk requirements.
    • Outgrowing your vendor before your contract ends can be expensive due to high switching costs. Managing multiple vendors can also be problematic.
    • It is crucial to define your service desk requirements before developing a request for proposal to make sure the service you select can meet your organization's needs.
    • Make sure that the business is involved in this planning stage, as the goals of IT need to scale with the growth strategy of the business. You may select a vendor with no additional capacity despite the fact that your organization has a major expansion planned to begin two years from now. Assessing future requirements also allows you to culture match with the vendor. If your outlooks and practices are similar, the match will likely click.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don't select a vendor for what your company is today – select a vendor for what your company will be years from now. Define your future service desk requirements in addition to your current requirements and leave room for growth and development.

    You can't outsource everything

    Manage the things that stay in-house well or suffer the consequences.

    "You can't outsource management; you can only outsource supervision." Barry Cousins, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    What can be the vendor in charge of?

    What stays in-house?

    • Call and email answering
    • Ongoing daily ticket creation and tracking
    • Tier 1 support
    • Internal escalation to Level 2 support
    • External escalation to specialized Level 2 and Level 3 support
    • Knowledge base article creation
    • Service desk-related hardware acquisition and maintenance
    • Service desk software acquisition and maintenance
    • Security and access management
    • Disaster recovery
    • Staff acquisition
    • Facilities
    • The role of the Service Desk Manager
    • Skills and training standards
    • Document standardization
    • Knowledge base quality assurance and documentation standardization
    • Self-service maintenance, promotion, and ownership
    • Short and long-term tracking of vendor performance

    Info-Tech Insight

    The need for a Service Desk Manager does not go away when you outsource. In fact, the need becomes even stronger and never diminishes.

    Assess current service desk processes before outsourcing

    Process standards with areas such as documentation, workflow, and ticket escalation should be in place before the decision to outsource has been made.

    Every effective service desk has a clear definition of the services that they are performing for the end user. You can't provide a service without knowing what the services are.

    MSPs typically have their own set of standards and processes in play. If your service desk is not at a similar level of maturity, outsourcing will not be pleasant.

    Make sure that your metrics are reported consistently and that they tell a story.

    "Establish baseline before outsourcing. Those organizations that don't have enough service desk maturity before outsourcing should work with the outsourcer to establish the baseline."
    – Yev Khobrenkov, Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Info-Tech Insight

    Outsourcing vendors are not service desk builders; they're service desk refiners. Switching to a vendor won't improve your maturity; you must have a certain degree of process maturity and standardization before moving.

    Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Cleaning Supplies

    SOURCE: PicNet

    Challenge

    • Reckitt Benckiser of Australia determined that its core service desk needed to be outsourced.
    • It would retain its higher level service desk staff to work on strategic projects.
    • The MSP needed to fulfill key requirements outlined by Reckitt Benckiser.

    Solution

    • Reckitt Benckiser recognized that its rapidly evolving IT needs required a service desk that could fulfill the following tasks:
    • Free up internal IT staff.
    • Provide in-depth understanding of business apps.
    • Offer efficient, cost-effective support onsite.
    • Focus on continual service improvement (CSI).

    Results

    • An RFP was developed to support the outsourcing strategy.
    • With the project structure outlined and the requirements of the vendor for the business identified, Reckitt Benckiser could now focus on selecting a vendor that met its needs.

    1.2.1 Identify service desk processes to outsource

    2-3 hours

    Review your prioritized project goals from activity 1.1.4.

    Brainstorm requirements and use cases for each goal and describe each use case. For example: To improve service desk timeliness, IT should improve incident management, to resolve incidents according to the defined SLA and based on ticket priority levels.

    Discuss if you're outsourcing just incident management or both incident management and request fulfillment. If both, determine what level of service requests will be outsourced? Will you ask the vendor to provide a service catalog? Will you outsource self-serve and automation?

    Document your findings in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library.

    Input

    • Outsourcing project goals from activity 1.1.4

    Output

    • List of processes to outsource

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    1.2.2 Design an outsourcing decision matrix for service desk processes and services

    Participants: IT Director, Service Desk Manager, Infrastructure manager

    2-3 hours

    Most successful service desk outsourcing engagements have a primary goal of freeing up their internal resources to work on complex tasks and projects. The key outsourcing success factor is to find out internal services and processes that are standardized or should be standardized, and then determine if they can be outsourced.

    1. Review the list of identified service desk processes from activity 1.2.1.
    2. Discuss the maturity level of each process (low, medium, high) and document under the maturity column of the Outsource the Service Desk Requirements Database Library.
    3. Use the following decision matrix for each process. Discuss which tasks are important to strategic objectives, which ones provide competitive advantage, and which ones require specialized in-house knowledge.
    4. Identify processes that receive high vendor's performance advantage. For instance, access to talent, lower cost at scale, and access to technology.
    5. In your outsourcing assessment, consider a narrow scope of engagement and a broad view of what is important to business outcome.
    6. Based on your findings, determine the priority of each process to be outsourced. Document results in the service desk outsourcing requirements database library, and section 4.1 of the service desk outsourcing project charter.
    • Important to strategic objectives
    • Provides competitive advantage
    • Specialized in-house knowledge required

    This is an image of a quadrant analysis, where the X axis is labeled Vendor's Performance Advantage, and the Y axis is labeled Importance to Business Outcomes.

    • Talent/access to skills
    • Economies of scale/lower cost at scale
    • Access to technology

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Maintain staff and training: you need to know who is being hired, how, and why

    Define documentation rules to retain knowledge

    • Establish a standard knowledge article template and list of required information.
    • Train staff on the requirements of knowledge base creation and management. Help them understand the value of the time spent recording their work.
    • It is your responsibility to assure the quality of each knowledge article. Outline accountabilities for internal staff and track for performance evaluations.

    For information on better knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy.

    Expect to manage stringent skills and training standards

    • Plan on being more formal about a Service Manager position and spending more time than you allocated previously.
    • Complete a thorough assessment of the skills you need to keep the service desk running smoothly.
    • Don't forget to account for any customized or proprietary systems. How will you train vendor staff to accommodate your needs? What does their turnaround look like: would it be more likely that you acquire a dependable employee in-house?
    • Staffing requirements need to be actively monitored to ensure the outsourcer doesn't have degradation of quality or hiring standards. Don't assume that things run well – complete regular checks and ask for access to audit results.
    • Are the systems and data being accessed by the vendor highly sensitive or subject to regulatory requirements? If so, it is your job to ensure that vendor staff are being screened appropriately.

    Does your service desk need to integrate to other IT services?

    A common challenge when outsourcing multiple services to more than one vendor is a lack of collaboration and communication between vendors.

    • Leverage SIAM capabilities to integrate service desk tasks to other IT services, if needed.
    • "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) is a management methodology that can be applied in an environment that includes services sourced from a number of service providers" (Scopism Limited, 2020).
    • SIAM supports cross-functional integrations. Organizations that look for a single provider will be less likely to get maximum benefits from SIAM.

    There are three layers of entities in SIAM:

    • Customer Organization: The customer who receives services, who defines the relationship with service providers.
    • Service Integrator: End-to-end service governance and integration is done at this layer, making sure all service providers are committed to their services.
    • Service Provider: Responsible party for service delivery according to contract. It can be combination of internal provider, managed by internal agreements, and external provider, managed by SLAs between providers and customer organization.

    Use SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    In the SIAM model, the customer organization keeps strategic, governance, and business activities, while integrating other services (either internally or externally).

    This is an image of the SIAM model

    SIAM Layers. Source: SIAM Foundation BoK

    Utilize SIAM to obtain better results from multiple service providers

    SIAM reduces service duplication and improves service delivery via managing internal and external service providers.

    To utilize the SIAM model, determine the following components:

    • Service providers
    • Service consumers
    • Service outcomes
    • Service obstacles and boundaries
    • Service dependencies
    • Technical requirements and interactions for each service
    • Service data and information including service levels

    To learn more about adopting SIAM, visit Scopism.

    1.2.3 Discuss if you need to outsource only service desk or if additional services would benefit from outsourcing too

    1-2 hours

    • Discuss principles and goals of SIAM and how integrating other services can apply within your processes.
    • Review the list of service desk processes and tasks to be outsourced from activities 1.2.1 and 1.2.2.
    • Brainstorm a list of other services that are outsourced/need to be outsourced.
    • Determine providers of each service (both internal and external). Document the other services to be integrated in the project charter template and requirements database library.

    Input

    • SIAM objectives
    • List of service desk processes to outsource

    Output

    • List of other services to outsource and integrate in the project

    Materials

    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Requirements Database Library

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Establish requirements for problem management in the outsourcing plan

    Your MSP should not just fulfill SLAs – they should be a proactive source of value.

    Problem management is a group effort. Make sure your internal team is assisted with sufficient and efficient data by the outsourcer to conduct a better problem management.

    Clearly state your organization's expectations for enabling problem management. MSPs may not necessarily need, and cannot do, problem management; however, they should provide metrics to help you discover trends, define recurring issues, and enable root cause analysis.

    For more information on problem management, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Improve Incident and Problem Management.

    PROBLEM MANAGEMENT

    INCIDENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: Ticket data from incident management is needed for incident matching to identify problems. Critical Incidents are also a main input to problem management.

    EVENT MANAGEMENT

    INTAKE: SMEs and operations teams monitoring system health events can identify indicators of potential future issues before they become incidents.

    APPLICATION, INFRASTRUCTURE, and SECURITY TEAMS

    ACTION: Problem tickets require investigation from relevant SMEs across different IT teams to identify potential solutions or workarounds.

    CHANGE MANAGEMENT

    OUTPUT: Problem resolution may need to go through Change Management for proper authorization and risk management.

    Outline problem management protocols to gain value from your service provider

    • For example, with a deep dive into ticket trend analysis, your MSP should be able to tell you that you've had a large number of tickets on a particular issue in the past month, allowing you to look into means to resolve the issue and prevent it from reoccurring.
    • A proactive MSP should be able to help your service levels improve over time. This should be built into the KPIs and metrics you ask for from the outsourcer.

    Sample Scenario

    Your MSP tracks ticket volume by platform.

    There are 100 network tickets/month, 200 systems tickets/month, and 5,000 end-user tickets/month.

    Tracking these numbers is a good start, but the real value is in the analysis. Why are there 5,000 end-user tickets? What are the trends?

    Your MSP should be providing a monthly root-cause analysis to help improve service quality.

    Outcomes:

    1. Meeting basic SLAs tells a small part of the story. The MSP is performing well in a functional sense, but this doesn't shed any insight on what kind of knowledge or value is being added.
    2. The MSP should provide routine updates on ticket trends and other insights gained through data analysis.
    3. A commitment to continual improvement will provide your organization with value throughout the duration of the outsourcing agreement.

    Phase 2

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify roles and responsibilities
    • Determine potential risks of outsourcing the service desk
    • Build a list of metrics

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Service Desk Team
    • IT Leadership

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 2.1

    Identify project stakeholders

    Activity

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • List of service desk roles
    • Service desk outsourcing goals

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcome of this step

    • Outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    Design an outsourcing strategy to capture the vision of your service desk

    An outsourcing strategy is crucial to the proper accomplishment of an outsourcing project. By taking the time to think through your strategy beforehand, you will have a clear idea of your desired outcomes. This will make your RFP of higher quality and will result in a much easier negotiation process.

    Most MSPs are prepared to offer a standard proposal to clients who do not know what they want. These are agreements that are doomed to fail. A clearly defined set of goals (discussed in Phase 1), risks, and KPIs and metrics (covered in this phase) makes the agreement more beneficial for both parties in the long run.

    1. Identify goals and objectives
    2. Determine mission statement
    3. Define roles and responsibilities
    4. Identify risks and constraints
    5. Define KPIs and metrics
    6. Complete outsourcing strategy

    A successful outsourcing initiative depends on rigorous preparation

    Outsourcing is a garbage in, garbage out initiative. You need to give your service provider the information they need to provide an effective product.

    • Data quality is critical to your outsourcing initiative's success.
    • Your vendor will be much better equipped to help you and to better price its services if it has a thorough understanding of your IT environment.
    • This means more than just building a catalog of your hardware and software. You will need to make available documented policies and processes so you and your vendor can understand where they fit in.
    • Failure to completely document your environment can lead to a much longer time to value as your provider will have to spend much more time (and thus much more money) getting their service up and running.

    "You should fill the gap before outsourcing. You should make sure how to measure tickets, how to categorize, and what the cost of outsourcing will be. Then you'll be able to outsource the execution of the service. Start your own processes and then outsource their execution."
    – Kris Krishan, Head of IT and business systems, Waymo

    Case Study

    Digital media company built an outsourcing strategy to improve customer satisfaction

    INDUSTRY: Digital Media

    SOURCE: Auxis

    Challenge

    A Canadian multi-business company with over 13,000 employees would like to maintain a growing volume of digital content with their endpoint management.

    The client operated a tiered model service desk. Tier 1 was outsourced, and tier 2 tasks were done internally, for more complex tasks and projects.

    As a result of poor planning and defining goals, the company had issues with:

    • Low-quality ticket handling
    • High volume of tickets escalated to tier 2, restraining them from working on complex tickets
    • High turn over and a challenge with talent retention
    • Insufficient documentation to train external tier 1 team
    • Long resolution time and low end-user satisfaction

    Solution

    The company structured a strategy for outsourcing service desk and defined their expectations and requirements.

    They engaged with another outsourcer that would fulfill their requirements as planned.

    With the help of the outsourcer's consulting team, the client was able to define the gaps in their existing processes and system to:

    • Implement a better ticketing system that could follow best-practices guidelines
    • Restructure the team so they would be able to handle processes efficiently

    Results

    The proactive planning led to:

    • Significant improvement in first call resolution (82%).
    • MTTR improvement freed tier 2 to focus on business strategic objectives and allowed them to work on higher-value activities.
    • With a better strategy around outsourcing planning, the company saved 20% of cost compared to the previous outsourcer.
    • As a result of this partnership, the company is providing a 24/7 structure in multiple languages, which is aligned with the company's growth.
    • Due to having a clear strategy built for the project, the client now has better visibility into metrics that support long-term continual improvement plans.

    Define roles and responsibilities for the outsourcing transition to form the base of your outsourcing strategy

    There is no "I" in outsource; make sure the whole team is involved

    Outsourcing is a complete top-to-bottom process that involves multiple levels of engagement:

    • Management must make high-level decisions about staffing and negotiate contract details with the vendor.
    • Service desk employees must execute on the documentation and standardization of processes in an effort to increase maturity.
    • Roles and responsibilities need to be clearly defined to ensure that all aspects of the transition are completed on time.
    • Implement a full-scale effort that involves all relevant staff. The most common mistake is to have the project design follow the same top-down pattern as the decision-making process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The service desk doesn't operate in isolation. The service desk interfaces with many other parts of the organization (such as finance, purchasing, field support, etc.), so it's important to ensure you engage stakeholders from other departments as well. If you only engage the service desk staff in your discussions around outsourcing strategy and RFP development, you may miss requirements that will come up when it's too late.

    2.1.1 Identify internal outsourcing roles and responsibilities

    2 hours

    1. The sample RACI chart in section 5 of the Project Charter Template outlines which positions are responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each major task within the outsourcing project.
    2. Responsible, is the group that is responsible for the execution and oversight of activities for the project. Accountable is the owner of the task/process, who is accountable for the results and outcomes. Consulted is the subject matter expert (SME) who is actively involved in the task/process and consulted on decisions. Informed is not actively involved with the task/process and is updated about decisions around the task/process.
    3. Make sure that you assign only one person as accountable per process. There can be multiple people responsible for each task. Consulted and Informed are optional for each task.
    4. Complete the RACI chart with recommended participants, and document in your service desk outsourcing project charter, under section 5.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Step 2.2

    Outline potential risks and constraints

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    Design an Outsourcing Strategy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Outsourcing objectives
    • Potential risks

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Managers
    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Mitigation strategy for each risk
    • Service desk metrics

    Know your constraints to reduce surprises during project implementation

    No service desk is perfect; know your limits and plan accordingly

    Define your constraints to outsourcing the service desk.

    Consider all types of constraints and opportunities, including:

    • Business forces
    • Economic cycles
    • Disruptive tech
    • Regulation and compliance issues
    • Internal organizational issues

    Within the scope of a scouring decision, define your needs and objectives, measure those as much as possible, and compare them with the "as-is" situation.

    Start determining what alternative approaches/scenarios the organization could use to fill the gaps. Start a comparison of scenarios against drivers, goals, and risks.

    Constraints

    Goals and objectives

    • Budget
    • Maturity
    • Compliance
    • Regulations
    • Outsourcing Strategy

    Plan ahead for potential risks that may impede your strategy

    Risk assessment must go hand-in-hand with goal and objective planning

    Risk is inherent with any outsourcing project. Common outsourcing risks include:

    • Lack of commitment to the customer's goals from the vendor.
    • The distraction of managing the relationship with the vendor.
    • A perceived loss of control and a feeling of over-dependence on your vendor.
    • Managers may feel they have less influence on the development of strategy.
    • Retained staff may feel they have become less skilled in their specialist field.
    • Unanticipated expenses that were assumed to be offered by the vendor.
    • Savings only result from high capital investment in new projects on the part of the customer.

    Analyze the risks associated with a specific scenario. This analysis should identify and understand the most common sourcing and vendor risks using a risk-reward analysis for selected scenarios. Use tools and guidelines to assess and manage vendor risk and tailor risk evaluation criteria to the types of vendors and products.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Plan for the worst to prevent it from happening. Evaluating risk should cover a wide variety of scenarios including the worst possible cases. This type of thinking will be crucial when developing your exit strategy in a later exercise.

    2.2.1 Identify potential risks and constraints that may impact achievement of objectives

    1-3 hours

    1. Brainstorm any potential risks that may arise through the outsourcing project. Describe each risk and categorize both its probability of occurring and impact on the organization as high (H), medium (M), or low (L), using the table below:
    Risk Description

    Probability(H/M/L)

    Impact(H/M/L)Planned Mitigation
    Lack of documentationMMUse cloud-based solution to share documents.
    Knowledge transferLMDetailed knowledge-sharing agreement in place in the RFP.
    Processes not followedLHClear outline and definition of current processes.
    1. Identify any constraints for your outsourcing strategy that may restrict, limit, or place certain conditions on the outsourcing project.
      • This may include budget restrictions or staffing limitations.
      • Identifying constraints will help you be prepared for risks and will lessen their impact.
    2. Document risks and constraints in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • RACI template
    • Org chart

    Output

    • List of roles and responsibilities for outsource project

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Service Desk Team

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Define service tiers and roles to develop clear vendor SLAs

    Management of performance, SLAs, and customer satisfaction remain the responsibility of your organization.

    Define the tiers and/or services that will be the responsibility of the MSP, as well as escalations and workflows across tiers. A sample outsourced structure is displayed here:

    External Vendor

    Tickets beyond the scope of the service desk staff need to be escalated back to the vendor responsible for the affected system.

    Tier 3

    Tickets that are focused on custom applications and require specialized or advanced support are escalated back to your organization's second- and third-level support teams.

    Tier 2

    The vendor is often able to provide specialized support for standard applications. However, the desktop support still needs someone onsite as that service is very expensive to outsource.

    Tier 1

    Service desk outsource vendors provide first-line response. This includes answering the phones, troubleshooting simple problems, and redirecting requests that are more complex.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you outsource everything, you'll be at the mercy of consultancy or professional services shops later on. You won't have anyone in-house to help you deploy anything; you're at the mercy of a consultant to come in and tell you what to do and how much to spend. Keep your highly skilled people in-house to offset what you'd have to pay for consultancy. If you need to repatriate your service desk later on, you will need skills in-house to do so.

    Don't become obsessed with managing by short-term metrics – look at the big picture

    "Good" metric results may simply indicate proficient reactive fixing; long-term thinking involves implementing proactive, balanced solutions.

    KPIs demonstrate that you are running an effective service desk because:

    • You close an average of 300 tickets per week
    • Your first call resolution is above 90%
    • Your talk time is less than five minutes
    • Surveys reveal clients are satisfied

    While these results may appear great on the surface, metrics don't tell the whole story.

    The effort from any support team seeks to balance three elements:

    FCR: Time; Resources; Quality

    First-Contact Resolution (FCR) Rate

    Percentage of tickets resolved during first contact with user (e.g. before they hang up or within an hour of submitting ticket). Could be measured as first-contact, first-tier, or first-day resolution.

    End-User Satisfaction

    Perceived value of the service desk measured by a robust annual satisfaction survey of end users and/or transactional satisfaction surveys sent with a percentage of tickets.

    Ticket Volume and Cost Per Ticket

    Monthly operating expenses divided by average ticket volume per month. Report ticket volume by department or ticket category, and look at trends for context.

    Average Time to Resolve (incidents) or Fulfill (service requests)

    Time elapsed from when a ticket is "open" to "resolved." Distinguish between ticket resolution vs. closure, and measure time for incidents and service requests separately.

    Focus on tension metrics to achieve long-term success

    Tension metrics help create a balance by preventing teams from focusing on a single element.

    For example, an MSP built incentives around ticket volume for their staff, but not the quality of tickets. As a result, the MSP staff rushed through tickets and gamed the system while service quality suffered.

    Use metrics to establish baselines and benchmarking data:

    • If you know when spikes in ticket volumes occur, you can prepare to resource more appropriately for these time periods
    • Create KB articles to tackle recurring issues and assist tier 1 technicians and end users.
      • Employ a root cause analysis to eliminate recurring tickets.

    "We had an average talk time of 15 minutes per call and I wanted to ensure they could handle those calls in 15 minutes. But the behavior was opposite, [the vendor] would wrap up the call, transfer prematurely, or tell the client they'd call them back. Service levels drive behavior so make sure they are aligned with your strategic goals with no unintended consequences."
    – IT Services Manager, Banking

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your metrics work cooperatively. Metrics should be chosen that cause tension on one another. It's not enough to rely on a fast service desk that doesn't have a high end-user satisfaction rate or runs at too high a cost; there needs to be balance.

    2.2.2 Arrange groups of tension metrics to balance your reporting

    1-3 hours

    1. Define KPIs and metrics that will be critical to service desk success.
    2. Distribute sticky notes of different colors to participants around the table.
    3. Select a space to place the sticky notes – a table, whiteboard, flip chart, etc. – and divide it into three zones.
    4. Refer to your defined list of goals and KPIs from activity 1.1.3 and discuss metrics to fulfill each KPI. Note that each goal (critical success factor, CSF) may have more than one KPI. For instance:
      1. Goal 1: Increase end-user satisfaction; KPI 1: Improve average transactional survey score. KPI 2: Improve annual relationship survey score.
      2. Goal 2: Improve service delivery; KPI 1: Reduce time to resolve incidents. KPI 2: Reduce time to fulfill service requests.
    5. Recall that tension metrics must form a balance between:
      1. Time
      2. Resources
      3. Quality
    6. Record the results in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter Template.

    Input

    • Service desk outsourcing goals
    • Service desk outsourcing KPIs

    Output

    • List of service desk metrics

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • Project Team
    • Service Desk Manager

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Phase 3

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Define the goal

    Design an outsourcing strategy

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    1.1 Identify goals and objectives

    1.2 Assess outsourcing feasibility

    2.1 Identify project stakeholders

    2.2 Outline potential risks and constraints

    3.1 Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    3.2 Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    3.3 Manage the outsource relationship

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build your outsourcing RFP
    • Set expectations with candidate vendors
    • Score and select your vendor
    • Manage your relationship with the vendor

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Define requirements for outsourcing service desk support

    Step 3.1

    Prepare a service overview and responsibility matrix

    Activities

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk processes and requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Knowledge management and technology requirements
    • Self-service requirements

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    Create a detailed RFP to ensure your candidate vendor will fulfill all your requirements

    At its core, your RFP should detail the outcomes of your outsourcing strategy and communicate your needs to the vendor.

    The RFP must cover business needs and the more detailed service desk functions required. Many enterprises only consider the functionality they need, while ignoring operational and selection requirements.

    Negotiate a supply agreement with the preferred outsourcer for delivery of the required services. Ensure your RFP covers:

    1. Service specification
    2. Service levels
    3. Roles and responsibilities
    4. Transition period and acceptance
    5. Prices, payment, and duration
    6. Agreement administration
    7. Outsourcing issues

    In addition to defining your standard requirements, don't forget to take into consideration the following factors when developing your RFP:

    • Employee onboarding and hardware imaging for new users
    • Applications you need current and future support for
    • Reporting requirements
    • Self-service options
    • Remote support needs and locations

    Although it may be tempting, don't throw everything over the wall at your vendor in the RFP. Evaluate your service desk functions in terms of quality, cost effectiveness, and the value provided from the vendor. Organizations should only outsource functions that the vendor can operate better, faster, or cheaper.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Involve the right stakeholders in developing your RFP, not just service desk. If only service desk is involved in RFP discussion, the connection between tier 1 and specialists will be broken, as some processes are not considered from IT's point of view.

    Identify ITSM solution requirements

    Your vendor probably uses a different tool to manage their processes; make sure its capabilities align with the vision of your service desk.

    Your service desk and outsourcing strategy were both designed with your current ITSM solution in mind. Before you hand the reins to an MSP, it is crucial that you outline how your current ITSM solution is being used in terms of functionality.

    Find out if it's better to have the MSP use their own ITSM tools or your ITSM solution.

    Benefits of operating within your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    Disadvantages of using your own ITSM while outsourcing the service desk:

    • If you provide the service catalog, it's easier to control your ITSM tool yourself.
    • Using your own ITSM and giving access to the outsourcer will allow you to build your dashboard and access your operational metrics rather than relying on the MSP to provide you with metrics.
    • Usage of the current tool may be extended across multiple departments, so it may be in the best interest of your business to have the vendor adopt usage of the current tool.
    • While many ITSM solutions have similar functions, innate differences do exist between them. Outsourcers mostly want to operate in their own ticketing solution. As other departments besides IT may be using the service management tool, you will need to have the same tool across the organization. This makes purchasing the new ITSM license very expensive, unless you operate in the same ITSM as the outsourcer.
    • You need your vendor to be able to use the system you have in order to meet your requirements, which will limit your options in the market.
    • If the outsourcer is using your ITSM, you should provide training to them.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Defining your tool requirements can be a great opportunity to get the tool functionality you always wanted. Many MSPs offer enterprise-level ITSM tools and highly mature processes that may tempt you to operate within their ITSM environment. However, first define your goals for such a move, as well as pros and cons of operating in their service management tool to weigh if its benefits overweigh its downfalls.

    Case Study

    Lone Star College learned that it's important to select a vendor whose tool will work with your service desk

    INDUSTRY: Education

    SOURCE: ServiceNow

    Challenge

    Lone Star College has an end-user base of over 100,000 staff and students.

    The college has six campuses across the state of Texas, and each campus was using its own service desk and ITSM solution.

    Initially, the decision was to implement a single ITSM solution, but organizational complexity prevented that initiative from succeeding.

    A decision was made to outsource and consolidate the service desks of each of the campuses to provide more uniform service to end users.

    Solution

    Lone Star College selected a vendor that implemented FrontRange.

    Unfortunately, the tool was not the right fit for Lone Star's service and reporting needs.

    After some discussion, the outsourcing vendor made the switch to ServiceNow.

    Some time later, a hybrid outsourced model was implemented, with Lone Star and the vendor combining to provide 24/7 support.

    Results

    The consolidated, standardized approach used by Lone Star College and its vendor has created numerous benefits:

    • Standardized reporting
    • High end-user satisfaction
    • All SLAs are being met
    • Improved ticket resolution times
    • Automated change management.

    Lone Star outsourced in order to consolidate its service desks quickly, but the tools didn't quite match.

    It's important to choose a tool that works well with your vendor's, otherwise the same standardization issues can persist.

    Design your RFP to help you understand what the vendor's standard offerings are and what it is capable of delivering

    Your RFP should be worded in a way that helps you understand what your vendor's standard offerings are because that's what they're most capable of delivering. Rather than laying out all your requirements in a high level of detail, carefully craft your questions in a probing way. Then, understand what your current baseline is, what your target requirements are, and assess the gap.

    Design the RFP so that responses can easily be compared against one another.

    It is common to receive responses that are very different – RFPs don't provide a response framework. Comparing vastly different responses can be like comparing apples to oranges. Not only are they immensely time consuming to score, their scores also don't end up accurately reflecting the provider's capabilities or suitability as a vendor.

    If your RFP is causing a ten minute printer backlog, you're doing something wrong.

    Your RFP should not be hundreds of pages long. If it is, there is too much detail.

    Providing too much detail can box your responses in and be overly limiting on your responses. It can deter potentially suitable provider candidates from sending a proposal.

    Request
    For
    Proposal

    "From bitter experience, if you're too descriptive, you box yourself in. If you're not descriptive enough, you'll be inundated with questions or end up with too few bidders. We needed to find the best way to get the message across without putting too much detail around it."
    – Procurement Manager, Utilities

    Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template contains nine sections

    1. Statement of work
      • Purpose, coverage, and participation ààInsert the purpose and goals of outsourcing your service desk, using steps 1.1 findings in this blueprint as reference.
    2. General information
      • Information about the document, enterprise, and schedule of events ààInsert the timeline you developed for the RFP issue and award process in this section.
    3. Proposal preparation instructions
      • The vendor's understanding of the RFP, good faith statement, points of contact, proposal submission, method of award, selection and notification.
    4. Service overview
      • Information about organizational perspective, service desk responsibility matrix, vendor requirements, and service level agreements (SLAs).
    5. Scope of work, specifications and requirements
      • Technical and functional requirements à Insert the requirements gathered in Phase 1 in this section of the RFP. Remember to include both current and future requirements.
    6. Exit conditions
      • Overview of exit strategy and transition process.
    7. Vendor qualifications and references
    8. Account management and estimated pricing
    9. Vendor certification
    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    The main point of focus in this document is defining your requirements (discussed in Phase 1) and developing proposal preparation instructions.

    The rest of the RFP consists mostly of standard legal language. Review the rest of the RFP template and adapt the language to suit your organization's standards. Check with your legal departments to make sure the RFP adheres to company policies.

    3.1.1 Evaluate your technology, people, and process requirements

    1-2 hours

    1. Review the outsourcing goals you identified in Phase 1 (activity 1.1.3).
    2. For each goal, divide the defined requirements from your requirements database library (activity 1.2.1) into three areas:
      1. People Requirements
      2. Process Requirements
      3. Technical Requirements
    3. Group your requirements based on characteristics (e.g. recovery capabilities, engagement methodology, personnel, etc.).
    4. Validate these requirements with the relevant stakeholders.
    5. Document your results in section 4 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Refined requirements to input into the RFP

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Assess knowledge management and technology requirements to enable the outsourcer with higher quality work

    Retain ownership of the knowledgebase to foster long-term growth of organizational intelligence

    With end users becoming more and more tech savvy, organizational intelligence is becoming an increasingly important aspect of IT support. Modern employees are able and willing to troubleshoot on their own before calling into the service desk. The knowledgebase and FAQs largely facilitate self-serve trouble shooting, both of which are not core concerns for the outsource vendor.

    Why would the vendor help you empower end users and decrease ticket volume when it will lead to less revenue in the future? Ticket avoidance is not simply about saving money by removing support. It's about the end-user community developing organizational intelligence so that it doesn't need as much technical support.

    Organizational intelligence occurs when shared knowledge and insight is used to make faster, better decisions.

    When you outsource, the flow of technical insight to your end-user community slows down or stops altogether unless you proactively drive it. Retain ownership of the knowledgebase and ensure that the content is:

    1. Validated to ensure it accurately describes the best solution.
    2. Actionable to ensure it prescribes repeatable, verifiable steps.
    3. Contextual to ensure the reader knows when NOT to apply the knowledge.
    4. Maintained to ensure the solution remains current.
    5. Applied, since knowledge is a cost with no benefit unless you apply it and turn it into organizational intelligence.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Include knowledge management process in your ticket handling workflows to make sure knowledge is transferred to the MSP and end users. For more information on knowledge management, refer to Info-Tech's Standardize the Service Desk and Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy blueprints.

    Assess self-service requirements in your outsourcing plan

    When outsourcing the service desk, determine who will take ownership of the self-service portal.

    Nowadays, outsourcers provide innovative services such as self-serve options. However, bear in mind that the quality of such services is a differentiating factor. A well-maintained portal makes it easy to:

    • Report incidents efficiently via use-case-based forms
    • Place requests via a business-oriented service catalog
    • Automate request processes
    • Give visibility on ticket status
    • Access knowledgebase articles
    • Provide status on critical systems
    • Look for services by both clicking service lists and searching them
    • Provide 24/7 service via interactive communication with live agent and AI-powered machine
    • Streamline business process in multiple departments rather than only IT

    In the outsourcing process, determine your expectations from your vendor on self-serve options and discuss how they will fulfill these requirements. Similar to other processes, work internally to define a list of services your organization is providing that you can pass over to the outsourcer to convert to a service catalog.

    Use Info-Tech's Sample Enterprise Services document to start determining your business's services.

    Assess admin rights in your outsourcing plan to give access to the outsourcer while you keep ownership

    Provide accessibility to account management to improve self-service, which enables:

    • Group owners to be named who can add or remove people from their operating units
    • Users to update attributes such as photos, address, phone number
    • Synchronization with HRIS (Human Resource Information Systems) to enable two-way communication on attribute updates
    • Password reset self-service

    Ensure the vendor has access rights to execute regular clean up to help:

    • Find stale and inactive user and computer accounts (inactive, expired, stale, never logged in)
    • Bulk move and disable capabilities
    • Find empty groups and remove
    • Find and assess NTFS permissions
    • Automated tasks to search and remediate

    Give admin rights to outsourcer to enable reporting and auditing capabilities, such as:

    • Change tracking and notifications
    • Password reset attempts, account unlocks, permission and account changes
    • Anomaly detection and remediation
    • Privilege abuse, such as password sharing

    Info-Tech Insight

    Provide your MSP with access rights to enable the service desk to have account management without giving too much authentication. This way you'll enable moving tickets to the outsourcer while you keep ownership and supervision.

    3.1.2 Outline which party will be responsible for which service desk processes

    1-2 hours

    This activity is an expansion to the outcomes of activity 1.2.1, where you determined the outsourcing requirements and the party to deliver each requirement.

    1. Add your identified tasks from the requirements database library to the service desk responsibility matrix (section 4.2 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template).
    2. Break each task down into more details. For instance, incident management may include tier 1, tier 2/3, KB creation and update, reporting, and auditing.
    3. Refer to section 4.1 of your Project Charter to review the responsible party for each use case.
    4. Considering the use cases, assess whether your organization, the MSP, or both parties will be responsible for the task.
    5. Document the results in section 4.2 of the RFP.

    Input

    • Identified key requirements

    Output

    • Responsible party to deliver each task

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Step 3.2

    Define your approach to vendor relationship management

    Activities

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    3.2.4 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews and evaluate responses for each vendor

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk outsourcing RFP
    • List of service desk outsourcing requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Service desk SLA
    • RFP scores

    Don't rush to judgment; apply due diligence when selecting your vendor

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    The most common mistake in vendor evaluation is moving too quickly. The process leading to an RFP evaluation can be exhausting, and many organizations simply want to be done with the whole process and begin outsourcing.

    1. Call around to get referrals for each vendor
    2. Create a shortlist
    3. Review SLAs and contract terms
    4. Select your vendor

    Recognize warning signs in the MSP's proposal to ensure a successful negotiation

    Vendors often include certain conditions in their proposals that masquerade as appealing but may spell disaster. Watch for these red flags:

    1. Discounted Price
      • Vendors know the market value of their competitors' services. Price is not what sets them apart; it's the type of services offered as well as the culture present.
      • A noticeably low price is often indicative of a desperate organization that is not focused on quality managed services.
    2. No Pushback
      • Vendors should work to customize their proposal to suit both their capabilities and your needs. No pushback means they are not invested in your project as deeply as they should be.
      • You should be prepared for and welcome negotiations; they're a sign that both sides are reaching a mutually beneficial agreement.
    3. Continual SLA Improvement
      • Continual improvement is a good quality that your vendor should have, but it needs to have some strategic direction.
      • Throwing continual SLA improvement into the deal may seem great, but make sure that you'll benefit from the value-added service. Otherwise, you'll be paying for services that you don't actually need.

    Clearly define core vendor qualities before looking at any options

    Vendor sales and marketing people know just what to say to sway you: don't talk to them until you know what you're looking for.

    Geography

    Do you prefer global or local data centers? Do you need multiple locations for redundancy in case of disaster? Will language barriers be a concern?

    Contract Length

    Ensure you can terminate a poor arrangement by having shorter terms with optional renewals. It's better to renew and renegotiate if one side is losing in the deal in order to keep things fair. Don't assume that proposed long-term cost savings will provide a satisfactory service.

    Target Market

    Vendors are aiming at different business segments, from startups to large enterprises. Some will accept existing virtual machines, and others enforce compliance to appeal to government and health agencies.

    SLA

    A robust SLA strengthens a vendor's reliability and accountability. Agencies with special needs should have room in negotiations for customization. Providers should also account for regular SLA reviews and updates. Vendors should be tracking call volume and making projections that should translate directly to SLAs.

    Support

    Even if you don't need a vendor with 24/7 availability, vendors who cannot support this timing should be eliminated. You may want to upgrade later and will want to avoid the hassle of switching.

    Maturity

    Vendors must have the willingness and ability to improve processes and efficiencies over time. Maintaining the status-quo isn't acceptable in the constantly evolving IT world.

    Cost

    Consider which model makes the most sense: will you go with per call or per user pricing? Which model will generate vendor motivation to continually improve and meet your long-term goals? Watch out for variable pricing models.

    Define your SLA requirements so your MSP can create a solution that fits

    SLAs ensure accountability from the service provider and determine service price

    SLAs define the performance of the service desk and clarify what the provider and customer can expect in their outsourcing relationship.

    • Service categories
    • The acceptable range of end-user satisfaction
    • The scope of what functions of the service desk are being measured (availability, time to resolve, time to respond, etc.)
    • Credits and penalties for achieving or missing targets
    • Frequency of measurement/reporting
    • Provisions and penalties for ending the contractual relationship early
    • Management and communication structure
    • Escalation protocol for incidents relating to tiers 2 or 3

    Each MSP's RFP response will help you understand their basic SLA terms and enhanced service offerings. You need to understand the MSP's basic SLA terms to make sure they are adequate enough for your requirements. A well-negotiated SLA will balance the requirements of the customer and limit the liability of the provider in a win/win scenario.

    For more information on defining service level requirements, refer to Info-Tech's blueprint Reduce Risk With Rock-Solid Service-Level Agreements.

    3.2.1 Define your SLA requirements

    2-3 hours

    • As a team, review your current service desk SLA for the following items:
      • Response time
      • Resolution time
      • Escalation time
      • End-user satisfaction
      • Service availability
    • Use the sample table as a starting point to determine your current incident management SLA:
    • Determine your SLA expectations from the outsourcer.
    • Document your SLA expectations in section 4.4 of the RFP template.

    Participants: IT Managers, Service Desk Manager, Project Team

    Response
    PriorityResponse SLOResolution SLOEscalation Time
    T1
    Severity 1CriticalWithin 10 minutes4 hours to resolveImmediate
    Severity 2HighWithin 1 business hour8 business hours to resolve20 minutes
    Severity 3MediumWithin 4 business hours24 business hours to resolveAfter 20 minutes without progress
    Severity 4LowSame day (8 hours)72 business hours to resolve After 1 hour without progress
    SLO ResponseTime it takes for service desk to respond to service request or incident. Target response is 80% of SLO
    SLO ResolutionTime it takes to resolve incident and return business services to normal. Target resolution is 80% of SLO

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Get a detailed plan from your selected vendor before signing a contract

    Build a standard process to evaluate candidate vendors

    Use section 5 of Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template for commonly used questions and requirements for outsourcing the service desk. Ask the right questions to secure an agreement that meets your needs. If you are already in a contract with an MSP, tale the opportunity of contract renewal to improve the contract and service.

    This is a screenshot of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Add your finalized assessment questions into Info-Tech's Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Scoring Tool to aggregate responses in one repository for comparison. Since the vendors are asked to respond in a standard format, it is easier to bring together all the responses to create a complete view of your options.

    This is an image of the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.2 Score each vendor to mitigate the risk of failure

    1-2 hours

    Include the right requirements for your organization and analyze candidate vendors on their capability to satisfy them.

    1. Use section 5 of the RFP template to convert your determined requirements into questions to address in vendor briefings.
    2. Review the questions in the context of near- and long-term service desk outsourcing needs. In the template, we have separated requirements into 7 categories:
      • Vendor Requirements (VR)
      • Vendor Qualifications/Engagement/Administration Capabilities (VQ)
      • Service Operations (SO)
      • Service Support (SS)
      • Service Level Agreement (SLA)
      • Transition Processes (TP)
      • Account Management (AM)
    3. Define the priority for each question:
      • Required
      • Desired
      • Optional
    4. Leave the compliance and comments to when you brief with vendors.

    Input

    • Technical and functional requirements

    Output

    • Priority level for each requirement
    • Completed list of requirement questions

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Markers
    • Laptops

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    3.2.3 Score RFP responses

    2-3 hours

    1. Enter the requirements questions into the RFP Scoring Tool and use it during vendor briefings.
    2. Copy the Required and Desired priority requirements from the previous activity into the RFP Questions column.
    3. Evaluate each RFP response against the RFP criteria based on the scoring scale.
    4. The Results section in the tool shows the vendor ranking based on their overall scores.
    5. Compare potential outsourcing partners considering scores on individual requirements categories and based on overall scores.

    Input

    • Completed list of requirement questions
    • Priority level for each requirement

    Output

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers
    • IT Director/CIO

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    3.2.3 Get referrals, conduct reference interviews, and evaluate responses for each vendor

    1. Outline a list of questions to conduct reference interviews with past/present clients of your candidate vendors.
    2. Use the reference interview template as a starting point. As a group review the questions and edit them to a list that will fulfill your requirements.
    3. Ask your candidate vendors to provide you with a list of three to five clients that have/had used their services. Make sure that vendors enforce the interview will be kept anonymous and names and results won't be disclosed.
    4. Ask vendors to book a 20-30 minute call with you and their client.
    5. Document your interview comments in your updated reference interview template.
    6. Update the RFP scoring tool accordingly.

    Input

    • List of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Output

    • Updated list of top vendors for outsourcing the service desk

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Reference Interview Template
    • Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Service Desk Vendor Proposal Scoring Tool

    Compare pricing models of outsourcing services

    It's a common sales tactic to use a low price as an easy solution. Carefully evaluate the vendors on your short-list and ensure that SLAs, culture, and price all match to your organization.

    Research different pricing models and accurately assess which model fits your organization. Consider the following pricing models:

    Pay per technician

    In this model, a flat rate is allocated to agents tackling your service desk tickets. This is a good option for building long-term relationship with outsourcer's agents and efficient knowledge transfer to the external team; however, it's not ideal for small organizations that deal with few tickets. This is potentially an expensive model for small teams.

    Pay per ticket

    This model considers the number of tickets handled by the outsourcer. This model is ideal if you only want to pay for your requirement. Although the internal team needs to have a close monitoring strategy to make sure the outsourcer's efficiency in ticket resolution.

    Pay per call

    This is based on outbound and inbound calls. This model is proper for call centers and can be less expensive than the other models; however, tracking is not easy, as you should ensure service desk calls result in efficient resolution rather than unnecessary follow-up.

    Pay per time (minutes or hours)

    The time spent on tickets is considered in this model. With this model, you pay for the work done by agents, so that it may be a good and relatively cheap option. As quicker resolution SLA is usually set by the organization, customer satisfaction may drop, as agents will be driven to faster resolution, not necessarily quality of work.

    Pay per user

    This model is based on number of all users, or number of users for particular applications. In this model, correlation between number of users and number of tickets should be taken into account. This is an ideal model if you want to deal with impact of staffing changes on service price. Although you should first track metrics such as mean time to resolve and average number of tickets so you can prevent unnecessary payment based on number of users when most users are not submitting tickets.

    Step 3.3

    Manage the outsource relationship

    Activities

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    Develop an RFP and make a long-term relationship

    This step requires the following inputs:

    • Service desk SLA
    • List of impacted stakeholder groups
    • List of impacts and benefits of the outsourced service desk

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Communication plan
    • Vendor management strategy

    Ensure formality of your vendor management practice

    A service desk outsourcing project is an ongoing initiative. Build a relationship plan to make sure the outsourcer complies with the agreement.

    This is an iamge of the cycle of relationship management and pre-contract management.

    Monitor Vendor Performance

    Key Activity:

    Measure performance levels with an agreed upon standard scorecard.

    Manage Vendor Risk

    Key Activity:

    Periodical assessment of the vendors to ensure they are meeting compliance standards.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Manage the contracts and renewal dates, the level of demand for the services/products provided, and the costs accrued.

    COMPLETE Identify and Evaluate Vendors

    Key Activity:
    Develop a plan with procurement and key internal stakeholders to define clear, consistent, and stable requirements.

    COMPLETE Select a Vendor

    Key Activity:
    Develop a consistent and effective process for selecting the most appropriate vendor.

    Manage Vendor Contracts and Relationships

    Key Activity:
    Contracts are consistently negotiated to ensure the vendor and the client have a documented and consistent understanding of mutual expectations.

    Expect the vendor to manage processes according to your standards

    You need this level of visibility into the service desk process, whether in-house or outsourced

    Each of these steps requires documentation – either through standard operating procedures, SLAs, logs, or workflow diagrams.

    • Define key operating procedures and workflows
    • Record, classify, and prioritize tickets
    • Verify, approve, and fulfill tickets
    • Investigate, diagnose, and allocate tickets
    • Resolve, recover, and close tickets
    • Track and report

    "Make sure what they've presented to you is exactly what's happening."
    – Service Desk Manager, Financial Services

    Manage the vendor relationship through regular communication

    Regular contact with your MSP provides opportunities to address issues that emerge

    Designate a relationship manager to act as a liaison at the business to be a conduit between the business and the MSP.

    • The relationship manager will take feedback from the MSP and relate it back to you to bridge the technical and business gap between the two.

    Who should be involved

    • Routine review meetings should involve the MSP and your relationship manager.
    • Technical knowledge may be needed to address specific issues, but business knowledge and relationship management skills are absolutely required.
    • Other stakeholders and people who are deeply invested in the vendor relationship should be invited or at least asked to contribute questions and concerns.

    What is involved

    • Full review of the service desk statistics, escalations, staffing changes, process changes, and drivers of extra billing or cost.
    • Updates to key documentation for the issues listed above and changes to the knowledgebase.
    • Significant drivers of customer satisfaction and dissatisfaction.
    • Changes that have/are being proposed that can impact any of the above.

    Communicate changes to end users to avoid push back and get buy-in

    Top-down processes for outsourcing will leave end users in the dark

    • Your service desk staff has been involved in the outsourcing process the entire time, but end users are affected all the same.
    • The service desk is the face of IT. A radical shift in service processes and points of contact can be detrimental to not only the service desk, but all of IT.
    • Communicating the changes early to end users will both help them cope with the change and help the MSP achieve better results.
      • An internal communication plan should be rolled out in order to inform and educate end users about the changes associated with outsourcing the service desk.
    • Your relationship manager should be tasked with communicating the changes to end users. The focus should be on addressing questions or concerns about the transition while highlighting the value gained through outsourcing to an MSP.
    • Service quality is a two-way street; the end user needs to be informed of proper protocols and points of contact so that the service desk technicians can fulfill their duties to the best of their ability.

    "When my company decided to outsource, I performed the same role but for a different company. There was a huge disruption to the business flow and a lack of communication to manage the change. The transition took weeks before any end users figured out what the new processes were for submitting a ticket and who to ask for help, and from a personal side, it became difficult to maintain relationships with colleagues."
    – IT Specialist for a financial institution

    Info-Tech Insight

    Educate the enterprise on expectations and processes that are handled by the MSP. Identify stakeholder groups affected by the outsourced processes then build a communication plan on what's been changed, what the benefits are, and how they will be impacted. Determine a timeline for communicating these initiatives and how these announcements will be made. Use InfoTech's Sample Communication Plan as a starting point.

    Build a continual improvement plan to make sure your MSP is efficiently delivering services according to expectations

    Ensure that your quality assurance program is repeatable and applicable to the outsourced services

    1. Design a QA scorecard that can help you assess steps the outsourcer agents should follow. Keep the questionnaire high level but specific to your environment. The scorecard should include questions that follow the steps to take considering your intake channels. For instance, if end users can reach the service desk via phone, chat, and email, build your QA around assessing customer service for call, chat, and ticket quality.
    2. Build a training program for agents: Develop an internal monitoring plan to relay detailed feedback to your MSP. Assess performance and utilize KBs as training materials for coaching agents on challenging transactions.
    3. Everything that goes to your service desk has to be documented; there will be no organic transfer of knowledge and experience.
    4. You need to let your MSP know how their efforts are impacting the performance of your organization. Measure your internal performance against the external performance of your service desk.
    5. Constant internal check-ins ensure that your MSP is meeting the SLAs outlined in the RFP.
    6. Routine reporting of metrics and ticket trends allow you to enact problem management. Otherwise, you risk your MSP operating your service desk with no internal feedback from its owner.
    7. Use metrics to determine the service desk functionality.

    Consider the success story of your outsourced service desk

    Build a feedback program for your outsourced services. Utilize transactional surveys to discover and tell outsourcing success to the impacted stakeholders.

    Ensure you apply steps for providing feedback to make sure processes are handled as expected. Service desk is the face of IT. Customer satisfaction on ticket transactions reflects satisfaction with IT and the organization.

    Build customer satisfaction surveys and conduct them for every transaction to get a better sense of outsourced service desk functionality. Collaborate with the vendor to make sure you build a proper strategy.

    • Build a right list of questions. Multiple and lengthy questions may lead to survey taking fatigue. Make sure you ask the right questions and give an option to the customer to comment any additional notes.
    • Give the option to users to rate the transaction. Make the whole process very seamless and doable in a few seconds.
    • Ensure to follow-up on negative feedback. This will help you find gaps in services and provide training to improve customer service.

    3.3.1 Analyze your outsourced service desk for continual improvement

    1 hour

    1. In this project, you determined the KPIs based on your service desk objectives (activity 2.2.2).
    2. Refer to your list of metrics in section 7 of the Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter.
    3. Think about what story you want to tell and determine what factors will help move the narrative.
    4. Discuss how often you would like to track these metrics. Determine the audience for each metric.
    5. Provide the list to the MSP to create reports with auto-distribution.

    Input

    • Determined CSFs and KPIs

    Output

    • List of metrics to track, including frequency to report and audience to report to

    Materials

    • Service Desk Outsourcing Project Charter

    Participants

    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers
    • Project Managers

    Download the Project Charter Template

    Reward the MSP for performance instead of "punishing" them for service failure

    Turn your vendor into a true partner by including an "earn back" condition in the contract

    MSPs often offer clients credit requests (service credits) for their service failures, which are applied to the previous month's monthly recurring charge. They are applied to the last month's MRC (monthly reoccurring charges) at the end of term and then the vendor pays out the residual.

    However, while common, service credits are not always perceived to be a strong incentive for the provider to continually focus on improvement of mean-time-to-respond/mean-time-to-resolve.

    • Engage the vendor as a true partner within a relationship only based upon Service Credits.
    • Suggest the vendor include a minor change to the non-performance processes within the final agreement: the vendor implements an "earn back" condition in the agreement.
    • Where a bank of service credits exists because of non-performance, if the provider exceeds the SLA performance metrics for a number of consecutive months (two is common), then an amount of any prior credits received by client is returned to the provider as an earn back for improved performance.
    • This can be a useful mechanism to drive improved performance.

    Measure the outsourced service desk ROI constantly to drive efficient decisions for continual improvement or an exit plan

    Efficient outsourced service desk causes positive impacts on business satisfaction. To address the true value of the services outsourced, you should evaluate the return on investment (ROI) in these areas: Emotional ROI, Time ROI, Financial ROI

    Emotional ROI

    Service desk's main purpose should be to provide topnotch services to end users. Build a customer experience program and leverage transactional surveys and relationship surveys to constantly analyze customer feedback on service quality.

    Ask yourself:

    • How have the outsourced services improved customer satisfaction?
    • How has the service desk impacted the business brand?
    • Have these services improved agents' job satisfaction?
    • What is the NPS score of the service desk?
    • What should we do to reduce the detractor rate and improve satisfaction leveraging the outsourced service desk?

    Time ROI

    Besides customer satisfaction, SLA commitment is a big factor to consider when conducting ROI analysis.

    Ask these questions:

    • Have we had improvement in FCR?
    • What are the mean time to resolve incidents and mean time to fulfill requests?
    • Is the cost incurred to outsourced services worth improvement in such metrics?

    Financial ROI

    As already mentioned in Phase 1, the main motivation for outsourcing the service desk should not be around cost reduction, but to improve performance. Regardless, it's still important to understand the financial implications of your decision.

    To evaluate the financial impact of your outsourced service desk, ask these questions:

    • How much have the outsourced services impacted our business financially?
    • How much are we paying compared to when it was done internally?
    • Considering the emotional, time, and effort factors, is it worth bringing the services in house or changing the vendor?

    3.3.2 Make a case to either rehabilitate your outsourcing agreement or exit

    3-4 hours

    1. Refer to the results of activity 2.2.2. for the list of metrics and the metrics dashboard over the past quarter.
    2. Consider emotional and time ROI, assess end-user satisfaction and SLA, and run a report comparison with the baseline that you built prior to outsourcing the service desk.
    3. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you stay with the vendor.
    4. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you switch the vendor.
    5. Estimate the organization's IT operating expenses over the next five years if you repatriate the service desk.
    6. Estimate the non-recurring costs associated with the move, such as the penalty for early contract termination, data center moving costs, and cost of potential business downtime during the move. Sum them to determine the investment.
    7. Calculate the return on investment. Discuss and decide whether the organization should consider rehabilitating the vendor agreement or ending the partnership.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    For more information on conducting this activity, refer to InfoTech's blueprint Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    Define exit conditions to complete your contract with your MSP

    The end of outsourcing is difficult. Your organization needs to maintain continuity of service during the transition. Your MSP needs to ensure that its resources can be effectively transitioned to the next deployment with minimal downtime. It is crucial to define your exit conditions so that both sides can prepare accordingly.

    • Your exit conditions must be clearly laid out in the contract. Create a list of service desk functions and metrics that are important to your organization's success. If your MSP is not meeting those needs or performance levels, you should terminate your services.
    • Most organizations accomplish this through a clear definition of hard and measurable KPIs and metrics that must be achieved and what will happen in the case these metrics are not being regularly met. If your vendor doesn't meet these requirements as defined in your contract, you then have a valid reason and the ability to leave the agreement.

    Examples of exit conditions:

    • Your MSP did not meet their SLAs on priority 1 or 2 tickets two times within a month.
    • If they didn't meet the SLA twice in that 30 days, you could terminate the contract penalty-free.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If things start going south with your MSP, negotiate a "get well plan." Outline your problems to the MSP and have them come back to you with a list of how they're going to fix these problems to get well before you move forward with the contract.

    Try to rehabilitate before you repatriate

    Switching service providers or ending the contract can be expensive and may not solve your problems. Try to rehabilitate your vendor relationship before immediately ending it.

    You may consider terminating your outsourcing agreement if you are dissatisfied with the current agreement or there has been a change in circumstances (either the vendor has changed, or your organization has changed).

    Before doing so, consider the challenges:

    1. It can be very expensive to switch providers or end a contract.
    2. Switching vendors can be a large project involving transfer of knowledge, documentation, and data.
    3. It can be difficult to maintain service desk availability, functionality, and reliability during the transition.

    Diagnose the cause of the problem before assuming it's the MSP's fault. The issue may lie with poorly defined requirements and processes, lack of communication, poor vendor management, or inappropriate SLAs. Re-assess your strategy and re-negotiate your contract if necessary.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There are many reasons why outsourcing relationships fail, but it's not always the vendor's fault.

    Clients often think their MSP isn't doing a great job, but a lot of the time the reason comes back to the client. They may not have provided sufficient documentation on processes, were not communicating well, didn't have a regular point of contact, and weren't doing regular service reviews. Before exiting the relationship, evaluate why it's not working and try to fix things first.

    Don't stop with an exit strategy, you also need to develop a transition plan

    Plan out your transition timeline, taking into account current contract terms and key steps required. Be prepared to handle tickets immediately upon giving notice.

    • Review your outsourcing contract with legal counsel to identify areas of concern for lock-in or breech.
    • Complete a cost/benefit analysis.
    • Bring intellectual property (including ticket data, knowledge base articles, and reports) back in-house (if you'd like to repatriate the service desk) or transfer to the next service desk vendor (if you're outsourcing to another MSP).
    • Review and update service desk standard processes (escalation, service levels, ticket templates, etc.).
    • Procure service desk software, licenses, and necessary hardware as needed.
    • Train the staff (internal for repatriating the service desk, or external for the prospective MSP).
    • Communicate the transition plan and be prepared to start responding to tickets immediately.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Develop a transition plan about six months before the contract notice date. Be proactive by constantly tracking the MSP, running ROI analyses and training staff before moving the services to the internal team or the next MSP. This will help you manage the transition smoothly and handle intake channels so that upon potential exit, users won't be disrupted.

    3.3.3 Develop an exit strategy in case you need to end your contract early

    3-4 hours

    Create a plan to be prepared in case you need to end your contract with the MSP early.

    Your exit strategy should encompass both the conditions under which you would need to end your contract with the MSP and the next steps you will take to transition your services.

    1. Define the exit conditions you plan to negotiate into your contract with the MSP:
      • Identify the performance levels you will require your MSP to meet.
      • Identify the actions you expect the MSP to take if they fail to meet these performance levels.
      • Identify the conditions under which you would leave the contract early.
    2. Develop a strategy for transitioning services in the event you need to leave your contract with the MSP:
      • Will you hand the responsibility to a new MSP or repatriate the service desk back in-house?
      • How will you maintain services through the transition?
    3. Document your exit strategy in section 6 of the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template.

    Input

    • Outsourced service desk metrics
    • Operating expenses

    Output

    • Return on investment

    Materials

    • List of metrics
    • Laptop
    • Markers
    • Flip chart/whiteboard

    Participants

    • IT Director/CIO
    • Service Desk Manager
    • IT Managers

    Download the Service Desk Outsourcing RFP Template

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    You have now re-envisioned your service desk by building a solid strategy for outsourcing it to a vendor. You first analyzed your challenges with the current service desk and evaluated the benefits of outsourcing services. Then you went through requirements assessment to find out which processes should be outsourced. Thereafter, you developed an RFP to communicate your proposal and evaluate the best candidates.

    You have also developed a continual improvement plan to ensure the outsourcer provides services according to your expectations. Through this plan, you're making sure to build a good relationship through incentivizing the vendor for accomplishments rather than punishing for service failures. However, you've also contemplated an exit plan in the RFP for potential consistent service failures.

    Ideally, this blueprint has helped you go beyond requirements identification and served as a means to change your mindset and strategy for outsourcing the service desk efficiently to gain long-term benefits.

    if you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    This is a picture of Info-Tech analyst Mahmoud Ramin

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    This is a screenshot of activity 1.2.1 found in this blueprint

    Identify Processes to Outsource
    Identify service desk tasks that will provide the most value upon outsourcing.

    This is a screenshot of activity 3.2.2 found in this blueprint

    Score Candidate Vendors
    Evaluate vendors on their capabilities for satisfying your service desk requirements.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Standardize the Service Desk

    • Improve customer service by driving consistency in your support approach and meeting SLAs.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery

    • There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Terminate the IT Infrastructure Outsourcing Relationship

    • There must be 50 ways to leave your vendor.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Yev Khovrenkov; Enterprise Consultant, Solvera Solutions

    Kamil Salagan; I&O Manager, Bartek Ingredients

    Satish Mekerira; VP of IT, Coherus BioSciences

    Kris Krishan; Head of IT and Business Systems, Waymo

    Kris Arthur; Infra & Security Director, SEKO Logistics

    Valance Howden; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Sandi Conrad; Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group

    Graham Price; Senior Director of Executive Services, Info-Tech Research Group

    Barry Cousins; Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Mark Tauschek; VP of I&O Research, Info-Tech Research Group

    Darin Stahl; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Yong; Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    A special thank-you to five anonymous contributors

    Bibliography

    Allnutt, Charles. "The Ultimate List of Outsourcing Statistics." MicroSourcing, 2022. Accessed July 2022.
    "Considerations for outsourcing the service desk. A guide to improving your service desk and service delivery performance through outsourcing." Giva. Accessed May 2022.
    Hurley, Allison. "Service Desk Outsourcing | Statistics, Challenges, & Benefits." Forward BPO Inc., 2019. Accessed June 2022.
    Mtsweni, Patricia, et al. "The impact of outsourcing information technology services on business operations." South African Journal of Information Management, 2021, Accessed May 2022.
    "Offshore, Onshore or Hybrid–Choosing the Best IT Outsourcing Model." Calance, 2021. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    "Service Integration and Management (SIAM) Foundation Body of Knowledge." Scopism, 2020. Accessed May 2022.
    Shultz, Aaron. "IT Help Desk Outsourcing Pricing Models Comparison." Global Help Desk Services. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Shultz, Aaron. "4 Steps to Accurately Measure the ROI of Outsourced Help Desk Services" Global Help Desk Services, Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Sunberg, John. "Great Expectations: What to Look for from Outsourced Service Providers Today." HDI. Accessed June 2022. Web.
    Walters, Grover. "Pivotal Decisions in outsourcing." Muma Case Review, 2019. Accessed May 2022.
    Wetherell, Steve. "Outsourced IT Support Services: 10 Steps to Better QA" Global Held Desk Services. Accessed May 2022. Web.

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}275|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $71,830 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 25 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /organizational-design

    Most organizations go through an organizational redesign to:

    • Better align to the strategic objectives of the organization.
    • Increase the effectiveness of IT as a function.
    • Provide employees with clarity in their roles and responsibilities.
    • Support new capabilities.
    • Better align IT capabilities to suit the vision.
    • Ensure the IT organization can support transformation initiatives.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizational redesign is only as successful as the process leaders engage in. It shapes a story framed in a strong foundation of need and a method to successfully implement and adopt the new structure.
    • Benchmarking your organizational redesign to other organizations will not work. Other organizations have different strategies, drivers, and context. It’s important to focus on your organization, not someone else's.
    • You could have the best IT employees in the world, but if they aren’t structured well your organization will still fail in reaching its vision.

    Impact and Result

    • We are often unsuccessful in organizational redesign because we lack an understanding of why this initiative is required or fail to recognize that it is a change initiative.
    • Successful organizational design requires a clear understanding of why it is needed and what will be achieved by operating in a new structure.
    • Additionally, understanding the impact of the change initiative can lead to greater adoption by core stakeholders.

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Deck – A defined method of redesigning your IT structure that is founded by clear drivers and consistently considering change management practices.

    The purpose of this storyboard is to provide a four-phased approach to organizational redesign.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure – Phases 1-4

    2. Communication Deck – A method to communicate the new organizational structure to critical stakeholders to gain buy-in and define the need.

    Use this templated Communication Deck to ensure impacted stakeholders have a clear understanding of why the new organizational structure is needed and what that structure will look like.

    • Organizational Design Communications Deck

    3. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Executive Summary Template – A template to secure executive leadership buy-in and financial support for the new organizational structure to be implemented.

    This template provides IT leaders with an opportunity to present their case for a change in organizational structure and roles to secure the funding and buy-in required to operate in the new structure.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Executive Summary

    4. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Workbook – A method to document decisions made and rationale to support working through each phase of the process.

    This Workbook allows IT and business leadership to work through the steps required to complete the organizational redesign process and document key rationale for those decisions.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Workbook

    5. Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Operating Models and Capability Definitions – A tool that can be used to provide clarity on the different types of operating models that exist as well as the process definitions of each capability.

    Refer to this tool when working through the redesign process to better understand the operating model sketches and the capability definitions. Each capability has been tied back to core frameworks that exist within the information and technology space.

    • Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure Operating Models and Capability Definitions

    Infographic

    Workshop: Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish the Organizational Design Foundation

    The Purpose

    Lay the foundation for your organizational redesign by establishing a set of organizational design principles that will guide the redesign process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly articulate why this organizational redesign is needed and the implications the strategies and context will have on your structure.

    Activities

    1.1 Define the org design drivers.

    1.2 Document and define the implications of the business context.

    1.3 Align the structure to support the strategy.

    1.4 Establish guidelines to direct the organizational design process.

    Outputs

    Clear definition of the need to redesign the organizational structure

    Understanding of the business context implications on the organizational structure creation.

    Strategic impact of strategies on organizational design.

    Customized Design Principles to rationalize and guide the organizational design process.

    2 Create the Operating Model Sketch

    The Purpose

    Select and customize an operating model sketch that will accurately reflect the future state your organization is striving towards. Consider how capabilities will be sourced, gaps in delivery, and alignment.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A customized operating model sketch that informs what capabilities will make up your IT organization and how those capabilities will align to deliver value to your organization.

    Activities

    2.1 Augmented list of IT capabilities.

    2.2 Capability gap analysis

    2.3 Identified capabilities for outsourcing.

    2.4 Select a base operating model sketch.

    2.5 Customize the IT operating model sketch.

    Outputs

    Customized list of IT processes that make up your organization.

    Analysis of which capabilities require dedicated focus in order to meet goals.

    Definition of why capabilities will be outsourced and the method of outsourcing used to deliver the most value.

    Customized IT operating model reflecting sourcing, centralization, and intended delivery of value.

    3 Formalize the Organizational Structure

    The Purpose

    Translate the operating model sketch into a formal structure with defined functional teams, roles, reporting structure, and responsibilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A detailed organizational chart reflecting team structures, reporting structures, and role responsibilities.

    Activities

    3.1 Categorize your IT capabilities within your defined functional work units.

    3.2 Create a mandate statement for each work unit.

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units and assign accountability and responsibility.

    3.4 Finalize your organizational structure.

    Outputs

    Capabilities Organized Into Functional Groups

    Functional Work Unit Mandates

    Organizational Chart

    4 Plan for the Implementation & Change

    The Purpose

    Ensure the successful implementation of the new organizational structure by strategically communicating and involving stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A clear plan of action on how to transition to the new structure, communicate the new organizational structure, and measure the effectiveness of the new structure.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify and mitigate key org design risks.

    4.2 Define the transition plan.

    4.3 Create the change communication message.

    4.4 Create a standard set of FAQs.

    4.5 Align sustainment metrics back to core drivers.

    Outputs

    Risk Mitigation Plan

    Change Communication Message

    Standard FAQs

    Implementation and sustainment metrics.

    Further reading

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Designing an IT structure that will enable your strategic vision is not about an org chart – it’s about how you work.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Structure enables strategy.

    The image contains a picture of Allison Straker.

    Allison Straker

    Research Director,

    Organizational Transformation

    The image contains a picture of Brittany Lutes.

    Brittany Lutes

    Senior Research Analyst,

    Organizational Transformation

    An organizational structure is much more than a chart with titles and names. It defines the way that the organization operates on a day-to-day basis to enable the successful delivery of the organization’s information and technology objectives. Moreover, organizational design sees beyond the people that might be performing a specific role. People and role titles will and often do change frequently. Those are the dynamic elements of organizational design that allow your organization to scale and meet specific objectives at defined points of time. Capabilities, on the other hand, are focused and related to specific IT processes.

    Redesigning an IT organizational structure can be a small or large change transformation for your organization. Create a structure that is equally mindful of the opportunities and the constraints that might exist and ensure it will drive the organization towards its vision with a successful implementation. If everyone understands why the IT organization needs to be structured that way, they are more likely to support and adopt the behaviors required to operate in the new structure.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your organization needs to reorganize itself because:

    • The current IT structure does not align to the strategic objectives of the organization.
    • There are inefficiencies in how the IT function is currently operating.
    • IT employees are unclear about their role and responsibilities, leading to inconsistencies.
    • New capabilities or a change in how the capabilities are organized is required to support the transformation.

    Common Obstacles

    Many organizations struggle when it comes redesigning their IT organizational structure because they:

    • Jump right into creating the new organizational chart.
    • Do not include the members of the IT leadership team in the changes.
    • Do not include the business in the changes.
    • Consider the context in which the change will take place and how to enable successful adoption.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Successful IT organization redesign includes:

    • Understanding the drivers, context, and strategies that will inform the structure.
    • Remaining objective by focusing on capabilities over people or roles.
    • Identifying gaps in delivery, sourcing strategies, customers, and degrees of centralization.
    • Remembering that organizational design is a change initiative and will require buy-in.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A successful redesign requires a strong foundation and a plan to ensure successful adoption. Without these, the organizational chart has little meaning or value.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations who are looking to:

    • Redesign the IT structure to align to the strategic objectives of the enterprise.
    • Increase the effectiveness in how the IT function is operating in the organization.
    • Provide clarity to employees around their roles and responsibilities.
    • Ensure there is an ability to support new IT capabilities and/or align capabilities to better support the direction of the organization.
    • Align the IT organization to support a business transformation such as becoming digitally enabled or engaging in M&A activities.

    Organizational design is a challenge for many IT and digital executives

    69% of digital executives surveyed indicated challenges related to structure, team silos, business-IT alignment, and required roles when executing on a digital strategy.

    Source: MIT Sloan, 2020

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make IT organizational redesign difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Confuse organizational design and organizational charts as the same thing.
    • Start with the organizational chart, not taking into consideration the foundational elements that will make that chart successful.
    • Fail to treat organizational redesign as a change management initiative and follow through with the change.
    • Exclude impacted or influential IT leaders and/or business stakeholders from the redesign process.
    • Leverage an operating model because it is trending.

    To overcome these barriers:

    • Understand the context in which the changes will take place.
    • Communicate the changes to those impacted to enable successful adoption and implementation of a new organizational structure.
    • Understand that organizational design is for more than just HR leaders now; IT executives should be driving this change.

    Succeed in Organizational Redesign

    75% The percentage of change efforts that fail.

    Source: TLNT, 2019

    55% The percentage of practitioners who identify how information flows between work units as a challenge for their organization.

    Source: Journal of Organizational Design, 2019

    Organizational design defined

    If your IT strategy is your map, your IT organizational design represents the optimal path to get there.

    IT organizational design refers to the process of aligning the organization’s structure, processes, metrics, and talent to the organization’s strategic plan to drive efficiency and effectiveness.

    Why is the right IT organizational design so critical to success?

    Adaptability is at the core of staying competitive today

    Structure is not just an organizational chart

    Organizational design is a never-ending process

    Digital technology and information transparency are driving organizations to reorganize around customer responsiveness. To remain relevant and competitive, your organizational design must be forward looking and ready to adapt to rapid pivots in technology or customer demand.

    The design of your organization dictates how roles function. If not aligned to the strategic direction, the structure will act as a bungee cord and pull the organization back toward its old strategic direction (ResearchGate.net, 2014). Structure supports strategy, but strategy also follows structure.

    Organization design is not a one-time project but a continuous, dynamic process of organizational self-learning and continuous improvement. Landing on the right operating model will provide a solid foundation to build upon as the organization adapts to new challenges and opportunities.

    Understand the organizational differences

    Organizational Design

    Organizational design the process in which you intentionally align the organizational structure to the strategy. It considers the way in which the organization should operate and purposely aligns to the enterprise vision. This process often considers centralization, sourcing, span of control, specialization, authority, and how those all impact or are impacted by the strategic goals.

    Operating Model

    Operating models provide an architectural blueprint of how IT capabilities are organized to deliver value. The placement of the capabilities can alter the culture, delivery of the strategic vision, governance model, team focus, role responsibility, and more. Operating model sketches should be foundational to the organizational design process, providing consistency through org chart changes.

    Organizational Structure

    The organizational structure is the chosen way of aligning the core processes to deliver. This can be strategic, or it can be ad hoc. We recommend you take a strategic approach unless ad hoc aligns to your culture and delivery method. A good organizational structure will include: “someone with authority to make the decisions, a division of labor and a set of rules by which the organization operates” (Bizfluent, 2019).

    Organizational Chart

    The capstone of this change initiative is an easy-to-read chart that visualizes the roles and reporting structure. Most organizations use this to depict where individuals fit into the organization and if there are vacancies. While this should be informed by the structure it does not necessarily depict workflows that will take place. Moreover, this is the output of the organizational design process.

    Sources: Bizfluent, 2019; Strategy & Business, 2015; SHRM, 2021

    The Technology Value Trinity

    The image contains a diagram of the Technology Value Trinity as described in the text below.

    All three elements of the Technology Value Trinity work in harmony to delivery business value and achieve strategic needs. As one changes, the others need to change as well.

    How do these three elements relate?

    • Digital and IT strategy tells you what you need to achieve to be successful.
    • Operating model and organizational design align resources to deliver on your strategy and priorities. This is done by strategically structuring IT capabilities in a way that enables the organizations vision and considers the context in which the structure will operate.
    • I&T governance is the confirmation of IT’s goals and strategy, which ensures the alignment of IT and business strategy and is the mechanism by which you continuously prioritize work to ensure that what is delivered is in line with the strategy.

    Too often strategy, organizational design, and governance are considered separate practices – strategies are defined without teams and resources to support. Structure must follow strategy.

    Info-Tech’s approach to organizational design

    Like a story, a strategy without a structure to deliver on it is simply words on paper.

    Books begin by setting the foundation of the story.

    Introduce your story by:

    • Defining the need(s) that are driving this initiative forward.
    • Introducing the business context in which the organizational redesign must take place.
    • Outlining what’s needed in the redesign to support the organization in reaching its strategic IT goals.

    The plot cannot thicken without the foundation. Your organizational structure and chart should not exist without one either.

    The steps to establish your organizational chart - with functional teams, reporting structure, roles, and responsibilities defined – cannot occur without a clear definition of goals, need, and context. An organizational chart alone won’t provide the insight required to obtain buy-in or realize the necessary changes.

    Conclude your story through change management and communication.

    Good stories don’t end without referencing what happened before. Use the literary technique of foreshadowing – your change management must be embedded throughout the organizational redesign process. This will increase the likelihood that the organizational structure can be communicated, implemented, and reinforced by stakeholders.

    Info-Tech uses a capability-based approach to help you design your organizational structure

    Once your IT strategy is defined, it is critical to identify the capabilities that are required to deliver on those strategic initiatives. Each initiative will require a combination of these capabilities that are only supported through the appropriate organization of roles, skills, and team structures.

    The image contains a diagram of the various services and blueprints that Info-Tech has to offer.

    Embed change management into organizational design

    Change management practices are needed from the onset to ensure the implementation of an organizational structure.

    For each phase of this blueprint, its important to consider change management. These are the points when you need to communicate the structure changes:

    • Phase 1: Begin to socialize the idea of new organizational structure with executive leadership and explain how it might be impactful to the context of the organization. For example, a new control, governance model, or sourcing approach could be considered.
    • Phase 2: The chosen operating model will influence your relationships with the business and can create/eliminate silos. Ensure IT and business leaders have insight into these possible changes and a willingness to move forward.
    • Phase 3: The new organizational structure could create or eliminate teams, reduce or increase role responsibilities, and create different reporting structures than before. It’s time to communicate these changes with those most impacted and be able to highlight the positive outcomes of the various changes.
    • Phase 4: Should consider the change management practices holistically. This includes the type of change and length of time to reach the end state, communication, addressing active resistors, acquiring the right skills, and measuring the success of the new structure and its adoption.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do not undertake an organizational redesign initiative if you will not engage in change management practices that are required to ensure its successful adoption.

    Measure the value of the IT organizational redesign

    Given that the organizational redesign is intended to align with the overall vision and objectives of the business, many of the metrics that support its success will be tied to the business. Adapt the key performance indicators (KPIs) that the business is using to track its success and demonstrate how IT can enable the business and improve its ability to reach those targets.

    Strategic Resources

    The percentage of resources dedicated to strategic priorities and initiatives supported by IT operating model. While operational resources are necessary, ensuring people are allocating time to strategic initiatives as well will drive the business towards its goal state. Leverage Info-Tech’s IT Staffing Assessment diagnostic to benchmark your IT resource allocation.

    Business Satisfaction

    Assess the improvement in business satisfaction overall with IT year over year to ensure the new structure continues to drive satisfaction across all business functions. Leverage Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision diagnostic to see how your IT organization is perceived.

    Role Clarity

    The degree of clarity that IT employees have around their role and its core responsibilities can lead to employee engagement and retention. Consider measuring this core job driver by leveraging Info-Tech’s Employee Engagement Program.

    Customer & User Satisfaction

    Measure customer satisfaction with technology-enabled business services or products and improvements in technology-enabled client acquisition or retention processes. Assess the percentage of users satisfied with the quality of IT service delivery and leverage Info-Tech’s End-User Satisfaction Survey to determine improvements.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Redesigning Your IT Organization

    Phase

    1. Establish the Organizational Design Foundation

    2. Create the Operating Model Sketch

    3. Formalize the Organizational Structure

    4. Plan for Implementation and Change

    Phase Outcomes

    Lay the foundation for your organizational redesign by establishing a set of organizational design principles that will guide the redesign process.

    Select and customize an operating model sketch that will accurately reflect the future state your organization is striving towards. Consider how capabilities will be sourced, gaps in delivery, and alignment.

    Translate the operating model sketch into a formal structure with defined functional teams, roles, reporting structure, and responsibilities.

    Ensure the successful implementation of the new organizational structure by strategically communicating and involving stakeholders.

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Organizational redesign processes focus on defining the ways in which you want to operate and deliver on your strategy – something an organizational chart will never be able to convey.

    Phase 1 insight

    Focus on your organization, not someone else's’. Benchmarking your organizational redesign to other organizations will not work. Other organizations have different strategies, drivers, and context.

    Phase 2 insight

    An operating model sketch that is customized to your organization’s specific situation and objectives will significantly increase the chances of creating a purposeful organizational structure.

    Phase 3 insight

    If you follow the steps outlined in the first three phases, creating your new organizational chart should be one of the fastest activities.

    Phase 4 insight

    Throughout the creation of a new organizational design structure, it is critical to involve the individuals and teams that will be impacted.

    Tactical insight

    You could have the best IT employees in the world, but if they aren’t structured well your organization will still fail in reaching its vision.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:


    Communication Deck

    Communicate the changes to other key stakeholders such as peers, managers, and staff.

    Workbook

    As you work through each of the activities, use this workbook as a place to document decisions and rationale.

    Reference Deck

    Definitions for every capability, base operating model sketches, and sample organizational charts aligned to those operating models.

    Job Descriptions

    Key deliverable:

    Executive Presentation

    Leverage this presentation deck to gain executive buy-in for your new organizational structure.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Create an organizational structure that aligns to the strategic goals of IT and the business.
    • Provide IT employees with clarity on their roles and responsibilities to ensure the successful delivery of IT capabilities.
    • Highlight and sufficiently staff IT capabilities that are critical to the organization.
    • Define a sourcing strategy for IT capabilities.
    • Increase employee morale and empowerment.

    Business Benefits

    • IT can carry out the organization’s strategic mission and vision of all technical and digital initiatives.
    • Business has clarity on who and where to direct concerns or questions.
    • Reduce the likelihood of turnover costs as IT employees understand their roles and its importance.
    • Create a method to communicate how the organizational structure aligns with the strategic initiatives of IT.
    • Increase ability to innovate the organization.

    Executive Brief Case Study

    IT design needs to support organizational and business objectives, not just IT needs.

    INDUSTRY: Government

    SOURCE: Analyst Interviews and Working Sessions

    Situation

    IT was tasked with providing equality to the different business functions through the delivery of shared IT services. The government created a new IT organizational structure with a focus on two areas in particular: strategic and operational support capabilities.

    Challenge

    When creating the new IT structure, an understanding of the complex and differing needs of the business functions was not reflected in the shared services model.

    Outcome

    As a result, the new organizational structure for IT did not ensure adequate meeting of business needs. Only the operational support structure was successfully adopted by the organization as it aligned to the individual business objectives. The strategic capabilities aspect was not aligned to how the various business lines viewed themselves and their objectives, causing some partners to feel neglected.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs.

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Call #1: Define the process, understand the need, and create a plan of action.

    Phase 2

    Call #2: Define org. design drivers and business context.

    Call #3: Understand strategic influences and create customized design principles.

    Call #4: Customize, analyze gaps, and define sourcing strategy for IT capabilities.

    Call #5: Select and customize the IT operating model sketch.

    Phase 3

    Call #6: Establish functional work units and their mandates.

    Call #7: Translate the functional organizational chart to an operational organizational chart with defined roles.

    Phase 4

    Call #8: Consider risks and mitigation tactics associated with the new structure and select a transition plan.

    Call #9: Create your change message, FAQs, and metrics to support the implementation plan.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish the Organizational Redesign Foundation

    Create the Operating Model Sketch

    Formalize the Organizational Structure

    Plan for Implementation and Change

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Define the org. design drivers.

    1.2 Document and define the implications of the business context.

    1.3 Align the structure to support the strategy.

    1.4 Establish guidelines to direct the organizational design process.

    2.1 Augment list of IT capabilities.

    2.2 Analyze capability gaps.

    2.3 Identify capabilities for outsourcing.

    2.4 Select a base operating model sketch.

    2.5 Customize the IT operating model sketch.

    3.1 Categorize your IT capabilities within your defined functional work units.

    3.2 Create a mandate statement for each work unit.

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units and assign accountability and responsibility.

    3.4 Finalize your organizational structure.

    4.1 Identify and mitigate key org. design risks.

    4.2 Define the transition plan.

    4.3 Create the change communication message.

    4.4 Create a standard set of FAQs.

    4.5 Align sustainment metrics back to core drivers.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Foundational components to the organizational design
    2. Customized design principles
    1. Heat mapped IT capabilities
    2. Defined outsourcing strategy
    3. Customized operating model
    1. Capabilities organized into functional groups
    2. Functional work unit mandates
    3. Organizational chart
    1. Risk mitigation plan
    2. Change communication message
    3. Standard FAQs
    4. Implementation and sustainment metrics
    1. Completed organizational design communications deck

    This blueprint is part one of a three-phase approach to organizational transformation

    PART 1: DESIGN

    PART 2: STRUCTURE

    PART 3: IMPLEMENT

    IT Organizational Architecture

    Organizational Sketch

    Organizational Structure

    Organizational Chart

    Transition Strategy

    Implement Structure

    1. Define the organizational design drivers, business context, and strategic alignment.

    2. Create customized design principles.

    3. Develop and customize a strategically aligned operating model sketch.

    4. Define the future-state work units.

    5. Create future-state work unit mandates.

    6. Define roles by work unit.

    7. Turn roles into jobs with clear capability accountabilities and responsibilities.

    8. Define reporting relationships between jobs.

    9. Assess options and select go-forward organizational sketch.

    11. Validate organizational sketch.

    12. Analyze workforce utilization.

    13. Define competency framework.

    14. Identify competencies required for jobs.

    15. Determine number of positions per job

    16. Conduct competency assessment.

    17. Assign staff to jobs.

    18. Build a workforce and staffing plan.

    19. Form an OD implementation team.

    20. Develop change vision.

    21. Build communication presentation.

    22. Identify and plan change projects.

    23. Develop organizational transition plan.

    24. Train managers to lead through change.

    25. Define and implement stakeholder engagement plan.

    26. Develop individual transition plans.

    27. Implement transition plans.

    Risk Management: Create, implement, and monitor risk management plan.

    HR Management: Develop job descriptions, conduct job evaluation, and develop compensation packages.

    Monitor and Sustain Stakeholder Engagement

    Phase 1

    Establish the Organizational Redesign Foundation

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1 Define the organizational redesign driver(s)

    1.2 Create design principles based on the business context

    1.3a (Optional Exercise) Identify the capabilities from your value stream

    1.3b Identify the capabilities required to deliver on your strategies

    1.4 Finalize your list of design principles

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Embed change management into the organizational design process

    Articulate the Why

    Changes are most successful when leaders clearly articulate the reason for the change – the rationale for the organizational redesign of the IT function. Providing both staff and executive leaders with an understanding for this change is imperative to its success. Despite the potential benefits to a redesign, they can be disruptive. If you are unable to answer the reason why, a redesign might not be the right initiative for your organization.

    Employees who understand the rationale behind decisions made by executive leaders are 3.6 times more likely to be engaged.

    McLean & Company Engagement Survey Database, 2021; N=123,188

    Info-Tech Insight

    Successful adoption of the new organizational design requires change management from the beginning. Start considering how you will convey the need for organizational change within your IT organization.

    The foundation of your organizational design brings together drivers, context, and strategic implications

    All aspects of your IT organization’s structure should be designed with the business’ context and strategic direction in mind.

    Use the following set of slides to extract the key components of your drivers, business context, and strategic direction to land on a future structure that aligns with the larger strategic direction.

    REDESIGN DRIVERS

    Driver(s) can originate from within the IT organization or externally. Ensuring the driver(s) are easy to understand and articulate will increase the successful adoption of the new organizational structure.

    BUSINESS CONTEXT

    Defines the interactions that occur throughout the organization and between the organization and external stakeholders. The context provides insight into the environment by both defining the purpose of the organization and the values that frame how it operates.

    STRATEGY IMPLICATIONS

    The IT strategy should be aligned to the overall business strategy, providing insight into the types of capabilities required to deliver on key IT initiatives.

    Understand IT’s desired maturity level, alignment with business expectations, and capabilities of IT

    Where are we today?

    Determine the current overall maturity level of the IT organization.

    Where do we want to be as an organization?

    Use the inputs from Info-Tech’s diagnostic data to determine where the organization should be after its reorganization.

    How can you leverage these results?

    The result of these diagnostics will inform the design principles that you’ll create in this phase.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s diagnostics to provide an understanding of critical areas your redesign can support:

    CIO Business Vision Diagnostic

    Management & Governance Diagnostic

    IT Staffing Diagnostic

    The image contains a picture of Info-Tech's maturity ladder.

    Consider the organizational design drivers

    Consider organizational redesign if …

    Effectiveness is a concern:

    • Insufficient resources to meet demand
    • Misalignment to IT (and business) strategies
    • Lack of clarity around role responsibility or accountability
    • IT functions operating in silos

    New capabilities are needed:

    • Organization is taking on new capabilities (digital, transformation, M&A)
    • Limited innovation
    • Gaps in the capabilities/services of IT
    • Other external environmental influences or changes in strategic direction

    Lack of business understanding

    • Misalignment between business and IT or how the organization does business
    • Unhappy customers (internal or external)

    Workforce challenges

    • Frequent turnover or inability to attract new skills
    • Low morale or employee empowerment

    These are not good enough reasons …

    • New IT leader looking to make a change for the sake of change or looking to make their legacy known
    • To work with specific/hand-picked leaders over others
    • To “shake things up” to see what happens
    • To force the organization to see IT differently

    Info-Tech Insight

    Avoid change for change’s sake. Restructuring could completely miss the root cause of the problem and merely create a series of new ones.

    1.1 Define the organizational redesign driver(s)

    1-2 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm a list of current pain points or inhibitors in the current organizational structure, along with a set of opportunities that can be realized during your restructuring. Group these pain points and opportunities into themes.
    2. Leverage the pain points and opportunities to help further define why this initiative is something you’re driving towards. Consider how you would justify this initiative to different stakeholders in the organization.
    3. Questions to consider:
      1. Who is asking for this initiative?
      2. What are the primary benefits this is intended to produce?
      3. What are you optimizing for?
      4. What are we capable of achieving as an IT organization?
      5. Are the drivers coming from inside or outside the IT organization?
    4. Once you’ve determined the drivers for redesigning the IT organization, prioritize those drivers to ensure there is clarity when communicating why this is something you are focusing time and effort on.

    Input

    Output

    • Knowledge of the current organization
    • Pain point and opportunity themes
    • Defined drivers of the initiative

    Materials

    Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Frame the organizational design within the context of the business

    Workforce Considerations:

    • How does your organization view its people resources? Does it have the capacity to increase the number of resources?
    • Do you currently have sufficient staff to meet the demands of the organization? Are you able to outsource resources when demand requires it?
    • Are the members of your IT organization unionized?
    • Is your workforce distributed? Do time zones impact how your team can collaborate?

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Culture:

    Culture, "the way we do things here,” has huge implications for executing strategy, driving engagement, and providing a guiding force that ensures organizations can work together toward common goals.

    • What is the culture of your organization? Is it cooperative, traditional, competitive, or innovative? (See appendix for details.)
    • Is this the target culture or a stepping-stone to the ideal culture?
    • How do the attitudes and behaviors of senior leaders in the organization reinforce this culture?

    Consider whether your organization’s culture can accept the operating model and organizational structure changes that make sense on paper.

    Certain cultures may lean toward particular operating models. For example, the demand-develop-service operating model may be supported by a cooperative culture. A traditional organization may lean towards the plan-build-run operating model.

    Ensure you have considered your current culture and added exercises to support it.

    If more capacity is required to accomplish the goals of the organization, you’ll want to prepare the leaders and explain the need in your design principles (to reflect training, upskilling, or outsourcing). Unionized environments require additional consideration. They may necessitate less structural changes, and so your principles will need to reflect other alternatives (hiring additional resources, creative options) to support organizational needs. Hybrid or fully remote workforces may impact how your organization interacts.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Control & Governance:

    It is important to consider how your organization is governed, how decisions are made, and who has authority to make decisions.

    Strategy tells what you do, governance validates you’re doing the right things, and structure is how you execute on what’s been approved.

    • How do decisions get considered and approved in your organization? Are there specific influences that impact the priorities of the organization?
    • Are those in the organization willing to release decision-making authority around specific IT components?
    • Should the organization take on greater accountability for specific IT components?

    Organizations that require more controls may lean toward more centralized governance. Organizations that are looking to better enable and empower their divisions (products, groups, regions, etc.) may look to embed governance in these parts of the organization.

    For enterprise organizations, consider where IT has authority to make decisions (at the global, local, or system level). Appropriate governance needs to be built into the appropriate levels.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Financial Constraints:

    Follow the money: You may need to align your IT organization according to the funding model.

    • Do partners come to IT with their budgets, or does IT have a central pool that they use to fund initiatives from all partners?
    • Are you able to request finances to support key initiatives/roles prioritized by the organization?
    • How is funding aligned: technology, data, digital, etc.? Is your organization business-line funded? Pooled?
    • Are there special products or digital transformation initiatives with resources outside IT? Product ownership funding?
    • How are regulatory changes funded?
    • Do you have the flexibility to adjust your budget throughout the fiscal year?
    • Are chargebacks in place? Are certain services charged back to business units

    Determine if you can move forward with a new model or if you can adjust your existing one to suit the financial constraints.

    If you have no say over your funding, pre-work may be required to build a business case to change your funding model before you look at your organizational structure – without this, you might have to rule out centralized and focus on hybrid/centralized. If you don’t control the budget (funding comes from your partners), it will be difficult to move to a more centralized model.

    A federated business organization may require additional IT governance to help prioritize across the different areas.

    Budgets for digital transformation might come from specific areas of the business, so resources may need to be aligned to support that. You’ll have to consider how you will work with those areas. This may also impact the roles that are going to exist within your IT organization – product owners or division owners might have more say.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Business Perspective of IT:

    How the business perceives IT and how IT perceives itself are sometimes not aligned. Make sure the business’ goals for IT are well understood.

    • Are your business partners satisfied if IT is an order taker? Do they agree with the need for IT to become a business partner? Is IT expected to innovate and transform the organization?
    • Is what the business needs from IT the same as what IT is providing currently?

    Business Organization Structure and Growth:

    • How is the overall organization structured: Centralized/decentralized? Functionally aligned? Divided by regions?
    • In what areas does the organization prioritize investments?
    • Is the organization located across a diverse geography?
    • How big is the organization?
    • How is the organization growing and changing – by mergers and acquisitions?

    If IT needs to become more of a business partner, you’ll want to define what that means to your organization and focus on the capabilities to enable this. Educating your partners might also be required if you’re not aligned.

    For many organizations, this will include stakeholder management, innovation, and product/project management. If IT and its business partners are satisfied with an order-taker relationship, be prepared for the consequences of that.

    A global organization will require different IT needs than a single location. Specifically, site reliability engineering (SRE) or IT support services might be deployed in each region. Organizations growing through mergers and acquisitions can be structured differently depending on what the organization needs from the transaction. A more centralized organization may be appropriate if the driver is reuse for a more holistic approach, or the organization may need a more decentralized organization if the acquisitions need to be handled uniquely.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org. Design Implication

    Sourcing Strategy:

    • What are the drivers for sourcing? Staff augmentation, best practices, time zone support, or another reason?
    • What is your strategy for sourcing?
    • Does IT do all of your technology work, or are parts being done by business or other units?
    • Are we willing/able to outsource, and will that place us into non-compliance (regulations)?
    • Do you have vendor management capabilities in areas that you might outsource?
    • How cloud-driven is your organization?
    • Do you have global operations?

    Change Tolerance:

    • What’s your organization’s tolerance to make changes around organizational design?
    • What's the appetite and threshold for risk?

    Your sourcing strategy affects your organizational structure, including what capabilities you group together. Since managing outsourced capabilities also includes the need for vendor management, you’ll need to ensure there aren’t too many capabilities required per leader. Look closely at what can be achieved through your operating model if IT is done through other groups. Even though these groups may not be in scope of your organization changes, you need to ensure your IT team works with them effectively.

    If your organization is going to push back if there are big structural changes, consider whether the changes are truly necessary. It may be preferred to take baby steps – use an incremental versus big-bang approach.

    A need for incremental change might mean not making a major operating model change.

    Business context considerations

    Business Context Consideration

    IT Org Design. Implication

    Stakeholder Engagement & Focus:

    Identify who your customers and stakeholders are; clarify their needs and engagement model.

    • Who is the customer for IT products and services?
    • Is your customer internal? External? Both?
    • How much of a priority is customer focus for your organization?
    • How will IT interact with customers, end users, and partners? What is the engagement model desired?

    Business Vision, Services, and Products:

    Articulate what your organization was built to do.

    • What does the organization create or provide?
    • Are these products and services changing?
    • What are the most critical capabilities to your organization?
    • What makes your organization a success? What are critical success factors of the organization and how are they measuring this to determine success?

    For a customer or user focus, ensure capabilities related to understanding needs (stakeholder, UX, etc.) are prioritized. Hybrid, decentralized, or demand-develop-service models often have more of a focus on customer needs.

    Outsourcing the service desk might be a consideration if there’s a high demand for the service. A differentiation between these users might mean there’s a different demand for services.

    Think broadly in terms of your organizational vision, not just the tactical (widget creation). You might need to choose an operating model that supports vision.

    Do you need to align your organization with your value stream? Do you need to decentralize specific capabilities to enable prioritization of the key capabilities?

    1.2 Create design principles based on the business context

    1-3 hours

    1. Discuss the business context in which the IT organizational redesign will be taking place. Consider the following standard components of the business context; include other relevant components specific to your organization:
    • Culture
    • Workforce Considerations
    • Control and Governance
    • Financial Constraints
    • Business Perspective of IT
    • Business Organization Structure and Growth
    • Sourcing Strategy
    • Change Tolerance
    • Stakeholder Engagement and Focus
    • Business Vision, Services, and Products
  • Different stakeholders can have different perspectives on these questions. Be sure to consider a holistic approach and engage these individuals.
  • Capture your findings and use them to create initial design principles.
  • Input

    Output

    • Business context
    • Design principles reflecting how the business context influences the organizational redesign for IT

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • List of Context Questions
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    How your IT organization is structured needs to reflect what it must be built to do

    Structure follows strategy – the way you design will impact what your organization can produce.

    Designing your IT organization requires an assessment of what it needs to be built to do:

    • What are the most critical capabilities that you need to deliver, and what does success look like in those different areas?
    • What are the most important things that you deliver overall in your organization?

    The IT organization must reflect your business needs:

    • Understand your value stream and/or your prioritized business goals.
    • Understand the impact of your strategies – these can include your overall digital strategy and/or your IT strategy

    1.3a (Optional Exercise) Identify the capabilities from your value stream

    1 hour

    1. Identify your organization’s value stream – what your overall organization needs to do from supplier to consumer to provide value. Leverage Info-Tech’s industry reference architectures if you haven’t identified your value stream, or use the Document Your Business Architecture blueprint to create yours.
    2. For each item in your value stream, list capabilities that are critical to your organizational strategy and IT needs to further invest in to enable growth.
    3. Also, list those that need further support, e.g. those that lead to long wait times, rework time, re-tooling, down-time, unnecessary processes, unvaluable processes.*
    4. Capture the IT capabilities required to enable your business in your draft principles.
    The image contains a screenshot of the above activity: Sampling Manufacturing Business Capabilities.
    Source: Six Sigma Study Guide, 2014
    Input Output
    • Organization’s value stream
    • List of IT capabilities required to support the IT strategy
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Your strategy will help you decide on your structure

    Ensure that you have a clear view of the goals and initiatives that are needed in your organization. Your IT, digital, business, and/or other strategies will surface the IT capabilities your organization needs to develop. Identify the goals of your organization and the initiatives that are required to deliver on them. What capabilities are required to enable these? These capabilities will need to be reflected in your design principles.

    Sample initiatives and capabilities from an organization’s strategies

    The image contains a screenshot of sample initiatives and capabilities from an organization's strategies.

    1.3b Identify the capabilities required to deliver on your strategies

    1 hour

    1. For each IT goal, there may be one or more initiatives that your organization will need to complete in order to be successful.
    2. Document those goals and infinitives. For each initiative, consider which core IT capabilities will be required to deliver on that goal. There might be one IT capability or there might be several.
    3. Identify which capabilities are being repeated across the different initiatives. Consider whether you are currently investing in those capabilities in your current organizational structure.
    4. Highlight the capabilities that require IT investment in your design principles.
    InputOutput
    • IT goals
    • IT initiatives
    • IT, digital, and business strategies
    • List of IT capabilities required to support the IT strategy
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Create your organizational design principles

    Your organizational design principles should define a set of loose rules that can be used to design your organizational structure to the specific needs of the work that needs to be done. These rules will guide you through the selection of the appropriate operating model that will meet your business needs. There are multiple ways you can hypothetically organize yourself to meet these needs, and the design principles will point you in the direction of which solution is the most appropriate as well as explain to your stakeholders the rationale behind organizing in a specific way. This foundational step is critical: one of the key reasons for organizational design failure is a lack of requisite time spent on the front-end understanding what is the best fit.

    The image contains an example of organizing design principles as described above.

    1.4 Finalize your list of design principles

    1-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the key outputs from your data collection exercises and their implications.
    2. Consider each of the previous exercises – where does your organization stand from a maturity perspective, what is driving the redesign, what is the business context, and what are the key IT capabilities requiring support. Identify how each will have an implication on your organizational redesign. Leverage this conversation to generate design principles.
    3. Vote on a finalized list of eight to ten design principles that will guide the selection of your operating model. Have everyone leave the meeting with these design principles so they can review them in more detail with their work units or functional areas and elicit any necessary feedback.
    4. Reconvene the group that was originally gathered to create the list of design principles and make any final amendments to the list as necessary. Use this opportunity to define exactly what each design principle means in the context of your organization so everyone has the same understanding of what this means moving forward.
    InputOutput
    • Organizational redesign drivers
    • Business context
    • IT strategy capabilities
    • Organizational design principles to help inform the selection of the right operating model sketch
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts (physical or electronic)
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Communications Deck

    Example design principles

    Your eight to ten design principles will be those that are most relevant to YOUR organization. Below are samples that other organizations have created, but yours will not be the same.

    Design Principle

    Description

    Decision making

    We will centralize decision making around the prioritization of projects to ensure that the initiatives driving the most value for the organization as a whole are executed.

    Fit for purpose

    We will build and maintain fit-for-purpose solutions based on business units’ unique needs.

    Reduction of duplication

    We will reduce role and application duplication through centralized management of assets and clearly differentiated roles that allow individuals to focus within key capability areas.

    Managed security

    We will manage security enterprise-wide and implement compliance and security governance policies.

    Reuse > buy > build

    We will maximize reuse of existing assets by developing a centralized application portfolio management function and approach.

    Managed data

    We will create a specialized data office to provide data initiatives with the focus they need to enable our strategy.

    Design Principle

    Description

    Controlled technical diversity

    We will control the variety of technology platforms we use to allow for increased operability and reduction of costs.

    Innovation

    R&D and innovation are critical – we will build an innovation team into our structure to help us meet our digital agenda.

    Resourcing

    We will separate our project and maintenance activities to ensure each are given the dedicated support they need for success and to reduce the firefighting mentality.

    Customer centricity

    The new structure will be directly aligned with customer needs – we will have dedicated roles around relationship management, requirements, and strategic roadmapping for business units.

    Interoperability

    We will strengthen our enterprise architecture practices to best prepare for future mergers and acquisitions.

    Cloud services

    We will move toward hosted versus on-premises infrastructure solutions, retrain our data center team in cloud best practices, and build roles around effective vendor management, cloud provisioning, and architecture.

    Phase 2

    Create the Operating Model Sketch

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1 Augment the capability list

    2.2 Heatmap capabilities to determine gaps in service

    2.3 Identify the target state of sourcing for your IT capabilities

    2.4 Review and select a base operating model sketch

    2.5 Customize the selected overlay to reflect the desired future state

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Embed change management into the organizational design process

    Gain Buy-In

    Obtain desire from stakeholders to move forward with organizational redesign initiative by involving them in the process to gain interest. This will provide the stakeholders with assurance that their concerns are being heard and will help them to understand the benefits that can be anticipated from the new organizational structure.

    “You’re more likely to get buy-in if you have good reason for the proposed changes – and the key is to emphasize the benefits of an organizational redesign.”

    Source: Lucid Chart

    Info-Tech Insight

    Just because people are aware does not mean they agree. Help different stakeholders understand how the change in the organizational structure is a benefit by specifically stating the benefit to them.

    Info-Tech uses capabilities in your organizational design

    We differentiate between capabilities and competencies.

    Capabilities

    • Capabilities are focused on the entire system that would be in place to satisfy a particular need. This includes the people who are competent to complete a specific task and also the technology, processes, and resources to deliver.
    • Capabilities work in a systematic way to deliver on specific need(s).
    • A functional area is often made up of one or more capabilities that support its ability to deliver on that function.
    • Focusing on capabilities rather then the individuals in organizational redesign enables a more objective and holistic view of what your organization is striving toward.

    Competencies

    • Competencies on the other hand are specific to an individual. It determines if the individual poses the skills or ability to perform.
    • Competencies are rooted in the term competent, which looks to understand if you are proficient enough to complete the specific task at hand.
    • Source: The People Development Magazine, 2020

    Use our IT capabilities to establish your IT organization design

    The image contains a diagram of the various services and blueprints that Info-Tech has to offer.

    2.1 Augment the capability list

    1-3 hours

    1. Using the capability list on the previous slide, go through each of the IT capabilities and remove any capabilities for which your IT organization is not responsible and/or accountable. Refer to the Operating Model and Capability Definition List for descriptions of each of the IT capabilities.
    2. Augment the language of specific capabilities that you feel are not directly reflective of what is being done within your organizational context or that you feel need to be changed to reflect more specifically how work is being done in your organization.
    • For example, some organizations may refer to their service desk capability as help desk or regional support. Use a descriptive term that most accurately reflects the terminology used inside the organization today.
  • Add any core capabilities from your organization that are missing from the provided IT capability list.
    • For example, organizations that leverage DevOps capabilities for their product development may desire to designate this in their operating model.
  • Document the rationale for decisions made for future reference.
  • Input Output
    • Baseline list of IT capabilities
    • IT capabilities required to support IT strategy
    • Customized list of IT capabilities
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Gaps in delivery

    Identify areas that require greater focus and attention.

    Assess the gaps between where you currently are and where you need to be. Evaluate how critical and how effective your capabilities are:

    • Criticality = Importance
      • Try to focus on those which are highly critical to the organization.
      • These may be capabilities that have been identified in your strategies as areas to focus on.
    • Effectiveness = Performance
      • Identify those where the process or system is broken or ineffective, preventing the team from delivering on the capability.
      • Effectiveness could take into consideration how scalable, adaptable, or sustainable each capability is.
      • Focus on the capabilities that are low or medium in effectiveness but highly critical. Addressing the delivery of these capabilities will lead to the most positive outcomes in your organization.

    Remember to identify what allows the highly effective capabilities to perform at the capacity they are. Leverage this when increasing effectiveness elsewhere.

    High Gap

    There is little to no effectiveness (high gap) and the capability is highly important to your organization.

    Medium Gap

    Current ability is medium in effectiveness (medium gap) and there might be some priority for that capability in your organization.

    Low Gap

    Current ability is highly effective (low gap) and the capability is not necessarily a priority for your organization.

    2.2 Heatmap capabilities to determine gaps in delivery

    1-3 hours

    1. At this point, you should have identified what capabilities you need to have to deliver on your organization's goals and initiatives.
    2. Convene a group of the key stakeholders involved in the IT organizational design initiative.
    3. Review your IT capabilities and color each capability border according to the effectiveness and criticality of that capability, creating a heat map.
    • Green indicates current ability is highly effective (low gap) and the capability is not necessarily a priority for your organization.
    • Yellow indicates current ability is medium in effectiveness (medium gap) and there might be some priority for that capability in your organization.
    • Red indicates that there is little to no effectiveness (high gap) and the capability is highly important to your organization.
    Input Output
    • Selected capabilities from activity 2.1
    • Gap analysis in delivery of capabilities currently
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Don’t forget the why: why are you considering outsourcing?

    There are a few different “types” of outsourcing:

    1. Competitive Advantage – Working with a third-party organization for the knowledge, insights, and best practices they can bring to your organization.
    2. Managed Service– The third party manages a capability or function for your organization.
    3. Staff Augmentation – Your organization brings in contractors and third-party organizations to fill specific skills gaps.

    Weigh which sourcing model(s) will best align with the needed capabilities to deliver effectively

    Insourcing

    Staff Augmentation

    Managed Service

    Competitive Advantage

    Description

    The organization maintains full responsibility for the management and delivery of the IT capability or service.

    Vendor provides specialized skills and enables the IT capability or service together with the organization to meet demand.

    Vendor completely manages the delivery of value for the IT capability, product or service.

    Vendor has unique skills, insights, and best practices that can be taught to staff to enable insourced capability and competency.

    Benefits

    • Retains in-house control over proprietary knowledge and assets that provide competitive or operational advantage.
    • Gains efficiency due to integration into the organization’s processes.
    • Provision of unique skills.
    • Addresses variation in demand for resources.
    • Labor cost savings.
    • Improves use of internal resources.
    • Improves effectiveness due to narrow specialization.
    • Labor cost savings.
    • Gain insights into aspects that could provide your organization with advantages over competitors.
    • Long-term labor cost savings.
    • Short-term outsourcing required.
    • Increase in-house competencies.

    Drawbacks

    • Quality of services/capabilities might not be as high due to lack of specialization.
    • No labor cost savings.
    • Potentially inefficient distribution of labor for the delivery of services/capabilities.
    • Potential conflicts in management or delivery of IT services and capabilities.
    • Negative impact on staff morale.
    • Limited control over services/capabilities.
    • Limited integration into organization’s processes.
    • Short-term labor expenses.
    • Requires a culture of continuous learning and improvement.

    Your strategy for outsourcing will vary with capability and capacity

    The image contains a diagram to show the Develop Vendor Management Capabilities, as described in the text below.

    Capability

    Capacity

    Outsourcing Model

    Low

    Low

    Your solutions may be with you for a long time, so it doesn’t matter whether it is a strategic decision to outsource development or if you are not able to attract the talent required to deliver in your market. Look for a studio, agency, or development shop that has a proven reputation for long-term partnership with its clients.

    Low

    High

    Your team has capacity but needs to develop new skills to be successful. Look for a studio, agency, or development shop that has a track record of developing its customers and delivering solutions.

    High

    Low

    Your organization knows what it is doing but is strapped for people. Look at “body shops” and recruiting agencies that will support short-term development contracts that can be converted to full-time staff or even a wholesale development shop acquisition.

    High

    High

    You have capability and capacity for delivering on your everyday demands but need to rise to the challenge of a significant, short-term rise in demand on a critical initiative. Look for a major system integrator or development shop with the specific expertise in the appropriate technology.

    Use these criteria to inform your right sourcing strategy

    Sourcing Criteria

    Description

    Determine whether you’ll outsource using these criteria

    1. Critical or commodity

    Determine whether the component to be sourced is critical to your organization or if it is a commodity. Commodity components, which are either not strategic in nature or related to planning functions, are likely candidates for outsourcing. Will you need to own the intellectual property created by the third party? Are you ok if they reuse that for their other clients?

    2. Readiness to outsource

    Identify how easy it would be to outsource a particular IT component. Consider factors such as knowledge transfer, workforce reassignment or reduction, and level of integration with other components.

    Vendor management readiness – ensuring that you have sufficient capabilities to manage vendors – should also be considered here.

    3. In-house capabilities

    Determine if you have the capability to deliver the IT solutions in-house. This will help you establish how easy it would be to insource an IT component.

    4. Ability to attract resources (internal vs. outsourced)

    Determine if the capability is one that is easily sourced with full-time, internal staff or if it is a specialty skill that is best left for a third-party to source.

    Determine your sourcing model using these criteria

    5. Cost

    Consider the total cost (investment and ongoing costs) of the delivery of the IT component for each of the potential sourcing models for a component.

    6. Quality

    Define the potential impact on the quality of the IT component being sourced by the possible sourcing models.

    7. Compliance

    Determine whether the sourcing model would fit with regulations in your industry. For example, a healthcare provider would only go for a cloud option if that provider is HIPAA compliant.

    8. Security

    Identify the extent to which each sourcing option would leave your organization open to security threats.

    9. Flexibility

    Determine the extent to which the sourcing model will allow your organization to scale up or down as demand changes.

    2.3 Identify capabilities that could be outsourced

    1-3 hours

    1. For each of the capabilities that will be in your future-state operating model, determine if it could be outsourced. Review the sourcing criteria available on the previous slide to help inform which sourcing strategy you will use for each capability.
    2. When looking to outsource or co-source capabilities, consider why that capability would be outsourced:
    • Competitive Advantage – Work with a third-party organization for the knowledge, insights, and best practices they can bring to your organization.
    • Managed Service – The third party manages a capability or function for your organization.
    • Staff Augmentation – Your organization brings in contractors and third-party organizations to fill specific skills gaps.
  • Place an asterisk (*) around the capabilities that will be leveraging one of the three previous sourcing options.
  • InputOutput
    • Customized IT capabilities
    • Sourcing strategy for each IT capability
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    What is an operating model?

    Leverage a cohesive operating model throughout the organizational design process.

    An IT operating model sketch is a visual representation of the way your IT organization needs to be designed and the capabilities it requires to deliver on the business mission, strategic objectives, and technological ambitions. It ensures consistency of all elements in the organizational structure through a clear and coherent blueprint.

    The visual should be the optimization and alignment of the IT organization’s structure to deliver the capabilities required to achieve business goals. Additionally, it should clearly show the flow of work so that key stakeholders can understand where inputs flow in and outputs flow out of the IT organization. Investing time in the front end getting the operating model right is critical. This will give you a framework to rationalize future organizational changes, allowing you to be more iterative and your model to change as the business changes.

    The image contains an example of an operating model as described in the text above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every structure decision you make should be based on an identified need, not on a trend.Build your IT organization to enable the priorities of the organization.

    Each IT operating model is characterized by a variety of advantages and disadvantages

    Centralized

    Hybrid

    Decentralized

    Advantages
    • Maximum flexibility to allocate IT resources across business units.
    • Low-cost delivery model and greatest economies of scale.
    • Control and consistency offers opportunity for technological rationalization and standardization and volume purchasing at the highest degree.
    • Centralizes processes and services that require consistency across the organization.
    • Decentralizes processes and services that need to be responsive to local market conditions.
    • Eliminates duplication and redundancy by allowing effective use of common resources (e.g. shared services, standardization).
    • Goals are aligned to the distinct business units or functions.
    • Greater flexibility and more timely delivery of services.
    • Development resources are highly knowledgeable about business-unit-specific applications.
    • Business unit has greatest control over IT resources and can set and change priorities as needed.

    Disadvantages

    • Less able to respond quickly to local requirements with flexibility.
    • IT can be resistant to change and unwilling to address the unique needs of end users.
    • Business units can be frustrated by perception of lack of control over resources.
    • Development of special business knowledge can be limited.
    • Requires the most disciplined governance structure and the unwavering commitment of the business; therefore, it can be the most difficult to maintain.
    • Requires new processes as pooled resources must be staffed to approved projects.
    • Redundancies, conflicts, and incompatible technologies can result from business units having differentiated services and applications – increasing cost.
    • Ability to share IT resources is low due to lack of common approaches.
    • Lack of integration limits the communication of data between businesses and reduces common reporting.

    Decentralization can take many forms – define what it means to your organization

    Decentralization can take a number of different forms depending on the products the organization supports and how the organization is geographically distributed. Use the following set of explanations to understand the different types of decentralization possible and when they may make sense for supporting your organizational objectives.

    Line of Business

    Decentralization by lines of business (LoB) aligns decision making with business operating units based on related functions or value streams. Localized priorities focus the decision making from the CIO or IT leadership team. This form of decentralization is beneficial in settings where each line of business has a unique set of products or services that require specific expertise or flexible resourcing staffing between the teams.

    Product Line

    Decentralization by product line organizes your team into operationally aligned product families to improve delivery throughput, quality, and resource flexibility within the family. By adopting this approach, you create stable product teams with the right balance between flexibility and resource sharing. This reinforces value delivery and alignment to enterprise goals within the product lines.

    Geographical

    Geographical decentralization reflects a shift from centralized to regional influences. When teams are in different locations, they can experience a number of roadblocks to effective communication (e.g. time zones, regulatory differences in different countries) that may necessitate separating those groups in the organizational structure, so they have the autonomy needed to make critical decisions.

    Functional

    Functional decentralization allows the IT organization to be separated by specialty areas. Organizations structured by functional specialization can often be organized into shared service teams or centers of excellence whereby people are grouped based on their technical, domain, or functional area within IT (Applications, Data, Infrastructure, Security, etc.). This allows people to develop specialized knowledge and skills but can also reinforce silos between teams.

    2.4 Review and select a base operating model sketch

    1 hour

    1. Review the set of base operating model sketches available on the following slides.
    2. For each operating model sketch, there are benefits and risks to be considered. Make an informed selection by understanding the risks that your organization might be taking on by adopting that particular operating model.
    3. If at any point in the selection process the group is unsure about which operating model will be the right fit, refer back to your design principles established in activity 1.4. These should guide you in the selection of the right operating model and eliminate those which will not serve the organization.
    InputOutput
    • Organizational design principles
    • Customized list of IT capabilities
    • Operating model sketch examples
    • Selected operating model sketch
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Centralized Operating Model #1: Plan-Build-Run

    I want to…

    • Establish a formalized governance process that takes direction from the organization on which initiatives should be prioritized by IT.
    • Ensure there is a clear separation between teams that are involved in strategic planning, building solutions, and delivering operational support.
    • Be able to plan long term by understanding the initiatives that are coming down the pipeline and aligning to an infrequent budgeting plan.

    BENEFITS

    • Effective at implementing long-term plans efficiently; separates maintenance and projects to allow each to have the appropriate focus.
    • More oversight over financials; better suited for fixed budgets.
    • Works across centralized technology domains to better align with the business’ strategic objectives – allows for a top-down approach to decision making.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Well-suited for a project-driven environment that employs waterfall or a hybrid project management methodology that is less iterative.

    RISKS

    • Creates artificial silos between the build (developers) and run (operations staff) teams, as both teams focus on their own responsibilities and often fail to see the bigger picture.
    • Miss opportunities to deliver value to the organization or innovate due to an inability to support unpredictable/shifting project demands as decision making is centralized in the plan function.
    • The portfolio of initiatives being pursued is often determined before requirements analysis takes place, meaning the initiative might be solving the wrong need or problem.
    • Depends on strong hand-off processes to be defined and strong knowledge transfer from build to run functions in order to be successful.
    The image contains an example of a Centralized Operating Model: Plan-Build-Run.

    Centralized Operating Model #2: Demand-Develop-Service

    I want to…

    • Listen to the business to understand new initiatives or service enhancements being requested.
    • Enable development and operations to work together to seamlessly deliver in a DevOps culture.
    • Govern and confirm that initiatives being requested by the business are still aligned to IT’s overarching strategy and roadmap before prioritizing those initiatives.

    BENEFITS

    • Aligns well with an end-to-end services model; constant attention to customer demand and service supply.
    • Centralizes service operations under one functional area to serve shared needs across lines of business.
    • Allows for economies of scale and expertise pooling to improve IT’s efficiency.
    • Elevates sourcing and vendor management as its own strategic function; lends well to managed service and digital initiatives.
    • Development and operations housed together; lends well to DevOps-related initiatives and reduces the silos between these two core groups.

    RISKS

    • IT prioritizes the initiatives it thinks are a priority to the business based on how well it establishes good stakeholder relations and communications.
    • Depends on good governance to prevent enhancements and demands from being prioritized without approval from those with accountability and authority.
    • This model thrives in a DevOps culture but does not mean it ensures your organization is a “DevOps” organization. Be sure you're encouraging the right behaviors and attitudes.

    The image contains an example of a Centralized Operating Model: Demand, Develop, Service.

    Hybrid Operating Model #1: LOB/Functional Aligned

    I want to…

    • Better understand the various needs of the organization to align IT priorities and ensure the right services can be delivered.
    • Keep all IT decisions centralized to ensure they align with the overarching strategy and roadmap that IT has set.
    • Organize your shared services in a strategic manner that enables delivery of those services in a way that fits the culture of the organization and the desired method of operating.

    BENEFITS

    • Best of both worlds of centralization and decentralization; attempts to channel benefits from both centralized and decentralized models.
    • Embeds key IT functions that require business knowledge within functional areas, allowing for critical feedback and the ability to understand those business needs.
    • Places IT in a position to not just be “order takers” but to be more involved with the different business units and promote the value of IT.
    • Achieves economies of scale where necessary through the delivery of shared services that can be requested by the function.
    • Shared services can be organized to deliver in the best way that suits the organization.

    RISKS

    • Different business units may bypass governance to get their specific needs met by functions – to alleviate this, IT must have strong governance and prioritize amongst demand.
    • Decentralized role can be viewed as an order taker by the business if not properly embedded and matured.
    • No guaranteed synergy and integration across functions; requires strong communication, collaboration, and steering.
    • Cannot meet every business unit’s needs – can cause tension from varying effectiveness of the IT functions.

    The image contains an example of a Hybrid Operating Model: LOB/Functional Aligned.

    Hybrid Model #2: Product-Aligned Operating Model

    I want to…

    • Align my IT organization into core products (services) that IT provides to the organization and establish a relationship with those in the organization that have alignment to that product.
    • Have roles dedicated to the lifecycle of their product and ensure the product can continuously deliver value to the organization.
    • Maintain centralized set of standards as it applies to overall IT strategy, security, and architecture to ensure consistency across products and reduce silos.

    BENEFITS

    • Focus is on the full lifecycle of a product – takes a strategic view of how technology enables the organization.
    • Promotes centralized backlog around a specific value creator, rather than a traditional project focus that is more transactional.
    • Dedicated teams around the product family ensure you have all of the resources required to deliver on your product roadmap.
    • Reduces barriers between IT and business stakeholders; focuses on technology as a key strategic enabler.
    • Delivery is largely done through frequent releases that can deliver value.

    RISKS

    • If there is little or no business involvement, it could prevent IT from truly understanding business demand and prioritizing the wrong work.
    • A lack of formal governance can create silos between the IT products, causing duplication of efforts, missed opportunities for collaboration, and redundancies in application or vendor contracts.
    • Members of each product can interpret the definition of standards (e.g. architecture, security) differently.

    The image contains an example of the Hybrid Operating Model: Product-Aligned Operating Model.

    Hybrid Operating Model #3: Service-Aligned Operating Model

    I want to…

    • Decentralize the IT organization by the various IT services it offers to the organization while remaining centralized with IT strategy, governance, security and operational services.
    • Ensure IT services are defined and people resources are aligned to deliver on those services.
    • Enable each of IT’s services to have the autonomy to understand the business needs and be able to manage the operational and new project initiatives with a dedicated service owner or business relationship manager.

    BENEFITS

    • Strong enabler of agility as each service has the autonomy to make decisions around operational work versus project work based on their understanding of the business demand.
    • Individuals in similar roles that are decentralized across services are given coaching to provide common direction.
    • Allows teams to efficiently scale with service demand.
    • This is a structurally baseline DevOps model. Each group will have services built within that have their own dedicated teams that will handle the full gambit of responsibilities, from new features to enhancements and maintenance.

    RISKS

    • Service owners require a method to collaborate to avoid duplication of efforts or projects that conflict with the efforts of other IT services.
    • May result in excessive cost through role redundancies across different services, as each will focus on components like integration, stakeholder management, project management, and user experiences.
    • Silos cause a high degree of specialization, making it more difficult for team members to imagine moving to another defined service group, limiting potential career advancement opportunities.
    • The level of complex knowledge required by shared services (e.g. help desk) is often beyond what they can provide, causing them to rely on and escalate to defined service groups more than with other operating models.

    The image contains an example of the Hybrid Operating Model: Service-Aligned Operating Model.

    Decentralized Model: Division Decentralization (LoB, Geography, Function, Product)

    I want to…

    • Decentralize the IT organization to enable greater autonomy within specific groups that have differing customer demands and levels of support.
    • Maintain a standard level of service that can be provided by IT for all divisions.
    • Ensure each division has access to critical data and reports that supports informed decision making.

    BENEFITS

    • Organization around functions allows for diversity in approach in how areas are run to best serve a specific business unit’s needs.
    • Each functional line exists largely independently, with full capacity and control to deliver service at the committed SLAs.
    • Highly responsive to shifting needs and demands with direct connection to customers and all stages of the solution development lifecycle.
    • Accelerates decision making by delegating authority lower into the function.
    • Promotes a flatter organization with less hierarchy and more direct communication with the CIO.

    RISKS

    • Requires risk and security to be centralized and have oversight of each division to prevent the decisions of one division from negatively impacting other divisions or the enterprise.
    • Less synergy and integration across what different lines of business are doing can result in redundancies and unnecessary complexity.
    • Higher overall cost to the IT group due to role and technology duplication across different divisions.
    • It will be difficult to centralize aspects of IT in the future, as divisions adopt to a culture of IT autonomy.

    The image contains an example of the Decentralized Model: Division Decentralization.

    Enterprise Model: Multi-Modal

    I want to…

    • Have an organizational structure that leverages several different operating models based on the needs and requirements of the different divisions.
    • Provide autonomy and authority to the different divisions so they can make informed and necessary changes as they see fit without seeking approval from a centralized IT group.
    • Support the different initiatives the enterprise is focused on delivering and ensure the right model is adopted based on those initiatives.

    BENEFITS

    • Allows for the organization to work in ways that best support individual areas; for example, areas that support legacy systems can be supported through traditional operating models while areas that support digital transformations may be supported through more flexible operating models.
    • Enables a specialization of knowledge related to each division.

    RISKS

    • Inconsistency across the organization can lead to confusion on how the organization should operate.
    • Parts of the organization that work in more traditional operating models may feel limited in career growth and innovation.
    • Cross-division initiatives may require greater oversight and a method to enable operations between the different focus areas.

    The image contains an example of the Enterprise Model: Multi-Modal.

    Create enabling teams that bridge your divisions

    The following bridges might be necessary to augment your divisions:

    • Specialized augmentation: There might not be a sufficient number of resources to support each division. These teams will be leveraged across the divisions; this means that the capabilities needed for each division will exist in this bridge team, rather than in the division.
    • Centers of Excellence: Capabilities that exist within divisions can benefit from shared knowledge across the enterprise. Your organization might set up centers of excellence to support best practices in capabilities organization wide. These are Forums in the unfix model, or communities of practice and support capability development rather than deliveries of each division.
    • Facilitation teams might be required to support divisions through coaching. This might include Agile or other coaches who can help teams adopt practices and embed learnings.
    • Holistic teams provide an enterprise view as they work with various divisions. This can include capabilities like user experience, which can benefit from the holistic perspective rather than a siloed one. People with these capabilities augment the divisions on an as-needed basis.
    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the use of bridges on divisions.

    2.5 Customize the selected sketch to reflect the desired future state

    1-3 hours

    1. Using the baseline operating model sketch, walk through each of the IT capabilities. Based on the outputs from activity 2.1:
      1. Remove any capabilities for which your IT organization is not responsible and/or accountable.
      2. Augment the language of specific capabilities that you feel are not directly reflective of what is being done within your organizational context or that you feel need to be changed to reflect more specifically how work is being done in your organization.
      3. Add any core capabilities from your organization that are missing from the provided IT capability list.
    2. Move capabilities to the right places in the operating model to reflect how each of the core IT processes should interact with one another.
    3. Add bridges as needed to support the divisions in your organization. Identify which capabilities will sit in these bridges and define how they will enable the operating model sketch to deliver.
    InputOutput
    • Selected base operating model sketch
    • Customized list of IT capabilities
    • Understanding of outsourcing and gaps
    • Customized operating model sketch
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Operating model sketch examples
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Document the final operating model sketch in the Communications Deck

    Phase 3

    Formalize the Organizational Structure

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    3.1 Create work units

    3.2 Create work unit mandates

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units

    3.4 Finalize the organizational chart

    3.5 Identify and mitigate key risks

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Embed change management into the organizational design process

    Enable adoption of the new structure.

    You don’t have to make the change in one big bang. You can adopt alternative transition plans such as increments or pilots. This allows people to see the benefits of why you are undergoing the change, allows the change message to be repeated and applied to the individuals impacted, and provides people with time to understand their role in making the new organizational structure successful.

    “Transformational change can be invigorating for some employees but also highly disruptive and stressful for others.”

    Source: OpenStax, 2019

    Info-Tech Insight

    Without considering the individual impact of the new organizational structure on each of your employees, the change will undoubtedly fail in meeting its intended goals and your organization will likely fall back into old structured habits.

    Use a top-down approach to build your target-state IT organizational sketch

    The organizational sketch is the outline of the organization that encompasses the work units and depicts the relationships among them. It’s important that you create the structure that’s right for your organization, not one that simply fits with your current staff’s skills and knowledge. This is why Info-Tech encourages you to use your operating model as a mode of guidance for structuring your future-state organizational sketch.

    The organizational sketch is made up of unique work units. Work units are the foundational building blocks on which you will define the work that IT needs to get done. The number of work units you require and their names will not match your operating model one to one. Certain functional areas will need to be broken down into smaller work units to ensure appropriate leadership and span of control.

    Use your customized operating model to build your work units

    WHAT ARE WORK UNITS?

    A work unit is a functional group or division that has a discrete set of processes or capabilities that it is responsible for, which don’t overlap with any others. Your customized list of IT capabilities will form the building blocks of your work units. Step one in the process of building your structure is grouping IT capabilities together that are similar or that need to be done in concert in the case of more complex work products. The second step is to iterate on these work units based on the organizational design principles from Phase 1 to ensure that the future-state structure is aligned with enablement of the organization’s objectives.

    Work Unit Examples

    Here is a list of example work units you can use to brainstorm what your organization’s could look like. Some of these overlap in functionality but should provide a strong starting point and hint at some potential alternatives to your current way of organizing.

    • Office of the CIO
    • Strategy and Architecture
    • Architecture and Design
    • Business Relationship Management
    • Projection and Portfolio Management
    • Solution Development
    • Solution Delivery
    • DevOps
    • Infrastructure and Operations
    • Enterprise Information Security
    • Security, Risk & Compliance
    • Data and Analytics

    Example of work units

    The image contains an example of work units.

    3.1 Create functional work units

    1-3 hours

    1. Using a whiteboard or large tabletop, list each capability from your operating model on a sticky note and recreate your operating model. Use one color for centralized activities and a second color for decentralized activities.
    2. With the group of key IT stakeholders, review the operating model and any important definitions and rationale for decisions made.
    3. Starting with your centralized capabilities, review each in turn and begin to form logical groups of compatible capabilities. Review the decentralized capabilities and repeat the process, writing additional sticky notes for capabilities that will be repeated in decentralized units.
    4. Note: Not all capabilities need to be grouped. If you believe that a capability has a high enough priority, has a lot of work, or is significantly divergent from others put this capability by itself.
    5. Define a working title for each new work unit, and discuss the pros and cons of the model. Ensure the work units still align with the operating model and make any changes to the operating model needed.
    6. Review your design principles and ensure that they are aligned with your new work units.
    InputOutput
    • Organizational business objectives
    • Customized operating model
    • Defined work units
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Group formation

    Understand the impact of the functional groups you create.

    A group consists of two or more individuals who are working toward a common goal. Group formation is how those individuals are organized to deliver on that common goal. It should take into consideration the levels of hierarchy in your structure, the level of focus you give to processes, and where power is dispersed within your organizational design.

    Importance: Balance highly important capabilities with lower priority capabilities

    Specialization: The scope of each role will be influenced by specialized knowledge and a dedicated leader

    Effectiveness: Group capabilities that increase their efficacy

    Span of Control: Identify the right number of employees reporting to a single leader

    Choose the degree of specialization required

    Be mindful of the number of hats you’re placing on any one role.

    • Specialization exists when individuals in an organization are dedicated to performing specific tasks associated with a common goal and requiring a particular skill set. Aligning the competencies required to carry out the specific tasks based on the degree of complexity associated with those tasks ensures the right people and number of people can be assigned.
    • When people are organized by their specialties, it reduces the likelihood of task switching, reduces the time spent training or cross-training, and increases the focus employees can provide to their dedicated area of specialty.
    • There are disadvantages associated with aligning teams by their specialization, such as becoming bored and seeing the tasks they are performing as monotonous. Specialization doesn’t come without its problems. Monitor employee motivation

    Info-Tech Insight

    Smaller organizations will require less specialization simply out of necessity. To function and deliver on critical processes, some people might be asked to wear several hats.

    Avoid overloading the cognitive capacity of employees

    Cognitive load refers to the number of responsibilities that one can successfully take on.

    • When employees are assigned an appropriate number of responsibilities this leads to:
      • Engaged employees
      • Less task switching
      • Increased effectiveness on assigned responsibilities
      • Reduced bottlenecks
    • While this cognitive load can differ from employee to employee, when assigning role responsibilities, ensure each role isn’t being overburdened and spreading their focus thin.
    • Moreover, capable does not equal successful. Just because someone has the capability to take on more responsibilities doesn’t mean they will be successful.
    • Leverage the cognitive load being placed on your team to help create boundaries between teams and demonstrate clear role expectations.
    Source: IT Revolution, 2021

    Info-Tech Insight

    When you say you are looking for a team that is a “jack of all trades,” you are likely exceeding appropriate cognitive loads for your staff and losing productivity to task switching.

    Factors to consider for span of control

    Too many and too few direct reports have negative impacts on the organization.

    Complexity: More complex work should have fewer direct reports. This often means the leader will need to provide lots of support, even engaging in the work directly at times.

    Demand: Dynamic shifts in demand require more managerial involvement and therefore should have a smaller span of control. Especially if this demand is to support a 24/7 operation.

    Competency Level: Skilled employees should require less hands-on assistance and will be in a better position to support the business as a member of a larger team than those who are new to the role.

    Purpose: Strategic leaders are less involved in the day-to-day operations of their teams, while operational leaders tend to provide hands-on support, specifically when short-staffed.

    Group formation will influence communication structure

    Pick your poison…

    It’s important to understand the impacts that team design has on your services and products. The solutions that a team is capable of producing is highly dependent on how teams are structured. For example, Conway’s Law tells us that small distributed software delivery teams are more likely to produce modular service architecture, where large collocated teams are better able to create monolithic architecture. This doesn’t just apply to software delivery but also other products and services that IT creates. Note that small distributed teams are not the only way to produce quality products as they can create their own silos.

    Sources: Forbes, 2017

    Create mandates for each of your identified work units

    WHAT ARE WORK UNIT MANDATES?

    The work unit mandate should provide a quick overview of the work unit and be clear enough that any reader can understand why the work unit exists, what it does, and what it is accountable for.

    Each work unit will have a unique mandate. Each mandate should be distinguishable enough from your other work units to make it clear why the work is grouped in this specific way, rather than an alternative option. The mandate will vary by organization based on the agreed upon work units, design archetype, and priorities.

    Don’t just adopt an example mandate from another organization or continue use of the organization’s pre-existing mandate – take the time to ensure it accurately depicts what that group is doing so that its value-added activities are clear to the larger organization.

    Examples of Work Unit Mandates

    The Office of the CIO will be a strategic enabler of the IT organization, driving IT organizational performance through improved IT management and governance. A central priority of the Office of the CIO is to ensure that IT is able to respond to evolving environments and challenges through strategic foresight and a centralized view of what is best for the organization.

    The Project Management Office will provide standardized and effective project management practices across the IT landscape, including an identified project management methodology, tools and resources, project prioritization, and all steps from project initiation through to evaluation, as well as education and development for project managers across IT.

    The Solutions Development Group will be responsible for the high-quality development and delivery of new solutions and improvements and the production of customized business reports. Through this function, IT will have improved agility to respond to new initiatives and will be able to deliver high-quality services and insights in a consistent manner.

    3.2 Create work unit mandates

    1-3 hours

    1. Break into teams of three to four people and assign an equal number of work units to each team.
    2. Have each team create a set of statements that describe the overall purpose of that working group. Each mandate statement should:
    • Be clear enough that any reader can understand.
    • Explain why the work unit exists, what it does, and what it is accountable for.
    • Be distinguishable enough from your other work units to make it clear why the work is grouped in this specific way, rather than an alternative option.
  • Have each group present their work unit mandates and make changes wherever necessary.
  • InputOutput
    • Work units
    • Work unit mandates
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Identify the key roles and responsibilities for the target IT organization

    Now that you have identified the main units of work in the target IT organization, it is time to identify the roles that will perform that work. At the end of this step, the key roles will be identified, the purpose statement will be built, and accountability and responsibility for roles will be clearly defined. Make sure that accountability for each task is assigned to one role only. If there are challenges with a role, change the role to address them (e.g. split roles or shift responsibilities).

    The image contains an example of two work units: Enterprise Architecture and PMO. It then lists the roles of the two work units.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do not bias your role design by focusing on your existing staff’s competencies. If you begin to focus on your existing team members, you run the risk of artificially narrowing the scope of work or skewing the responsibilities of individuals based on the way it is, rather than the way it should be.

    3.3 Define roles inside the work units

    1-3 hours

    1. Select a work unit from the organizational sketch.
    2. Describe the most senior role in that work unit by asking, “what would the leader of this group be accountable or responsible for?” Define this role and move the capabilities they will be accountable for under that leader. Repeat this activity for the capabilities this leader would be responsible for.
    3. Continue to define each role that will be required in that work unit to deliver or provide oversight related to those capabilities.
    4. Continue until key roles are identified and the capabilities each role will be accountable or responsible for are clarified.
    5. Remember, only one role can have accountability for each capability but several can have responsibility.
    6. For each role, use the list of capabilities that the position will be accountable, responsible, or accountable and responsible for to create a job description. Leverage your own internal job descriptions or visit our Job Descriptions page.
    InputOutput
    • Work units
    • Work unit mandates
    • Responsibilities
    • Accountabilities
    • Roles with clarified responsibilities and accountabilities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Delivery model for product or solution development

    Can add additional complexity or clarity

    • Certain organizational structures will require a specific type of resourcing model to meet expectations and deliver on the development or sustainment of core products and solutions.
    • There are four common methods that we see in IT organizations:
      • Functional Roles: Completed work is handed off from functional team to functional team sequentially as outlined in the organization’s SDLC.
      • Shared Service & Resource Pools (Matrix): Resources are pulled whenever the work requires specific skills or pushed to areas where product demand is high.
      • Product or System: Work is directly sent to the teams who are directly managing the product or directly supporting the requestor.
      • Skills & Competencies: Work is directly sent to the teams who have the IT and business skills and competencies to complete the work.
    • Each of these will lead to a difference in how the functional team is skilled. They could have a great understanding of their customer, the product, the solution, or their service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Despite popular belief, there is no such thing as the Spotify model, and organizations that structured themselves based on the original Spotify drawing might be missing out on key opportunities to obtain productivity from employees.

    Sources: Indeed, 2020; Agility Scales

    There can be different patterns to structure and resource your product delivery teams

    The primary goal of any product delivery team is to improve the delivery of value for customers and the business based on your product definition and each product’s demand. Each organization will have different priorities and constraints, so your team structure may take on a combination of patterns or may take on one pattern and then transform into another.

    Delivery Team Structure Patterns

    How Are Resources and Work Allocated?

    Functional Roles

    Teams are divided by functional responsibilities (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk) and arranged according to their placement in the software development lifecycle (SDLC).

    Completed work is handed off from team to team sequentially as outlined in the organization’s SDLC.

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Teams are created by pulling the necessary resources from pools (e.g. developers, testers, business analysts, operations, help desk).

    Resources are pulled whenever the work requires specific skills or pushed to areas where product demand is high.

    Product or System

    Teams are dedicated to the development, support, and management of specific products or systems.

    Work is directly sent to the teams who are directly managing the product or directly supporting the requester.

    Skills and Competencies

    Teams are grouped based on skills and competencies related to technology (e.g. Java, mobile, web) or familiarity with business capabilities (e.g. HR, Finance).

    Work is directly sent to the teams who have the IT and business skills and competencies to complete the work.

    Delivery teams will be structured according to resource and development needs

    Functional Roles

    Shared Service and Resource Pools

    Product or System

    Skills and Competencies

    When your people are specialists versus having cross-functional skills

    Leveraged when specialists such as Security or Operations will not have full-time work on the product

    When you have people with cross-functional skills who can self-organize around a product’s needs

    When you have a significant investment in a specific technology stack

    The image contains a diagram of functional roles.The image contains a diagram of shared service and resource pools.The image contains a diagram of product or system.The image contains a diagram of skills and competencies.

    For more information about delivering in a product operating model, refer to our Deliver Digital Products at Scale blueprint.

    3.4 Finalize the organizational chart

    1-3 hours

    1. Import each of your work units and the target-state roles that were identified for each.
    2. In the place of the name of each work unit in your organizational sketch, replace the work unit name with the prospective role name for the leader of that group.
    3. Under each of the leadership roles, import the names of team members that were part of each respective work unit.
    4. Validate the final structure as a group to ensure each of the work units includes all the necessary roles and responsibilities and that there is clear delineation of accountabilities between the work units.

    Input

    Output

    • Work units
    • Work unit mandates
    • Roles with accountabilities and responsibilities
    • Finalized organizational chart

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook & Executive Communications Deck

    Proactively consider and mitigate redesign risks

    Every organizational structure will include certain risks that should have been considered and accepted when choosing the base operating model sketch. Now that the final organizational structure has been created, consider if those risks were mitigated by the final organizational structure that was created. For those risks that weren’t mitigated, have a tactic to control risks that remain present.

    3.5 Identify and mitigate key risks

    1-3 hours

    1. For each of the operating model sketch options, there are specific risks that should have been considered when selecting that model.
    2. Take those risks and transfer them into the correct slide of the Organizational Design Workbook.
    3. Consider if there are additional risks that need to be considered with the new organizational structure based on the customizations made.
    4. For each risk, rank the severity of that risk on a scale of low, medium, or high.
    5. Determine one or more mitigation tactic(s) for each of the risks identified. This tactic should reduce the likelihood or impact of the risk event happening.
    InputOutput
    • Final organizational structure
    • Operating model sketch benefits and risks
    • Redesign risk mitigation plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Phase 4

    Plan for Implementation & Change

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    4.1 Select a transition plan

    4.2 Establish the change communication messages

    4.3 Be consistent with a standard set of FAQs

    4.4 Define org. redesign resistors

    4.5 Create a sustainment plan

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership
    • HR Business Partners

    All changes require change management

    Change management is:

    Managing a change that requires replanning and reorganizing and that causes people to feel like they have lost control over aspects of their jobs.

    – Padar et al., 2017
    People Process Technology

    Embedding change management into organizational design

    PREPARE A

    Awareness: Establish the need for organizational redesign and ensure this is communicated well.

    This blueprint is mostly focused on the prepare and transition components.

    D

    Desire: Ensure the new structure is something people are seeking and will lead to individual benefits for all.

    TRANSITION K

    Knowledge: Provide stakeholders with the tools and resources to function in their new roles and reporting structure.

    A

    Ability: Support employees through the implementation and into new roles or teams.

    FUTURE R

    Reinforcement: Emphasize and reward positive behaviors and attitudes related to the new organizational structure.

    Implementing the new organizational structure

    Implementing the organizational structure can be the most difficult part of the process.

    • To succeed in the process, consider creating an implementation plan that adequately considers these five components.
    • Each of these are critical to supporting the final organizational structure that was established during the redesign process.

    Implementation Plan

    Transition Plan: Identify the appropriate approach to making the transition, and ensure the transition plan works within the context of the business.

    Communication Strategy: Create a method to ensure consistent, clear, and concise information can be provided to all relevant stakeholders.

    Plan to Address Resistance: Given that not everyone will be happy to move forward with the new organizational changes, ensure you have a method to hear feedback and demonstrate concerns have been heard.

    Employee Development Plan: Provide employees with tools, resources, and the ability to demonstrate these new competencies as they adjust to their new roles.

    Monitor and Sustain the Change: Establish metrics that inform if the implementation of the new organizational structure was successful and reinforce positive behaviors.

    Define the type of change the organizational structure will be

    As a result, your organization must adopt OCM practices to better support the acceptance and longevity of the changes being pursued.

    Incremental Change

    Transformational Change

    Organizational change management is highly recommended and beneficial for projects that require people to:

    • Adopt new tools and workflows.
    • Learn new skills.
    • Comply with new policies and procedures.
    • Stop using old tools and workflows.

    Organizational change management is required for projects that require people to:

    • Move into different roles, reporting structures, and career paths.
    • Embrace new responsibilities, goals, reward systems, and values.
    • Grow out of old habits, ideas, and behaviors.
    • Lose stature in the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    How you transition to the new organizational structure can be heavily influenced by HR. This is the time to be including them and leveraging their expertise to support the transition “how.”

    Transition Plan Options

    Description

    Pros

    Cons

    Example

    Big Bang Change

    Change that needs to happen immediately – “ripping the bandage off.”

    • It puts an immediate stop to the current way of operating.
    • Occurs quickly.
    • More risky.
    • People may not buy into the change immediately.
    • May not receive the training needed to adjust to the change.

    A tsunami in Japan stopped all imports and exports. Auto manufacturers were unable to get parts shipped and had to immediately find an alternative supplier.

    Incremental Change

    The change can be rolled out slower, in phases.

    • Can ensure that people are bought in along the way through the change process, allowing time to adjust and align with the change.
    • There is time to ensure training takes place.
    • It can be a timely process.
    • If the change is dragged on for too long (over several years) the environment may change and the rationale and desired outcome for the change may no longer be relevant.

    A change in technology, such as HRIS, might be rolled out one application at a time to ensure that people have time to learn and adjust to the new system.

    Pilot Change

    The change is rolled out for only a select group, to test and determine if it is suitable to roll out to all impacted stakeholders.

    • Able to test the success of the change initiative and the implementation process.
    • Able to make corrections before rolling it out wider, to aid a smooth change.
    • Use the pilot group as an example of successful change.
    • Able to gain buy-in and create change champions from the pilot group who have experienced it and see the benefits.
    • Able to prevent an inappropriate change from impacting the entire organization.
    • Lengthy process.
    • Takes time to ensure the change has been fully worked through.

    A retail store is implementing a new incentive plan to increase product sales. They will pilot the new incentive plan at select stores, before rolling it out broadly.

    4.1 Select a transition plan approach

    1-3 hours

    1. List each of the changes required to move from your current structure to the new structure. Consider:
      1. Changes in reporting structure
      2. Hiring new members
      3. Eliminating positions
      4. Developing key competencies for staff
    2. Once you’ve defined all the changes required, consider the three different transition plan approaches: big bang, incremental, and pilot. Each of the transition plan approaches will have drawbacks and benefits. Use the list of changes to inform the best approach.
    3. If you are proceeding with the incremental or the pilot, determine the order in which you will proceed with the changes or the groups that will pilot the new structure first.
    InputOutput
    • Customized operating model sketch
    • New org. chart
    • Current org. chart
    • List of changes to move from current to future state
    • Transition plan to support changes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • HR Business Partners

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Make a plan to effectively manage and communicate the change

    Success of your new organizational structure hinges on adequate preparation and effective communication.

    The top challenge facing organizations in completing the organizational redesign is their organizational culture and acceptance of change. Effective planning for the implementation and communication throughout the change is pivotal. Make sure you understand how the change will impact staff and create tailored plans for communication.

    65% of managers believe the organizational change is effective when provided with frequent and clear communication.

    Source: SHRM, 2021

    Communicate reasons for organizational structure changes and how they will be implemented

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message, i.e. a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, and that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The organizational change message should:

    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed.
    • Explain how change will be implemented.
    • Address how change will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the change successful.

    Five elements of communicating change

    • What is the change?
    • Why are we doing it?
    • How are we going to go about it?
    • How long will it take us to do it?
    • What will the role be for each department and individual?
    Source: Cornelius & Associates, 2010

    4.2 Establish the change communication messages

    2 hours

    1. The purpose of this activity is to establish a change communication message you can leverage when talking to stakeholders about the new organizational structure.
    2. Review the questions in the Organizational Design Workbook.
    3. Establish a clear message around the expected changes that will have to take place to help realize the new organizational structure.
    InputOutput
    • Customized operating model sketch
    • New org. chart
    • Current org. chart
    • List of changes
    • Transition plan
    • Change communication message for new organizational structure
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Apply the following communication principles to make your IT organization redesign changes relevant to stakeholders

    Be Clear

    • Say what you mean and mean what you say.
    • Choice of language is important: “Do you think this is a good idea? I think we could really benefit from your insights and experience here.” Or do you mean: “I think we should do this. I need you to do this to make it happen.”
    • Don’t use jargon.

    Be Consistent

    • The core message must be consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Test your communication with your team or colleagues to obtain feedback before delivering to a broader audience.
    • A lack of consistency can be interpreted as an attempt at deception. This can hurt credibility and trust.

    Be Concise

    • Keep communication short and to the point so key messages are not lost in the noise.
    • There is a risk of diluting your key message if you include too many other details.

    Be Relevant

    • Talk about what matters to the stakeholder.
    • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
    • Tailor the details of the message to each stakeholder’s specific concerns.
    • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be understood but this does not matter to stakeholders. Think: “what’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.

    Frequently asked questions (FAQs) provide a chance to anticipate concerns and address them

    As a starting point for building an IT organizational design implementation, look at implementing an FAQ that will address the following:

    • The what, who, when, why, and where
    • The transition process
    • What discussions should be held with clients in business units
    • HR-centric questions

    Questions to consider answering:

    • What is the objective of the IT organization?
    • What are the primary changes to the IT organization?
    • What does the new organizational structure look like?
    • What are the benefits to our IT staff and to our business partners?
    • How will the IT management team share new information with me?
    • What is my role during the transition?
    • What impact is there to my reporting relationship within my department?
    • What are the key dates I should know about?

    4.3 Be consistent with a standard set of FAQs

    1 hour

    1. Beyond the completed communications plans, brainstorm a list of answers to the key “whats” of your organizational design initiative:
    • What is the objective of the IT organization?
    • What are the primary changes to the IT organization?
    • What does the new organizational structure look like?
    • What are the benefits to our IT staff and to our business partners?
  • Think about any key questions that may rise around the transition:
    • How will the IT management team share new information with me?
    • What is my role during the transition?
    • What impact is there to my reporting relationship within my department?
    • What are the key dates I should know about?
  • Determine the best means of socializing this information. If you have an internal wiki or knowledge-sharing platform, this would be a useful place to host the information.
  • InputOutput
    • Driver(s) for the new organizational structure
    • List of changes to move from current to future state
    • Change communication message
    • FAQs to provide to staff about the organizational design changes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    The change reaction model

    The image contains a picture of the change reaction model. The model includes a double arrow pointing in both directions of left and right. On top of the arrow are 4 circles spread out on the arrow. They are labelled: Active Resistance, Detachment, Questioning, Acceptance.

    (Adapted from Cynthia Wittig)

    Info-Tech Insight

    People resist changes for many reasons. When it comes to organizational redesign changes, some of the most common reasons people resist change include a lack of understanding, a lack of involvement in the process, and fear.

    Include employees in the employee development planning process

    Prioritize

    Assess employee to determine competency levels and interests.

    Draft

    Employee drafts development goals; manager reviews.

    Select

    Manager helps with selection of development activities.

    Check In

    Manager provides ongoing check-ins, coaching, and feedback.

    Consider core and supplementary components that will sustain the new organizational structure

    Supplementary sustainment components:

    • Tools & Resources
    • Structure
    • Skills
    • Work Environment
    • Tasks
    • Disincentives

    Core sustainment components:

    • Empowerment
    • Measurement
    • Leadership
    • Communication
    • Incentives

    Sustainment Plan

    Sustain the change by following through with stakeholders, gathering feedback, and ensuring that the change rationale and impacts are clearly understood. Failure to so increases the potential that the change initiative will fail or be a painful experience and cost the organization in terms of loss of productivity or increase in turnover rates.

    Support sustainment with clear measurements

    • Measurement is one of the most important components of monitoring and sustaining the new organizational structure as it provides insight into where the change is succeeding and where further support should be added.
    • There should be two different types of measurements:
    1. Standard Change Management Metrics
    2. Organizational Redesign Metrics
  • When gathering data around metrics, consider other forms of measurement (qualitative) that can provide insights on opportunities to enhance the success of the organizational redesign change.
    1. Every measurement should be rooted to a goal. Many of the goals related to organizational design will be founded in the driver of this change initiative
    2. Once the goals have been defined, create one or more measurements that determines if the goal was successful.
    3. Use specific key performance indicators (KPIs) that contain a metric that is being measured and the frequency of that measurement.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Obtaining qualitative feedback from employees, customers, and business partners can provide insight into where the new organizational structure is operating optimally versus where there are further adjustments that could be made to support the change.

    4.4 Consider sustainment metrics

    1 hour

    1. Establish metrics that bring the entire process together and that will ensure the new organizational design is a success.
    2. Go back to your driver(s) for the organizational redesign. Use these drivers to help inform a particular measurement that can be used to determine if the new organizational design will be successful. Each measurement should be related to the positive benefits of the organization, an individual, or the change itself.
    3. Once you have a list of measurements, use these to determine the specific KPI that can be qualified through a metric. Often you are looking for an increase or decrease of a particular measurement by a dollar or percentage within a set time frame.
    4. Use the example metrics in the workbook and update them to reflect your organization’s drivers.
    InputOutput
    • Driver(s) for the new organizational structure
    • List of changes to move from current to future state
    • Change communication message
    • Sustainment metrics
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • CIO
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Leadership

    Record the results in the Organizational Design Workbook

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    • Continue into the second phase of the organizational redesign process by defining the required workforce to deliver.
    • Leveraging trends, data, and feedback from your employees, define the competencies needed to deliver on the defined roles.

    Implement a New IT Organizational Structure

    • Organizational design implementations can be highly disruptive for IT staff and business partners.
    • Without a structured approach, IT leaders may experience high turnover, decreased productivity, and resistance to the change.

    Define the Role of Project Management in Agile and Product-Centric Delivery

    • There are many voices with different opinions on the role of project management. This causes confusion and unnecessary churn.
    • Project management and product management naturally align to different time horizons. Harmonizing their viewpoints can take significant work.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    The image contains a picture of Jardena London.

    Jardena London

    Transformation Catalyst, Rosetta Technology Group

    The image contains a picture of Jodie Goulden.

    Jodie Goulden

    Consultant | Founder, OrgDesign Works

    The image contains a picture of Shan Pretheshan.

    Shan Pretheshan

    Director, SUPA-IT Consulting

    The image contains a picture of Chris Briley.

    Chris Briley

    CIO, Manning & Napier

    The image contains a picture of Dean Meyer.

    Dean Meyer

    President N. Dean Meyer and Associates Inc.

    The image contains a picture of Jimmy Williams.

    Jimmy Williams

    CIO, Chocktaw Nation of Oklahoma

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Cole Cioran, Managing Partner

    Dana Daher, Research Director

    Hans Eckman, Principal Research Director

    Ugbad Farah, Research Director

    Ari Glaizel, Practice Lead

    Valence Howden, Principal Research Director

    Youssef Kamar, Senior Manager, Consulting

    Carlene McCubbin, Practice Lead

    Baird Miller, Executive Counsellor

    Josh Mori, Research Director

    Rajesh Parab, Research Director

    Gary Rietz, Executive Counsellor

    Bibliography

    “A Cheat Sheet for HR Professionals: The Organizational Development Process.” AIHR, 2021. Web.

    Acharya, Ashwin, Roni Lieber, Lissa Seem, and Tom Welchman. “How to identify the right ‘spans of control’ for your organization.” McKinsey, 21 December 2017. Web.

    Anand. N., and Jean-Louis Barsoux. “What everyone gets wrong about change management. Harvard Business Review, December 2017. Web.

    Atiken, Chris. “Operating model design-first principles.” From Here On, 24 August 2018. Web.

    “Avoid common digital transformation challenges: Address your IT Operating Model Now.” Sofigate, 5 May 2020. Web.

    Baumann, Oliver, and Brian Wu. “The many dimensions of research on designing flat firms.” Journal of Organizational Design, no. 3, vol. 4. 09 May 2022.Web.

    Bertha, Michael. “Cross the project to product chasm.” CIO, 1 May 2020. Web.

    Blenko, Marcia, and James Root. “Design Principles for a Robust Operating Model.” Bain & Company, 8 April 2015. Web.

    Blenko, Marcia, Leslie Mackrell, and Kevin Rosenberg. “Operating models: How non-profits get from strategy to results.” The Bridge Span Group, 15 August 2019. Web.

    Boulton, Clint. “PVH finds perfect fit in hybrid IT operating model amid pandemic.” CIO, 19 July 2021. Web.

    Boulton, Clint. “Why digital disruption leaves no room for bimodal IT.” CIO, 11 May 2017. Web.

    Bright, David, et al. “Chapter 10: Organizational Structure & Change.” Principles of Management, OpenStax, Rice University, 20 March 2019. Book.

    Campbell, Andrew. “Design Principles: How to manage them.” Ashridge Operating Models. 1 January 2022. Web.

    D., Maria. “3 Types of IT Outsourcing Models and How to Choose Between Them.” Cleveroad, 29 April 2022. Web.

    Devaney, Eric. “9 Types of Organizational Structure Every Company Should Consider.” HubSpot, 11 February 2022. Web.

    Devaney, Erik. “The six building blocks of organizational structure.” Hubspot, 3 June 2020. Web.

    Eisenman, M., S. Paruchuri, and P. Puranam. “The design of emergence in organizations.” Journal of Organization Design, vol. 9, 2020. Web.

    Forbes Business Development Council. “15 Clear Signs It’s Time to Restructure the Business.” Forbes, 10 February 2020. Web.

    Freed, Joseph. “Why Cognitive Load Could Be The Most Important Employee Experience Metric In The Next 10 Years.” Forbes, 30 June 2020. Web.

    Galibraith, Jay. “The Star Model.” JayGalbraith.com, n.d. Web.

    Girod, Stéphane, and Samina Karim. “Restructure or reconfigure?” Harvard Business Review, April 2017. Web.

    Goldman, Sharon. “The need for a new IT Operating Model: Why now?” CIO, 27 August 2019. Web.

    Halapeth, Milind. “New age IT Operating Model: Creating harmony between the old and the new.” Wirpo, n.d. Web.

    Harvey, Michelle. “Why a common operating model is efficient for business productivity.” CMC, 10 May 2020. Web.

    Helfand, Heidi. “Dynamic Reteaming.” O’Reilly Media, 7 July 2020. Book.

    JHeller, Martha. “How Microsoft CIO Jim DuBois changed the IT Operating Model.” CIO, 2 February 2016. Web.

    Heller, Martha. “How Stryker IT Shifted to a global operating model.” CIO, 19 May 2021. Web.

    Heller, Michelle. “Inside blue Shields of California’s IT operating model overhaul.” CIO, 24 February 2021. Web.

    Hessing, Ted. “Value Stream Mapping.” Six Sigma Study Guide, 11 April 2014. Web.

    Huber, George, P. “What is Organization Design.” Organizational Design Community, n.d. Web.

    Indeed Editorial Team. “5 Advantages and Disadvantages of the Matrix Organizational Structure.” Indeed, 23 November 2020. Web.

    Indeed Editorial Team. “How to plan an effective organization restructure.” Indeed, 10 June 2021. Web.

    “Insourcing vs Outsourcing vs Co-Sourcing.” YML Group, n.d. Web.

    “Investing in more strategic roles.” CAPS Research, 3 February 2022. Web.

    Jain, Gagan. “Product IT Operating Model: The next-gen model for a digital work.” DevOps, 22 July 2019. Web.

    Kane, Gerald, D. Plamer, and Anh Phillips. “Accelerating Digital Innovation Inside and Out.” Deloitte Insights, 4 June 2019. Web.

    Krush, Alesia. “IT companies with ‘flat’ structures: utopia or innovative approach?” Object Style, 18 October 2018. Web.

    Law, Michael. “Adaptive Design: Increasing Customer Value in Your Organisation.” Business Agility Institute, 5 October 2020. Web.

    LucidContent Team. “How to get buy-in for changes to your organizational structure.” Lucid Chart, n.d. Web.

    Matthews, Paul. “Do you know the difference between competence and capability?” The People Development Magazine, 25 September 2020. Web.

    Meyer, Dean N. “Analysis: Common symptoms of organizational structure problems.” NDMA, n.d. Web.

    Meyer, N. Dean. “Principle-based Organizational Structure.” NDMA Publishing, 2020. Web.

    Morales Pedraza, Jorge. Answer to posting, “What is the relationship between structure and strategy?” ResearchGate.net, 5 March 2014. Web.

    Nanjad, Len. “Five non-negotiables for effective organization design change.” MNP, 01 October 2021. Web.

    Neilson, Gary, Jaime Estupiñán, and Bhushan Sethi. “10 Principles of Organizational Design.” Strategy & Business, 23 March 2015. Web.

    Nicastro, Dom. “Understanding the Foundational Concepts of Organizational Design.” Reworked, 24 September 2020. Web.

    Obwegeser, Nikolaus, Tomoko Yokoi, Michael Wade, and Tom Voskes. “7 Key Principles to Govern Digital Initiatives.” MIT Sloan, 1 April 2020. Web.

    “Operating Models and Tools.” Business Technology Standard, 23 February 2021. Web.

    “Organizational Design Agility: Journey to a combined community.” ODF-BAI How Space, Organizational Design Forum, 2022. Web.

    “Organizational Design: Understanding and getting started.” Ingentis, 20 January 2021. Web.

    Padar, Katalin, et al. “Bringing project and change management roles into sync.” Journal of Change Management, 2017. Web.

    Partridge, Chris. “Evolve your Operating Model- It will drive everything.” CIO, 30 July 2021. Web.

    Pijnacker, Lieke. “HR Analytics: role clarity impacts performance.” Effectory, 25 September 2019. Web.

    Pressgrove, Jed. “Centralized vs. Federated: Breaking down IT Structures.” Government Technology, March 2020. Web.

    Sherman, Fraser. “Differences between Organizational Structure and Design.” Bizfluent, 20 September 2019. Web.

    Skelton, Matthew, and Manual Pais. “Team Cognitive Load.” IT Revolution, 19 January 2021. Web.

    Skelton, Matthew, and Manual Pais. Team Topologies. IT Revolution Press, 19 September 2019. Book

    Spencer, Janet, and Michael Watkins. “Why organizational change fails.” TLNT, 26 November 2019. Web.

    Storbakken, Mandy. “The Cloud Operating Model.” VMware, 27 January 2020. Web.

    "The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2010. Web.

    “Understanding Organizational Structures.” SHRM, 31 August 2021. Web.

    "unfix Pattern: Base.” AgilityScales, n.d. Web.

    Walker, Alex. “Half-Life: Alyx helped change Valve’s Approach to Development.” Kotaku, 10 July 2020. Web.

    "Why Change Management.” Prosci, n.d. Web.

    Wittig, Cynthia. “Employees' Reactions to Organizational Change.” OD Practioner, vol. 44, no. 2, 2012. Web.

    Woods, Dan. “How Platforms are neutralizing Conway’s Law.” Forbes, 15 August 2017. Web.

    Worren, Nicolay, Jeroen van Bree, and William Zybach. “Organization Design Challenges. Results from a practitioner survey.” Journal of Organizational Design, vol. 8, 25 July 2019. Web.

    Appendix

    IT Culture Framework

    This framework leverages McLean & Company’s adaptation of Quinn and Rohrbaugh’s Competing Values Approach.

    The image contains a diagram of the IT Culture Framework. The framework is divided into four sections: Competitive, Innovative, Traditional, and Cooperative, each with their own list of descriptors.

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}195|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 2 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize the organization’s ability to respond to risk.

    Impact and Result

    • Understand gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establish a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Drive a risk-aware organization toward innovation and consider alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Research & Tools

    Integrated Risk Management Capstone – A framework for how IT risks can be integrated into your organization’s enterprise risk management program to enable strategic risk-informed decisions.

    This is a capstone blueprint highlighting the benefits of an integrated risk management program that uses risk information and data to inform strategic decision making. Throughout this research you will gain insight into the five core elements of integrating risk through assessing, governing, defining the program, defining the process, and implementing.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk Capstone
    • Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment
    • Risk Register Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Integrate IT Risk Into Enterprise Risk

    Don’t fear IT risks, integrate them.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Having siloed risks is risky business for any enterprise.

    Photo of Valence Howden, Principal Research Director, CIO Practice.
    Valence Howden
    Principal Research Director, CIO Practice
    Photo of Petar Hristov Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance.
    Petar Hristov
    Research Director, Security, Privacy, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Ian Mulholland Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance.
    Ian Mulholland
    Research Director, Security, Risk & Compliance
    Photo of Brittany Lutes, Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice.
    Brittany Lutes
    Senior Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Photo of Ibrahim Abdel-Kader, Research Analyst, CIO Practice
    Ibrahim Abdel-Kader
    Research Analyst, CIO Practice

    Every organization has a threshold for risk that should not be exceeded, whether that threshold is defined or not.

    In the age of digital, information and technology will undoubtedly continue to expand beyond the confines of the IT department. As such, different areas of the organization cannot address these risks in silos. A siloed approach will produce different ways of identifying, assessing, responding to, and reporting on risk events. Integrated risk management is about embedding IT uncertainty to inform good decision making across the organization.

    When risk is integrated into the organization's enterprise risk management program, it enables a single view of all risks and the potential impact of each risk event. More importantly, it provides a consistent view of the risk event in relation to uncertainty that might have once been seemingly unrelated to IT.

    And all this can be achieved while remaining within the enterprise’s clearly defined risk appetite.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Most organizations fail to integrate IT risks into enterprise risks:

    • IT risks, when considered, are identified and classified separately from the enterprise-wide perspective.
    • IT is expected to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Poor behaviors, such as only considering IT risks when conducting compliance or project due diligence, have been normalized.

    Common Obstacles

    IT leaders have to overcome these obstacles when it comes to integrating risk:

    • Making business leaders aware of, involved in, and able to respond to all enterprise risks.
    • A lack of data or information being used to support a holistic risk management process.
    • A low level of enterprise risk maturity.
    • A lack of risk management capabilities.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    By leveraging the Info-Tech Integrated Risk approach, your business can better address and embed risk by:

    • Understanding gaps in the organization’s current approach to risk management practices.
    • Establishing a standardized approach for how IT risks impact the enterprise as a whole.
    • Driving a risk-aware organization toward innovation and considering alternative options for how to move forward.
    • Helping integrate IT risks into the foundational risk practice.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Stop avoiding risk – integrate it. This provides a holistic view of uncertainty for the organization to drive innovative new approaches to optimize its ability to respond to risk.

    What is integrated risk management?

    • Integrated risk management is the process of ensuring all forms of risk information, including information and technology, are considered and included in the enterprise’s risk management strategy.
    • It removes the siloed approach to classifying risks related to specific departments or areas of the organization, recognizing that each of those risks is a threat to the overarching enterprise.
    • Aggregating the different threats or uncertainty that might exist within an organization allows for informed decisions to be made that align to strategic goals and continue to drive value back to the business.
    • By holistically considering the different risks, the organization can make informed decisions on the best course of action that will reduce any negative impacts associated with the uncertainty and increase the overall value.

    Enterprise Risk Management (ERM)

    • IT
    • Security
    • Digital
    • Vendor/Third Party
    • Other

    Enterprise risk management is the practice of identifying and addressing risks to your organization and using risk information to drive better decisions and better opportunities.

    IT risk is enterprise risk

    Multiple types of risk, 'Finance', 'IT', 'People', and 'Digital', funneling into 'ENTERPRISE RISKS'. IT risks have a direct and often aggregated impact on enterprise risks and opportunities in the same way other business risks can. This relationship must be understood and addressed through integrated risk management to ensure a consistent approach to risk.

    Your challenge

    Embedding IT risks into the enterprise risk management program is challenging because:

    • Most organizations classify risks based on the departments or areas of the business where the uncertainty is likely to happen.
    • Unnecessary expectations are placed on the IT department to own risks over which they have no authority or oversight.
    • Risks are often only identified when conducting due diligence for a project or ensuring compliance with regulations and standards.

    Risk-mature organizations have a unique benefit in that they often have established an overarching governance framework and embedded risk awareness into the culture.

    35% — Only 35% of organizations had embraced ERM in 2020. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    12% — Only 12% of organizations are leveraging risk as a tool to their strategic advantage. (Source: AICPA and NC State Poole College of Management)

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make integrating IT risks difficult to address for many organizations:

    • IT risks are not seen as enterprise risks.
    • The organization’s culture toward risk is not defined.
    • The organization’s appetite and threshold for risk are not defined.
    • Each area of the organization has a different method of identifying, assessing, and responding to risk events.
    • Access to reliable and informative data to support risk management is difficult to obtain.
    • Leadership does not see the business value of integrating risk into a single management program.
    • The organization’s attitudes and behaviors toward risk contradict the desired and defined risk culture.
    • Skills, training, and resources to support risk management are lacking, let alone those to support integrated risk management.

    Integrating risks has its challenges

    62% — Accessing and disseminating information is the main challenge for 62% of organizations maturing their organizational risk management. (Source: OECD)

    20-28% — Organizations with access to machine learning and analytics to address future risk events have 20 to 28% more satisfaction. (Source: Accenture)

    Integrate Risk and Use It to Your Advantage

    Accelerate and optimize your organization by leveraging meaningful risk data to make intelligent enterprise risk decisions.

    Risk management is more than checking an audit box or demonstrating project due diligence.

    Risk Drivers
    • Audit & compliance
    • Preserve value & avoid loss
    • Previous risk impact driver
    • Major transformation
    • Strategic opportunities
    Arrow pointing right. Only 7% of organizations are in a “leading” or “aspirational” level of risk maturity. (OECD, 2021) 63% of organizations struggle when it comes to defining their appetite toward strategy related risks. (“Global Risk Management Survey,” Deloitte, 2021) Late adopters of risk management were 70% more likely to use instinct over data or facts to inform an efficient process. (Clear Risk, 2020) 55% of organizations have little to no training on ERM to properly implement such practices. (AICPA, NC State Poole College of Management, 2021)
    1. Assess Enterprise Risk Maturity 3. Build a Risk Management Program Plan 4. Establish Risk Management Processes 5. Implement a Risk Management Program
    2. Determine Authority with Governance
    Unfortunately, less than 50% of those in risk focused roles are also in a governance role where they have the authority to provide risk oversight. (Governance Institute of Australia, 2020)
    IT can improve the maturity of the organization’s risk governance and help identify risk owners who have authority and accountability.

    Governance and related decision making is optimized with integrated and aligned risk data.

    List of 'Integrated Risk Maturity Categories': '1. Context & Strategic Direction', '2. Risk Culture and Authority', '3. Risk Management Process', and '4. Risk Program Optimization'. The five types of a risk in Enterprise Risk Management.

    ERM incorporates the different types of risk, including IT, security, digital, vendor, and other risk types.

    The program plan is meant to consider all the major risk types in a unified approach.

    The 'Risk Process' cycle starting with '1. Identify', '2. Assess', '3. Respond', '4. Monitor', '5. Report', and back to the beginning. Implementation of an integrated risk management program requires ongoing access to risk data by those with decision making authority who can take action.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside Risk Focus

    A diagram titled 'Risk and Controls' beginning with 'Possible Sources' and a list of sources, 'Control Activities' to prevent, the 'RISK EVENT', 'Recovery Activities' to recover, and 'Possible Repercussions' with a list of ramifications.

    Integrated Risk Mapping — Downside and Upside Risk

    Third-Party Risk Example

    Example of a third-party risk mapped onto the diagram on the previous slide, but with potential upsides mapped out as well. The central risk event is 'Vendor exposes private customer data'. Possible Sources of the downside are 'External Attack' with likelihood prevention method 'Define security standard requirements for vendor assessment' and 'Exfiltration of data through fourth-party staff' with likelihood prevention method 'Ensure data is properly classified'. Possible Sources of the upside are 'Application rationalization' with likelihood optimization method 'Reduce number of applications in environment' and 'Review vendor assessment practices' with likelihood optimization method 'Improve vendor onboarding'. Possible Repercussions on the downside are 'Organization unable to operate in jurisdiction' with impact minimization method 'Engage in-house risk mitigation responses' and 'Fines levied against organization' with impact minimization method 'Report incident to any regulators'. Possible Repercussions on the upside are 'Easier vendor integration and management' with impact utilization method 'Improved vendor onboarding practices' and 'Able to bid on contracts with these requirements' with impact utilization method 'Vendors must provide attestations (e.g. SOC or CMMC)'.

    Insight Summary

    Overarching insight

    Stop fearing risk – integrate it. Integration leads to opportunities for organizations to embrace innovation and new digital technologies as well as reducing operational costs and simplifying reporting.

    Govern risk strategically

    Governance of risk management for information- and technology-related events is often misplaced. Just because it's classified as an IT risk does not mean it shouldn’t be owned by the board or business executive.

    Assess risk maturity

    Integrating risk requires a baseline of risk maturity at the enterprise level. IT can push integrating risks, but only if the enterprise is willing to adopt the attitudes and behaviors that will drive the integrated risk approach.

    Manage risk

    It is not a strategic decision to have different areas of the organization manage the risks perceived to be in their department. It’s the easy choice, but not the strategic one.

    Implement risk management

    Different areas of an enterprise apply risk management processes differently. Determining a single method for identification, assessment, response, and monitoring can ensure successful implementation of enterprise risk management.

    Tactical insight

    Good risk management will consider both the positives and negatives associated with a risk management program by recognizing both the upside and downside of risk event impact and likelihood.

    Integrated risk benefits

    IT Benefits

    • IT executives have a responsibility but not accountability when it comes to risk. Ensure the right business stakeholders have awareness and ability to make informed risk decisions.
    • Controls and responses to risks that are within the “IT” realm will be funded and provided with sufficient support from the business.
    • The business respects and values the role of IT in supporting the enterprise risk program, elevating its role into business partner.

    Business Benefits

    • Business executives and boards can make informed responses to the various forms of risk, including those often categorized as “IT risks.”
    • The compounding severity of risks can be formally assessed and ideally quantified to provide insight into how risks’ ramifications can change based on scenarios.
    • Risk-informed decisions can be used to optimize the business and drive it toward adopting innovation as a response to risk events.
    • Get your organization insured against cybersecurity threats at the lowest premiums possible.

    Measure the value of integrating risk

    • Reduce Operating Costs

      • Organizations can reduce their risk operating costs by 20 to 30% by adopting enterprise-wide digital risk initiatives (McKinsey & Company).
    • Increase Cybersecurity Threat Preparedness

      • Increase the organization’s preparedness for cybersecurity threats. 79% of organizations that were impacted by email threats in 2020 were not prepared for the hit (Diligent)
    • Increase Risk Management’s Impact to Drive Strategic Value

      • Currently, only 3% of organizations are extensively using risk management to drive their unique competitive advantage, compared to 35% of companies who do not use it at all (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management).
    • Reduce Lost Productivity for the Enterprise

      • Among small businesses, 76% are still not considering purchasing cyberinsurance in 2021, despite the fact that ransomware attacks alone cost Canadian businesses $5.1 billion in productivity in 2020 (Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2021).

    “31% of CIO’s expected their role to expand and include risk management responsibilities.” (IDG “2021 State of the CIO,” 2021)

    Make integrated risk management sustainable

    58%

    Focus not just on the preventive risk management but also the value-creating opportunities. With 58% of organizations concerned about disruptive technology, it’s an opportunity to take the concern and transform it into innovation. (Accenture)

    70%

    Invest in tools that have data and analytics features. Currently, “gut feelings” or “experience” inform the risk management decisions for 70% of late adopters. (Clear Risk)

    54%

    Align to the strategic vision of the board and CEO, given that these two roles account for 54% of the accountability associated with extended enterprise risk management. (Extended Enterprise Risk Management Survey, 2020,” Deloitte)

    63%

    Include IT leaders in the risk committee to help informed decision making. Currently 63% of chief technology officers are included in the C‑suite risk committee. (AICPA & NC State Poole College of Management)

    Successful adoption of integrated risk management is often associated with these key elements.

    Assessment

    Assess your organization’s method of addressing risk management to determine if integrated risk is possible

    Assessing the organization’s risk maturity

    Mature or not, integrated risk management should be a consideration for all organizations

    The first step to integrating risk management within the enterprise is to understand the organization’s readiness to adopt practices that will enable it to successfully integrate information.

    In 2021, we saw enterprise risk management assessments become one of the most common trends, particularly as a method by which the organization can consolidate the potential impacts of uncertainties or threats (Lawton, 2021). A major driver for this initiative was the recognition that information and technology not only have enterprise-wide impacts on the organization’s risk management but that IT has a critical role in supporting processes that enable effective access to data/information.

    A maturity assessment has several benefits for an organization: It ensures there is alignment throughout the organization on why integrated risk is the right approach to take, it recognizes the organization’s current risk maturity, and it supports the organization in defining where it would like to go.

    Pie chart titled 'Organizational Risk Management Maturity Assessment Results' showing just under half 'Progressing', a third 'Established', a seventh 'Emerging', and a very small portion 'Leading or Aspirational'.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Categories

    Semi-circle with colored points indicating four categories.

    1

    Context & Strategic Direction Understand the organization’s main objectives and how risk can support or enhance those objectives.

    2

    Risk Culture and Authority Examine if risk-based decisions are being made by those with the right level of authority and if the organization’s risk appetite is embedded in the culture.

    3

    Risk Management Process Determine if the current process to identify, assess, respond to, monitor, and report on risks is benefitting the organization.

    4

    Risk Program Optimization Consider opportunities where risk-related data is being gathered, reported, and used to make informed decisions across the enterprise.

    Maturity should inform your approach to risk management

    The outcome of the risk maturity assessment should inform how risk management is approached within the organization.

    A row of waves starting light and small and becoming taller and darker in steps. The levels are 'Non-existent', 'Basic', 'Partially Integrated', 'Mostly Integrated', 'Fully Integrated', and 'Optimized'.

    For organizations with a low maturity, remaining superficial with risk will offer more benefits and align to the enterprise’s risk tolerance and appetite. This might mean no integrated risk is taking place.

    However, organizations that have higher risk maturity should begin to integrate risk information. These organizations can identify the nuances that would affect the severity and impact of risk events.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    The purpose of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment is to assess the organization's current maturity and readiness for integrated risk management (IRM).

    Frequently and continually assessing your organization’s maturity toward integrated risk ensures the right risk management program can be adopted by your organization.

    Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment

    A simple tool to understand if your organization is ready to embrace integrated risk management by measuring maturity across four key categories: Context & Strategic Direction, Risk Culture & Authority, Risk Management Process, and Risk Program Optimization

    Sample of the Integrated Risk Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Use the results from this integrated risk maturity assessment to determine the type of risk management program that can and should be adopted by your organization.

    Some organizations will need to remain siloed and focused on IT risk management only, while others will be able to integrate risk-related information to start enabling automatic controls that respond to this data.

    Initiate Your Service Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}398|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • IT organizations continue attempting to implement service management, often based on ITIL, with limited success and without visible value.
    • More than half of service management implementations have failed beyond simply implementing the service desk and the incident, change, and request management processes.
    • Organizational structure, goals, and cultural factors are not considered during service management implementation and improvement.
    • The business lacks engagement and understanding of service management.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Service management is an organizational approach. Focus on producing successful and valuable services and service outcomes for the customers.
    • All areas of the organization are accountable for governing and executing service management. Ensure that you create a service management strategy that improves business outcomes and provides the value and quality expected.

    Impact and Result

    • Identified structure for how your service management model should be run and governed.
    • Identified forces that impact your ability to oversee and drive service management success.
    • Mitigation approach to restraining forces.

    Initiate Your Service Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why service management implementations often fail and why you should establish governance for service management.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify the level of oversight you need

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective service management program with proper oversight.

    • Service Management Program Initiation Plan
    [infographic]

    Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}421|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: DR and Business Continuity
    • Parent Category Link: /business-continuity
    • Many organizations do not have developed plans for how to turn on-premises employees into remote workers in an emergency.
    • In an emergency situation, such as a pandemic, sending employees home to work remotely without time to prepare presents daunting challenges, such as trying to comprehend and prioritize the myriad of tasks that need accomplishing for human resources, the business, and IT in a VUCA (volatile, uncertain, complex, and ambiguous) world.
    • Security issues may arise from employees not used to working remotely. Indeed, employees sent home to work remotely in an emergency may not have been eligible otherwise. This creates security risks, including the proliferation of shadow IT.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The emergency will restructure the business: make sure it’s done right. While your organization may need quick fixes for day one of an emergency remote work plan, these are not viable long-term solutions. The emergency will vividly reinforce to the business side that more resources need to be directed to IT to enable strong business continuity and employee safety. Make sure the right plan is put in place during the crucial first weeks. The next emergency is just around the corner.
    • Prioritize key business processes. Before getting into the details of a work from home policy, identify which crucial business processes need to continue for the company to survive. Build the remote work policy around supporting those workflows.
    • Where the “carrot” is not possible, emergencies may require the “stick.” To ensure secure endpoints and prevent proliferation of shadow IT, you may need to enforce certain rules through policy. However, disenfranchising employees is not a long-term solution: once the emergency subsides, use this basis to explore end-user requirements properly and ensure employee-driven adoption plans. Where possible, for this latter scenario, always use the carrot.

    Impact and Result

    • A prioritized plan for IT processes through Info-Tech’s cascading responsibility checklists for emergency remote work.
    • A codified emergency remote work policy document to better prepare for future emergencies.

    Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Research & Tools

    Start here

    Read our concise Executive Brief for why you need prioritized emergency remote work checklists and an accompanying policy document and review Info-Tech’s methodology.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Storyboard

    1. Day one preparations

    Prioritize key action items on day one of sending your employees home to remotely work during an emergency.

    • Emergency Remote Work Plan Checklists
    • Home Office Survey
    • Checklist for Securing Remote Workers
    • None
    • Remote Access Policy
    • Equipment Loan Policy
    • None
    • Develop a Security Awareness and Training Program That Empowers End Users – Phases 1-2
    • Remote Work Assignment Log
    • Wiki Collection for Collaboration Tools
    • Pandemic Preparation: The People Playbook

    2. One-to-two weeks preparations

    Address key action items in the one-to-two weeks following an emergency that forced your employees to work remotely.

    • None

    3. Codify an emergency remote work policy

    Turn your emergency remote work checklists into policy.

    • Emergency Remote Work Policy
    • Execute an Emergency Remote Work Plan Executive Presentation
    [infographic]

    Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}338|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement
    • According to Info-Tech research, 74% of our clients feel that IT quality management is an important process, however, only 15% said they actually had effective quality management.
    • IT is required to deliver high quality projects and services, but if CIOs are ineffective at quality management, how can IT deliver?
    • Rather than disturb the status quo with holistic quality initiatives, heads of IT leave quality in the hands of process owners, functional areas, and other segmented facets of the department.
    • CIOs are facing greater pressures to be innovative, agile, and cost-effective, but cannot do so without stable operations, an accountable staff base, and business support; all of which are achieved by high IT quality.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Quality management needs more attention that it’s typically getting. It’s not going to happen randomly; you must take action to see results.
    • Quality must be holistic. Centralized accountability will align inconsistencies in quality and refocus IT towards a common goal.
    • Accountability is the key to quality. Clearly defined roles and responsibilities will put your staff on the hook for quality outcomes.

    Impact and Result

    • Shift your mindset to the positive implications of high quality. Info-Tech’s quality management methodology will promote innovation, agility, lower costs, and improved operations.
    • We will help you develop a fully functional quality management program in four easy steps:
      • Position your program as a group to encourage buy-in and unite IT around a common quality vision. Enact a center of excellence to build, support, and monitor the program.
      • Build flexible program requirements that will be adapted for a fit-to-purpose solution.
      • Implement the program using change management techniques to alleviate challenges and improve adoption.
      • Operate the program with a focus on continual improvement to ensure that your IT department continues to deliver high quality projects and services as stakeholder needs change.

    Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Understand why Info-Tech’s unique approach to quality management can fix a variety of IT issues and understand the four ways we can support you in building a quality management program designed just for you.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Position the program

    Hold a positioning working session to focus the program around business needs, create solid targets, and create quality champions to get the job done.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 1: Position the Quality Program
    • Quality Management Program Charter
    • Quality Management Capability Assessment and Planning Tool
    • Quality Management Roadmap

    2. Build the program

    Build program requirements and design standard templates that will unite IT quality.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 2: Build a Quality Program
    • Quality Management Quality Plan Template
    • Quality Management Review Template
    • Quality Management Dashboard Template

    3. Implement the program

    Evaluate the readiness of the department for change and launch the program at the right time and in the right way to transform IT quality.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 3: Implement the Quality Program
    • Quality Management Communication Plan Template
    • Quality Management Readiness Assessment Template

    4. Operate the program

    Facilitate the success of key IT practice areas by operating the Center of Excellence to support the key IT practice areas’ quality initiatives.

    • Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program – Phase 4: Operate the Quality Program
    • Quality Management User Satisfaction Survey
    • Quality Management Practice Area Assessment and Planning Tool
    • Quality Management Capability Improvement Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Drive Efficiency and Agility with a Fit-for-Purpose Quality Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Position Your Program

    The Purpose

    Create a quality center of excellence to lead and support quality initiatives.

    Position your quality program to meet the needs of your business.

    Develop clear targets and create a roadmap to achieve your vision. 

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined Center of Excellence roles & responsibilities.

    A firm vision for your program with clearly outlined targets.

    A plan for improvements to show dedication to the program and create accountability. 

    Activities

    1.1 Identify current quality maturity.

    1.2 Craft vision and mission.

    1.3 Define scope.

    1.4 Determine goals and objectives.

    1.5 Specify metrics and critical success factors.

    1.6 Develop quality principles.

    1.7 Create action plan.

    Outputs

    Completed Maturity Assessment

    Completed Project Charter

    Completed Quality Roadmap

    2 Build Your Program

    The Purpose

    Build the requirements for the quality program, including outputs for quality planning, quality assurance, quality control, and quality improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined standards for the quality program.

    General templates to be used to unify quality throughout IT. 

    Activities

    2.1 Define quality policy, procedures, and guidelines.

    2.2 Define your standard Quality Plan.

    2.3 Define your standard Quality Review Document.

    2.4 Develop your Standard Quality Management Dashboard.

    Outputs

    Quality Policy

    Standard Quality Plan Template

    Standard Quality Review Template

    Standard Quality Dashboard

    3 Implement Your Program

    The Purpose

    Launch the program and begin quality improvement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Perform a readiness assessment to ensure your organization is ready to launch its quality program.

    Create a communication plan to ensure constant and consistent communication throughout implementation. 

    Activities

    3.1 Assess organizational readiness.

    3.2 Create a communication plan.

    Outputs

    Completed Readiness Assessment

    Completed Communication Plan

    4 Operate Your Program

    The Purpose

    Have the Center of Excellence facilitate the roll-out of the quality program in your key practice areas.

    Initiate ongoing monitoring and reporting processes to enable continuous improvement.  

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Quality plans for each practice area aligned with the overall quality program.

    Periodic quality reviews to ensure plans are being acted upon.

    Methodology for implementing corrective measures to ensure quality expectations are met.

    Activities

    4.1 Perform a quality management satisfaction survey.

    4.2 Complete a practice area assessment.

    4.3 Facilitate the creation of practice area quality plans.

    4.4 Populate quality dashboards.

    4.5 Perform quality review(s).

    4.6 Address issues with corrective and preventative measures.

    4.7 Devise a plan for improvement.

    4.8 Report on quality outcomes.

    Outputs

    Completed Satisfaction Surveys

    Practice Area Assessments

    Quality Plans (for each practice area)

    Quality Reviews (for each practice area)

    Quality Improvement Plan

    Optimize the Current Testing Process for Enterprise Mobile Applications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}404|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
    • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
    • Your team has little or no experience in mobile testing.
    • You need to optimize current testing processes to include mobile.
    • You need to conduct an RFP for mobile testing tools.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • One-size-fits-all testing won’t work for mobile. The testing tools are fragmented.
    • Mobile offers many new test cases, so organizations can expect to spend more time testing.

    Impact and Result

    • Identify and address gaps between your current testing process and a target state that includes mobile testing.
    • Establish project value metrics to ensure business and technical requirements are met.

    Optimize the Current Testing Process for Enterprise Mobile Applications Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current testing state

    Determine a starting point for architecture and discuss pain points that will drive reusability.

    • Storyboard: Optimize the Current Testing Process for Enterprise Mobile Applications
    • Mobile Testing Project Charter Template
    • Visual SOP Template for Application Testing

    2. Determine the target state testing framework

    Document a preliminary list of test requirements and create vendor RFP and scoring.

    • Test Requirements Tool
    • Request for Proposal (RFP) Template

    3. Implement testing tools to support the testing SOP

    Create an implementation rollout plan.

    • Project Planning and Monitoring Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Optimize the Current Testing Process for Enterprise Mobile Applications

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Fit for Test Process Optimization

    The Purpose

    Understand mobile testing pain points.

    Evaluate current statistics and challenges around mobile testing and compare with your organization.

    Realize the benefits of mobile testing.

    Understand the differences of mobile testing.

    Assess your readiness for optimizing testing to include mobile.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Preliminary understanding of how mobile testing is different from conventional approaches to testing apps.

    Understanding of how mobile testing can optimize your current testing process.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand the pain points experienced with mobile testing

    1.2 Evaluate current statistics and challenges of mobile testing and compare your organization

    1.3 Realize the benefits that come from mobile testing

    1.4 Understand the differences between mobile app testing and conventional app testing

    1.5 Assess your readiness for optimizing the testing process to include mobile

    Outputs

    Organizational state assessment for mobile testing

    2 Structure & Launch the Project

    The Purpose

    Identify stakeholders for testing requirements gathering.

    Create a project charter to obtain project approval.

    Present and obtain project charter sign-off.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Well documented project charter.

    Approval to launch the project.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify stakeholders for testing requirements gathering

    2.2 Create a project charter to obtain project approval

    2.3 Present & obtain project charter sign-off

    Outputs

    Project objectives and scope

    Project roles and responsibilities

    3 Assess Current Testing State

    The Purpose

    Document your current non-mobile testing processes.

    Create a current testing visual SOP.

    Determine current testing pain points.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Thorough understanding of current testing processes and pain points.

    Activities

    3.1 Document your current non-mobile testing processes

    3.2 Create a current state visual SOP

    3.3 Determine current testing pain points

    Outputs

    Documented current testing processes in the form of a visual SOP

    List of current testing pain points

    4 Determine Target State Testing Framework

    The Purpose

    Determine your target state for mobile testing.

    Choose vendors for the RFP process.

    Evaluate selected vendor(s) against testing requirements.

    Design mobile testing visual SOP(s).

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized list of testing requirements for mobile.

    Vendor selection for mobile testing solutions through an RFP process.

    New SOP designed to include both current testing and mobile testing processes.

    Activities

    4.1 Determine your target state for mobile testing by following Info-Tech’s framework as a starting point

    4.2 Design new SOP to include testing for mobile apps

    4.3 Translate all considered visual SOP mobile injections into requirements

    4.4 Document the preliminary list of test requirements in the RFP

    4.5 Determine which vendors to include for the RFP process

    4.6 Reach out to vendors for a request for proposal

    4.7 Objectively evaluate vendors against testing requirements

    4.8 Identify and assess the expected costs and impacts from determining your target state

    Outputs

    List of testing requirements for mobile

    Request for Proposal

    5 Implement Testing Tools to Support Your Testing SOP

    The Purpose

    Develop an implementation roadmap to integrate new testing initiatives.

    Anticipate potential roadblocks during implementation rollout.

    Operationalize mobile testing and ensure a smooth hand-off to IT operations.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Creation of implementation project plan.

    List of approaches to mitigate potential implementation roadblocks.

    Achieving clean hand-off to IT ops team.

    Activities

    5.1 Develop a project plan to codify your current understanding of the scope of work

    5.2 Anticipate potential roadblocks during your tool’s implementation

    5.3 Operationalize your testing tools and ensure a smooth hand-off from the project team

    Outputs

    Mobile testing metrics implementation plan

    6 Conduct Your Retrospectives

    The Purpose

    Conduct regular retrospectives to consider areas for improvement.

    Adjust your processes, systems, and testing tools to improve performance and usability.

    Revisit implementation metrics to communicate project benefits.

    Leverage the lessons learned and apply them to other projects.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Project specific metrics.

    Discovery of areas to improve.

    Activities

    6.1 Conduct regular retrospectives to consider areas for improvement

    6.2 Revisit your implementation metrics to communicate project benefits to business stakeholders

    6.3 Adjust your processes, systems, and testing tools to improve performance and usability

    6.4 Leverage the lessons learned and apply them to other IT projects

    Outputs

    Steps to improve your mobile testing

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}559|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • A weak or poorly defined Go-to-Market strategy is often the root cause of slow product revenue growth or missed product revenue targets.
    • Many agile-driven product teams rush to release, skipping key GTM steps leaving Sales and Marketing misaligned and not ready to fully monetize precious product investments.
    • Guessing at buyer persona and journey or competitive SWOT analyses – two key deliverables of an effective GTM strategy – cause poor marketing and sales outcomes.
    • Without the sales and product-aligned business case for launch called for in a successful GTM strategy, companies see low buyer adoption, wasted sales and marketing investments, and a failure to claim product and launch campaign success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having an updated and compelling Go-to-Market strategy is a critical capability – as important as financial strategy, sales operations, and even corporate business development, given its huge impact on the many drivers of sustainable growth.
    • Establishing alignment through the GTM process builds long-term operational strength.
    • With a sound GTM strategy, marketers give themselves a 50% greater chance of product launch success.

    Impact and Result

    • Align stakeholders on a common vision and execution plan prior to the Build and Launch phases.
    • Build a foundation of buyer and competitive understanding to drive a successful product hypothesis, then validate with buyers.
    • Deliver a team-aligned launch plan that enables launch readiness and outlines commercial success.

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy Research & Tools

    Build Your Go-to-Market Strategy

    Use this storyboard and its deliverables to build a baseline market, understand your buyer, and gain competitive insights. It will also help you design your initial product and business case, and align stakeholder plans to prep for build.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy – Executive Brief

      Almost there!

      Please enter your email and a few details and you're on your way to an efficient process.

      Download ×
    • Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy – Phases 1-3
    • Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template
    • Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook
    • Product Market Opportunity Sizing Workbook
    • Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Align on GTM Vision & Plan, Craft Initial Strategy

    The Purpose

    Align on GTM vision and plan; craft initial strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confidence that market opportunity is sufficient.

    Deeper buyer understanding to drive product design and messaging and launch campaign asset design.

    Steering committee approval for next phase.

    Activities

    1.1 Outline a vision for GTM, roles required, identify Steering Committee lead, workstream leads, and teams.

    1.2 Capture GTM strategy hypothesis by working through initial draft of the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation and business case.

    1.3 Capture team knowledge on buyer persona and journey and competitive SWOT.

    1.4 Identify info./data gaps, sources, and plan for capturing/gathering including buyer interviews.

    Outputs

    Documented Steering Committee and Working team.

    Aligned on GTM vision and process.

    Documented buyer persona and journey. Competitive SWOT analysis.

    Document team knowledge on initial GTM strategy, buyer personas, and business case.

    2 Identify Initial Business Case, Sales Forecast, and Launch Plan

    The Purpose

    Identify Initial Business Case, Sales Forecast, and Launch Plan.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confidence in size of market opportunity.

    Alignment of Sales and Product on product forecast.

    Assessment of marketing tech stack.

    Initial business case.

    Activities

    2.1 Size Product Market Opportunity and initial revenue forecast.

    2.2 Craft initial product hypothesis from buyer interviews including feature priorities, pricing, packaging, competitive differentiation, channel/route to market.

    2.3 Craft initial launch campaign, product release and sales and CX readiness plans.

    2.4 Identify launch budgets across each investment area.

    2.5 Discuss initial product launch business case and key activities.

    Outputs

    Product Serviceable Obtainable Market (SOM), Serviceable Available Market (SAM) and Total Available Market (TAM).

    Definition of product-market fit, uniqueness, and competitive differentiation.

    Preliminary campaign, targets, and readiness plans.

    Incremental budgets for each key stakeholder area.

    Preliminary product launch business case.

    3 Develop Launch Plans (I of II)

    The Purpose

    Develop final Launch plans and budgets in product and marketing.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Align Product release/launch plans with the marketing campaign for launch.

    Understand incremental budgets from product and marketing for launch.

    Activities

    3.1 Apply product interviews to scope, MVP, roadmap, competitive differentiation, pricing, feature prioritization, routes to market, and sales forecast.

    3.2 Develop a more detailed launch campaign plan complete with asset-types, messaging, digital plan to support buyer journey, media buy plan and campaign metrics.

    Outputs

    Minimally Viable Product defined with feature prioritization. Product competitive differentiation documented Routes to market identified Sales forecast aligned with product team expectations.

    Marketing campaign launch plan Content marketing asset-creation/acquisition plan Campaign targets and metrics.

    4 Develop Launch Plans (II of II)

    The Purpose

    Develop final Launch Plans and budgets for remaining areas.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Align Product release/launch plans with the marketing campaign for launch.

    Understand incremental budgets from Product and Marketing for launch.

    Activities

    4.1 Develop detailed launch/readiness plans with final budgets for: Sales enablement , Sales training, Tech stack, Customer onboarding & success, Product marketing, AR, PR, Corp Comms/Internal Comms, Customer Events, Employee Events, etc.

    Outputs

    Detailed launch plans, budgets for Product Marketing, Sales, Customer Success, and AR/PR/Corp. Comms.

    5 Present Final Business Case

    The Purpose

    To gain approval to move to Build and Launch phases.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Align business case with Steering Committee expectations

    Approvals to Build and Launch targeted offering

    Activities

    5.1 Review final launch/readiness plans with final budgets for all key areas.

    5.2 Move all key findings into Steering Committee presentation slides.

    5.3 Present to Steering Committee; receive feedback.

    5.4 Incorporate Steering Committee feedback; update finial business case.

    Outputs

    Combined budgets across all areas. Final launch/readiness plans.

    Final Steering Committee-facing slides.

    Final approvals for Build and Launch.

    Further reading

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    Maximize GTM success through deeper market and buyer understanding and competitive differentiation and launch team readiness that delivers target revenues.

    Table of Contents

    Section Title
    1 Executive Brief
    • Executive Summary
    • Analyst Perspective
    • Go-to-Market (GTM) strategy critical success factors
    • Key GTM challenges
    • Essential deliverables for GTM success
    • Benefits of a more effective GTM Strategy
    • Our methodology to support your success
    • Insight Summary
    • Blueprint deliverables and guided implementation steps
    2 Build baseline market, buyer, and competitive insights
    • Establish your team
    • Build buyer personas and journeys – develop initial messaging
    • Build initial product hypothesis
    • Size product market opportunity
    • Outline your key tech, app, and digital requirements
    • Develop your competitive differentiation
    • Select routes to market
    3 Design initial product and business case
    • Branding check
    • Formulate packaging and pricing
    • Craft buyer-valid product concept
    • Build campaign plan and targets
    • Develop budgets for creative, content, and media purchases
    • Draft product business case
    • Update GTM Strategy deck
    4 Align stakeholder plans to prep for build
    • Assess tech/tools support for all GTM phases
    • Outline sales enablement and customer success plan
    • Build awareness plan
    • Finalize business case
    • Final GTM plan deck

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Go-to-Market Strategy.

    A successful go-to-market (GTM) strategy aligns marketing, product, sales and customer success, sees decision making based on deep buyer understanding, and tests many basic assumptions often overlooked in today’s agile-driven product development/management environment.

    The disciplines you build using our methodology will not only support your team’s effort building and launching more successful products, but also can be modified for use in other strategic initiatives such as branding, M&A integration, expanding into new markets, and other initiatives that require a cross-functional and multidisciplined process.

    Photo of Jeff Golterman, Managing Director, SoftwareReviews Advisory.

    Jeff Golterman
    Managing Director
    SoftwareReviews Advisory

    Executive Summary

    An ineffective go-to-market strategy is often a root cause of:
    • Failure to attain new product revenue targets.
    • A loss of customer focus and poor new product/feature release buyer adoption.
    • Product releases misaligned with marketing, sales, and customer success readiness.
    • Low win rates compared to key competitors’.
    • Low contact-to-lead conversion rates.
    • Loss of executive/investor support for further new product development and marketing investments.
    Hurdles to go-to-market success include:
    • An unclear product-market opportunity.
    • A lack of well defined and prioritized buyer personas and needs that are well understood.
    • Poor competitive analysis that fails to pinpoint key areas of competitive differentiation.
    • Guessing at buyer journey and buyer-described ideal engagement within your lead gen engine.
    • A business case that calls for levels of customer value delivery (vs. feature MVPs) that can actually deliver wins and targeted revenue goals.
    Apply SoftwareReviews approach for greater GTM success.

    Our blueprint is designed to help you:

    • Align stakeholders on a common vision and execution plan prior to the build and launch phases.
    • Build a foundation of buyer and competitive understanding to drive a successful product hypothesis, then validate with buyers.
    • Deliver a team-aligned launch plan that enables launch readiness and outlines commercial success.

    SoftwareReviews Insight

    Creating a compelling go-to-market strategy, and keeping it current, is a critical software company function – as important as financial strategy, sales operations, and even corporate business development – given its huge impact on the many drivers of sustainable growth.

    Go-to-Market Strategy Critical Success Factors

    Your GTM Strategy is where a multi-disciplined team builds a strong foundation for overall product plan, build, launch, and manage success

    A GTM Strategy is not all art and not all science but requires both. Software leaders will establish a set of core capabilities upon which they will plan, build, launch and manage product success. Executives, when resourcing their GTM strategies, will begin with:
    • Strong Program Leadership – An experienced Program Manager will guide the team through each step of GTM Strategy and test team readiness before advancing to the next step.
    • Few Shortcuts – Successful teams will have navigated the process through all steps together at least once. Then future launches can skip steps where prior decisions still hold.
    • Stakeholder Buy-In – Strong collaboration among Sales, Marketing, and Product wins the day.
    • Strong Team Skills – Success depends on having the right talent, making the right decisions, and delivering the right outcomes enabled with the right set of technologies and integrated to reach the right buyers at the right moment.
    • Discipline and perseverance – Given that GTM Strategy is not easy, it’s not surprising that 75% of marketers cite a significant level of dissatisfaction with the outcomes of their GTM plan, build, and launch phases.
    Diagram titled 'Go-to-Market Phases' with phases 'Manage', 'Launch', 'Build', and highlighted as 'This blueprint focus': 'Plan'.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Marketers who get GTM Strategy “right” give themselves a 50% greater chance of Build and Launch success.

    Sample of the 'PLAN' section of the GTM Strategy optimization diagram shown later.

    Go-to-Market Success is Challenging

    Getting GTM right is like winning an Olympic first-place crew finish. It takes teamwork, practice, and well-functioning tools and equipment.

    Stock image of a rowing team.

    • The goal of any Go-to-Marketing Strategy is not only to do it right once, but to do it over and over consistently.
    • A lack of GTM consistency often results in decelerating growth, and a weak GTM Strategy is likely the root cause when companies observe any of the following challenges:
      • Product opportunity is unclear and well-defined business cases are lacking
      • Buyer adoption slows of new features and launch revenue targets are missed
      • Sales and marketing are not ready when development releases new features
      • Sales win/loss ratios drop as customers tell us products are not competitively differentiated
      • Loss of executive support for new product investments
    • A company experiencing any one of these symptoms will find a remedy in plugging gaps in the way they Go-to-Market.

    “Figuring out a Go-to-Market approach is no trivial exercise – it separates the companies that will be successful and sustainable from those that won’t.” (Harvard Business Review)

    Slowing growth may be due to missing GTM Strategy essentials

    Marketers – Large and Small – will further test their GTM Strategy strength by asking “Are we missing any of the following?”

    • Product, Marketing, and Sales Alignment
    • Buyer personas and journeys
    • Product market opportunity size
    • Competitively differentiated product hypothesis
    • Buyer validated commercial concept
    • Sales revenue plan and program cost budget
    • Compelling business case for build and launch

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Marketers will go through the GTM Strategy process together across all disciplines at least once in order to establish a consistent process, make key foundational decisions (e.g. tech stack, channel strategy, pricing structure, etc.), and assess strengths and weaknesses to be addressed. Future releases to existing products don’t need to be re-thought but instead check-listed against prior foundational decisions.

    Is Your GTM Strategy Led and Staffed Properly?

    Staffing tree outlining GTM Strategy essentials. At the top are 'Steering Committee: CEO/GM in larger company, CFO/Senior Finance, Key functional leaders'. Next is 'Program Manager: Leads the GTM program. Workstream leads are “dotted line” for the program.' Followed by 'Workstream Leads: (PM) Product Marketing – Program leadership, (PD) Product Mgt. – Aligned with PM, (MO) Marketing Ops – SMB optional, (BR) Branding/Creative – SMB optional, (CI) Competitive Intel. – SMB optional, (DG) Demand Gen./Field Marketing. – crucial, (SE) Sales Enablement – crucial, (PR) PR/AR/Comms – SMB optional, and (CS) Customer Success – SMB optional'. In a 'Large Enterprise' each role is assigned to a separate person, but in a 'Small' Enterprise each person has multiple roles. 'SMB – as employees wear many hats, teams comprise members with requisite skills vs. specific roles/titles.'

    Benefits of a more effective go-to-market strategy

    Our research shows a more effective GTM Strategy delivers key benefits, including:
    • Increased product development ROI – with a finance-aligned business case, a buyer-validated value proposition, and the readiness of marketing and sales to product launch.
    • Launch campaign effectiveness – increases dramatically when messaging resonates with buyers and where they are in their journey.
    • Seller effectiveness – increases with buyer validated value proposition, competitive differentiation, and the ability to articulate to buyers.
    • Executive support – is achieved when an aligned sales, marketing, and product team proves consistent in delivering against release targets over and over again.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Many marketers experiencing the value of the GTM Steering Committee, extend its use into a “Product and Pricing Council” (PPC) in order to move product-related decision making from ad-hoc to structured, and to reinforce GTM Strategy guardrails and best practices across the company.

    “Go-to-Market Strategies aren’t just for new products or services, they can also be used for:
    • Acquiring other businesses
    • Changing your business’s focus
    • Announcing a new feature
    • Entering a new market
    • Rebranding
    • Positioning or repositioning

    And while each GTM strategy is unique, there are a series of steps that every product marketer should follow.” (Product Marketing Alliance)

    Is your GTM Strategy optimized?

    Large detailed layout of the steps needed to 'Make Your Go-to-Market Strategy More Successful'. 'GTM Planning Success Can Be Elusive'; '75% of high-tech marketers desire a more effective GTM strategy...'. Steps: '1 Your Challenges - Are You Feeling Any of These Pains?', '2 Framework - Stay Aligned', '3 Planning - Check Your GTM Plan Steps', '4 Insight - Deliver Key Output', and '5 Results - Reap Key Benefits'. Source: SoftwareReviews, powered by Info-Tech Research Group.

    Marketers, in order to optimize a go-to-market strategy, will:

    1. Self assess for symptoms of a sub-optimized approach.
    2. Align marketing, sales, product, and customer success with a common vision and execution plan.
    3. Diagnose for missing steps.
    4. Ensure creation of key deliverables.
    5. And then be able to reap the rewards.

    Who benefits from an optimized go-to-market strategy?

    This research is designed for:
    • High-tech marketers who are:
      • Looking to improve any aspect of their go-to-market strategy.
      • Looking for a checklist of roles and responsibilities across the product planning, build, and launch processes.
      • Looking to foster better alignment among key stakeholders such as product marketing, product management, sales, field marketing/campaigners, and customer success.
      • Looking to build a stronger business case for new product development and launch.
    This research will help you:
    • Explain the benefits of a more effective go-to-market strategy to stakeholders.
    • Size the market opportunity for a product/solution.
    • Organize stakeholders for GTM operational success.
    • More easily present the GTM strategy to executives and colleagues.
    • Build and present a solid business case for product build and launch.
    This research will also assist:
    • High-tech marketing and product leaders who are:
      • Looking for a framework of best practices to improve and scale their GTM planning.
      • Looking to align team members from all the key teams that support high-tech product planning, build, launch, and manage.
    This research will help them:
    • Align stakeholders on an overall GTM strategy.
    • Coordinate tasks and activities involved across plan, build, launch, and manage – the product lifecycle.
    • Avoid low market opportunity pursuits.
    • Avoid poorly defined product launch business cases.
    • Build competence in managing cross-functional complex programs.

    SoftwareReviews’ Approach

    1

    Build baseline market, buyer, and competitive insights

    Sizing your opportunity, building deep buyer understanding, competitive differentiation, and routes to market are fundamental first steps.

    2

    Design initial product and business case

    Validate positioning and messaging against brand, develop packaging and pricing, and develop digital approach, launch campaign approach and supporting budgets across all areas.

    3

    Align stakeholder plans to prep for build

    Rationalize product release and concept to sales/financial plan and further develop customer success, PR/AR, MarTech, and analytics/metrics plans.

    Our methodology provides a step-by-step approach to build a more effective go-to-market strategy

    1.Build baseline market, buyer, and competitive insights 2. Design initial product and business case 3. Align stakeholder plans to prep for build
    Phase Steps
    1. Select Steering Committee, GTM team, and outline roles and responsibilities. Build an aligned vision.
    2. Build initial product hypothesis based on sales and buyer “jobs to be done” research.
    3. Size the product market opportunity.
    4. Outline digital and tech requirements to support the full GTM process.
    5. Clarify target buyer personas and the buyer journey.
    6. Identify competitive gaps, parity, and differentiators.
    7. Select the most effective routes to market.
    8. Craft initial GTM Strategy presentation for executive review and status check.
    1. Compare emerging messaging and positioning with existing brand for consistency.
    2. Formulate packaging and pricing.
    3. Build a buyer-validated product concept.
    4. Build an initial campaign plan and targets.
    5. Develop initial budgets across all areas.
    6. Draft an initial product business case.
    7. Update GTM Strategy for executive review and status check.
    1. Assess technology and tools support for GTM strategy as well as future phases of GTM build, launch, and manage.
    2. Outline support for customer onboarding and ongoing engagement.
    3. Build an awareness plan covering media, social media, and industry analysts.
    4. Finalize product business case with collaborative input from product, sales, and marketing.
    5. Develop a final executive presentation for request for approval to proceed to GTM build phase.
    Phase Outcomes
    1. Properly sized market opportunity and a unique buyer value proposition
    2. Buyer persona and journey mapping with buyer needs and competitive SWOT
    3. Tech stack modernization requirements
    4. First draft of business case
    1. Customer-validated value proposition and product-market fit
    2. Initial product business case with sales alignment
    3. Initial launch plans including budgets across all areas
    1. Key stakeholders and their plans are fully aligned
    2. Executive sign-off to move to GTM build phases

    Insight summary

    Your go-to-market strategy ability is a strategic asset

    Having an updated and compelling go-to-market strategy is a critical capability – as important as financial strategy, sales operations, and even corporate business development – given its huge impact on the many drivers of sustainable growth.

    Build the GTM Steering Committee into a strategic decision-making body

    Many marketers experiencing the value of the GTM Steering Committee extend its use into a “Product and Pricing Council” (PPC) in order to move product-related decision making from ad-hoc to structured, and to reinforce GTM Strategy guardrails and best practices across the company.

    A strong MarTech apps and analytics stack differentiates GTM leaders from laggards

    Marketers that collaborate closely with Marketing Ops., Sales Ops., and IT early in the process of a go-to-market strategy will be best able to assess whether current website/digital, marketing applications, CRM/sales automation apps, and tools can support the complete Go-to-Market process effectively.

    Establishing alignment through the GTM process builds long term operational strength

    Marketers will go through the GTM Strategy process together across all disciplines at least once in order to establish a consistent process, make key foundational decisions (e.g. tech stack, channel strategy, pricing structure, etc.), and assess strengths and weaknesses to be addressed.

    Build speed and agility

    Future releases to existing products don’t need be re-thought but instead check-listed against prior foundational decisions.

    GTM Strategy builds launch success

    Marketers who get GTM Strategy “right” give themselves a 50% greater chance of build and launch success.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Capture key findings for your GTM Strategy within the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template.

    Sample of the key deliverable, the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template.

    Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook

    Includes a RACI model and launch checklist that helps scope your working team’s roles and responsibilities.

    Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook deliverable.

    Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Capture launch incremental costs that, when weighed against the forecasted revenue, illustrate gross margins as a crucial part of the business case.

    Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook deliverable.

    Product Market Opportunity Sizing

    While not a deliverable of this blueprint per se, the Product Market Opportunity blueprint is required.

    Sample of the Product Market Opportunity Sizing deliverable. This blueprint calls for downloading the following additional blueprint:

    Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint

    While not a deliverable of this blueprint per se, the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint is required

    Sample of the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint deliverable.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."
    Included within advisory membership Optional add-ons

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    For guidance on marketing applications, we can arrange a discussion with an Info-Tech analyst.

    Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    What does our GI on Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy look like?

    Build baseline market, buyer, and competitive insights

    Design initial product and business case

    Align stakeholder plans to prep for build

    Call #1: Share GTM vision and outline team activities for the GTM Strategy process. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #2: Outline product market opportunity approach and steps to complete. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #3: Hold a series of inquiries to do a modernization check on tech stack. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

    Call #4: Discuss buyer interview process, persona, and journey steps. Plan next call – 2 weeks.

    Call #5: Outline competitive differentiation analysis, routes to market, and review of to-date business case. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #6: Discuss brand strength/weakness, pricing, and packaging approach. Plan next call – 3 weeks.

    Call #7: Outline needs to craft assets with right messaging across campaign launch plan and budget. Outline needs to create plans and budgets across rest of marketing, sales, CX, and product. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #8: Review template and approach for initial business case and sales and product alignment. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #9: Review initial business case and launch plans across marketing, sales, CX, and product. Plan next call – 1 week.

    Call #10: Discuss plans/needs/budgets for tech stack modernization. Plan next call – 3 days.

    Call #11: Discuss plans/needs/budgets for CX readiness for launch. Plan next call – 3 days.

    Call #12: Discuss plans/needs/budgets for digital readiness for launch. Plan next call – 3 days.

    Call #13: Discuss plans/needs/budgets for marketing and sales readiness for launch. Plan next call – 3 days.

    Call #14: Review final business case and coach on Steering Committee Presentation. Plan next call – 1 week.

    A Go-to-Market Workshop Overview

    Contact your engagement manager for more information.
    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Align on GTM Vision & Plan, Craft Initial Strategy
    Identify Initial Business Case, Sales Forecast and Launch Plan
    Develop Launch Plans (i of ii)
    Develop Launch Plans (ii of ii)
    Present Final Business Case to Steering Committee
    Activities

    1.1 Outline a vision for GTM and roles required, identify Steering Committee lead, workstream leads, and teams.

    1.2 Capture GTM strategy hypothesis by working through initial draft of GTM Strategy Presentation and business case.

    1.3 Capture team knowledge on buyer persona and journey and competitive SWOT.

    1.4 Identify information/data gaps and sources and plan for capturing/gathering including buyer interviews.

    Plan next day 2-3 weeks after buyer persona/journey interviews.

    2.1 Size product market opportunity and initial revenue forecast.

    2.2 Craft initial product hypothesis from buyer interviews including feature priorities, pricing, packaging, competitive differentiation, and channel/route to market.

    2.3 Craft initial launch campaign, product release, sales, and CX readiness plans.

    2.4 Identify launch budgets across each investment area.

    2.5 Discuss initial product launch business case and key activities.

    Plan next day 2-3 weeks after product hypothesis-validation interviews with customers and prospects.

    3.1 Apply product interviews to scope, MVP, and roadmap competitive differentiation, pricing, feature prioritization, routes to market and sales forecast.

    3.2 Develop more detailed launch campaign plan complete with asset-types, messaging, digital plan to support buyer journey, media buy plan and campaign metrics.

    4.1 Develop detailed launch/readiness plans with final budgets for:

    • Sales enablement
    • Sales training
    • Tech stack
    • Customer onboarding & success
    • Product marketing
    • AR
    • PR
    • Corp comms/Internal comms
    • Customer events
    • Employee events
    • etc.

    5.1 Review final launch/readiness plans with final budgets for all key areas.

    5.2 Move all key findings up into Steering Committee presentation slides.

    5.3 Present to Steering Committee, receive feedback.

    5.4 incorporate Steering Committee feedback; update finial business case.

    Deliverables
    1. Documented Steering Committee and working team, aligned on GTM vision and process.
    2. Document team knowledge on initial GTM strategy, buyer persona and business case.
    1. Definition of product market fit, uniqueness and competitive differentiation.
    2. Preliminary product launch business case, campaign, targets, and readiness plans.
    1. Detailed launch plans, budgets for product and marketing launch.
    1. Detailed launch plans, budgets for product marketing, sales, customer success, and AR/PR/Corp. comms.
    1. Final GTM Strategy, launch plan and business case.
    2. Approvals to move to GTM build and launch phases.

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    Phase 1

    Build baseline market, buyer, and competitive insights

    Phase 1

    1.1 Select Steering Cmte/team, build aligned vision for GTM

    1.2 Buyer personas, journey, initial messaging

    1.3 Build initial product hypothesis

    1.4 Size market opportunity

    1.5 Outline digital/tech requirements

    1.6 Competitive SWOT

    1.7 Select routes to market

    1.8 Craft GTM Strategy deck

    Phase 2

    2.1 Brand consistency check

    2.2 Formulate packaging and pricing

    2.3 Craft buyer-valid product concept

    2.4 Build campaign plan and targets

    2.5 Develop cost budgets across all areas

    2.6 Draft product business case

    2.7 Update GTM Strategy deck

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess tech/tools support for all GTM phases

    3.2 Outline sales enablement and Customer Success plan

    3.3 Build awareness plan

    3.4 Finalize business case

    3.5 Final GTM Plan deck

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Steering Committee and Team formulation
    • A vision for go-to-market strategy
    • Initial product hypothesis
    • Market Opportunity sizing
    • Tech stack/digital requirements
    • Buyer persona and journey
    • Competitive gaps, parity, differentiators
    • Routes to market
    • GTM Strategy deck

    This phase involves the following stakeholders:

    • Steering Committee
    • Working group leaders

    To complete this phase, you will need:

    Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint Product Market Opportunity Sizing Workbook
    Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template deliverable. Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook deliverable. Sample of the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint deliverable. Sample of the Product Market Opportunity Sizing Workbook deliverable.
    Use the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template to document the results from the following activities:
    • Documenting your GTM Strategy stakeholders
    • Documenting your GTM Strategy working team
    Use the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook to:
    • Review the scope of roles and responsibilities required
    • Document the roles and responsibilities of your teams
    Use the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint to:
    • Interview sales and customers/prospects to inform product concepts, understand persona and later, flush out buyer journey
    Use the Product Market Opportunity Sizing blueprint to:
    • Project Serviceable Obtainable Market (SOM), Serviceable Available Market (SAM), and Total Available Market (TAM) from your current penetrated market

    Step 1.1

    Identify a GTM Program Steering Committee and Team. Build an Aligned Vision for Your Go-to-Market Strategy Approach

    Activities
    • 1.1.1 Identify the Steering Committee of key stakeholders whose support will be critical to success
    • 1.1.2 Select your go-to-market strategy program team
    • 1.1.3 Discuss an overview of the GTM process and program roles and responsibilities with stakeholders and GTM workstream leads
    • 1.1.4 Develop a Go-to-Market launch, tiering, time-line, and overall program plan
    • 1.1.5 Work with each workstream lead on their overall project plan and incremental budget requirements

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify stakeholders – your Steering Committee
    • Identify team members
    • Present a vision of GTM Strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Steering Committee
    • Program workstream leads

    Outcomes of this step

    • Steering Committee identified
    • Team members identified
    • All aligned on the GTM process
    • Go-to-market strategy timeline and program plan
    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals
    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    1.1.1 Identify stakeholders critical to success

    1-2 hours

    Input: Steering Committee interviews, Recognition of Steering Committee interest

    Output: List of GTM Strategy stakeholders as Steering Committee members

    Materials: Following slide outlining the key responsibilities required of the Steering Committee members, A high-Level timeline of GTM Strategy phases and key milestone meetings

    Participants: CMO, sponsoring executive, Functional leads - Marketing, Product Marketing, Product Management, Sales, Customer Success

    1. The GTM Strategy initiative manager should meet with the CMO to determine who will comprise the Steering Committee for your GTM Strategy.
    2. Finalize selection of steering committee members.
    3. Meet with members to outline their roles and responsibilities and ensure their willingness to participate.
    4. Document the steering committee members and the milestone/presentation expectations for reporting project progress and results.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Go To Market Steering Committee’s can become an important ongoing body to steer overall product, pricing and other GTM decisions. Some companies have done so by adding the CEO and CFO to this committee and designated it as a permanent body that meets monthly to give go/no decisions to “all things product related” across all products and business units. Leaders that use this tool well, stay aligned, demonstrate consistency across business units and leverage outcomes across business units to drive greater scale.

    Go-to-Market Strategy Stakeholders

    Understand that aligning key stakeholders around the way your company goes to market is an essential company function.

    Title Key Roles Supporting an Effective Go-to-Market Strategy
    Go-to-Market Strategy Sponsor
    • Owns the function at the management/C-suite level
    • Responsible for breaking down barriers and ensuring alignment with organizational strategy
    • CMO, VP of Marketing, and in SMB Providers, the CEO
    Go-to-Market Strategy Program Manager
    • Typically a senior member of the marketing team
    • Responsible for organizing the GTM Strategy process, preparing summary executive-level communications and approval requests
    • Program manages the GTM Strategy process, and in many cases, the continued phases of build and launch.
    • Product Marketing Director, or other marketing director, that has strong program management skills, has run large scale marketing and/or product programs, and is familiar with the stakeholder roles and enabling technologies
    Functional Workstream Leads
    • Works alongside the Go-to-Market Strategy Initiative Manager on a specific product launch, campaign, rebranding, new market development, etc. and ensures their functional workstreams are aligned with the GTM Strategy
    • With typical GTM B2B a representative from each of the following functions will comprise the team:
      • Product Marketing, Product Management, Field Marketing, Creative, Marketing Ops/Digital, PR/Corporate Comms/AR, Social Media Marketing, Sales Operations, Sales Enablement/Training, and Customer Success
    Digital, Marketing/Sales Ops/IT Team
    • Comprised of individuals whose application and tech tools knowledge and skills are crucial to supporting the entire marketing tech stack and its integration with Sales/CRM
    • Responsible for choosing technology that supports the business requirements behind Go-to-Market Strategy, and eventually the build and launch phases as well
    • Digital Platforms, CRM, Marketing Applications and Analytics managers
    Steering Committee
    • Comprised of C-suite/management-level individuals that guide key decisions, approve of requests, and mitigate any functional conflicts
    • Responsible for validating goals and priorities, defining the scope, enabling adequate resourcing, and managing change especially among C-level leaders in Sales & Product
    • CMO, CTO/CPO, CRO, Head of Customer Success

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Roles vary by company size. Launch success depends on clear responsibilities

    Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook

    Success improves when you align & assign
    • Go-to-Market, build, and launch success improves when:
      • Phases and steps are outlined
      • Key activities are documented
      • Roles/functions are described
      • At the intersection of activities and role, whether the role is “Responsible,” “Accountable,” “Consulted,” or “Informed” is established across the team
    • Leaders will hold a workshop to establish RACI that fits with the scope and scale of your organization.
    • Confusion, conflict, and friction can be dramatically reduced/eliminated with RACI adoption and practice.
    • Review the RACI model and launch checklist within the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook in order to identify the full scope of roles and responsibilities needed.

    Go-to-Market Strategy Working Team

    Consider the skills and knowledge required for GTM Strategy as well as build and launch functions when choosing teams.

    Work with functional leaders to select workstream leads

    Workstream leads should be strong in collaboration, coordination of effort among others, knowledgeable about their respective function, and highly organized as they may be managing a team of colleagues within their function to deliver their responsible portion of GTM.

    Required Skills/Knowledge

    • Target Buyer
    • Product Roadmap
    • Brand
    • Competitors
    • Campaigns/Lead Gen
    • Sales Enablement
    • Media/Analysts
    • Customer satisfaction

    Suggested Functions

    • Product Marketing
    • Product Management
    • Creative Director
    • Competitive Intelligence
    • Demand Gen./Field Marketing
    • Sales Ops/Training/Enablement
    • PR/AR/Corporate Comms.
    • Customer Success
    Roles Required in Successful GTM Strategy
    For SMB companies, as employees wear many different hats, assign people that have the requisite skills and knowledge vs. the role title.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook

    1.1.2 Select the GTM Strategy working team

    1-2 hours

    Input: Stakeholders and leaders across the various functions outlined to the left

    Output: List of go-to-market strategy team members

    Materials: Go-to-Market Strategy Workbook

    Participants: Initiative Manager, CMO, Sponsoring executive, Departmental Leads – Sales, Marketing, Product Marketing, Product Management (and others), Marketing Applications Director, Senior Digital Business Analyst

    1. The GTM Strategy Initiative Manager should meet with the GTM Strategy Sponsor and functional leaders of workstream areas/functions to determine which team members will serve as Steering Committee members and who will serve as workstream leads.
    2. The working team for your go-to-market strategy should have the following roles represented in the working team:
      • Depending on the initiative and the size of the organization, the team will vary.
      • Key business leaders in key areas – Product Marketing, Field Marketing, Digital Marketing, Inside Sales, Sales, Marketing Ops., Product Management, and IT – should be involved.
    3. Document the members of your go-to-market strategy team in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation slide entitled “Our Team.”

    Download the Go-To-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook

    1.1.3 Develop a timeline for key milestones

    1 hour

    Timeline for Key Milestones with row headers 'Go-to-Market Phases', 'Major Milestones', and 'Key Phase Activities'. The phases (each column) and their associated activities are 'PLAN - Create buyer-validated product concept, size opportunity, and build business case', 'BUILD - Build product and enable readiness across the rest of marketing sales and customer success', 'LAUNCH - Release product, launch campaigns, and measure progress toward objectives', and then post-phase is 'MANAGE'. Notes in the 'Major Milestones' row: 'Outline key dates', 'Update with 'Today's Date' as you make progress', and 'Use GTM Plan major milestones or create your own'.

    GTM Program Managers:

    1. Will establish key program milestones working collaboratively with the Steering Cmte. and workstream leads.
    2. Outline key ”Market-facing” or external deliverables & dates, as well as internal.
    3. More detailed deliverable plans are called for working with workstream leads.
    4. This high-level overview will be used in regular Steering Cmte. and working team meets
    5. Record in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    1.1.5 Share your GTM strategy vision with your team

    1-2 hours

    Input: N/A

    Output: Team understanding of an effective go-to-market strategy, team roles and responsibilities and initial product and launch concept.

    Materials: The Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy Executive Brief

    Participants: GTM Program Manager, CMO, Sponsoring executive, Workstream leads

    1. Download the Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy Executive Brief and add the additional slides on Team Composition and Key Milestones you have created in prior steps as appropriate.
    2. Convene the Steering Committee and Working Team and take them through the Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy Executive Brief with your additional slides to:
      1. Communicate team composition, roles and responsibilities, and key GTM Strategy program milestones.
      2. Educate them on what comprises a complete GTM Strategy from the Executive Brief.
    3. Optional: As a SoftwareReviews Advisory client, invite a SoftwareReviews analyst to present the Executive Brief if that is of help to you and your team.

    Go to the Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy Executive Brief

    GTM program managers and workstream leads will collaborate on detailed project plans

    Timeline titled 'Workstreams Status' with a legend of shapes and colors, activities listed as row headers, timeline sections 'EXPLORE', 'DESIGN', 'ALIGN', and 'BUILD', and a column at the end of the timelines for the name of the workstream lead. Notes: 'Change names to actual workstream. Create separate pages for each', 'Overlay colored bars to indicate on/off track', 'Describe major deliverables & due dates', 'Outline major milestones', 'Update with your actual month and week-ending dates', 'Add workstream lead names'.

    Program managers will:

    • Outline an overall more detailed way of tracking GTM program workstreams, key dates and on/off track status

    Program managers & workstream leads will:

    • Call out each key workstream and workstream lead
    • Outline key deliverables and due dates
    • Track weekly for communicating status to Steering Cmte and working team meetings

    Use the Launch Checklist when building out full project plans

    Sample Launch Checklist table with project info above, and table columns 'Component', 'Owner', 'Start Date', 'Finish Date', 'G2M Plan', and 'Build'.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook

    Continuous improvement is enabled with a repeatable process
    • With ownership assigned and set-back schedules in place, product marketing and management leaders can take the guesswork out of the GTM plan and build and launch process for the entire team.
    • “Lighter” versions are created for lower-tier releases.
    • Checklists ensure “we haven’t missed anything” and drive clarity among the team.
    • Articulating where we are now and what’s next increases management confidence.
    • Rinse and repeat improves overall quality and drives scale.

    1.1.6 Develop a project plan for each workstream

    Work with your workstream leads to see them develop a detailed project plan that spans all their deliverables for a GTM Strategy
    1. It’s essential that GTM initiative managers can rely upon workstream leads to provide the status of their respective workstreams in a shared environment for easy weekly updating and reporting.
    2. We suggest the following approach:
      1. GTM initiative managers should maintain a copy of the GTM Strategy Presentation in a shared drive so workstream leads can provide updates.
      2. Workstream leads should work with their GTM initiative manager to populate a version of the workstream tracker shown on the previous slide that enables team status reporting.
      3. Additional slides that actually show “work completed” (e.g. images of assets created, training plans, screen caps of software functionality, etc.) should be reviewed each week as well.
      4. GTM initiative leaders/program managers are advised to summarize the to-date work completed across the team into the Go-To-Market Product and Launch Business Case slides to demonstrate progress to the Steering Committee.
    3. The goal is to keep tracking manageable. Because status is most easily shown during Steering Committee and Working Team meetings using PowerPoint, we recommend a simple approach to program management by using PowerPoint.
    Using the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation:
    3-4 hours Initial, 1-2 hours weekly
    1. Work with your workstream leads to create a slide for each workstream that will contain all the key milestones.
    2. Some teams will choose to use project management software, others a PowerPoint representation, which makes for easy presentation during status meets.
    3. Use the following resources:
      • In the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook, reference the Launch Checklist.
      • In the Go-to-Market Presentation, use the Appendix slides and complete for each workstream.
    4. The GTM initiative manager must be able to track status with workstream leads and present status to the rest of the team during Steering Committee and workstream lead meetings.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Download the Go-To-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook

    Step 1.2

    Hold Interviews With Sales Then Customers and Prospects to Inform Your Initial Product Concept

    Activities
    • 1.2.1 Use the SoftwareReviews Buyer Persona and Journey Interview Guide and Data Capture Tool found within the SoftwareReviews Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint.
    • 1.2.2 Follow the instructions within the above blueprint and hold interviews with Sales and customers and prospects to inform your buyer persona, initial product hypothesis, and buyer journey.
    • 1.2.3 Flush out the initial product and launch concept using the slides found within the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template. You will continually refine the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template such that you turn the Product and Launch descriptions into a business case for product build and launch. We advise you and your team to populate the slides to begin to inform an initial concept, then hold interviews with Sales, customers, and prospects to refine. The best way to capture customer and prospect insights is to use the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Schedule time with sales/sales advisory to flush out the product concept
    • Develop your customer and prospect interviewee list
    • Consolidate findings for your GTM Strategy program slide deck

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Sales/sales advisory, product management, initiative leader (product marketing)
    • Customers and prospects

    Outcomes of this step

    • Guidance from sales on product concept
    • Initial guidance from customers and prospective buyers
    • Agreement to proceed further

    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    Documenting buyer personas enables success beyond marketing

    Documenting buyer personas has several essential benefits to marketing, sales, and product teams:
    • Achieve a better understanding of your target buyer – by building a detailed buyer persona for each type of buyer and keeping it fresh, you take a giant step in becoming a customer-centric organization.
    • Align the team on a common definition – will happen when you build buyer personas collaboratively and among teams that touch the customer.
    • Improved lead generation – increases dramatically when messaging and marketing assets across your lead generation engine better resonate with buyers because you have taken the time to understand them deeply.
    • More effective selling – is possible when sellers apply persona development output to their interactions with prospects and customers.
    • Better product-market fit – increases when product teams more deeply understand for whom they are designing products. Documenting buyer challenges, pain points, and unmet buyer needs gives product teams what they need to optimize product adoption.
    “It’s easier buying gifts for your best friend or partner than it is for a stranger, right? You know their likes and dislikes, you know the kind of gifts they’ll have use for, or the kinds of gifts they’ll get a kick out of. Customer personas work the same way. By knowing what your customer wants and needs, you can present them with content targeted specifically to those wants and needs.” (Emma Bilardi, Product Marketing Alliance, July 8, 2020)

    Buyer persona attributes that need defining

    A well defined buyer persona enables us to:

    • Clarify target org-types, identify buying decision makers and key personas, and determine how they make decisions
    • Align colleagues around a common definition of target buyer(s) to drive improvements in messaging and engagement across marketing, sales, and customer success
    • Identify specific asset-types and tools that, when activated within our lead gen engine and in the hands of sellers, helps a buyer move through a decision process
    Functional – “to find them”
    Job Role Titles Org Chart Dynamics Buying Center Firmographics

    Emotive – “what they do and jobs to be done”
    Initiatives – What programs/projects the persona is tasked with and what are their feelings and aspirations about these initiatives? Motivations? Build credibility? Get promoted? Challenges – Identify the business issues, problems, and pain points, that impede attainment of objectives. What are their fears, uncertainties, and doubts about these challenges? Buyer need – They may have multiple needs; which need is most likely met with the offering? Terminology – What are the keywords/phrases they organically use to discuss the buyer need or business issue?

    Decision Criteria – “how they decide”
    Buyer role – List decision-making criteria and power level. The five common buyer roles are champion, influencer, decision maker, user, and ratifier (purchaser/negotiator). Evaluation and decision criteria – The lens, either strategic, financial, or operational, through which the persona evaluates the impact of purchase.

    Solution Attributes – “what the ideal solution looks like”
    Steps in “Jobs to be Done” Elements of the “Ideal Solution” Business outcomes from ideal solution Opportunity scope – other potential users Acceptable price for value delivered Alternatives that see consideration Solution sourcing – channel, where to buy

    Behavioral Attributes – “how to approach them successfully”
    Content preferences – List the persona’s content preferences, could be blog, infographic, demo, video, or other, vs. long-form assets (e.g. white paper, presentation, analyst report). Interaction preferences – Which among in-person meetings, phone calls, emails, video conferencing, conducting research via web, mobile, and social. Watering holes – Which physical or virtual places do they go to network or exchange info with peers e.g. LinkedIn, etc.

    Buyer journeys are constantly shifting

    If you haven’t re-mapped buyer journeys recently, you may be losing to competitors that have. Leaders re-map buyer journeys frequently.
    • The multi-channel buyer journey is constantly changing – today’s B2B buyer uses industry research sites, vendor content marketing assets, software reviews sites, contacts with vendor salespeople, events participation, peer networking, consultants, emails, social media sites, and electronic media to research purchasing decisions.
    • COVID has dramatically decreased face-to-face – we estimate a B2B buyer spent between 20-25% more time online researching software buying decisions in 2021 than they did pre-COVID. This has diminished the importance of face-to-face selling and has given dramatic rise to digital selling and outbound marketing.
    • Content marketing has exploded – but without mapping the buyer journey and knowing where (by channel) and when (which buyer journey step) to offer content marketing assets, we will fail to convert prospects into buyers.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Marketers are advised to update their buyer journey annually and with greater frequency when the human vs. digital mix is effected due to events such as COVID, and as emerging media such as Augmented Reality shifts asset-type usage and engagement options.

    “Two out of three B2B buyers today prefer remote human interactions or digital self service.

    And during August 2020-February 2021, use of digital self service leapt by 10%” (McKinsey & Company, 2021.)

    Challenges of not mapping persona and journey

    A lack of buyer persona and journey understanding is frequently the root cause of the following symptoms:
    • Lead generation results are way below expectations.
    • Inconsistent product-market fit.
    • Sellers have low success rates doing discovery with new prospects.
    • Website abandonment rates are really high.

    These challenges are often attributed to messaging and talk tracks that fail to resonate with prospects and products that fail to meet the needs of targeted buyers.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Marketers developing buyer personas and journeys that lack agreement among Marketing, Sales, and Product of personas to target will squander precious time and resources throughout the customer targeting and acquisition process.

    “Forty-four percent of B2B marketers have already discovered the power of personas.” (Boardview, 2016.)

    1.2.1 Interview Sales and customers/prospects

    12 - 15 Hours, over course of 2-3 weeks

    Input: Insights from Sellers, Insights from customers and prospects

    Output: Completed slides outlining buyer persona, buyer journey, overall product concept, and detailed features and capabilities needed

    Materials: Create a Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint, Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation

    Participants: Product management lead, GTM Program Manager, Select sellers, Workstream leads that wish to participate in interviews

    1. Using the Create a Buyer Journey and Persona Journey blueprint:
      • Follow the instructions to interview a group of Sellers, and most importantly, several customers and prospects
        • For this stage in the GTM Strategy process, the goal is to validate your initial product and launch concept.
        • We urge getting through all the interview questions with interviewees as the answers inform:
          • Product market fit and Minimal Viable Product
          • Competitive differentiation
          • Messaging, positioning, and campaign targeting
          • Launch campaign asset creation.
      • Place summary findings into the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation, and for reference, place the Buyer Persona and Journey Summaries into the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Appendix.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Download the Create a Buyer Journey and Persona Journey blueprint

    Step 1.3

    Update Your Product Concept

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Based on Sales and Customer/Prospect interviews, update:
      • Your product concept slide
      • Detailed prioritization of features and capabilities

    This step calls for the following activities:

    • Update the product concept slide based on interview findings
    • Update/create the stack-ranking of buyer requested feature and capability priorities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product management lead
    • GTM initiative leader
    • Select workstream leads who sat in on interview findings

    Outcomes of this step

    • Advanced product concept
    • Prioritized features for development during Build phase
    • Understanding of MVP to deliver customer value and deal “wins”

    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    1.3.1 Update Product and Launch concept

    2 Hours

    Input: Insights from Sellers, Insights from customers and prospects

    Output: Completed slides outlining product concept and detailed features and capabilities needed

    Materials: Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation

    Participants: Product management lead, GTM Program Manager, Select sellers, Workstream leads that wish to participate in interviews

    1. Using the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation:
      • With interview findings, update the Product and Launch Concept, Buyer Journey, and Capture Key Features/Capabilities of High Importance to Buyers slides

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Product and Launch Concept

    At this early stage, summarize findings from concept interviews to guide further discovery, as well as go-to-market concepts and initial campaign concepts in upcoming steps.

    Job Function Attributes

    Target Persona(s):
    Typical Title:
    Buying Center/functional area/dept.:

    Firmographics:
    Industry specific/All:
    Industry subsegments:
    Sizes (by revenues, # of employees):
    Geographical focus:

    Emotive Attributes

    Initiative descriptions: Buyer description of project/program/initiative. What terms used?

    Business issues: What are the business issues related to this initiative? How is this linked to a CEO-level mission-critical priority?

    Key challenges: What business/process hurdles need to be overcome?

    Pain points: What are the pain points to the business/personally in their role related to the challenges that drove them to seek a solution?

    Success motivations: What motivates our persona to be successful in this area?

    Solution and Opportunity

    Steps to do the job: What are the needed steps to do this job today?

    Key features and capabilities: What are the key solution elements the buyer sees in the ideal solution? (See additional detail slide with prioritized features.)

    Key business outcomes: In business terms, what value (e.g. cost/time/FTE savings, deals won, smarter, etc.) is expected by implementing this solution?

    Other users/opportunities: Are there other users in the role team/company that would benefit from this solution?

    Pricing/Packaging

    What is an acceptable price to pay for this solution? Based on financial benefits and ROI hurdles, what’s a good price to pay? A high price? What are packaging options? Any competitive pricing to compare?

    Alternatives/Competition

    What are alternatives to this solution: How else would you solve this problem? Are there other solutions you’ve investigated?

    Channel Preferences

    Where would it be most convenient to buy?: Direct from provider? Channel partner/reseller? Download from the web?

    Decision Criteria Attributes

    Decision maker – Role, criteria/decision lens:
    User(s) – Role, criteria/decision lens:
    Influencer(s) – Role, criteria/decision lens:
    Ratifier(s) – Role, criteria/decision lens:

    Behavioral Attributes

    Interaction preferences: Best way for us to reach this role? Email? At events? Texting? Video calls?

    Content types: Which content types (specifics; videos, short blog/article, longer whitepapers, etc.) help us stay educated about this initiative area?

    Content sources: What news, data, and insight sources (e.g. specifics) do you use to stay abreast of what’s important for this initiative area?

    Update the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation with findings from Sales and customer/prospect interviews.

    Capture key features/capabilities of high importance to buyers

    Ask buyers during interviews, as outlined in the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint, to describe and rate key features by need. You will also review with buyers during the GTM Build phase, so it’s important to establish high priority features now.

    Example bar chart for 'Buyer Feature Importance Ratings' where 'Buyer Need' is rated for each 'Feature'.
    • List key feature areas for buyer importance rating.
    • Establish a rating scheme.
        E.g. a rating of:
      • 4.5 or higher = critical ROI driver
      • 3.5 to 4.5 = must haves
      • 2 to 3.5 = nice to have
      • Less than 2 = low importance
    • Have buyers rate each possible feature 0-5 after explaining the rating scheme. Ask – are we missing any key features?
    • Update this slide, found within the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation, with customer/prospect interview findings.
    Perform the same buyer interviews for non-feature “capabilities” such as:
    • Ease of use, security, availability of training, service model, etc. – and other “non-feature” areas that you need for your product hypothesis.

    Step 1.4

    Size the Product Market Opportunity

    Activities
    • 1.3.1 Based on the product concept, size, and the product market opportunity and with a focus on your “Obtainable Market”:
      • Clarify the definitions used to size market opportunity.
      • Source data both internally and externally.
      • Calculate the available, obtainable market for your software product.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review market sizing definitions and identify required data
    • Identify the target market for your software application
    • Source market and internal data that will support your market sizing
    • Document and validate with team members

    This step involves the following participants:

    • GTM initiative leader
    • CMO, select workstream leads

    Outcomes of this step

    • Definitions on market sizing views
    • Data sourcing established
    • Market sizing and estimated penetration calculations

    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    Market opportunity sizing definitions

    Your goal is to assess whether or not the opportunity is significantly sized and if you are well positioned to capture it

    1. This exercise is designed to help size the market opportunity for this particular product GTM launch and not the market opportunity for the entire product line or company. First a few market sizes to define:
      1. Penetrated – is your current revenues and can be expressed in your percentage vs. competitors’.
      2. Serviceable Obtainable Market (SOM) – larger than your currently penetrated market, and a percentage of SAM that can realistically be achieved. It accounts for your current limitations to reach and your ability to sell to buyers. It is restricted by your go-to-market ability and reduced by competitive market share. SOM answers: What increased market can we obtain by further penetrating accounts within current geographical coverage and go-to-market abilities and within our ability to finance our growth?
      3. Serviceable Available Market (SAM) – larger than SOM yet smaller than TAM, SAM accounts for current products and current go-to-market capabilities and answers: What if every potential buyer bought the products we have today and via the type of go-to-market (GTM) especially geographical coverage, we have today? SAM calls for applying our current GTM into unpenetrated portions of currently covered customer segments and regions.
      4. Total Available Market (TAM) – larger than SAM, TAM sizes a market assuming we could penetrate other customer segments within currently covered regions without regard for resources, capabilities, or competition. It answers the question: If every potential buyer within our available market – covered regions – bought, how big would the market be?
      5. Total Global Market – estimates market opportunity if all orgs in all segments and regions bought – with full disregard for resources and without the restrictions of our current GTM abilities.
      6. Develop your market opportunity sizing using the Product Market Opportunity Sizing Workbook.

    Download the Product Market Opportunity Sizing Workbook

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:
    Product marketers that size the product market opportunity and account for the limitations posed by competitors, current sales coverage, brand permission, and awareness, provide their organizations with valuable insights into which inhibitors to growth should be addressed.

    Visualization of market opportunity sizes as circles within bigger circles, 'Penetrated Market' being the smallest and 'Global Market' being the largest.

    1.4.1 Size the product market opportunity

    Your goal is two-fold: Determine the target market size, and develop a realistic 12–24 month forecast to support your business case
    1. Open the Product Market Opportunity Sizing Workbook.
    2. Follow the instructions within.
    3. When finished, download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation and update the Product Market Opportunity Size slide with your calculated Product Market Opportunity Size.

    Download the Product Market Opportunity Sizing Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    “Segmentation, targeting and positioning are the three pillars of modern marketing. Great segmentation is the bedrock for GTM success but is overlooked by so many.” (Product Marketing Alliance)

    Step 1.5

    Outline Digital and Tech Requirements

    Activities

    Designing your go-to-market strategy does not require a robust customer experience management (CXM) platform, but implementing your strategy during the next steps of Go-to-Market – Build then Launch – certainly does.

    Review info-Tech’s CXM blueprint to build a more complete, end-to-end customer interaction solution portfolio that encompasses CRM alongside other critical components.

    The CXM blueprint also allows you to develop strategic requirements for CRM based on customer personas and external market analysis called for during your GTM Strategy design.

    Diagram of 'Customer Relationship Management' surrounded by its components: 'Web Experience Management Platform', 'E-Commerce & Point-of-Sale Solutions', 'Social Media Management Platform', 'Customer Intelligence Platform', 'Customer Service Management Tools', and 'Marketing Management Suite'.

    These steps outlined in the CXM blueprint, will help you:

    • Assess your CRM application(s) and the environment in which they exist. Take a business-first strategy to prioritize optimization efforts.
    • Validate CRM capabilities, user satisfaction, issues around data, vendor management, and costs to build out an optimization strategy
    • Pull this all together to develop a prioritized optimization roadmap.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Marketing Operations, Digital, IT
    • Project workstream leads as appropriate

    Outcomes of this step

    • After inquiries with appropriate analysts, client will be able to assess what new application and technology support is required to support Go To Market process.

    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    Step 1.6

    Identify features and capabilities that will drive competitive differentiation

    Activities
    • 1.6.1 Hold a session with key stakeholders including sales, customer success, product, and product marketing to develop a hypothesis of features and capabilities vs. competitors: differentiators, parity areas, and gaps (DPG).
    • Optional for clients with buyer reviews and key competitive reviews within target product category:
      • 1.6.2 Request from SoftwareReviews a 2X2 Matrix Report of Importance vs. Satisfaction for both features and capabilities within your product market/category to identify areas of competitive DPG.
      • 1.6.3 Hold an Inquiry with covering ITRG analysts in your product category to have them validate key areas of competitive DPG.
    • 1.6.4 Document competitive DPG and build out your hypothesis for product build as you ready for customer interviews to validate that hypothesis.

    This step will provide processes to help you:

    • Understand and document competitive differentiation, parity, and gaps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project workstream leads in product marketing, competitive intelligence, product management, and customer success

    Outcomes of this step

    • Develop a clear understanding of what differentiated capabilities to promote, which parity items to mention in marketing, and which areas are competitive gaps
    • Develop a hypothesis of what areas need to be developed during the Build phase of the Go-to-Market lifecycle

    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    Assess current capabilities and competitive differentiation vs. buyer needs

    Taking buyer needs ratings from step 1.3, assess your current and key competitive capabilities against buyer needs for both feature and non-feature capabilities. Incorporate into your initial product hypothesis.

    Example bar chart for 'Competitive Differentiation, Parity and Gaps – Features' comparing ratings of 'Buyer Need', 'Our Current Capabilities', and 'Competitive Capabilities' for each 'Feature'.

    • Rank features in order of buyer need from step 1.3.
    • Prioritize development needs where current capabilities are rated low. Spot areas for competitive differentiation especially in high buyer-need areas.
    Perform the analysis for non-feature capabilities such as:
    • ease of use
    • security
    • availability of training
    • service model

    Optional: Validate feature and capability importance with buyer reviews

    Request from your SoftwareReviews Engagement Manager the “Importance vs. Satisfaction” analysis for your product(s) feature and non-feature capabilities under consideration for your GTM Strategy

    Satisfaction
    Fix Promote
    Importance

    Low Satisfaction
    High Importance

    These features are important to their market and will highlight any differentiators to avoid market comparison.

    High Satisfaction
    High Importance

    These are real strengths for the organization and should be promoted as broadly as possible.

    Low Satisfaction
    Low Importance

    These features are not important for the market and are unlikely to drive sales if marketing material focuses on them. Rationalize investment in these areas.

    High Satisfaction
    Low Importance

    Features are relatively strong, so highlight that these features can meet customer needs
    Review Maintain

    Overall Category Product Feature Satisfaction Importance

    • Importance is based on how strongly satisfaction for a feature of a software suite correlates to the overall Likeliness to Recommend
    • Importance is relative – low scores do not necessarily indicate the product is not important, just that it’s not as important as other features

    (Optional for clients with buyer reviews and key competitive reviews within target product category.)

    Optional: Feature importance vs. satisfaction

    Example: ERP “Vendor A” ratings and recommended key actions. Incorporate this analysis into your product concept if updating an existing solution. Have versions of the below run for specific competitors.

    Importance vs. Satisfaction map for Features, as shown on the previous slide, but with examples mapped onto it using a legend, purple squares are 'Enterprise Resource Planning' and green triangles are 'Vendor A'.

    Features in the “Fix” quadrant should be addressed in this GTM Strategy cycle.

    Features in the “Review” quadrant are low in both buyer satisfaction and importance, so vendors are wise to hold on further investments and instead focus on “Fix.”

    Features in the “Promote” quadrant are high in buyer importance and satisfaction, and should be called out in marketing and selling.

    Features in the “Maintain” quadrant are high in buyer satisfaction, but lower in importance than other features – maintain investments here.

    (Optional for clients with buyer reviews and key competitive reviews within target product category.)

    Optional: Capabilities importance vs. satisfaction

    Example: ERP “Vendor A” capabilities ratings and recommended key actions. Incorporate this analysis into your product concept for non-feature areas if updating an existing solution. Have versions of the below run for specific competitors.

    Importance vs. Satisfaction map for Capabilities with examples mapped onto it using a legend, purple squares are 'Enterprise Resource Planning' and green triangles are 'Vendor A'.

    Capabilities in the “Fix” quadrant should be addressed in this GTM Strategy cycle.

    Capabilities in the “Review” quadrant are low in both buyer satisfaction and importance, so vendors are wise to hold on further investments and instead focus on “Fix.”

    Capabilities in the “Promote” quadrant are high in buyer importance and satisfaction, and should be called out in marketing and selling.

    Capabilities in the “Maintain” quadrant are high in buyer satisfaction, but lower in importance than other features – maintain investments here.

    (Optional for clients with buyer reviews and key competitive reviews within target product category.)

    Develop a competitively differentiated value proposition

    Combining internal competitive knowledge with insights from buyer interviews and buyer reviews; establish which key features that will competitively differentiate your product when delivered

    Example bar chart for 'Competitive Differentiation, Parity and Gaps – Features and Capabilities' comparing ratings of 'Your Product' and 'Competitor A' with high buyer importance at the top, low at the bottom, and rankings of each 'Differentiator', 'Parity', and 'Gap'.

    • Identify what buyers need that will differentiate your product features and company capabilities from key competitors.
    • Determine which features and company capabilities, ideally lower in buyer importance, can achieve/maintain competitive parity.
    • Determine which features and company capabilities, ideally much lower in buyer importance, that can exist in a state of competitive gap.

    Step 1.7

    Select the Most Effective Routes to Market

    Activities
    • 1.7.1 Understand a framework for deciding how to approach evaluating each available channel including freemium/ecommerce, inside sales, field sales, and channel partner.
    • 1.7.2 Gather data that will inform option consideration.
    • 1.7.3 Apply to decision framework and present to key stakeholders for a decision.

    This step will provide processes to help you:

    • Understand the areas to consider when choosing a sales channel
    • Support your decision by making a specific channel recommendation

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project workstream leads in Sales, Sales Operations, Product Marketing, and Customer Success

    Outcomes of this step

    • Clarity around channel choice for this specific go-to-market strategy cycle
    • Pros and cons of choices with rationale for selected channel

    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    Your “route-to-market” – channel strategy

    Capture buyer channel preferences in Step 1.3, and research alternatives using the following framework

    Inside vs. Field Sales – Selling software during COVID has taught us that you can successfully sell software using virtual conferencing tools, social media, the telephone, and even texting and webchat – so is the traditional model of field/territory-based sellers being replaced with inside/virtual sellers who can either work at home, or is there a benefit to being in the office with colleagues?

    Solutions vs. Individual Products – Do your buyers prefer to buy a complete solution from a channel partner or a solutions integrator that puts all the pieces together, and can handle training and servicing, for a more complete buyer solution?

    Channel Partner vs. Build Sales Force – Are there channel partners that, given your product is targeting a new buyer with whom you have no relationship, can leverage their existing relationships, quicken adoption of your products, and lower your cost of sales?

    Fully Digital – Is your application one where users can get started for free then upgrade with more advanced features without the use of a field or inside sales person? Do you possess the e-commerce platform to support this?

    While there are other considerations beyond the above to consider, decide which channel approach will work best for this GTM Strategy.

    Flowchart on how to capture 'Buyer Channel Preferences' with five possible outcomes: 'Freemium/e-commerce', 'Use specified channel partner', 'Establish channel partner', 'Use Inside Sales', and 'Use Field Sales'.

    Channel Partnerships are Expanding

    “One estimate is that for every dollar a firm spends on its SaaS platform, it spends four times that amount with systems integrators and other channel partners.

    And as technologies are embedded inside other products, services, and solutions, effective selling requires more partners.

    Salesforce, for example, is recruiting thousands of new partners, while Microsoft is reportedly adding over 7,000 partners each month.” (HBR, 2021)

    Step 1.8

    Craft an Initial GTM Strategy Presentation for Executive Review and Status Check

    Activities
    • 1.8.1 Finalize the set of slides within the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation that best illustrates the many key findings and recommended decisions that have been made during the Explore phase of the GTM Strategy.
      • Test whether all key deliverables have been created, especially those that must be in place in order to support future phases and steps.
      • Schedule a Steering Committee meeting and present your findings with the goal to gain support to proceed to the Design phase of GTM Strategy.

    This step will provide processes to help you:

    • Work with your colleagues to consolidate the findings from Phase 1 of the GTM Strategy
    • Create a slide deck with your colleagues for presentation to the Steering Committee to gain approvals to proceed to Phase 2

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project workstream leads in Sales, Sales Operations, Product Marketing, and Customer Success
    • Steering Committee

    Outcomes of this step

    • Slide deck to present to the Steering Committee
    • Approvals to move to Phase 2 of the GTM Strategy

    Phase 1 - Formulate a hypothesis and run discovery on key fundamentals

    Step 1.1 Step 1.2 Step 1.3 Step 1.4 Step 1.5 Step 1.6 Step 1.7 Step 1.8

    1.8.1 Build your GTM Strategy deck for Steering Committee approval

    1. As you near completion of the Go-to-Market Strategy Phase, Explore Step, an important test to pass before proceeding to the Design step of GTM Strategy, is to answer several key questions:
      1. Have you properly sized the market opportunity for the focus of this GTM cycle?
      2. Have you defined a unique value proposition of what buyers are looking for?
      3. And have you aligned stakeholders on the target customer persona and flushed out an accurate buyer journey?
    2. If the answer is “no” you need to return to these steps and ensure completion.
    3. Pull together a summary review deck, schedule a meeting with the Steering Committee, present to-date findings for approval to move on to Phase 2.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Sample of the 'PLAN' section of the GTM Strategy optimization diagram with 'GTM Explore Review' circled in red.

    The presentation you create contains:

    • Team composition and roles and responsibilities
    • Steps in overall process
    • Goals and objectives
    • Timelines and work plan
    • Initial product and launch concept
    • Buyer persona and journey
    • Competitive differentiation
    • Channel strategy

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    Phase 2

    Design your initial product and business case

    Phase 1

    1.1 Select Steering Cmte/team, build aligned vision for GTM

    1.2 Buyer personas, journey, initial messaging

    1.3 Build initial product hypothesis

    1.4 Size market opportunity

    1.5 Outline digital/tech requirements

    1.6 Competitive SWOT

    1.7 Select routes to market

    1.8 Craft GTM Strategy deck

    Phase 2

    2.1 Brand consistency check

    2.2 Formulate packaging and pricing

    2.3 Craft buyer-valid product concept

    2.4 Build campaign plan and targets

    2.5 Develop cost budgets across all areas

    2.6 Draft product business case

    2.7 Update GTM Strategy deck

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess tech/tools support for all GTM phases

    3.2 Outline sales enablement and Customer Success plan

    3.3 Build awareness plan

    3.4 Finalize business case

    3.5 Final GTM Plan deck

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Branding consistency check
    • Formulate packaging and pricing
    • Craft buyer-validated product concept
    • Build initial campaign plan and targets
    • Develop budgets for creative, content, and media purchases
    • Draft product business case
    • Update GTM Strategy deck

    This phase involves the following stakeholders:

    • Steering Committee
    • Working group leaders

    To complete this phase, you will need:

    Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation TemplateGo-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist WorkbookBuyer Persona and Journey blueprintGo-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook
    Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template deliverable.Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook deliverable.Sample of the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint deliverable.Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook deliverable.
    Use the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template to document the results from the following activities:
    • Documenting your GTM strategy stakeholders
    • Documenting your GTM strategy working team
    Use the Go-to-Market Strategy RACI and Launch Checklist Workbook to:
    • Review the scope of roles and responsibilities required
    • Document the roles and responsibilities of your teams
    Use the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint to:
    • Interview sales and customers/prospects to inform product concepts, understand persona and later, flesh out buyer journeys
    Use the Go-to-Market Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook to:
    • Tally budgets from across key functions involved in GTM Strategy
    • Compare with forecasted revenues to assess gross margins

    Step 2.1

    Compare Emerging Messaging and Positioning With Existing Brand for Consistency

    Activities

    Share messaging documented with the buyer journey with branding/creative and/or Marketing VP/CMO to ensure consistency with overall corporate messaging. Use the “Brand Diagnostic” on the following slide as a quick check.

    For those marketers that see the need for a re-brand, please:
    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Later during the Build phase of GTM, marketing assets, digital platforms, sales enablement, and sales training will be created where actual messaging can be written with brand guidelines aligned.

    This step is to assess whether you we need to budget extra funds for any rebranding.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • After completing the buyer journey and identifying messaging, test with branding/CMO that new messaging aligns with current:
      • Company positioning
      • Messaging
      • Brand imagery

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Product marketing
    • Branding/creative
    • CMO

    Outcomes of this step

    • Check – Y/N on brand alignment
    • Adjustments made to current branding or new product messaging to gain alignment

    Phase 2 – Validate designs with buyers and solidify product business case

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4 Step 2.5 Step 2.6 Step 2.7

    Brand identity

    Re-think tossing a new product into the same old marketing engine. Ask if your branding today and on this new offering needs help.

    If you answer “no” to any of the following questions, you may need to re-think your brand. Does your brand:

    • recognize buyer pain points and convey clear pain-relief?
    • convey unique value that is clearly distanced from key competitors?
    • resonate with how target personas see themselves (e.g. rebellious, intelligent, playful, wise, etc.) and convey the “feeling” (e.g. relief, security, confidence, inspiration, etc.) buyers seek?
    • offer proof points via customer testimonials (vs. claimed value)?
    • tell a truly customer-centric story that is all about them (vs. what you want them to know about you)?
    • use words (e.g. quality, speed, great service, etc.) that equate to how buyers actually see you? Is your tone of voice going to resonate with your target buyer?
    • present in a clean, simple, and truly unique way? And will your brand identity stand the test of time?
    • represent feedback gleaned from prospects as well as customers?

    “Nailing an impactful brand identity is a critical part of Growth Marketing.

    Without a well-crafted and maintained brand identity, your marketing will always feel flat and one-dimensional.” (Lean Labs, 2021)

    Step 2.2

    Formulate Packaging and Pricing

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Leverage what was learned in Phase 1 from buyer interviews to create an initial packaging and initial pricing approach.
      • Packaging success is driven by knowing what the buyer values are, how newly proposed functionality may work with other applications, and how well the buyer(s) work in teams.
      • Develop pricing using cost-plus, value/ROI, and competitive/market pricing comparisons.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Approaches to establishing price points for software products
    • Checking if pricing supports emerging product revenue plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Product Marketing
    • Product Management
    • Pricing (if a function)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Pricing that is validated through buyer interviews and consistent with overall company pricing guardrails
    • Packaging that can be delivered

    Phase 2 – Validate designs with buyers and solidify product business case

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4 Step 2.5 Step 2.6 Step 2.7

    2.2.1 Formulate packaging and pricing

    Goal: Incorporate buyer benefits into your MVP that delivers the buyer value that compels them to purchase and drives the business case

    1. Leverage findings from buyer interviews and feature prioritization found in Step 1.3 to arrive at initial feature inclusion.
    2. Leverage feedback from customer interviews and competitive pricing analysis to arrive at an initial target price offer.
    3. Go to the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation and use the slides labeled “Go-to-Market Strategy, Overall Project Plan.”

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Refer to the findings from buyer persona interviews

    Sample of the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint deliverable.

    Step 2.3

    Build a Buyer-Validated Product Concept

    Activities
    • 2.2.1 Add to your initial product concept from Phase 1, the pricing and packaging approach.
      • Take the concept out to buyers to get their feedback – not on UX design, that will come later, but to ensure the value is clear to the buyers, and to raise confidence in the product concept.
      • As with previous customer and prospect interviews, use the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint with its accompanying interview guide and focus on the product related questions.
      • Generate your slides to present and discuss with buyers, capture feedback, and refine the product concept.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Hold buyer interviews to review the product design
    • Validate concept and commercial variables – not UX design, that comes later

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Product Marketing
    • Product Management

    Outcomes of this step

    • Customer validated product concept that meets the business plan

    Phase 2 – Validate designs with buyers and solidify product business case

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4 Step 2.5 Step 2.6 Step 2.7

    2.3.1 The best new product hypothesis doesn’t always come from your best customers

    Goal: Validate your product concept and business case

    1. Key areas to validate during product concept feedback:
      1. Feature/capability-build priorities – Which set of features and capabilities (i.e. service model, etc.) must be delivered in a minimum viable product (MVP) that delivers unique and competitively differentiating buyer value so we have win rates that support the business case?
      2. Packaging/Pricing – Are their features/capabilities that are not in base offering but offered as add-ons or not at all? Are their different packaging options that must be delivered given different customer segments and appropriate price points? (E.g. a small- to-medium sized business (SMB) version, Freemium, or Basic vs. Premium offerings?
      3. Routes to Market/Channel – Ensure you validate your channel strategy as work/effort will be needed to arrive at channel sales and marketing enablement.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    “Innovation opportunities almost always come from understanding a company’s worst customers or customers it doesn’t serve” (Harvard Business School Press, 1997)

    2.3.2 How your prospects buy will inform upcoming campaign design

    Goal: During product validation interviews, further validate the buyer journey to identify asset types to be created/sourced for launch campaign design

    1. Leverage findings from buyer interviews with a focus on buyer journey questions/answers found in Step 1.3 and further validated during product concept feedback in step 2.3.
    2. Your goal is to uncover the following key areas (see next slide for illustration):
      1. Validate the steps buyers take throughout the buyer journey – when you validate buyer steps and what the buyer is doing and thinking as they make a buying decision determines if you are supporting the right process.
      2. Validate the human vs. non-human/digital interaction type for each step – this determines whether your lead gen engine or your salesforce (or channel partner) will deliver the marketing assets and sales collateral.
      3. Describe the asset-types most valued by buyers during each step – this will provide the guidance your demand gen/field marketers need to either work with product marketing and creative to design and build, or source the right marketing asset and sales collateral for your lead gen engine and to support sales enablement.
      4. Identify which channels – this will give your digital team the guidance they need to design the “where” to place the assets within your lead gen engine. Feedback from customer interviews and competitive pricing analysis to arrive at an initial target price for offering is shown on the next slide.
    3. Use the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation to complete the buyer journey slide with key findings.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Refer to the findings from buyer persona interviews

    Sample of the Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint deliverable.

    Answers you need to map buyer journey

    Your buyer interviews – whether during earlier steps or here during product concept validation – will give specific answers to all areas in green text below. Understanding channels, asset-types, and crafting your key messaging are essential for next steps.

    Table outlining an example buyer's journey with fields in green text that are to be to replaced with answers from your buyer interviews.

    Step 2.4

    Build Your Initial Campaign Plan and Targets

    Activities
    • 2.4.1. While product management and marketing is working on the business case, the campaign team is designing their launch campaign.
    • Expand from the product concept and build out the entire launch campaign identifying dates, CTA’s, channels, and asset types needed that will be built during the Build phase.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Outline deployment plan of activities and outcomes
    • Draw up specs for needed assets, web-page changes, emails, target segments, and targets for leads generated

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Field Marketing
    • Product Marketing

    Outcomes of this step

    • The initial draft of the campaign plan that outlines multichannel activities, dates, and assets that need to be sourced and/or created

    Phase 2 – Validate designs with buyers and solidify product business case

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4 Step 2.5 Step 2.6 Step 2.7

    2.4.1 Document your campaign plan

    2 hours

    On the following Awareness and Lead Gen Engine slide:
    1. Tailor the slide to describe your lead generation engine as you will use it when you get to latter steps to describe the activities in your lead gen engine and weigh them for go-to-market strategy.
    2. Use the template to see what makes up a typical lead gen and awareness building engine to see what you may be missing, as well as to record your current engine “parts.”
      • Note: The “Goal” image in upper right is meant as a reminder that marketers should establish a goal for Sales Qualified Leads (SQL’s) delivered to field sales for each campaign.

    On the Product and Launch Concept slides:

    1. Update the slides with findings from 2.3 and 2.4.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    “Only 32% of marketers – and 29% of B2B marketers – said the process of planning campaigns went very well. Just over half were sure they had selected the right business goal for a given marketing project and only 42% were confident they identified the right audience – which is, of course, a critical determinant for achieving success.” (MIT Sloan Management Review)

    Launch campaign

    Our Goal for [Campaign name] is to generate X SQL’s

    Flowchart of the steps to take when a campaign is launched, from 'Organic Website Visits' and 'Go Live' to future 'Sales Opportunities'. A key is present to decipher various icons.

    Awareness

    PR/EXTERNAL COMMS:

    Promote release in line with company story

    • [Executive Name] interview with [Publication Y] on [Launch Topic X] – Mo./Day
    • Press Release on new enhancements – Mo./Day
    • [Executive Name] interview with [Publication Z] on [Launch Topic X] – Mo./Day
    ANALYST RELATIONS:

    Receive analyst feedback pre-launch and brief with final releases messaging/positioning

    • Inquiry with [Key Analysts] on [Launch Topic X] – Mo./Day, pre launch
    • Press Release shared on new enhancements – Launch day minus two days
    • Analyst briefing with [Key Analysts] on [Launch Topic X] – Launch day minus two days

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    2.4.2 Campaign targets

    Goal: Establish a Marketing-Influenced Win target that will be achieved for this launch

    We advise setting a target for the launch campaign. Here is a suggested approach:
    1. Understand what % of all sales wins are touched by marketing either through first or last touch attribution. This is the % of Marketing-Influenced Wins (MIWs).
    2. Determine what sales wins are needed to attain product revenue targets for this launch.
    3. Apply the actual company MIW % to the number of deals that must be closed to achieve target product launch revenues. This becomes the MIW target for this launch campaign.
    4. Then, using your average marketing funnel conversion rates working backwards from MIWs to Opportunities, Sales Accepted Leads (SALs), Sales Qualified Leads (SQLs), Marketing Qualified Leads (MQLs), up to website visits.
    5. Update the slides with findings from 2.3 and 2.4.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    “Marketing should quantify its contribution to the business. One metric many clients have found valuable is Marketing Influenced Wins (MIW). Measured by what % of sales wins had a last-touch marketing attribution, marketers in the 30% – 40% MIW range are performing well.” (SoftwareReviews Advisory Research)

    Step 2.5

    Develop Initial Budgets Across All Areas

    Activities
    • 2.5.1 Use the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and work with your workstream leads.
      • Capture the costs associated with this GTM Strategy and Launch.
      • Summarize your GTM budget in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation, including the details behind the gross margin calculation for your GTM Strategy/campaign if required.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Field marketing, product marketing, creative, others to identify the specific budget elements needed for this campaign/launch

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Field Marketing
    • Product Marketing
    • Branding/creative

    Outcomes of this step

    • The initial marketing budget for this campaign/launch

    Phase 2 – Validate designs with buyers and solidify product business case

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4 Step 2.5 Step 2.6 Step 2.7

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    2.5.1 Develop your GTM Strategy/product launch campaign budget

    Goal: Work with your workstream leads to identify all incremental costs associated with this GTM strategy and product launch

    1. Use the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and adjust to include the areas that are identified by your workstream leads as being applicable to this GTM Strategy and Launch.
      • These should be incremental costs to normal operating and capital budgets and those areas that are fully approved for inclusion by your Steering Committee/Sponsoring Executive.
    2. Begin to Catalog all applicable costs to include all key areas such as:
      • Technology costs for internal use (typically from Marketing Ops), and “core” to product technology costs working with the product team
      • Channel marketing programs, agency (e.g. branding, naming, web design, SEO, content marketing, etc.), T&E, paid media, events, marketing assets, etc.
    3. Note that in the Align Step – Step 3, you will see your workstream leads each develop their individual contributions to both the launch plan as well a budget.

    4. Summarize your initial GTM budget findings in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation, including the details behind the gross margin calculation for your GTM Strategy/campaign if required. Again, you will flush out the final costs within each workstream areas in Phase 3, ”Align.”

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Step 2.6

    Draft Initial Product Business Case

    Activities
    • 2.6.1 Here’s where you begin to pull together all the essential elements of your final business case.
      • For many organizations that require a view of return on investment, you will begin here to shape the key elements that your organization requires for a complete business case to go ahead with the needed investments.
      • The goal is to compare estimated costs to estimated revenues to ensure acceptable margins will be delivered for this GTM strategy/product launch.
      • The culmination of work to get to this calculation will continue through Phase 3; however, the following slide illustrates the kind of visualization that will be possible with our approach.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • A product revenue forecast is created, alignment with sales/sales targets is created for a minimum viable product (MVP) that meets the buyer’s needs at the price point established/validated

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Product management
    • Product marketing
    • Sales leadership

    Outcomes of this step

    • The important measures of:
      • Product revenue forecast
      • Supported MVP features

    Phase 2 – Validate designs with buyers and solidify product business case

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4 Step 2.5 Step 2.6 Step 2.7

    Gross Margin Estimates – part of a complete product business case

    Your goal: Earn more than you spend! This projection of estimated gross margins should be part of your product launch business case. The GTM initiative lead and workstream leads are charged with estimating incremental costs, and product and sales must work together on the revenue forecast.

    Net Return

    We estimate our 12 month gross profit to be ….

    Quarterly Revenues

    Based on sales forecast, our quarterly/monthly revenues are ….

    Estimated Expenses

    Incremental up-front costs are expected to be ….

    Example 'P&L waterfall for Product X Launch' with notes. Green bars are 'Increase', red bars are 'Decrease', and blue bars are 'Total'. Red bar note: 'Your estimated incremental up-front costs', Green bar note: 'Your estimated net incremental revenues vs. costs', Blue bar note: 'Your estimated net gross profit for this product launch and campaign', 'END' note: 'Extend for suitable period'.

    2.6.1 Develop your initial product business case

    Goal: Focused on the Product Concept areas related to product Market Fit, Buyer Needs and Market Opportunity, Product Managers will summarize in order to gain approval for Build

    1. Using the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation, product managers should ensure the product concept slide(s) support the rationale to move to Build phase. Key areas include:
      1. Adequate market opportunity size – that is worth the incremental investment
      2. Acceptable costs/investment to pursue the opportunity – design, creative services for branding, web design, product naming, asset creation, copywriting, translation services not available in-house
      3. Well-defined product market fit – review buyer interviews that identify buyer pain points and ideas that will deliver needed business value
      4. Buyer-validated commercials – buyer-validated pricing and packaging
      5. Product development budget and staffing support to build viable MVP & beyond roadmap – development budget and staffing is in place/budgeted to deliver MVP by target date and continue to ensure attainment of product revenue targets
      6. Unique product value proposition that is competitively differentiated – to drive acceptable win rates
      7. Product Sales Forecast – that when compared to costs meets company investment hurdle rates
      8. Sales Leadership support for achieving sales forecast and supported sales/channel resourcing plan – sales leadership has taken on forecasted revenues as an incremental sales quota and has budget for additional hiring, enablement, and training for attainment.
    2. Go to the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation and complete the slides summarizing these key areas that support the business case for the next phases of Build and Launch.

    Product Business Case Checklist:

    • Acceptably large enough product market opportunity
    • Well-defined competitive differentiation
    • Buyer-validated product-market fit
    • Buyer-validated and competitive commercials (i.e. pricing, packaging)
    • An MVP with roadmap that aligns to buyer needs and buyer-validated price points
    • A 24–36 month sales forecast with CRO sign-up and support for attainment
    • Costs of launch vs. forecasted revenues to gauge gross margins

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Step 2.7

    Update the GTM Strategy Presentation Deck for Executive Review and Sign-off

    Activities
    • 2.7.1 Update the deck with Phase 2 findings culminating in the business case.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Drop into the GTM Strategy deck the summary findings from the team’s work
    • Write an executive summary that garners executive support for needed funds, signed-up-for sales targets, agreed upon launch timing
    • Steering Committee alignment on above and next steps

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Steering Committee
    • Workstream leads

    Outcomes of this step

    • Executive support for the GTM Strategy plan and approval to proceed to Phase 3

    Phase 2 – Validate designs with buyers and solidify product business case

    Step 2.1 Step 2.2 Step 2.3 Step 2.4 Step 2.5 Step 2.6 Step 2.7

    2.7.1 Update your GTM Strategy deck for Design Steering Committee approval

    1. As you near completion of the Go-to-Market Strategy Phase – Design Step, while your emerging business case is important, it will be finalized in the Align Step.
    2. An important test to pass before proceeding to the Align step of the GTM Strategy, is to answer several key questions:
      1. Have you validated the product value proposition with buyers?
      2. Is the competitive differentiation clear for this offering?
      3. Did Sales support the business case by signing up for the incremental quota?
      4. Has product defined an MVP that aligns with the buyer value needed to drive purchases?
      • If the answer is “no” you need to return to these steps and ensure completion
    3. Pull together a summary review deck, schedule a meeting with the Steering Committee, and present to-date findings for approval to move onto Phase 3.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Sample of the 'PLAN' section of the GTM Strategy optimization diagram with 'GTM Design Review' circled in red.

    The presentation you create contains:

    • Timelines and a work plan
    • Expanded product concept to include your packaging and pricing approach
    • Feedback from buyers on validated product concept especially commercial elements
    • Expanded campaign plan and marketing budget
    • Initial product business case

    Build a More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    Phase 3

    Align stakeholder plans to prep for build

    Phase 1

    1.1 Select Steering Cmte/team, build aligned vision for GTM

    1.2 Buyer personas, journey, initial messaging

    1.3 Build initial product hypothesis

    1.4 Size market opportunity

    1.5 Outline digital/tech requirements

    1.6 Competitive SWOT

    1.7 Select routes to market

    1.8 Craft GTM Strategy deck

    Phase 2

    2.1 Brand consistency check

    2.2 Formulate packaging and pricing

    2.3 Craft buyer-valid product concept

    2.4 Build campaign plan and targets

    2.5 Develop cost budgets across all areas

    2.6 Draft product business case

    2.7 Update GTM Strategy deck

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess tech/tools support for all GTM phases

    3.2 Outline sales enablement and Customer Success plan

    3.3 Build awareness plan

    3.4 Finalize business case

    3.5 Final GTM Plan deck

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Assess tech/tools support for all GTM phases
    2. Map lead generation plan
    3. Outline Customer Success plan
    4. Build awareness plan (PR/AR, etc.)
    5. Finalize product business case
    6. Final GTM planning deck and Steering Committee review

    This phase involves the following stakeholders:

    • Steering Committee
    • Working group leaders

    To complete this phase, you will need:

    Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook
    Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template deliverable. Sample of the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook deliverable.
    Use the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template to document the results from the following activities:
    • Documenting your GTM Strategy Stakeholders
    • Documenting your GTM Strategy Working Team
    Use the Go-to-Market Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook to:
    • Tally budgets from across key functions involved in the GTM Strategy
    • Compare with forecasted revenues to assess gross margins

    Step 3.1

    Assess Technology and Tools Support for Your GTM Strategy as Well as Future Phases of GTM

    Activities
    • 3.1.1 Have Marketing Operations document what tech stack improvements are required in order to get the team to a successful launch. Understand costs and implementation timelines and work it into the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • After completing your initial survey in Step 1, complete requirements building for needed technology and tools acquisition/upgrade in campaign management, sales opportunity management, and analytics.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Marketing operations/digital
    • IT

    Outcomes of this step

    • Build a business requirement against which to evaluate new/upgraded vendor tools to support the entire GTM process

    Phase 3 – Align functional plans with a compelling business case for product build

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3 Step 3.4 Step 3.5

    3.1.1 Technology plan and investments

    Goal: Outline the results of our analysis and Info-Tech analyst guidance regarding supporting systems, tools, and technologies to support our go-to-market strategy

    1. Plans, timings, and incremental costs related to, but not limited to, the following apps/tools/technologies:
      1. Lead management/Marketing automation
      2. Marketing analytics
      3. Sales Opportunity Management System (OMS) and Configure, Price, and Quote (CPQ) applications
      4. Sales engagement
      5. Sales analytics
      6. Customer service and support/Customer interaction hub
      7. Customer data management and analytics
      8. Customer experience platforms
      9. Marketing content management
      10. Creative tools
      11. Share of voice and social platform management
      12. Etc.
    2. Go to the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and complete by adding costs identified in above areas that are specific to this go-to-market strategy, Build, and Launch initiative. Record in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation completing the areas within the slides related to the Product and Launch Concepts and Business Case.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Step 3.2

    Outline Sales Enablement and Support for Customer Success to Include Onboarding and Ongoing Engagement

    Activities
    • 3.3.1 Sales Enablement – develop the sales enablement and training plan for Launch to include activities, responsible parties, dates for delivery, etc.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Finalize the customer success training and support plan
    • Onboarding scripts
    • Changes to help screens in application
    • Timing to plan for Quality Acceptance

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Customer Success lead
    • Product management
    • Product marketing

    Outcomes of this step

    • Plan for creation of copy, assets, and rollout pan to support clients and client segments for Launch

    Phase 3 – Align functional plans with a compelling business case for product build

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3 Step 3.4 Step 3.5

    3.2.1 Outline sales enablement

    Goal: Outline sales collateral, updates to sales proposals, CPQ, Opportunity Management Systems, and sales training

    1. Describe the requirements for sales enablement to include elements such as:
      1. Sales collateral
      2. Client-facing presentations
      3. Sales proposal updates
      4. Updates to Configure, Price, and Quote (CPQ) applications
      5. Updates to Opportunity Management System (OMS) applications
      6. Sales demo versions of the new product
      7. Sales communication plans
      8. Sales training and certification programs
    2. Go to the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and add the costs identified in above areas that are specific to this go-to-market strategy, Build, and Launch initiative. Record as well in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation completing the areas within the slides related to the Product and Launch Concepts and Business Case.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    3.2.2 Outline customer success

    Goal: Outline customer support/success requirements and plan

    1. Plans, timings, and incremental costs for the following:
      1. Onboarding scripts for the new solution
      2. Updates to retention lifecycle
      3. FAQ answers
      4. Updates to online help/support system
      5. “How-to” videos
      6. Live chat updates
      7. Updates to “provide feedback” system
      8. Updates to Quarterly Business Review slides
    2. Go to the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and add the costs identified in above areas that are specific to this go-to-market strategy, Build, and Launch initiative. Record in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation and complete the areas within the slides related to the Product and Launch Concepts and Business Case.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Step 3.3

    Build an Awareness Plan Covering Media, Social Media, and Industry Analysts

    Activities
    • 3.4.1 Corp Comms/PR/AR – develop the overall awareness plans for executive interviews, articles placed, social drops, analyst briefing dates, and internal associate comms if required.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Outline outbound communications plans including press releases, social posts, etc.
    • Describe dates for AR outreach to covering analysts
    • Develop the internal communications plan

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Corporate Comms lead
    • Creative
    • Analyst relations
    • Social media marketing lead

    Outcomes of this step

    • Plan for creation of copy, assets, and rollout pan to support awareness building, external communications, and internal communications if required

    Phase 3 – Align functional plans with a compelling business case for product build

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3 Step 3.4 Step 3.5

    3.3.1 Internal communications plan

    Goal: Outline complete internal communications plan. For large-scale changes (i.e. rebranding, M&A, etc.) HR may drive significant volume of employee communications working with Corporate Comms

    1. Plans, timings, and incremental costs for the following:
      1. Complete a comms plan with dates, messages, and channels
      2. Team member roles and responsibilities
      3. Intranet article and posting schedules
      4. Creation of new office signage, merchandise, etc. for employee kits
      5. Pre-launch announcements schedule
      6. Launch day communications, events, and activities
      7. Post launch update schedule and messages for launch success
      8. Incremental staffing and resources/budget requirements
    2. Go to the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and add costs identified in above areas that are specific to this go-to-market strategy, Build, and Launch initiative. Record as well in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation completing the areas related to the Product and Launch Concepts and Business Case.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    3.3.2 PR and External Communications Plan

    Goal: Outline complete internal communications plan. For large scale changes (i.e. rebranding, M&A, etc.) HR may drive significant volume of employee communications working with Corporate Comms

    1. Plans, timings, and incremental costs for the following:
      1. List of Tier 1 and Tier 2 media authors covering the [product/initiative] market area
      2. Schedule of launch briefings, with any non-analyst influencers
      3. Timing of press releases
      4. Required supporting executives and stakeholders for each of the above meetings
      5. Slide deck/media kit for the above and planned questions to support needed feedback
      6. Media Site materials especially to support media questions and requests for briefings
      7. Social postings calendar of activities and key messages plan
      8. Publish data of [product/initiative] relevant articles with set-back schedules
      9. Cultivation of reference customers and client testimonials for media outreach
      10. Requirements for additional staffing to cover product/initiative new market and analysts
      11. Internal and external events calendar to invite media
    2. Go to the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and add the costs identified in the above areas that are specific to this go-to-market strategy, Build, and Launch initiative. Record in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation by completing the areas related to the Product and Launch Concepts and Business Case.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    3.3.3 Analyst relations plan

    Goal: Outline incremental costs in analyst communications, engagement, and access to research

    1. Plans, timings, and incremental costs for the following:
      1. List of Tier 1 and Tier 2 analysts for the [product/initiative] market area
      2. Schedule of inquiries, pre-launch briefings, launch briefings, and post-launch feedback
      3. Required supporting executives and stakeholders for each of the above meetings
      4. Analyst deck for each of the above and planned questions to support needed feedback
      5. Analyst Site materials to support 2nd and 3rd Tier analysts’ questions and requests for briefings
      6. Social postings calendar of activities and key messages
      7. Resources to respond to analyst blogs and/or social posts regarding your product/initiative area
      8. Timing of important and relevant analyst document/methodology publishing dates with set-back schedules
      9. Cultivation of reference customers and client testimonials to coincide with analyst outreach for research and for buyer review sites/reviews data gathering
      10. Requirements for additional staffing to cover product/initiative new market and analysts
      11. Events calendar where analysts will be presenting on this product/initiative market
    2. Go to the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook and add the costs identified in the above areas that are specific to this go-to-market strategy, Build and Launch initiative. Record in the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation by completing the areas related to the Product and Launch Concepts and Business Case.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Step 3.4

    Finalize Product Business Case With Collaborative Input From Product, Sales, and Marketing

    Activities
    • 3.5.1 Convene the team to align sales, marketing, and product around the business case.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Refine the product business case initiated in Phase 2
    • Align product revenue forecast with sales revenue forecast
    • Align MVP features to be developed during “GTM – Build” with customer validated product-market fit

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project lead
    • Product management
    • Product marketing

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product business case

    Phase 3 – Align functional plans with a compelling business case for product build

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3 Step 3.4 Step 3.5

    3.4.1 Final product Build and Launch business case

    Goal: Beyond the product business case, factor in costs for technology, campaigning, sales enablement, and customer success in order to gain approval for Build and Launch

    1. Using the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation, workstream leads and Go-to-Market Initiative leaders will finalize the anticipated incremental costs, and when compared to projected product revenues, present to the Steering Committee including CFO for final approval before moving to Build and Launch.
    2. To present a complete business case, key cost areas include:
      1. All the areas outlined up through Step 3.4 plus:
      2. Technology/MarTech Stack incremental costs
      3. Channel programs, branding/agency, pricing, packaging/product, and T&E incremental costs
      4. Campaign related – creative, content marketing, paid media, events, SEO, lists/data
      5. Sales Enablement, Customer Support/Success incremental costs
      6. Internal communications/events/activities/signage costs
      7. PR/AR/Media incremental costs
    3. Compare to final Sales/Product agreed projected revenues, in order to calculate estimated gross margins

    Go to the Go-to-Market Budget Workbook as outlined in prior steps and document final incremental costs and projected revenues and summarize within the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Cost Budget and Revenue Forecast Workbook

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Product Build and Launch Business Case Checklist:

    • Acceptably large enough product market opportunity
    • Well-defined competitive differentiation
    • Buyer-validated product-market fit
    • Buyer-validated and competitive commercials (i.e. pricing, packaging)
    • An MVP with roadmap that aligns with buyer needs and buyer validated price points
    • A 24–36 month sales forecast with CRO sign-up and support for attainment
    • Incremental product development, tech, marketing, sales, customer success, AR/PR costs vs. forecasted revenues fall within acceptable margins

    Step 3.5

    Develop Your Final Executive Presentation to Request Approval and Proceed to GTM Build Phase

    Activities
    • 3.6.1 Update the Product, Launch, Journey, and Business Case slides included within the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template with Phase 3 findings culminating in the business case.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Update the previously created slides with findings from Phase 3
    • Hold a Steering Committee meeting and present findings for approval

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Steering Committee
    • Workstream leads

    Outcomes of this step

    • GTM Strategy approved to move to GTM Build

    Phase 3 – Align functional plans with a compelling business case for product build

    Step 3.1 Step 3.2 Step 3.3 Step 3.4 Step 3.5

    3.5.1 Update your GTM Strategy deck for Align Steering Committee approval

    1. As you near completion of the Go-to-Market Strategy Phase – Align Step, an important test to pass before proceeding to the Design step of GTM Strategy, is to answer several key questions:
      1. Are Sales, Product, and Marketing all aligned and in agreement on the business case?
      2. Are the gross margin calculations acceptable to the Steering Committee? CFO? CEO?
    2. If the answer is “no” you need to return to prior steps and ensure completion.
    3. Pull together a summary review deck, schedule a meeting with the Steering Committee, present to-date findings for approval to move on to Build Phase.
    4. Once your final business case is accepted, you are ready to move on to the GTM Build and Launch phases. These phases are covered in sperate SoftwareReviews blueprints.

    Download the Go-to-Market Strategy Presentation Template

    Sample of the 'PLAN' section of the GTM Strategy optimization diagram with 'GTM Align Review' circled in red.

    The presentation you create contains:

    • Timelines and work plan updates
    • Tech stack needs/modifications
    • An expanded product concept to include packaging and pricing approach
    • Asset-type concepts for marketing campaigns, sales collateral, website, and social
    • Outline of initial Launch dates
    • Outline of initial customer success, awareness/PR/AR plans, and sales training plans
    • Final business case

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved – A More Effective Go-to-Market Strategy

    By guiding your team through the Go-to-Market planning process applied to an actual GTM Strategy, you have built an important set of capabilities that underpins today’s well-managed software companies. By following the step-by-step process outlined in this blueprint, you have delivered a host of benefits that include the following:

    • Alignment of Product, Marketing, Sales, and Customer Success around a deeper understanding of your target buyers and what it takes to build competitive differentiation.
    • You have calculated your product market opportunity and whether it’s worth the investment in the long-term, and for the short term you have estimated gross margins as an important part of the business case.
    • Built executive support and confidence by leading a disparate team in complex decision making that is fact and evidence based to make more effective go/no go decisions related to investing in new products.
    • And finally, because you and your team have demonstrated their ability to align programs toward a common goal and program-manage a complex initiative through to successful completion, you have led your team to develop the “institutional muscle” to take on equally complex initiatives such as acquisition integration, rebranding, launching in a new region, etc.

    Therefore, developing the capabilities to manage a complex go-to-market strategy is akin to building company scalability and is sought after as a professional development opportunity that each executive should have on his/her résumé.

    If you would like additional support, contact us and we’ll make sure you get the professional expertise you need.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    info@softwarereviews.com 1-888-670-8889

    Bibliography

    Acosta, Danette. “Average Customer Retention Rate by Industry.” Profitwell.com. Accessed Jan. 2022.

    Ashkenas, Ron, and Patrick Finn. “The Go-To-Market Approach Startups Need to Adopt.” Harvard Business Review, June 2016. Accessed Jun. 2021.

    Bilardi, Emma. “ How to Create Buyer Personas.” Product Marketing Alliance, July 2020. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    Cespedes, Frank V. “Defining a Post-Pandemic Channel Strategy.” Harvard Business Review, Apr. 2021. Accessed Jul. 2021.

    Chapman, Lawrence. “A Visual Guide to Product Launches.” Product Marketing Alliance. Accessed Jul. 2021.

    Chapman, Lawrence. “Everything You Need To Know About Go-To-Market Strategies.” Product Marketing Alliance. Accessed Jul. 2021.

    Christiansen, Clayton. “The Innovators Dilemma.” Harvard Business School Press, 1997.

    Drzewicki, Matt. “Digital Marketing Maturity: The Path to Success.” MIT Sloan Management Review. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    “Go-To-Market Refresher,” Product Marketing Alliance. Accessed Jul. 2021

    Harrison, Liz; Dennis Spillecke, Jennifer Stanley, and Jenny Tsai. “Omnichannel in B2B sales: The new normal in a year that has been anything but.” McKinsey & Company, 15 March, 2021. Accessed Dec. 2021.

    Jansen, Hasse. “Buyer Personas – 33 Mind Blowing Stats.” Boardview, 19 Feb. 2016. Accessed Jan. 2022.

    Scott, Ryan. “Creating a Brand Identity: 20 Questions to Consider.” Lean Labs, Jun 2021. Accessed Jul. 2021.

    Smith, Michael L., and James Erwin. “Role and Responsibility Charting (RACI).” DOCSearch. Accessed Jan. 2022. Web.

    “What is the Total Addressable Market (TAM).” Corporate Finance Institute (CFI), n.d. Accessed Jan. 2022.

    Related Software Reviews Research

    Sample of the Create a Buyer Persona and Journey research Create a Buyer Persona and Journey
    • A successful go-to-market strategy depends upon deep buyer understanding. Our Create a Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint will give you a step-by-step process that when followed will provide you and your team with that deep buyer understanding you need.
    • The Create a Buyer Persona and Journey blueprint provides you with an interview containing over 75 questions that, after capturing buyer answers and insights during interviews, will strengthen your value proposition, product market fit, lead gen engine and sales effectiveness.
    Sample of the Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring research Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring
    • Save time and money and improve your sales win rates when you apply our methodology to score contacts with your lead gen engine more accurately and pass better qualified leads over to your sellers.
    • Our methodology teaches marketers to develop your own lead scoring approach based upon lead/contact profile vs. your Ideal Customer Profile (ICP) and scores contact engagement. Applying the methodology to arrive at your own approach to scoring will mean reduced lead gen costs, higher conversion rates, and increased marketing influenced wins.

    Build a Data Warehouse

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}200|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $94,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 30 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • Relational data warehouses, although reliable, centralized repositories for corporate data, were not built to handle the speed and volume of data and analytics today.
    • IT is under immense pressure from business units to provide technology that will yield greater agility and insight.
    • While some organizations are benefitting from modernization technologies, the majority of IT departments are unfamiliar with the technologies and have not yet defined clear use cases.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • The vast majority of your corporate data is not being properly leveraged. Modernize the data warehouse to get value from the 80% of unstructured data that goes unused.
    • Avoid rip and replace. Develop a future state that complements your existing data warehouse with emerging technologies.
    • Be flexible in your roadmap. Create an implementation roadmap that’s incremental and adapts to changing business priorities.

    Impact and Result

    • Establish both the business and IT perspectives of today’s data warehouse environment.
    • Explore the art-of-the-possible. Don’t get stuck trying to gather technical requirements from business users who don’t know what they don’t know. Use Info-Tech’s interview guide to discuss the pains of the current environment, and more importantly, where stakeholders want to be in the future.
    • Build an internal knowledgebase with respect to emerging technologies. The technology landscape is constantly shifting and often difficult for IT staff to keep track of. Use Info-Tech’s Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Education Deck to ensure that IT is able to appropriately match the right tools to the business’ use cases.
    • Create a compelling business case to secure investment and support.

    Build a Data Warehouse Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should be looking to modernize the relational data warehouse, review Info-Tech’s framework for identifying modernization opportunities, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess the current data warehouse environment

    Review the business’ perception and architecture of the current data warehouse environment.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 1: Assess the Current Data Warehouse Environment
    • Data Warehouse Maturity Assessment Tool

    2. Define modernization drivers

    Collaborate with business users to identify the strongest motivations for data warehouse modernization.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 2: Define Modernization Drivers
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Stakeholder Interview Guide
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Education Deck
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Initiative Building Tool

    3. Create the modernization future state

    Combine business ideas with modernization initiatives and create a roadmap.

    • Drive Business Innovation With a Modernized Data Warehouse Environment – Phase 3: Create the Modernization Future State
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Technology Architectural Template
    • Data Warehouse Modernization Deployment Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build a Data Warehouse

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess the Current Data Warehouse Environment

    The Purpose

    Discuss the general project overview for data warehouse modernization.

    Establish the business and IT perspectives of the current state.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Holistic understanding of the current data warehouse.

    Business user engagement from the start of the project.

    Activities

    1.1 Review data warehouse project history.

    1.2 Evaluate data warehouse maturity.

    1.3 Draw architecture diagrams.

    1.4 Review supporting data management practices.

    Outputs

    Data warehouse maturity assessment

    Data architecture diagrams

    2 Explore Business Opportunities

    The Purpose

    Conduct a user workshop session to elicit the most pressing needs of business stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Modernization technology selection is directly informed by business drivers.

    In-depth IT understanding of the business pains and opportunities.

    Activities

    2.1 Review general trends and drivers in your industry.

    2.2 Identify primary business frustrations, opportunities, and risks.

    2.3 Identify business processes to target for modernization.

    2.4 Capture business ideas for the future state.

    Outputs

    Business ideas for modernization

    Defined strategic direction for data warehouse modernization

    3 Review the Technology Landscape

    The Purpose

    Educate IT staff on the most common technologies for data warehouse modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Improved ability for IT to match technology with business ideas.

    Activities

    3.1 Appoint Modernization Advisors.

    3.2 Hold an open education and discussion forum for modernization technologies.

    Outputs

    Modernization Advisors identified

    Modernization technology education deck

    4 Define Modernization Solutions

    The Purpose

    Consolidate business ideas into modernization initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Refinement of the strategic direction for data warehouse modernization.

    Activities

    4.1 Match business ideas to technology solutions.

    4.2 Group similar ideas to create modernization initiatives.

    4.3 Create future-state architecture diagrams.

    Outputs

    Identified strategic direction for data warehouse modernization

    Defined modernization initiatives

    Future-state architecture for data warehouse

    5 Establish a Modernization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Validate and build out initiatives with business users.

    Define benefits and costs to establish ROI.

    Identify enablers and barriers to modernization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completion of materials for a compelling business case and roadmap.

    Activities

    5.1 Validate use cases with business users.

    5.2 Define initiative benefits.

    5.3 Identify enablers and barriers to modernization.

    5.4 Define preliminary activities for initiatives.

    5.5 Evaluate initiative costs.

    5.6 Determine overall ROI.

    Outputs

    Validated modernization initiatives

    Data warehouse modernization roadmap

    Data security consultancy

    Data security consultancy

    Based on experience
    Implementable advice
    human-based and people-oriented

    Data security consultancy makes up one of Tymans Group’s areas of expertise as a corporate consultancy firm. We are happy to offer our insights and solutions regarding data security and risk to businesses, both through online and offline channels. Read on and discover how our consultancy company can help you set up practical data security management solutions within your firm.

    How our data security consultancy services can help your company

    Data security management should be an important aspect of your business. As a data security consultancy firm, Tymans Group is happy to assist your small or medium-sized enterprise with setting up clear protocols to keep your data safe. As such, we can advise on various aspects comprising data security management. This ranges from choosing a fit-for-purpose data architecture to introducing IT incident management guidelines. Moreover, we can perform an external IT audit to discover which aspects of your company’s data security are vulnerable and which could be improved upon.

    Security and risk management

    Our security and risk services

    Security strategy

    Security Strategy

    Embed security thinking through aligning your security strategy to business goals and values

    Read more

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Disaster Recovery Planning

    Create a disaster recovey plan that is right for your company

    Read more

    Risk Management

    Risk Management

    Build your right-sized IT Risk Management Program

    Read more

    Check out all our services

    Discover our practical data security management solutions

    Data security is just one aspect with which our consultancy firm can assist your company. Tymans Group offers its extensive expertise in various corporate management domains, such as quality management and risk management. Our solutions all stem from our vast expertise and have proven their effectiveness. Moreover, when you choose to employ our consultancy firm for your data security management, you benefit from a holistic, people-oriented approach.

    Set up an appointment with our experts

    Do you wish to learn more about our data security management solutions and services for your company? We are happy to analyze any issues you may be facing and offer you a practical solution if you contact us for an appointment. You can book a one-hour online talk or elect for an on-site appointment with our experts. Contact us to set up your appointment now.

    Register to read more …

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}253|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.3/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $48,932 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 42 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to understand zero trust and how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources.
    • The need to move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach is clear. The path to getting there is complex and expensive.
    • Zero trust as a principle is a moving target due to competing definitions and standards. A strategy that adapts evolving best practices must be supported by business stakeholders.
    • Full zero trust includes many components. Performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Apply zero trust to key protect surfaces. A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Impact and Result

    Every organization should have a zero trust strategy and the roadmap to deploy it must always be tested and refined. Our unique approach:

    • Assess resources and determine zero trust readiness.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build out roadmap.
    • Deploy zero trust and monitor with zero trust progress metrics.

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build a Zero Trust Roadmap Deck – The purpose of the storyboard is to provide a detailed description of the steps involving in building a roadmap for implementing zero trust.

    The storyboard contains five easy-to-follow steps on building a roadmap for implementing zero trust, from aligning initiatives to business goals to establishing metrics for measuring the progress and effectiveness of a zero trust implementation.

    • Build a Zero Trust Roadmap – Phases 1-5

    2. Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool – A tool to identify key protect surfaces and map them to business goals.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by having it focus on key protect surfaces that are aligned to the goals of the business.

    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    3. Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool – A tool to perform a gap analysis between the organization's current implementation of zero trust controls and its desired target state and to build a roadmap to achieve the target state.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by creating a roadmap that is aligned with the current state of the organization when it comes to zero trust and its desired target state.

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    4. Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool – A tool to identify and evaluate solutions for identified zero trust initiatives.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by identifying the best solutions for zero trust initiatives.

    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    5. Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool – A tool to identify metrics to measure the progress and efficiency of the zero trust implementation.

    Use this tool to develop your zero trust strategy by identifying metrics that will allow the organization to monitor how the zero trust implementation is progressing, and whether it is proving to be effective.

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    6. Zero Trust Communication Deck – A template to present the zero trust template to key stakeholders.

    Use this template to present the zero trust strategy and roadmap to ensure all key elements are captured.

    • Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    The Purpose

    Align business goals to protect surfaces.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A better understanding of how business goals can map to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand business and IT strategy and plans.

    1.2 Define business goals.

    1.3 Identify five critical protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    1.4 Map business goals and protect surfaces.

    Outputs

    Mapping of business goals to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    2 Begin Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Identify and define zero trust initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A list of zero trust initiatives to be prioritized and set into a roadmap.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess current security capabilities and define the zero trust target state for a set of controls.

    2.2 Identify tasks to close maturity gaps.

    2.3 Assign tasks to zero trust initiatives.

    Outputs

    Security capabilities current state assessment

    Zero trust target state

    Tasks to address maturity gaps

    3 Complete Gap Analysis

    The Purpose

    Complete the zero trust gap analysis and prioritize zero trust initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized list of zero trust initiatives aligned to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    Activities

    3.1 Align initiatives to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    3.2 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on zero trust initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives.

    Outputs

    Zero trust initiative list mapped to business goals and key protect surfaces

    Prioritization of zero trust initiatives

    4 Finalize Roadmap and Formulate Policies

    The Purpose

    Finalize the zero trust roadmap and begin to formulate zero trust policies for roadmap initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A zero trust roadmap of prioritized initiatives.

    Activities

    4.1 Define solution criteria.

    4.2 Identify candidate solutions.

    4.3 Evaluate candidate solutions.

    4.4 Finalize roadmap.

    4.5 Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements.

    4.6 Establish metrics for high-priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Zero trust roadmap

    Zero trust policies for critical protect surfaces

    Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions

    Metrics for high-priority initiatives

    Further reading

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    Leverage an iterative and repeatable process to apply zero trust to your organization.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Internet is the new corporate network.

    For the longest time we have focused on reducing the attack surface to deter malicious actors from attacking organizations, but I dare say that has made these actors scream “challenge accepted.” With sophisticated tools, time, and money in their hands, they have embarrassed even the finest of organizations. A popular hybrid workforce and rapid cloud adoption have introduced more challenges for organizations, as the security and network perimeter have shifted and the internet is now the corporate network. Suffice it to say that a new mindset needs to be adopted to stay on top of the game.

    The success of most attacks is tied to denial of service, data exfiltration, and ransom. A shift from focusing on the attack surface to the protect surface will help organizations implement an inside-out architecture that protects critical infrastructure, prevents the success of any attack, makes it difficult to gain access, and links directly to business goals.

    Zero trust principles aid that shift across several pillars (Identity, Device, Application, Network, and Data) that make up a typical infrastructure; hence, the need for a zero trust roadmap to accomplish that which we desire for our organization.

    Victor Okorie
    Senior Research Analyst, Security and Privacy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    • Many IT and security leaders struggle to understand zero trust and how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources.
    • The need to move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach is clear. The path to getting there is complex and expensive.

    Common Obstacles

    • Zero trust as a principle is a moving target due to competing definitions and standards. A strategy that adapts evolving best practices must be supported by business stakeholders.
    • Full zero trust includes many components. Performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Every organization should have a zero trust strategy and the roadmap to deploy it must always be tested and refined.
    • Our unique approach:
      • Assess resources and determine zero trust readiness.
      • Address barriers and identify enablers.
      • Prioritize initiatives and build out roadmap.
      • Identify most appropriate vendors via vendor selection framework.
      • Deploy zero trust and monitor with zero trust progress metrics.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations:

    • Understand what zero trust is and decide how best to deploy it with their existing IT resources. Zero trust is a set of principles that defaults to the highest level of security; a failed implementation can easily disrupt the business. A pragmatic zero trust implementation must be flexible and adaptable yet maintain a consistent level of protection.
    • Move from a perimeter-based approach to security toward an “Always Verify” approach. The path to getting there is complex without a clear understanding of desired outcomes. Focusing efforts on key protection gaps and leveraging capable controls in existing architecture allows for a repeatable process that carries IT, security, and the business along on the journey.

    On this zero trust journey, identify your valuable assets and zero trust controls to protect them.

    Top three reasons for building a zero trust strategy

    44%

    Reduce attacker’s ability to move laterally

    44%

    Enforce least privilege access to critical resources

    41%

    Reduce enterprise attack surface

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • Due to zero trust’s many components, performing an accurate assessment of readiness and benefits to adopt zero trust can be extremely difficult when you don’t know where to start.
      • To feel ready to implement and to understand the benefits of zero trust, IT must first understand what zero trust means to the organization.
    • Zero trust as a set of principles is a moving target, with many developing standards and competing technology definitions. A strategy built around evolving best practices must be supported by related business stakeholders.
      • To ensure support, IT must be able to “sell” zero trust to business stakeholders by illustrating the value zero trust can bring to business objectives.

    43%

    Organizations with a full implementation of zero trust saved 43% on the costs of data breaches.
    (Source: Teramind, 2021)

    96%

    Zero trust is considered key to the success of 96% of organizations in a survey conducted by Microsoft.
    (Source: Microsoft, 2021)

    What is zero trust?

    It depends on who you ask…

    • Vendors use zero trust as a marketing buzzword.
    • Organizations try to comprehend zero trust in their own limited views.
    • Zero trust regulations/standards are still developing.

    “A cybersecurity paradigm focused on resource protection and the premise that trust is never granted implicitly but must be continually evaluated.”

    Source: NIST, SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture, 2020

    “An evolving set of cybersecurity paradigms that move defenses from static, network-based perimeters to focus on users, assets, and resources.”

    Source: DOD, Zero Trust Reference Architecture, 2021

    “A security model, a set of system design principles, and a coordinated cybersecurity and system management strategy based on an acknowledgement that threats exist both inside and outside traditional network boundaries.”

    Source: NSA, Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model, 2021

    “Zero trust provides a collection of concepts and ideas designed to minimize uncertainty in enforcing accurate, least privilege per-request access decisions in information systems and services in the face of a network viewed as compromised.”

    Source: CISA, Zero Trust Maturity Model, 2021

    “The foundational tenet of the zero trust model is that no actor, system, network, or service operating outside or within the security perimeter is trusted.”

    Source: OMB, Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles, 2022

    What is zero trust?

    From Theoretical to Practical

    Zero trust is an ideal in the literal sense of the word, because it is a standard defined by its perfection. Just as nothing in life is perfect, there is no measure that determines an organization is absolutely zero trust. The best organizations can do is improve their security iteratively and get as close to ideal as possible.

    In the most current application of zero trust in the enterprise, a zero trust strategy applies a set of principles, including least-privilege access and per-request access enforcement, to minimize compromise to critical assets. A zero trust roadmap is a plan that leverages zero trust concepts, considers relationships between technical elements as well as security solutions, and applies consistent access policies to minimize areas of exposure.

    Zero Trust; Identity; Workloads & Applications; Network; Devices; Data

    Info-Tech Insight

    Solutions offering zero trust often align with one of five pillars. A successful zero trust implementation may involve a combination of solutions, each protecting the various data, application, assets, and/or services elements in the protect surface.

    Zero trust business benefits

    Reduce business and organizational risk

    Reduced business risks as continuous verification of identity, devices, network, applications, and data is embedded in the organizations practice.

    36% of data breaches involved internal actors.
    Source: Verizon, 2021

    Reduce CapEx and OpEx

    Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirement, and improved time-to-respond to threats.
    Source: SecurityBrief - Australia, 2020.

    Reduce scope and cost of compliance

    Helps achieve compliance with several privacy standards and regulations, improves maturity for cyber insurance premium, and fewer gaps during audits.

    Scope of compliance reduced due to segmentation.

    Reduce risk of data breach

    Reduced risk of data breach in any instance of a malicious attack as there’s no lateral movement, secure segment, and improved visibility.

    10% Increase in data breach costs; costs went from $3.86 million to $4.24 million.
    Source: IBM, 2021

    This is an image of a thought map detailing Info-Tech's Build A Zero Trust Roadmap.  The main headings are: Define; Design; Develop; Monitor

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Building a Zero Trust Roadmap

    1. Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    2. Assess Key Capabilities and Identify Zero Trust Initiatives

    3. Evaluate Candidate Solutions and Finalize Roadmap

    4. Formulate Policies for Roadmap Initiatives

    5. Monitor the Zero Trust Roadmap Deployment

    Phase Steps

    Define business goals

    Identify critical DAAS elements

    Map business goals to critical DAAS elements

    1. Review the Info-Tech framework
    2. Assess current capabilities and define the zero trust target state
    3. Identify tasks to close gaps
    4. Define tasks and initiatives
    5. Align initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces
    1. Define solution criteria
    2. Identify candidate solutions
    3. Evaluate candidate solutions
    4. Perform cost/benefit analysis
    5. Prioritize initiatives
    6. Finalize roadmap
    1. Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements
    2. Formulate policies to secure a path to access critical DAAS elements
    1. Establish metrics for roadmap tasks
    2. Track and report metrics
    3. Build a communication deck

    Phase Outcomes

    Mapping of business goals to protect surfaces

    Gap analysis of security capabilities

    Evaluation of candidate solutions and a roadmap to close gaps

    Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions

    Metrics for measuring the progress and efficiency of the zero trust implementation

    Protect what is relevant

    Apply zero trust to key protect surfaces

    A successful zero trust strategy should evolve through an iterative and repeatable process by assessing the full spectrum of available technologies to apply zero trust principles to the most relevant protect surfaces.

    Align protect surfaces to business objectives

    Developing a zero trust roadmap collaboratively with business stakeholders enables alignment with upcoming business priorities and industry trends.

    Identify zero trust capabilities

    Deriving protect surface elements from business goals reframes how security controls are applied. Assess control effectiveness in this context and identify zero trust capabilities to close any gaps.

    Roadmap first, not solution first

    Don’t let your solution dictate your roadmap. Define your zero trust solution criteria before engaging in vendor selection.

    Create enforceable policies

    The success of a zero trust implementation relies on consistent enforcement. Applying the Kipling methodology to each protect surface is the best way to design zero trust policies.

    Success should benefit the organization

    To measure the efficacy of a zero trust implementation, ensure you know what a successful zero trust implementation means for your organization, and define metrics that demonstrate whether that success is being realized.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Key deliverable:

    Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Present your zero trust strategy in a prepopulated document that summarizes the work you have completed as a part of this blueprint.

    Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Identify critical and vulnerable DAAS elements to protect and align them to business goals.

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Perform a gap analysis between current and target states to build a zero trust roadmap.

    Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Determine and evaluate candidate solutions based on defined criteria.

    Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Develop metrics to track the progress and efficiency of the organization’s zero trust implementation.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • A mapped transaction flow of critical and vulnerable assets and visibility of where to implement security controls that aligns with the principle of zero trust.
    • Improved security posture across the digital attack surface while focusing on the protect surface.
    • An inside-out architecture that leverages current existing architecture to tighten security controls, is automated, and gives granular visibility.

    Business Benefits

    • Reduced business risks as continuous verification of identity, devices, network, applications, and data is embedded in the organization’s practice.
    • Reduced CapEx and OpEx due to the scalability, low staffing requirement, and improved time-to-respond to threats.
    • Helps achieve compliance with several privacy standards and regulations, improves maturity for cyber insurance premium, and fewer gaps during audits.
    • Reduced risk of data breach in any instance of a malicious attack.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Save an average of $1.76 million dollars in the event of a data breach

    • This research set seeks to help organizations develop a mature zero trust implementation which, according to IBM’s “Cost of a Data Breach 2021 Report,” saves organizations an average of $1.76 million in the event of a data breach.
    • Leverage phase 5 of this research to develop metrics to track the implementation progress and efficacy of zero trust tasks.

    43%

    Organizations with a mature implementation of zero trust saved 43%, or $1.76 million, on the costs of data breaches.
    Source: IBM, 2021

    In phase 2 of this blueprint, we will help you establish zero trust implementation tasks for your organization.

    In phase 3, we will help you develop a game plan and a roadmap for implementing those tasks.

    This image contains a screenshot info-tech's methodology for building a zero-trust roadmap, discussed earlier in this blueprint

    Executive Brief Case Study

    National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA)

    INDUSTRY: Government

    SOURCE: Zero Trust Architecture Technical Exchange Meeting

    NASA recognized the potential benefits of both adopting a zero trust architecture (including aligning with OMB FISMA and DHS CDM DEFEND) and improving NASA systems, especially those related to user experience with dynamic access, application security with sole access from proxy, and risk-based asset management with trust score. The trust score is continually evaluated from a combination of static factors, such as credential and biometrics, and dynamic factors, such as location and behavior analytics, to determine the level of access. The enhanced access mechanism is projected on use-case flows of users and external partners to analyze the required initiatives.

    The lessons learned in adapting zero trust were:

    • Focus on access to data, assets, applications, and services; and don’t select solutions or vendors too early.
    • Provide support for mobile and external partners.
    • Complete zero trust infrastructure and services design with holistic risk-based management, including network access control with software-defined networking and an identity management program.
    • Develop a zero trust strategy that aligns with mission objectives.

    Results

    NASA implemented zero trust architecture by leveraging the agency existing components on a roadmap with phases related to maturity. The initial development includes privileged access management, security user behavior analytics, and a proof-of-concept lab for evaluating the technologies.
    Case Study Source: NASA, “Planning for a Zero Trust Architecture Target State,” 2019

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5
    Call #1:
    Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #3:
    Define current security capabilities and zero trust target state.

    Call #5:

    Identify and evaluate solution criteria.

    Call #7:
    Create a process for formulating zero trust policies.

    Call #8:
    Establish metrics for assessing the implementation and effectiveness of zero trust.

    Call #2:
    Identify business goals and protect surfaces.

    Call #4:
    Identify gap-closing tasks and assign to zero trust initiatives.

    Call #6:
    Prioritize zero trust initiatives.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.
    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 2 to 4 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5

    Define Business Goals and Protect Surfaces

    Begin Gap Analysis

    Complete Gap Analysis

    Finalize Roadmap and Formulate Policies

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Understand business and IT strategy and plans.

    1.2 Define business goals.

    1.3 Identify five critical protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements.

    1.4 Map business goals and protect surfaces.

    2.1 Assess current security capabilities and define the zero Trust target state for a set of controls.

    2.2 Identify tasks to close maturity gaps.

    2.3 Assign tasks to zero trust initiatives.

    3.1 Align initiatives to business goals and key protect surfaces.

    3.2 Conduct cost/benefit analysis on zero trust initiatives.

    3.3 Prioritize initiatives.

    4.1 Define solution criteria.

    4.2 Identify candidate solutions.

    4.3 Evaluate candidate solutions.

    4.4 Finalize roadmap.

    4.5 Formulate policies for critical DAAS elements.

    4.6 Establish metrics for high-priority initiatives.

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables
    1. 1.Mapping of business goals to key protect surfaces and their associated DAAS elements
    1. Security capabilities current state assessment
    2. Zero trust target state
    3. Tasks to address maturity gaps
    1. Zero trust initiative list mapped to business goals and key protect surfaces
    2. Prioritization of zero trust initiatives
    1. Zero trust roadmap
    2. Zero trust policies for critical protect surfaces
    3. Method for defining zero trust policies for candidate solutions
    4. Metrics for high-priority initiatives
    1. Zero trust roadmap documentation
    2. Mapping of Info-Tech resources against individual initiatives

    Phase 1

    Define Business Objectives and Protect Surfaces

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify and define the business goals.
    • Identify the critical DAAS elements and protect surface.
    • Align the business goals to the protect surface and critical DAAS elements.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Business Executives
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management

    Analyze your business goals

    Identifying business goals is the first step in aligning your zero trust roadmap with your business’ vision.

    • Security leaders need to understand the direction the business is headed in.
    • Wise security investments depend on aligning your security initiatives to business objectives.
    • Zero trust, and information security at large, should contribute to your organization’s business objectives by supporting operational performance, ensuring brand protection and shareholder value.
      • For example, if the organization is working on a new business initiative that requires the handling of credit card payments, the security organization needs to know as soon as possible to ensure the zero trust architecture will be extended to protect the PCI data and enable the organization to be PCI compliant.

      Info-Tech Insight

      Security and the business need to be in alignment when implementing zero trust. Defining the business goal helps rationalize the need for a zero trust implementation.

    1.1 Define your organization’s business goals

    Estimated time 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm the business goals of the organization.
    2. Review relevant business and IT strategies.
    3. Review the business goal definitions in tab “2. Business Objectives” of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool, including the key goal indicator metrics.
    4. Record the most important business goals in the Business Goal column on tab “3. Protect Surfaces” of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than five primary goals. This limitation will be critical to help map the protect surface and the zero trust roadmap later.

    Input

    • Business and IT strategies

    Output

    • Prioritized list of business objectives

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Stakeholders
    • Risk Management
    • Compliance
    • Legal

    Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Developing a zero trust roadmap collaboratively with business stakeholders enables alignment with upcoming business priorities and industry trends.

    What does zero trust mean for you?

    For a successful implementation, focus on your zero trust outcome.

    This image describes the Who, What, When, Where, Why, and How for Zero Trust.

    Regardless of whether the user is accessing resources internally or externally, zero trust is posed to authenticate, authorize, and continuously verify the security policies and posture before access is granted or denied. Many network architecture can be local, cloud based, or hybrid and with users working from any location, there is no network perimeter as we knew it and the internet is now the corporate network.

    Zero trust framework seeks to extend the perimeter-less security to the present digital transformation.

    Understand protect surface

    Data, Application, Asset, and Services

    A protect surface can be described as what’s critical, most vulnerable, or most valuable to your organization. This protect surface could include at least one of the following – data, assets, applications, and services (DAAS) – that requires protection. This is also the area that zero trust policy is aimed to protect. Understanding what your protect surface is can help channel the required energy into protecting that which is crucial to the business, and this aligns with the shift from focusing on the attack surface to narrowing it down to a smaller and achievable area of protection.

    Anything and everything that connects to the internet is a potential attack surface and pursuing every loophole will leave us one step behind due to lack of resources. Since a protect surface contains one or more DAAS element, the micro-perimeter is created around it and the appropriate protection is applied around it. As a team, we can ask ourselves this question when thinking of our protect surface: to what degree does my organization want me to secure things? The knowledge of the answer to this question can be tied to the risk tolerance level of the organization and it is only fair for us to engage the business in identifying what the protect surface should be.

    Components of a protect surface

    • Data
    • Application
    • Asset
    • Services

    Info-Tech Insight

    The protect surface is a shift from focusing on the attack surface. DAAS elements show where the initiatives and controls associated with the zero trust pillars (Identity, Devices, Network, Application, and Data) need to be applied.

    Sample Scenario

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare

    SOURCE: Info-Tech Research Group

    Illustration

    A healthcare provider would consider personal health information a critical resource worthy of being protected against data exfiltration due to a host of reasons including but not limited to privacy regulations, loss of revenue, legal, and reputational loss; hence, this would be considered a protect surface.

    • What is the data that can’t be risked exfiltrated?
    • What application(s) is used to access this data?
    • What assets are used to generate and store the data?
    • What are the services we rely on to be able to access the data?

    DAAS Element

    • The data here is the patient information.
    • The application used to access the personal health information would be EPIC, OR list, and any other application used in that organization.
    • The assets used to store the data and generate the PHI would include physical workstations, medical scanners, etc.
    • The services that can be exploited to disrupt the operation or used to access the data would include active directory, single sign-on, etc.

    DAAS and Zero Trust Pillar

    This granular identification provides an opportunity to not only see what the protect surface and DAAS elements are but also understand where to apply security controls that align with the principle of zero trust as well as how the transaction flows. The application pillar initiatives will provide protection to the EPIC application and the device pillar initiatives will provide protection to the workstations and physical scanners. The identity pillar initiatives will apply protection to the active directory, and single sign-on services. The zero trust pillar initiatives align with the protection of the DAAS elements.

    Shift from attack surface to protect surface

    This image contains a screenshot of the thought map: Shift from attack surface to protect surface.  Go from complex to a micro perimeter approach.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The protect surface is a shift from focusing on the attack surface as it creates a micro-perimeter for the application of zero trust policies on the system. This drastically reduces the success of an attack whether internally or externally, reduces the attack surface, and is also repeatable.

    1.2 Identify critical DAAS elements

    Estimated time 1-3 hours

    1. As a group, brainstorm and identify critical, valuable, sensitive assets or resources requiring high availability in the organization. Each DAAS element is part of a protect surface, or sometimes, the DAAS element itself is a protect surface.
    • Data – The sensitive data that poses the greatest risk if exfiltrated or misused. What data needs to be protected?
    • Applications – The applications that use sensitive data or control critical assets. Which applications are critical for your business functions?
    • Assets – Physical or virtual assets, including an organization’s information technology (IT), operational technology (OT), or Internet of Things devices.
    • Services – The services an organization most depends on. Services that can be exploited to disrupt normal IT or business operations.
  • Record the critical DAAS elements and protect surface in their respective columns of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. Try to limit the number of business goals to no more than five primary protect surfaces to match with the business goals.
  • Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Input

    • Critical resources to protect
    • Understanding of how they interoperate or connect

    Output

    • Protect surfaces

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Business Stakeholders

    1.3 Map business goals to critical DAAS elements

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. The protect surface will be generated from the critical DAAS elements as a standalone protect surface or a group of interconnected DAAS elements merged into one.
    • Each protect surface can be tied back to a business objective.
  • Select from the drop-down list of business objectives the option that fits the identified protect surface as it relates to the organization.
    • Type in your business objectives if the drop-down list does not apply.

    Download the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool, with the following columns highlighted: Business Goal Name; Protect Surface Name

    Phase 2

    Assess Key Capabilities and Identify Zero Trust Initiatives

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Assess the organization’s current capabilities.
    • Define the zero trust target state.
    • Identify tasks to close gaps
    • Define zero trust initiatives and align zero trust initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    The Info-Tech Zero Trust Framework

    Info-Tech’s Zero Trust Framework aligns with zero trust references, including:

    • ACT Zero Trust Cybersecurity Current Trends. 2019
    • NIST SP 800-207: Zero Trust Architecture. 2020
    • DOD Zero Trust Reference Architecture. 2021
    • NSA Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model. 2021
    • CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model. 2021
    • Executive Order (EO) 14028: Improving the Nation’s Cybersecurity, The White House. 2021
    • OMB Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles. 2022
    • NSTAC Zero Trust and Trusted Identity Management. 2022
    • NIST SP 800-53 r5: Security and Privacy Controls for Information Systems and Organizations

    Identity

    • Authentication
    • Authorization
    • Privileged Access Management

    Applications

    • Software Defined Compute
    • DevSecOps
    • Software Supply Chain

    Devices

    • Authentication
    • Authorization
    • Compliance

    Networks

    • Software Defined Networking
    • Macro Segmentations
    • Micro Segmentation

    Data

    • Software Defined Storage
    • Data Loss Prevention
    • Data Rights Management

    Info-Tech Insight

    A best-of-breed approach ensures holistic coverage of your zero trust program while refraining from locking you into a specific reference.

    2.1 Review the Info-Tech framework

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, have the team review the framework within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Customize the tool as required using the instructions in tab “2. Setup”:
    • Define costing criteria
    • Define benefits criteria
    • Configure full-time equivalent hours and start year
    • Input business goals as mapped to protect surfaces (see next slide)

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives

    Output

    • Customized framework

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    2.1.1 Input business goals as mapped to protect surfaces

    Refer to the Protect Surface Mapping Tool, copy the following elements from the Protect Surface tab.

    1. Enter Business Goals.
    2. Enter Protect Surfaces.
    3. Enter Data.
    4. Enter Application.
    5. Enter Assets.
    6. Enter Services.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.  The Column headings are labeled as follows: 1: Business Goal Name; 2: Protect Surface; 3: DATA; 4: APPLICATION; 5: ASSETS; 6: SERVICES

    Info-Tech Insight

    Deriving protect surface elements from business goals reframes how security controls are applied. Assess control effectiveness in this context and identify zero trust capabilities to close any gaps.

    2.2 Assess current capabilities and define zero trust target state

    Estimated time 6-12 hours

    1. Using the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to complete your current-state and target-state assessment.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives
    • Information on current state of controls, including sources such as audit findings, vulnerability and penetration test results, and risk registers

    Output

    • Current-state and target-state assessment for gap analysis

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management

    Understanding security target states

    Maturity models are very effective for determining target states. This table provides general descriptions for each maturity level. As a group, consider which description most accurately reflects the ideal target state in your organization.

    AD HOC 01

    Initial/ad hoc security programs are reactive. Lacking strategic vision, these programs are less effective and less responsive to the needs of the business.

    DEVELOPING 02

    Developing security programs can be effective at what they do but are not holistic. Governance is largely absent. These programs tend to rely on the talents of individuals rather than a cohesive plan.

    DEFINED 03

    A defined security program is holistic, documented, and proactive. At least some governance is in place; however, metrics are often rudimentary and operational in nature. These programs still often rely on best practices rather than strong risk management.

    MANAGED 04

    Managed security programs have robust governance and metrics processes. Management and board-level metrics for the overall program are produced. These are reviewed by business leaders and drive security decisions. More mature risk management practices take the place of best practices.

    OPTIMIZED 05

    An optimized security program is based on strong risk management practices, including the production of key risk indicators (KRIs). Individual security services are optimized using key performance indicators (KPIs) that continually measure service effectiveness and efficiency.

    2.2.1 Conduct current-state assessment

    1. Carefully review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab that are needed for the protect surfaces. For each control, indicate the current maturity level of the organization. The tool uses the maturity levels of the CMMI model to score maturity.
    • Only use “N/A” if you are confident that the control is not required in your protect surfaces. For example, if the protect surfaces do not require or use software-defined computing, select “N/A” for any controls related to software-defined computing.
  • Provide comments to describe your current state. This step is optional but recommended as it may be important to record this information for future reference.
  • Select the target maturity for the control.
  • This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Current Maturity; 2: Current State Comments (optional); Target Maturity

    Make sure that the gap between target state and current state is achievable for the current zero trust roadmap. For instance, if you set your current maturity to 1 – Ad Hoc, then having a target maturity of 4 – Managed or 5 – Optimized is not recommended due to the big jump.

    2.2.2 Review the Gap Analysis Dashboard

    1. Use the Dashboard to map your progress on assessing current- and future-state maturities. As you fill out the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, check with the Dashboard to see the difference between your current and target state.
    2. Use the color-coded legend to see the size of the gap between your current and target state.
    3. Zero trust processes that appear white have not yet been assessed or are rated as “N/A.”
    this image contains a screenshot of Info-tech's Zero-Trust framework discussed earlier in this blueprint, with the addition of a legend demonstrating how to use the gap analysis tool to identify the size of the gap between current and target states

    2.3 Identify tasks to close gaps

    Estimated time 5 hours

    1. Using the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, review each of the controls in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Follow the instructions on the next slides to identify gap closure tasks for each control that requires improvement.
    3. For most organizations, multiple internal subject matter experts will need to be consulted to complete the assessment.

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Zero trust controls gap information

    Output

    • Gap closure task list

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management

    2.3 Identify tasks to close gaps (cont.)

    1. For each of the controls where there is a gap between the current and target state, a gap closure task should be identified:
    • Review the example tasks and copy one or more of them if appropriate. Otherwise, enter your own gap closure task.
  • Considerations for identifying gap closure tasks:
    • In small groups, have participants ask, “what would we have to do to achieve the target state?” Document these in the Gap Closure Tasks column.
    • The example gap closure tasks may be appropriate for your organization, but do not simply copy them without considering whether they are right for you.
    • Not all gaps require their own task. You can enter one task that may address multiple gaps.
    • Be aware that tasks that are along the lines of “investigate and make recommendations” may not fully close maturity gaps.
    this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column heading highlighted and numbered: 1: Gap Closure Tasks

    Make sure that the Gap Closure Tasks are SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Realistic, Timebound).

    2.4 Define tasks and initiatives

    Estimated time 2-4 hours

    1. As a group, review the gap tasks identified in the Gap Analysis tab.
    2. Using the instructions on the following slides, finalize your tab “5. Task List.”
    3. Using the instructions on the following slides, review and consolidate your tab “6. Initiative List.”

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • Gap analysis

    Output

    • Refined list of tasks
    • List of zero trust initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    2.4.1 Finalize your task list

    1. Define the gap closure task list in tab “5. Task List”:
      1. Obtain a list of all your tasks from Gap Closure Tasks column in tab “3. Gap Analysis.”
      2. Paste the list into the table in tab “5. Task List,” Task column.
    • Use Paste Values to retain the table formatting.
  • Consolidate tasks into initiatives when:
      • They have costs associated with them.
      • They require initial effort to implement and ongoing effort to maintain.
      • They must be accomplished dependently of other tasks.
    1. For each new initiative, create the initiative name on Initiative Name column in the tab “6. Initiative List.”
  • For tasks which are not incorporated into initiatives, enter a task owner and due date for each task.
  • this image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Gap analysis Tool with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Task; 2: Initiative Name; 3: (Task Owner; Due Date)

    Example: Initiative consolidation

    In the example below, we see three gap closure tasks within the Authentication process for the Identity pillar being consolidated into a single initiative “IAM modernization.”

    We can also see three gap closure tasks within the Micro Segmentation process for the Network pillar being grouped into another initiative “Network segmentation.”

    This image contains an example of Initiative Consolidation

    Info-Tech Insight

    As you go through this exercise, you may find that some tasks that you previously defined could be consolidated into an initiative.

    2.4.2 Finalize your initiative list

    1. As you go through this exercise, you may find that some tasks that you previously defined could be consolidated into an initiative.
    2. Review your final list of initiatives in tab “6. Initiative List” and make any required updates.
      1. Optionally, add a description or paste in a list of the individual gap closure actions that are associated with the initiative. This will make it easier to perform the cost and benefit analysis.
    3. Obtain a list of all gap closure tasks associated with an initiative by filtering the Initiative Name column in the Task List tab.
    4. Indicate the most appropriate pillar alignment for each initiative using the drop-down list.
      1. Refer to tab “5. Task List” for the pillar associated with an initiative under the Initiative Name column.

    This image contains a screenshot from Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, the following column headings are numbered and highlighted: 1: Initiative Name; 2: Description; 3: Pillar

    If the list of tasks is too long for the Description column, then you can also shorten the name of the tasks or group several tasks to a more general task.

    2.5 Align initiatives to business goals and protect surfaces

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. Using the instructions on the following slides, align initiatives to business goals in tab “6. Initiative List.”
    2. Using the instructions on the following slides, align initiatives to protect surfaces in tab “6. Initiative List.”

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Input

    • List of zero trust initiatives
    • Protect surfaces mapped to business objectives

    Output

    • List of zero trust initiatives aligned to business goals and protect surfaces

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    2.5.1 Align initiatives to business goals

    1. Indicate the most appropriate business goal(s) alignment for each initiative using the drop-down list in “Selection for Business Goal(s)” column.
      1. Use the legend to determine the most appropriate business goal(s).
    2. After that copy the selected business goal(s) to Business Goal(s) Alignment column.
    3. Then reset the selection using the blank cell in Selection for Business Goal(s) column.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Selection for Business Goal(s); Business Goals Alignment; 3: Selection for Business Goals

    2.5.2 Align initiatives to protect surfaces

    1. Indicate the most appropriate protect surface(s) for each initiative using the drop-down list in Selection for Protect Surface(s) column.
      1. Use the legend to determine the most appropriate protect surface(s).
    2. After that copy the selected protect surface(s) to Protect Surface(s) Coverage column.
    3. Reset the selection using the blank cell in Selection for Protect Surface(s) column.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Description; 2: Protect Surfaces Covered; 3: Selection for Protect Surfaces

    Phase 3

    Evaluate Candidate Solutions and Finalize Roadmap

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define solution criteria.
    • Identify candidate solutions.
    • Evaluate candidate solutions.
    • Perform cost/benefit analysis.
    • Prioritize initiatives and build roadmap.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Finance, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    3.1 Define solution criteria

    Estimated time 30-60 minutes

    1. As a group, review the scoring system within the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool.
    2. Customize the tool as required using the instructions on the following slides.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t let your solution dictate your roadmap. Define your zero trust solution criteria before engaging in vendor selection.

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Input

    • Zero trust initiative list

    Output

    • Zero trust candidate solutions

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    3.1.1 Define compliance and solution evaluation criteria

    On the Setup tab, provide a weight for each evaluation criterion to evaluate the candidate solutions. You can use “0%” weight if that criterion is not required in your solution selection.

    1. Verify that the Description for each criterion is accurate.
    2. Provide weights for the compliance score and the solution score, which are the overall evaluation:
    • Compliance score consists of tenets score, pillar score, threat protection score, and trust algorithm score.
    • Solution score consists of features score, usability score, affordability score, and architecture score.
    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool, which demonstrates how to define compliance and solution evaluation criteria.

    3.1.2 Define remaining evaluation criteria

    On the Setup tab, provide a weight for each evaluation criterion to evaluate the candidate solutions. You can use “0%” weight if that criterion is not required in your solution selection.

    1. Verify that the Description for each criterion is accurate.
    2. Provide weights for the remaining evaluation criteria:
    • Tenets: Considers how well each initiative aligns with zero trust principles.
    • Pillars: Considers how well each initiative aligns with zero trust pillars.
    • Threats: Considers what zero trust threats are relevant with the candidate solution.
    • Trust Algorithm: Considers trust evaluation factors, trust evaluation process score, and input coverage.
    • Cost Estimation: Considers initial costs, which are one-time, upfront capital investments (e.g. hardware and software costs), and ongoing cost, which is any annually recurring operating expenses that are new budgetary costs (e.g. licensing, maintenance, subscription fees).
    • Deployment Architecture: Considers the solutions deployment architecture capabilities.

    This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool, and demonstrates where to define additional evaluation data

    Review available candidate solutions

    this image contains a list of available candidate Solutions.  This list includes: Zero Trust Identity; Zero-Trust Application & Workloads; Zero-Trust Networks; Zero-Trust Devices; and Zero-Trust Data

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework is a comprehensive yet fast-moving approach to help you select the right software for your organization

    Five key phases sequentially add rigor to your selection efforts while giving you a clear, swift-flowing methodology to follow.

    Awareness Education & Discovery Evaluation Selection Negotiation & Configuration
    1.1 Proactively Lead Technology Optimization & Prioritization 2.1 Understand Marketplace Capabilities & Trends 3.1 Gather & Prioritize Requirements & Establish Key Success Metrics 4.1 Create a Weighted Vendor Selection Decision Model 5.1 Initiate Price Negotiation With Top
    1.2 Scope & Define the Selection Process for Each Selection Request Action 2.2 Discover Alternative Solutions & Conduct Market Education 3.2 Conduct a Data-Driven Comparison of Vendor Features & Capabilities 4.2 Conduct Investigative Interviews Focused on Mission Critical Priorities With Top 2-4 Vendors 5.2 Negotiate Contract Terms & Product Configuration Two Vendors Selected
    1.3 Conduct an Accelerated Business Needs Assessment 2.3 Evaluate Enterprise Architecture & Application Portfolio 3.3 Narrow the Field to Four Top Contenders 4.3 Validate Key Issues With Deep Technical Assessments, Trial Configuration & Reference Checks 5.3 Finalize Budget Approval & Project Implementation Timeline
    1.4 Align Stakeholder Calendars to Reduce Elapsed Time & Asynchronous Evaluation 2.4 Validate the Business Case 5.4 Invest in Training & Onboarding Assistance

    Download the Rapid Application Selection Framework research

    Evaluate software category leaders through vendor rankings and awards

    SoftwareReviews

    The Data Quadrant is a thorough evaluation and ranking of all software in an individual category to compare platforms across multiple dimensions.

    The Data Quadrant Report

    Vendors are ranked by their Composite Score, based on individual feature evaluations, user satisfaction rankings, vendor capability comparisons, and likeliness to recommend the platform.

    Vendors ranked by their Composite Score

    The Emotional Footprint is a powerful indicator of overall user sentiment toward the relationship with the vendor, capturing data across five dimensions.

    Emotional Footprint

    Vendors are ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score, which combines the overall Emotional Footprint rating with a measure of the value delivered by the solution.

    Vendors ranked by their Customer Experience (CX) Score

    Sample whiteboard activity

    • Place sticky notes on the zero trust tenet that matches with the identified candidate solution to produce “solution requirements” that can be used to develop an RFP.
    • A sample sticky note is provided below for privileged access management.

    This image contains a screenshot of a sample whiteboard activity which can be done using sticky notes.

    • The PAM solution should support MFA
    • Live session monitoring, audit, and reporting
    • Should have password vaulting to prevent privileged users from knowing the passwords to critical systems and resources

    3.2 Identify candidate solutions

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. As a group, have the team review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. On tab 3 in the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool:
    • Review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool. For example, the candidate solutions with multifactor authentication (MFA) options are authenticators with SMS, mobile application, smartcard, or token.

    Input

    • Candidate solutions for zero trust tasks and initiatives

    Output

    • Suitability evaluation of candidate solutions

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    Info-Tech Insight

    Add a description associated with the candidate solution, e.g. reference link to vendors or manufacturers. This will make it easier to perform the evaluation.

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    3.2.1 Review candidate solutions

    1. Review the candidate solutions within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool. For example, the candidate solutions with multifactor authentication (MFA) options are authenticators with SMS, mobile application, smartcard, or token.
    2. Enter candidate solutions to the Compliance Data Entry tab on the Solution column within the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool.
    3. Optionally, add a description associated with the candidate solution, e.g. reference link to vendors or manufacturers. This will make it easier to perform the evaluation.
    this image contains a screenshot of a sample candidate solution, which can be done using Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.3 Evaluate candidate solutions

    Estimated time 3 hours

    On the Scoring tab, evaluate solution features, usability, affordability, and architecture using the instructions on the following slides. This activity will produce a solution score that can be used to identify the suitability of a solution.

    Input

    • Candidate solutions

    Output

    • Candidate solutions scored

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT

    Download the Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    3.3.3 Evaluate solution scores

    After all candidate solutions are evaluated, the Solution Score column can be sorted to rank the candidate solutions. After sorting, the top solutions can be used on prioritization of initiatives on Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. On Features
      1. Enter Coverage.
      2. Enter Quality.
    2. Enter Usability.
    3. On Affordability
      1. Enter Initial Cost.
      2. Enter Ongoing Cost (annual).
    4. Enter Architecture.
    this image contains a screenshot of how you can sort the solution score column in Info-Tech's Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.4 Perform cost/benefit analysis

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. Assign costing and benefits information for each initiative, following the instructions on the next slide.
    2. Define dependencies or business impacts if they will help with prioritization.

    Input

    • Ranked candidate solutions
    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list

    Output

    • Completed cost/benefit analysis for initiative list

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool
    • Zero Trust Candidate Solutions Selection Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, Facilities, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.4.1 Complete the cost/benefit analysis

    Use Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. On the Prioritization tab, use the drop-down lists to enter the estimated costs and efforts for each initiative, using the criteria defined earlier.
    • Use the result from candidate selection to define the estimated costs.
    • If you have actual costs available, you can optionally enter them under the Detailed Cost Estimates columns.
  • Enter the estimated benefits, also using the criteria defined earlier.
  • This image contains a screenshot of a cost/benefit analysis table which can be found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    The Cost / Effort Rating is calculated based on the weight defined on step 2.1.1. The Benefit Rating is calculated based on the weight defined on step 2.1.2.

    3.4.2 Optionally enter detailed cost estimates

    Use Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. For each initiative, the tool will automatically populate the Detailed Cost Estimates and Detailed Staffing Estimates columns using the averages that you provided in step 2.1.1. However, if you have more detailed data about the costs and effort requirements for an initiative, you can override the calculated data by manually entering it into these columns. For example:
    • You are planning to subscribe to a security awareness vendor, and you have a quote from them specifying that the initial cost will be $75,000.
    • You have defined your “Medium” cost range as being “$10-100K,” so you select medium as your initial cost for this initiative in step 3.4.1. As you defined the average for medium costs as being $50,000, this is what the tool will put into the detailed cost estimate.
    • You can override this average by entering $75,000 as the initial cost in the detailed cost estimate column.

    This image contains a screenshot of a sample cost/benefit table found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    The Benefits-Cost column will give results after comparing the cost and the benefit. Negative value means that the cost outweighs the benefit. Positive value means that the benefit outweighs the cost. Zero value means that the cost equals the benefit.

    3.5 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated time 2-3 hours

    1. As a group, review the results of the cost/benefit analysis. Optionally, complete the Other Considerations columns in the Prioritization tab:
    • Dependencies can refer to other initiatives on the list or any other dependency that relates to activities or projects within the organization.
    • Business impacts can be helpful to document as they may require additional planning and communication that could impact initiative timelines.
  • Follow step 3.5.1 to create a visual effort map for your organization.
  • Follow step 3.5.2 and 3.5.3 to refine the effort map’s visual output.
  • Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Initiative list
    • Cost/benefit analysis

    Output

    • Prioritized list of initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.5.1 Create a visual effort map for your organization

    1 hour

    An effort map is a tool used for the visualization of a cost and benefit analysis. It is a quadrant output that visually shows how your gap initiatives were prioritized based on tab 7 in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    1. Establish the axes and colors for your effort map:
      1. X-axis represents the Benefit value from column J
      2. Y-axis represents the Cost/Effort value from column H
      3. Sticky note color is determined using the Alignment to Business value from column I
    2. Create sticky notes for each initiative and place them on the effort map or whiteboard based on the axes you have created with the help of your team.
    3. As you place initiatives on the visual effort map, discuss and modify rankings based on team member input.

    this image contains a sample visual effort map which can be found in the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.

    Input

    • Outputs from activities 3.4.1 and 3.4.2

    Output

    • High-level prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • Visual representation of quantitative values

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    3.5.2 Refine the effort map’s visual output

    1 hour

    Once the effort map is complete, work to further simplify the visual output by categorizing initiatives based on the quadrant in which they have been placed.

    1. Before moving forward with the initiative wave prioritization (activity 3.7), identify any initiatives listed across all quadrants that are required as a part of compliance and mark with a sticky dot.
    2. Document these initiatives as Execution Wave 1.

    this image contains a screenshot of a refined visual effort map, which can be done by following the instructions in this section.

    Input

    • Outputs from activity 3.5.1

    Output

    • Prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • First execution wave of gap-closing initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Sticky dots
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    3.5.3 Refine the effort map’s visual output

    30 minutes

    1. Use a separate area of the whiteboard to draw out four to five Execution Wave columns.
    2. Group initiatives into each Execution Wave column based on their placement within the quadrant from activities 3.5.1 and 3.5.2.
      1. Ensure that all identified mandatory activities as per governing privacy law fall within the first wave.
      2. Leverage the following 0-4 Execution Wave scale:
        1. Underway –Initiatives that are already underway
        2. Must Do – Initiatives that must happen right away
        3. Should Do – Initiatives that should happen but need more time/support
        4. Could Do – Initiatives that are not a priority
        5. Won’t Do – Initiatives that likely won’t be carried out
    3. Indicate the granular level for each execution wave using the a-z scale.
    • Use the lettering to track dependencies between initiatives.
      • If one must take place before another, ensure that its letter comes first alphabetically.
      • If multiple initiatives must take place at the same time, use the same letter to show they will take place in tandem.

    This image depicts the sample output for a refined visual effort map

    Input

    • Outputs from activity 3.5.2

    Output

    • Prioritization for each of the gap-closing initiatives
    • First execution wave of gap-closing initiatives

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool (tab 7)
    • Sticky notes
    • Sticky dots
    • Markers
    • Whiteboard

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Wave assignment example

    In the example below, we see “IAM modernization” was assessed as 9 on cost/effort rating and 5 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a positive value of 1. We can label this as SHOULD DO (wave 2).

    We can also see “Network segmentation” was assessed as 6 on cost/effort rating and 4 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a positive value of 2. We can label this as MUST DO (wave 1).

    We can also see “Unified Endpoints Management” was assessed as 8 on cost/effort rating and 2 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a negative value of -4. We can label this as WON’T DO (no wave).

    We can also see “Data Protection” was assessed as 4 on cost/effort rating and 2 on benefit rating and its Benefits-Cost has a zero value. We can label this as COULD DO (wave 3).

    This image depicts a sample wave assignment output, discussed in this section.

    It is recommended to define the threshold of each wave based on the value of Benefits-Cost before assigning waves.

    3.6 Build roadmap

    Estimated time 2-3 hours

    1. As a group, follow step 3.6.1 to create your roadmap by scheduling initiatives into the Gantt chart within the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool.
    2. Review the roadmap for resourcing conflicts and adjust as required.
    3. Review the final cost and effort estimates for the roadmap.

    Input

    • Gap analysis
    • Cost/benefit analysis
    • Prioritized initiative list

    Output

    • Zero trust roadmap

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • IT Leadership
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    3.6.1 Schedule initiatives using the Gantt chart

    1. On the Gantt Chart tab for each initiative, enter an owner (the role who will be primarily responsible for execution).
    2. Additionally, enter a start month and year for the initiative and the expected duration in months.
    • You can filter the Wave column to only see specific waves at any one time to assist with the scheduling.
    • You do not need to schedule Wave 4 initiatives as the expectation is that these initiatives will not be done.
    • This Image contains a screenshot of the Gantt Chart, with the following column headings highlighted and numbered: 1: Owner; 2: Expected Duration

    3.6.2 Review your roadmap

    1. When you have completed the Gantt chart, as a group review the overall roadmap to ensure that it is reasonable for your organization. Consider the following:
    • Do you have other IT or business projects planned during this time frame that may impact your resourcing or scheduling?
    • Does your organization have regular change freezes throughout the year that will impact the schedule?
    • Do you have over-subscribed resources? You can filter the list on the Owner column to identify potential over-subscription of resources.
    • Have you considered any long vacations, sabbaticals, parental leaves, or other planned longer-term absences?
    • Are your initiatives adequately aligned to your budget cycle? For instance, if you have an initiative that is expected to make recommendations for capital expenditure, it must be completed prior to budget planning.

    This image depicts an example roadmap which can be created following the use of the Gantt Chart

    3.6.3 Review your cost/effort estimates table

    1. Once you have completed your roadmap, review the total cost/effort estimates. This can be found in a table on the Results tab. This table will provide initial and ongoing costs and staffing requirements for each wave. This also includes the total three-year investment. In your review consider:
    • Is this investment realistic? Will completion of your roadmap require adding more staff or funding than you otherwise expected?
    • If the investment seems unrealistic, you may need to revisit some of your assumptions, potentially reducing target levels or increasing the amount of time to complete the strategy.

    This table provides you with the information to have important conversations with management and stakeholders.

    This image contains an example of the Zero Trust Roadmap Cost/Effort Estimates.  The column headings are as follows: Wave; Number of Initiatives; Initial Implementation - Cost; Initial Implementation - Effort; Ongoing Maintenance - Cost; Ongoing Maintenance - Effort.  A separate table is shown with the column heading: Estimated Total Three Year Investment

    Phase 4

    Formulate Policies for Roadmap Initiatives

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Formulate zero trust policies for critical DAAS elements.
    • Formulate zero trust policies to secure a path to access critical DAAS elements.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    Understand the zero trust policy

    Use the Kipling methodology as a vendor agnostic approach to identify appropriate allow list elements when deploying multiple zero trust solutions.
    The policies help to prevent lateral movement.

    Who Who should access a resource? Here, the user ID that identifies the users through the principle of least privilege is allowed access to a particular resource. The authentication policy will be used to verify identity of a user when access request to a resource is made. Who requires MFA?
    What What application is used to access the resource? Application ID to identify applications that are only allowed on the network. Port control policies can be used for the application service.
    When When do users access the resource? Policy that identifies and enforces time schedule when an application accessed by users is used.
    Where Where is the resource located? The location of the destination resource should be added to the policy and, where possible, restrict the source of the traffic either by zone and/or IP address.
    Why Why is the data accessed? Data classification should be done to know why the data needs protection and the type of protection (data filtering).
    How How should you allow access to the resource? This covers the protection of the application traffic. Principle of least privilege access, log all traffic, configure security profiles, NGFW, decryption and encryption, consistent application of policy and threat prevention across all locations for all local and remote users on managed and unmanaged endpoints are ways to apply content-ID.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The success of a zero trust implementation relies on enforcing policies consistently. Applying the Kipling methodology to the protect surface is the best way to design zero trust policies.

    4.1.1 Formulate policy

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    1. As a group, review the protect surface(s) identified in phase one, and using the Kipling methodology from the previous slide, formulate a policy. Each policy can be reviewed repeatedly until we are sure it satisfies the goal.
    2. The policy created should be consistent for both cloud and on-prem environments.
    3. As an example, let's use the healthcare scenario found in tab 3 of the Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool. The protect surface used is "Automated Medication Dispensing." Another example will be "Salesforce" accessed via the cloud.
    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID
    On-Prem Pyxis_Users Pyxis Any Pyxis_server Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic
    Cloud Sales Salesforce Working hours Canada Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic

    Input

    • Kipling methodology
    • Protect surface

    Output

    • Zero trust policy

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    4.1.2 Apply policy

    1-2 hours

    1. Place each protect surface in its own microperimeter. Each microperimeter should be segmented by a next-generation firewall or authentication broker that will serve as a segmentation gateway.
    2. Name the microperimeter and place it on a firewall.

    Input

    • Kipling methodology
    • Protect surface

    Output

    • Zero trust policy

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Sticky Notes
    • Zero Trust Protect Surface Mapping Tool

    Participants

    • CIO
    • CISO
    • Business Executives
    • IT Manager
    • Security Team

    Microperimeter A
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    Microperimeter B
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    Microperimeter C
    Protect Surface:
    DAAS Elements:

    Who What When Where Why How
    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID

    4.2 Secure a path to access critical DAAS elements

    How should you allow access to the resource?

    This component makes up the final piece of formulating the policies as it applies the protection of the application traffic.

    The principle of least privilege is applied to the security policy to only allow access requests and restrict the access to the purpose it serves. This access request is then logged as well as the traffic (both internal and external). Most firewalls (NGFW) have policy rules that, by default, enable logging.

    Segmentation gateways (NGFW, VM-series firewalls, agent-based and clientless VPN solutions), are used to apply zero trust policy (Kipling methodology) in the network, cloud, and endpoint (managed and unmanaged) for all local and remote users.

    These policies need to be applied to security profiles on all allowed traffic. Some of these profiles include but are not limited to the following: URL filtering profile for web access and protect against phishing attacks, vulnerability protection profile intrusion prevention systems, anti spyware profiles to protect against command-and-control threats, malware and antivirus profile to protect against malware, and a file blocking profile to block and/or alert suspicious file types.

    Good visibility on your network can also be tied to decryption as you can inspect traffic and data to the lowest level possible that is generally accepted by your organization and in compliance with regulation.

    Conceptualized flow

    With users working from anywhere on managed and unmanaged devices, access to the internet, SAAS, public cloud, and the data center will have consistent policies applied regardless of their location.

    The policy is validating that the user is who they say they are based on the role profile, what they are trying to access to make sure their role or attribute profile has the appropriate permission to the application, and within the stipulated time limit. Where the data or application is located is also verified and the why needs to be satisfied before the requested access is granted. Based on the mentioned policies, the how element is then applied throughout the lifecycle of the access.

    Who

    (Internet)

    What

    (SAAS)

    When

    Where

    (Public Cloud)

    Why

    How

    (Data Center)

    Method User-ID App-ID Time limit System Object Classification Content-ID
    On-Prem Pyxis_Users Pyxis Any Pyxis_server Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic
    Cloud Sales Salesforce Working hours Canada Severe (high value data) Decrypt, Inspect, log traffic

    Phase 5

    Monitor Zero Trust Roadmap Deployment

    Build a Zero Trust Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Establish metrics for roadmap tasks.
    • Track metrics for roadmap tasks.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    5.1 Establish metrics for roadmap tasks

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, identify metrics to measure implementation and efficacy of tasks
    2. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, document metric metadata.
    3. On the Prioritization tab, use the drop-down lists to enter the estimated costs and efforts for each initiative, using the criteria defined earlier.
    • If you have actual costs available, you can optionally enter them under the Detailed Cost Estimates columns.
  • Enter the estimated benefits, also using the criteria defined earlier.
  • Input

    • Zero trust roadmap task list

    Output

    • Metrics for measuring zero trust task implementation and efficacy

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    5.1.1 Identify metrics to measure implementation and efficacy of tasks

    Estimated time 3-4 hours

    1. On tab “2. Task & Metric Register” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, for each section defined in columns C and D, enter zero trust implementation tasks into column E. If you completed the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool, use the tasks identified there to populate column E.
    2. For each task, identify in column F any metrics that will communicate implementation progress and/or implementation efficacy.
    • If multiple metrics are needed for a single task, we recommend expanding the size of the row and adding additional metrics onto a new line in the same row. A sample is provided in the tool.

    this image contains a screenshot of tab 2 in the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    To measure the efficacy of a zero trust implementation, ensure you know what a successful zero trust implementation means for your organization, and define metrics that demonstrate whether that success is being realized.

    5.1.2 Document metric metadata

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    For each metric defined in step 4.1.1:

    1. Identify in column G whether the metric can be measured now (Phase 1), measured in a few months’ time (Phase 2), or measured in a few years’ time (Phase 3).
    2. Identify in columns H through M who is responsible for collecting the metric (Person Source), who/what is consulted to collect the metric (Technology Source), who compiles the collected metric into dashboards and presentations (Compiler), and who is informed of the measurement of the metric (Audience).
    • Add more columns under the Audience category if needed.
    • Use “X” to identify if an audience group will be informed of the measurement of the metric.
  • Identify in columns N through P the target for the metric (Metric Target), the effort it takes to collect the metric (Effort to Collect), the frequency with which the organizations plans to collect the metric (Frequency of Collection), and any comments that people should know when collecting, compiling, or presenting metrics.
  • This image contains a screenshot from the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Priority; 2: Roles and Responsibilities; 3: effort to collect; frequency of collection; Metric Target; Comments

    5.2 Track and report metrics

    Estimated time 2 hours

    1. In the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, copy and paste metrics you plan to track in the tool from column F on tab 2 to column B on tab 3.
    2. Use tab 3 to identify collection frequency, metric target, and measurements collected for each metric. Add notes or comments to each metric or measurement to track contextual elements that could affect metric measurements.
    3. Leverage the graphs on tab 4 to communicate metrics to the appropriated audience groups, as defined in tab 2.

    Input

    • Metrics for measuring zero trust task implementation and efficacy

    Output

    • Metric data and graphs for presenting zero trust implementation metrics to audience groups

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    5.2.1 Record baseline measurements for metrics

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    On tab “3. Track Metrics” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    1. Copy and paste the metrics from Column F on tab “2. Task & Metric Register” that you want to track into Column B of this tab.
    2. For each metric, record the frequency of collection (Collection Frequency) and the metric target (Target) by referencing columns O and P on tab “2. Task & Metric Register.”
    3. Begin to record baseline/initial values for each metric in column E. Rename columns to match your highest frequency of collection.
      (e.g. if any metric is being measured monthly, there should be one column per month)
    4. Over time, conduct measurements of your metrics and store them in the table below.
    5. Add notes, as necessary.

    this image contains a screenshot of tab 3 of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool, with the following column headings numbered: 1: Your Metrics; 2: Collection Frequency; Target; 3: Jan; 4: Metric Measurements; 5: Notes

    5.2.2 Report metric health to audience groups

    Estimated time 1-2 hours

    On tab “4. Graphs” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    1. The Overall Metric Health gauge at the top of this tab presents the average percentage away from meeting metric targets for all metrics being tracked. To calculate this value, the differences between the most recent measurements and target values for each metric are averaged.
    2. Below the Overall Metric Health gauge, use the drop-down list in cell D9 to select one of the metrics from tab “3. Track Metrics.”
    3. Six different graphic representations of the tracked data for the selected metric will populate.

    Copy and paste desired graphs into presentations for audience members identified in step 5.1.2.

    This image contains a screenshot from tab “4. Graphs” of the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool:

    5.3 Build a communication deck

    Estimated time 2 hours

    Leverage the Zero Trust Communication Deck to showcase the work that you have done in the tools and activities associated with this research.

    In this communication deck template, you will find the following sections:

    • Introduction
    • Protect Surfaces
    • Zero Trust Gap Analysis
    • Zero Trust Initiatives & Tasks

    Input

    • Protect surfaces mapped to business goals
    • Zero trust program gap analysis
    • Zero trust roadmap initiatives and tasks
    • Zero trust metrics

    Output

    • Communication deck for zero trust strategy

    Materials

    • Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Participants

    • Security Team
    • Subject Matter Experts From IT, HR, Legal, Facilities, Compliance, Audit, Risk Management
    • Project Management Office

    Download the Zero Trust Communication Deck

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Knowledge Gained

    • Knowledge of protect surfaces and the business goals protecting them supports
    • Comprehensive knowledge of zero trust current state and summary initiatives required to achieve zero trust objectives
    • Assessment of which solutions for zero trust tasks and initiatives are the most appropriate for the organization
    • A defined set of security metrics assessing zero trust implementation progress and efficacy

    Deliverables Completed

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop

    To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.

    Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    This is a picture of an Info-Tech Account Representative
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust Program Gap Analysis Tool

    Assess current security capabilities and build a roadmap of tasks and initiatives that close maturity gaps.

    Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    This is a screenshot from the Zero Trust Progress Monitoring Tool

    Identify and track metrics for zero trust tasks and initiatives.

    Research Contributors

    • Aaron Benson, CME Group, Director of IAM Governance
    • Brad Mateski, Zones, Solutions Architect for CyberSecurity
    • Bob Smock, Info-Tech Research Group, Vice President of Consulting
    • Dr. Chase Cunningham, Ericom Software, Chief Strategy Officer
    • John Kindervag, ON2IT Cybersecurity, Senior Vice President, Cybersecurity Strategy and ON2IT Group Fellow
    • John Zhao, Fonterra, Enterprise Security Architect
    • Rongxing Lu, University of New Brunswick, Associate Professor
    • Sumanta Sarkar, University of Warwick, Assistant Professor
    • Tim Malone, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Director Information Security
    • Vana Matte, J.B. Hunt Transport, Senior Vice President of Technology Services

    Related Info-Tech Research

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Build an Information Security Strategy

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Info-Tech has developed a highly effective approach to building an information security strategy – an approach that has been successfully tested and refined for over seven years with hundreds of organizations. This unique approach includes tools for ensuring alignment with business objectives, assessing organizational risk and stakeholder expectations, enabling a comprehensive current-state assessment, prioritizing initiatives, and building out a security roadmap.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness.

    Determine Your Zero Trust Readiness

    IT security was typified by perimeter security. However, the way the world does business has mandated a change to IT security. In response, zero trust is a set of principles that can add flexibility to planning your IT security strategy.

    Use this blueprint to determine your zero trust readiness and understand how zero trust can benefit both security and the business.

    This is a screenshot from Info-Tech's Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Mature Your Identity and Access Management Program

    Many organizations are looking to improve their identity and access management (IAM) practices but struggle with where to start and whether all areas of IAM have been considered. This blueprint will help you improve the organization's identity and access management practices by following our three-phase methodology:

    • Assess identity and access requirements
    • Identify initiatives using the identity lifecycle
    • Prioritize initiatives and build a roadmap

    Bibliography

    • “2021 Data Breach Investigations Report.” Verizon, 2021. Web.
    • “A Zero-Trust Strategy Has 3 Needs - Identify, Authenticate, and Monitor Users and Devices On and Off The Network.” Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    • “Applying Zero Trust Principles to Enterprise Mobility.” CISA, March 2022. Web.
    • Biden Jr., Joseph R. “Executive Order on Improving the Nation’s Cybersecurity.” The White House, 12 May 2021. Web.
    • “CISA Zero Trust Maturity Model.” CISA - Cybersecurity Division, June 2021. Web.
    • “Continuous Diagnostics and Mitigation Program Overview.” CISA, Jan. 2022. Web.
    • Contributor. “The Five Business Benefits of a Zero Trust Approach to Security.” Security Brief - Australia, 19 Aug. 2020. Web.
    • “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021.” IBM, July 2021. Web.
    • English, Melanie. “5 Stats That Show The Cost Saving Effect of Zero Trust.” Teramind, 29 Sept. 2021. Web.
    • “Improve Application Access and Security With Fortinet Zero Trust Network Access.” Fortinet, 2 March 2021. Web.
    • “Incorporating Zero-trust Strategies for Secure Network and Application Access.” Fortinet, 21 July 2021. Web.
    • Jakkal, Vasu. “Zero Trust Adoption Report: How Does Your Organization Compare?” Microsoft, 28 July 2021. Web.
    • “Jericho Forum™ Commandments.” The Open Group, Jericho Forum, May 2007. Web.
    • Johnson, Derrick. “Zero Trust vs. SASE - Here's What You Need to Know.” Security Magazine, 23 July 2021. Web.
    • Joint Defense Information Systems Agency (DISA) and National Security Agency (NSA) Zero Trust Engineering Team. “Department of Defense (DOD) Zero Trust Reference Architecture.” DoD CIO, Feb. 2021. Web.
    • Kay, Dennis. “Planning for a Zero Trust Architecture Target State.” NASA, NIST, 13 Nov. 2019. Web.
    • National Security Agency. “Embracing a Zero Trust Security Model.” U.S. Department of Defense, Feb. 2021. Web.
    • NSTAC. “Draft Report to the President - Zero Trust and Trusted Identity Management.” CISA, NSTAC, n.d. Web.
    • Rose, Scott W., et al. “Zero Trust Architecture.” NIST, 10 Aug. 2020. Web.
    • “Securing Digital Innovation Demands Zero-Trust Access.” Fortinet, 15 July 2021. Web.
    • Shackleford, Dave. “How to Create a Comprehensive Zero Trust Strategy.” SANS, Cisco, 2 Sept. 2020. Web.
    • “The CISO’s Guide to Effective Zero-Trust Access.” Fortinet, 28 April 2021. Web.
    • “The State of Zero Trust Security 2021.” Okta, June 2021. Web.
    • Kerman, Alper, et al. “Implementing a Zero Trust Architecture.” NIST - National Cybersecurity Center of Excellence, March 2020. Web.
    • Kindervag, John. “Keynote - John KINDERVAG - 021622.” Vimeo, VIRTUAL Eastern | CyberSecurity Conference, 16 Feb. 2022. Web.
    • Lodewijkx, Koos. “IBM CISO Perspective: Zero Trust Changes Security From Something You Do to Something You Have.” SecurityIntelligence, IBM, 19 Nov. 2020. Web.
    • VB Staff. “Report: Only 21% of Enterprises Use Zero Trust Architecture.” VentureBeat, 15 Feb. 2022. Web.
    • Young, Shalanda D. “Moving the U.S. Government Toward Zero Trust Cybersecurity Principles.” The White House, EXECUTIVE OFFICE OF THE PRESIDENT - OFFICE OF MANAGEMENT AND BUDGET, 26 Jan. 2022. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Access.” Fortinet, n.d. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Architecture Technical Exchange Meeting.” NIST - National Cybersecurity Center of Excellence, 12 Nov. 2019. Web.
    • “Zero Trust Cybersecurity Current Trends.” ACT-IAC, 18 April 2019. Web.
    • “Zero-Trust Access for Comprehensive Visibility and Control.” Fortinet, 24 Sep. 2020. Web.

    Deliver a Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}484|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $4,339 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • The scope of service that the service desk must provide has expanded. With the growing complexity of technologies to support, it becomes easy to forget the customer service side of the equation. Meanwhile, customer expectations for prompt, frictionless, and exceptional service from anywhere have grown.
    • IT departments struggle to hire and retain talented service desk agents with the right mix of technical and customer service skills.
    • Some service desk agents don’t believe or understand that customer service is an integral part of their role.
    • Many IT leaders don’t ask for feedback from users to know if there even is a customer service problem.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • There’s a common misconception that customer service skills can’t be taught, so no effort is made to improve those skills.
    • Even when there is a desire to improve customer service, it’s hard for IT teams to make time for training and improvement when they’re too busy trying to keep up with tickets.
    • A talented service desk agent with both great technical and customer service skills doesn’t have to be a rare unicorn, and an agent without innate customer service skills isn’t a lost cause. Relevant and impactful customer service habits, techniques, and skills can be taught through practical, role-based training.
    • IT leaders can make time for this training through targeted, short modules along with continual on-the-job coaching and development.

    Impact and Result

    • Good customer service is critical to the success of the service desk. How a service desk treats its customers will determine its customers' satisfaction with not only IT but also the company as a whole.
    • Not every technician has innate customer service skills. IT managers need to provide targeted, practical training on what good customer service looks like at the service desk.
    • One training session is not enough to make a change. Leaders must embed the habits, create a culture of engagement and positivity, provide continual coaching and development, regularly gather customer feedback, and seek ways to improve.

    Deliver a Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should deliver customer service training to your team, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    • Deliver a Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department – Executive Brief
    • Deliver a Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department Storyboard

    1. Deliver customer service training to your IT team

    Understand the importance of customer service training, then deliver Info-Tech's training program to your IT team.

    • Customer Service Training for the Service Desk – Training Deck
    • Customer Focus Competency Worksheet
    • Cheat Sheet: Service Desk Communication
    • Cheat Sheet: Service Desk Written Communication
    [infographic]

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}172|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $54,542 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Architecture & Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /architecture-and-strategy

    Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor:

    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You cannot outsource application strategy.
    • Modern software options have lessened the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. But your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require centralized oversight to ensure the best overall return on investment.
    • Application portfolio management is the mechanism to ensure that the applications in your enterprise are delivering value and support for your value streams and business capabilities. Understanding value, satisfaction, technical health, and total cost of ownership are critical to digital transformation, modernization, and roadmaps.

    Impact and Result

    Build an APM program that is actionable and fit for size:

    • Understand your current state, needs, and goals for your application portfolio management.
    • Create an application and platform inventory that is built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps with business priorities and communicate risk in operational terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support your applications.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Deck – A guide that helps you establish your core application inventory, simplified rationalization, redundancy comparison, and modernization roadmap.

    Enterprises have more applications than they need and rarely apply oversight to monitor the health, cost, and relative value of applications to ensure efficiency and minimal risk. This blueprint will help you build a streamlined application portfolio management process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations – Phases 1-4

    2. Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool – A tool that assesses your current application portfolio.

    Visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices will help inform and guide your next steps.

    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    3. Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook – A template that builds your application portfolio management playbook.

    Capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    • Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    4. Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool – A tool that stores application information and allows you to execute rationalization and build a portfolio roadmap.

    This tool is the central hub for the activities within Application Portfolio Management Foundations.

    • Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Your Foundations

    The Purpose

    Work with key corporate stakeholders to come to a shared understanding of the benefits and aspects of application portfolio management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Establish the goals of APM.

    Set the scope of APM responsibilities.

    Establish business priorities for the application portfolio.

    Activities

    1.1 Define goals and metrics.

    1.2 Define application categories.

    1.3 Determine steps and roles.

    1.4 Weight value drivers.

    Outputs

    Set short- and long-term goals and metrics.

    Set the scope for applications.

    Set the scope for the APM process.

    Defined business value drivers.

    2 Improve Your Inventory

    The Purpose

    Gather information on your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Populated inventory based on your and your team’s current knowledge.

    Understanding of outstanding data and a plan to collect it.

    Activities

    2.1 Populate inventory.

    2.2 Assign business capabilities.

    2.3 Review outstanding data.

    Outputs

    Initial application inventory

    List of areas of redundancy

    Plan to collect outstanding data

    3 Gather Application Information

    The Purpose

    Work with the application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Dispositions for individual applications

    Application rationalization framework

    Activities

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.3 Assess TCO.

    3.4 Assess technical health.

    3.5 Assess redundancies.

    3.6 Determine dispositions.

    Outputs

    Business value score for individual applications

    End-user satisfaction scores for individual applications

    TCO score for individual applications

    Technical health scores for individual applications

    Feature-level assessment of redundant applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual applications

    4 Gather, Assess, and Select Dispositions

    The Purpose

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Prioritized initiatives

    Initial application portfolio roadmap

    Ongoing structure of APM

    Activities

    4.1 Prioritize initiatives

    4.2 Populate roadmap.

    4.3 Determine ongoing APM cadence.

    4.4 Build APM action plan.

    Outputs

    Prioritized new potential initiatives.

    Built an initial portfolio roadmap.

    Established an ongoing cadence of APM activities.

    Built an action plan to complete APM activities.

    Further reading

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Analyst Perspective

    You can’t outsource accountability.

    Many lack visibility into their overall application portfolio, focusing instead on individual projects or application development. Inevitably, application sprawl creates process and data disparities, redundant applications, and duplication of resources and stands as a significant barrier to business agility and responsiveness. The shift from strategic investment to application maintenance creates an unnecessary constraint on innovation and value delivery.

    With the rise and convenience of SAAS solutions, IT has an increasing need to discover and support all applications in the organization. Unmanaged and unsanctioned applications can lead to increased reputational risk. What you don’t know WILL hurt you.

    You can outsource development, you can even outsource maintenance, but you cannot outsource accountability for the portfolio. Organizations need a holistic dashboard of application performance and dispositions to help guide and inform planning and investment discussions. Application portfolio management (APM) can’t tell you why something is broken or how to fix it, but it is an important tool to determine if an application’s value and performance are up to your standards and can help meet your future goals.

    The image contains a picture of Hans Eckman.

    Hans Eckman
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group


    Is this research right for you?

    Research Navigation

    Managing your application portfolio is essential regardless of its size or whether your software is purchased or developed in house. Each organization must have some degree of application portfolio management to ensure that applications deliver value efficiently and that their risk or gradual decline in technical health is appropriately limited.

    Your APM goals

    If this describes your primary goal(s)

    • We are building a business case to determine where and if APM is needed now.
    • We want to understand how well supported are our business capabilities, departments, or core functions by our current applications.
    • We want to start our APM program with our core or critical applications.
    • We want to build our APM inventory for less than 150 applications (division, department, operating unit, government, small enterprise, etc.).
    • We want to start simple with a quick win for our 150 most important applications.
    • We want to start with an APM pilot before committing to an enterprise APM program.
    • We need to rationalize potentially redundant and underperforming applications to determine which to keep, replace, or retire.
    • We want to start enterprise APM, with up to 150 critical applications.
    • We want to collect and analyze detailed information about our applications.
    • We need tools to help us calculate total cost of ownership (TCO) and value.
    • We want to customize our APM journey and rationalization.
    • We want to build a formal communication strategy for our APM program.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    • Organizations consider application oversight a low priority and app portfolio knowledge is poor.
    • No dedicated or centralized effort to manage the app portfolio means no single source of truth is available to support informed decision making.
    • Organizations acquire more applications over time, creating redundancy, waste, and the need for additional support.
    • Organizations are more vulnerable to changing markets. Flexibility and growth are compromised when applications are unadaptable or cannot scale.
    • APM implies taking a holistic approach and compiling multiple priorities and perspectives.
    • Organizations have limited time to act strategically or proactively and need to be succinct.
    • Uncertainties on business value prevent IT from successfully advising software decision making.
    • IT knows its technical debt but struggles to get the business to act on technical risks.
    • Attempts at exposing these problems rarely gain buy-in and discourage the push for improvement.
    • Think low priority over no priority.
    • Integrate these tasks into your mixed workload.
    • Create an inventory built for better decision making.
    • Rationalize your apps in accordance with business priorities and communicate risks on their terms.
    • Create a roadmap that improves communication between those who own, manage, and support an application.
    • Build your APM process fit for size.

    Info-Tech Insight: You can’t outsource strategy.

    Modern software options have decreased the need for organizations to have robust in-house application management capabilities. Your applications’ future and governance of the portfolio still require a centralized IT oversight to ensure the best return on investment.

    The top IT challenges for SE come from app management

    #1 challenge small enterprise owners face in their use of technology:

    Taking appropriate security precautions

    24%

    The costs of needed upgrades to technology

    17%

    The time it takes to fix problems

    17%

    The cost of maintaining technology

    14%

    Lack of expertise

    9%

    Breaks in service

    7%
    Source: National Small Business Association, 2019

    Having more applications than an organization needs means unnecessarily high costs and additional burden on the teams who support the applications. Especially in the case of small enterprises, this is added pressure the IT team cannot afford.

    A poorly maintained portfolio will eventually hurt the business more than it hurts IT.

    Legacy systems, complex environments, or anything that leads to a portfolio that can’t adapt to changing business needs will eventually become a barrier to business growth and accomplishing objectives. Often the blame is put on the IT department.

    56%

    of small businesses cited inflexible technology as a barrier to growth

    Source: Salesforce as quoted by Tech Republic, 2019

    A hidden and inefficient application portfolio is the root cause of so many pains experienced by both IT and the business.

    • Demand/Capacity Imbalance
    • Overspending
    • Security and Business Continuity Risk
    • Delays in Delivery
    • Barriers to Growth

    APM comes at a justified cost

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate APM and the costs.

    The benefits of APM

    APM identifies areas where you can reduce core spending and reinvest in innovation initiatives.

    Other benefits can include:

    • Fewer redundancies
    • Less risk
    • Less complexity
    • Improved processes
    • Flexibility
    • Scalability

    APM allows you to better understand and set the direction of your portfolio

    Application Inventory

    The artifact that documents and informs the business of your application portfolio.

    Application Rationalization

    The process of collecting information and assessing your applications to determine recommended dispositions.

    Application Alignment

    The process of revealing application information through interviewing stakeholders and aligning to business capabilities.

    Application Roadmap

    The artifact that showcases the strategic directions for your applications over a given timeline.

    Application Portfolio Management (APM):

    The ongoing practice of:

    • Providing visibility into applications across the organization.
    • Recommending corrections or enhancements to decision makers.
    • Aligning delivery teams on priority.
    • Showcasing the direction of applications to stakeholders.

    Create a balanced approach to value delivery

    Enterprise Agility and Value Realization

    Product Lifecycle Management

    Align your product and service improvement and execution to enterprise strategy and value realization in three key areas: defining your products and services, aligning product/service owners, and developing your product vision.

    Product Delivery Lifecycle (Agile DevOps)

    Enhance business agility by leveraging an Agile mindset and continuously improving your delivery throughput, quality, value realization, and adaptive governance.

    Application Portfolio Management

    Transform your application portfolio into a cohesive service catalog aligned to your business capabilities by discovering, rationalizing, and modernizing your applications while improving application maintenance, management, and reuse.

    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on the Application Department Strategy.


    The image contains a screenshot of a Thought Model on Accelerate Your Transition to Product Delivery.

    Every organization experiences some degree of application sprawl

    The image contains a screenshot of images to demonstrate application sprawl.

    Causes of Sprawl

    • Poor Lifecycle Management
    • Turnover & Lack of Knowledge Transfer
    • Siloed Business Units & Decentralized IT
    • Business-Managed IT
    • (Shadow IT)
    • Mergers & Acquisitions

    Problems With Sprawl

    • Redundancy and Inefficient Spending
    • Disparate Apps & Data
    • Obsolescence
    • Difficulties in Prioritizing Support
    • Barriers to Change & Growth

    Application Sprawl:

    Inefficiencies within your application portfolio are created by the gradual and non-strategic accumulation of applications.

    You have more apps than you need.

    Only 34% of software is rated as both IMPORTANT and EFFECTIVE by users.

    Source: Info-Tech’s CIO Business Vision

    Build your APM journey map

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine Scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio.

    1.2 Determine narrative.

    1.3 Define goals and metrics.

    1.4 Define application categories.

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC).

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    2.1 Populate your inventory.

    2.2 Align to business capabilities.

    *Repeat

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    3.1 Assess business value.

    3.2 Assess technical health.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership.

    *Repeat

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results.

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results.

    4.3 Determine dispositions.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional).

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional).

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives.

    4.7 Determine ongoing cadence.

    *Repeat

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Retail

    SOURCE: Deloitte, 2017

    Supermarket Company

    The grocer was a smaller organization for the supermarket industry with a relatively low IT budget. While its portfolio consisted of a dozen applications, the organization still found it difficult to react to an evolving industry due to inflexible and overly complex legacy systems.

    The IT manager found himself in a scenario where he knew the applications well but had little awareness of the business processes they supported. Application maintenance was purely in keeping things operational, with little consideration for a future business strategy.

    As the business demanded more responsiveness to changes, the IT team needed to be able to react more efficiently and effectively while still securing the continuity of the business.

    The IT manager found success by introducing APM and gaining a better understanding of the business use and future needs for the applications. The organization started small but then increased the scope over time to produce and develop techniques to aid the business in meeting strategic goals with applications.

    Results

    The IT manager gained credibility and trust within the organization. The organization was able to build a plan to move away from the legacy systems and create a portfolio more responsive to the dynamic needs of an evolving marketplace.

    The application portfolio management initiative included the following components:

    Train teams and stakeholders on APM

    Model the core business processes

    Collect application inventory

    Assign APM responsibilities

    Start small, then grow

    Info-Tech’s application portfolio management methodology

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase Activities

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    Phase Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    • Extract key business priorities.
    • Set your goals.
    • Define scope of APM effort.

    Gather information on your own understanding of your applications to build a detailed inventory and identify areas of redundancy.

    Work with application subject matter experts to collect and compile data points and determine the appropriate disposition for your apps.

    Work with application delivery specialists to determine the strategic plans for your apps and place these in your portfolio roadmap.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook

    Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    This template allows you to capture your APM roles and responsibilities and build a repeatable process.

    This tool stores all relevant application information and allows you to assess your capability support, execute rationalization, and build a portfolio roadmap.

    The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Foundations Playbook. The image contains screenshots of the Application Portfolio Management Snapshot and Foundations Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Blueprint Storyboard

    This is the PowerPoint document you are viewing now. Follow this guide to understand APM, learn how to use the tools, and build a repeatable APM process that will be captured in your playbook.

    The image contains a screenshot of the blueprint storyboard.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.” “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI for on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Establish goals and foundations for your APM practice.

    Call #2:

    Initiate inventory and determine data requirements.

    Call #3:

    Initiate rationalization with group of applications.

    Call #4:

    Review result of first iteration and perform retrospective.

    Call #5:

    Initiate your roadmap and determine your ongoing APM practice.

    Note: The Guided Implementation will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our right-sized best practices in your organization. A typical GI, using our materials, is 3 to 6 calls over the course of 1 to 3 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    Post Workshop Steps

    Activities

    1.1 Assess your current
    application portfolio

    1.2 Determine narrative

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    1.4 Define application categories

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3.1 Assess business value

    3.2 Assess technical health

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations results

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    4.7 Determine ongoing APM cadence

    • Complete in-progress deliverables from the previous four days.
    • Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss the next steps.

    Outcomes

    Work with the appropriate management stakeholders to:

    1. Extract key business priorities
    2. Set your goals
    3. Agree on key terms and set the scope for your APM effort

    Work with your applications team to:

    1. Build a detailed inventory
    2. Identify areas of redundancy

    Work with the SMEs for a subset of applications to:

    1. Define your rationalization criteria, descriptions, and scoring
    2. Evaluate each application using rationalization criteria

    Work with application delivery specialists to:

    1. Determine the appropriate disposition for your apps
    2. Build an initial application portfolio roadmap
    3. Establish an ongoing cadence of APM activities

    Info-Tech analysts complete:

    1. Workshop report
    2. APM Snapshot and Foundations Toolset
    3. Action plan

    Note: The workshop will focus on a subset or group of applications depending on the state of your current APM inventory and available time. The goal is to use this first group to build your APM process and models to support your ongoing discovery, rationalization, and modernization efforts.

    Workshop Options

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Outcomes

    1-Day Snapshot

    3-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Key Apps)

    4-Day Snapshot and Foundations (Pilot Area)

    APM Snapshot

    • Align applications to business capabilities
    • Evaluate application support for business capabilities

    APM Foundations

    • Define your APM program and cadence
    • Rationalize applications using weighted criteria
    • Define application dispositions
    • Build an application roadmap aligned to initiatives

    Establish APM practice with a small sample set of apps and capabilities.

    Establish APM practice with a pilot group of apps and capabilities.

    Blueprint Pre-Step: Get the right stakeholders to the right exercises

    The image contains four steps and demonstrates who should be handling each exercise. 1. Lay Your Foundations, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Key Corporate Stakeholders. 2. Improve Your Inventory, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner and the Applications Subject Matter Experts. 3. Rationalize Your Apps, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Applications Subject Matter Experts, and the Delivery Leads. 4. Populate Your Roadmap, is to be handled by the APM Lead/Owner, the Key Corporate Stakeholders, and the Delivery Leads.

    APM Lead/Owner (Recommended)

    ☐ Applications Lead or the individual responsible for application portfolio management, along with any applications team members, if available

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Depending on size and structure, participants could include:

    ☐ Head of IT (CIO, CTO, IT Director, or IT Manager)

    ☐ Head of shared services (CFO, COO, VP HR, etc.)

    ☐ Compliance Officer, Steering Committee

    ☐ Company owner or CEO

    Application Subject Matter Experts

    Individuals who have familiarity with a specific subset of applications

    ☐ Business owners (product owners, Head of Business Function, power users)

    ☐ Support owners (Operations Manager, IT Technician)

    Delivery Leads

    ☐ Development Managers

    ☐ Solution Architects

    ☐ Project Managers

    Understand your APM tools and outcomes

    1.Diagnostic The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.

    5. Foundations: Chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Chart APM tool.

    2. Data Journey

    The image contains a screenshot of the data journey APM tool.

    6. App Comparison

    The image contains a screenshot of the App Comparison APM tool.

    3. Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the snapshot APM tool.

    7. Roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap APM tool.

    4. Foundations: Results

    The image contains a screenshot of the Foundations: Results APM Tool.

    Examples and explanations of these tools are located on the following slides and within the phases where they occur.

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM snapshots results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    ARE YOU READY TO GET STARTED?

    Phase 1

    Lay Your Foundations

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    Applications Lead

    Key Corporate Stakeholders

    Additional Resources

    APM supports many goals

    Building an APM process requires a proper understanding of the underlying business goals and objectives of your organization’s strategy. Effectively identifying these drivers is paramount to gaining buy-in and the approval for any changes you plan to make to your application portfolio.

    After identifying these goals, you will need to ensure they are built into the foundations of your APM process.

    “What is most critical?” but also “What must come first?”

    Discover

    Improve

    Transform

    Collect Inventory

    Uncover Shadow IT

    Uncover Redundancies

    Anticipate Upgrades

    Predict Retirement

    Reduce Cost

    Increase Efficiency

    Reduce Applications

    Eliminate Redundancy

    Limit Risk

    Improve Architecture

    Modernize

    Enable Scalability

    Drive Business Growth

    Improve UX

    Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s APM Diagnostic Tool

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Diagnostic Tool.

    One of the primary purposes of application portfolio management is to get what we know and need to know on paper so we can share a common vision and understanding of our portfolio. This enables better discussions and decisions with your application owners and stakeholders.

    1.1 Assess your current application portfolio with Info-Tech’s diagnostic tool

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. This tool provides visibility into your application portfolio and APM practices.
    2. Based on your assessment, you should gain a better understanding of whether the appropriate next steps are in application discovery, rationalization, or roadmapping.
    3. Complete the “Data Entry” worksheet in the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool (Excel).
    4. Review the “Results” worksheet to help inform and guide your next steps.

    Download the Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool

    Input Output
    • Current APM program
    • Application landscape
    • APM current-state assessment
    Materials Participants
    • Application Portfolio Management Diagnostic Tool
    • Applications Lead

    1.1 Understanding the diagnostic results

    • Managed Apps are your known knowns and most of your portfolio.
    • Unmanaged and Unsanctioned Apps are known but have unknown risks and compliance. Bring these under IT support.
    • Unknown Apps are high risk and noncompliant. Prioritize these based on risk, cost, and use.
    The image contains a screenshot of the diagnostic APM tool.
    • APM is more than an inventory and assessment. A strong APM program provides ongoing visibility and insights to drive application improvement and value delivery.
    • Use your Sprawl Factors to identify process and organizational gaps that may need to be addressed.
    • Your APM inventory is only as good as the information in it. Use this chart to identify gaps and develop a path to define missing information.
    • APM is an iterative process. Use this state assessment to determine where to focus most of your current effort.

    Understand potential motivations for APM

    The value of APM is defined by how the information will be used to drive better decisions.

    Portfolio Governance

    Transformative Initiatives

    Event-Driven Rationalization

    Improves:

    • Spending efficiency
    • Risk
    • Retirement of aged and low-value applications
    • Business enablement

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Less urgent
    • As rigorous as appropriate
    • Apply in-depth analysis as needed

    Enables:

    • Data migration or harmonization
    • Legacy modernization
    • Infrastructure/cloud migration
    • Standardizing platforms
    • Shift to cloud and SAAS

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time sensitive
    • Scope on impacted areas
    • Need to determine specific dispositions
    • Outcomes need to include detailed and actionable steps

    Responds to:

    • Mergers and acquisitions
    • Regulatory and compliance change
    • New applications
    • Application retirement by vendors
    • Changes in business operations
    • Security risks and BC/DR

    Impact on your rationalization framework:

    • Time constrained
    • Lots of discovery work
    • Primary focus on duplication
    • Increased process and system understanding

    Different motivations will influence the appropriate approach to and urgency of APM or, specifically, rationalizing the portfolio. When rationalizing is directly related to enabling or in response to a broader initiative, you will need to create a more structured approach with a formal budget and resources.

    1.2 Determine narrative

    Estimated time: 30 minutes-2 hours

    1. Open the “Narrative” tab in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    2. Start by listing your prevailing IT pain points with the application portfolio. These will be the issues experienced predominantly by the IT team and not necessarily by the stakeholders. Be sure to distinguish pain points from their root causes.
    3. Determine an equivalent business pain point for each IT pain point. This should be how the problem manifests itself to business stakeholders and should include potential risks to the organization is exposed to.
    4. Determine the business goal for each business pain point. Ideally, these are established organizational goals that key decision-makers will recognize. These goals should address the business pain points you have documented.
    5. Determine the technical objective for each business goal. These speak to the general corrections or enhancements to the portfolio required to accomplish the business goals.
    6. Use the “Narrative - Matrix” worksheet to group items into themes if needed.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Familiarity with application landscape
    • Organizational context and strategic artifacts
    • Narrative for application portfolio transformation
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Application Portfolio Manager

    Connect your pains to what the business cares about to find the most effective narrative

    Root Cause

    IT Pain Points

    Business Pain Points

    Business Goals

    Narrative

    Technical Objectives

    Sprawl

    Shadow IT/decentralized oversight

    Neglect over time

    Poor delivery processes

    Back-End Complexity

    Disparate Data/Apps

    Poor Architectural Fit

    Redundancy

    Maintenance Demand/
    Resource Drain

    Low Maintainability

    Technical Debt

    Legacy, Aging, or Expiring Apps

    Security Vulnerabilities

    Unsatisfied Customers

    Hurdles to Growth/Change

    Poor Business Analytics

    Process Inefficiency

    Software Costs

    Business Continuity Risk

    Data Privacy Risk

    Data/IP Theft Risk

    Poor User Experience

    Low-Value Apps

    Scalability

    Flexibility/Agility

    Data-Driven Insights

    M&A Transition

    Business Unit Consolidation/ Centralization

    Process Improvement

    Process Modernization

    Cost Reduction

    Stability

    Customer Protection

    Security

    Employee Enablement

    Business Enablement

    Innovation

    Create Strategic Alignment

    Identify specific business capabilities that are incompatible with strategic initiatives.

    Reduce Application Intensity

    Highlight the capabilities that are encumbered due to functional overlaps and complexity.

    Reduce Software Costs

    Specific business capabilities come at an unnecessarily or disproportionately high cost.

    Mitigate Business Continuity Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk of interruption or stoppages due to unresolved back-end issues.

    Mitigate Security Risk

    Specific business capabilities are at risk due to unmitigated security vulnerabilities or breaches.

    Increase Satisfaction Applications

    Specific business capabilities are not achieving their optimal business value.

    Platform Standardization

    Platform Standardization Consolidation

    Data Harmonization

    Removal/Consolidation of Redundant Applications

    Legacy Modernization

    Application Upgrades

    Removal of Low-Value Applications

    1.3 Define goals and metrics

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Determine the motivations behind APM. You may want to collect and review any of the organization’s strategic documents that provide additional context on previously established goals.
    2. With the appropriate stakeholders, discuss the goals of APM. Try to label your goals as either:
      1. Short term: Refers to immediate goals used to represent the progress of APM activities. Likely these goals are more IT-oriented
      2. Long term: Refers to broader and more distant goals more related to the impact of APM. These goals tend to be more business-oriented.
    3. To help clearly define your goals, discuss appropriate metrics for each goal. Often these metrics can be expressed as:
      1. Leading indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your short-term goals and the progress of APM activities.
      2. Lagging indicators: Metrics used to gauge the success of your long-term goals.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Overarching organizational strategy
    • IT strategy
    • Defined goals and metrics for APM
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.3 Define goals and metrics: Example

    Goals

    Metric

    Target

    Short Term

    Improve ability to inform the business

    Leading Indicators

    • Application inventory with all data fields completed
    • Applications with recommended dispositions
    • 80% of portfolio

    Improve ownership of applications

    • Applications with an assigned business and technical owner
    • 80% of portfolio

    Reduce costs of portfolio

    • TCO of full application portfolio
    • The number of recovered/avoided software licenses from retired apps
    • Reduce by 5%
    • $50,000

    Long Term

    Migrate platform

    Lagging Indicators

    • Migrate all applications
    • Total value change in on-premises apps switched to SaaS
    • 100% of applications
    • Increase 50%

    Improve overall satisfaction with portfolio

    • End-user satisfaction rating
    • Increase 25%

    Become more customer-centric

    • Increased sales
    • Increased customer experience
    • Increase 35%

    “Application” doesn’t have the same meaning to everyone

    The image contains a picture of Martin Fowler.

    Code: A body of code that's seen by developers as a single unit.

    Functionality: A group of functionality that business customers see as a single unit.

    Funding: An initiative that those with the money see as a single budget.

    ?: What else?

    “Essentially applications are social constructions.

    Source: Martin Fowler

    APM focuses on business applications.

    “Software used by business users to perform a business function.”

    – ServiceNow, 2020

    Unfortunately, that definition is still quite vague.

    You must set boundaries and scope for “application”

    1. Many individual items can be considered applications on their own or components within or associated with an application.

    2. Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    Different categories of applications may be out of scope or handled differently within the activities and artifacts of APM.

    • Interface
    • Software Component
    • Supporting Software
    • Platform
    • Presentation Layer
    • Middleware
    • Micro Service
    • Database
    • UI
    • API
    • Data Access/ Transfer/Load
    • Operating System

    Apps can be categorized by generic categories

    • Enterprise Applications
    • Unique Function-Specific Applications
    • Productivity Tools
    • Customer-Facing Applications
    • Mobile Applications

    Apps can be categorized by bought vs. built or install types

    • Custom
    • On-Prem
    • Off the Shelf
    • SaaS
    • Hybrid
    • End-User-Built Tools

    Apps can be categorized by the application family

    • Parent Application
    • Child Application
    • Package
    • Module
    • Suite
    • Component (Functional)

    Apps can be categorized by the group managing them

    • IT-Managed Applications
    • Business-Managed Applications (Shadow IT)
    • Partner/External Applications

    Apps can be categorized by tiers

    • Mission Critical
    • Tier 2
    • Tier 3

    Set boundaries on what is an application or the individual unit that you’re making business decisions on. Also, determine which categories of applications are in scope and how they will be included in the activities and artifacts of APM. Use your product families defined in Deliver Digital Products at Scale to help define your application categories, groups, and boundaries.

    1.4 Define application categories

    Estimated time: 1 hour

    1. Review the items listed on the previous slide and consider what categories provide the best initial grouping to help organize your rationalization and dispositions. Update the category list to match your application groupings.
    2. Identify the additional categories you need to manage in your application portfolio.
    3. For each category, establish or modify a description or definition and provide examples that exist in your current portfolio.
    4. For each category, answer:
      1. Will these be documented in the application inventory?
      2. Will these be included in application rationalization? Think about if this item will be assigned a TCO, value score, and, ultimately, a disposition.
      3. Will these be listed in the application portfolio roadmap?
    5. If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families to help define your application categories.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Working list of applications
    • Definitions and guidelines for which application categories are in scope for APM
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    1.4 Define application categories: Example

    Category

    Definition/Description

    Examples

    Documented in your application inventory?

    Included in application rationalization?

    Listed in your application portfolio roadmap?

    Business Application

    End-user facing applications that directly enable specific business functions. This includes enterprise-wide and business-function-specific applications. Separate modules will be considered a business application when appropriate.

    ERP system, CRM software, accounting software

    Yes

    Yes. Unless currently in dev. TCO of the parent application will be divided among child apps.

    Yes

    Software Components

    Back-end solutions are self-contained units that support business functions.

    ETL, middleware, operating systems

    No. Documentation in CMDB. These will be listed as a dependency in the application inventory.

    No. These will be linked to a business app and included in TCO estimates and tech health assessments.

    No

    Productivity Tools

    End-user-facing applications that enable standard communication of general document creation.

    MS Word, MS Excel, corporate email

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    End-User- Built Microsoft Tools

    Single instances of a Microsoft tool that the business has grown dependent on.

    Payroll Excel tool, Access databases

    No. Documentation in Business Tool Glossary.

    No No

    Partner Applications

    Partners or third-party applications that the business has grown dependent on but are internally owned or managed.

    Supplier’s ERP portal, government portal

    No No

    Yes

    Shadow IT

    Business-managed applications.

    Downloaded tools

    Yes

    Yes. However, just from a redundancy perspective.

    Yes

    The roles in APM rarely exist; you need to adapt

    Application Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for the health and evolution of the application portfolio.
    • Facilitates the rationalization process.
    • Compiles and assesses application information and recommends and supports key decisions regarding the direction of the applications.
    • This is rarely a dedicated role even in large enterprises. For small enterprises, this should be an IT employee at a manager level – an IT manager or operations manager.

    Business Owner

    • Responsible for managing individual applications on a functional level and approves and prioritizes projects.
    • Provides business process or functional subject matter expertise for the assessment of applications.
    • For small enterprises, this role is rarely defined, but the responsibility should exist. Consider the head of a business unit or a process owner as the owner of the application.

    Support Owner

    • Responsible for the maintenance and management of individual applications.
    • Provides technical information and subject matter expertise for the assessment of an application.
    • For small enterprises, this would be those responsible for maintaining the application and those responsible for its initial implementation. Often support responsibilities are external, and this role will be more of a vendor manager.

    Project Portfolio Manager

    • Responsible for intake, planning, and coordinating the resources that deliver any changes.
    • The body that consumes the results of rationalization and begins planning any required action or project.
    • For small enterprises, the approval process can come from a steering committee but it is often less formal. Often a smaller group of project managers facilitates planning and coordination and works closely with the delivery leads.

    Corner-of-the-Desk Approach

    • No one is explicitly dedicated to building a strategy or APM practices.
    • Information is collected whenever the applications team has time available.
    • Benefits are pushed out and the value is lost.

    Dedicated Approach

    • The initiative is given a budget and formal agenda.
    • Roles and responsibilities are assigned to team members.

    The high-level steps of APM present some questions you need to answer

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    • Who will build the inventory?
    • Do you know all your applications (Shadow IT)?
    • Do you know your applications’ functionality?
    • Do you know where your applications overlap?
    • Who do you need to consult with to fill in the gaps?
    • Who will provide specific application information?

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    • Who will collect and compile the data points for rationalization?
    • What are the specific data points?
    • Are some of the data points currently documented?
    • Who will provide specific data points on technical health, cost, performance, and business value?
    • Who will determine what business value is?

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    • Who will apply a rationalization tool or decision-making framework to generate dispositions for the applications?
    • Who will modify the tool or framework to ensure results align to the goals of the organization?
    • Who will define any actions or projects that result from the rationalization? And who needs to be consulted to assess the feasibility of any potential project?

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    • Who will present the recommended disposition, corrective action, or new project to the appropriate decision maker?
    • Who is the appropriate decision maker for application changes or project approval?
    • What format is recommended (idea, proposal, business case) and what extra analysis is required?
    • Who needs to be consulted regarding the potential changes?

    1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Begin by comparing Info-Tech’s list of common APM roles to the roles that exist in your organization with respect to application management and ownership.
    2. There are four high-level steps for APM: build inventory, collect & compile, assess & recommend, and validate & roadmap. Apply the SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer) model by completing the following for each step:
      1. In the Process column, modify the description, if necessary. Identify who is responsible for performing the step.
      2. In the Inputs column, modify the list of inputs.
      3. In the Suppliers column, identify who must be included to provide the inputs.
      4. In the Outputs column, modify the list of outputs.
      5. In the Customers column, identify who consumes the outputs.
    3. (Optional) Outline how the results of APM will be consumed. For example, project intake or execution, data or platform migration, application or product management, or whichever is appropriate.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Existing function and roles regarding application delivery, management, and ownership
    • Scope of APM
    • Responsibilities assigned to your roles
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • “Supporting Activities – SIPOC” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    1.5 Determine steps and roles

    Suppliers

    Inputs

    Process

    Outputs

    Customers

    • Applications Manager
    • Operations Manager
    • Business Owners
    • IT Team
    • List of applications
    • Application attributes
    • Business capabilities

    Build Inventory

    Create the full list of applications and capture all necessary attributes.

    Resp: Applications Manager & IT team member

    • Application inventory
    • Identified redundancies
    • Whole organization
    • Applications SMEs
    • Business Owners
    • Support Owners & Team
    • End Users
    • Application inventory
    • Existing documentation
    • Additional collection methods
    • Knowledge of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Collect & Compile

    Engage with appropriate SMEs and collect necessary data points for rationalization.

    Resp: IT team member

    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application
    • Applications Manager
    • Applications Manager
    • Defined application rationalization framework and toolset
    • Data points of business value, cost, and performance for each application

    Assess & Recommend

    Apply rationalization framework and toolset to determine dispositions.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business Owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Assigned disposition for each application
    • New project ideas for applications
    • Awareness of goals and priorities
    • Awareness of existing projects and resources capacity

    Validate & Roadmap

    Present dispositions for validation and communicate any decisions or direction for applications.

    Resp: Applications Manager

    • Application portfolio roadmap
    • Confirmed disposition for each application
    • Project request submission
    • Whole organization
    • Applications Manager
    • Solutions Engineer
    • Business Owner
    • Project request submission
    • Estimated cost
    • Estimated value or ROI

    Project Intake

    Build business case for project request.

    Resp: Project Manager

    • Approved project
    • Steering Committee

    Planning your APM modernization journey steps

    Discovery Rationalization Disposition Roadmap

    Enter your pilot inventory.

    • Optional Snapshot: Populate your desired snapshot grouping lists (departments, functions, groups, capabilities, etc.).

    Score your pilot apps to refine your rationalization criteria and scoring.

    • Score 3 to 9 apps to adjust and get comfortable with the scoring.
    • Validate scoring with the remaining apps in your pilot group. Refine and finalize the criteria and scoring descriptions.
    • Optional Snapshot: Use the Group Alignment Matrix to match your grouping list to select which apps support each grouping item.

    Determine recommended disposition for each application.

    • Review and adjust the disposition recommendations on the “Disposition Options” worksheet and set your pass/fail threshold.
    • Review your apps on the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update (override) the recommended disposition and priority if needed.

    Populate your application roadmap.

    • Indicate programs, projects, initiatives, or releases that are planned for each app.
    • Update the priority based on the initiative.
    • Use the visual roadmap to show high-level delivery phases.

    Phase 2

    Improve Your Inventory

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Applications Team

    Additional Resources

    Document Your Business Architecture

    Industry Reference Architectures

    Application Capability Template

    Pre-step: Collect your applications

    1. Consult with your IT team and leverage any existing documentation to gather an initial list of your applications.
    2. Build an initial working list of applications. This is just meant to be a starting point. Aim to include any new applications in procurement, implementation, or development.
    3. The rationalization and roadmapping phases are best completed when iteratively focusing on manageable groups of applications. Group your applications into subsets based on shared subject matter experts. Likely this will mean grouping applications by business units.
    4. Select a subset to be the first group of applications that will undergo the activities of rationalization and roadmapping to refine your APM processes, scoring, and disposition selection.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The more information you plan to capture, the larger the time and effort, especially as you move along toward advanced and strategic items. Capture the information most aligned to your objectives to make the most of your investment.

    If you completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale, use your product families and products to help define your applications.

    Learn more about automated application discovery:
    High Application Satisfaction Starts With Discovering Your Application Inventory

    Discover your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    2.1 Populate your inventory

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per group

    1. Review Info-Tech’s list of application inventory attributes.
    2. Open the “Application Inventory Details” tab of the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool. Modify, add, or omit attributes.
    3. For each application, populate your prioritized data fields or any fields you know at the time of discovery. You will complete all the fields in future iterations.
    4. Complete this the best you can based on your team’s familiarity and any readily available documentation related to these applications.
    5. Use the drop-down list to select Enabling, Redundant/Overlapping, and Dependent apps. This will be used to help determine dispositions and comparisons.
    6. Highlight missing information or placeholder values that need to be verified.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Input Output
    • Working list of applications
    • Determined attributes for inventory
    • Populated inventory
    Materials Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Why is the business capability so important?

    For the purposes of an inventory, business capabilities help all stakeholders gain a sense of the functionality the application provides.

    However, the true value of business capability comes with rationalization.

    Upon linking all the organization’s applications to a standardized and consistent set of business capabilities, you can then group your applications based on similar, complementary, or overlapping functionality. In other words, find your redundancies and consolidation opportunities.

    Important Consideration

    Defining business capabilities and determining the full extent of redundancy is a challenging undertaking and often is a larger effort than APM all together.

    Business capabilities should be defined according to the unique functions and language of your organization, at varying levels of granularity, and ideally including target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy.

    This blueprint provides a simplified and generic list for the purpose of categorizing similar functionality. We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture to help in the business capability defining process, especially when visibility into your portfolio and knowledge of redundancies is poor.

    The image contains a screenshot of the business capability scenarios.

    For a more detailed capability mapping, use the Application Portfolio Snapshot and the worksheets in your current workbook.

    What is a business capability map?

    The image contains a screenshot of a business capability map.

    A business capability map (BCM) is an abstraction of business operations that helps describe what the enterprise does to achieve its vision, mission, and goals. Business capabilities are the building blocks of the enterprise. They are typically defined at varying levels of granularity and include target-state capabilities that identify gaps in the future strategy. These are the people, process, and tool units that deliver value to your teams and customers.

    Info-Tech’s Industry Coverage and Reference Architectures give you a head start on producing a BCM fit for your organization. The visual to the left is an example of a reference architecture for the retail industry.

    These are the foundational piece for our Application Portfolio Snapshot. By linking capabilities to your supporting applications, you can better visualize how the portfolio supports the organization at a single glance. More specifically, you can highlight how issues with the portfolio are impacting capability delivery.

    Reminder: Best practices imply that business capabilities are methodologically defined by business stakeholders and business architects to capture the unique functions and language of your organization.

    The approach laid out in this service is about applying minimal time and effort to make the case for proper investment into the best practices, which can include creating a tailored BCM. Start with a good enough example to produce a useful visual and generate a positive conversation toward resourcing and analyses.

    We strongly encourage exploring Document Your Business Architecture and the Application Portfolio Snapshot to understand the thorough methods and tactics for BCM.

    Why perform a high-level application alignment before rationalization?

    Having to address redundancy complicates the application rationalization process. There is no doubt that assessing applications in isolation is much easier and allows you to arrive at dispositions for your applications in a timelier manner.

    Rationalization has two basic steps: first, collect and compile information, and second, analyze that information and determine a disposition for each application. When you don’t have redundancy, you can analyze an application and determine a disposition in isolation. When you do have redundancies, you need to collect information for multiple applications, likely across departments or lines of business, then perform a comparative analysis.

    Most likely your approach will fall somewhere between the examples below and require a hybrid approach.

    Benefits of a high-level application alignment:

    • Review the degree of redundancy across your portfolio.
    • Understand the priority areas for rationalization and the sequence of information collection.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    2.2 Align apps to capabilities and functions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours per grouping

    The APM tool provides up to three different grouping comparisons to assess how well your applications are supporting your enterprise. Although business capabilities are important, identify your organizational perspectives to determine how well your portfolio supports these functions, departments, or value streams. Each grouping should be a consistent category, type, or arrangement of applications.

    1. Enter the business capabilities, from either your own BCM or the Info-Tech reference architectures, into the Business Capability column under Grouping 1.
    2. Open the “Group 1 Alignment Matrix” worksheet in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool.
    3. For each application’s row, enter an “X” in the column of a capability that the application supports.
    4. Optionally, repeat these steps under Grouping 2 and 3 for each value stream, department, function, or business unit where you’d like to assess application support. Note: To use Grouping 3, unhide the columns on the “Application and Group Lists” worksheet and unhide the worksheet “Grouping 3 Alignment Matrix.”

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Application inventory
    • List of business capabilities, Info-Tech Reference Architecture capabilities, departments, functions, divisions, or value streams for grouping comparison
    • Assigned business capabilities to applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    2.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    2.2 Aligning applications to groups example

    Alignment Matrix: Identify applications supporting each capability or function.

    Capability, Department, or Function 1

    Capability, Department, or Function 2

    Capability, Department, or Function 3

    Capability, Department, or Function 4

    Capability, Department, or Function 5

    Capability, Department, or Function 6

    Application A

    x

    Application B

    x

    Application C

    x

    Application D

    x

    Application E

    x x

    Application F

    x

    Application G

    x

    Application H

    x

    Application I

    x

    Application J

    x

    In this example:

    BC 1 is supported by App A

    BC 2 is supported by App B

    BC 3 is supported by Apps C & D

    BCs 4 & 5 are supported by App E

    BC 6 is supported by Apps F-G. BC 6 shows an example of potential redundancy and portfolio complexity.

    The APM tool supports three different Snapshot groupings. Repeat this exercise for each grouping.

    Align application to capabilities – tool view

    The image contains screenshots of the align application to capabilities - tool view

    Phase 3

    Rationalize Your Applications

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Application SMEs

    Additional Resources

    Phase pre-step: Sequence rationalization assessments appropriately

    Use the APM Snapshot results to determine APM iterations

    • Application rationalization requires an iterative approach.
    • Review your application types and alignment from Phase 2 to begin to identify areas of overlapping or redundant applications.
    • Sequence the activities of Phase 3 based on whether you have a:
      • Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Complete the application functional analysis.
        • Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to aid your comparison of application subsets.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.
      • Non-Redundant Portfolio
        • Use the APM Snapshot to prioritize analysis by grouping.
        • Update application dispositions and roadmap initiatives.

    The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of rationalization effort.

    Phase pre-step: Are the right stakeholders present?

    Make sure you have the right people at the table from the beginning.

    • Application rationalization requires specific stakeholders to provide specific data points.
    • Ensure your application subsets are grouped by shared subject matter experts. Ideally, these are grouped by business units.
    • For each subset, identify the appropriate SMEs for the five areas of rationalization criteria.
    • Communicate and schedule interviews with groups of stakeholders. Inform them of additional information sources to have readily available.
    • (Optional) This phase’s activities follow the clockwise sequence of the diagram to the right. Reorder the sequence of activities based on overlaps of availability in subject matter expertise.

    Application

    Rationalization

    Additional Information Sources

    Ideal Stakeholders

    • KPIs

    Business Value

    • Business Application/Product Owners
    • Business Unit/ Process Owners
    • Survey Results

    End User

    • Business Application/ Product Owners
    • Key/Power Users
    • End Users
    • General Ledger
    • Service Desk
    • Vendor Contracts

    TCO

    • Operations/Maintenance Manager
    • Vendor Managers
    • Finance & Acct.
    • Service Desk
    • ALM Tools

    Technical Health

    • Operations/ Maintenance Manager
    • Solution Architect
    • Security Manager
    • Dev. Manager
    • Capability Maps
    • Process Maps

    Application Alignment

    • Business Unit/ Process Owners

    Rationalize your applications

    The image contains screenshots of diagrams that reviews building your APM journey map.

    One of the principal goals of application rationalization is determining dispositions

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or course of action for an application.

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    High-level examples:

    The image contains a screenshot of an image that demonstrates a directionless portfolio of applications.

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Modernize: Create a new project to address an inadequacy.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Consolidate: Create a new project to reduce duplicate functionality.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    The image contains screenshots of a few images taken from the directionless application to demonstrate the text above.

    Application rationalization provides insight

    Directionless portfolio of applications

    Info-Tech’s Five Lens Model

    Assigned dispositions for individual apps

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of directionless portfolio of applications.

    Application Alignment

    Business Value

    Technical Health

    End-User Perspective

    Total Cost of Ownership (TCO)

    Maintain: Keep the application but adjust its support structure.

    Modernize: Create a new initiative to address an inadequacy.

    Consolidate: Create a new initiative to reduce duplicate functionality.

    Retire: Phase out the application.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    How well do your apps support your core functions and teams?

    How well are your apps aligned to value delivery?

    Do your apps meet all IT quality standards and policies?

    How well do your apps meet your end users’ needs?

    What is the relative cost of ownership and operation of your apps?

    Application rationalization requires the collection of several data points that represent these perspectives and act as the criteria for determining a disposition for each of your applications.

    Disposition: The intended strategic direction or implied course of action for an application.

    3.1-3.4 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM worksheet data journey map.

    Assessing application business value

    The Business Business Value of Applications IT
    Keepers of the organization’s mission, vision, and value statements that define IT success. The business maintains the overall ownership and evaluation of the applications. Technical subject matter experts of the applications they deliver and maintain. Each IT function works together to ensure quality applications are delivered to stakeholder expectations.

    First, the authorities on business value need to define and weigh their value drivers that describe the priorities of the organization.

    This will then allow the applications team to apply a consistent, objective, and strategically aligned evaluation of applications across the organization.

    In this context…business value is the value of the business outcome that the application produces and how effective the application is at producing that outcome.

    Business value IS NOT the user’s experience or satisfaction with the application.

    Review the value drivers of your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of a the business value matrix.

    Financial vs. Human Benefits

    Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and are often quite tangible.

    Human benefits refer to how an application can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    Inward orientation refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.

    Outward orientation refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Increased Revenue

    Reduced Costs

    Enhanced Services

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue and deliver value to your customers.

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which an application limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    3.1 Assess business value

    Estimated time: 1 -4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s four quadrants of business value: increase revenue/value, reduce costs, enhance services, and reach customers. Edit your value drivers, description, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each value driver, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities. When editing the scoring descriptions, keep only the one you are using.
    2. (Optional) Add an additional value driver if your organization has distinct value drivers (e.g. compliance, sustainability, innovation, and growth).
    3. For each application, score on a scale of 0 to 5 how impactful the application is for each value driver. Use the indicators set in Phase 1 to guide your scoring.
    4. For each value driver, adjust the criteria weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    InputOutput
    • Knowledge of organizational priorities
    • (Optional) Existing mission, vision, and value statements
    • Scoring scheme for assessing business value
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Key Corporate Stakeholders

    3.1 Weigh value drivers: Example

    The image contains a screenshot example of the weigh value drivers.

    For additional support in implementing a balanced value framework, refer to Build a Value Measurement Framework.

    Understand the back end and technical health of your applications

    Technical health identifies the extent of technology risk to the organization.

    MAINTAINABILITY (RAS)

    RAS refers to an app’s reliability, availability, and serviceability. How often, how long, and how difficult is it for your resources to keep an app functioning, and what are the resulting continuity risks? This can include root causes of maintenance challenges.

    SECURITY

    Applications should be aligned and compliant with ALL security policies. Are there vulnerabilities or is there a history of security incidents? Remember that threats are often internal and non-malicious.

    ADAPTABILITY

    How easily can the app be enhanced or scaled to meet changes in business needs? Does the app fit within the business strategy?

    INTEROPERABILITY

    The degree to which an app is integrated with current systems. Apps require comprehensive technical planning and oversight to ensure they connect within the greater application architecture. Does the app fit within your enterprise architecture strategy?

    BUSINESS CONTINUITY/DISASTER RECOVERY

    The degree to which the application is compatible with business continuity/disaster recovery (BC/DR) policies and plans that are routinely tested and verified.

    Unfortunately, the business only cares about what they can see or experience. Rationalization is your opportunity to get risk on the business’ radar and gain buy-in for the necessary action.

    3.2 Assess technical health

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested technical health criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of technical health perspective for applications within this subset
    • Maintenance history, architectural models
    • Technical health scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Technical SMEs
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    End users provide valuable perspective

    Your end users are your best means of determining front-end issues.

    Data Quality

    To what degree do the end users find the data quality sufficient to perform their role and achieve their desired outcome?

    Effectiveness

    To what degree do the end users find the application effective for performing their role and desired outcome?

    Usability

    To what degree do the end users find the application reliable and easy to use to achieve their desired outcome?

    Satisfaction

    To what degree are end users satisfied with the features of this application?

    What else matters to you?

    Tune your criteria to match your values and priorities.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    When facing large user groups, do not make assumptions or use lengthy methods of collecting information. Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to collect data by surveying your end users’ perspectives.

    3.3 Assess end-user perspective

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested end-user perspective criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity of end user’s perspective for applications within this subset
    • User satisfaction scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Key Users
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Consider the spectrum of application cost

    An application’s cost extends past a vendor’s fee and even the application itself.

    LICENSING AND SUBSCRIPTIONS: Your recurring payments to a vendor.

    Many commercial off-the-shelf applications require a license on a per-user basis. Review contracts and determine costs by looking at per-user or fixed rates charged by the vendor.

    MAINTENANCE COSTS: Your internal spending to maintain an app.

    These are the additional costs to maintain an application such as support agreements, annual maintenance fees, or additional software or hosting expenses.

    INDIRECT COSTS: Miscellaneous expenses necessary for an app’s continued use.

    Expenses like end-user training, developer education, and admin are often neglected, but they are very real costs organizations pay regularly.

    RETURN ON INVESTMENT: Perceived value of the application related to its TCO.

    Some of our most valuable applications are the most expensive. ROI is an optional criterion to account for the value and importance of the application.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    The TCO assessment is one area where what you are considering the ”application” matters quite a bit. An application’s peripherals or software components need to be considered in your estimates. For additional help calculating TCO, use the Application TCO Calculator from Build a Rationalization Framework.

    3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. Review Info-Tech’s suggested TCO criteria. Edit your criteria, descriptions, and scoring on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet. For each criterion, update the key indicators specific to your organization’s priorities.
    2. For each application, score on a scale of 1 to 5 on how impactful the application is for each criterion.
    3. For each criterion, adjust the weighting to match its relative importance to the organization. Start with a balanced or low weighting. Adjust the weights to ensure that the category score matches your relative values and priorities.
    InputOutput
    • Familiarity with the TCO for applications within this subset
    • Vendor contracts, maintenance history
    • TCO scores for each application
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners, Vendor Managers, Operations Managers
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Phase 4

    Populate Your Roadmap

    Phase 1

    1.1 Assess Your Current Application Portfolio

    1.2 Determine Narrative

    1.3 Define Goals and Metrics

    1.4 Define Application Categories

    1.5 Determine APM Steps and Roles

    Phase 2

    2.1 Populate Your Inventory

    2.2 Align to Business Capabilities

    Phase 3

    3.1 Assess Business Value

    3.2 Assess Technical Health

    3.3 Assess End-User Perspective

    3.4 Assess Total Cost of Ownership

    Phase 4

    4.1 Review APM Snapshot Results

    4.2 Review APM Foundations Results

    4.3 Determine Dispositions

    4.4 Assess Redundancies (Optional)

    4.5 Determine Dispositions for Redundant Applications (Optional)

    4.6 Prioritize Initiatives

    4.7 Determine Ongoing APM Cadence

    his phase involves the following participants:

    • Applications Lead
    • Delivery Leads

    Additional Resources

    Review your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.1 Review your APM Snapshot results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. The APM Snapshot provides a dashboard to support your APM program’s focus and as an input to demand planning. Unhide the “Group 3” worksheet if you completed the alignment matrix.
    2. For each grouping area, review the results to determine underperforming areas. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis and demand planning. Use the key on the following slide to guide your analysis.
    3. Analysis guidance:
      1. Start with the quartile grouping to find areas scoring in Remediate or Critical Need and focus follow-up actions on these areas.
      2. Use the lens/category heat map to determine which lenses are underperforming. Use this to then look up the individual app scores supporting that group to identify application issues.
      3. Use the “Application Comparison” worksheet to select and compare applications for the group to make your review and comparison easier.
      4. Work with teams in the group to provide root cause analysis for low scores.
      5. Build a plan to address any apps not supported by IT.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Application to Group mapping
    • Rationalization scores
    • Awareness of application support for each grouping

    Materials

    Participants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Interpreting your APM Snapshot

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Snapshot with guides on how to interpret it.

    4.1 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Review your APM rationalization results

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.2 Review your APM Foundations results

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    The APM Foundations Results dashboard (“App Rationalization Results” worksheet) provides a detailed summary of your relative app scoring to serve as input to demand planning.

    1. For each grouping, review the results to determine underperforming app support. Use this information to prioritize your application root cause analysis using the individual criteria scores on the “Rationalization Inputs” worksheet.
    2. Use guidance on the following example slides to understand each area of the results.
    3. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    4. Use the column filters to compare a subset of applications or use the “App Comparison” worksheet to maintain an ongoing view by grouping, redundancy, or category.
    5. Any applications marked as N/A for evaluation will display N/A on the results worksheet and will not be displayed in the chart. You can still enter dispositions.
    InputOutput
    • Application list
    • Rationalization scores
    • Application awareness
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.2 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the AMP worksheet data journey map.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations results

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations results.

    Interpreting your APM Foundations chart

    The image contains a screenshot of the APM Foundations chart.

    Modernize your applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    Apply Info-Tech’s 6 R’s Rationalization Disposition Model

    The image contains a screenshot of Info-Tech's 6 R's Rationalization Disposition Model.

    Disposition

    Description

    Reward

    Prioritize new features or enhancement requests and openly welcome the expansion of these applications as new requests are presented.

    Refresh

    Address the poor end-user satisfaction with a prioritized project. Consult with users to determine if UX issues require improvement to address satisfaction.

    Refocus

    Determine the root cause of the low value. Refocus, retrain, or refresh the UX to improve value. If there is no value found, aim to "keep the lights on" until the app can be decommissioned.

    Replace

    Replace or rebuild the application as technical and user issues are putting important business capabilities at risk. Decommission application alongside replacement.

    Remediate

    Address the poor technical health or risk with a prioritized project. Further consult with development and technical teams to determine if migration or refactoring is suited to address the technical issue.

    Retire

    Cancel any requested features and enhancements. Schedule the proper decommission and transfer end users to a new or alternative system if necessary.

    TCO, compared relatively to business value, helps determine the practicality of a disposition and the urgency of any call to action. Application alignment is factored in when assessing redundancies and has a separate set of dispositions.

    4.3 Determine dispositions

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. The Recommended Disposition and Priority fields are prepopulated from your scoring thresholds and options on the “Disposition Options” worksheet. You can update any individual application disposition or priority using the drop-down menu and it will populate your selection on the “Roadmap” worksheet.
    2. Question if that disposition is appropriate. Be sure to consider:
      1. TCO – cost should come into play for any decisions.
      2. Alignment to strategic goals set for the overarching organizational, IT, technology (infrastructure), or application portfolio.
      3. Existing organizational priorities or funded initiatives impacting the app.
    3. Some dispositions may imply a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. You can use different dispositions and priorities on the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    4. Note: Modify the list of dispositions on the “Disposition Options” worksheet as appropriate for your rationalization initiative. Any modifications to the Disposition column will be automatically updated in the “App Rationalization Results” and “Roadmap” worksheets.
    InputOutput
    • Rationalization results
    • Assigned dispositions for applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.3 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Redundancies require a different analysis and set of dispositions

    Solving application redundancy is a lot more complicated than simply keeping one application and eliminating the others.

    First, you need to understand the extent of the redundancy. The applications may support the same capability, but do they offer the same functions? Determine which apps offer which functions within a capability. This means you cannot accurately arrive at a disposition until you have evaluated all applications.

    Next, you need to isolate the preferred system. This is completed by comparing the same data points collected for rationalization and the application alignment analysis. Cost and coverage of all necessary functions become the more important factors in this decision-making process.

    Lastly, for the non-preferred redundant applications you need to determine: What will you do with the users? What will you do with the data? And what can you do with the functionality (can the actual coding be merged onto a common platform)?

    Disposition

    Description & Additional Analysis

    Call to Action (Priority)

    Keep & Absorb

    Higher value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These are the preferred apps to be kept. However, additional efforts are still required to migrate new users and data and potentially configure the app to new processes.

    Application or Process Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Shift & Retire

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives

    These apps will be decommissioned alongside efforts to migrate users and data to the preferred system.

    *Confirm there are no unique and necessary features.

    Process Initiative & Decommission

    (Moderate)

    Merge

    Lower value, health satisfaction, and cost than alternatives but still has some necessary unique features

    These apps will be merged with the preferred system onto a common platform.

    *Determine the unique and necessary features.

    *Determine if the multiple applications are compatible for consolidation.

    Application Initiative

    (Moderate)

    Compare groups of applications

    The image contains a screenshot of examples of applications that support APM.

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Estimated rime: 1 hour per group

    This exercise is best performed after aligning business capabilities to applications across the portfolio and identifying your areas of redundancy. At this stage, this is still an information collection exercise, and it will not yield a consolidation-based disposition until applied to all relevant applications. Lastly, this exercise may still be at too high a level to outline the full details of redundancy, but it is still vital information to collect and a starting point to determine which areas require more concentrated analysis.

    1. Determine which areas of redundancy or comparisons are desired. Duplicate the “App Comparison” worksheet for each grouping or comparison.
    2. Extend the comparison to better identify redundancy.
      1. For each area of redundancy, identify the high-level features. Aim to limit the features to ten, grouping smaller features if necessary. SoftwareReviews can be a resource for identifying common features.
      2. Label features using the MoSCoW model: must have, should have, could have, will not have.
      3. For each application, identify which features they support. You can use the grouping alignment matrix as a template for feature alignment comparison. Duplicate the worksheet, unlock it, and replace the grouping cell references with your list of features.
    Input Output
    • Areas of redundancy
    • Familiarity with features for applications within this subset
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.4 Assess redundancies (optional)

    Account Management

    Call Management

    Order/Transaction Processing

    Contract Management

    Lead/Opportunity Management

    Forecasting/Planning

    Customer Surveying

    Email Synchronization

    M M M M S S C W

    CRM 1

    CRM 2

    CRM 3

    4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (optional)

    Estimated time: 1 hour per group

    1. Based on the feature-level assessment, determine if you can omit applications if they don’t truly overlap with other applications.
    2. Make a copy of the “App Comparison” worksheet and select the applications you want to compare based on your functional analysis.
    3. Determine the preferred application(s). Use the diagram to inform your decision. This may be the application closest to the top right (strong health and value). However, less expensive options or any options that provide a more complete set of features may be preferable.
    4. Open the “App Rationalization Results” worksheet. Update your disposition for each application.
    5. Use these updated dispositions to determine a call to action, new project, or initiative. Ideate and/or discuss with the team any potential initiatives. Update your roadmap with these initiatives in the next step.
    InputOutput
    • Feature-level review of application redundancy
    • Redundancy comparison
    • Assigned dispositions for redundant applications
    MaterialsParticipants
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Business Owners
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    Compare application groups

    Group comparison can be used for more than just redundant/overlapping applications.

    The image contains a screenshot of images that demonstrate comparing application groups.

    Roadmaps are used for different purposes

    Roadmaps are used for different communication purposes and at varying points in your application delivery practice. Some use a roadmap to showcase strategy and act as a feedback mechanism that allows stakeholders to validate any changes (process 1). Others may use it to illustrate and communicate approved and granular elements of a change to an application to inform appropriate stakeholders of what to anticipate (process 2).

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    Add to Roadmap

    Validate Direction

    Plan Project

    Execute Project

    Select Dispositions & Identify New Initiatives

    • Project Proposal
    • Feasibility/ Estimation
    • Impact Assessment
    • Business Case
    • Initial Design

    Approve Project

    Add to Roadmap

    Execute Project

    The steps between selecting a disposition and executing on any resulting project will vary based on the organization’s project intake standards (or lack thereof).

    This blueprint focuses on building a strategic portfolio roadmap prior to any in-depth assessments related to initiative/project intake, approval, and prioritization. For in-depth support related to intake, approval, prioritization, or planning, review the following resources.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver on your Digital Product Vision blueprint. The image contains a screenshot of the Deliver Digital Products at Scale blueprint.

    Determine what makes it onto the roadmap

    A roadmap should not be limited to what is approved or committed to. A roadmap should be used to present the items that need to happen and begin the discussion of how or if this can be put into place. However, not every idea should make the cut and end up in front of key stakeholders.

    The image contains a screenshot of steps to be taken to determine what makes it onto the roadmap.

    4.6 Prioritize initiatives

    Estimated time: 1-4 hours

    1. This is a high-level assessment to provide a sense of feasibility, practicality, and priority as well as an estimated timeline of a given initiative. Do not get lost in granular estimations. Use this as an input to your demand planning process.
    2. Enter the specific name or type of initiative.
      1. Process Initiative: Any project or effort focused on process improvements without technical modification to an app (e.g. user migration, change in SLA, new training program). Write the application and initiative name on a blue sticky note.
      2. App Initiative: Any project or effort involving technical modification to an app (e.g. refactoring, platform migration, feature addition or upgrade). Write the application and initiative name on a yellow sticky note.
      3. Decommission Initiative: Any project and related efforts to remove an app (e.g. migrating data, removal from server). Write the application and initiative name on a red sticky note.
    3. Prioritize the initiative to aid in demand planning. This is prepopulated from your selected application disposition, but you can set a different priority for the initiative here.
    4. Select the Initiative Phase in the timeline to show the intended schedule and sequencing of the initiative.
    Input Output
    • Assigned dispositions
    • Rationalization results
    • Prioritized initiatives
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Delivery Leads
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.6 APM worksheet data journey map

    The image contains a screenshot of the worksheet data journey map.

    Populate roadmap example

    The image contains an example of the populate roadmap.

    Create a recurring update plan

    • Application inventories become stale before you know it. Build steps in your procurement process to capture the appropriate information on new applications. Also, build in checkpoints to revisit your inventory regularly to assess the accuracy of inventory data.
    • Rationalization is not one and done; it must occur with an appropriate cadence.
      • Business priorities change, which will impact the current and future value of your apps.
      • Now more than ever, user expectations evolve rapidly.
      • Application sprawl likely won’t stop, so neither will shadow IT and redundancies.
      • Obsolescence, growing technical debt, changing security threats, or shifting technology strategies are all inevitable, as is the gradual decline of an app’s health or technical fit.
    • An application’s disposition changes quicker than you think, and rationalization requires a structured cadence. You need to plan to minimize the need for repeated efforts. Conversely, many use preceding iterations to increase the analysis (e.g. more thorough TCO projections or more granular capability-application alignment).
    • Portfolio roadmaps require a cadence for both updates and presentations to stakeholders. Updates are often completed semiannually or quarterly to gauge the business adjustments that affect the timeline of the domain-specific applications. The presentation of a roadmap should be completed alongside meetings or gatherings of key decision makers.
    • M&A or other restructuring events will prompt the need to address all the above.

    The image contains a screenshot of chart to help determine frequency of updating your roadmap.

    Build your APM maturity by taking the right steps at the right time

    The image contains a diagram to demonstrate the steps taken to build APM maturity.

    Info-Tech’s Build an Application Rationalization Framework provides additional TCO and value tools to help build out your portfolio strategy.

    APM is an iterative and evergreen process

    APM provides oversight and awareness of your application portfolio’s performance and support for your business operations and value delivery to all users and customers.

    Determine scope and categories Build your list of applications and capabilities Score each application based on your values Determine outcomes based on app scoring and support for capabilities

    1. Lay Your Foundations

    • 1.1 Assess the state of your current application portfolio
    • 1.2 Determine narrative
    • 1.3 Define goals and metrics
    • 1.4 Define application categories
    • 1.5 Determine APM steps and roles (SIPOC)

    2. Improve Your Inventory

    • 2.1 Populate your inventory
    • 2.2 Align to business capabilities

    3. Rationalize Your Apps

    • 3.1 Assess business value
    • 3.2 Assess technical health
    • 3.3 Assess end-user perspective
    • 3.4 Assess total cost of ownership

    4. Populate Your Roadmap

    • 4.1 Review APM Snapshot results
    • 4.2 Review APM Foundations results
    • 4.3 Determine dispositions
    • 4.4 Assess redundancies (Optional)
    • 4.5 Determine dispositions for redundant applications (Optional)
    • 4.6 Prioritize initiatives
    • 4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Repeat according to APM cadence and application changes

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Estimated time: 1-2 hours

    1. Determine how frequently you will update or present the artifacts of your APM practice: Application Inventory, Rationalization, Disposition, and Roadmap.
    2. For each artifact, determine the:
      1. Owner: Who is accountable for the artifact and the data or information within the artifact and will be responsible for or delegate the responsibility of updating or presenting the artifact to the appropriate audience?
      2. Update Cadence: How frequently will you update the artifact? Include what regularly scheduled meetings this activity will be within.
      3. Update Scope: Describe what activities will be performed to keep the artifact up to date. The goal here is to minimize the need for a full set of activities laid out within the blueprint. Optional: How will you expand the thoroughness of your analysis?
      4. Audience: Who is the audience for the artifact or assessment results?
      5. Presentation Cadence: How frequently and when will you review the artifact with the audience?
    InputOutput
    • Initial experience with APM
    • Strategic meetings schedule
    • Ongoing cadence for APM activities
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard and markers
    • APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool
    • Applications Lead
    • Any Applications Team Members

    Record the results in the APM Snapshot and Foundations Tool

    4.7 Ongoing APM cadence

    Artifact

    Owner

    Update Cadence

    Update Scope

    Audience

    Presentation Cadence

    Inventory

    Greg Dawson

    • As new applications are acquired
    • Annual review
    • Add new application data points (this is added to implementation standards)
    • Review inventory and perform a data health check
    • Validate with app’s SME
    • Whole organization
    • Always available on team site

    Rationalization Tool

    Judy Ng

    • Annual update
    • Revisit value driver weights
    • Survey end users
    • Interview support owners
    • Interview business owners
    • Update TCO based on change in operational costs; expand thoroughness of cost estimates
    • Rescore applications
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Annually alongside yearly strategy meeting

    Portfolio Roadmap

    Judy Ng

    • Monthly update alongside project updates
    • Shift the timeline of the roadmap to current day 1
    • Carry over project updates and timeline changes
    • Validate with PMs and business owners
    • Steering Committee
    • Business owners of applications
    • IT leaders
    • Quarterly alongside Steering Committee meetings
    • Upon request

    Appendices

    • Additional support slides
    • Bibliography

    The APM tool provides a single source of truth and global data sharing

    The table shows where source data is used to support different aspects of APM discovery, rationalization, and modernization.

    Worksheet Data Mapping

    Application and Capability List

    Group Alignment Matrix (1-3)

    Rationalization Inputs

    Group 1-3 Results

    Application Inventory Details

    App Rationalization Results

    Roadmap

    App Redundancy Comparison

    Application and Capability List

    App list, Groupings

    App list

    App list, Groupings

    App list, Categories

    App list, Categories

    App list

    App list

    Groups 1-3 Alignment Matrix

    App to Group Tracing

    Application Categories

    Category
    drop-down

    Category

    Category

    Rationalization Inputs

    Lens Scores (weighted input to Group score)

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    Disposition Options

    Disposition list, Priorities list, Recommended Disposition and Priority

    Lens Scores (weighted input)

    App Rationalization Results

    Disposition

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Name Organization’s terminology used for the application. Auto-discovery tools will provide names for the applications they reveal. However, this may not be the organizational nomenclature. You may adapt the names by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    ID Unique identifiers assigned to the application (e.g. app number). Typically an identification system developed by the application portfolio manager.
    Description A brief description of the application, often referencing core capabilities. Typically completed by leveraging pre-existing documentation and internal knowledge or by consulting business users.
    Business Units A list of all business units, departments, or user groups. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with business unit representatives. However, this doesn’t always expose hidden applications. Application-capability mapping is the most effective way to determine all the business units/user groups of an app.
    Business Capabilities A list of business capabilities the application is intended to enable. Application capability mapping completed via interviews with business unit representatives.
    Criticality A high-level grading of the importance of the application to the business, typically used for support prioritization purposes (i.e. critical, high, medium, low). Typically the criticality rating is determined by a committee representing IT and business leaders.
    Ownership The individual accountable for various aspect of the application (e.g. product owner, product manager, application support, data owner); typically includes contact information and alternatives. If application ownership is an established accountability in your organization, typically consulting appropriate business stakeholders will reveal this information. Otherwise, application capability mapping can be an effective means of identifying who that owner should be.
    Application SMEs Any relevant subject matter experts who can speak to various aspects of the application (e.g. business process owners, development managers, data architects, data stewards, application architects, enterprise architects). Technical SMEs should be known within an IT department, but shadow IT apps may require interviews with the business unit. Application capability mapping will determine the identity of those key users/business process SMEs.
    Type An indication of whether the application was developed in-house, commercial off-the-shelf, or a hybrid option. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or development managers.
    Active Status An indication of whether the application is currently active, out of commission, in repair, etc. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or operation managers.

    Common application inventory attributes

    Attribute Description Common Collection Method
    Vendor Information Identification of the vendor from whom the software was procured. May include additional items such as the vendor’s contact information. Consultation with business SMEs, end users, or procurement teams, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Links to Other Documentation Pertinent information regarding the other relevant documentation of the application (e.g. SLA, vendor contracts, data use policies, disaster recovery plan). Typically includes links to documents. Consultation with product owners, service providers, or SMEs, or review of vendor contracts or license agreements.
    Number of Users The current number of users for the application. This can be based on license information but will often require some estimation. Can include additional items of quantities at different levels of access (e.g. admin, key users, power users). Consultation, surveys, or interviews with product owners or appropriate business SMEs or review of vendor contracts or license agreements. Auto-discovery tools can reveal this information.
    Software Dependencies List of other applications or operating components required to run the application. Consultation with application architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Hardware Dependencies Identification of any hardware or infrastructure components required to run the application (i.e. databases, platform). Consultation with infrastructure or enterprise architects and any architectural tools or documentation. This information can begin to reveal itself through application capability mapping.
    Development Language Coding language used for the application. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with development managers or appropriate technical SMEs.
    Platform A framework of services that application programs rely on for standard operations. Consultation, surveys, or interviews with infrastructure or development managers.
    Lifecycle Stage Where an application is within the birth, growth, mature, end-of-life lifecycle. Consultation with business owners and technical SMEs.
    Scheduled Updates Any major or minor updates related to the application, including the release date. Consultation with business owners and vendor managers.
    Planned or In-Flight Projects Any projects related to the application, including estimated project timeline. Consultation with business owners and project managers.

    Bibliography

    ”2019 Technology & Small Business Survey.” National Small Business Association (NSBA), n.d. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    “Application Rationalization – Essential Part of the Process for Modernization and Operational Efficiency.” Flexera, 2015. Web.
    “Applications Rationalization during M&A: Standardize, Streamline, Simplify.” Deloitte Consulting, 2016. Web.
    Bowling, Alan. “Clearer Visibility of Product Roadmaps Improves IT Planning.” ComputerWeekly.com, 1 Nov. 2010. Web.
    Brown, Alex. “Calculating Business Value.” Agile 2014 Orlando, 13 July 2014. Scrum Inc. 2014. Web.
    Brown, Roger. “Defining Business Value.” Scrum Gathering San Diego 2017. Agile Coach Journal. Web.
    “Business Application Definition.” Microsoft Docs, 18 July 2012. Web.
    “Connecting Small Businesses in the US.” Deloitte Consulting, 2017. Accessed 1 April. 2020.
    Craveiro, João. “Marty meets Martin: connecting the two triads of Product Management.” Product Coalition, 18 Nov. 2017. Web.
    Curtis, Bill. “The Business Value of Application Internal Quality.” CAST, 6 April 2009. Web.
    Fleet, Neville, Joan Lasselle, and Paul Zimmerman. “Using a Balance Scorecard to Measure the Productivity and Value of Technical Documentation Organizations.” CIDM, April 2008. Web.
    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Web.
    Harris, Michael. “Measuring the Business Value of IT.” David Consulting Group, 2007. Web.
    “How Application Rationalization Contributes to the Bottom Line.” LeanIX, 2017. Web.
    Jayanthi, Aruna. “Application Landscape Report 2014.” Capgemini, 4 March 2014. Web.
    Lankhorst, Marc., et al. “Architecture-Based IT Valuation.” Via Nova Architectura, 31 March 2010. Web.
    “Management of business application.” ServiceNow, Jan.2020. Accessed 1 April 2020.
    Mauboussin, Michael J. “The True Measures of Success.” HBR, Oct. 2012. Web.
    Neogi, Sombit., et al. “Next Generation Application Portfolio Rationalization.” TATA, 2011. Web.
    Riverbed. “Measuring the Business Impact of IT Through Application Performance.” CIO Summits, 2015. Web.
    Rouse, Margaret. “Application Rationalization.” TechTarget, March 2016. Web.
    Van Ramshorst, E.A. “Application Portfolio Management from an Enterprise Architecture Perspective.” Universiteit Utrecht, July 2013.
    “What is a Balanced Scorecard?” Intrafocus, n.d. Web.
    Whitney, Lance. “SMBs share their biggest constraints and great challenges.” Tech Republic, 6 May 2019. Web.

    Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}73|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,733 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management
    • Unprecedented health and economic conditions are putting extreme pressure and controls on expense management.
    • IT needs to implement proactive measures to reduce costs with immediate results.
    • IT must sustain these reductions beyond the near term since no one knows how long the current conditions will last.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Proactively initiating a “War on Waste” (WoW) to reduce the expenses and costs in areas that do not impact operational capabilities of IT is an easy way to reduce IT expenditures.
    • This is accomplished by following the principle “Stop Doing Stupid Stuff” (SDSS), which many organizations deemphasize or overlook during times of growth and prosperity.
    • Initiating a WoW and SDSS program with passion, creativity, and urgency will deliver short-term cost reductions.

    Impact and Result

    • Pinpoint and implement tactical countermeasures and savings opportunities to reduce costs immediately (Reactive: <3 months).
    • Identify and deploy proven practices to capture and sustain expense reduction throughout the mid-term (Proactive: 3-12months).
    • Create a long-term strategy to improve flexibility, make changes more swiftly, and quickly generate cost-cutting opportunities (Strategic: >12 months).
    • Use Info-Tech’s 4 R’s Framework (Required, Removed, Rescheduled, and Reduced) and guiding principles to develop your cost-reduction roadmap.

    Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here – read the Storyboard

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how you can reduce your IT cost in the short term while establishing a foundation for long-term sustainment of IT cost containment.

    • Cost-Reduction Planning for IT Vendors Storyboard
    • Cost-Cutting Classification and Prioritization Tool
    [infographic]

    Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}72|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.9/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $57,297 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cost & Budget Management
    • Parent Category Link: /cost-and-budget-management

    Cost optimization is misunderstood and inadequately tackled. IT departments face:

    • Top-down budget cuts within a narrow time frame
    • Absence of adequate governance: financial, project, data, etc.
    • Long-standing bureaucratic practices slowing down progress
    • Short-term thinking

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Cost optimization is not just about reducing costs. In fact, you should aim to achieve three objectives:

    • Reduce your unwarranted IT spending.
    • Optimize your cost-to-value.
    • Sustain your cost optimization.

    Impact and Result

    • Follow Info-Tech’s approach to develop a 12-month cost optimization roadmap.
    • Develop an IT cost optimization strategy based on your specific circumstances and timeline.
    • Info-Tech’s methodology helps you maintain sustainable cost optimization across IT by focusing on four levers: assets, vendors, project portfolio, and workforce.

    Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Deck – A step-by-step methodology to achieve sustainable cost optimization and effectively communicate your strategy to stakeholders.

    This blueprint will help you understand your IT cost optimization mandate, identify your journey, assess your IT spend across four levers, develop your IT cost optimization roadmap, and craft a related communication strategy.

    • Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap – Phases 1-4

    2. IT Cost Optimization Workbook – A structured tool to help you document your IT cost optimization goals and outline related initiatives to develop an effective 12-month roadmap.

    This tool guides an IT department in planning and prioritization activities to build an effective IT cost optimization strategy. The outputs include visual charts and a 12-month roadmap to showcase the implementation timelines and potential cost savings.

    • IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    3. IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Samples and Templates – A proactive journey template to help you communicate your IT cost optimization strategy to stakeholders in a clear, concise, and compelling manner.

    This presentation template uses sample data from "Acme Corp" to demonstrate an IT cost optimization strategy following a proactive journey. Use this template to document your final IT cost optimization strategy outputs, including the adopted journey, IT cost optimization goals, related key initiatives, potential cost savings, timelines, and 12-month roadmap.

    • IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Samples and Templates

    Infographic

    Workshop: Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Your Mandate & Objectives

    The Purpose

    Determine your organization’s current context and its cost optimization objectives, IT’s corresponding cost optimization journey, and goals.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A business-aligned set of specific IT cost optimization goals.

    Activities

    1.1 Understand your organization’s cost optimization objectives and how this impacts IT.

    1.2 Review potential cost optimization target areas based on your ITFM Benchmarking Report.

    1.3 Identify factors constraining cost optimization options.

    1.4 Set concrete IT cost optimization goals.

    1.5 Identify inputs required for decision making.

    Outputs

    IT cost optimization journey and guiding principles for making corresponding decisions

    2 Outline Initiatives for Vendors & Assets

    The Purpose

    Create a longlist of potential cost optimization initiatives focused on two cost optimization levers: assets and vendors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A comprehensive list of potential asset- and vendor-focused initiatives including cost savings estimates.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify a longlist of possible initiatives around asset lifecycle management, investment deferral, repurposing, etc., and vendor contract renegotiation, cancelation, etc.

    2.2 Estimate the cost savings of cost optimization initiatives.

    Outputs

    Longlist of potential vendor management and asset optimization IT cost optimization initiatives

    3 Outline Initiatives for Projects & Workforce

    The Purpose

    Create a longlist of potential cost optimization initiatives focused on two cost optimization levers: project portfolio and workforce.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A comprehensive list of potential initiatives focused on project portfolio and workforce including cost savings estimates.

    Activities

    3.1 Identify a longlist of possible initiatives around project priorities, project backlog reduction, project intake restructuring, etc., and workforce productivity, skills, redeployment, etc.

    3.2 Estimate the cost savings of cost optimization initiatives.

    Outputs

    Longlist of possible cost optimization initiatives and their potential cost savings for project portfolio and workforce levers.

    4 Build an IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Develop a visual IT cost optimization roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A prioritized, business-aligned IT cost optimization roadmap

    Activities

    4.1 Assess feasibility of each initiative (effort and risk profile) given cost optimization goals.

    4.2 Prioritize cost optimization initiatives to create a final shortlist.

    4.3 Fine-tune key information about your final cost optimization initiatives and develop a cost optimization roadmap for proposal.

    Outputs

    Prioritized list of key cost optimization initiatives, descriptions, estimated impact, and roadmap.

    5 Communicate & Execute

    The Purpose

    Develop a communication plan and executive presentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A boardroom-ready set of communication materials for gaining buy-in and support for your IT cost optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    5.1 Outline components of a communication plan, including approvers, stakeholders, and governance and management mechanisms to be used.

    5.2 Create an executive presentation.

    5.3 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and post-workshop activities.

    Outputs

    IT cost optimization communication plan and presentation strategy.

    IT Cost Optimization Executive Presentation

    Further reading

    Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Improve cost-to-value in a sustainable manner.

    Analyst Perspective

    Optimize your cost sustainably.

    Whether the industry is in an economic downturn, or your business is facing headwinds in the market, pressure to reduce spending across organizations is inevitable. When it comes to the IT organization, it is often handled as a onetime event. Cost optimization is an industry standard term, but it usually translates into cost cutting. How do you manage this challenge given the day-to-day demands placed on IT? Do you apply cost reduction equally across the IT landscape, or do you apply reductions using a targeted approach? How do you balance the business demands regarding innovation with keeping the lights on? What is the best path forward?

    While the situation isn't unique, all too often the IT organization response is too shortsighted.

    By using the Info-Tech methodology and tools, you will be able to develop an IT cost optimization roadmap based on your specific circumstances and timeline.

    A well-thought-out strategy should help you achieve three objectives:

    1. Reduce your unwarranted IT spending.
    2. Optimize your cost-to-value.
    3. Sustain your cost optimization.

    This blueprint will guide you to understand your mandate, identify your cost optimization journey (reactive, proactive, or strategic), and assess your IT spend across four levers (assets, vendors, project portfolio, and workforce).

    Finally, keep in mind that cost optimization is not a project to be completed, but an ongoing process to be exercised.

    Bilal Alberto Saab, Research Director, IT Financial Management

    Bilal Alberto Saab
    Research Director, IT Financial Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Cost optimization is misunderstood and inadequately tackled Common obstacles Follow Info-Tech's approach to develop a 12-month cost optimization roadmap
    • Top-down budget cut within a narrow time frame.
    • Absence of adequate governance: financial, project, data, etc.
    • Long-standing bureaucratic practices slowing down progress.
    • Short-term thinking.
    • Lack of alignment and collaboration among stakeholders: communication and relationships.
    • Absence of a clear plan and adequate process.
    • Lack of knowledge, expertise, and skill set.
    • Inadequate funding and no financial transparency.
    • Poor change management practices.

    Develop an IT cost optimization strategy based on your specific circumstances and timeline.

    Info-Tech's methodology helps you maintain sustainable cost optimization across IT by focusing on four levers:

    1. Assets
    2. Vendors
    3. Project Portfolio
    4. Workforce

    Info-Tech Insight
    Cost optimization is not just about reducing costs. In fact, you should aim to achieve three objectives: (1) reduce your unwarranted IT spending, (2) optimize your cost-to-value, and (3) sustain your cost optimization.

    Your challenge

    IT leaders are often asked to cut costs.

    • Cost management is a long-term challenge. Businesses and IT departments look to have a flexible cost structure focused on maximizing business value while maintaining the ability to adapt to market pressure. However, businesses must also be able to respond to unexpected events.
    • In times of economic downturn, many CEOs and CFOs shift their thinking from growth to value protection. This can force a round of cost cutting across all departments focused on short-term, immediate, and measurable objectives.
    • Many IT departments are then faced with the challenge of meeting cost cutting targets. No one knows exactly how markets will behave, but the effects of rising inflation and increasing interest rates, for example, can manifest very quickly.

    When crisis hits, does IT's hard-won gains around being seen as a partner to the business suddenly disappear and IT becomes just a cost center all over again?

    In times of economic slowdown or downturn, the key challenge of IT leaders is to optimize costs without jeopardizing their strategic and innovative contribution.

    Common obstacles

    The 90% of the budget you keep is more important than the 10% of the budget you cut.

    • While the business responds to fluctuating economic conditions, IT must ensure that its budget remains fully aligned with business strategy and expected business value.
    • However, in the face of sudden pressures, a common tendency is to make quick decisions without fully considering their long-term implications.
    • Avoid costly mistakes with a proactive and strategic mindset. Put in place a well-communicated cost optimization strategy rather than hastily cutting back the biggest line items in your budget.

    How can IT optimize costs to achieve a corporate impact, but not cut so deep that the organization can't take advantage of opportunities to recover and thrive?

    Know how you will strategically optimize IT costs before you are forced to cut cost aggressively in a reactive fashion.

    What is cost optimization?

    It's not just about cutting costs

    • While cost optimization may involve cutting costs, it is more about making smart spend and investment decisions.
    • At its core, cost optimization is a strategic decision-making process that sets out to minimize waste and get the most value for money.
    • Cost optimization encompasses near-term, mid-term, and long-term objectives, all of which are related and build upon one another. It is an accumulative practice, not a onetime exercise.
    • A sound cost optimization practice is inherently flexible, sustainable, and consequence-oriented with the positive goal of generating net benefit for the organization over time.

    Change your mindset ...

    An Info-Tech survey of IT staff reveals that while most agree that cost optimization is an important IT process, nearly 20% fewer of them agree that it's being managed well.

    Chart of cost optimization

    Info-Tech IT Management & Governance Diagnostic, 2022.

    A starting point for cost optimization improvement is adjusting your frame of mind. Know that it's not just about making difficult cuts - in reality, it's a creative pursuit that's about thriving in all circumstances, not just surviving.

    Slow revenue growth expectations generate urgency

    Many IT organizations will be directed to trim costs during turbulent times.

    • Cost optimization implies continuous cost management, which entails long-term strategic initiatives (i.e. organizations and their IT departments seek flexible cost structures and practices focused on maximizing business value while maintaining the ability to adapt to changes in the broader economic environment). However, organizations must also be able to respond to unexpected events.
    • During times of turmoil – poor economic outlook expected to negatively impact an organization's bottom line – CEOs and CFOs think more about survival than growth, driving cost cutting across all departments to create short-term, immediate, and measurable financial benefits.
    • In such situations, many IT departments will be hard-pressed to meet cost cutting targets at short notice. If not planned correctly, with a tunnel vision focus instead of a strategic one, you can end up hurting yourself in the not-so-distant future.

    Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Insight summary

    Sustain an optimal cost-to-value ratio across four levers:

    1. Assets
    2. Vendors
    3. Project Portfolio
    4. Workforce

    Cost optimization is not just about reducing costs

    In fact, you should aim to achieve three objectives:
    (1) reduce your unwarranted IT spending, (2) optimize your cost-to-value, and (3) sustain your cost optimization.

    Reduce unwarranted IT spending

    Stop the bleeding or go for quick wins
    Start by reducing waste and bad spending habits while clearly communicating your intentions to your stakeholders – get buy-in.

    Optimize cost-to-value

    Value means tradeoffs
    Pursue value but know that it will lead you to make tradeoffs between cost, performance, and risk.

    Sustain cost optimization

    Think about tomorrow: reduce, reuse, recalibrate, and repeat
    Standardize and automate your cost optimization processes around a proper governance framework. Cost optimization is not a onetime exercise.

    Info-Tech's methodology for building your IT cost optimization roadmap

    Phase 1: Understand Your Mandate & Objectives

    Know where you stand and where you're going.

    Understand your cost optimization mandate within the context of your organization's situation and direction.

    Phase 2: Outline Your Initiatives

    Evaluate many, pick a few.

    Think of all possible cost optimization initiatives across the four optimization levers (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, and Workforce), but only keep the ones that best help you fulfill your goals.

    Phase 3: Develop Your Roadmap

    Keep one eye on today and the other on tomorrow.

    Prioritize cost optimization initiatives that would help you achieve your near-term objectives first, but don't forget about the medium and long term.

    Phase 4: Communicate and Execute

    Communicate and collaborate - you are not a one-person show.

    Reach out to other business units where necessary. Your success relies on getting buy-in from various stakeholders, especially when cost optimization initiatives impact them in one way or another.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Samples and Templates
    Templates including an abbreviated executive presentation and a final communication presentation based on a 12-month cost optimization roadmap.

    IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    A workbook generating a 12-month cost optimization roadmap.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Maintain an optimal IT cost-to-organization revenue ratio.

    This blueprint will guide you to set cost optimization goals across one to three main objectives, depending on your identified journey (reactive, proactive, or strategic):

    • Reduce unwarranted IT spending.
    • Optimize cost-to value.
    • Sustain cost optimization.

    In phase 1 of this blueprint, we will help you establish your goals to satisfy your organization's needs.

    In phase 3, we will help you develop a game plan and a roadmap for achieving those metrics.

    Once you implement your 12-month roadmap, start tracking the metrics below over the next fiscal year (FY) to assess the effectiveness of undertaken measures.

    Cost Optimization Objective Key Success Metric
    Reduce unwarranted IT spending Decrease IT cost in identified key areas
    Optimize cost-to-value Decrease IT cost per IT employee
    Sustain cost optimization Decrease IT cost-to-organization revenue

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."
    Guided Implementation
    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."
    Workshop
    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.
    Consulting
    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    Call #1:
    • Identify cost optimization scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.
    • Review and assess cost optimization goals and objectives.
    Call #2:

    Review potential cost optimization initiatives for assets and vendors levers.

    Call #3:

    Assess cost optimization initiatives' cost and feasibility - for assets and vendors levers.

    Call #4:

    Review potential cost optimization initiatives for project portfolio and workforce levers.

    Call #5:

    Assess cost optimization initiatives' cost and feasibility - for project portfolio and workforce levers.

    Call #6:
    • Identify final decision criteria for cost optimization prioritization.
    • Review prioritized cost optimization initiatives and roadmap outputs.
    Call #7:
    • Review the Cost Optimization Communication Plan and IT Cost Optimization Executive Presentation.
    • Discuss next steps.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI will include multiple calls over the course of one to two months.

    IT cost analysis and optimization workshop overview

    Session 1 Session 2 Session 3 Session 4 Session 5
    Activities Understand Your Mandate and Objectives Outline Initiatives for Assets and Vendors Outline Initiatives for Projects and Workforce Develop an IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Communicate and Execute
    1.1 Understand your organization's cost optimization objectives and how this impacts IT.
    1.2 Review potential cost optimization target areas based on your IT financial management benchmarking report.
    1.3 Identify factors constraining cost optimization options.
    1.4 Set concrete IT cost optimization goals.
    1.5 Identify inputs required for decision making.
    2.1 Identify a longlist of possible initiatives around:
    1. Asset lifecycle management, investment deferral, repurposing, etc.
    2. Vendor contract renegotiation, cancelation, etc.
    2.2 Estimate the cost savings of cost optimization initiatives.
    3.1 Identify a longlist of possible initiatives around:
    1. Project priorities, project backlog reduction, project intake restructuring, etc.
    2. Workforce productivity, skills, redeployment, etc.
    3.2 Estimate the cost savings of cost optimization initiatives.
    4.1 Assess the feasibility of each initiative (effort and risk profile) given cost optimization goals.
    4.2 Prioritize cost optimization initiatives to create a final shortlist.
    4.3 Fine-tune key information about your final cost optimization initiatives and develop a cost optimization roadmap for proposal.
    5.1 Outline components of a communication plan, including approvers, stakeholders, and governance and management mechanisms to be used.
    5.2 Create an executive presentation.
    5.3 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and post-workshop activities.
    Output
    • IT cost optimization journey and guiding principles for making corresponding decisions.
    • Long list of possible cost optimization initiatives and their potential cost savings for assets and vendors levers.
    • Long list of possible cost optimization initiatives and their potential cost savings for project portfolio and workforce levers.
    • Prioritized list of key cost optimization initiatives, descriptions, estimated impact, and roadmap.
    • IT cost optimization communication plan and presentation strategy.

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 1

    Understand Your Mandate and Objectives

    Phase 1
    Understand Your Mandate and Objectives

    Phase 2
    Outline Your Cost Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 3
    Develop Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Phase 4
    Communicate and Execute

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Business context and cost optimization journey
    • Cost constraints and parameters
    • Cost optimization goals

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead

    1.1 Gain consensus on the business context and IT cost optimization journey

    60 minutes

    • Using the questions on slide 20, conduct a brief journey assessment to ensure consensus on the direction you are planning to take.
    • Document your findings in the provided template.
    Input Output
    • Understanding business objectives and identifying your IT mandate
    • Determining the cost optimization journey: reactive, proactive, or strategic
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Journey assessment template
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead

    See the next three slides for guidelines and the journey assessment questions and template.

    Distinguishing between three journeys

    By considering business objectives without forgoing your IT mandate.

    Journey Reactive Proactive Strategic
    Description
    • Business objectives are closely tied to cost reduction, forcing cost cutting across IT.
    • Typically occurs during turbulent economic times, when slow revenue growth is expected.
    • Business objectives do not include clear cost optimization initiatives but mandates IT to be fiscally conservative.
    • Typically occurs when economic turbulence is on the horizon and the organization's revenue is stable - executives only have a fiscal discipline guidance.
    • Business objectives do not include clear cost optimization initiatives.
    • Typically occurs when the overall economy is in good shape and the organization is in positive revenue growth territory.
    Main Focus
    • Quick-to-execute measures with few dependencies and concrete impact in response to business urgency and/or executive directive.
    • Enabling the organization to respond to different types and magnitudes of business change in a more planned and controlled manner.
    • Establishing an efficient, agile, sustainable, and strategically aligned cost optimization practice across all stages of the business cycle, regardless of business conditions.

    Questions to help determine your journey

    Business Objectives Business Strategy
    • What are the current business objectives?
    • Are there any stated cost-related objectives? If yes, what cost-related objectives have been stated by organizational leadership, such as cuts, areas of investment, and any targets for both?
    • Does the organization have a business strategy in place?
    • Was the business strategy reviewed or revised recently?
    • What's the business strategy focus for the next 12 months?
    • Are there any cost optimization implications within the current business strategy?
    IT Objectives IT Strategy and Mandate
    • What are your current IT objectives?
    • Are your IT objectives aligned to business objectives?
    • Do you have any IT cost-related objectives? If yes, what are your current IT cost-related objectives?
    • Are your IT cost-related objectives aligned to business objectives?
    • Do you have an IT strategy in place?
    • Is your IT strategy aligned to your organization's business strategy?
    • Do you have a cost optimization mandate? If yes, what is your cost optimization mandate?
    • What's the fiscal guidance and direction in IT?
    Journey
    Agreed-upon journey: reactive, proactive, or strategic.

    Template & Example

    Journey assessment

    Business Objectives Business Strategy
    • The founder's mission around quality persists despite ownership/leadership changes. Reliability and dependability are really important to everyone.
    • Increase visibility and interconnectivity across the supply chain.
    • Increase market share: younger markets and emerging foreign markets.
    • Economic outlook expected to negatively affect the bottom line - will need to trim and protect the core.
    • Grow Gizmo product sales by 10%.
    • Lower production cost of Gizmo product by 5%.
    IT Objectives IT Strategy and Mandate
    • IT/OT convergence, process automation, and modernization are major opportunities to better position the business for the future and introduce more agility into operations and reduce production cost.
    • Very mature and stable production processes with 100% uptime is a priority.
    • Lower IT cost related to Gizmo product.
    • There's no clear cost optimization mandate, but a fiscally conservative budget is recommended.
    Journey
    Agreed-upon journey: proactive.

    1.2 Review internal and external benchmarking reports

    60-90 minutes

    1. Review the IT spend and staffing results, summarized in your Info-Tech IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking report.
    2. Identify areas where your IT spend is disproportionately high or low in comparison with your industry peers.
    3. Review and document any causes or rationales for high or low spend in each area identified. Do not be specific about any actual optimization targets or actions at this stage - simply make notes.
    4. Start a list of potential cost optimization initiatives to be further analyzed and investigated for feasibility at a later stage (see next slides for guidance, example, and template).
    InputOutput
    • IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking report
    • A list of potential cost optimization focus areas
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Potential cost optimization initiatives list template
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead

    Info-Tech's approach

    Our IT cost model maps your IT spending and staffing according to four key views, putting IT spend in language that stakeholders across the organization can relate to.

    IT cost model maps

    Template & Example

    Potential cost optimization initiatives list

    Brainstorm and list potential cost optimization initiatives at a macro level.

    Potential Initiative Source Source Contact Notes
    Reduce application maintenance cost Internal Benchmarking Report CIO Based on current year report
    Rationalize software applications Info-Tech IT Benchmarking Report CIO Based on current year report
    Migrate key business applications to the cloud Latest iteration of the IT strategy CIO New IT strategy will be in development concurrent with cost optimization strategy development
    Align job roles to the current IT structure IT org. chart and salaries HR, CIO Based on information of the current year and will likely change in a few months (beginning of a new year)
    Renegotiate the top five vendor contracts up for renewal this year List of IT vendors Procurement office, CIO, IT infrastructure director, IT applications director, IT services manager Based on a list consolidated last week

    Want help with your IT spend transparency and benchmarking efforts?

    Let us fast-track your IT spend journey.

    The path to IT financial management maturity starts with knowing exactly where your money is going. To streamline this effort, Info-Tech offers an IT Spend & Staffing Benchmarking service that provides full transparency into where your money is going without any heavy lifting on your part.

    This unique service features:

    • A client-proven approach to meet your IT spend transparency goals.
    • Spend and staff mapping that reveals business consumption of IT.
    • Industry benchmarking to compare your spending and staffing to that of your peers.
    • Results in a fraction of the time with much less effort than going it alone.
    • Expert review of results and ongoing discussions with Info-Tech analysts.

    If you'd like Info-Tech to pave the way to IT spend transparency, contact your account manager for more information - we're happy to talk anytime.

    1.3 Identify your overarching constraints

    30 minutes

    1. Assess where spend change opportunities are currently limited or nonexistent due to organization edict or policy, industry regulatory requirements, or active contracts. Ask yourself:
      1. Where do IT spend bottlenecks exist and what are they?
      2. What IT spend objectives and practices are absolutely mandatory and nonnegotiable from both a business and an IT perspective?
      3. Are there areas where spend change is possible but would be very difficult to execute due to the stakeholders involved, governance processes, time frames, or another constraining factor?
    2. Identify where reduction or elimination of an IT service would negatively affect required service levels and business continuity or recovery.
    3. List constraints as negotiable or nonnegotiable on the template provided.
    4. Remove areas of focus from your cost optimization scope that land outside achievable parameters, and flag those that are difficult but still possible.
    InputOutput
    • Situational awareness and current state understanding
    • List of negotiable constraints to act on
    • Delimiting the cost optimization scope
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Constraints assessment template
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead

    See the next slides for additional guidance and a constraints assessment template.

    Acknowledge your limitations

    By recognizing your constraints, which will lead you to define your cost optimization scope.

    Constraints Organizational Legal/Regulatory Other
    What An organizational constraint is any work condition that hinders an employee's performance - be it physical, emotional, or otherwise. A legal or regulatory constraint is any law, rule, standard, or regulation - be it industry specific or otherwise - limiting the ability of any stakeholder to get the most out of a certain activity, initiative, or project. Other types of constraints affecting business units.
    Who Collaborate with your IT leaders and business partners to identify all major constraints that would affect cost optimization initiatives.
    How Discussions and information sessions to distinguish between negotiable and nonnegotiable constraints that would thwart cost optimization efforts:
    • Legal/regulatory requirements and related initiatives (past, ongoing, and planned/expected).
      Example: projects cannot be delayed, processes are difficult to simplify, etc.
    • Operational governance - organization policies, processes, methodologies, structure, etc.
      Example: adopting a waterfall model for development instead of an agile one.
    • Financial and accounting practices.
      Example: capital expenditure and operational expenditure classification.
    Challenge Degree to which you can influence certain outcomes within a set time frame:
    • Prioritize negotiating constraints where you can influence the outcome or maximize cost optimization benefits.

    We define a constraint as a restriction controlling the behavior of any of your stakeholders, hence preventing a desired outcome.

    In our context, constraints will determine your playing field: the boundaries of your cost optimization scope.

    Distinguish between constraints

    Negotiable vs. nonnegotiable to delimit your cost optimization scope.

    Distinguish between constraints

    Template & Example

    Constraints assessment

    List high-level limitations that hinder your cost optimization options.

    Nonnegotiable constraints
    Organizational Legal/Regulatory IT/Other
    Prioritization of sales/customer service activities SEC compliance/reporting mandates Production unit incident response service levels
    [Constraint] [Constraint] [Constraint]
    [Constraint] [Constraint] [Constraint]
    [Constraint] [Constraint] [Constraint]
    Negotiable constraints
    Organizational Legal/Regulatory IT/Other
    Core business operations process design Vendor contracts up for near-term renewal Current capital project commitments
    [Constraint] [Constraint] [Constraint]
    [Constraint] [Constraint] [Constraint]
    [Constraint] [Constraint] [Constraint]

    1.4 Establish overarching cost optimization goals

    60-90 minutes

    1. Establish specific IT cost optimization goals. Depending on your journey, step 1.1. You will have one to three overarching cost optimization goals, as follows:
      1. Reactive: Cost-cutting goal to reduce unwarranted IT spending.
      2. Proactive: Cost-to-value optimization goal.
      3. Strategic: Cost optimization sustainability goal.
      Consider amounts and time frames, as well as likely/suitable approaches you plan to employ to achieve these goals.
    2. Document your final cost optimization goals in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.
    3. Revisit your goals after outlining your initiatives (phase 2) to ensure feasibility depending on your journey.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Situational awareness and current state understanding
    • Defined goals for IT cost optimization
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Set Cost Optimization Goals tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead

    Template & Example

    Document your overarching goals

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Set Optimization Goals Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to document your goals based on your journey:

    Table of Overarching Goals

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Dropdown Select the appropriate journey: Reactive, Proactive, or Strategic.
    C Dropdown Select the appropriate cost optimization objective: Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, Optimize Cost-to-Value, Sustain Cost Optimization.
    D Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending goal is the first priority, followed by Optimize Cost-to-Value, and Sustain Cost Optimization goals, respectively.
    E Text Enter the overarching goal related to each objective.

    Complete the following fields for each goal depending on your journey in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Set Cost Optimization Goals tab.
    2. Identify your journey and objective for each goal.
    3. Document your goal(s).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    Template & Example

    Break down your goals per quarter

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Set Cost Optimization Goals Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to break down your goals per quarter and track your progress:

    Table break down your goals per quarter

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    F, G, H, I Text Enter the target per quarter: It could be a percentage, dollar amount, or description of the breakdown, depending on the cost optimization goal and objective.

    Complete the following fields for each goal depending on your journey in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Set Cost Optimization Goals tab.
    2. Determine your target per quarter for every goal.
    3. Document your targets.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    1.5 Identify inputs required for decision making

    60-90 minutes

    1. Each of the optimization levers (assets, vendors, project portfolio, and workforce) will require specific and unique sources of information which you will need to collect before moving forward. Examples of important sources of information include:
      1. Latest iteration of the IT strategy.
      2. List of IT assets (hardware, software).
      3. List of IT services or IT service catalog.
      4. List of current and planned IT projects and their resourcing allocations.
      5. List of largest vendor contracts and their key details, such as their expiration/renewal date.
      6. IT department organizational chart and salaries (by role).
    2. Review and analyze each of the documents.
    3. Continue to list potential cost optimization initiatives (step 1.2) to be further analyzed and investigated for feasibility at a later stage.
    InputOutput
    • IT strategy
    • Lists of IT assets, services, and projects
    • Top vendor contracts
    • IT org. chart and salaries
    • Macrolevel list of potential cost optimization initiatives
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Potential cost optimization initiatives list template (slide 24)
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead

    Prepare all pertinent sources of information

    And start drafting your cost optimization laundry list.

    Documents Benchmarking IT Strategy Other Information Sources
    What
    • Review:
      • Your IT spend trend across several years (ideally three to five years): internal benchmarking report.
      • Your IT spend compared to industry peers: external benchmarking report.
    • Analyze your internal and external benchmarking reports across the four views: service, expense, business, and innovation.
    • Review your business aligned IT strategy to identify cost optimization related initiatives.
    • At a later stage, exploit your IT strategy to prioritize cost optimization initiatives as needed.
    • Review your IT organization chart and salaries to determine whether the IT organization structure is optimal, job descriptions are mapped to the desired structure, employee skillsets and salary scale are adequate and aligned to the job description, etc.
    • Compile and examine lists of assets, vendors, projects, and services.
    • Prepare any other information sources you deem meaningful.
    Who Collaborate with your IT leaders and business partners to:
    • Prepare the necessary reports, documents, and required sources of information.
    • Identify potential cost optimization initiatives around areas of improvement.
    How Discussions and information sessions to analyze and deep dive on raw findings.
    Challenge Time to compile and analyze reports without affecting day-to-day operations:
    • Outsource some activities such as external benchmarking to organizations like Info-Tech.
    • Get consulting support on specific reports or tasks through workshops, calls, etc.

    Phase 2

    Outline Your Cost Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 1
    Understand Your Mandate and Objectives

    Phase 2
    Outline Your Cost Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 3
    Develop Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Phase 4
    Communicate and Execute

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • IT cost optimization initiatives
    • IT cost optimization workbook

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT asset manager
    • IT infrastructure manager
    • IT vendor management lead
    • PMO lead
    • IT talent management representative
    • Other IT management

    Outline your cost optimization initiatives

    Across Info-Tech's four levers.

    Levers ASSETS VENDORS PROJECT PORTFOLI WORKFORCE
    What
    • Maintain trustworthy data to optimize cost, reduce risk, and improve services in line with business priorities and requirements:
      • Optimize cost: reallocate unused hardware and software, end unneeded service agreements, and manage renewals and audits.
      • Reduce risk: provide comprehensive asset data for security controls development and incident management - manage equipment disposal.
      • Improve IT service: support incident, problem, request, and change management with ITAM data.
    • Examine your vendor contracts and vendor management practices to optimize your expected value from every IT provider you deal with.
    • Treat vendor management as a proactive, cross-functional practice aiming to create value by improving communication, relationships, processes, performance, and ultimately reducing cost.
    • Reassess your project portfolio to maximize total value in line with business objectives and strategy.
    • Reduce resource waste with a strategic approach to project portfolio management:
      • Ensure that approved projects can be completed by aligning intake with real project capacity.
      • Minimize over-allocation of resources by allocating based on the proportion of project vs. non-project work.
      • Forecast future resource requirements by maintaining accurate resource capacity data.
    • Review your strategic workforce plan to identify cost optimization opportunities.
    • Determine capability gaps to train or develop current staff and minimize the need for severance payouts and hiring costs, while providing clear career paths to retain high performers.
    • Link workforce planning with strategic planning to ensure that you have the right people in the right positions, in the right places, at the right time, with the knowledge, skills, and attributes to deliver on strategic business goals.
    Who Collaborate with your IT leaders and business partners to:
    • Prepare the necessary reports, documents, and required sources of information.
    • Determine cost optimization initiatives across the four levers.
    How You will decide on the best course of action depending on your journey.

    Most common cost optimization challenges

    Across Info-Tech's four levers.

    Levers ASSETS VENDORS PROJECT PORTFOLI WORKFORCE
    Challenge
    • Incomplete or inaccurate data, poor processes, inadequate tools, and lack of support across the organization is leading to bad decision making while damaging value.
    • Spending on IT providers is increasing while vendor contract expected value - results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes - is not realized.
    • Poor planning, conflicting priorities, and resource scarcity is affecting project outcomes, resulting in suboptimal value.
    • Talent shortages, lack of prioritization, and experience in managing an IT workforce is leading to higher costs and a loss in value.
    Solution
    • Develop a sustainable IT asset management (ITAM) strategy aligned with your business priorities.
    • Establish a vendor management initiative (VMI) with a solid foundation to fit your organization's culture, environment, and goals.
    • Create a coherent strategy to maximize the total value that projects deliver as a portfolio, rather than a collection of individual projects.
    • Develop a strategic workforce plan (SWP) to ensure you have the right people in place at the right time.
    Related Info-Tech Research Develop an IT Asset Management Strategy Jump-start Your Vendor Management Initiative Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    2.1 Determine your cost optimization initiatives

    8 hours

    Now that you have identified your journey and understood your constraints:

    1. Review your list of potential cost optimization initiatives and document viable ones in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.
    2. Think of potential cost optimization initiatives within the four levers: assets, vendors, project portfolio, and workforce. The following slides will help you in this endeavor.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    Input Output
    • Potential cost optimization initiatives list
    • Outline Initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    Materials Participants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Other IT management - depending on the optimization lever (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce)

    Plan your cost optimization initiatives

    Your initiatives will differ depending on your journey

    In terms of aggressiveness and objectives.

    Plan cost optimization initiatives

    Cost optimization initiatives pertaining to a reactive journey are characterized by aggressive cost reduction.

    On the other hand, cost optimization initiatives within a strategic journey can vary in aggressiveness across objectives.

    2.1.1 Identify asset optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Review the IT asset management strategy if available. Compile a list of all hardware, software, and facility asset costs for delivery of IT services.
    2. Analyze hardware and software assets for opportunities to consolidate, reduce, eliminate, and/or enhance functionality/automation. Look for:
      1. Redundancy or duplication of functionality not necessary for disaster recovery or business continuity purposes.
      2. Low or no-use software.
      3. Homegrown or legacy systems with high maintenance/support burdens.
      4. Multiple, old, or unsupported versions of current-use software.
      5. Opportunities to delay hardware/software refreshes or upgrades.
      6. Cloud/outsourced options.
      7. Instances of unsanctioned shadow IT.
    3. Reassess your in-house asset management processes to see where efficiency and effectiveness could be improved overall.
    4. Document cost optimization initiatives that could be driven by asset optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • IT asset management strategy
    • List of current assets including hardware, software, and facilities
    • Outline Initiatives driven by asset optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT asset manager
    • IT infrastructure manager
    • Other IT management

    Example

    Asset optimization

    Some examples to get you started

    Journey Reactive, Proactive, or Strategic Proactive or Strategic Strategic
    Initiatives
    • Validate the license cost of performance optimization.
    • Review the utilization of software/hardware before renewal or purchase of additional hardware or software.
    • Assess new license cost against projects to determine possibility of differing or canceling software.
    • Postpone the purchases of hardware.
    • Extend the life of hardware.
    • Consolidate and reconfigure hardware.
    • Return damaged/malfunctioning hardware under warranty.
    • Consolidate and reconfigure software.
    • Optimize software/hardware functionality.
    • Implement hardware/software standard or policy.
    • Develop an infrastructure management outsourcing strategy.
    • Optimize cloud management: review utilization, licensing, cost, etc.
    • Develop a sustainable IT asset management (ITAM) strategy aligned with your business priorities.
    • Minimize shadow IT by creating a policy and improving the service request process.
    • Develop or assess a cloud strategy for a certain service.
    No initiatives for the reactive journey. No initiatives for the reactive or proactive journeys.
    Objective Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending Optimize Cost-to-Value Sustain Cost Optimization

    Template & Example

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to input your asset optimization initiatives and related objectives:

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The ID will update once there's an input in column E.
    C Dropdown Select an optimization lever: Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce.
    D Dropdown Select an initiative focus from the dropdown list - this will help you think of initiatives.
    E Text Enter your initiative.
    F Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing a cost optimization rationale.
    G Dropdown Select the cost type per initiative: OpEx (operating expenditure) or CapEx (capital expenditure).
    H Dropdown Select 1 of 3 objectives for each initiative: Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, Optimize Cost-to-Value, or Sustain Cost Optimization.

    List your initiatives in the provided Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Enter all your initiatives driven by the asset optimization lever.
    3. Determine the cost optimization objective per initiative.

    2.1.2 Identify vendor optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Revisit the IT vendor classification if available. Identify all existing vendor contracts up for renewal within the current fiscal year and create an inventory.
    2. Examine your vendor contracts to optimize your expected value from every IT provider you deal with. For each contract:
      1. Identify the business purpose/drivers.
      2. Identify the expiration/renewal date to determine time frames for action.
      3. Determine if there is an opportunity to rightsize, cancel, renegotiate costs/service levels, or postpone renewal/purchase.
      4. Identify integrations and interdependencies with other hardware and software systems to understand scope and impact of potential changes.
    3. Reassess your in-house vendor management processes to see where efficiency and effectiveness could be improved overall.
    4. Document cost optimization initiatives that could be driven by vendor optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Vendor classification
    • Vendors contracts
    • Outline Initiatives driven by vendor optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT vendor management lead
    • Other IT management

    Example

    Vendor optimization

    Some examples to get you started.

    Journey Reactive, Proactive, or Strategic Proactive or Strategic Strategic
    Initiatives
    • Renegotiate and rightsize a vendor contract:
      • Cancel vendor/service/type application contract.
      • Renegotiate vendor/service/type contract.
      • Cancel vendor/service/type licenses.
      • Rationalize number of vendor/service/type licenses.
    • Consolidate vendors/resellers with similar services, products and features.
    • Implement a vendor management initiative to maximize value and minimize risk.
    • Consolidate contracts to take advantage of spending power and volume.
    • Set up custom vendor performance metrics.
    • Establish ongoing monitoring of vendor risk (financial, security, etc.).
    No initiatives for the reactive journey. No initiatives for the reactive or proactive journeys.
    Objective Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending Optimize Cost-to-Value Sustain Cost Optimization

    Template & Example

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to input your vendor optimization initiatives and related objectives:

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The ID will update once there's an input in column E.
    C Dropdown Select an optimization lever: Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce.
    D Dropdown Select an initiative focus from the dropdown list - this will help you think of initiatives.
    E Text Enter your initiative.
    F Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing a cost optimization rationale.
    G Dropdown Select the cost type per initiative: OpEx (operating expenditure) or CapEx (capital expenditure).
    H Dropdown Select 1 of 3 objectives for each initiative: Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, Optimize Cost-to-Value, or Sustain Cost Optimization.

    List your initiatives in the provided Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Enter all your initiatives driven by the vendor optimization lever.
    3. Determine the cost optimization objective per initiative.

    2.1.3 Identify project portfolio optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Review the IT Project Portfolio Strategy if available, and the list of both in-flight and planned projects.
    2. Reassess your project portfolio to maximize total value in line with business objectives and strategy. For each current and pending project on the list, identify a cost optimization initiative, including:
      1. Revisiting, confirming, and documenting actual project rationale with the business in relation to strategic goals.
      2. Rescoping existing projects that are underway.
      3. Accelerating planned or existing projects that enable business cost savings or competitive advantage and revenue growth.
      4. Canceling or postponing projects that are underway or haven't started.
      5. Identifying net-new projects that enhance business capabilities or save business costs.
    3. Reassess your in-house project management and project portfolio management processes to see where efficiency and effectiveness could be improved overall.
    4. Document cost optimization initiatives that could be driven by project portfolio optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    Input Output
    • Project Portfolio Management Strategy
    • List of current and pending projects
    • Outline Initiatives driven by project portfolio optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    Materials Participants
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • PMO lead
    • Other IT management

    Example

    Project portfolio optimization

    Some examples to get you started.

    Journey Reactive, Proactive, or Strategic Proactive or Strategic Strategic
    Initiatives
    • Cancel projects with no executive sponsor.
    • Cancel projects with unacceptable timelines.
    • Postpone projects where there is a more urgent need for related resources.
    • Rescope projects where a more effective business case has been identified.
    • Freeze projects where scope and resourcing are uncertain.
    • Accelerate projects that enable business cost savings or a competitive advantage with revenue growth.
    • Combine projects that are better managed by realigning project managers and coordinators.
    • Break projects into phases to front-load realized value.
    • Outsource projects with commoditized skillset requirements.
    • Reassess the technology requirements when multiple vendors are involved.
    • Reexamine project rationale with the business in relation to strategic goals.
    • Identify net-new projects that offer improved value in relation to current economics.
    • Reassess the strategic drivers for project spending in the face of shifting priorities.
    • Implement a project portfolio governance function.
    • Introduce a benefits realization discipline in relation to the benefits forecasted during project approval.
    No initiatives for the reactive journey. No initiatives for the reactive or proactive journeys.
    Objective Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending Optimize Cost-to-Value Sustain Cost Optimization

    Template & Example

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to input your project portfolio optimization initiatives and related objectives:

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The ID will update once there's an input in column E.
    C Dropdown Select an optimization lever: Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce.
    D Dropdown Select an initiative focus from the dropdown list - this will help you think of initiatives.
    E Text Enter your initiative.
    F Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing a cost optimization rationale.
    G Dropdown Select the cost type per initiative: OpEx (operating expenditure) or CapEx (capital expenditure).
    H Dropdown Select 1 of 3 objectives for each initiative: Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, Optimize Cost-to-Value, or Sustain Cost Optimization.

    List your initiatives in the provided Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Enter all your initiatives driven by the project portfolio optimization lever.
    3. Determine the cost optimization objective per initiative.

    2.1.4 Identify workforce optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Review the IT department's strategic workforce plan (SWP) if available, organizational chart, and salaries by role. Do not review IT staffing in terms of named individuals who occupy a given role - focus on functions, roles, and job descriptions.
    2. Determine capability gaps:
      1. Rectify efficiency, effectiveness, and other performance issues.
      2. Train IT staff to enhance or improve skills and effectiveness.
      3. Add roles, skills, or headcount to improve effectiveness.
      4. Integrate teams to improve collaboration and reduce redundancies or break out new ones to increase focus/specialization.
      5. Redesign job roles and responsibilities.
      6. Redeploy/reassign staff to other teams.
      7. Conduct layoff (as a last resort, starting by assessing contractual employees).
    3. Document cost optimization initiatives that could be driven by workforce optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Strategic workforce plan (SWP)
    • Organizational charts
    • Staff lists
    • Outline Initiatives driven by workforce optimization objectives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Talent management representative
    • Other IT management

    Example

    Workforce optimization

    Some examples to get you started.

    Journey Reactive, Proactive, or Strategic Proactive or Strategic Strategic
    Initiatives
    • Defer vacancy, position, or role.
    • Freeze all overnight and unessential IT staff travel.
    • Outsource project/function to free internal resources.
    • Postpone nonessential IT staff training as per training plans.
    • Suspend IT team discretionary spend.
    • Streamline workforce related to department/service (develop the process).
    • Relocate role or function from division or group to division or group.
    • Adjust framework and level assignments.
    • Promote and train employees for a certain objective.
    • Implement a strategic workforce plan (SWP) to ensure you have the right people in place, at the right time.
    • Set up a workforce performance monitoring framework or process to optimize staffing capabilities aligned with business value.
    No initiatives for the reactive journey. No initiatives for the reactive or proactive journeys.
    Objective Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending Optimize Cost-to-Value Sustain Cost Optimization

    Template & Example

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to input your workforce optimization initiatives and related objectives:

    List your objectives and initiatives

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The ID will update once there's an input in column E.
    C Dropdown Select an optimization lever: Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce.
    D Dropdown Select an initiative focus from the dropdown list - this will help you think of initiatives.
    E Text Enter your initiative.
    F Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing a cost optimization rationale.
    G Dropdown Select the cost type per initiative: OpEx (operating expenditure) or CapEx (capital expenditure).
    H Dropdown Select 1 of 3 objectives for each initiative: Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, Optimize Cost-to-Value, or Sustain Cost Optimization.

    List your initiatives in the provided Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Enter all your initiatives driven by the workforce optimization lever.
    3. Determine the cost optimization objective per initiative.

    2.2 Estimate the cost savings of cost optimization initiatives

    8 hours

    Now that you have identified your initiatives:

    1. Review your cost optimization initiatives per lever (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, and Workforce).
    2. Determine whether the implementation cost of each of your initiatives is included as part of your budget.
    3. Estimate your cost savings.
    4. Document your assessment in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Potential cost optimization initiatives list
    • Outline Initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard or flip charts
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Other IT management - depending on the optimization lever (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce)

    2.2.1 Estimate the costs impacting your asset optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Review each asset optimization initiative to estimate cost implications.
    2. Consider implementation cost in terms of your budget, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). Is the implementation cost of the underlying initiative considered in your current budget? If not, move to the next initiative. You will assess the flagged initiative independently at a later stage if deemed necessary.
    3. Estimate the current cost related to the initiative (including implementation cost), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the first of two inputs needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.
    4. Estimate the expected cost, post initiative execution, of the underlying initiative, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the second and last input needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Asset optimization initiatives
    • Cost and budget information
    • Cost estimates of asset optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT asset manager
    • IT infrastructure manager
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Estimate your cost

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete cost estimates for each asset optimization initiative:

    Estimate your cost

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    I Dropdown Select if the implementation cost is considered within your budget or not. If not, the initiative will be flagged to be reviewed, and no further entry is required; move to the next initiative. Implementation cost represents your cost for planning, executing, and monitoring the related initiative.
    J, K Whole Number Input a dollar amount. Current cost represents the yearly cost including implementing the initiative, while the expected cost represents the yearly cost after implementing the initiative.
    L Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The difference between current cost and expected cost.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine if the implementation cost is considered within the budget.
    3. If yes, estimate the current cost, and expected cost of the underlying initiative.

    2.2.2 Estimate the costs impacting your vendor optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Review each vendor optimization initiative to estimate cost implications.
    2. Consider implementation cost in terms of your budget, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). Is the implementation cost of the underlying initiative considered in your current budget? If not, move to the next initiative. You will assess the flagged initiative independently at a later stage if deemed necessary.
    3. Estimate the current cost related to the initiative (including implementation cost), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the first of two inputs needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.
    4. Estimate the expected cost, post initiative execution, of the underlying initiative, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the second and last input needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Vendor optimization initiatives
    • Cost and budget information
    • Cost estimates of vendor optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT vendor management lead
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Estimate your cost

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete cost estimates for each vendor optimization initiative:

    Estimate your cost

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    I Dropdown Select if the implementation cost is considered within your budget or not. If not, the initiative will be flagged to be reviewed, and no further entry is required; move to the next initiative. Implementation cost represents your cost for planning, executing, and monitoring the related initiative.
    J, K Whole Number Input a dollar amount. Current cost represents the yearly cost including implementing the initiative, while the expected cost represents the yearly cost after implementing the initiative.
    L Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The difference between current cost and expected cost.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine if the implementation cost is considered within the budget.
    3. If yes, estimate the current cost, and expected cost of the underlying initiative.

    2.2.3 Estimate the costs impacting your project portfolio optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Review each project portfolio optimization initiative to estimate cost implications.
    2. Consider implementation cost in terms of your budget, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). Is the implementation cost of the underlying initiative considered in your current budget? If not, move to the next initiative. You will assess the flagged initiative independently at a later stage if deemed necessary.
    3. Estimate the current cost related to the initiative (including implementation cost), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the first of two inputs needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.
    4. Estimate the expected cost, post initiative execution, of the underlying initiative, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the second and last input needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Project portfolio optimization initiatives
    • Cost and budget information
    • Cost estimates of project portfolio optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • PMO lead
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Estimate your cost

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete cost estimates for each project portfolio optimization initiative:

    Estimate your cost

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    I Dropdown Select if the implementation cost is considered within your budget or not. If not, the initiative will be flagged to be reviewed, and no further entry is required; move to the next initiative. Implementation cost represents your cost for planning, executing, and monitoring the related initiative.
    J, K Whole Number Input a dollar amount. Current cost represents the yearly cost including implementing the initiative, while the expected cost represents the yearly cost after implementing the initiative.
    L Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The difference between current cost and expected cost.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine if the implementation cost is considered within the budget.
    3. If yes, estimate the current cost, and expected cost of the underlying initiative.

    2.2.4 Estimate the costs impacting your workforce optimization initiatives

    2 hours

    1. Review each workforce optimization initiative to estimate cost implications.
    2. Consider implementation cost in terms of your budget, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). Is the implementation cost of the underlying initiative considered in your current budget? If not, move to the next initiative. You will assess the flagged initiative independently at a later stage if deemed necessary.
    3. Estimate the current cost related to the initiative (including implementation cost), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the first of two inputs needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.
    4. Estimate the expected cost, post initiative execution, of the underlying initiative, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). This will be the second and last input needed to calculate the initiative's potential cost savings.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Workforce optimization initiatives
    • Cost and budget information
    • Cost estimates of workforce optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Talent management representative
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Estimate your cost

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization –i Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete cost estimates for each workforce optimization initiative:

    Estimate your cost

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    I Dropdown Select if the implementation cost is considered within your budget or not. If not, the initiative will be flagged to be reviewed, and no further entry is required; move to the next initiative. Implementation cost represents your cost for planning, executing, and monitoring the related initiative.
    J, K Whole Number Input a dollar amount. Current cost represents the yearly cost including implementing the initiative, while the expected cost represents the yearly cost after implementing the initiative.
    L Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The difference between current cost and expected cost.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine if the implementation cost is considered within the budget.
    3. If yes, estimate the current cost, and expected cost of the underlying initiative.

    Phase 3

    Develop Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Phase 1
    Understand Your Mandate and Objectives

    Phase 2
    Outline Your Cost Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 3
    Develop Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Phase 4
    Communicate and Execute

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • IT cost optimization workbook
    • IT cost optimization roadmap

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT asset manager
    • IT infrastructure manager
    • IT vendor management lead
    • PMO lead
    • IT talent management representative
    • Other IT management

    Develop your prioritized and aligned cost optimization roadmap

    The process of developing your roadmap is where you set final cost optimization priorities, conduct a final rationalization to decide what's in and what's out, and document your proposed plan of action.

    First, take a moment to consider if you missed anything. Too often, only the cost cutting elements of the cost optimization equation get attention. Remember that cost optimization also includes making smart investments. Sometimes adding and expanding is better for the business than removing or contracting.

    • Do your proposed initiatives help position the organization to recover quickly if you're dealing with a downturn or recession scenario?
    • Have you fully considered growth or innovation opportunities that will help optimize costs in the long run?

    Feasibility
    Eliminate initiatives from the longlist of potential initiatives that cannot be achieved given the cost optimization goals you determined at the beginning of this exercise.

    Priority
    Rank order the remaining initiatives according to their ability to contribute to goal attainment and dependency relationships with external constraints and one another.

    Action Plan
    Create an overarching visual roadmap that shows how you intend to achieve your cost optimization goals over the short, medium, and long-term.

    3.1 Assess the feasibility of your cost optimization initiatives

    4 hours

    Now that you have identified your initiatives across the four levers and understood the business impacts:

    1. Review each of your cost optimization initiatives and estimate the feasibility in terms of:
      1. Effort required to implement.
      2. Risk: Likelihood of failure and impact on performance.
      3. Approval rights: Within the IT or finance's accountability/domain or not.
    2. Document your assessment in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Cost optimization initiatives
    • Feasibility estimates of cost optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Variables tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Other IT management - depending on the optimization lever (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce)

    3.1.1 Estimate the feasibility of your asset optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each asset optimization initiative to estimate feasibility implications.
    2. Start by defining the effort required variables. Think in terms of how many dedicated full-time employees you would need to implement the initiative. Document your definition for each of the three variables (High, Medium, or Low) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). Then, estimate the effort required to implement the related initiative. Consider complexity, scope, and resource availability, before you document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    3. Define your likelihood of failure variables. Think in terms of probability of failure or percent chance the underlying initiative will not succeed. Document your definition for each of the three variables (High, Medium, or Low) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides). Then, estimate the likelihood of failure to implement the related initiative, and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    4. Consider the initiative's impact on performance. Would implementing the initiative hinder IT or business performance? If you are on a reactive journey, would it impede business recovery in any way, shape, or form? Document the impact (Positive Impact, No Impact, or Negative Impact) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    5. Determine who is responsible for approving the initiative. Does it fall within your jurisdiction, responsibility, or accountability? If not, it would mean that it might be more difficult to implement the initiative. Document approval rights (within accountability or not within accountability) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    Input Output
    • Asset optimization initiatives
    • Feasibility estimates of asset optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    Materials Participants
    • Define Variables tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT asset manager
    • IT infrastructure manager
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Define your feasibility variables

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Define Variables Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to define your feasibility variables for standardization purposes. You can adopt a different definition per optimization lever (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, and Workforce), or maintain the same one across initiatives, depending on what makes sense for your organization:

    Define your feasibility variables

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    B, G Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The ID will populate automatically.
    C, H Text No entry required. Three variables identified: High, Medium, Low.
    D, E Whole Number Review and input the range of each effort required variable, based on the number of dedicated full-time employees needed to implement an initiative, as it works best for your organization.
    I, J Whole Number Review and input the range of each likelihood of failure variable, based on the probability of failure of an initiative, as it works best for your organization. This example should work for most organizations.

    Define your feasibility variables in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Define Variables tab.
    2. Review and enter the range of each effort required and likelihood of failure variable as you see fit for your organization.

    Template & Example

    Estimate your feasibility

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete feasibility estimates for each asset optimization initiative:

    Estimate your feasibility

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    M Dropdown Select the effort required estimate based on your defined variables. Effort required represents the number of dedicated employees needed to plan, execute, and monitor the underlying initiative, based on the level of maturity and readiness; consider complexity, scope, and resource availability.
    N Dropdown Select the likelihood of failure estimate based on your defined variables. Likelihood of failure represents the probability of failure of the underlying initiative.
    O Dropdown Select the impact on performance estimate related to the implementation of the underlying initiative. Consider the impact on IT and on business (including business recovery if on a reactive journey).
    P Dropdown Select the appropriate approval right related to the underlying initiative. Determine if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability or not.
    Q Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing an impact rationale and identifying the approver where possible.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate effort required to implement the underlying initiative.
    3. Identify the risk of each initiative: likelihood of failure and impact on performance.
    4. Choose the adequate approval right classification for each initiative.

    3.1.2 Estimate the feasibility of your vendor optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each vendor optimization initiative to estimate feasibility implications, along with previously defined variables (see slides 64 and 65).
    2. Consider the initiative's impact on performance. Would implementing the initiative hinder IT or business performance? If you are on a reactive journey, would it impede business recovery in any way, shape, or form? Document the impact (Positive Impact, No Impact, or Negative Impact) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    3. Determine who is responsible for approving the initiative. Does it fall within your jurisdiction, responsibility, or accountability? If not, it would mean that it might be more difficult to implement the initiative. Document approval rights (within accountability or not within accountability) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Vendor optimization initiatives
    • Feasibility estimates of vendor optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Variables tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT vendor management lead
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Estimate your feasibility

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete feasibility estimates for each vendor optimization initiative:

    Estimate your feasibility

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    M Dropdown Select the effort required estimate based on your defined variables. Effort required represents the number of dedicated employees needed to plan, execute, and monitor the underlying initiative, based on the level of maturity and readiness; consider complexity, scope, and resource availability.
    N Dropdown Select the likelihood of failure estimate based on your defined variables. Likelihood of failure represents the probability of failure of the underlying initiative.
    O Dropdown Select the impact on performance estimate related to the implementation of the underlying initiative. Consider the impact on IT and on business (including business recovery if on a reactive journey).
    P Dropdown Select the appropriate approval right related to the underlying initiative. Determine if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability or not.
    Q Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing an impact rationale and identifying the approver where possible.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate effort required to implement the underlying initiative.
    3. Identify the risk of each initiative: likelihood of failure and impact on performance.
    4. Choose the adequate approval right classification for each initiative.

    3.1.3 Estimate the feasibility of your project portfolio optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each project portfolio optimization initiative to estimate feasibility implications, along with previously defined variables (see slides 64 and 65).
    2. Consider the initiative's impact on performance. Would implementing the initiative hinder IT or business performance? If you are on a reactive journey, would it impede business recovery in any way, shape, or form? Document the impact (Positive Impact, No Impact, or Negative Impact) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    3. Determine who is responsible for approving the initiative. Does it fall within your jurisdiction, responsibility, or accountability? If not, it would mean that it might be more difficult to implement the initiative. Document approval rights (within accountability or not within accountability) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Project portfolio optimization initiatives
    • Feasibility estimates of vendor optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Variables tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • PMO lead
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Estimate your feasibility

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete feasibility estimates for each project portfolio optimization initiative:

    Estimate your feasibility

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    M Dropdown Select the effort required estimate based on your defined variables. Effort required represents the number of dedicated employees needed to plan, execute, and monitor the underlying initiative, based on the level of maturity and readiness; consider complexity, scope, and resource availability.
    N Dropdown Select the likelihood of failure estimate based on your defined variables. Likelihood of failure represents the probability of failure of the underlying initiative.
    O Dropdown Select the impact on performance estimate related to the implementation of the underlying initiative. Consider the impact on IT and on business (including business recovery if on a reactive journey).
    P Dropdown Select the appropriate approval right related to the underlying initiative. Determine if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability or not.
    Q Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing an impact rationale and identifying the approver where possible.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate effort required to implement the underlying initiative.
    3. Identify the risk of each initiative: likelihood of failure and impact on performance.
    4. Choose the adequate approval right classification for each initiative.

    3.1.4 Estimate the feasibility of your workforce optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each workforce optimization initiative to estimate feasibility implications, along with previously defined variables (see slides 64 and 65).
    2. Consider the initiative's impact on performance. Would implementing the initiative hinder IT or business performance? If you are on a reactive journey, would it impede business recovery in any way, shape, or form? Document the impact (Positive Impact, No Impact, or Negative Impact) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    3. Determine who is responsible for approving the initiative. Does it fall within your jurisdiction, responsibility, or accountability? If not, it would mean that it might be more difficult to implement the initiative. Document approval rights (within accountability or not within accountability) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Workforce optimization initiatives
    • Feasibility estimates of workforce optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Variables tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Talent management representative
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Estimate your feasibility

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete feasibility estimates for each workforce optimization initiative:

    Estimate your feasibility

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    M Dropdown Select the effort required estimate based on your defined variables. Effort required represents the number of dedicated employees needed to plan, execute, and monitor the underlying initiative, based on the level of maturity and readiness; consider complexity, scope, and resource availability.
    N Dropdown Select the likelihood of failure estimate based on your defined variables. Likelihood of failure represents the probability of failure of the underlying initiative.
    O Dropdown Select the impact on performance estimate related to the implementation of the underlying initiative. Consider the impact on IT and on business (including business recovery if on a reactive journey).
    P Dropdown Select the appropriate approval right related to the underlying initiative. Determine if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability or not.
    Q Text Write a brief description per initiative, providing an impact rationale and identifying the approver where possible.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate effort required to implement the underlying initiative.
    3. Identify the risk of each initiative: likelihood of failure and impact on performance.
    4. Choose the adequate approval right classification for each initiative.

    3.2 Prioritize cost optimization initiatives to create a final shortlist

    4 hours

    Now that you have your cost and feasibility for each cost optimization initiative:

    1. Review each of your cost optimization initiatives and estimate the time and priority by considering:
      1. Preliminary priority assessment based on your cost and feasibility input.
      2. Time frame: start and end date of each initiative.
      3. Current budget cycle: time remaining in the current budget cycle and potential cost savings in this fiscal year.
    2. Determine the final priority of the initiative and decide whether you want to include it in your 12-month roadmap.
    3. Document your assessment in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Cost optimization initiatives
    • Time and priority estimates of cost optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Priority Threshold tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Other IT management - depending on the optimization lever (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, or Workforce)

    3.2.1 Prioritize your asset optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each asset optimization initiative to set the priority.
    2. Validate your cost and feasibility estimates and consider the automated evaluation, in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook, providing you with a preliminary priority based on your cost and feasibility estimates (see next slides).
    3. Revisit your overarching goals (step 1.4) as you will assess the time it will take you to complete your initiatives and prioritize accordingly.
    4. Determine your start and end date for each initiative based on your journey, objectives, and overarching goals. Consider the urgency of each initiative. Document the quarter and year for your start and end dates in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    5. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of each initiative to get a cost savings estimate for the current fiscal year. Document the number of remaining quarters (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    6. Decide on the priority of each initiative (High, Medium, or Low), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    7. Revisit the priority decision after prioritizing all your initiatives and determine which ones to include in your 12-month roadmap; consider the number of initiatives you can tackle at the same time within a 12-month period. Document your final decision (Yes or No) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Asset optimization initiatives
    • Time and priority estimates of cost optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Priority Threshold tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT asset manager
    • IT infrastructure manager
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Understand your priority assessment

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how the preliminary priority assessment is assigned, for each asset optimization initiative, noting that columns Q to X are hidden automatic calculations and should not be touched:

    Understand your priority assessment

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    R Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Rank of estimate cost savings (per year) in ascending order (higher cost savings implies a higher rank).
    S Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Savings Score on a scale of 1 to 3, where the top third in Cost Savings Rank are assigned a score of 1, the bottom third a score of 3, and in between a score of 2, noting that negative cost savings would imply a -1 score.
    T Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Score adds 1 to the Cost Savings Score if the underlying initiative is within the budget.
    U, V, W Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. A score on a scale of 1 to 3 based on input of columns M, N, and O, where Low or Positive Impact is assigned a score of 3, Medium or No Impact a score of 2, and High or Negative Impact a score of 1.
    X Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The rounding of the average of columns U, V, and W, adding 1 to the result if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability (column P).
    Y Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The sum of columns T and X, adding 3 for Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, and 1 to Optimize Cost-to-value (column H).
    Z Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Preliminary priority assessment based on the Define Priority Threshold worksheet (hidden, see next slide).

    Review the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Validate cost and feasibility estimates (columns I to P previously filled - steps 2.2 and 3.1) driving the Priority Score and Preliminary Priority Assessment.

    Template & Example

    Priority threshold rationale

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Define Priority Threshold Worksheet

    Refer to the screenshot of the Define Priority Threshold worksheet below to understand the rationale behind the priority score and priority level:

    Priority threshold rationale

    Template & Example

    Estimate your timeline

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete timeline estimates for each asset optimization initiative:

    Estimate your timeline

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    AA, AC Dropdown Select the quarter(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AB, AD Dropdown Select the year(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AE Dropdown Select the number of remaining quarters, in the current fiscal year, after you complete the initiative (0 to 4); based on columns AA to AD.
    AF Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Estimate of cost savings in the current fiscal year, based on the remaining quarters after implementation. The entry in column AE is divided by 4, and the result is multiplied by the related estimated cost savings per year (entry in column L).
    AG Dropdown Select if cost savings after the implementation of the underlying initiative will be permanent or temporary.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate quarter and year to start and complete the initiative.
    3. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of the initiative.

    Template & Example

    Make your final decisions

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to assign the final priority for each asset optimization initiative, and include it in your 12-month roadmap:

    Make your final decisions

    Column ID Row ID Input Type Guidelines
    AH - Dropdown Select your final priority decision after reviewing the preliminary priority assessment (column Z) and timeline estimates (columns AA to AG).
    AI - Dropdown Select whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap (Yes or No).
    AK, AL 5 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The total number of initiatives you decided to include in your 12-month roadmap; based on column AI when Yes is selected.
    AK, AL 6 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings per year after the initiative's completion; based on column L when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    AK, AL 7 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings in the current fiscal year; based on column AF when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    • Estimated cost savings per year refer to cost savings fully realized by the end of the upcoming fiscal year, following the initiatives' implementation.
    • Estimated cost savings in the current budget cycle, refer to cost savings partially realized in the current fiscal year, after the initiatives' implementation.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the final priority of the initiative.
    3. Decide whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap.

    3.2.2 Prioritize your vendor optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each vendor optimization initiative to set the priority.
    2. Validate your cost and feasibility estimates and consider the automated evaluation, in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook, providing you with a preliminary priority based on your cost and feasibility estimates (see next slides).
    3. Revisit your overarching goals (step 1.4) as you will assess the time it will take you to complete your initiatives and prioritize accordingly.
    4. Determine your start and end date for each initiative based on your journey, objectives, and overarching goals. Consider the urgency of each initiative. Document the quarter and year for your start and end dates in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    5. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of each initiative to get a cost savings estimate for the current fiscal year. Document the number of remaining quarters (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    6. Decide on the priority of each initiative (High, Medium, or Low), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    7. Revisit the priority decision after prioritizing all your initiatives and determine which ones to include in your 12-month roadmap; consider the number of initiatives you can tackle at the same time within a 12-month period. Document your final decision (Yes or No) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    Input Output
    • Vendor optimization initiatives
    • Time and priority estimates of cost optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    Materials Participants
    • Define Priority Threshold tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • IT vendor management lead
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Understand your priority assessment

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how the preliminary priority assessment is assigned, for each vendor optimization initiative, noting that columns Q to X are hidden automatic calculations and should not be touched:

    Understand your priority assessment

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    R Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Rank of estimate cost savings (per year) in ascending order (higher cost savings implies a higher rank).
    S Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Savings Score on a scale of 1 to 3, where the top third in Cost Savings Rank are assigned a score of 1, the bottom third a score of 3, and in between a score of 2, noting that negative cost savings would imply a -1 score.
    T Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Score adds 1 to the Cost Savings Score if the underlying initiative is within the budget.
    U, V, W Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. A score on a scale of 1 to 3 based on input of columns M, N, and O, where Low or Positive Impact is assigned a score of 3, Medium or No Impact a score of 2, and High or Negative Impact a score of 1.
    X Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The rounding of the average of columns U, V, and W, adding 1 to the result if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability (column P).
    Y Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The sum of columns T and X, adding 3 for Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, and 1 to Optimize Cost-to-Value (column H).
    Z Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Preliminary priority assessment based on the Define Priority Threshold worksheet (hidden, see next slide).

    Review the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Validate cost and feasibility estimates (columns I to P previously filled - steps 2.2 and 3.1) driving the Priority Score and Preliminary Priority Assessment.

    Template & Example

    Priority Threshold Rationale

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Define Priority Threshold Worksheet

    Refer to the screenshot of the Define Priority Threshold worksheet below to understand the rationale behind the Priority Score and Priority Level:

    Priority Threshold Rationale

    Template & Example

    Estimate your timeline

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization – Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete timeline estimates for each vendor optimization initiative:

    Estimate your timeline

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    AA, AC Dropdown Select the quarter(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AB, AD Dropdown Select the year(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AE Dropdown Select the number of remaining quarters, in the current fiscal year, after you complete the initiative (0 to 4); based on columns AA to AD.
    AF Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Estimate of cost savings in the current fiscal year, based on the remaining quarters after implementation. The entry in column AE is divided by 4, and the result is multiplied by the related estimated cost savings per year (entry in column L).
    AG Dropdown Select if cost savings after the implementation of the underlying initiative will be Permanent or Temporary.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate quarter and year to start and complete the initiative.
    3. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of the initiative.

    Template & Example

    Make your final decisions

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to assign the final priority for each vendor optimization initiative, and include it in your 12-month roadmap:

    Make your final decisions

    Column ID Row ID Input Type Guidelines
    AH - Dropdown Select your final priority decision after reviewing the preliminary priority assessment (column Z) and timeline estimates (columns AA to AG).
    AI - Dropdown Select whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap (Yes or No).
    AK, AL 5 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The total number of initiatives you decided to include in your 12-month roadmap; based on column AI when Yes is selected.
    AK, AL 6 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings per year after the initiative's completion; based on column L when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    AK, AL 7 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings in the current fiscal year; based on column AF when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    • Estimated cost savings per year refer to cost savings fully realized by the end of the upcoming fiscal year, following the initiatives' implementation.
    • Estimated cost savings in the current budget cycle, refer to cost savings partially realized in the current fiscal year, after the initiatives' implementation.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the final priority of the initiative.
    3. Decide whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap.

    3.2.3 Prioritize your project portfolio optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each project portfolio optimization initiative to set the priority.
    2. Validate your cost and feasibility estimates and consider the automated evaluation, in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook, providing you with a preliminary priority based on your cost and feasibility estimates (see next slides).
    3. Revisit your overarching goals (step 1.4) as you will assess the time it will take you to complete your initiatives and prioritize accordingly.
    4. Determine your start and end date for each initiative based on your journey, objectives, and overarching goals. Consider the urgency of each initiative. Document the quarter and year for your start and end dates in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    5. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of each initiative to get a cost savings estimate for the current fiscal year. Document the number of remaining quarters (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    6. Decide on the priority of each initiative (High, Medium, or Low), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    7. Revisit the priority decision after prioritizing all your initiatives and determine which ones to include in your 12-month roadmap; consider the number of initiatives you can tackle at the same time within a 12-month period. Document your final decision (Yes or No) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Project portfolio optimization initiatives
    • Time and priority estimates of cost optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Priority Threshold tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • PMO lead
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Understand your priority assessment

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how the preliminary priority assessment is assigned, for each project portfolio optimization initiative, noting that columns Q to X are hidden automatic calculations and should not be touched:

    Understand your priority assessment

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    R Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Rank of Estimate Cost Savings (per year) in ascending order (higher cost savings implies a higher rank).
    S Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Savings Score on a scale of 1 to 3, where the top third in Cost Savings Rank are assigned a score of 1, the bottom third a score of 3, and in between a score of 2, noting that negative cost savings would imply a -1 score.
    T Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Score adds 1 to the Cost Savings Score if the underlying initiative is within the budget.
    U, V, W Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. A score on a scale of 1 to 3 based on input of columns M, N, and O, where Low or Positive Impact is assigned a score of 3, Medium or No Impact a score of 2, and High or Negative Impact a score of 1.
    X Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The rounding of the average of columns U, V, and W, adding 1 to the result if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability (column P).
    Y Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The sum of columns T and X, adding 3 for Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, and 1 to Optimize Cost-to-Value (column H).
    Z Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Preliminary Priority Assessment based on the Define Priority Threshold worksheet (hidden, see next slide).

    Review the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Validate cost and feasibility estimates (columns I to P previously filled - steps 2.2 and 3.1) driving the Priority Score and Preliminary Priority Assessment.

    Template & Example

    Priority Threshold Rationale

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Define Priority Threshold Worksheet

    Refer to the screenshot of the Define Priority Threshold worksheet below to understand the rationale behind the Priority Score and Priority Level:

    Priority threshold rationale

    Template & Example

    Estimate your timeline

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete timeline estimates for each project portfolio optimization initiative:

    Estimate your timeline

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    AA, AC Dropdown Select the quarter(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AB, AD Dropdown Select the year(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AE Dropdown Select the number of remaining quarters, in the current fiscal year, after you complete the initiative (0 to 4); based on columns AA to AD.
    AF Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Estimate of cost savings in the current fiscal year, based on the remaining quarters after implementation. The entry in column AE is divided by 4, and the result is multiplied by the related estimated cost savings per year (entry in column L).
    AG Dropdown Select if cost savings after the implementation of the underlying initiative will be Permanent or Temporary.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate quarter and year to start and complete the initiative.
    3. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of the initiative.

    Template & Example

    Make your final decisions

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to assign the final priority for each project portfolio optimization initiative and include it in your 12-month roadmap:

    Make your final decisions

    Column ID Row ID Input Type Guidelines
    AH - Dropdown Select your final priority decision after reviewing the preliminary priority assessment (column Z) and timeline estimates (columns AA to AG).
    AI - Dropdown Select whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap (Yes or No).
    AK, AL 5 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The total number of initiatives you decided to include in your 12-month roadmap; based on column AI when Yes is selected.
    AK, AL 6 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings per year after the initiative's completion; based on column L when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    AK, AL 7 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings in the current fiscal year; based on column AF when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    • Estimated cost savings per year refer to cost savings fully realized by the end of the upcoming fiscal year, following the initiatives' implementation.
    • Estimated cost savings in the current budget cycle, refer to cost savings partially realized in the current fiscal year, after the initiatives' implementation.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the final priority of the initiative.
    3. Decide whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap.

    3.2.4 Prioritize your workforce optimization initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Review each workforce optimization initiative to set the priority.
    2. Validate your cost and feasibility estimates and consider the automated evaluation, in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook, providing you with a preliminary priority based on your cost and feasibility estimates (see next slides).
    3. Revisit your overarching goals (step 1.4) as you will assess the time it will take you to complete your initiatives and prioritize accordingly.
    4. Determine your start and end date for each initiative based on your journey, objectives, and overarching goals. Consider the urgency of each initiative. Document the quarter and year for your start and end dates in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    5. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of each initiative to get a cost savings estimate for the current fiscal year. Document the number of remaining quarters (0, 1, 2, 3, or 4) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    6. Decide on the priority of each initiative (High, Medium, or Low), and document it in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    7. Revisit the priority decision after prioritizing all your initiatives and determine which ones to include in your 12-month roadmap; consider the number of initiatives you can tackle at the same time within a 12-month period. Document your final decision (Yes or No) in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Workforce optimization initiatives
    • Time and priority estimates of cost optimization initiatives in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Define Priority Threshold tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • Talent management representative
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Understand your priority assessment

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how the preliminary priority assessment is assigned, for each workforce optimization initiative, noting that columns Q to X are hidden automatic calculations and should not be touched:

    Understand your priority assessment

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    R Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Rank of Estimate Cost Savings (per year) in ascending order (higher cost savings implies a higher rank).
    S Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Savings Score on a scale of 1 to 3, where the top third in Cost Savings Rank are assigned a score of 1, the bottom third a score of 3, and in between a score of 2, noting that negative cost savings would imply a -1 score.
    T Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Cost Score adds 1 to the Cost Savings Score if the underlying initiative is within the budget.
    U, V, W Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. A score on a scale of 1 to 3 based on input of columns M, N, and O, where Low or Positive Impact is assigned a score of 3, Medium or No Impact a score of 2, and High or Negative Impact a score of 1.
    X Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The rounding of the average of columns U, V, and W, adding 1 to the result if the initiative's approval falls within your accountability (column P).
    Y Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. The sum of columns T and X, adding 3 for Reduce Unwarranted IT Spending, and 1 to Optimize Cost-to-Value (column H).
    Z Formula Hidden automatic calculation, no entry required. Preliminary Priority Assessment based on the Define Priority Threshold worksheet (hidden, see next slide).

    Review the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Validate cost and feasibility estimates (columns I to P previously filled - steps 2.2 and 3.1) driving the Priority Score and Preliminary Priority Assessment.

    Template & Example

    Priority Threshold Rationale

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Define Priority Threshold

    Refer to the screenshot of the Define Priority Threshold worksheet below to understand the rationale behind the Priority Score and Priority Level:

    Priority Threshold Rationale

    Template & Example

    Estimate your timeline

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to complete timeline estimates for each workforce optimization initiative:

    Estimate your timeline

    Column ID Input Type Guidelines
    AA, AC Dropdown Select the quarter(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AB, AD Dropdown Select the year(s) in which you plan to begin and complete your initiative.
    AE Dropdown Select the number of remaining quarters, in the current fiscal year, after you complete the initiative (0 to 4); based on columns AA to AD.
    AF Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Estimate of cost savings in the current fiscal year, based on the remaining quarters after implementation. The entry in column AE is divided by 4, and the result is multiplied by the related estimated cost savings per year (entry in column L).
    AG Dropdown Select if cost savings after the implementation of the underlying initiative will be Permanent or Temporary.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the appropriate quarter and year to start and complete the initiative.
    3. Identify the time remaining in your current budget cycle after the completion of the initiative.

    Template & Example

    Make your final decisions

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Worksheet

    Refer to the example and guidelines below on how to assign the final priority for each workforce optimization initiative, and include it in your 12-month roadmap:

    Make your final decisions

    Column ID Row ID Input Type Guidelines
    AH - Dropdown Select your final priority decision after reviewing the preliminary priority assessment (column Z) and timeline estimates (columns AA to AG).
    AI - Dropdown Select whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap (Yes or No).
    AK, AL 5 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. The total number of initiatives you decided to include in your 12-month roadmap; based on column AI when Yes is selected.
    AK, AL 6 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings per year after the initiative's completion; based on column L when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    AK, AL 7 Formula Automatic calculation, no entry required. Total estimated cost savings in the current fiscal year; based on column AF when included in the 12-month roadmap (column AI when Yes is selected)
    • Estimated cost savings per year refer to cost savings fully realized by the end of the upcoming fiscal year, following the initiatives' implementation.
    • Estimated cost savings in the current budget cycle, refer to cost savings partially realized in the current fiscal year, after the initiatives' implementation.

    Complete the following fields for each initiative in the Excel Workbook as per guidelines:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives tab.
    2. Determine the final priority of the initiative.
    3. Decide whether you want to include the initiative in your 12-month roadmap.

    3.3 Develop your cost optimization roadmap

    1 hour

    1. Conduct a final evaluation of your timeline, priority decision, and initiatives you wish to include in your 12-month roadmap. Do they make sense, are they achievable, and do they all contribute individually and collectively to reaching your cost optimization goals?
    2. Review your 12-month roadmap outputs in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slides).
    3. Make adjustments to your 12-month roadmap by adding or removing initiatives as you deem necessary (step 3.2).
    4. Document your final roadmap - including initiatives and relative time frames for execution - in the IT Cost Optimization Roadmap templates provided (see slide 97). The 12-month roadmap outputs from the IT Cost Optimization Workbook (see next slide) can facilitate this task.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    Input Output
    • Outline Initiatives tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook, output from previous steps
    • IT Cost Optimization Roadmap
    Materials Participants
    • Outline Initiatives Charts tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Diagram Results tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • List Results tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Timeline Result tab in the IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management

    Template & Example

    Potential Cost Savings Per Year

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Outline Initiatives Charts Worksheet

    Refer to the example below on charts depicting different views of estimated cost savings per year across the four optimization levers (Assets, Vendors, Project Portfolio, and Workforce) that could help you in your assessment and decision making.

    Potential cost savings per year

    From the Excel Workbook, after completing your potential initiatives and filling all related entries in the Outline Initiatives tab:

    1. Navigate to the Outline Initiatives Charts tab.
    2. Review each of the charts.
    3. Navigate back to the Outline Initiatives tab to examine, drill down, and amend individual initiative entries or final decisions as you deem necessary.

    Template & Example

    12-month Roadmap Outputs

    Excel Workbook: IT Cost Optimization - Diagram Results, List Results, and Timeline Result Worksheets

    Refer to the example below depicting different roadmap output that could help you in presentations, assessment, and decision making.

    12-month Roadmap Outputs

    From the Excel Workbook:

    1. Navigate to the Diagram Results tab. This bubble diagram represent cost optimization initiatives by objective where each bubble size is determined by its estimated cost saving per year.
    2. Navigate to the List Results tab. You will find a list of the cost optimizations initiatives you've chosen to include in your roadmap and related charts.
    3. Navigate to the Timeline Result tab. This Gantt chart is a timeline view of the cost optimizations initiatives you've chosen to include in your roadmap.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    IT cost optimization roadmap

    Phase 4

    Communicate and Execute

    Phase 1
    Understand Your Mandate and Objectives

    Phase 2
    Outline Your Cost Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 3
    Develop Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    Phase 4
    Communicate and Execute

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Cost optimization communication plan
    • Cost optimization executive presentation

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CIO/IT director
    • IT finance lead
    • PMO lead
    • Other IT management

    Build Your IT Cost Optimization Roadmap

    4.1 Build the communication plan

    45 to 60 minutes

    1. Use the Cost Optimization Communication Plan templates and guidance on the following slides.
    2. Complete the template to develop your communication plan for your cost optimization proposal and initiatives. At a minimum, it should include:
      1. Steps for preparing and presenting your proposal to decision-makers, sponsors, and other stakeholders, including named presenters and points of contact in IT.
      2. Checkpoints for communication throughout the execution of each initiative and the cost optimization roadmap overall, including target audiences, accountabilities, modes and methods of communication, type/scope of information to be communicated at each checkpoint, and any decision/approval steps.

    Download the IT Cost Optimization Workbook

    InputOutput
    • Cost optimization roadmap
    • Completed draft of the Cost Optimization Communication Plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • IT Cost Optimization Roadmap
    • Info-Tech's Cost Optimization Communication Plan template
    • CIO/IT director
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management

    Understand a communication strategy's purpose

    Put as much effort into developing your communication strategy as you would into planning and executing the cost optimization initiatives themselves. Don't skip this part.

    Your communication strategy has two major components ...

    1. A tactical plan for how and when you'll communicate with stakeholders about your proposals, activities, and progress toward meeting cost optimization goals.
    2. An executive or board presentation that outlines your final proposed cost optimization initiatives, their respective business cases, and resources/support required with the goal of gaining approval to execute.

    Your communication strategy will need to ...

    • Provide answers to the "What's in it for me?" question from all impacted stakeholders.
    • Roles, responsibilities, and accountabilities before, during, and after initiatives are completed.
    • Descriptions and high-level information about dates, deliverables, and impacts of the specific changes being made.

    You will also develop more detailed operational and project plans for each initiative. IT will use these plans to manage and track the execution of individual initiatives when the time comes.

    Template & Example

    Document the overall what and why of your planned communications

    Component Purpose Context Key Messages Intended Outcomes
    Definition Description of the topic and why you're communicating with this specific audience right now. Background information about the broader situation and how you got to where you are today. The main points you want your target audience to hear/read, absorb, and remember. What you hope you and your audience will get at the end of the communication or effort.
    Our Language
    • IT is proposing an organization-wide array of initiatives in order to reduce IT costs. We are seeking your approval and support to carry out these initiatives.
    • [Purpose]
    • The economy is in active downturn and may become a full recession.
    • IT is anticipating mandatory cost reductions and has opted to take a proactive position.
    • We used an analytical framework to look at all areas of the organization to identify and prioritize IT cost-reduction opportunities.
    • [Context]
    • IT is being proactive.
    • IT is sensitive to the business.
    • IT needs your support.
    • IT is committed to keeping you informed at every step.
    • IT wants to position the organization for rapid recovery when the economy improves.
    • [Message]
    • Buy-in, approval, and ongoing support for cost optimization initiatives proposed.
    • Update on the status of specific initiatives, including what's happened, progress, and what's coming next.
    • [Outcome]

    Template & Example

    Next, note the who, how, and when of your communication plan

    Stakeholder/Approver Initiatives Impact Format Time frame Messenger
    CEO
    • Reduce number of Minitab licenses
    • Defer hiring of new data architecture position
    • Cancel VR simulation project
    Indefinitely delays current strategic projects Monthly meeting discussion Last Wednesday of every month starting Oct. 26, FY1 CIO, IT data analytics project lead, IT VR project lead
    IT Steering Committee
    • Adjust service level framework and level assignments
    • Postpone purchases for network modernization
    • Postpone workstation/laptop upgrades for non-production functions
    • Outsource data analytics project
    Nearly all of these initiatives are enterprise-wide or affect multiple departments. Varying direct and indirect impacts will need to be independently communicated for each initiative if approved by the ITS.

    Formal presentation at quarterly ITS meetings

    Monthly progress updates via email bulletin

    Approval presentation: Oct. 31, FY1

    Quarterly updates: Jan. 31, Apr. 28, and Jul. 28, FY2

    CIO, IT service director, IT infrastructure director, IT data analytics project lead
    VP of Sales
    • Pause Salesforce view redesign project
    Delays new sales tool efficiency improvement. Meeting discussion Nov. FY1 CIO, IT Salesforce view redesign project lead
    [Name/Title/Group]
    • [Initiative]
    • [Initiative]
    [Impact statement] [Format] [Date/Period] [Name/Title]
    [Name/Title/Group]
    • [Initiative]
    • [Initiative]
    [Impact statement] [Format] [Date/Period] [Name/Title]
    [Name/Title/Group]
    • [Initiative]
    • [Initiative]
    [Impact statement] [Format] [Date/Period] [Name/Title]

    4.2 Build the executive presentation

    45-60 minutes

    1. Download Info-Tech's IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Samples and Templates.
    2. Update the content with the outputs of your cost optimization roadmap and data/graph elements from the IT Cost Optimization Workbook. Refer to your organization's standards and norms for executive-level presentations and adapt accordingly.

    Download IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Samples and Templates

    Input Output
    • IT Cost Optimization Roadmap
    • IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • Completed draft of the IT Cost Optimization Executive Presentation
    Materials Participants
    • IT Cost Optimization Workbook
    • IT Cost Optimization Roadmap Samples and Templates
    • CIO/IT directors
    • IT financial lead
    • Other IT management

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Congratulations! You now have an IT cost optimization strategy and a communication plan.

    Throughout this blueprint, you have:

    1. Identified your IT mandate and cost optimization journey.
    2. Outlined your initiatives across the four levers (assets, vendors, project portfolio, and workforce).
    3. Put together a 12-month IT cost optimization roadmap.
    4. Developed a communication strategy and crafted an executive presentation - your initial step to communicate and discuss IT cost optimization initiatives with your key stakeholders.

    What's next?

    Communicate with your stakeholders, then follow your internal project policies and procedures to get the necessary approvals as required. Once obtained, you can start the execution and implementation of your IT cost optimization strategy.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Jennifer Perrier, Principal Research Director, IT Financial Management

    Jennifer Perrier
    Principal Research Director, IT Financial Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Jack Hakimian, Senior Vice President, Research Development

    Jack Hakimian
    Senior Vice President, Research Development
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Graham Price, Senior Executive Counselor, Executive Services

    Graham Price
    Senior Executive Counselor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Travis Duncan, Research Director, Project & Portfolio Management

    Travis Duncan
    Research Director, Project & Portfolio Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Dave Kish, Practice Lead, IT Financial Management

    Dave Kish
    Practice Lead, IT Financial Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Baird Miller, PhD, Senior Executive Advisor, Executive Services

    Baird Miller, PhD
    Senior Executive Advisor, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Other Research Contributors and Experts

    Monica Braun
    Research Director, IT Financial Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Sandi Conrad
    Principal Advisory Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Phil Bode
    Principal Advisory Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Donna Glidden
    Advisory Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Barry Cousins
    Distinguished Analyst & Research Fellow
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andrew Sharp
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations Practice
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Frank Sewell
    Advisory Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Achieve IT Spend & Staffing Transparency
    Most CIOs, CFOs, and business function leaders don't enjoy a shared vocabulary when it comes to talking about technology spend. As a result, truly meaningful conversations about where and how to spend technology funds in support of business goals are rare. Enable these important conversations by transparently mapping your IT spend data against four key stakeholder views.

    Reduce Shadow IT With a Service Request Catalog
    As the business gets more innovative to solve its problems, IT finds itself in reactive mode, dealing with software bloat, managing surprise SaaS renewals, and having to integrate products that they didn't know were purchased. To solve this, IT needs to focus on service and visibility to counter Shadow IT.

    Bibliography

    "A Short Guide to Structured Cost Reduction." National Audit Office, 18 June 2010. Web.

    "IT Cost Savings: A Guide to Application Rationalization." LeanIX, 2021. Web.

    Jouravlev, Roman. "Service Financial Management: ITIL 4 Practice Guide." Axelos, 30 April 2020. Web.

    Leinwand, Paul, and Vinay Couto. "How to Cut Costs More Strategically." Harvard Business Review, March 2017. Web.

    "Role & Influence of the Technology Decision-Maker 2022." Foundry, 2022. Web.

    "State of the CIO 2022." CIO, 2022. Web.

    "The Definitive Guide to IT Cost Optimization." LeanIX, n.d. Web.

    "Understand the Principles of Cost Optimization." Google Cloud, n.d. Web.

    Implement Lean Management Practices That Work

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}116|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Performance Measurement
    • Parent Category Link: /performance-measurement
    • Service delivery teams do not measure, or have difficulty demonstrating, the value they provide.
    • There is a lack of continuous improvement.
    • There is low morale within the IT teams leading to low productivity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Create a problem-solving culture. Frequent problem solving is the differentiator between sustaining Lean or falling back to old management methods.
    • Commit to employee growth. Empower teams to problem solve and multiply your organizational effectiveness.

    Impact and Result

    • Apply Lean management principles to IT to create alignment and transparency and drive continuous improvement and customer value.
    • Implement huddles and visual management.
    • Build team capabilities.
    • Focus on customer value.
    • Use metrics and data to make better decisions.
    • Systematically solve problems and improve performance.
    • Develop an operating rhythm to promote adherence to Lean.

    Implement Lean Management Practices That Work Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how a Lean management system can help you increase transparency, demonstrate value, engage your teams and customers, continuously improve, and create alignment.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand Lean concepts

    Understand what a Lean management system is, review Lean philosophies, and examine simple Lean tools and activities.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 1: Understand Lean Concepts
    • Lean Management Education Deck

    2. Determine the scope of your implementation

    Understand the implications of the scope of your Lean management program.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 2: Determine the Scope of Your Implementation
    • Lean Management Scoping Tool

    3. Design huddle board

    Examine the sections and content to include in your huddle board design.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 3: Design Huddle Board
    • Lean Management Huddle Board Template

    4. Design Leader Standard Work and operating rhythm

    Determine the actions required by leaders and the operating rhythm.

    • Implement Lean Management Practices That Work – Phase 4: Design Leader Standard Work and Operating Rhythm
    • Leader Standard Work Tracking Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Lean Management Practices That Work

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand Lean Concepts

    The Purpose

    Understand Lean management.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain a common understanding of Lean management, the Lean management thought model, Lean philosophies, huddles, visual management, team growth, and voice of customer.

    Activities

    1.1 Define Lean management in your organization.

    1.2 Create training materials.

    Outputs

    Lean management definition

    Customized training materials

    2 Understand Lean Concepts (Continued) and Determine Scope

    The Purpose

    Understand Lean management.

    Determine the scope of your program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand metrics and performance review.

    Understand problem identification and continuous improvement.

    Understand Kanban.

    Understand Leader Standard Work.

    Define the scope of the Lean management program.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop example operational metrics

    2.2 Simulate problem section.

    2.3 Simulate Kanban.

    2.4 Build scoping tool.

    Outputs

    Understand how to use operational metrics

    Understand problem identification

    Understand Kanban/daily tasks section

    Defined scope for your program

    3 Huddle Board Design and Huddle Facilitation Coaching

    The Purpose

    Design the sections and content for your huddle board.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Initial huddle board design.

    Activities

    3.1 Design and build each section in your huddle board.

    3.2 Simulate coaching conversations.

    Outputs

    Initial huddle board design

    Understanding of how to conduct a huddle

    4 Design and Build Leader Standard Work

    The Purpose

    Design your Leader Standard Work activities.

    Develop a schedule for executing Leader Standard Work.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Standard activities identified and documented.

    Sample schedule developed.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify standard activities for leaders.

    4.2 Develop a schedule for executing Leader Standard Work.

    Outputs

    Leader Standard Work activities documented

    Initial schedule for Leader Standard Work activities

    Get the Most Out of Workday

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}239|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /optimization
    • Your Workday systems are critical to supporting the organization’s business processes.They are expensive. Direct benefits and ROI can be hard to measure.
    • Workday application portfolios are often behemoths to support. With complex integration points and unique business processes, stabilization is the norm.
    • Application optimization is essential to staying competitive and productive in today’s digital environment.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Continuous assessment and optimization of your Workday enterprise resource planning (ERP) is critical to the success of your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Build an ongoing optimization team to conduct application improvements.
    • Assess your Workday application(s) and the environment in which they exist. Take a business first strategy to prioritize optimization efforts.
    • Validate Workday capabilities, user satisfaction, processes, issues around data, integrations, and vendor management to build out an optimization strategy
    • Pull this all together to develop a prioritized optimization roadmap.

    Get the Most Out of Workday Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Get the Most Out of Workday – A guide to help the business leverages to accomplish its goals.

    Enterprise resource planning (ERP) is a core tool that the business leverages to accomplish its goals. Take a proactive approach to optimize your enterprise applications. Strategically re-align business goals, identify business application capabilities, complete a process assessment, evaluate user satisfaction, measure module satisfaction, and vendor relations to create an optimization plan that will drive a cohesive technology strategy that delivers results.

    • Get the Most Out of Workday – Phases 1-4

    2. Get the Most Out of Workday Workbook – A tool to document and assist with this project.

    The Get the Most out of Workday Workbook serves as the holding document for the different elements of the Get the Most out Workday blueprint. Use each assigned tab to input the relevant information for the process of optimizing Workday.

    • Get the Most Out of Workday Workbook

    3. Workday Application Inventory Tool – A tool to define applications and capabilities around ERP.

    Use this tool provide Info-Tech with information surrounding your ERP application(s). This inventory will be used to create a custom Application Portfolio Assessment (APA) for your ERP. The template includes demographics, application inventory, departments to be surveyed and data quality inclusion.

    • Workday Application Inventory Tool

    Infographic

    Workshop: Get the Most Out of Workday

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Workday Application Vision

    The Purpose

    Define your workday application vision.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Set the foundation for optimizing Workday by building a cross-functional team, aligning with organizational strategy, inventorying current system state, defining your timeframe, and exploring current costs.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify stakeholders and build your optimization team.

    1.2 Build an ERP strategy model.

    1.3 Inventory current system state.

    1.4 Define optimization timeframe.

    1.5 Understand Workday costs.

    Outputs

    Workday optimization team

    Workday business model

    Workday optimization goals

    System inventory and data flow

    Application and business capabilities list

    Workday optimization timeline

    2 Map Current-State Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Map current-state capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Measure the state of your current Workday system to understand where it is not performing well.

    Activities

    2.1 Assess Workday capabilities.

    2.2 Review your satisfaction with the vendor/product and willingness for change.

    Outputs

    Workday capability gap analysis

    Workday user satisfaction (application portfolio assessment)

    Workday SoftwareReviews survey results

    Workday current costs

    3 Assess Workday

    The Purpose

    Assess Workday.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Explore underperforming areas to:

    Uncover where user satisfaction is lacking and possible root causes.

    Identify process and workflows that are creating issues for end users and identify improvement options.

    Understand where data issues are occurring and explore how you can improve these.

    Identify integration points and explore if there are any areas of improvement.

    Investigate your relationship with the vendor and product, including that relative to others.

    Identify any areas for cost optimization (optional).

    Activities

    3.1 Prioritize optimization opportunities.

    3.2 Discover optimization initiatives.

    Outputs

    Product and vendor satisfaction opportunities

    Capability and feature optimization opportunities

    Process optimization opportunities

    Integration optimization opportunities

    Data optimization opportunities

    Workday cost-saving opportunities

    4 Build the Optimization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build the optimization roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding where you need to improve is the first step, now understand where to focus your optimization efforts, build out next steps and put a timeframe in place.

    Activities

    4.1 Build your optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Workday optimization roadmap

    Further reading

    Get the Most Out of Workday

    In today’s connected world, the continuous optimization of enterprise applications to realize your digital strategy is key.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Focus optimization on organizational value delivery.

    HR, finance, and planning systems are the core foundation of enterprise resource systems (ERP) systems. These are core tools that the business leverages to accomplish its goals. An ERP that is doing its job well is invisible to the business. The challenges come when the tool is no longer invisible. It has become a source of friction in the functioning of the business.

    Workday is expensive, benefits can be difficult to quantify, and optimization can be difficult to navigate. Over time, technology evolves, organizational goals change, and the health of these systems is often not monitored. This is complicated in today’s digital landscape with multiple integration points, siloed data, and competing priorities.

    Too often organizations jump into selecting replacement systems without understanding the health of their systems. We can do better than this.

    IT leaders need to take a proactive approach to continually monitor and optimize their enterprise applications. Strategically realign business goals, identify business application capabilities, complete a process assessment, evaluate user satisfaction, measure module satisfaction, and improve vendor relations to create an optimization plan that will drive a cohesive technology strategy that delivers results.

    Lisa Highfield

    Research Director, Enterprise Applications

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Your Workday systems are critical to supporting the organization’s business processes. They are expensive. Direct benefits and ROI can be hard to measure.

    Workday application portfolios are often behemoths to support. With complex integration points and unique business processes, stabilization is the norm.

    Application optimization is essential to staying competitive and productive in today’s digital environment.

    Common Obstacles

    Balancing optimization with stabilization is one of the most difficult decisions for Workday application leaders.

    Competing priorities and often unclear enterprise application strategies make it difficult to make decisions about what, how, and when to optimize.

    Enterprise applications involve large numbers of processes, users, and evolving vendor roadmaps.

    Teams do not have a framework to illustrate, communicate, and justify the optimization effort in the language your stakeholders understand.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    In today’s changing world, it is imperative to evaluate your applications for optimization and to look for opportunities to capitalize on rapidly expanding technologies, integrated data, and employee solutions that meet the needs of your organization.

    Assess your Workday applications and the environment in which they exist. Take a business-first strategy to prioritize optimization efforts.

    Validate capabilities, user satisfaction, and issues around data, vendor management, and costs to build out an overall roadmap and optimization strategy.

    Pull this all together to prioritize optimization efforts and develop a concrete roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Workday is investing heavily in expanding and deepening its finance and expanded product offerings, but we cannot stand still on our optimization efforts. Understand your product(s), processes, user satisfaction, integration points, and the availability of data to business decision makers. Examine these areas to develop a personalized Workday optimization roadmap that fits the needs of your organization. Incorporate these methodologies into an ongoing optimization strategy aimed at enabling the business, increasing productivity, and reducing costs.

    The image shows a graphic titled Get the Most Out of Your ERP. The centre of the graphic shows circular gears labelled with text such as Processes; User Satisfaction; Integrations; Data; and Vendor Relations. There is also text surrounding the central gears in concentric circles, and on either side, there are sets of arrows titled Service-centric capabilities and Product-centric capabilities.

    Insight summary

    Continuous assessment and optimization of your Workday ERP is critical to the success of your organization.

    • Applications and the environments in which they live are constantly evolving.
    • This blueprint provides business and application managers with a method to complete a health assessment of their Workday systems to identify areas for improvement and optimization.
    • Put optimization practices into effect by:
      • Aligning and prioritizing key business and technology drivers.
      • Identifying ERP process classification and performing a gap analysis.
      • Measuring user satisfaction across key departments.
      • Evaluating vendor relations.
      • Understanding how data plays into the mix.
      • Pulling it all together into an optimization roadmap.

    Workday enterprise resource planning (ERP) facilitates the flow of information across business units. It allows for the seamless integration of data across financial and people systems to create a holistic view of the enterprise to support decision making.

    In many organizations, Workday is considered the core people systems and is becoming more widely adopted for finance and a full ERP system.

    ERP systems are considered the lifeblood of organizations. Problems with this key operational system will have a dramatic impact on the ability of the enterprise to survive and grow.

    ERP implementation should not be a one-and-done exercise. There needs to be ongoing optimization to enable business processes and optimal organizational results.

    Workday enterprise resource planning (ERP)

    Workday

    • Finance
    • Human Resources Management
    • Talent and Performance
    • Payroll and Workforce Management
    • Employee Experience
    • Student Information Systems
    • Professional Services Automation
    • Analytics and Reporting
    • Spend Management
    • Enterprise Planning

    What is Workday?

    Workday has many modules that work together to facilitate the flow of information across the business. Workday’s unique data platform allows for seamless integration of systems and creates a holistic view of the enterprise to support decision making.

    In many organizations, the ERP system is considered the lifeblood of the enterprise. Problems with this key operational system will have a dramatic impact on the ability of the enterprise to survive and grow.

    Workday operates in many industry verticals and performs well in service organizations.

    An ERP system:

    • Automates processes, reducing the amount of manual, routine work.
    • Integrates with core modules, eliminating the fragmentation of systems.
    • Centralizes information for reporting from multiple parts of the value chain to a single point.

    Workday Fast Facts

    Product Description

    • Workday offers HR, Finance, planning systems, and extended offerings. Workday prides itself on rapidly expanding its product portfolio to meet the needs of organizations in a changing world.
    • The integrated cloud data model Workday has been built on allows for seamless end-to-end organizational data.
    • Offerings include Financial Management, Human Capital Management, Workday Adaptive Planning, Spend Management, Talent Management, Payroll & Workforce Management, Analytics & Reporting, Student, Professional Services Automation, Platform & Product Extensions, Workday Peakon Employee Voice, and most recently VNDLY (contract and vendor management).

    Evolution of Workday

    Workday HCM 2006

    Workday Financial Management 2007

    Workday 10 (Finance & HCM) 2010

    Workday Student (Higher Education) 2011

    Workday Cloud (PAAS) 2017

    Acquisition of Adaptive Insights 2018

    Acquisition of VNDLY 2021

    Vendor Description

    • Workday was founded in 2005 by Aneel Bhusri and Dave Duffield (former PeopleSoft founder.)
    • The platform-as-a-service (PaaS) bundles and modules are sold in a subscription model to customers.
    • Workday has untaken several acquisitions in recent years to grow the product and invests in early-stage companies through Workday Ventures.
    • Workday is publicly traded (2012); Nasdaq: WDAY.

    Employees: 12,500

    Headquarters: Pleasanton, CA

    Website: workday.com

    Founded: 2005

    Presence: Global, Publicly Traded

    Workday by the numbers

    77%

    77% of clients were satisfied with the product’s business value created. 78% of clients were satisfied that the cost is fair relative to value, and 95% plan to renew. (SoftwareReviews, 2022)

    50% of Fortune 500

    Workday has seen steady growth working with over 50% of Fortune 500 companies. 4,100 of those are HCM and finance customers. It has seen great success in service industries and has a 95% gross retention rate. (Diginomica)

    40%

    Workday reported a 40% year-over-year increase in Workday Financial Management deployments for both new and existing customers, as accelerated demand for Workday cloud-based continues. (Workday, June 2021)

    Workday Finance

    A great opportunity for Workday

    Workday continues to invest in Workday Finance

    • 35% of the Fortune 500 and 50% of the Fortune 50 use Workday HCM products (Seeking Alpha, 2019).
    • The customer base for Workday Financial Management has increased from 45 in 2014 to 530 in 2019 with 9 Fortune 500 companies in the mix. This infers that Financial Management is a product that will drive future growth for Workday.

    Recent Finance-Related Acquisitions

    • Zimit - Quotation Management
    • Stories.bi - Augmented Analytics
    • Adaptive Insights - Business Planning
    • SkipFlag - Machine Learning (AI)
    • Platfora - Analytics
    • VNDLY - Contractor and Vendor Management

    Workday challenges and dissatisfaction

    Workday challenges and dissatisfaction

    Organizational

    • Competing Priorities
    • Lack of Strategy
    • Budget Challenges

    People and teams

    • Knowledgeable Staff/Turnover
    • Lack of Internal Skills
    • Ability to Manage New Products
    • Lack of Training

    Technology

    • Integration Issues
    • Selecting Tools & Technology
    • Keeping Pace With Technology Changes
    • Update Challenges

    Data

    • Access to Data
    • Data Literacy
    • Data Hygiene
    • One View of the Customer

    Finance, IT, Sales, and other users of the ERP system can only optimize ERP with the full support of each other. The cooperation of the departments is crucial when trying to improve ERP technology capabilities and customer interaction.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences, there are many other drivers of dissatisfaction. IT must stand shoulder-to-shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for ERP.

    Where are applications leaders focusing?

    Big growth numbers

    Year-over-year call topic requests

    Enterprise Application Optimization - 124%

    Product - 65%

    Enterprise Application Selection - 76%

    Agile - 79%

    (Info-Tech case data, 2022; N=3,293)

    We are seeing Applications leaders’ priorities change year over year, driven by a shift in their approach to problem solving. Leaders are moving from a process-centric approach to a collaborative approach that breaks down boundaries and brings teams together.

    Other changes

    Year-over-year call topic requests

    Application Portfolio Management - 13%

    Business Process Management - 4%

    Software Development Lifecycle -25%

    (Info-Tech case data, 2022; N=3,293)

    Software development lifecycle topics are tactical point solutions. Organizations have been “shifting left” to tackle the strategic issues such as product vision and Agile mindset to optimize the whole organization.

    Application optimization is risky without a plan

    Avoid these common pitfalls:

    • Not considering how this pays into the short-, medium-, and long-term ERP strategy.
    • Not considering application optimization as a business and IT partnership, which requires the continuous formal engagement of all participants.
    • Not having a good understanding of your current state, including integration points and data.
    • Not adequately accommodating feedback and changes after digital applications are deployed and employed.
    • Not treating digital applications as a motivator for potential future IT optimization efforts and incorporating digital assets in strategic business planning.
    • Not involving department leads, management, and other subject-matter experts to facilitate the organizational change digital applications bring.

    “A successful application optimization strategy starts with the business need in mind and not from a technological point of view. No matter from which angle you look at it, modernizing a legacy application is a considerable undertaking that can’t be taken lightly. Your best approach is to begin the journey with baby steps.” – Norelus, Pamidala, and Senti, 2020

    Info-Tech’s methodology for getting the most out of your ERP

    1. Map Current-State Capabilities 2. Assess Your Current State 3. Identify Key Optimization Areas 4. Build Your Optimization Roadmap
    Phase Steps
    1. Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Workday Optimization Team
    2. Build an ERP Strategy Model
    3. Inventory Current System State
    4. Define Business Capabilities
    • Conduct a Gap Analysis for ERP Processes
    • Assess User Satisfaction
    • Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor and Product
    1. Identify Key Optimization Areas
    2. Evaluate Product Sustainability Over the Short, Medium, and Long Term
    3. Identify Any Product Changes Anticipated Over Short, Medium, and Long Term
    1. Prioritize Optimization Opportunities
    2. Identify Key Optimization Areas
    3. Compile Optimization Assessment Results
    Phase Outcomes
    1. Stakeholder map
    2. Workday optimization team
    3. Workday business model
    4. Strategy alignment
    5. Systems inventory and diagram
    6. Business capabilities map
    7. Key Workday processes list
    1. Gap analysis for Workday-related processes
    2. Understanding of user satisfaction across applications and processes
    3. Insight into Workday data quality
    4. Quantified satisfaction with the vendor and product
    5. Understanding Workday costs
    1. List of Workday optimization opportunities
    1. Workday optimization roadmap

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Identify and prioritize your Workday optimization goals.

    Application Portfolio Assessment

    Assess IT-enabled user satisfaction across your Workday portfolio.

    Key deliverable:

    Workday Optimization Roadmap

    Complete an assessment of processes, user satisfaction, data quality, and vendor management.

    Case Study

    MANAGED AP AUTOMATION with OneSource Virtual

    TripAdvisor + OneSource

    INDUSTRY: Travel

    SOURCE: OneSource Virtual, 2017

    Challenge

    TripAdvisor needed a solution that would decrease administrative labor from its accounting department.

    “We needed something that was already compatible with our Workday tenant, that didn’t require a lot of customizations and would be an enhancement to our processes.” – Director of Accounting Operations, Scott Garner

    Requirements included:

    • Easy implementation
    • Existing system compatibility
    • Enhancement to the company’s process
    • Competitive pricing
    • Secure

    Solution

    TripAdvisor chose to outsource its accounts payable services to OneSource Virtual (OSV).

    OneSource Virtual offers the comprehensive finance and accounting outsourcing solutions needed to improve efficiency, eliminate paper processes, reduce errors, and improve cash flow.

    Managed AP services include scanning and auditing all extracted invoice data for accuracy, transmitting AP files with line-item details from invoices, and creating full invoice images in Workday.

    Results

    • Accurate and timely invoice processing for over 3,000 invoices per month.
    • Empowered employees to focus on higher-level tasks rather than day-to-day data entry.
    • 50+ hours saved per week on routine data entry.
    • Employees had 30% of their time freed up to focus on high-value tasks.
    • Allowed TripAdvisor to become more scalable across departments and as an organization.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenge.

    Phase 2

    Call #2:

    • Build the Workday team.
    • Align organizational goals.

    Call #3:

    • Map current state.
    • Inventory Workday capabilities and processes.
    • Explore Workday-related costs.

    Phase 3

    Call #4: Understand product satisfaction and vendor management.

    Call #5: Review APA results.

    Call #6: Understand Workday optimization opportunities.

    Call #7: Determine the right Workday path for your organization.

    Phase 4

    Call #8: Build out optimization roadmap and next steps.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1Day 2Day 3Day 4Day 5
    Define Your Workday Application VisionMap Current StateAssess WorkdayBuild Your Optimization RoadmapNext Steps and

    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team

    1.2 Build an ERP Strategy Model

    1.3 Inventory Current System State

    1.4 Define Optimization Timeframe

    1.5 Understand Workday Costs

    2.1 Assess Workday Capabilities

    2.2 Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor/Product and Willingness for Change

    3.1 Prioritize Optimization Opportunities

    3.2 Discover Optimization Initiatives

    4.1 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    5.1 Complete In-progress Deliverables From Previous Four Days.

    5.2 Set Up Review Time for Workshop Deliverables and to Discuss Next Steps.

    Deliverables
    1. Workday optimization team
    2. Workday business model
    3. Workday optimization goals
    4. System inventory and data flow
    5. Application and business capabilities list
    6. Workday optimization timeline
    1. Workday capability gap analysis
    2. Workday user satisfaction (application portfolio assessment)
    3. Workday SoftwareReviews survey results
    4. Workday current costs
    1. Product and vendor satisfaction opportunities
    2. Capability and feature optimization opportunities
    3. Process optimization opportunities
    4. Integration optimization opportunities
    5. Data optimization opportunities
    6. Workday cost-saving opportunities
    1. Workday optimization roadmap

    Phase 1

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    Phase 1

    1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team

    1.2 Build an ERP Strategy Model

    1.3 Inventory Current System State

    1.4 Define Optimization Timeframe

    1.5 Understand Workday Costs

    Phase 2

    2.1 Assess Workday Capabilities

    2.2 Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor/Product and Willingness for Change

    Phase 3

    3.1 Prioritize Optimization Opportunities

    3.2 Discover Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Align your organizational goals
    • Gain a firm understanding of your current state
    • Inventory Workday and related applications
    • Confirm the organization’s capabilities

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CFO
    • Department Leads – Finance, Procurement, Asset Management
    • Applications Director
    • Senior Business Analyst
    • Senior Developer
    • Procurement Analysts

    Step 1.1

    Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team

    Activities

    1.1.1 Identify Stakeholders Critical to Success

    1.1.2 Map Your Workday Optimization Stakeholders

    1.1.3 Determine Your Workday Optimization Team

    Map Current State Capabilities

    Step 1.1

    Step 1.2

    Step 1.3

    Step 1.4

    Step 1.5

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify ERP drivers and objectives
    • Explore ERP challenges and pain points
    • Discover ERP benefits and opportunities
    • Align the ERP foundation with your corporate strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder map
    • Workday optimization team

    ERP optimization stakeholders

    • Understand the roles necessary to Get the Most Out of Your Workday.
    • Understand the role of each player within your project structure. Look for listed participants on the activities slides to determine when each player should be involved.
    Title Role Within the Project Structure
    Organizational Sponsor
    • Owns the project at the management/C-suite level
    • Responsible for breaking down barriers and ensuring alignment with your organizational strategy
    • CIO, CFO, COO, or similar
    Project Manager
    • The IT individual(s) that oversee day-to-day project operations
    • Responsible for preparing and managing the project plan and monitoring the project team’s progress
    • Applications Manager or other IT Manager, Business Analyst, Business Process Owner, or similar
    Business Unit Leaders
    • Works alongside the IT Project Manager to ensure the strategy is aligned with business needs
    • In this case, likely to be a marketing, sales, or customer service lead
    • Sales Director, Marketing Director, Customer Care Director, or similar
    Optimization Team
    • Comprised of individuals whose knowledge and skills are crucial to project success
    • Responsible for driving day-to-day activities, coordinating communication, and making process and design decisions; can assist with persona and scenario development for ERP
    • Project Manager, Business Lead, ERP Manager, Integration Manager, Application SMEs, Developers, Business Process Architects, and/or similar SMEs
    Steering Committee
    • Comprised of the C-suite/management-level individuals that act as the project’s decision makers
    • Responsible for validating goals and priorities, defining the project scope, enabling adequate resourcing, and managing change
    • Project Sponsor, Project Manager, Business Lead, CFO, Business Unit SMEs, or similar

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do not limit project input or participation. Include subject-matter experts and internal stakeholders at stages within the project. Such inputs can be solicited on a one-off basis as needed. This ensures you take a holistic approach to create your ERP optimization strategy.

    1.1.1 Identify Workday optimization stakeholders

    1 hour

    1. Hold a meeting to identify the Workday optimization stakeholders.
    2. Use the next slide as a guide.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Understand how to navigate the complex web of stakeholders in ERP

    Identify which stakeholders to include and what their level of involvement should be during requirements elicitation based on relevant topic expertise.

    Sponsor End User IT Business
    Description An internal stakeholder who has final sign-off on the ERP project. Front-line users of the ERP technology. Back-end support staff who are tasked with project planning, execution, and eventual system maintenance. Additional stakeholders that will be impacted by any ERP technology changes.
    Examples
    • CEO
    • CIO/CTO
    • COO
    • CFO
    • Warehouse personnel
    • Sales teams
    • HR admins
    • Applications manager
    • Vendor relationship manager(s)
    • Director, Procurement
    • VP, Marketing
    • Manager, HR
    Values Executive buy-in and support is essential to the success of the project. Often, the sponsor controls funding and resource allocation. End users determine the success of the system through user adoption. If the end user does not adopt the system, the system is deemed useless and benefits realization is poor. IT is likely to be responsible for more in-depth requirements gathering. IT possesses critical knowledge around system compatibility, integration, and data. Involving business stakeholders in the requirements gathering will ensure alignment between HR and organizational objectives.

    Large-scale ERP projects require the involvement of many stakeholders from all corners and levels of the organization, including project sponsors, IT, end users, and business stakeholders. Consider the influence and interest of stakeholders in contributing to the requirements elicitation process and involve them accordingly.

    The image shows a graph with dots on it, titled Example: Stakeholder Involvement during Selection.

    Activity 1.1.2 Map your Workday optimization stakeholders

    1 hour

    1. Use the list of Workday optimization stakeholders.
    2. Map each stakeholder on the quadrant based on their expected Influence and involvement in the project.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    The image shows a graph titled Map the Organization's Stakeholders, with stakeholders listed on the left, and arranged in quadrants. Along the bottom of the graph is the text: Involvement, with an arrow pointing to the right. Along the left side of the graph is the text: Influence, with an arrow pointing upwards.

    Map the organization’s stakeholders

    The image shows the same organization stakeholder map shown in the previous section.

    The Workday optimization team

    Consider the core team functions when putting together the project team. Form a cross-functional team (i.e. across IT, Marketing, Sales, Service, and Operations) to create a well-aligned ERP optimization strategy.

    Don’t let your project team become too large when trying to include all relevant stakeholders. Carefully limiting the size of the project team will enable effective decision making while still including functional business units such as Human Resources, Operations, Manufacturing, Marketing, Sales, Service, and Finance as well as IT.

    Required Skills/Knowledge Suggested Project Team Members
    Business
    • Department leads
    • Business process leads
    • Business analysts
    • Subject matter experts
    • SMEs/Business process leads across all functional areas, for example, Strategy, Sales, Marketing, Customer Service, Finance, HR
    IT
    • Application development
    • Enterprise integration
    • Business processes
    • Data management
    • Product owner
    • ERP application manager
    • Business process manager
    • Integration manager
    • Application developer
    • Data stewards
    Other
    • Operations
    • Administrative
    • Change management
    • COO
    • CFO
    • Change management officer

    1.1.3 Determine your Workday optimization team

    1 hour

    1. Have the project manager and other key stakeholders discuss and determine who will be involved in the Workday optimization project.
      • The size of the team will depend on the initiative and size of your organization.
      • Key business leaders in key areas and IT representatives should be involved.

    Note: Depending on your initiative and size of your organization, the size of this team will vary.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Step 1.2

    Build an ERP Strategy Model

    Activities

    1.2.1 Explore Organizational Goals and Business Needs

    1.2.2 Discover Environmental Factors and Technology Drivers

    1.2.3 Consider Potential Barriers to Achieving Workday Optimization

    1.2.4 Set the Foundation for Success

    1.2.5 Discuss Workday Strategy and Develop Your ERP Optimization Goals

    Map Current State Capabilities

    Step 1.1

    Step 1.2

    Step 1.3

    Step 1.4

    Step 1.5

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Identify ERP drivers and objectives
    • Explore ERP challenges and pain points
    • Discover ERP benefits and opportunities
    • Align the ERP foundation with the corporate strategy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Workday Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • ERP business model
    • Strategy alignment

    Align your Workday strategy with the corporate strategy

    Corporate Strategy

    Your corporate strategy:

    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and business aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the desired future state.

    Unified ERP Strategy

    • The ideal ERP strategy is aligned with overarching organizational business goals and broader IT initiatives.
    • Include all affected business units and departments in these conversations.
    • The ERP optimization can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate business objectives.

    IT Strategy

    Your IT strategy:

    • Communicates the organization’s budget and spending on ERP.
    • Identifies IT initiatives that will support the business and key ERP objectives.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for ERP initiatives.

    ERP projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance and the criticality of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning business strategies with ERP capabilities. Effective alignment between IT and the business should happen daily. Alignment doesn’t just need to occur at the executive level but at each level of the organization.

    ERP Business Model Template

    The image shows a template of the ERP Business Model. At the top, there is a section for ERP Needs, then on the left and right, Environmental Factors and Organizational Goals. At the center, there is a box with text that reads Barriers, with empty space underneath it, then the text: ERP Strategy, and then the heading Enables with empty space beneath it. At the bottom are Technology Drivers. There are notes attached to sections. For ERP Needs, the note reads: What are your business drivers? What are your current ERP pains?. For the Environmental Factors section, the note reads: What factors impacting your strategy are out of your control?. For the Technology Drivers section, the note reads: Why do you need a new system? What is the purpose for becoming an integrated organization?.

    Conduct interviews to elicit the business context

    Stakeholder Interviews

    Begin by conducting interviews of your executive team. Interview the following leaders:

    1. Chief Information Officer
    2. Chief Executive Officer
    3. Chief Financial Officer
    4. Chief Revenue Officer/Sales Leader
    5. Chief Operating Officer/Supply Chain & Logistics Leader
    6. Chief Technology Officer/Chief Product Officer

    INTERVIEWS MUST UNCOVER:

    1. Your organization’s mission & vision
    2. Your organization’s top business goals
    3. Your organization’s top business initiatives
    4. The stakeholder’s top goals and initiatives
    5. Tools and systems needed to facilitate organizational and departmental goals

    Understand the mission, vision, and goals of the organization and supporting departments

    Business Needs Business Drivers
    Definition A business need is a requirement associated with a particular business process. A business need is a requirement associated with a particular business process.
    Examples
    • Audit tracking
    • Authorization levels
    • Business rules
    • Data quality
    • Customer satisfaction
    • Branding
    • Time-to-resolution

    Info-Tech Insight

    One of the biggest drivers for ERP adoption is the ability to make quicker decisions from timely information. This driver is a result of external considerations. Many industries today are highly competitive, uncertain, and rapidly changing. To succeed under these pressures, there needs to be timely information and visibility into all components of the organization.

    1.2.1 Explore organizational goals and business needs

    60 minutes

    1. Discuss organizational mission, vision, and goals. What are the top initiatives underway? Are you contracting, expanding, or innovating?
    2. Discuss business needs to support organizational goals. What are identified goals and initiatives at the departmental level? What tools and resources within the Workday system will help make this successful?
    3. Understand how the company is running today and what the organization’s future will look like. Envision the future system state.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image shows the same ERP Business Model Template from the previous section, zoomed in on the centre of the graphic.

    Organizational Goals

    • Organization’s mission and vision
    • Top business goals
    • Initiatives underway

    Business Needs

    • Departmental goals
    • Business drivers
    • Key initiatives
    • Key capabilities to support the organization
    • Requirements to support the business capability and process

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    ERP Business Model

    Organizational Goals

    • Organization’s mission and vision
    • Top business goals (~3)
    • Initiatives underway
    • KPIs and metrics that are important to the organization in achieving its goals and objectives

    Business Needs

    • Departmental goals
    • Key initiatives
    • Key capabilities to support the organization
    • Tools and systems required to support business capability or process
    • KPIs and metrics that are important to the department/stakeholder in achieving its goals and objectives

    Understand the technology drivers and environmental factors

    Technology Drivers Environmental Factors
    Definition Technology drivers are technological changes that have created the need for a new ERP enablement strategy. Many organizations turn to technology systems to help them obtain a competitive edge. These external considerations are factors that take place outside of the organization and impact the way business is conducted inside the organization. These are often outside the control of the business. Look three to five years ahead, what challenges will the business face? Where will you have to adapt and pivot? How can we prepare for this?
    Examples
    • Deployment model (i.e. SaaS)
    • Integration
    • Reporting capabilities
    • Fragmented technologies
    • Economic and political factors
    • Competitive influencers
    • Compliance regulations

    Info-Tech Insight

    A comprehensive plan that takes into consideration organizational goals, departmental needs, technology drivers, and environmental factors will allow for a collaborative approach to defining your Workday strategy.

    1.2.2 Discover environmental factors and technology drivers

    30 minutes

    1. Identify business drivers that are contributing to the organization’s need for ERP.
    2. Understand how the company is running today and what the organization’s future will look like. Try to identify the purpose for becoming an integrated organization. Use a whiteboard or flip charts and markers to capture key findings.
    3. Consider external considerations, organizational drivers, technology drivers, and key functional requirements.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image is the same ERP Business Model Template from previous sections. In this instance, it is zoomed into the centre of the graphic, with the environmental factors section circled.

    External Considerations

    • Funding constraints
    • Regulations

    Technology Considerations

    • Data accuracy
    • Data quality
    • Better reporting

    Functional Requirements

    • Information availability
    • Integration between systems
    • Secure data

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Create a realistic ERP foundation by identifying the challenges and barriers the project will bestow

    There are several different factors that may stifle the success of an ERP implementation. Organizations that are creating an ERP foundation must scan their current environment to identify internal barriers and challenges.

    Common Internal Barriers

    Management Support Organizational Culture Organizational Structure IT Readiness
    Definition The degree of understanding and acceptance toward ERP systems. The collective shared values and beliefs. The functional relationships between people and departments in an organization. The degree to which the organization’s people and processes are prepared for a new ERP system.
    Questions
    • Is an ERP project recognized as a top priority?
    • Will management commit time to the project?
    • Are employees resistant to change?
    • Is the organization highly individualized?
    • Is the organization centralized?
    • Is the organization highly formalized?
    • Is there strong technical expertise?
    • Is there strong infrastructure?
    Impact
    • Funding
    • Resources
    • Knowledge sharing
    • User acceptance
    • Flow of knowledge
    • Quality of implementation
    • Need for reliance on consultants

    1.2.3 Consider potential barriers to achieving Workday optimization

    1-3 hours

    1. Open tab 1.2, “Strategy & Goals,” in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.
    2. Identify barriers to ERP optimization success.
    3. Review the ERP critical success factors and how they relate to your optimization efforts.
    4. Discuss potential barriers to successful ERP optimization.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image is the same zoomed-in section of the ERP Strategy Business Model Template seen in previous sections. In this instance, the Barriers section is circled.

    Functional Gaps

    • No online purchase order requisitions

    Technical Gaps

    • Inconsistent reporting – data quality concerns

    Process Gaps

    • Duplication of data
    • Lack of system integration

    Barriers to Success

    • Cultural mindset
    • Resistance to change
    • Lack of training
    • Funding

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    ERP Business Model

    Organizational Goals

    • Efficiency
    • Effectiveness
    • Integrity
    • One source of truth for data
    • One team
    • Customer service, external and internal

    Barriers

    • Organizational silos
    • Lack of formal process documentation
    • Funding availability
    • What goes first? Organizational priorities

    What does success look like?

    Top 15 Critical Success Factors for ERP System Implementation

    The image shows a horizontal bar graph with the text: Frequency of Citation (n=127) at the top. Different implementation strategies are listed on the left, in descending order of frequency.

    (Epizitone and Olugbara, 2019; CC BY 4.0)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Complement your ability to deliver on your critical success factors with the capabilities of your implementation partner to drive a successful ERP implementation.

    “Implementation partners can play an important role in successful ERP implementations. They can work across the organizational departments and layers creating a synergy and a communications mechanism.” – Ayogeboh Epizitone, Durban University of Technology

    1.2.3 Set the foundation for success

    1-3 hours

    1. Open tab 1.2, “Strategy & Goals,” in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.
    2. Identify barriers to ERP optimization success.
    3. Review the ERP critical success factors and how they relate to your optimization efforts.
    4. Discuss potential barriers to successful ERP optimization.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image is the same zoomed-in section of the ERP Strategy Business Model Template seen in previous sections. In this instance, the Enablers section is circled.

    Business Benefits

    • Business-IT alignment

    IT Benefits

    • Compliance
    • Scalability
    • Operational efficiency

    Organizational Benefits

    • Data accuracy
    • Data quality
    • Better reporting

    Enablers of Success

    • Change management
    • Training
    • Alignment with strategic objectives

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    ERP Business Model

    Organizational Goals

    • Efficiency
    • Effectiveness
    • Integrity
    • One source of truth for data
    • One team
    • Customer service, external and internal

    Enablers

    • Cross-trained employees
    • Desire to focus on value-add activities
    • Collaborative
    • Top-level executive support
    • Effective change management process

    The Business Value Matrix

    Rationalizing and quantifying the value of Workday

    Benefits can be realized internally and externally to the organization or department and have different drivers of value.

    • Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and are often quite tangible.
    • Human benefits refer to how an application can deliver value through a user’s experience.
    • Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.
    • Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Organizational Goals

    Increased Revenue

    Application functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue and deliver value to your customers.

    Reduced Costs

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which an application limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Enhanced Services

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    Business Value Matrix

    The image shows a matrix, with Human benefits and Financial Benefits on the horizontal axis, and Outward and Inward on the Vertical axis.

    1.2.4 Define your Workday strategy and optimization goals

    30 minutes

    1. Discuss the Workday business model exercises and ERP critical success factors.
    2. Through the lens of corporate goals and objectives think about the supporting ERP technology. How can the ERP system bring value to the organization? What are the top things that will make this initiative a success? What major themes are emerging?
    3. Develop five to ten optimization goals that will form the basis for the success of this initiative.
      • What is a strong statement that will help guide decision making throughout the life of the ERP project?
      • What are your overarching requirements for business processes?
      • What do you ultimately want to achieve?
      • What is a statement that will ensure all stakeholders are on the same page for the project?

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Workday strategy and optimization goals

    Key Themes Emerging / Workday Strategy

    • Efficiency
    • Effectiveness
    • Integrity
    • One source of truth for data
    • One team
    • Customer service, external and internal

    Optimization Goals

    • Support Business Agility: A flexible and adaptable integrated business system providing a seamless user experience.
    • Use ERP best practices: Do not recreate or replicate what we have today; focus on modernization. Exercise customization governance by focusing on those customizations that are strategically differentiating.
    • Automate: Take manual work out where we can, empowering staff and improving productivity through automation and process efficiencies.
    • Stay focused: Focus on scope around core business capabilities. Maintain scope control. Prioritize demand in line with the strategy.
    • Strive for “One Source of Truth”: Unified data model and integrate processes where possible. Assess integration needs carefully.

    Step 1.3

    Inventory Current System State

    Activities

    1.3.1 Inventory Workday Applications and Interactions

    1.3.2 Draw Your Workday System Diagram

    1.3.3 Inventory Your Workday Modules and Business Capabilities (or Business Processes)

    1.3.4 Define Your Key Workday Optimization Modules and Business Capabilities

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    Step 1.1

    Step 1.2

    Step 1.3

    Step 1.4

    Step 1.5

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Inventory of applications
    • Mapping interactions between systems

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Workday Optimization Team
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • Systems inventory
    • Systems diagram

    1.3.1 Inventory Workday applications and interfaces

    1-3+ hours

    1. Enter your Workday systems, Workday extended applications, and integrated applications within scope.
    2. Include any abbreviated names or nicknames.
    3. List the application type or main function. List the modules the organization has licensed.
    4. List any integrations.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    ERP Data Flow

    When assessing the current application portfolio that supports your ERP, the tendency will be to focus on the applications under the ERP umbrella. These relate mostly to marketing, sales, and customer service. Be sure to include systems that act as input to, or benefit due to outputs from, ERP or similar applications.

    The image shows a flowchart, with example ERP Data. There is a colour-coded legend for the data, and at the bottom of the graphic, there is text that reads: Be sure to include enterprise applications that are not included in the ERP application portfolio. There are also definitions of abbreviated terms at the bottom of the graphic.

    1.3.2 Draw your Workday system diagram (optional)

    1-3+ hours

    1. From the Workday application inventory, diagram your network. Include:
      • Any internal or external systems
      • Integration points
      • Data flow

    The image shows the flowchart section of th image that appears in the previous section.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Sample Workday and integrations map

    The image shows a sample map of Workday and integrations. There is a colour-coded legend at the bottom right.

    Business capability map (Level 0)

    In business architecture, the primary view of an organization is known as a business capability map.

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation, rather than how.

    Business capabilities:

    • Represent stable business functions.
    • Are unique and independent of each other.
    • Will typically have a defined business outcome.

    A business capability map provides details that help the business architecture practitioner direct attention to a specific area of the business for further assessment.

    The image shows a Business Capability Map, which is divided into 4 sections: Products and Services Development; Revenue Generation; Demand Fulfillment; and Enterprise Management and Planning

    The value stream

    Value stream defined:

    Value Streams:

    Design Product

    • Manufacturers work proactively to design products and services that will meet consumer demand.
    • Products are driven by consumer demand and government regulations.

    Produce Product

    • Production processes and labor costs are constantly analyzed for efficiencies and accuracies.
    • Quality of product and services are highly regulated through all levels of the supply chain.

    Sell Product

    • Sales networks and sales staff deliver the product from the organization to the end consumer.
    • Marketing plays a key role throughout the value stream connecting consumers’ wants and needs to the products and services offered.

    Customer Service

    • Relationships with consumers continue after the sale of products and services.
    • Continued customer support and data mining is important to revenue streams.

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities in the marketplace. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment in which an organization operates. There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams.

    • Core value streams are mostly externally facing. They deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
    • Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.

    Taking a value stream approach to process mapping allows you to move across departmental and system boundaries to understand the underlying business capability.

    Some mistakes organizations make are over-customizing processes, or conversely, not customizing when required. Workday provides good baseline process that work for most organizations. However, if a process is broken or not working efficiently take the time to investigate it, including underlying policies, roles, workflows, and integrations.

    Process frameworks

    Help define your inventory of sales, marketing, and customer services processes.

    Operating Processes
    1. Develop vision and strategy 2. Develop and manage products and services 3. Market and sell products and services 4. Deliver physical products 5. Deliver services
    Management and Support Processes
    6. Manage customer service
    7. Develop and manage human capital
    8. Manage IT
    9. Manage financial resources
    10. Acquire, construct, and manage assets
    11. Manage enterprise risk, compliance, remediation, and resiliency
    12. Manage external relationships
    13. Develop and manage business capabilities

    (APQC)

    If you do not have a documented process model, you can use the APQC Framework to help define your inventory of sales business processes.

    APQC’s Process Classification Framework is a taxonomy of cross-functional business processes intended to allow the objective comparison of organizational performance within and among organizations.

    APQC’s Process Classification Framework

    Process mapping hierarchy

    A process classification framework is helpful for organizations to effectively define their processes and manage them appropriately.

    Use Info-Tech’s related industry resources or publicly available process frameworks (such as APQC) to develop and map your business processes.

    These processes can then be mapped to supporting applications and modules. Policies, roles, and workflows also play a role and should be considered in the overall functioning.

    APQC’s Process Classification Framework

    The image shows a chart, titled PCL Levels Explained, with each of the PCF Levels listed, and a brief description of each.

    (APQC)

    Focus on level-1 processes

    Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
    Market and sell products and services Understand markets, customers, and capabilities Perform customer and market intelligence analysis Conduct customer and market research
    Market and sell products and services Develop a sales strategy Develop a sales forecast Gather current and historic order information
    Deliver services Manage service delivery resources Manage service delivery resource demand Develop baseline forecasts
    ? ? ? ?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus your initial assessment on the level-1 processes that matter to your organization. This allows you to target your scant resources on the areas of optimization that matter most to the organization and minimize the effort required from your business partners.

    You may need to iterate the assessment as challenges are identified. This allows you to be adaptive and deal with emerging issues more readily and become a more responsive partner to the business.

    Process mapping and supporting ERP modules

    The operating model

    An operating model is a framework that drives operating decisions. It helps to set the parameters for the scope of ERP and the processes that will be supported. The operating model will serve to group core operational processes. These groupings represent a set of interrelated, consecutive processes aimed at generating a common output.

    From your developed processes and your Workday license agreements you will be able to pinpoint the scope for investigation, including the processes and modules.

    The image shows three images, overlapping one another. At the back is a chart with three sections, and boxes beneath. In front of that is a graphic with Objectives, Value Streams, Capabilities, and Processes written down the left side, and descriptions on the right. Below that image is an arrow pointing downward to the text Supporting Workday Modules. In front is a circular graphic with the word Workday in the centre, and circles with text in them around it.

    Workday modules and process enablement

    Workday Finance

    • Accounts Receivable and Collections
    • Accounts Payable and Payments
    • Asset Management
    • Audit and Controls
    • Billing and Invoicing
    • Cash Management
    • Contracts
    • Financial Reporting and Analysis
    • [Global] Close and Consolidation
    • Multi-GAAP/Multi-book/Multi-chart of Accounts
    • Revenue Management

    Spend Management

    • Strategic Sourcing
    • Procure to Pay
    • Inventory
    • Expenses

    Professional Services Automation

    • Project and Resource Management
    • Project Financials
    • Project Billing
    • Expense Management
    • Time Tracking

    Enterprise Planning

    • Financial planning
    • Reporting
    • Analytics
    • Budgets
    • Insights
    • Workforce planning
    • Sales planning
    • Operational planning

    Analytics and Reporting

    • Financial Management Core Reporting
    • Human Capital Management Core Reporting
    • Benchmarking
    • Data Hub
    • Augmented Analytics

    Student

    • Admissions
    • Financial Aid
    • Advising
    • Student Finance
    • Student Records

    Human Capital Management (HCM)

    • Human Resource Management
    • Organization Management
    • Business Process Management
    • Reporting and Analytics
    • Employee and Manager Self-Service
    • Contingent Labor Management
    • Skills Cloud
    • Absence Management
    • Benefits Administration
    • ACA Management
    • Compensation
    • Talent Optimization

    Payroll and Workforce Management

    • Scheduling and Labor Management
    • Time and Attendance
    • Absence
    • Payroll

    Employee Experience

    • Employee Engagement Insights
    • Diversity, Inclusion, and Belonging Measurement
    • Health and Well-Being Metrics
    • Back-to-Workplace Readiness
    • Confidential Employee-Manager Conversations
    • Attrition Prediction
    • Continuous Industry Benchmarks

    Talent and Performance

    • Talent Profile
    • Continuous Feedback
    • Survey Campaigns
    • Embedded Analytics
    • Goal Management
    • Performance Management
    • Talent Review
    • Calibration
    • Competencies
    • Career and Development Planning
    • Succession Planning
    • Talent Marketplace
    • Mobile
    • Expenses

    1.3.3 Inventory your Workday modules and business capabilities

    1-3+ hours

    1. Look at the major functions or processes within the scope of ERP.
    2. From the inventory of current systems, choose the submodules or processes that you want to investigate and are within scope for this optimization initiative.
    3. List the top modules, capabilities, or processes that will be within the scope of this optimization initiative.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    1.3.4 Define your key Workday optimization modules and business capabilities

    1-3+ hours

    1. Look at the major functions or processes within the scope of ERP.
    2. From the inventory of current systems, choose the submodules or processes for this optimization initiative. Base this on those that are most critical to the business, those with the lowest levels of satisfaction, or those that perhaps need more knowledge around them.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Step 1.4

    Define Optimization Timeframe

    Activities

    1.4.1 Define Workday Key Dates, and Workday Optimization Roadmap Timeframe and Structure

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    Step 1.1

    Step 1.2

    Step 1.3

    Step 1.4

    Step 1.5

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Defining key dates related to your optimization initiative
    • Identifying key building blocks for your optimization roadmap

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Workday Optimization Team
    • Vendor Management

    Outcomes of this step

    • Optimization Key Dates
    • Optimization Roadmap Timeframe and Structure

    1.4.1 Optimization roadmap timeframe and structure

    1-3+ hours

    1. Key items and dates relevant to your optimization initiatives, such as any products reaching end of life or end of contract, or budget proposal submission deadlines.
    2. Enter the expected Optimization Initiative Start Date.
    3. Enter the Roadmap Length. This is the total amount of time you expect to participate in the Workday Optimization Initiative. This includes short-, medium-, and long-term initiatives.
    4. Enter your Roadmap Date markers – how you want dates displayed on the roadmap.
    5. Enter column time values – what level of granularity will be helpful for this initiative?
    6. Enter the sprint or cycle timeframe – use this if following Agile.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Step 1.5

    Understand Workday Costs

    Activities

    1.5.1 Document Costs Associated With Workday

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    Step 1.1

    Step 1.2

    Step 1.3

    Step 1.4

    Step 1.5

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define your Workday direct and indirect costs
    • List your Workday expense line items

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Finance representatives
    • Workday Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current Workday and related costs

    1.5.1 Document costs associated with Workday

    1-3 hours

    Before you can make changes and optimization decisions, you need to understand the high-level costs associated with your current application architecture. This activity will help you identify the types of technology and people costs associated with your current systems.

    1. Identify the types of technology costs associated with each current system:
      1. System Maintenance
      2. Annual Renewal
      3. Licensing
    2. Identify the cost of people associated with each current system:
      1. Full-Time Employees
      2. Application Support Staff
      3. Help Desk Tickets

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Phase 2

    Assess Your Current State

    Phase 1

    1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team

    1.2 Build an ERP Strategy Model

    1.3 Inventory Current System State

    1.4 Define Optimization Timeframe

    1.5 Understand Workday Costs

    Phase 2

    2.1 Assess Workday Capabilities

    2.2 Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor/Product and Willingness for Change

    Phase 3

    3.1 Prioritize Optimization Opportunities

    3.2 Discover Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Determine process relevance
    • Perform a gap analysis
    • Perform a user satisfaction survey
    • Assess software and vendor satisfaction

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Workday Optimization Team
    • Users across functional areas of your ERP and related technologies

    Step 2.1

    Assess Workday Capabilities

    Activities

    2.1.1 Rate Capability Relevance to Organizational Goals

    2.1.2 Complete a Workday Application Portfolio Assessment

    2.1.3 (Optional) Assess Workday Process Maturity

    Assess Workday Capabilities

    Step 2.1

    Step 2.2

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Capability Relevance
    • Process Gap Analysis
    • Application Portfolio Assessment

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Workday Users

    Outcomes of this step

    • Workday Capability Assessment

    Benefits of the Application Portfolio Assessment

    Assess the health of the application portfolio

    • Get a full 360-degree view of the effectiveness, criticality, and prevalence of all relevant applications to get a comprehensive view of the health of the applications portfolio.
    • Identify opportunities to drive more value from effective applications, retire nonessential applications, and immediately address at-risk applications that are not meeting expectations.

    Provide targeted department feedback

    • Share end-user satisfaction and importance ratings for core IT services, IT communications, and business enablement to focus on the right end-user groups or lines of business, and ramp up satisfaction and productivity.

    Gain insight into the state of data quality

    • Data quality is one of the key issues causing poor ERP user satisfaction and business results. This can include the relevance, accuracy, timeliness, or usability of the organization’s data.
    • Targeted, open-ended feedback around data quality will provide insight into where optimization efforts should be focused.

    2.1.1 Complete a current state assessment (via the Application Portfolio Assessment)

    3 hours

    Option 1: Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to generate your user satisfaction score. This tool not only measures application satisfaction but also elicits great feedback from users regarding the support they receive from the IT team around Workday.

    1. Download the Workday Application Inventory Tool.
    2. Complete the “Demographics” tab (tab 2).
    3. Complete the “Inventory” tab (tab 3).
      1. Complete the inventory by treating each module within your Workday system as an application.
      2. Treat every department as a separate column in the department section. Feel free to add, remove, or modify department names to match your organization.
      3. Include data quality for all applications applicable.

    Option 2: Create a survey manually.

    1. Use tab Reference 2.1 “APA Questions” as a guide for creating your survey.
    2. Send out surveys to end users.
    3. Modify tab 2.1 “Workday Assessment” if required.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Content for New section Tag Goes HereThe image shows a number of charts relating to applications, such as Overall Applications Portfolio Satisfaction and Most Critical Applications. Data is shown in each category relating to number of users, usability, data quality, status, and others.

    2.1.2 Complete the Application Portfolio Assessment

    3 hours

    Option 1: Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to generate your user satisfaction score. This tool not only measures application satisfaction but also elicits great feedback from users regarding the support they receive from the IT team around Workday.

    1. Download the Workday Application Inventory Tool.
    2. Complete the “Demographics” tab (tab 2).
    3. Complete the “Inventory” tab (tab 3).
      1. Complete the inventory by treating each module within your Workday system as an application.
      2. Treat every department as a separate column in the department section. Feel free to add, remove, or modify department names to match your organization.
      3. Include data quality for all applications applicable.

    Option 2: Create a survey manually.

    1. Use tab Reference 2.1 “APA Questions” as a guide for creating your survey.
    2. Send out surveys to end users.
    3. Modify tab 2.1 “Workday Assessment” if required.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    2.1.3 (Optional) Assess Workday process maturity

    1. As with any ERP system, the issues encountered may not be related to the system itself but processes that have developed over time.
    2. Use this opportunity to interview key stakeholders to learn about deeper capability processes.
      1. Identify key stakeholders.
      2. Hold sessions to document deeper processes.
      3. Discuss processes and technical enablement in each area.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Process Maturity Assessment

    Process Assessment

    Strong

    Moderate

    Weak

    1.1 Financial Planning and Analysis

    1.2 Accounting and Financial Close

    1.3 Treasury Management

    1.4 Financial Operations

    1.5 Governance, Risk & Compliance

    2.1 Core HR

    Description All aspects related to financial operations
    Key Success Indicators Month-end reporting in 5 days AR at risk managing down (zero over 90 days) Weekly operating cash flow updates
    Timely liquidity for claims payments Payroll audit reporting and insights reporting 90% of workflow tasks captured in ERP
    EFT uptake Automated reconciliations Reduce audit hours required
    Current Pain Points A lot of voided and re-issued checks NIDPP Integration with banks; can’t get the information back into existing ERP
    There is no payroll integration No payroll automation and other processes Lack of integration with HUB
    Not one true source of data Incentive payment processing Rewards program management
    Audit process is onerous Reconcile AP and AR for dealers

    Stakeholders Interviewed:

    The process is formalized, documented, optimized, and audited.

    The process is poorly documented. More than one person knows how to do it. Inefficient and error-prone.

    The process is not documented. One person knows how to do it. The process is ad hoc, not formalized, inconsistent.

    Capability Processes:

    General Ledger

    Accounts Receivable

    Incentives Management

    Accounts Payable

    General Ledger Consolidation

    Treasury Management

    Cash Management

    Subscription / recurring payments

    Treasury Transactions

    Step 2.2

    Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor/Product and Willingness for Change

    Activities

    2.2.1 Rate Your Vendor and Product Satisfaction

    2.2.2 Review Workday Product Scores (if applicable)

    2.2.3 Evaluate Your Product Satisfaction

    2.2.4 Check Your Business Process Change Tolerance

    Product Satisfaction

    Step 2.1

    Step 2.2

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Rate your vendor and product satisfaction
    • Compare with survey data from SoftwareReviews

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Workday Product Owner(s)
    • Procurement Representative
    • Vendor Contracts Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Quantified satisfaction with vendor and product

    2.2.1 Rate your vendor and product satisfaction

    30 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s vendor satisfaction survey to identify optimization areas with your ERP product(s) and vendor(s).

    1. Option 1 (recommended): Conduct a satisfaction survey using SoftwareReviews. This option allows you to see your results in the context of the vendor landscape.
    2. Option 2: Use the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook to review your satisfaction with your Workday software.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise Resource Planning Category

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    2.2.2 Review Workday product scores (if applicable)

    30 minutes

    1. Download the scorecard for your Workday product from the SoftwareReviews website. (Note: Not all products are represented or have sufficient data, so a scorecard may not be available.)
    2. Use the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook tab 2.3 to record the scorecard results.
    3. Use your Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook to flag areas where your score may be lower than the product scorecard. Brainstorm ideas for optimization.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    SoftwareReviews’ Enterprise Resource Planning Category

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    2.2.3 How does your satisfaction compare with your peers?

    Use SoftwareReviews to explore product features, vendor experience, and capability satisfaction.

    The image shows two data quadrants, one titled Enterprise Resource Planning - Enterprise, and Enterprise Resource Planning - Midmarket.

    (SoftwareReviews ERP Mid-Market, 2022; SoftwareReviews ERP Enterprise, 2022)

    2.2.4 Check your business process change tolerance

    1 hours

    Input

    • Business process capability map

    Output

    • Heat map of risk areas that require more attention to validate best practices or minimize customization

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip charts
    • Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Participants

    • Implementation team
    • SMEs
    • Departmental Leaders
    1. As a group, list your level-0 and level-1 business capabilities. Sample on the next slide.
    2. Assess the department’s willingness for change and the risk of maintaining the status quo.
    3. Color-code the level-0 business capabilities based on:
      1. Green – Willing to follow best practices
      2. Yellow – May be challenging or unique business model
      3. Red – Low tolerance for change

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Heat map representing desire for best practice or those having the least tolerance for change

    Legend:

    Willing to follow best practice

    May be challenging or unique business model

    Low tolerance for change

    Out of Scope

    Product-Centric Capabilities
    R&D Production Supply Chain Distribution Asset Mgmt
    Idea to Offering Plan to Produce Procure to Pay Forecast to Delivery Acquire to Dispose
    Add/Remove Shop Floor Scheduling Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove
    Add/Remove Product Costing Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove
    Service-Centric Capabilities
    Finance HR Marketing Sales Service
    Record to Report Hire to Retire Market to Order Quote to Cash Issue to Resolution
    Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove
    Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove Add/Remove

    Determine the areas of risk to conform to best practice and minimize customization. These will be areas needing focus from the vendor, supporting change and guiding best practice.

    For example: Must be able to support our unique process manufacturing capabilities and enhance planning and visibility to detailed costing.

    Phase 3

    Identify Key Optimization Opportunities

    Phase 1

    1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team

    1.2 Build an ERP Strategy Model

    1.3 Inventory Current System State

    1.4 Define Optimization Timeframe

    1.5 Understand Workday Costs

    Phase 2

    2.1 Assess Workday Capabilities

    2.2 Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor/Product and Willingness for Change

    Phase 3

    3.1 Prioritize Optimization Opportunities

    3.2 Discover Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify key optimization areas
    • Create an optimization roadmap

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Workday Optimization Team

    Step 3.1

    Prioritize optimization opportunities

    Activities

    3.1.1 Prioritize Optimization Capability Areas

    Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    Step 3.1

    Step 3.2

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Explore existing process gaps
    • Identify the impact of processes on user satisfaction
    • Identify the impact of data quality on user satisfaction
    • Review your overall product satisfaction and vendor management

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Workday Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Application optimization plan

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enabling a high-performing organization requires excellent management practices and continuous optimization efforts. Your technology portfolio and architecture are important, but we must go deeper. Taking a holistic view of ERP technologies in the environments in which they operate allows for the inclusion of people and process improvements – this is key to maximizing business results. Using a formal ERP optimization initiative will drive business-IT alignment, identify IT automation priorities, and dig deep into continuous process improvement.

    Address process gaps:

    • ERP and related technologies are invaluable to the goal of organizational enablement, but they must have supported processes driven by business goals.
    • Identify areas where capabilities need to be improved and work toward optimization.

    Support user satisfaction:

    • The best technology in the world won’t deliver business results if it’s not working for the users who need it.
    • Understand concerns, communicate improvements, and support users in all roles.

    Improve data quality:

    • Data quality is unique to each business unit and requires tolerance, not perfection.
    • Implement data quality initiatives that are aligned with overall business objectives and aimed at addressing data practices and the data itself.

    Proactively manage vendors:

    • Vendor management is a critical component of technology enablement and IT satisfaction.
    • Assess your current satisfaction against that of your peers and work toward building a process that is best fit for your organization.

    Assessing application business value

    The Business

    Keepers of the organization’s mission, vision, and value statements that define IT success. The business maintains the overall ownership and evaluation of the applications.

    Business Value of Applications

    IT

    Technical subject matter experts of the applications they deliver and maintain. Each IT function works together to ensure quality applications are delivered to stakeholder expectations.

    First, the authorities on business value need to define and weigh their value drivers that describe the priorities of the organization. This will allow the applications team to apply a consistent, objective, and strategically aligned evaluation of applications across the organization.

    In this context…

    business value is

    the value of the business outcome that the application produces. Additionally, it is how effective the application is at producing that outcome.

    Business value IS NOT

    the user’s experience or satisfaction with the application.

    Brainstorm IT initiatives to enable high areas of opportunity to support the business

    Create or Improve:

    • ERP Capabilities
    • Optimization Initiatives

    Capabilities are what the system and business do that creates value for the organization.

    Optimization initiatives are projects with a definitive start and end date, and they enhance, create, maintain, or remove capabilities with the goal of increasing value.

    Brainstorm ERP optimization initiatives in each area. Ensure you are looking for all-encompassing opportunities within the context of IT, the business, and Workday systems.

    • Process
    • Technology
    • Organization

    Discover the value drivers of your applications

    Financial vs. Human Benefits

    Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and are often quite tangible.

    Human benefits refer to how an application can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. Outward Orientation

    Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.

    Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    The image shows a business value matrix, with Human benefit and Financial benefit in the horizontal and Outward and Inward on the vertical. In the top left quadrant is Reach Customers; top right is Increase Revenue or Deliver Value; bottom left is Enhance Services, and bottom right is Reduce Costs.

    The image shows a graph titled Perceived business benefits from using digital tools. It is a bar graph, showing percentages assigned to each perceived benefit. The source is Collins et al, 2017.

    Increased Revenue

    Application functions that are specifically related to the impact on your organization’s ability to generate revenue and deliver value to your customers.

    Reduced Costs

    Reduction of overhead. The ways in which an application limits the operational costs of business functions.

    Enhanced Services

    Functions that enable business capabilities that improve the organization’s ability to perform its internal operations.

    Reach Customers

    Application functions that enable and improve the interaction with customers or produce market information and insights.

    Prioritize Workday optimization areas that will bring the most value to the organization

    Review your ERP capability areas and rate them according to relevance to organizational goals. This will allow you to eliminate optimization ideas that may not bring value to the organization.

    The image shows a graph, separated into quadrants. On the x-axis is Satisfaction, from low to high, and on the Y-axis is Relevant to Organizational Goals from Low to High. The top left quadrant is High Priority, top right is Maintain, and the two lower quadrants are both low priority.

    Value vs. Effort

    How important is it? vs. How difficult is it?

    How important is it? How Difficult is it?

    What is the value?

    • Increase revenue
    • Decrease costs
    • Enhanced services
    • Reach customers

    What is the benefit?

    • How can it help us reach our goals?

    What is the impact?

    • To organizational goals
    • To ERP goals
    • To departmental goals

    What is the cost?

    • Hours x Rates ++ =

    What is the level of effort?

    • Development effort
    • Operational effort
    • Implementation effort
    • Outside resource coordination

    What is the risk of implementing/not implementing?

    What is the complexity?

    (Roadmunk)

    RICE method

    Measure the “total impact per time worked”

    The image shows a graphic with the word Confidence at the top, then an arrow pointing upwards that reads Impact. Below that, there is an arrow pointing horizontally in both directions that reads Reach, and then a horizontal line, with the word Effort below it.

    Reach Impact Confidence Effort

    How many people will this improvement impact? Internal: # of users OR # of transactions per period

    External: # of customers OR # of transactions per period

    What is the scale of impact? How much will the improvement affect satisfaction?

    Example Weighting:

    1 = Massive Impact

    2 = High Impact

    1 = Medium Impact

    0.5 = Low Impact

    0.25 = Very Low Impact

    How confident are we that the improvements are achievable and that they will meet the impact estimates?

    Example Weighting:

    1 = High Confidence

    0.80 = Medium Confidence

    0.50 = Low Confidence

    How much investment will be required to implement the improvement initiative?

    FTE hours x cost per hour

    (Intercom)

    3.1.1 Prioritize and rate optimization capability areas

    1-3 hours

    1. Use tab 3.1 Optimization Priorities.
    2. From the Workday Key Capabilities (pulled from tab 1.3 Key Capabilities), discuss areas of scope for the Workday optimization initiative.
    3. Discuss the four areas of the business value matrix and identify how each module, along with organizational goals, can bring value to the organization.
    4. Rate each of your Workday capabilities for the level of importance to your organization. The levels of importance are:
      • Crucial
      • Important
      • Secondary
      • Unimportant
      • Not applicable

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Step 3.2

    Discover Optimization Initiatives

    Activities

    3.2.1 Discover Product and Vendor Satisfaction Opportunities

    3.2.2 Discover Capability and Feature Optimization Opportunities

    3.2.3 Discover Process Optimization Opportunities

    3.2.4 Discover Integration Optimization Opportunities

    3.2.5 Discover Data Optimization Opportunities

    3.2.6 Discover Workday Cost-Saving Opportunities

    Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    Step 3.1

    Step 3.2

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Explore existing process gaps
    • Identify the impact of processes on user satisfaction
    • Identify the impact of data quality on user satisfaction
    • Review your overall product satisfaction and vendor management

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Workday Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Application optimization plan
    Content for New section Tag Goes HereThe image shows a graphic title Product Feature Satisfaction, showing features in rank order and data on each.
    Content for New section Tag Goes HereThe image shows a graphic titled Vendor Capability Satisfaction, showing features in rank order with related data.

    Workday’s partner landscape

    Workday uses an extensive partner network to help deliver results.

    ADVISORY PARTNERS

    Workday Advisory Partners have in-depth knowledge to help customers determine what’s best for their needs and how to maximize business value. They guide you through digital acceleration strategy and planning, product selection, change management, and more.

    SERVICES PARTNERS

    Workday Services Partners represent a curated community of global systems integrators and regional firms that help companies deploy Workday and continually adopt new capabilities.

    SOFTWARE PARTNERS

    Workday Software Partners are a global ecosystem of application, content, and technology software companies that design, build, and deploy solution extensions to help customers enhance the capabilities of Workday.

    Global payroll PARTNERS

    Workday’s Global Payroll Cloud (GPC) program makes it easy to expand payroll (outside of the US, Canada, the UK, and France) to third-party payroll providers around the world using certified, prebuilt integrations from Workday Partners. Payroll partners provide solutions in more than 100 countries.

    Adaptive planning PARTNERS

    Adaptive planning partners guide you through all aspects of everything from integration to deployment.

    With large-scale ERP and HCM systems, the success of the system can be as much about the SI (Systems Integrator) or vendor partners as it is about the core product.

    In evaluating your Workday system, think about Workday’s extensive partner network to understand how you can capitalize on your installation.

    You do not need to reinvent the system; you may just need an additional service partner or bolt-on solution to round out your product functionality.

    Improving vendor management

    Create a right-size, right-fit strategy for managing the vendors relevant to your organization.

    The image shows a matrix, with strategic value on the x-axis from low to high, and Vendor Spend/Switching Costs on the y-axis, from low to high. In the top left is Operational, top right is Strategic; lower left is commodity; and lower right Tactical.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A vendor management initiative is an organization’s formalized process for evaluating, selecting, managing, and optimizing third-party providers of goods and services.

    The amount of resources you assign to managing vendors depends on the number and value of your organization’s relationships. Before optimizing your vendor management program around the best practices presented in Info-Tech’s Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative blueprint, assess your current maturity and build the process around a model that reflects the needs of your organization.

    Note: Info-Tech uses VMI interchangeably with the terms “vendor management office (VMO),” “vendor management function,” “vendor management process,” and “vendor management program.”

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    3.2.1 Discover product and vendor satisfaction

    1-2 hours

    1. Review tab 2.2 Vend. & Prod. Sat. to review the overall Product (and Vendor) satisfaction of your Workday system.
    2. Use tab 3.2 Optimization Initiatives to answer the following questions in the Overall Product (and Vendor) Evaluation area.
      • Document overall product satisfaction.
      • How does your satisfaction compare with your peers?
      • Is the overall system fit for use?
      • Do you have a proactive vendor management strategy in place?
      • Is the product dissatisfaction at the point that you need to evaluate if it is time to replace the product?
      • Could your vendor or SI help you achieve better results?

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image shows a box with text in it, titled 3.2.1 Overall Product (and Vendor) Evaluation.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Content for New section Tag Goes HereThe image is a graphic, with the Five Most Critical Applications section at the top, with related data, and other sets of data included in smaller text at the bottom of the image.

    3.2.2 Discover capability and feature optimization opportunities

    1-2 hours

    1. Review tab 2.2 Vend. & Prod. Sat. and tab 3.1 Optimization Priorities to review the satisfaction with the capabilities and features of your Workday system.
    2. Use tab 3.2 Optimization Initiatives to answer the following questions in the Capabilities and Features Evaluation area to answer the following questions:
      • What capabilities and features are performing the worst?
      • Do other organizations and users struggle with these areas?
      • Why is it not performing well?
      • Is there an opportunity for improvement?
      • What are some optimization initiatives that could be undertaken?

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    The image is a box with text in it, titled 3.2.2 Capabilities and Features Evaluation.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Process optimization: the hidden goldmine

    Know your strategic goals and KPIs that will deliver results.

    Goals of Process Improvement Process Improvement Sample Areas Improvement Possibilities
    • Optimize business and improve value drivers
    • Reduce TCO
    • Reduce process complexity
    • Eliminate manual processes
    • Increase efficiencies
    • Support digital transformation and enablement
    • Order to cash
    • Procure to pay
    • Order to replenish
    • Plan to produce
    • Request to settle
    • Make to order
    • Make to stock
    • Purchase to order
    • Increase number of process instances processed successfully end to end
    • Increase number of instances processed in time
    • Increase degree of process automation
    • Speed up cycle times of supply chain processes
    • Reduce number of process exceptions
    • Apply internal best practices across organizational units

    3.2.3 Discover process optimization opportunities

    1-2 hours

    1. Use tab 3.1 Optimization Priorities and tab 2.2 Bus Proc Change Tolerance to review process optimization opportunities.
    2. Use tab 3.2 Optimization Initiatives to answer the following questions in the Capabilities and Features Evaluation area to answer the following questions:
      • List underperforming capabilities around process.
      • Answer the following:
        • What is the state of the current processes?
        • Is there an opportunity for process improvement?
        • What are some optimization initiatives that could be undertaken in this area?

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image shows a box with text in it, titled Processes Optimization.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Integration provides long-term usability

    Balance the need for secure, compliant data availability with organizational agility.

    The benefits of integration

    • The largest benefit is the extended use of data. The ERP data can be used in the enterprise-level business intelligence suite rather than the application-specific analytics.
    • Enhanced data security. Integrated approaches lend themselves to auditable processes such as sign-on and limit the email movement of data.
    • Regulatory compliance. Large multi-site organizations have many layers of regulation. A clear understanding of where orders, deliveries, and payments were made streamlines the audit process.

    The challenges of integration

    • Extending a single instance ERP to multiple sites. The challenge for data management is the same as any SaaS application. The connection and data replication present challenges.
    • Combining data from equally high-volume systems. For Workday it is recommended that one instance is set to primary and all other sites are read-only to maintain data integrity.
    • Incorporating data from the separate system(s). The proprietary and locked-in nature of the data collection and definitions for ERP systems often limit the movement of data between separate systems.

    Common integration and consolidation scenarios

    Financial Consolidation Data Backup Synchronization Across Sites Legacy Consolidation
    • Financial consolidation requires a holistic view of data format and accounting schedules
    • Problem: Controlling financial documentation across geographic regions. Most companies are required to report in each region where they maintain a presence. Stakeholders and senior management also need a holistic view. This leads to significant strain on the financial department to consolidate both revenue and budget allocations for cross-site projects across the various geographic locations on a regular basis.
    • Solution: For enterprises with a single vendor or Workday-only portfolios, Workday can offer integration tools. For those needing to integrate with other ERPs the use of a connector may be required to send financial data to the main system. The format and accounting calendar for transactions should match the primary ERP system to allow consolidation. The local specific format should be a role-based customization at the level of the site’s specific instance.
    • Use a data center as the main repository to ensure all geographic locations have equal access to the necessary data.
    • Problem: ERP systems generate high volumes of data. Most systems have a defined schedule of back-up during off-hours. Multi-instance brings additional issues through lack of defined off-hours, higher volume of data, and the potential for cross-site or instance data relationships. This leads to headaches for both the Database Administrator and Business Analysts.
    • Solution: The best solution is an offsite data center with high availability. This may include cloud storage or hosted data centers. Regardless of where the data is stored, centralize the data and replicate to each site. Ensure that the data center can mirror the database and Binary Large Object (BLOB) storage that exists for each site.
    • Set up synchronization schedules based on data usage, not site location.
    • Problem: Providing access to up-to-date transactions requires copying of both contextual information (permissions, timestamp, location, history) and the transaction itself across multiple sites to allow local copies to be used for analysis and audits. The sheer volume of information makes timely synchronization difficult.
    • Solution: Not all data needs to be synchronized in a timely fashion. In Workday, administrators can use NetWeaver to maintain and alter global data synchronization through the Master Data Management module. Permissions can be given to users to perform on-demand synchronization of data attached to that user.
    • Carefully define older transactions. Only active transactions should be brought in the ERP. Send older data to storage.
    • Problem: Subsidiaries and acquired companies often have a Tier 2 ERP product. Prior to fully consolidating the processes, many enterprises will want to migrate data to their ERP system to build compliance and audit trails. Migration of data often breaks historical linkages between transactions.
    • Solution: Workday offers tools to integrate data across applications that can be used as part of a data migration strategy. The process of data migration should be combined with data warehousing to ensure a cost-effective process. For most enterprises, the lack of experience in data migration will necessitate the use of consultants and Independent Software Vendors (ISV).

    For more information: Implement a Multi-site ERP

    3.2.4 Discover integration optimization opportunities

    1-2 hours

    1. Use tab 3.2 Optimization Initiatives to answer the following questions in the Integration Evaluation area:
      1. Are there some areas where integration could be improved?
      2. Is there an opportunity for process improvement?
      3. What are some optimization initiatives that could be undertaken in this area?

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image shows a box with text in it, titled Integration Evaluation.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Use a data strategy that fixes the enterprise-wide data management issues

    Your data management must allow for flexibility and scalability for future needs.

    IT has several concerns around ERP data and wide dissemination of that data across sites. Large organizations can benefit from building a data warehouse or at least adopting some of the principles of data warehousing. The optimal way to deal with the issue of integration is to design a metadata-driven data warehouse that acts as a central repository for all ERP data. This serves as the storage facility for millions of transactions, formatted to allow analysis and comparison.

    Key considerations:

    • Technical: At what stage does data move to the warehouse? Can processes be automated to dump data or to do a scheduled data movement?
    • Process: Data integration requires some level of historical context for all data. Ensure that all data has multiple metadata tags to future-proof the data.
    • People: Who will be accessing the data and what are the key items that users will need to adapt to the data warehouse process?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data warehouse solutions can be expensive. See Info-Tech’s Build a Data Warehouse on a Solid Foundation for guidance on what options are available to meet your budget and data needs.

    Optimizing Workday data, additional considerations

    Data Quality Management Effective Data Governance Data-Centric Integration Strategy Extensible Data Warehousing
    • Prevention is 10x cheaper than remediation. Stop fixing data quality with band-aid solutions and start fixing at the source of the problem.
    • Data quality is unique to each business unit and requires tolerance, not perfection. If the data allows the business to operate at the desired level, don’t waste time fixing data that may not need to be fixed.
    • Implement a set of data quality initiatives that are aligned with overall business objectives and aimed at addressing data practices and the data itself.
    • Develop a prioritized data quality improvement project roadmap and long-term improvement strategy.
    • Build related practices with more confidence and less risk after achieving an appropriate level of data quality.
    • Data governance enables data-driven insight. Think of governance as a structure for making better use of data.
    • Collaboration is critical. The business may own the data, but IT understands the data. Data governance will not work unless the business and IT work together.
    • Data governance powers the organization up the data value chain through policies and procedures, master data management, data quality, and data architecture.
    • Create a roadmap to prioritize initiatives and delineate responsibilities among data stewards, data owners, and the data governance steering committee.
    • Ensure buy-in from business and IT stakeholders. Communicate initiatives to end users and executives to reduce resistance.
    • Every enterprise application involves data integration. Any change in the application and database ecosystem requires you to solve a data integration problem.
    • Data integration is becoming more and more critical for downstream functions of data management and for business operations to be successful. Poor integration holds back these critical functions.
    • Build your data integration practice with a firm foundation in governance and a reference architecture. Ensure that your process is scalable and sustainable.
    • Support the flow of data through the organization and meet the organization’s requirements for data latency, availability, and relevancy.
    • Data availability must be frequently reviewed and repositioned to continue to grow with the business.
    • A data warehouse is a project, but successful data warehousing is a program. An effective data warehouse requires planning beyond the technology implementation.
    • Governance, not technology, needs to be the core support system for enabling a data warehouse program.
    • Leverage an approach that focuses on constructing a data warehouse foundation that can address a combination of operational, tactical, and ad hoc business needs.
    • Invest time and effort to put together pre-project governance to inform and guide your data warehouse implementation.
    • Select the most suitable architecture pattern to ensure the data warehouse is “built right” at the very beginning.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Establish Data Governance

    Build a Data Integration Strategy

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    3.2.5 Discover data optimization opportunities

    1-2 hours

    1. Use your 2.1 APA survey and/or tab 2.2 Vendor & Prod Sat to better understand issues related to data.
    • Note: Data issues happen for a number of reasons:
      • Poor underlying data in the system
      • More than one source of truth
      • Inability to consolidate data
      • Inability to measure KPIs (key performance indicators) effectively
      • Reporting that is cumbersome or non-existent
  • Use tab 3.2 Optimization Initiatives to answer the following questions in the Data Evaluation area:
    • What are some underlying issues?
    • Is there an opportunity for data improvement?
    • What are some optimization initiatives that could be undertaken in this area?
  • Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image shows a box with text in it, titled 3.2.5 Data Evaluation.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Content for New section Tag Goes HereThe image shows a graphic, with a bar graph at the bottom, showing Primary Reason for Leaving Workday Human Capital Management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The number one reason organizations leave Workday is because of cost. Do not be strong-armed into a contract you do not feel comfortable with. Do your homework, know your leverage points, be fully prepared for cost negotiations, use their competition to your advantage, and get support – such as Info-Tech’s vendor management resources and team.

    Approach contracts and pricing strategically

    Don’t go into contract negotiation blind.

    • Understand the vendor – year-end, market strategy, and competitive position.
    • Take the time to understand the contract. including contract details such as length of the contract, full-service equivalent (FSE, employee count,) innovation fees, modules included, and renewal clauses.
    • Be fully prepared to take a proactive approach to cost negotiations.
      • Use Info-Tech’s vendor management services to support you.
      • Go in prepared.
      • Use your leverage points – FSE count, Module Bundles, CPI & Innovation Fees.
      • Use competition to your advantage.

    Since 2007, Workday has been steadily growing its market share and footprint in human capital management, finance, and student information systems.

    Organizations considering additional modules or undergoing contract renewal need to gain insight into areas of leverage and other relevant vendor information.

    Key issues that occur include pricing transparency and contractual flexibility on terms and conditions. Adequate planning and communication need to be taken into consideration before entering into any agreement.

    3.2.6 Discover Workday cost-saving opportunities

    1-2 hours

    1. Use tab 1.5 Current Costs, as an input for this exercise. Another great resource is Info-Tech’s Workday vendor management resources which you can use to help understand cost-saving strategies.
    2. Use tab 3.2 Optimization Initiatives Costs Evaluation area to list cost savings initiatives and opportunities.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image shows a box with text in it, titled 3.2.6 Costs Evaluation.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Other optimization opportunities

    There are many opportunities to improve your Workday portfolio. Choose the ones that are right for your business.

    • Artificial intelligence (AI) (and management of the AI lifecycle)
    • Machine learning (ML)
    • Augment business interactions
    • Automatically execute sales pipelines
    • Process mining
    • Workday application monitoring
    • Be aware of the Workday product roadmap
    • Implement and take advantage of Workday tools and product offerings

    Phase 4

    Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    Phase 1

    1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team

    1.2 Build an ERP Strategy Model

    1.3 Inventory Current System State

    1.4 Define Optimization Timeframe

    1.5 Understand Workday Costs

    Phase 2

    2.1 Assess Workday Capabilities

    2.2 Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor/Product and Willingness for Change

    Phase 3

    3.1 Prioritize Optimization Opportunities

    3.2 Discover Optimization Initiatives

    Phase 4

    4.1 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review the different options to solve the identified pain points
    • Build out a roadmap showing how you will get to those solutions
    • Build a communication plan that includes the stakeholder presentation

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Primary stakeholders in each value stream supported by the ERP
    • ERP Applications support team

    Get the Most Out of Your Workday

    Step 4.1

    4.1 Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    Activities

    4.1.1 Evaluate Optimization Initiatives

    4.1.2 Prioritize Your Workday Initiatives

    4.1.3 Build a Roadmap

    4.1.4 Build a Visual Roadmap

    Next steps

    Step 4.1

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review the different options to solve the identified pain points then build out a roadmap of how to get to that solution.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Primary stakeholders in each value stream supported by the ERP
    • ERP Applications support team

    Outcomes of this step

    • A strategic direction is set
    • An initial roadmap is laid out

    Evaluate your optimization initiatives and determine next steps to build out your optimization roadmap

    The image shows a chart titled Value Drivers, with specific categories and criteria listed along the top as headings. The rows below the headings are blank.

    Activity 4.1.1 Evaluate optimization Initiatives

    1 hour

    1. Evaluate your optimization initiatives from tab 3.2, Optimization Initiatives.
    2. Complete Value Drivers:
    • Relevance to Organizational Goals and Objectives
    • Applications Portfolio Assessment Survey:
      • Impact: Number of Users, Importance to Role
      • Current State: Satisfaction With Features, Usability, and Data Quality.
    • Value Drivers: Increase Revenue, Decrease Costs, Enhanced Services, or Reach Customers.
    • Additional Factors:
      • Current to Future Risk Profile
      • Number of Departments to Benefit
      • Importance to Stakeholder Relations
  • Complete Effort and Cost Estimations:
    • Resources: Do we have resources available and the skillset?
    • Cost
    • Overall Effort Rating
  • Gut Check: “Is it achievable? Have we done it or something similar before? Are we willing to invest in it?“
  • Decision to Proceed
  • Next Steps
  • Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Activity 4.1.2 Determine your optimization roadmap building blocks

    1 hour

    Optimization initiatives: Determine which if any to proceed with.

    1. Identify initiatives.
    2. For each item on your roadmap assign an owner who will be accountable to the completion of the roadmap item.
    3. Wherever possible, assign a start date, month, or quarter. The more specific you can be the better.
    4. Identify completion dates to create a sense of urgency. If you are struggling with start dates, it can help to start with a finish date and “back in” to a start date based on estimated efforts.
    5. Include periphery tasks such as communication strategy.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    Note: Your roadmap should be treated as a living document that is updated and shared with the stakeholders on a regular schedule.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Activity 4.1.3 – Build a visual Workday optimization roadmap (optional)

    1 hour

    For some, a visual representation of a roadmap is easier to comprehend.

    Consider taking the roadmap built in 4.1.2 and creating a visual roadmap.

    Record this information in the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook.

    The image shows a chart that tracks Initiative and Owner across multiple years.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your Workday Workbook

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Get the Most Out of Your Workday

    ERP technology is critical to facilitating an organization’s flow of information across business units. It allows for seamless integration of systems and creates a holistic view of the enterprise to support decision making. ERP implementation should not be a one-and-done exercise. There needs to be ongoing optimization to enable business processes and optimal organizational results.

    Get the Most Out of Your Workday allows organizations to proactively implement continuous assessment and optimization of their enterprise resource planning system, including:

    • Alignment and prioritization of key business and technology drivers.
    • Identification of processes, including classification and gap analysis.
    • Measurement of user satisfaction across key departments.
    • Improved vendor relations.
    • Data quality initiatives.

    This formal Workday optimization initiative will drive business-IT alignment, identify IT automation priorities, and dig deep into continuous process improvement.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Research Contributors

    Ben Dickie

    Research Practice Lead

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Ben Dickie is a Research Practice Lead at Info-Tech Research Group. His areas of expertise include customer experience management, CRM platforms, and digital marketing. He has also led projects pertaining to enterprise collaboration and unified communications.

    Scott Bickley

    Practice Lead and Principal Research

    Director Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Bickley is a Practice Lead and Principal Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group focused on vendor management and contract review. He also has experience in the areas of IT asset management (ITAM), software asset management (SAM), and technology procurement along with a deep background in operations, engineering, and quality systems management.

    Andy Neil

    Practice Lead, Applications

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy is a Senior Research Director, Data Management and BI, at Info-Tech Research Group. He has over 15 years of experience in managing technical teams, information architecture, data modeling, and enterprise data strategy. He is an expert in enterprise data architecture, data integration, data standards, data strategy, big data, and the development of industry standard data models.

    Bibliography

    “9 product prioritization frameworks for product managers.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed 15 May 2022.

    Armel, Kate. "New Article: Data-Driven Estimation, Management Lead to High Quality." QSM: Quantitative Software Management, 14 May 2013. Accessed 4 Feb. 2021.

    Collins, George, et al., “Connecting Small Businesses in the US.” Deloitte Commissioned by Google, 2017. Web.

    Epizitone, Ayogeboh, and Oludayo O. Olugbara. "Critical Success Factors for ERP System Implementation to Support Financial Functions." Academy of Accounting and Financial Studies Journal, vol. 23, no. 6, 2019. Accessed 12 Oct. 2021

    Gheorghiu, Gabriel. "The ERP Buyer’s Profile for Growing Companies." Selecthub, 2018. Accessed 21 Feb. 2021.

    Karlsson, Johan. "Product Backlog Grooming Examples and Best Practices." Perforce, 18 May 2018. Accessed 4 Feb. 2021.

    Lauchlan, Stuart. “Workday accelerates into fiscal 2023 with a strong year end as cloud adoption gets a COVID-bounce.” diginomica, 1 March 2022. Web.

    "Maximizing the Emotional Economy: Behavioral Economics." Gallup, n.d. Accessed 21 Feb. 2021.

    Noble, Simon-Peter. “Workday: A High-Quality Business That's Fairly Valued.” Seeking Alpha, 8 Apr. 2019. Web.

    Norelus, Ernese, Sreeni Pamidala, and Oliver Senti. "An Approach to Application Modernization: Discovery and Assessment Phase," Medium, 24 Feb. 2020. Accessed 21 Feb. 2021.

    "Process Frameworks." APQC, n.d. Accessed 21 Feb. 2021.

    Saxena, Deepak, and Joe Mcdonagh. "Evaluating ERP Implementations: The Case for a Lifecycle-based Interpretive Approach." The Electronic Journal of Information Systems Evaluation, vol. 22, no. 1, 2019, pp. 29-37. Accessed 21 Feb. 2021.

    “Workday Enterprise Management Cloud Product Scorecard.” SoftwareReviews, May 2022. Web.

    “Workday Meets Growing Customer Demand with Record Number of Deployments and Industry-Leading Customer Satisfaction Score.” Workday, Inc., 7 June 2021. Web.

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}300|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    There are many challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt
    • Skills and talent in the IT team
    • A culture that resists change
    • Fear of job loss

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    By using the framework of culture, competencies, collaboration and capabilities, organizations can create dimensions in their I&O structure in order to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence though the effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Impact and Result

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation – Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers for success.

  • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
  • Understanding business needs and pain points is key to delivering solutions.
  • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at this as a journey.
    • Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation Storyboard
    • I&O Digital Transformation Maturity Assessment Tool

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Assess Infrastructure Readiness for Digital Transformation

    Unlock the full potential of your infrastructure with a digital transformation strategy and clear the barriers to success.

    Analyst Perspective

    It’s not just about the technology!

    Many businesses fail in their endeavors to complete a digital transformation, but the reasons are complex, and there are many ways to fail, whether it is people, process, or technology. In fact, according to many surveys, 70% of digital transformations fail, and it’s mainly down to strategy – or the lack thereof.

    A lot of organizations think of digital transformation as just an investment in technology, with no vision of what they are trying to achieve or transform. So, out of the gate, many organizations fail to undergo a meaningful transformation, change their business model, or bring about a culture of digital transformation needed to be seriously competitive in their given market.

    When it comes to I&O leaders who have been given a mandate to drive digital transformation projects, they still must align to the vision and mission of the organization; they must still train and hire staff that will be experts in their field; they must still drive process improvements and align the right technology to meet the needs of a digital transformation.

    John Donovan

    John Donovan

    Principal Research Director, I&O
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Insight summary

    Overarching insight

    Digital transformation requires I&O teams to shift from traditional infrastructure management to becoming a strategic enabler, driving agility, innovation, and operational excellence through effective integration of people, process, and technology.

    Insight 1

    Collaboration is a key component of I&O – Promote strong collaboration between I&O and other business functions. When doing a digital transformation, it is clear that this is a cross-functional effort. Business leaders and IT teams need to align their objectives, prioritize initiatives, and ensure that you are seamlessly integrating technologies with the new business functions.

    Insight 2

    Embrace agility and adaptability as core principles – As the digital landscape continues to evolve, it is paramount that I&O leaders are agile and adaptable to changing business needs, adopting new technology and implementing new innovative solutions. The culture of continuous improvement and openness to experimentation and learning will assist the I&O leaders in their journey.

    Insight 3

    Future-proof your infrastructure and operations – By anticipating emerging technologies and trends, you can proactively plan and organize your team for future needs. By investing in scalable, flexible infrastructure such as cloud services, automation, AI technologies, and continuously upskilling the IT staff, you can stay relevant and forward-looking in the digital space.

    Tactical insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployment of services.

    Tactical insight

    Having a clear strategy, with leadership commitment along with hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    There are a lot of challenges for I&O when it comes to digital transformation, including:

    • Legacy infrastructure technical debt.
    • Skills and talent in the IT team.
    • A culture that resists change.
    • Fear of job loss.

    These and many more will hinder your progress, which demonstrates the need to invest in modernizing your infrastructure, investing in training and hiring talent, and cultivating a culture that supports digital transformation.

    Common Obstacles

    Many obstacles to digital transformation begin with non-I&O activities, including:

    • Lack of a clear vision and strategy.
    • Siloed organizational structure.
    • Lack of governance and data management.
    • Limited budget and resources.

    By addressing these obstacles, I&O will have a better chance of a successful transformation and delivering the full potential of digital technologies.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Building a culture of innovation by developing clear goals and creating a vision will be key.

    • Be customer centric as opposed to being technology driven.
    • Understand the business needs and pain points in order to effectively deliver solutions.
    • Approach infrastructure digital transformation in iterations and look at it as a journey.

    By completing the Info-Tech digital readiness questionnaire, you will see where you are in terms of maturity and areas you need to concentrate on.

    Info-Tech Insight

    By driving a customer-centric approach, delivering a successful transformation can be tailored to the business goals and drive adoption and engagement. Refining your roadmap through data and analytics will drive this change. Use third-party expertise to guide your transformation and help build that vision of the future.

    The cost of digital transformation

    The challenges that stand in the way of your success, and what is needed to reverse the risk

    What CIOs are saying about their challenges

    26% of those CIOs surveyed cite resistance to change, with entrenched viewpoints demonstrating a real need for a cultural shift to enhance the digital transformation journey.

    Source: Prophet, 2019.

    70% of digital transformation projects fall short of their objectives – even when their leadership is aligned, often with serious consequences.

    Source: BCG, 2020.

    Having a clear strategy and commitment from leadership, hiring and training the right people, monitoring and measuring your progress, and ensuring it is a business-led journey will increase your chances of success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cultural change, business alignment, skills training, and setting a clear strategy with KPIs to demonstrate success are all key to being successful in your digital journey.

    Small and medium-sized enterprises

    What business owners and CEOs are saying about their digital transformation

    57% of small business owners feel they must improve their IT infrastructure to optimize their operations.

    Source: SMB Story, 2023.

    64% of CEOs believe driving digital transformation at a rapid pace is critical to attracting and retaining talent and customers.

    Source: KPMG, 2022.

    Info-Tech Insight

    An IT infrastructure maturity assessment is a foundational step in the journey of digital transformation. The demand will be on performance, resilience, and scalability. IT infrastructure must be able to support innovation and rapid deployments.

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}336|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design

    Mainframes remain a critical part of an organization’s infrastructure and will need to support these platforms for the foreseeable future. Despite the importance, it can be a challenge for organizations to find qualified resources to support them. Meanwhile, companies are unsure of where to find help to train and develop their teams on mainframe technologies and are at risk of a skills gap within their teams.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Mainframes continue to have wide usage, particularly in enterprise organizations. The complexity of moving or replatforming many of these applications means these platforms will be around for a long time still.
    • Companies need to be proactive about developing their teams to support their mainframe systems.

    Impact and Result

    • Companies can protect their assets by cultivating a pipeline of qualified resources to support their mainframe infrastructure.
    • There is a robust training ecosystem headed by large, reputable organizations to help develop and support companies' resources. You don’t have to do it alone.

    Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard – An overview of the solutions available to support your mainframe training and skills development needs.

    Your mainframes are not going to disappear overnight. These systems often support the most critical operations in your organization. You need to ensure you have the right qualified resources to support your platforms.

    • Skills Development on the Mainframe Platform Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Agile Enterprise Architecture Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}581|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,106 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 33 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model

    Establish an enterprise architecture practice that:

    • Leverages an operating model that promotes/supports agility within the organization.
    • Embraces business, data, application, and technology architectures in an optimal mix.
    • Is Agile in itself and will be sustainable and reactive to business needs, staying relevant and “profitable” – continuously delivering business value.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Use your business and EA strategy and design principles to right-size standardized operating models to fit your EA organization’s needs.
    • You need to define a sound set of design principles before commencing with the design of your EA organization.
    • The EA operating model structure should be rigid but pliable enough to fit the needs of the stakeholders it provides services to.
    • A phased approach and a good communication strategy is key to the success of the new EA organization.
    • Start with one group and work out the hurdles before rolling it out organization-wide.
    • Make sure that you communicate regularly on wins but also on hurdles and how to overcome them.

    Impact and Result

    • The organization design approach proposed will aim to provide twofold agility: the ability to stretch and shrink depending on business requirements and the promotion of agility in architecture delivery.
    • By recognizing that agility comes in different flavors, organizations using more traditional design patterns will also benefit from the approach advocated by this blueprint.

    Agile Enterprise Architecture Operating Model Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out create an Agile EA operating model to execute the EA function, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design your EA operating model

    You need to define a sound set of design principles before commencing with the design of your EA organization.

    • Agile EA Operating Model Communication Deck
    • Agile EA Operating Model Workbook
    • Business Architect
    • Application Architect
    • Data Architect
    • Enterprise Architect

    2. Define your EA organizational structure

    The EA operating model structure should be rigid but pliable enough to fit the needs of the stakeholders it provide services to.

    • EA Views Taxonomy
    • EA Operating Model Template
    • Architecture Board Charter Template
    • EA Policy Template
    • EA Compliance Waiver Form Template

    3. Implement the EA operating model

    A phased approach and a good communications strategy are key to the success of the new EA organization.

    • EA Roadmap
    • EA Communication Plan Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Agile Enterprise Architecture Operating Model

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 EA Function Design

    The Purpose

    Identify how EA looks within the organization and ensure all the necessary skills are accounted for within the function.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    EA is designed to be the most appropriately placed and structured for the organization.

    Activities

    1.1 Place the EA department.

    1.2 Define roles for each team member.

    1.3 Find internal and external talent.

    1.4 Create job descriptions with required proficiencies.

    Outputs

    EA organization design

    Role-based skills and competencies

    Talent acquisition strategy

    Job descriptions

    2 EA Engagement Model

    The Purpose

    Create a thorough engagement model to interact with stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of each process within the engagement model.

    Create stakeholder interaction cards to plan your conversations.

    Activities

    2.1 Define each engagement process for your organization.

    2.2 Document stakeholder interactions.

    Outputs

    EA Operating Model Template

    EA Stakeholder Engagement Model Template

    3 EA Governance

    The Purpose

    Develop EA boards, alongside a charter and policies to effectively govern the function.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Governance that aids the EA function instead of being a bureaucratic obstacle.

    Adherence to governace.

    Activities

    3.1 Outline the architecture review process.

    3.2 Position the architecture review board.

    3.3 Create a committee charter.

    3.4 Make effective governance policy.

    Outputs

    Architecture Board Charter Template

    EA Policy Template

    4 Architecture Development Framework

    The Purpose

    Create an operating model that is influenced by universal standards including TOGAF, Zachmans, and DoDAF.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A thoroughly articulated development framework.

    Understanding of the views that influence each domain.

    Activities

    4.1 Tailor an architecture development framework to your organizational context.

    Outputs

    EA Operating Model Template

    Enterprise Architecture Views Taxonomy

    5 Operational Plan

    The Purpose

    Create a change management and communication plan or roadmap to execute the operating model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Build a plan that takes change management and communication into consideration to achieve the wanted benefits of an EA program.

    Effectively execute the roadmap.

    Activities

    5.1 Create a sponsorship action plan.

    5.2 Outline a communication plan.

    5.3 Execute a communication roadmap.

    Outputs

    Sponsorship Action Plan

    EA Communication Plan Template

    EA Roadmap

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}342|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Big Data
    • Parent Category Link: /big-data
    • Data warehouse implementation is a costly and complex undertaking, and can end up not serving the business' needs appropriately.
    • Too heavy a focus on technology creates a data warehouse that isn’t sustainable and ends up with poor adoption.
    • Emerging data sources and technologies add complexity to how the appropriate data is made available to business users.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • A data warehouse is a project; but successful data warehousing is a program. An effective data warehouse requires planning beyond the technology implementation.
    • Governance, not technology needs to be the core support system for enabling a data warehouse program.
    • Understand business processes at the operational, tactical, and ad hoc levels to ensure a fit-for-purpose DW is built.

    Impact and Result

    • Leverage an approach that focuses on constructing a data warehouse foundation that is able to address a combination of operational, tactical, and ad hoc business needs.
    • Invest time and effort to put together pre-project governance to inform and provide guidance to your data warehouse implementation.
    • Develop “Rosetta Stone” views of your data assets to facilitate data modeling.
    • Select the most suitable architecture pattern to ensure the data warehouse is “built right” at the very beginning.

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why the data warehouse is becoming an important tool for driving business value, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare for the data warehouse foundation project

    Begin the data warehouse foundation by defining the project and governance teams, as well as reviewing supporting data management practices.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 1: Prepare for the Data Warehouse Foundation Project
    • Data Warehouse Foundation Project Plan Template
    • Data Warehouse Work Breakdown Structure Template
    • Data (Warehouse) Architect
    • Data Integration Specialist
    • Business Intelligence Specialist
    • Director of Data Warehousing/Business Intelligence
    • Data Warehouse Program Charter Template
    • Data Warehouse Steering Committee Charter Template

    2. Establish the business drivers and data warehouse strategy

    Using the business activities as a guide, develop a data model, data architecture, and technology plan for a data warehouse foundation.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 2: Establish the Business Drivers and Data Warehouse Strategy
    • Business Data Catalog
    • Data Classification Inventory Tool
    • Data Warehouse Architecture Planning Tool
    • Master Data Mapping Tool

    3. Plan for data warehouse governance

    Start developing a data warehouse program by defining how users will interact with the new data warehouse environment.

    • Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation – Phase 3: Plan for Data Warehouse Governance
    • Data Warehouse Standard Operating Procedures Template
    • Data Warehouse Service Level Agreement
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare for the Data Warehouse Foundation Project

    The Purpose

    Identify the members of the foundation project team.

    Define overarching statements and define success factors/risks.

    Outline basic project governance.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined membership, roles, and responsibilities involved in the foundation project.

    Establishment of a steering committee as a starting point for the data warehouse program.

    Activities

    1.1 Identify foundation project team and create a RACI chart.

    1.2 Understand what a data warehouse can and cannot enable.

    1.3 Define critical success factors, key performance metrics, and project risks.

    1.4 Develop rough timelines for foundation project completion.

    1.5 Define the current and future states for key data management practices.

    Outputs

    Job Descriptions and RACI

    Data Warehouse Steering Committee Charter

    Data Warehouse Foundation Project Plan

    Work Breakdown Structure

    2 Establish the Business Drivers and Data Warehouse Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define the information needs of the business and its key processes.

    Create the components that will inform an appropriate data model.

    Design a data warehouse architecture model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear definition of business needs that will directly inform the data and architecture models.

    Activities

    2.1 Understand the most fundamental needs of the business.

    2.2 Define the data warehouse vision, mission, purpose, and goals.

    2.3 Detail the most important operational, tactical, and ad hoc activities the data warehouse should support.

    2.4 Link the processes that will be central to the data warehouse foundation.

    2.5 Walk through the four-column model and business entity modeling as a starting point for data modeling.

    2.6 Create data models using the business data glossary and data classification.

    2.7 Identify master data elements to define dimensions.

    2.8 Design lookup tables based on reference data.

    2.9 Create a fit-for-purpose data warehousing model.

    Outputs

    Data Warehouse Program Charter

    Data Warehouse Vision and Mission

    Documentation of Business Processes

    Business Entity Map

    Business Data Glossary

    Data Classification Scheme

    Data Warehouse Architecture Model

    3 Plan for Data Warehouse Governance

    The Purpose

    Create a plan for governing your data warehouse efficiently and effectively.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Documentation of current standard operating procedures.

    Identified members of a data warehouse center of excellence.

    Activities

    3.1 Develop a technology capability map to visualize your desired state.

    3.2 Establish a data warehouse center of excellence.

    3.3 Create a data warehouse foundation roadmap.

    3.4 Define data warehouse service level agreements.

    3.5 Create standard operating procedures.

    Outputs

    Technology Capability Map

    Project Roadmap

    Service Level Agreement

    Data Warehouse Standard Operating Procedure Workbook

    Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}90|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Innovation
    • Parent Category Link: /innovation
    • The business has a mandate for IT-led innovation.
    • IT doesn’t have the budget it wants for high-risk, high-reward initiatives.
    • Many innovation projects have failed in the past.
    • Many projects that have moved through the approval process failed to meet their expectations.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t let perfect be the enemy of good. Think like a start-up and use experimentation and rapid re-iteration to get your innovative ideas off the ground.

    Impact and Result

    • Build and test a prototype in four days using Info-Tech’s Innovation Design Sprint Methodology.
    • Create an environment for co-creation between IT and the business.
    • Learn techniques for socializing and selling your ideas to business stakeholders.
    • Refine your prototype through rapid iteration and user-experience testing.
    • Socialize design thinking culture, tactics, and methods with the business.

    Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should evaluate your ideas using a design sprint, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand and ideate

    Define the problem and start ideating potential solutions.

    • Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint – Day 1: Understand and Ideate
    • Prototyping Workbook

    2. Divide and conquer

    Split off into prototyping teams to build and test the first-iteration prototypes

    • Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint – Day 2: Divide and Conquer
    • Research Study Log Tool

    3. Unite and integrate

    Integrate the best ideas from the first iterations and come up with a team solution to the problem.

    • Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint – Day 3: Unite and Integrate
    • Prototype One Pager

    4. Build and sell

    Build and test the team’s integrated prototype, decide on next steps, and come up with a pitch to sell the solution to business executives.

    • Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint – Day 4: Build and Sell
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Prototype With an Innovation Design Sprint

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Understand and Ideate

    The Purpose

    Align the team around a well-defined business problem and start ideating solutions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Ideate solutions in the face of organizational cconstraints and characterize the success of the prototype.

    Activities

    1.1 Frame the problem.

    1.2 Develop evaluation criteria.

    1.3 Diverge and converge.

    Outputs

    Problem statement(s)

    Evaluation criteria

    Ideated solutions

    2 Divide and Conquer

    The Purpose

    Break off into teams to try and develop solutions that address the problem in unique ways.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop and test a first-iteration prototype.

    Activities

    2.1 Design first prototypes in teams.

    2.2 Conduct UX testing.

    Outputs

    First-iteration prototypes

    User feedback and data

    3 Unite and Integrate

    The Purpose

    Bring the team back together to develop a team vision of the final prototype.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Integrated, second-iteration prototype.

    Activities

    3.1 Create and deliver prototype pitches.

    3.2 Integrate prototypes.

    Outputs

    Prototype practice pitches

    Second-iteration prototype

    4 Build and Sell

    The Purpose

    Build and test the second prototype and prepare to sell it to business executives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Second-iteration prototype and a budget pitch.

    Activities

    4.1 Conduct second round of UX testing.

    4.2 Create one pager and budget pitch.

    Outputs

    User feedback and data

    Prototype one pager and budget pitch

    Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}437|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • PPM suite deployments are complicated and challenging. Vendors and consultants can provide much needed expertise and assistance to organizations deploying new PPM suites.
    • While functional requirements are often defined during the procurement stage (for example, in an RFP), the level of detail during this stage is likely insufficient for actually configuring the solution to your specific PPM needs. Too many organizations fail to further develop these functional requirements between signing their contracts and the official start of their professional implementation engagement.
    • Many organizations fail to organize and record the PPM data they will need to populate the new PPM suite. In almost all cases, customers have the expertise and are in the best position to collect and organize their own data. Leaving this until the vendor or consultant arrives to help with the deployment can result in using your professional services in a suboptimal way.
    • Vendors and consultants want you to prepare for their implementation engagements so that you can make the best use of their expertise and assistance. They want you to deploy a PPM suite that can be sustainably adopted in the long term. All too often, however, they arrive onsite to find customers that are disorganized and underprepared.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Preparing for a professional implementation engagement allows you to make the best use of your professional services, as well as helping to ensure that the PPM suite is deployed according to your specific PPM needs.
    • Involving your internal resources in the preparation of data and in fully defining functional requirements for the PPM suite helps to establish stakeholder buy-in early on, helping to build internal ownership of the solution from the beginning. This avoids the solution being perceived as something the vendor/consultant “forced upon us.”
    • Vendors and consultants are happy when organizations are organized and prepared for their professional implementation engagements. Preparation ensures these engagements are positive experiences for everyone involved.

    Impact and Result

    • Ensure that the data necessary to deploy the new PPM suite is recorded and organized.
    • Make your functional requirements detailed enough to ensure that the new PPM suite can be configured/customized during the deployment engagement in a way that best fits the organization’s actual PPM needs.
    • Through carefully preparing data and fully defining functional requirements, you help the solution become sustainably adopted in the long term.

    Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read this Executive Brief to understand why preparing for PPM deployment will ensure that organizations get the most value out of the implementation professional services they purchased and will help drive long-term sustainable adoption of the new PPM suite.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Create a preparation team and plan

    Engage in purposeful and effective PPM deployment planning by clearly defining what to prepare and when exactly it is time to move from planning to execution.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 1: Create a Preparation Team and Plan
    • Prepare to Deploy PPM Suite Project Charter Template
    • PPM Suite Functional Requirements Document Template
    • PPM Suite Deployment Timeline Template (Excel)
    • PPM Suite Deployment Timeline Template (Project)
    • PPM Suite Deployment Communication Plan Template

    2. Prepare project-related requirements and deliverables

    Provide clearer definition to specific project-related functional requirements and collect the appropriate PPM data needed for an effective PPM suite deployment facilitated by vendors/consultants.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 2: Prepare Project-Related Requirements and Deliverables
    • PPM Deployment Data Workbook
    • PPM Deployment Dashboard and Report Requirements Workbook

    3. Prepare PPM resource requirements and deliverables

    Provide clearer definition to specific resource management functional requirements and data and create a communication and training plan.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 3: Prepare PPM Resource Requirements and Deliverables
    • PPM Suite Transition Plan Template
    • PPM Suite Training Plan Template
    • PPM Suite Training Management Tool

    4. Provide preparation materials to the vendor and implementation professionals

    Plan how to engage vendors/consultants by communicating functional requirements to them and evaluating changes to those requirements proposed by them.

    • Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software – Phase 4: Provide Preparation Materials to the Vendor and Implementation Professionals
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Prepare to Successfully Deploy PPM Software

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan the Preparation Project

    The Purpose

    Select a preparation team and establish clear assignments and accountabilities.

    Establish clear deliverables, milestones, and metrics to ensure it is clear when the preparation phase is complete.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Preparation activities will be organized and purposeful, ensuring that you do not threaten deployment success by being underprepared or waste resources by overpreparing.

    Activities

    1.1 Overview: Determine appropriate functional requirements to define and data to record in preparation for the deployment.

    1.2 Create a timeline.

    1.3 Create a charter for the PPM deployment preparation project: record lessons learned, establish metrics, etc.

    Outputs

    PPM Suite Deployment Timeline

    Charter for the PPM Suite Preparation Project Team

    2 Prepare Project-Related Requirements and Deliverables

    The Purpose

    Collect and organize relevant project-related data so that you are ready to populate the new PPM suite when the vendor/consultant begins their professional implementation engagement with you.

    Clearly define project-related functional requirements to aid in the configuration/customization of the tool.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An up-to-date and complete record of all relevant PPM data.

    Avoidance of scrambling to find data at the last minute, risking importing out-of-date or irrelevant information into the new software.

    Clearly defined functional requirements that will ensure the suite is configured in a way that can be adoption in the long term.

    Activities

    2.1 Define project phases and categories.

    2.2 Create a list of all projects in progress.

    2.3 Record functional requirements for project requests, project charters, and business cases.

    2.4 Create a list of all existing project requests.

    2.5 Record the current project intake processes.

    2.6 Define PPM dashboard and reporting requirements.

    Outputs

    Project List (basic)

    Project Request Form Requirements (basic)

    Scoring/Requirements (basic)

    Business Case Requirements (advanced)

    Project Request List (basic)

    Project Intake Workflows (advanced)

    PPM Reporting Requirements (basic)

    3 Prepare PPM Resource Requirements and Deliverables

    The Purpose

    Collect and organize relevant resource-related data.

    Clearly define resource-related functional requirements.

    Create a purposeful transition, communication, and training plan for the deployment period.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An up-to-date and complete record of all relevant PPM data that allows your vendor/consultant to get right to work at the start of the implementation engagement.

    Improved buy-in and adoption through transition, training, and communication activities that are tailored to the actual needs of your specific organization and users.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a portfolio-wide roster of project resources (and record their competencies and skills, if appropriate).

    3.2 Record resource management processes and workflows.

    3.3 Create a transition plan from existing PPM tools and processes to the new PPM suite.

    3.4 Identify training needs and resources to be leveraged during the deployment.

    3.5 Define training requirements.

    3.6 Create a PPM deployment training plan.

    Outputs

    Resource Roster and Competency Profile (basic)

    User Roles and Permissions (basic)

    Resource Management Workflows (advanced)

    Transition Approach and Plan (basic)

    Data Archiving Requirements (advanced)

    List of Training Modules and Attendees (basic)

    Internal Training Capabilities (advanced)

    Training Milestones and Deadlines (basic)

    4 Provide Preparation Materials to the Vendor and Implementation Professionals

    The Purpose

    Compile the data collected and the functional requirements defined so that they can be provided to the vendor and/or consultant before the implementation engagement.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Deliverables that record the outputs of your preparation and can be provided to vendors/consultants before the implementation engagement.

    Ensures that the customer is an active and equal partner during the deployment by having the customer prepare their material and initiate communication.

    Vendors and/or consultants have a clear understanding of the customer’s needs and expectations from the beginning.

    Activities

    4.1 Collect, review, and finalize the functional requirements.

    4.2 Compile a functional requirements and data package to provide to the vendor and/or consultants.

    4.3 Discuss how proposed changes to the functional requirements will be reviewed and decided.

    Outputs

    PPM Suite Functional Requirements Documents

    PPM Deployment Data Workbook

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}468|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.9/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $35,642 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 21 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Cloud Strategy
    • Parent Category Link: /cloud-strategy

    Despite the universally agreed-upon benefit of formulating a coherent strategy, several obstacles make execution difficult:

    • Inconsistent understanding of what the cloud means
    • Inability to come to a consensus on key decisions
    • Ungoverned decision-making
    • Unclear understanding of cloud roles and responsibilities

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A cloud strategy might seem like a big project, but it’s just a series of smaller conversations. The methodology presented here is designed to facilitate those conversations, using a curated list of topics, prompts, participant lists, and sample outcomes. We have divided the strategy into four key areas:

    • Vision and alignment
    • People
    • Governance
    • Technology

    Impact and Result

    • A shared understanding of what is necessary to succeed in the cloud
    • An end to ad hoc deployments that solve small problems and create larger ones
    • A unified approach and set of principles that apply to governance, architecture, integration, skills, and roles (and much, much more).

    Document Your Cloud Strategy Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Document Your Cloud Strategy – a phased guide to identifying, validating, and recording the steps you’ll take, the processes you’ll leverage, and the governance you’ll deploy to succeed in the cloud.

    This storyboard comprises four phases, covering mission and vision, people, governance, and technology, and how each of these areas requires forethought when migrating to the cloud.

    • Document Your Cloud Strategy – Phases 1-4

    2. Cloud Strategy Document Template – a template that allows you to record the results of the cloud strategy exercise in a clear, readable way.

    Each section of Document Your Cloud Strategy corresponds to a section in the document template. Once you’ve completed each exercise, you can record your results in the document template, leaving you with an artifact you can share with stakeholders.

    • Cloud Strategy Document Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Document Your Vision and Alignment

    The Purpose

    Understand and document your cloud vision and its alignment with your other strategic priorities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A complete understanding of your strategy, vision, alignment, and a list of success metrics that will help you find your way.

    Activities

    1.1 Record your cloud mission and vision.

    1.2 Document your cloud strategy’s alignment with other strategic plans.

    1.3 Record your cloud guiding principles.

    Outputs

    Documented strategy, vision, and alignment.

    Defined success metrics.

    2 Record Your People Strategy

    The Purpose

    Define how people, skills, and roles will contribute to the broader cloud strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Sections of the strategy that highlight skills, roles, culture, adoption, and the creation of a governance body.

    Activities

    2.1 Outline your skills and roles strategy.

    2.2 Document your approach to culture and adoption

    2.3 Create a cloud governing body.

    Outputs

    Documented people strategy.

    3 Document Governance Principles

    The Purpose

    This section facilitates governance in the cloud, developing principles that apply to architecture, integration, finance management, and more.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Sections of the strategy that define governance principles.

    Activities

    3.1 Conduct discussion on architecture.

    3.2 Conduct discussion on integration and interoperability.

    3.3 Conduct discussion on operations management.

    3.4 Conduct discussion on cloud portfolio management.

    3.5 Conduct discussion on cloud vendor management.

    3.6 Conduct discussion on finance management.

    3.7 Conduct discussion on security.

    3.8 Conduct discussion on data controls.

    Outputs

    Documented cloud governance strategy.

    4 Formalize Your Technology Strategy

    The Purpose

    Creation of a formal cloud strategy relating to technology around provisioning, monitoring, and migration.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed strategy sections of the document that cover technology areas.

    Activities

    4.1 Formalize organizational approach to monitoring.

    4.2 Document provisioning process.

    4.3 Outline migration processes and procedures.

    Outputs

    Documented cloud technology strategy.

    Further reading

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Get ready for the cloudy future with a consistent, proven strategy.

    Analyst perspective

    Any approach is better than no approach

    The image contains a picture of Jeremy Roberts

    Moving to the cloud is a big, scary transition, like moving from gas-powered to electric cars, or from cable to streaming, or even from the office to working from home. There are some undeniable benefits, but we must reorient our lives a bit to accommodate those changes, and the results aren’t always one-for-one. A strategy helps you make decisions about your future direction and how you should respond to changes and challenges. In Document Your Cloud Strategy we hope to help you accomplish just that: clarifying your overall mission and vision (as it relates to the cloud) and helping you develop an approach to changes in technology, people management, and, of course, governance. The cloud is not a panacea. Taken on its own, it will not solve your problems. But it can be an important tool in your IT toolkit, and you should aim to make the best use of it – whatever “best” happens to mean for you.

    Jeremy Roberts

    Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations

    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The cloud is multifaceted. It can be complicated. It can be expensive. Everyone has an opinion on the best way to proceed – and in many cases has already begun the process without bothering to get clearance from IT. The core challenge is creating a coherent strategy to facilitate your overall goals while making the best use of cloud technology, your financial resources, and your people.

    Common Obstacles

    Despite the universally agreed-upon benefit of formulating a coherent strategy, several obstacles make execution difficult:

    • Inconsistent understanding of what the cloud means
    • Inability to come to a consensus on key decisions
    • Ungoverned decision making
    • Unclear understanding of cloud roles and responsibilities

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A cloud strategy might seem like a big project, but it’s just a series of smaller conversations. The methodology presented here is designed to facilitate those conversations, using a curated list of topics, prompts, participant lists, and sample outcomes. We have divided the strategy into four key areas:

    1. Vision and alignment
    2. People
    3. Governance
    4. Technology

    The answers might be different, but the questions are the same

    Every organization will approach the cloud differently, but they all need to ask the same questions: When will we use the cloud? What forms will our cloud usage take? How will we manage governance? What will we do about people? How will we incorporate new technology into our environment? The answers to these questions are as numerous as there are people to answer them, but the questions must be asked.

    Your challenge

    This research is designed to help organizations that are facing these challenges or looking to:

    • Ensure that the cloud strategy is complete and accurately reflects organizational goals and priorities.
    • Develop a consistent and coherent approach to adopting cloud services.
    • Design an approach to mitigate risks and challenges associated with adopting cloud services.
    • Create a shared understanding of the expected benefits of cloud services and the steps required to realize those benefits.

    Grappling with a cloud strategy is a top initiative: 43% of respondents report progressing on a cloud-first strategy as a top cloud initiative.

    Source: Flexera, 2021.

    Definition: Cloud strategy

    A document providing a systematic overview of cloud services, their appropriate use, and the steps that an organization will take to maximize value and minimize risk.

    Common obstacles

    These barriers make this challenge difficult to address for many organizations:

    • The cloud means different things to different people, and creating a strategy that is comprehensive enough to cover a multitude of use cases while also being written to be consumable by all stakeholders is difficult.
    • The incentives to adopt the cloud differ based on the expected benefit for the individual customer. User-led decision making and historically ungoverned deployments can make it difficult to reset expectation and align with a formal strategy.
    • Getting all the right people in a room together to agree on the key components of the strategy and the direction undertaken for each one is often difficult.

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Vision and alignment

    • Mission and vision
    • Alignment to other strategic plans
    • Guiding principles
    • Measuring success

    Technology

    • Monitoring
    • Provisioning
    • Migration

    Governance

    • Architecture
    • Integration and interoperability
    • Operations management
    • Cloud portfolio management
    • Cloud vendor management
    • Finance management
    • Security
    • Data controls

    People

    • Skills and roles
    • Culture and adoption
    • Governing bodies

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Your cloud strategy will comprise the elements listed under “vision and alignment,” “technology,” “governance,” and “people.” The Info-Tech methodology involves breaking the strategy down into subcomponents and going through a three-step process for each one. Start by reviewing a standard set of questions and understanding the goal of the exercise: What do we need to know? What are some common considerations and best practices? Once you’ve had a chance to review, discuss your current state and any gaps: What has been done? What still needs to be done? Finally, outline how you plan to go forward: What are your next steps? Who needs to be involved?

    Review

    • What questions do we need to answer to complete the discussion of this strategy component? What does the decision look like?
    • What are some key terms and best practices we must understand before deciding?

    Discuss

    • What steps have we already taken to address this component?
    • Does anything still need to be done?
    • Is there anything we’re not sure about or need further guidance on?

    Go forward

    • What are the next steps?
    • Who needs to be involved?
    • What questions still need to be asked/answered?
    • What should the document’s wording look like?

    Info-Tech’s methodology for documenting your cloud strategy

    1. Document your vision and alignment

    2. Record your people strategy

    3. Document governance principles

    4. Formalize your technology strategy

    Phase Steps

    1. Record your cloud mission and vision
    2. Document your cloud strategy’s alignment with other strategic plans
    3. Record your cloud guiding principles
    4. Define success
    1. Outline your skills and roles strategy
    2. Document your approach to culture and adoption
    3. Create a cloud governing body

    Document official organizational positions in these governance areas:

    1. Architecture
    2. Integration and interoperability
    3. Operations management
    4. Cloud portfolio management
    5. Cloud vendor management
    6. Finance management
    7. Security
    8. Data controls
    1. Formalize organizational approach to monitoring
    2. Document provisioning process
    3. Outline migration processes and procedures

    Phase Outcomes

    Documented strategy: vision and alignment

    Documented people strategy

    Documented cloud governance strategy

    Documented cloud technology strategy

    Insight summary

    Separate strategy from tactics

    Separate strategy from tactics! A strategy requires building out the framework for ongoing decision making. It is meant to be high level and achieve a large goal. The outcome of a strategy is often a sense of commitment to the goal and better communication on the topic.

    The cloud does not exist in a vacuum

    Your cloud strategy flows from your cloud vision and should align with the broader IT strategy. It is also part of a pantheon of strategies and should exist harmoniously with other strategies – data, security, etc.

    People problems needn’t preponderate

    The cloud doesn’t have to be a great disruptor. If you handle the transition well, you can focus your people on doing more valuable work – and this is generally engaging.

    Governance is a means to an end

    Governing your deployment for its own sake will only frustrate your end users. Articulate the benefits users and the organization can expect to see and you’re more likely to receive the necessary buy-in.

    Technology isn’t a panacea

    Technology won’t solve all your problems. Technology is a force multiplier, but you will still have to design processes and train your people to fully leverage it.

    Key deliverable

    Cloud Strategy Document template

    Inconsistency and informality are the enemies of efficiency. Capture the results of the cloud strategy generation exercises in the Cloud Strategy Document template.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Strategy Document Template.
    • Record the results of the exercises undertaken as part of this blueprint in the Cloud Strategy Document template.
    • It is important to remember that not every cloud strategy will look exactly the same, but this template represents an amalgamation of best practices and cloud strategy creation honed over several years of advisory service in the space.
    • You know your audience better than anyone. If you would prefer a strategy delivered in a different way (e.g. presentation format) feel free to adapt the Cloud Vision Executive Presentation into a longer strategy presentation.
    • Emphasis is an area where you should exercise discretion as well. A cost-oriented cloud strategy, or one that prioritizes one type of cloud (e.g. SaaS) at the exclusion of others, may benefit from more focus on some areas than others, or the introduction of relevant subcategories. Include as many of these as you think will be relevant.
    • Parsimony is king – if you can distill a concept to its essence, start there. Include additional detail only as needed. You want your cloud strategy document to be read. If it’s too long or overly detailed, you’ll encounter readability issues.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    Business benefits

    • A consistent, well-defined approach to the cloud
    • Consensus on key strategy components, including security, architecture, and integration
    • A clear path forward on skill development and talent acquisition/retention
    • A comprehensive resource for information about the organization’s approach to key strategy components
    • Predictable access to cloud services
    • A business-aligned approach to leveraging the resources available in the cloud
    • Efficient and secure consumption of cloud resources where appropriate to do so
    • Answers to questions about the cloud and how it will be leveraged in the environment

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Don’t take our word for it:

    • Document Your Cloud Strategy has been available for several years in various forms as both a workshop and as an analyst-led guided implementation.
    • After each engagement, we send a survey that asks members how they benefited from the experience. Those who have worked through Info-Tech’s cloud strategy material have given overwhelmingly positive feedback.
    • Additionally, members reported saving between 10 and 20 days and an average of $46,499.
    • Measure the value by calculating the time saved as a result of using Info-Tech’s framework vs. a home-brewed cloud strategy alternative and by comparing the overall cost of a guided implementation or workshop with the equivalent offering from another firm. We’re confident you’ll come out ahead.

    8.8/10 Average reported satisfaction

    13 Days Average reported time savings

    $46,499 Average cost savings

    Executive Brief Case Study

    INDUSTRY: Pharmaceuticals

    SOURCE: Info-Tech workshop

    Pharmaceutical company

    The unnamed pharmaceutical company that is the subject of this case study was looking to make the transition to the cloud. In the absence of a coherent strategy, the organization had a few cloud deployments with no easily discernable overall approach. Representatives of several distinct functions (legal, infrastructure, data, etc.) all had opinions on the uses and abuses of cloud services, but it had been difficult to round everyone up and have the necessary conversations. As a result, the strategy exercise had not proceeded in a speedy or well-governed way. This lack of strategic readiness presented a roadblock to moving forward with the cloud strategy and to work with the cloud implementation partner, tasked with execution.

    Results

    The company engaged Info-Tech for a four-day workshop on cloud strategy documentation. Over the course of four days, participants drawn from across the organization discussed the strategic components and generated consensus statements and next steps. The team was able to formalize the cloud strategy and described the experience as saving 10 days.

    Example output: Document your cloud strategy workshop exercise

    The image contains an example of Document your cloud streatgy workshop exercise.

    Anything in green, the team was reasonably sure they had good alignment and next steps. Those yellow flags warranted more discussion and were not ready for documentation.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Document your vision and alignment

    Record your people strategy

    Document governance principles

    Formalize your technology strategy

    Call #1: Review existing vision/strategy documentation.

    Call #2: Review progress on skills, roles, and governance bodies.

    Call #3: Work through integration, architecture, finance management, etc. based on reqs. (May be more than one call.)

    Call #4: Discuss challenges with monitoring, provisioning, and migration as-needed.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is 4 to 6 calls over the course of 1 to 3 months

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Answer
    “so what?”

    Define the
    IT target state

    Assess the IT
    current state

    Bridge the gap and
    create the strategy

    Next steps and
    wrap-up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Introduction

    1.2 Discuss cloud mission and vision

    1.3 Discuss alignment with other strategic plans

    1.4 Discuss guiding principles

    1.5 Define success metrics

    2.1 Discuss skills and roles

    2.2 Review culture and adoption

    2.3 Discuss a cloud governing body

    2.4 Review architecture position

    2.5 Discuss integration and interoperability

    3.1 Discuss cloud operations management

    3.2 Review cloud portfolio management

    3.3 Discuss cloud vendor management

    3.4 Discuss cloud finance management

    3.5 Discuss cloud security

    4.1 Review and formalize data controls

    4.2 Design a monitoring approach

    4.3 Document the workload provisioning process

    4.4 Outline migration processes and procedures

    5.1 Populate the Cloud Strategy Document

    Deliverables

    Formalized cloud mission and vision, along with alignment with strategic plans, guiding principles, and success metrics

    Position statement on skills and roles, culture and adoption, governing bodies, architecture, and integration/interoperability

    Position statements on cloud operations management, portfolio management, vendor management, finance management, and cloud security

    Position statements on data controls, monitoring, provisioning, and migration

    Completed Cloud Strategy Document

    Phase 1

    Document Your Vision and Alignment

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Phase 4

    1.1 Document your mission and vision

    1.2 Document alignment to other strategic plans

    1.3 Document guiding principles

    1.4 Document success metrics

    2.1 Define approach to skills and roles

    2.2 Define approach to culture and adoption

    2.3 Define cloud governing bodies

    3.1 Define architecture direction

    3.2 Define integration approach

    3.3 Define operations management process

    3.4 Define portfolio management direction

    3.5 Define vendor management direction

    3.6 Document finance management tactics

    3.7 Define approach to cloud security

    3.8 Define data controls in the cloud

    4.1 Define cloud monitoring strategy

    4.2 Define cloud provisioning strategy

    4.3 Define cloud migration strategy

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Record your cloud mission and vision
    2. Document your cloud strategy’s alignment with other strategic plans
    3. Record your cloud guiding principles
    4. Define success

    This phase has the following outcome:

    • Documented strategy: vision and alignment

    Record your mission and vision

    Build on the work you’ve already done

    Before formally documenting your cloud strategy, you should ensure that you have a good understanding of your overall cloud vision. How do you plan to leverage the cloud? What goals are you looking to accomplish? How will you distribute your workloads between different cloud service models (SaaS, PaaS, IaaS)? What will your preferred delivery model be (public, private, hybrid)? Will you support your cloud deployment internally or use the services of various consultants or managed service providers?

    The answers to these questions will inform the first section of your cloud strategy. If you haven’t put much thought into this or think you could use a deep dive on the fundamentals of your cloud vision and cloud archetypes, consider reviewing Define Your Cloud Vision, the companion blueprint to this one.

    Once you understand your cloud vision and what you’re trying to accomplish with your cloud strategy, this phase will walk you through aligning the strategy with other strategic initiatives. What decisions have others made that will impact the cloud strategy (or that the cloud strategy will impact)? Who must be involved/informed? What callouts must be involved at what point? Do users have access to the appropriate strategic documentation (and would they understand it if they did)?

    You must also capture some guiding principles. A strategy by its nature provides direction, helping readers understand the decisions they should make and why those decisions align with organizational interests. Creating some top-level principles is a useful exercise because those principles facilitate comprehension and ensure the strategy’s applicability.

    Finally, this phase will walk you through the process of measuring success. Once you know where you’d like to go, the principles that underpin your direction, and how your cloud strategy figures into the broader strategic pantheon, you should record what success actually means. If you’re looking to save money, overall cost should be a metric you track. If the cloud is all about productivity, generate appropriate productivity metrics. If you’re looking to expand into new technology or close a datacenter, you will need to track output specific to those overall goals.

    Review: mission and vision

    The overall organizational mission is a key foundational element of the cloud strategy. If you don’t understand where you’re going, how can you begin the journey to get there? This section of the strategy has four key parts that you should understand and incorporate into the beginning of the strategy document. If you haven’t already, review Define Your Cloud Vision for instructions on how to generate these elements.

    1. Cloud vision statement: This is a succinct encapsulation of your overall perspective on the suitability of cloud services for your environment – what you hope to accomplish. The ideal statement includes a scope (who/what does the strategy impact?), a goal (what will it accomplish?), and a key differentiator (what will make it happen?). This is an example: “[Organization] will leverage public cloud solutions and retire existing datacenter and colocation facilities. This transition will simplify infrastructure administration, support and security, while modernizing legacy infrastructure and reducing the need for additional capital expenditure.” You might also consider reviewing your overall cloud archetype (next slide) and including the output of that exercise in the document

    2. Service model decision framework: Services can be provided as software as a service (SaaS), platform as a service (PaaS), infrastructure as a service (IaaS), or they can be colocated or remain on premises. Not all cloud service models serve the same purpose or provide equal value in all circumstances. Understanding how you plan to take advantage of these distinct service models is an important component of the cloud strategy. In this section of the strategy, a rubric that captures the characteristics of the ideal workload for each of the named service models, along with some justification for the selection, is essential. This is a core component of Define Your Cloud Vision, and if you would like to analyze individual workloads, you can use the Cloud Vision Workbook for that purpose.

    3. Delivery model decision framework: Just as there are different cloud service models that have unique value propositions, there are several unique cloud delivery models as well, distinguished by ownership, operation, and customer base. Public clouds are the purview of third-party providers who make them available to paying customers. Private clouds are built for the exclusive use of a designated organization or group of organizations with internal clients to serve. Hybrid clouds involve the use of multiple, interoperable delivery models (interoperability is the key term here), while multi-cloud deployment models incorporate multiple delivery and service models into a single coherent strategy. What will your preferred delivery model be? Why?

    4. Support model decision framework: Once you have a service model nailed down and understand how you will execute on the delivery, the question then becomes about how you will support your cloud deployment going forward. Broadly speaking, you can choose to manage your deployment in house using internal resources (e.g. staff), to use managed service providers for ongoing support, or to hire consultants to handle specific projects/tasks. Each approach has its strengths and weaknesses, and many cloud customers will deploy multiple support models across time and different workloads. A foundational perspective on the support model is a key component of the cloud vision and should appear early in the strategy.

    Understand key cloud concepts: Archetype

    Once you understand the value of the cloud, your workloads’ general suitability for the cloud, and your proposed risks and mitigations, the next step is to define your cloud archetype. Your organization’s cloud archetype is the strategic posture that IT adopts to best support the organization’s goals. Info-Tech’s model recognizes seven archetypes, divided into three high-level archetypes. After consultation with your stakeholders, and based on the results of the suitability and risk assessment activities, define your archetype. The archetype feeds into the overall cloud vision and provides simple insight into the cloud future state for all stakeholders. The cloud vision itself is captured in a “vision statement,” a short summary of the overall approach that includes the overall cloud archetype.

    The image contains an arrow facing vertically up. The pointed end of the arrow is labelled more cloud, and the bottom of the arrow is labelled less cloud.

    We can best support the organization’s goals by:

    Cloud-Focused

    Cloud-Centric

    Providing all workloads through cloud delivery.

    Cloud-First

    Using the cloud as our default deployment model. For each workload, we should ask “why NOT cloud?”

    Cloud-Opportunistic

    Hybrid

    Enabling the ability to transition seamlessly between on-premises and cloud resources for many workloads.

    Integrated

    Combining cloud and traditional infrastructure resources, integrating data and applications through APIs or middleware.

    Split

    Using the cloud for some workloads and traditional infrastructure resources for others.

    Cloud-Averse

    Cloud-Light

    Using traditional infrastructure resources and limiting our use of the cloud to when it is absolutely necessary.

    Anti-Cloud

    Using traditional infrastructure resources and avoiding the use of cloud wherever possible.

    Cookie Notice

    Gert Taeymans BV wants to inform you about our cookie notice on the Gert Taeymans BV websites via this document. Please also see the privacy policy which you can find here.

    This website is owned by Gert Taeymans BV

    Contact details:
    Gert Taeymans BV
    Koning Albertstraat 136
    2070 Burcht
    Belgium
    Company number: 0685974694
    Phone: +32 3 289 41 09
    email: gtbvba@gerttaeymans.com

    Site Scope

    The websites in scope of this notice are:

    • tymansgroup.com
    • gerttaeymans.consulting
    • gerttaeymans.site
    • gerttaeymans.audio

    Cookie Types

    We differentiate 4 types of cookies

    • Necessary cookies
      Necessary cookies help make our website usable by enabling basic functions like page navigation and access to secure areas of the website. While you can decline them, The website cannot function properly without these cookies.
    • Preferences cookies
      Preference cookies enable our website to remember information that changes the way the website behaves or looks, like your preferred language or the region that you are in. They may include cookies from 3rd party providers whose content we show or reference on our site. Those cookies are outside of our control and these providers may change their terms and policies at any time.
    • Statistics cookies
      Statistic cookies help our company to understand how visitors interact with our website by collecting and reporting statistical information pseudonymously. That means that eg. your IP address is scrambled in such a way that it will always be the same upon each subsequent visit to our site, so that Google can process the visit as a return visit. This helps with basic statistics, but also is a factor in how well we rank in future searches. Many returning visitors means that you like our site and that is a ranking element.
      Due to the ECJ striking down the  EU-US Privacy Shield agreement, this leaves us with a open gap. The resulting implications and actions to take are not yet clear. However, when agreeing to statistics cookies, you agree that your data may be processed in the United States under less strict privacy laws and that your data will be exposed to all associated risks. Such risks include the US government being able to investigate you, simply for being a non-US citizen due to provision 702 of the FISA act, which they are able to do anyway, with or without the cookie. Also, the laws in the United States are less strict with regards to selling information to third parties.
    • Marketing cookies
      Marketing cookies are used to track you across websites. The intention is to display ads that are relevant and engaging for you and thereby more valuable for publishers and third party advertisers. At this point we do not allow ads to display on our site, so no third-party trackers are defined on our site. We may add a 1st party (us) tracker to our site at any time.

    Actual cookies used

    Necessary cookies (all sites in site scope)

    Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    Session cookie (displayed as a long series of numbers and letters) The active session ID When you close your broser, clear your cookie's cache in your browser or after 60 minutes of inactivity on the site. The cookie may remain in your machine but is no longer valid after the mentioned tile of inactivity    

    The browser cookie is simply a random string of characters to identify the visitor. There are no personally identifable details in the cookie and no real data of use at all. The cookie is marked as a 'session' type of cookie, which means it will expire (be deleted automatically) when the browser is closed or cleaned by the browser after a set period of non-use; for instance, you haven't visited a page on the site that has used the cookie for 1 week. This latter case is useful for people that leave their computer running and never close their browser.

    The use of a cookie is what gives your website a short-term memory. By providing it with each request, Joomla can look up the history of the current viewing session in the database record below.

    cookieconsent_status allow 1 year This cookie stores that you have consented to the use of cookies on our site. It is there to avoid that you have to give your consent again at every page load.

    Preferences cookies

    Site Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    gerttaeymans.consulting None at this stage N/A N/A   N/A
    tymansgroup.com None at this stage N/A N/A N/A
             
             

    Statistical cookies

    Site Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    All Scope _ga Google Analytics type and account identifier 2 years This cookie identifies our domain (gerttaeymans.consulting) and sends visit information to Google. information may include, but not limited to: browser identifiable information, page visited, visit duration, etc. This information does not contain user identifiable information
    All Scope _gat_gtag_UA_140807308_3 Google Analytics type and account identifier 2 years This cookie also identifies our domain (gerttaeymans.consulting) and sends visit information to Google. information may include, but not limited to: browser identifiable information, page visited, visit duration, etc. This information does not contain user identifiable information
    All Scope _gid Google Analytics type and account identifier 1 day This cookie also identifies our domain (gerttaeymans.consulting) and sends visit information to Google. information may include, but not limited to: browser identifiable information, page visited, visit duration, etc. This information does not contain user identifiable information
             
             

    Marketing cookies

    Name     Contents Expiration Reason for the cookie
    None at this stage N/A N/A N/A
           
           

     

    Managing cookies

    You are not required to accept any cookies . Our cookies toolbar allows you to fine tune which cookies you accespt or want to revoke consent for. The resulting experience may however be affected by your decision not to accept cookies.

    Eg. not accepting or revoking consent for the “Necessary” category cookies will result in your inability to log into the site, even if you have previously accepted the cookies and paid for service.

    Not accepting or revoking consent for “Preference” category cookies may impede on your ability to watch instructional videos on our site, even if you have previously accepted the cookies and paid for service.

    Not accepting or revoking consent for ‘Statistical” category cookies will result in us not seeing where visitors stay longer or shorter on our site. While the immediate experience will not degrade for you, it may impede us in better understanding where we need to improve our service, thereby denying you a potentially improved experience in the future.

    Not accepting or revoking consent for “Marketing” category cookies may result in you seeing irrelevant ads, if we make the decision to allow carefully selected partners to offer their services through our site.

    Removing cookies from your device

    You can delete all cookies that are already on your device by clearing the browsing history of your browser. This will remove all cookies from all websites you have visited.

    Be aware though that you may also lose some saved information (e.g. saved login details, site preferences).

    Managing site-specific cookies

    For more detailed control over site-specific cookies, check the privacy and cookie settings in your preferred browser

    Blocking cookies

    You can set most modern browsers to prevent any cookies being placed on your device, but you may then have to manually adjust some preferences every time you visit a site/page. And some services and functionalities may not work properly at all (e.g. profile logging-in).

    Why learn from Tymans Group?

    The TY classes contain in-depth learning material based on over 30 years of experience in IT Operations and Resilience.

    You receive the techniques, tips, tricks, and "professional secrets" you need to succeed in your resilience journey.

    Why would I share "secrets?"

    Because over time, you will find that "secrets" are just manifested experiences.

    What do I mean by that? Gordon Ramsay, who was born in 1966 like me, decided to focus on his culinary education at age 19. According to his Wikipedia page, that was a complete accident. (His Wikipedia page is a hoot to read, by the way.) And he has nothing to prove anymore. His experience in his field speaks for itself.

    I kept studying in my original direction for just one year longer, but by 21, I founded my first company in Belgium in 1987, in the publishing industry. This was extended by IT experiences in various sectors, like international publishing and hospitality, culminating in IT for high-velocity international financial markets and insurance.

    See, "secrets" are a great way to get you to sign up for some "guru" program that will "tell all!" Don't fall for it, especially if the person is too young to have significant experience.

    There are no "secrets." There is only experience and 'wisdom." And that last one only comes with age.

    If I were in my 20s, 30s, or 40s, there is no chance I would share my core experiences with anyone who could become my competitor. At that moment, I'm building my own credibility and my own career. I like helping people, but not to the extent that it will hurt my prospects. 

    And that is my second lesson: be always honest about your intentions. Yes, always. 

    At the current point in my career, "hurting my prospects" is less important. Yes, I still need to make a living, and in another post, I will explain more about that. Here, I feel it is important to share my knowledge and experience with the next people who will take my place in the day-to-day operations of medium and large corporations. And that is worth something. Hence, "sharing my secrets."

    Gert

    Why learn about resilience from us?

    This is a great opportunity to learn from my 30+ years of resilience experience. TY's Gert experienced 9/11 in New York, and he was part of the Lehman Disaster Recovery team that brought the company back within one (one!) week of the terrorist attack.

    He also went through the London Bombings of 2005 and the 2008 financial crisis, which required fast incident responses, the Covid 2020 issues, and all that entailed. Not to mention that Gert was part of the Tokyo office disaster response team as early as 1998, ensuring that Salomon was protected from earthquakes and floods in Japan.

    Gert was part of the solution (for his clients) to several further global events, like the admittedly technical log4J event in 2021, the 2024 Crowdstrike event, and many other local IT incidents, to ensure that clients could continue using the services they needed at that time.

    Beyond the large corporate world, we helped several small local businesses improve their IT resilience with better cloud storage and security solutions. 

    These solutions and ways of thinking work for any business, large or small.

    The TY team

    Explore our resilience solutions.

    Cost and Budget Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}8|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}8|crosssells{/j2store}
    • Up-Sell: {j2store}8|upsells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $2,000
    • member rating average days saved: 5
    • Parent Category Name: Financial Management
    • Parent Category Link: /financial-management

    The challenge

    • IT is seen as a cost center in most organizations. Your IT spend is fuelled by negative sentiment instead of contributing to business value.

    • Budgetary approval is difficult, and in many cases, the starting point is lowering the cost-income ratio without looking at the benefits.
    • Provide the right amount of detail in your budgets to tell your investment and spending story. Align it with the business story. Too much detail only increases confusion, too little suspicion.

    Our advice

    Insight

    An effective IT budget complements the business story with how you will achieve the expected business targets.

    • Partner with the business to understand the strategic direction of the company and its future needs.
    • Know your costs and the value you will deliver.
    • Present your numbers and story clearly and credibly. Excellent delivery is part of good communication.
    • Guide your company by clearly explaining the implications of different choices they can make.

    Impact and results 

    • Get a head-start on your IT forecasting exercise by knowing the business strategy and what initiatives they will launch.
    • The coffee corner works! Pre-sell your ideas in quick chats.
    • Do not make innovation budgets bigger than they need to be. It undermines your credibility.
    • You must know your history to accurately forecast your IT operations cost and how it will evolve based on expected business changes.
    • Anticipate questions. IT discretionary proposals are often challenged. Think ahead of time about what areas your business partners will focus on and be ready with researched and credible responses.
    • When you have an optimized budget, tie further cost reductions to consequences in service delivery or deferred projects, or a changed operating model.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started

    Our concise executive brief shows you why you should develop a budget based on value delivery. We'll show you our methodology and the ways we can help you in completing this.

    Plan for budget success

    • Build an IT Budget That Demonstrates Value Delivery – Phase 1: Plan (ppt)
    • IT Budget Interview Guide (doc)

    Build your budget.

    • Build an IT Budget That Demonstrates Value Delivery – Phase 2: Build (ppt)
    • IT Cost Forecasting Tool (xls)

    Sell your budget

    • Build an IT Budget That Demonstrates Value Delivery – Phase 3: Sell (ppt)
    • IT Budget Presentation (ppt)

     

    Design Your Cloud Operations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}462|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • member rating average days saved: After each Info-Tech experience, we ask our members to quantify the real-time savings, monetary impact, and project improvements our research helped them achieve.
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
    • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess your key workflows’ maturity for life in the cloud and evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working
    • Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services
    • Design your cloud operations framework and communicate it clearly and succinctly to secure buy-in

    Design Your Cloud Operations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Design Your Cloud Operations Deck – A step-by-step storyboard to help guide you through the activities and tools in this project.

    This storyboard will help you assess your cloud maturity, understand relevant ways of working, and create a meaningful design of your cloud operations that helps align team members and stakeholders.

    • Design Your Cloud Operations – Storyboard
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Roadmap Tool

    2. Planning and design tools.

    Use these templates and tools to assess your current state, design the cloud operations organizing framework, and create a roadmap.

    • Cloud Maturity Assessment

    3. Communication tools.

    Use these templates and tools to plan how you will communicate changes to key stakeholders and communicate the new cloud operations organizing framework in an executive presentation.

    • Cloud Operations Communication Plan
    • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework: Executive Brief

    Infographic

    Workshop: Design Your Cloud Operations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Day 1

    The Purpose

    Establish Context

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment on target state

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

    1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    1.4 Develop organization design principles

    Outputs

    Cloud maturity assessment

    Project drivers

    Cloud challenges and objectives

    Organization design principles

    2 Day 2

    The Purpose

    Establish Context

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of cloud workstreams

    Activities

    2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

    2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

    2.3 Identify cloud work

    Outputs

    Workstream target statement

    Cloud operations workflow diagrams

    3 Day 3

    The Purpose

    Design the Organization

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Visualization of the cloud operations future state

    Activities

    3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

    3.2 Create a current-state cloud operations diagram

    3.3 Define success indicators

    Outputs

    Future-state cloud operations diagram

    Current-state cloud operations diagram

    Success indicators

    4 Day 4

    The Purpose

    Communicate the Changes

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Alignment and buy-in from stakeholders

    Activities

    4.1 Create a roadmap

    4.2 Create a communication plan

    Outputs

    Roadmap

    Communication plan

    Further reading

    It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analysts’ Perspective

    The image contains a picture of Andrew Sharp.

    Andrew Sharp

    Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    It’s “day two” in the cloud. Now what?

    Just because you’re in the cloud doesn’t mean everyone is on the same page about how cloud operations work – or should work.

    You have an opportunity to implement new ways of working. But if people can’t see the bigger picture – the organizing framework of your cloud operations – it will be harder to get buy-in to realize value from your cloud services.

    Use Info-Tech’s methodology to build out and visualize a cloud operations organizing framework that defines cloud work and aligns it to the right areas.

    The image contains a picture of Nabeel Sherif.

    Nabeel Sherif

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    The image contains a picture of Emily Sugerman.

    Emily Sugerman

    Research Analyst

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Scott Young

    Principal Research Director

    Infrastructure & Operations Practice

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Widespread cloud adoption has created new opportunities and challenges:

    • Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.
    • Different stakeholders across previously separate teams rely on one another more than ever, but rules of engagement do not yet exist, leading to a lack of direction, employee frustration, missed work, inefficiency, and unacceptable risk.
    • Many organizations have bought their way into a SaaS portfolio. Now, as key applications leave their network, I&O leaders still have accountability for these apps, but little visibility and control over them.
    • Few organizations are, or will ever be, cloud only. Your operations will be both on-prem and in-cloud for the foreseeable future and you must be able to accommodate both.
    • Traditional infrastructure siloes no longer work for cloud operations, but key stakeholders are wary of significant change.

    Clearly communicate the need for operations changes:

    • Identify current challenges with cloud operations. Assess your readiness and fit for new ways of working involved in cloud operations: DevOps, SRE, Platform Engineering, and more.
    • Use Info-Tech’s templates to design a cloud operations organizing framework. Define cloud work, and align work to the right work areas.
    • Communicate the design. Gain buy-in from your key stakeholders for the considerable organizational change management required to achieve durable change.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Your Challenge

    Traditional IT capabilities, activities, organizational structures, and culture need to adjust to leverage the value of cloud, optimize spend, and manage risk.

    • As key applications leave for the cloud, I&O teams are still expected to manage access, spend, and security but may have little or no visibility or control over the applications themselves.
    • The automation and self-service capabilities of cloud aren’t delivering the speed the business expected because teams don’t work together effectively.
    • Business leaders purchase their own cloud solutions because, from their point of view, IT’s processes are cumbersome and ineffective.
    • Accounting practices and governance mechanisms haven’t adjusted to enable new development practices and technologies.
    • Security and cost management requirements may not be accounted for by teams acquiring or developing solutions.
    • All of this contributes to frustration, missed work, wasteful spending, and unacceptable risk.

    Obstacles, by the numbers:

    85% of respondents reported security in the cloud was a serious concern.

    73% reported balancing responsibilities between a central cloud team and business units was a top concern.

    The average organization spent 13% more than they’d budgeted on cloud – even when budgets were expected to increase by 29% in the next year.

    32% of all cloud spend was estimated to be wasted spend.

    56% of operations professionals said their primary focus is cloud services.

    81% of security professionals thought it was difficult to get developers to prioritize bug fixes.

    42% of security professionals felt bugs were being caught too late in the development process.

    1. Flexera 2022 State of the Cloud Report. 2. GitLab DevSecOps 2021 Survey

    Cloud operations are different, but IT departments struggle to change

    • There’s no sense of urgency in the organization that change is needed, particularly from teams that aren’t directly involved in operations. It can be challenging to make the case that change is needed.
    • Beware “analysis paralysis”! With so many options, philosophies, approaches, and methodologies, it’s easy to be overwhelmed by choice and fail to make needed changes.
    • The solution to the problem requires organizational changes beyond the operations team, but you don’t have the authority to make those changes directly. Operations can influence the solution, but they likely can’t direct it.
    • Behavior, culture, and organizations take time and work to change. Progress is usually evolutionary – but this can also mean it feels like it’s happening too slowly.
    • It’s not just cloud, and it probably never will be. You’ll need to account for operating both on-premises and cloud technologies for the foreseeable future.

    Follow Info-Tech’s Methodology

    1. Ensure alignment with the risks and drivers of the business and understand your organization’s strengths and gaps for a cloud operations world.

    2. Understand the balance of different types of deliveries you’re responsible for in the cloud.

    3. Reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations to your workstreams.

    4. Identify “work areas,” decide which area is responsible for what tasks and how work areas should interact in order to best facilitate desired business outcomes.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram demonstrating Info-Tech's Methodology, as described in the text above.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services; i.e. If you mostly build or host in cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

    Operating Framework Elements

    Proper design of roles and responsibilities for each cloud workflow category will help reduce risk by reinforcing the key operational pillars of cloud operations.

    We base this on a composite of the well-architected frameworks established by the top global cloud providers today.

    Workflow Categories

    • Build
    • Host
    • Consume

    Key Pillars

    • Performance
    • Reliability
    • Cost Effectiveness
    • Security
    • Operational Excellence

    Risks to Mitigate

    • Changes to Support Model
    • Changes to Security & Governance
    • Changes to Skills & Roles
    • Replicating Old Habits
    • Misaligned Stakeholders

    Cloud Operations Design

    Info-Tech’s Methodology

    Assess Maturity and Ways of Working

    Define Cloud Work

    Design Cloud Operations

    Communicate and Secure Buy-in

    Assess your key workflows’ maturity for “life in the cloud,” related to Key Operational Pillars. Evaluate your readiness and need for new ways of working.

    Identify the work that must be done to deliver value in cloud services.

    Define key cloud work areas, the work they do, and how they should share information and interact.

    Outline the change you recommend to a range of stakeholders. Gain buy-in for the plan.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Cloud Maturity Assessment

    Assess the intensity and cloud maturity of your IT operations for each of the key cloud workstreams: Consume, Host, and Build

    The image contains screenshots of the Cloud Maturity Assessment.

    Communication Plan

    Identify stakeholders, what’s in it for them, what the impact will be, and how you will communicate over the course of the change.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Communcation Plan.

    Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook

    Capture the diagram as you build it.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.

    Roadmap Tool

    Build a roadmap to put the design into action.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Roadmap Tool.

    Key deliverable:

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

    The Cloud Operations Organizing Framework is a communication tool that introduces the cloud operations diagram and establishes its context and justification.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

    Project Outline

    Phase 1: Establish Context

    1.1: Identify challenges, opportunities, and cloud maturity

    1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3: Define cloud work

    Phase 2: Design the organization and communicate changes

    2.1: Design a draft cloud operations diagram

    2.2: Communicate changes

    Outputs

    Cloud Services Objectives and Obstacles

    Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams

    Cloud Maturity Assessment

    Draft Cloud Operations Diagram

    Communication Plan

    Roadmap Tool

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework

    Project benefits

    Benefits for IT

    Benefits for the business

    • Define the work required to effectively deliver cloud services to deliver business value.
    • Define key roles for operating cloud services.
    • Outline an operations diagram that visually communicates what key work areas do and how they interact.
    • Communicate needed changes to key stakeholders.
    • Receive more value from cloud services when the organization is structured to deliver value including:
      • Avoiding cost overruns
      • Securing services
      • Providing faster, more effective delivery
      • Increasing predictability
      • Reducing error rates

    Calculate the value of Info-Tech’s Methodology

    The value of the project is the delivery of organizational change that improves the way you manage cloud services

    Example Goal

    How this blueprint can help

    How you might measure success/value

    Streamline Responsibilities

    The operations team is spending too much time fighting applications fires, which is distracting it from needed platform improvements.

    • Identify shared and separate responsibilities for development and platform operations teams.
    • Focus the operations team on securing and automating cloud platform(s).
    • Reduce time wasted on back and forth between development and operations teams (20 hrs. per employee per year x 50 staff = 1000 hrs.).
    • Deliver automation features that reduces development lead time by one hour per sprint (40 devs x 20 sprints per yr. x 1 hr. = 800 hrs.).

    Improve Cost Visibility

    The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

    The teams responsible for cost management today don’t have the authority, visibility, or time to effectively find wasted spend.

    • Ensure operations contributes to visibility and execution of cost governance.
    • $1,000,000 annual spend on cloud services.
    • Of this, assume 32% is wasted spend ($320k).1
    • New cost management function has a target to cut waste by half next year saving ~$160k.
    • Cost visibility and capture metrics (e.g. accurate tagging metrics, right-sizing execution).
    1. Average wasted cloud spend across all organizations, from the 2022 Flexera State of the Cloud Report

    Understand your cloud vision and strategy before you redesign operations

    Guide your operations redesign with an overarching cloud vision and strategy that aligns to and enables the business’s goals.

    Cloud Vision

    The image contains a screenshot of the Define Your Cloud Vision.

    Cloud Strategy

    It is difficult to get or maintain buy-in for changes to operations without everyone on the same page about the basic value proposition cloud offers your organization.

    Do the workload and risk analysis to create a defensible cloud vision statement that boils down into a single statement: “This is how we want to use the cloud.”

    Once you have your basic cloud vision, take the next step by documenting a cloud strategy.

    Establish your steering committee with stakeholders from IT, business, and leadership to work through the essential decisions around vision and alignment, people, governance, and technology.

    Your cloud operations design should align to a cloud strategy document that provides guidelines on establishing a cloud council, preparing staff for changing skills, mitigating risks through proper governance, and setting a direction for migration, provisioning, and monitoring decisions.

    Key Insights

    Focus on the future, not the present

    Define your target cloud operations state first, then plan how to get there. If you begin by trying to reconstruct on-prem operations in the cloud, you will build an operations model that is the worst of both worlds.

    Responsibilities change in the cloud

    Understand what you mean by cloud work

    Focus where it matters

    Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and it requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

    In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring

    Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but is required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

    Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

    Start by designing operations around the main workflow you have for cloud services. If you mostly build or host in the cloud, build the diagram to maximize value for that workflow.

    Design principles will often change over time as the organization’s strategy evolves.

    Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges

    Calls #2&3: Assess cloud maturity and drivers for org. redesign

    Call #4: Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    Call #5: Evaluate new ways of working and identify cloud work

    Calls #6&7: Create your Cloud Operations diagram

    Call #8: Create your communication plan and build roadmap

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Establish Context

    Design the Organization and Communicate Changes

    Next Steps and
    Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Assess current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement

    1.2 Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    1.3 Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    1.4 Develop organization design principles

    2.1 Evaluate new ways of working

    2.2 Develop a workstream target statement

    2.3 Identify cloud work

    3.1 Design a future-state cloud operations diagram

    3.2 Create a current state cloud operations diagram

    3.3 Define success indicators

    4.1 Create a roadmap

    4.2 Create a communication plan

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days.

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps.

    Deliverables

    1. Cloud Maturity Assessment
    2. Cloud Challenges and Objectives
    1. Workstream target statement
    2. Cloud Operations Workflow Diagrams
    1. Future and current state cloud operations diagrams
    1. Roadmap
    2. Communication Plan

    Cloud Operations Organizing Framework.

    Phase 1:

    Establish context

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3 Identify cloud work

    2.1 Draft an operating model

    2.2 Communicate proposed changes

    Phase Outcomes:

    Define current maturity and which workstreams are important to your organization.

    Understand new operating approaches and which apply to your workstream balance.

    Identify a new target state for IT operations.

    Before you get started

    Set yourself up for success with these three steps:

    • This methodology and the related slides are intended to be executed via intensive, collaborative working sessions using the rest of this slide deck.
    • Ensure the working sessions are successful by working through these steps before you start work on defining your cloud operations.

    1. Identify an operations design working group

    2. Review cloud vision and strategy

    3. Create a working folder

    This should be a group with insight into current cloud challenges, and with the authority to drive change. This group is the main audience for the activities in this blueprint.

    Review your established planning work and documentation.

    Create a repository to house your notes and any work in progress.

    Create a working folder

    15 minutes

    Create a central repository to support transparency and collaboration. It’s an obvious step, but one that’s often forgotten.

    1. Download all the documents associated with this blueprint to a shared repository accessible to all participants. Keep separate folders for templates and work-in-progress.
    2. Share the link to the repository with all attendees. Include links to the repository in any meeting invites you set up as working sessions for the project.
    3. Use the repository for all the work you do in the activities listed in this blueprint.

    Step 1.1: Identify goals and challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group, which may include:
      • Cloud owners
      • Platform/Applications Team leads
      • Infra & Ops managers

    Outcomes

    • Identify your current cloud maturity and areas in need of improvement.
    • Define the advantages you expect to realize from cloud services and any obstacles you have to overcome to meet those objectives.
    • Identify the reasons why redesigning cloud operations is necessary.
    • Develop organization design principles.

    “Start small: Begin with a couple services. Then, based on the feedback you receive from Operations and the business, modify your approach and keep increasing your footprint.” – Nenad Begovic

    Cloud changes operational activities, tactics, and goals

    As you adopt cloud services, the operations core mission remains . . .

    • IT operations are expected to deliver stable, efficient, and secure IT services.

    . . . but operational activities are evolving.

    • Core IT operational processes remain relevant, such as incident or capacity management, but opportunities to automate or outsource operations tasks will change how that work is done.
    • As you rely more on automation and outsourcing, the team may see less direct execution in its day-to-day work and more solution design and validation.
    • Outsourcing frees the team from operational toil but reduces the direct control over your end-to-end solution and increases your reliance on your vendor.
    • Pay-as-you-go pricing models present opportunities for streamlined delivery and cost rationalization but require you to rethink how you do cost and asset management.
    • It’s very easy for the business to buy a SaaS solution without consulting IT, which can lead to duplicated functionality, integration challenges, security threats, and more.

    Design a model for cloud operations that helps you achieve value from your cloud environment.

    “As operating models shift to the cloud, you still need the same people and processes. However, the shift is focused on a higher level of operations. If your people no longer focus on server uptime, then their success metrics will change. When security is no longer protected by the four walls of a datacenter, your threat profile changes.

    (Microsoft, “Understand Cloud Operating Models,” 2022)

    Operational responsibilities are shared with a range of stakeholders

    When using a vendor-operated public cloud, IT exists in a shared responsibility model with the cloud service provider, one that is further differentiated by the type of cloud service model in use: broadly, software-as a service (SaaS), platform-as-a-service (PaaS), or infrastructure-as-a-service (IaaS).

    Your IT operations organization may still reflect a structure where IT retains control over the entire infrastructure stack from facilities to application and defines their operational roles and processes accordingly.

    If the organization chooses a co-location facility, they outsource facility responsibility to a third-party provider, but much of the rest of the traditional IT operating model remains the same. The operations model that worked for an entirely premises-based environment is very different from one that is made up of, for instance, a portfolio of SaaS applications, where your control is limited to the top of the infrastructure stack at the application layer.

    Once an organization migrates workloads to the cloud, IT gives up an increasing amount of control to the vendor, and its traditional operational roles & responsibilities necessarily change.

    The image contains a screenshot that demonstrates what the cloud service models are.

    Align operations with customer value

    • Decisions about operational design should be made with customer value in mind. Remember that cloud adoption should be an enabler of adaptability in the face of changing business needs!
    • Think about how the operations team is indispensable to the value received by your customer. Think about the types of changes that can add to the value your customers receive.
    • A focus on value will help you establish and explain the rationale and urgency required to deliver on needed changes. If you can’t explain how the changes you propose will help deliver value, your proposal will come across as change for the sake of change.
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how operational design decisions need to be made with customer value in mind.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Work that is invisible to the customer can still be essential to delivering customer value. A lot of operations work is invisible to your organization’s customers but required to deliver stability, security, efficiency, and more.

    A new consumption model means a different mix of activities

    Evolving to cloud-optimal operations also means re-assessing and adapting your team’s approach to achieving cloud maturity, especially with respect to how automation and standardization can be leveraged to best achieve optimization in cloud.

    Traditional ITDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor
    CloudDesignExecuteValidateSupportMonitor

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cloud is a different way of consuming IT resources and applications and requires a different operational approach than traditional IT.

    In most cases, cloud operations involves less direct execution and more service validation and monitoring.

    The Service Models in cloud correspond to the way your organization delivers IT

    Service Model

    Example

    Function

    Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

    Salesforce.com

    Office 365

    Workday

    Consume

    Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS)

    Azure Stack

    AWS SageMaker

    WordPress

    Build

    Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Microsoft Azure

    Amazon EC2

    Google Cloud Platform

    Host

    Define how you plan to use cloud services

    Your cloud operations will include different tasks, teams, and workflows, depending on whether you consume cloud services, build them, or host on them.

    Function

    Business Need

    Service Model

    Example Tasks

    Consume

    “I need a commodity, off-the-shelf service that we can configure to our organization’s needs.

    Software-as-a-Service (SaaS)

    Onboard and add users to a new SaaS offering. Vendor management of SaaS providers. Configure/integrate the SaaS offering to meet business needs.

    Build

    “I need to create significantly customized or net-new products and services.”

    Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS) & Infrastructure as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Create custom applications. Build and maintain a container platform. Manage CI/CD pipelines and tools. Share infrastructure and applications patterns.

    Host

    “I need compute, storage, and networking components that reflect key cloud characteristics (on-demand self-service, metered usage, etc.).”

    Infrastructure-as-a-Service (IaaS)

    Stand up compute, networking, and storage resources to host a COTS application. Plan to increase storage capacity to support future demand.

    Align to the well-architected framework

    • Each cloud provider has defined a well-architected framework (WAF) that defines effective deployment and operations for their services.
    • WAFs embody a set of best practices and design principles to leverage the cloud in a more efficient, secure, and cost-effective manner.
    • While each vendor’s WAF has its own definitions and nuances, they collectively share a set of key principles, or “pillars,” that define the desired outcome of any cloud deployment.
    • These pillars address the key areas of risk when migrating to a public cloud platform.

    “In order to accelerate public cloud adoption, you need to focus on infrastructure-as-code and script everything you can. Unlike traditional operations, CloudOps focuses on creating scripts: a script for task A, a script for task B, etc.”

    – Nenad Begovic

    Pillars

    • Reliability
    • Security
    • Cost Optimization
    • Operational Excellence
    • Performance Efficiency

    General Best Practice Capability Areas

    • Host
    • Network
    • Data
    • Identity Management
    • Cost/Subscription Management

    Assess cloud maturity

    2 hours

    1. Download a copy of the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool.
    2. As a group, work through:
      • The balance of your operations activities from a Host/Build/Consume perspective. What are you responsible for delivering now? How do you expect things will change in the future?
      • Which workstreams to focus on. Are there activity categories that are critical or non-critical or that don’t represent a significant portion of overall work? Conversely, are there workstreams that you feel are subject to particular risk when moving to cloud?
    3. Fill out the Maturity Quiz tab in the Cloud Maturity Assessment Tool for the workstreams you have chosen to focus on.
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Maturity scoring for key workload streams as they align to the pillars of a general well-architected cloud framework
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Operating model template
    • Cloud platform SMEs

    Download theCloud Maturity Assessment Tool

    Identify the drivers for organizational redesign

    Whiteboard Activity

    An absolute must-have in any successful redesign is a shared understanding and commitment to changing the status quo.

    Without a clear and urgent call to action, the design changes will be seen as change for the sake of change and therefore entirely safe to ignore.

    Take up the following questions as a group:

    1. What kind of organizational change is needed?
    2. Why do we think the need for this change is urgent?
    3. What do we think will happen if no change occurs? What’s the worst-case scenario?

    Record your answers so you can reference and use them in the communication materials you’ll create in Phase 2.

    InputOutput
    • Cloud maturity assessment
    • Objectives and obstacles
    • Insight into existing challenges stemming from organizational design challenges
    • A list of reasons that form a compelling argument for organizational change
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    “We know, for example, that 70 percent of change programs fail to achieve their goals, largely due to employee resistance and lack of management support. We also know that when people are truly invested in change it is 30 percent more likely to stick.”

    – Ewenstein, Smith, Sologar

    McKinsey (2015)

    Consider the value of change from advantage and obstacle perspectives

    Consider what you intend to achieve and the obstacles to overcome to help identify the changes required to achieve your desired future state.

    Advantage Perspective

    Ideas for Change

    Obstacle Perspective

    What advantages do cloud services offer us as an organization?

    For example:

    • Enhance service features.
    • Enhance user experience.
    • Provide ubiquitous access.
    • Scalability to align with demand.
    • Automate or outsource routine tasks.

    What obstacles prevent us from realizing value in cloud services?

    For example:

    • Inadequate stability and reliability
    • Difficult to observe or monitor workloads
    • Challenges ensuring cloud security
    • Insufficient access to relevant skills

    Review risks and challenges

    Changes to Support Model

    • Have we identified who is on the cloud ops team?
    • Do we know where we are procuring skills (internal IT vs. third party) and for how long?
    • Do we know where we are in the migration process?

    Changes to security & governance

    • Have we identified how our attack surface changes in the cloud?
    • Do we have guardrails in place to govern self-provisioning users?
    • Are we managing cost overage risks?

    Replicating old habits

    • Have we made concrete plans to leverage cloud capabilities to standardize and automate outputs?
    • Are we simply reproducing existing systems in the cloud?

    Changes to Skills & Roles

    • Is our staff excited to learn new skills and technologies? Are our specialists prepared to acquire generalist skills to support cloud services?
    • Do we have training plans created and aligned to our technology roadmap?
    • Do we know what head count we need?

    Misaligned stakeholders

    • Have we identified our key stakeholders and teams? Have we considered what changes will impact them and how?
    • Are we meeting regularly and collaborating effectively with our peers, or are we siloed?

    Review cloud objectives and obstacles

    Whiteboard Activity

    1 hour

    1. With your working group, review why you’re using cloud in the first place. What advantages do you expect to realize by adopting cloud services? If we achieve what we’ve set out to do, what should that look and feel like to us, our organization, and our organization’s customers?
      • You should have identified cloud drivers and objectives in your cloud vision and strategy – leverage and validate what you already have!
    2. Next, identify obstacles that are preventing you from fully realizing the value of cloud services.
    3. Finally, brainstorm initial ideas for change. What could we start doing that could help us better use cloud in the future? Are there changes to how we need to organize ourselves to collaborate more effectively?
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment
    • Identified key business outcomes you expect to realize by adopting cloud services
    • Identified challenges and obstacles that are preventing you from realizing key outcomes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud operations design working group.

    Commonly cited advantages and obstacles

    Cloud Advantages/Objectives

    • Deliver faster on commitments to the business by removing infrastructure provisioning as a bottleneck.
    • Simplify capacity management on flexible cloud-based infrastructure.
    • Reduce capital spending on IT infrastructure.
    • Create sandboxes/innovation practices to experiment with and develop new functionality on cloud platforms.
    • Easily enable ubiquitous access to key corporate services.
    • Minimize the expense and effort required to maintain a data center – power & cooling, cabling, or physical hardware.
    • Leverage existing automation tools from cloud vendors to speed up integration and deployment.
    • Direct costs for specific services can improve transparency and cost allocation, allowing IT to directly “show-back” or charge-back cloud costs to specific cost centers.

    Obstacles

    Need to speed up provisioning of PaaS/IaaS/data resources to development and project teams.

    No time to develop and improve platform services and standards due to other responsibilities.

    We constantly run up unexpected cloud costs.

    Not enough time for continuous learning and development.

    The business will buy SaaS apps and only let us know after they’ve been purchased, leading to overlapping functionality; gaps in compliance, security, or data protection requirements; integration challenges; cost inefficiencies; and more.

    Role descriptions haven’t kept up with tech changes.

    Obvious opportunities to rationalize costs aren’t surfaced (e.g. failing to make use of existing volume licensing agreements).

    Skills needed to properly operate cloud solutions aren’t identified until breakdowns happen.

    Establish organization design principles

    You’ve established a need for organizational change. What will that change look like?

    Design principles are concise, direct statements that describe how you will design your organization to achieve key objectives and address key challenges.

    This is a critically important step for several reasons:

    • A set of clear, concise statements that describe what the design should achieve provides parameters that will help you create and evaluate different design options.
    • A focused, facilitated discussion to create those statements will help uncover conflicting assumptions between key stakeholders.
    • A comprehensive description of the various ways the organization should change makes it easier to identify misaligned or incompatible objectives.
    • A description of what your organization should look like in the future will help you identify where changes will be required .

    Examples of design principles:

    1. We will create a path to review and publish effective application/platform patterns.
    2. A single governing body should have oversight into all cloud costs.
    3. Development must happen only on approved cloud platforms.
    4. Application teams must address operational issues that derive from the applications they’ve created.
    5. Security practices should be embedded into approved cloud platforms and be automatically applied wherever possible.
    6. Focus is on improving developer experience on cloud platforms.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Design principles will often change as the organization’s strategy evolves.

    Align design principles to your objectives

    Developing design principles starts with your key objectives. What do we absolutely have to get right to deliver value through cloud services?

    Once you have your direction set, work through the points in the star model to establish how you will meet your objectives and deliver value. Each point in the star is an important element in your design – taken together, it paints a holistic picture of your future-state organization.

    The changes you choose to implement that affect capabilities, structure, processes, rewards, and people should be self-reinforcing. Each point in the star is connected to, and should support, the other points.

    “There is no one-size-fits-all organization design that all companies – regardless of their particular strategy needs – should subscribe to.”

    – Jay Galbraith, “The Star Model”

    The image contains a screenshot of a modified versio of Jay Galbraith's Star Model of Organizational Design.

    Establish design principles

    Track your findings in the table on the next slide.

    1. Review the cloud objectives and challenges from the previous activity. As a group, decide from that list: what are the key objectives you are trying to achieve? What are the things you absolutely must get right to get value from cloud services?
    2. Work through the following questions as a group:
      • What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?
      • How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?
      • Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?
      • How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?
      • What new skills or knowledge is required? How will we acquire those skills or knowledge?
    InputOutput
    • Cloud objectives and challenges
    • Different viewpoints into how your organization must change to realize objectives and overcome challenges
    • Organizational design principles for cloud operations
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Cloud operations design working group

    Design principles (example)

    What is our key objective?

    • Rapidly develop innovative cloud services aligned to business value.

    What capabilities or technologies do we need to adopt or leverage differently?

    • We will adopt more agile development techniques to make smaller changes, faster.
    • We will standardize and automate tasks that are routine and repeatable.

    How must our structure change? How will power shift in the new structure?

    • Embed development teams within business units to better align to business unit needs.
    • Create a focused cloud platform team to develop infrastructure services.

    Will our new structure require changes to processes or information sharing?

    • Development teams will take on responsibility for application support.
    • Platform teams will be deeply embedded with development teams on new projects to build new infrastructure functionality.

    How must we change how we motivate or reward employees?

    • We will highlight innovative work across the company.
    • We will encourage experimentation and risk-taking.

    What new skills or knowledge is required, and how will we acquire it?

    • We will focus on acquiring skills most closely aligned to our technology roadmap.
    • We will ensure budget is available for training employees who ask for it.
    • We will contract to find skills we cannot develop in-house and use engagements as an opportunity to learn internally.

    Step 1.2: Evaluate new ways of working

    Participants

    Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    Shared understanding of the horizon of work possibilities:

    • Ways to work
    • Ways to govern and learn

    Consider the different approaches on the following slides, how they change operational work, and decide which approaches are the right fit for you.

    Evaluate new ways of working

    Cut through the hype

    • There are new approaches/ways of working that deal head on with the persistent breakdowns and headaches that come with operations management – work thrown over the wall from development, manual and repetitive work, siloed teams, and more.
    • Many of these approaches emphasize an operations-aware approach to solutions development and apply techniques traditionally associated with AppDev to Operations.
    • Cloud services present opportunities to outsource/automate away routine tasks.

    “DevOps is a set of practices, tools, and a cultural philosophy that automates and integrates the processes between software development and IT teams. It emphasizes team empowerment, cross-team communication and collaboration, and technology automation.”

    – Atlassian, “DevOps”

    “ITIL 4 brings ITIL up to date by…embracing new ways of working, such as Lean, Agile, and DevOps.”

    – ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition

    “Over time, left to their own devices, the SRE team should end up with very little operational load and almost entirely engage in development tasks, because the service basically runs and repairs itself.”

    – Ben Treynor Sloss, “Site Reliability Engineering”

    The more things change, the more they stay the same:

    • Core processes remain, but they may be done differently, and new technologies and services create new challenges.
    • Not all approaches are right for all organizations, and what’s right for you depends on how you use cloud services.
    • The best solution draws from these management ideas to build an approach to operations that is right for you.

    Leverage patterns to think about new ways of approaching operations work

    Patterns are strategies, approaches, and philosophies that can help you imagine new ways of working in your own organization.

    • The following slides provide an overview of organizing patterns that are applicable to cloud operations.
    • These are strategies that have been applied successfully elsewhere. Review what they can and cannot do and decide whether they are something you can use in your own organizational design.
    • Not every pattern will apply to every organization. For example, an organization which typically consumes SaaS applications will likely have very little need for SRE approaches and techniques.

    Ways to work

    • What work do we do? What skills do we need?
    • How do we create and support systems?

    Ways to govern and learn

    • How do we set and enforce rules?
    • How do we create and share knowledge?

    Explore Applicable Patterns

    Ways to work

    Ways to govern and learn

    1. DevOps

    2. Site Reliability Engineering

    3. Platform Engineering

    4. Cloud Centre of Excellence

    5. Cloud Community of Practice

    What is DevOps?

    “Look for obstacles constantly and treat them as opportunities to experiment and learn.” – Jez Humble, et al. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • Another word for automation or CI/CD tools.
    • A specific role.
    • A fix-all to address friction between existing siloed application and development teams.
    • An approach that will be successful without getting the basics right first.
    • The right fit for every IT organization or every team.

    An operational philosophy that seeks to:

    • Converge accountability for development and operations to align all teams to the goal of delivering customer value.
    • Improve the relationship between Development and Operations teams.
    • Increase the rate of deployment of valuable functionality into production.
    • “A cultural shift giving development teams more control over shipping code to production.” 1
    • You’re doing a lot of custom development.
    • There are opportunities for operations and development teams to work more closely.
    • You want to improve coding quality and throughput.
    • You want to shift the culture of the team to focus on customer value rather than exclusively uptime or new features.
    1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

    What is Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)?

    “Hope is not a strategy” – Benjamin Treynor Sloss, Site Reliability Engineering: How Google Runs Production Systems

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • Deeply focussed on a specific technical domain; SRE work “does not discriminate between infrastructure, software, networking, or platforms.” 2
    • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
    • A programming framework or a specific set of technologies.
    • A way to manage COTS software. SRE is less useful when you’re using applications out-of-the-box with minimal customization, integration, or development.
    • An application of skills and approaches from software engineering to improve system reliability.
    • A team responsible for “availability, latency, performance, efficiency, change management, monitoring, emergency response, and capacity planning.”3
    • A team responsible for building systems that become “a platform and workflow that encompasses monitoring, incident management, eliminating single points of failure, [and] failure mitigation.”1
    • You are building services and providing them at scale.
    • You want to improve reliability and reduce “the frequency and impact of failures that can impact the overall reliability of a cloud application.”1
    • You need to define related service metrics and SLOs.
    • To increase the use of automation in operations to avoid mistakes and minimize toil. 3
    1 SRE vs Platform Engineering
    2. Lakhani, Usman. “ISite Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?,” 2020.
    3. Sloss, “Introduction,” 2017

    What4 is Platform Engineering?

    “Platform engineers can act as a shield between developers and the infrastructure”

    – Carlos Schults, “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term”

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A team that manages every aspect of each application on a particular platform.
    • Focussed solely on platform reliability and availability.
    • A different name for a team of sysadmins.
    • Needed for all cloud service deployments. Platform engineers are most useful when you’re building extensively on a particular platform (e.g. AWS, Azure, or your internal cloud).
    • Platform engineers design, build, and manage the infrastructure that supports and hosts work done by developers.
    • The work done by platform engineering allows developers to avoid the repetitive work of setting everything up anew each time.
    • Requires engineers with a deep understanding of cloud services and other platform technologies (e.g. Kubernetes).
    • The big public cloud platforms are built for everyone. You need platform engineering when you need to extensively adapt or manage standard cloud services to support your own requirements.
    • Platform engineers are responsible for creating a secure, stable, maintainable environment that enables developers to do their work faster and without having to manage the underlying technology infrastructure.
    1 DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering

    What is a Cloud Center of Excellence?

    You need a strong core to grow a cloud culture.

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A project management office (PMO) for cloud services.
    • An easy, quick, or temporary fix to cloud governance problems. The CCoE requires champions who provide ongoing support to realize value over time.
    • An approach that’s only for enterprise-sized IT organizations.
    • A standing meeting – members of the CCoE may meet regularly to review progress on their mandate, but work and collaboration need to happen outside of meetings.
    • A cross-functional team responsible for oversight of all cloud initiatives, including architectural, technical, security, financial, contractual, and operational aspects of planned and deployed solutions.
    • The CCoE’s responsibilities typically include governance and continuous improvement; alignment between technical and accounting practices; documentation, training, best practices and standards development; and vendor management.
    • CCoE duties are often part of an existing role rather than a full-time responsibility.
    • You want to enable a core group of cloud experts to promote collaboration and accelerate adoption of cloud services, including members from infrastructure, applications, and security.
    • You need to manage cloud risks, set guidelines and policies, and govern costs across cloud environments.
    • There is an unmet need for training, knowledge sharing, and best practice development across the organization.

    What is a Cloud Community of Practice?

    “We have to stop optimizing for programmers and start optimizing for users”

    – Jeff Atwood

    What it is NOT

    What it IS

    Why Use It

    • A replacement for effective oversight and governance practices, though they may help users navigate and understand governance requirements.
    • A way to advertise cloud to potential new practitioners – engaged members of a CoP are typically already using a particular service.
    • Always exclusively composed of internal staff; in certain cases, a CoP could have external members as well.
    • A network of engaged users and experts who share knowledge and best practices for related technologies, crowdsource solutions to problems, and suggest improvements.
    • Often supported by communication and collaboration tools (e.g. chat channels, knowledge base, forums). May use a range of techniques (e.g. drop-ins, vendor-led training, lunch and learns).
    • Communities of practice may be deliberately created by the organization or develop organically.
    • Communities of practice are an effective way for practitioners to support one another and share ideas and solutions.
    • A CoP can help “shift left” work and help practitioners help themselves.
    • An engaged CoP can help IT to identify improvement opportunities and can also be a channel to communicate updates or changes to practitioners.

    Reinforce what we mean by patterns

    Patterns are . . .

    Ways of Working

    • Sets of habits, processes, and methodologies you want to adopt as part of your operational guidelines and commonly agreed upon definitions.

    Patterns are also . . .

    Ways to Govern and Learn

    • The formal and informal practices and groups that focus on enabling governance, risk management, and adoption.

    Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

    Ways of Working

    DevOps

    Development teams take on operational work to support the services they create after they are launched to production.

    Some DevOps teams may be aligned around a particular function or product rather than a technology – there are individuals with skills on a number of technologies that are part of the same team.

    Site Reliability Engineering (SRE)

    In the beginning, you can start to adopt SRE practices within existing teams. As demand grows for SRE skills and services, you may decide to create focused SRE roles or teams.

    SRE teams may work across applications or be aligned to just infrastructure services or a particular application, or they may focus on tools that help developers manage reliability. SREs may also be embedded long-term with other teams or take on an internal consulting roles with multiple teams.1

    Platform Engineering

    Platform engineering will often, though not always, be the responsibility of a dedicated team. This team must work very closely with, and tuned into the needs of, its internal customers. There is a constant need to find ways to add value that aren’t already part and parcel of the platform – or its external roadmap.

    This team will take on responsibility for the platform, in terms of feature development, automation, availability and reliability, security, and more. They may also be internal consultants or advisors on the platform to developers.

    1. Gustavo Franco and Matt Brown, “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.”

    Review the implications of each pattern for organizational design

    Ways to Govern and Learn

    Cloud Center of Excellence

    • A CCoE is a cross-functional group with technical experts from security, infrastructure, applications, and more.
    • There should, ideally, be someone focused on leading the CCoE full-time – often someone with an architecture background. Team members may work on the CCoE part-time alongside their main role, and dedicate more of their time to the CCoE as needed.
    • As the CCoE is a governance function, it will typically bridge and sit above teams working on cloud services, reporting to the CIO, CTO, or to an architecture function.

    Cloud Community of Practice

    • Participation in a community of practice is often above and beyond a core role – it’s a leadership activity taken on by technologically adept experts with a drive to help others.
    • Some organizations will create a role to foster community collaboration, run events, raise opportunities and issues identified by the community with product or technology teams, manage collaboration tools, and more.

    Evolve your organization to meet the needs of increased adoption

    Your operating model should evolve as you increase adoption of cloud services.

    Least Adoption Greatest Adoption

    Initial Adoption

    Early Centralization

    Scaling Up

    Full Steam Ahead

    • One or more small agile teams design, build, manage, and operate individual solutions on cloud resources. Solutions provide early value, and identify new opportunities using small, safe-to-fail experiments.
    • Governance is likely done locally to each team. Knowledge sharing, guidelines, and standards are likely informal.
    • Early experience with cloud services help the organization identify where to invest in cloud services to best meet business demands.
    • Accountability and governance over the platform are more clearly defined, possibly still separate from core IT governance processes. Best practices may be shared across teams through a Community of Practice.
    • Operations may be centralized, where valuable, to support monitoring and incident response.
    • Additional product/service-aligned development teams are created to keep up with demand.
    • There is a focused effort to consolidate best practices and platform knowledge, which can be supported through a culture of learning, effective automation, and appropriate tools.
    • The CCoE takes on additional roles in cloud governance, security, operations, and administration.
    • The organization has reached a relatively steady-state for cloud adoption. Innovation and new service development takes place on a stable platform.
    • A Cloud Center of Excellence is accountable for cloud governance across the organization.
    Adapted from Microsoft, “Get Started: Align your organization,” 2021

    Choose new ways of working that make sense for your team

    1 hour

    Consider if, and how, the approaches to management and governance you’ve just reviewed can offer value to your organization.

    1. List the organizing/managing ideas listed in the previous slides in the table below.
    2. Define why it’s for you. What benefits do you expect to realize? What challenges do you expect this will help you overcome? How does this align with your key benefits and drivers for moving to cloud?
    3. List risks or challenges to adoption. Why will it be hard to do? What could get in the way of adoption? Why might it not be a good fit?
    4. Identify next steps to adopt proposed practices.

    Why it’s for us (drivers)

    Risks or challenges to adoption

    Next steps to build/adopt it

    CCoE

    DevOps

    InputOutput
    • Related Info-Tech slides on new ways of working.
    • Opportunities and challenges in your own cloud deployment that may be addressed through new ways of working.
    • Identify new ways of working aligned to your goals.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Step 1.3: Identify cloud work

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Identify core work required to deliver value in key cloud workstreams.

    “At first, for many people, the cloud seems vast. But what you actually do is carve out space.”

    –DevOps Manager

    Identify work

    Before you can identify roles and responsibilities, you have to confirm what work you do as an organization and how that work enables you to meet your goals.

    • A comprehensive approach that connects the work you do to your organizational goals will help you identify work that’s falling through the cracks.
    • Identifying work is an opportunity to look at the tasks you regularly execute and ensure they actually drive value.
    • Working through the exercise as a group will help you develop a common language around the work you do.
    • To make the evident obvious: you can’t decide who should be responsible for something if you don’t know about it in the first place.

    Defining work can be a lot of … work! We recommend you start by identifying work for the workstream you do most – Build, Consume, or Host – to focus your efforts. You can repeat the exercise as needed.

    Map work in workstream diagrams

    The image contains a screenshot of the map work in workstream diagrams.

    The five Well-Architected Framework pillars. These are principles/directions/guideposts that should inform all cloud work.

    The work being done to achieve the workstream target. These are roughly aligned with the three streams on the right.

    Workstream Target: A concise statement of the value you aim to achieve through this workstream. All work should help deliver value (directly or indirectly).

    Define the scope of the exercise

    Whiteboard Activity

    20 minutes

    Over the next few exercises, you’ll do a deep dive into the work you do in one specific workstream. In this exercise, we’ll decide on a workstream to focus on first.

    1. Are you primarily building, hosting on, or consuming cloud services? Start with the workstream where you’re doing the most work.
    2. If this isn’t sufficient to narrow your focus, look at the workstream that is most closely tied to mission critical applications, or that is most in need of review in terms of what work is done and who does it.
    3. You can narrow the scope further if there’s a very specific sub-area that differs from the rest (e.g. managing your O365 environment vs. managing all SaaS applications).
    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Your completed cloud maturity assessment.
    • Identify one workstream where you’ll define work first.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • None
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Create a workstream target statement

    Whiteboard Activity

    30 minutes

    In this activity, come up with a short sentence to describe what all this work you do is building toward. The target statement helps align participants on why work is being done and helps focus the activity on work that is most important to achieving the target statement.

    Start with this common workstream target statement:

    “Deliver valuable, secure, available, reliable, and efficient cloud services.”

    Now, review and adjust the target statement by working through the questions below:

    1. Return to the earlier exercises in Phase 1.1 where you reviewed your key objectives for cloud services. Does the target statement align with what you’d identified previously?
    2. Who is the customer for the work you do? Would they see the target differently than you’ve described it?
    3. Can you be more specific? Are there value drivers that are more specific to your industry, organization, business functions, or products that are key to the value your customers receive from this workstream?
    InputOutput
    • Previous exercises.
    • Workstream target statement.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Identify cloud work

    1-2 hours

    1. Use the workstream diagram template in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, or draw the template out on a whiteboard and use sticky notes to identify work.
    2. Identify the workstream at the top of the slide. Update the template value statement on the right with the value statement you created in the previous exercise.
    3. Review one or more of the examples in the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook to get a sense of the level of detail required for this exercise.

    Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

    Some notes to the facilitator:

    • Working directly from the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook will save you time with transcription. Sharing the document with participants (e.g. via OneDrive) will allow you to collaborate and edit the document together in real-time.
    • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment, just get the information written down and you can clean up the diagram later.
    InputOutput
    • Previously identified design principles.
    • An understanding of the work done, and that needs to be done, in your cloud environment.
    • Identify the work that needs to be done to support your key cloud services workstream in the future.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Whiteboard and sticky notes (optional)
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Identify cloud work (cont’d)

    4. Work together to identify work, documenting one work item per box. This should focus on future state, so record work whether it’s actually done today or not. Your space is limited on the sheet, so focus on work that is indispensable to delivering the value statement. Use the lists on the right as a reminder of key IT practice areas.

    5. As much as possible, align the work items to the appropriate row (Govern & Align, Design & Execute, or Validate, Support & Monitor). You can overlap boxes between rows if needed.

    Have you captured work related to:

    ITIL practices, such as:

    • Request management
    • Incident & problem management
    • Service catalog
    • Service level management
    • Configuration management

    Security-aligned practices, such as:

    • Identity & access management
    • Vulnerability management
    • Security incident management

    Financial practices, such as:

    • IT asset management
    • Cost management & budgeting
    • Vendor management
    • Portfolio management

    Data-aligned practices, such as:

    • Data integrations
    • Data governance

    Technology-specific tasks, such as:

    • Network, Server & Storage
    • Structured/unstructured DBs
    • Composite services
    • IDEs and compilers

    Other key practices:

    • Monitoring & observability
    • Continuous improvement
    • Testing & quality assurance
    • Training and knowledge management
    • Manage shadow IT

    Info-Tech Insight

    Cloud work is not just applications that have been approved by IT. Consider how unsanctioned software purchased by the business will be integrated and managed.

    Identify cloud work (cont’d)

    6. If you have decided to adopt any of the new ways of working outlined in Step 1.2 (e.g. DevOps, SRE, etc.) review the next slide for examples of the type of work that frequently needs to be done in each of those work models. Add any additional work items as needed.

    7. Consolidate boxes and clean up the diagram (e.g. remove duplicate work items, align boxes, clarify language).

    8. Do a final review. Is all the work in the diagram truly aligned with the value statement? Is the work identified aligned with the design principles from Step 1.1?

    If you used a whiteboard for this exercise, transcribe the output to a copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook, and repeat the exercise for other key workstreams. You will use this diagram in Phase 2.

    Examples of work

    Examples of work in the "Host" workstream:

    • Bulk patch servers
    • Add a server
    • Add capacity
    • Develop a new server template
    • Incident management

    Examples of work in the "Build" workstream:

    • Provision a production server
    • Provision a test environment
    • Test recovery procedures
    • Add capacity for a service
    • Publish a new pattern
    • Manage capacity/performance for a service
    • Identify wasted spend across services
    • Identify performance bottlenecks
    • Review and shut down idle/unneeded services

    Examples of work in the "Consume" workstream:

    • Conduct vendor risk assessments
    • Develop a standard evaluation matrix to compare solutions to existing or potential in-house offerings
    • Onboard a solution
    • Offboard a solution
    • Conduct a renewal
    • Review and negotiate a contract
    • Rationalize software titles

    Phase 2:

    Design the organization and communicate changes

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    1.1 Establish operating model design principals by identifying goals & challenges, workstreams, and cloud maturity

    1.2 Evaluate new ways of working

    1.3 Identify cloud work

    2.1 Draft an operating model

    2.2 Communicate proposed changes

    Phase Outcomes:

    Draft your cloud operations diagram, identify key messages and impacts to communicate to your stakeholders, and build out the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework communication deck.

    Step 2.1: Identify groups and responsibilities

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Cloud Operations Diagram
    • Success Indicators
    • Roadmap

    “No-one ever solved a problem by restructuring.”

    – Anonymous

    Visualize your cloud operations

    Create a visual to help you abstract, analyze, and clarify your vision for the future state of your organization in order to align and instruct stakeholders.

    Create a visual, high-level view of your organization to help you answer questions such as:

    • “What work do we do? What are the roles and responsibilities of different teams?”
    • “How do we interact between work areas?”
    • “How has our organization changed already, and what additional changes may be needed?”
    • “How do we make technology decisions?”
    • “How do we provide services?”
    • “How might this change be received by people on the ground?”
    The image contains a screenshot of the Cloud Operations Diagram Example.

    Decide whether to centralize or decentralize

    Specialization & Focus: A group or work unit developing a focused concentration of skills, expertise, and activities aligned with an area of focus (such as the ones at right).

    Decentralization: Operational teams that report to a decentralized IT or business function, either directly or via a “dotted line” relationship.

    Decentralization and Specialization can:

    • Duplicate work.
    • Localize decision-making authority, which can increase agility and responsiveness.
    • Transfer authority and accountability to local and typically smaller teams, clarifying responsibilities and encouraging staff to take ownership for service delivery.
    • Enable the team to focus on complex and rapidly changing technologies or processes.
    • Create islands of expertise, which can get in the way of collaboration, innovation, and decision making across groups and work units and make oversight difficult.
    • Complicate the transfer of resources and knowledge between groups.

    Examples: Areas of Focus

    Business unit

    • Manufacturing
    • R&D
    • Sales & Marketing

    Region

    • Americas
    • EMEA
    • APAC

    Service

    • ERP
    • Commercial website

    Technology

    • On-premises servers/storage
    • Network
    • Cloud services

    Operational process focus

    • Capacity management & planning
    • Incident management
    • Problem management

    “The concept of organization design is simple in theory but highly complex in practice. Like any strategic decision, it involves making multiple trade-offs before choosing what is best suited to a business context.”

    – Nitin Razdan & Arvind Pandit

    Identify key work areas

    Balance specialization with effective collaboration

    • Much is said about breaking down organizational silos. But at some level, silos are inevitable – any company with more than one employee will have to divide work up somehow.
    • Dividing up work is a delicate balancing act – ensuring individuals and groups are able to do work that is related, meaningful, and that allows autonomy while allowing for effective collaboration between groups that need to work together to achieve business goals.

    Why “work areas”?

    Why don’t we just use teams, groups, squads, or departments, or some other more common term for groups of people working together?

    • We are not yet at the point of deciding who in the organization should be aligned to which areas in the design.
    • Describing work areas as teams can shift the conversation to the organizational chart – to who does the work, rather than what needs to be done.

    That’s not the goal of this exercise. If the conversation gets stuck on what you do today, it can get in the way of thinking about what you need to do in the future.

    Create a future-state cloud operations diagram

    1-3 hours

    1. Review the example cloud operations diagram example in your copy of the Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook.
    2. Identify key work areas (e.g. applications, infrastructure, platform engineering, DevOps, security). Add the name of each work area in one of the larger boxes.
      • Go back to your design principles. Did you define any work areas in your design principles that should be represented here?
      • If you have several groups or teams with similar responsibilities, consider lumping them together in one box (e.g. applications teams, 3x DevOps teams).
    3. Copy the tasks from any workstream diagrams you’ve created to the same slide as the organization design diagram. Keep the workstream diagram intact, as you’ll want to be able to refer back to it later.

    Activity instructions continue on the next slide.

    InputOutput
    • Insight into and experience with your current cloud environment.
    • Cloud Operations Diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip charts
    • Cloud Operations
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Cloud operations diagram (cont’d)

    1-3 hours

    4. As a group, move the work boxes from the workstream diagram into the appropriate work area.

    • Don’t worry about being too tidy for the moment – clean up the diagram when the exercise is done.
    • Make adjustments to the wording of the work boxes if needed.

    5. Use the space between work areas to describe how work areas must interact to achieve organizational goals. For example:

    • What information should be shared between groups?
    • What information sharing channels may be used?
    • What processes will be handed-off between groups and how?
    • How often will teams interact?
    • Will interactions be formal or informal?

    Create a current-state operations diagram

    1 -2 hours

    This exercise can be done by one person, then reviewed with the working group at a later time.

    This current state diagram helps clarify the changes that may need to happen to get to your future state.

    1. Color code the work boxes for each work area. For example, if you have a “DevOps” work area, make all the work boxes assigned to “DevOps” the same color.
    2. On a separate slide, sketch your existing organization indicating your current teams.
    3. Copy the tasks from the future-state diagram to this current-state chart. Align the tasks to the appropriate groups.
    4. Review the chart with the working group. Discuss: are there teams that are doing work today that will also be done by different teams? Are there groups that may merge into one team? What types of changes may be required?
    InputOutput
    • Future-state cloud operations diagram
    • Current-state cloud operations diagram
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Cloud Operations Design Sketchbook
    • Projector/screen/virtual meeting
    • Project lead
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Check for biases to make better choices

    Use the strategies below to spot and address flaws in your team’s thinking about your future-state design.

    Biases

    What’s the risk?

    Mitigation strategies

    Is the team making mistakes due to self-interest, love of a single idea, or groupthink?

    Important information may be ignored or left unspoken.

    Rigorously check for the other biases, below. Tactfully seek dissenting opinions.

    Do recommendations use unreasonable analogies to other successes or failures?

    Opportunities or challenges in the current situation may not be sufficiently understood.

    Ask for other examples, and check whether the analogies are still valid.

    Is the team blinkered by the weight of past decisions?

    Doubling-down on bad decisions (sunk costs) or ignoring new opportunities.

    Ask yourself what you'd do if you were new to the position or organization.

    Does the data support the recommendations?

    Data used to make the case isn't a good fit for the challenge, is based on faulty assumptions, or is incomplete.

    If you had a year to make the decision, what data would you want? How much can you get?

    Are there realistic alternative recommendations?

    Alternatives don't exist or are "strawman" options.

    Ask for additional options.

    Is the recommendation too risk averse or cautious?

    Recommendations that may be too risky are ignored, leading to missed opportunities.

    Review options to accept, transfer, distribute, or mitigate the risk of the decision.

    Framework above adapted from Kahneman, Lovallo, and Sibony (2011)

    Be specific with metrics

    Thinking of ways you could measure success can help uncover what success actually means to you.

    Work collectively to generate success indicators for each key cloud initiative. Success indicators are metrics, with targets, aligned to goals, and if you are able to measure them accurately, they should help you report your progress toward your objectives.

    For example, if your driver is “faster access to resources” you might consider indicators like developer satisfaction, project completion time, average time to provision, etc.

    There are several reasons you may not publicize these metrics. They may be difficult to calculate or misconstrued as targets, warping behavior in unexpected ways. But managed properly, they have value in measuring operational success!

    Examples: Operations redesign project metrics

    Key stakeholder satisfaction scores

    IT staff engagement scores

    Support Delivery of New Functionality

    Double number of accepted releases per cycle

    80% of key cloud initiatives completed on time, on budget, and in scope

    Improve Operational Effectiveness

    <1% of servers have more than two major versions out of date

    No more than one capacity-related incident per Q

    Define success indicators

    Whiteboard Activity

    45 minutes

    1. On a whiteboard, draw a table with key objectives for the design across the top.
      • What cloud objectives should the redesign help you achieve? Refer back to the design principles from Phase 1.
      • Think about the redesign itself. How will you measure whether the project itself is proceeding according to plan? Consider metrics such as employee engagement scores and satisfaction scores from key stakeholders.
    2. Consider whether the metrics are feasible to track. Record your decisions in your copy of the Cloud Operations Organizing Framework deck.
    InputOutput
    • Key design goals
    • Success indicators for your design
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Populate a roadmap

    Tool Activity

    45 minutes

    1. In the Roadmap Tool, populate the data entry tab with the initiatives you will take to support changes toward the new cloud operations organizing framework.
    2. Input each of the tasks in the data entry tab and provide a description and rationale behind the task (as needed).
    3. Assign an effort, priority, and cost level to each task (high, medium, low).
    4. Assign an owner to each task – someone who can take points and shepherd the task to completion.
    5. Identify the timeline for each task based on the priority, effort, and cost (short, medium, and long term).
    6. Highlight risk for each task if it will be deferred.
    7. Track the progress of each task with the status column.
    InputOutput
    • Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
    • Roadmap/ implementation plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Roadmap Tool
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Download the Roadmap Tool

    Step 2.2: Communicate changes

    Participants

    • Operations Design Working Group

    Outcomes

    • Build a communication plan for key stakeholders
    • Complete the communication deck Cloud Operations Organizing Framework
    • Build a roadmap

    “Words, words, words.”

    – Shakespeare

    Communicate changes

    Which stakeholders will be affected by the changes?

    Decision makers: Who do you ultimately need to convince to proceed with any changes you’ve outlined?

    Peers: How will managers of other areas be affected by the changes you’re proposing? If you are you suggesting changes to the way that they, or their teams, do their work, you will have to present a compelling case that there’s value in it for them.

    Staff: Are you dictating changes or looking for feedback on the path forward?

    The image contains a screenshot of the Five Elements of Change that is displayed in a cycle. The five elements are: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us? What is the role of each team and individual.

    Source: The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change

    Follow these guidelines for good communication

    Be relevant

    • Talk about what matters to each stakeholder group.
    • Talk about what matters to the initiative.
    • IT thinks in processes but stakeholders only care about results: talk in terms of results.
    • IT wants to be “understood” but this does not matter to stakeholders; think “what’s in it for them?”
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news.
    • If you expect objections, create a plan to handle them.

    Be clear

    • Lead with the point you’re trying to make.
    • Don’t use jargon.
    • Avoid idiomatic language and clichés.
    • Have a third party review draft communications and ask them to tell you the key messages in their own words. If they’re missing the main points, there’s a good chance the draft isn’t clear.

    Be consistent

    • Ensure the core message is consistent regardless of audience, channel, or medium.
    • Changing the core message from one group to another can be interpreted as incompetence or an attempt at deception. This will damage your credibility and can lead to a loss of trust.

    Be concise

    • Get to the point.
    • Minimize word count wherever possible.

    “We tend to use a lot of jargon in our discussions, and that is a sure fire way to turn people away. We realized the message wasn’t getting out because the audience wasn’t speaking the same language. You have to take it down to the next level and help them understand where the needs are.”

    – Jeremy Clement, Director of Finance, College of Charleston

    Create a communication plan

    1 hour

    Fill out the table below.

    Stakeholder group: Identify key stakeholders who may be impacted by changes to the operations team. This might include IT leadership, management, and staff.

    Benefits: What’s in it for them?

    Impact: What are we asking in return?

    How: What mechanisms or channels will you use to communicate?

    When: When (and how often) will you get the message out?

    Benefits

    Impact

    How

    When

    IT Mgrs.

    • Improve agility, stability
    • Deliver faster against business goals
    • Respond to identified needs
    • Improve confidence in IT
    • Must support the process
    • Change and engagement issues during restructuring may affect staff engagement and productivity
    • Training budget required
    • Present at leadership meeting
    • Kick-off email
    • Sept. leadership meeting
    • Weekly touchpoints
    • Informally throughout project

    Ops Staff

    • Clearer direction and clear priorities (Operations mission statement and RACI)
    • Higher-value work – address problems, contribute to plans
    • New skills and training
    • More personal accountability
    • Push toward process consistency
    • Must make time and plan for training during work hours
    • Present at operations team’s offsite meeting
    • AMA channel on Slack
    • 1:1 meetings
    • Add RACI, org. sketch to shared folder
    • Operations offsite
    • Sept. all-hands meeting
    • Ongoing coaching and informal conversations
    InputOutput
    • Discussion
    • Communication Plan
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard/Flip Chart
    • Cloud Operations Design Working Group

    Download the Communication Plan Template

    Support the transition with a plan to acquire skills

    Identify the preferred way to acquire needed skill sets: contracting, outsourcing, training, or hiring.

    • Some cloud projects will change the demand for some skills in the organization, and not all skills should be cultivated internally. Uncertainty about future skills and jobs will cause anxiety for your team and can lead to employee exit.
    • Use Info-Tech’s research to conduct a demand analysis to identify which new and critical skills should be acquired via training or hiring (rather than outsourcing or contracting).
    • Create a roadmap to clarify when training needs to be completed, a budget plan that accounts for training costs, and role descriptions that paint a picture of future work.
    • Within the confines of a collective agreement, managers may be required to retrain staff into new roles before those staff are required to do work in their new jobs. Failing to plan can be more consequential.
    • Remember that in cloud, a wealth of automation opportunities present a great option for offloading tasks as well!

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify skills requirements and gaps as early as possible to avoid skills gaps later. Whether you plan to acquire skills via training or cross-training, hiring, contracting, or outsourcing, effectively building skills takes time. Use Info-Tech’s methodology to address skills gaps in a prioritized and rational way.

    Involve HR for implementation

    Your HR team should help you work through:

    • Which staff and managers will move to which roles, and any headcount changes.
    • Job descriptions, performance metrics, career paths, compensation, and succession planning.
    • Organizational change management and implementation plans.

    When do you need to involve HR?

    Role changes will result in job description changes.

    • New or changed job descriptions need to be evaluated for impact on pay, title, exempt status, career pathing, and more.
    • This is especially true in more traditional or unionized organizations that require specific and granular job descriptions of responsibilities.
    • Changed jobs will likely require union review and approval.

    You anticipate changes to the reporting structure.

    • Work with HR to develop a transition plan including communications, training to new managers, and support to new teams.

    You anticipate redundancies.

    • Your HR department can prepare you for difficult discussions, help you navigate labor laws, and support the offboarding process.

    You anticipate new positions.

    • Recruitment and hiring takes time. Give HR advance notice to support recruitment, hiring, and onboarding to ensure you hire the right people, with the right skills, at the right time.

    Training and development budget is required.

    • If training is a critical part of the onboarding process, don’t just assume funding is available. Work with HR to build your case.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Define Your Cloud Vision

    Define your cloud vision before it defines you.

    Document Your Cloud Strategy

    Drive consensus by outlining how your organization will use the cloud.

    Map Technical Skills for a Changing Infrastructure & Operations Organization

    Be practical and proactive – identify needed technical skills for your future-state environment and the most efficient way to acquire them.

    Bibliography

    “2021 GitLab DevSecOps Survey.” Gitlab, 2021.
    “2022 State of the Cloud Report.” Flexera, 2022.
    “DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Atwood, Jeff. “The 2030 Self-Driving Car Bet.” Coding Horror, 4 Mar 2022. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
    Campbell, Andrew. “What is an operating model?” Operational Excellence Society, 12 May 2016. Web. 13 July 2022.
    “DevOps.” Atlassian, ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Ewenstein, Boris, Wesley Smith, Ashvin Sologar. “Changing change management” McKinsey, 1 July 2015. Web. 8 April 2022.
    Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized, and how to get started.” Google Cloud Blog, 26 June 2019. Web. July 13 2022.
    “Get started: Build a cloud operations team.” Microsoft, 10 May 2021.
    ITIL Foundation: ITIL 4 Edition. Axelos, 2019.
    Humble, Jez, Joanne Molesky, and Barry O’Reilly. Lean Enterprise: How High Performance Organizations Innovate at Scale. O’Reilly Media, 2015.
    Franco, Gustavo and Matt Brown. “How SRE teams are organized and how to get started.” 26 June 2019. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Galbraith, Jay. “The Star Model”. ND. Web. 21 July 2022.
    Kahnemanm Daniel, Dan Lovallo, and Olivier Sibony. “Before you make that big decision.” Harv Bus Rev. 2011 Jun; 89(6): 50-60, 137. PMID: 21714386.
    Kesler, Greg. “Star Model of Organizational Design.” YouTube, 1 Oct 2018. Web Video. 21 Jul 2022.
    Lakhani, Usman. “Site Reliability Engineering: What Is It? Why Is It Important for Online Businesses?” Info-Tech. Web. 25 May 2020.
    Mansour, Sherif. “Product Management: The role and best practices for beginners.” Atlassian Agile Coach, n.d.
    Murphy, Annie, Jamie Kirwin, Khalid Abdul Razak. “Operating Models: Delivering on strategy and optimizing processes.” EY, 2016.
    Shults, Carlos. “What is Platform Engineering? The Concept Behind the Term.” liatrio, 3 Aug 2021. Web. 5 Aug 2022.
    Sloss, Benjamin Treynor. Site Reliability Engineering Part I: Introduction. O’Reilly Media, 2017.
    “SRE vs. Platform Engineering.” Ambassador Labs, 8 Feb 2021.
    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, n.d. Web.
    “Understand cloud operating models.” Microsoft, 02 Sept. 2022.
    Velichko, Ivan. “DevOps, SRE, and Platform Engineering.” 15 Mar 2022.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Nenad Begovic

    Executive Director, Head of IT Operations

    MUFG Investor Services

    Desmond Durham

    Manager, ICT Planning & Infrastructure

    Trinidad & Tobago Unit Trust Corporation

    Virginia Roberts

    Director, Enterprise IT

    Denver Water

    Denis Sharp

    IT/LEAN Consultant

    Three anonymous contributors

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}486|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 7.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $9,246 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 7 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk
    • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project, but also a process improvement opportunity.
    • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool, but they will not fix your processes for you.
    • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment.
    • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data.
    • ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices.
    • Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope.

    Impact and Result

    • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
    • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project.
    • Improved project management, and therefore, better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront.

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan Deck – An implementation guide that walks you through the steps to ensure the tool delivers business value.

    There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical for the success of the implementation project.

    • Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan – Phases 1-3

    2. ITSM Tool Project Charter Template – A charter to document your project scope, milestones, stakeholders, risks etc. to kick-off and manage your project.

    This project charter document summarizes the Project Overview (Description, background, drivers, and objectives), Governance and Management (Project stakeholders/roles, budget, and dependencies), and Risk, Assumptions, and Constraints (Known and potential risks and mitigation strategy).

    • ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

    3. ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist – A tool to help identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

    The checklists in this tool identify the most common decisions and preparation you will need to make to support the implementation for the ITSM modules that we recommend are set up first: incident management and service requests; change management; and asset management. Use these checklists as a model to follow for any additional ITSM modules you plan to implement, and refer to Info-Tech's blueprints for each service management topic for additional guidance.

    • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    4. ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template – A tool to help prioritize and prepare for tool rollout plan.

    This deployment plan documents the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool, and the details to execute the cutover to a live environment, including how, when, where.

    • ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    5. ITSM Tool Training Schedule – Use the tool to create your new tool training roadmap.

    This template is a guide for creating a training and communication plan as part of the implementation project for your ITSM tool. Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

    • ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    Plan ahead with a step-by-step approach to ensure the tool delivers business value.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst perspective

    Take control of the wheel or you might end up in a ditch.

    The image contains a picture of Frank Trovato.

    An ITSM tool implementation is a complex project with direct impact on IT’s ability to support the business. With that level of risk, you need to take control early on.

    Yes, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation, but they depend on you to tell them how to configure ITSM parameters and workflows that affect user interface, the ability to manage incidents, and governance over assets and IT changes.

    If you leave the configuration completely to the vendor, at best you might get the same setup as in your old tool (and not realize the benefits that leadership is expecting). At worst you end up with default values that don’t fit your process needs, i.e., confusion and not realizing expected benefits.

    A successful implementation requires early planning from a wide range of resources including ITSM tool experts (supported by the vendor), process experts, and a project manager to methodically step through the hundreds of parameters you will need to define before implementation.

    Frank Trovato
    Research Director, Infrastructure and Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Leadership has invested significantly in a new ITSM tool and expects to see the benefits they were promised by the vendor and the procurement team.

    The ITSM project team needs to balance leadership expectations with the direct impact this project will have on IT staff and end users.

    Implementing an ITSM tool is a large project that is often highly complex in part because it requires input from a wide range of stakeholders: IT staff, end users, senior management, and vendors.

    A new ITSM tool will change how IT staff work and how users are serviced, and change is always difficult.

    Finally, implementing the new tool requires a migration from an existing tool without a pause in IT service availability. Incidents don’t take a week off while you execute the final product rollout.

    There may be hundreds of parameters to define and decisions to make, so identifying the full list of tasks early is critical to:

    • Identify the necessary stakeholders to provide input into implementation decisions.
    • Properly define scope and timelines.
    • Take advantage of the opportunity to review and improve processes as part of defining what will need to be configured in the new ITSM tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    As with any large project, a key step is tackling it one bite at a time – but also understanding the size of the whole meal. This is where organizations often fail with ITSM implementations: not understanding upfront the volume of work required for a successful implementation.

    Your Challenge

    Organizations implementing a new ITSM tool often face these pitfalls:

    • Selecting the Wrong Resources: You need ITSM technology and process experts, because this is not just a technology project but also a process improvement opportunity. You will need to configure ITSM parameters and workflows in the new tool – which directly affects processes. Take advantage of that opportunity to fix pain points. For example, if your existing ticket categories are not effective, implement a better categorization scheme rather than just configure the same old, ineffective scheme.
    • Over-Reliance on the Vendor to Optimize Your Tool: Yes, the vendor will typically install and set up the tool but they will not fix your processes for you. On installation day, if you are not prepared with the categories, ticket templates, and so on that you wish to configure, your vendor will just go with the default or migrate your old parameters from your old ITSM tool.
    • Not Preparing for Data Migration: Data migration is complex. You need to determine what data to migrate, if any, and how that data will be mapped to the new environment. That takes planning and must be defined well before the vendor is ready to implement your tool.
    • Insufficient IT and End-User Training: A link to the ITSM tool manual is not enough. Staff and users need training on how your processes will be executed in the new tool.

    A survey of implementation challenges for ServiceNow’s customers

    26% Resistance to change

    43% Lacked a clear roadmap

    38% Planning for resources

    Source: Acorio, 2019

    Info-Tech’s approach

    Divide the implementation project into controllable phases for an effective implementation.

    Plan

    Define the scope of your project, identify and get buy-in from your stakeholders, and establish a timeframe for the implementation.

    Design & Build

    Identify existing process challenges and design workflows and ticket management to improve processes. Make decisions on data migrations and integrations for your new tool.

    Deploy & Train

    Create a rollout plan and communicate changes and improvements to users. Plan for the new tool deployment and monitor your solution.

    STOP: Use this blueprint after you have selected an ITSM solution

    Leverage our SoftwareReviews service and related blueprints to assist with ITSM tool selection, and then use this blueprint to plan the implementation.

    1. Evaluate solutions

    2. Select and purchase

    3. Implement (use this blueprint)

    Use our SoftwareReviews resources to evaluate solutions and vendors based on criteria such as features and customer service. Below are links to our ITSM software reviews:

    Use the following resources to help you make the case for funding and execute the purchase process:

    Your ITSM vendor or systems integrator will lead the technical implementation (e.g. software install and integration).

    As a result, your implementation plan needs to focus on preparing the information needed for implementation (e.g. ticket categories, workflow requirements) and organizational change management.

    This blueprint provides a methodology, checklist, and supporting templates to prepare for the implementation.

    Info-Tech’s methodology to build an ITSM Tool Implementation Plan

    1. Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

    2. Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    3. Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Document define scope

    1.2 Define roles and responsibilities

    1.3 Identify preliminary timeline

    2.1 Review your existing solution and challenges

    2.2 Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

    2.3 Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations

    2.4 Plan the module rollout

    3.1 Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

    3.2 Create a training plan

    3.3 Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    Phase Outcomes

    • RACI chart outlining high-level accountability and responsibilities for the project
    • Documenting timeline and team for the implementation project
    • ITSM tool implementation checklist
    • Strategy and identified opportunities to implement incident and service request modules
    • Documented communications and targeted training plan
    • Completed rollout plan and prepared to monitor your success metrics

    Insight summary

    Start with the assumption you don’t need to migrate old data

    ITSM tools are designed to support ITIL best practices

    Implement your new tool in stages to manage scope

    We all love data. We love being able to run reports showing trends, measuring changes over time, and highlighting pain points – but is your data from five years ago relevant to those assessments? Can you get by with just migrating open tickets and perhaps just the last year of critical tickets?

    Be ruthless in deciding what really needs to be in your active system to support incident matching, troubleshooting, or ongoing reporting.

    If you can’t make a strong case, don’t waste your time on old data. Remember, you can still save an exported copy or report of your old data if the need arises to search historical records.

    For organizations lacking process maturity, the tool’s default settings will often provide a good starting point. For example, a good ITSM tool will typically already be configured to follow best practices such as:

    • Separating incidents from service requests
    • Assigning resolution codes to solved tickets
    • Enabling routing based on categories

    Within those defaults, you will still need to decide your specific parameters – e.g. what your categories and resolution codes should be – so don’t blindly follow default settings but use them as a starting point.

    Start with the incident management and service requests modules. Those are typically the core of IT service management operations, so that should help realize benefits from the new tool sooner. In addition, incident management and service requests processes will support other ITSM processes such as asset management and problem management.

    Once those modules are implemented successfully (from a technology and process perspective), then start to implement your next core module (e.g. asset or change management), and continue to build from there.

    Blueprint deliverables

    This blueprint includes tools and templates to help you accomplish your goals:

    ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    Identify the most common decisions you will need to make and prepare for your implementation project.

    ITSM Tool Project Charter Template

    Review and edit the template to suit your project requirements

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Project Charter Template.
    The image contains screenshots of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist.

    ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Prioritize and prepare tool rollout plan

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

    ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Use the checklist to create your new tool training roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

    Blueprint benefits

    Benefits for IT

    Benefits for the business

    • Checklists and templates to support a smoother transition to the new ITSM tool.
    • Opportunity to review and optimize processes as part of the ITSM tool implementation project. A new tool with the same old processes will not achieve expected benefits.
    • Ability to plan and scope the project to avoid or reduce last-minute chaos.
    • Better planning means better results – specifically, ensuring that the implementation takes into account targeted business benefits.
    • Improved project management, and therefore better cost and effort estimates, by identifying required tasks upfront. This also provides the opportunity to re-scope or adjust timelines based on estimated effort.
    • Higher end-user satisfaction by executing a well-organized ITSM tool implementation.

    Measured value from using this blueprint

    Use this guide as an example to calculate your total cost savings from the ITSM tool implementation project.

    Phase 1

    Identify Scope, Stakeholders, and Preliminary Timeline

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to define scope and plan your project

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

    Phase 2

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to build your solution strategy and determine configurations

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 8 days * $80,000/year = $5,400/-

    Phase 3

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s methodology to establish an effective communications roadmap and deploy tool

    E.g. 2 FTEs * 6 days * $80,000/year = $4,000/-

    Total Savings

    Total Savings

    Phase 1 + Phase 2 + Phase 3 = $13,400

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting
    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.” “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.” “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Define scope, roles, responsibilities and timeline.

    Call #2: Review your existing solution and challenges.

    Call #3: Plan ticket management and workflow implementation.

    Call #4: Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations.

    Call #5: Plan the module rollout.

    Call #6: Create a communication plan.

    Call #7: Create a training plan.

    Call #8: Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. A typical GI is between 6 to 8 calls over the course of 3 to 6 months.

    Phase 1

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    1. Define scope
    2. Define roles and responsibilities
    3. Identify preliminary timeline

    Step 1.1

    Define scope

    Activities

    1.1.1

    Use the Project Charter Template to capture project parameters

    1.1.2

    Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

    1.1.3

    Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

    1.1.4

    Interview ITSM staff to identify current tool challenges and support organizational change management

    1.1.5

    Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

    1.1.6

    Determine if data migration is required

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define the scope of the implementation project
    • Establish the future processes and functionalities the tool will support

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Specifying the implementation project
    • Identifying the business units that are needed to support the project
    • Defining the ongoing and future service management processes the tool will support

    1.1.1 Use the Project Charter Template to capture scope, stakeholders, and timeline as outlined in Phase 1

    Follow the instructions in Phase 1 (step 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3) to gather information needed to create a project charter to define project parameters.

    Specific subsections are listed below and described in more detail in the remainder of this phase.

    1. Project Overview: Includes deliverables, scope, milestones, and success metrics.
    2. Governance and Management: Includes roles, responsibilities, and resource requirements.
    3. Project Risks, Assumptions, and Constraints: Includes risks and mitigation strategies as well as any assumptions and constraints.
    4. Project Sign-Off: Includes IT and executive sign-off (if required).

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

    Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Project Charter Template

    1.1.2 Leverage the Implementation Checklist to guide your preparation

    The checklist tabs align to each phase of this blueprint.

    • Phase 1 (Tab 1) – Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline
    • Phase 2 (Tab 2) – Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules
    • Phase 3 (Tabs 3+4) – Prepare to Implement Additional ITSM Modules (e.g. Change Management)
    • Phase 4 (deployment section in each tab) – Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    The image contains screenshots from the Implementation Checklist.

    Download the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    1.1.3 Review goals that drove the ITSM tool purchase

    Identify the triggers for the selection and implementation of your new ITSM tool.

    Whether this is your first ITSM tool or a replacement for your old tool, the project was likely triggered by pain points that must be addressed by the new tool to improve your service desk. Having a clear understanding of these pain points throughout the implementation of your new tool will help to prevent them from reoccurring.

    Common ITSM pain points include:

    1. Poor communication with end users on ticket status.
    2. Lack of SLA automation to escalate issues to the appropriate channels.
    3. Poor self-service options for end users to perform simple requests on their own.
    4. Undeveloped knowledgebase for users to find answers to common issues.
    5. Lack of reporting or mistrust in reporting data.
    6. Lack of automation, including ticket templates.
    7. Overcomplicated ticket categories resulting in categories being misused.
    8. Overconfiguration prevents future upgrades.
    9. Lack of integration with other tools.

    If you haven't already selected an ITSM tool, leverage the IT Service Management Selection Guide to select the right tool.

    Download the IT Service Management Selection Guide

    1.1.4 Plan to interview staff to support organizational change management

    Identify challenges with the existing tool and processes as well as potential objections to the new tool.

    Incorporate this feedback in the implementation to drive buy-in and a successful rollout.

    Implementing a new ITSM tool will force changes in how IT staff do their work:

    • At a minimum, it means learning a new interface.
    • It could also mean leveraging features that improve IT operations but could change the process or tasks for the staff.
    • Their input on the current tool and process challenges can be critical for the project.
    • Solving at least some of their challenges can help bring them onboard to use this tool properly and follow associated process changes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep management in the loop through every stage of the implementation process. They are the ones who are paying for the software, so they need to be informed throughout implementation and feel that their needs and feedback are being heard to prevent pushback further into the implementation.

    1.1.5 Identify the modules and features you will plan to implement

    Consider these factors when deciding what modules and features you want to implement:

    • Specific ITSM modules based on the recommended order and any unique business requirements
    • Key features that drove the tool purchase and address key issues
    • High-level process changes needed to address challenges and realize expected benefits from the new ITSM tool (e.g. if a key goal was automated ticket routing based on categories, then the project needs to include developing a good categorization scheme)

    Recommended order for implementation:

    1. Incident Management and Service Request
    2. This is the core of service management and typically has the highest impact on the organization. Include knowledgebase development as part of this implementation.

    3. Change Management
    4. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to minimize disruptions to IT services when making changes to services and critical systems.

    5. Asset Management
    6. A foundational component of service management, it allows organizations to track their assets’ locations, how they are used, and when changes are made to them.

    1.1.6 Determine if data migration is required

    If you are switching from a previous ITSM tool, carefully weigh the pros and cons as well as the necessity of migrating historical transactional data before deciding to import it into the new tool.

    Importing your old transactional data will allow you to track metrics over time, which can be valuable for data analysis and reporting purposes.

    However, ask yourself what the true value of your data is before you import it.

    You will not get value out of migrating the old data if:

    • You have incomplete or inaccurate data (a high percentage of incidents did not have tickets created in the old system).
    • The categorization of your old tickets was not useful or was used inconsistently.
    • You plan on changing the ticket categorization in the new system.

    “Don’t debate whether you can import your old data until you’ve made sure that you should.”

    – Barry Cousins, Practice Lead at Info-Tech Research Group

    Info-Tech Insight

    If you decide to migrate your data, keep in mind that it can be a complex process and proper time should be budgeted for planning, structuring the data, and importing and testing it.

    Step 1.2

    Define roles and responsibilities

    Activities

    1.2.1

    Key internal roles and responsibilities

    1.2.2

    Key external roles and responsibilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Decision on whether to hire professional services for the implementation
    • Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for the project

    1.2.1 Identify key internal roles and responsibilities

    Review the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist to help you identify appropriate roles and specific staff that will be needed to execute this project.

    Project Role

    Description

    RACI

    Assigned To

    Executive Sponsor

    Liaison with the executive team (the CIO would be a good candidate for this role).

    Accountable for project completion.

    Approves resource allocation and funding.

    A, C

    Name(s)

    Project Manager

    Manages the project schedule, tasks, and budget.

    May act as a liaison between executives and the project-level team.

    R

    Name(s)

    Product Owner

    Liaison with the vendor.

    SME for the new tool.

    Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

    Manages the tool post-implementation.

    R

    Name(s)

    Process Owners

    Define current processes.

    Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address and potential changes as part of the new tool implementation.

    R

    Name(s)

    Service Desk Manager

    Provides input to tool configuration decisions.

    Manages and trains service desk agents to use new tool and processes.

    R

    Name(s)

    ITSM Tool Core Users (e.g. Service Desk Technicians)

    Provide input to identifying current-state process challenges to address.

    Provide input to tool configuration decisions.

    C

    Name(s)

    RACI = Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed

    Assign individuals to roles through each step of the implementation project in the governance and management chart in the Project Charter Template.

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.2.2 Key external roles and responsibilities

    Determine whether you will engage professional services for the implementation.

    There are three main ways to implement your ITSM tool

    Implemented in-house by own staff

    Implemented using a combination of your own staff and your ITSM tool vendor

    Implemented by professional services and your ITSM tool vendor

    DIY Implementation

    Adopting a DIY implementation approach can save money but could draw out your implementation timeline and increase the likelihood of errors. Carefully consider your integration environment to determine your resourcing capabilities and maturity.

    Vendor Implementation

    In most cases, your vendor will support or execute the technical implementation based on your requirements. Use this blueprint to help you define those requirements.

    Professional Services

    Opting for professional services may result in a shorter implementation period and fewer errors but may also deny your IT staff the opportunity to develop the skills necessary to maintain and configure the solution in the future.

    Clarify the role of the professional services vendor before acquiring their services to make sure your expectations are aligned. For example, are you hiring the vendor for tool installation, tool configuration, or tool customization or for training your end users?

    Step 1.3

    Identify preliminary timeline

    Activities

    1.3.1

    Identify preliminary internal target dates

    1.3.2

    Identify target dates for vendor involvement

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director/Manager
    • Service Manager
    • Project Manager and the project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Specifying the target dates for the implementation project

    1.3.1 Identify preliminary internal target dates

    Identify high-level start and end dates based on the following:

    • Existing process maturity
    • Process changes required (to address process issues or to realize targeted benefits from the new tool)
    • Data migration requirements (if any)
    • Information to prepare for the implementation (review the Checklist Tool)
    • Vendor availability to support implementation
    • Executive mandates that have established specific milestone dates

    Create an initial project schedule:

    • Review the remaining phases of this blueprint for more details on the implementation planning steps.
    • Review and update the Checklist Tool to suit your implementation goals and requirements.
    • Assign task owners and target dates in the Checklist Tool.

    Note: This is a preliminary schedule. Monitor progress as well as requirement changes, and adjust the scope or schedule as needed.

    Update the columns in the Checklist Tool to plan and keep track of your implementation project.

    1.3.2 Identify target dates for vendor involvement

    Plan when you'll be ready for the vendor and identify the key points for when the vendor will come in.

    Are dates already scheduled for tool installation/configuration/customization?

    If yes:

    • Clarify vendor expectations for those target dates (i.e. what do you have to have prepared in advance?).
    • Determine options to adjust dates if needed.

    If no:

    • Defer scheduling until you have reviewed and updated the Implementation Checklist. The checklist will help you determine your readiness for vendor involvement.

    Consider if the vendor will implement the ITSM tool in one go or if they will help setup the tool in stages. Keep in mind that ITSM implementation projects typically take anywhere from 9 weeks to 16 months and plan accordingly depending on the maturity of your processes and the modules and features you plan to implement.

    Use your internal target dates to estimate when you'll be ready for the vendor to set up the tool and implement the setting that you've defined.

    Phase 2

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    • Review your existing solution and challenges
    • Plan ticket management and workflow implementation
    • Plan data migration, knowledgebase setup, and integrations
    • Plan the module rollout

    Additional Info-Tech Research

    The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in these blueprints.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

    Step 2.1

    Review your existing solution and challenges

    Activities

    2.1.1

    Configure, don’t customize, your solution to minimize risk

    2.1.2

    Review your existing process and solution challenges for opportunities for improvement

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    2.1.1 Configure your tool, don’t customize it

    Your tool may require at least some basic configurations to align with your processes, but in most cases customization of the tool is not recommended.

    Configuration

    Customization

    • Creating settings and recording reference data in the tool within the normal functionality of the tool.
    • Does not require changes to source code.

    Documentation of configurations is key.

    Failure to document configurations and the reasons for specific configurations will lead to:

    • Difficulty diagnosing incidents and problems.
    • Difficulty reconstructing the tool in the case of disaster recovery.
    • One administrator having all of the knowledge of configurations and taking it with them if they leave the organization.
    • Configurations that become useless in the future are maintained and lead to unnecessary work if documentation is not regularly reviewed.
    • Extending the functionality of the tool beyond what it was originally intended to do.
    • Requires manual changes to source code.

    Carefully consider whether a customization is necessary.

    • Over-customization of your ITSM tool code may lock you into your current version of the software by preventing future patches and upgrades, leaving you with outdated software.
    • Over-customization becomes particularly risky when your ITSM solution is integrated with other tools, as a loss in functionality of your ITSM tool resulting from over-customization may cause disruptions across the business.
    • If your selected ITSM solution doesn’t do something you think you need it to do, carefully evaluate whether you really need that customization and if the trade-off of potentially limiting future innovation is worth it.

    Case Study

    Consider the consequences of over-customizing your solution.

    INDUSTRY: Education

    SOURCE: IT Director

    Situation

    Challenge

    Resolution

    A few years ago, the service management office at the university decided to switch ITSM tools, from Computer Associates to ServiceNow.

    They wanted the new tool to behave similarly to what they had previously, so they made a lot of customized code changes to ServiceNow during implementation.

    As a result of the customizations, much of the functionality of the tool was restricted, and the upgrades were not compatible with the solution.

    The external consultants who performed the customizations and backend work did not document their changes, leaving the service management team without an understanding of why they did what they did.

    The service management team is working with ServiceNow to slowly unravel the custom code to try to get the solution back to having out-of-the-box functionality, with the ability to be upgraded.

    It has been challenging to do this work without disrupting the functionality of the tool.

    Over-customization led to the organization paying for features they couldn’t use and spending more time and resources down the road to try to reverse the changes.

    2.1.2 Review your existing process to identify opportunities for improvement

    Documenting your existing processes is an effective method for also reviewing those processes and identifying inefficiencies. Take advantage of this project to fix your process issues.

    1. Document your existing workflows for incident management and service requests.
    2. Review your workflows to identify opportunities to optimize through process refinement (e.g. clarifying escalation guidelines) or by leveraging features in your new ITSM tool (e.g. improved workflow automation).
    3. Similarly, review the challenges identified through stakeholder interviews: is there an opportunity address those challenges through process changes or leveraging your new ITSM tool?
    4. Address those challenge and issues as you execute the tasks outlined in the Implementation Checklist Tool. For example, if inconsistent ticket routing was identified as a challenge due to a vague categorization scheme, that’s a driver to review and update your scheme rather than just carry forward your existing scheme.

    Regardless of your existing ITSM maturity, this is an opportunity to review and optimize existing processes. Even the most-mature organizations can typically find an area to improve.

    Case Study

    Reviewing and defining processes before the implementation can be a project in itself.

    INDUSTRY: Defense

    SOURCE: Anonymous

    Situation

    Challenge

    Resolution

    The organization was switching to a new ITSM tool. To prepare for the implementation, they gathered stakeholders, held steering committee meetings, and broke down key processes, teams, and owners before even meeting with the larger group.

    They used a software tool called InDesign to visibly map service requests and incidents and determine who owned each process and where the handoffs were.

    The service catalog also needed to be built out as they were performing certain services that didn’t relate to anything in the catalog.

    The goal for the implementation was to have it completed within a year, but it ended up going over, taking 15 to 16 months to complete.

    Most of the time was spent identifying processes upfront before configuring the tool. There were difficulties defining processes as well as agreeing on who owned a process or service.

    There were also difficulties agreeing upon who the valid stakeholders were for processes, as groups were siloed.

    The major obstacles to implementation were therefore people and process, not the product.

    New processes were introduced, and boundaries were placed around processes that were being done in the past that weren’t necessary.

    Once the groups were able to agree upon process owners, the tool configuration and implementation itself did not pose any major difficulties.

    After the implementation, the tool was continually improved and sharpened to adapt to processes.

    Step 2.2

    Plan ticket management and workflow implementation

    Activities

    2.2.1

    Define ticket classification values

    2.2.2

    Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

    2.2.3

    Plan your ticket intake channels

    2.2.4

    Design a self-service portal

    2.2.5

    Plan your knowledgebase implementation in the new tool

    2.2.6

    Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

    2.2.7

    Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/ service groups

    2.2.8

    Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

    2.2.9

    Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    Tool is designed and configured to support service desk processes and organization needs.

    Checklist overview

    The ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist will help you estimate resources required to support demand, based on your ticket volume.

    TAB 2

    TAB 3

    TAB 4

    Incident and Service Modules Checklist

    Change Management Modules

    Asset Management Modules

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 2. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 3. The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist, tab 4.

    How to follow this section:

    The following slides contain a table that explains why each task in the module matters and what needs to be considered. Complete the checklist modules referring to this section.

    2.2.1 Define ticket classification values

    Ticket classification improves reporting, workflow automation, and problem identification.

    Review your existing ticket classification values to identify what to carry forward, drop, or change. For example, if your categorization scheme has become too complex, this is your opportunity to fix it; don’t perpetuate ineffective classification in the new tool.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Ticket Types (e.g. incident, service request, change)

    In particular, separating incidents from service requests supports appropriate ticket prioritization and resourcing; for example, an incident typically should be prioritized, and service requests can be scheduled.

    Categories (e.g. network, servers)

    An effective categorization scheme can help identify ticket assignment and escalation (e.g. network tickets would be escalated to the network team), and potentially automate ticket routing.

    Resolution Codes

    Indicates how the ticket was resolved (e.g. configuration change). Supports another layer of trends reporting and data to support problem identification.

    Status Values

    Shows what status the ticket is currently in (e.g. if the ticket has been opened or assigned to an agent, if it is in progress or has been resolved).

    2.2.2 Define ticket templates for common incident types and service requests

    Ticket templates are the backbone of automation. A common complaint is that tickets take too much time. However, a little planning can reduce the time it takes to create a ticket to less than a minute.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify common recurring tickets that would be good candidates for using ticket templates (e.g. common service requests and incidents).

    Some common recurring tickets such as password reset, new laptop, and login requests would be great candidates to create ticket templates for. Building a deck of standard rules to follow for common tickets saves time and reduces the number of tickets generated.

    Design ticket templates and workflows for common tickets (e.g. fields to auto-populate as well as routing and secondary tickets for onboarding requests).

    Differentiating between recurring ticket types and building pre-defined templates not just saves time but can also have major impact on how service is delivered as this will also help separate tickets. Creating these templates beforehand will also let you communicate effectively with the users at a time when all hands need to be on deck.

    2.2.3 Plan your ticket intake channels

    Consider possible ticket intake channels and evaluate their relevance to your organization.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Decide on ticket intake channels (e.g. phone, email, portal, walk-ups).

    Each standard intake channel serves its own purposes and can be extremely valuable under different circumstances. For example, walk-ins may be inefficient but necessary for critical incidents.

    If using email, identify/create the email account and appropriate permissions.

    Email works well if it automatically creates a ticket in your ticketing system, but users often don’t provide enough information in unstructured emails. Use required fields and ticket templates to ensure the ticket is properly categorized.

    If using phone, identify/create the phone number and appropriate integrations.

    Maintain the phone for users from other locations and for critical incidents but encourage users who call in to submit a ticket through the portal.

    If using a portal, determine if you will leverage the tool's portal or an existing portal.

    The web portal is the most efficient intake method, but ensure it is user friendly before promoting it.

    If using chat, determine whether you will use the tool's chat or an existing chat mechanism and whether integrations are needed.

    Another way to improve support experience for your customers is through live chat. This gives your customers an easy way to reach you at the exact moment they have questions or issues they can't fix.

    2.2.4 Design a self-service portal

    Map your processes to the tool by defining your ticket input, categories, escalations, and workflows.

    Don’t forget about the client-facing side of the solution. It is important to build a self-serve portal that has an easy-to-use interface where the user can easily find the category for the help they’re looking for. It is also necessary to educate the users on where to find the portal or how to access it.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify components to include (e.g. service request, incident, knowledgebase).

    Identify the categories you want the users to be able to access in the portal. Finding the right balance of components to include is very important to make it easy for your users to find all the relevant information they are looking for. This could mean fewer tickets.

    Plan the input form for service requests and incidents (e.g. mandatory fields, optional fields, drop-down lists).

    Having relevant and specific fields helps to narrow down your user’s issues and provides more information on how to allocate these tasks among the service desk resources and reduce time to further investigate the issues.

    If service catalog will be attached to the ITSM tool, define routing and workflows; if there is no existing service catalog, start a separate project to define it (e.g. services, SLAs).

    A centrally defined guide enables a uniform quality in service and clarifies the responsible tier for the ticket. Identify services that will be included in the catalog, and if the information is attached to the ITSM tool, plan for how will the routing and workflows be structured.

    Plan design requirements (e.g. company branding).

    Ensure that the portal is aligned with the company’s theme and access format. Work with the vendor to customize the branding on the tool, design requirements, images.

    2.2.5 Plan your knowledgebase (KB) implementation in the new tool

    Evaluate how onerous KB migration will be for you. Is this an opportunity to improve how the KB is organized?

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define knowledgebase categories and structure.

    Establishing knowledgebase structures or having them separated into categories makes it easy for your clients to find them (e.g. do they align with ticket categories?).

    Identify existing knowledgebase articles to add to the new tool.

    Review existing knowledgebase articles at a high level (e.g. Do you carry forward all existing articles? Take an opportunity to retire old articles?).

    Define knowledgebase article templates.

    Having standardized templates makes it an easy read and will increase its usage (e.g. all knowledgebase articles for recurring incidents will follow the same template).

    Build knowledgebase article creation, usage, and revision workflows.

    Decide how new knowledgebase articles will be built and added to the tool, how it will be accessed and used, and also any steps necessary to update the articles.

    Plan a knowledgebase feedback system.

    For example, include a comments section, like buttons, and who will get notified about feedback.

    2.2.6 Design your ticket status notification processes and templates

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify triggers for status notifications. Balance the need for keeping users informed versus notifications being treated as spam.

    Identify when and where the users are informed to make sure you are not under or over communicating with them. Status notifications and alerts are a great way to set or reset expectations to your users on the delivery or resolution on their tickets. For example, auto-response for a new ticket, or status updates to users when the ticket is assigned, solved, and closed.

    If using email notifications, design email templates for each type of notification.

    Creating notification templates is a great way to provide standardized service to your clients and it saves time when a ticket is raised. For example, email templates for new ticket, ticket updated, or ticket closed.

    Plan how you will enable users to validate the ticket or resolve request without causing the ticket to reopen.

    For example, in the ticket solved template, provide a link to close the ticket, and ask the user to reply only if they wish to re-open the ticket (i.e. if it's not resolved). May require consulting with the ITSM tool vendor.

    Decide if customer satisfaction surveys will be sent to end users after their ticket has been closed.

    Discuss if this data would be useful to you if captured to improve/modify your service.

    If customer satisfaction surveys will be used, design the survey.

    Discuss what data would be useful to you if captured and create survey questionnaires to capture that data from your clients. For example, how many questions, types of questions, whether sent for every ticket or randomly.

    2.2.7 Identify required user accounts, access levels, and skills/service groups

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define Tier 1, 2, and 3 roles and their associated access levels.

    Having pre-established roles for different tiers and teams is a great way to boost accountability and also helps identify training requirements for each tier. For example, knowledgebase training for tier 1 & 2, reporting/analytics for IT manager.

    Identify skill groups or support teams.

    Establishing accountability for all the support practices in the service desk is important for the tickets to be effectively distributed among the functional individuals and teams. Identifying the responsibilities of groups help execute shift-left strategy.

    Identify required email permissions for each role.

    For example, define which roles get permissions to include status updates or other ticket information in their emails or to support automated notifications and other integrations with email.

    Determine how you will import users into the new tool.

    Identify the best way to migrate your users to the new tool whether it be by importing from Active Directory or the old ITSM tool, etc.

    2.2.8 Review and update your workflows and escalation rules

    Task

    Why this matters

    Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

    Document your workflows and review it to make sure it’s accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

    Review the future-state workflows.

    This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

    Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

    Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

    Identify opportunities to further automate workflows by leveraging the new tool.

    The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

    2.2.9 Identify desired reporting and relevant metrics to track

    Documentation of key metrics of service desk performance and end-user satisfaction that you wish to improve through the new solution is key to evaluate the success of your implementation.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Define the metrics you will track in the new ITSM tool.

    It is critical to ensure that your tool will be able to track necessary metrics on KPIs from the start and that this data is accurate and reliable so that reporting will be relevant and meaningful to the business. Whether you use your own tool for tracking metrics or an external tool, ensure that you can get the internal data you need from the ITSM tool. This may include measures of Productivity (e.g. time to respond, time to resolve), Service (e.g. incident backlog, customer satisfaction), and Proactiveness (e.g. number of knowledgebase articles per week).

    Determine what reports you want to generate from data collected through the tool.

    It’s not enough to simply set up metrics, you have to actually use the information. Reports should be analyzed regularly and used to manage costs and productivity, improve services, and identify issues. Ensure that your service desk team contributes to the usefulness of reporting by following processes such as creating tickets for every incident and request, categorizing it properly, and closing it after it’s resolved with the proper resolution code.

    Identify the information and metrics to include in the ITSM tool's dashboards.

    A dashboard helps drive accountability across the team through greater visibility. Decide what will be reported on the dashboard. For example, average time to resolution, number of open tickets with subtotals for each priority, problem ticket aging.

    Step 2.3

    Plan data migration and integrations

    Activities

    2.3.1

    Create a data migration and archiving plan

    2.3.2

    Identify and plan required integrations

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    • Decisions made around data migration, integrations, automation, and reporting.
    • ITSM Tool Implementation Checklist

    2.3.1 Create a data migration and archiving plan

    Task

    Why this matters

    Document your future-state incident and service request workflows that will incorporate the above planning as well as improvements supported by the new tool.

    Document your workflows and review them to make sure they’re accurate and also to help you with communicating process expectations to all the stakeholders.

    Review the future-state workflows.

    This helps you validate that the planned changes meet your goals and identify any additional required changes.

    Update ticket classification values, templates, and ticket intake as needed based on the future-state workflows.

    Documenting your process might uncover additional requirements for classification, templates, etc. Ensure that the classification templates and related parameters align with the workflows.

    Identify opportunities to further automate workflows leveraging the new tool.

    The process of reviewing the workflows often helps identify manual processes, labor-intensive processes, very repetitive processes, etc. These can be opportunities to further automate your processes.

    2.3.2 Identify and plan required integrations

    Consider and plan for any necessary integrations with other systems.

    A major component of the implementation that should be carefully considered throughout is if and how to integrate your ITSM tool with other applications in the environment.

    Task

    Why this matters

    Identify the systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool (e.g. asset discovery tools, reporting systems).

    Regardless of whether your solution will be configured and installed on-premises or as a SaaS, you need to consider the underlying technology to determine how you will integrate it with other tools where necessary.

    Businesses may need to integrate their ITSM tool with other systems including asset management, network monitoring, and reporting systems to make the organization more efficient.

    Determine how data will flow between systems.

    Carefully evaluate the purpose of each integration. Clients often want their ITSM tool to be integrated with all of the available data in another application when they only need a subset of that data to be integrated.

    Consider not only which systems you need to integrate with your ITSM tool but also who the owners of those systems are and which way the data needs to flow.

    Plan the development, configuration, and testing of integrations.

    As with other aspects of the implementation, configure and test the integrations before going live with the tool.

    Step 2.4

    Plan the module rollout

    Activities

    2.4.1

    Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

    2.4.2

    Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. Service Manager and Service Desk Team
    2. Project Manager and Core Project Team
    3. Subject Matter Experts and Tool Administrator, if applicable

    Outcomes of this step

    Identify and plan for additional modules and features to be implemented

    2.4.1 Repeat the methodology for additional ITSM modules, using the Checklists as a guide

    The preparation completed in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provide a foundation for additional ITSM modules.

    This blueprint starts with the incident management and service request modules as those are typically implemented first since they are the most impactful to day-to-day IT service management.

    In addition, the methodology outlined in Phase 1 and 2 to this point provides a model to follow for additional ITSM modules:

    • If you did not already account for additional modules in Phase 1, then repeat the steps in Phase 1 to define scope, stakeholders, and timeline.
    • The Implementation Checklist Tool provides tabs for Change Management and Asset Management to outline the specific details for those topic areas, but they follow the same high-level steps as Phase 2 (e.g. review existing processes, design relevant workflows).
    • If you are planning to implement other modules (e.g. Problem Management), create additional tabs in the Implementation Checklist Tool as needed, using the existing tabs as a base.
    The image contains screenshots of the ITSM checklists.

    2.4.2 Leverage these blueprints to help you implement change and asset management modules

    The Implementation Checklist Tool summarizes what you need to prepare for the implementation. If you need more assistance with developing the underlying ITSM processes, use the tools, templates, and guidance in the blueprints below.

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Create an SOP and associated process workflows to streamline and standardize hardware asset management.

    Implement Software Asset Management

    Build on a strong hardware asset management program to also properly track and manage software assets. This includes managing software licensing, finding opportunities to reduce costs, and improving your software audit readiness.

    Phase 3

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3

    Identify Stakeholders, Scope, and Preliminary Timeline

    Prepare to Implement Incident Management and Service Request Modules

    Create a Deployment Plan (Communication, Training, Rollout)

    This phase will walk you through the following steps:

    1. Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)
    2. Create a training plan
    3. Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Use the template to document and plan the communications and training needs prior to deployment of the new tool.

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Training Schedule.

    Use the deployment plan template to document the strategy and decisions made for making the transition to the new ITSM tool.

    The image contains a screenshot of the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template.

    Download the ITSM Tool Training Schedule

    Download the ITSM Tool Deployment Plan Template

    Step 3.1

    Create a communication plan (for IT, users, and business leaders)

    Activities

    3.1.1

    Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

    3.1.2

    Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve to accommodate natural resistance

    3.1.3

    Communicate new processes with business leaders and end users to improve positive customer feedback

    This step involves the following participants:

    1. CIO/IT Director
    2. IT Manager
    3. Service Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    Plan for communicating the change with business executives, service desk agents, and end users.

    3.1.1 Ensure there is strong communication from management throughout the implementation and deployment

    A common contributing factor for unsuccessful implementation is a lack of communication around training, transitioning, and deploying the new tool.

    Common Pitfall:

    Organizational communication and change management should have been ongoing and tightly monitored throughout the project. However, cut-over is a time in which critical communication regarding deployment and proper user training can be derailed when last-minute preparations take priority. Not only will general user frustration increase, but unintended process workarounds will emerge, eroding system effectiveness.

    Mitigating Actions:

    Deliver training for end users that will be engaged in testing. For all other users, deliver training prior to go-live to avoid the risk of training too early (where materials may not be ready or users are likely to forget what was learned). If possible, host quick refresher training a week or two prior to go-live.

    Aim to communicate the upcoming go-live. The purpose of communication here is to reiterate expectations, complexities, and ramifications on business going forward. Alleviate performance anxiety by clearly stating that temporary drops in productivity are to be expected and that there will be appropriate assistance throughout the transition period.

    Transition: Have the project/program manager remain on the project team for some time after deployment to oversee and assure smooth transition for the organization.

    Complete training: Have a clear plan for training those users that were missed in the first round of training as well as a plan for ongoing training for those that require refresher training, for new joiners to your organization, and for any training requirements that result from subsequent upgrades.

    3.1.2 Base your communications timeline on a classic change curve

    It’s important to communicate the change ahead of the implementation, but also to reinforce that communication after implementation to recover from any resistance that occurs through the implementation itself.

    Stages in a typical change curve:

    1. Change is announced. Some people are skeptical and resistant, but others are enthusiastic. Most people are fence sitters; if they trust senior leadership, they will give the benefit of the doubt and expect change to be good.
    2. Positive sentiment declines as implementation approaches. Training and other disruptions take people’s time and energy away from their work. Project setbacks and delays take credibility away from project leaders and seem to validate the efforts of saboteurs and skeptics.
    3. Overall sentiment begins to improve as people adjust and see real progress made. Ideally, early successes or quick wins neutralize saboteurs and convert skeptics. At the very least, people will begin to accept and adapt to new realities.
    4. If the project is successful and communication is reinforced after implementation, sentiment will peak and level out over time as people move on to other projects.

    The image contains a diagram of a change curve.

    1. Honeymoon of “Uninformed Optimism”: Tentative support and enthusiasm for change before people have really felt or understood what it involves.
    2. Backlash of “Informed Pessimism” (leading to “Valley of Despair”): People realize they’ve overestimated the benefits (or how soon they’ll be achieved) and underestimated the difficulty of change.
    3. Valley of Despair and beginning of “Hopeful Realism”: Sentiment bottoms out and people begin to accept the difficulty (or inevitability) of change.
    4. Bounce of “Informed Optimism”: More optimism and support when people begin to see bright spots and early successes.
    5. Contentment of “Completion”: Change has been successfully adopted and benefits are being realized.

    3.1.3 Communicate new processes

    1. Communicate with business unit leaders and users:
    • Focus on the benefits for end users to encourage buy-in for the change.
    • Include preliminary instructions with a date for training sessions.
  • Train users:
    • Teach users how to contact the service desk and submit a ticket.
    • Set expectations for IT’s response.
    • Record all your training sessions so it can used for recursive training.
  • Enforce:
    • IT must point users toward the new process, but ad hoc requests should still be expected at first. Deal with these politely but encourage all employees to use the new service desk ticketing process, if applicable.
  • Measure success:
    • Continue to adjust communications if processes aren’t being followed to ensure SLAs can be met and improved.

    “Communicate with your end users in phase 1 to let them know what will be changing, get feedback and buy-in, and inform them that training will be happening, then ensure you train them once the tool is installed. A lot of times we’ll get our tool set up but people don’t know how to use it."

    – Director of ITSM Tools

    Info-Tech Insight

    If there is a new process for ticket input, consider using a reward system for users who submit a ticket through the proper channel ;(e.g. email or self-serve portal) instead of their old method (e.g. phone). However, if a significant cultural change is required, don’t expect it to happen right away.

    Step 3.2

    Create a training plan

    Activities

    3.2.1

    Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk, service groups, IT managers

    3.3.1

    Provide training (tool/portal and process changes)

    3.4.1

    Choose an appropriate training delivery method that will focus on both process and tool

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Training modules for different users of the tool.
    • Assignment of training modules to users and schedule for completion.

    3.2.1 Target training session(s) to the specific needs of your service desk and IT staff

    Create targeted role-based training programs for your service desk analysts; they care about the portion of the solution they are responsible for, not the functionality that is irrelevant to their job.

    Create and execute a role-based training program by conducting training sessions for targeted groups of users, training them on the functions they require to perform their jobs.

    Use a table like this one to help identify which roles should be trained on which tasks within the ITSM tool.

    The image contains a table as an example of identifying which roles should be trained within the ITSM tool.

    The need for targeted training:

    • IT personnel may challenge the need for training. They may feel they don’t require training on the use of tools or that they don’t have time to dedicate to training when there is so much work to be done.
    • Providing targeted training focused on only the functions of the solution that each tier is responsible for can help to overcome that resistance.
    • Targeted training may include basic training for level 1 technicians and more advanced in-depth training for administrators, power users, or level 2/3 technicians.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Properly trained users promote adoption and improve results. Always keep training materials updated and available. New employees, new software integration, and internal promotions create opportunities for training employees to align the ITSM tool with their roles and responsibilities.

    3.2.2 Provide training

    Training must take place before deployment to ensure that both your service desk agents and end users will use the tool in the way it was intended and improve end-user satisfaction.

    • Implementing a new ITSM tool will likely bring with it at least some degree of organizational and cultural change. It’s important to manage that change through proper training. Your training needs will vary depending on the maturity of the organization and the amount of cultural and process change being implemented.
    • If this is your first ITSM solution with many new changes for staff to take on board, it will be important to dedicate training time not only before deployment but also several months after the initial installation, to allow staff to gain more experience with the new tool and processes and formulate questions they may not think to ask during implementation.
    • A training plan should take into account not only training needs for the implementation project but also any ongoing training requirements that may be required. This may include:
      • Training for new personnel.
      • Training on any changes to the tool.
      • Training on any new processes the tool will support.
    • Better agent training will lead to better performance and improved end-user satisfaction.

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate training hours and first contact resolution.

    The blue graph line charts new-agent training hours against first contact resolution and the orange graph line charts the trendline for the dataset.

    Source: MetricNet, 2012

    3.2.3 Choose an appropriate training delivery method

    Training should include use cases that focus on not only how the tool’s interface works but also how the tool should be used to support process activities.

    1. Training through use cases highlights how the tool will support the user in role-based tasks.
    2. If new processes are being introduced along with the tool, training should cover both in an integrated way.
    3. Team leadership and management commitment ensures that all agents take their training seriously and are prepared for all use cases by the deployment date.

    Trainer-led sessions:

    Self-taught sessions:

    • May take the form of onsite or video training.
    • Vendor may train administrators or managers, who will later train remaining staff.
    • Allows for interaction with the trainer and greater opportunity to ask questions.
    • Difficult for large organizations with many users to be trained.
    • Delivered via computer-based training applications, typically through a web browser.
    • May include voice training sessions combined with exercises and quizzes.
    • More feasible for large, distributed organizations with less flexible schedules.

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Ensure that the training demonstrates not only how the tool should be used, but also the benefits it will provide your staff in terms of improved efficiency and productivity. Users who can clearly see the benefits the tool will provide for their daily work will accept the tool more readily and promote it across the organization.

    Step 3.3

    Plan how you will deploy, monitor, and maintain the solution

    Activities

    3.3.1

    Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    3.3.2

    Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    3.3.3

    Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    3.3.4

    Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    3.3.5

    Monitor success metrics defined in Phase 1

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Project Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    Deployment plan, including a plan for cut-over from the old tool (if applicable), release of the new tool, and post-deployment support and maintenance of the tool.

    3.3.1 Plan the transition from your old tool to ensure continual functionality

    If you will have a transitional period during which the current tool will be used alongside the new tool, develop a clear plan for the transition to ensure continued service for your end users.

    • If there will be an interim period during which only some aspects of the new ITSM tool are functional, you will need to determine how the new system and old systems will work together for that period of time. This may require creating interfaces as well as providing user documentation and/or SOPs on how the business processes will operate during the interim period.
    • Cut-over is the period during which the changeover to the new system occurs. Cut-over activities need to be tightly choreographed for a successful deployment. If improperly planned, chaos may erupt when unforeseen issues are encountered during deployment, the deployment may be jeopardized, and the organization may encounter costly interruptions to its daily operations.
    • Many organizations may leave any open tickets in the old tool until they are closed, which requires that tool run alongside the new tool for a transitional period. In this case, it is necessary to create guidelines around how long the open tickets will remain in the old system and ensure there is clear communication around these processes.

    Be prepared for the transition:

    1. Create a robust cut-over plan that includes when the old tool will be decommissioned, what activities are necessary during the cut-over, and what the contingency plan is in case of unforeseen issues.
    2. Plan for and perform mock cut-overs to establish the timeline and dependencies for all steps that need to be performed to successfully complete the changeover. Do this to avoid any surprises or delays during the true cut-over period.
    3. Establish cut-over logistics: Create a schedule for resources to work in shifts to avoid burn-out during cut-over, which can lead to lapses in judgment and easily avoidable mistakes. Allocate dedicated workspaces for cut-over activities, e.g. “war rooms” for the triage of issues.

    3.3.2 Choose a cut-over approach that works for you

    Approaches and insights from three case studies

    Case Study #1

    Case Study #2

    Case Study #3

    On day one we started recording all new incidents in the new tool, and everything that was open in the old tool remained open for about one month. At that point we transferred over some open incidents but closed old incidents with the view that if anyone really wanted something done that hadn’t been yet, they could re-submit a ticket.

    – Brett Andrews,

    Managing Director at BAPTISM Consultancy

    It made sense for us to start fresh with the new system. We left all of the old tickets in the old system and started the new system with ticket #1. We only had about a dozen open tickets in the old system so we left them there and ran the two tools side by side until those were closed.

    – CIO, Publishing

    It depends on the client and the size of their service desk as well as the complexity of their data and whether they need their old data for reporting. If there are only a dozen open tickets, they can manually move those over easily, and decide whether they want to migrate their historical data for reporting purposes.

    – Scott Walling,

    Co-Founder at Monitor 24-7 Inc.

    3.3.3 Deploy the solution and any new processes simultaneously to ease the transition

    Follow a deployment plan for introducing new processes alongside the new tool to ensure changes to both process and technology are adopted simultaneously.

    If you’re introducing new processes alongside the new tool, it’s important to maintain the link between process and tool. Typically, the processes and tool should be deployed simultaneously unless there is a strong reason not to do so.

    Deployment can be done as a big-bang or phased approach. The decision to employ a phased deployment depends on the number and size of business units the tool will support, as well as the organization’s geography and infrastructure (deployment locations).

    Before deployment, conduct readiness assessments to understand whether:

    The people are ready to accept the new system (have received the proper training and communications and understand how their jobs will change when the switch is flipped).

    The technology is ready (test results are favorable, workarounds and a plan for closure have been identified for any open defects, and the system is performing as expected).

    The data is ready (data for final conversion has been cleansed, and all conversions have been rehearsed).

    The post-deployment support model is ready (infrastructure and technical support is in place, sites are ready, knowledge transfer has been conducted with the support organization, and end users understand procedures for escalation of issues).

    3.3.4 Have a post-deployment support plan in place

    Ensure that strong internal support for the project and tool will continue after deployment.

    The stabilization period after a new software deployment can last between three and nine months, during which there may be continued training needs and fine-tuning of processes. Internal support from project leaders within your organization will be critical to recover from any dip in operational efficiency and deliver the benefits of the tool.

    Consider the following to prepare better for your support plan:

    What are the roles and responsibilities for ongoing tool administration support?

    What level of support will exist to assist service desk staff after deployment?

    How much time will project team resources devote to tackling upcoming issues and assisting with ongoing support?

    Who will be responsible for ongoing training needs and documentation?

    If your organization is spread across multiple locations, what level of support/assistance will be available at each site?

    How will new code releases or system upgrades be managed and communicated?

    Info-Tech Insight:

    Deployment is only the first step in the system lifecycle. Full benefit realization from the tool requires ongoing investment and learning to be sustained. Unless processes and training are updated on an ongoing basis, benefits gained will start to decrease over time. If your service desk efficiency stagnates at the level it was at prior to implementation, the tool has failed to serve its objective.

    Establish ongoing tool maintenance, improvement structures, and processes

    People, processes, and organizations change over time, and your ITSM tool will need to change to meet expectations.

    Develop and execute a plan for the maintenance of the solution and its infrastructure components.

    Include periodic reviews against business needs and operational requirements (e.g. patches, upgrades, and risk and security requirements).

    For maintenance updates, use the change management process and assess how an activity will impact solution design, functionality, and business processes.

    For major changes that result in significant change in current designs, functionality, and/or business processes, follow the development process used for new systems.

    Ensure that maintenance activities are periodically analyzed for abnormal trends indicating underlying quality or performance problems, cost/benefit of major upgrade, or replacement in lieu of maintenance.

    Assign responsibility for ongoing maintenance. Hold regular meetings for the following activities:

    1. Inspect data and reports.
    2. Assess whether you’re meeting SLAs.
    3. Predict any upcoming changes that may impact ticket volume (e.g. a new operating system or security patch).
    4. Create new ticket templates for recurring or upcoming issues.
    5. Create new knowledgebase articles.
    6. Determine whether ticket categories are being used correctly.
    7. Ask team if there are any problems with the tool.

    3.3.5 Monitor success metrics defined in Project Charter

    Revisit your goals for the solution and assess if they are being met by evaluating current metrics. If your goals have not yet been met, re-evaluate how to ensure the tool will deliver value.

    Sample High-Level Goals:

    1. Improved service desk efficiency
    2. Improved end-user satisfaction
    3. Improved self-service options for end users
    4. Improved data and reporting capabilities

    Sample Metric Descriptions

    Baseline Metric

    Goal

    Current Metric

    Increased ticket input through email versus phone

    50% of tickets submitted through phone

    10% of tickets submit through phone

    Reduced ticket volume (through improved self-serve capabilities)

    1,500 tickets per month

    1,200 tickets per month

    Improved first call resolution (through increased efficiency and automation)

    50% FCR

    60% FCR

    Improved ability to meet SLAs (through automated escalations and prioritization)

    5 minutes to log a ticket

    1 minute to log a ticket

    Improved time to produce reports

    3 business days

    1 business day

    Improved end-user satisfaction

    60% satisfied with services

    75% satisfied

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Optimize IT Change Management

    Define change management workflows, key roles, and supporting elements such as request-for-change forms based on best practices.

    Standardize the Service Desk

    Build core elements of service desk operations, including incident management and service request workflows, ticket categorization schemes, and ticket prioritization rules.

    Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy

    Implement tools such as an improved knowledgebase and self-service portal to enable lower tier support staff and end users to resolve incidents or fulfill service requests.

    Incident and Problem Management

    Develop a critical incident management workflow and create standard operating procedures for problem management.

    IT Service Management Selection Guide

    Identify the best-of-breed solution to make the most of your investment and engage the right stakeholders to define success.

    Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data

    Develop a framework to track metrics, clean data, and put your data to use for pre-defined timelines.

    Bibliography

    Adiga, Siddanth. “10 Reasons Why ITSM Implementations Fail.” Could Strategy, 6 May 2015. Web.

    Hastie, Shane, and Stéphane Wojewoda. “Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” InfoQ, 4 October 2015. Web.

    “How to Manage Change in the Implementation of an ITSM Software.” C2, 20 April 2015. Web.

    Lockwood, Meghan. “First Look: Annual ServiceNow Insight and Vision Executive Summary [eBook].” Acorio, 31 October 2019. Web.

    Mainville, David. “7 Steps to a Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” Navvia, 2012. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Preparing for ITSM Tool Implementation.” Joe the IT Guy, 24 June 2015. Web.

    Rae, Barclay. “Successful ITSM Tool Implementation.” BrightTALK, 9 May 2013. Webcast.

    Rumburg, Jeffrey. “Metric of the Month: Agent Training Hours.” MetricNet, 2012. Web.

    Select a Marketing Management Suite

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}533|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $6,560 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 50 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Time, money, and effort are wasted on channels and campaigns that are not resonating with your customer base.
    • Email marketing, social marketing, and/or lead management alone are often not enough to meet more sophisticated marketing needs.
    • Many organizations struggle with taking a systematic approach to selection that pairs functional requirements with specific marketing workflows, and as a result they choose a marketing management suite (MMS) that is not well aligned to their needs, wasting resources and causing end-user frustration.
    • For IT managers or marketing professionals, the task to incorporate MMS technology into the organization requires not only receiving the buy-in for the MMS investment but also determining the vendor and solution that best fit the organization’s particular marketing management needs.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • An MMS enables complex campaigns across many channels, product lines, customer segments, and marketing groups throughout the enterprise.
    • Selecting an MMS has become increasingly difficult because the number of players in the marketplace has ballooned. Moreover, picking the wrong marketing solution has a direct impact on revenue.
    • Determine whether the investment in an MMS is worthwhile or the funds are better allocated elsewhere. For organizations with a large audience or varied product offerings, an MMS enables complex campaigns across many channels, product lines, customer segments, and marketing groups throughout the enterprise.

    Impact and Result

    • Maximize your success and credibility with a proposal that emphasizes the areas relevant to your situation.
    • Perform more effective customer targeting and campaign management. Having an MMS equips marketers with the tools they need to make informed decisions around campaign execution, resulting in better targeting, acquisition, and customer retention. This means more revenue.
    • Maximize marketing impact with analytics-based decision making. Understanding users’/customers’ behaviors and preferences will allow you to run effective marketing initiatives.

    Select a Marketing Management Suite Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out how to approach selecting an MMS, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the MMS project and collect requirements

    Assess the organization’s fit for MMS technology and structure the MMS selection project.

    • Select a Marketing Management Suite – Phase 1: Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements
    • MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist

    2. Shortlist marketing management suites

    Produce a vendor shortlist for your MMS.

    • Select a Marketing Management Suite – Phase 2: Shortlist Marketing Management Suites

    3. Select vendor and communicate decision to stakeholders

    Evaluate RFPs, conduct vendor demonstrations, and select an MMS.

    • Select a Marketing Management Suite – Phase 3: Select Vendor and Communicate Decision to Stakeholders
    • MMS Requirements Picklist Tool
    • MMS Request for Proposal Template
    • MMS Vendor Demo Script
    • MMS Selection Executive Presentation Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Select a Marketing Management Suite

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements

    The Purpose

    Determine a “right-size” approach to marketing enablement applications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Confirmation of the goals, objectives, and direction of the organization is marketing application strategy.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the value and identify the organization’s fit for MMS technology.

    1.2 Understand the art of the possible.

    1.3 Understand CXM strategy and identify your fit for MMS technology.

    1.4 Build procurement team and project customer experience management (CXM) strategy.

    1.5 Identify your MMS requirements.

    Outputs

    Project team list.

    Preliminary requirements list.

    2 Shortlist Marketing Management Suites

    The Purpose

    Enumerate relevant marketing management suites and point solutions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    List of marketing enablement applications based on requirements articulated in the preliminary requirements list strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Identify relevant use cases.

    2.2 Discuss the vendor landscape.

    Outputs

    Vendor shortlist.

    3 Select Vendor and Communicate Decision to Stakeholders

    The Purpose

    Develop a rationale for selecting a specific MMS vendor.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    MMS Vendor decision.

    A template to communicate the decision to executives.

    Activities

    3.1 Create a procurement strategy.

    3.2 Discuss the executive presentation.

    3.3 Plan the procurement process.

    Outputs

    Executive/stakeholder PowerPoint presentation.

    Selection of an MMS.

    Further reading

    Select a Marketing Management Suite

    A best-fit solution balances needs, cost, and capability.

    Table of contents

    1. Project Rationale
    2. Execute the Project/DIY Guide
    3. Appendices

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Navigate the complexity of a vast ecosystem by taking a structured approach to marketing management suite (MMS) selection.

    Marketing applications are in high demand, but it is difficult to select a suite that is right for your organization. Market offerings have grown from 50 vendors to over 800 in the past five years. Much of the process of identifying an appropriate vendor is not about the vendor at all, but rather about having a comprehensive understanding of internal needs. There are instances where a smaller-point solution is necessary to satisfy requirements and a full marketing management suite is an overinvestment.

    Likewise, a partner with differentiating features such as AI-driven workflows and a mobile software development kit can act as a powerful extension of an overall customer experience management strategy. It is crucial to make the right decision; missing the mark on an MMS selection will have a direct impact on the business’ bottom line.

    Ben Dickie
    Research Director, Enterprise Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Phase milestones

    Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements — Phase 1

    • Understand the MMS market space.
    • Assess organizational and project readiness for MMS selection.
    • Structure your MMS selection and implementation project by refining your MMS roadmap.
    • Align organizational use-case fit with market use cases.
    • Collect, prioritize, and document MMS requirements.

    Shortlist MMS Tool — Phase 2

    • Review MMS market leaders and players within your aligned use case.
    • Review MMS vendor profiles and capabilities.
    • Shortlist MMS vendors based on organizational fit.

    Select an MMS — Phase 3

    • Submit request for proposal (RFP) to shortlisted vendors.
    • Evaluate vendor responses and develop vendor demonstration scripts.
    • Score vendor demonstrations and select the final product.

    Stop! Are you ready for this project?

    This Research Is Designed For:
    • IT applications directors and business analysts supporting their marketing teams in selecting and implementing a robust marketing solution.
    • Any organization looking to procure an MMS tool that will allow it to automate its marketing processes or learn more about the MMS vendor landscape.
    This Research Will Help You:
    • Understand today’s MMS market, specific to marketing automation, marketing intelligence, and social marketing use-case scenarios.
    • Understand MMS functionality as well as marketing terminology.
    • Follow best practices to prepare for and execute on selection, including requirements gathering and vendor evaluation.
    This Research Will Also Assist:
    • Marketing managers, brand managers, and any marketing professional looking to build a cohesive marketing platform.
    • MMS project teams or working groups tasked with managing an RFP process for vendor selection.
    This Research Will Help Them
    • Assess organizational and project readiness for embarking on MMS selection.
    • Draft an RFP, manage the vendor and product review process, and select a vendor.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    The MMS market is a landscape of vendors offering campaign management, multichannel support, analytics, and publishing tools. Many vendors specialize in some of these areas but not all. Sometimes multiple products are necessary – but determining which feature sets the organization truly needs can be a challenging task. The right technology stack is critical in order to bring automation to marketing initiatives.

    Complication

    • The first challenge is deciding whether to implement a full marketing suite or a point solution.
    • The number of marketing suites and point solutions has increased from 50 to more than 800 just in the past five years.
    • IT is receiving a growing number of marketing analytics requests and must be prepared to speak intelligently about marketing management vendor selection.

    Resolution

    • Leverage Info-Tech’s comprehensive three-phase approach to MMS selection projects: assess your organization’s preparedness to go into the selection stage, move through technology selection, and present decisions to stakeholders.
    • Conduct an MMS project preparedness assessment to ensure you maximize the value of your time, effort, and spend.
    • Determine whether your organization’s needs will best be met by a marketing management suite or a point solution.
    • Determine which use case your organization fits into and review the relevant vendor landscape, common capability, and areas of product differentiation. Consult Info-Tech’s market analysis to shortlist vendors for your RFP process.
    • Take advantage of traceable and auditable selection tools to run an effective evaluation and selection process. Be prepared to answer the retroactive question “Why this MMS?” with documentation of your selection process and outputs.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. The new MMS market. Selecting a marketing management solution has become increasingly difficult, with the number of players in the marketplace ballooning to meet buyer demand.
    2. Direct translation to revenue. Picking the wrong marketing solution has a direct impact on the bottom line. However, the right MMS can lead to a 7.3x greater year-over-year increase in annual revenue.
    3. Don’t buy best-of-breed; buy best-for-you. Base your vendor selection on your requirements and use case, not on the vendor’s overall performance.

    MMS is a key piece of the CRM puzzle

    In order to optimize cross-sell opportunities and marketing effectiveness, there needs to be a master customer database, which belongs in the customer relationship management (CRM) suite.

    When it comes to marketing automation capabilities, using CRM is like building a car from a kit. All the parts are there, but you need the time and skill to put it all together. Using marketing automation is like buying the car you want or need, with all the features you want already installed and some gas in the tank, ready to drive. In either case, you still need to know how to drive and where you want to go.” (Mac McIntosh, Marketo Inc.) 'CRM' surrounded by its components with 'MMS' highlighted. A master database – the central place where all up-to-the-minute data on a customer profile is stored – is essential for MMS success. This is particularly true for real-time capability effectiveness and to minimize customer fatigue.

    Understand what an MMS can do for you

    Take time to learn the capabilities of modern marketing applications. Understanding the “art of the possible” will help you to get the most out of your MMS.

    MMS helps marketers in two primary ways:
    1. It allows them to efficiently execute and manage campaigns across dozens of channels and products.
    2. It allows them to analyze the outcomes of campaigns.
    Marketing suites accomplish these tasks by:
    • Leveraging workflow automation to reduce the amount of time spent creating marketing campaigns
    • Using internal or third-party data to increase conversion effectiveness from customer databases across the organization
    A strong MMS provides marketers with the data they need for actionable insights about their customers.
    A marketing automation solution delivers essentially all the benefits of an email marketing solution along with integrated capabilities that would otherwise need to be cobbled together using various standalone technologies.” (Marketo Inc.)

    Review Info-Tech’s vendor profiles of the MMS market to identify vendors that meet your requirements

    Logos of multiple vendors including 'Hubspot', 'IBM', 'Salesforce marketing cloud', etc.

    Use Info-Tech’s MMS implementation methodology as a starting point for your organization’s MMS selection

    Info-Tech’s implementation methodology is not a step-by-step approach to vendor selection, but rather it highlights the pertinent considerations for MMS selection at each of the five steps outlined below.

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    Establish Resources Gather Requirements Write and Assemble RFP Exercise Due Diligence Evaluate Candidate Solutions
    • Determine work initiative dependencies and project milestones.
    • Establish the project timeline.
    • Designate project resources.
    • Prioritize rollout of functionality.
    • Link business goals with the MMS selection project.
    • Determine user roles and profiles.
    • Conduct stakeholder interviews.
    • Build communication and change management plan.
    • Draft an RFP.
    • Make a plan for soliciting feedback and publishing the RFP.
    • Customize a vendor demo script and scorecard.
    • Conduct vendor demos.
    • Speak with vendor references.
    • Evaluate nonfunctional requirements.
    • Understand upgrade schedules.
    • Define a vendor evaluation framework.
    • Prepare the final evaluation.
    • Prepare a presentation for management.

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Professional services provider engages Info-Tech to guide it through its MMS selection journey

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Professional Services | Source: Info-Tech Consulting

    Challenge

    A large professional services firm specializing in knowledge development was looking to modernize an outdated marketing services stack.

    Previous investments in marketing tools ranging from email automation to marketing analytics led to system fragmentation. As a result, there was no 360-degree overview of marketing operations and no way to run campaigns at scale.

    To satisfy the organization’s aspirations, a comprehensive marketing management suite had to be selected that met needs for the foreseeable future.

    Solution

    The Info-Tech consulting team was brought in to assist in the MMS selection process.

    After meeting with several stakeholders, MMS requirements were developed and weighted. An RFP was then created from these requirements.

    Following a market scan, four vendors were selected to complete the organization’s RFP. Demonstration scripts were then developed as the RFPs were completed by vendors.

    Shortlisted vendors progressed to the demonstration phase.

    Results

    Vendor scorecards were utilized during the two-day demonstrations with the core project team to score each vendor.

    During the scoring process the team also identified the need to replace the organization’s core customer repository (a legacy CRM).

    The decision was made to select a CRM before finalizing the MMS selection. Doing so ensured uniform system architecture and strong interoperability between the firm’s MMS and its CRM.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful." "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track." "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place." "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Select a Marketing Management Suite – project overview

    1. Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements 2. Shortlist Marketing Management Suites 3. Select Vendor and Communicate Decision to Stakeholders
    Supporting Tool icon

    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Assess the value and identify your organization’s fit for MMS technology.

    1.2 Build your procurement team and project customer experience management (CXM) strategy.

    1.3 Identify your MMS requirements.

    2.1 Produce your shortlist

    3.1 Select your MMS

    3.2 Present selection

    Guided Implementations

    • Understand CXM strategy and identify your fit for MMS technology.
    • Identify staffing needs.
    • Plan requirements gathering steps.
    • Discuss use-case fit assessment results.
    • Discuss vendor landscape.
    • Create a procurement strategy.
    • Discuss executive presentation.
    • Conduct a proposal review.
    Associated Activity icon

    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:
    Launch Your MMS Selection Project
    Module 2:
    Analyze MMS Requirements and Shortlist Vendors
    Module 3:
    Plan Your Procurement Process
    Phase 1 Outcome:
    • Launch of MMS selection project
    Phase 2 Outcome:
    • Shortlist of vendors
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • Selection of MMS

    Use these icons to help direct you as you navigate this research

    Use these icons to help guide you through each step of the blueprint and direct you to content related to the recommended activities.

    A small monochrome icon of a wrench and screwdriver creating an X.

    This icon denotes a slide where a supporting Info-Tech tool or template will help you perform the activity or step associated with the slide. Refer to the supporting tool or template to get the best results and proceed to the next step of the project.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a person in front of a blank slide.

    This icon denotes a slide with an associated activity. The activity can be performed either as part of your project or with the support of Info-Tech team members who will come onsite to facilitate a workshop for your organization.

    A small monochrome icon depicting a descending bar graph.

    This icon denotes a slide that pertains directly to the Info-Tech vendor profiles on marketing management technology. Use these slides to support and guide your evaluation of the MMS vendors included in the research.

    Select a Marketing Management Suite

    PHASE 1

    Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements

    Phase 1 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Launch Your MMS Project and Collect Requirements

    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 weeks
    Step 1.2: Structure the Project Step 1.3: Gather Requirements
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review readiness requirements for an MMS project.
    • Understand the work initiatives involved in MMS selection.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Determine use case based on your organizational alignment.
    • Discuss core MMS requirements.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Conduct an organizational MMS readiness assessment.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Identify best-fit use case.
    • Elicit, capture, and prioritize requirements.
    With these tools & templates:
    • MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist
    With these tools & templates:
    • MMS Requirements Picklist Tool
    Phase 1 Results:
    • Completed readiness assessment.
    • Refined project plan to incorporate selection and implementation.

    Phase 1 milestones

    Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements — Phase 1

    • Understand the MMS market space.
    • Assess organizational and project readiness for MMS selection.
    • Structure your MMS selection and implementation project by refining your MMS roadmap.
    • Align organizational use-case fit with market use cases.
    • Collect, prioritize, and document MMS requirements.

    Shortlist MMS Tool — Phase 2

    • Review MMS market leaders and players within your aligned use case.
    • Review MMS vendor profiles and capabilities.
    • Shortlist MMS vendors based on organizational fit.

    Select an MMS — Phase 3

    • Submit request for proposal (RFP) to shortlisted vendors.
    • Evaluate vendor responses and develop vendor demonstration scripts.
    • Score vendor demonstrations and select the final product.

    Step 1.1: Understand the MMS market

    1.1

    1.2

    1.3

    Understand the MMS Market Structure the Project Gather MMS Requirements

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • MMS market overview

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Project team
    • Project manager
    • Project sponsor

    Outcomes of this step

    • An understanding of the evolution of the MMS market space and how it helps today’s organizations.
    • An evaluation of new and upcoming trends sought by MMS clients.
    • Verification of whether an MMS is a fit with your organization.

    Speak the same language as the marketing department to deliver the most business value

    Marketing Management Suite Glossary

    Analytics The practice of measuring marketing performance to improve return on investment (ROI). It is often carried out through the visualization of meaningful patterns in data as a result of marketing initiatives.
    Channels The different places where marketers can reach customers (e.g. social media, print mail, television).
    Click-through rate The percentage of individuals who proceed (click-through) from one part of a marketing campaign to the next.
    Content management Curating, creating, editing, and keeping track of content and client-facing assets.
    Customer relationship management (CRM) A core enterprise application that provides a broad feature set for supporting customer interaction processes. The CRM frequently serves as a core customer data repository.
    Customer experience management (CXM) The holistic management of customer interaction processes across marketing, sales, and customer service to create valuable, mutually beneficial customer experiences.
    Engagement rate A social media metric used to describe the amount of likes, comments, shares, etc., that a piece of content receives.
    Lead An individual or organization who has shown interest in the product or service being marketed.
    Omnichannel The portfolio of interaction channels you use.

    MMS is a key piece of the customer experience ecosystem

    Within the broader CXM ecosystem, an MMS typically lives within the CRM platform. Interfacing with the CRM’s master customer database allows an MMS to optimize cross-sell opportunities and marketing effectiveness.

    A master database – the central place where all up-to-the-minute data on a customer profile is stored – is essential for MMS success. This is particularly true for real-time capability effectiveness and to minimize customer fatigue.

    If you have customer records in multiple places, you risk missing customer opportunities and potentially upsetting clients. For example, if a client has communicated preferences or disinterest through one channel, and this is not effectively recorded throughout the organization, another representative is likely to contact them in the same method again – possibly alienating the customer for good.

    A master database requires automatic synchronization with all point solutions, POS, billing systems, agencies, etc. If you don’t have up-to-the-minute information, you can’t score prospects effectively and you lose out on the benefits of the MMS.

    'CRM' surrounded by its components with 'MMS' highlighted.
    Focus on the fundamentals before proceeding. Secure organizational readiness to reduce project risk using Info-Tech’s Build a Strong Technology Foundation for CXM and Select and Implement a CRM Platform blueprints.

    Understanding the “art of the possible”

    The world of marketing technology changes rapidly! Understand how modern marketing management suites are used in most organizations.

    An MMS helps marketers in two primary ways:

    1. It allows them to efficiently execute and manage campaigns across dozens of channels and products.
    2. It allows them to analyze the outcomes of campaigns.

    Marketing suites accomplish these tasks by:

    • Leveraging workflow automation to reduce the amount of time spent creating marketing campaigns.
    • Using internal or third-party data to increase conversion effectiveness from customer databases across the organization.

    A strong MMS provides marketers with the data they need for actionable insights about their customers.

    A marketing automation solution delivers essentially all the benefits of an email marketing solution along with integrated capabilities that would otherwise need to be cobbled together using various standalone technologies.” (Marketo Inc.)

    Inform your way of thinking by understanding the capabilities of modern marketing applications.

    A tree with icons related to knowledge.

    Expect the marketing department to drive suite adoption, but don’t count out the benefits MMS will also provide to IT

    MMS adoption is driven by the need for better campaign execution and marketing intelligence. MMS technologies are adopted to create faster, easier, more intelligent, and more measurable campaigns and make managing complex channels easy and repeatable.

    Top Drivers for Adopting Marketing Management Technologies

    Bar chart of top drivers for adopting marketing management technology. The first four bars are highlighted and the largest, they are labelled 'Campaign Measurement & Effectiveness', 'Execute Multi-channel Campaigns', 'Shorten Marketing Campaign Cycle', and 'Reduce Manual Campaign Creation'.
    (Source: Info-Tech Research Group; N=23)

    The key drivers for MMS are business-related, not IT-related. However, this does not mean that there are no benefits to IT. In fact, the IT department will see numerous benefits, including time and resource savings. Further, not having an MMS creates more work for your IT department. IT must serve as a valued partner for selection and implementation.

    Additional benefits to IT driven by MMS

    Marketing management suites are ideal for large organizations with multiple product lines in complex marketing environments. IT is often more centralized than its counterparts in the business, making it uniquely positioned to encourage greater coordination by helping the business units understand the shared goals and the benefits of working together to roll out suites for marketing workflow management, intelligence, and channel management.

    Cross-Segmentation Additional Revenue Generation Real-Time Capabilities Lead Growth/ Conversion Rate
    Business Value
    • Share resources between brands and product lines.
    • Increase database size with populated client data.
    • Track customer lifetime value.
    • Increase average deal size.
    • Decrease time to execute campaigns.
    • Decrease lead acquisition costs while collecting higher quality leads.
    • Improve retention rates.
    • Reduce cost to serve.
    • Increase customer retention due to effective service.
    • Higher campaign and response rates.
    • Track, measure, and prove the value of marketing activities.
    • Broaden reach through social channels.
    IT Value
    • Reduce reliance on IT for routine tasks such as list creation and data cleansing.
    • Free up IT resources for the sectors of the business where the ROI is greatest.
    • Reduce need for IT to cleanse, modify, or merge data lists because most suites include CRM connectors.
    • Reduce need for constant customization on status reports on lead value and campaign success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t forget that MMS technologies deliver on the overarching suite value proposition: a robust solution within one integrated offering. Without an MMS in play, organizations in need of this functionality are forced to piece together point solutions (or ad hoc management). This not only increases costs but also is an integration nightmare for IT.

    Step 1.2: Structure the project

    1.1

    1.2

    1.3

    Understand the MMS MarketStructure the ProjectGather MMS Requirements

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine if you are ready to kick off the MMS selection project.
    • Align project goals with CXM strategy and business goals.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core project team
    • Project manager
    • Project sponsor

    Outcomes of this step

    • Assurance that you have completed adequate preparation, obtained stakeholder and sponsor buy-in, secured sufficient resources, and completed strategy and planning activities to move forward with selection.
    • An approach to remedy organizational readiness to prepare for MMS selection.
    • An understanding of stakeholder goals.

    Identify the scope and purpose of your MMS selection process

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Sample Project Overview

    [Organization] plans to select and implement a marketing management suite in order to introduce better campaign management to the business’ processes. This procurement and implementation of an MMS tool will enable the business to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of marketing campaign execution.

    This project will oversee the assessment and shortlisting of MMS vendors, selection of an MMS tool, the configuration of the solution, and the implementation of the technology into the business environment.

    Rationale Behind the Project

    Consider the business drivers behind the interest in MMS technology.

    Be specific to business units impacted and identify key considerations (both opportunities and risks).

    Business Drivers

    • Organizational productivity
    • Customer satisfaction
    • Marketing management costs
    • Risk management

    Info-Tech Insights

    Creating repeatable and streamlined marketing processes is a common overarching business objective that is driven by multiple factors. To ensure this objective is achieved, confirm that the primary drivers are following the implementation of the first automated marketing channels.

    Activity: Understand your business’ goals for MMS by parsing your formal CXM strategy

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.1 1 hour

    INPUT: Stakeholder user stories

    OUTPUT: Understanding of ideal outcomes from MMS implementation

    MATERIALS: Whiteboard and marker or sticky notes

    PARTICIPANTS: Project sponsor, Project stakeholders, Business analysts, Business unit reps

    Instructions

    1. Outline the purpose of the future MMS tool and the drivers behind this business decision with the project’s key stakeholders.
    2. Document plans to ensure that these drivers are taken into consideration and realized following implementation. Example:
      Improve Reduce/Eliminate KPIs
      Multichannel marketing Duplication of effort Number of customer interaction channels supported
      Social integration Process inefficiencies Number of social signals received (likes, shares, etc.)

    If you do not have a well-defined CXM strategy, leverage Info-Tech’s research to Build a Strong Technology Foundation for Customer Experience Management.

    Understanding marketing suites

    Vendor Profiles icon

    This blueprint focuses on complete, integrated marketing management suites

    An integrated suite is a single product that is designed to assist with multiple marketing processes. Information from these suites is deeply connected to the core CRM. Changing a piece of information for one process will update all affected.

    'MMS' surrounded by its integrated processes, including 'Marketing Operations Management', 'Breadth of Channel Support', 'Marketing Asset Management', etc.

    Understanding marketing point solutions

    Vendor Profiles icon

    A point solution typically interfaces with a single customer interaction channel with minimal CRM integration.

    Why use a marketing point solution?

    1. A marketing point solution is a standalone application used to manage a unique process.
    2. Point solutions can be implemented and updated relatively quickly.
    3. They cost less than full-feature, integrated marketing suites.
    4. Some point solutions integrate with CRM platforms or MMS platforms.

    Refer to Phase 2 for a bird’s-eye view of the point solution marketplace.

    Marketing Point Solutions

    • Twitter Analytics
    • Search Engine Optimization
    • Customer Portals
    • Livechat
    • Marketing Attribution
    • Demand Side Platform

    Determine if MMS is right for your organization

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Adopt an MMS if:

    1. Your organization is actively pursuing a multichannel marketing strategy, particularly if its marketing campaigns are complex and multifaceted, involving consumer-specific conditional messaging.
    2. Your enterprise serves a high volume of customers and marketing needs extend to formally managing budgets and resources, lead generation and segmentation, and measuring channel effectiveness.
    3. Your organizations has multiple product lines and is interested in increasing cross-sale opportunities.

    Bypass an MMS if:

    • Your organization does not participate in multichannel campaigns and is primarily using email or web channels to generate leads. You may find the advanced features and capabilities of an MMS to be overkill and should consider lead marketing automation (LMA) or email marketing services first.
    • You are a small to midsize business (SMB) with a limited budget or fewer than five marketing professionals. Don’t buy what you don’t need; organizations with fewer than five people in the marketing department are unlikely to need an MMS.
    • Sales generation is not a priority for the business or a primary goal for the marketing department.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Using an MMS is ideal for organizations with multiple brands and product portfolios (e.g. consumer packaged goods). Ad hoc management and email marketing services are best for small organizations with a client base that requires only bare bones engagement.

    Determine if you are ready to kick off your MMS selection and implementation project

    Supporting Tool icon 1.2.2 MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist
    Use Info-Tech’s MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist to determine if your organization has sufficient process and campaign maturity to warrant the investment in a consolidated marketing management suite.

    Sections of the Tool:

    1. Goals & Objectives
    2. Project Team
    3. Current State Understanding
    4. Future State Vision
    5. Business Process Improvement
    6. Project Metrics
    7. Executive Sponsorship
    8. Stakeholder Buy-In & Change Management
    9. Risk Management
    10. Cost & Budget

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Sample of Info-Tech's MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist.

    Complete the MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist by following the instructions in Activity 1.2.3.

    Activity: Determine if you are ready to kick off your MMS selection project

    Associated Activity icon 1.2.3 30 minutes

    INPUT: MMS foundation, MMS strategy

    OUTPUT: Readiness remediation approach, Validation of MMS project readiness

    MATERIALS: Info-Tech’s MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist

    PARTICIPANTS: Project sponsor, Core project team

    Instructions

    1. Download the MMS Readiness Assessment Checklist.
    2. Review Section 1 of the checklist with the core project team and/or project sponsor, item by item. For completed items, tick the relative checkbox.
    3. Once the whole checklist has been reviewed, document all incomplete items in the table under Section 1 in the first table column (“Incomplete Readiness Item”).
    4. For each incomplete item, use your discretion to determine whether its completion is critical in preparation for MMS selection and implementation. This may vary given the complexity of your MMS project. If the item is critical to the project, indicate this with “Y” in the second column (“Criticality (Y/N)”).
    5. For each critical item, reflect on the barriers that have prevented or are preventing its completion. Possible barriers include incomplete task dependencies, low value-to-effort determination, lack of organizational knowledge or resources, pressure of deadlines, etc. Document these barriers in the third column (“Barriers to Completion”).
    6. Based on the barriers determined in Step 5, determine a remediation approach for each item. Document the approach in the fourth column (“Remediation Approach”).
    7. For each remediation activity, designate a due date and remediation owner. Document this in the fifth column (“Due Date & Owner”).
    8. Carry out the remediation of critical tasks and return to this blueprint to kickstart your selection and implementation project.

    Step 1.3: Gather MMS requirements

    1.1

    1.2

    1.3

    Understand the MMS MarketStructure the ProjectGather MMS Requirements

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Understand your MMS use case.
    • Elicit and capture your MMS requirements.
    • Prioritize your solution requirements.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core project team
    • Project manager
    • Business analysts
    • Procurement subject-matter experts (SMEs)

    Outcomes of this step

    • Project alignment with MMS market use case.
    • Inventory of categorized and prioritized MMS business requirements.

    Understand the dominant use-case scenarios for MMS across organizations

    Vendor Profiles icon

    USE CASES

    While an organization may be product- or service-centric, most fall into one of the three use cases described on this slide.

    1) Marketing Automation

    Workflow Management

    Managing complex marketing campaigns and building and tracking marketing workflows are the mainstay responsibilities of brand managers and other senior marketing professionals. In this category, we evaluated vendors that provide marketers with comprehensive tools for marketing campaign automation, workflow building and tracking, lead management, and marketing resource planning for campaigns that need to reach a large segment of customers.

    Omnichannel Management

    The proliferation of marketing channels has created significant challenges for many organizations. In this use case, we executed a special evaluation of vendors that are well suited for the intricacies of juggling multiple channels, particularly mobile, social, and email marketing.

    2) Marketing Intelligence

    Sifting through data from a myriad of sources and coming up with actionable intelligence and insights remains a critical activity for marketing departments, particularly for market researchers. In this category, we evaluated solutions that aggregate, analyze, and visualize complex marketing data from multiple sources to allow decision makers to execute informed decisions.

    3) Social Marketing

    The proliferation of social networks, customer data, and use cases has made ad hoc social media management challenging. In this category we evaluated vendors that bring uniformity to an organization’s social media capabilities and contribute to a 360-degree customer view.

    Activity: Understand which type of MMS you need

    Associated Activity icon 1.3.1 30 minutes

    INPUT: Use-case breakdown

    OUTPUT: Project use-case alignments

    Materials: Whiteboard, markers

    Participants: Project manager, Core project team (optional)

    Instructions

    1. Familiarize your team with Info-Tech’s MMS use-case breakdown from the previous slide.
    2. Determine which use case is best aligned with your organization’s MMS project objectives. If you need assistance with this, consider the relevance of the cases studies and statements on the following slides.
    3. If your team agrees with most or all statements under a given use case, this indicates strong alignment towards that use case. It is possible for an organization to align with more than one use case. Your use-case alignment will guide you in creating a vendor shortlist later in this project.

    Use Info-Tech’s vendor research and use-case scenarios to support your organization’s vendor analysis

    The use-case view of vendor and product performance provides multiple opportunities for vendors to fit into your application architecture depending on their product and market performance. The use cases selected are based on market research and client demand.

    Determining your use case is crucial for:

    1. Selecting an application that is the right fit
    2. Establishing a business case for MMS

    The following slides illustrate how the three most common use cases (marketing automation, marketing intelligence, and social marketing) align with business needs. As shown by the case studies, the right MMS can result in great benefits to your organization.

    Use-case alignment and business need

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Marketing Automation

    Marketing Need Manage customer experience across multiple channels Manage multiple campaigns simultaneously Integrate web-enabled devices (IoT) into marketing campaigns Run and track email marketing campaigns
    A line of arrows pointing down.
    Corresponding Feature End-to-end management of email marketing Visual workflow editor Customer journey mapping Business rules engine A/B tracking

    The Portland Trail Blazers utilize an MMS to amplify their message with marketing automation technology

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Entertainment | Source: Marketo

    Challenge

    The Portland Trail Blazers, an NBA franchise, were looking to expand their appeal beyond the city of Portland and into the greater Pacific Northwest Region.

    The team’s management group also wanted to showcase the full range of events that were hosted in the team’s multipurpose stadium.

    The Trail Blazers were looking to engage fans in a more targeted fashion than their CRM allowed for. Ultimately, they hoped to move from “batch and blast” email campaigns to an automated and targeted approach.

    Solution

    The Trail Blazers implemented an MMS that allowed it to rapidly build different types of campaigns. These campaigns could be executed across a variety of channels and target multiple demographics at various points in the fan journey.

    Contextual ads were implemented using the marketing suite’s automated customer journey mapping feature. Targeted ads were served based on a fan’s location in the journey and interactions with the Trail Blazers’ online collateral.

    Results

    The automated campaigns led to a 75% email open rate, which contributed to a 96% renewal rate for season ticket holders – a franchise record.

    Other benefits resulting from the improved conversion rate included an increased cohesion between the Trail Blazers’ marketing, analytics, and ticket sales operations.

    Use-case alignment and business need

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Marketing Intelligence

    Marketing Need Capture marketing- and customer-related data from multiple sources Analyze large quantities of marketing data Visualize marketing-related data in a manner that is easy for decision makers to consume Perform trend and predictive analysis
    A line of arrows pointing down.
    Corresponding Feature Integrate data across customer segments Analysis through machine learning Assign attributers to unstructured data Displays featuring data from external sources Create complex customer data visualizations

    Chico’s FAS uses marketing intelligence to drive customer loyalty

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Retail | Source: SAS

    Challenge

    Women’s apparel retailer Chico’s FAS was looking to capitalize on customer data from in-store and online experiences.

    Chico’s hoped to consolidate customer data from multiple online and brick-and-mortar retail channels to get a complete view of the customer.

    Doing so would satisfy Chico’s need to create more highly segmented, cost-effective marketing campaigns

    Solution

    Chico’s selected an MMS with strong marketing intelligence, analysis, and data visualization capability.

    The MMS could consolidate and analyze customer and transactional information. The suite’s functionality enabled Chico’s marketing team to work directly with the data, without help from statisticians or IT staff.

    Results

    The approach to marketing indigence led to customers getting deals on products that were actually relevant to them, increasing sales and brand loyalty.

    Moreover, the time it took to perform data consolidation decreased dramatically, from 17 hours to two hours, allowing the process to be performed daily instead of weekly.

    Use-case alignment and business need

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Social Marketing

    Marketing Need Understand customers' likes and dislikes Manage and analyze social media channels like Facebook and Twitter Foster a conversation around specific products Engage international audiences through regional messaging apps
    A line of arrows pointing down.
    Corresponding Feature Social listening capabilities Tools for curating customer community content Ability to aggregate social data Integration with popular social networks Ability to conduct trend reporting

    Bayer leverages MMS technology to cultivate a social presence

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Life Sciences | Source: Adobe

    Challenge

    Bayer, a Fortune 500 health and life sciences company, was looking for a new way to communicate its complex medical breakthroughs to the general public.

    The decision was made to share the science behind its products via social channels in order to generate excitement.

    Bayer needed tools to publish content across a variety of social media platforms while fostering conversations that were more focused on the science behind products.

    Solution

    Based on the requirements, Bayer decided that an MMS would be the best fit.

    After conducting a market scan, the company selected an MMS with a comprehensive social media suite.

    The suite included tools for social listening and moderation and tools to guide conversations initiated by both marketers and customers.

    Results

    The MMS provided Bayer with the toolkit to engage its audience.

    Bayer took control of the conversation about its products by serving potential customers with relevant video content on social media.

    Its social strategy coupled with advanced engagement tools resulted in new business opportunities and more than 65,000 views on YouTube and more than 87,000 Facebook views in a single month.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s requirements gathering framework to serve as the basis for capturing your MMS requirements

    An important step in selecting an MMS that will have widespread user adoption is creating archetypal customer personas. This will enable you to talk concretely about them as consumers of the application you select and allow you to build buyer scenarios around them.
    REQUIREMENTS GATHERING
    Info-Tech’s requirements gathering framework is a comprehensive approach to requirements management that can be scaled to any size of project or organization. This framework ensures that the application created will capture the needs of all stakeholders and deliver business value. Develop and right-size a proven standard operating procedure for requirements gathering with Info-Tech’s blueprint Build a Strong Approach to Business Requirements Gathering.
    Stock photo of a Jenga tower with title: Build a Strong Approach to Business Requirements Gathering
    KEY INPUTS TO MMS REQUIREMENTS GATHERING
    Requirements Gathering Methodology

    Sample of Requirements Gathering Blueprint.

    Requirements Gathering Blueprint Slide 25: Understand the best-practice framework for requirements gathering for enterprise applications projects.

    Requirements Gathering SOP

    Sample of Requirements Gathering Blueprint.

    Requirements Gathering Blueprint Activities 1.2.2-1.2.5, 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 3.1.1, 3.2.1, 4.1.1-4.1.3, 4.2.2: Consolidate outputs to right-size a best-practice SOP for your organization.

    Project Level Selection Tool

    Sample of Requirements Gathering Blueprint.

    Requirements Gathering Blueprint Activity 1.2.4: Determine project-level selection guidelines to inform the due diligence required in your MMS requirements gathering.

    Activity: Elicit and capture your MMS requirements

    Associated Activity icon 1.3.2 Varies

    INPUT: MMS tool user expertise, MMS Requirements Picklist Tool

    OUTPUT: A list of needs from the MMS tool user perspective

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: MMS users in the organization, MMS selection committee

    Instructions

    1. Identify stakeholders for the requirements gathering exercise. Consider holding one-on-one sessions or large focus groups with key stakeholders or the project sponsor to gather business requirements for an MMS.
    2. Use the MMS Requirements Picklist Tool as a starting point for conducting the requirements elicitation session(s).
    3. Begin by reading the instructions in the template and then move to the “Requirements” worksheet. Read each defined requirement in the worksheet and indicate in the “Requirement Status” column whether the requirement is a “Must,” “High,” or “Low.” Confirming the status is an important part of the exercise. The status will help filter vendors for final selection later on in the process.
    4. Decide whether additional requirements are necessary by asking the MMS tool users. If so, add the requirements to the bottom of the “Requirements” worksheet and indicate their “Requirement Status.”

    Download the MMS Requirements Picklist Tool to help with completing this activity.

    Show the measurable benefits of MMS with metrics

    The return on investment (ROI) and perceived value of the organization’s marketing solution will be a critical indication of the likelihood of success of the suite’s selection and implementation.

    EXAMPLE
    METRICS

    MMS and Technology Adoption

    Marketing Performance Metrics
    Average revenue gain per campaign Quantity and quality of marketing insights
    Average time to execute a campaign Customer acquisition rates
    Savings from automated processes Marketing cycle times
    User Adoption and Business Feedback Metrics
    User satisfaction feedback User satisfaction survey with the technology
    Business adoption rates Application overhead cost reduction

    Info-Tech Insight

    Even if marketing metrics are difficult to track right now, the implementation of an MMS brings access to valuable customer intelligence from data that was once kept in silos.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech Workshop Associated Activity icon

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    Photo of an Info-Tech analyst.
    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analyst will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech's historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.2.1

    Sample of activity 1.2.1 'Understand your business' goals for MMS by parsing your formal CXM strategy'. Align the CXM strategy value proposition to MMS capabilities

    Our facilitator will help your team identify the IT CXM strategy and marketing goals. The analyst will then work with the team to map the strategy to technological drivers available in the MMS market.

    1.3.2

    Sample of activity 1.3.2 'Elicit and capture your MMS requirements'. Define the needs of MMS users

    Our facilitator will work with your team to identify user requirements for the MMS Requirements Picklist Tool. The analyst will facilitate a discussion with your team to prioritize identified requirements.

    Select a Marketing Management Suite

    PHASE 2

    Shortlist Marketing Management Suites

    Phase 2 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Shortlist Marketing Management Suites

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-3 months
    Step 2.1: Analyze and Shortlist MMS Vendors
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review requirements gathering findings.
    • Review the MMS market space.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Review vendor profiles and analysis.
    • Weigh the evaluation criteria’s importance in product capabilities and vendor characteristics.
    • Shortlist MMS vendors.
    With these tools & templates:
    Phase 2 Results:
    • Shortlist of MMS tools

    Phase 2 milestones

    Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements — Phase 1

    • Understand the MMS market space.
    • Assess organizational and project readiness for MMS selection.
    • Structure your MMS selection and implementation project by refining your MMS roadmap.
    • Align organizational use-case fit with market use cases.
    • Collect, prioritize, and document MMS requirements.

    Shortlist MMS Tool — Phase 2

    • Review MMS market leaders and players within your aligned use case.
    • Review MMS vendor profiles and capabilities.
    • Shortlist MMS vendors based on organizational fit.

    Select an MMS — Phase 3

    • Submit request for proposal (RFP) to shortlisted vendors.
    • Evaluate vendor responses and develop vendor demonstration scripts.
    • Score vendor demonstrations and select the final product.

    Step 2.1: Analyze and shortlist MMS vendors

    2.1

    Analyze and Shortlist MMS Vendors

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Review MMS vendor landscape.
    • Take note of relevant point solutions.
    • Shortlist vendors for the RFP process.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core project team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of Info-Tech’s use-case scenarios for MMS: marketing automation, marketing intelligence, and social marketing.
    • Familiarity with the MMS vendor landscape.
    • Shortlist of MMS vendors for RFP process.

    Familiarize yourself with the MMS market: How it got here

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Loosely Tied Together

    Originally the sales and marketing enterprise application space was highly fragmented, with disparate best-of-breed point solutions patched together. Soon after, vendors in the late 1990s started bundling automation technologies into a single suite offering. Marketing capabilities of CRM suites were minimal at best and often restricted to web and email only.

    Limited to Large Enterprises

    Many vendors started to combine all marketing tools into a single, comprehensive marketing suite, but cost and complexity limited them to large enterprises and marketing agencies.

    Best-of-breed solutions targeting new channels and new goals, like closed-loop sales and marketing, continued driving new marketing software genres, like dedicated lead management suites.

    In today’s volatile business environment, judgment built from past experience is increasingly unreliable. With consumer behaviors in flux, once-valid assumptions (e.g. ‘older consumers don’t use Facebook or send text messages’) can quickly become outdated.” (SAS Magazine)

    Info-Tech Insight

    As the market evolves, capabilities that were once cutting edge become default and new functionality becomes differentiating. Some features, like basic CRM integration, have become table stakes capabilities. Focus on advanced analytics features and omnichannel integration capabilities to get the best fit for your requirements.

    Familiarize yourself with the MMS market: Where it’s going

    Vendor Profiles icon

    AI and Machine Learning

    Vendors are beginning to offer AI capabilities across MMS for data-driven customer engagement scoring and social listening insights. Machine learning capability is being leveraged to determine optimal customer journey and suggest next steps to users.

    Marketplace Fragmentation

    The number of players in the marketing application space has grown exponentially. The majority of these new vendors offer point solutions rather than full-blown marketing suites. Fragmentation is leading to tougher choices when looking to augment an existing platform with specific functionality.

    Improving Application Integration

    MMS vendors are fostering deeper integrations between their marketing products and core CRM products, leading to improved data hygiene. At the same time, vendors are improving flexibility in the marketing suite so that new channels can be added easily.

    Greater Self-Service

    Vendors have an increased emphasis on application usability. Their goal is to enable marketers to execute campaigns without relying on specialists.

    There’s a firehose of customer data coming at marketers today, and with more interconnected devices emerging (wearables, smart watches, etc.), cultivating a seamless customer experience is likely to grow even more challenging.

    Building out a data-driven marketing strategy and technology stack that enables you to capture behaviors across channels is key.” (IBM, Ideas for Exceeding Customer Expectations)

    Review Info-Tech’s vendor profiles of the MMS market to identify vendors that meet your requirements

    Vendors & Products Evaluated

    Vendor logos including 'Adobe', 'ORACLE', and 'IBM'.

    VENDOR PROFILES

    Review the MMS Vendor Evaluation

    Large icon of a descending bar graph for vendor profiles title page.

    Table stakes are the minimum standard; without these, a product doesn’t even get reviewed

    Vendor Profiles icon

    TABLE STAKES

    Feature Table Stake Functionality
    Basic Workflow Automation Simple automation of common marketing tasks (e.g. handling inbound leads).
    Basic Channel Integration Integration with minimum two or more marketing channels (e.g. email and direct mail).
    Customizable User Interface A user interface that can be changed and optimized to users’ preferences. This includes customizable dashboards for displaying relevant marketing metrics.
    Basic Mobile UX Accessible from a mobile device in some fashion.
    Cloud Compatibility Able to offer integration within pre-existing or proprietary cloud server. Many vendors only have SaaS products.

    What does this mean?

    The products assessed in these vendor profiles meet, at the very least, the requirements outlined as table stakes.

    Many of the vendors go above and beyond the outlined table stakes; some even do so in multiple categories. This section aims to highlight the products’ capabilities in excess of the criteria listed here.

    Info-Tech Insight

    If table stakes are all you need from your MMS, determine whether your existing CRM platform already satisfies your requirements. Otherwise, dig deeper to find the best price-to-value ratio for your needs.

    Take a holistic approach to vendor and product evaluation

    Almost – or equally – as important as evaluating vendor feature capabilities is the need to evaluate vendor viability and non-functional aspects of the MMS. Include an evaluation of the following criteria in your vendor scoring methodology:

    Vendor Attribute Description
    Vendor Stability and Variability The vendor’s proven ability to execute on constant product improvement, deliberate strategic direction, and overall commitment to research and development efforts in responding to emerging trends.
    Security Model The potential to integrate the application to existing security models and the vendor's approach to handling customer data.
    Deployment Style The choice to deploy a single or multi-tenant SaaS environment via a perpetual license.
    Ease of Customization The relative ease with which a system can be customized to accommodate niche or industry-specific business or functional needs.
    Vendor Support Options The availability of vendor support options, including selection consulting, application development resources, implementation assistance, and ongoing support resources.
    Size of Partner Ecosystem The quantity of enterprise applications and third-party add-ons that can be linked to the MMS, as well as the number of system integrators available.
    Ease of Data Integration The relative ease with which the system can be integrated with an organization’s existing application environment, including legacy systems, point solutions, and other large enterprise applications.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Evaluate vendor capabilities, not just product capabilities. An MMS is typically a long-term commitment; ensure that your organization is teaming up with a vendor or provider that you feel you can work well with and depend on.

    Advanced features are the capabilities that allow for granular differentiation of market players and use-case performance

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Evaluation Methodology

    These product features were assessed as part of the classification of vendors into use cases. In determining use-case leaders and players, select features were considered based on best alignment with the use case.

    Feature Advanced Functionality
    Advanced Campaign Management End-to-end marketing campaign management: customer journey mapping, campaign initiation, monitoring, and dynamic reporting and adjustment.
    Marketing Asset Management Content repository functionality (or tight ECM integration) for marketing assets and campaign collateral (static, multimedia, e-commerce–related, etc.).
    Marketing Analytics
    • Predictive analytics; machine learning; capabilities for data ingestion and visualization across various marketing research/marketing intelligence categories (demographic, psychographic, etc.).
    • Data segmentation; drill-down ability to assign attributes to unstructured data; ability to construct complex customer/competitive data visualizations from segmented data.
    Breadth of Channel Support Ability to support and manage a wide range of marketing channels (e-commerce, SEO/SEM, paid advertising, email, traditional [print, multimedia], etc.).
    Marketing Workflow Management Visual workflow editors and business rules engine creation.

    Advanced features are the capabilities that allow for granular differentiation of market players and use-case performance

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Evaluation Methodology

    These product features were assessed as part of the classification of vendors into use cases. In determining use-case leaders and players, select features were considered based on best alignment with the use case.

    Feature Advanced Functionality
    Community Marketing Management Branded customer communities (e.g. community support forums) and DMB/DSP.
    Email Marketing Automation End-to-end management of email marketing: email templates, email previews, spam testing, A/B tracking, multivariate testing, and email metrics tracking.
    Social Marketing Ability to integrate with popular social media networks and manage social properties and to aggregate and analyze social data for trend reporting.
    Mobile Marketing Ability to manage SMS, push, and mobile application marketing.
    Marketing Operations Management Project management tools for marketers (timelines, performance indicators, budgeting/resourcing tools, etc.).

    Use the information in the MMS vendor profiles to streamline your vendor analysis process

    Vendor Profiles icon This section includes profiles of the vendors evaluated against the previously outlined framework.
    Review the use-case scenarios relevant to your organization’s use case to identify a vendor’s fit to your organization’s MMS needs.
    • L = Use-case leader
    • P = Use-case player
    Three column headers: 'Marketing Automation', 'Marketing Intelligence', and 'Social Media Marketing'.
    Understand your organization’s size and whether it falls within the product’s market focus.
    • Large enterprise: 2,000+ employees and revenue of $250M+
    • Small-medium enterprise: 30-2,000 employees and revenue of $25M-$250M
    Column header 'MARKET FOCUS' with row headers 'Small-Medium' and 'Large Enterprise'.
    Review the differentiating features to identify where the application performs best. A list of features.
    Colors signify a feature’s performance. A key for color-coding: Blue - 'Best of Breed', Green - 'Present: Competitive Strength', Yellow-Green - 'Present: Competitive Parity', Yellow - 'Semi-Present', Grey - 'Absent'.

    Adobe Marketing Cloud

    Vendor Profiles icon
    Logo for Adobe. FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Creative Cloud Integration: To make for a more seamless cross-product experience, projects can be sent between Marketing Cloud and Creative Cloud apps such as Photoshop and After Effects.

    Sensei: Adobe has revamped its machine learning and AI platform in an effort to integrate AI into all of its marketing applications. Sensei includes data from Microsoft in a new partnership program.

    Anomaly Detection: Adobe’s Anomaly Detection contextualizes data and provides a statistical method to determine how a given metric has changed in relation to previous metrics.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    L

    L

    P

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    Adobe’s goal with Marketing Cloud is to help businesses provide customers with cohesive, seamless experiences by surfacing customer profiles in relevant situations quickly. Adobe Marketing Cloud has traditionally been used in the B2C space but has seen an increase in B2C use cases driven by the finance and technology sectors. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for Adobe.
    Employees (2018): 17,000 Presence: Global Founded: 1982 NASDAQ: ADBE

    HubSpot

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for Hubspot.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Content Optimization System (COS): The fully integrated system stores assets and serves them to their designated channels at relevant times. The COS is integrated into HubSpot's marketing platform.

    Email Automation: HubSpot provides basic email that can be linked to a specific part of an organization’s marketing funnel. These emails can also be added to pre-existing automated workflows.

    Email Deliverability Tool: HubSpot identifies HTML or content that will be flagged by spam filters. It also validates links and minimizes email load times.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    P

    P

    P

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    Hubspot’s primary focus has been on email marketing campaigns. It has put effort into developing solid “click not code” email marketing capabilities. Also, Hubspot has an official integration with Salesforce for expanded operations management and analytics capabilities. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for Hubspot.
    Employees (2018): 1,400 Presence: Global Founded: 2006 NYSE: HUBS

    IBM Marketing Cloud

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for IBM.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Watson: IBM is leveraging its popular Watson AI brand to generate marketing insights for automated campaigns.

    Weather Effects: Set campaign rules based on connections between weather conditions and customer behavior relative to zip code made by Watson.

    Real-Time Personalization: IBM has made efforts to remove campaign interaction latency and optimize live customer engagement by acting on information about what customers are doing in the current moment.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    L

    L

    P

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    IBM has remained ahead of the curve by incorporating its well-known AI technology throughout Marketing Cloud. The application’s integration with the wide array of IBM products makes it a powerful tool for users already in the IBM ecosystem. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for IBM.
    Employees (2018): 380,000 Presence: Global Founded: 1911 NYSE: IBM

    Marketo

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for Marketo.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Content AI: Marketo has leveraged its investments in machine learning to intelligently fetch marketing assets and serve them to customers based on their interactions with a campaign.

    Email A/B Testing: To improve lead generation from email campaigns, Marketo features the ability to execute A/B testing for customized campaigns.

    Partnership with Google: Marketo is now hosted on Google’s cloud platform, enabling it to provide support for larger enterprise clients and improve GDPR compliance.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    P

    P

    P

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    Marketo has strong capabilities for lead management but has recently bolstered its analytics capabilities. Marketo is hoping to capture some of the analytics application market share by offering tools with varying complexity and to cater to firms with a wide range of analytics needs. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for Marketo.
    Employees (2018): 1,000 Presence: Global Founded: 2006 Private Corporation

    Oracle Marketing Cloud

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for Oracle.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Data Visualization: To make for a more seamless cross-product experience, marketing projects can be sent between Marketing Cloud and Creative Cloud apps such as Dreamweaver.

    ID Graph: Use ID Graph to unite disparate data sources to form a singular profile of leads, making the personalization and contextualization of campaigns more efficient.

    Interest-Based Messaging: Pause a campaign to update a segment or content based on aggregated customer activity and interaction data.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    P

    P

    P

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    Oracle Marketing Cloud is known for its balance between campaigns and analytics products. Oracle has taken the lead on expanding its marketing channel mix to include international options such as WeChat. Users already using Oracle’s CRM/CEM products will derive the most value from Marketing Cloud. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for Oracle.
    Employees (2018): 138,000 Presence: Global Founded: 1977 NYSE: ORCL

    Salesforce Marketing Cloud

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for Salesforce Marketing Cloud.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Einstein: Salesforce is putting effort into integrating AI into all of its applications. The Einstein AI platform provides marketers with predictive analytics and insights into customer behavior.

    Mobile Studio: Salesforce has a robust mobile marketing offering that encompasses SMS/MMS, in-app engagement, and group messaging platforms.

    Journey Builder: Salesforce created Journey Builder, which is a workflow automation tool. Its user-friendly drag-and-drop interface makes it easy to automate responses to customer actions.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    L

    P

    L

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    Salesforce Marketing Cloud is primarily used by organizations in the B2C space. It has strong Sales Cloud CRM integration. Pardot is positioning itself as a tool for sales teams in addition to marketers. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for Salesforce Marketing Cloud.
    Employees (2018): 1,800 Presence: Global Founded: 2000 NYSE: CRM

    Salesforce Pardot

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for Salesforce Pardot.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Engagement Studio: Salesforce is putting marketing capabilities in the hands of sales reps by giving them access to a team email engagement platform.

    Einstein: Salesforce’s Einstein AI platform helps marketers and sales reps identify the right accounts to target with predictive lead scoring.

    Program Steps: Salesforce developed a distinct own workflow building tool for Pardot. Workflows are made of “Program Steps” that have the functionality to initiate campaigns based on insights from Einstein.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    P

    P

    -

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    Pardot is Salesforce’s B2B marketing solution. Pardot has focused on developing tools that enable sales teams and marketers to work in lockstep in order to achieve lead-generation goals. Pardot has deep integration with Salesforce’s CRM and customer service management products. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for Salesforce Pardot.
    Employees (2018): 1,800 Presence: Global Founded: 2000 NYSE: CRM

    SAP Hybris Marketing

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for SAP.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    CMO Dashboard: The specialized dashboard is aimed at providing overviews for the executive level. It includes the ability to coordinate marketing activities and project budgets, KPIs, and timelines.

    Loyalty Management: SAP features in-app tools to manage campaigns specifically geared toward customer loyalty with digital coupons and iBeacons.

    Customer Segmentation: SAP’s predictive capabilities dynamically suggest relevant customer profiles for new campaigns.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    P

    L

    P

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    SAP Hybris Marketing Cloud optimizes marketing strategies in real time with accurate attribution and measurements. SAP’s operations management capabilities are robust, including the ability to view consolidated data streams from ongoing marketing plans, performance targets, and budgets. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for SAP.
    Employees (2018): 84,000 Presence: Global Founded: 1972 NYSE: SAP

    SAS Marketing Intelligence

    Vendor Profiles icon

    Logo for SAS.FUNCTIONAL SPOTLIGHT

    Activity Map: A user-friendly workflow builder that can be used to execute campaigns. Multiple activities can be simultaneously A/B tested within the Activity Map UI. The outcome of the test can automatically adjust the workflow.

    Spots: A native digital asset manager that can store property that is part of existing and future campaigns.

    Viya: A framework for fully integrating third-party data sources into SAS Marketing Intelligence. Viya assists with pairing on-premises databases with a cloud platform for use with the SAS suite.

    USE-CASE PERFORMANCE
    Marketing
    Automation
    Marketing
    Intelligence
    Social
    Marketing

    P

    L

    MARKET FOCUS
    Small-Medium
    Large Enterprise
    SAS has been a leading BI and analytics provider for more than 35 years. Rooted in statistical analysis of data, SAS products provide forward-looking strategic insights. Organizations that require extensive customer intelligence capabilities and the ability to “slice and dice” segments should have SAS on their shortlist. FEATURES
    Color-coded ranking of each feature for SAS.
    Employees (2018): 14,000 Presence: Global Founded: 1976 Private Corporation

    Consider alternative MMS vendors not included in Info-Tech’s vendor profiles

    Info-Tech evaluated only a portion of vendors in the MMS market. In order for a vendor to be included in this landscape, the company needed to meet three baseline criteria:
    1. Our clients must be talking about the solution.
    2. Our analysts must believe the solution will play well within the evaluation.
    3. The vendor must meet table stakes criteria.
    Below is a list of notable vendors in the space that did not meet all of Info-Tech’s inclusion requirements.

    Additional vendors in the MMS market:

    Logo for act-on. Logo for SharpSpring.

    See the next slides for suggested point solutions.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s WXM and SMMP vendor landscapes to select platforms that fit with your CXM strategy

    Web experience management (WXM) and social media management platforms (SMMP) act in concert with your MMS to execute complex campaigns.

    Social Media Management

    Info-Tech’s SMMP selection guide enables you to find a solution that satisfies your objectives across marketing, sales, public relations, HR, and customer service. Create a unified framework for driving successful implementation and adoption of your SMMP that fully addresses CRM and marketing automation integration, end-user adoption, and social analytics with Info-Tech’s blueprint Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform.

    Stock image with the title Select and Implement a Social Media Management Platform.
    Web Experience Management

    Info-Tech’s approach to WXM ensures you have the right suite of tools for web content management, experience design, and web analytics. Put your best foot forward by conducting due diligence as the selection project advances. Ensure that your organization will see quick results with Info-Tech’s blueprint Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution.

    Stock image with the title Select and Implement a Web Experience Management Solution.

    POINT SOLUTION PROFILES

    Review this cursory list of point solutions by use case

    Consider point solutions if a full suite is not required

    Large icon of a target for point solution profiles title page.

    Consider point solutions if a full suite is not required

    Email Marketing

    Logos of companies for Email Marketing including MailChimp and emma.

    Consider point solutions if a full suite is not required

    Search Engine Optimization (SEO)

    Logos of companies for Search Engine Optimization including SpyFu and SerpStat.

    Consider point solutions if a full suite is not required

    Demand-Side Platform (DSP)

    Logos of companies for Demand-Side Platform including MediaMath and rocketfuel.

    Consider point solutions if a full suite is not required

    Customer Portal Software

    Logos of companies for Customer Portal Software including LifeRay and lithium.

    Select a Marketing Management Suite

    PHASE 3

    Select Vendor and Communicate Decision to Stakeholders

    Phase 3 outline

    Associated Activity icon Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Plan Your MMS Implementation

    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks
    Step 3.1: Select Your MMS Step 3.2: Communicate the Decision to Stakeholders
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
    • Review the MMS shortlist.
    • Discuss how to link RFP questions and demo script scenarios to gathered requirements.
    Review findings with analyst:
    • Review the alignment between MMS capability and the business’ CXM strategy.
    • Discuss how to present the decision to stakeholders.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Build a vendor response template.
    • Evaluate RFP responses from vendors.
    • Build demo scripts and set up product demonstrations.
    • Establish evaluation criteria.
    • Select MMS product and vendor.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Present decision rationale to stakeholders.
    With these tools & templates:
    • MMS Request for Proposal Template
    • MMS Vendor Demo Script
    With these tools & templates:
    • MMS Selection Executive Presentation Template
    Phase 3 Results
    • Select an MMS that meets requirements and is approved by stakeholders.

    Phase 3 milestones

    Launch the MMS Project and Collect Requirements — Phase 1

    • Understand the MMS market space.
    • Assess organizational and project readiness for MMS selection.
    • Structure your MMS selection and implementation project by refining your MMS roadmap.
    • Align organizational use-case fit with market use cases.
    • Collect, prioritize, and document MMS requirements.

    Shortlist MMS Tool — Phase 2

    • Review MMS market leaders and players within your aligned use case.
    • Review MMS vendor profiles and capabilities.
    • Shortlist MMS vendors based on organizational fit.

    Select an MMS — Phase 3

    • Submit request for proposal (RFP) to shortlisted vendors.
    • Evaluate vendor responses and develop vendor demonstration scripts.
    • Score vendor demonstrations and select the final product.

    Step 2.1: Analyze and shortlist MMS vendors

    3.1

    3.2

    Select Your MMS Communicate Decision to Stakeholders

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Build a response template to standardize potential vendor responses and streamline your evaluation process.
    • Evaluate the RFPs you receive with a clear scoring process and evaluation framework.
    • Build a demo script to evaluate product demonstrations by vendors.
    • Select your solution.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core project team
    • Procurement SMEs
    • Project sponsor

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed MMS RFP vendor response template
    • Completed MMS demo script(s)
    • Established product and vendor evaluation criteria
    • Final MMS selection

    Activity: Shortlist vendors for the RFP process

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.1 30 minutes

    INPUT: Organizational use-case fit

    OUTPUT: MMS vendor shortlist

    Materials: Info-Tech’s MMS use cases, Info-Tech’s vendor profiles, Whiteboard, markers

    Participants: Core project team

    Instructions

    1. Collectively with the core project team, determine any knock-out criteria for shortlisting MMS vendors. For example, if your team is executing on a strategy that favors mobile deployment, vendors who do not have a mobile offering may be off the table.
    2. Based on the results in Activity 1.3.2, write a longlist of vendors. In most cases, this list will consist of all the vendors that fall into your organization’s use-case scenario. If your organization fits into more than one use case (e.g. your organization has both product-centric and service-centric MMS needs), look for the overlap of vendors between the use cases.
    3. Review the profiles of the vendors that fall into your use-case scenario. Based on your knock-out criteria established in Step 1, eliminate any vendors as applicable.
    4. Finalize and record your shortlist of MMS vendors.

    Use Info-Tech’s MMS Request for Proposal Template to document and communicate your requirements to vendors

    Supporting Tool icon 3.1.2 MMS Request for Proposal Template

    Use the MMS Request for Proposal Template as a step-by-step guide on how to request interested vendors to submit written proposals that meet your set of requirements.

    If interested in bidding for your project, vendors will respond with a description of the techniques they would employ to address your organizational challenges and meet your requirements, along with a plan of work and detailed budget for the project.

    The RFP is an important piece of setting and aligning your expectations with the vendors’ product offerings. Make sure to address the following elements in the RFP:

    Sections of the Tool:

    1. Statement of work
    2. General information
    3. Proposal preparation instructions
    4. Scope of work, specifications, and requirements
    5. Vendor qualifications and references
    6. Budget and estimated pricing
    7. Additional terms and conditions
    8. Vendor certification

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Sample of Info-Tech's MMS Request Proposal Template.

    Complete the MMS Request for Proposal Template by following the instructions in Activity 3.1.3.

    Activity: Create an RFP to submit to MMS vendors

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.3 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Business requirements document, Procurement procedures

    OUTPUT: MMS RFP

    Materials: Internal RFP tools or templates (if available), Info-Tech’s MMS Request for Proposal Template (optional)

    Participants: Procurement SMEs, Project manager, Core project team (optional)

    Instructions

    1. Download Info-Tech’s MMS Request for Proposal Template or prepare internal best-practice RFP tools.
    2. Build your RFP:
      1. Complete the statement of work and general information sections to provide organizational context to your longlisted vendors.
      2. Outline the organization’s procurement instructions for vendors, including due diligence, assessment criteria, and dates.
      3. Input the business requirements document as created in Activity 1.3.2.
      4. Create a scenario overview to provide vendors with an opportunity to give an estimate price.
    3. Obtain approval for your RFP. Each organization has a unique procurement process; follow your own organization’s process as you submit your RFPs to vendors. Ensure compliance with your organization’s standards and gain approval for submitting your RFP.

    Establish vendor evaluation criteria

    Vendor demonstrations are an integral part of the selection process. Having clearly defined selection criteria will help with setting up relevant demos as well as inform the vendor scorecards.

    EXAMPLE EVALUATION CRITERIAPie chart indicating the weight of each 'Vendor Evaluation Criteria': 'Functionality, 30%', 'Ease of Use, 25%', 'Cost, 15%', 'Vendor, 15%', and 'Technology, 15%'.
    Functionality (30%)
    • Breadth of capability
    • Tactical capability
    • Operational capability
    Ease of Use (25%)
    • End-user usability
    • Administrative usability
    • UI attractiveness
    • Self-service options
    Cost (15%)
    • Maintenance
    • Support
    • Licensing
    • Implementation (internal and external costs)
    Vendor (15%)
    • Support model
    • Customer base
    • Sustainability
    • Product roadmap
    • Proof of concept
    • Implementation model
    Technology (15%)
    • Configurability options
    • Customization requirements
    • Deployment options
    • Security and authentication
    • Integration environment
    • Ubiquity of access (mobile)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Base your vendor evaluations not on the capabilities of the solutions but instead on how the solutions align with your organization’s process automation requirements and considerations.

    Vendor demonstrations

    Examine how the vendor’s solution performs against your evaluation framework.

    What is the value of a vendor demonstration?

    Vendor demonstrations create a valuable opportunity for your organization to confirm that the vendor’s claims in the RFP are actually true.

    A display of the vendor’s functional capabilities and its execution of the scenarios given in your demo script will help to support your assessment of whether a vendor aligns with your MMS requirements.

    What should be included in a vendor demonstration?

    1. Vendor’s display of its solution for the scenarios provided in the demo script.
    2. Display of functional capabilities of the tool.
    3. Briefing on integration capabilities.

    Activity: Invite top performing vendors for product demonstrations

    Associated Activity icon 3.1.4 1-2 hours

    INPUT: Business requirements document, Logistical considerations, Usage scenarios by functional area

    OUTPUT: MMS demo script

    Materials: Info-Tech’s MMS Vendor Demo Script

    Participants: Procurement SMEs, Core project team

    Instructions

    1. Have your evaluation team (selected at the onset of the project) present to evaluate each vendor’s presentation. In some cases you may choose to bring in a subject matter expert (SME) to evaluate a specific area of the tool.
    2. Outline the logistics of the demonstration in the Introduction section of the template. Be sure to outline the total length of the demo and the amount of time that should be dedicated to the following:
      • Product demonstration in response to the demo script
      • Showcase of unique product elements, not reflective of the demo script
      • Question and answer session
      • Breaks and other potential interruptions
    3. Provide prompts for the vendor to display the capabilities by listing and describing usage scenarios by functional area. For example, when asking a vendor to demo financial and accounting management capabilities, you may break scenarios out by task (e.g. general ledger, accounts payable) or user role (e.g. finance manager, administrator).

    Info-Tech Insight

    Challenge vendor project teams during product demonstrations. Asking the vendor to make adjustments or customizations on the fly will allow you to get an authentic feel of product capability and flexibility, as well as of the degree of adaptability of the vendor project team. Ask the vendor to demonstrate how to do things not listed in your user scenarios, such as change system visualizations or design, change underlying data, add additional datasets, demonstrate analytics capabilities, or channel specific automation.

    Use Info-Tech’s MMS Vendor Demo Script template to set expectations for vendor product demonstration

    Vendor Profiles icon MMS Vendor Demo Script

    Customize and use Info-Tech’s MMS Vendor Demo Script to help identify how a vendor’s solution will fit your organization’s particular business capability needs.

    This tool assists with outlining logistical considerations for the demo itself and the scenarios with which the vendors should script their demonstration.

    Sections of the Tool:

    1. Introduction
    2. Demo scenarios by functional area

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Avoid providing vendors with a rigid script for product demonstration; instead, provide user scenarios. Part of the value of a vendor demonstration is the opportunity to assess whether or not the vendor project team has a solid understanding of your organization’s MMS challenges and requirements and can work with your team to determine the best solution possible. A rigid script may result in your inability to assess whether the vendor will adjust for and scale with your project and organization as a technology partner.

    INFO-TECH DELIVERABLE

    Sample of Info-Tech's MMS Vendor Demo Script.

    Use the MMS Vendor Demo Script by following the instructions in Activity 3.1.4.

    Leverage Info-Tech’s vendor selection and negotiation models as the basis for a streamlined MMS selection process

    Design a procurement process that is robust, ruthless, and reasonable. Rooting out bias during negotiation is vital to making unbiased vendor selections.

    Vendor Selection

    Info-Tech’s approach to vendor selection gets you to design a procurement process that is robust, ruthless, and reasonable. This approach enables you to take control of vendor communications. Implement formal processes with an engaged team to achieve the right price, the right functionality, and the right fit for the organization with Info-Tech's blueprint Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    Stock image with the title Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.
    Vendor Negotiation

    Info-Tech’s SaaS negotiation strategy focuses on taking control of implementation from the beginning. The strategy allows you to work with your internal stakeholders to make sure they do not team up with the vendor instead of you. Reach an agreement with your vendor that takes into account both parties’ best interests with Info-Tech’s blueprint Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last.

    Stock image with the title Negotiate SaaS Agreements That Are Built to Last.

    Step 3.2: Communicate decision to stakeholders

    3.1

    3.2

    Select Your MMS Communicate Decision to Stakeholders

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Collect project rationale documentation.
    • Create a presentation to communicate your selection decision to stakeholders.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Core project team
    • Procurement SMEs
    • Project sponsor
    • Business stakeholders
    • Relevant management

    Outcomes of this step

    • Completed MMS Selection Executive Presentation Template
    • Affirmation of MMS selection by stakeholders

    Inform internal stakeholders of the final decision

    Ensure traceability from the selected tool to the needs identified in the first phase. Internal stakeholders must understand the reasoning behind the final selection and see the alignment to their defined requirements and needs.

    Document the selection process to show how the selected tool aligns to stakeholder needs:

    A large arrow labelled 'Application Benefits', underlaid beneath two smaller arrows labelled 'MMS stakeholder needs' and 'MMS technology needs', all pointing to the right.

    Documentation will assist with:

    1. Adopting the selected MMS.
    2. Demonstrating that proper due diligence was performed during the selection process.
    3. Providing direct traceability between the selected applications and internal stakeholder needs.

    Activity: Prepare a presentation deck to communicate the selection process and decision to internal stakeholders

    Associated Activity icon 3.2.1 1 week

    INPUT: MMS tool selection committee expertise

    OUTPUT: Decision to invest or not invest in an MMS tool

    Materials: Note-taking materials, Whiteboard or flip chart, markers

    Participants: MMS tool selection committee

    Instructions

    1. Download Info-Tech’s MMS Selection Executive Presentation Template.
    2. Read the instructions on slide 2 of the template. Then, on slide 3, decide if any portion of the selection process should be removed from the communication. Discuss with the team and make adjustments to slide 3 as necessary.
    3. Work with the MMS selection committee to populate the slides that remain after the adjustments. Follow the instructions on each slide to help complete the content.
    4. Refer to the square brackets on each slide (e.g. [X.X]) to identify the activity numbers in this storyboard that correspond to the slide in the MMS Selection Executive Presentation Template. Use the outputs produced from the corresponding activities in this deck and populate each slide in the MMS Selection Executive Presentation Template.
    5. Use the completed template to present to internal stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Documenting the process of how the selection decision was made will avoid major headaches down the road. Without a documented process, internal stakeholders and even vendors can challenge and discredit the selection process.

    Vendor participation

    Vendors Who Briefed with Info-Tech Research Group

    Logos of vendors who participated in this blueprint: Salesforce Pardot, SAS, Adobe, Marketo, and Salesforce Marketing Cloud.

    Professionals Who Contributed to Our Evaluation and Research

    • Sara Camden, Digital Change Agent, Equifax
    • Caren Carrasco, Lifecycle Marketing and Automation, Benjamin David Group
    • 10 anonymous contributors participated in the vendor briefings

    Works cited

    Adobe Systems Incorporated. “Bayer builds understanding, socially.” Adobe.com, 2017. Web.

    IBM Corporation, “10 Key Marketing Trends for 2017.” IBM.com, 2017. Web.

    Marketo, Inc. “The Definitive Guide to Marketing Automation.” Marketo.com, 2013. Web.

    Marketo, Inc. “NBA franchise amplifies its message with help from Marketo’s marketing automation technology.” Marketo.com, 2017. Web.

    Salesforce Pardot. “Marketing Automation & Your CRM: The Dynamic Duo.” Pardot.com, 2017. Web.

    SAS Institute Inc. “Marketing Analytics: How, why and what’s next.” SAS Magazine, 2013. Web.

    SAS Institute Inc. “Give shoppers offers they’ll love.” SAS.com, 2017. Web.

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}436|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $47,944 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 29 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • As portfolio manager, you’re responsible for supporting the intake of new project requests, providing visibility into the portfolio of in-flight projects, and helping to facilitate the right approval and prioritization decisions.
    • You need a project portfolio management (PPM) tool that promotes the maintenance and flow of good data to help you succeed in these tasks. However, while throwing expensive technology at bad process rarely works, many organizations take this approach to solve their PPM problems.
    • Commercial PPM solutions are powerful and compelling, but they are also expensive, complex, and hard to use. When a solution is not properly adopted, the data can be unreliable and inconsistent, defeating the point of purchasing a tool in the first place.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your choice of PPM solution must be in tune with your organizational PPM maturity to ensure that you are prepared to sustain the tool use without having the corresponding PPM processes collapse under its own weight.
    • A spreadsheet-based homegrown PPM solution can provide key capabilities of an optimized PPM solution with a high level of sophistication and complexity without the prohibitive capital and labor costs demanded by commercial PPM solution.
    • Focus on your PPM decision makers that will consume the reports and insights by investigating their specific reporting needs.

    Impact and Result

    • Think outside the commercial box. Develop an affordable, adoptable, and effective PPM solution using widely available tools based on Info-Tech’s ready-to-deploy templates.
    • Make your solution sustainable. When it comes to portfolio management, high level is better. A tool that is accurate and maintainable will provide more value than one that strives for precise data yet is ultimately unmaintainable.
    • Report success. A PPM tool needs to foster portfolio visibility in order to engage and inform the executive layer and support effective decision making.

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should grow your own PPM solution, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Right-size your PPM solution

    Scope an affordable, adoptable, and effective PPM solution with Info-Tech's Portfolio Manager 2017 workbook.

    • Grow Your Own PPM Solution – Phase 1: Right-Size Your PPM Solution
    • Portfolio Manager 2017 Cost-in-Use Estimation Tool
    • None

    2. Get to know Portfolio Manager 2017

    Learn how to use Info-Tech's Portfolio Manager 2017 workbook and create powerful reports.

    • Grow Your Own PPM Solution – Phase 2: Meet Portfolio Manager 2017
    • Portfolio Manager 2017
    • Portfolio Manager 2017 (with Actuals)
    • None
    • None
    • None

    3. Implement your homegrown PPM solution

    Plan and implement an affordable, adoptable, and effective PPM solution with Info-Tech's Portfolio Manager 2017 workbook.

    • Grow Your Own PPM Solution – Phase 3: Implement Your PPM Solution
    • Portfolio Manager 2017 Operating Manual
    • Stakeholder Engagement Workbook
    • Portfolio Manager Debut Presentation for Portfolio Owners
    • Portfolio Manager Debut Presentation for Data Suppliers

    4. Outgrow your own PPM solution

    Develop an exit strategy from your home-grown solution to a commercial PPM toolset. In this video, we show a rapid transition from the Excel dataset shown on this page to a commercial solution from Meisterplan. Christoph Hirnle of Meisterplan is interviewed starting at 9 minutes.

    • None
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Grow Your Own PPM Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Scope a Homegrown PPM Solution for Your Organization

    The Purpose

    Assess the current state of project portfolio management capability at your organization. The activities in this module will inform the next modules by exploring your organization’s current strengths and weaknesses and identifying areas that require improvement.

    Set up the workbook to generate a fully functional project portfolio workbook that will give you a high-level view into your portfolio.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A high-level review of your current project portfolio capability is used to decide whether a homegrown PPM solution is an appropriate choice

    Cost-benefit analysis is done to build a business case for supporting this choice

    Activities

    1.1 Review existing PPM strategy and processes.

    1.2 Perform a cost-benefit analysis.

    Outputs

    Confirmation of homegrown PPM solution as the right choice

    Expected benefits for the PPM solution

    2 Get to Know Portfolio Manager 2017

    The Purpose

    Define a list of requirements for your PPM solution that meets the needs of all stakeholders.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A fully customized PPM solution in your chosen platform

    Activities

    2.1 Introduction to Info-Tech's Portfolio Manager 2017: inputs, outputs, and the data model.

    2.2 Gather requirements for enhancements and customizations.

    Outputs

    Trained project/resource managers on the homegrown solution

    A wish list of enhancements and customizations

    3 Implement Your Homegrown PPM Solution

    The Purpose

    Determine an action plan regarding next steps for implementation.

    Implement your homegrown PPM solution. The activities outlined in this step will help to promote adoption of the tool throughout your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A set of processes to integrate the new homegrown PPM solution into existing PPM activities

    Plans for piloting the new processes, process improvement, and stakeholder communication

    Activities

    3.1 Plan to integrate your new solution into your PPM processes.

    3.2 Plan to pilot the new processes.

    3.3 Manage stakeholder communications.

    Outputs

    Portfolio Manager 2017 operating manual, which documents how Portfolio Manager 2017 is used to augment the PPM processes

    Plan for a pilot run and post-pilot evaluation for a wider rollout

    Communication plan for impacted PPM stakeholders

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}322|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $10,000 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Businesses prioritize speed to market over secure coding and testing practices in the development lifecycle. As a result, vulnerabilities exist naturally in software.
    • To improve overall system security, organizations are leveraging external security researchers to identify and remedy vulnerabilities, so as to mitigate the overall security risk.
    • A primary challenge to developing a coordinated vulnerability disclosure (CVD) program is designing repeatable procedures and scoping the program to the organization’s technical capacity.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Having a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program is likely to be tomorrow’s law. With pressures from federal government agencies and recommendations from best-practice frameworks, it is likely that a CVD will be mandated in the future to encourage organizations to be equipped and prepared to respond to externally disclosed vulnerabilities.
    • CVD programs such as bug bounty and vulnerability disclosure programs (VDPs) may reward differently, but they have the same underlying goals. As a result, you don't need dramatically different process documentation.

    Impact and Result

    • Design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program that reflects business, customer, and regulatory obligations.
    • Develop a program that aligns your resources with the scale of the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.
    • Follow Info-Tech’s vulnerability disclosure methodology by leveraging our policy, procedure, and workflow templates to get you started.

    Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should design a coordinated vulnerability disclosure program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess goals

    Define the business, customer, and compliance alignment for the coordinated vulnerability disclosure program.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 1: Assess Goals
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    2. Formalize the program

    Equip your organization for coordinated vulnerability disclosure with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Design a Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Program – Phase 2: Formalize the Program
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Policy
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Plan
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (Visio)
    • Coordinated Vulnerability Disclosure Workflow (PDF)
    [infographic]

    Modernize Your SDLC

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}148|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $30,263 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Today’s rapidly scaling and increasingly complex products create mounting pressure on delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly and with sufficient quality.
    • Many organizations lack the critical capabilities and resources needed to satisfy their growing backlog, jeopardizing product success.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Delivery quality and throughput go hand in hand. Focus on meeting minimum process and product quality standards first. Improved throughput will eventually follow.
    • Business integration is not optional. The business must be involved in guiding delivery efforts, and ongoing validation and verification product changes.
    • The software development lifecycle (SDLC) must deliver more than software. Business value is generated through the products and services delivered by your SDLC. Teams must provide the required product support and stakeholders must be willing to participate in the product’s delivery.

    Impact and Result

    • Standardize your definition of a successful product. Come to an organizational agreement of what defines a high-quality and successful product. Accommodate both business and IT perspectives in your definition.
    • Clarify the roles, processes, and tools to support business value delivery and satisfy stakeholder expectations. Indicate where and how key roles are involved throughout product delivery to validate and verify work items and artifacts. Describe how specific techniques and tools are employed to meet stakeholder requirements.
    • Focus optimization efforts on most affected stages. Reveal the health of your SDLC from the value delivery, business and technical practice quality standards, discipline, throughput, and governance perspectives with a diagnostic. Identify and roadmap the solutions to overcome the root causes of your diagnostic results.

    Modernize Your SDLC Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should modernize your SDLC, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Set your SDLC context

    State the success criteria of your SDLC practice through the definition of product quality and organizational priorities. Define your SDLC current state.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 1: Set Your SDLC Context
    • SDLC Strategy Template

    2. Diagnose your SDLC

    Build your SDLC diagnostic framework based on your practice’s product and process objectives. Root cause your improvement opportunities.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 2: Diagnose Your SDLC
    • SDLC Diagnostic Tool

    3. Modernize your SDLC

    Learn of today’s good SDLC practices and use them to address the root causes revealed in your SDLC diagnostic results.

    • Modernize Your SDLC – Phase 3: Modernize Your SDLC
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Modernize Your SDLC

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Set Your SDLC Context

    The Purpose

    Discuss your quality and product definitions and how quality is interpreted from both business and IT perspectives.

    Review your case for strengthening your SDLC practice.

    Review the current state of your roles, processes, and tools in your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Grounded understanding of products and quality that is accepted across the organization.

    Clear business and IT objectives and metrics that dictate your SDLC practice’s success.

    Defined SDLC current state people, process, and technologies.

    Activities

    1.1 Define your products and quality.

    1.2 Define your SDLC objectives.

    1.3 Measure your SDLC effectiveness.

    1.4 Define your current SDLC state.

    Outputs

    Product and quality definitions.

    SDLC business and technical objectives and vision.

    SDLC metrics.

    SDLC capabilities, processes, roles and responsibilities, resourcing model, and tools and technologies.

    2 Diagnose Your SDLC

    The Purpose

    Discuss the components of your diagnostic framework.

    Review the results of your SDLC diagnostic.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    SDLC diagnostic framework tied to your SDLC objectives and definitions.

    Root causes to your SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

    Activities

    2.1 Build your diagnostic framework.

    2.2 Diagnose your SDLC.

    Outputs

    SDLC diagnostic framework.

    Root causes to SDLC issues and optimization opportunities.

    3 Modernize Your SDLC

    The Purpose

    Discuss the SDLC practices used in the industry.

    Review the scope and achievability of your SDLC optimization initiatives.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Knowledge of good practices that can improve the effectiveness and efficiency of your SDLC.

    Realistic and achievable SDLC optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 Learn and adopt SDLC good practices.

    3.2 Build your optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Optimization initiatives and target state SDLC practice.

    SDLC optimization roadmap, risks and mitigations, and stakeholder communication flow.

    Fix Your IT Culture

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}518|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $32,499 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Lead
    • Parent Category Link: /lead
    • Go beyond value statements to create a culture that enables the departmental strategy.
    • There is confusion about how to translate culture from an abstract concept to something that is measurable, actionable, and process driven.
    • Organizations lack clarity about who is accountable and responsible for culture, with groups often pointing fingers at each other.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • When it comes to culture, the lived experience can be different from stated values. Culture is the pattern of behaviors and the way work is done rather than simply perks, working environment, and policy.
    • Executives’ active participation in culture change is paramount. If executives aren’t willing to change the way they behave, attempts to shift the culture will fail.
    • Elevate culture to a business imperative. Foster a culture that is linked to strategy rather than trying to replicate the hot culture of the moment.
    • Target values that will have the greatest impact. Select a few focus values as a guide and align all behaviors and work practices to those values.

    Impact and Result

    • Executives need to clarify how the culture they want will help achieve their strategy and choose the focus values that will have the maximum impact.
    • Measure the current state of culture and facilitate the process of leveraging existing elements while shifting undesirable ones.

    Fix Your IT Culture Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should improve your culture to enable your strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assessment: Determine current culture and identify focus values

    Complete a cultural assessment and select focus values to form core culture efforts.

    • Culture Documentation Template
    • IT Departmental Values Survey
    • IT Culture Diagnostic
    • Cultural Assessment Report Template

    2. Tools: Give IT executives the tools to drive change

    Enable executives to gather feedback on behavioral perceptions and support behavioral change.

    • Executive Reflection Template

    3. Behavioral Alignment: Align IT behaviors to the desired culture

    Review all areas of the department to understand where the links to culture exist and create a communication plan.

    • Standard Internal Communications Plan
    • IT Competency Library
    • Leadership Competency Library

    4. Sustainment: Disseminate and manage culture within the department

    Customize a process to infuse behaviors aligned with focus values in work practices and complete the first wave of meetings.

    • Culture Facilitation Guide for Leaders
    [infographic]

    Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}460|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $7,199 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Operations Management
    • Parent Category Link: /i-and-o-process-management
    • Measuring the business value provided by IT is very challenging.
    • You have a number of metrics, but they may not be truly meaningful, contextual, or actionable.
    • You know you need more than a single metric to tell the whole story. You also suspect that metrics from different systems combined will tell an even fuller story.
    • You are being asked to provide information from different levels of management, for different audiences, conveying different information.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Many organizations collect metrics to validate they are keeping the lights on. But the Infrastructure and Operations managers who are benefitting the most are taking steps to ensure they are getting the right metrics to help them make decisions, manage costs, and plan for change.
    • Complaints about metrics are often rooted in managers wading through too many individual metrics, wrong metrics, or data that they simply can’t trust.
    • Info-Tech surveyed and interviewed a number of Infrastructure managers, CIOs, and IT leaders to understand how they are leveraging metrics. Successful organizations are using metrics for everything from capacity planning to solving customer service issues to troubleshooting system failures.

    Impact and Result

    • Manage metrics so they don’t become time wasters and instead provide real value.
    • Identify the types of metrics you need to focus on.
    • Build a metrics process to ensure you are collecting the right metrics and getting data you can use to save time and make better decisions.

    Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should implement a metrics program in your Infrastructure and Operations practice, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Gap analysis

    This phase will help you identify challenges that you want to avoid by implementing a metrics program, discover the main IT goals, and determine your core metrics.

    • Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics – Phase 1: Gap Analysis
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Executive Presentation

    2. Build strategy

    This phase will help you make an actionable plan to implement your metrics program, define roles and responsibilities, and communicate your metrics project across your organization and with the business division.

    • Take Control of Infrastructure and Operations Metrics – Phase 2: Build Strategy
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Definition Template
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Tracking and Reporting Tool
    • Infra & Ops Metrics Program Roles & Responsibilities Guide
    • Weekly Metrics Review With Your Staff
    • Quarterly Metrics Review With the CIO
    [infographic]

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}528|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Customer expectations regarding service are rapidly evolving. As your current IT systems may be viewed as ineffective at delivering upon these expectations, a transformation is called for.
    • It is unclear whether IT has the system architecture/infrastructure to support modern Customer Service channels and technologies.
    • The relationship between Customer Service and IT is strained. Strategic system-related decisions are being made without the inclusions of IT, and IT is only engaged post-purchase to address integration or issues as they arise.
    • Scope: An ABPM-centric approach is taken to model the desired future state, and retrospectively look into the current state to derive gaps and sequential requirements. The requirements are bundled into logical IT initiatives to be plotted on a roadmap and strategy document.
    • Challenge: The extent to which business processes can be mapped down to task-based Level 5 can be challenging depending on the maturity of the organization.
    • Pain/Risk: The health of the relationship between IT and Customer Service may determine project viability. Poor collaboration and execution may strain the relationship further.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • When transformation is called for, start with future state visioning. Current state analysis can impede your ability to see future needs and possibilities.
    • Solve your own problems by enhancing core or “traditional” Customer Service functionality first, and then move on to more ambitious business enabling functionality.
    • The more rapidly businesses can launch applications in today’s market, the better positioned they are to improve customer experience and reap the associated benefits. Ensure that technology is implemented with a solid strategy to support the initiative.

    Impact and Result

    • The right technology is established to support current and future Customer Service needs.
    • Streamlined and optimized Customer Service processes that drive efficiency and improve Customer Service quality are established.
    • The IT and Customer Service functions are both transformed from a cost center into a competitive advantage.

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Structure the project

    Identify project stakeholders, define roles, and create the project charter.

    • Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service Storyboard
    • Project RACI Chart
    • Project Charter

    2. Define vision for future state

    Identify and model the future state of key business processes.

    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    3. Document current state and assess gaps

    Model the current state of key business processes and assess gaps.

    4. Evaluate solution options

    Review the outputs of the current state architecture health assessment and adopt a preliminary posture on architecture.

    5. Evaluate application options

    Evaluate the marketplace applications to understand the “art of the possible.”

    6. Frame desired state and develop roadmap

    Compile and score a list of initiatives to bridge the gaps, and plot the initiatives on a strategic roadmap.

    • Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Vision for Future State

    The Purpose

    Discuss Customer Service-related organizational goals and align goals with potential strategies for implementation.

    Score level 5 Customer Service business processes against organizational goals to come up with a shortlist for modeling.

    Create a future state model for one of the shortlisted business processes.

    Draft the requirements as they relate to the business process.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Preliminary list of Customer Service-related business goals

    List of Customer Service business processes (Task Level 5)

    Pre-selected Customer Service business process for modeling

    Activities

    1.1 Outline and prioritize your customer goals and link their relevance and value to your Customer Service processes with the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    1.2 Score customer service business processes against organizational goals with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    Outputs

    Initial position on viable Customer Service strategies

    Shortlist of key business processes

    Documented future state business process model

    Business/functional/non-functional requirements

    2 Document Current State and Assess Gaps

    The Purpose

    Create a current state model for the shortlisted business processes.

    Score the functionality and integration of current supporting applications.

    Revise future state model and business requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Inventory of Customer Service supporting applications

    Inventory of related system interfaces

    Activities

    2.1 Holistically assess multiple aspects of Customer Service-related IT assets with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    Outputs

    Documented current state business process model

    Customer Service systems health assessment

    3 Adopt an Architectural Posture

    The Purpose

    Review the Customer Service systems health assessment results.

    Discuss options.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Completed Customer Service systems health assessment

    Application options

    Activities

    3.1 Analyze CS Systems Strategy and review results with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    Outputs

    Posture on system architecture

    4 Frame Desired State and Develop Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Draft a list of initiatives based on requirements.

    Score and prioritize the initiatives.

    Plot the initiatives on a roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Business/functional/non-functional requirements

    Activities

    4.1 Help project and management stakeholders visualize the implementation of Customer Service IT initiatives with the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.

    Outputs

    Scored and prioritized list of initiatives

    Customer Service implementation roadmap

    Further reading

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    E-commerce is accelerating, and with it, customer expectations for exceptional digital service.

    Analyst Perspective

    The future of Customer Service is digital. Your organization needs an IT strategy to meet this demand.

    The image contains a picture of Thomas E. Randall.

    As the pandemic closed brick-and-mortar stores, the acceleration of ecommerce has cemented Customer Service’s digital future. However, the pandemic also revealed severe cracks in the IT strategy of organizations’ Customer Service – no matter the industry. These cracks may include low resolution and high wait times through the contact center, or a lack of analytics that fuel a reactive environment. Unfortunately, organizations have no time to waste in resolving these issues. Customer patience for poor digital service has only decreased since March 2020, leaving organizations with little to no runway for ramping up their IT strategy.

    Organizations that quickly mature their digital Customer Service will come out the other side of COVID-19 more competitive and with a stronger reputation. This move necessitates a concrete IT strategy for coordinating what the organization’s future state should look like and agreeing on the technologies and software required to meet this state across the entire organization.

    Thomas E. Randall, Ph.D.

    Senior Research Analyst, Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Common Obstacles

    Info-Tech’s Solution

    • COVID-19 has accelerated ecommerce, rapidly evolving customer expectations about the service they should receive. Without a robust IT strategy for enabling remote, contactless points of service, your organization will quickly fall behind.
    • The organization would like to use modern channels and technologies to enhance customer service, but it is unclear whether IT has the infrastructure to support them.
    • The relationship between Customer Service and IT is strained. Strategic system-related decisions are being made without the inclusion of IT.
    • IT is in a permanent reactive state, only engaged post-purchase to fix issues as they arise and to offer workarounds.
    • Use Info-Tech’s methodology to produce an IT strategy for Customer Service:
      • Phase 1: Define Project and Future State
      • Phase 2: Evaluate Current State
      • Phase 3: Build a Roadmap to Future State
    • Each phase contributes toward this blueprint’s key deliverable: the Strategic Roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT must proactively engage with the organization to define what good customer service should look like. This ensures IT has a fair say in what kinds of architectural solutions are feasible for any projected future state. In this proactive scenario, IT can help build the roadmap for implementing and maintaining customer service infrastructure and operations, reducing the time and resources spent on putting out preventable fires or trying to achieve an unworkable goal set by the organization.

    Key insights

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    Ecommerce growth has increased customer expectations

    Despite the huge obstacles that organizations are having to overcome to meet accelerating ecommerce from the pandemic, customers have not increased their tolerance for organizations with poor service. Indeed, customer expectations for excellent digital service have only increased since March 2020. If organizations cannot meet these demands, they will become uncompetitive.

    The future of customer service is tied up in analytics

    Without a coordinated IT strategy for leveraging technology and data to improve Customer Service, the organization will quickly be left behind. Analytics and reporting are crucial for proactively engaging with customers, planning marketing campaigns, and building customer profiles. Failing to do so leaves the organization blind to customer needs and will constantly be in firefighting mode.

    Meet the customer wherever they are – no matter the channel

    Providing an omnichannel experience is fast becoming a table stakes offering for customers. To maximize customer engagement and service, the organization must connect with the customer on whatever channel the customer prefers – be it social media, SMS, or by phone. While voice will continue to dominate how Customer Service connects with customers, demographics are shifting toward a digital-first generation. Organizations must be ready to capture this rapidly expanding audience.

    This blueprint will achieve:

    Increased customer satisfaction

    • An IT strategy for Customer Service that proactively meets customer demand, improving overall customer satisfaction with the organization’s services.
    • A process for identifying the organization’s future state of Customer Service and developing a concrete gap analysis.

    Time saved

    • Ready-to-use deliverables that analyze and provide a roadmap toward the organization’s desired future state.
    • Market analyses and rapid application selection through SoftwareReviews to streamline project time-to-completion.

    Increased ROI

    • A modernization process that aids Customer Service digital transformation, with a view to achieve high ROI.
    • Save costs through an effective requirements gathering method.
    • Building and expanding the organization’s customer base to increase revenues by meeting the customers where they are – no matter what channel.

    An IT strategy for customer service is imperative for a post-COVID world

    COVID-19 has accelerated ecommerce, rapidly evolving customer expectations for remote, contactless service.

    59% Of customers agree that the pandemic has raised their standards for service (Salesforce, 2020).

    • With COVID-19, most customer demand and employment moved online and turned remote.
    • Retailers had to rapidly respond, meeting customer demand through ecommerce. This not only entailed a complete shift in how customers could buy their goods but how retailers could provide a remote customer journey from discovery to post-purchase support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The pandemic did not improve customer tolerance for bad service – instead, the demand for good service increased dramatically. Organizations need an IT strategy to meet customer support demands wherever the customer is located.

    The technology to provide remote customer support is surging

    IT needs to be at the forefront of learning about and suggesting new technologies, working with Customer Service to deliver a consistent, business-driven approach.

    78%

    Of decision makers say they’ve invested in new technology as a result of the pandemic (Salesforce, 2020).

    OMNICHANNEL SUPPORT

    Rapidly changing demographics and modes of communications require an evolution toward omnichannel engagement. Agents need customer information synced across each channel they use, meeting the customer’s needs where they are.

    78%

    Of customers have increased their use of self-service during the pandemic (Salesforce, 2020).

    INTELLIGENT SELF-SERVICE PORTALS

    Customers want their issues resolved as quickly as possible. Machine-learning self-service options deliver personalized customer experiences, which also reduce both agent call volume and support costs for the organization.

    90%

    Of global executives who use data analytics report that they improved their ability to deliver a great customer experience (Gottlieb, 2019).

    LEVERAGING ANALYTICS

    The future of customer service is tied up with analytics: from AI-driven capabilities that include agent assist and using biometric data (e.g., speech) for security, to feeding real insights about how customers and agents are doing and performing.

    Executive Brief – Case Study

    Self-service options improve quality of service and boost organization’s competitiveness in a digital marketspace.

    INDUSTRY: Financial Services

    SOURCE: TSB

    Situation

    Solution

    Results

    • The pandemic increased pressure on TSB’s Customer Service, with higher call loads from their five million customers who were anxious about their financial situation.
    • TSB needed to speed up its processing times to ensure loan programs and other assistances were provided as quickly as possible.
    • As meeting in-person became impossible due to the lockdown, TSB had to step up its digital abilities to serve their customers.
    • TSB sought to boost its competitiveness by shifting as far as possible to digital services.
    • TSB launched government loan programs in 36 hours, ahead of its competitors.
    • TSB created and released 21 digital self-service forms for customers to complete without needing to interact with bank staff.
    • TSB processed 140,000 forms in three months, replacing 15,000 branch visits.
    • TSB increased digital self-service rate by nine percent.

    IT can demonstrate its value to business by enhancing remote customer service

    IT must engage with Customer Service – otherwise, IT risks being perennially reactive and dictated to as remote customer service needs increase.

    IT benefits

    Customer Service benefits

    • The right technology is established to support Customer Service.
    • IT is viewed as a strategic partner and innovator, not just a cost center and support function.
    • Streamlined and optimized Customer Service processes that drive efficiency and improve Customer Service quality.
    • Transformation of the Customer Service function into a competitive advantage.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Change to how Customer Service will operate is inevitable. This is an opportunity for IT to establish their value to the business and improve their autonomy in how new technologies should be onboarded and utilized.

    Customer Service and IT need to work together to mitigate their pain points

    IT and Customer Service have an opportunity to reinforce and build their organization’s customer base by working together to streamline operations.

    IT pain points

    Customer Service pain points

    • IT lacks understanding of Customer Service challenges and pain points.
    • IT has technical debt or constrained technology funding.
    • The IT department is viewed as a cost center and support organization, not an engine of innovation, growth, and service delivery performance.
    • Processes supporting Customer Service delivery may be sub-optimal.
    • The existing technology cannot support the increasingly advanced needs of Customer Service functions.
    • Customer Service isn’t fully aware of what your customers think of your service quality. There is little to no monitoring of customer sentiment.
    • There is a lack of value-based segmentation of customers and information on their channel usage and preferences.
    • Competitor actions are not actively monitored.

    IT often cannot spark a debate with Customer Service on whether a decision made without IT is misaligned with corporate direction. It’s almost always an uphill battle for IT.

    Sahri Lava, Research Director, IDC

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    DON’T FALL BEHIND

    70% of companies either have a digital transformation strategy in place or are working on one (Tech Pro Research, 2018). Unless IT can enable technology that meets the customer where they are, the organization will quickly fall behind in an age of accelerating ecommerce.

    DEVELOP FUTURE STATES

    Many customer journeys are now exclusively digital – 63% of customers expect to receive service over social media (Ringshall, 2020). Organization’s need an IT strategy to develop the future of their customer service – from leveraging analytics to self-service AI portals.

    BUILD GAP ANALYSIS

    73% of customers prefer to shop across multiple channels (Sopadjieva et al., 2017). Assess your current state’s application integrations and functionality to ensure your future state can accurately sync customer information across each channel.

    SHORTLIST SOLUTIONS

    Customer relationship management software is one of the world's fastest growing industries (Kuligowski, 2022). Choosing a best-fit solution requires an intricate analysis of the market, future trends, and your organization’s requirements.

    ADVANCE CHANGE

    95% of customers cite service as key to their brand loyalty (Microsoft, 2019). Build out your roadmap for the future state to retain and build your customer base moving forward.

    Use Info-Tech’s method to produce an IT strategy for Customer Service:

    PHASE 1: Define Project and Future State

    Output: Project Charter and Future State Business Processes

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define a Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    KEY DELIVERABLE:

    Strategic Roadmap

    The image contains a screenshot of the strategic roadmap.

    PHASE 2: Evaluate Current State

    Output: Requirements Identified to Bridge Current to Future State

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    PHASE 3: Build a Roadmap to Future State

    Output: Initiatives and Strategic Roadmap

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Your Strategic Roadmap

    Key deliverable and tools outline

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting materials to help you accomplish your goals.

    Project RACI Chart

    Activity 1.1a Organize roles and responsibilities for carrying out project steps.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project RACI Chart.

    Key Deliverable:

    Strategic Roadmap

    Develop, prioritize, and implement key initiatives for your customer service IT strategy, plotting and tracking them on an easy-to-read timeline.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Strategic Roadmap.

    Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    Activities 1.2a, 1.2b, and 2.1aOutline and prioritize customer service goals.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Project Charter Template

    Activity 1.1b Define the project, its key deliverables, and metrics for success.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

    Systems Strategy Tool

    Activities 1.3a, Phase 2, 3.1a Prioritize requirements, assess current state customer service functions, and decide what to do with your current systems going forward.

    .The image contains a screenshot of the Systems Strategy Tool.

    Looking ahead: defining metrics for success

    Phase 1 of this blueprint will help solidify how to measure this project’s success. Start looking ahead now.

    For example, the metrics below show the potential business benefits for several stakeholders through building an IT strategy for Customer Service. These stakeholders include agents, customers, senior leadership, and IT. The benefits of this project are listed to the right.

    Metric Description

    Current Metric

    Future Goal

    Number of channels for customer contact

    1

    6

    Customer self-service resolution

    0%

    50%

    % ROI

    - 4%

    11%

    Agent satisfaction

    42%

    75%

    As this project nears completion:

    1. Customers will have more opportunities for self-service resolution.
    2. Agents will experience higher satisfaction, improving attrition rates.
    3. The organization will experience higher ROI from its digital Customer Service investments.
    4. Customers can engage the contact center via a communication channel that suits them.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    Guided Implementation

    Workshop

    Consulting

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”“Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”“We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”“Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical Guided Implementation on this topic look like?

    Define Project and Future StateDocument and Assess Current StateEvaluate Architectural and Application OptionsBuild Roadmap to Future State

    Call #1: Introduce project, defining its vision and metrics of success.

    Call #2: Review environmental scan to define future state vision.

    Call #3: Examine future state business processes to compile initial requirements.

    Call #4: Document current state business processes.

    Call #5: Assess current customer service IT architecture.

    Call #6: Refine and prioritize list of requirements for future state.

    Call #7: Evaluate architectural options.

    Call #8: Evaluate application options.

    Call #9:Develop and score initiatives to future state.

    Call #10: Develop timeline and roadmap.

    Call #11: Review progress and wrap-up project.

    A Guided Implementation is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical Guided Implementation is two to 12 calls over the course of four to six months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com1-888-670-8889

    Day 1Day 2Day 3Day 4Day 5

    Define Your Vision for Future State

    Document Current State and Assess Gaps

    Adopt an Architectural Posture

    Frame Desired State and Develop Roadmap

    Communicate and Implement

    Activities

    1.1 Outline and prioritize your customer goals.

    1.2 Link customer service goals’ relevance and value to your Customer Service processes.

    1.3 Score Customer Service business processes against organizational goals.

    2.1 Holistically assess multiple aspects of Customer Service-related IT assets with Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    3.1 Analyze Customer Service Systems Strategy and review results with the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    4.1 Help project management stakeholders visualize implementation of Customer Service IT initiatives.

    4.2 Build strategic roadmap and plot initiatives.

    5.1 Finalize deliverables.

    5.2 Support communication efforts.

    5.3 Identify resources in support of priority initiatives.

    Deliverables

    1. Initial position on viable Customer Service strategies.
    2. Shortlist of key business processes.
    3. Documented future-state business process model.
    4. Business/functional/non-functional requirements.
    1. Documented current state business process model.
    2. Customer Service systems health assessment.
    3. Inventory of Customer Service supporting applications.
    4. Inventory of related system interfaces.
    1. Posture on system architecture.
    2. Completed Customer Service systems health assessment.
    3. List of application options.
    1. Scored and prioritized list of initiatives.
    2. Customer Service implementation roadmap.
    1. Customer Service IT Strategy Roadmap.
    2. Mapping of Info-Tech resources against individual initiatives.

    Phase 1

    Define Project and Future State

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Strategic Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    1.1a Create your project’s RACI chart to establish key roles throughout the timeline of the project.

    1.1b Finalize your project charter that captures the key goals of the project, ready to communicate to stakeholders for approval.

    1.2a Begin documenting business processes to establish potential future states.

    1.2b Model future state business processes for looking beyond current constraints and building the ideal scenario.

    1.3a Document your preliminary requirements for concretizing a future state and performing a gap analysis.

    Participants required for Phase 1:

    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    1.1 Identify process owners early for successful project execution

    IT and Customer Service must work in tandem throughout the project. Both teams’ involvement ensures all stakeholders are heard and support the final decision.

    Customer Service Perspective

    IT Perspective

    • Customer Service is the victim of pain points resulting from suboptimal systems and it stands to gain the most benefits from a well-planned systems strategy.
    • Looking to reduce pain points, Customer Service will likely initiate, own, and participate heavily in the project.
    • Customer Service must avoid the tendency to make IT-independent decisions. This could lead to disparate systems that contribute little to the overall organizational goals.
    • IT owns the application and back-end support of all Customer Service business processes. Any technological aspect of processes will need IT involvement.
    • IT may or may not have the mandate to run the Customer Service strategy project. Responsibility for systems decisions remains with IT.
    • IT should own the task of filtering out unnecessary or infeasible application and technology decisions. IT capabilities to support such acquisitions and post-purchase maintenance must be considered.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While involving management is important for high-level strategic decisions, input from those who interact day-to-day with the systems is a crucial component to a well-planned strategy.

    1.1 Define project roles and responsibilities to improve progress tracking

    Assign responsibilities, accountabilities, and other project involvement roles using a RACI chart.

    • IT should involve Customer Service from the beginning of project planning to implementation and execution. The project requires input and knowledge from both functions to succeed.
    • Do not let the tasks be forgotten within inter-functional communication. Define roles and responsibilities for the project as early as possible.
    • Each member of the project team should be given a RACI designation, which will vary for each task to ensure clear ownership, execution, and progress tracking.
    • Assigning RACI early can:
      • Improve project quality by assigning the right people to the right tasks.
      • Improve chances of project task completion by assigning clear accountabilities.
      • Improve project buy-in by ensuring that stakeholders are kept informed of project progress, risks, and successes.

    R – Responsibility

    A – Accountability

    C – Consulted

    I – Informed

    1.1 Use Info-Tech’s recommended process owners and roles for this blueprint

    Customer Service Head

    Customer Service Director

    CIO

    Applications Director*

    CEO/COO

    Marketing Head

    Sales Head

    Determine Project Suitability

    ARCCCII

    Phase 1.1

    CCARIII

    Phases 1.2 – 1.3

    ARCCICC

    Phase 2

    ARICIII

    Phase 3.1

    (Architectural options)

    CCARIII

    Phase 3.1

    (Application options)

    ACIRICC

    Phases 3.2 – 3.3

    CCARCII

    * The Applications Director is to compile a list of Customer Service systems; the Customer Service Director is responsible for vetting a list and mapping it to Customer Service functions.

    ** The Applications Director is responsible for technology-related decisions (e.g. SaaS or on-premise, integration issues); the Customer Service Director is responsible for functionality-related decisions.

    1.1a Create your project’s RACI chart

    1 hour

    1. The Applications Director and Customer Service Head should identify key participants and stakeholders of the project.
    2. Use Info-Tech’s Project RACI Chart to identify ownership of tasks.
    3. Record roles in the Project RACI Chart.
    The image contains a screenshot of the project RACI chart.
    InputOutput
    • Identification of key project participants and stakeholders.
    • Identification of key project participants and stakeholders.

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project RACI Chart
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Project RACI Chart

    1.1 Start developing the project charter

    A project charter should address the following:

    • Executive Summary and Project Overview
      • Goals
      • Benefits
      • Critical Success Factors
    • Scope
    • Key Deliverables
    • Stakeholders and RACI
    • Risk Assessment
      • What are some risks you may encounter during project execution?
    • Projected Timeline and Key Milestones
    • Review and Approval Process

    What is a project charter?

    • The project charter defines the project and lays the foundation for all subsequent project planning.
    • Once approved by the business, the charter gives the project lead formal authority to initiate the project.

    Why create a project charter?

    • The project charter allows all parties involved to reach an agreement and document major aspects of the project.
    • It also supports the decision-making process and can be used as a communication tool.

    Stakeholders must:

    • Understand and agree on the objectives and important characteristics of the project charter before the project is initiated.
    • Be given the opportunity to adjust the project charter to better address their needs and concerns.

    1.1b Finalize the project charter

    1-2 hours

    1. Request relevant individuals and parties to complete sections of Info-Tech’s Project Charter Template.
    2. Input the simplified RACI output from tab 3 in Info-Tech’s Project RACI Chart tool into the RACI section of the charter.
    3. Send the completed template to the CIO and Customer Service Head for approval.
    4. Communicate the document to stakeholders for changes and finalization.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Project Charter Template.

    Input

    Output

    • Customer Service and IT strategies
    • Justification of impetus to begin this project
    • Timeline estimates
    • A completed project charter that captures the key goals of the project, ready to communicate to stakeholders for approval.

    Materials

    Participants

    • Project RACI Chart
    • Project Charter Template
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Project Charter Template

    1.2 IT must play a role shaping Customer Service’s future vision

    IT is only one or two degrees of separation from the end customer – their involvement can significantly impact the customer experience.

    IT

    Customer Service

    Customer

    Customer Service-Facing Application

    Customer-Facing Application

    • IT enables, supports, and maintains the applications used by the Customer Service organization to service customers. IT provides the infrastructural and technical foundation to operate the function.
    • IT supports customer-facing interfaces and channels for Customer Service interaction.
    • Channel examples include web pages, mobile device applications and optimization, and interactive voice response for callers.

    1.2 Establish a vision for Customer Service excellence

    Info-Tech has identified three prominent Customer Service strategic patterns. Evaluate which fits best with your situation and organization.

    Retention

    Efficiency

    Cross-Sell/Up-Sell

    Ensuring customers remain customers by providing proactive customer service and a seamless omnichannel strategy.

    Reducing costs by diverting customers to lower cost channels and empowering agents to solve problems quickly.

    Maximizing the value of existing customers by capitalizing on cross-sell and up-sell opportunities.

    1.2 Let profitability goals help reveal which strategy to pursue

    Profitability goals are tied to the enabling of customer service strategies.

    • If looking to drive cost decreases across the organization, pursue cost efficiency strategies such as customer volume diversion in order to lower cost channels and avoid costly escalations for customer complaints and inquiries.
    • Ongoing Contribution Margin is positive only once customer acquisition costs (CAC) have been paid back. For every customer lost, another customer has to be acquired in order to experience no loss. In this way, customer retention strategies help decrease your overall costs.
    • Once cost reduction and customer retention measures are in place, look to increase overall revenue through cross-selling and up-selling activities with your customers.
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate the relationship between goals and enabling strategies.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Purely driving efficiency is not the goal. Create a balance that does not compromise customer satisfaction.

    Customer Service strategies: Case studies

    Efficiency

    • Volume diversion to lower cost channels
    • Agent empowerment

    MISS DIG 811 – a utility notification system – sought to make their customer service more efficient by moving to softphones. Using the Cisco Customer Journey Platform, Miss Dig saw a 9% YoY increase in agent productivity and 83% reduction in phone equipment costs. Source: (Cisco, 2018).

    Retention

    • Proactive Customer Service
    • Seamless omnichannel strategy

    VoiceSage worked with Home Retail Group – a general merchandise retailer – to proactively increase customer outreach, reducing the number of routine customer order and delivery queries received. In four weeks, Home Retail Group increased their 30-40% answer rate from customers to 100%, with 90% of incoming calls answered and 60% of contacts made via SMS. Source: (VoiceSage, 2018)

    Cross-Sell/

    Up-Sell

    • Cross-Sell and Up-Sell opportunities

    A global brand selling language-learning software utilized Callzilla to help improve their call conversion rate of 2%. After six months of agent and supervisor training, this company increased their call conversion rate to 16% and their upsell rate to 40%. Their average order value increased from < $300 to $465. Source: (Callzilla, n.d.)

    1.2 Performing an environmental scan can help IT optimize Customer Service support

    Though typically executed by Customer Service, IT can gain valuable insights for best supporting infrastructure, applications, and operations from an environmental scan.

    An environmental scan seeks to understand your organization’s customers from multiple directions. It considers:

    • Customers’ value-based segmentations.
    • The interaction channels customers prefer to use.
    • Customers’ likes and dislikes.
    • The general sentiment of your customer service quality.
    • What your competitors are doing in this space.
    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how performing an environmental scan can help IT optimize Customer Service support.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Business processes must directly relate to customer service. Failing to correlate customer experience with business performance outcomes overlooks the enormous cost of negative sentiment.

    1.2 The environmental scan results should drive IT’s strategy and resource spend

    Insights derived from this scan can help frame IT’s contributions to Customer Service’s future vision.

    Why IT should care:

    Implications:

    Each customer experience, from product/service selection to post-transaction support, can have a significant impact on business performance.

    It is not just IT or Customer Service that should care; rather, it should be an organizational responsibility to care about what customers say.

    Customers have little tolerance for mediocrity or poor service and simply switch their allegiances to those that can satisfy their expectations.

    Do not ignore your competitors; they may be doing something well in Customer Service technology which may serve as your organization’s benchmark.

    With maturing mobile and social technologies, customers want to be treated as individuals rather than as a series of disconnected accounts

    Do not ignore your customers’ plea for individuality through mobile and social. Assess your customers’ technology channel preferences.

    Customer service’s perception of service quality may be drastically different than what is expected by the customers.

    Prevent your organization from investing in technology that will have no positive impact on your customer experience.

    Some customers may not provide your organization the business value that surpasses your cost to serve them.

    Focus on enhancing the technology and customer service experience for your high-value customers.

    1.2 Have Customer Service examine feedback across channels for a holistic view

    Your method of listening needs to evolve to include active listening on social and mobile channels.

    Insights and Implications for Customer Service

    Limitations of conventional listening:

    • Solicited customer feedback, such as surveys, do not provide an accurate feedback method since customers only have one channel to express their views.
    • Sentiment, voice, and text analytics within social media channels provide the most accurate and timely intelligence.

    How IT Can Help

    IT can help facilitate the customer feedback process by:

    • Conducting customer feedback with voice recognition software.
    • Monitoring customer sentiment on mobile and social channels.
    • Utilizing customer data analytic engines on social media management platforms.
    • Referring Customer Service to customer advisory councils and their databases.

    1.2 Benchmark IT assets by examining your competitors’ Customer Service capabilities

    The availability of the internet means almost complete transparency between your products and services, and those of your competitors.

    Insights and implications from Customer Service

    How IT can help

    Competitor actions are crucial. Watch your competitors to learn how they use Customer Service as a competitive differentiator and a customer acquisition tool.

    Do not learn about a competitor’s actions because your customers are already switching to them. Track your competitors before getting a harsh surprise from your customers.

    View the customer service experience from the outside in. Assessing from the inside out gives an internal perspective on how good the service is, rather than what customers are experiencing.

    Take a data and analytics-driven approach to mine insights on what customers are saying about your competitors. Negative sentiment and specific complaints can be used as reference for IT and Customer Service to:

    • Avoid repeating the competitor’s mistakes.
    • Utilize sentiment as a benchmark for goal setting and improvements.
    • Duplicate successful technology initiatives to realize business value.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Look to your competitors for comparative models but do not pursue to solely replicate what they currently have. Aim higher and attempt to surpass their capabilities and brand value.

    1.2 Collaborate with Customer Service to understand customer value segments

    Let segmentation help you gain intelligence on customers’ expectations.

    Insights and implications from customer service

    • Segment your customers based on their value relative to the cost to serve. The easiest way to do so is with channel preference categorization.
    • If the cost for retention attempts are higher than the value that those customers provide, there is little business case to pursue retention action.

    How IT can help

    • Couple value-based segmentation with channel preference and satisfaction levels of your most-valued customers to effectively target IT investments in channels that maximize service customization and quality.
    • Correlate the customers’ channel and technology usage with their business value to see which IT assets are delivering on their investments.

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate the relationship between cost of retention and value.

    “If you're developing a Customer Service strategy, it has to start with who your clients are, what [they are] trying to do, and through what channels […] and then your decision around processes have to fall out of that. If IT is trying to lead the conversation, or bring people together to lead the conversation, then marketing and whoever does segmentation has to be at the table as a huge component of this.”

    Lisa Woznica, Director of Client Experience, BMO Financial Group

    1.2 Be mindful of trends in the consumer and technology landscape

    Building a future vision of customer service requires knowing what upcoming technologies can aid the organization.

    OMNICHANNEL SUPPORT

    Rapidly changing demographics and modes of communication requires an evolution toward omnichannel engagement. 63% of customers now expect to communicate with contact centers over their social media (Ringshall 2020). Agents need customer information synced across each channel they use, meeting the customer’s needs where they are.

    INTELLIGENT SELF-SERVICE PORTALS

    Customers want their issues resolved as quickly as possible. Machine learning self-service options deliver personalized customer experiences, which also reduce both agent call volume and support costs for the organization. 60% of contact centers are using or plan to use AI in the next 12 months to improve their customer (Canam Research 2020).

    LEVERAGING ANALYTICS

    The future of customer service is tied up with analytics. This not only entails AI-driven capabilities that fetch the agent relevant information, but it finds skills-based routing and uses biometric data (e.g., speech) for security. It also feeds operations leaders’ need for easy access to real insights about how their customers and agents are doing.

    Phase 1 – Case Study

    Omnichannel support delivers a financial services firm immediate customer service results.

    INDUSTRY: Financial Services

    SOURCE: Mattsen Kumar

    Situation

    Solution

    Results

    • A financial services firm’s fast growth began to show cracks in their legacy customer service system.
    • Costs to support the number of customer queries increased.
    • There was a lack of visibility into incoming customer communications and their resolutions.
    • Business opportunities were lost due to a lack of information on customers’ preferences and challenges. Customer satisfaction was decreasing, negatively impacting the firm’s brand.
    • Mattsen Kumar diagnosed that the firm’s major issue was that their customer service processes required a high percentage of manual interventions.
    • Mattsen Kumar developed an omnichannel strategy, including a mix of social channels joined together by a CRM.
    • A key aspect of this omnichannel experience was designing automated processes with minimal manual intervention.
    • 25% reduction in callbacks from customers.
    • $50,000 reduction in operational costs.
    • Two minutes wait time reduction for chat process.
    • 14% decrease in average handle time.
    • Scaled up from 6000 to 50,000 monthly calls that could be handled by the current team.
    • Enabled more than 10,000 customer queries over chats.

    1.2 Construct your future state using a business process management approach

    Documenting and evaluating your business processes serves as a good starting point for defining the overall Customer Service strategy.

    • Examining key Customer Service business processes can unlock clues around the following:
      • Driving operational effectiveness.
      • Identifying, implementing, and maintaining reusable enterprise systems.
      • Identifying gaps that can be addressed by acquisition of additional systems.
    • Business process modeling facilitates the collaboration between business and IT, recording the sequence of events, tasks performed, by whom they are performed, and the levels of interaction with the various supporting applications.
    • By identifying the events and decision points in the process, and overlaying the people that perform the functions and technologies that support them, organizations are better positioned to identify gaps that need to be bridged.
    • Encourage the analysis by compiling the inventory of Customer Service business processes that are relevant to the organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A process-oriented approach helps organizations see the complete view of the system by linking strategic requirements to business requirements, and business requirements to system requirements.

    1.2 Use the APQC Framework to define your Customer Service-related processes

    • APQC’s Process Classification Framework (PCF) is a taxonomy of cross-functional business processes intended to allow the objective comparison of organizational performance within and among organizations.
    • Section 5 of the PCF details various levels of Customer Service business processes, useful for mapping on to your own organization’s current state.
    • The APQC Framework can be accessed through the following link: APQC’s Process Classification Framework.

    The APQC Framework serves as a high-level, industry-neutral enterprise model that allows organizations to see activities from a cross-industry process perspective.

    The image contains a screenshot example of the APQC Process Classification Framework.
    Source: (Ziemba and Eisenbardt 2015)

    Info-Tech Caution

    The APQC framework does not list all processes within a specific organization, nor are the processes which are listed in the framework present in every organization. It is designed as a framework and global standard to be customized for use in any organization.

    1.2 Each APQC process has five levels that represent its logical components

    The image contains a screenshot of the APQC five levels. The levels include: category, process group, process, and activity.

    The PCF provides L1 through 4 for the Customer Service Framework.

    L5 processes are task- and industry-specific and need to be defined by the organization.

    Source: (APQC 2020)
    This Industry Process Classification Framework was jointly developed by APQC and IBM to facilitate improvement through process management and benchmarking. ©2018 APQC and IBM. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

    1.2a Begin documenting business processes

    4 hours

    1. Using Info-Tech’s Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool, list the Customer Service goals and rank them by importance.
    2. Score the APQC L4 processes by relevance to the defined goals and perceived satisfaction index.
    3. Define the L5 processes for the top scoring L4 process.
    4. Leave Tab 5, Columns G – I for now. These columns will be revisited in activities 1.2b and 2.1a.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Input

    Output

    • List of Customer Service goals
    • A detailed prioritization of Customer Service business processes to model for future states

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    1.2 Start designing the future state of key business processes

    If Customer Service transformation is called for, start with your future-state vision. Don’t get stuck in current state and the “art of the possible” within its context.

    Future-State Analysis

    Start by designing your future state business processes (based on the key processes shortlisting exercise). Design these processes as they would exist as your “ideal scenario.” Next, analyze your current state to help better your understanding of:

    • The gaps that exist and must be bridged to achieve the future-state vision.
    • Whether or not any critical functions that support your business were omitted accidentally from the future-state processes.
    • Whether or not any of the supporting applications or architecture can be salvaged and used toward delivery of your future-state vision.

    Though it’s a commonly used approach, documenting your current-state business processes first can have several drawbacks:

    • Current-state analysis can impede your ability to see future possibility.
    • Teams will spend a great deal of time and effort on documenting current state and inevitably succumb to “analysis paralysis.”
    • Current state assessment, when done first, limits the development of the future (or target) state, constraining thinking to the limitations of the current environment rather than the requirements of the business strategy.

    Current-State Analysis

    “If you're fairly immature and looking for a paradigm shift or different approach [because] you recognize you're totally doing it wrong today, then starting with documenting current state doesn't do a lot except make you sad. You don't want to get stuck in [the mindset of] ‘Here's the current state, and here’s the art of the possible.’”

    Trevor Timbeck, Executive Coach, Parachute Executive Coaching

    1.2 Start modeling future-state processes

    Build buy-in and accountability in process owners through workshops and whiteboarding – either in-person or remotely.

    Getting consensus on the process definition (who does what, when, where, why, and how) is one of the hardest parts of BPM.

    Gathering process owners for a process-defining workshop isn’t easy. Getting them to cooperate can be even harder. To help manage these difficulties during the workshop, make sure to:

    • Keep the scope contained to the processes being defined in order to make best use of everyone’s time, as taking time away from employees is a cost too.
    • Prior to the workshop, gather information about the processes with interviews, questionnaires, and/or system data gathering and analysis.
    • Use the information gathered to have real-life examples of the processes in question so that time isn’t wasted.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep meetings short and on task as tangents are inevitable. Set ground rules at the beginning of any brainstorming or whiteboarding session to ensure that all participants are aligned.

    1.2 Use the five W’s to help map out your future-state processes

    Define the “who, what, why, where, when, and how” of the process to gain a better understanding of individual activities.

    Owner

    Who

    What

    When

    Where

    Why

    How

    Record Claim

    Customer Service

    Customer Service Rep.

    Claim

    Accident

    Claims system

    Customer notification

    Agent enters claim into the system and notifies claims department

    Manage Claim

    Claims Department

    Claims Clerk

    Claim

    Agent submitted the claim

    Claims system

    Agent notification

    Clerk enters claim into the claims system

    Investigate Claim

    Claims Investigation

    Adjuster

    Claim

    Claim notification

    Property where claim is being made

    Assess damage

    Evaluation and expert input

    Settle Claim

    Claims Department

    Claim Approver

    Claim and Adjuster’s evaluation

    Receipt of Adjuster’s report

    Claims system

    Evaluation

    Approval or denial

    Administer Claim

    Finance Department

    Finance Clerk

    Claim amount

    Claim approval notification

    Finance system

    Payment required

    Create payment voucher and cut check

    Close Claim

    Claims Department

    Claims Clerk

    Claim and all supporting documentation

    Payment issued

    Claims system

    Claim processed

    Close the claim in the system

    Info-Tech Insight

    It’s not just about your internal processes. To achieve higher customer retention and satisfaction, it’s also useful to map the customer service process from the customer perspective to identify customer pain points and disconnects.

    1.2 Use existing in-house software as a simplistic entry point to process modeling

    A diagramming tool like Visio enables you to plot process participants and actions using dedicated symbols and connectors that indicate causality.

    • Models can use a stick-figure format, a cross-functional workflow format, or BPMN notation.
    • Plot the key activities and decision points in the process using standard flowcharting shapes. Identify the data that belongs to each step in a separate document or as call-outs on the diagram.
    • Document the flow control between steps, i.e., what causes one step to finish and another to start?

    The image contains a screenshot of the sample cross-functional diagram using the claims process.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Diagramming tools can force the process designer into a specific layout: linear or cross-functional/swim lane.

    • A linear format is recommended for single function and system processes.
    • A swim lane format is recommended for cross-functional and cross-departmental processes.

    1.2 Introduce low investment alternatives for process modeling for modeling disciplines

    SaaS and low-cost modeling tools are emerging to help organizations with low to medium BPM maturity visualize their processes.

    • Formal modeling tools allow a designer to model in any view and easily switch to other views to gain new perspectives on the process.
    • Subscription-based, best-of-breed SaaS tools provide scalable and flexible process modeling capabilities.
    • Open source and lower cost tools also exist to help distribute BPM modeling discipline and standards.
    • BPMS suites incorporate advanced modeling tools with process execution engines for end-to-end business process management. Integrate process discovery with modeling, process simulation, and analysis. Deploy, monitor, and measure process models in process automation engines.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram of the claims process.

    Explore SoftwareReviews’ Business Process Management market analysis by clicking here.

    1.2b Model future state business processes

    4 hours

    1. Model the future state of the most critical business processes.
    2. Use Tab 5, Columns G – H of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool to keep stock of what processes are targeted for modeling, and whether the models have been completed.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Input

    Output

    • Modeled future Customer Service business processes
    • An inventory of modeled future states for critical Customer Service business processes

    Materials

    Participants

    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    1.3 Start a preliminary inventory of your requirements

    Use the future state business process models as a source for software requirements.

    • Business process modeling deals with business requirements that can be used as the foundation for elicitation of system (functional and non-functional) requirements.
    • Modeling creates an understanding of the various steps and transfers in each business process, as well as the inputs and outputs of the process.
    • The future state models form an understanding of what information is needed and how it flows from one point to another in each process.
    • Understand what technologies are (or can be) leveraged to facilitate the exchange of information and facilitate the process.

    For each task or event in the process, ask the following questions:

    • What is the input?
    • What is the output?
    • What are the underlying risks and how can they be mitigated?
    • What conditions should be met to mitigate or eliminate each risk?
    • What are the improvement opportunities?
    • What conditions should be met to enable these opportunities?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Incorporate future considerations into the requirements. How will the system need to adapt over time to accommodate additional processes, process variations, introduction of additional channels and capabilities, etc. Do not overreach by identifying system capabilities that cannot possibly be met.

    1.3 Understand the four different requirements to document

    Have a holistic view for capturing the various requirements the organization has for a Customer Service strategy.

    Business requirements

    High-level requirements that management would typically understand.

    User requirements

    High-level requirements on how the tool should empower users’ lives.

    Non-functional requirements

    Criteria that can be used to judge the operation of a contact center. It defines how the system should perform for the organization.

    Functional requirements

    Outline the technical requirements for the desired contact center.

    1.3 Extract requirements from the business process models

    To see how, let us examine our earlier example for the Claims Process, extracting requirements from the “Record Claim” task.

    The image contains an example of the claims process, and focuses on the record claim task.

    1.3a Document your preliminary requirements

    4 hours

    1. The Applications Director and Customer Service Head are to identify participants based on the business processes that will be reviewed.
    2. They are to conduct a workshop to gather all requirements that can be taken from the business process models.
    3. Use Tab 4 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to document your preliminary requirements.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Half-day workshop to review the proposed future-state diagrams and distill from them the business, functional, and non-functional requirements
    • Future state business process models from activities 1.2a and 1.2b
    • An inventory of preliminary requirements for modeled future states
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Results of activities 1.2a and 1.2b
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    Phase 2

    Evaluate Current State

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Strategic Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    2.1a Model current-state business processes for an inventory to compare against future-state models.

    2.1b Compare future and current business states for a preliminary gap analysis.

    2.1c Begin compiling an inventory of CS Systems by function for an overview of your current state map.

    2.2a Rate your functional and integration quality to assess the performance of your application portfolio.

    2.3a Compare states and propose action to bridge current business processes with viable future alternatives.

    2.3b Document finalized requirements, ready to enact change.

    Participants required for Phase 2:

    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives
    • IT Managers

    2.1 Document the current state of your key business processes

    Doing so will solidify your understanding of the gaps, help identify any accidental omissions from the future state vision, and provide clues as to what can be salvaged.

    • Analysis of the current state is important in the context of gap analysis. It aids in understanding the discrepancies between your baseline and the future-state vision, and ensuring that these gaps are recorded as part of the overall requirements.
    • By analyzing the current state of key business processes, you may identify critical functions that are in place today that were not taken into consideration during the future-state business process visioning exercise.
    • By overlaying the current state process models with the applications that support them, the current state models will indicate what systems and interfaces can be salvaged.
    • The baseline feeds the business case, allowing the team to establish proposed benefits and improvements from implementing the future-state vision. Seek to understand the following:
      • The volumes of work
      • Major exceptions
      • Number of employees involved
      • Amount of time spent in each area of the process

    2.1 Assess the current state to drive the gap analysis

    Before you choose any solution, identify what needs to be done to your current state in order to achieve the vision you have defined.

    • By beginning with the future state in mind, you have likely already envisioned some potential solutions.
    • By reviewing your current situation in contrast with your desired future state, you can deliberate what needs to be done to bridge the gap. The differences between the models allow you to define a set of changes that must be enacted in sequence or in parallel. These represent the gaps.
    • The gaps, once identified, translate themselves into additional requirements.

    Assessment Example

    Future State

    Current Situation

    Next Actions/ Proposals

    Incorporate social channels for responding to customer inquiries.

    No social media monitoring or channels for interaction exist at present.

    1. Implement a social media monitoring platform tool and integrate it with the current CSM.
    2. Recruit additional Customer Service representatives to monitor and respond to inquiries via social channels.
    3. Develop report(s) for analyzing volumes of inquiries received through social channels.

    Info-Tech Insight

    It is important to allot time for the current-state analysis, confine it to the minimum effort required to understand the gaps, and identify any missing pieces from your future-state vision. Make sure the work expended is proportional to the benefit derived from this exercise.

    2.1a Model current-state business processes

    2 hours

    1. Model the current state of the most critical business processes, using the work done in activities 1.2a and 1.2b to help identify these processes.
    2. Use Tab 5, Column I of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool to keep stock of what models have been completed.
    3. This tool is now complete.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Modeled current-state Customer Service business processes
    • An inventory of modeled current states for critical Customer Service business processes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Results of activities 1.2a and 1.2b.
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool

    2.1b Compare future and current business states

    2 hours

    1. Use Tab 9 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to record a summary of the future state, current state, and actions proposed in order to bridge the gaps.
      • Fill out the desired future state of the business processes and IT architecture.
      • Fill out the current state of the business processes and IT architecture.
      • Fill out the actions required to mitigate the gaps between the future and current state.
    The image contains a screenshot of thr Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • The results of activities 1.2a, 1.2b, and 2.1a.
    • Modeled future- and current-state business processes
    • An overview and analysis of how to reach certain future states from the current state.
    • A preliminary list of next steps through bridging the gap between current and future states.
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool
    • Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.1 Assess whether Customer Service architecture can meet future-state vision

    Approach your CS systems holistically to identify opportunities for system architecture optimization.

    • Organizations often do not have a holistic view of their Customer Service systems. These systems are often cobbled together from disparate parts, such as:
      • Point solutions (both SaaS and on-premise).
      • Custom interfaces between applications and databases.
      • Spreadsheets and other manual workarounds.
    • A high degree of interaction between multiple systems can cause distention in the application portfolio and databases, creating room for error and more work for CS and IT staff. Mapping your systems and architectural landscape can help you:
      • Identify the number of manual processes you currently employ.
      • Eliminate redundancies.
      • Allow for consolidation and/or integration.

    Consider the following metrics when tracking your CS systems:

    Time needed to perform core tasks (i.e., resolving a customer complaint)

    Accuracy of basic information (customer history, customer product portfolio)

    CSR time spent on manual process/workarounds

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is a two-step process to document the current state of your Customer Service systems:

    1. Compile an inventory of systems by function
    2. Identify points of integration across systems

    2.1c Begin compiling an inventory of CS systems by function

    2 hours

    1. Using Tab 2 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool, request that the CS managers fill in the application inventory template with all the CS systems that they use.
    2. Questions to trigger exercise:
      • Which applications am I using?
      • Which CS function does the application support?
      • How many applications support the same function?
      • What spreadsheets or manual workarounds do I use to fill in system gaps?
    3. Send the filled-in template to IT Managers to validate and fill in missing system information.
    InputOutput
    • Applications Directors’ knowledge of the current state
    • IT Managers’ validation of this state
    • A corroborated inventory of the current state for Customer Service systems
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Applications Director
    • IT managers

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.1 Use activity 2.1c for an overview of your current state map

    The image contains a screenshot of activity 2.1.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A current-state map of CS systems can offer insight on:

    • Coverage, i.e. whether all functional areas are supported by systems.
    • Redundancies, i.e. functional areas with multiple systems. If a customer’s records are spread across multiple systems, it may be difficult to obtain a single source of truth.

    2.2 Assess current state with user interface architecture diagrams

    Understand a high-level overview of how your current state integrates together to rate its overall quality.

    • If IT already has an architecture diagram, use this in conjunction with your application inventory for the basis of current state discussions.
    • If your organization does not already have an architecture diagram for review and discussion, consider creating one in its most simplistic form using the following guidelines (see illustrative example on next slide):

    Represent each of your systems as a labelled shape with a unique number (this number can be referenced in other artifacts that can provide more detail).

    Color coding can also be applied to differentiate these objects, e.g., to indicate an internal system (where development is owned by your organization) vs. an external system (where development is outside of your organization’s control).

    2.2 Example: Current state with user interface architecture diagrams

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of current state with user interface architecture diagrams.

    2.2 Evaluate application functionality and functional coverage

    Use this documentation of the current state as an opportunity to spot areas for rationalizing your application portfolio.

    If an application is well-received by the organization and is an overall good platform, consider acquiring more modules from the same vendor application.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate functionality and functional coverage.

    If you have more than one application for a function, consider why that is and how you might consolidate into a single application.

    Measure the effectiveness of applications under consideration. For example, consider the number of failures when an application attempts a function (by ticket numbers), and overall satisfaction/ease of use.

    The above steps will reveal capability overlaps and application pain points and show how the overall portfolio could be made more efficient.

    2.2 Determine the degree of integration between systems

    Data and system integration are key components of an effective CS system portfolio.

    The needed level of integration will depend on three major factors:

    Integration between systems helps facilitate reporting. The required reports will vary from organization to organization:

    How many other systems benefit from the data of the application?

    Large workforces will benefit from more detailed WFM reports for optimizing workforce planning and talent acquisition.

    Will automating the integration between systems alleviate a significant amount of manual effort?

    Organizations with competitive sales and incentives will want to strategize around talent management and compensation.

    What kind of reports will your organization require in order to perform core and business-enabling functions?

    Aging workforces or organizations with highly specialized skills can benefit from detailed analysis around succession planning.

    Phase 2 – Case Study

    Integrating customer relationship information streamlines customer service and increases ROI for the organization.

    INDUSTRY: Retail and Wholesale

    SOURCE: inContact

    Situation

    Solution

    Results

    • Hall Automotive – a group of 14 multi-franchise auto dealerships located throughout Virginia and North Carolina – had customer information segmented throughout their CRM system at each dealership.
    • Call center agents lacked the technology to synthesize this information, leading customers to receive multiple and unrelated service calls.
    • Hall Automotive wanted to avoid embarrassing information gaps, integrate multiple CRM systems, and help agents focus on customers.
    • Hall Automotive utilized an inContact solution that included Automated Call Distributor, Computer Telephony Integration, and IVR technologies.
    • This created a complete customer-centric system that interfaced with multiple CRM and back-office systems.
    • The inContact solution simplified intelligent call flows, routed contacts to the right agent, and provided comprehensive customer information.
    • Call time decreased from five minutes to one minute and 23 seconds.
    • 350% increase in production.
    • Market response time down from three months to one day.
    • Cost per call cut from 83 cents to 23 cents.
    • Increased agents’ calls-per-hour from 12 to 43.
    • Scalability matched seasonal fluctuations in sales.

    2.2a Rate your functional and integration quality

    2 hours

    1. Using Tab 5 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool, evaluate the functionality of your applications.
    2. Then, use Tab 6 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to evaluate the integration of your applications.
    The image contains screenshots of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Applications Directors’ knowledge of the current state
    • IT Managers’ validation of this state
    • A documented evaluation of the organization’s application portfolio regarding functional and integration quality
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Applications Director
    • IT managers

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.3 Revisit and refine the future-state business processes and list of requirements

    With a better understanding of the current state, determine whether the future-state models hold up. Ensure that the requirements are updated accordingly to reflect the full set of gaps identified.

    • Future-state versus current-state modeling is an iterative process.
    • By assessing the gaps between target state and current state, you may decide that:
      • The future state model was overly ambitious for what can reasonably be delivered in the near-term.
      • Core functions that exist today were accidentally omitted from the future state models and need to be incorporated.
      • There are systems or processes that your organization would like to salvage, and they must be worked into the future-state model.
    • Once the future state vision is stabilized, ensure that all gaps have been translated into business requirements.
      • If possible, categorize all gaps by functional and non-functional requirements.

    2.3a Compare states and propose action

    3 hours

    • Revisit Tab 9 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to more accurately compare your organization’s current- and future-state business processes.
    • Ensure that gaps in the system architecture have been captured.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Modeled future- and current-state business processes
    • Refined and prioritized list of requirements
    • An accurate list of action steps for bridging current and future state business processes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • Applications Director
    • IT managers

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    2.3 Prioritize and finalize the requirements

    Prioritizing requirements will help to itemize initiatives and the timing with which they need to occur.

    Requirements are to be prioritized based on relative important and the timing of the respective initiatives.

    Prioritize the full set of requirements by assigning a priority to each:

    1. High/Critical: A critical requirement; without it, the product is not acceptable to the stakeholders.
    2. Medium/Important: A necessary but deferrable requirement that makes the product less usable but still functional.
    3. Low/Desirable: A nice feature to have if there are resources, but the product can function well without it.

    Requirements prioritization must be completed in collaboration with all key stakeholders (business and IT).

    Consider the following criteria when assigning the priority:

    • Business value
    • Business or technical risk
    • Implementation difficulty
    • Likelihood of success
    • Regulatory compliance
    • Relationship to other requirements
    • Urgency
    • Unified stakeholder agreement

    Stakeholders must ask themselves:

    • What are the consequences to the business objectives if this requirement is omitted?
    • Is there an existing system or manual process/workaround that could compensate for it?
    • Why can’t this requirement be deferred to the next release?
    • What business risk is being introduced if a particular requirement cannot be implemented right away?

    2.3b Document finalized requirements

    4 hours

    1. Using Tab 4 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool, evaluate your applications’ functionality, review, refine, prioritize, and finalize your requirements.
    2. Review the proposed future state diagrams in activity 2.3a and distill from them the business, functional, and non-functional requirements.
    3. The Applications Director and Customer Service Head are to identify participants based on the business processes that will be reviewed. They are to conduct a workshop to gather all the requirements that can be taken from the business process models.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Modeled future- and current-state business processes
    • Refined and prioritized list of requirements
    • A documented finalized list of requirements to achieve future state business processes
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Whiteboard
    • Writing materials
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • IT Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    Phase 3

    Build Roadmap to Future State

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Structure the Project

    1.2 Define Vision for Future State

    1.3 Document Preliminary Requirements

    2.1 Document Current State Business Processes

    2.2 Assess Current State Architecture

    2.3 Review and Finalize Requirements for Future State

    3.1 Evaluate Architectural and Application Options

    3.2 Understand the Marketplace

    3.3 Score and Plot Initiatives Along Strategic Roadmap

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    3.1a Analyze future architectural posture to understand how applications within the organization ought to be arranged.

    3.3a Develop a Customer Service IT Systems initiative roadmap to reach your future state.

    Participants required for Phase 3:

    • Applications Director
    • CIO
    • Customer Service Director
    • Customer Service Head
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives
    • IT Applications Director

    3.1a Analyze future architectural posture

    1 hour

    Review Tab 8 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    This tab plots each system that supports Customer Service on a 2x2 framework based on its functionality and integration scores. Where these systems plot on each 2x2 provides clues as to whether they should be considered for retention, functional enhancement (upgrade), increased system integration, or replacement.

    • Integrate: The application is functionally rich, so integrate it with other modules by building or enhancing interfaces.
    • Retain: The application satisfies both functionality and integration requirements, so it should be considered for retention.
    • Replace: The application neither offers the functionality sought, nor is it integrated with other modules.
    • Replace/Enhance: The module offers poor functionality but is well integrated with other modules. If enhancing for functionality is easy (e.g., through configuration or custom development), consider enhancement or replace it altogether.
    The image contains a screenshot of tab 8 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Review Tab 8 of the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • An overview of how different applications in the organization ought to be assessed
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool
    • IT Applications Director
    • Customer Service Director
    • IT and Customer Service Representatives

    Download the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool

    3.1 Interpret 3.1a’s results for next steps

    Involving both sales and marketing in these discussions will provide a 360-degree view on what the modifications should accomplish.

    If the majority of applications are plotted in the “Integrate” quadrant:

    The applications are performing well in terms of functionality but have poor integration. Determine what improvements can be made to enhance integration between the systems where required (e.g. re-working existing interfaces to accommodate additional data elements, automating interfaces, or creating brand new custom interfaces where warranted).

    If the applications are spread across “Integrate,” “Retain,” and “Replace/Enhance”:

    There is no clear recommended direction in this case. Weigh the effort required to replace/enhance/integrate specific applications critical for supporting processes. If resource usage for piecemeal solutions is too high, consider replacement with suite.

    If the majority of applications are plotted in the “Retain” quadrant:

    All applications satisfy both functionality and integration requirements. There is no evidence that significant action is required.

    If the application placements are split between the “Retain” and “Replace/Enhance” quadrants:

    Consider whether or not IT has the capabilities to execute application replacement procedures. If considering replacement, consider the downstream impact on applications that the system in question is currently integrated with. Enhancing an application usually implies upgrading or adding a module to an existing application. Consider the current satisfaction with the application vendor and whether the upgrade or additional module will satisfy your customer service needs.

    3.1 Work through architectural considerations to narrow future states

    Best-of-breeds vs. suite

    Integration and consolidation

    Deployment

    Does the organization only need a point solution or an entire platform of solutions?

    Does the current state enable interoperability between software? Is there room for rationalization?

    Should any new software be SaaS-based, on-premises, or a hybrid?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Decommissioning and replacing entire applications can put well-functioning modules at risk. Make sure to drill down into the granular features to assess if the feature level performance prompts change. The goal is to make the architecture more efficient for Customer Service and easier to manage for IT. If integration has been chosen as a course of action, make sure that the spend on resources and effort is less than that on system replacement. Also make sure that the intended architecture streamlines usability for agents.

    3.1 Considerations: Best-of-breeds vs. suite

    If requirements extend beyond the capabilities of a best-of-breed solution, a suite of tools may be required.

    Best-of-breed

    Suite

    Benefits

    • Features may be more advanced for specific functional areas and a higher degree of customization may be possible.
    • If a potential delay in real-time customer data transfer is acceptable, best-of-breeds provide a similar level of functionality to suites for a lower price.
    • Best-of-breeds allow value to be realized faster than suites, as they are easier and faster to implement and configure.
    • Rip and replace is easier and vendor updates are relatively quick to market.

    Benefits

    • Everyone in the organization works from the same set of customer data.
    • There is a “lowest common denominator” for agent learning as consistent user interfaces lower learning curves and increase efficiency in usage.
    • There is a broader range of functionality using modules.
    • Integration between functional areas will be strong and the organization will be in a better position to enable version upgrades without risking invalidation of an integration point between separate systems.

    Challenges

    • Best-of-breeds typically cover less breadth of functionality than suites.
    • There is a lack of uniformity in user experience across best-of-breeds.
    • Data integrity risks are higher.
    • Variable infrastructure may be implemented due to multiple disparate systems, which adds to architecture complexity and increased maintenance.
    • There is potential for redundant functionality across multiple best-of-breeds.

    Challenges

    • Suites exhibit significantly higher costs compared to point solutions.
    • Suite module functionality may not have the same depth as point solutions.
    • Due to high configuration availability and larger-scale implementation requirements, the time to deploy is longer than point solutions.

    3.1 Considerations: Integration and consolidation

    Use Tab 7 of Info-Tech’s Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool to gauge the need for consolidation.

    IT benefits

    • Decreased spend on infrastructure, application acquisition, and development.
    • Reduced complexity in vendor management.
    • Less resources and effort spent on internal integration and functional customization.

    Customer Service benefits

    • Reduced user confusion and application usage efficiency.
    • Increased operational visibility and ease process mapping.
    • Improved data management and integrity.

    Theoretical scenarios and recommendations

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of a customer service functional purpose.

    Problem:

    • Large Redundancy – multiple applications address the same function, but one application performs better than others.

    Recommendation:

    • Consolidate the functions into Application 1 and consider decommissioning Applications 2 to 4.
    The image contains a screenshot of an example of a customer service functional purpose.

    Problem:

    • Large Redundancy – multiple applications address the same function, but none of them do it well.

    Recommendation:

    • None of the applications perform well in functional support. Consider replacing with suite or leveraging the Application 3 vendor for functional module expansion, if feasible.

    3.1 Considerations: Deployment

    SaaS is typically recommended as it reduces IT support needs. However, customization limitations and higher long-term TCO values continue to be a challenge for SaaS.

    On-premises deployment

    Hybrid deployment

    Public cloud deployment

    Benefits

    • Solution and deployment are highly customizable.
    • There are fewer compliance and security risks because customer data is kept on premises.

    Challenges

    • There is slower physical deployment.
    • Physical hardware and software are required.
    • There are higher upfront costs.

    Benefits

    • Pick-and-mix which aspects to keep on premises and which to outsource.
    • Benefits of scaling and flexibility for outsourced solution.

    Challenges

    • Expensive to maintain.
    • Requires in-house skillset for on-premises option.
    • Some control is lost over outsourced customization.

    Benefits

    • Physical hardware is not required.
    • There is rapid deployment, vendor managed product updates, and server maintenance.
    • There are lower upfront costs.

    Challenges

    • There is higher TCO over time.
    • There are perceived security risks.
    • There are service availability and reliability risks.
    • There is limited customization.

    3.1 Considerations: Public cloud deployment

    Functionality is only one aspect of a broader range of issues to narrow down the viability of a cloud-based architecture.

    Security/Privacy Concerns:

    Whether the data is stored on premise or in the cloud, it is never 100% safe. The risk increases with a multi-tenant cloud solution where a single vendor manages the data of multiple clients. If your data is particularly sensitive, heavily scrutinize the security infrastructure of potential vendors or store the data internally if internal security is deemed stronger than that of a vendor.

    Location:

    If there are individuals that need to access the system database and work in different locations, centralizing the system and its database in the cloud may be an effective approach.

    Compatibility:

    Assess the compatibility of the cloud solutions with your internal IT systems. Cloud solutions should be well-integrated with internal systems for data flow to ensure efficiency in service operations.

    Cost/Budget Constraints:

    SaaS allows conversion of up-front CapEx to periodic OpEx. It assists in bolstering a business case as costs in the short-run are much more manageable. On-premise solutions have a much higher upfront TCO than cloud solutions. However, the TCO for the long-term usage of cloud solutions under the licensing model will exceed that of an on-premise solution, especially with a growing business and user base.

    Functionality/Customization:

    Ensure that the function or feature that you need is available on the cloud solution market and that the feature is robust enough to meet service quality standards. If the available cloud solution does not support the processes that fit your future-state vision and gaps, it has little business value. If high levels of customization are required to meet functionality, the amount of effort and cost in dealing with the cloud vendor may outweigh the benefits.

    Maintenance/Downtime:

    For most organizations, lapses in cloud-service availability can become disastrous for customer satisfaction and service quality. Organizations should be prepared for potential outages since customers require constant access to customer support.

    3.2 Explore the customer service technology marketplace

    Your requirements, gap analysis, and assessment of current applications architecture may have prompted the need for a new solutions purchase.

    • Customer service technology has come a long way since PABX in 1960s call centers. Let Info-Tech give you a quick overview of the market and the major systems that revolve around Customer Service.
    • The image contains a screenshot of a timeline of the market and major systems that revolve  around customer service.

    Info-Tech Insight

    While Customer Relationships Management systems interlock several aspects of the customer journey, best-of-breed software for specific aspects of this journey could provide a better ROI if the organization’s coverage of these aspects are only “good enough” and need boosting.

    3.2 The CRM software market will continue to grow at an aggressive rate

    • In recent years, CRM suite solutions have matured significantly in their customer support capabilities. Much of this can be attributed to their acquisitions of smaller best-of-breed Customer Service vendors.
    • Many of the larger CRM solutions (like those offered by Salesforce) have now added social media engagement, knowledge bases, and multi-channel capabilities into their foundational offering.
    • CRM systems are capable of huge sophistication and integration with the core ERP, but they also have heavy license and implementation costs, and therefore may not be for everyone.
    • In some cases, customers are looking to augment upon very specific capabilities that are lacking from their customer service foundation. In these cases, best-of-breed solutions ought to be integrated with a CRM, ERP, or with one another through API integration.
    The image contains a screenshot of a graph that demonstrates the CRM global market growth, 2019-2027.

    3.2 Utilize SoftwareReviews to focus on which CS area needs enhancing

    Contact Center as a Service (CCaaS)

    Cloud-based customer experience solution that allows organizations to utilize a provider’s software to administer incoming support or inquiries from consumers in a hosted, subscription model.

    Customer Service Management (CSM)

    Supports an organization's interaction with current and potential customers. It uses data-driven tools designed to help organizations drive sales and deliver exceptional customer experiences.

    Customer Intelligence Platform

    Gather and analyze data from both structured and unstructured sources regarding your customers, including their demographic/firmographic details and activities, to build deeper and more effective customer relationships and improve business outcomes.

    Enterprise Social Media Management

    Software for monitoring social media activity with the goal of gaining insight into user opinion and optimizing social media campaigns.

    Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

    Consists of applications designed to automate and manage the customer life cycle. CRM software optimizes customer data management, lead tracking, communication logging, and marketing campaigns.

    Virtual Assistants and Chatbots

    interactive applications that use Artificial Intelligence (AI) to engage in conversation via speech or text. These applications simulate human interaction by employing natural language input and feedback.

    3.2 SoftwareReviews’ data accelerates and improves the software selection process

    SoftwareReviews collects and analyzes detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    With SoftwareReviews:

    • Access premium reports to understand the marketspace of 193 software categories.
    • Compare vendors with SoftwareReviews’ Data Quadrant Reports.
    • Discover which vendors have better customer relations management with SoftwareReviews’ Emotional Footprint Reports.
    • Explore the Product Scorecards of single vendors for a detailed analysis of their software offerings.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Software Reviews offerings.

    3.2 Speak with category experts to dive deeper into the vendor landscape

    Fact-based reviews of business software from IT professionals.

    Product and category reports with state-of-the-art data visualization.

    Top-tier data quality backed by a rigorous quality assurance process.

    User-experience insight that reveals the intangibles of working with a vendor.

    CLICK HERE to access SoftwareReviews

    Comprehensive software reviews to make better IT decisions.

    We collect and analyze the most detailed reviews on enterprise software from real users to give you an unprecedented view into the product and vendor before you buy.

    SoftwareReviews is powered by Info-Tech.

    Technology coverage is a priority for Info-Tech, and SoftwareReviews provides the most comprehensive unbiased data on today’s technology. The insights of our expert analysts provide unparalleled support to our members at every step of their buying journey.

    3.2 Leverage Info-Tech’s Rapid Application Selection Framework

    Improve your key software selection metrics for best-of-breed customer service software.

    The image contains a screenshot of an example of Info-Tech's Rapid Application Selection Framework.

    A simple measurement of the number of days from intake to decision.

    Use our Project Satisfaction Tool to measure stakeholder project satisfaction.

    Use our Application Portfolio Assessment Tool annually to measure application satisfaction.

    Use our Contract Review Service to benchmark and optimize your technology spending.

    Learn more about Info-Tech’s The Rapid Application Selection Framework

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework (RASF) is best geared toward commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications

    Not all software selection projects are created equal – some are very small, some span the entire enterprise. To ensure that IT is using the right framework, understand the cost and complexity profile of the application you’re looking to select. The RASF approach is best for commodity and mid-tier enterprise applications; selecting complex applications is better handled by the methodology described in Implement a Proactive and Consistent Vendor Selection Process.

    RASF Methodology

    Commodity & Personal Applications

    • Simple, straightforward applications (think OneNote vs. Evernote)
    • Total application spend of up to $10,000; limited risk and complexity
    • Selection done as a single, rigorous, one-day session

    Complex Mid-Tier Applications

    • More differentiated, department-wide applications (Marketo vs. Pardot)
    • Total application spend of up to $100,000; medium risk and complexity
    • RASF approach done over the course of an intensive 40-hour engagement

    Consulting Engagement

    Enterprise Applications

    Sophisticated, enterprise-wide applications (Salesforce vs. Dynamics)

    Total application spend of over $100,000; high risk and complexity

    Info-Tech can assist with tailored, custom engagements

    3.3 Translate gathered requirements and gaps into project-based initiatives

    Identify initiatives that can address multiple requirements simultaneously.

    The Process

    • You now have a list of requirements from assessing business processes and the current Customer Service IT systems architecture.
    • With a viable architecture and application posture, you can now begin scoring and plotting key initiatives along a roadmap.
    • Group similar requirements into categories of need and formulate logical initiatives to fulfill the requirements.
    • Ensure that all requirements are related to business needs, measurable, sufficiently detailed, and prioritized, and identify initiatives that meet the requirements.

    Consider this case:

    Paul’s organization, a midsize consumer packaged goods retailer, needs to monitor social media for sentiment, use social analytics to gain intelligence, and receive and respond to inquiries made over Twitter.

    The initiative:

    Implement a social media management platform (SMMP): A SMMP is able to deliver on all of the above requirements. SMMPs are highly capable platforms that have social listening modules and allow costumer service representatives to post to and monitor social media.

    3.3 Prioritize your initiatives and plan the order of rollout

    Initiatives should not and cannot be tackled all at once. There are three key factors that dictate the prioritization of initiatives.

    1. Value
      • What is the monetary value/perceived business value?
      • Are there regulatory or security related impacts if the initiative is not undertaken?
      • What is the time to market and is it an easily achievable goal?
      • How well does it align with the strategic direction?
    2. Risk
      • How technically complex is it?
      • Does it impact existing business processes?
      • Are there ample resources and right skillsets to support it?
    3. Dependencies
      • What initiatives must be undertaken first?
      • Which subsequent initiatives will it support?

    Example scenario using Info-Tech’s Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool

    An electronics distributor wants to implement social media monitoring and response. Its existing CRM does not have robust channel management functions. The organization plans to replace its CRM in the future, but because of project size and impact and budgetary constraints, the replacement project has been scheduled to occur two years from now.

    • The SMMP solution proposed for implementation has a high perceived value and is low risk.
    • The CRM replacement has higher value, but also carries significantly more risk.
    • Option 1: Complete the CRM replacement first, and overlay the social media monitoring component afterward (as the SMMP must be integrated with the CRM).
    • Option 2: Seize the easily achievable nature of the SMMP initiative. Implement it now and plan to re-work the CRM integration later.
    The image contains a screenshot of an example scenario using Info-Tech's Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.

    3.3a Develop a Customer Service IT Systems initiative roadmap

    1 hour

    • Complete the tool as a team during a one-hour meeting to collaborate and agree on criteria and weighting.
      1. Input initiative information.
      2. Determine value and risk evaluation criteria.
      3. Evaluate each initiative to determine its priority.
      4. Create a roadmap of prioritized initiatives.
    The image contains a screenshot of the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.
    InputOutput
    • Input the initiative information including the start date, end date, owner, and dependencies
    • Adjust the evaluation criteria, i.e., the value and risk factors
    • A list of initiatives and a roadmap toward the organization’s future state of Customer Service IT Systems
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool
    • Applications Director
    • CIO
    • Customer Service Head

    Download the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool

    Document and communicate the strategy

    Leverage the artifacts of this blueprint to summarize your findings and communicate the outcomes of the strategy project to the necessary stakeholders.

    Document Section

    Proposed Content

    Leverage the Following Artifacts

    Executive Summary

    • Introduction
    • The opportunity
    • The scope
    • The stakeholders
    • Project success measures

    Project Charter section:

    • 1.1 Project Overview
    • 1.2 Project Objectives
    • 1.3 Project Benefits
    • 2.0 Scope

    Project RACI Chart Tool:

    • Tab 3. Simplified Output
    The image contains screenshots from the Project Charter, and the RACI Chart Tool.

    Background

    • The project approach
    • Current situation overview
    • Results of the environmental scan

    Blueprint slides:

    • Info-Tech’s methodology to develop your IT Strategy for CS Systems
    The image contains a screenshot from the blueprint slides.

    Future-State Vision

    • Customer service goals
    • Future-state modeling findings

    Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool:

    • Tab 2. Customer Service Goals
    • Tab 5. Level 5 Process Inventory

    Future State Business Process Models

    The image contains screenshots from the Customer Service Business Process Shortlisting Tool.

    Current Situation

    • Current-state modeling findings
    • Current-state architecture findings
    • Gap assessment
    • Requirements

    Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool:

    • Tab 2. Inventory of Applications
    • Tab 7. Systems Health Heat Map
    • Tab 8. Systems Health Dashboard
    • Tab 9. Future vs. Current State
    • Tab 4. Requirements Collection
    The image contains screenshots from the Customer Service Systems Strategy Tool.

    Summary of Recommendations

    • Optimization opportunities
    • New capabilities

    N/A

    IT Strategy Implementation Plan

    • Implementation plan
    • Business case

    Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool:

    • Tab 2. CS Initiative Definition
    • Tab 4. CS Technology Roadmap
    The image contains screenshots from the Customer Service Initiative Scoring and Roadmap Tool.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Develop an IT Strategy to Support Customer Service

    With ecommerce accelerating and customer expectations rising with it, organizations must have an IT strategy to support Customer Service.

    The deliverable you have produced from this blueprint provides a solution to this problem: a roadmap to a desired future state for how IT can ground an effective customer service engagement. From omnichannel to self-service, IT will be critical to enabling the tools required to digitally meet customer needs.

    Begin implementing your roadmap!

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information.

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Deliver a Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department

    • One training session is not enough to make a change. Leaders must embed the habits, create a culture of engagement and positivity, provide continual coaching and development, regularly gather customer feedback, and seek ways to improve.

    Build a Chatbot Proof of Concept

    • When implemented effectively, chatbots can help save costs, generate new revenue, and ultimately increase customer satisfaction for both external- and internal-facing customers.

    The Rapid Application Selection Framework

    • Application selection is a critical activity for IT departments. Implement a repeatable, data-driven approach that accelerates application selection efforts.

    Bibliography (1/2)

    • Callzilla. "Software Maker Compares Call Center Companies, Switches to Callzilla After 6 Months of Results." Callzilla. N.d. Accessed: 4 Jul. 2022.
    • Cisco. “Transforming Customer Service.” Cisco. 2018. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Gottlieb, Giorgina. “The Importance of Data for Superior Customer Experience and Business Success.” Medium. 23 May 2019. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Grand View Research. “Customer Relationship Management Market Size, Share & Trends Analysis Report By Solution, By Deployment, By Enterprise Size, By End Use, By Region, And Segment Forecasts, 2020 – 2027.” Grand View Research. April 2020. Accessed: 17 Feb. 2021.
    • inContact. “Hall Automotive Accelerates Customer Relations with inContact.” inContact. N.d. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Kulbyte, Toma. “37 Customer Experience Statistics to Know in 2021.” Super Office. 4 Jan. 2021. Accessed: 5 Feb. 2021.
    • Kuligowski, Kiely. "11 Benefits of CRM Systems." Business News Daily. 29 Jun. 2022. Accessed: 4 Jul. 2022.
    • Mattsen Kumar. “Ominchannel Support Transforms Customer Experience for Leading Fintech Player in India.” Mattsen Kumar. 4 Apr. 2020. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Microsoft. “State of Global Customer Service Report.” Microsoft. Mar. 2019. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Ringshall, Ben. “Contact Center Trends 2020: A New Age for the Contact Center.” Fonolo. 20 Oct. 2020. Accessed 2 Nov. 2020.
    • Salesforce. “State of Service.” Salesforce. 4th ed. 2020. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • Sopadjieva, Emma, Utpal M. Dholakia, and Beth Benjamin. “A Study of 46,000 Shoppers Shows That Omnichannel Retailing Works.” Harvard Business Review. 3 Jan. 2017. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.

    Bibliography (2/2)

    • Tech Pro Research. “Digital Transformation Research Report 2018: Strategy, Returns on Investment, and Challenges.” Tech Pro Research. 29 Jul. 2018. Accessed: 5 Feb. 2021.
    • TSB. “TSB Bank Self-Serve Banking Increases 9% with Adobe Sign.” TSB. N.d. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.
    • VoiceSage. “VoiceSage Helps Home Retail Group Transform Customer Experience.” VoiceSage. 4 May 2018. Accessed: 8 Feb. 2021.

    Improve Service Desk Ticket Intake

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}481|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

    • Customers expect a consumer experience with IT. It won’t be long until this expectation expands to IT service support.
    • Messaging and threads are becoming central to how businesses organize information and conversations, but voice isn’t going away. It is still by far people’s favorite channel.
    • Tickets are becoming more complicated. BYOD, telework, and SaaS products present a perfect storm.
    • Traditional service metrics are not made for self service. Your mean-time-to-resolve will increase and first-contact resolution will decrease.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Bring the service desk to the people. Select channels that are most familiar to your users, and make it as easy possible to talk to a human.
    • Integrate channels. Users should have a consistent experience, and technicians should know user history.
    • Don’t forget the human aspect. People aren’t always good with technology. Allow them to contact a person if they are struggling.

    Impact and Result

    • Define which channels will be prioritized.
    • Identify improvements to these channels based on best practices and our members’ experiences.
    • Streamline your ticket intake process to remove unnecessary steps.
    • Prioritize improvements based on their value. Implement a set of improvements every quarter.

    Improve Service Desk Ticket Intake Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should improve your ticket intake, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define and prioritize ticket channels

    Align your improvements with business goals and the shift-left strategy.

    • Improve Service Desk Ticket Intake – Phase 1: Define and Prioritize Ticket Channels
    • Service Desk Maturity Assessment
    • Service Desk Improvement Presentation Template

    2. Improve ticket channels

    Record potential improvements in your CSI Register, as you review best practices for each channel.

    • Improve Service Desk Ticket Intake – Phase 2: Improve Ticket Channels
    • Service Desk Continual Improvement Roadmap
    • Service Desk Ticket Intake Workflow Samples (Visio)
    • Service Desk Ticket Intake Workflow Samples (PDF)
    • Service Definition Checklist
    • Service Desk Site Visit Checklist Template

    3. Define next steps

    Streamline your ticket intake process and prioritize opportunities for improvement.

    • Improve Service Desk Ticket Intake – Phase 3: Define Next Steps
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Improve Service Desk Ticket Intake

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Optimize Ticket Channels

    The Purpose

    Brainstorm improvements to your systems and processes that will help you optimize.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a single point of contact.

    Reduce the time before a technician can start productively working on a ticket.

    Enable Tier 1 and end users to complete more tickets.

    Activities

    1.1 Prioritize channels for improvement.

    1.2 Optimize the voice channel.

    1.3 Identify improvements for self service.

    1.4 Improve Tier 1 agents’ access to information.

    1.5 Optimize supplementary ticket channels.

    Outputs

    Action items to improve the voice channel.

    Populated CSI Register for self-service channels.

    Identified action items for the knowledgebase.

    Populated CSI Register for additional ticket channels.

    2 Streamline Ticket Intake

    The Purpose

    Create long-term growth by taking a sustainable approach to improvements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Streamline your overall ticket intake process for incidents and service requests.

    Activities

    2.1 Map out the incident intake processes.

    2.2 Identify opportunities to streamline the incident workflow.

    2.3 Map out the request processes.

    2.4 Identify opportunities to streamline the request workflow.

    Outputs

    Streamlined incident intake process.

    Streamlined request intake process.

    Populated CSI Register for request intake.

    Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK®

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}252|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Security Strategy & Budgeting
    • Parent Category Link: /security-strategy-and-budgeting
    • To effectively protect your business interests, you need to be able to address what the most pressing vulnerabilities in your network are. Which attack vectors should you model first? How do you adequately understand your threat vectors when attacks continually change and adapt?
    • Security can often be asked the world but given a minimal budget with which to accomplish it.
    • Security decisions are always under pressure from varying demands that pull even the most well-balanced security team in every direction.
    • Adequately modeling any and every possible scenario is ineffective and haphazard at best. Hoping that you have chosen the most pressing attack vectors to model will not work in the modern day of threat tactics.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Precision is critical to being able to successfully defend against threats.
      • Traditional threat modeling such as STRIDE or PASTA is based on a spray-and-pray approach to identifying your next potential threat vector. Instead, take a structured risk-based approach to understanding both an attacker’s tactics and how they may be used against your enterprise. Threat preparedness requires precision, not guesswork.
    • Knowing is half the battle.
      • You may be doing better than you think. Undoubtedly, there is a large surface area to cover with threat modeling. By preparing beforehand, you can separate what’s important from what’s not and identify which attack vectors are the most pressing for your business.
    • Be realistic and measured.
      • Do not try to remediate everything. Some attack vectors and approaches are nearly impossible to account for. Take control of the areas that have reasonable mitigation methods and act on those.
    • Identify blind spots.
      • Understand what is out there and how other enterprises are being attacked and breached. See how you stack up to the myriad of attack tactics that have been used in real-life breaches and how prepared you are. Know what you’re ready for and what you’re not ready for.
    • Analyze the most pressing vectors.
      • Prioritize the attack vectors that are relevant to you. If an attack vector is an area of concern for your business, start there. Do not cover the entire tactics list if certain areas are not relevant.
    • Detection and mitigation lead to better remediation.
      • For each relevant tactic and techniques, there are actionable detection and mitigation methods to add to your list of remediation efforts.

    Impact and Result

    Using the MITRE ATT&CK® framework, Info-Tech’s approach helps you understand your preparedness and effective detection and mitigation actions.

    • Learn about potential attack vectors and the techniques that hostile actors will use to breach and maintain a presence on your network.
    • Analyze your current protocols versus the impact of an attack technique on your network.
    • Discover detection and mitigation actions.
    • Create a prioritized series of security considerations, with basic actionable remediation items. Plan your next threat model by knowing what you’re vulnerable to.
    • Ensure business data cannot be leaked or stolen.
    • Maintain privacy of data and other information.
    • Secure the network connection points.
    • Mitigate risks with the appropriate services.

    This blueprint and associated tool are scalable for all types of organizations within various industry sectors, allowing them to know what types of risk they are facing and what security services are recommended to mitigate those risks.

    Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why threat preparedness is a crucial first step in defending your network against any attack type. Review Info-Tech’s methodology and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Attack tactics and techniques

    Review a breakdown of each of the various attack vectors and their techniques for additional context and insight into the most prevalent attack tactics.

    • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 1: Attack Tactics and Techniques

    2. Threat Preparedness Workbook mapping

    Map your current security protocols against the impacts of various techniques on your network to determine your risk preparedness.

    • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 2: Threat Preparedness Workbook Mapping
    • Enterprise Threat Preparedness Workbook

    3. Execute remediation and detective measures

    Use your prioritized attack vectors to plan your next threat modeling session with confidence that the most pressing security concerns are being addressed with substantive remediation actions.

    • Threat Preparedness Using MITRE ATT&CK® – Phase 3: Execute Remediation and Detective Measures
    [infographic]

    IT Management and Policies

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}23|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}23|crosssells{/j2store}
    • InfoTech Academy Title: IT management and policies videos
    • InfoTech Academy Excerpt: More videos are available once you join. Contact us for more information.
    • Teaser Video: Visit Website
    • Teaser Video Title: Policies Academy Overview
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $23101
    • member rating average days saved: 11
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Governance
    • InfotechAcademy-Executivebrief: Visit Website
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-governance
    Create policies that matter most to your organization.

    Management, policy, policies

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}537|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $31,749 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 22 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Customer Relationship Management
    • Parent Category Link: /customer-relationship-management
    • Application optimization is essential to stay competitive and productive in today’s digital environment.
    • Enterprise applications often involve large capital outlay, unquantified benefits, and high risk of failure.
    • Customer relationship management (CRM) application portfolios are often messy with multiple integration points, distributed data, and limited ongoing end-user training.
    • User dissatisfaction is common.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A properly optimized CRM ecosystem will reduce costs and increase productivity.

    Impact and Result

    • Build an ongoing optimization team to conduct application improvements.
    • Assess your CRM application(s) and the environment in which they exist. Take a business-first strategy to prioritize optimization efforts.
    • Validate CRM capabilities, user satisfaction, issues around data, vendor management, and costs to build out an optimization strategy.
    • Pull this all together to develop a prioritized optimization roadmap.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize your CRM, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Map current-state capabilities

    Gather information around the application:

    • Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    2. Assess your current state

    Assess CRM and related environment. Perform CRM process assessment. Assess user satisfaction across key processes, applications, and data. Understand vendor satisfaction

    • CRM Application Inventory Tool

    3. Build your optimization roadmap

    Build your optimization roadmap: process improvements, software capability improvements, vendor relationships, and data improvement initiatives.

    Infographic

    Workshop: Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your CRM Application Vision

    The Purpose

    Define your CRM application vision.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop an ongoing application optimization team.

    Realign CRM and business goals.

    Understand your current system state capabilities.

    Explore CRM and related costs.

    Activities

    1.1 Determine your CRM optimization team.

    1.2 Align organizational goals.

    1.3 Inventory applications and interactions.

    1.4 Define business capabilities.

    1.5 Explore CRM-related costs (optional).

    Outputs

    CRM optimization team

    CRM business model

    CRM optimization goals

    CRM system inventory and data flow

    CRM process list

    CRM and related costs

    2 Map Current-State Capabilities

    The Purpose

    Map current-state capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Complete a CRM process gap analysis to understand where the CRM is underperforming.

    Review the CRM application portfolio assessment to understand user satisfaction and data concerns.

    Undertake a software review survey to understand your satisfaction with the vendor and product.

    Activities

    2.1 Conduct gap analysis for CRM processes.

    2.2 Perform an application portfolio assessment.

    2.3 Review vendor satisfaction.

    Outputs

    CRM process gap analysis

    CRM application portfolio assessment

    CRM software reviews survey

    3 Assess CRM

    The Purpose

    Assess CRM.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Learn which processes you need to focus on.

    Uncover underlying user satisfaction issues to address these areas.

    Understand where data issues are occurring so that you can mitigate this.

    Investigate your relationship with the vendor and product, including that relative to others.

    Identify any areas for cost optimization (optional).

    Activities

    3.1 Explore process gaps.

    3.2 Analyze user satisfaction.

    3.3 Assess data quality.

    3.4 Understand product satisfaction and vendor management.

    3.5 Look for CRM cost optimization opportunities (optional).

    Outputs

    CRM process optimization priorities

    CRM vendor optimization opportunities

    CRM cost optimization

    4 Build the Optimization Roadmap

    The Purpose

    Build the optimization roadmap.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding where you need to improve is the first step, now understand where to focus your optimization efforts.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify key optimization areas.

    4.2 Build your CRM optimization roadmap and next steps.

    Outputs

    CRM optimization roadmap

    Further reading

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    In today’s connected world, continuous optimization of enterprise applications to realize your digital strategy is key.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    In today’s connected world, continuous optimization of enterprise applications to realize your digital strategy is key.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Focus optimization on organizational value delivery.

    Customer relationship management (CRM) systems are at the core of a customer-centric strategy to drive business results. They are critical to supporting marketing, sales, and customer service efforts.

    CRM systems are expensive, their benefits are difficult to quantify, and they often suffer from poor user satisfaction. Post implementation, technology evolves, organizational goals change, and the health of the system is not monitored. This is complicated in today’s digital landscape with multiple integration points, siloed data, and competing priorities.

    Too often organizations jump into the selection of replacement systems without understanding the health of their current systems. IT leaders need to stop reacting and take a proactive approach to continually monitor and optimize their enterprise applications. Strategically realign business goals, identify business application capabilities, complete a process assessment, evaluate user adoption, and create an optimization roadmap that will drive a cohesive technology strategy that delivers results.

    This is a picture of Lisa Highfield

    Lisa Highfield
    Research Director,
    Enterprise Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In today’s connected world, continuous optimization of enterprise applications to realize your digital strategy is key.

    Enterprise applications often involve large capital outlay and unquantified benefits.

    CRM application portfolios are often messy. Add to that poor processes, distributed data, and lack of training – business results and user dissatisfaction is common.

    Technology owners are often distributed across the business. Consolidation of optimization efforts is key.

    Common Obstacles

    Enterprise applications involve large numbers of processes and users. Without a clear focus on organizational needs, decisions about what and how to optimize can become complicated.

    Competing and conflicting priorities may undermine optimization value by focusing on the approaches that would only benefit one line of business rather than the entire organization.

    Teams do not have a framework to illustrate, communicate, and justify the optimization effort in the language your stakeholders understand.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Build an ongoing optimization team to conduct application improvements.

    Assess your CRM application(s) and the environment in which they exist. Take a business-first strategy to prioritize optimization efforts.

    Validate CRM capabilities, user satisfaction, issues around data, vendor management, and costs to build out an optimization strategy

    Pull this all together to develop a prioritized optimization roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    CRM implementation should not be a one-and-done exercise. A properly optimized CRM ecosystem will reduce costs and increase productivity.

    This is an image of the thought model: Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    Insight Summary

    Continuous assessment and optimization of customer relationship management (CRM) systems is critical to their success.

    • Applications and the environments in which they live are constantly evolving.
    • Get the Most Out of Your CRM provides business and application managers a method to complete a health assessment on their CRM systems to identify areas for improvement and optimization.
    • Put optimization practices into effect by:
      • Aligning and prioritizing key business and technology drivers.
      • Identifying CRM process classification, and performing a gap analysis.
      • Measuring user satisfaction across key departments.
      • Evaluating vendor relations.
      • Understanding how data fits.
      • Pulling it all together into an optimization roadmap.

    CRM platforms are the applications that provide functional capabilities and data management around the customer experience (CX).

    Marketing, sales, and customer service are enabled through CRM technology.

    CRM technologies facilitate an organization’s relationships with customers, service users, employees, and suppliers.

    CRM technology is critical to managing the lifecycle of these relationships, from lead generation, to sales opportunities, to ongoing support and nurturing of these relationships.

    Customer experience management (CXM)

    CRM platforms sit at the core of a well-rounded customer experience management ecosystem.

    Customer Relationship Management

    • Web Experience Management Platform
    • E-Commerce & Point-of-Sale Solutions
    • Social Media Management Platform
    • Customer Intelligence Platform
    • Customer Service Management Tools
    • Marketing Management Suite

    Customer relationship management suites are one piece of the overall customer experience management ecosystem, alongside tools such as customer intelligence platforms and adjacent point solutions for sales, marketing, and customer service. Review Info-Tech’s CXM blueprint to build a complete, end-to-end customer interaction solution portfolio that encompasses CRM alongside other critical components. The CXM blueprint also allows you to develop strategic requirements for CRM based on customer personas and external market analysis.

    CRM by the numbers

    1/3

    Statistical analysis of CRM projects indicate failures vary from 18% to 69%. Taking an average of those analyst reports, about one-third of CRM projects are considered a failure.
    Source: CIO Magazine, 2017

    85%

    Companies that apply the principles of behavioral economics outperform their peers by 85% in sales growth and more than 25% in gross margin.
    Source: Gallup, 2012

    40%

    In 2019, 40% of executives name customer experience the top priority for their digital transformation.
    Source: CRM Magazine, 2019

    CRM dissatisfaction

    Drivers of Dissatisfaction

    Business Data People and Teams Technology
    • Misaligned objectives
    • Product fit
    • Changing priorities
    • Lack of metrics
    • Access to data
    • Data hygiene
    • Data literacy
    • One view of the customer
    • User adoption
    • Lack of IT support
    • Training (use of data and system)
    • Vendor relations
    • Systems integration
    • Multichannel complexity
    • Capability shortfall
    • Lack of product support

    Info-Tech Insight

    While technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences, there are many other drivers of dissatisfaction. IT must stand shoulder to shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for customer relationship management.

    Marketing, Sales, and Customer Service, along with IT, can only optimize CRM with the full support of each other. The cooperation of the departments is crucial when trying to improve CRM technology capabilities and customer interaction.

    Application optimization is risky without a plan

    Avoid the common pitfalls.

    • Not considering application optimization as a business and IT partnership that requires continuous formal engagement of all participants.
    • Not having a good understanding of current state, including integration points and data.
    • Not adequately accommodating feedback and changes after digital applications are deployed and employed.
    • Not treating digital applications as a motivator for potential future IT optimization effort, and not incorporating digital assets in strategic business planning.
    • Not involving department leads, management, and other subject matter experts to facilitate the organizational change digital applications bring.

    “A successful application optimization strategy starts with the business need in mind and not from a technological point of view. No matter from which angle you look at it, modernizing a legacy application is a considerable undertaking that can’t be taken lightly. Your best approach is to begin the journey with baby steps.”
    – Ernese Norelus, Sreeni Pamidala, and Oliver Senti
    Medium, 2020

    Info-Tech’s methodology for Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    1. Map Current-State Capabilities 2. Assess Your Current State 3. Build Your Optimization Roadmap
    Phase Steps
    1. Identify stakeholders and build your CRM optimization team
    2. Build a CRM strategy model
    3. Inventory current system state
    4. Define business capabilities
    1. Conduct a gap analysis for CRM processes
    2. Assess user satisfaction
    3. Review your satisfaction with the vendor and product
    1. Identify key optimization areas
    2. Compile optimization assessment results
    Phase Outcomes
    1. Stakeholder map
    2. CRM optimization team
    3. CRM business model
    4. Strategy alignment
    5. Systems inventory and diagram
    6. Business capabilities map
    7. Key CRM processes list
    1. Gap analysis for CRM-related processes
    2. Understanding of user satisfaction across applications and processes
    3. Insight into CRM data quality
    4. Quantified satisfaction with the vendor and product
    1. Application optimization plan

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Key deliverable:

    CRM Optimization Roadmap (Tab 8)

    This image contains a screenshot from Tab 9 of the Get the most out of your CRM WorkshopThis image contains a screenshot from Tab 9 of the Get the most out of your CRM Workshop

    Complete an assessment of processes, user satisfaction, data quality, and vendor management using the Workbook or the APA diagnostic.

    CRM Business Model (Tab 2)

    This image contains a screenshot from Tab 2 of the Get the most out of your CRM Workshop

    Align your business and technology goals and objectives in the current environment.

    Prioritized CRM Optimization Goals (Tab 3)

    This image contains a screenshot from Tab 3 of the Get the most out of your CRM Workshop

    Identify and prioritize your CRM optimization goals.

    Application Portfolio Assessment (APA)

    This image contains a screenshot of the Application Portfolio Assessment

    Assess IT-enabled user satisfaction across your CRM portfolio.

    Prioritized Process Assessment (Tab 5)

    This image contains a screenshot from Tab 5 of the Get the most out of your CRM Workshop

    Understand areas for improvement.

    Case Study

    Align strategy and technology to meet consumer demand.

    INDUSTRY - Entertainment
    SOURCE - Forbes, 2017

    Challenge

    Beginning as a mail-out service, Netflix offered subscribers a catalog of videos to select from and have mailed to them directly. Customers no longer had to go to a retail store to rent a video. However, the lack of immediacy of direct mail as the distribution channel resulted in slow adoption.

    Blockbuster was the industry leader in video retail but was lagging in its response to industry, consumer, and technology trends around customer experience

    Solution

    In response to the increasing presence of tech-savvy consumers on the internet, Netflix invested in developing its online platform as its primary distribution channel. The benefit of doing so was two-fold: passive brand advertising (by being present on the internet) and meeting customer demands for immediacy and convenience. Netflix also recognized the rising demand for personalized service and created an unprecedented, tailored customer experience.

    Results

    Netflix’s disruptive innovation is built on the foundation of great customer experience management. Netflix is now a $28-billion company, which is tenfold what Blockbuster was worth.

    Netflix used disruptive technologies to innovatively build a customer experience that put it ahead of the long-time, video rental industry leader, Blockbuster.

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

    Call #1: Scope requirements, objectives, and your specific challenges.

    Call #2:

    Build the CRM team.

    Align organizational goals.

    Call #4:

    Conduct gap analysis for CRM processes.

    Prepare application portfolio assessment.

    Call #5:

    Understand product satisfaction and vendor management.

    Look for CRM cost optimization opportunities (optional).

    Call #7:

    Identify key optimization areas.

    Build out optimization roadmap and next steps.

    Call #3:

    Map current state.

    Inventory CRM processes.

    Explore CRM-related costs.

    Call #6:

    Review APA results.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 to 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Define Your CRM Application Vision Map Current-State Capabilities Assess CRM Build the Optimization Roadmap Next Steps and Wrap-Up (offsite)

    Activities

    1.1 Determine your CRM optimization team

    1.2 Align organizational goals

    1.3 Inventory applications and interactions

    1.4 Define business capabilities

    1.5 Explore CRM-related costs

    2.1 Conduct gap analysis for CRM processes

    2.2 Perform an application portfolio assessment

    2.3 Review vendor satisfaction

    3.1 Explore process gaps

    3.2 Analyze user satisfaction

    3.3 Assess data quality

    3.4 Understand product satisfaction and vendor management

    3.5 Look for CRM cost optimization opportunities (optional)

    4.1 Identify key optimization areas

    4.2 Build your CRM optimization roadmap and next steps

    5.1 Complete in-progress deliverables from previous four days

    5.2 Set up review time for workshop deliverables and to discuss next steps

    Deliverables
    1. CRM optimization team
    2. CRM business model
    3. CRM optimization goals
    4. CRM system inventory and data flow
    5. CRM process list
    6. CRM and related costs
    1. CRM process gap analysis
    2. CRM application portfolio assessment
    3. CRM software reviews survey
    1. CRM process optimization priorities
    2. CRM vendor optimization opportunities
    3. CRM cost optimization
    1. CRM optimization roadmap

    Phase 1

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    • 1.1 Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team
    • 1.2 Build a CRM Strategy Model
    • 1.3 Inventory Current System State
    • 1.4 Define Business Capabilities
    • 1.5 Understand CRM Costs

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Align your organizational goals
    • Gain a firm understanding of your current state
    • Inventory CRM and related applications
    • Confirm the organization’s capabilities

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product Owners
    • CMO
    • Departmental leads – Sales, Marketing, Customer Service, or other
    • Applications Director
    • Senior Business Analyst
    • Senior Developer
    • Procurement Analysts

    Inventory of CRM and related systems

    Develop an integration map to specify which applications will interface with each other.

    This is an image of an integration map, integrating the following Terms to CRM: Telephony Systems; Directory Services; Email; Content Management; Point Solutions; ERP

    Integration is paramount: your CRM application often integrates with other applications within the organization. Create an integration map to reflect a system of record and the exchange of data. To increase customer engagement, channel integration is a must (i.e. with robust links to unified communications solutions, email, and VoIP telephony systems).

    CRM plays a key role in the more holistic customer experience framework. However, it is heavily influenced by and often interacts with many other platforms.

    Data is one key consideration that needs to be considered here. If customer information is fragmented, it will be nearly impossible to build a cohesive view of the customer. Points of integration (POIs) are the junctions between the CRM(s) and other applications where data is flowing to and from. They are essential to creating value, particularly in customer insight-focused and omnichannel-focused deployments.

    Customer expectations are on the rise

    CRM strategy is a critical component of customer experience (CX).

    CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE

    1. Thoughtfulness is in
      Connect with customers on a personal level
    2. Service over products
      The experience is more important than the product
    3. Culture is now number one
      Culture is the most overlooked piece of customer experience strategy
    4. Engineering and service finally join forces
      Companies are combining their technology and service efforts to create
      strong feedback loops
    5. The B2B world is inefficiently served
      B2B needs to step up with more tools and a greater emphasis placed on
      customer experience

    Source: Forbes, 2019

    Build a cohesive CRM strategy that aligns business goals with CRM capabilities.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Customers expect to interact with organizations through the channels of their choice. Now more than ever, you must enable your organization to provide tailored customer experiences.

    IT is critical to the success of your CRM strategy

    Today’s shared digital landscape of the CIO and CMO

    CIO

    • IT Operations
    • Service Delivery and Management
    • IT Support
    • IT Systems and Application
    • IT Strategy and Governance
    • Cybersecurity

    Collaboration and Partnership

    • Digital Strategy = Transformation
      Business Goals | Innovation | Leadership | Rationalization
    • Customer Experience
      Architecture | Design | Omnichannel Delivery | Management
    • Insight (Market Facing)
      Analytics | Business Intelligence | Machine Learning | AI
    • Marketing Integration + Operating Model
      Apps | Channels | Experiences | Data | Command Center
    • Master Data
      Customer | Audience | Industry | Digital Marketing Assets

    CMO

    • PEO Media
    • Brand Management
    • Campaign Management
    • Marketing Tech
    • Marketing Ops
    • Privacy, Trust, and Regulatory Requirements

    Info-Tech Insight

    Technology is the key enabler of building strong customer experiences: IT must stand shoulder to shoulder with the business to develop a technology framework for customer relationship management.

    Step 1.1

    Identify Stakeholders and Build Your Optimization Team

    Activities

    1.1.1 Identify the stakeholders whose support will be critical to success

    1.1.2 Select your CRM optimization team

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify CRM drivers and objectives.
    • Explore CRM challenges and pain points.
    • Discover CRM benefits and opportunities.
    • Align the CRM foundation with the corporate strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder map
    • CRM optimization team composition

    CRM optimization stakeholders

    Understand the roles necessary to get the most out of your CRM.

    Understand the role of each player within your optimization initiative. Look for listed participants on the activity slides to determine when each player should be involved.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Do not limit input or participation. Include subject matter experts and internal stakeholders at stages within the optimization initiative. Such inputs can be solicited on a one-off basis as needed. This ensures you take a holistic approach to creating your CRM optimization strategy.

    Title

    Roles Within CRM Optimization Initiative

    Optimization Sponsor

    • Owns the project at the management/C-suite level
    • Responsible for breaking down barriers and ensuring alignment with organizational strategy
    • CMO, VP od Marketing, VP of Sales, VP of Customer Care, or similar

    Optimization Initiative Manager

    • Typically IT individual(s) that oversee day-to-day operations
    • Responsible for preparing and managing the project plan and monitoring the project team’s progress
    • Applications Manager or other IT Manager, Business Analyst, Business Process Owner, or similar

    Business Leads/
    Product Owners

    • Works alongside the Optimization Initiative Manager to ensure that the strategy is aligned with business needs
    • In this case, likely to be a marketing, sales, or customer service lead
    • Product Owners
    • Sales Director, Marketing Director, Customer Care Director, or similar

    CRM Optimization Team

    • Comprised of individuals whose knowledge and skills are crucial to optimization success
    • Responsible for driving day-to-day activities, coordinating communication, and making process and design decisions
    • Project Manager, Business Lead, CRM Manager, Integration Manager, Application SMEs, Developers, Business Process Architects, and/or similar SMEs

    Steering Committee

    • Comprised of C-suite/management level individuals that act as the CRM optimization decision makers.
    • Responsible for validating goals and priorities, defining the optimization scope, enabling adequate resourcing, and managing change
    • Project Sponsor, Project Manager, Business Lead, CMO, Business Unit SMEs, or similar

    1.1.1 Identify stakeholders critical to success

    1 hour

    1. Hold a meeting to identify the stakeholders that should be included in the project’s steering committee.
    2. Finalize selection of steering committee members.
    3. Contact members to ensure their willingness to participate.
    4. Document the steering committee members and the milestone/presentation expectations for reporting project progress and results.

    Input

    • Stakeholder interviews
    • Business process owners list

    Output

    • CRM optimization stakeholders
    • Steering committee members

    Materials

    • N/A

    Participants

    • Product Owners
    • CMO
    • Departmental Leads – Sales, Marketing, Customer Service (and others)
    • Applications Director
    • Senior Business Analyst
    • Senior Developer
    • Procurement Analyst

    The CRM optimization team

    Consider the core team functions when composing the CRM optimization team. Form a cross-functional team (i.e. across IT, Marketing, Sales, Service, Operations) to create a well-aligned CRM optimization strategy.

    Don’t let your core team become too large when trying to include all relevant stakeholders. Carefully limiting the size of the optimization team will enable effective decision making while still including functional business units such as Marketing, Sales, Service, and Customer Service.

    Required Skills/Knowledge

    Suggested Optimization Team Members

    Business

    • Understanding of the customer
    • Departmental processes
    • Sales Manager
    • Marketing Manager
    • Customer Service Manager

    IT

    • Product Owner
    • Application developers
    • Enterprise architects
    • CRM Application Manager
    • Business Process Manager
    • Data Stewards
    Other
    • Operations
    • Administrative
    • Change management
    • Operations Manager
    • CFO
    • Change Management Manager

    1.1.2 Select your CRM optimization team

    30 minutes

    1. Have the CMO and other key stakeholders discuss and determine who will be involved in the CRM optimization project.
      • Depending on the initiative and the size of the organization the size of the team will vary.
      • Key business leaders in key areas – Sales, Marketing, Customer Service, and IT – should be involved.
    2. Document the members of your optimization team in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “1. Optimization Team.”
      • Depending on your initiative and size of your organization, the size of this team will vary.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Input

    • Stakeholders

    Output

    • List of CRM Optimization Team members

    Materials

    • Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Participants

    • Product Owners
    • CMO
    • Departmental Leads – Sales, Marketing, Customer Service
    • Applications Director
    • Senior Business Analyst
    • Senior Developer
    • Procurement Analyst

    Step 1.2

    Build a CRM Strategy Model

    Activities

    • 1.2.1 Explore environmental factors and technology drivers
    • 1.2.2 Discuss challenges and pain points
    • 1.2.3 Discuss opportunities and benefits
    • 1.2.4 Align CRM strategy with organizational goals

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify CRM drivers and objectives.
    • Explore CRM challenges and pain points.
    • Discover the CRM benefits and opportunities.
    • Align the CRM foundation with the corporate strategy.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • CRM business model
    • Strategy alignment

    Align the CRM strategy with the corporate strategy

    Corporate Strategy

    Your corporate strategy:

    • Conveys the current state of the organization and the path it wants to take.
    • Identifies future goals and business aspirations.
    • Communicates the initiatives that are critical for getting the organization from its current state to the future state.

    Unified Strategy

    • The CRM optimization can be and should be linked, with metrics, to the corporate strategy and ultimate business objectives.

    CRM Strategy

    Your CRM Strategy:

    • Communicates the organization’s budget and spending on CRM.
    • Identifies IT initiatives that will support the business and key CRM objectives.
    • Outlines staffing and resourcing for CRM initiatives.

    CRM projects are more successful when the management team understands the strategic importance and the criticality of alignment. Time needs to be spent upfront aligning business strategies with CRM capabilities. Effective alignment between Sales, Marketing, Customer Service, Operations, IT, and the business should happen daily. Alignment doesn’t just need to occur at the executive level but at each level of the organization.

    Sample CRM objectives

    Increase Revenue

    Enable lead scoring

    Deploy sales collateral management tools

    Improve average cost per lead via a marketing automation tool

    Enhance Market Share

    Enhance targeting effectiveness with a CRM

    Increase social media presence via an SMMP

    Architect customer intelligence analysis

    Improve Customer Satisfaction

    Reduce time-to-resolution via better routing

    Increase accessibility to customer service with live chat

    Improve first contact resolution with customer KB

    Increase Customer Retention

    Use a loyalty management application

    Improve channel options for existing customers

    Use customer analytics to drive targeted offers

    Create Customer-Centric Culture

    Ensure strong training and user adoption programs

    Use CRM to provide 360-degree view of all customer interactions

    Incorporate the voice of the customer into product development

    Identifying organizational objectives of high priority will assist in breaking down business needs and CRM objectives. This exercise will better align the CRM systems with the overall corporate strategy and achieve buy-in from key stakeholders.

    CRM business model Template

    This image contains a screenshot of the CRM business model template

    Understand objectives for creating a strong CRM strategy

    Business Needs

    Business Drivers

    Technology Drivers

    Environmental Factors

    Definition A business need is a requirement associated with a particular business process. Business drivers can be thought of as business-level goals. These are tangible benefits the business can measure such as employee retention, operation excellence, and financial performance. Technology drivers are technological changes that have created the need for a new CRM enablement strategy. Many organizations turn to technology systems to help them obtain a competitive edge. External considerations are factors taking place outside of the organization that are impacting the way business is conducted inside the organization. These are often outside the control of the business.

    Examples

    • Audit tracking
    • Authorization levels
    • Business rules
    • Data quality
    • Employee engagement
    • Productivity
    • Operational efficiency
    • Deployment model (i.e. SaaS)
    • Integration
    • Reporting capabilities
    • Fragmented technologies
    • Economic and political factors, the labor market
    • Competitive influencers
    • Compliance regulations

    Info-Tech Insight

    One of the biggest drivers for CRM adoption is the ability to make decisions through consolidated data. This driver is a result of external considerations. Many industries today are highly competitive, uncertain, and rapidly changing. To succeed under these pressures, there needs to be timely information and visibility into all components of the organization.

    1.2.1 Explore environmental factors and technology drivers

    30 minutes

    1. Identify business drivers that are contributing to the organization’s need for CRM.
    2. Understand how the company is running today and what the organization’s future will look like. Try to identify the purpose for becoming an integrated organization. Use a whiteboard and markers to capture key findings.
    3. Consider environmental factors: external considerations, organizational drivers, technology drivers, and key functional requirements.
    4. Use the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “2. Business Model,” to complete this exercise.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    This is a screenshot of the CRM Business Model the following boxes highlighted in purple boxes.  CRM business Needs; Environmental Factors; Technology Drivers

    External Considerations

    Organizational Drivers

    Technology Considerations

    Functional Requirements

    • Funding Constraints
    • Regulations
    • Compliance
    • Scalability
    • Operational Efficiency
    • Data Accuracy
    • Data Quality
    • Better Reporting
    • Information Availability
    • Integration Between Systems
    • Secure Data

    Create a realistic CRM foundation by identifying the challenges and barriers to the project

    There are several different factors that may stifle the success of an CRM portfolio. Organizations creating an CRM foundation must scan their current environment to identify internal barriers and challenges.

    Common Internal Barriers

    Management Support

    Organizational Culture

    Organizational Structure

    IT Readiness

    Definition The degree of understanding and acceptance towards CRM technology and systems. The collective shared values and beliefs. The functional relationships between people and departments in an organization. The degree to which the organization’s people and processes are prepared for new CRM system(s.)

    Questions

    • Is a CRM project recognized as a top priority?
    • Will management commit time to the project?
    • Are employees resistant to change?
    • Is the organization highly individualized?
    • Is the organization centralized?
    • Is the organization highly formalized?
    • Is there strong technical expertise?
    • Is there strong infrastructure?
    Impact
    • Funding
    • Resources
    • Knowledge sharing
    • User acceptance
    • Flow of knowledge
    • Poor implementation
    • Need for reliance on consultants

    1.2.2 Discuss challenges and pain points

    30 minutes

    1. Identify challenges with current systems and processes.
    2. Brainstorm potential barriers to success. Use a whiteboard and markers to capture key findings.
    3. Consider the project barriers: functional gaps, technical gaps, process gaps, and barriers to CRM success.
    4. Use the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “2. Business Model,” to complete this exercise.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    This is a screenshot of the CRM Business Model the following boxes highlighted in purple boxes.  Barriers

    Functional Gaps

    Technical Gaps

    Process Gaps

    Barriers to Success

    • No sales tracking within core CRM
    • Inconsistent reporting – data quality concerns
    • Duplication of data
    • Lack of system integration
    • Cultural mindset
    • Resistance to change
    • Lack of training
    • Funding

    1.2.3 Discuss opportunities and benefits

    30 minutes

    1. Identify opportunities and benefits from an integrated system.
    2. Brainstorm potential enablers for successful CRM enablement and the ideal portfolio.
    3. Consider the project enablers: business benefits, IT benefits, organizational benefits, and enablers of CRM success.
    4. Use the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “2. Business Model,” to complete this exercise.
    This is a screenshot of the CRM Business Model the following boxes highlighted in purple boxes.  Enablers

    Business Benefits

    IT Benefits

    Organizational Benefits

    Enablers of Success

    • Business-IT alignment
    • Compliance
    • Scalability
    • Operational Efficiency
    • Data Accuracy
    • Data Quality
    • Better Reporting
    • Change Management
    • Training
    • Alignment to Strategic Objectives

    1.2.4 Align CRM strategy with organizational goals

    1 hour

    1. Discuss your corporate objectives (organizational goals). Choose three to five corporate objectives that are a priority for the organization in the current year.
    2. Break into groups and assign each group one corporate objective.
    3. For each objective, produce several ways an optimized CRM system will meet the given objective.
    4. Think about the modules and CRM functions that will help you realize these benefits.
    5. Use the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “2. Business Model,” to complete this exercise.
    Increase Revenue

    CRM Benefits

    • Increase sales by 5%
    • Expand to new markets
    • Offer new product
    • Identify geographies underperforming
    • Build out global customer strategy
    • Allow for customer segmentation
    • Create targeted marketing campaigns

    Input

    • Organizational goals
    • CRM strategy model

    Output

    • Optimization benefits map

    Materials

    • Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Participants

    • Product Owners
    • CMO
    • Departmental Leads – Sales, Marketing, Customer Service
    • Applications Director
    • Senior Business Analyst
    • Senior Developer
    • Procurement Analyst

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Step 1.3

    Inventory Current System State

    Activities

    1.3.1 Inventory applications and interactions

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Inventory applications
    • Map interactions between systems

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM Optimization Team
    • Enterprise Architect
    • Data Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • Systems inventory
    • Systems diagram

    1.3.1 Inventory applications and interactions

    1-3 hours

    1. Individually list all electronic systems involved in the organization. This includes anything related to customer information and interactions, such as CRM, ERP, e-commerce, finance, email marketing, and social media, etc.
    2. Document data flows into and out of each system to the ERP. Refer to the example on the next slide (CRM data flow).
    3. Review the processes in place (e.g. reporting, marketing, data moving into and out of systems). Document manual processes. Identify integration points. If flowcharts exist for these processes, it may be useful to provide these to the participants.
    4. If possible, diagram the system. Include information direction flow. Use the sample CRM map, if needed.

    This image contains an example of a CRM Data Flow

    CRM data flow

    This image contains an example of a CRM Data Flow

    Be sure to include enterprise applications that are not included in the CRM application portfolio. Popular systems to consider for POIs include billing, directory services, content management, and collaboration tools.

    When assessing the current application portfolio that supports CRM, the tendency will be to focus on the applications under the CRM umbrella, relating mostly to Marketing, Sales, and Customer Service. Be sure to include systems that act as input to, or benefit due to outputs from, the CRM or similar applications.

    Sample CRM map

    This image contains an example of a CRM map

    Step 1.4

    Define Business Capabilities

    Activities

    1.4.1 Define business capabilities

    1.4.2 List your key CRM processes

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define your business capabilities
    • List your key CRM processes

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM Optimization Team
    • Business Architect

    Outcomes of this step

    • Business capabilities map
    • Key CRM processes list

    Business capability map (Level 0)

    This image contains a screenshot of a business capability map.  an Arrow labeled CRM points to the Revenue Generation section. Revenue Generation: Marketing; Sales; Customer Service.

    In business architecture, the primary view of an organization is known as a business capability map.

    A business capability defines what a business does to enable value creation, rather than how.

    Business capabilities:

    • Represent stable business functions.
    • Are unique and independent of each other.
    • Typically will have a defined business outcome.

    A business capability map provides details that help the business architecture practitioner direct attention to a specific area of the business for further assessment.

    Capability vs. process vs. feature

    Understanding the difference

    When examining CRM optimization, it is important we approach this from the appropriate layer.

    Capability:

    • The ability of an entity (e.g. organization or department) to achieve its objectives (APQC, 2017).
    • An ability that an organization, person, or system possesses. Typically expressed in general and high-level terms and typically require a combination of organization, people, processes, and technology to achieve (TOGAF).

    Process:

    • Can be manual or technology enabled. A process is a series of interrelated activities that convert inputs into results (outputs). Processes consume resources, require standards for repeatable performance, and respond to control systems that direct the quality, rate, and cost of performance. The same process can be highly effective in one circumstance and poorly effective in another with different systems, tools, knowledge, and people (APQC, 2017).

    Feature:

    • Is a distinguishing characteristic of a software item (e.g. performance, portability, or functionality) (IEEE, 2005).

    In today’s complex organizations, it can be difficult to understand where inefficiencies stem from and how performance can be enhanced.
    To fix problems and maximize efficiencies business capabilities and processes need to be examined to determine gaps and areas of lagging performance.

    Info-Tech’s CRM framework and industry tools such as the APQC’s Process Classification Framework can help make sense of this.

    1.4.1 Define business capabilities

    1-3 hours

    1. Look at the major functions or processes within the scope of CRM.
    2. Compile an inventory of current systems that interact with the chosen processes. In its simplest form, document your application inventory in a spreadsheet (see tab 3 of the CRM Application Inventory Tool). For large organizations, interview representatives of business domains to help create your list of applications.
    3. Make sure to include any processes that are manual versus automated.
    4. Use your current state drawing from activity 1.3.1 to link processes to applications for further effect.

    CRM Application Inventory Tool

    Input

    • Current systems
    • Key processes
    • APQC Framework
    • Organizational process map

    Output

    • List of key business processes

    Materials

    • CRM Application Inventory Tool
    • CRM APQC Framework
    • Whiteboard, PowerPoint, or flip charts
    • Pens/markers

    Participants

    • CRM Optimization Team

    CRM process mapping

    This image contains two screenshots.  one is of the business capability map seen earlier in this blueprint, and the other includes the following operating model: Objectives; Value Streams; Capabilities; Processes

    The operating model

    An operating model is a framework that drives operating decisions. It helps to set the parameters for the scope of CRM and the processes that will be supported. The operating model will serve to group core operational processes. These groupings represent a set of interrelated, consecutive processes aimed at generating a common output.

    The Value Stream

    Value Stream Defined

    Value Streams

    Design Product

    Produce Product

    Sell Product

    Customer Service

    • Manufacturers work proactively to design products and services that will meet consumer demand.
    • Products are driven by consumer demand and governmental regulations.
    • Production processes and labor costs are constantly analyzed for efficiencies and accuracies.
    • Quality of product and services are highly regulated through all levels of the supply chain.
    • Sales networks and sales staff deliver the product from the organization to the end consumer.
    • Marketing plays a key role throughout the value stream connecting consumers wants and needs to the product and services offered.
    • Relationships with consumers continue after the sale of a product and services.
    • Continued customer support and mining is important to revenue streams.

    Value streams connect business goals to the organization’s value realization activities in the marketplace. Those activities are dependent on the specific industry segment in which an organization operates.

    There are two types of value streams: core value streams and support value streams.

    • Core value streams are mostly externally facing. They deliver value to either an external or internal customer and they tie to the customer perspective of the strategy map.
    • Support value streams are internally facing and provide the foundational support for an organization to operate.

    An effective method for ensuring all value streams have been considered is to understand that there can be different end-value receivers.

    APQC Framework

    Help define your inventory of sales, marketing, and customer services processes.

    Operating Processes

    1. Develop Vision and Strategy
    2. Develop and Manage Products and Services
    3. Market and Sell Products and Services
    4. Deliver Physical Products
    5. Deliver Services

    Management and Support Processes

    1. Manage Customer Service
    2. Develop and Manage Human Capital
    3. Manage Information Technology (IT)
    4. Manage Financial Resources
    5. Acquire, Construct, and Manage Assets
    6. Manage Enterprise Risk, Compliance, Remediation, and Resiliency
    7. Manage External Relationships
    8. Develop and Manage Business Capabilities

    Source: APQC, 2020

    If you do not have a documented process model, you can use the APQC Framework to help define your inventory of sales business processes.

    APQC’s Process Classification Framework is a taxonomy of cross-functional business processes intended to allow the objective comparison of organizational performance within and among organizations.

    Go to this link

    Process mapping hierarchy

    This image includes explanations for the following PCF levels:  Level 1 - Category; Level 2 - Process Group; Level 3 - Process; Level 4 - Activity; Level 5 - Task

    APQC provides a process classification framework. It allows organizations to effectively define their processes and manage them appropriately.

    THE APQC PROCESS CLASSIFICATION FRAMEWORK (PCF)® was developed by non-profit APQC, a global resource for benchmarking and best practices, and its member companies as an open standard to facilitate improvement through process management and benchmarking, regardless of industry, size, or geography. The PCF organizes operating and management processes into 12 enterprise level categories, including process groups and over 1,000 processes and associated activities. To download the full PCF or industry-specific versions of the PCF as well as associated measures and benchmarking, visit www.apqc.org/pcf.

    Cross-industry classification framework

    Level 1 Level Level 3 Level 4

    Market and sell products and services

    Understand markets, customers, and capabilities Perform customer and market intelligence analysis Conduct customer and market research

    Market and sell products and services

    Develop sales strategy Develop sales forecast Gather current and historic order information

    Deliver services

    Manage service delivery resources Manage service delivery resource demand Develop baseline forecasts
    ? ? ? ?

    Info-Tech Insight

    Focus your initial assessment on the level 1 processes that matter to your organization. This allows you to target your scant resources on the areas of optimization that matter most to the organization and minimize the effort required from your business partners.

    You may need to iterate the assessment as challenges are identified. This allows you to be adaptive and deal with emerging issues more readily and become a more responsive partner to the business.

    1.4.2 List your key CRM processes

    1-3 hours

    1. Reflect on your organization’s CRM capabilities and processes.
    2. Refer to tab 4, “Process Importance,” in your Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook. You can use your own processes if you prefer. Consult tab 10. “Framework (Reference)” in the Workbook to explore additional capabilities.
    3. Use your CRM goals as a guide.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    This is a screenshot from the APQC Cross-Industry Process Classification Framework, adapted to list key CRM processes

    *Adapted from the APQC Cross-Industry Process Classification Framework, 2019.

    Step 1.5

    Understand CRM Costs

    Activities

    1.5.1 List CRM-related costs (optional)

    Map Current-State Capabilities

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define your business capabilities
    • List your key CRM processes

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Finance Representatives
    • CRM Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Current CRM and related operating costs

    1.5.1 List CRM-related costs (optional)

    3+ hours

    Before you can make changes and optimization decisions, you need to understand the high-level costs associated with your current application architecture. This activity will help you identify the types of technology and people costs associated with your current systems.

    1. Identify the types of technology costs associated with each current system:
      1. System Maintenance
      2. Annual Renewal
      3. Licensing
    2. Identify the cost of people associated with each current system:
      1. Full-Time Employees
      2. Application Support Staff
      3. Help Desk Tickets
    3. Use the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “9. Costs (Optional),” to complete this exercise.

    This is a screenshot of an example of a table which lays out CRM and Associated Costs.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Phase 2

    Assess Your Current State

    • 2.1 Conduct a Gap Analysis for CRM Processes
    • 2.2 Assess User Satisfaction
    • 2.3 Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor and Product

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    This phase will guide you through the following activities:

    • Determine process relevance
    • Perform a gap analysis
    • Perform a user satisfaction survey
    • Assess software and vendor satisfaction

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CRM optimization team
    • Users across functional areas of your CRM and related technologies

    Step 2.1

    Conduct a Gap Analysis for CRM Processes

    Activities

    • 2.1.1 Determine process relevance
    • 2.1.2 Perform process gap analysis

    Assess Your Current State

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Determine process relevance
    • Perform a gap analysis

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM optimization team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Gap analysis for CRM-related processes (current vs. desired state)

    2.1.1 Determine process relevance

    1-3 hours

    1. Open tab “4. Process Importance,” in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook.
    2. Rate each process for level of importance to your organization on the following scale:
      • Crucial
      • Important
      • Secondary
      • Unimportant
      • Not applicable

    This image contains a screenshot of tab 4 of the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    2.1.2 Perform process gap analysis

    1-3 hours

    1. Open tab “5. Process Assessment,” in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook.
    2. For each line item, identify your current state and your desired state on the following scale:
      • Not important
      • Poor
      • Moderate
      • Good
      • Excellent

    This is a screenshot of Tab 5 of the Get the Most Out of your CRM Workshop

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Step 2.2

    Assess User Satisfaction

    Activities

    • 2.2.1 Prepare and complete a user satisfaction survey
    • 2.2.2 Enter user satisfaction

    Assess Your Current State

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Preparation and completion of an application portfolio assessment (APA)
    • Entry of the user satisfaction scores into the workbook

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM optimization team
    • Users across functional areas of CRM and related technologies

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of user satisfaction across applications and processes
    • Insight into CRM data quality

    Benefits of the Application Portfolio Assessment

    This is a screenshot of the application  Overview tab

    Assess the health of the application portfolio

    • Get a full 360-degree view of the effectiveness, criticality, and prevalence of all relevant applications to get a comprehensive view of the health of the applications portfolio.
    • Identify opportunities to drive more value from effective applications, retire nonessential applications, and immediately address at-risk applications that are not meeting expectations.

    This is a screenshot of the Finance Overview tab

    Provide targeted department feedback

    • Share end-user satisfaction and importance ratings for core IT services, IT communications, and business enablement to focus on the right end-user groups or lines of business, and ramp up satisfaction and productivity.

    This is a screenshot of the application  Overview tab

    Insight into the state of data quality

    • Data quality is one of the key issues causing poor CRM user satisfaction and business results. This can include the relevance, accuracy, timeliness, or usability of the organization’s data.
    • Targeted, open-ended feedback around data quality will provide insight into where optimization efforts should be focused.

    2.2.1 Prepare and complete a user satisfaction survey

    1 hour

    Option 1: Use Info-Tech’s Application Portfolio Assessment to generate your user satisfaction score. This tool not only measures application satisfaction but also elicits great feedback from users regarding support they receive from the IT team.

    1. Download the CRM Application Inventory Tool.
    2. Complete the “Demographics” tab (tab 2).
    3. Complete the “Inventory” tab (tab 3).
      1. Complete the inventory by treating each process within the organization as a separate row. Use the processes identified in the process gap analysis as a reference.
      2. Treat every department as a separate column in the department section. Feel free to add, remove, or modify department names to match your organization.
      3. Include data quality for all applications applicable.

    Option 2: Use the method of choice to elicit current user satisfaction for each of the processes identified as important to the organization.

    1. List processes identified as important (from the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab 4, “Process Importance”).
    2. Gather user contact information by department.
    3. Ask users to rate satisfaction: Extremely Satisfied, Satisfied, Neutral, Dissatisfied, and Extremely Dissatisfied (on Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab 5. “Process Assessment”).

    This image contains a screenshot of the CRM Application Inventory Tool Tab

    Understand user satisfaction across capabilities and departments within your organization.

    Download the CRM Application Inventory Tool

    2.2.2 Enter user satisfaction

    20 minutes

    Using the results from the Application Portfolio Assessment or your own user survey:

    1. Open your Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “5. Process Assessment.”
    2. For each process, record up to three different department responses.
    3. Enter the answers to the survey for each line item using the drop-down options:
      • Extremely Satisfied
      • Satisfied
      • Neutral
      • Dissatisfied
      • Extremely Dissatisfied

    This is a screenshot of Tab 5 of the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook

    Understand user satisfaction across capabilities and departments within your organization.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Step 2.3

    Review Your Satisfaction With the Vendor and Product

    Activities

    2.3.1 Rate your vendor and product satisfaction

    2.3.2 Enter SoftwareReviews scores from your CRM Product Scorecard (optional)

    Assess Your Current State

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Rate your vendor and product satisfaction
    • Compare with survey data from SoftwareReviews

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM Owner(s)
    • Procurement Representative
    • Vendor Contracts Manager

    Outcomes of this step

    • Quantified satisfaction with vendor and product

    Use a SoftwareReviews Product Scorecard to evaluate your satisfaction compared to other organizations.

    This is a screenshot of the SoftwareReviews Product Scorecard

    Source: SoftwareReviews, March 2019

    Where effective IT leaders spend their time

    This image contains two lists.  One list is where CIOs with  data-verified=80% satisfaction score, and the other list is CIOs with <80% satisfaction score.">

    Info-Tech Insight

    The data shows that effective IT leaders invest a significant amount of time (8%) on vendor management initiatives.

    Be proactive in managing you calendar and block time for these important tasks.

    CIOs who prioritize vendor management see improved results

    Analysis of CIOs’ calendars revealed that how CIOs spend their time has a correlation to both stakeholder IT satisfaction and CEO-CIO alignment.

    Those CIOs that prioritized vendor management were more likely to have a business satisfaction score greater than 80%.

    This image demonstrates that CIOs who spend time with the team members of their direct reports delegate management responsibilities to direct reports and spend less time micromanaging, and CIOs who spend time on vendor management align rapidly changing business needs with updated vendor offerings.

    2.3.1 Rate your vendor and product satisfaction

    30 minutes

    Use Info-Tech’s vendor satisfaction survey to identify optimization areas with your CRM product(s) and vendor(s).

    Option 1 (recommended): Conduct a satisfaction survey using SoftwareReviews. This option allows you to see your results in the context of the vendor landscape.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Option 2: Use your Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “6. Vendor Optimization,” to review your satisfaction with your software.

    SoftwareReviews’ Customer Relationship Management

    This is a screenshot of tab 6 of the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook.

    2.3.2 Enter SoftwareReviews scores (optional)

    30 minutes

    1. Download the scorecard for your CRM product from the SoftwareReviews website. (Note: Not all products are represented or have sufficient data, so a scorecard may not be available.)
    2. Use your Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “6. Vendor Optimization,” to record the scorecard results.
    3. Use your Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “6. Vendor Optimization,” to flag areas where your score may be lower than the product scorecard. Brainstorm ideas for optimization.

    Download the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    SoftwareReviews’ Customer Relationship Management

    This is a screenshot of the optional vendor optimization scorecard

    Phase 3

    Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    • 3.1 Identify Key Optimization Areas
    • 3.2 Compile Optimization Assessment Results

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify key optimization areas
    • Create an optimization roadmap

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CRM Optimization Team

    Build your optimization roadmap

    Address process gaps

    • CRM and related technologies are invaluable to sales, marketing, and customer service enablement, but they must have supported processes driven by business goals.
    • Identify areas where capabilities need to be improved and work towards.

    Support user satisfaction

    • The best technology in the world won’t deliver business results if it is not working for the users who need it.
    • Understand concerns, communicate improvements, and support users in all roles.

    Improve data quality

    • Data quality is unique to each business unit and requires tolerance, not perfection.
    • Implement a set of data quality initiatives that are aligned with overall business objectives and aimed at addressing data practices and the data itself.

    Proactively manage vendors

    • Vendor management is a critical component of technology enablement and IT satisfaction.
    • Assess your current satisfaction against those of your peers and work towards building a process that is best fit for your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Enabling a high-performing, customer-centric sales, marketing, and customer service operations program requires excellent management practices and continuous optimization efforts.

    Technology portfolio and architecture is important, but we must go deeper. Taking a holistic view of CRM technologies in the environments in which they operate allows for the inclusion of people and process improvements – this is key to maximizing business results.

    Using a formal CRM optimization initiative will drive business-IT alignment, identify IT automation priorities, and dig deep into continuous process improvement.

    Step 3.1

    Identify Key Optimization Areas

    Activities

    • 3.1.1 Explore process gaps
    • 3.1.2 Analyze user satisfaction
    • 3.1.3 Assess data quality
    • 3.1.4 Analyze product satisfaction and vendor management

    Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Explore existing process gaps
    • Identify the impact of processes on user satisfaction
    • Identify the impact of data quality on user satisfaction
    • Review your overall product satisfaction and vendor management

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Application optimization plan

    3.1.1 Explore process gaps

    1 hour

    1. Review the compiled CRM Process Assessment in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “7. Process Prioritization.”
    2. These are processes you should prioritize.
    • The activities in the rest of Step 3.1 help you create optimization strategies for the different areas of improvement these processes relate to: user satisfaction, data quality, product satisfaction, and vendor management.
  • Consolidate your optimization strategies in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “8. Optimization Roadmap.” (See next slide for screenshot.)
  • This image consists of the CRM Process Importance Rankings

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Plan your product optimization strategy for each area of improvement

    This is a screenshot from the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook, with the Areas of Improvement column  highlighted in a red box.

    3.1.2 Analyze user satisfaction

    1 hour

    1. Use the APA survey results from activity 2.2.1 (or your own internal survey) to identify areas where the organization is performing low in user satisfaction across the CRM portfolio.
      1. Understand application portfolio and IT service satisfaction.
      2. Identify cost savings opportunities from unused or unimportant apps.
      3. Build a roadmap for improving user IT services.
      4. Manage needs by department and seniority.
    2. Consolidate your optimization strategies in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “8. Optimization Roadmap.” (See next slide for screenshot.)

    this is an image of the Business & IT Communications Overview Tab from the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Plan your user satisfaction optimization strategy

    This is a screenshot from the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook, with the Optimization Strategies column  highlighted in a red box.

    Next steps in improving your data quality

    Data Quality Management Effective Data Governance Data-Centric Integration Strategy Extensible Data Warehousing
    • Prevention is ten times cheaper than remediation. Stop fixing data quality with band-aid solutions and start fixing it by healing it at the source of the problem.
    • Data governance enables data-driven insight. Think of governance as a structure for making better use of data.
    • Every enterprise application involves data integration. Any change in the application and database ecosystem requires you to solve a data integration problem.
    • A data warehouse is a project; but successful data warehousing is a program. An effective data warehouse requires planning beyond the technology implementation.
    • Data quality is unique to each business unit and requires tolerance, not perfection. If the data allows the business to operate at the desired level, don’t waste time fixing data that may not need to be fixed.
    • Collaboration is critical. The business may own the data, but IT understands the data. Data governance will not work unless the business and IT work together.
    • Data integration is becoming more and more critical for downstream functions of data management and for business operations to be successful. Poor integration holds back these critical functions.
    • Governance, not technology, needs to be the core support system for enabling a data warehouse program.
    • Implement a set of data quality initiatives that are aligned with overall business objectives and aimed at addressing data practices and the data itself.
    • Data governance powers the organization up the data value chain through policies and procedures, master data management, data quality, and data architecture.
    • Build your data integration practice with a firm foundation in governance and reference architecture. Ensure your process is scalable and sustainable.
    • Leverage an approach that focuses on constructing a data warehouse foundation that can address a combination of operational, tactical, and ad hoc business needs.
    • Develop a prioritized data quality improvement project roadmap and long-term improvement strategy.
    • Create a roadmap to prioritize initiatives and delineate responsibilities among data stewards, data owners, and members of the data governance steering committee.
    • Support the flow of data through the organization and meet the organization’s requirements for data latency, availability, and relevancy.
    • Invest time and effort to put together pre-project governance to inform and provide guidance to your data warehouse implementation.
    • Build related practices with more confidence and less risk after achieving an appropriate level of data quality.
    • Ensure buy-in from the business and IT stakeholders. Communicate initiatives to end users and executives to reduce resistance.
    • Data availability must be frequently reviewed and repositioned to continue to grow with the business.
    • Select the most suitable architecture pattern to ensure the data warehouse is “built right” at the very beginning.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Establish Data Governance

    Build a Data Integration Strategy

    Build an Extensible Data Warehouse Foundation

    3.1.3 Assess data quality

    1 hour

    1. Use your APA survey results (if available) to identify areas where the organization is performing low in data quality initiatives. Common areas for improvement include:
      • Overall data quality management
      • Effective data governance
      • Poor data integration
      • The need to implement extensible data warehousing
    2. Consolidate your optimization strategies in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “8. Optimization Roadmap.” (See next slide for screenshot.)

    This is an image of the Business & IT Communications Overview tab from the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Plan your data quality optimization strategy

    This is a screenshot from the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook, with the Optimization Strategies column  highlighted in a red box.

    Use Info-Tech’s vendor management initiative (VMI)

    Create a right-size, right-fit strategy for managing the vendors relevant to your organization.

    A crowd chart is depicted, with quadrants for strategic value, and Vendor spend/switching cost.

    Info-Tech Insight

    A VMI is a formalized process within an organization, responsible for evaluating, selecting, managing, and optimizing third-party providers of goods and services.

    The amount of resources you assign to managing vendors depends on the number and value of your organization’s relationships. Before optimizing your vendor management program around the best practices presented in this blueprint, assess your current maturity and build the process around a model that reflects the needs of your organization.

    Info-Tech uses VMI interchangeably with the terms “vendor management office (VMO),” “vendor management function,” “vendor management process,” and “vendor management program.”

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    3.1.4 Analyze product satisfaction and vendor management

    1 hour

    1. Use the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “6. Vendor Optimization.”
    2. Download the SoftwareReviews Vendor Scorecard.
    3. Using the scorecards, compare your results with those of your peers.
    4. Consolidate areas of improvement and optimization strategies in the Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “8. Optimization Roadmap.” (See next slide for screenshot.)

    See previous slide for help around implementing a vendor management initiative.

    This is a screenshot from the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook, with the Areas for Optimization column  highlighted in a red box.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook

    Plan your vendor management optimization strategy

    This is a screenshot from the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook, with the Optimization Strategies column  highlighted in a red box.

    Step 3.2

    Compile Optimization Assessment Results

    Activities

    • 3.2.1 Identify key optimization areas

    Build Your Optimization Roadmap

    This step will guide you through the following activities:

    • Use your work from previous activities and prioritization to build your list of optimization activities and lay them out on a roadmap

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CRM Optimization Team

    Outcomes of this step

    • Application optimization plan

    3.2.1 Identify key optimization areas

    1-3 hours

    Before you can make changes and optimization decisions, you need to understand the high-level costs associated with your current application architecture. This activity will help you identify the types of technology and people costs associated with your current systems.

    1. Consolidate your findings and identify optimization priorities (Step 3.1).
    2. Prioritize those most critical to the organization, easiest to change, and whose impact will be highest.
    3. Use the information gathered from exercise 1.5.1 on Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab “9. Costs (Optional).”
    4. These costs could affect the priority or timeline of the initiatives. Consolidate your thoughts on your Get the Most Out of Your CRM Workbook, tab 8, “Optimization Roadmap.” Note: There is no column specific to costs on tab 8.

    This is meant as a high-level roadmap. For formal, ongoing optimization project management, refer to “Build a Better Backlog” (Phase 2 of the Info-Tech blueprint Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision).

    This is a screenshot from the Get the most out of your CRM Workbook, with the Priority; Owner; and Timeline columns highlighted in a red box.

    Next steps: Manage your technical debt

    Use a holistic assessment of the “interest” paid on technical debt to quantify and prioritize risk and enable the business make better decisions.

    • Technical debt is an IT risk, which in turn is a category of business risk.
    • The business must decide how to manage business risk.
    • At the same time, business decision makers may not be aware of technical debt or be able to translate technical challenges into business risk. IT must help the business make decisions around IT risk by describing the risk of technical debt in business terms and by outlining the options available to address risk.
    • Measure the ongoing business impact (the “interest” paid on technical debt) to establish the business risk of technical debt. Consider a range of possible impacts including direct costs, lost goodwill, lost flexibility and resilience, and health, safety, and compliance impacts.
    • When weighing these impacts, the business may choose to accept the risk of technical debt if the cost of addressing the debt outweighs the benefit. But it’s critically important that the business accepts that risk – not IT.

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    Take it a step further…

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Phase 2: Build a Better Product Backlog

    Build a structure for your backlog that supports your product vision.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a better backlog

    An ongoing CRM optimization effort is best facilitated through a continuous Agile process. Use info-Tech’s developed tools to build out your backlog.

    The key to a better backlog is a common structure and guiding principles that product owners and product teams can align to.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Exceptional customer value begins with a clearly defined backlog focused on items that will create the greatest human and business benefits.

    Activity Participants

    Backlog Activity

    Quality Filter

    Product Manager

    Product Owner

    Dev Team

    Scrum Master

    Business

    Architects

    Sprint

    Sprint Planning

    “Accepted”

    Ready

    Refine

    “Ready”

    Qualified

    Analysis

    “Qualified”

    Ideas

    Intake

    “Backlogged”

    A product owner and the product backlog are critical to realize the benefits of Agile development

    A product owner is accountable for defining and prioritizing the work that will be of the greatest value to the organization and its customers. The backlog is the key to facilitating this process and accomplishing the most fundamental goals of delivery.

    For more information on the role of a product owner, see Build a Better Product Owner.

    Highly effective Agile teams spend 28% of their time on product backlog management and roadmapping (Quantitative Software Management, 2015).

    1. Manage Stakeholders

    • Stakeholders need to be kept up to speed on what the future holds for a product, or at least they should be heard. This task falls to the product owner.

    2. Inform and Protect the Team

    • The product owner is a servant leader of the team. They need to protect the team from all the noise and give them the time they need to focus on what they do best: develop.

    3. Maximize Value to the Product

    • Sifting through all of these voices and determining what is valuable, or what is most valuable, falls to the product owner.

    A backlog stores and organizes PBIs at various stages of readiness.

    Your backlog must give you a holistic understanding of demand for change in the product

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog:

    Detailed Appropriately: PBIs are broken down and refined as necessary.

    Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as PBIs are added and removed.

    Estimated: The effort a PBI requires is estimated at each tier.

    Prioritized: The PBI’s value and priority are determined at each tier.

    Ideas; Qualified; Ready

    3 - IDEAS

    Composed of raw, vague, and potentially large ideas that have yet to go through any formal valuation.

    2 - QUALIFIED

    Researched and qualified PBIs awaiting refinement.

    1 - READY

    Discrete, refined PBIs that are ready to be placed in your development teams’ sprint plans.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM

    CRM technology is critical to facilitate an organization’s relationships with customers, service users, employees, and suppliers. CRM implementation should not be a one-and-done exercise. There needs to be an ongoing optimization to enable business processes and optimal organizational results.

    Get the Most Out of Your CRM allows organizations to proactively implement continuous assessment and optimization of a customer relationship management system. This includes:

    • Alignment and prioritization of key business and technology drivers
    • Identification of CRM processes including classification and gap analysis
    • Measurement of user satisfaction across key departments
    • Improved vendor relations
    • Data quality initiatives

    This formal CRM optimization initiative will drive business-IT alignment, identify IT automation priorities, and dig deep into continuous process-improvement.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech Workshop.

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-866-670-8889

    Research Contributors

    Ben Dickie

    Ben Dickie
    Research Practice Lead
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Ben Dickie is a Research Practice Lead at Info-Tech Research Group. His areas of expertise include customer experience management, CRM platforms, and digital marketing. He has also led projects pertaining to enterprise collaboration and unified communications.

    Scott Bickley

    Scott Bickley
    Practice Lead & Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Bickley is a Practice Lead & Principal Research Director at Info-Tech Research Group focused on vendor management and contract review. He also has experience in the areas of IT asset management (ITAM), software asset management (SAM), and technology procurement, along with a deep background in operations, engineering, and quality systems management.

    Andy Neil

    Andy Neil
    Practice Lead, Applications
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Andy is Senior Research Director, Data Management and BI, at Info-Tech Research Group. He has over 15 years of experience in managing technical teams, information architecture, data modeling, and enterprise data strategy. He is an expert in enterprise data architecture, data integration, data standards, data strategy, big data, and the development of industry-standard data models.

    Bibliography

    Armel, Kate. “Data-driven Estimation, Management Lead to High Quality.” Quantitative Software Management Inc. 2015. Web.

    Chappuis, Bertil, and Brian Selby. “Looking beyond Technology to Drive Sales Operations.” McKinsey & Company, 24 June 2016. Web.

    Cross-Industry Process Classification Framework (PCF) Version 7.2.1. APQC, 26 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Fleming, John, and Hater, James. “The Next Discipline: Applying Behavioral Economics to Drive Growth and Profitability.” Gallup, 22 Sept. 2012. Accessed 6 Oct. 2020.

    Hinchcliffe, Dion. “The evolving role of the CIO and CMO in customer experience.” ZDNet, 22 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Karlsson, Johan. “Backlog Grooming: Must-Know Tips for High-Value Products.” Perforce. 18 May 2018. Web. Feb. 2019.

    Klie, L. “CRM Still Faces Challenges, Most Speakers Agree: CRM systems have been around for decades, but interoperability and data siloes still have to be overcome.” CRM Magazine, vol. 23, no. 5, 2019, pp. 13-14.

    Kumar, Sanjib, et al. “Improvement of CRM Using Data Mining: A Case Study at Corporate Telecom Sector.” International Journal of Computer Applications, vol. 178, no. 53, 2019, pp. 12-20, doi:10.5120/ijca2019919413.

    Morgan, Blake. “50 Stats That Prove The Value Of Customer Experience.” Forbes, 24 Sept. 2019. Web.

    Norelus, Ernese, et al. “An Approach to Application Modernization: Discovery and Assessment Phase.” IBM Garage, Medium, 24 Feb 2020. Accessed 4 Mar. 2020.

    “Process Frameworks.” APQC, 4 Nov. 2020. Web.

    “Process vs. Capability: Understanding the Difference.” APCQ, 2017. Web.

    Rubin, Kenneth S. "Essential Scrum: A Practical Guide to the Most Popular Agile Process." Pearson Education, 2012.

    Savolainen, Juha, et al. “Transitioning from Product Line Requirements to Product Line Architecture.” 29th Annual International Computer Software and Applications Conference (COMPSAC'05), IEEE, vol. 1, 2005, pp. 186-195, doi: 10.1109/COMPSAC.2005.160

    Smith, Anthony. “How To Create A Customer-Obsessed Company Like Netflix.” Forbes, 12 Dec. 2017. Web.

    “SOA Reference Architecture – Capabilities and the SOA RA.” The Open Group, TOGAF. Web.

    Taber, David. “What to Do When Your CRM Project Fails.” CIO Magazine, 18 Sept. 2017. Web.

    “Taudata Case Study.” Maximizer CRM Software, 17 Jan. 2020. Web.

    Business Intelligence and Reporting

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}6|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}6|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.9/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $45,792
    • member rating average days saved: 29
    • Parent Category Name: Data and Business Intelligence
    • Parent Category Link: /improve-your-core-processes/data-and-business-intelligence

    The challenge

    • Your business partners need an environment that facilitates flexible data delivery.
    • Your data and BI strategy must continuously adapt to new business realities and data sources to stay relevant.
    • The pressure to go directly to the solution design is high.  

    Our advice

    Insight

    • A BI initiative is not static. It must be treated as a living platform to adhere to changing business goals and objectives. Only then will it support effective decision-making.
    • Hear the voice of the business; that is the "B" in BI.
    • Boys and their toys... The solution to better intelligence often lies not in the tool but the BI practices.
    • Build a roadmap that starts with quick-wins to establish base support for your initiative.

    Impact and results 

    • Use the business goals and objectives to drive your BI initiatives.
    • Focus first on what you already have in your company's business intelligence landscape before investing in a new tool that will only complicate things.
    • Understand the core of what your users need by leveraging different approaches to pinpointing BI capabilities.
    • Create a roadmap that details the iterative deliveries of your business intelligence initiative. Show both the short and long term.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started

    Our concise executive brief shows why you should create or refresh your business intelligence (BI) strategy. We'll show you our methodology and the ways we can help you in handling this.

    Upon ordering you receive the complete guide with all files zipped.

    Understand your business context and BI landscape

    Understand critical business information and analyze your current business intelligence landscape.

    • Build a Next-Generation BI with a Game-Changing BI Strategy – Phase 1: Understand the Business Context and BI Landscape (ppt)
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap Template (doc)
    • BI End-User Satisfaction Survey Framework (ppt)

    Evaluate your current business intelligence practices

    Assess your current maturity level and define the future state.

    • Build a Next-Generation BI with a Game-Changing BI Strategy – Phase 2: Evaluate the Current BI Practice (ppt)
    • BI Practice Assessment Tool – Example 1 (xls)
    • BI Practice Assessment Tool – Example 2 (xls)

    Create your BI roadmap

    Create business intelligence focused initiatives for continuous improvement.

    • Build a Next-Generation BI with a Game-Changing BI Strategy – Phase 3: Create a BI Roadmap for Continuous Improvement (ppt)
    • BI Initiatives and Roadmap Tool (xls)
    • BI Strategy and Roadmap Executive Presentation Template (ppt)

     

    Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}557|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Marketing Solutions
    • Parent Category Link: /marketing-solutions
    • Prospective buyer traffic into digital marketing platforms has exploded.
    • Many freemium/low-cost digital marketing platforms lack lead scoring and nurturing functionality.
    • As a result, the volume of unqualified leads being delivered to outbound sellers has increased dramatically.
    • This has reduced sales productivity, frustrated prospective buyers, and raised the costs of lead generation.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Lead scoring is a must-have capability for high-tech marketers.
    • Without lead scoring, marketers will see increased costs of lead generation and decreased SQL-to-opportunity conversion rates.
    • Lead scoring increases sales productivity and shortens sales cycles.

    Impact and Result

    • Align Marketing, Sales, and Inside Sales on your ideal customer profile.
    • Re-evaluate the assets and activities that compose your current lead generation engine.
    • Develop a documented methodology to ignore, nurture, or contact right away the leads in your marketing pipeline.
    • Deliver more qualified leads to sellers, raising sales productivity and marketing/lead-gen ROI.

    Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should optimize lead generation with lead scoring, review SoftwareReviews Advisory’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Drive aligned vision for lead scoring

    Outline your plan, form your team, and plan marketing tech stack support.

    • Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring – Phase 1: Drive an Aligned Vision for Lead Scoring

    2. Build and test your lead scoring model

    Set lead flow thresholds, define your ideal customer profile and lead generation engine components, and weight, score, test, and refine them.

    • Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring – Phase 2: Build and Test Your Lead Scoring Model
    • Lead Scoring Workbook

    3. Apply your model to marketing apps and go live with better qualified leads

    Apply your lead scoring model to your lead management app, test it, validate the results with sellers, apply advanced methods, and refine.

    • Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring – Phase 3: Apply Your Model to Marketing Apps and Go Live With Better Qualified Leads
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Drive Aligned Vision for Lead Scoring

    The Purpose

    Drive an aligned vision for lead scoring.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Attain an aligned vision for lead scoring.

    Identify the steering committee and project team and clarify their roles and responsibilities.

    Provide your team with an understanding of how leads score through the marketing funnel.

    Activities

    1.1 Outline a vision for lead scoring.

    1.2 Identify steering committee and project team members.

    1.3 Assess your tech stack for lead scoring and seek advice from Info-Tech analysts to modernize where needed.

    1.4 Align on marketing pipeline terminology.

    Outputs

    Steering committee and project team make-up

    Direction on tech stack to support lead generation

    Marketing pipeline definitions alignment

    2 Buyer Journey and Lead Generation Engine Mapping

    The Purpose

    Define the buyer journey and map the lead generation engine.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Align the vision for your target buyer and their buying journey.

    Identify the assets and activities that need to compose your lead generation engine.

    Activities

    2.1 Establish a buyer persona.

    2.2 Map your buyer journey.

    2.3 Document the activities and assets of your lead generation engine.

    Outputs

    Buyer persona

    Buyer journey map

    Lead gen engine assets and activities documented

    3 Build and Test Your Lead Scoring Model

    The Purpose

    Build and test your lead scoring model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Gain team alignment on how leads score and, most importantly, what constitutes a sales-accepted lead.

    Develop a scoring model from which future iterations can be tested.

    Activities

    3.1 Understand the Lead Scoring Grid and set your thresholds.

    3.2 Identify your ideal customer profile, attributes, and subattribute weightings – run tests.

    Outputs

    Lead scoring thresholds

    Ideal customer profile, weightings, and tested scores

    Test profile scoring

    4 Align on Engagement Attributes

    The Purpose

    Align on engagement attributes.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Develop a scoring model from which future iterations can be tested.

    Activities

    4.1 Weight the attributes of your lead generation engagement model and run tests.

    4.2 Apply weightings to activities and assets.

    4.3 Test engagement and profile scenarios together and make any adjustments to weightings or thresholds.

    Outputs

    Engagement attributes and weightings tested and complete

    Final lead scoring model

    5 Apply Model to Your Tech Platform

    The Purpose

    Apply the model to your tech platform.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Deliver better qualified leads to Sales.

    Activities

    5.1 Apply model to your marketing management/campaign management software and test the quality of sales-accepted leads in the hands of sellers.

    5.2 Measure overall lead flow and conversion rates through your marketing pipeline.

    5.3 Apply lead nurturing and other advanced methods.

    Outputs

    Model applied to software

    Better qualified leads in the hands of sellers

    Further reading

    Optimize Lead Generation With Lead Scoring

    In today’s competitive environment, optimizing Sales’ resources by giving them qualified leads is key to B2B marketing success.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    Improve B2B seller win rates with a lead scoring methodology as part of your modern lead generation engine.

    The image contains a picture of Jeff Golterman.

    As B2B organizations emerge from the lowered demands brought on by COVID-19, they are eager to convert marketing contacts to sales-qualified leads with even the slightest signal of intent, but many sales cycles are wasted when sellers receive unqualified leads. Delivering highly qualified leads to sellers is still more art than science, and it is especially challenging without a way to score a contact profile and engagement. While most marketers capture some profile data from contacts, many will pass a contact over to Sales without any engagement data or schedule a demo with a contact without any qualifying profile data. Passing unqualified leads to Sales suboptimizes Sales’ resources, raises the costs per lead, and often results in lost opportunities. Marketers need to develop a lead scoring methodology that delivers better qualified leads to Field Sales scored against both the ideal customer profile (ICP) and engagement that signals lower-funnel buyer interest. To be successful in building a compelling lead scoring solution, marketers must work closely with key stakeholders to align the ICP asset/activity with the buyer journey. Additionally, working early in the design process with IT/Marketing Operations to implement lead management and analytical tools in support will drive results to maximize lead conversion rates and sales wins.

    Jeff Golterman

    Managing Director

    SoftwareReviews Advisory

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    The affordability and ease of implementation of digital marketing tools have driven global adoption to record levels. While many marketers are fine-tuning the lead generation engine components of email, social media, and web-based advertising to increase lead volumes, just 32% of companies pass well-qualified leads over to outbound marketers or sales development reps (SDRs). At best, lead gen costs stay high, and marketing-influenced win rates remain suboptimized. At worst, marketing reputation suffers when poorly qualified leads are passed along to sellers.

    Common Obstacles

    Most marketers lack a methodology for lead scoring, and some lack alignment among Marketing, Product, and Sales on what defines a qualified lead. In their rush to drive lead generation, marketers often fail to “define and align” on the ICP with stakeholders, creating confusion and wasted time and resources. In the rush to adopt B2B marketing and sales automation tools, many marketers have also skipped the important steps to 1) define the buyer journey and map content types to support, and 2) invest in a consistent content creation and sourcing strategy. The wrong content can leave prospects unmotivated to engage further and cause them to seek alternatives.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    To employ lead scoring effectively, marketers need to align Sales, Marketing, and Product teams on the definition of the ICP and what constitutes a Sales-accepted lead. The buyer journey needs to be mapped in order to identify the engagement that will move a lead through the marketing lead generation engine. Then the project team can score prospect engagement and the prospect profile attributes against the ICP to arrive at a lead score. The marketing tech stack needs to be validated to support lead scoring, and finally Sales needs to sign off on results.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Lead scoring is a must-have capability for high-tech marketers. Without lead scoring, marketers will see increased costs of lead gen, decreased SQL to opportunity conversion rates, decreased sales productivity, and longer sales cycles.

    Who benefits from a lead scoring project?

    This Research Is Designed for:

    • Marketers and especially campaign managers who are:
      • Looking for a more precise way to score leads and deploy outbound marketing resources to optimize contacts-to-MQL conversion rates.
      • Looking for a more effective way to profile contacts raised by your lead gen engine.
      • Looking to use their lead management software to optimize lead scoring.
      • Starting anew to strengthen their lead generation engine and want examples of a typical engine, ways to identify buyer journey, and perform lead nurturing.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Explain why having a lead scoring methodology is important.
    • Identify a methodology that will call for identifying an ICP against which to score prospect profiles behind each contact that engages your lead generation engine.
    • Create a process of applying weightings to score activities during contact engagement with your lead generation engine. Apply both scores to arrive at a contact/lead score.
    • Compare your current lead gen engine to a best-in-class example in order to identify gaps and areas for improvement and exploration.

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • CMOs, Marketing Operations leaders, heads of Product Marketing, and regional Marketing leads who are stakeholders in:
      • Finding alternatives to current lead scoring approaches.
        • Altering current or evaluating new marketing technologies to support a refreshed lead scoring approaches.

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Align stakeholders on an overall program of identifying target customers, building common understanding of what constitutes a qualified lead, and determining when to use higher-cost outbound marketing resources.
    • Deploy high-value applications that will improve core marketing metrics.

    Insight summary

    Continuous adjustment and improvement of your lead scoring methodology is critical for long-term lead generation engine success.

    • Building a highly functioning lead generation engine is an ongoing process and one that requires continual testing of new asset types, asset design, and copy variations. Buyer profiles change over time as you launch new products and target new markets.
    • Pass better qualified leads to Field Sales and improve sales win rates by taking these crucial steps to implement a better lead generation engine and a lead scoring methodology:
      • Make the case for lead scoring in your organization.
      • Establish trigger points that separate leads to ignore, nurture, qualify, or outreach/contact.
      • Identify your buyer journey and ICP through collaboration among Sales, Marketing, and Product.
      • Assess each asset and activity type across your lead generation engine and apply a weighting for each.
      • Test lead scenarios within our supplied toolkit and with stakeholders. Adjust weightings and triggers that deliver lead scores that make sense.
      • Work with IT/Marketing Operations to emulate your lead scoring methodology within your marketing automation/campaign management application.
      • Explore advanced methods including nurturing.
    • Use the Lead Scoring Workbook collaboratively with other stakeholders to design your own methodology, test lead scenarios, and build alignment across the team.

    Leading marketers who successfully implement a lead scoring methodology develop it collaboratively with stakeholders across Marketing, Sales, and Product Management. Leaders will engage Marketing Operations, Sales Operations, and IT early to gain support for the evaluation and implementation of a supporting campaign management application and for analytics to track lead progress throughout the Marketing and Sales funnels. Leverage the Marketing Lead Scoring Toolkit to build out your version of the model and to test various scenarios. Use the slides contained within this storyboard and the accompanying toolkit as a means to align key stakeholders on the ICP and to weight assets and activities across your marketing lead generation engine.

    What is lead scoring?

    Lead scoring weighs the value of a prospect’s profile against the ICP and renders a profile score. The process then weighs the value of the prospects activities against the ideal call to action (CTA) and renders an activity score. Combining the profile and activity scores delivers an overall score for the value of the lead to drive the next step along the overall buyer journey.

    EXAMPLE: SALES MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

    • For a company that markets sales management software the ideal buyer is the head of Sales Operations. While the ICP is made up of many attributes, we’ll just score one – the buyer’s role.
    • If the prospect/lead that we wish to score has an executive title, the lead’s profile scores “High.” Other roles will score lower based on your ICP. Alongside role, you will also score other profile attributes (e.g. company size, location).
    • With engagement, if the prospect/lead clicked on our ideal CTA, which is “request a proposal,” our engagement would score high. Other CTAs would score lower.
    The image contains a screenshot of two examples of lead scoring. One example demonstrates. Profile Scoring with Lead Profile, and the second image demonstrates Activity Scoring and Lead Engagement.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    A significant obstacle to quality lead production is disagreement on or lack of a documented definition of the ideal customer profile. Marketers successful in lead scoring will align key stakeholders on a documented definition of the ICP as a first step in improving lead scoring.

    Use of lead scoring is in the minority among marketers

    The majority of businesses are not practicing lead scoring!

    Up to 66% of businesses don’t practice any type of lead scoring.

    Source: LeadSquared, 2014

    “ With lead scoring, you don’t waste loads of time on unworthy prospects, and you don’t ignore people on the edge of buying.”

    Source: BigCommerce

    “The benefits of lead scoring number in the dozens. Having a deeper understanding of which leads meet the qualifications of your highest converters and then systematically communicating with them accordingly increases both ongoing engagement and saves your internal team time chasing down inopportune leads.”

    – Joey Strawn, Integrated Marketing Director, in IndustrialMarketer.com

    Key benefit: sales resource optimization

    Many marketing organizations send Sales too many unqualified leads

    • Leads – or, more accurately, contacts – are not all qualified. Some are actually nothing more than time-wasters for sellers.
    • Leading marketers peel apart a contact into at least two dimensions – “who” and “how interested.”
      • The “who” is compared to the ICP and given a score.
      • The “how interested” measures contact activity – or engagement – within our lead gen engine and gives it a score.
    • Scores are combined; a contact with a low score is ignored, medium is nurtured, and high is sent to sellers.
    • A robust ICP, together with engagement scoring and when housed within your lead management software, prioritizes for marketers which contacts to nurture and gets hot leads to sellers more quickly.

    Optimizing Sales Resources Using Lead Scoring

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate optimizing sales resources with lead scoring.

    Lead scoring drives greater sales effectiveness

    When contacts are scored as “qualified leads” and sent to sellers, sales win rates and ROI climb

    • Contacts can be scored properly once marketers align with Sales on the ICP and work closely with colleagues in areas like product marketing and field marketing to assign weightings to lead gen activities.
    • When more qualified leads get into the hands of the salesforce, their win rates improve.
    • As win rates improve, and sellers are producing more wins from the same volume of leads, sales productivity improves and ROI on the marketing investment increases.

    “On average, organizations that currently use lead scoring experience a 77% lift in lead generation ROI, over organizations that do not currently use lead scoring.”

    – MarketingSherpa, 2012

    Average Lead Generation ROI by Use of Lead Scoring

    The image contains a screenshot of a graph to demonstrate the average lead generation ROI by using of lead scoring. 138% are currenting using lead scoring, and 78% are not using lead scoring.
    Source: 2011 B2B Marketing Benchmark Survey, MarketingSherpa
    Methodology: Fielded June 2011, N=326 CMOs

    SoftwareReviews’ Lead Scoring Approach

    1. Drive Aligned Vision for Lead Scoring

    2. Build and Test Your Lead Scoring Model

    3. Apply to Your Tech Platform and Validate, Nurture, and Grow

    Phase
    Steps

    1. Outline a vision for lead scoring and identify stakeholders.
    2. Assess your tech stack for lead scoring and seek advice from Info-Tech analysts to modernize where needed.
    3. Align on marketing pipeline terminology, buyer persona and journey, and lead gen engine components.
    1. Understand the Lead Scoring Grid and establish thresholds.
    2. Collaborate with stakeholders on your ICP, apply weightings to profile attributes and values, and test your model.
    3. Identify the key activities and assets of your lead gen engine, weight attributes, and run tests.
    1. Apply model to your marketing management software.
    2. Test quality of sales-accepted leads by sellers and measure conversion rates through your marketing pipeline.
    3. Apply advanced methods such as lead nurturing.

    Phase Outcomes

    1. Steering committee and stakeholder selection
    2. Stakeholder alignment
    3. Team alignment on terminology
    4. Buyer journey map
    5. Lead gen engine components and asset types documented
    1. Initial lead-stage threshold scores
    2. Ideal customer profile, weightings, and tested scores
    3. Documented activities/assets across your lead generation engine
    4. Test results to drive adjusted weightings for profile attributes and engagement
    5. Final model to apply to marketing application
    1. Better qualified leads in the hands of sellers
    2. Advanced methods to nurture leads

    Key Deliverable: Lead Scoring Workbook

    The workbook walks you through a step-by-step process to:

    • Identify your team.
    • Identify the lead scoring thresholds.
    • Define your IPC.
    • Weight the activities within your lead generation engine.
    • Run tests using lead scenarios.

    Tab 1: Team Composition

    Consider core functions and form a cross-functional lead scoring team. Document the team’s details here.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Lead Scoring Workbook, Tab 1.

    Tab 2: Threshold Setting

    Set your initial threshold weightings for profile and engagement scores.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Lead Scoring Workbook, Tab 2.

    Tab 3:

    Establish Your Ideal Customer Profile

    Identify major attributes and attribute values and the weightings of both. You’ll eventually score your leads against this ICP.

    Record and Weight Lead Gen Engine Activities

    Identify the major activities that compose prospect engagement with your lead gen engine. Weight them together as a team.

    Test Lead Profile Scenarios

    Test actual lead profiles to see how they score against where you believe they should score. Adjust threshold settings in Tab 2.

    Test Activity Engagement Scores

    Test scenarios of how contacts navigate your lead gen engine. See how they score against where you believe they should score. Adjust thresholds on Tab 2 as needed.

    Review Combined Profile and Activity Score

    Review the combined scores to see where on your lead scoring matrix the lead falls. Make any final adjustments to thresholds accordingly.

    The image contains screenshots of the Lead Scoring Workbook, Tab 3.

    Several ways we help you build your lead scoring methodology

    DIY Toolkit Guided Implementation Workshop Consulting

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project."

    • Begin your project using the step-by-step process outlined in this blueprint.
    • Leverage the accompanying workbook.
    • Launch inquiries with the analyst who wrote the research.
    • Kick off your project with an inquiry with the authoring analyst and your engagement manager.
    • Additional inquiries will guide you through each step.
    • Leverage the blueprint and toolkit.
    • Reach out to your engagement manager.
    • During a half-day workshop the authoring analyst will guide you and your team to complete your lead scoring methodology.
    • Reach out to your engagement manager.
    • We’ll lead the engagement to structure the process, gather data, interview stakeholders, craft outputs, and organize feedback and final review.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Call #1: Collaborate on vision for lead scoring and the overall project.

    Call #2: Identify the steering committee and the rest of the team.

    Call #3: Discuss app/tech stack support for lead scoring. Understand key marketing pipeline terminology and the buyer journey.

    Call #4: Discuss your ICP, apply weightings, and run test scenarios.

    Call #5: Discuss and record lead generation engine components.

    Call #6: Understand the Lead Scoring Grid and set thresholds for your model.

    Call #7: Identify your ICP, apply weightings to attributes, and run tests.

    Call #8: Weight the attributes of engagement activities and run tests. Review the application of the scoring model on lead management software.

    Call #9: Test quality of sales-accepted leads in the hands of sellers. Measure lead flow and conversion rates through your marketing pipeline.

    Call #10: Review progress and discuss nurturing and other advanced topics.

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is series of calls with a SoftwareReviews Advisory analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization. For guidance on marketing applications, we can arrange a discussion with an Info-Tech analyst. Your engagement managers will work with you to schedule analyst calls.

    Workshop Overview

    Accelerate your project with our facilitated SoftwareReviews Advisory workshops

    Day 1

    Day 2

    Day 3

    Day 4

    Day 5

    Drive Aligned Vision for Lead Scoring

    Buyer Journey and Lead Gen Engine Mapping

    Build and Test Your Lead Scoring Model

    Align on Engagement Attributes

    Apply to Your Tech Platform

    Activities

    1.1 Outline a vision for lead scoring.

    1.2 Identify steering committee and project team members.

    1.3 Assess your tech stack for lead scoring and seek advice from Info-Tech analysts to modernize where needed.

    1.4 Align on marketing pipeline terminology.

    2.1 Establish a buyer persona (if not done already).

    2.2 Map your buyer journey.

    2.3 Document the activities and assets of your lead gen engine.

    3.1 Understand Lead Scoring Grid and set your thresholds.

    3.2 Identify ICP attribute and sub-attribute weightings. Run tests.

    4.1 Weight the attributes of your lead gen engagement model and run tests.

    4.2 Apply weightings to activities and assets.

    4.3 Test engagement and profile scenarios together and adjust weightings and thresholds as needed.

    5.1 Apply model to your campaign management software and test quality of sales-accepted leads in the hands of sellers.

    5.2. Measure overall lead flow and conversion rates through your marketing pipeline.

    5.3 Apply lead nurturing and other advanced methods.

    Deliverables

    1. Steering committee & project team composition
    2. Direction on tech stack to support lead gen
    3. Alignment on marketing pipeline definitions
    1. Buyer (persona if needed) journey map
    2. Lead gen engine assets and activities documented
    1. Lead scoring thresholds
    2. ICP, weightings, and tested scores
    3. Test profile scoring
    1. Engagement attributes and weightings tested and complete
    2. Final lead scoring model
    1. Model applied to your marketing management/ campaign management software
    2. Better qualified leads in the hands of sellers

    Phase 1

    Drive an Aligned Vision for Lead Scoring

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Establish a cross-functional vision for lead scoring

    1.2 Asses your tech stack for lead scoring (optional)

    1.3 Catalog your buyer journey and lead gen engine assets

    2.1 Start building your lead scoring model

    2.2 Identify and verify your IPC and weightings

    2.3 Establish key lead generation activities and assets

    3.1 Apply model to your marketing management software

    3.2 Test the quality of sales-accepted leads

    3.3 Apply advanced methods

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    • Solidify your vision for lead scoring.
    • Achieve stakeholder alignment.
    • Assess your tech stack.

    This phase involves the following stakeholders:

    • Field Marketing/Campaign Manager
    • CMO
    • Product Marketing
    • Product Management
    • Sales Leadership/Sales Operations
    • Inside Sales leadership
    • Marketing Operations/IT
    • Digital Platform leadership

    Step 1.1

    Establish a Cross-Functional Vision for Lead Scoring

    Activities

    1.1.1 Identify stakeholders critical to success

    1.1.2 Outline the vision for lead scoring

    1.1.3 Select your lead scoring team

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Discuss the reasons why lead scoring is important.
    • Review program process.
    • Identify stakeholders and team.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder alignment on vision of lead scoring
    • Stakeholders described and team members recorded
    • A documented buyer journey and map of your current lead gen engine

    1.1.1 Identify stakeholders critical to success

    1 hour

    1. Meet to identify the stakeholders that should be included in the project’s steering committee.
    2. Finalize selection of steering committee members.
    3. Contact members to ensure their willingness to participate.
    4. Document the steering committee members and the milestone/presentation expectations for reporting project progress and results
    Input Output
    • Stakeholder interviews
    • List of business process owners (lead management, inside sales lead qualification, sales opportunity management, marketing funnel metric measurement/analytics)
    • Lead generation/scoring stakeholders
    • Steering committee members
    Materials Participants
    • N/A
    • Initiative Manager
    • CMO, Sponsoring Executive
    • Departmental Leads – Sales, Marketing, Product Marketing, Product Management (and others)
    • Marketing Applications Director
    • Senior Digital Business Analyst

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    B2B marketers that lack agreement among Marketing, Sales, Inside Sales, and lead management supporting staff of what constitutes a qualified lead will squander precious time and resources throughout the customer acquisition process.

    1.1.2 Outline the vision for lead scoring

    1 hour

    1. Convene a meeting of the steering committee and initiative team members who will be involved in the lead scoring project.
    • Using slides from this blueprint, understand the definition of lead scoring, the value of lead scoring to the organization, and the overall lead scoring process.
    • Understand the teams’ roles and responsibilities and help your Marketing Operations/IT colleagues understand some of the technical requirements needed to support lead scoring.
    • This is important because as the business members of the team are developing the lead scoring approach on paper, the technical team can begin to evaluate lead management apps within which your lead scoring model will be brought to life.
    Input Output
    • Slides to explain lead scoring and the lead scoring program
    • An understanding of the project among key stakeholders
    Materials Participants
    • Slides taken from this blueprint. We suggest slides from the Executive Brief (slides 3-16) and any others depending on the team’s level of familiarity.
    • Initiative Manager
    • CMO, Sponsoring Executive
    • Departmental leads from Sales, Marketing, Product Marketing, Product Management (and others)
    • Marketing Applications Director
    • Senior Digital Business Analyst

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    While SMBs can implement some form of lead scoring when volume is very low and leads can be scored by hand, lead scoring and effective lead management cannot be performed without investment in digital platforms and lead management software and integration with customer relationship management (CRM) applications in the hands of inside and field sales staff. Marketers should plan and budget for the right combination of applications and tools to be in place for proper lead management.

    Lead scoring stakeholders

    Developing a common stakeholder understanding of the ICP, the way contact profiles are scored, and the way activities and asset engagement in your lead generation engine are scored will strengthen alignment between Marketing, Sales and Product Management.

    Title

    Key Stakeholders Within a Lead Generation/Scoring Initiative

    Lead Scoring Sponsor

    • Owns the project at the management/C-suite level
    • Responsible for breaking down barriers and ensuring alignment with organizational strategy
    • CMO, VP of Marketing, CEO (in SMB providers)

    Lead Scoring Initiative Manager

    • Typically a senior member of the marketing team
    • Responsible for preparing and managing the project plan and monitoring the project team’s progress
    • Marketing Manager or a field marketing team member who has strong program management skills, has run large-scale B2B generation campaigns, and is familiar with the stakeholder roles and enabling technologies

    Business Leads

    • Works alongside the lead scoring initiative manager to ensure that the strategy is aligned with business needs
    • In this case, likely to be a marketing lead
    • Marketing Director

    Digital, Marketing/Sales Ops/IT Team

    • Composed of individuals whose application and technology tools knowledge and skills are crucial to lead generation success
    • Responsible for understanding the business requirements behind lead generation and the requirements in particular to support lead scoring and the evaluation, selection, and implementation of the supporting tech stack – apps, website, analytics, etc.
    • Project Manager, Business Lead, CRM Manager, Integration Manager, Marketing Application SMEs, Sales Application

    Steering Committee

    • Composed of C-suite/management-level individuals who act as the lead generation process decision makers
    • Responsible for validating goals and priorities, defining the scope, enabling adequate resourcing, and managing change especially among C-level leaders in Sales & Product
    • Executive Sponsor, Project Sponsor, CMO, Business Unit SMEs

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Marketers managing the lead scoring initiative must include Product Marketing, Sales, Inside Sales, and Product Management. And given that world-class B2B lead generation engines cannot run without technology enablement, Marketing Operations/IT – those that are charged with enabling marketing and sales – must also be part of the decision making and implementation process of lead scoring and lead generation.

    1.1.3 Select your lead scoring team

    30 minutes

    1. The CMO and other key stakeholders should discuss and determine who will be involved in the lead scoring project.
    • Business leaders in key areas – Product Marketing, Field Marketing, Digital Marketing, Inside Sales, Sales, Marketing Ops, Product Management, and IT – should be involved.
  • Document the members of your lead scoring team in tab 1 of the Lead Scoring Workbook.
    • The size of the team will vary depending on your initiative and size of your organization.
    InputOutput
    • Stakeholders
    • List of lead scoring team members
    MaterialsParticipants
    • Lead Scoring Workbook
    • Initiative Manager
    • CMO, Sponsoring Executive
    • Departmental Leads – Sales, Marketing, Product Marketing, Product Management (and others)
    • Marketing Applications Director
    • Senior Digital Business Analyst

    Download the Lead Scoring Workbook

    Lead scoring team

    Consider the core team functions when composing the lead scoring team. Form a cross-functional team (i.e. across IT, Marketing, Sales, Service, Operations) to create a well-aligned lead management/scoring strategy. Don’t let your core team become too large when trying to include all relevant stakeholders. Carefully limit the size of the team to enable effective decision making while still including functional business units.

    Required Skills/Knowledge

    Suggested Team Members

    Business

    • Understanding of the customer
    • Understanding of brand
    • Understanding of multichannel marketing: email, events, social
    • Understanding of lead qualification
    • Field Marketing/Campaign Lead
    • Product Marketing
    • Sales Manager
    • Inside Sales Manager
    • Content Marketer/Copywriter

    IT

    • Campaign management application capabilities
    • Digital marketing
    • Marketing and sales funnel Reporting/metrics
    • Marketing Application Owners
    • CRM/Sales Application Owners
    • Marketing Analytics Owners
    • Digital Platform Owners

    Other

    • Branding/creative
    • Social
    • Change management
    • Creative Director
    • Social Media Marketer

    Step 1.2 (Optional)

    Assess Your Tech Stack for Lead Scoring

    Our model assumes you have:

    1.2.1 A marketing application/campaign management application in place that accommodates lead scoring.

    1.2.2 Lead management software integrated with the sales automation/CRM tool in the hands of Field Sales.

    1.2.3 Reporting/analytics that spans the entire lead generation pipeline/funnel.

    Refer to the following three slides if you need guidance in these areas.

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Confirm that you have your tech stack in place.
    • Set up an inquiry with an Info-Tech analyst should you require guidance on evaluating lead pipeline reporting, CRM, or analytics applications.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Understanding of what new application and technology support is required to support lead scoring.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Marketers that collaborate closely with Marketing Ops/IT early in the process of lead scoring design will be best able to assess whether current marketing applications and tools can support a full lead scoring capability.

    1.2.1 Plan technology support for marketing management apps

    Work with Marketing Ops and IT early to evaluate application enablement for lead management, including scoring

    A thorough evaluation takes months – start early

    • Work closely with Marketing Operations (or the team that manages the marketing apps and digital platforms) as early as possible to socialize your approach to lead scoring.
    • Work with them on a set of updated requirements for selecting a marketing management suite or for changes to existing apps and tools to support your lead scoring approach that includes lead tracking and marketing funnel analytics.
    • Access the Info-Tech blueprint Select a Marketing Management Suite, along with analyst inquiry support during the requirements definition, vendor evaluation, and vendor selection phases. Use the SoftwareReviews Marketing Management Data Quadrant during vendor evaluation and selection.

    SoftwareReviews Marketing Management Data Quadrant

    The image contains a screenshot of the Marketing Management Data Quadrant.

    1.2.2 Plan technology support for sales opportunity management

    Work with Marketing Ops and IT early to evaluate applications for sales opportunity management

    A thorough evaluation takes months – start early

    • Work closely with Sales Operations as early as possible to socialize your approach to lead scoring and how lead management must integrate with sales opportunity management to manage the entire marketing and sales funnel management process.
    • Work with them on a set of updated requirements for selecting a sales opportunity management application that integrates with your marketing management suite or for changes to existing apps and tools to support your lead management and scoring approach that support the entire marketing and sales pipeline with analytics.

    Access the Info-Tech blueprint Select and Implement a CRM Platform, along with analyst inquiry support during the requirements definition, vendor evaluation, and vendor selection phases. Use the SoftwareReviews CRM Data Quadrant during vendor evaluation and selection.

    SoftwareReviews Customer Relationship Management Data Quadrant

    The image contains a screenshot of the SoftwareReviews Customer Relationship Management Data Quadrant.

    1.2.3 Plan analytics support for marketing pipeline analysis

    Work with Marketing Ops early to evaluate analytics tools to measure marketing and sales pipeline conversions

    A thorough evaluation takes weeks – start early

    • Work closely with Marketing and Sales Operations as early as possible to socialize your approach to measuring the lifecycle of contacts through to wins across the entire marketing and sales funnel management process.
    • Work with them on a set of updated requirements for selecting tools that can support the measurement of conversion ratios from contact to MQL, SQL, and opportunity to wins. Having this data enables you to measure improvement in component parts to your lead generation engine.
    • Access the Info-Tech blueprint Select and Implement a Reporting and Analytics Solution, along with analyst inquiry support during the requirements definition, vendor evaluation and vendor selection phases. Use the SoftwareReviews Best Business intelligence & Analytics Software Data Quadrant as well during vendor evaluation and selection.

    SoftwareReviews Business Intelligence Data Quadrant

    The image contains a screenshot of the Software Reviews Business Intelligent Quadrant.

    Step 1.3

    Catalog Your Buyer Journey and Lead Gen Engine Assets

    Activities

    1.3.1 Review marketing pipeline terminology

    1.3.2 Describe your buyer journey

    1.3.3 Describe your awareness and lead generation engine

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Discuss marketing funnel terminology.
    • Describe your buyer journey.
    • Catalog the elements of your lead generation engine.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder alignment on terminology, your buyer journey, and elements of your lead generation engine

    1.3.1 Review marketing pipeline terminology

    30 minutes

    1. We assume for this model the following:
      1. Our primary objective is to deliver more, and more-highly qualified, sales-qualified leads (SQLs) to our salesforce. The salesforce will accept SQLs and after further qualification turn them into opportunities. Sellers work opportunities and turn them into wins. Wins that had first/last touch attribution within the lead gen engine are considered marketing-influenced wins.
      2. This model assumes the existence of sales development reps (SDRs) whose mission it is to take marketing-qualified leads (MQLs) from the lead generation engine and further qualify them into SQLs.
      3. The lead generation engine takes contacts – visitors to activities, website, etc. – and scores them based on their profile and engagement. If the contact scores at or above the designated threshold, the lead generation engine rates it as an MQL and passes it along to Inside Sales/SDRs. If the contact scores above a certain threshold and shows promise, it is further nurtured. If the contact score is low, it is ignored.
    2. If an organization does not possess a team of SDRs or Inside Sales, you would adjust your version of the model to, for example, raise the threshold for MQLs, and when the threshold is reached the lead generation engine would pass the lead to Field Sales for further qualification.

    Stage

    Characteristics

    Actions

    Contact

    • Unqualified
    • No/low activity

    Nurture

    SDR Qualify

    Send to Sales

    Close

    MQL

    • Profile scores high
    • Engagement strong

    SQL

    • Profile strengthened
    • Demo/quote/next step confirmed

    Oppt’y

    • Sales acceptance
    • Sales opportunity management

    Win

    • Deal closed

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Score leads in a way that makes it crystal clear whether they should be ignored, further nurtured, further qualified, or go right into a sellers’ hands as a super hot lead.

    1.3.2 Describe your buyer journey

    1. Understand the concept of the buyer journey:
      1. Typically Product Marketing is charged with establishing deep understanding of the target buyer for each product or solution through a complete buyer persona and buyer journey map. The details of how to craft both are covered in the upcoming SoftwareReviews Advisory blueprint Craft a More Comprehensive Go-to-Market Strategy. However, we share our Buyer Journey Template here (on the next slide) to illustrate the connection between the buyer journey and the lead generation and scoring processes.
      2. Marketers and campaigners developing the lead scoring methodology will work closely with Product Marketing, asking them to document the buyer journey.
      3. The value of the buyer journey is to guide asset/content creation, nurturing strategy and therefore elements of the lead generation engine such as web experience, email, and social content and other elements of engagement.
      4. The additional value of having a buyer persona is to also inform the ICP, which is an essential element of lead scoring.
      5. For the purposes of lead scoring, use the template on the next slide to create a simple form of the buyer journey. This will guide lead generation engine design and the scoring of activities later in our blueprint.

    2 hours

    On the following slide:

    1. Tailor this template to suit your buyer journey. Text in green is yours to modify. Text in black is instructional.
    2. Your objective is to use the buyer journey to identify asset types and a delivery channel that once constructed/sourced and activated within your lead gen engine will support the buyer journey.
    3. Keep your buyer journey updated based on actual journeys of sales wins.
    4. Complete different buyer journeys for different product areas. Complete these collaboratively with stakeholders for alignment.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Establishing a buyer journey is one of the most valuable tools that, typically, Product Marketing produces. Its use helps campaigners, product managers, and Inside and Field Sales. Leading marketers keep journeys updated based on live deals and characteristics of wins.

    Buyer Journey Template

    Personas: [Title] e.g. “BI Director”

    The image contains a screenshot of the describe persona level as an example.

    [Persona name] ([levels it includes from arrows above]) Buyer’s Journey for [solution type] Vendor Selection

    The image contains a screenshot of the Personas Type example to demonstrate a specific IT role, end use in a relevant department.

    1.3.3 Describe Your Awareness and Lead Gen Engine

    1. Understand the workings of a typical awareness and lead generation engine. Reference the image of a lead gen engine on the following slide when reviewing our guidance below:
      1. In our lead scoring example found in the Lead Scoring Workbook, tab 3, “Weight and Test,” we use a software company selling a sales automation solution, and the engagement activities match with the Typical Awareness and Lead Gen Engine found on the following slide. Our goal is to match a visual representation of a lead gen and awareness engine with the activity scoring portion of lead scoring.
      2. At the top of the Typical Awareness and Lead Generation Engine image, the activities are activated by a team of various roles: digital manager (new web pages), campaign manager (emails and paid media), social media marketer (organic and paid social), and events marketing manager (webinars).
      3. “Awareness” – On the right, the slide shows additional awareness activities driven by the PR/Corporate Comms and Analyst Relations teams.*
      4. The calls to action (CTAs) found in the outreach activities are illustrated below the timeline. The CTAs are grouped and are designed to 1) drive profile capture data via a main sales form fill, and 2) drive engagement that corresponds to the Education, Solution, and Selection buyer journey phases outlined on the prior slide. Ensure you have fast paths to get a hot lead – request a demo – directly to Field Sales when profiles score high.

    * For guidance on best practices in engaging industry analysts, contact your engagement manager to schedule an inquiry with our expert in this area. during that inquiry, we will share best practices and recommended analyst engagement models.

    Lead Scoring Workbook

    2 hours

    On the following slide:

    1. Tailor the slide to describe your lead generation engine as you will use it when you get to latter steps to describe the activities in your lead gen engine and weight them for lead scoring.
    2. Use the template to see what makes up a typical lead gen and awareness building engine. Record your current engine parts and see what you may be missing.
    3. Note: The “Goal” image in the upper right of the slide is meant as a reminder that marketers should establish a goal for SQLs delivered to Field Sales for each campaign.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Marketing’s primary mission is to deliver marketing-influenced wins (MIWs) to the company. Building a compelling awareness and lead gen engine must be done with that goal in mind. Leaders are ruthless in testing – copy, email subjects, website navigation, etc. – to fine-tune the engine and staying highly collaborative with sellers to ensure high value lead delivery.

    Typical Awareness and Lead Gen Engine

    Understand how a typical lead generation engine works. Awareness activities are included as a reference. Use as a template for campaigns.

    The image contains a screenshot of a diagram to demonstrate how a lead generation engine works.

    Phase 2

    Build and Test Your Lead Scoring Model

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Establish a cross-functional vision for lead scoring

    1.2 Asses your tech stack for lead scoring (optional)

    1.3 Catalog your buyer journey and lead gen engine assets

    2.1 Start building your lead scoring model

    2.2 Identify and verify your IPC and weightings

    2.3 Establish key lead generation activities and assets

    3.1 Apply model to your marketing management software

    3.2 Test the quality of sales-accepted leads

    3.3 Apply advanced methods

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Understand the Lead Scoring Grid and establish thresholds.
    2. Collaborate with stakeholders on your ICP, apply weightings to profile attributes and values, and test.
    3. Identify the key activities and assets of your lead gen engine, weight attributes, and run tests.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Field Marketing/Campaign Manager
    • Product Marketing
    • Sales Leadership/Sales Operations
    • Inside Sales leadership
    • Marketing Operations/IT
    • Digital Platform leadership

    Step 2.1

    Start Building Your Lead Scoring Model

    Activities

    2.1.1 Understand the Lead Scoring Grid

    2.1.2 Identify thresholds

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Discuss the concept of the thresholds for scoring leads in each of the various states – “ignore,” “nurture,” “qualify,” “send to sales.”
    • Open the Lead Scoring Workbook and validate your own states to suit your organization.
    • Arrive at an initial set of threshold scores.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder alignment on stages
    • Stakeholder alignment on initial set of thresholds

    2.1.1 Understand the Lead Scoring Grid

    30 minutes

    1. Understand how lead scoring works and our grid is constructed.
    2. Understand the two important areas of the grid and the concept of how the contact’s scores will increase as follows:
      1. Profile – as the profile attributes of the contact approaches that of the ICP we want to score the contact/prospect higher. Note: Step 1.3 walks you through creating your ICP.
      2. Engagement – as the contact/prospect engages with the activities (e.g. webinars, videos, events, emails) and assets (e.g. website, whitepapers, blogs, infographics) in our lead generation engine, we want to score the contact/prospect higher. Note: You will describe your engagement activities in this step.
    3. Understand how thresholds work:
      1. Threshold percentages, when reached, trigger movement of the contact from one state to the next – “ignore,” “nurture,” “qualify with Inside Sales,” and “send to sales.”
    The image contains a screenshot of an example of the lead scoring grid, as described in the text above.

    2.1.2 Identify thresholds

    30 minutes

    We have set up a model Lead Scoring Grid – see Lead Scoring Workbook, tab 2, “Identify Thresholds.”

    Set your thresholds within the Lead Scoring Workbook:

    • Set your threshold percentages for ”Profile” and “Engagement.”
    • You will run test scenarios for each in later steps.
    • We suggest you start with the example percentages given in the Lead Scoring Workbook and plan to adjust them during testing in later steps.
    • Define the “Send to Sales,” “Qualify With Inside Sales,” “Nurture,” and “Ignore” zones.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Clarify that all-important threshold for when a lead passes to your expensive and time-starved outbound sellers.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Lead Scoring Workbook, tab 2 demonstrating the Lead Scoring Grid.

    Lead Scoring Workbook

    Step 2.2

    Identify and Verify Your Ideal Customer Profile and Weightings

    Activities

    2.2.1 Identify your ideal customer profile

    2.2.2 Run tests to validate profile weightings

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify the attributes that compose the ICP.
    • Identify the values of each attribute and their weightings.
    • Test different contact profile scenarios against what actually makes sense.
    • Adjust weightings if needed.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder alignment on ICP
    • Stakeholder alignment on weightings given to attributes
    • Tested results to verify thresholds and cores

    2.2.1 Identify your ideal customer profile

    Collaborate with stakeholders to understand what attributes best describe your ICP. Assign weightings and subratings.

    2 hours

    1. Choose attributes such as job role, organization type, number of employees/potential seat holders, geographical location, interest area, etc., that describe the ideal profile of a target buyer. Best practice sees marketers choosing attributes based on real wins.
    2. Some marketers compare the email domain of the contact to a target list of domains. In the Lead Scoring Workbook, tab 3, “Weight and Test,” we provide an example profile for a “Sales Automation Software” ICP.
    3. Use the workbook as a template, remove our example, and create your own ICP attributes. Then weight the attributes to add up to 100%. Add in the attribute values and weight them. In the next step you will test scenarios.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Marketers who align with colleagues in areas such as Product Marketing, Sales, Inside Sales, Sales Training/Enablement, and Product Managers and document the ICP give their organizations a greater probability of lead generation success.

    The image contains a screenshot of tab 3, demonstrating the weight and test with the example profile.

    Lead Scoring Workbook

    2.2.2 Run tests to validate profile weightings

    Collaborate with stakeholders to run different profile scenarios. Validate your model including thresholds.

    The image contains a screenshot of tab 3 to demonstrate the next step of running tests to validate profile weightings.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Keep your model simple in the interest of fast implementation and to drive early learnings. The goal is not to be perfect but to start iterating toward success. You will update your scoring model even after going into production.

    2 hours

    1. Choose scenarios of contact/lead profile attributes by placing a “1” in the “Attribute” box shown at left.
    2. Place your estimate of how you believe the profile should score in the box to the right of “Estimated Profile State.” How does the calculated state, beneath, compare to the estimated state?
    3. In cases where the calculated state differs from your estimated state, consider weighting the profile attribute differently to match.
    4. If you find estimates and calculated states off dramatically, consider changing previously determined thresholds in tab 2, “Identify Thresholds.” Test multiple scenarios with your team.

    Lead Scoring Workbook

    Step 2.3

    Establish Key Lead Generation Activities and Assets

    Activities

    2.3.1 Establish activities, attribute values, and weights

    2.3.2 Run tests to evaluate activity ratings

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Identify the activities/asset types in your lead gen engine.
    • Weight each attribute and define values to score for each one.
    • Run tests to ensure your model makes sense.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Final stakeholder alignment on which assets compose your lead generation engine
    • Scoring model tested

    2.3.1 Establish activities, attribute values, and weights

    2 hours

    1. Catalog the assets and activities that compose your lead generation engine outlined in Activity 1.3.3. Identify their attribute values and weight them accordingly.
    2. Consider weighting attributes and values according to how close that asset gets to conveying your ideal call to action. For example, if your ideal CTA is “schedule a demo” and the “click” was submitted in the last seven days, it scores 100%. Take time decay into consideration. If that same click was 60 days ago, it scores less – maybe 60%.
    3. Different assets convey different intent and therefore command different weightings; a video comparing your offering against the competition, considered a down funnel asset, scores higher than the company video, considered a top-of-the-funnel activity and “awareness.”
    The image contains a screenshot of the next step of establishing activities, attribute values, and weights.

    Lead Scoring Workbook

    2.3.2 Run tests to validate activity weightings

    Collaborate with stakeholders to run different engagement scenarios. Validate your model including thresholds.

    The image contains a screenshot of activity 2.3.2: run tests to validate activity weightings.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Use data from actual closed deals and the underlying activities to build your model – nothing like using facts to inform your key decisions. Use common sense and keep things simple. Then update further when data from new wins appears.

    2 hours

    1. Test scenarios of contact engagement by placing a “1” in the “Attribute” box shown at left.
    2. Place your estimate of how you believe the engagement should score in the box to the right of “Estimated Engagement State.” How does the calculated state, beneath, compare to the estimated state?
    3. In cases where the calculated state differs from your estimated state, consider weighting the activity attribute differently to match.
    4. If you find that the estimates and calculated states are off dramatically, consider changing previously determined thresholds in tab 2, “Identify Thresholds.” Test multiple scenarios with your team.

    Lead Scoring Workbook

    Phase 3

    Apply Your Model to Marketing Apps and Go Live With Better Qualified Leads

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    1.1 Establish a cross-functional vision for lead scoring

    1.2 Asses your tech stack for lead scoring (optional)

    1.3 Catalog your buyer journey and lead gen engine assets

    2.1 Start building your lead scoring model

    2.2 Identify and verify your IPC and weightings

    2.3 Establish key lead generation activities and assets

    3.1 Apply model to your marketing management software

    3.2 Test the quality of sales-accepted leads

    3.3 Apply advanced methods

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1. Apply model to your marketing management/campaign management software.
    2. Get better qualified leads in the hands of sellers.
    3. Apply lead nurturing and other advanced methods.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Field Marketing/Campaign Manager
    • Sales Leadership/Sales Operations
    • Inside Sales leadership
    • Marketing Operations/IT
    • Digital Platform leadership

    Step 3.1

    Apply Model to Your Marketing Management Software

    Activities

    3.1.1 Apply final model to your lead management software

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Apply the details of your scoring model to the lead management software.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Marketing management software or campaign management application is now set up/updated with your lead scoring approach.

    3.1.1 Apply final model to your lead management software

    Now that your model is complete and ready to go into production, input your lead scoring parameters into your lead management software.

    The image contains a screenshot of activity 3.1.1 demonstrating tab 4 of the Lead Scoring Workbook.

    3 hours

    1. Go to the Lead Scoring Workbook, tab 4, “Model Summary” for a formatted version of your lead scoring model. Double-check print formatting and print off a copy.
    2. Use the copy of your model to show to prospective technology providers when asking them to demonstrate their lead scoring capabilities.
    3. Once you have finalized your model, use the printed output from this tab to ease your process of transposing the corresponding model elements into your lead management software.

    Lead Scoring Workbook

    Step 3.2

    Test the Quality of Sales-Accepted Leads

    Activities

    3.2.1 Achieve sales lead acceptance

    3.2.2 Measure and optimize

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Suggest that the Inside Sales and Field Sales teams should assess whether to sign off on quality of leads received.
    • Campaign managers and stakeholders should now be able to track lead status more effectively.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Sales leadership should be able to sign off that leads are better qualified.
    • With marketing pipeline analytics in place, campaigners can start to measure lead flow and conversion rates.

    3.2.1 Achieve sales lead acceptance

    Collaborate with sellers to validate your lead scoring approach.

    1 hour

    1. Gather a set of SQLs – leads that have been qualified by Inside Sales and delivered to Field Sales. Have Field Sales team members convey whether these leads were properly qualified.
    2. Where leads are deemed not properly qualified, determine if the issue was a) a lack of proper qualification by the Inside Sales team, or b) the lead generation engine, which should have further nurtured the lead or ignored it outright.
    3. Work collaboratively with Inside Sales to update your lead scoring model and/or Inside Sales practice.

    Stage

    Characteristics

    Actions

    Contact

    • Unqualified
    • No/low activity

    Nurture

    SDR Qualify

    Send to Sales

    Close

    MQL

    • Profile scores high
    • Engagement strong

    SQL

    • Profile strengthened
    • Demo/quote/next step confirmed

    Oppt’y

    • Sales acceptance
    • Sales opportunity management

    Win

    • Deal closed

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Marketers that collaborate with Sales – and in this case, a group of sellers as a sales advisory team – well in advance of sales acceptance to design lead scoring will save time during this stage, build trust with sellers, and make faster decisions related to lead management/scoring.

    3.2.2 Measure and optimize

    Leverage analytics that help you optimize your lead scoring methodology.

    Ongoing

    1. Work with Marketing Ops/IT team to design and implement analytics that enable you to:
    2. Meet frequently with your stakeholder team to review results.
    3. Learn from the wins: see how they actually scored and adjust thresholds and/or asset/activity weightings.
    4. Learn from losses: fix ineffective scoring, activities, assets, form-fill strategies, and engagement paths.
    5. Test from both wins and losses if demographic weightings are delivering accurate scores.
    6. Analyze those high scoring leads that went right to sellers but did not close. This could point to a sales training or enablement challenge.
    The image contains a screenshot of the lead scoring dashboard.

    Analytics will also drive additional key insights across your lead gen engine:

    • Are volumes increasing or decreasing? What percentage of leads are in what status (A1-D4)?
    • What nurturing will re-engage stalled leads that score high in profile but low in engagement (A3, B3)?
    • Will additional profile data capture further qualify leads with high engagement (C1, C2)?
    • And beyond all of the above, what leads move to Inside Sales and convert to SQLs, opportunities, and eventually marketing-influenced wins?

    Step 3.3

    Apply Advanced Methods

    Activities

    3.3.1 Employ lead nurturing strategies

    3.3.2 Adjust your model over time to accommodate more advanced methods

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Apply lead nurturing to your lead gen engine.
    • Adjust your engine over time with more advanced methods.

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Stakeholders
    • Project sponsors and leaders

    Outcomes of this step

    • Marketers can begin to test lead nurturing strategies and other advanced methods.

    3.3.1 Employ lead nurturing strategies

    A robust content marketing competence with compelling assets and the capture of additional profile data for qualification are key elements of your nurturing strategy.

    The image contains a screenshot of the Lead Scoring Grid with a focus on Nurture.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    Nurturing success combines the art of crafting engaging copy/experiences and the science of knowing just where a prospect is within your lead gen engine. Great B2B marketers demonstrate the discipline of knowing when to drive engagement and/or additional profile attribute capture using intent while not losing the prospect to over-profiling.

    Ongoing

    1. The goal of lead nurturing is to move the collection of contacts/leads that are scoring, for example, in the A3, B3, C1, C2, and C3 cells into A2, B2, and B1 cells.
    2. How is this best done? To nurture leads that are A3 and B3, entice the prospect with engagement that leads to the bottom of funnel – e.g. “schedule a demo” or “schedule a consultation” via a compelling asset. See the example on the following slide.
    3. To nurture C1 and C2, we need to qualify them further, so entice with an asset that leads to deeper profile knowledge.
    4. For C3 leads, we need both profile and activity nurturing.

    Lead nurturing example

    The image contains an example of a lead nurturing example.

    SoftwareReviews Advisory Insight:

    When nurturing, choose/design content as to what “intent” it satisfies. For example, a head-to-head comparison with a key competitor signals “Selection” phase of the buyer journey. Content that helps determine what app-type to buy signals “Solution”. A company video, or a webinar replay, may mean your buyer is “educating themselves.

    3.3.2 Adjust your model over time to accommodate more advanced methods

    When getting started or within a smaller marketing team, focus on the basics outlined thus far in this blueprint. Larger and/or more experienced teams are able to employ more advanced methods.

    Ongoing

    Advanced Methods

    • Invest in technologies that interpret lead scores and trigger next-step actions, especially outreach by Inside and/or Field Sales.
    • Use the above to route into nurturing environments where additional engagement will raise scores and trigger action.
    • Recognize that lead value decays with time to time additional outreach/activities and to reduce lead scores over time.
    • Always be testing different engagement, copy, and subsequent activities to optimize lead velocity through your lead gen engine.
    • Build intent sensitivity into engagement activities; e.g. test if longer demo video engagement times imply ”contact me for a demo” via a qualification outreach. Update scores manually to drive learnings.
    • Vary engagement paths by demographics to deliver unique digital experiences. Use firmographics/email domain to drive leads through a more tailored account-based marketing (ABM) experience.
    • Reapply learnings from closed opportunities/wins to drive updates to buyer journey mapping and your ICP.

    Frequently used acronyms

    ABM

    Account-Based Marketing

    B2B

    Business to Business

    CMO

    Chief Marketing Officer

    CRM

    Customer Relationship Management

    ICP

    Ideal Customer Profile

    MIW

    Marketing-Influenced Win

    MQL

    Marketing-Qualified Lead

    SDR

    Sales Development Representative

    SQL

    Sales-Qualified Lead

    Works cited

    Arora, Rajat. “Mining the Real Gems from you Data – Lead Scoring and Engagement Scoring.” LeadSquared, 27 Sept. 2014. Web.

    Doyle, Jen. “2012 B2B Marketing Benchmark Report: Research and insights on attracting and converting the modern B2B buyer.” MarketingSherpa, 2012. Web.

    Doyle, Jen, and Sergio Balegno. “2011 MarketingSherpa B2B Marketing Benchmark Survey: Research and Insights on Elevating Marketing Effectiveness from Lead Generation to Sales Conversion.” MarketingSherpa, 2011.

    Kirkpatrick, David. “Lead Scoring: CMOs realize a 138% lead gen ROI … and so can you.” marketingsherpa blog, 26 Jan 2012. Web.

    Moser, Jeremy. “Lead Scoring Is Important for Your Business: Here’s How to Create Scoring Model and Hand-Off Strategy.” BigCommerce, 25 Feb. 2019. Web.

    Strawn, Joey. “Why Lead Scoring Is Important for B2Bs (and How You Can Implement It for Your Company.” IndustrialMarketer.com, 17 Aug. 2016. Web.

    Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}283|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Mobile Development
    • Parent Category Link: /mobile-development
    • CEOs see mobile for employees as their top mandate for upcoming technology innovation initiatives, making security a key competency for development.
    • Unsecure mobile applications can cause your employees to question the mobile applications’ integrity for handling sensitive data, limiting uptake.
    • Secure mobile development tends to be an afterthought, where vulnerabilities are tested for post-production rather than during the build process.
    • Developers lack the expertise, processes, and proper tools to effectively enhance applications for mobile security.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations currently react to security issues. Info-Tech recommends a proactive approach to ensure a secure software development life cycle (SSDLC) end-to-end.
    • Organizations currently lack the secure development practices to provide highly secure mobile applications that end users can trust.
    • Enable your developers with five key secure development techniques from Info-Tech’s development toolkit.

    Impact and Result

    • Embed secure development techniques into your SDLC.
    • Create a repeatable process for your developers to continually evaluate and optimize mobile application security for new threats and corresponding mitigation steps.
    • Build capabilities within your team based on Info-Tech’s framework by supporting ongoing security improvements through monitoring and metric analysis.

    Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should adopt secure development techniques for mobile application development, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess secure mobile development processes

    Determine the current security landscape of mobile application development.

    • Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications – Phase 1: Assess Secure Mobile Development Practices
    • Systems Architecture Template
    • Mobile Application High-Level Design Requirements Template

    2. Implement and test secure mobile techniques

    Incorporate the various secure development techniques into current development practices.

    • Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications – Phase 2: Implement and Test Secure Mobile Techniques

    3. Monitor and support secure mobile applications

    Create a roadmap for mobile optimization initiatives.

    • Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications – Phase 3: Monitor and Support Secure Mobile Applications
    • Mobile Optimization Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Strengthen the SSDLC for Enterprise Mobile Applications

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Your Secure Mobile Development Practices

    The Purpose

    Identification of the triggers of your secure mobile development initiatives.

    Assessment of the security vulnerabilities in your mobile applications from an end-user perspective.

    Identification of the execution of your mobile environment.

    Assessment of the mobile threats and vulnerabilities to your systems architecture.

    Prioritization of your mobile threats.

    Creation of your risk register.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key opportunity areas where a secure development optimization initiative can provide tangible benefits.

    Identification of security requirements.

    Prioritized list of security threats.

    Initial mobile security risk register created. 

    Activities

    1.1 Establish the triggers of your secure mobile development initiatives.

    1.2 Assess the security vulnerabilities in your mobile applications from an end-user perspective.

    1.3 Understand the execution of your mobile environment with a systems architecture.

    1.4 Assess the mobile threats and vulnerabilities to your systems architecture.

    1.5 Prioritize your mobile threats.

    1.6 Begin building your risk register.

    Outputs

    Mobile Application High-Level Design Requirements Document

    Systems Architecture Diagram

    2 Implement and Test Your Secure Mobile Techniques

    The Purpose

    Discovery of secure development techniques to apply to current development practices.

    Discovery of new user stories from applying secure development techniques.

    Discovery of new test cases from applying secure development techniques.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Areas within your code that can be optimized for improving mobile application security.

    New user stories created in relation to mitigation steps.

    New test cases created in relation to mitigation steps.

    Activities

    2.1 Gauge the state of your secure mobile development practices.

    2.2 Identify the appropriate techniques to fill gaps.

    2.3 Develop user stories from security development gaps identified.

    2.4 Develop test cases from user story gaps identified.

    Outputs

    Mobile Application High-Level Design Requirements Document

    3 Monitor and Support Your Secure Mobile Applications

    The Purpose

    Identification of key metrics used to measure mobile application security issues.

    Identification of secure mobile application and development process optimization initiatives.

    Identification of enablers and blockers of your mobile security optimization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Metrics for measuring application security.

    Modified triaging process for addressing security issues.

    Initiatives for development optimization.

    Enablers and blockers identified for mobile security optimization initiatives.

    Process for developing your mobile optimization roadmap.

    Activities

    3.1 List the metrics that would be gathered to assess the success of your mobile security optimization.

    3.2 Adjust and modify your triaging process to enhance handling of security issues.

    3.3 Brainstorm secure mobile application and development process optimization initiatives.

    3.4 Identify the enablers and blockers of your mobile security optimization.

    3.5 Define your mobile security optimization roadmap.

    Outputs

    Mobile Optimization Roadmap

    Make Prudent Decisions When Increasing Your Salesforce Footprint

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}134|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.9/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $55,224 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Licensing
    • Parent Category Link: /licensing
    • Too often, organizations fail to achieve economy of scale. They neglect to negotiate price holds, do not negotiate deeper discounts as volume increases, or do not realize there are already existing contracts within the organization.
    • Understand what to negotiate. Organizations do not know what can and cannot be negotiated, which means value gets left on the table.
    • Integrations with other applications must be addressed from the outset. Many users buy the platform only to realize later on that the functionality they wanted does not exist and may be an extra expense with customization.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Buying power dissipates when you sign the contract. Get the right product for the right number of users for the right term and get it right the first time.
    • Getting the best price does not assure a great total cost of ownership or ROI. There are many components as part of the purchasing process that if unaccounted for can lead to dramatic and unbudgeted spend.
    • Avoid buyer’s remorse through due diligence before signing the deal. If you need to customize the software or extend it with a third-party add-in, identify your costs and timelines upfront. Plan for successful adoption.

    Impact and Result

    • Centralize purchasing instead of enabling small deals to maximize discount levels by creating a process to derive a cost-effective methodology when subscribing to Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, and Force.com.
    • Educate your organization on Salesforce’s licensing methods and contract types, enabling informed purchasing decisions. Critical components of every agreement that need to be negotiated are a renewal escalation cap, term protection, and license metrics to document what comes with each. Re-bundling protection is also critical in case a product is no longer desired.
    • Proactively addressing integrations and business requirements will enable project success and enable the regular upgrades the come with a multi-tenant cloud services SaaS solution.

    Make Prudent Decisions When Increasing Your Salesforce Footprint Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you need to understand and document your Salesforce licensing strategy, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Establish software requirements

    Begin your journey by understanding whether Salesforce is the right CRM. Also proactively approach Salesforce licensing by understanding which information to gather and assessing the current state and gaps.

    • Make Prudent Decisions When Increasing Your Salesforce Footprint – Phase 1: Establish Software Requirements
    • Salesforce Licensing Purchase Reference Guide
    • RASCI Chart

    2. Evaluate licensing options

    Review current products and licensing models to determine which licensing models will most appropriately fit the organization's environment.

    • Make Prudent Decisions When Increasing Your Salesforce Footprint – Phase 2: Evaluate Licensing Options
    • Salesforce TCO Calculator
    • Salesforce Discount Calculator

    3. Evaluate agreement options

    Review Salesforce’s contract types and assess which best fits the organization’s licensing needs.

    • Make Prudent Decisions When Increasing Your Salesforce Footprint – Phase 3: Evaluate Agreement Options
    • Salesforce Terms and Conditions Evaluation Tool

    4. Purchase and manage licenses

    Conduct negotiations, purchase licensing, finalize a licensing management strategy, and enhance your CRM with a Salesforce partner.

    • Make Prudent Decisions When Increasing Your Salesforce Footprint – Phase 4: Purchase and Manage Licenses
    • Controlled Vendor Communications Letter
    • Vendor Communication Management Plan
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Make Prudent Decisions When Increasing Your Salesforce Footprint

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish Software Requirements

    The Purpose

    Assess current state and align goals; review business feedback.

    Interview key stakeholders to define business objectives and drivers.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a baseline for whether Salesforce is the right solution.

    Understand Salesforce as a solution.

    Examine all CRM options.

    Activities

    1.1 Perform requirements gathering to review Salesforce as a potential solution.

    1.2 Gather your documentation before buying or renewing.

    1.3 Confirm or create your Salesforce licensing team.

    1.4 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing options and budget allocation.

    Outputs

    Copy of your Salesforce Master Subscription Agreement

    RASCI Chart

    Salesforce Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    2 Evaluate Licensing Options

    The Purpose

    Review product editions and licensing options.

    Review add-ons and licensing rules.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand how licensing works.

    Discuss licensing rules and their application to your current environment.

    Determine the product and license mix that is best for your requirements.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine the editions, licenses, and add-ons for your Salesforce CRM solution.

    2.2 Calculate total cost of ownership.

    2.3 Use the Salesforce Discount Calculator to ensure you are getting the discount you deserve.

    2.4 Meet with stakeholders to discuss the licensing options and budget allocation.

    Outputs

    Salesforce CRM Solution

    Salesforce TCO Calculator

    Salesforce Discount Calculator

    Salesforce Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    3 Evaluate Agreement Options

    The Purpose

    Review terms and conditions of Salesforce contracts.

    Review vendors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Determine if MSA or term agreement is best.

    Learn what specific terms to negotiate.

    Activities

    3.1 Perform a T&Cs review and identify key “deal breakers.”

    3.2 Decide on an agreement that nets the maximum benefit.

    Outputs

    Salesforce T&Cs Evaluation Tool

    Salesforce Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    4 Purchase and Manage Licenses

    The Purpose

    Finalize the contract.

    Discuss negotiation points.

    Discuss license management and future roadmap.

    Discuss Salesforce partner and implementation strategy.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Discuss negotiation strategies.

    Learn about licensing management best practices.

    Review Salesforce partner options.

    Create an implementation plan.

    Activities

    4.1 Know the what, when, and who to negotiate.

    4.2 Control the flow of communication.

    4.3 Assign the right people to manage the environment.

    4.4 Discuss Salesforce partner options.

    4.5 Discuss implementation strategy.

    4.6 Meet with stakeholders to discuss licensing options and budget allocation.

    Outputs

    Salesforce Negotiation Strategy

    Vendor Communication Management Plan

    RASCI Chart

    Info-Tech’s Core CRM Project Plan

    Salesforce Licensing Purchase Reference Guide

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}434|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $12,599 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 20 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Portfolio Management
    • Parent Category Link: /portfolio-management
    • As a portfolio manager, you’re expected to size projects for approval and intake before they have sufficient definition.
    • The consequences of initial sizing are felt throughout the project lifecycle.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Your organization lacks strong organizational memory upon which assumptions and estimates can be made.
    • Definition is at a minimum not validated, untested, and is likely incomplete. It has the potential to be dangerously misleading.

    Impact and Result

    • Build project history and make more educated estimates – Projects usually start with a “ROM” or t-shirt size estimate, but if your estimates are consistently off, then it’s time to shift the scale.
    • Plan ahead – Projects face risks; similar projects face similar risks. Provide sponsors with estimates that account for as many risks as possible, so that if something goes wrong you have a plan to make it right.
    • Store and strengthen organizational memory – Each project is rich with lessons that can inform your next project to make it more effective and efficient, and ultimately help to avoid committing the same failures over and over again. Develop a process to catalogue project history and all of the failures and successes associated with those projects.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should improve your estimation practices, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build organizational memory to inform early estimates

    Analyze your project history to identify and fill gaps in your estimation practices.

    • Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations – Phase 1: Build Organizational Memory to Inform Early Estimations
    • PMO Organizational Memory Tool
    • T-Shirt Sizing Health Check Lite
    • Project Estimation Playbook

    2. Develop and refine a reliable estimate with top-down allocations

    Allocate time across project phases to validate and refine estimates and estimate assumptions.

    • Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations – Phase 2: Develop and Refine a Reliable Estimate With Top-Down Allocations
    • Planning-Level Estimate Calculator

    3. Implement a new estimation process

    Implement a lessons learned process to provide transparency to your sponsors and confidence to your teams.

    • Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations – Phase 3: Implement a New Estimation Process
    • Project Lessons Learned Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Develop the Foundations of Organizational Memory

    The Purpose

    Track key performance indicators on past projects to inform goals for future projects.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Developed Project History List.

    Refined starting estimates that can be adjusted accurately from project to project.

    Activities

    1.1 Build project history.

    1.2 Analyze estimation capabilities.

    1.3 Identify estimation goals.

    Outputs

    Project History List

    T-Shirt Sizing Health Check

    Estimate Tracking Plan

    2 Define a Requirements Gathering Process

    The Purpose

    Outline the common attributes required to complete projects.

    Identify the commonly forgotten attributes to ensure comprehensive scoping early on.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Refined initial estimate based on high-level insights into work required and resources available.

    Activities

    2.1 Develop a list of in-scope project attributes.

    2.2 Identify leadership priorities for deliverables and attributes.

    2.3 Track team and skill responsibilities for attributes.

    Outputs

    Identified list or store of past project attributes and costs

    Attribute List and Estimated Cost

    Required Skills List

    3 Build an Estimation Process

    The Purpose

    Set clear processes for tracking the health of your estimate to ensure it is always as accurate as possible.

    Define check-in points to evaluate risks and challenges to the project and identify trigger conditions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An estimation process rooted in organizational memory and lessons learned.

    Project estimates that are consistently reevaluated to predict and correct challenges before they can drastically affect your projects.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine Milestone Check-In Points.

    3.2 Develop Lessons Learned Meeting Agendas.

    3.3 Identify common risks and past lessons learned.

    3.4 Develop contingency tracking capabilities.

    Outputs

    Project Lessons Learned Template

    Historic Risks and Lessons Learned Master Template

    Contingency Reserve and Risk Registers

    4 Improve Business Alignment With Your Estimation Plan

    The Purpose

    Bridge the gap between death march projects and bloated and uncertain estimates by communicating expectations and assumptions clearly to your sponsors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clear estimation criteria and assumptions aligned with business priorities.

    Post-mortem discussion items crucial to improving project history knowledge for next time.

    Activities

    4.1 Identify leadership risk priorities.

    4.2 Develop IT business alignment.

    4.3 Develop hand-off procedures and milestone approval methods.

    4.4 Create a list of post-mortem priorities.

    Outputs

    Estimation Quotation

    Risk Priority Rankings

    Hand-Off Procedures

    Post-mortem agenda planning

    There should never be only one.

    • Large vertical image:
    • member rating overall impact: High Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    Today, we're talking about a concept that’s both incredibly simple and dangerously overlooked: the single point of failure, or SPOF for short.

    Imagine you’ve built an impenetrable fortress. It has high walls, a deep moat, and strong gates. But the entire fortress can only be accessed through a single wooden bridge. That bridge is your single point of failure. If it collapses or is destroyed, your magnificent fortress is completely cut off. It doesn't matter how strong the rest of it is; that one weak link renders the entire system useless.

    In your work, your team, and your processes and technology, these single bridges are everywhere. A SPOF is any part of a system that, if it stops working, will cause the entire system to shut down. It’s the one critical component, the one indispensable person, or the one vital process that everything else depends on.

    When you identify and fix these weak points you aren't being pessimistic; you're fixing the very foundation of something that can withstand shocks and surprises. It’s about creating truly resilient systems and teams, not just seemingly strong ones. So, let’s explore where these risks hide and what you can do about them.

    When People Become the Problem

    For those of you who know me, saying something like this feels at odds with who I am. And yet, it's one of the most common and riskiest areas in any organization. Human single points of failure don't happen because of malicious intent. They typically grow out of good intentions, hard work, and necessity. But the result is the same: a fragile system completely dependent on an individual.

    The Rise of the Hero

    We all know a colleague like this. The “hero” is the one person who has all the answers. When a critical system goes down at 3 AM, they're the only one who can fix it. They understand the labyrinthine codebase nobody else dares to touch. They have the historical context for every major decision made in the last decade. On the surface, this person is invaluable. Management loves them because they solve problems. The team relies on them because they’re a walking encyclopedia.

    But here’s the inconvenient truth: your hero is your biggest liability.

    This isn’t their fault. They likely became the hero by stepping up when no one else would or could. The hero may actually feel like they are the only ones qualified to handle the issue because “management” does not take the necessary actions to train other people. Or “management” places other priorities. Be aware, this is a perception thing. The manager is very likely to be very concerned about the well-being of their employee. (I'm taking "black companies", akin to black sites, out of the equation for a moment and concentrating on generally healthy workplaces.) The hero will likely feel a strong bond to their environment. Also, every hero is different. There is a single point of failure, but not a single type of person. Every person has a different driver.

    I watched a YouTube video by a famous entrepreneur the other day. And she said something that triggered a response in me, because it sows the seeds of the hero. She said, Would you rather have an employee who just fixes it, handles it, and deals with it? Or an employee that talks about it? Obviously, the large majority will take the person behind door number 1. I would too. But then you need to step up as a manager, as an owner, as an executive, and enforce knowledge sharing.

    If you channel all critical knowledge and capabilities through one person, if you let this person become your go-to specialist for everything, you've created a massive SPOF. What happens when your hero gets sick, takes a well deserved two week vacation to a place with no internet, or leaves the company for a new opportunity? The system grinds to a halt. A minor issue becomes a major crisis because the only person who can fix it is unavailable.

    This overreliance doesn't just create a risk; it stifles growth. Other team members don't get the opportunity to learn and develop new skills because the hero is always there to swoop in and save the day. The answer? I guess that depends on your situation and what your ability is to keep this person happy without alienating the rest of the team. The answer may lie in the options discussed later in the article around KPIs.

    The Knowledge Hoarders

    A step beyond the individual hero is the team that acts as a collective SPOF. This is the team that “protects” its know how. They might use complex, undocumented tools, speak in a language of acronyms only they understand, or resist any attempts to standardize their processes. They've built a silo around their work, making themselves indispensable as a unit.

    Unlike the hero, this often comes from a place of perceived self preservation. If they are the only ones who understand how something works, their jobs are secure, right? But this behavior is incredibly damaging to the organization's resilience. Not to mention that it is just plain wrong. The team becomes inundated with requests for new features, but also for help in solving incidents. The result in numerous instances is that the team succeeds in neither. Next the manager is called to the senior management because the business is complaining that things don't progress as expected. 

    This team thus has become a bottleneck. Any other team that needs to interact with their system is completely at their mercy. Progress slows to a crawl, dependent on their availability and willingness to cooperate. Preservation has turned into survival.  

    The real root cause at the heart of both the hero and the knowledge hoarding team is a failure of knowledge management. When information isn't shared, documented, and made accessible, you are actively choosing to create single points of failure. We'll dive deeper into building a robust knowledge sharing culture in a future article, but for now, recognize that knowledge kept in one person's or team's head is a disaster waiting to happen.

    When Your Technology is a House of Cards

    People aren't the only source of fragility. The way you build and manage your technology stacks can easily create critical SPOFs that leave you vulnerable. These are often less obvious at first, but they can cause dangerous failures when they finally break.

    The Danger of the Single Node

    Let's start with the most straightforward technical SPOF: the single node setup. Imagine you have a critical application like maybe your company's main website or an internal database. If you run that entire application on one single server (a single “node”), you've created a classic SPOF.

    It’s like a restaurant with only one chef. If that chef goes home, the kitchen closes. It doesn't matter how many waiters or tables you have. If that single server experiences a hardware failure, a software crash, or even just needs to be rebooted for an update, your entire service goes offline. There is no failover. The service is simply down until that one machine is fixed, patched or rebooted.

    You need to set up your systems so that when one node goes down, the other takes over. This is not just something for large enterprises. SMEs must do the same. I've had numerous calls from business owners who did something to their web server or system and now “it doesn't work!” Not only are they down, now they have to call me and I then must arrange for subject matter experts to fix it immediately. Typically at a cost much larger than if they had set up their system with active, warm or even cold standbys. 

    The Mystery of Closed Technologies

    Another major risk comes from an overreliance on closed, proprietary technologies. This happens when you build a core part of your business on a piece of software or hardware that you don't control and can't inspect. It’s a “black box.” You know what it’s supposed to do, but you have no idea how it does it, and you can’t fix it if it breaks. When something goes wrong, you are completely at the mercy of the company that created it. You have to submit a support ticket and wait.

    This is actually relatable to the next chapter, please follow along and take the advice there.

    The Trap of Vendor Lock In

    Closely related to closed technology is the concept of vendor lock-in. This is a subtle but powerful SPOF. It happens when you become so deeply integrated with a single vendor's ecosystem that the cost and effort of switching to a competitor are impossibly high. Your vendor effectively becomes a strategic single point of failure. Your ability to innovate, control costs, and pivot your strategy is now tied to the decisions of another company.

    This may even run afoul of legal standards. In Europe, we have the DORA and NIS2 regulations. DORA specifically mandates that companies have exit plans for their systems, starting with their critical and important functions. Functions refers to business services, to be clear. 

    But we get there so easily. The native functions of AWS, Azure and Google Cloud, just to name a few, are very enticing to use. They offer convenience, low code, and performance on tap. It's just that, once you integrate deeply with them, you are taken, hook, line, and sinker. And then you have people like me, or worse, your regulator, who demands “What is your exit plan?”

    Your Resilience Playbook: Practical Steps to Eliminate SPOFs

    Identifying your single points of failure is the first step. The real work is in systematically eliminating them. This isn't about a single, massive project; it's about building new habits and principles into your daily work. Here's a playbook I think you can start using today.

    Mitigate People-Based Risks

    The cure for depending on one person is to create a culture where knowledge is fluid and shared by default. Your goal is to move from individual heroics to collective resilience.

    • Mandate real vacations. This might sound strange, but one of the best ways to reveal and fix a “hero” problem is to make sure your hero takes a real, disconnected vacation. This isn't a punishment; it's a benefit to them and a necessary stress test for the team. It forces others to step up and document their processes in preparation. The first time will be painful, but it gets easier each time as the team builds its own knowledge.

    • Adopt the “teach, don't just do” rule. Coach your senior experts to see their role as multipliers. When someone asks them a question, their first instinct should be to show, not just to do. This can be a five minute screen sharing session, grabbing a colleague to pair program on a fix, or taking ten minutes to write down the answer in a shared knowledge base so it never has to be asked again.

      Many companies have knowledge sharing solutions in place. Take a moment to actually use them. Prepare for when new people come into the company. Have a place where they can get into the groove and learn the heart beat of the company. There is a reason why the Madonna song is so captivating to so many people. Getting into the groove elevates you. And the same thing happens in your company. 

    • Rotate responsibilities and run "game days". Actively move people around. Let a developer handle support tickets for a week to understand common customer issues. Have your infrastructure expert sit with the product team. Also, create “game days” where you simulate a crisis. For example: "Okay team, our lead developer is 'on vacation' today. Let's practice a full deployment without them.” This makes learning safe and proactive.

    • Celebrate team success, not individual firefighting. Shift your praise and recognition. Instead of publicly thanking a single person for working all night to resolve a problem, celebrate the team that built a system so resilient it didn't break in the first place. Reward the team that wrote excellent documentation that allowed a junior member to solve a complex issue. Culture follows what you celebrate. At the same time, if the team does not pony up, definitely praise the person and follow up with the team to fix this.

    • Host internal demos and tech talks. Create a regular, informal forum where people can share what they're working on. This could be a “brown bag lunch” session or a Friday afternoon demo. It demystifies what other teams are doing, breaks down silos, and encourages people to ask questions in a low pressure environment.

    • Remunerate sharing. Make sharing knowledge a bonus-eligible key performance indicator. The more sharing an expert does, with their peers acknowledging this, the more the expert earns. You can easily incorporate this into your peer feedback system. 

    • Run DRP exercises without your top engineers: This is taking a leap of faith, and I would never recommend this until all of the above are in place and proven. 

    Building Resilient Technical Systems

    The core principle here is to assume failure will happen and to design for it. A resilient system isn't one where parts never fail, but one where the system as a whole keeps working even when they do.

    • Embrace the rule of three. This is a simple but powerful guideline. For critical data, aim to have three copies on two different types of media, with one copy stored off-site (or in a different cloud region). For critical services, aim for at least three instances running in different availability zones. This simple rule protects you from a wide range of common failures.

    • Automate everything you can. Every manual process is a potential SPOF. It relies on a person remembering a series of steps perfectly, often under pressure. Automate your testing, your deployments, your server setup, and your backup procedures. Scripts are consistent and repeatable; tired humans at 3 AM are not.

    • Use health checks and smart monitoring. It's not enough to have a backup server; you need to know that it's healthy and ready to take over. Implement automated health checks that constantly monitor your primary and redundant systems. Your monitoring should alert you the moment a backup component fails, not just when the primary one does.

    • Practice chaos engineering. Don't wait for a real failure to test your resilience. Intentionally introduce failures in a controlled environment. This is known as chaos engineering. Start small. What happens if you turn off a non-critical service during work hours? Does the system handle it gracefully? Does the team know how to respond? This turns a potential crisis into a planned, educational drill.

    Avoiding Technology and Vendor Traps

    Your resilience also depends on the choices you make about the technology and partners you rely on. The goal is to maintain control over your destiny.

    • Build abstraction layers. Instead of having your application code talk directly to a specific vendor's service, create an intermediary layer that you control. This “abstraction layer” acts as a buffer. If you ever need to switch vendors, you only have to update your abstraction layer, not your entire application. It’s more work up front but gives you immense flexibility later.

    • Make “ease of exit” a key requirement. When you evaluate a new technology or vendor, make portability a primary concern. Ask tough questions: How do we get our data out? What is the process for migrating to a competitor? Is the technology based on open standards? Run a small proof of concept to test how hard it would be to leave before you commit fully.

    • Consider a multi-vendor strategy. For your most critical dependencies, like cloud hosting, avoid going all in on a single provider if you can. Using services from two or more vendors is an advanced strategy, but it provides the ultimate protection against a massive, platform wide outage or unfavorable changes in pricing or terms.

    It's a journey, not a destination

    You will never be “ready.” Building resilience by eliminating single points of failure isn't a one time project you can check off a list. It’s a continuous process. New SPOFs will emerge as your systems evolve, people change roles, and your business grows.

    The key is to make this thinking a part of your culture. Make “What's the bus factor for this project?” a regular question in your planning meetings. Make redundancy and documentation a non negotiable requirement for new systems. By constantly looking for the one thing that can bring everything down, you can build teams and technology that don't just survive shocks—they eat them for breakfast.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}316|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.2/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $105,346 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 39 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Threat Intelligence & Incident Response
    • Parent Category Link: /threat-intelligence-incident-response
    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being re-victimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Impact and Result

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should develop and implement a security incident management program, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Prepare

    Equip your organization for incident response with formal documentation of policies and processes.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 1: Prepare
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Management Charter Template
    • Security Incident Management Policy Template
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool

    2. Operate

    Act with efficiency and effectiveness as new incidents are handled.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 2: Operate
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Credential Compromise
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Credential Compromise (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Distributed Denial of Service
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Distributed Denial of Service (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Malicious Email
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Malicious Email (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Ransomware
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Ransomware (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Data Breach
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Data Breach (PDF)
    • Data Breach Reporting Requirements Summary
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Third-Party Incident
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (Visio)
    • Security Incident Management Workflow: Third-Party Incident (PDF)
    • Security Incident Management Runbook: Blank Template

    3. Maintain and optimize

    Manage and improve the incident management process by tracking metrics, testing capabilities, and leveraging best practices.

    • Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – Phase 3: Maintain and Optimize
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Root-Cause Analysis Template
    • Security Incident Report Template
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Prepare Your Incident Response Program

    The Purpose

    Understand the purpose of incident response.

    Formalize the program.

    Identify key players and escalation points.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Common understanding of the importance of incident response.

    Various business units becoming aware of their roles in the incident management program.

    Formalized documentation.

    Activities

    1.1 Assess the current process, obligations, scope, and boundaries of the incident management program.

    1.2 Identify key players for the response team and for escalation points.

    1.3 Formalize documentation.

    1.4 Prioritize incidents requiring preparation.

    Outputs

    Understanding of the incident landscape

    An identified incident response team

    A security incident management charter

    A security incident management policy

    A list of top-priority incidents

    A general security incident management plan

    A security incident response RACI chart

    2 Develop Incident-Specific Runbooks

    The Purpose

    Document the clear response procedures for top-priority incidents.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    As incidents occur, clear response procedures are documented for efficient and effective recovery.

    Activities

    2.1 For each top-priority incident, document the workflow from detection through analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident analysis.

    Outputs

    Up to five incident-specific runbooks

    3 Maintain and Optimize the Program

    The Purpose

    Ensure the response procedures are realistic and effective.

    Identify key metrics to measure the success of the program.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Real-time run-through of security incidents to ensure roles and responsibilities are known.

    Understanding of how to measure the success of the program.

    Activities

    3.1 Limited scope tabletop exercise.

    3.2 Discuss key metrics.

    Outputs

    Completed tabletop exercise

    Key success metrics identified

    Further reading

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Create a scalable incident response program without breaking the bank.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    Security incidents are going to happen whether you’re prepared or not. Ransomware and data breaches are just a few top-of-mind threats that all organizations deal with. Taking time upfront to formalize response plans can save you significantly more time and effort down the road. When an incident strikes, don’t waste time deciding how to remediate. Rather, proactively identify your response team, optimize your response procedures, and track metrics so you can be prepared to jump to action.

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Picture of Céline Gravelines

    Céline Gravelines,
    Senior Research Analyst
    Security, Risk & Compliance Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research is Designed For

    • A CISO who is dealing with the following:
      • Inefficient use of time and money when retroactively responding to incidents, negatively affecting business revenue and workflow.
      • Resistance from management to adequately develop a formal incident response plan.
      • Lack of closure of incidents, resulting in being re-victimized by the same vector.

    This Research Will Help You

    • Develop a consistent, scalable, and usable incident response program that is not resource intensive.
    • Track and communicate incident response in a formal manner.
    • Reduce the overall impact of incidents over time.
    • Learn from past incidents to improve future response processes.

    This Research Will Also Assist

    • Business stakeholders who are responsible for the following:
    • Improving workflow and managing operations in the event of security incidents to reduce any adverse business impacts.
    • Ensuring that incident response compliance requirements are being adhered to.

    This Research Will Help Them

    • Efficiently allocate resources to improve incident response in terms of incident frequency, response time, and cost.
    • Effectively communicate expectations and responsibilities to users.

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • Security incidents are inevitable, but how they’re dealt with can make or break an organization. Poor incident response negatively affects business practices, including workflow, revenue generation, and public image.
    • The incident response of most organizations is ad hoc at best. A formal management plan is rarely developed or adhered to, resulting in ineffective firefighting responses and inefficient allocation of resources.

    Complication

    • Tracked incidents are often classified into ready-made responses that are not necessarily applicable to the organization. With so many classifications, tracking becomes inefficient and indigestible, allowing major incidents to fall through the cracks.
    • Outcomes of incident response tactics are not formally tracked or communicated, resulting in a lack of comprehensive understanding of trends and patterns regarding incidents, leading to being revictimized by the same vector.
    • Having a formal incident response document to meet compliance requirements is not useful if no one is adhering to it.

    Resolution

    • Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of preparation, detection, analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities.
    • This blueprint will walk through the steps of developing a scalable and systematic incident response program relevant to your organization.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • You will experience incidents. Don’t rely on ready-made responses. They’re too broad and easy to ignore. Save your organization response time and confusion by developing your own specific incident use cases.
    • Analyze, track, and review results of incident response regularly. Without a comprehensive understanding of incident trends and patterns, you can be re-victimized by the same attack vector.
    • Establish communication processes and channels well in advance of a crisis. Don’t wait until a state of panic. Collaborate and exchange information with other organizations to stay ahead of incoming threats.

    Data breaches are resulting in major costs across industries

    Per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies (measured in USD)

    This is a bar graph showing the per capita cost by industry classification of benchmarked companies(measured in USD). the companies are, in decreasing order of cost: Health; Financial; Services; Pharmaceutical; Technology; Energy; Education; Industrial; Entertainment; Consumer; Media; Transportation; Hospitality; Retail; Research; Public

    Average data breach costs per compromised record hit an all-time high of $148 (in 2018).
    (Source: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study)”

    % of systems impacted by a data breach
    1%
    No Impact
    19%
    1-10% impacted
    41%
    11-30% impacted
    24%
    31-50% impacted
    15%
    > 50% impacted
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    61% Lost
    < 20%
    21% Lost 20-40% 8% Lost
    40-60%
    6% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%
    % of customers lost from a data breach
    58% Lost
    <20%
    25% Lost
    20-40%
    9% Lost
    40-60%
    5% Lost
    60-80%
    4% Lost
    80-100%

    Source: Cisco, “Cisco 2017 Annual Cybersecurity Report”

    Defining what is security incident management

    IT Incident

    Any event not a part of the standard operation of a service which causes, or may cause, the interruption to, or a reduction in, the quality of that service.

    Security Event:

    A security event is anything that happens that could potentially have information security implications.

    • A spam email is a security event because it may contain links to malware.
    • Organizations may be hit with thousands or perhaps millions of identifiable security events each day.
    • These are typically handled by automated tools or are simply logged.

    Security Incident:

    A security incident is a security event that results in damage such as lost data.

    • Incidents can also include events that don't involve damage but are viable risks.
    • For example, an employee clicking on a link in a spam email that made it through filters may be viewed as an incident.

    It’s not a matter of if you have a security incident, but when

    The increasing complexity and prevalence of threats have finally caught the attention of corporate leaders. Prepare for the inevitable with an incident response program.

    1. A formalized incident response program reduced the average cost of a data breach (per capita) from $148 to $134, while third-party involvement increased costs by $13.40.
    2. US organizations lost an average of $7.91 million per data breach as a result of increased customer attrition and diminished goodwill. Canada and the UK follow suit at $1.57 and $1.39 million, respectively.
    3. 73% of breaches are perpetrated by outsiders, 50% are the work of criminal groups, and 28% involve internal actors.
    4. 55% of companies have to manage fallout, such as reputational damage after a data breach.
    5. The average cost of a data breach increases by $1 million if left undetected for > 100 days.

    (Sources: IBM, “2018 Cost of Data Breach Study”; Verizon, “2017 Data Breach Investigations Report”; Cisco, “Cisco 2018 Annual Cybersecurity Report”)

    Threat Actor Examples

    The proliferation of hacking techniques and commoditization of hacking tools has enabled more people to become threat actors. Examples include:
    • Organized Crime Groups
    • Lone Cyber Criminals
    • Competitors
    • Nation States
    • Hacktivists
    • Terrorists
    • Former Employees
    • Domestic Intelligence Services
    • Current Employees (malicious and accidental)

    Benefits of an incident management program

    Effective incident management will help you do the following:

    Improve efficacy
    Develop structured processes to increase process consistency across the incident response team and the program as a whole. Expose operational weak points and transition teams from firefighting to innovating.

    Improve threat detection, prevention, analysis, and response
    Enhance your pressure posture through a structured and intelligence-driven incident handling and remediation framework.

    Improve visibility and information sharing
    Promote both internal and external information sharing to enable good decision making.

    Create and clarify accountability and responsibility
    Establish a clear level of accountability throughout the incident response program, and ensure role responsibility for all tasks and processes involved in service delivery.

    Control security costs
    Effective incident management operations will provide visibility into your remediation processes, enabling cost savings from misdiagnosed issues and incident reduction.

    Identify opportunities for continuous improvement
    Increase visibility into current performance levels and accurately identify opportunities for continuous improvement with a holistic measurement program.

    Impact

    Short term:
    • Streamlined security incident management program.
    • Formalized and structured response process.
    • Comprehensive list of operational gaps and initiatives.
    • Detailed response runbooks that predefine necessary operational protocol.
    • Compliance and audit adherence.
    Long term:
    • Reduced incident costs and remediation time.
    • Increased operational collaboration between prevention, detection, analysis, and response efforts.
    • Enhanced security pressure posture.
    • Improved communication with executives about relevant security risks to the business.
    • Preserved reputation and brand equity.

    Incident management is essential for organizations of any size

    Your incidents may differ, but a standard response ensures practical security.

    Certain regulations and laws require incident response to be a mandatory process in organizations.

    Compliance Standard Examples Description
    Federal Information Security Modernization Act (FISMA)
    • Organizations must have “procedures for detecting, reporting, and responding to security incidents” (2002).
    • They must also “inform operators of agency information systems about current and potential information security threats and vulnerabilities.”
    Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
    • “Organizations must: (i) establish an operational incident handling capability for organizational information systems that includes adequate preparation, detection, analysis, containment, recovery, and user response activities.”
    Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS v3)
    • 12.5.3: “Establish, document, and distribute security incident response and escalation procedures to ensure timely and effective handling of all situations.”
    Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)
    • 164.308: Response and Reporting – “Identify and respond to suspected or known security incidents; mitigate, to the extent practicable, harmful effects of security incidents that are known to the covered entity; and document security incidents and their outcomes.”

    Security incident management is applicable to all verticals

    Examples:
    • Finance
    • Insurance
    • Healthcare
    • Public administration
    • Education services
    • Professional services
    • Scientific and technical services

    Maintain a holistic security operations program

    Legacy security operations centers (SOCs) fail to address gaps between data sources, network controls, and human capital. There is limited visibility and collaboration between departments, resulting in siloed decisions that do not support the best interests of the organization.

    Security operations is part of what Info-Tech calls a threat collaboration environment, where members must actively collaborate to address cyberthreats affecting the organization’s brand, business operation, and technology infrastructure on a daily basis.

    Prevent: Defense in depth is the best approach to protect against unknown and unpredictable attacks. Diligent patching and vulnerability management, endpoint protection, and strong human-centric security (amongst other tactics) are essential. Detect: There are two types of companies – those who have been breached and know it, and those who have been breached and don’t know it. Ensure that monitoring, logging, and event detection tools are in place and appropriate to your organizational needs.
    Analyze: Raw data without interpretation cannot improve security and is a waste of time, money, and effort. Establish a tiered operational process that not only enriches data but also provides visibility into your threat landscape. Respond: Organizations can’t rely on an ad hoc response anymore – don’t wait until a state of panic. Formalize your response processes in a detailed incident runbook to reduce incident remediation time and effort.

    Info-Tech’s incident response blueprint is one of four security operations initiatives

    Design and Implement a Vulnerability Management Program Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Vulnerability Tracking Tool
    • Vulnerability Scanning Tool RFP Template
    • Penetration Test RFP Template
    • Vulnerability Mitigation Process Template
    Integrate Threat Intelligence Into Your Security Operations Vulnerability Management
    Vulnerability management revolves around the identification, prioritization, and remediation of vulnerabilities. Vulnerability management teams hunt to identify which vulnerabilities need patching and remediating.
    • Threat Intelligence Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Threat Intelligence RACI Tool
    • Threat Intelligence Management Plan Template
    • Threat Intelligence Policy Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert Template
    • Threat Intelligence Alert and Briefing Cadence Schedule Template
    Develop Foundational Security Operations Processes Operations
    Security operations include the real-time monitoring and analysis of events based on the correlation of internal and external data sources. This also includes incident escalation based on impact. These analysts are constantly tuning and tweaking rules and reporting thresholds to further help identify which indicators are most impactful during the analysis phase of operations.
    • Security Operations Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Operations Event Prioritization Tool
    • Security Operations Efficiency Calculator
    • Security Operations Policy
    • In-House vs. Outsourcing Decision-Making Tool
    • Seccrimewareurity Operations RACI Tool
    • Security Operations TCO & ROI Comparison Calculator
    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program Incident Response (IR)
    Effective and efficient management of incidents involves a formal process of analysis, containment, eradication, recovery, and post-incident activities. Incident response teams coordinate root cause and incident gathering while facilitating post-incident lessons learned. Incident response can provide valuable threat data that ties specific indicators to threat actors or campaigns.
    Security Incident Management Policy
    • Security Incident Management Plan
    • Incident Response Maturity Assessment Tool
    • Security Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Various Incident Management Runbooks

    Understand how incident response ties into related processes

    Info-Tech Resources:
    Business Continuity Plan Develop a Business Continuity Plan
    Disaster Recovery Plan Create a Right-Sized Disaster Recovery Plan
    Security Incident Management Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program
    Incident Management Incident and Problem Management
    Service Desk Standardize the Service Desk

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program – project overview

    1. Prepare 2. Operate 3. Maintain and Optimize
    Best-Practice Toolkit 1.1 Establish the Drivers, Challenges, and Benefits.

    1.2 Examine the Security Incident Landscape and Trends.

    1.3 Understand Your Security Obligations, Scope, and Boundaries.

    1.4 Gauge Your Current Process to Identify Gaps.

    1.5 Formalize the Security Incident Management Charter.

    1.6 Identify Key Players and Develop a Call Escalation Tree.

    1.7 Develop a Security Incident Management Policy.

    2.1 Understand the Incident Response Framework.

    2.2 Understand the Purpose of Runbooks.

    2.3 Prioritize the Development of Incident-Specific Runbooks.

    2.4 Develop Top-Priority Runbooks.

    2.5 Fill Out the Root-Cause Analysis Template.

    2.6 Customize the Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool to Standardize Useful Questions for Lessons-Learned Meetings.

    2.7 Complete the Security Incident Report Template.

    3.1 Conduct Tabletop Exercises.

    3.2 Initialize a Security Incident Management Metrics Program.

    3.3 Leverage Best Practices for Continuous Improvement.

    Guided Implementations Understand the incident response process, and define your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.

    Formalize the incident management charter, RACI, and incident management policy.
    Use the framework to develop a general incident management plan.

    Prioritize and develop top-priority runbooks.
    Develop and facilitate tabletop exercises.

    Create an incident management metrics program, and assess the success of the incident management program.
    Onsite Workshop Module 1:
    Prepare for Incident Response
    Module 2:
    Handle Incidents
    Module 3:
    Review and Communicate Security Incidents
    Phase 1 Outcome:
  • Formalized stakeholder support
  • Security Incident Management Policy
  • Security Incident Management Charter
  • Call Escalation Tree
  • Phase 2 Outcome:
    • A generalized incident management plan
    • A prioritized list of incidents
    • Detailed runbooks for top-priority incidents
    Phase 3 Outcome:
    • A formalized tracking system for benchmarking security incident metrics.
    • Recommendations for optimizing your security incident management processes.

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities
    • Kick off and introductions.
    • High-level overview of weekly activities and outcomes.
    • Understand the benefits of security incident response management.
    • Formalize stakeholder support.
    • Assess your current process, obligations, and scope.
    • Develop RACI chart.
    • Define impact and scope.
    • Identify key players for the threat escalation protocol.
    • Develop a security incident response policy.
    • Develop a general security incident response plan.
    • Prioritize incident-specific runbook development.
    • Understand the incident response process.
    • Develop general and incident-specific call escalation trees.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your top-priority incidents (e.g. ransomware).
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Develop specific runbooks for your next top-priority incidents:
      • Detect the incident.
      • Analyze the incident.
      • Contain the incident.
      • Eradicate the root cause.
      • Recover from the incident.
      • Conduct post-incident analysis and communication.
    • Determine key metrics to track and report.
    • Develop post-incident activity documentation.
    • Understand best practices for both internal and external communication.
    • Finalize key deliverables created during the workshop.
    • Present the security incident response program to key stakeholders.
    • Workshop executive presentation and debrief.
    • Finalize main deliverables.
    • Schedule subsequent Analyst Calls.
    • Schedule feedback call.
    Deliverables
    • Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary
    • Security Incident Management RACI Tool
    • Security Incident Management Policy
    • General incident management plan
    • Security Incident Management Runbook
    • Development prioritization
    • Prioritized list of runbooks
    • Understanding of incident handling process
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Incident-specific runbooks for two incidents (including threat escalation criteria and Visio workflow)
    • Discussion points for review with response team
    • Security Incident Metrics Tool
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Post-Incident Report Analysis Template
    • Root Cause Analysis Template
    • Post-Incident Review Questions Tracking Tool
    • Communication plans
    • Workshop summary documentation
  • All final deliverables
  • Measured value for Guided Implementations

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice – it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Purpose Measured Value
    Section 1: Prepare

    Understand the need for an incident response program.
    Develop your incident response policy and plan.
    Develop classifications around incidents.
    Establish your program implementation roadmap.

    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates: 2 FTEs*2 days*$80,000/year = $1,280
    Time, value, and resources saved using our classification guidance and templates:
    2 FTEs*5 days*$80,000/year = $3,200

    Section 2: Operate

    Prioritize runbooks and develop the processes to create your own incident response program:

  • Detect
  • Analyze
  • Contain
  • Eradicate
  • Recover
  • Post-Incident Activity
  • Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    4 FTEs*10 days*$80,000/year = $12,800 (if done internally)

    Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance:
    1 consultant*15 days*$2,000/day = $30,000 (if done by third party)
    Section 3: Maintain and Optimize Develop methods of proper reporting and create templates for communicating incident response to key parties. Time, value, and resources saved using our guidance, templates, and tabletop exercises:
    2 FTEs*3 days*$80,000/year = $1,920
    Total Costs To just get an incident response program off the ground. $49,200

    Insurance company put incident response aside; executives were unhappy

    Organization implemented ITIL, but formal program design became less of a priority and turned more ad hoc.

    Situation

    • Ad hoc processes created management dissatisfaction around the organization’s ineffective responses to data breaches.
    • Because of the lack of formal process, an entirely new security team needed to be developed, costing people their positions.

    Challenges

    • Lack of criteria to categorize and classify security incidents.
    • Need to overhaul the long-standing but ineffective program means attempting to change mindsets, which can be time consuming.
    • Help desk is not very knowledgeable on security.
    • New incident response program needs to be in alignment with data classification policy and business continuity.
    • Lack of integration with MSSP’s ticketing system.

    Next steps:

    • Need to get stakeholder buy-in for a new program.
    • Begin to establish classification/reporting procedures.

    Follow this case study to Phase 1

    Phase 1

    Prepare

    Develop and Implement a Security Incident Management Program

    Phase 1: Prepare

    PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3
    Prepare Operate Optimize

    This phase walks you through the following activities:

    1.1 Establish the drivers, challenges, and benefits.
    1.2 Examine the security incident landscape and trends.
    1.3 Understand your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    1.4 Gauge your current process to identify gaps.
    1.5 Formalize a security incident management charter.
    1.6 Identify key players and develop a call escalation tree.
    1.7 Develop a security incident management policy.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • CISO
    • Security team
    • IT staff
    • Business leaders

    Outcomes of this phase

    • Formalized stakeholder support.
    • Security incident management policy.
    • Security incident management charter.
    • Call escalation tree.

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Prepare for Incident Response
    Proposed Time to Completion: 3 Weeks
    Step 1.1-1.3 Understand Incident Response Step 1.4-1.7 Begin Developing Your Program
    Start with an analyst kick-off call:
  • Discuss your current incident management status.
  • Review findings with analyst:
  • Review documents.
  • Then complete these activities…
    • Establish your security obligations, scope, and boundaries.
    • Identify the drivers, challenges, and benefits of formalized incident response.
    • Review any existing documentation.
    Then complete these activities…
    • Discuss further incident response requirements.
    • Identify key players for escalation and notifications.
    • Develop the policy.
    • Develop the plan.

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Maturity Checklist ‒ Preliminary Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool

    With these tools & templates:
    Security Incident Management Policy
    Security Incident Management Plan
    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    Ready-made incident response solutions often contain too much coverage: too many irrelevant cases that are not applicable to the organization are accounted for, making it difficult to sift through all the incidents to find the ones you care about. Develop specific incident use cases that correspond with relevant incidents to quickly identify the response process and eliminate ambiguity when handled by different individuals.

    Ice breaker: What is a security incident for your organization?

    1.1 Whiteboard Exercise – 60 minutes

    How do you classify various incident types between service desk, IT/infrastructure, and security?

    • Populate sticky notes with various incidents and assign them to the appropriate team.
      • Who owns the remediation? When are other groups involved? What is the triage/escalation process?
      • What other groups need to be notified (e.g. cyber insurance, Legal, HR, PR)?
      • Are there dependencies among incidents?
      • What are we covering in the scope of this project?

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}396|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $59,399 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 66 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Service Management
    • Parent Category Link: /service-management
    • Organizations often don’t understand which technical services affect user-facing services.
    • Organizations lack clarity around ownership of responsibilities for service delivery.
    • Organizations are vulnerable to change-related incidents when they don’t have insight into service dependencies and their business impact.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Even IT professionals underestimate the effort and the complexity of technical components required to deliver a service.
    • Info-Tech’s methodology promotes service orientation among technical teams by highlighting how their work affects the value of user-facing services.
    • CIOs can use the technical part of the catalog as a tool to articulate the value, dependencies, and constraints of services to business leaders.

    Impact and Result

    • Extend the user-facing service catalog to document the people, processes, and technology required to deliver user-facing services.
    • Bring transparency to how services are delivered to better articulate IT’s capabilities and strengthen IT-business alignment.
    • Increase IT’s ability to assess the impact of changes, make informed decisions, and mitigate change-related risks.
    • Respond to incidents and problems in the IT environment with more agility due to reduced diagnosis time for issues.

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should build the technical components of your service catalog, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Launch the project

    Build a strong foundation for the project to increase the chances of success.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 1: Launch the Project
    • Service Catalog Extension Project Charter
    • Service Catalog Extension Training Deck

    2. Identify service-specific technologies

    Identify which technologies are specific to certain services.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 2: Identify Service-Specific Technology
    • IT Service Catalog

    3. Identify underpinning technologies

    Determine which technologies underpin the existence of user-facing services.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 3: Identify Underpinning Services

    4. Map the people and processes to the technologies they support

    Document the roles and responsibilities required to deliver each user-facing service.

    • Create an IT View of the Service Catalog – Phase 4: Determine People & Process
    • Service Definitions: Visual Representations
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Launch the Project

    The Purpose

    Build a foundation to kick off the project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A carefully selected team of project participants.

    Identified stakeholders and metrics.

    Activities

    1.1 Create a communication plan

    1.2 Complete the training deck

    Outputs

    Project charter

    Understanding of the process used to complete the definitions

    2 Identify Service-Specific Technologies and Underpinning Technologies

    The Purpose

    Determine the technologies that support the user-facing services.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of what is required to run a service.

    Activities

    2.1 Determine service-specific technology categories

    2.2 Identify service-specific technologies

    2.3 Determine underpinning technologies

    Outputs

    Logical buckets of service-specific technologies makes it easier to identify them

    Identified technologies

    Identified underpinning services and technologies

    3 Identify People and Processes

    The Purpose

    Discover the roles and responsibilities required to deliver each user-facing service.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understanding of what is required to deliver each user-facing service.

    Activities

    3.1 Determine roles required to deliver services based on organizational structure

    3.2 Document the services

    Outputs

    Mapped responsibilities to each user-facing service

    Completed service definition visuals

    4 Complete the Service Definition Chart and Visual Diagrams

    The Purpose

    Create a central hub (database) of all the technical components required to deliver a service.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Single source of information where IT can see what is required to deliver each service.

    Ability to leverage the extended catalog to benefit the organization.

    Activities

    4.1 Document all the previous steps in the service definition chart and visual diagrams

    4.2 Review service definition with team and subject matter experts

    Outputs

    Completed service definition visual diagrams and completed catalog

    Don't try this at home

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    Brilliant little and very amusing way to deal with a scammer.

    But do not copy this method as it will actually reveal quite a bit and confirm that your email is valid and active.

    Click to watch Joe Lycett

     

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}145|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.5/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $21,919 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 13 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Development
    • Parent Category Link: /development
    • Product owners must bridge the gap between the customers, operations, and delivery to ensure products continuously deliver increasing value.
    • Product owners are often assigned to projects or product delivery without proper support, guidance, or alignment.
    • In many organizations, the product owner role is not well-defined, serves as a proxy for stakeholder ownership, and lacks reinforcement of the key skills needed to be successful.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    A product owner is the CEO for their product. Successful product management starts with empowerment and accountability. Product owners own the vision, roadmap, and value realization for their product or family aligned to enterprise goals and priorities.

    • Product and service ownership share the same foundation - underlying capabilities and best practices to own and improve a product or service are identical for both roles. Use the terms that make the most sense for your culture.
    • Product owners represent three primary perspectives: Business (externally facing), Technical (systems and tools), or Operational (manual processes). Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.
    • Product owners are operating under an incomplete understanding of the capabilities needed to succeed. Most product/service owners lack a complete picture of the needed capabilities, skills, and activities to successfully perform their roles.

    Impact and Result

    • Create a culture of product management trust and empowerment with product owners aligned to your operational structure and product needs.
    • Promote and develop true Agile skills among your product owners and family managers.
    • Implement Info-Tech’s product owner capability model to define the role expectations and provide a development path for product owners.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Storyboard – Establish a culture of success for product management and mature product owner capabilities.

    Strengthen the product owner role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

  • Establish a foundation for empowerment and success.
  • Assign and align product owners with products and stakeholders.
  • Mature product owner capabilities and skills.
    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Storyboard

    2. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment – Determine your readiness for a product-centric culture based on Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G model.

    Using Info-Tech’s CLAIM model, quickly determine your organization’s strengths and weaknesses preparing for a product culture. Use the heat map to identify key areas.

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment

    3. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook – Playbook for product owners and product managers.

    Use the blueprint exercises to build your personal product owner playbook. You can also use the workbook to capture exercise outcomes.

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook

    4. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook – Workbook for product owners and product managers.

    Use this workbook to capture exercise outcomes and transfer them to your Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook (optional).

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook

    5. Mature and Scale Product Ownership Proficiency Assessment – Determine your current proficiency and improvement areas.

    Product owners need to improve their core capabilities and real Agile skills. The assessment radar will help identify current proficiency and growth opportunities.

    • Mature and Scale Product Ownership Proficiency Assessment
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Establish the foundation for product ownership

    The Purpose

    Establish the foundation for product ownership.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Product owner playbook with role clarity and RACI.

    Activities

    1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management.

    1.2 Define your product management roles and names.

    1.3 Assess your product management readiness.

    1.4 Identify your primary product owner perspective.

    1.5 Define your product owner RACI.

    Outputs

    Enablers and blockers

    Role definitions.

    Product culture readiness

    Product owner perspective mapping

    Product owner RACI

    2 Align product owners to products

    The Purpose

    Align product owners to products.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Assignment of resources to open products.

    A stakeholder management strategy.

    Activities

    2.1 Assign resources to your products and families.

    2.2 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers.

    2.3 Group stakeholders into categories.

    2.4 Prioritize your stakeholders.

    Outputs

    Product resource assignment

    Stakeholder management strategy

    Stakeholder management strategy

    Stakeholder management strategy

    3 Mature product owner capabilities

    The Purpose

    Mature product owner capabilities.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    Assess and mature product owner capabilities

    Activities

    3.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency.

    3.2 Assess your vison capability proficiency.

    3.3 Assess your leadership capability proficiency.

    3.4 Assess your PLM capability proficiency.

    3.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency.

    3.6 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value.

    Outputs

    Real Agile skill proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Business value drivers and sources of value

    Further reading

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    Strengthen the product owner’s role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Executive Brief

    Analyst Perspective

    Empower product owners throughout your organization.

    Hans Eckman

    Whether you manage a product or service, the fundamentals of good product ownership are the same. Organizations need to focus on three key elements of product ownership in order to be successful.

    • Create an environment of empowerment and service leadership to reinforce product owners and product family managers as the true owners of the vision, improvement, and realized the value of their products.
    • Align product and product family owner roles based on operational alignment and the groups defined when scaling product management.
    • Develop your product owners to improve the quality of roadmaps, alignment to enterprise goals, and profit and loss (P&L) for each product or service.

    By focusing the attention of the teammates serving in product owner or service owner roles, your organization will deliver value sooner and respond to change more effectively.

    Hans Eckman

    Principal Research Director – Application Delivery and Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Product owners must bridge the gap between the customers, operations, and delivery to ensure products continuously deliver increasing value.

    Product owners are often assigned to projects or product delivery without proper support, guidance, or alignment.

    In many organizations the product owner role is not well-defined, serves as a proxy for stakeholder ownership, and lacks reinforcement of the key skills needed to be successful.

    Common Obstacles

    Organizations have poor alignment or missing product owners between lines of business, IT, and operations.

    Product owners are aligned to projects and demand management rather than long-term strategic product ownership.

    Product families are not properly defined, scaled, and supported within organizations.

    Individuals in product owner roles have an incomplete understanding of needed capabilities and lack a development path.

    Info-Tech's Approach

    Create a culture of product management trust and empowerment with product owners aligned to your operational structure and product needs.

    Promote and develop true Agile skills among your product owners and family managers.

    Implement Info-Tech’s product owner capability model to define the role expectations and provide a development path for product owners.

    Extend product management success using Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision and Deliver Digital Products at Scale.

    Info-Tech Insight

    There is no single correct approach to product ownership. Product ownership must be tuned and structured to meet the delivery needs of your organization and the teams it serves.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Product owners make the final decision

    • Establish a foundation for empowerment and success
    • Assign product owners and align with products and stakeholders
    • Mature product owner capabilities and skills
    Product Owner capabilities: Vision, Product Lifecycle Management, Leadership, Value Realization

    The Info-Tech difference

    1. Assign product owners where product decisions are needed, not to match org charts or delivery teams. The product owner has the final word on product decisions.
    2. Organize product owners into related teams to ensure product capabilities delivered are aligned to enterprise strategy and goals.
    3. Shared products and services must support the needs of many product owners with conflicting priorities. Shared service product owners must map and prioritize demand to align to enterprise priorities and goals.
    4. All product owners share the same capability model.

    Insight summary

    There is no single correct approach to product ownership

    Successful product management starts with empowerment and accountability. Product owners own the vision, roadmap, and value realization for their product or family aligned to enterprise goals and priorities.

    Phase 1 insight

    Product owners represent three primary perspectives: business (external-facing), technical (systems and tools), or operational (manual processes). Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.

    Phase 2 insight

    Start with your operational grouping of products and families, identifying where an owner is needed. Then, assign people to the products and families. The owner does not define the product or family.

    Phase 3 insight

    Product owners are operating under an incomplete understanding of the capabilities needed to succeed. Most product/service owners lack a complete picture of the needed capabilities, skills, and activities to successfully perform their roles.

    Product and service ownership share the same foundation

    The underlying capabilities and best practices to own and improve a product or service are identical for both roles. Use the terms that make the most sense for your culture.

    Map product owner roles to your existing job titles

    Identify where product management is needed and align expectations with existing roles. Successful product management does not require a dedicated job family.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements. Shows difference of value for project life-cycles, hybrid life-cycles, and product life-cycles.

    Projects within products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    You go through a period or periods of project-like development to build a version of an application or product.

    You also have parallel services along with your project development, which encompass the more product-based view. These may range from basic support and maintenance to full-fledged strategy teams or services like sales and marketing.

    Product and services owners share the same foundation and capabilities

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. The term “product” is used for consistency but would apply to services, as well.

    Product = Service

    Common foundations: Focus on continuous improvement, ROI, and value realization. Clear vision, goals, roadmap, and backlog.

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Recognize the product owner perspectives

    The 3 product owner perspectives. 1. Business: Customer-facing, value-generating. 2. Technical: IT systems and tools. 3. Operations: Keep-the-lights-on processes.

    Product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Match your product management role definitions to your product family levels

    Product ownership exists at the different operational tiers or levels in your product hierarchy. This does not imply a management relationship.

    Product portfolio

    Groups of product families within an overall value stream or capability grouping.

    Project portfolio manager

    Product family

    A collection of related products. Products can be grouped along architectural, functional, operational, or experiential patterns.

    Product family manager

    Product

    Single product composed of one or more applications and services.

    Product owner

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define the current roles that will perform the product management function or define consistent role names to product owners and managers.

    Align enterprise value through product families

    Product families are operational groups based on capabilities or business functions. Product family managers translate goals, priorities, and constraints so they are actionable at the next level. Product owners prioritize changes to enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals.

    Understand special circumstances

    In Deliver Digital Products at Scale, products were grouped into families using Info-Tech’s five scaling patterns. Assigning owners to Enterprise Applications and Shared Services requires special consideration.

    Value stream alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products

    Enterprise applications

    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > Modules Supporting: Job board, healthcare administrator

    Shared Services

    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools

    Technical

    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network

    Organizational alignment

    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure is no longer needed because the management team owns the product management role

    Map sources of demand and influencers

    Use the stakeholder analysis to define the key stakeholders and sources of demand for enterprise applications and shared services. Extend your mapping to include their stakeholders and influencers to uncover additional sources of demand and prioritization.

    Map of key stakeholders for enterprise applications and shared services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product owner map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support and operate your product directly.

    Combine your product owner map with your stakeholder map to create a comprehensive view of influencers.

    The primary value of the product owner is to fill the backlog with the highest ROI opportunities aligned with enterprise goals.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The product owner owns the direction of the product.

    • Roadmap - Where are we going?
    • Backlog - What changes are needed to get there?
    • Product review - Did we get close enough?

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    Product strategy includes: Vision, Goals, Roadmap, backlog and Release plan.

    Product family owners are more strategic

    When assigning resources, recognize that product family owners will need to be more strategic with their planning and alignment of child families and products.

    Product family owners are more strategic. They require a roadmap that is strategic, goal-based, high-level, and flexible.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Roadmaps for your product family are, by design, less detailed. This does not mean they aren’t actionable! Your product family roadmap should be able to communicate clear intentions around the future delivery of value in both the near and long term.

    Connecting your product family roadmaps to product roadmaps

    Your product and product family roadmaps should be connected at an artifact level that is common between both. Typically, this is done with capabilities, but it can be done at a more granular level if an understanding of capabilities isn’t available.

    Product family roadmap versus Product Roadmaps.

    Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

    Stakeholder management, Product lifecycle, Project delivery, Operational support.

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner can accomplish.

    Product owners operate within a network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Without a stakeholder strategy, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers, to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Stakeholder network map defines the influence landscape your product operates. Connectors determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support and operate your product directly.

    Use “connectors” to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

    Being successful at Agile is more than about just doing Agile

    The following represents the hard skills needed to “Do Agile”:

    Being successful at Agile needs 4 hard skills: 1. Engineering skills, 2. Technician Skills, 3. Framework/Process skills, 4. Tools skills.
    • Engineering skills. These are the skills and competencies required for building brand-new valuable software.
    • Technician skills. These are the skills and competencies required for maintaining and operating the software delivered to stakeholders.
    • Framework/Process skills. These are the specific knowledge skills required to support engineering or technician skills.
    • Tools skills. This represents the software that helps you deliver other software.

    While these are important, they are not the whole story. To effectively deliver software, we believe in the importance of being Agile over simply doing Agile.

    Adapted from: “Doing Agile” Is Only Part of the Software Delivery Pie

    Why focus on core skills?

    They are the foundation to achieve business outcomes

    Skills, actions, output and outcomes

    The right skills development is only possible with proper assessment and alignment against outcomes.

    Focus on these real Agile skills

    Agile skills

    • Accountability
    • Collaboration
    • Comfort with ambiguity
    • Communication
    • Empathy
    • Facilitation
    • Functional decomposition
    • Initiative
    • Process discipline
    • Resilience

    Product capabilities deliver value

    As a product owner, you are responsible for managing these facets through your capabilities and activities.

    The core product and value stream consists of: Funding - Product management and governance, Business functionality - Stakeholder and relationship management, and Technology - Product delivery.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    It is easy to lose sight of what matters when we look at a product from a single point of view. Despite what "The Agile Manifesto" says, working software is not valuable without the knowledge and support that people need in order to adopt, use, and maintain it. If you build it, they will not come. Product owners must consider the needs of all stakeholders when designing and building products.

    Recognize product owner knowledge gaps

    Pulse survey of product owners

    Pulse survey of product owners. Graph shows large percentage of respondents have alignment to common agile definition of product owners. Yet a significant perception gap in P&L, delivery, and analytics.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Less than 15% of respondents identified analytics or financial management as a key component of product ownership.
    2. Assess your product owner’s capabilities and understanding to develop a maturity plan.

    Source: Pulse Survey (N=18)

    Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

    Unfortunately, most product owners operate with incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization.

    Product Owner capabilities: Vision, Product Lifecycle Management, Leadership, Value Realization

    Vision

    • Market Analysis
    • Business Alignment
    • Product Roadmap

    Leadership

    • Soft Skills
    • Collaboration
    • Decision Making

    Product Lifecycle Management

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run

    Value Realization

    • KPIs
    • Financial Management
    • Business Model

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Vision predicts impact of Value realization. Value realization provides input to vision

    Your vision informs and aligns what goals and capabilities are needed to fulfill your product or product family vision and align with enterprise goals and priorities. Each item on your roadmap should have corresponding KPIs or OKRs to know how far you moved the value needle. Value realization measures how well you met your target, as well as the impacts on your business value canvas and cost model.

    Product lifecycle management builds trust with Leadership. Leadership improves quality of Product lifecycle management.

    Your leadership skills improve collaborations and decisions when working with your stakeholders and product delivery teams. This builds trust and improves continued improvements to the entire product lifecycle. A product owner’s focus should always be on finding ways to improve value delivery.

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Leadership enhances Vision. Vision Guides Product Lifecycle Management. Product Lifecycle Management delivers Value Realization. Leadership enhances Value Realization

    Develop product owner capabilities

    Each capability: Vision, Product lifecycle management, Value realization and Leadership has 3 components needed for successful product ownership.

    Avoid common capability gaps

    Vision

    • Focusing solely on backlog grooming (tactical only)
    • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
    • Operational support and execution
    • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
    • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

    Leadership

    • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
    • Using a command-and-control approach
    • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
    • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
    • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

    Product lifecycle management

    • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
    • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
    • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
    • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
    • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

    Value realization

    • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
    • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
    • Skipping business plans and financial models
    • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
    • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

    Your product vision is your North Star

    It's ok to dream a little!

    Who is the target customer, what is the key benefit, what do they need, what is the differentiator

    Adapted from: Crossing the Chasm

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A product vision shouldn’t be so far out that it doesn’t feel real or so short-term that it gets bogged down in minutiae and implementation details. Finding the right balance will take some trial and error and will be different for each organization.

    Leverage the product canvas to state and inform your product vision

    Leverage the product Canvas to state and inform your product vision. Includes: Product name, Tracking info, Vision, List of business objectives or goals, Metrics used to measure value realization, List of groups who consume the product/service, and List of key resources or stakeholders.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    Use a balanced value to establish a common definition of goals and value

    Value drivers are strategic priorities aligned to our enterprise strategy and translated through our product families. Each product and change has an impact on the value driver helping us reach our enterprise goals.

    Importance of the value driver multiplied by the Impact of value score is equal to the Value score.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your value drivers and impact helps estimate the expected value of roadmap items, prioritize roadmap and backlog items, and identify KPIs and OKRs to measure value realization and actual impact.

    Use CLAIM to guide your journey

    Culture, Learning, Automation, Integrated teams, Metrics and governance.

    Value is best created by self-managing teams who deliver in frequent, short increments supported by leaders who coach them through challenges.

    Product-centric delivery and Agile are a radical change in how people work and think. Structured, facilitated learning is required throughout the transformation to help leaders and practitioners make the shift.

    Product management, Agile, and DevOps have inspired SDLC tools that have become a key part of delivery practices and work management.

    Self-organizing teams that cross business, delivery, and operations are essential to gain the full benefits of product-centric delivery.

    Successful implementations require the disciplined use of metrics that support developing better teams

    Communicate reasons for changes and how they will be implemented

    Five elements of communicating change: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us to do it? What will the role be for each department individual?

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message; that is, a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, and that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The organizational change message should:

    • Explain why the change is needed.
    • Summarize what will stay the same.
    • Highlight what will be left behind.
    • Emphasize what is being changed.
    • Explain how the change will be implemented.
    • Address how change will affect various roles in the organization.
    • Discuss the staff’s role in making the change successful.

    Info-Tech’s methodology for mature and scale product ownership

    Phase steps

    1. Establish the foundation for product ownership

    Step 1.1 Establish an environment for product owner success

    Step 1.2 Establish your product ownership model

    2. Align product owners to products

    Step 2.1 Assign product owners to products

    Step 2.2 Manage stakeholder influence

    3. Mature product owner capabilities

    Step 3.1 Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    Step 3.2 Mature product owner capabilities

    Phase outcomes

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    3.2 Mature product owner capabilities

    3.2.1 Assess your vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals.

    Key deliverable

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook

    Capture and organize the outcomes of the activities in the workbook.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook

    The workbook helps organize and communicate the outcomes of each activity.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment

    Determine your level of mastery of real Agile skills and product owner capabilities.


    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    • Competent product owner who can support teams operating in any delivery methodology.
    • Representative viewpoint and input from the technical and operational product owner perspectives.
    • Products aligned to business needs and committed work are achievable.
    • Single point of contact with a business representative.
    • Acceptance of product owner role outside the Scrum teams.

    Business benefits

    • Better alignment to enterprise goals, vision, and outcomes.
    • Improved coordination with stakeholders.
    • Quantifiable value realization tied to vision.
    • Product decisions made at the right time and with the right input.
    • Product owner who has the appropriate business, operations, and technical knowledge.

    Measure the value of this blueprint

    Align product owner metrics to product delivery and value realization.

    Member outcome

    Suggested Metric

    Estimated impact

    Increase business application satisfaction Satisfaction of business applications (CIO BV Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Increase effectiveness of application portfolio management Effectiveness of application portfolio management (M&G Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Increase importance and effectiveness of application portfolio Importance and effectiveness to business (APA Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Increase satisfaction of support of business operations Support to business (CIO BV Diagnostic) 20% increase within one year after implementation
    Successfully deliver committed work (productivity) Number of successful deliveries; burndown Reduction in project implementation overrun by 20%

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    "Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful."

    Guided Implementation

    "Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track."

    Workshop

    "We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place."

    Consulting

    "Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project"

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks are used throughout all four options.

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Establish the Foundation for Product Ownership

    Phase 2 Align Product Owners to Products

    Phase 3 Mature Product Owner Capabilities

    • Call #1:
      Scope objectives and your specific challenges
    • Call #2:
      Step 1.1 Establish an environment for product owner success
      Step 1.2 Establish your product ownership model
    • Call #3:
      Step 2.1 Assign product owners to products
    • Call #4:
      Step 2.2 Manage stakeholder influence
    • Call #5:
      Step 3.1 Assess your Agile product owner readiness
    • Call #6:
      Step 3.2 Mature product owner capabilities

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is between 8 and 12 calls over the course of 4 to 6 months.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Phase 1

    Phase 2

    Phase 3

    Activities

    Establish the Foundation for Product Ownership

    Step 1.1 Establish an environment for product owner success

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    Step 1.2 Establish your product ownership model

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    Align Product Owners to Products

    Step 2.1 Assign product owners to products

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    Step 2.2 Manage stakeholder influence

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Mature Product Owner Capabilities

    Step 3.1 Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    Step 3.2 Mature product owner capabilities=

    3.2.1 Assess your Vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your Leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your Value Realization capability proficiency

    Deliverables

    1. Enablers and blockers
    2. Role definitions
    3. Product culture readiness
    4. Product owner perspective mapping
    5. Product owner RACI
    1. Product resource assignment
    2. Stakeholder management strategy
    1. Real Agile skill proficiency assessment
    2. Info-Tech’s product owner capability model proficiency assessment
    3. Business value drivers and sources of value

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Understand Agile fundamentals, principles, and practices so you can apply them effectively in your organization.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Application portfolio management

    APM Research Center

    See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management

    Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Build an Application Department Strategy

    Delivering value starts with embracing what your department can do.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Empower the business to implement its own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Value, delivery metrics, estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Organizational design and performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic Workforce Plan

    Have the right people in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New Organizational Structure

    Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Don’t just measure engagement, act on it.

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Phase 1

    Establish the Foundation for Product Ownership

    Phase 1: Establish an environment for product owner success, Establish your product ownership model

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 1.1

    Establish an environment for product owner success

    Activities

    1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    Establish the foundation for product ownership

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Enablers and blockers
    • Role definitions

    Empower product owners as the true owners of their product

    Product ownership requires decision-making authority and accountability for the value realization from those decisions. POs are more than a proxy for stakeholders, aggregators for changes, and the communication of someone else’s priorities.

    “A Product Owner in its most beneficial form acts like an Entrepreneur, like a 'mini-CEO'. The Product Owner is someone who really 'owns' the product.”

    – Robbin Schuurman,
    “Tips for Starting Technical Product Managers”

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Implement Info-Tech’s Product Owner Capability Model to help empower and hold product owners accountable for the maturity and success of their product. The product owner must understand how their product fits into the organization’s mission and strategy in order to align to enterprise value.

    Product and service owners share the same foundation and capabilities

    For the purpose of this blueprint, product/service and product owner/service owner are used interchangeably. The term “product” is used for consistency but applies to services, as well.

    Product = Service

    Common foundations: Focus on continuous improvement, ROI, and value realization. Clear vision, goals, roadmap, and backlog.

    “Product” and “service” are terms that each organization needs to define to fit its culture and customers (internal and external). The most important aspect is consistent use and understanding of:

    • External products
    • Internal products
    • External services
    • Internal services
    • Products as a service (PaaS)
    • Productizing services (SaaS)

    Define product ownership to match your culture and customers

    Characteristics of a discrete product:

    • Has end users or consumers
    • Delivers quantifiable value
    • Evolves or changes over time
    • Has predictable delivery
    • Has definable boundaries
    • Has a cost to produce and operate
    • Has a discrete backlog and roadmap of improvements

    What does not need a product owner?

    • Individual features
    • Transactions
    • Unstructured data
    • One-time solutions
    • Non-repeatable processes
    • Solutions that have no users or consumers
    • People or teams

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Products are long-term endeavors that don’t end after the project finishes.
    • Products mature and improve their ability to deliver value.
    • Products have a discrete backlog of changes to improve the product itself, separate from operational requests fulfilled by the product or service.

    Need help defining your products or services? Download our blueprint Deliver Digital Products at Scale.

    Connect roadmaps to value realization with KPIs

    Every roadmap item should have an expected realized value once it is implemented. The associate KPIs or OKRs determine if our goal was met. Any gap in value feedback back into the roadmap and backlog refinement.</p data-verified=

    " loading="lazy">

    Info-Tech Insight

    Every roadmap item should have an expected realized value once it is implemented. The associate KPIs or OKRs determine if our goal was met. Any gap in value feedback back into the roadmap and backlog refinement.

    Identify the differences between a project-centric and a product-centric organization

    Differences between Project centric and Product centric organizations in regards to: Funding, Prioritization, Accountability, Product management, Work allocation, and Capacity management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product delivery requires significant shifts in the way you complete development work and deliver value to your users. Make the changes that support improving end-user value and enterprise alignment.

    Projects can be a mechanism for funding product changes and improvements

    Projects lifecycle, hybrid lifecycle and product lifecycle. Period or periods of project development have parallel services that encompass a more product-based view.

    Projects withing products

    Regardless of whether you recognize yourself as a product-based or project-based shop, the same basic principles should apply.

    You go through a period or periods of project-like development to build a version of an application or product.

    You also have parallel services along with your project development, which encompasses a more product-based view. These may range from basic support and maintenance to full-fledged strategy teams or services like sales and marketing.

    Recognize common barriers to product management

    The transition to product ownership is a series of behavioral and cultural changes supported by processes and governance. It takes time and consistency to be successful.

    • Command and control structures
    • Lack of ownership and accountability
    • High instability in the market, demand, or organization
    • Lack of dedicated teams align to delivery, service, or product areas
    • Culture of one-off projects
    • Lack of identified and engaged stakeholders
    • Lack of customer exposure and knowledge

    Agile’s four core values

    “…while there is value in the items on the right, we value the items on the left more.”

    Source: “The Agile Manifesto”

    We value...

    We value being agile: Individuals and interactions, Working Software, Customer collaboration, Responding to change. Versus being prescriptive: Processes and tools, Comprehensive documentation, Contract negotiation, following a plan.

    Exercise 1.1.1 Define enablers and blockers of product management

    1 hour
    1. Identify and mitigate blockers of product management in your organization.
    2. What enablers will support strong product owners?
    3. What blockers will make the transition to product management harder?
    4. For each blocker, also define at least one mitigating step.
    Define enablers e.g. team culture. Define blockers and at least one mitigating step

    Output

    • Enablers and blockers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Align enterprise value through product families

    Product families are operational groups based on capabilities or business functions. Product family managers translate goals, priorities, and constraints so they are actionable at the next level. Product owners prioritize changes to enhance the capabilities that allow you to realize your product family. Enabling capabilities realize value and help reach your goals.

    Effective product delivery requires thinking about more than just a single product

    Good application and product management begins with strengthening good practices for a single or small set of applications, products, and services.

    Product portfolio

    Groups of product families within an overall value stream or capability grouping.

    Project portfolio manager

    Product family

    A collection of related products. Products can be grouped along architectural, functional, operational, or experiential patterns.

    Product family manager

    Product

    Single product composed of one or more applications and services.

    Product owner

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define the current roles that will perform the product management function or define consistent role names to product owners and managers.

    Exercise 1.1.2 Define your product management roles and names

    1-2 hour
    1. Identify the roles in which product management activities will be owned.
    2. Define a common set of role names and describe the role.
    3. Map the level of accountability for each role: Product or Product Family
    4. Product owner perspectives will be defined in the next step.

    Define roles, description and level of product accountability.

    Output

    • Role definitions

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Use CLAIM to guide your journey

    Culture, Learning, Automation, Integrated teams, Metrics and governance.

    Value is best created by self-managing teams who deliver in frequent, short increments supported by leaders who coach them through challenges.

    Product-centric delivery and Agile are a radical change in how people work and think. Structured, facilitated learning is required throughout the transformation to help leaders and practitioners make the shift.

    Product management, Agile, and DevOps have inspired SDLC tools that have become a key part of delivery practices and work management.

    Self-organizing teams that cross business, delivery, and operations are essential to gain the full benefits of product-centric delivery.

    Successful implementations require the disciplined use of metrics that support developing better teams

    Exercise 1.1.3 Assess your product management readiness

    1 hour
    1. Open and complete the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment in your Playbook or the provided Excel tool.
    2. Discuss high and low scores for each area to reach a consensus.
    3. Record your results in your Playbook.

    Assess your culture, learning, automation, Integrated teams, metrics and governance.

    Output

    • Assessment of product management readiness based on Info-Tech’s CLAIM+G model.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Readiness Assessment.

    Communicate reasons for changes and how they will be implemented

    Five elements of communicating change: What is the change? Why are we doing it? How are we going to go about it? How long will it take us to do it? What will the role be for each department individual?

    Leaders of successful change spend considerable time developing a powerful change message; that is, a compelling narrative that articulates the desired end state, and that makes the change concrete and meaningful to staff.

    The organizational change message should:

    Step 1.2

    Establish your product ownership model

    Activities

    1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    Establish the foundation for product ownership

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product owner perspective mapping
    • Product owner RACI

    Recognize the product owner perspectives

    The 3 product owner perspectives. 1. Business: Customer-facing, value-generating. 2. Technical: IT systems and tools. 3. Operations: Keep-the-lights-on processes.

    Product owners represent one of three primary perspectives. Although all share the same capabilities, how they approach their responsibilities is influenced by their primary perspective.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product owners must translate needs and constraints from their perspective into the language of their audience. Kathy Borneman, Digital Product Owner at SunTrust Bank, noted the challenges of finding a common language between lines of business and IT (e.g. what is a unit?).

    Identify and align to product owner perspectives to ensure product success

    Product owner perspectives

    The 3 product owner perspectives. 1. Business: Customer-facing, value-generating. 2. Technical: IT systems and tools. 3. Operations: Keep-the-lights-on processes.
    1. Each product owner perspective provides important feedback, demand, and support for the product.
    2. Where a perspective is represented by a distinct role, the perspective is managed with that product owner.
    3. If separate roles don’t exist, the product owner must evaluate their work using two or three perspectives.
    4. The ultimate success of a product, and therefore product owner, is meeting the end-user value of the business product owner, tool support of the technical product owner, and manual processing support of the operations product owner.

    Line of business (LOB) product owners

    LOB product owners focus on the products and services consumed by the organization’s external consumers and users. The role centers on the market needs, competitive landscape, and operational support to deliver products and services.

    Business perspective

    • Alignment to enterprise strategy and priorities
    • Growth: market penetration and/or revenue
    • Perception of product value
    • Quality, stability, and predictability
    • Improvement and innovation
    • P&L
    • Market threats and opportunities
    • Speed to market
    • Service alignment
    • Meet or exceed individual goals

    Relationship to Operations

    • Customer satisfaction
    • Speed of delivery and manual processing
    • Continuity

    Relationship to Technical

    • Enabler
    • Analysis and insight
    • Lower operating and support costs

    Technical product owners

    Technical product owners are responsible for the IT systems, tools, platforms, and services that support business operations. Often they are identified as application or platform managers.

    Technical perspective

    • Application, application suite, or group of applications
    • Core platforms and tools
    • Infrastructure and networking
    • Third-party technology services
    • Enable business operations
    • Direct-to-customer product or service
    • Highly interconnected
    • Need for continuous improvement
    • End-of-life management
    • Internal value proposition and users

    Relationship to Business

    • Direct consumers
    • End users
    • Source of funding

    Relationship to Operations

    • End users
    • Process enablement or automation
    • Support, continuity, and manual intervention

    Operations (service) product owners

    Operational product owners focus on the people, processes, and tools needed for manual processing and decisions when automation is not cost-effective. Operational product owners are typically called service owners due to the nature of their work.

    Operational perspective

    • Business enablement
    • Continuity
    • Problem, incident, issue resolution
    • Process efficiency
    • Throughput
    • Error/defect avoidance
    • Decision enablement
    • Waste reduction
    • Limit time in process
    • Disaster recovery

    Relationship to Business

    • Revenue enablement
    • Manual intervention and processing
    • End-user satisfaction

    Relationship to Technical

    • Process enabler
    • Performance enhancement
    • Threat of automation

    Exercise 1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1 hour
    1. Identify which product owner perspective represents your primary focus.
    2. Determine where the other perspectives need to be part of your product roadmap or if they are managed by other product owners.

    Identify product/service name, identify product owner perspective, determine if other perspectives need to be part of roadmap.

    Output

    • Identification of primary product owner perspective.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Realign differences between project managers and product owners

    Differences between Project Manager and Product Owners in regards to: Funding, Prioritization, Accountability, Product management, Work allocation, and Capacity management.

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Successful product owners understand and define the key milestones in their product delivery lifecycles. These need to be managed along with the product backlog and roadmap.

    Define key milestones and their product delivery life-cycles.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product ownership isn’t just about managing the product backlog and development cycles. Teams need to manage key milestones such as learning milestones, test releases, product releases, phase gates, and other organizational checkpoints.

    Define who manages each key milestone

    Key milestones must be proactively managed. If a project manager is not available, those responsibilities need to be managed by the product owner or Scrum Master. Start with responsibility mapping to decide which role will be responsible.

    Example milestones and Project Manager, Product Owner and Team Facilitator.

    *Scrum Master, Delivery Manager, Team Lead

    Exercise 1.2.2 Define your product owner RACI

    60 minutes
    1. Review your product and project delivery methodologies to identify key milestones (including approvals, gates, reviews, compliance checks, etc.). List each milestone on a flip chart or whiteboard.
    2. For each milestone, define who is accountable for the completion.
    3. For each milestone, define who is responsible for executing the milestone activity. (Who does the work that allows the milestone to be completed?)
    4. Review any responsibility and accountability gaps and identify opportunities to better support and execute your operating model.
    5. If you previously completed Deliver Digital Products at Scale , review and update your RACI in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Define: Milestones, Project Manager, Product/service owner, Team Facilitator, and Other roles.

    Output

    • Product owner RACI

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Phase 2

    Align Product Owners to Products

    Phase 2: Assign product owners to products, Manage stakeholder influence

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Step 2.1

    Assign product owners to products

    Activities

    2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    Align product owners to products

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Product resource assignment

    Match your product management role definitions to your product family levels

    Using the role definitions, you created in Exercise 1.1.2, determine which roles correspond to which levels of your product families.

    Product portfolio

    Groups of product families within an overall value stream or capability grouping.

    Project portfolio manager

    Product family

    A collection of related products. Products can be grouped along architectural, functional, operational, or experiential patterns.

    Product family manager

    Product

    Single product composed of one or more applications and services.

    Product owner

    Info-Tech Insight

    Define the current roles that will perform the product management function or define consistent role names to product owners and managers.

    Assign resources throughout your product families

    Project families are owned by a product manager. Product owners own each product that has a distinct backlog.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • Start by assigning resources to each product or product family box.
    • A product owner can be responsible for more than one product.
    • Ownership of more than one product does not mean they share the same backlog.
    • For help organizing your product families, please download Deliver Digital Products at Scale.

    Understand special circumstances

    In Deliver Digital Products at Scale , products were grouped into families using Info-Tech’s five scaling patterns. Assigning owners to Enterprise Applications and Shared Services requires special consideration.

    Value stream alignment

    • Business architecture
      • Value stream
      • Capability
      • Function
    • Market/customer segment
    • Line of business (LoB)
    • Example: Customer group > value stream > products

    Enterprise applications

    • Enabling capabilities
    • Enterprise platforms
    • Supporting apps
    • Example: HR > Workday/Peoplesoft > Modules Supporting: Job board, healthcare administrator

    Shared Services

    • Organization of related services into service family
    • Direct hierarchy does not necessarily exist within the family
    • Examples: End-user support and ticketing, workflow and collaboration tools

    Technical

    • Domain grouping of IT infrastructure, platforms, apps, skills, or languages
    • Often used in combination with Shared Services grouping or LoB-specific apps
    • Examples: Java, .NET, low-code, database, network

    Organizational alignment

    • Used at higher levels of the organization where products are aligned under divisions
    • Separation of product managers from organizational structure is no longer needed because the management team owns the product management role

    Map the source of demand to each product

    With enterprise applications and shared services, your demand comes from other product and service owners rather than end customers in a value stream.

    Enterprise applications

    • Primary demand comes from the operational teams and service groups using the platform.
    • Each group typically has processes and tools aligned to a module or portion of the overall platform.
    • Product owners determine end-user needs to assist with process improvement and automation.
    • Product family managers help align roadmap goals and capabilities across the modules and tools to ensure consistency and the alignment of changes.

    Shared services

    • Primary demand for shared services comes from other product owners and service managers whose solution or application is dependent on the shared service platform.
    • Families are grouped by related themes (e.g. workflow tools) to increase reusability, standard enterprise solutions, reduced redundancy, and consistent processes across multiple teams.
    • Product owners manage the individual applications or services within a family.

    Pattern: Enterprise applications

    A division or group delivers enabling capabilities and the team’s operational alignment maps directly to the modules/components of an enterprise application and other applications that support the specific business function.

    Workforce Management, Strategic HR, Talent Management, Core HR

    Example:

    • Human resources is one corporate function. Within HR, however, there are subfunctions that operate independently.
    • Each operational team is supported by one or more applications or modules within a primary HR system.
    • Even though the teams work independently, the information they manage is shared with, or ties into processes used by other teams. Coordination of efforts helps provide a higher level of service and consistency.

    For additional information about HRMS, please download Get the Most Out of Your HRMS.

    Assigning owners to enterprise applications

    Align your enterprise application owners to your operating teams that use the enterprise applications. Effectively, your service managers will align with your platform module owners to provide integrated awareness and planning.

    Family manager (top-level), Family managers (second-level) and Product owners.

    Pattern: Shared services

    Grouping by service type, knowledge area, or technology allows for specialization while families align service delivery to shared business capabilities.

    Grouping by service type, knowledge area, or technology allows for specialization while families align service delivery to shared business capabilities.

    Example:

    • Recommended for governance, risk, and compliance; infrastructure; security; end-user support; and shared platforms (workflow, collaboration, imaging/record retention). Direct hierarchies do not necessarily exist within the shared service family.
    • Service groupings are common for service owners (also known as support managers, operations managers, etc.).
    • End-user ticketing comes through a common request system, is routed to the team responsible for triage, and then is routed to a team for resolution.
    • Collaboration tools and workflow tools are enablers of other applications, and product families might support multiple apps or platforms delivering that shared capability.

    Assigning owners to shared services

    Assign owners by service type, knowledge area, or technology to provide alignment of shared business capabilities and common solutions.

    Family manager (top-level), Family managers (second-level) and Product owners.

    Map sources of demand and influencers

    Use the stakeholder analysis to define the key stakeholders and sources of demand for enterprise applications and shared services. Extend your mapping to include their stakeholders and influencers to uncover additional sources of demand and prioritization.

    Map of key stakeholders for enterprise applications and shared services.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your product owner map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Combine your product owner map with your stakeholder map to create a comprehensive view of influencers.

    Exercise 2.1.1 Assign resources to your products and families

    1-4 hours
    1. Use the product families you completed in Deliver Digital Products at Scale to determine which products and product families need a resource assigned. Where the same resource fills more than one role, they are the product owner or manager for each independently.
    2. Product families that are being managed as products (one backlog for multiple products) should have one owner until the family is split into separate products later.
    3. For each product and family, define the following:
      • Who is the owner (role or person)?
      • Is ownership clearly defined?
      • Are there other stakeholders who make decisions for the product?
    4. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook on the Product Owner Mapping worksheet.

    Output

    • Product owner and manager resource alignment.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Step 2.2

    Manage stakeholder influence

    Activities

    2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Align product owners to products

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Delivery managers
    • Business analysts

    Outcomes of this step

    • Stakeholder management strategy

    Develop a product owner stakeholder strategy

    Stakeholder management, Product lifecycle, Project delivery, Operational support.

    Stakeholders are a critical cornerstone to product ownership. They provide the context, alignment, and constraints that influence or control what a product owner can accomplish.

    Product owners operate within a network of stakeholders who represent different perspectives within the organization.

    First, product owners must identify members of their stakeholder network. Next, they should devise a strategy for managing stakeholders.

    Without a stakeholder strategy, product owners will encounter obstacles, resistance, or unexpected changes.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization

    Follow the trail of breadcrumbs from your direct stakeholders to their influencers to uncover hidden stakeholders.

    Create a stakeholder network map to product roadmaps and prioritization. Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your stakeholder map defines the influence landscape your product operates. It is every bit as important as the teams who enhance, support, and operate your product directly.

    Use connectors to determine who may be influencing your direct stakeholders. They may not have any formal authority within the organization, but they may have informal yet substantive relationships with your stakeholders.

    Exercise 2.2.1 Visualize relationships to identify key influencers

    1 hour
    1. List direct stakeholders for your product.
    2. Determine the stakeholders of your stakeholders and consider adding each of them to the stakeholder list.
    3. Assess who has either formal or informal influence over your stakeholders; add these influencers to your stakeholder list.
    4. Construct a diagram linking stakeholders and their influencers together.
      • Use black arrows to indicate the direction of professional influence.
      • Use dashed green arrows to indicate informal bidirectional influence relationships.
    5. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Output

    • Relationships among stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Categorize your stakeholders with a prioritization map

    A stakeholder prioritization map helps product owners categorize their stakeholders by their level of influence and ownership in the product and/or teams.

    Influence versus Ownership/Interest

    There are four areas on the map, and the stakeholders within each area should be treated differently.

    • Players have a high interest in the initiative and the influence to effect change over the initiative. Their support is critical, and a lack of support can cause significant impediments to the objectives.
    • Mediators have a low interest but significant influence over the initiative. They can help to provide balance and objective opinions to issues that arise.
    • Noisemakers have low influence but high interest. They tend to be very vocal and engaged, either positively or negatively but have little ability to enact their wishes.
    • Spectators are generally apathetic and have little influence over or interest in the initiative.

    Exercise 2.2.2 Group stakeholders into categories

    1 hour
    1. Identify your stakeholders’ interest in and influence on your Agile implementation as high, medium, or low by rating the attributes below.
    2. Map your results to the model below to determine each stakeholder’s category.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Influence versus Ownership/Interest with CMO, CIO and Product Manager in assigned areas.

    Output

    • Categorization of stakeholders and influencers

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Prioritize your stakeholders

    There may be too many stakeholders to be able to manage them all. Focus your attention on the stakeholders that matter most.

    Stakeholder category versus level of support.

    Consider the three dimensions of stakeholder prioritization: influence, interest, and support. Support can be determined by rating the following question: How likely is it that your stakeholder would recommend your product? These parameters are used to prioritize which stakeholders are most important and should receive your focused attention. The table to the right indicates how stakeholders are ranked.

    Exercise 2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    1 hour
    1. Identify the level of support of each stakeholder by answering the following question: How likely is it that your stakeholder would endorse your product?
    2. Prioritize your stakeholders using the prioritization scheme on the previous slide.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook .

    Stakeholder, Category, level of support, prioritization.

    Output

    • Stakeholder and influencer prioritization

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers
    • Development team leads
    • Portfolio managers
    • Business analysts

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.

    Define strategies for engaging stakeholders by type

    Authority Vs. Ownership/Interest.

    Type

    Quadrant

    Actions

    Players

    High influence, high interest – actively engage Keep them updated on the progress of the project. Continuously involve players in the process and maintain their engagement and interest by demonstrating their value to its success.

    Mediators

    High influence, low interest – keep satisfied They can be the game changers in groups of stakeholders. Turn them into supporters by gaining their confidence and trust and including them in important decision-making steps. In turn, they can help you influence other stakeholders.

    Noisemakers

    Low influence, high interest – keep informed Try to increase their influence (or decrease it if they are detractors) by providing them with key information, supporting them in meetings, and using mediators to help them.

    Spectators

    Low influence, low interest – monitor They are followers. Keep them in the loop by providing clarity on objectives and status updates.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Each group of stakeholders draws attention and resources away from critical tasks. By properly identifying your stakeholder groups, the product owner can develop corresponding actions to manage stakeholders in each group. This can dramatically reduce wasted effort trying to satisfy spectators and noisemakers while ensuring the needs of mediators and players are met.

    Phase 3

    Mature Product Owner Capabilities

    Phase 3: Assess your Agile product owner readiness, Mature product owner capabilities.

    Mature and Scale Product Ownership

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    3.2.1 Assess your vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Step 3.1

    Assess your Agile product owner readiness

    Activities

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    Mature product owner capabilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Real Agile skill proficiency assessment

    Why focus on core skills?

    They are the foundation to achieve business outcomes

    Skills, actions, output and outcomes

    The right skills development is only possible with proper assessment and alignment against outcomes.

    Being successful at Agile is more than about just doing Agile

    The following represents the hard skills needed to “Do Agile”:

    Being successful at Agile needs 4 hard skills: 1. Engineering skills, 2. Technician Skills, 3. Framework/Process skills, 4. Tools skills.

    • Engineering skills. These are the skills and competencies required for building brand-new valuable software.
    • Technician skills. These are the skills and competencies required for maintaining and operating the software delivered to stakeholders.
    • Framework/Process skills. These are the specific knowledge skills required to support engineering or technician skills.
    • Tools skills. This represents the software that helps you deliver other software.

    While these are important, they are not the whole story. To effectively deliver software, we believe in the importance of being Agile over simply doing Agile.

    Adapted from: “Doing Agile” Is Only Part of the Software Delivery Pie

    Focus on these real Agile skills

    Agile skills

    • Accountability
    • Collaboration
    • Comfort with ambiguity
    • Communication
    • Empathy
    • Facilitation
    • Functional decomposition
    • Initiative
    • Process discipline
    • Resilience

    Info-Tech research shows these are the real Agile skills to get started with

    Skill Name

    Description

    Accountability

    Refers to the state of being accountable. In an Agile context, it implies transparency, dedication, acting responsibly, and doing what is necessary to get the job done.

    Collaboration

    Values diverse perspectives and working with others to achieve the best output possible. Effective at working toward individual, team, department, and organizational goals.

    Comfort with ambiguity

    Allows you to confidently take the next steps when presented with a problem without having all the necessary information present.

    Communication

    Uses different techniques to share information, concerns, or emotions when a situation arises, and it allows you to vary your approach depending on the current phase of development.

    Empathy

    Is the ability to understand and share the feelings of another to better serve your team and your stakeholders.

    Facilitation

    Refers to guiding and directing people through a set of conversations and events to learn and achieve a shared understanding.

    Functional decomposition

    Is being able to break down requirements into constituent epics and stories.

    Initiative

    Is being able to anticipate challenges and then act on opportunities that lead to better business outcomes.

    Process discipline

    Refers to the focus of following the right steps for a given activity at the right time to achieve the right outcomes.

    Resilience

    Refers to the behaviors, thoughts, and actions that allow a person to recover from stress and adversity.

    Accountability

    An accountable person:

    • Takes ownership of their own decisions and actions and is responsible for the quality of results.
    • Recognizes personal accountabilities to others, including customers.
    • Works well autonomously.
    • Ensures that the mutual expectations between themselves and others are clearly defined.
    • Takes the appropriate actions to ensure that obligations are met in a timely manner.
    • As a leader, takes responsibility for those being led.

    Accountability drives high performance in teams and organizations

    • The performance level of teams depends heavily on accountability and who demonstrates it:
      • In weak teams, there is no accountability.
      • In mediocre teams, supervisors demonstrate accountability.
      • In high-performance teams, peers manage most performance problems through joint accountability. (Grenny, 2014)
    • According to Bain & Company, accountability is the third most important attribute of high-performing companies. Some of the other key attributes include honest, performance-focused, collaborative, and innovative. (Mankins, 2013)

    All components of the employee empowerment driver have a strong, positive correlation with engagement.

    Employee empowerment and Correlation with engagement.

    Source: McLean & Company Engagement Database, 2018; N=71,794

    Accountability

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Alerts others to possible problems in a timely manner.
    • Seeks appropriate support to solve problems.
    • Actively contributes to the creation and evaluation of possible solutions.
    • Acts on solutions selected and decisions made as directed.
    • Makes effective decisions about how to complete work tasks.
    • Demonstrates the capability of breaking down concrete issues into parts and synthesizing information succinctly.
    • Collects and analyzes information from a variety of sources.
    • Seeks information and input to fully understand the cause of problems.
    • Takes action to address obstacles and problems before they impact performance and results.
    • Initiates the evaluation of possible solutions to problems.
    • Makes effective decisions about work task prioritization.
    • Appropriately assesses risks before deciding.
    • Effectively navigates through ambiguity, using multiple data points to analyze issues and identify trends.
    • Does not jump to conclusions.
    • Draws logical conclusions and provides opinions and recommendations with confidence.
    • Takes ownership over decisions and their consequences.
    • Demonstrates broad knowledge of information sources that can be used to assess problems and make decisions.
    • Invests time in planning, discovery, and reflection to drive better decisions.
    • Effectively leverages hard data as inputs to making decisions.
    • Garners insight from abstract data and makes appropriate decisions.
    • Coaches others in effective decision-making practices.
    • Has the authority to solve problems and make decisions.
    • Thinks several steps ahead in deciding the best course of action, anticipating likely outcomes, risks, or implications.
    • Establishes metrics to aid in decision-making, for self and teams
    • Prioritizes objective and ambiguous information and analyzes this when making decisions.
    • Solicits a diverse range of opinions and perspectives as inputs to decision making.
    • Applies frameworks to decision making, particularly in situations that have little base in prior experience.
    • Makes effective decisions about organizational priorities.
    • Holds others accountable for their decisions and consequences.
    • Creates a culture of empowerment and trust to facilitate effective problem solving and decision making.
    • Makes sound decisions that have organization-wide consequences and that influence future direction.

    Collaboration as a skill

    The principles and values of Agile revolve around collaboration.

    • Works well with others on specialized and cross-functional teams.
    • Can self-organize while part of a team.
    • Respects the commitments that others make.
    • Identifies and articulates dependencies.
    • Values diverse perspectives and works with others to achieve the best output possible.
    • Effective at working toward individual, team, department, and organizational goals.
    The principles and values of Agile revolve around collaboration. Doing what was done before (being prescriptive), going though the motions (doing Agile), living the principles (being Agile)

    Collaboration

    The Agile Manifesto has three principles that focus on collaboration:

    1. The business and developers must work together daily throughout the project.
    2. Build projects around motivated individuals. Give them the environment and support they need and trust them to get the job done.
    3. The most efficient and effective method of conveying information to and within a development team is face-to-face conversation.

    Effective collaboration supports Agile behaviors, including embracing change and the ability to work iteratively.

    Collaboration

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Understands role on the team and the associated responsibilities and accountabilities.
    • Treats team members with respect.
    • Contributes to team decisions and to the achievement of team goals and objectives.
    • Demonstrates a positive attitude.
    • Works cross-functionally to achieve common goals and to support the achievement of other team/department goals.
    • Values working in a diverse team and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.
    • Fosters team camaraderie, collaboration, and cohesion.
    • Understands the impact of one's actions on the ability of team members to do their jobs.
    • Respects the differences other team members bring to the table by openly seeking others' opinions.
    • Helps the team accomplish goals and objectives by breaking down shared goals into smaller tasks.
    • Approaches challenging team situations with optimism and an open mind, focusing on coming to a respectful conclusion.
    • Makes suggestions to improve team engagement and effectiveness.
    • Supports implementation of team decisions.
    • Professionally gives and seeks feedback to achieve common goals.
    • Values working in a diverse team and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.
    • Motivates the team toward achieving goals and exceeding expectations.
    • Reaches out to other teams and departments to build collaborative, cross-functional relationships.
    • Creates a culture of collaboration that leverages team members' strengths, even when the team is remote or virtual.
    • Participates and encourages others to participate in initiatives that improve team engagement and effectiveness.
    • Builds consensus to make and implement team decisions, often navigating through challenging task or interpersonal obstacles.
    • Values leading a diverse team and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.
    • Creates a culture of collaboration among teams, departments, external business partners, and all employee levels.
    • Breaks down silos to achieve inter-departmental collaboration.
    • Demonstrates ownership and accountability for team/department/ organizational outcomes.
    • Uses an inclusive and consultative approach in setting team goals and objectives and making team decisions.
    • Coaches others on how to identify and proactively mitigate potential points of team conflict.
    • Recognizes and rewards teamwork throughout the organization.
    • Provides the tools and resources necessary for teams to succeed.
    • Values diverse teams and understands the importance of differing perspectives to develop unique solutions or ideas.

    Comfort with ambiguity

    Ability to handle ambiguity is a key factor in Agile success.

    • Implies the ability to maintain a level of effectiveness when all information is not present.
    • Able to confidently act when presented with a problem without all information present.
    • Risk and uncertainty can comfortably be handled.
    • As a result, can easily adapt and embrace change.
    • People comfortable with ambiguity demonstrate effective problem-solving skills.

    Relative importance of traits found in Agile teams

    1. Handles ambiguity
    2. Agreeable
    3. Conscientious

    Comfort with ambiguity

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Requires most information to be present before carrying out required activities.
    • Can operate with some information missing.
    • Comfortable asking people within their known circles for help.
    • Significant time is taken to reveal small pieces of information.
    • More adept at operating with information missing.
    • Willing to reach out to people outside of their regular circles for assistance and clarification.
    • Able to apply primary and secondary research methods to fill in the missing pieces.
    • Can operate essentially with a statement and a blank page.
    • Able to build a plan, drive others and themselves to obtain the right information to solve the problem.
    • Able to optimize only pulling what is necessary to answer the desired question and achieve the desired outcome.

    Communication

    Even though many organizations recognize its importance, communication is one of the root causes of project failure.

    Project success vs Communication effectiveness. Effective communications is associated with a 17% increase in finishing projects within budget.

    56%

    56% of the resources spent on a project are at risk due to ineffective communications.

    PMI, 2013.

    29%

    In 29% of projects started in the past 12 months, poor communication was identified as being one of the primary causes of failure.

    PMI, 2013.

    Why are communication skills important to the Agile team?

    It’s not about the volume, it’s about the method.

    • Effectively and appropriately interacts with others to build relationships and share ideas and information.
    • Uses tact and diplomacy to navigate difficult situations.
    • Relays key messages by creating a compelling story, targeted toward specific audiences.

    Communication effectiveness, Activity and Effort required.

    Adapted From: Agile Modeling

    Communication

    Your Score:____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Actively listens, learns through observation, and uses clear and precise language.
    • Possesses an open and approachable demeanor, with a positive and constructive tone.
    • Demonstrates interest in the thoughts and feelings of others.
    • Considers potential responses of others before speaking or acting.
    • Checks own understanding of others’ communication by repeating or paraphrasing.
    • Demonstrates self-control in stressful situations.
    • Provides clear, concise information to others via verbal or written communication.
    • Seeks to understand others' points of view, looking at verbal and non-verbal cues to encourage open and honest discussions.
    • Invites and encourages others to participate in discussions.
    • Projects a sincere and genuine tone.
    • Remains calm when dealing with others who are upset or angry.
    • Provides and seeks support to improve communication.
    • Does not jump to conclusions or act on assumptions.
    • Tailors messages to meet the different needs of different audiences.
    • Accurately interprets responses of others to their words and actions.
    • Provides feedback effectively and with empathy.
    • Is a role model for others on how to effectively communicate.
    • Ensures effective communication takes place at the departmental level.
    • Engages stakeholders using appropriate communication methods to achieve desired outcomes.
    • Creates opportunities and forums for discussion and idea sharing.
    • Demonstrates understanding of the feelings, motivations, and perspectives of others, while adapting communications to anticipated reactions.
    • Shares insights about their own strengths, weaknesses, successes, ad failures to show empathy and help others relate.
    • Discusses contentious issues without getting defensive and maintains a professional tone.
    • Coaches others on how to communicate effectively and craft targeted messages.
    • Sets and exemplifies standards for respectful and effective communications in the organization.
    • Comfortably delivers strategic messages supporting their function and the organization at the enterprise level.
    • Communicates with senior-level executives on complex organizational issues.
    • Promotes inter-departmental communication and transparency.
    • Achieves buy-in and consensus from people who share widely different views.
    • Shares complex messages in clear, understandable language.
    • Accurately interprets how they are perceived by others.
    • Rallies employees to communicate ideas and build upon differing perspectives to drive innovation.

    Empathy

    Empathy is the ability to understand and share the feelings of another in order to better serve your team and your stakeholders. There are three kinds:

    Cognitive

    Thought, understanding, intellect

    • Knowing how someone else feels and what they might be thinking.
    • Contributes to more effective communication.

    Emotional

    Feelings, physical sensation

    • You physically feel the emotions of the other person.
    • Helps build emotional connections with others.

    Compassionate

    Intellect, emotion with action

    • Along with understanding, you take action to help.

    How is empathy an Agile skill?

    Empathy enables you to serve your team, your customers, and your organization

    Serving the team

    • Primary types: Emotional and compassionate empathy.
    • The team is accountable for delivery.
    • By being able to empathize with the person you are talking to, complex issues can be addressed.
    • A lack of empathy leads to a lack of collaboration and being able to go forward on a common path.

    Serving your customers and stakeholders

    • Primary type: Cognitive empathy.
    • Agile enables the delivery of the right value at the right time to your stakeholders
    • Translating your stakeholders' needs requires an understanding of who they are as people. This is done through observations, interviews and conversations.
    • Leveraging empathy maps and user-story writing is an effective tool.

    Empathy

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Knowing how someone else feels and what they might be thinking.
    • Ability to build emotional connections with others.
    • Able to harness emotional connections to achieve tangible and experiential outcomes.
    • Demonstrates an awareness of different feelings and ways of thinking by both internal and external stakeholders.
    • Limited ability to make social connections with others outside of the immediate team.
    • Able to connect with similarly minded people to improve customer/stakeholder satisfaction. (Insights into action)
    • Able to interact and understand others with vastly different views.
    • Lack of agreement does not stop individual. from asking questions, understanding, and pushing the conversation forward

    Facilitation

    It’s not just your manager’s problem.

    “Facilitation is the skill of moderating discussions within a group in order to enable all participants to effectively articulate their views on a topic under discussion, and to ensure that participants in the discussion are able to recognize and appreciate the differing points of view that are articulated.” (IIBA, 2015)

    • Drives action through influence, often without authority.
    • Leads and impacts others' thinking, decisions, or behavior through inclusive practices and relationship building.
    • Encourages others to self-organize and hold themselves accountable.
    • Identifies blockers and constructively removes barriers to progress.

    Facilitation

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Drives action through influence, often without authority.
    • Leads and impacts others' thinking, decisions, or behavior through inclusive practices and relationship building.
    • Encourages others to self-organize and hold themselves accountable.
    • Identifies blockers and constructively removes barriers to progress.
    • Maps and executes processes effectively.
    • Uses facts and concrete examples to demonstrate a point and gain support from others.
    • Openly listens to the perspectives of others.
    • Builds relationships through honest and consistent behavior.
    • Understands the impact of their own actions and how others will perceive it.
    • Identifies impediments to progress.
    • Anticipates the effect of one's approach on the emotions and sensitivities of others.
    • Practices active listening while demonstrating positivity and openness.
    • Customizes discussion and presentations to include "what’s in it for me" for the audience.
    • Presents compelling information to emphasize the value of an idea.
    • Involves others in refining ideas or making decisions in order to drive buy-in and action.
    • Knows how to appropriately use influence to achieve outcomes without formal authority.
    • Seeks ways and the help of others to address barriers or blockers to progress.
    • Leverages a planned approach to influencing others by identifying stakeholder interests, common goals, and potential barriers.
    • Builds upon successes to gain acceptance for new ideas.
    • Facilitates connections between members of their network for the benefit of the organization or others.
    • Demonstrates the ability to draw on trusting relationships to garner support for ideas and action.
    • Encourages a culture that allows space for influence to drive action.
    • Adept at appropriately leveraging influence to achieve business unit outcomes.
    • Actively manages the removal of barriers and blockers for teams.

    Functional decomposition

    It’s not just a process, it’s a skill.

    “Functional decomposition helps manage complexity and reduce uncertainty by breaking down processes, systems, functional areas, or deliverables into their simpler constituent parts and allowing each part to be analyzed independently."

    (IIBA, 2015)

    Being able to break down requirements into constituent consumable items (example: epics and user stories).

    Start: Strategic Initiatives. 1: Epics. 2: Capabilities. 3: Features. End: Stories.

    Use artifact mapping to improve functional decomposition

    In our research, we refer to these items as epics, capabilities, features, and user stories. How you develop your guiding principles and structure your backlog should be based on the terminology and artifact types commonly used in your organization.

    Agile, Waterfall, Relationship, Decomposition skill most in demand, definition.

    Functional Decomposition

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Able to decompose items with assistance from other team members.
    • Able to decompose items independently, ensuring alignment with business value.
    • Able to decompose items independently and actively seeks out collaboration opportunities with relevant SME's during and after the refinement process to ensure completion.
    • Able to decompose items at a variety of granularity levels.
    • Able to teach and lead others in their decomposition efforts.
    • Able to quickly operate at different levels of the requirements stack.

    Initiative and self-organization

    A team that takes initiative can self-organize to solve critical problems.

    • "The best architectures, requirements, and designs emerge from self-organizing teams." (Agile Manifesto)
    • In a nutshell, the initiative represents the ability to anticipate challenges and act on opportunities that lead to better business outcomes.
    • Anticipates challenges and acts on opportunities that lead to better business outcomes.
    • Thinks critically and is motivated to use both specialist expertise and general knowledge.
    • Driven by the delivery of business value and better business outcomes.
    • Empowers others to act and is empowered and self-motivated.

    Initiative and self-organization

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Demonstrates awareness of an opportunity or issue which is presently occurring or is within the immediate work area.
    • Reports an opportunity or issue to the appropriate person.
    • Acts instead of waiting to be asked.
    • Willingly takes on challenges, even if they fall outside their area of expertise.
    • Is proactive in identifying issues and making recommendations to resolve them.
    • Within the scope of the work environment, takes action to improve processes or results, or to resolve problems.
    • Not deterred by obstacles.
    • Tackles challenges that require risk taking.
    • Procures the necessary resources, team and technical support to enable success.
    • Assists others to get the job done.
    • Demonstrates awareness of an opportunities or issues which are in the future or outside the immediate work area.
    • Typically exceeds the expectations of the job.
    • Learns new technology or skills outside their specialization so that they can be a more effective team member.
    • Recommends solutions to enhance results or prevent potential issues.
    • Drives implementation of new processes within the team to improve results.
    • Able to provide recommendations on plans and decisions that are strategic and future-oriented for the organization.
    • Identifies areas of high risk or of organizational level impact.
    • Able to empower significant recourses from the organization to enable success.
    • Leads long-term engagements that result in improved organizational capabilities and processes.

    Process discipline

    A common misconception is that Agile means no process and no discipline. Effective Agile teams require more adherence to the right processes to create a culture of self-improvement.

    • Refers to the focus of following the right steps for a given activity at the right time to achieve the right outcomes.
    • Focus on following the right steps for a given activity at the right time to achieve desired outcomes.
    Example: Scrum Ceremonies during a sprint (1 - 4 weeks/sprint). 1: Sprint planning, 2: Daily scrum, 3: Sprint review, 4: Sprint retrospective.

    Process discipline

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Demonstrates awareness of the key processes and steps that are needed in a given situation.
    • Limited consistency in following processes and limited understanding of the 'why' behind the processes.
    • Aware and follows through with key agile processes in a consistent manner.
    • Demonstrates not only the knowledge of processes but understands the 'why' behind their existence.
    • Aware and follows through with key agile processes in a consistent manner.
    • Demonstrates understanding of not only why specific processes exist but can suggest changes to improve efficiency, consistency, and outcomes.

    N/A -- Maximum level is '3

    Resilience

    If your team hits the wall, don’t let the wall hit them back.

    • Resilience is critical for an effective Agile transformation. A team that demonstrates resilience always exhibits:
    • Evolution over transformation – There is a recognition that changes happen over time.
    • Intensity and productivity – A race is not won by the ones who are the fastest, but by the ones who are the most consistent. Regardless of what comes up, the team can push through.
    • That organizational resistance is futile – Given that it is working on the right objectives, the team needs to demonstrate a consistency of approach and intensity regardless of what may stand in its way.
    • Refers to the behaviors, thoughts, and actions that allow a person to recover from stress and adversity.

    How resilience aligns with Agile

    A team is not “living the principles” without resilience.

    1. Purpose

      Aligns with: “Our highest priority is to satisfy the customer through early and continuous delivery of valuable software.” The vision or goals may not be clear in certain circumstances and can be difficult to relate to a single work item. Being able to intrinsically source and harness a sense of purpose becomes more important, especially as a self-organizing team.
    2. Perseverance

      Aligns with: “Agile processes harness change for the customer's competitive advantage.” Perseverance enables teams to continuously deliver at a steady pace, addressing impediments or setbacks and continuing to move forward.
    3. Composure

      Aligns with: “Agile processes promote sustainable development,” and “At regular intervals, the team reflects ... and adjusts its behavior accordingly.”
      When difficult situations arise, composure allows us to understand perspectives, empathize with customers, accept late changes, and sustain a steady pace.
    4. Self-Reliance

      Aligns with: “The best architectures, requirements, and designs emerge from self-organizing teams.” Knowing oneself, recognizing strengths, and drawing on past successes, can be a powerful aid in creating high-performing Agile teams
    5. Authenticity

      Aligns with: “At regular intervals, the team reflects … and adjusts its behavior accordingly,” and “Build projects around motivated individuals.”
      When difficult situations arise, authenticity is crucial. “For example, being able to openly disclose areas outside of your strengths in sprint planning or being able to contribute constructively toward self-organization.”

    Adapted from: Why Innovation, 2019.

    Resilience

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Easily distracted and stopped by moderately stressful and challenging situations.
    • Requires significant help from others to get back on track.
    • Not frequently able (or knows) how to ask for help
    • Handles typical stresses and challenges for the given role.
    • Able to get back on track with limited assistance.
    • Able to ask for help when they need it.
    • Quality of work unaffected by an increase in pressures and challenges.
    • Handles stresses and challenges what is deemed above and beyond their given role.
    • Able to provide advice to others on how to handle difficult and challenging situations.
    • Quality of work and outcomes is maintained and sometimes exceeded as pressure increases.
    • Team looks to this individual as being the gold standard on how to approach any given problem or situation.
    • Directly mentors others on approaches in situations regardless of the level of challenge.

    Exercise 1.2.1 Identify your primary product owner perspective

    1 hour
    1. Review each real Agile skill and determine your current proficiency.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Accountability, Collaboration, Comfort in Ambiguity, Communication, Empathy, Facilitation, Functional Decomposition, Initiative, Process Discipline, Resilience.

    Output

    • Agile skills assessment results.

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Determine your Agile skills proficiency: Edit chart data to plot your scores or add your data points and connect the lines.

    Step 3.2

    Mature product owner capabilities

    Activities

    3.2.1 Assess your vision capability proficiency

    3.2.2 Assess your leadership capability proficiency

    3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    Mature product owner capabilities

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Outcomes of this step

    • Info-Tech product owner capability model proficiency assessment

    Product capabilities deliver value

    As a product owner, you are responsible for managing these facets through your capabilities and activities.

    The core product and value stream consists of: Funding - Product management and governance, Business functionality - Stakeholder and relationship management, and Technology - Product delivery.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    It is easy to lose sight of what matters when we look at a product from a single point of view . Despite what "The Agile Manifesto" says, working software is not valuable without the knowledge and support that people need in order to adopt, use, and maintain it. If you build it, they will not come. Product owners must consider the needs of all stakeholders when designing and building products.

    Recognize product owner knowledge gaps

    Pulse survey of product owners

    Pulse survey of product owners. Graph shows large percentage of respondents have alignment to common agile definition of product owners. Yet a significant perception gap in P&L, delivery, and analytics.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. Less than 15% of respondents identified analytics or financial management as a key component of product ownership.
    2. Assess your product owner’s capabilities and understanding to develop a maturity plan.

    Source: Pulse Survey (N=18)

    Implement the Info-Tech product owner capability model

    Unfortunately, most product owners operate with incomplete knowledge of the skills and capabilities needed to perform the role. Common gaps include focusing only on product backlogs, acting as a proxy for product decisions, and ignoring the need for key performance indicators (KPIs) and analytics in both planning and value realization.

    Product Owner capabilities: Vision, Product Lifecycle Management, Leadership, Value Realization

    Vision

    • Market Analysis
    • Business Alignment
    • Product Roadmap

    Leadership

    • Soft Skills
    • Collaboration
    • Decision Making

    Product Lifecycle Management

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run

    Value Realization

    • KPIs
    • Financial Management
    • Business Model

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Vision predicts impact of Value realization. Value realization provides input to vision

    Your vision informs and aligns what goals and capabilities are needed to fulfill your product or product family vision and align with enterprise goals and priorities. Each item on your roadmap should have corresponding KPIs or OKRs to know how far you moved the value needle. Value realization measures how well you met your target, as well as the impacts on your business value canvas and cost model.

    Product lifecycle management builds trust with Leadership. Leadership improves quality of Product lifecycle management.

    Your leadership skills improve collaborations and decisions when working with your stakeholders and product delivery teams. This builds trust and improves continued improvements to the entire product lifecycle. A product owner’s focus should always be on finding ways to improve value delivery.

    Product owner capabilities provide support

    Leadership enhances Vision. Vision Guides Product Lifecycle Management. Product Lifecycle Management delivers Value Realization. Leadership enhances Value Realization

    Develop product owner capabilities

    Each capability: Vision, Product lifecycle management, Value realization and Leadership has 3 components needed for successful product ownership.

    Avoid common capability gaps

    Vision

    • Focusing solely on backlog grooming (tactical only)
    • Ignoring or failing to align product roadmap to enterprise goals
    • Operational support and execution
    • Basing decisions on opinion rather than market data
    • Ignoring or missing internal and external threats to your product

    Leadership

    • Failing to include feedback from all teams who interact with your product
    • Using a command-and-control approach
    • Viewing product owner as only a delivery role
    • Acting as a proxy for stakeholder decisions
    • Avoiding tough strategic decisions in favor of easier tactical choices

    Product lifecycle management

    • Focusing on delivery and not the full product lifecycle
    • Ignoring support, operations, and technical debt
    • Failing to build knowledge management into the lifecycle
    • Underestimating delivery capacity, capabilities, or commitment
    • Assuming delivery stops at implementation

    Value realization

    • Focusing exclusively on “on time/on budget” metrics
    • Failing to measure a 360-degree end-user view of the product
    • Skipping business plans and financial models
    • Limiting financial management to project/change budgets
    • Ignoring market analysis for growth, penetration, and threats

    Capabilities: Vision

    Market Analysis

    • Customer Empathy: Identify the target users and unique value your product provides that is not currently being met. Define the size of your user base, segmentation, and potential growth.
    • Customer Journey: Define the future path and capabilities your users will respond to.
    • Competitive analysis: Complete a SWOT analysis for your end-to-end product lifecycle. Use Info-Tech’s Business SWOT Analysis Template.

    Business Alignment

    • Enterprise alignment: Align to enterprise and product family goals, strategies, and constraints.
    • Delivery and release strategy: Develop a delivery strategy to achieve value quickly and adapt to internal and external changes. Value delivery is constrained by your delivery pipeline.
    • OCM and go-to-market strategy: Create organizational change management, communications, and a user implementation approach to improve adoption and satisfaction from changes.

    Product Roadmap

    • Roadmap strategy: Determine the duration, detail, and structure of your roadmap to accurately communicate your vision.
    • Value prioritization: Define criteria used to evaluate and sequence demand items.
    • Release and capacity planning: Build your roadmap with realistic goals and milestones based on your delivery pipeline and dependencies.

    “Customers are best heard through many ears.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Vision: Market Analysis, Business Alignment, and Product Roadmap.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Data comes from many places and may still not tell the complete story.

    Build your product strategy playbook

    Complete Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision to define your Vision, Goals, Roadmap approach, and Backlog quality filters.

    Digital Product Strategy Supporting Workbook

    Supporting workbook that captures the interim results from a number of exercises that will contribute to your overall digital product vision.

    Product Backlog Item Prioritization Tool

    An optional tool to help you capture your product backlog and prioritize based on your given criteria

    Product Roadmap Tool

    An optional tool to help you build out and visualize your first roadmap.

    Your Digital Product Vision Details Strategy

    Record the results from the exercises to help you define, detail, and make real your digital product vision.

    Your product vision is your North Star

    It's ok to dream a little!

    Who is the target customer, what is the key benefit, what do they need, what is the differentiator

    Adapted from: Geoffrey Moore, 2014.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    A product vision shouldn’t be so far out that it doesn’t feel real or so short-term that it gets bogged down in minutiae and implementation details. Finding the right balance will take some trial and error and will be different for each organization.

    Use product roadmaps to guide delivery

    In Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision, we showed how the product roadmap is key to value realization. As a product owner, the product roadmap is your communicated path to align teams and changes to your defined goals, while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy.

    As a product owner, the product roadmap is your communicated path to align teams and changes to your defined goals, while aligning your product to enterprise goals and strategy

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Info-Tech Best Practice Product delivery requires a comprehensive set of business and technical competencies to effectively roadmap, plan, deliver, support, and validate your product portfolio. Product delivery is a “multi-faceted, complex discipline that can be difficult to grasp and hard to master.” It will take time to learn and adopt methods and become a competent product manager or owner (“What Is Product Management?”, Pichler Consulting Limited).

    Match your roadmap and backlog to the needs of the product

    Ultimately, you want products to be able to respond faster to changes and deliver value sooner. The level of detail in the roadmap and backlog is a tool to help the product owner plan for change. The duration of your product roadmap is all directly related to the tier of product owner in the product family.

    The level of detail in the roadmap and backlog is a tool to help the product owner plan for change. The duration of your product roadmap is all directly related to the tier of product owner in the product family.

    Product delivery realizes value for your product family

    While planning and analysis are done at the family level, work and delivery are done at the individual product level.

    Product strategy includes: Vision, Goals, Roadmap, backlog and Release plan.

    Use artifact mapping to improve functional decomposition

    In our research, we refer to these items as epics, capabilities, features, and user stories. How you develop your guiding principles and structure your backlog should be based on the terminology and artifact types commonly used in your organization.

    Agile, Waterfall, Relationship, Decomposition skill most in demand, definition.

    Manage and communicate key milestones

    Successful product owners understand and define the key milestones in their product delivery lifecycles. These need to be managed along with the product backlog and roadmap.

    Define key milestones and their release dates.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Product ownership isn’t just about managing the product backlog and development cycles! Teams need to manage key milestones such as learning milestones, test releases, product releases, phase gates, and other organizational checkpoints!

    Milestones

    • Points in the timeline when the established set of artifacts is complete (feature-based), or checking status at a particular point in time (time-based).
    • Typically assigned a date and used to show the progress of development.
    • Plays an important role when sequencing different types of artifacts.

    Release dates

    • Releases mark the actual delivery of a set of artifacts packaged together in a new version of the product.
    • Release dates, firm or not, allow stakeholders to anticipate when this is coming.

    Leverage the product canvas to state and inform your product vision

    Leverage the product Canvas to state and inform your product vision. Includes: Product name, Tracking info, Vision, List of business objectives or goals, Metrics used to measure value realization, List of groups who consume the product/service, and List of key resources or stakeholders.

    Capability: Vision

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Product backlog.
    • Basic roadmap with milestones and releases.
    • Unprioritized stakeholder list.
    • Understanding of product’s purpose and value.
    • Customers and end-users defined with core needs identified.
    • Roadmap with goals and capabilities defined by themes and set to appropriate time horizons.
    • Documented stakeholder management plan with communication and collaboration aligned to the stakeholder strategy.
    • Value drivers traced to product families and enterprise goals.
    • Customer personas defined with pain relievers and value creators defined.
    • Fully-developed roadmap traced to family (and child) roadmaps.
    • Expected ROI for all current and next roadmap items.
    • KPIs/OKRs used to improve roadmap prioritization and sequencing.
    • Proactive stakeholder engagement and reviews.
    • Cross-functional engagement to align opportunities and drive enterprise value.
    • Formal metrics to assess customer needs and value realization.
    • Roadmaps managed in an enterprise system for full traceability, value realization reporting, and views for defined audiences.
    • Proactive stakeholder engagement with regular planning and review ceremonies tied to their roadmaps and goals.
    • Cross-functional innovation to find disruptive opportunities to drive enterprise value.
    • Omni-channel metrics and customer feedback mechanisms to proactively evaluate goals, capabilities, and value realization.

    Exercise 3.2.1 Assess your Vision capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Capabilities: Leadership

    Soft Skills

    • Communication: Maintain consistent, concise, and appropriate communication using SMART guidelines (specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely).
    • Integrity: Stick to your values, principles, and decision criteria for the product to build and maintain trust with your users and teams.
    • Influence: Manage stakeholders using influence and collaboration over contract negotiation.

    Collaboration

    • Stakeholder management: Build a communications strategy for each stakeholder group, tailored to individual stakeholders.
    • Relationship management: Use every interaction point to strengthen relationships, build trust, and empower teams.
    • Team development: Promote development through stretch goals and controlled risks to build team capabilities and performance.

    Decision Making

    • Prioritized criteria: Remove personal bias by basing decisions off data analysis and criteria.
    • Continuous improvement: Balance new features with the need to ensure quality and create an environment of continuous improvement.
    • Team empowerment/negotiation: Push decisions to teams closest to the problem and solution, using Delegation Poker to guide you.

    “Everything walks the walk. Everything talks the talk.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Leadership: Soft skills, collaboration, decision making.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners cannot be just a proxy for stakeholder decisions. The product owner owns product decisions and management of all stakeholders.

    Capability: Leadership

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Activities are prioritized with minimal direction and/or assistance.
    • Progress self-monitoring against objectives with leadership apprised of deviations against plan.
    • Facilitated decisions from stakeholders or teams.
    • Informal feedback on performance and collaboration with teams.
    • Independently prioritized activities and provide direction or assistance to others as needed.
    • Managed issue resolution and provided guidance on goals, priorities, and constraints.
    • Product decision ownership with input from stakeholders, SMEs, and delivery teams.
    • Formal product management retrospectives with tracked and measured changes to improve performance.
    • Consulted in the most challenging situations to provide subject matter expertise on leading practices and industry standards.
    • Provide mentoring and coaching to your peers and/or teammates.
    • Use team empowerment, pushing decisions to the lowest appropriate level based on risk and complexity.
    • Mature and flexible communication.
    • Provide strategies and programs ensuring all individuals in the delivery organization obtain the level of coaching and supervision required for success in their position.
    • Provide leadership to the organization’s coaches ensuring delivery excellence across the organization.
    • Help develop strategic initiatives driving common approaches and utilizing information assets and processes across the enterprise.

    Exercise 3.2.2 Assess your Leadership capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Capability: Product lifecycle management

    Plan

    • Product backlog: Follow a schedule for backlog intake, grooming, updates, and prioritization.
    • Journey map: Create an end-user journey map to guide adoption and loyalty.
    • Fit for purpose: Define expected value and intended use to ensure product meets your end user’s needs.

    Build

    • Capacity management: Work with operations and delivery teams to ensure consistent and stable outcomes.
    • Release strategy: Build learning, release, and critical milestones into a repeatable release plan.
    • Compliance: Build policy compliance into delivery practices to ensure alignment and reduce avoidable risk (privacy, security).

    Run

    • Adoption: Focus attention on end-user adoption and proficiency to accelerate value and maximize retention.
    • Support: Build operational support and business continuity into every team.
    • Measure: Measure KPIs and validate expected value to ensure product alignment to goals and consistent product quality.

    “Pay fantastic attention to detail. Reward, recognize, celebrate.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Product Lifecycle Management: Plan, Build, Run

    Info-Tech Insight

    Product owners must actively manage the full lifecycle of the product.

    Define product value by aligning backlog delivery with roadmap goals

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    In each product plan, the backlogs show what you will deliver. Roadmaps identify when and in what order you will deliver value, capabilities, and goals.

    A backlog stores and organizes PBIs at various stages of readiness

    A backlog stores and organizes PBIs at different levels of readiness. Stage 3 - Ideas are composed of raw, vague ideas that have yet to go through any formal valuation. Stage 2 - Qualified are researched and qualified PBIs awaiting refinement. Stage 1 - Ready are Discrete, refined RBIs that are read to be placed in your development team's sprint plans.

    A well-formed backlog can be thought of as a DEEP backlog:

    Detailed Appropriately: PBIs are broken down and refined, as necessary.

    Emergent: The backlog grows and evolves over time as PBIs are added and removed.

    Estimated: The effort a PBI requires is estimated at each tier.

    Prioritized: The PBI’s value and priority are determined at each tier.

    (Perforce, 2018)

    Distinguish your specific goals for refining in the product backlog vs. planning for a sprint itself

    Often backlog refinement is used interchangeably or considered a part of sprint planning. The reality is they are very similar, as the required participants and objectives are the same; however, there are some key differences.

    Backlog refinement versus Sprint planning. Differences in Objectives, Cadence and Participants

    Use quality filters to promote high value items into the delivery pipeline

    Product backlog has quality filters such as: Backlogged, Qualified and Ready. Sprint backlog has a backlog of accepted PBI's

    Basic scrum process

    The scrum process coordinates multiple stakeholders to deliver on business priorities.

    Prioritized Backlog, Sprint Backlog, Manage Delivery, Sprint Review, Product Release

    Capability: Product lifecycle management

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Informal or undocumented intake process.
    • Informal or undocumented delivery lifecycle.
    • Unstable or unpredictable throughput or quality.
    • Informal or undocumented testing and release processes.
    • Informal or undocumented organizational change management planning for each release.
    • Informal or undocumented compliance validation with every release.
    • Documented intake process with stakeholder prioritization of requests.
    • Consistent delivery lifecycle with stable and predictable throughput with an expected range of delivery variance.
    • Formal and documented testing and release processes.
    • Organizational change management planning for each major release.
    • Compliance validation with every major release.
    • Intake process using value drivers and prioritization criteria to sequence all items.
    • Consistent delivery lifecycle with stable and predictable throughput with little variance.
    • Risk-based and partially automated testing and release processes.
    • Organizational change management planning for all releases.
    • Automated compliance validation with every major release.
    • Intake process using enterprise value drivers and prioritization criteria to sequence all items.
    • Stable Agile DevOps with low variability and automation.
    • Risk-based automated and manual testing.
    • Multiple release channels based on risk. Automated build, validation, and rollback capabilities.
    • Cross-channel, integrated organizational change management for all releases.
    • Automated compliance validation with every change or release.

    Exercise 3.2.3 Assess your PLM capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Capabilities: Value realization

    Key performance indicators (KPIs)

    • Usability and user satisfaction: Assess satisfaction through usage monitoring and end-user feedback.
    • Value validation: Directly measure performance against defined value proposition, goals, and predicted ROI.
    • Fit for purpose: Verify the product addresses the intended purpose better than other options.

    Financial management

    • P&L: Manage each product as if it were its own business with profit and loss statements.
    • Acquisition cost/market growth: Define the cost of acquiring a new consumer, onboarding internal users, and increasing product usage.
    • User retention/market share: Verify product usage continues after adoption and solution reaches new user groups to increase value.

    Business model

    • Defines value proposition: Dedicate your primary focus to understanding and defining the value your product will deliver.
    • Market strategy and goals: Define your acquisition, adoption, and retention plan for users.
    • Financial model: Build an end-to-end financial model and plan for the product and all related operational support.

    “The competition is anyone the customer compares you with.”

    – Thomas K. Connellan, Inside the Magic Kingdom

    Value Realization: KPIs, Financial management, Business model

    Info-Tech Insight

    Most organizations stop with on-time and on-budget. True financial alignment needs to define and manage the full lifecycle P&L.

    Use a balanced value to establish a common definition of goals and value

    Value drivers are strategic priorities aligned to our enterprise strategy and translated through our product families. Each product and change has an impact on the value driver helping us reach our enterprise goals.

    Importance of the value driver multiplied by the Impact of value score is equal to the Value score.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Your value drivers and impact helps estimate the expected value of roadmap items, prioritize roadmap and backlog items, and identify KPIs and OKRs to measure value realization and actual impact.

    Include balanced value as one criteria to guide better decisions

    Your balanced value is just one of many criteria needed to align your product goals and sequence roadmap items. Feasibility, delivery pipeline capacity, shared services, and other factors may impact the prioritization of backlog items.

    Build your balanced business value score by using four key value drivers.

    Determine your value drivers

    Competent organizations know that value cannot always be represented by revenue or reduced expenses. However, it is not always apparent how to envision the full spectrum of sources of value. Dissecting value by benefit type and the value source’s orientation allows you to see the many ways in which a product or service brings value to the organization.

    Business value matrix

    Graph with 4 quadrants representing Outward versus Inward, and Financial benefit versus Human benefit. The quadrants are Reach customers, Increase revenue/demonstrate value, Enhance services, Reduce costs.

    Financial benefits vs. improved capabilities

    Financial benefits refer to the degree to which the value source can be measured through monetary metrics and is often quite tangible.

    Human benefits refer to how a product or service can deliver value through a user’s experience.

    Inward vs. outward orientation

    Inward refers to value sources that have an internal impact and improve your organization’s effectiveness and efficiency in performing its operations.

    Outward refers to value sources that come from your interaction with external factors, such as the market or your customers.

    Exercise 3.2.4 Identify your business value drivers and sources of value

    1 hour
    1. Brainstorm the different types of business value that you produce on the sticky notes (one item per page). Draw from examples of products in your portfolio.
    2. Identify the most important value items for your organization (two to three per quadrant).
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Workbook.

    My business value sources

    Graph with 4 quadrants representing Outward versus Inward, and Financial benefit versus Human benefit. The quadrants are Reach customers, Increase revenue/demonstrate value, Enhance services, Reduce costs.

    Capability: Value realization

    Your Score: ____

    1 - Foundational: Transitioning and Growing

    2 - Capable/Competent: Core Contributor

    3 - Influential: Gifted Improver

    4 - Transformational: Towering Strength

    • Product canvas or basic product positioning overview.
    • Simple budget or funding mechanism for changes.
    • Product demos and informal user feedback mechanisms.
    • Business value canvas or basic business model tied to roadmap funding.
    • Product funding tied to roadmap milestones and prioritization.
    • Defined KPIs /OKRs for roadmap delivery throughput and value realization measurement.
    • Business model with operating cost structures, revenue/value traceability, and market/user segments.
    • Scenario-based roadmap funding alignment.
    • Roadmap aligned KPIs /OKRs for delivery throughput and value realization measurement as a key factor in roadmap prioritization.
    • Business model tied to enterprise operating costs and value realization KPIs/OKRs.
    • P&L roadmap and cost accounting tied to value metrics.
    • Roadmap aligned enterprise and scenario-based KPIs /OKRs for delivery throughput and value realization measurement as a key factor in roadmap prioritization.

    Exercise 3.2.5 Assess your value realization capability proficiency

    1 hour
    1. Review the expectations for this capability and determine your current proficiency for each skill.
    2. Complete your assessment in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment tool.
    3. Record the results in the Mature and Scale Product Ownership Playbook.
    4. Review the skills map to identify strengths and areas of growth.

    Output

    • Product owner capability assessment

    Participants

    • Product owners
    • Product managers

    Capture in the Mature and Scale Product Owner Proficiency Assessment.

    Determine your product owner capability proficiency in regards to: Vision, Leadership, Product Lifecycle, and Value Realization

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem solved.

    Product ownership can be one of the most difficult challenges facing delivery and operations teams. By focusing on operational grouping and alignment of goals, organizations can improve their value realization at all levels in the organization.

    The foundation for delivering and enhancing products and services is rooted in the same capability model. Traditionally, product owners have focused on only a subset of skills and capabilities needed to properly manage and grow their products. The product owner capability model is a useful tool to ensure optimal performance from product owners and assess the right level of detail for each product within the product families.

    Congratulations. You’ve completed a significant step toward higher-value products and services.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as apart of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com
    1-888-670-8889

    Additional Support

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as apart of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.1 Assess your real Agile skill proficiency

    Assess your skills and capabilities against the real Agile skills inventory

    2.2.3 Prioritize your stakeholders

    Build a stakeholder management strategy.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Emily Archer

    Lead Business Analyst,
    Enterprise Consulting, authentic digital agency

    Emily Archer is a consultant currently working with Fortune 500 clients to ensure the delivery of successful projects, products, and processes. She helps increase the business value returned for organizations’ investments in designing and implementing enterprise content hubs and content operations, custom web applications, digital marketing, and e-commerce platforms.

    David Berg

    Founder & CTO
    Strainprint Technologies Inc.

    David Berg is a product commercialization expert who has spent the last 20 years delivering product management and business development services across a broad range of industries. Early in his career, David worked with product management and engineering teams to build core network infrastructure products that secure and power the internet we benefit from today. David’s experience also includes working with clean technologies in the area of clean power generation, agritech, and Internet of Things infrastructure. Over the last five years, David has been focused on his latest venture, Strainprint Technologies, a data and analytics company focused on the medical cannabis industry. Strainprint has built the largest longitudinal medical cannabis dataset in the world, with a goal to develop an understanding of treatment behavior, interactions, and chemical drivers to guide future product development.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kathy Borneman

    Digital Product Owner, SunTrust Bank

    Kathy Borneman is a senior product owner who helps people enjoy their jobs again by engaging others in end-to-end decision making to deliver software and operational solutions that enhance the client experience and allow people to think and act strategically.

    Charlie Campbell

    Product Owner, Merchant e-Solutions

    Charlie Campbell is an experienced problem solver with the ability to quickly dissect situations and recommend immediate actions to achieve resolution, liaise between technical and functional personnel to bridge the technology and communication gap, and work with diverse teams and resources to reach a common goal.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Yarrow Diamond

    Sr. Director, Business Architecture
    Financial Services

    Yarrow Diamond is an experienced professional with expertise in enterprise strategy development, project portfolio management, and business process reengineering across financial services, healthcare and insurance, hospitality, and real estate environments. She has a master’s in Enterprise Architecture from Penn State University, LSSMBB, PMP, CSM, ITILv3.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey, CBAP, PMI-PBA

    Enterprise Business Systems Analyst,
    Vertex, Inc.

    Cari J. Faanes-Blakey has a history in software development and implementation as a Business Analyst and Project Manager for financial and taxation software vendors. Active in the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA), Cari participated on the writing team for the BA Body of Knowledge 3.0 and the certification exam.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Kieran Gobey

    Senior Consultant Professional Services
    Blueprint Software Systems

    Kieran Gobey is an IT professional with 24 years of experience, focused on business, technology, and systems analysis. He has split his career between external and internal customer-facing roles, and this has resulted in a true understanding of what is required to be a Professional Services Consultant. His problem-solving skills and ability to mentor others have resulted in successful software implementations.

    Kieran’s specialties include deep system troubleshooting and analysis skills, facilitating communications to bring together participants effectively, mentoring, leadership, and organizational skills.

    Rupert Kainzbauer

    VP Product, Digital Wallets
    Paysafe Group

    Rupert Kainzbauer is an experienced senior leader with a passion for defining and delivering products that deliver real customer and commercial benefit. With a team of highly experienced and motivated product managers, he has successfully led highly complex, multi-stakeholder payments initiatives, from proposition development and solution design through to market delivery. Their domain experience is in building online payment products in high-risk and emerging markets, remittance, prepaid cards, and mobile applications.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Saeed Khan

    Founder,
    Transformation Labs

    Saeed Khan has been working in high tech for 30 years in Canada and the US and has held several leadership roles in Product Management in that time. He speaks regularly at conferences and has been writing publicly about technology product management since 2005.

    Through Transformation Labs, Saeed helps companies accelerate product success by working with product teams to improve their skills, practices, and processes. He is a cofounder of ProductCamp Toronto and currently runs a Meetup group and global Slack community called Product Leaders; the only global community of senior level product executives.

    Hoi Kun Lo

    Product Owner
    Nielsen

    Hoi Kun Lo is an experienced change agent who can be found actively participating within the IIBA and WITI groups in Tampa, FL and a champion for Agile, architecture, diversity, and inclusion programs at Nielsen. She is currently a Product Owner in the Digital Strategy team within Nielsen Global Watch Technology.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Abhishek Mathur

    Sr Director, Product Management
    Kasisto, Inc.

    Abhishek Mathur is a product management leader, an artificial intelligence practitioner, and an educator. He has led product management and engineering teams at Clarifai, IBM, and Kasisto to build a variety of artificial intelligence applications within the space of computer vision, natural language processing, and recommendation systems. Abhishek enjoys having deep conversations about the future of technology and helping aspiring product managers enter and accelerate their careers.

    Jeff Meister

    Technology Advisor and Product Leader

    Jeff Meister is a technology advisor and product leader. He has more than 20 years of experience building and operating software products and the teams that build them. He has built products across a wide range of industries and has built and led large engineering, design, and product organizations.

    Jeff most recently served as Senior Director of Product Management at Avanade, where he built and led the product management practice. This involved hiring and leading product managers, defining product management processes, solution shaping and engagement execution, and evangelizing the discipline through pitches, presentations, and speaking engagements.

    Jeff holds a Bachelor of Applied Science (Electrical Engineering) and a Bachelor of Arts from the University of Waterloo, an MBA from INSEAD (Strategy), and certifications in product management, project management, and design thinking.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Vincent Mirabelli

    Principal,
    Global Project Synergy Group

    With over 10 years of experience in both the private and public sectors, Vincent Mirabelli possesses an impressive track record of improving, informing, and transforming business strategy and operations through process improvement, design and re-engineering, and the application of quality to business analysis, project management, and process improvement standards.

    Oz Nazili

    VP, Product & Growth
    TWG

    Oz Nazili is a product leader with a decade of experience in both building products and product teams. Having spent time at funded startups and large enterprises, he thinks often about the most effective way to deliver value to users. His core areas of interest include Lean MVP development and data-driven product growth.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Mike Starkey

    Director of Engineering
    W.W. Grainger

    Mike Starkey is a Director of Engineering at W.W. Grainger, currently focusing on operating model development, digital architecture, and building enterprise software. Prior to joining W.W. Grainger, Mike held a variety of technology consulting roles throughout the system delivery lifecycle spanning multiple industries such as healthcare, retail, manufacturing, and utilities with Fortune 500 companies.

    Anant Tailor

    Cofounder and Head of Product
    Dream Payments Corp.

    Anant Tailor is a cofounder at Dream Payments where he currently serves as the COO and Head of Product, having responsibility for Product Strategy & Development, Client Delivery, Compliance, and Operations. He has 20+ years of experience building and operating organizations that deliver software products and solutions for consumers and businesses of varying sizes.

    Prior to founding Dream Payments, Anant was the COO and Director of Client Services at DonRiver Inc, a technology strategy and software consultancy that he helped to build and scale into a global company with 100+ employees operating in seven countries.

    Anant is a Professional Engineer with a Bachelor degree in Electrical Engineering from McMaster University and a certificate in Product Strategy & Management from the Kellogg School of Management at Northwestern University.

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Angela Weller

    Scrum Master, Businessolver

    Angela Weller is an experienced Agile business analyst who collaborates with key stakeholders to attain their goals and contributes to the achievement of the company’s strategic objectives to ensure a competitive advantage. She excels when mediating or facilitating teams.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Product Delivery

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Build Your Agile Acceleration Roadmap

    Quickly assess the state of your Agile readiness and plan your path forward to higher value realization.

    Implement Agile Practices That Work

    Improve collaboration and transparency with the business to minimize project failure.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Extend Agile Practices Beyond IT

    Further the benefits of Agile by extending a scaled Agile framework to the business.

    Build Your BizDevOps Playbook

    Embrace a team sport culture built around continuous business-IT collaboration to deliver great products.

    Embed Security Into the DevOps Pipeline

    Shift security left to get into DevSecOps.

    Spread Best Practices With an Agile Center of Excellence

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Enable Organization-Wide Collaboration by Scaling Agile

    Execute a disciplined approach to rolling out Agile methods in the organization.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Application Portfolio Management

    APM Research Center

    See an overview of the APM journey and how we can support the pieces in this journey.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management

    Move beyond maintenance to ensuring exceptional value from your apps.

    Build an Application Department Strategy

    Delivering value starts with embracing what your department can do.

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Value, Delivery Metrics, Estimation

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value–driven outcomes.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Be careful what you ask for, because you will probably get it.

    Application Portfolio Assessment: End User Feedback

    Develop data-driven insights to help you decide which applications to retire, upgrade, re-train on, or maintain to meet the demands of the business.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Refine Your Estimation Practices With Top-Down Allocations

    Don’t let bad estimates ruin good work.

    Estimate Software Delivery With Confidence

    Commit to achievable software releases by grounding realistic expectations.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Optimize Project Intake, Approval, and Prioritization

    Deliver more projects by giving yourself the voice to say “no” or “not yet” to new projects.

    Enhance PPM Dashboards and Reports

    Facilitate ongoing alignment between Agile teams and the business with a set of targeted service offerings.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Organizational Design and Performance

    Redesign Your IT Organizational Structure

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Build a Strategic IT Workforce Plan

    Have the right people, in the right place, at the right time.

    Implement a New Organizational Structure

    Reorganizations are inherently disruptive. Implement your new structure with minimal pain for staff while maintaining IT performance throughout the change.

    Build an IT Employee Engagement Program

    Don’t just measure engagement, act on it

    Set Meaningful Employee Performance Measures

    Set holistic measures to inspire employee performance.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    A, Karen. “20 Mental Models for Product Managers.” Product Management Insider, Medium, 2 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Adams, Paul. “Product Teams: How to Build & Structure Product Teams for Growth.” Inside Intercom, 30 Oct. 2019. Web.

    Aghina, Handscomb, Ludolph, West, and Abby Yip, “How to select and develop individuals for successful agile teams: A practical guide” McKinsey & Company 20 Dec. 2018. Web.

    Agile Alliance. “Product Owner.” Agile Alliance. n.d. Web.

    Ambler, Scott W. "Communication on Agile Software Teams“, Agile Modeling. 2001-2022. Web.

    Ambysoft. “2018 IT Project Success Rates Survey Results.” Ambysoft. 2018. Web.

    Banfield, Richard, et al. “On-Demand Webinar: Strategies for Scaling Your (Growing) Enterprise Product Team.” Pluralsight, 31 Jan. 2018. Web.

    Beck, Beedle, van Bennekum, Cockburn, Cunningham, Fowler, Grenning, Highsmith, Hunt, Jeffries, Kern, Marick, Martin, Mellor, Schwaber, Sutherland, Thomas, "Manifesto for Agile Software Development." agilemanifesto.org. 2001

    Berez, Steve, et al. “How to Plan and budget for Agile at Scale.” Bain & Company, 08 Oct 2019. Web

    Blueprint. “10 Ways Requirements Can Sabotage Your Projects Right From the Start.” Blueprint. 2012. Web.

    Breddels, Dajo, and Paul Kuijten. “Product Owner Value Game.” Agile2015 Conference, Agile Alliance 2015. Web.

    Cagan, Martin. “Behind Every Great Product.” Silicon Valley Product Group. 2005. Web.

    Cohn, Mike. “What Is a Product?” Mountain Goat Software. 6 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Connellan, Thomas K. Inside the Magic Kingdom, Bard Press, 1997.

    Curphey, Mark. “Product Definition.” SlideShare, 25 Feb. 2007. Web.

    “Delegation Poker Product Image.” Management 3.0, n.d. Web.

    Distel, Dominic, et al. “Finding the sweet spot in product-portfolio management.’ McKinsey, 4 Dec. 2020. Web

    Eringa, Ron. “Evolution of the Product Owner.” RonEringa.com, 12 June 2016. Web.

    Fernandes, Thaisa. “Spotify Squad Framework - Part I.” PM101, Medium, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Galen, Robert. “Measuring Product Ownership – What Does ‘Good’ Look Like?” RGalen Consulting, 5 Aug. 2015. Web.

    Grenny, Joseph. “The Best Teams Hold Themselves Accountable.” Harvard Business Review, 30 May 2014. Web.

    Halisky, Merland, and Luke Lackrone. “The Product Owner’s Universe.” Agile2016 Conference, Agile Alliance, 2016. Web.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    IIBA "A Guide to the Business Analysis Body of Knowledge® (BABOK® Guide) v3" IIBA. 15 APR 2015

    Kamer, Jurriaan. “How to Build Your Own ‘Spotify Model’.” The Ready, Medium, 9 Feb. 2018. Web.

    Kendis Team. “Exploring Key Elements of Spotify’s Agile Scaling Model.” Scaled Agile Framework, Medium, 23 Jul. 2018. Web.

    Lindstrom, Lowell. “7 Skills You Need to Be a Great Product Owner.” Scrum Alliance, n.d. Web.

    Lukassen, Chris. “The Five Belts Of The Product Owner.” Xebia.com, 20 Sept. 2016. Web.

    Mankins, Michael. “The Defining Elements of a Winning Culture.” Bain, 19 Dec. 2013. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “Scaling Product Management: Secrets to Defeating Common Challenges.” ProductPlan, 12 July 2019. Web.

    McCloskey, Heather. “When and How to Scale Your Product Team.” UserVoice, 21 Feb. 2017. Web. Mironov, Rich. “Scaling Up Product Manager/Owner Teams.” Rich Mironov's Product Bytes, Mironov Consulting, 12 Apr. 2014. Web.

    Moore, Geoffrey A. “Crossing the Chasm, 3rd Edition.” Collins Business Essentials, 28 Jan 2014

    Oh, Paul. “How Mastering Resilience Can Help Drive Agile Transformations.” Why Innovation!, 10 Oct. 2019.

    Overeem, Barry. “A Product Owner Self-Assessment.” Barry Overeem, 6 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Overeem, Barry. “Retrospective: Using the Team Radar.” Barry Overeem, 27 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “How to Scale the Scrum Product Owner.” Roman Pichler, 28 June 2016 . Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Product Management Framework.” Pichler Consulting Limited, 2014. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Sprint Planning Tips for Product Owners.” LinkedIn, 4 Sept. 2018. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “What Is Product Management?” Pichler Consulting Limited, 26 Nov. 2014. Web.

    PMI "The high cost of low performance: the essential role of communications“. PMI Pulse of Profession, May 2013.

    Radigan,Dan. “Putting the ‘Flow' Back in Workflow With WIP Limits.” Atlassian, n.d. Web.

    Bibliography (Product Management)

    Rouse, Margaret. “Definition: product.” TechTarget, Sept. 2005. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on (Business) Value.” Scrum.org, 30 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Agile Product Management.” Scrum.org, 28 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Scrum.org, 5 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on the Product Vision.” Scrum.org, 29 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Starting Product Owners.” Scrum.org, 27 Nov. 2017. Web.

    Sharma, Rohit. “Scaling Product Teams the Structured Way.” Monetary Musings, 28 Nov. 2016. Web.

    Shirazi, Reza. “Betsy Stockdale of Seilevel: Product Managers Are Not Afraid To Be Wrong.” Austin Voice of Product, 2 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Spitz, Enid R. “The Three Kinds of Empathy: Emotional, Cognitive, Compassionate.” The Three Kinds of Empathy: Emotional, Cognitive, Compassionate. Heartmanity. Web.

    Steiner, Anne. “Start to Scale Your Product Management: Multiple Teams Working on Single Product.” Cprime, 6 Aug. 2019. Web.

    “The Qualities of Leadership: Leading Change.” Cornelius & Associates, 2016. Web.

    “The Standish Group 2015 Chaos Report.” The Standish Group. 2015. Web.

    Theus, Andre. “When Should You Scale the Product Management Team?” ProductPlan, 7 May 2019. Web.

    Tolonen, Arto. “Scaling Product Management in a Single Product Company.” Smartly.io, 26 Apr. 2018. Web.

    Ulrich, Catherine. “The 6 Types of Product Managers. Which One Do You Need?” Medium, 19 Dec. 2017. Web.

    Verwijs, Christiaan. “Retrospective: Do The Team Radar.” The Liberators, Medium, 10 Feb. 2017. Web.

    Vlaanderen, Kevin. “Towards Agile Product and Portfolio Management”. Academia.edu. 2010. Web.

    Backlog

    2009 Business Analysis Benchmark Study.” IAG Consulting, 2009. Web.

    Armel, Kate. “Data-driven Estimation, Management Lead to High Quality.” Quantitative Software Management Inc, 2015. Web.

    Bradley, Marty. “Agile Estimation Guidance.” Leading Agile, 30 Aug. 2016. Web. Feb. 2019.

    CollabNet and VersionOne. “12th Annual State of Agile Report.” VersionOne, 9 April 2018. Web.

    Craveiro, João. “Marty meets Martin: connecting the two triads of Product Management.” Product Coalition, 18 Nov. 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    “Enablers.” Scaled Agile, n.d. Web.

    “Epic.” Scaled Agile, n.d. Web.

    Fischer, Christian. “Scrum Compact.” Itemis, n.d. Web. Feb. 2019.

    Hackshall, Robin. “Product Backlog Refinement.” Scrum Alliance, 9 Oct. 2014. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Hartman, Bob. “New to agile? INVEST in good user stories.” Agile For All, 14 May 2009. Web.

    Huether, Derek. “Cheat Sheet for Product Backlog Refinement (Grooming).” Leading Agile, 2 Nov. 2013. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Karlsson, Johan. “Backlog Grooming: Must-Know Tips for High-Value Products.” Perforce, 18 May 2018. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Khan, Saeed. “Good Bye ‘Product Owner’, Hello ‘Backlog Manager.’” On Product Management, 27 June 2011. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Khan, Saeed. “Let’s End the Confusion: A Product Owner is NOT a Product Manager.” On Product Management, 14 July 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Lawrence, Richard. “New Story Splitting Resource.” Agile For All. 27 Jan. 2012. Web. Feb. 2019.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile Inc, 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Lucero, Mario. “Product Backlog – Deep Model.” Agilelucero, 8 Oct. 2014. Web.

    “PI Planning.” Scaled Agile, n.d. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Roadmap and the Product Backlog.” Roman Pichler, 9 Sept. 2014. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Rubin, Kenneth S. Essential Scrum: A Practical Guide to the Most Popular Agile Process. Pearson Education, 2012.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “10 Tips for Product Owners on Product Backlog Management.” Burozeven, 20 Nov. 2017. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Srinivasan, Vibhu. “Product Backlog Management: Tips from a Seasoned Product Owner.” Agile Alliance, n.d. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    Todaro, Dave. “Splitting Epics and User Stories.” Ascendle, n.d. Accessed Feb. 2019.

    “What Characteristics Make Good Agile Acceptance Criteria?” Segue Technologies, 3 Sept. 2015. Web. Feb. 2019.

    Bibliography (Roadmap)

    Bastow, Janna. “Creating Agile Product roadmaps Everyone Understands.” ProdPad, 22 Mar. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bastow, Janna. “The Product Tree Game: Our Favorite Way To Prioritize Features.” ProdPad, 21 Feb. 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Chernak, Yuri. “Requirements Reuse: The State of the Practice.” 2012 IEEE International Conference, 12 June 2012, Herzliya, Israel. Web.

    Fowler, Martin. “Application Boundary.” MartinFowler.com, 11 Sept. 2003. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Harrin, Elizabeth. “Learn What a Project Milestone Is.” The Balance Careers, 10 May 2018. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    “How to create a product roadmap.” Roadmunk, n.d. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “How to Master the 3 Horizons of Product Strategy.” Aha!, 24 Sept. 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Johnson, Steve. “The Product Roadmap vs. the Technology Roadmap.” Aha!, 23 June 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018

    Juncal, Shaun. “How Should You Set Your Product Roadmap Timeframes?” ProductPlan, Web. Sept. 2018.

    Leffingwell, Dean. “SAFe 4.0.” Scaled Agile, 2017. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “What is a Minimum Viable Product (MVP).” Leanstack, 12 June 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. “10 Tips for Creating an Agile Product Roadmap.” Roman Pichler, 20 July 2016. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Pichler, Roman. Strategize: Product Strategy and Product Roadmap Practices for the Digital Age. Pichler Consulting, 2016.

    “Product Roadmap Contents: What Should You Include?” ProductPlan, n.d. Accessed 20 Nov. 2017.

    Saez, Andrea. “Why Your Roadmap Is Not a Release Plan.” ProdPad, 23 October 2015. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Schuurman, Robbin. “Tips for Agile product roadmaps & product roadmap examples.” Scrum.org, 7 Dec. 2017. Accessed Sept. 2018.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    Adams, Paul. “The Future Product Canvas.” Inside Intercom, 10 Jan. 2014. Web.

    “Aligning IT Funding Models to the Pace of Technology Change.” EDUCAUSE, 14 Dec. 2015. Web.

    Altman, Igor. “Metrics: Gone Bad.” OpenView, 10 Nov. 2009. Web.

    Barry, Richard. “The Product Vision Canvas – a Strategic Tool in Developing a Successful Business.” Polymorph, 2019. Web.

    “Business Canvas – Business Models & Value Propositions.” Strategyzer, 2019. Web.

    “Business Model Canvas.” Wikipedia: The Free Encyclopedia, 4 Aug. 2019. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Idea to Product: The Working Model.” ThoughtWorks, 13 July 2017. Web.

    Charak, Dinker. “Product Management Canvas - Product in a Snapshot.” Dinker Charak, 29 May 2017. Web.

    Chudley, James. “Practical Steps in Determining Your Product Vision (Product Tank Bristol, Oct. 2018).” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by cxpartners, 2 Nov. 2018. Web.

    Cowan, Alex. “The 20 Minute Business Plan: Business Model Canvas Made Easy.” COWAN+, 2019. Web.

    Craig, Desiree. “So You've Decided To Become A Product Manager.” Start it up, Medium, 2 June 2019. Web.

    “Create an Aha! Business Model Canvas Strategic Model.” Aha! Support, 2019. Web.

    Eick, Stephen. “Does Code Decay? Assessing the Evidence from Change Management Data.” IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering, vol. 27, no. 1, Jan. 2001, pp. 1-12. Web.

    Eriksson, Martin. “The next Product Canvas.” Mind the Product, 22 Nov. 2013. Web.

    “Experience Canvas: a Lean Approach: Atlassian Team Playbook.” Atlassian, 2019. Web.

    Freeman, James. “How to Make a Product Canvas – Visualize Your Product Plan.” Edraw, 23 Dec. 2019. Web.

    Fuchs, Danny. “Measure What Matters: 5 Best Practices from Performance Management Leaders.” OpenGov, 8 Aug. 2018. Web.

    Gorisse, Willem. “A Practical Guide to the Product Canvas.” Mendix, 28 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Gothelf, Jeff. “The Lean UX Canvas.” Jeff Gothelf, 15 Dec. 2016. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product: Getting Started.” EBG Consulting, 15 Jan. 2019. Web.

    Gottesdiener, Ellen. “Using the Product Canvas to Define Your Product's Core Requirements.” EBG Consulting, 4 Feb. 2019. Web.

    Gray, Mark Krishan. “Should I Use the Business Model Canvas or the Lean Canvas?” Blog, Medium.com, 2019. Web.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    Hanby, Jeff. "Software Maintenance: Understanding and Estimating Costs." LookFar, 21 Oct. 2016. Web.

    “How do you define a product?” Scrum.org, 4 Apr 2017, Web

    Juncal, Shaun. “How to Build a Product Roadmap Based on a Business Model Canvas.” ProductPlan, 19 June 2019. Web.

    “Lean Canvas Intro - Uber Example.” YouTube, uploaded by Railsware Product Academy, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    “Lesson 6: Product Canvas.” ProdPad Help Center, 2019. Web.

    Lucero, Mario. “The Product Canvas.” Agilelucero.com, 22 June 2015. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Create a New Lean Canvas.” Canvanizer, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Don't Write a Business Plan. Create a Lean Canvas Instead.” LEANSTACK, 2019. Web.

    Maurya, Ash. “Why Lean Canvas vs Business Model Canvas?” Medium, 27 Feb. 2012. Web.

    Mirabelli, Vincent. “The Project Value Canvas.” Vincent Mirabelli, 2019. Web.

    Mishra, LN. “Business Analysis Canvas – The Ultimate Enterprise Architecture.” BA Times, 19 June 2019. Web.

    Muller. Jerry Z. “Why performance metrics isn’t always the best way to judge performance.” Fast Company, 3 April 2019. Web.

    Perri, Melissa. “What Is Good Product Strategy?” Melissa Perri, 14 July 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “A Product Canvas for Agile Product Management, Lean UX, Lean Startup.” Roman Pichler, 16 July 2012. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Introducing the Product Canvas.” JAXenter, 15 Jan. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “Roman's Product Canvas: Introduction.” YouTube, uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Agile Vision Board: Vision and Product Strategy.” Roman Pichler, 10 May 2011. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas – Template.” Roman Pichler, 11 Oct. 2016. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Canvas Tutorial V1.0.” LinkedIn SlideShare. Uploaded by Roman Pichler, 14 Feb. 2013. Web.

    Pichler, Roman. “The Product Vision Board: Introduction.” YouTube uploaded by Roman Pichler, 3 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “Product Canvas PowerPoint Template.” SlideModel, 2019. Web.

    Bibliography (Vision and Canvas)

    “Product Canvas.” SketchBubble, 2019, Web.

    “Product Canvas.” YouTube, uploaded by Wojciech Szramowski, 18 May 2016. Web.

    “Product Roadmap Software to Help You Plan, Visualize, and Share Your Product Roadmap.” Productboard, 2019. Web.

    Roggero, Giulio. “Product Canvas Step-by-Step.” LinkedIn SlideShare, uploaded by Giulio Roggero, 18 May 2013. Web.

    Royce, Dr. Winston W. “Managing the Development of Large Software Systems.” Scf.usc.edu, 1970. Web.

    Ryan, Dustin. “The Product Canvas.” Qdivision, Medium, 20 June 2017. Web.

    Snow, Darryl. “Product Vision Board.” Medium, 6 May 2017. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas – a Tool Your Startup Needs Instead of a Business Plan.” Railsware, 12 Oct. 2018. Web.

    Stanislav, Shymansky. “Lean Canvas Examples of Multi-Billion Startups.” Railsware, 20 Feb. 2019. Web.

    “The Product Vision Canvas.” YouTube, Uploaded by Tom Miskin, 20 May 2019. Web.

    Tranter, Leon. “Agile Metrics: the Ultimate Guide.” Extreme Uncertainty, n.d. Web.

    “Using Business Model Canvas to Launch a Technology Startup or Improve Established Operating Model.” AltexSoft, 27 July 2018. Web.

    Veyrat, Pierre. “Lean Business Model Canvas: Examples + 3 Pillars + MVP + Agile.” HEFLO BPM, 10 Mar. 2017. Web.

    “What Are Software Metrics and How Can You Track Them?” Stackify, 16 Sept. 2017. Web

    “What Is a Product Vision?” Aha!, 2019. Web.

    Supporting Research

    Transformation topics and supporting Info-Tech research to make the journey easier, with less rework.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving IT alignment

    Build a Business-Aligned IT Strategy

    Success depends on IT initiatives clearly aligned to business goals, IT excellence, and driving technology innovation.

    Includes a "Strategy on a page" template

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Create an IT View of the Service Catalog

    Unlock the full value of your service catalog with technical components.

    Application Portfolio Management Foundations

    Ensure your application portfolio delivers the best possible return on investment.

    Supporting research and services

    Shifting toward Agile DevOps

    Agile/DevOps Resource Center

    Tools and advice you need to be successful with Agile.

    Develop Your Agile Approach for a Successful Transformation

    Understand Agile fundamentals, principles, and practices so you can apply them effectively in your organization.

    Implement DevOps Practices That Work

    Streamline business value delivery through the strategic adoption of DevOps practices.

    Perform an Agile Skills Assessment

    Being Agile isn't about processes, it's about people.

    Define the Role of Project Management in Agile and Product-Centric Delivery

    Projects and products are not mutually exclusive.

    Supporting research and services

    Shifting toward product management

    Make the Case for Product Delivery

    Align your organization on the practices to deliver what matters most.

    Deliver on Your Digital Product Vision

    Build a product vision your organization can take from strategy through execution.

    Deliver Digital Products at Scale

    Deliver value at the scale of your organization through defining enterprise product families.

    Build a Better Product Owner

    Strengthen the product owner's role in your organization by focusing on core capabilities and proper alignment.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving value and delivery metrics

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Select and Use SDLC Metrics Effectively

    Be careful what you ask for because you will probably get it.

    Reduce Time to Consensus With an Accelerated Business Case

    Expand on the financial model to give your initiative momentum.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving governance, prioritization, and value

    Make Your IT Governance Adaptable

    Governance isn't optional, so keep it simple and make it flexible.

    Maximize Business Value from IT Through Benefits Realization

    Embed benefits realization into your governance process to prioritize IT spending and confirm the value of IT.

    Drive Digital Transformation With Platform Strategies

    Innovate and transform your business models with digital platforms.

    Succeed With Digital Strategy Execution

    Building a digital strategy is only half the battle: create a systematic roadmap of technology initiatives to execute the strategy and drive digital transformation.

    Build a Value Measurement Framework

    Focus product delivery on business value-driven outcomes.

    Create a Holistic IT Dashboard

    Mature your IT department by measuring what matters.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving requirements management and quality assurance

    Requirements Gathering for Small Enterprises

    Right-size the guidelines of your requirements gathering process.

    Improve Requirements Gathering

    Back to basics: great products are built on great requirements.

    Build a Software Quality Assurance Program

    Build quality into every step of your SDLC.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done

    Drive software delivery throughput and quality confidence by extending your automation test coverage.

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Create a Business Process Management Strategy

    Avoid project failure by keeping the "B" in BPM.

    Build a Winning Business Process Automation Playbook

    Optimize and automate your business processes with a user-centric approach.

    Create a Winning BPI Playbook

    Don't waste your time focusing on the "as is." Focus on the improvements and the "to be."

    Supporting research and services

    Improving release management

    Optimize Applications Release Management

    Build trust by right-sizing your process using appropriate governance.

    Streamline Application Maintenance

    Effective maintenance ensures the long-term value of your applications.

    Streamline Application Management

    Move beyond maintenance to ensure exceptional value from your apps.

    Optimize Change Management

    Right-size your change management process.

    Manage Your Technical Debt

    Make the case to manage technical debt in terms of business impact.

    Improve Application Development Throughput

    Drive down your delivery time by eliminating development inefficiencies and bottlenecks while maintaining high quality.

    Supporting research and services

    Business relationship management

    Embed Business Relationship Management

    Leverage knowledge of the business to become a strategic IT partner.

    Improving security

    Build an Information Security Strategy

    Create value by aligning your strategy to business goals and business risks.

    Develop and Deploy Security Policies

    Enhance your overall security posture with a defensible and prescriptive policy suite.

    Simplify Identity and Access Management

    Leverage risk- and role-based access control to quantify and simplify the IAM process.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving and supporting business-managed applications

    Embrace Business-Managed Applications

    Empower the business to implement their own applications with a trusted business-IT relationship.

    Enhance Your Solution Architecture Practices

    Ensure your software systems solution is architected to reflect stakeholders’ short-and long-term needs.

    Satisfy Digital End Users With Low- and No-Code

    Extend IT, automation, and digital capabilities to the business with the right tools, good governance, and trusted organizational relationships.

    Build Your First RPA Bot

    Support RPA delivery with strong collaboration and management foundations.

    Automate Work Faster and More Easily With Robotic Process Automation

    Embrace the symbiotic relationship between the human and digital workforce.

    Supporting research and services

    Improving business intelligence, analytics, and reporting

    Modernize Data Architecture for Measurable Business Results

    Enable the business to achieve operational excellence, client intimacy, and product leadership with an innovative, Agile, and fit-for-purpose data architecture practice.

    Build a Reporting and Analytics Strategy

    Deliver actionable business insights by creating a business-aligned reporting and analytics strategy.

    Build Your Data Quality Program

    Quality data drives quality business decisions.

    Design Data-as-a-Service

    Journey to the data marketplace ecosystems.

    Build a Robust and Comprehensive Data Strategy

    Key to building and fostering a data-driven culture.

    Build an Application Integration Strategy

    Level the table before assembling the application integration puzzle or risk losing pieces.

    Appendix

    Pulse survey results

    Pulse survey (N=18): What are the key components of product/service ownership?

    Pulse survey results: What are the key components of product/service ownership? Table shows answer options and responses in percentage.

    Pulse Survey (N=18): What are the key individual skills for a product/service owner?

    What are the key individual skills for a product/service owner? Table shows answer options and responses in percentage

    Other choices entered by respondents:

    • Anticipating client needs, being able to support delivery in all phases of the product lifecycle, adaptability, and ensuring a healthy backlog (at least two sprints’ worth of work).
    • Requirements elicitation and prioritization.
    • The key skill is being product-focused to ensure it provides value for competitive advantage.

    Pulse Survey (N=18): What are three things an outstanding product/service owner does that an average one doesn’t?

    What are three things an outstanding product/service owner does that an average one doesn't? Table shows results.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}285|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $29,139 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 5 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Testing, Deployment & QA
    • Parent Category Link: /testing-deployment-and-qa
    • Today’s rapidly changing software products and operational processes create mounting pressure on software delivery teams to release new features and changes quickly while meeting high and demanding quality standards.
    • Most organizations see automated testing as a solution to meet this demand alongside their continuous delivery pipeline. However, they often lack the critical foundations, skills, and practices that are imperative for success.
    • The technology is available to enable automated testing for many scenarios and systems, but industry noise and an expansive tooling marketplace create confusion for those interested in adopting this technology.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Good automated testing improves development throughput. No matter how quickly you put changes into production, end users will not accept them if they do not meet quality standards. Escaped defects, refactoring, and technical debt can significantly hinder your team’s ability to deliver software on time and on budget. In fact, 65% of organizations saw a reduction of test cycle time and 62% saw reductions in test costs with automated testing (Sogeti, World Quality Report 2020–21).
    • Start automation with unit and functional tests. Automated testing has a sharp learning curve, due to either the technical skills to implement and operate it or the test cases you are asked to automate. Unit tests and functional tests are ideal starting points in your automation journey because of the available tools and knowledge in the industry, the contained nature of the tests you are asked to execute, and the repeated use of the artifacts in more complicated tests (such as performance and integration tests). After all, you want to make sure the application works before stressing it.
    • Automated testing is a cross-functional practice, not a silo. A core component of successful software delivery throughput is recognizing and addressing defects, bugs, and other system issues early and throughout the software development lifecycle (SDLC). This involves having all software delivery roles collaborate on and participate in automated test case design, configure and orchestrate testing tools with other delivery tools, and proactively prepare the necessary test data and environments for test types.

    Impact and Result

    • Bring the right people to the table. Automated testing involves significant people, process and technology changes across multiple software delivery roles. These roles will help guide how automated testing will compliment and enhance their responsibilities.
    • Build a foundation. Review your current circumstances to understand the challenges blocking automated testing. Establish a strong base of good practices to support the gradually adoption of automated testing across all test types.
    • Start with one application. Verify and validate the automated testing practices used in one application and their fit for other applications and systems. Develop a reference guide to assist new teams.

    Automate Testing to Get More Done Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should automate testing, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    2. Adopt good automated testing practices

    Develop and implement practices that mature your automated testing capabilities.

    • Automated Testing Quick Reference Template

    Infographic

    Workshop: Automate Testing to Get More Done

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Adopt Good Automated Testing Practices

    The Purpose

    Understand the goals of and your vision for your automated testing practice.

    Develop your automated testing foundational practices.

    Adopt good practices for each test type.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Level set automated testing expectations and objectives.

    Learn the key practices needed to mature and streamline your automated testing across all test types.

    Activities

    1.1 Build a foundation.

    1.2 Automate your test types.

    Outputs

    Automated testing vision, expectations, and metrics

    Current state of your automated testing practice

    Ownership of the implementation and execution of automated testing foundations

    List of practices to introduce automation to for each test type

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}191|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.6/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $44,821 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 11 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: IT Governance, Risk & Compliance
    • Parent Category Link: /it-governance-risk-and-compliance
    • Unfortunately, when CIOs implement IT steering committees, they often lack the appropriate structure and processes to be effective.
    • Due to the high profile of the IT steering committee membership, CIOs need to get this right – or their reputation is at risk.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • 88% of IT steering committees fail. The organizations that succeed have clearly defined responsibilities that are based on business needs.
    • Without a documented process your committee can’t execute on its responsibilities. Clearly define the flow of information to make your committee actionable.
    • Limit your headaches by holding your IT steering committee accountable for defining project prioritization criteria.

    Impact and Result

    Leverage Info-Tech’s process and deliverables to see dramatic improvements in your business satisfaction through an effective IT steering committee. This blueprint will provide three core customizable deliverables that you can use to launch or optimize your IT steering committee:

    • IT Steering Committee Charter: Use this template in combination with this blueprint to form a highly tailored committee.
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation: Build understanding around the goals and purpose of the IT steering committee, and generate support from your leadership team.
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool: Engage your IT steering committee participants in defining project prioritization criteria. Track project prioritization and assess your portfolio.

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should establish an IT steering committee, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Build the steering committee charter

    Build your IT steering committee charter using results from the stakeholder survey.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 1: Build the Steering Committee Charter
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey
    • IT Steering Committee Charter

    2. Define IT steering commitee processes

    Define your high level steering committee processes using SIPOC, and select your steering committee metrics.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 2: Define ITSC Processes

    3. Build the stakeholder presentation

    Customize Info-Tech’s stakeholder presentation template to gain buy-in from your key IT steering committee stakeholders.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 3: Build the Stakeholder Presentation
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation

    4. Define the prioritization criteria

    Build the new project intake and prioritization process for your new IT steering committee.

    • Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee – Phase 4: Define the Prioritization Criteria
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool
    • IT Project Intake Form
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Build the IT Steering Committee

    The Purpose

    Lay the foundation for your IT steering committee (ITSC) by surveying your stakeholders and identifying the opportunities and threats to implementing your ITSC.

    Key Benefits Achieved

     An understanding of the business environment affecting your future ITSC and identification of strategies for engaging with stakeholders

    Activities

    1.1 Launch stakeholder survey for business leaders.

    1.2 Analyze results with an Info-Tech advisor.

    1.3 Identify opportunities and threats to successful IT steering committee implementation.

    1.4 Develop the fit-for-purpose approach.

    Outputs

    Report on business leader governance priorities and awareness

    Refined workshop agenda

    2 Define the ITSC Goals

    The Purpose

    Define the goals and roles of your IT steering committee.

    Plan the responsibilities of your future committee members.

    Key Benefits Achieved

     Groundwork for completing the steering committee charter

    Activities

    2.1 Review the role of the IT steering committee.

    2.2 Identify IT steering committee goals and objectives.

    2.3 Conduct a SWOT analysis on the five governance areas

    2.4 Define the key responsibilities of the ITSC.

    2.5 Define ITSC participation.

    Outputs

    IT steering committee key responsibilities and participants identified

    IT steering committee priorities identified

    3 Define the ITSC Charter

    The Purpose

    Document the information required to create an effective ITSC Charter.

    Create the procedures required for your IT steering committee.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Clearly defined roles and responsibilities for your steering committee

    Completed IT Steering Committee Charter document

    Activities

    3.1 Build IT steering committee participant RACI.

    3.2 Define your responsibility cadence and agendas.

    3.3 Develop IT steering committee procedures.

    3.4 Define your IT steering committee purpose statement and goals.

    Outputs

    IT steering committee charter: procedures, agenda, and RACI

    Defined purpose statement and goals

    4 Define the ITSC Process

    The Purpose

    Define and test your IT steering committee processes.

    Get buy-in from your key stakeholders through your stakeholder presentation.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Stakeholder understanding of the purpose and procedures of IT steering committee membership

    Activities

    4.1 Define your high-level IT steering committee processes.

    4.2 Conduct scenario testing on key processes, establish ITSC metrics.

    4.3 Build your ITSC stakeholder presentation.

    4.4 Manage potential objections.

    Outputs

    IT steering committee SIPOC maps

    Refined stakeholder presentation

    5 Define Project Prioritization Criteria

    The Purpose

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Activities

    5.1 Create prioritization criteria

    5.2 Customize the project prioritization tool

    5.3 Pilot test the tool

    5.4 Define action plan and next steps

    Outputs

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Action plan

    Further reading

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    Have the right people making the right decisions to drive IT success.

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • CIOs
    • IT Leaders

    This Research Will Also Assist:

    • Business Partners

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Structure an IT steering committee with the appropriate membership and responsibilities
    • Define appropriate cadence around business involvement in IT decision making
    • Define your IT steering committee processes, metrics, and timelines
    • Obtain buy-in for IT steering committee participations
    • Define the project prioritization criteria

    This Research Will Help Them:

    • Understand the importance of IT governance and their role
    • Identify and build the investment prioritization criteria

    Executive Summary

    Situation

    • An effective IT steering committee (ITSC) is one of the top predictors of value generated by IT, yet only 11% of CIOs believe their committees are effective.
    • An effective steering committee ensures that the right people are involved in critical decision making to drive organizational value.

    Complication

    • Unfortunately, when CIOs do implement IT steering committees, they often lack the appropriate structure and processes to be effective.
    • Due to the high profile of the IT steering committee membership, CIOs need to get this right – or their reputation is at risk.

    Resolution

    Leverage Info-Tech’s process and deliverables to see dramatic improvements in your business satisfaction through an effective IT steering committee. This blueprint will provide three core customizable deliverables that you can use to launch or optimize your IT steering committee. These include:

    1. IT Steering Committee Charter: Customizable charter complete with example purpose, goals, responsibilities, procedures, RACI, and processes. Use this template in combination with this blueprint to get a highly tailored committee.
    2. IT Stakeholder Presentation: Use our customizable presentation guide to build understanding around the goals and purpose of the IT steering committee and generate support from your leadership team.
    3. IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool: Engage your IT steering committee participants in defining the project prioritization criteria. Use our template to track project prioritization and assess your portfolio.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. 88% of IT steering committees fail. The organizations that succeed have clearly defined responsibilities that are based on business needs.
    2. Without a documented process your committee can’t execute on its responsibilities. Clearly define the flow of information to make your committee actionable.
    3. Limit your headaches by holding your IT steering committee accountable for defining project prioritization criteria.

    IT Steering Committee

    Effective IT governance critical in driving business satisfaction with IT. Yet 88% of CIOs believe that their governance structure and processes are not effective. The IT steering committee (ITSC) is the heart of the governance body and brings together critical organizational stakeholders to enable effective decision making (Info-Tech Research Group Webinar Survey).

    IT STEERING COMMITTEES HAVE 3 PRIMARY OBJECTIVES – TO IMPROVE:

    1. Alignment: IT steering committees drive IT and business strategy alignment by having business partners jointly accountable for the prioritization and selection of projects and investments within the context of IT capacity.
    2. Accountability: The ITSC facilitates the involvement and commitment of executive management through clearly defined roles and accountabilities for IT decisions in five critical areas: investments, projects, risk, services, and data.
    3. Value Generation: The ITSC is responsible for the ongoing evaluation of IT value and performance of IT services. The committee should define these standards and approve remediation plans when there is non-achievement.

    "Everyone needs good IT, but no one wants to talk about it. Most CFOs would rather spend time with their in-laws than in an IT steering-committee meeting. But companies with good governance consistently outperform companies with bad. Which group do you want to be in?"

    – Martha Heller, President, Heller Search Associates

    An effective IT steering committee improves IT and business alignment and increases support for IT across the organization

    CEOs’ PERCEPTION OF IT AND BUSINESS ALIGNMENT

    67% of CIOs/CEOs are misaligned on the target role for IT.

    47% of CEOs believe that business goals are going unsupported by IT.

    64% of CEOs believe that improvement is required around IT’s understanding of business goals.

    28% of business leaders are supporters of their IT departments.

    A well devised IT steering committee ensures that core business partners are involved in critical decision making and that decisions are based on business goals – not who shouts the loudest. Leading to faster decision-making time, and better-quality decisions and outcomes.

    Source: Info-Tech CIO/CEO Alignment data

    Despite the benefits, 9 out of 10 steering committees are unsuccessful

    WHY DO IT STEERING COMMITTEES FAIL?

    1. A lack of appetite for an IT steering committee from business partners
    2. An effective ITSC requires participation from core members of the organization’s leadership team. The challenge is that most business partners don’t understand the benefits of an ITSC and the responsibilities aren’t tailored to participants’ needs or interests. It’s the CIOs responsibility to make this case to stakeholders and right-size the committee responsibilities and membership.
    3. IT steering committees are given inappropriate responsibilities
    4. The IT steering committee is fundamentally about decision making; it’s not a working committee. CIOs struggle with clarifying these responsibilities on two fronts: either the responsibilities are too vague and there is no clear way to execute on them within a meeting, or responsibilities are too tactical and require knowledge that participants do not have. Responsibilities should determine who is on the ITSC, not the other way around.
    5. Lack of process around execution
    6. An ITSC is only valuable if members are able to successfully execute on the responsibilities. Without well defined processes it becomes nearly impossible for the ITSC to be actionable. As a result, participants lack the information they need to make critical decisions, agendas are unmet, and meetings are seen as a waste of time.

    GOVERNANCE and ITSC and IT Management

    Organizations often blur the line between governance and management, resulting in the business having say over the wrong things. Understand the differences and make sure both groups understand their role.

    The ITSC is the most senior body within the IT governance structure, involving key business executives and focusing on critical strategic decisions impacting the whole organization.

    Within a holistic governance structure, organizations may have additional committees that evaluate, direct, and monitor key decisions at a more tactical level and report into the ITSC.

    These committees require specialized knowledge and are implemented to meet specific organizational needs. Those operational committees may spark a tactical task force to act on specific needs.

    IT management is responsible for executing on, running, and monitoring strategic activities as determined by IT governance.

    RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN STRATEGIC, TACTICAL, AND OPERATIONAL GROUPS

    Strategic IT Steering Committee
    Tactical

    Project Governance Service Governance

    Risk Governance Information Governance

    IT Management
    Operational Risk Task Force

    This blueprint focuses exclusively on building the IT steering committee. For more information on IT governance see Info-Tech’s blueprint Tailor an IT Governance Plan to Fit Organizational Needs.

    1. Governance of the IT Portfolio & Investments: ensures that funding and resources are systematically allocated to the priority projects that deliver value
    2. Governance of Projects: ensures that IT projects deliver the expected value, and that the PM methodology is measured and effective.
    3. Governance of Risks: ensures the organization’s ability to assess and deliver IT projects and services with acceptable risk.
    4. Governance of Services: ensures that IT delivers the required services at the acceptable performance levels.
    5. Governance of Information and Data: ensures the appropriate classification and retention of data based on business need.

    If these symptoms resonate with you, it might be time to invest in building an IT steering committee

    SIGNS YOU MAY NEED TO BUILD AN IT STEERING COMMITTEE

    As CIO I find that there is a lack of alignment between business and IT strategies.
    I’ve noticed that projects are thrown over the fence by stakeholders and IT is expected to comply.
    I’ve noticed that IT projects are not meeting target project metrics.
    I’ve struggled with a lack of accountability for decision making, especially by the business.
    I’ve noticed that the business does not understand the full cost of initiatives and projects.
    I don’t have the authority to say “no” when business requests come our way.
    We lack a standardized approach for prioritizing projects.
    IT has a bad reputation within the organization, and I need a way to improve relationships.
    Business partners are unaware of how decisions are made around IT risks.
    Business partners don’t understand the full scope of IT responsibilities.
    There are no SLAs in place and no way to measure stakeholder satisfaction with IT.

    Info-Tech’s approach to implementing an IT steering committee

    Info-Tech’s IT steering committee development blueprint will provide you with the required tools, templates, and deliverables to implement a right-sized committee that’s effective the first time.

    • Measure your business partner level of awareness and interest in the five IT governance areas, and target specific responsibilities for your steering committee based on need.
    • Customize Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Charter Template to define and document the steering committee purpose, responsibilities, participation, and cadence.
    • Build critical steering committee processes to enable information to flow into and out of the committee to ensure that the committee is able to execute on responsibilities.
    • Customize Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template to make your first meeting a breeze, providing stakeholders with the information they need, with less than two hours of preparation time.
    • Leverage our workshop guide and prioritization tools to facilitate a meeting with IT steering committee members to define the prioritization criteria for projects and investments and roll out a streamlined process.

    Info-Tech’s Four-Phase Process

    Key Deliverables:
    1 2 3 4
    Build the Steering Committee Charter Define ITSC Processes Build the Stakeholder Presentation Define the Prioritization Criteria
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey
    • IT Steering Committee Charter
      • Purpose
      • Responsibilities
      • RACI
      • Procedures
    • IT Steering Committee SIPOC (Suppliers, Inputs, Process, Outputs, Customers)
    • Defined process frequency
    • Defined governance metrics
    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template
      • Introduction
      • Survey outcomes
      • Responsibilities
      • Next steps
      • ITSC goals
    • IT project prioritization facilitation guide
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool
    • Project Intake Form

    Leverage both COBIT and Info-Tech-defined metrics to evaluate the success of your program or project

    COBIT METRICS Alignment
    • Percent of enterprise strategic goals and requirements supported by strategic goals.
    • Level of stakeholder satisfaction with scope of the planned portfolio of programs and services.
    Accountability
    • Percent of executive management roles with clearly defined accountabilities for IT decisions.
    • Rate of execution of executive IT-related decisions.
    Value Generation
    • Level of stakeholder satisfaction and perceived value.
    • Number of business disruptions due to IT service incidents.
    INFO-TECH METRICS Survey Metrics:
    • Percent of business leaders who believe they understand how decisions are made in the five governance areas.
    • Percentage of business leaders who believe decision making involved the right people.
    Value of Customizable Deliverables:
    • Estimated time to build IT steering committee charter independently X cost of employee
    • Estimated time to build and generate customer stakeholder survey and generate reports X cost of employee
    • # of project interruptions due to new or unplanned projects

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    Situation

    A newly hired CIO at a large consumer goods company inherited an IT department with low maturity from her predecessor. Satisfaction with IT was very low across all business units, and IT faced a lot of capacity constraints. The business saw IT as a bottleneck or red tape in terms of getting their projects approved and completed.

    The previous CIO had established a steering committee for a short time, but it had a poorly established charter that did not involve all of the business units. Also the role and responsibilities of the steering committee were not clearly defined. This led the committee to be bogged down in politics.

    Due to the previous issues, the business was wary of being involved in a new steering committee. In order to establish a new steering committee, the new CIO needed to navigate the bad reputation of the previous CIO.

    Solution

    The CIO established a new steering committee engaging senior members of each business unit. The roles of the committee members were clearly established in the new steering committee charter and business stakeholders were informed of the changes through presentations.

    The importance of the committee was demonstrated through the new intake and prioritization process for projects. Business stakeholders were impressed with the new process and its transparency and IT was no longer seen as a bottleneck.

    Results

    • Satisfaction with IT increased by 12% after establishing the committee and IT was no longer seen as red tape for completing projects
    • IT received approval to hire two more staff members to increase capacity
    • IT was able to augment service levels, allowing them to reinvest in innovative projects
    • Project prioritization process was streamlined

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee

    Build the Steering Committee Charter Define ITSC Processes Build the Stakeholder Presentation Define the Prioritization Criteria
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Survey Your Steering Committee Stakeholders

    1.2 Build Your ITSC Charter

    2.1 Build a SIPOC

    2.2 Define Your ITSC Process

    3.1 Customize the Stakeholder Presentation

    4.1 Establish your Prioritization Criteria

    4.2 Customize the Project Prioritization Tool

    4.3 Pilot Test Your New Prioritization Criteria

    Guided Implementations
    • Launch your stakeholder survey
    • Analyze the results of the survey
    • Build your new ITSC charter
    • Review your completed charter
    • Build and review your SIPOC
    • Review your high-level steering committee processes
    • Customize the presentation
    • Build a script for the presentation
    • Practice the presentation
    • Review and select prioritization criteria
    • Review the Project Prioritization Tool
    • Review the results of the tool pilot test
    Onsite Workshop

    Module 1:

    Build a New ITSC Charter

    Module 2:

    Design Steering Committee Processes

    Module 3:

    Present the New Steering Committee to Stakeholders

    Module 4:

    Establish Project Prioritization Criteria

    Phase 1 Results:
    • Customized ITSC charter

    Phase 2 Results:

    • Completed SIPOC and steering committee processes
    Phase 3 Results:
    • Customized presentation deck and script
    Phase 4 Results:
    • Customized project prioritization tool

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Workshop Day 1 Workshop Day 2 Workshop Day 3 Workshop Day 4 Workshop Day 5
    Activities

    Build the IT Steering Committee

    1.1 Launch stakeholder survey for business leaders

    1.2 Analyze results with an Info-Tech Advisor

    1.3 Identify opportunities and threats to successful IT steering committee implementation.

    1.4 Develop the fit-for-purpose approach

    Define the ITSC Goals

    2.1 Review the role of the IT steering committee

    2.2 Identify IT steering committee goals and objectives

    2.3 Conduct a SWOT analysis on the five governance areas

    2.4 Define the key responsibilities of the ITSC 2.5 Define ITSC participation

    Define the ITSC Charter

    3.1 Build IT steering committee participant RACI

    3.2 Define your responsibility cadence and agendas

    3.3 Develop IT steering committee procedures

    3.4 Define your IT steering committee purpose statement and goals

    Define the ITSC Process

    4.1 Define your high-level IT steering committee processes

    4.2 Conduct scenario testing on key processes, establish ITSC metrics

    4.3 Build your ITSC stakeholder presentation

    4.4 Manage potential objections

    Define Project Prioritization Criteria

    5.1 Create prioritization criteria

    5.2 Customize the Project Prioritization Tool

    5.3 Pilot test the tool

    5.4 Define action plan and next steps

    Deliverables
    1. Report on business leader governance priorities and awareness
    2. Refined workshop agenda
    1. IT steering committee priorities identified
    2. IT steering committee key responsibilities and participants identified
    1. IT steering committee charter: procedures, agenda, and RACI
    2. Defined purpose statement and goals
    1. IT steering committee SIPOC maps
    2. Refined stakeholder presentation
    1. Project Prioritization Tool
    2. Action plan

    Phase 1

    Build the IT Steering Committee Charter

    Phase 1 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Formalize the Security Policy Program

    Proposed Time to Completion: 1-2 weeks

    Select Your ITSC Members

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Launch your stakeholder survey

    Then complete these activities…

    • Tailor the survey questions
    • Identify participants and tailor email templates

    With these tools & templates:

    • ITSC Stakeholder Survey
    • ITSC Charter Template

    Review Stakeholder Survey Results

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the results of the Stakeholder Survey

    Then complete these activities…

    • Customize the ITSC Charter Template

    With these tools & templates:

    • ITSC Charter Template

    Finalize the ITSC Charter

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Review the finalized ITSC charter with an Info-Tech analyst

    Then complete these activities…

    • Finalize any changes to the ITSC Charter
    • Present it to ITSC Members

    With these tools & templates:

    • ITSC Charter Template

    Build the IT Steering Committee Charter

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Launch and analyze the stakeholder survey
    • Define your ITSC goals and purpose statement
    • Determine ITSC responsibilities and participants
    • Determine ITSC procedures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    Be exclusive with your IT steering committee membership. Determine committee participation based on committee responsibilities. Select only those who are key decision makers for the activities the committee is responsible for and, wherever possible, keep membership to 5-8 people.

    Tailor Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Charter Template to define terms of reference for the ITSC

    1.1

    A charter is the organizational mandate that outlines the purpose, scope, and authority of the ITSC. Without a charter, the steering committee’s value, scope, and success criteria are unclear to participants, resulting in unrealistic stakeholder expectations and poor organizational acceptance.

    Start by reviewing Info-Tech’s template. Throughout this section we will help you to tailor its contents.

    Committee Purpose: The rationale, benefits of, and overall function of the committee.

    Responsibilities: What tasks/decisions the accountable committee is making.

    Participation: Who is on the committee

    RACI: Who is accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed regarding each responsibility.

    Committee Procedures and Agendas: Includes how the committee will be organized and how the committee will interact and communicate with business units.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Charter Template.">

    IT Steering Committee Charter

    Take a data-driven approach to build your IT steering committee based on business priorities

    1.2

    Leverage Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Surveyand reports to quickly identify business priorities and level of understanding of how decisions are made around the five governance areas.

    Use these insights to drive the IT steering committee responsibilities, participation, and communication strategy.

    The Stakeholder Survey consists of 17 questions on:

    • Priority governance areas
    • Desired level of involvement in decision making in the five governance areas
    • Knowledge of how decisions are made
    • Five open-ended questions on improvement opportunities

    To simplify your data collection and reporting, Info-Tech can launch a web-based survey, compile the report data and assist in the data interpretation through one of our guided implementations.

    Also included is a Word document with recommended questions, if you prefer to manage the survey logistics internally.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's first page of the <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey "> A screenshot of Info-Tech's survey.

    Leverage governance reports to define responsibilities and participants, and in your presentation to stakeholders

    1.3

    A screenshot is displayed. It advises that 72% of stakeholders do <strong data-verified= understand how decisions around IT services are made (quality, availability, etc.). Two graphs are included in the screenshot. One of the bar graphs shows the satisfaction with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services. The other bar graph displays IT decisions around service delivery and quality that involve the right people.">

    OVERALL PRIORITIES

    You get:

    • A clear breakdown of stakeholders’ level of understanding on how IT decisions are made in the five governance areas
    • Stakeholder perceptions on the level of IT and business involvement in decision making
    • Identification of priority areas

    So you can:

    • Get an overall pulse check for understanding
    • Make the case for changes in decision-making accountability
    • Identify which areas the IT steering committee should focus on
    A screenshot is displayed. It advises that 80% of stakeholders do <strong data-verified=not understand how decisions around IT investments or project and service resourcing are made. Two bar graphs are displayed. One of the bar graphs shows the satisfaction with the quality of decisions made around IT investments. The other graph display IT decisions around spending priorities involving the right people.">

    GOVERNANCE AREA REPORTS

    You get:

    • Satisfaction score for decision quality in each governance area
    • Breakdown of decision-making accountability effectiveness
    • Identified level of understanding around decision making
    • Open-ended comments

    So you can:

    • Identify the highest priority areas to change.
    • To validate changes in decision-making accountability
    • To understand business perspectives on decision making.

    Conduct a SWOT analysis of the five governance areas

    1.4

    1. Hold a meeting with your IT leadership team to conduct a SWOT analysis on each of the five governance areas. Start by printing off the following five slides to provide participants with examples of the role of governance and the symptoms of poor governance in each area.
    2. In groups of 1-2 people, have each group complete a SWOT analysis for one of the governance areas. For each consider:
    • Strengths: What is currently working well in this area?
    • Weaknesses: What could you improve? What are some of the challenges you’re experiencing?
    • Opportunities: What are some organizational trends that you can leverage? Consider whether your strengths or weaknesses that could create opportunities?
    • Threats: What are some key obstacles across people, process, and technology?
  • Have each team or individual rotate until each person has contributed to each SWOT. Add comments from the stakeholder survey to the SWOT.
  • As a group rank each of the five areas in terms of importance for a phase one IT steering committee implementation, and highlight the top 10 challenges, and the top 10 opportunities you see for improvement.
  • Document the top 10 lists for use in the stakeholder presentation.
  • INPUT

    • Survey outcomes
    • Governance overview handouts

    OUTPUT

    • SWOT analysis
    • Ranked 5 areas
    • Top 10 challenges and opportunities identified.

    Materials

    • Governance handouts
    • Flip chart paper, pens

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Governance of RISK

    Governance of risk establishes the risk framework, establishes policies and standards, and monitors risks.

    Governance of risk ensures that IT is mitigating all relevant risks associated with IT investments, projects, and services.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Defines responsibility and accountability for IT risk identification and mitigation.
    2. Ensures the consideration of all elements of IT risk, including value, change, availability, security, project, and recovery
    3. Enables senior management to make better IT decisions based on the evaluation of the risks involved
    4. Facilitates the identification and analysis of IT risk and ensures the organization’s informed response to that risk.

    Symptoms of poor governance of risk

    • Opportunities for value creation are missed by not considering or assessing IT risk, or by completely avoiding all risk.
    • No formal risk management process or accountabilities exist.
    • There is no business continuity strategy.
    • Frequent security breaches occur.
    • System downtime occurs due to failed IT changes.

    Governance of PPM

    Governance of the IT portfolio achieves optimum ROI through prioritization, funding, and resourcing.

    PPM practices create value if they maximize the throughput of high-value IT projects at the lowest possible cost. They destroy value when they foster needlessly sophisticated and costly processes.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Ensures that the projects that deliver greater business value get a higher priority.
    2. Provides adequate funding for the priority projects and ensures adequate resourcing and funding balanced across the entire portfolio of projects.
    3. Makes the business and IT jointly accountable for setting project priorities.
    4. Evaluate, direct, and monitor IT value metrics and endorse the IT strategy and monitor progress.

    Symptoms of poor governance of PPM/investments

    • The IT investment mix is determined solely by Finance and IT.
    • It is difficult to get important projects approved.
    • Projects are started then halted, and resources are moved to other projects.
    • Senior management has no idea what projects are in the backlog.
    • Projects are approved without a valid business case.

    Governance of PROJECTS

    Governance of projects improves the quality and speed of decision making for project issues.

    Don’t confuse project governance and management. Governance makes the decisions regarding allocation of funding and resources and reviews the overall project portfolio metrics and process methodology.

    Management ensures the project deliverables are completed within the constraints of time, budget, scope, and quality.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Monitors and evaluates the project management process and critical project methodology metrics.
    2. Ensures review and mitigation of project issue and that management is aware of projects in crisis.
    3. Ensures that projects beginning to show characteristics of failure cannot proceed until issues are resolved.
    4. Endorses the project risk criteria, and monitors major risks to project completion.
    5. Approves the launch and execution of projects.

    Symptoms of poor governance of projects

    • Projects frequently fail or get cancelled.
    • Project risks and issues are not identified or addressed.
    • There is no formal project management process.
    • There is no senior stakeholder responsible for making project decisions.
    • There is no formal project reporting.

    Governance of SERVICES

    Governance of services ensures delivery of a highly reliable set of IT services.

    Effective governance of services enables the business to achieve the organization’s goals and strategies through the provision of reliable and cost-effective services.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Ensures the satisfactory performance of those services critical to achieving business objectives.
    2. Monitors and directs changes in service levels.
    3. Ensures operational and performance objectives for IT services are met.
    4. Approves policy and standards on the service portfolio.

    Symptoms of poor governance of service

    • There is a misalignment of business needs and expectations with IT capability.
    • No metrics are reported for IT services.
    • The business is unaware of the IT services available to them.
    • There is no accountability for service level performance.
    • There is no continuous improvement plan for IT services.
    • IT services or systems are frequently unavailable.
    • Business satisfaction with IT scores are low.

    Governance of INFORMATION

    Governance of information ensures the proper handling of data and information.

    Effective governance of information ensures the appropriate classification, retention, confidentiality, integrity, and availability of data in line with the needs of the business.

    GOVERNANCE ROLES:

    1. Ensures the information lifecycle owner and process are defined and endorse by business leadership.
    2. Ensures the controlled access to a comprehensive information management system.
    3. Ensures knowledge, information, and data are gathered, analyzed, stored, shared, used, and maintained.
    4. Ensures that external regulations are identified and met.

    Symptoms of poor governance of information

    • There is a lack of clarity around data ownership, and data quality standards.
    • There is insufficient understanding of what knowledge, information, and data are needed by the organization.
    • There is too much effort spent on knowledge capture as opposed to knowledge transfer and re-use.
    • There is too much focus on storing and sharing knowledge and information that is not up to date or relevant.
    • Personnel see information management as interfering with their work.

    Identify the responsibilities of the IT steering committee

    1.5

    1. With your IT leadership team, review the typical responsibilities of the IT steering committee on the following slide.
    2. Print off the following slide, and in your teams of 1-2 have each group identify which responsibilities they believe the IT steering committee should have, brainstorm any additional responsibilities, and document their reasoning.
    3. Note: The bolded responsibilities are the ones that are most common to IT steering committees, and greyed out responsibilities are typical of a larger governance structure. Depending on their level of importance to your organization, you may choose to include the responsibility.

    4. Have each team present to the larger group, track the similarities and differences between each of the groups, and come to consensus on the list of responsibilities.
    5. Complete a sanity check – review your swot analysis and survey results. Do the responsibilities you’ve identified resolve the critical challenges or weaknesses?
    6. As a group, consider the responsibilities and consider whether you can reasonably implement those in one year, or if there are any that will need to wait until year two of the IT steering committee.
    7. Modify the list of responsibilities in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Charter by deleting the responsibilities you do not need and adding any that you identified in the process.

    INPUT

    • SWOT analysis
    • Survey reports

    OUTPUT

    • Defined ITSC responsibilities documented in the ITSC Charter

    Materials

    • Responsibilities handout
    • Voting dots

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Typical IT steering committee and governance responsibilities

    The bolded responsibilities are those that are most common to IT steering committees, and responsibilities listed in grey are typical of a larger governance structure.

    INVESTMENTS / PPM

    • Establish the target investment mix
    • Evaluate and select programs/projects to fund
    • Monitor IT value metrics
    • Endorse the IT budget
    • Monitor and report on program/project outcomes
    • Direct the governance optimization
    • Endorse the IT strategy

    PROJECTS

    • Monitor project management metrics
    • Approve launch of projects
    • Review major obstacles to project completion
    • Monitor a standard approach to project management
    • Monitor and direct project risk
    • Monitor requirements gathering process effectiveness
    • Review feasibility studies and formulate alternative solutions for high risk/high investment projects

    SERVICE

    • Monitor stakeholder satisfaction with services
    • Monitor service metrics
    • Approve plans for new or changed service requirements
    • Monitor and direct changes in service levels
    • Endorse the enterprise architecture
    • Approve policy and standards on the service portfolio
    • Monitor performance and capacity

    RISK

    • Monitor risk management metrics
    • Review the prioritized list of risks
    • Monitor changes in external regulations
    • Maintain risk profiles
    • Approve the risk management emergency action process
    • Maintain a mitigation plan to minimize risk impact and likelihood
    • Evaluate risk management
    • Direct risk management

    INFORMATION / DATA

    • Define information lifecycle process ownership
    • Monitor information lifecycle metrics
    • Define and monitor information risk
    • Approve classification categories of information
    • Approve information lifecycle process
    • Set policies on retirement of information

    Determine committee membership based on the committee’s responsibilities

    • One of the biggest benefits to an IT steering committee is it involves key leadership from the various lines of business across the organization.
    • However, in most cases, more people get involved than is required, and all the committee ends up accomplishing is a lot of theorizing. Participants should be selected based on the identified responsibilities of the IT steering committee.
    • If the responsibilities don’t match the participants, this will negatively impact committee effectiveness as leaders become disengaged in the process and don’t feel like it applies to them or accomplishes the desired goals. Once participants begin dissenting, it’s significantly more difficult to get results.
    • Be careful! When you have more than one individual in a specific role, select only the people whose attendance is absolutely critical. Don’t let your governance collapse under committee overload!

    LIKELY PARTICIPANT EXAMPLES:

    MUNICIPALITY

    • City Manager
    • CIO/IT Leader
    • CCO
    • CFO
    • Division Heads

    EDUCATION

    • Provost
    • Vice Provost
    • VP Academic
    • VP Research
    • VP Public Affairs
    • VP Operations
    • VP Development
    • Etc.

    HEALTHCARE

    • President/CEO
    • CAO
    • EVP/ EDOs
    • VPs
    • CIO
    • CMO

    PRIVATE ORGANIZATIONS

    • CEO
    • CFO
    • COO
    • VP Marketing
    • VP Sales
    • VP HR
    • VP Product Development
    • VP Engineering
    • Etc.

    Identify committee participants and responsibility cadence

    1.6

    1. In a meeting with your IT leadership team, review the list of committee responsibilities and document them on a whiteboard.
    2. For each responsibility, identify the individuals whom you would want to be either responsible or accountable for that decision.
    3. Repeat this until you’ve completed the exercise for each responsibility.
    4. Group the responsibilities with the same participants and highlight groupings with less than four participants. Consider the responsibility and determine whether you need to change the wording to make it more applicable or if you should remove the responsibility.
    5. Review the grouping, the responsibilities within them, and their participants, and assess how frequently you would like to meet about them – annually, quarterly, or monthly. (Note: suggested frequency can be found in the IT Steering Committee Charter.)
    6. Subdivide the responsibilities for the groupings to determine your annual, quarterly, and monthly meeting schedule.
    7. Validate that one steering committee is all that is needed, or divide the responsibilities into multiple committees.
    8. Document the committee participants in the IT Steering Committee Charter and remove any unneeded responsibilities identified in the previous exercise.

    INPUT

    • List of responsibilities

    OUTPUT

    • ITSC participants list
    • Meeting schedule

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Committees can only be effective if they have clear and documented authority

    It is not enough to participate in committee meetings; there needs to be a clear understanding of who is accountable, responsible, consulted, and informed about matters brought to the attention of the committee.

    Each committee responsibility should have one person who is accountable, and at least one person who is responsible. This is the best way to ensure that committee work gets done.

    An authority matrix is often used within organizations to indicate roles and responsibilities in relation to processes and activities. Using the RACI model as an example, there is only one person accountable for an activity, although several people may be responsible for executing parts of the activity. In this model, accountable means end-to-end accountability for the process.

    RESPONSIBLE: The one responsible for getting the job done.

    ACCOUNTABLE: Only one person can be accountable for each task.

    CONSULTED: Involvement through input of knowledge and information.

    INFORMED: Receiving information about process execution and quality.

    A chart is depicted to show an example of the authority matrix using the RACI model.

    Define IT steering committee participant RACI for each of the responsibilities

    1.7

    1. Use the table provided in the IT Steering Committee Charter and edit he list of responsibilities to reflect the chosen responsibilities of your ITSC.
    2. Along the top of the chart list the participant names, and in the right hand column of the table document the agreed upon timing from the previous exercise.
    3. For each of the responsibilities identify whether participants are Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, or Informed by denoting an R, A, C, I, or N/A in the table. Use N/A if this is a responsibility that the participant has no involvement in.
    4. Review your finalized RACI chart. If there are participants who are only consulted or informed about the majority of responsibilities, consider removing them from the IT steering committee. You only want the decision makers on the committee.

    INPUT

    • Responsibilities
    • Participants

    OUTPUT

    • RACI documented in the ITSC Charter

    Materials

    • ITSC RACI template
    • Projector

    Participants

    • IT leadership

    Building the agenda may seem trivial, but it is key for running effective meetings

    49% of people consider unfocused meetings as the biggest workplace time waster.*

    63% of the time meetings do not have prepared agendas.*

    80% Reduction of time spent in meetings by following a detailed agenda and starting on time.*

    *(Source: http://visual.ly/fail-plan-plan-fail).

    EFFECTIVE MEETING AGENDAS:

    1. Have clearly defined meeting objectives.
    2. Effectively time-boxed based on priority items.
    3. Defined at least two weeks prior to the meetings.
    4. Evaluated regularly – are not static.
    5. Leave time at the end for new business, thus minimizing interruptions.

    BUILDING A CONSENT AGENDA

    A consent agenda is a tool to free up time at meetings by combining previously discussed or simple items into a single item. Items that can be added to the consent agenda are those that are routine, noncontroversial, or provided for information’s sake only. It is expected that participants read this information and, if it is not pulled out, that they are in agreement with the details.

    Members have the option to pull items out of the consent agenda for discussion if they have questions. Otherwise these are given no time on the agenda.

    Define the IT steering committee meeting agendas and procedures

    1.8

    Agendas

    1. Review the listed responsibilities, participants, and timing as identified in a previous exercise.
    2. Annual meeting: Identify if all of the responsibilities will be included in the annual meeting agenda (likely all governance responsibilities).
    3. Quarterly Meeting Agenda: Remove the meeting responsibilities from the annual meeting agenda that are not required and create a list of responsibilities for the quarterly meetings.
    4. Monthly Meeting Agenda: Remove all responsibilities from the list that are only annual or quarterly and compile a list of monthly meeting responsibilities.
    5. Review each responsibility, and estimate the amount of time each task will take within the meeting. We recommend giving yourself at least an extra 10-20% more time for each agenda item for your first meeting. It’s better to have more time than to run out.
    6. Complete the Agenda Template in the IT Steering Committee Charter.

    Procedures:

    1. Review the list of IT steering committee procedures, and replace the grey text with the information appropriate for your organization.

    INPUT

    • Responsibility cadence

    OUTPUT

    • ITSC annual, quarterly, monthly meeting agendas & procedures

    Materials

    • ITSC Charter

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Draft your IT steering committee purpose statement and goals

    1.9

    1. In a meeting with your IT leadership team – and considering the defined responsibilities, participants, and opportunities and threats identified – review the example goal statement in the IT Steering Committee Charter, and first identify whether any of these statements apply to your organization. Select the statements that apply and collaboratively make any changes needed.
    2. Define unique goal statements by considering the following questions:
      1. What three things would you realistically list for the ITSC to achieve.
      2. If you were to accomplish three things in the next year, what would those be?
    3. Document those goals in the IT Steering Committee Charter.
    4. With those goal statements in mind, consider the overall purpose of the committee. The purpose statement should be a reflection of what the committee does, why it does it, and the goals.
    5. Have each individual review the example purpose statement, and draft what they think a good purpose statement would be.
    6. Present each statement, and work together to determine a best of breed statement.
    7. Document this in the IT Steering Committee Charter.

    INPUT

    • Responsibilities, participants, top 10 lists of challenges and opportunities.

    OUTPUT

    • ITSC goals and purpose statement

    Materials

    • ITSC Charter

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    CASE STUDY

    "Clearly defined Committee Charter allows CIO to escape the bad reputation of previous committee."

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    CHALLENGE

    The new CIO at a large consumer goods company had difficulty generating interest in creating a new IT steering committee. The previous CIO had created a steering committee that was poorly organized and did not involve all of the pertinent members. This led to a committee focused on politics that would often devolve into gossip. Also, many members were dissatisfied with the irregular meetings that would often go over their allotted time.

    In order to create a new committee, the new CIO needed to dispel the misgivings of the business leadership.

    SOLUTION

    The new CIO decided to build the new steering committee from the ground up in a systematic way.

    She collected information from relevant stakeholders about what they know/how they feel about IT and used this information to build a detailed charter.

    Using this info she outlined the new steering committee charter and included in it the:

    1. Purpose
    2. Responsibilities
    3. RACI Chart
    4. Procedures

    OUTCOME

    The new steering committee included all the key members of business units, and each member was clear on their roles in the meetings. Meetings were streamlined and effective. The adjustments in the charter and the improvement in meeting quality played a role in improving the satisfaction scores of business leaders with IT by 21%.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1

    A screenshot of activity 1.1 is displayed. 1.1 is about surveying your ITSC stakeholders.

    Survey your ITSC stakeholders

    Prior to the workshop, Info-Tech’s advisors will work with you to launch the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Survey to understand business priorities and level of understanding of how decisions are made. Using this data, we will create the IT steering committee responsibilities, participation, and communication strategy.

    1.7

    A screenshot of activity 1.7 is displayed. 1.7 is about defining a participant RACI for each of the responsibilities.

    Define a participant RACI for each of the responsibilities

    The analyst will facilitate several exercises to help you and your stakeholders create an authority matrix. The output will be defined responsibilities and authorities for members.

    Phase 2

    Build the IT Steering Committee Process

    Phase 2 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Define your ITSC Processes
    Proposed Time to Completion: 2 weeks

    Review SIPOCs and Process Creation

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the purpose of the SIPOC and how to build one

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build a draft SIPOC for your organization

    With these tools & templates:

    Phase 2 of the Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Finalize the SIPOC

    Review Draft SIPOC:

    • Review and make changes to the SIPOC
    • Discuss potential metrics

    Then complete these activities…

    • Test survey link
    • Info-Tech launches survey

    With these tools & templates:

    Phase 2 of the Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Finalize Metrics

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Finalize metrics

    Then complete these activities…

    • Establish ITSC metric triggers

    With these tools & templates:

    Phase 2 of the Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Build the IT Steering Committee Process

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Define high-level steering committee processes using SIPOC
    • Select steering committee metrics

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    Building high-level IT steering committee processes brings your committee to life. Having a clear process will ensure that you have the right information from the right sources so that committees can operate and deliver the appropriate output to the customers who need it.

    Build your high-level IT steering committee processes to enable committee functionality

    The IT steering committee is only valuable if members are able to successfully execute on responsibilities.

    One of the most common mistakes organizations make is that they build their committee charters and launch into their first meeting. Without defined inputs and outputs, a committee does not have the needed information to be able to effectively execute on responsibilities and is unable to meet its stated goals.

    The arrows in this picture represent the flow of information between the IT steering committee, other committees, and IT management.

    Building high-level processes will define how that information flows within and between committees and will enable more rapid decision making. Participants will have the information they need to be confident in their decisions.

    Strategic IT Steering Committee
    Tactical

    Project Governance Service Governance

    Risk Governance Information Governance

    IT Management
    Operational Risk Task Force

    Define the high-level process for each of the IT steering committee responsibilities

    Info-Tech recommends using SIPOC as a way of defining how the IT steering committee will operate.

    Derived from the core methodologies of Six Sigma process management, SIPOC – a model of Suppliers, Inputs, Processes, Outputs, Customers – is one of several tools that organizations can use to build high level processes. SIPOC is especially effective when determining process scope and boundaries and to gain consensus on a process.

    By doing so you’ll ensure that:

    1. Information and documentation required to complete each responsibility is identified.
    2. That the results of committee meetings are distributed to those customers who need the information.
    3. Inputs and outputs are identified and that there is defined accountability for providing these.

    Remember: Your IT steering committee is not a working committee. Enable effective decision making by ensuring participants have the necessary information and appropriate recommendations from key stakeholders to make decisions.

    Supplier Input
    Who provides the inputs to the governance responsibility. The documented information, data, or policy required to effectively respond to the responsibility.
    Process
    In this case this represents the IT steering committee responsibility defined in terms of the activity the ITSC is performing.
    Output Customer
    The outcome of the meeting: can be approval, rejection, recommendation, request for additional information, endorsement, etc. Receiver of the outputs from the committee responsibility.

    Define your SIPOC model for each of the IT steering committee responsibilities

    2.1

    1. In a meeting with your IT leadership, draw the SIPOC model on a whiteboard or flip-chart paper. Either review the examples on the following slides or start from scratch.
    2. If you are adjusting the following slides, consider the templates you already have which would be appropriate inputs and make adjustments as needed.

    For atypical responsibilities:

    1. Start with the governance responsibility and identify what specifically it is that the IT steering committee is doing with regards to that responsibility. Write that in the center of the model.
    2. As a group, consider what information or documentation would be required by the participants to effectively execute on the responsibility.
    3. Identify which individual will supply each piece of documentation. This person will be accountable for this moving forward.
    4. Outputs: Once the committee has met about the responsibility, what information or documentation will be produced. List all of those documents.
    5. Identify the individuals who need to receive the outputs of the information.
    6. Repeat this for all of the responsibilities.
    7. Once complete, document the SIPOC models in the IT Steering Committee Charter.

    INPUT

    • List of responsibilities
    • Example SIPOCs

    OUTPUT

    • SIPOC model for all responsibilities.

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers
    • ITSC Charter

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Establish the target investment mix
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Target investment mix and rationale
    Process
    Responsibility: The IT steering committee shall review and approve the target investment mix.
    Output Customer
    • Approval of target investment mix
    • Rejection of target investment mix
    • Request for additional information
    • CFO
    • CIO
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Endorse the IT budget
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Recommendations

    See Info-Tech’s blueprint IT Budget Presentation

    Process

    Responsibility: Review the proposed IT budget as defined by the CIO and CFO.

    Output Customer
    • Signed endorsement of the IT budget
    • Request for additional information
    • Recommendation for changes to the IT budget.
    • CFO
    • CIO
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Monitor IT value metrics
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • IT value dashboard
    • Key metric takeaways
    • Recommendations
    CIO Business Vision
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations and either accept or reject recommendations. Refine go-forward metrics.

    Output Customer
    • Launch corrective task force
    • Accept recommendations
    • Define target metrics
    • CEO
    • CFO
    • Business executives
    • CIO
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Evaluate and select programs/projects to fund
    Supplier Input
    PMO
    • Recommended project list
    • Project intake documents
    • Prioritization criteria
    • Capacity metrics
    • IT budget

    See Info-Tech’s blueprint

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution
    Process

    Responsibility: The ITSC will approve the list of projects to fund based on defined prioritization criteria – in line with capacity and IT budget.

    It is also responsible for identifying the prioritization criteria in line with organizational priorities.

    Output Customer
    • Approved project list
    • Request for additional information
    • Recommendation for increased resources
    • PMO
    • CIO
    • Project sponsors

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Endorse the IT strategy
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • IT strategy presentation

    See Info-Tech’s blueprint

    IT Strategy and Roadmap
    Process

    Responsibility: Review, understand, and endorse the IT strategy.

    Output Customer
    • Signed endorsement of the IT strategy
    • Recommendations for adjustments
    • CEO
    • CFO
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Monitor project management metrics
    Supplier Input
    PMO
    • Project metrics report with recommendations
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around PM metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept project metrics performance
    • Accept recommendations
    • Launch corrective task force
    • Define target metrics
    • PMO
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Approve launch of planned and unplanned project
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Project list and recommendations
    • Resourcing report
    • Project intake document

    See Info-Tech’s Blueprint:

    Grow Your Own PPM Solution
    Process

    Responsibility: Review the list of projects and approve the launch or reprioritization of projects.

    Output Customer
    • Approved launch of projects
    • Recommendations for changes to project list
    • CFO
    • CIO
    • IT leadership
    SIPOC: Monitor stakeholder satisfaction with services and other service metrics
    Supplier Input
    Service Manager
    • Service metrics report with recommendations
    Info-Tech End User Satisfaction Report
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around service metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept service level performance
    • Accept recommendations
    • Launch corrective task force
    • Define target metrics
    • Service manager
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Approve plans for new or changed service requirements
    Supplier Input
    Service Manager
    • Service change request
    • Project request and change plan
    Process

    Responsibility: Review IT recommendations, approve changes, and communicate those to staff.

    Output Customer
    • Approved service changes
    • Rejected service changes
    • Service manager
    • Organizational staff
    SIPOC: Monitor risk management metrics
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • Risk metrics report with recommendations
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around risk metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept risk register and mitigation strategy
    • Launch corrective task force to address risks
    • Risk manager
    • Business executives
    • IT leadership

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Review the prioritized list of risks
    Supplier Input
    Risk Manager
    • Risk register
    • Mitigation strategies
    See Info-Tech’s risk management research to build a holistic risk strategy.
    Process

    Responsibility: Accept the risk registrar and define any additional action required.

    Output Customer
    • Accept risk register and mitigation strategy
    • Launch corrective task force to address risks
    • Risk manager
    • IT leadership
    • CRO
    SIPOC: Define information lifecycle process ownership
    Supplier Input
    CIO
    • List of risk owner options with recommendations
    See Info-Tech’s related blueprint: Information Lifecycle Management
    Process

    Responsibility: Define responsibility and accountability for information lifecycle ownership.

    Output Customer
    • Defined information lifecycle owner
    • Organization wide.

    SIPOC examples for typical ITSC responsibilities

    SIPOC: Monitor information lifecycle metrics
    Supplier Input
    Information lifecycle owner
    • Information metrics report with recommendations
    Process

    Responsibility: Review recommendations around information management metrics and define target metrics. Endorse current effectiveness levels or determine corrective action.

    Output Customer
    • Accept information management performance
    • Accept recommendations
    • Launch corrective task force to address challenges
    • Define target metrics
    • IT leadership

    Define which metrics you will report to the IT steering committee

    2.2

    1. Consider your IT steering committee goals and the five IT governance areas.
    2. For each governance area, identify which metrics you are currently tracking and determine whether these metrics are valuable to IT, to the business, or both. For metrics that are valuable to business stakeholders determine whether you have an identified target metric.

    New Metrics:

    1. For each of the five IT governance areas review your SWOT analysis and document your key opportunities and weaknesses.
    2. For each, brainstorm hypotheses around why the opportunity was weak or was a success. For each hypothesis identify if there are any clear ways to measure and test the hypothesis.
    3. Review the list of metrics and select 5-7 metrics to track for each prioritized governance area.

    INPUT

    • List of responsibilities
    • Example SIPOCs

    OUTPUT

    • SIPOC model for all responsibilities

    Materials

    • Whiteboard
    • Markers

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    IT steering committee metric triggers to consider

    RISK

    • Risk profile % increase
    • # of actionable risks outstanding
    • # of issues arising not identified prior
    • # of security breaches

    SERVICE

    • Number of business disruptions due to IT service incidents
    • Number of service requests by department
    • Number of service requests that are actually projects
    • Causes of tickets overall and by department
    • Percentage of duration attributed to waiting for client response

    PROJECTS

    • Projects completed within budget
    • Percentage of projects delivered on time
    • Project completion rate
    • IT completed assigned portion to scope
    • Project status and trend dashboard

    INFORMATION / DATA

    • % of data properly classified
    • # of incidents locating data
    • # of report requests by complexity
    • # of open data sets

    PPM /INVESTMENTS

    • CIO Business Vision (an Info-Tech diagnostic survey that helps align IT strategy with business goals)
    • Level of stakeholder satisfaction and perceived value
    • Percentage of ON vs. OFF cycle projects by area/silo
    • Realized benefit to business units based on investment mix
    • Percent of enterprise strategic goals and requirements supported by strategic goals
    • Target vs. actual budget
    • Reasons for off-cycle projects causing delays to planned projects

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    "IT steering committee’s reputation greatly improved by clearly defining its process."

    CHALLENGE

    One of the major failings of the previous steering committee was its poorly drafted procedures. Members of the committee were unclear on the overall process and the meeting schedule was not well established.

    This led to low attendance at the meetings and ineffective meetings overall. Since the meeting procedures weren’t well understood, some members of the leadership team took advantage of this to get their projects pushed through.

    SOLUTION

    The first step the new CIO took was to clearly outline the meeting procedures in her new steering committee charter. The meeting agenda, meeting goals, length of time, and outcomes were outlined, and the stakeholders signed off on their participation.

    She also gave the participants a SIPOC, which helped members who were unfamiliar with the process a high-level overview. It also reacquainted previous members with the process and outlined changes to the previous, out-of-date processes.

    OUTCOME

    The participation rate in the committee meetings improved from the previous rate of approximately 40% to 90%. The committee members were much more satisfied with the new process and felt like their contributions were appreciated more than before.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    An image of an Info-Tech analyst is depicted.

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1

    A screenshot of activity 2.1 is depicted. Activity 2.1 is about defining a SIPOC for each of the ITSC responsibilities.

    Define a SIPOC for each of the ITSC responsibilities

    Create SIPOCs for each of the governance responsibilities with the help of an Info-Tech advisor.

    2.2

    A screenshot of activity 2.2 is depicted. Activity 2.2 is about establishing the reporting metrics for the ITSC.

    Establish the reporting metrics for the ITSC

    The analyst will facilitate several exercises to help you and your stakeholders define the reporting metrics for the ITSC.

    Phase 3

    Build the Stakeholder Presentation

    Phase 3 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Build the Stakeholder Presentation
    Proposed Time to Completion: 1 week

    Customize the Presentation

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation with an analyst

    Then complete these activities…

    • Schedule the first meeting and invite the ITSC members
    • Customize the presentation template

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation


    Review and Practice the Presentation

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review the changes made to the template
    • Practice the presentation and create a script

    Then complete these activities…

    • Hold the ITSC meeting

    With these tools & templates:

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation
    Review the First ITSC Meeting

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Review the outcomes of the first ITSC meeting and plan out the next steps

    Then complete these activities…

    • Review the discussion and plan next steps

    With these tools & templates:

    Establish an Effective IT Steering Committee blueprint

    Build the Stakeholder Presentation

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Organizing the first ITSC meeting
    • Customizing an ITSC stakeholder presentation
    • Determine ITSC responsibilities and participants
    • Determine ITSC procedures

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    Stakeholder engagement will be critical to your ITSC success, don't just focus on what is changing. Ensure stakeholders know why you are engaging them and how it will help them in their role.

    Hold a kick-off meeting with your IT steering committee members to explain the process, responsibilities, and goals

    3.1

    Don’t take on too much in your first IT steering committee meeting. Many participants may not have participated in an IT steering committee before, or some may have had poor experiences in the past.

    Use this meeting to explain the role of the IT steering committee and why you are implementing one, and help participants to understand their role in the process.

    Quickly customize Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template to explain the goals and benefits of the IT steering committee, and use your own data to make the case for governance.

    At the end of the meeting, ask committee members to sign the committee charter to signify their agreement to participate in the IT steering committee.

    A screenshot of IT Steering Committee: Meeting 1 is depicted. A screenshot of the IT Steering Committee Challenges and Opportunities for the organization.

    Tailor the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template: slides 1-5

    3.2 Estimated Time: 10 minutes

    Review the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template. This document should be presented at the first IT steering committee meeting by the assigned Committee Chair.

    Customization Options

    Overall: Decide if you would like to change the presentation template. You can change the color scheme easily by copying the slides in the presentation deck and pasting them into your company’s standard template. Once you’ve pasted them in, scan through the slides and make any additional changes needed to formatting.

    Slide 2-3: Review the text on each of the slides and see if any wording should be changed to better suite your organization.

    Slide 4: Review your list of the top 10 challenges and opportunities as defined in section 2 of this blueprint. Document those in the appropriate sections. (Note: be careful that the language is business-facing; challenges and opportunities should be professionally worded.)

    Slide 5: Review the language on slide 5 to make any necessary changes to suite your organization. Changes here should be minimal.

    INPUT

    • Top 10 list
    • Survey report
    • ITSC Charter

    OUTPUT

    • Ready-to-present presentation for defined stakeholders

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation

    Participants

    • IT Steering Committee Chair/CIO

    Tailor the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template: slides 6-10

    3.2 Estimated Time: 10 minutes

    Customization Options

    Slide 6: The goal of this slide is to document and share the names of the participants on the IT steering committee. Document the names in the right-hand side based on your IT Steering Committee Charter.

    Slides 7-9:

    • Review the agenda items as listed in your IT Steering Committee Charter. Document the annual, quarterly, and monthly meeting responsibilities on the left-hand side of slides 7-9.
    • Meeting Participants: For each slide, list the members who are required for that meeting.
    • Document the key required reading materials as identified in the SIPOC charts under “inputs.”
    • Document the key meeting outcomes as identified in the SIPOC chart under “outputs.”

    Slide 10: Review and understand the rollout timeline. Make any changes needed to the timeline.

    INPUT

    • Top 10 list
    • Survey report
    • ITSC Charter

    OUTPUT

    • Ready-to-present presentation for defined stakeholders

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation

    Participants

    • IT Steering Committee Chair/CIO

    Present the information to the IT leadership team to increase your comfort with the material

    3.3 Estimated Time: 1-2 hours

    1. Once you have finished customizing the IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation, practice presenting the material by meeting with your IT leadership team. This will help you become more comfortable with the dialog and anticipate any questions that might arise.
    2. The ITSC chair will present the meeting deck, and all parties should discuss what they think went well and opportunities for improvement.
    3. Each business relationship manager should document the needed changes in preparation for their first meeting.

    INPUT

    • IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation - Meeting 1

    Participants

    • IT leadership team

    Schedule your first meeting of the IT steering committee

    3.4

    By this point, you should have customized the meeting presentation deck and be ready to meet with your IT steering committee participants.

    The meeting should be one hour in duration and completed in person.

    Before holding the meeting, identify who you think is going to be most supportive and who will be least. Consider meeting with those individuals independently prior to the group meeting to elicit support or minimize negative impacts on the meeting.

    Customize this calendar invite script to invite business partners to participate in the meeting.

    Hello [Name],

    As you may have heard, we recently went through an exercise to develop an IT steering committee. I’d like to take some time to discuss the results of this work with you, and discuss ways in which we can work together in the future to better enable corporate goals.

    The goals of the meeting are:

    1. Discuss the benefits of an IT steering committee
    2. Review the results of the organizational survey
    3. Introduce you to our new IT steering committee

    I look forward to starting this discussion with you and working with you more closely in the future.

    Warm regards,

    CASE STUDY

    Industry:Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    "CIO gains buy-in from the company by presenting the new committee to its stakeholders."

    CHALLENGE

    Communication was one of the biggest steering committee challenges that the new CIO inherited.

    Members were resistant to joining/rejoining the committee because of its previous failures. When the new CIO was building the steering committee, she surveyed the members on their knowledge of IT as well as what they felt their role in the committee entailed.

    She found that member understanding was lacking and that their knowledge surrounding their roles was very inconsistent.

    SOLUTION

    The CIO dedicated their first steering committee meeting to presenting the results of that survey to align member knowledge.

    She outlined the new charter and discussed the roles of each member, the goals of the committee, and the overarching process.

    OUTCOME

    Members of the new committee were now aligned in terms of the steering committee’s goals. Taking time to thoroughly outline the procedures during the first meeting led to much higher member engagement. It also built accountability within the committee since all members were present and all members had the same level of knowledge surrounding the roles of the ITSC.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1

    A screenshot of Activity 3.1 is depicted. Activity 3.1 is about creating a presentation for ITSC stakeholders to be presented at the first ITSC meeting.

    Create a presentation for ITSC stakeholders to be presented at the first ITSC meeting

    Work with an Info-Tech advisor to customize our IT Steering Committee Stakeholder Presentation template. Use this presentation to gain stakeholder buy-in by making the case for an ITSC.

    Phase 4

    Define the Prioritization Criteria

    Phase 4 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own, or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation : Define the Prioritization Criteria
    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Discuss Prioritization Criteria

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review sample project prioritization criteria and discuss criteria unique to your organization

    Then complete these activities...

    • Select the criteria that would be most effective for your organization
    • Input these into the tool

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Customize the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Review changes made to the tool
    • Finalize criteria weighting

    Then complete these activities…

    • Pilot test the tool using projects from the previous year

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Review Results of the Pilot Test

    Finalize phase deliverable:

    • Review the results of the pilot test
    • Make changes to the tool

    Then complete these activities…

    • Input your current project portfolio into the prioritization tool

    With these tools & templates:

    IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Define the Project Prioritization Criteria

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    • Selecting the appropriate project prioritization criteria for your organization
    • Developing weightings for the prioritization criteria
    • Filling in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Steering Committee
    • IT Leadership Team
    • PMO

    Key Insight:

    The steering committee sets and agrees to principles that guide prioritization decisions. The agreed upon principles will affect business unit expectations and justify the deferral of requests that are low priority. In some cases, we have seen the number of requests drop substantially because business units are reluctant to propose initiatives that do not fit high prioritization criteria.

    Understand the role of the IT steering committee in project prioritization

    One of the key roles of the IT steering committee is to review and prioritize the portfolio of IT projects.

    What is the prioritization based on? Info-Tech recommends selecting four broad criteria with two dimensions under each to evaluate the value of the projects. The criteria are aligned with how the project generates value for the organization and the execution of the project.

    What is the role of the steering committee in prioritizing projects? The steering committee is responsible for reviewing project criteria scores and making decisions about where projects rank on the priority list. Planning, resourcing, and project management are the responsibility of the PMO or the project owner.

    Info-Tech’s Sample Criteria

    Value

    Strategic Alignment: How much a project supports the strategic goals of the organization.

    Customer Satisfaction: The impact of the project on customers and how visible a project will be with customers.

    Operational Alignment: Whether the project will address operational issues or compliance.

    Execution

    Financial: Predicted ROI and cost containment strategies.

    Risk: Involved with not completing projects and strategies to mitigate it.

    Feasibility: How easy the project is to complete and whether staffing resources exist.

    Use Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool to catalog and prioritize your project portfolio

    4.1

    • Use Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool in conjunction with the following activities to catalog and prioritize all of the current IT projects in your portfolio.
    • Assign weightings to your selected criteria to prioritize projects based on objective scores assigned during the intake process and adjust these weightings on an annual basis to align with changing organizational priorities and goals.
    • Use this tool at steering committee meetings to streamline the prioritization process and create alignment with the PMO and project managers.
    • Monitor ongoing project status and build a communication channel between the PMO and project managers and the IT steering committee.
    • Adjusting the titles in the Settings tab will automatically adjust the titles in the Project Data tab.
    • Note: To customize titles in the document you must unprotect the content under the View tab. Be sure to change the content back to protected after making the changes.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool is depicted. The first page of the tool is shown. A screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool is depicted. The page depicted is on the Intake and Prioritization Tool Settings.

    Establish project prioritization criteria and build the matrix

    4.2 Estimated Time: 1 hour

    1. During the second steering committee meeting, discuss the criteria you will be basing your project prioritization scoring on.
    2. Review Info-Tech’s prioritization criteria matrix, located in the Prioritization Criteria List tab of the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool, to gain ideas for what criteria would best suit your organization.
    3. Write these main criteria on the whiteboard and brainstorm criteria that are more specific for your organization; include these on the list as well.
    4. Discuss the criteria. Eliminate criteria that won’t contribute strongly to the prioritization process and vote on the remaining. Select four main criteria from the list.
    5. After selecting the four main criteria, write these on the whiteboard and brainstorm the dimensions that fall under the criteria. These should be more specific/measurable aspects of the criteria. These will be the statements that values are assigned to for prioritizing projects so they should be clear. Use the Prioritization Criteria List in the tool to help generate ideas.
    6. After creating the dimensions, determine what the scoring statements will be. These are the statements that will be used to determine the score out of 10 that the different dimensions will receive.
    7. Adjust the Settings and Project Data tabs in the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool to reflect your selections.
    8. Edit Info-Tech’s IT Project Intake Form or the intake form that you currently use to contain these criteria and scoring parameters.

    INPUT

    • Group input
    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    OUTPUT

    • Project prioritization criteria to be used for current and future projects

    Materials

    • Whiteboard and markers

    Participants

    • IT steering committee
    • CIO
    • IT leadership

    Adjust prioritization criteria weightings to reflect organizational needs

    4.3 Estimated Time: 1 hour

    1. In the second steering committee meeting, after deciding what the project prioritization criteria will be, you need to determine how much weight (the importance) each criteria will receive.
    2. Use the four agreed upon criteria with two dimensions each, determined in the previous activity.
    3. Perform a $100 test to assign proportions to each of the criteria dimensions.
      1. Divide the committee into pairs.
      2. Tell each pair that they have $100 divide among the 4 major criteria based on how important they feel the criteria is.
      3. After dividing the initial $100, ask them to divide the amount they allocated to each criteria into the two sub-dimensions.
      4. Next, ask them to present their reasoning for the allocations to the rest of the committee.
      5. Discuss the weighting allotments and vote on the best one (or combination).
      6. Input the weightings in the Settings tab of the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool and document the discussion.
    4. After customizing the chart establish the owner of the document. This person should be a member of the PMO or the most suitable IT leader if a PMO doesn’t exist.
    5. Only perform this adjustment annually or if a major strategic change happens within the organization.

    INPUT

    • Group discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Agreed upon criteria weighting
    • Complete prioritization tool

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool
    • Whiteboard and sticky notes

    Participants

    • IT steering committee
    • IT leadership

    Document the prioritization criteria weightings in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool.

    Configure the prioritization tool to align your portfolio with business strategy

    4.4 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    Download Info-Tech’s Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's Project Intake and Prioritization Tool.

    Rank: Project ranking will dynamically update relative to your portfolio capacity (established in Settings tab) and the Size, Scoring Progress, Remove from Ranking, and Overall Score columns. The projects in green represent top priorities based on these inputs, while yellow projects warrant additional consideration should capacity permit.

    Scoring Progress: You will be able to determine some items on the scorecard earlier in the scoring progress (such as strategic and operational alignment). As you fill in scoring columns on the Project Data tab, the Scoring Progress column will dynamically update to track progress.

    The Overall Score will update automatically as you complete the scoring columns (refer to Activity 4.2).

    Days in Backlog: This column will help with backlog management, automatically tracking the number of days since an item was added to the list based on day added and current date.

    Validate your new prioritization criteria using previous projects

    4.5 Estimated Time: 2 hours

    1. After deciding on the prioritization criteria, you need to test their validity.
    2. Look at the portfolio of projects that were completed in the previous year.
    3. Go through each project and score it according to the criteria that were determined in the previous exercise.
    4. Enter the scores and appropriate weighting (according to goals/strategy of the previous year) into the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool.
    5. Look at the prioritization given to the projects in reference to how they were previously prioritized.
    6. Adjust the criteria and weighting to either align the new prioritization criteria with previous criteria or to align with desired outcomes.
    7. After scoring the old projects, pilot test the tool with upcoming projects.

    INPUT

    • Information on previous year’s projects
    • Group discussion

    OUTPUT

    • Pilot tested project prioritization criteria

    Materials

    • IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    Participants

    • IT steering committee
    • IT leadership
    • PMO

    Pilot the scorecard to validate criteria and weightings

    4.6 Estimated Time: 60 minutes

    1. Pilot your criteria and weightings in the IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool using project data from one or two projects currently going through approval process.
    2. For most projects, you will be able to determine strategic and operational alignment early in the scoring process, while the feasibility and financial requirements will come later during business case development. Score each column as you can. The tool will automatically track your progress in the Scoring Progress column on the Project Data tab.

    Projects that are scored but not prioritized will populate the portfolio backlog. Items in the backlog will need to be rescored periodically, as circumstances can change, impacting scores. Factors necessitating rescoring can include:

    • Assumptions in business case have changed.
    • Organizational change – e.g. a new CEO or a change in strategic objectives.
    • Major emergencies or disruptions – e.g. a security breach.

    Score projects using the Project Data tab in Info-Tech’s IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    A screenshot of Info-Tech's <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool is depicted. The Data Tab is shown.">

    Use Info-Tech’s IT Project Intake Form to streamline the project prioritization and approval process

    4.7

    • Use Info-Tech’s IT Project Intake Form template to streamline the project intake and prioritization process.
    • Customize the chart on page 2 to include the prioritization criteria that were selected during this phase of the blueprint.
    • Including the prioritization criteria at the project intake phase will free up a lot of time for the steering committee. It will be their job to verify that the criteria scores are accurate.
    A screenshot of Info-Tech's IT Project Intake Form is depicted.

    After prioritizing and selecting your projects, determine how they will be resourced

    Consult these Info-Tech blueprints on project portfolio management to create effective portfolio project management resourcing processes.

    A Screenshot of Info-Tech's Create Project Management Success Blueprint is depicted. Create Project Management Success A Screenshot of Info-Tech's Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy Blueprint is depicted. Develop a Project Portfolio Management Strategy

    CASE STUDY

    Industry: Consumer Goods

    Source: Interview

    "Clear project intake and prioritization criteria allow for the new committee to make objective priority decisions."

    CHALLENGE

    One of the biggest problems that the previous steering committee at the company had was that their project intake and prioritization process was not consistent. Projects were being prioritized based on politics and managers taking advantage of the system.

    The procedure was not formalized so there were no objective criteria on which to weigh the value of proposed projects. In addition to poor meeting attendance, this led to the overall process being very inconsistent.

    SOLUTION

    The new CIO, with consultation from the newly formed committee, drafted a set of criteria that focused on the value and execution of their project portfolio. These criteria were included on their intake forms to streamline the rating process.

    All of the project scores are now reviewed by the steering committee, and they are able to facilitate the prioritization process more easily.

    The objective criteria process also helped to prevent managers from taking advantage of the prioritization process to push self-serving projects through.

    OUTCOME

    This was seen as a contributor to the increase in satisfaction scores for IT, which improved by 12% overall.

    The new streamlined process helped to reduce capacity constraints on IT, and it alerted the company to the need for more IT employees to help reduce these constraints further. The IT department was given permission to hire two new additional staff members.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    4.1

    A screenshot of activity 4.1 is depicted. Activity 4.1 was about defining your prioritization criteria and customize our <em data-verified=IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool.">

    Define your prioritization criteria and customize our IT Steering Committee Project Prioritization Tool

    With the help of Info-Tech advisors, create criteria for determining a project’s priority. Customize the tool to reflect the criteria and their weighting. Run pilot tests of the tool to verify the criteria and enter your current project portfolio.

    Research contributors and experts

    • Andy Lomasky, Manager, Technology & Management Consulting, McGladrey LLP
    • Angie Embree, CIO, Best Friends Animal Society
    • Corinne Bell, CTO and Director of IT Services, Landmark College
    • John Hanskenecht, Director of Technology, University of Detroit Jesuit High School and Academy
    • Lori Baker, CIO, Village of Northbrook
    • Lynne Allard, IT Supervisor, Nipissing Parry Sound Catholic School Board
    • Norman Allen, Senior IT Manager, Baker Tilly
    • Paul Martinello, VP, IT Services, Cambridge and North Dumfries Hydro Inc.
    • Renee Martinez, IT Director/CIO, City of Santa Fe
    • Sam Wong, Director, IT, Seneca College
    • Suzanne Barnes, Director, Information Systems, Pathfinder International
    • Walt Joyce, CTO, Peoples Bank

    Appendices

    GOVERNANCE & ITSC & IT Management

    Organizations often blur the line between governance and management, resulting in the business having say over the wrong things. Understand the differences and make sure both groups understand their role.

    The ITSC is the most senior body within the IT governance structure, involving key business executives and focusing on critical strategic decisions impacting the whole organization.

    Within a holistic governance structure, organizations may have additional committees that evaluate, direct, and monitor key decisions at a more tactical level and report into the ITSC.

    These committees require specialized knowledge and are implemented to meet specific organizational needs. Those operational committees may spark a tactical task force to act on specific needs.

    IT management is responsible for executing on, running, and monitoring strategic activities as determined by IT governance.

    Strategic IT Steering Committee
    Tactical

    Project Governance Service Governance

    Risk Governance Information Governance

    IT Management
    Operational Risk Task Force

    This blueprint focuses exclusively on building the IT Steering committee. For more information on IT governance see Info-Tech’s related blueprint: Tailor an IT Governance Plan to Fit Organizational Needs.

    IT steering committees play an important role in IT governance

    By bucketing responsibilities into these areas, you’ll be able to account for most key IT decisions and help the business to understand their role in governance, fostering ownership and joint accountability.

    The five governance areas are:

    Governance of the IT Portfolio and Investments: Ensures that funding and resources are systematically allocated to the priority projects that deliver value.

    Governance of Projects: Ensures that IT projects deliver the expected value, and that the PM methodology is measured and effective.

    Governance of Risks: Ensures the organization’s ability to assess and deliver IT projects and services with acceptable risk.

    Governance of Services: Ensures that IT delivers the required services at the acceptable performance levels.

    Governance of Information and Data: Ensures the appropriate classification and retention of data based on business need.

    A survey of stakeholders identified a need for increased stakeholder involvement and transparency in decision making

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: I understand how decisions are made in the following areas. The areas include risk, services, projects, portfolio, and information. A circle graph is depicted. The title is: Do IT decisions involve the right people?

    Overall, survey respondents indicated a lack of understanding about how decisions are made around risk, services, projects, and investments, and that business involvement in decision making was too minimal.

    Satisfaction with decision quality around investments and PPM are uneven and largely not well understood

    72% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around IT services are made (quality, availability, etc.).

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services? A bar graph is depicted. Title of the graph: IT decisions around service delivery and quality involve the right people?

    Overall, services were ranked #1 in importance of the 5 areas

    62% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around IT services are made (quality, availability, etc.).

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services? A bar graph is depicted. Title of the graph: IT decisions around service delivery and quality involve the right people?

    Projects ranked as one of the areas with which participants are most satisfied with the quality of decisions

    70% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around projects selection, success, and changes are made.

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions and transparency around IT services? A bar graph is depicted. The title is: IT decisions around project changes, delays, and metrics involve the right people?

    Stakeholders are largely unaware of how decisions around risk are made and believe business participation needs to increase

    78% of stakeholders do not understand how decisions around risk are made

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions made around risk? A bar graph is depicted. The title is: IT decisions around acceptable risk involve the right people?

    The majority of stakeholders believe that they are aware of how decisions around information are made

    67% of stakeholders believe they do understand how decisions around information (data) retention and classification are made.

    A bar graph is depicted. The title is: How satisfied are you with the quality of decisions around information governance? A bar graph is depicted. The title is: IT decisions around information retention and classification involve the right people?

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}211|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $137,332 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 31 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • Each year, IT organizations spend more money “outsourcing” tasks, activities, applications, functions, and other items.
    • The increased spend and associated outsourcing leads to less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. There are commonalites among vendor management initiatives, but the key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs, not the other way around.
    • All vendors are not of equal importance to an organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.
    • Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

    Impact and Result

    • Build and implement a vendor management initiative tailored to your environment.
    • Create a solid foundation to sustain your vendor management initiative as it evolves and matures.
    • Leverage vendor management-specific tools and templates to manage vendors more proactively and improve communication.
    • Concentrate your vendor management resources on the right vendors.
    • Build a roadmap and project plan for your vendor management journey to ensure you reach your destination.
    • Build collaborative relationships with critical vendors.

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should jump start a vendor management initiative, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Plan

    Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 1: Plan
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    2. Build

    Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 2: Build
    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    3. Run

    Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 3: Run

    4. Review

    Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    • Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative – Phase 4: Review

    Infographic

    Workshop: Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Plan

    The Purpose

    Getting Organized

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined Roles and Goals for the VMI

    Activities

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities – OIC Chart

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Vendor Inventory Tool (Overview)

    Outputs

    Completed Mission Statement and Goals

    List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI

    List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI

    Completed OIC Chart

    Sample Process Map for One Process

    Begun Using Vendor Inventory Tool

    2 Plan/Build/Run

    The Purpose

    Build VMI Tools and Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

    Activities

    2.1 Maturity Assessment

    2.2 Structure and Job Descriptions

    2.3 Attributes of a Valuable Vendor

    2.4 Classification Model

    2.5 Risk Assessment Tool

    2.6 Scorecards and Feedback

    2.7 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda

    Outputs

    Completed Maturity Assessment.

    Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases.

    List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor.

    Configured Classification Model.

    Configured Risk Assessment Tool.

    Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions.

    Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda.

    3 Build/Run

    The Purpose

    Continue Building VMI Tools and Templates

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Configured Tools and Templates for the VMI Based on Its Roles and Goals

    Activities

    3.1 Relationship Alignment Document

    3.2 Vendor Orientation

    3.3 Policies and Procedures

    3.4 3-Year Roadmap

    3.5 90-Day Plan

    3.6 Quick Wins

    3.7 Reports

    3.8 Kickoff Meeting

    Outputs

    Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist

    Vendor Orientation Checklist

    Policies and Procedures Checklist

    Completed 3-Year Roadmap

    Completed 90-Day Plan

    List of Quick Wins

    List of Reports

    4 Review

    The Purpose

    Review the Past 12 Months of VMI Operations and Improve

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Keeping the VMI Aligned With the Organization’s Goals and Ensuring the VMI Is Leveraging Leading Practices

    Activities

    4.1 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships.

    4.2 Assess Compliance.

    4.3 Incorporate Leading Practices.

    4.4 Leverage Lessons Learned.

    4.5 Maintain Internal Alignment.

    4.6 Update Governances.

    Outputs

    Further reading

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Create and implement a vendor management framework to begin obtaining measurable results in 90 days.

    EXECUTIVE BRIEF

    Analyst Perspective

    What is vendor management?

    When you read the phrase “vendor management,” what comes to mind? This isn’t a rhetorical question. Take your time … I’ll wait.

    Unfortunately, those words conjure up a lot of different meanings, and much of that depends on whom you ask. Those who work in the vendor management field will provide a variety of answers. To complicate matters, those who are vendor management “outsiders” will have a totally different view of what vendor management is. Why is this important? Because we need a common definition to communicate more effectively, even if the definition is broad.

    Let’s start creating a working definition that is not circular. Vendor management is not simply managing vendors. That expression basically reorders the words and does nothing to advance our cause; it only adds to the existing confusion surrounding the concept.

    Vendor management is best thought of as a spectrum or continuum with many points rather than a specific discipline like accounting or finance. There are many functions and activities that fall under the umbrella term of vendor management: some of them will be part of your vendor management initiative (VMI), some will not, and some will exist in your organization but be outside the VMI. This is the unique part of vendor management – the part that makes it fun, but also the part that leads to the confusion. For example, accounts payable sits within the accounting department almost exclusively, but contract management can sit within or outside the VMI. The beauty of vendor management is its flexibility; your VMI can be created to meet your specific needs and goals while leveraging common vendor management principles.

    Every conversation around vendor management needs to begin with “What do you mean by that?” Only then can we home in on the scope and nature of what people are discussing. “Managing vendors” is too narrow because it often ignores many of the reasons organizations create VMIs in the first place: to reduce costs, to improve performance, to improve processes, to improve relationships, to improve communication, and to manage risk better.

    Vendor management is a strategic initiative that takes the big picture into account … navigating the cradle to grave lifecycle to get the most out of your interactions and relationships with your vendors. It is flexible and customizable; it is not plug and play or overly prescriptive. Tools, principles, templates, and concepts are adapted rather than adopted as is. Ultimately, you define what vendor management is for your organization.

    We look forward to helping you on your vendor management journey no matter what it looks like. But first, let’s have a conversation about how you want to define vendor management in your environment.

    This is a picture of Phil Bode, Principal  Research Director, Vendor Management at Info-Tech Research Group.

    Phil Bode
    Principal Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Each year, IT organizations “outsource” tasks, activities, functions, and other items. During 2021:

    • Spend on as-a-service providers increased 38% over 2020.*
    • Spend on managed service providers increased 16% over 2020.*
    • IT service providers increased their merger and acquisition numbers by 47% over 2020.*

    *Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    This leads to more spend, less control, and more risk for IT organizations. Managing this becomes a higher priority for IT, but many IT organizations are ill-equipped to do this proactively.

    Common Obstacles

    As new contracts are negotiated and existing contracts are renegotiated or renewed, there is a perception that the contracts will yield certain results, output, performance, solutions, or outcomes. The hope is that these will provide a measurable expected value to IT and the organization. Oftentimes, much of the expected value is never realized. Many organizations don’t have a VMI to help:

    • Ensure at least the expected value is achieved.
    • Improve on the expected value through performance management.
    • Significantly increase the expected value through a proactive VMI.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management is a proactive, cross-functional lifecycle. It can be broken down into four phases:

    • Plan
    • Build
    • Run
    • Review

    The Info-Tech process addresses all four phases and provides a step-by-step approach to configure and operate your VMI. The content in this blueprint helps you quickly establish your VMI and set a solid foundation for its growth and maturity.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Vendor management is not a one-size-fits-all initiative. It must be configured:

    • For your environment, culture, and goals.
    • To leverage the strengths of your organization and personnel.
    • To focus your energy and resources on your critical vendors.

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    Spend on managed service providers and as-a-service providers continues to increase. In addition, IT services vendors continue to be active in the mergers and acquisitions arena. This increases the need for a VMI to help with the changing IT vendor landscape. In 2021, there was increases of:

    38%

    Spend on As-a-Service Providers

    16%

    Spend on Managed Services Providers

    47%

    IT Services Merger & Acquisition Growth (Transactions)

    Source: Information Services Group, Inc., 2022.

    Executive Summary

    Common Obstacles

    When organizations execute, renew, or renegotiate a contract, there is an “expected value” associated with that contract. Without a robust VMI, most of the expected value will never be realized. With a robust VMI, the realized value significantly exceeds the expected value during the contract term.

    A contract’s realized value with and without a vendor management initiative

    Two bars are depicted, showing that vendor collaboration and vendor performance management exceed expected value with a VMI, but without VMI, 75% of a contract's expected value can disappear within 18 months.

    Source: Based on findings from Geller & Company, 2003.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    A sound, cyclical approach to vendor management will help you create a VMI that meets your needs and stays in alignment with your organization as they both change (i.e. mature and grow).

    This is an image of Info-Tech's approach to VMI.  It includes the following four steps: 01 - Plan; 02 - Build; 03 - Run; 04 - Review

    Info-Tech’s Methodology for Creating and Operating Your VMI

    Phase 1: Plan Phase 2: Build Phase 3: Run Phase 4: Review

    Phase Steps

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    Phase Outcomes

    This phase helps you organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI. This phase helps you configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan. This phase helps you begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI. This phase helps the VMI identify what it should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    Insight Summary

    Insight 1

    Vendor management is not “plug and play” – each organization’s vendor management initiative (VMI) needs to fit its culture, environment, and goals. While there are commonalities and leading practices associated with vendor management, your initiative won’t look exactly like another organization’s. The key is to adapt vendor management principles to fit your needs.

    Insight 2

    All vendors are not of equal importance to your organization. Internal resources are a scarce commodity and should be deployed so that they provide the best return on the organization’s investment. Classifying or segmenting your vendors allows you to focus your efforts on the most important vendors first, allowing your VMI to have the greatest impact possible.

    Insight 3

    Having a solid foundation is critical to the VMI’s ongoing success. Whether you will be creating a formal vendor management office or using vendor management techniques, tools, and templates “informally,” starting with the basics is essential. Make sure you understand why the VMI exists and what it hopes to achieve, what is in and out of scope for the VMI, what strengths the VMI can leverage and the obstacles it will have to address, and how it will work with other areas within your organization.

    Blueprint Deliverables

    The four phases of creating and running a vendor management initiative are supported with configurable tools, templates, and checklists to help you stay aligned internally and achieve your goals.

    VMI Tools and Templates

    This image contains two screenshots of Info-Tech's VMI Tools and Templates

    Build a solid foundation for your VMI and configure tools and templates to help you manage your vendor relationships.

    Key Deliverables:

    1. Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium
    2. Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium
    3. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool
    4. Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    A suite of tools and templates to help you create and implement your vendor management initiative.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT Benefits

    • Identify and manage risk proactively.
    • Reduce costs and maximize value.
    • Increase visibility with your critical vendors.
    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Create a collaborative environment with key vendors.
    • Segment vendors to allocate resources more effectively and more efficiently.

    Business Benefits

    • Improve vendor accountability.
    • Increase collaboration between departments.
    • Improve working relationships with your vendors.
    • Create a feedback loop to address vendor or customer issues before they get out of hand or are more costly to resolve.
    • Increase access to meaningful data and information regarding important vendors.

    Establish Baseline Metrics

    Baseline metrics will be improved through:

    Using the Maturity Assessment and 90-Day Plan tools, track how well you are able to achieve your goals and objectives:

    • Did you meet the targeted maturity level for each maturity category as determined by the point system?
    • Did you finish each activity in the 90-Day Plan completely and on time?
    1-Year Maturity Roadmap(by Category) Target Maturity (Total Points) Actual Maturity (Total Points)
    Contracts 12 12
    Risk 8 7
    Vendor Selection 9 9
    Vendor Relationships 21 21
    VMI Operations 24 16
    90-Day Plan (by Activity) Activity Completed
    Finalize mission and goals; gain executive approval Yes
    Finalize OIC chart; gain buy-in from other departments Yes
    Classify top 40 vendors by spend Yes
    Create initial scorecard Yes
    Develop the business alignment meeting agenda Yes
    Conduct two business alignment meetings No
    Update job descriptions Yes
    Map two VMI processes No

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Phase 1 Phases 2 & 3 Phase 4

    Call #1: Mission statement and goals, scope, and strengths and obstacles.

    Call #5: Classification model.

    Call #9: Policies and procedures and reports.

    Call #12: Assess compliance, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

    Call #2: Roles and responsibilities and process mapping.

    Call #6: Risk assessment.

    Call #10: 3-year roadmap.

    Call #3: Charter and vendor inventory.

    Call #7: Scorecards and feedback and business alignment meetings.

    Call #11: 90-day plan and quick wins.

    Call #4: Maturity assessment and VMI structure.

    Call #8: Relationship alignment document, vendor orientation, and job descriptions.

    Workshop Overview

    Contact your account representative for more information.
    workshops@infotech.com 1-888-670-8889

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
    Plan Plan/Build/Run Build/Run Review

    Activities

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    Deliverables

    1. Completed Mission Statement and Goals
    2. List of Items In Scope and Out of Scope for the VMI
    3. List of Strengths and Obstacles for the VMI
    4. Completed OIC Chart
    5. Sample Process Map for One Process
    6. Vendor Inventory tab
    1. Completed Maturity Assessment
    2. Sample Job Descriptions and Phrases
    3. List of Attributes of a Valuable Vendor
    4. Configured Classification Model
    5. Configured Risk Assessment Tool
    6. Configured Scorecard and Feedback Questions
    7. Configured Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    1. Relationship Alignment Document Sample and Checklist
    2. Vendor Orientation Checklist
    3. Policies and Procedures Checklist
    4. Completed 3-Year Roadmap
    5. Completed 90-Day Plan
    6. List of Quick Wins
    7. List of Reports

    Phase 1: Plan

    Get Organized

    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Organize your VMI and document internal processes, relationships, roles, and responsibilities. The main outcomes from this phase are organizational documents, a baseline VMI maturity level, and a desired future state for the VMI.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 1: Plan

    Get organized.

    Phase 1: Plan focuses on getting organized. Foundational elements (mission statement, goals, scope, strengths and obstacles, roles and responsibilities, and process mapping) will help you define your VMI. These and the other elements of this Phase will follow you throughout the process of standing up your VMI and running it.

    Spending time up front to ensure that everyone is on the same page will help avoid headaches down the road. The tendency is to skimp (or even skip) on these steps to get to “the good stuff.” To a certain extent, the process provided here is like building a house. You wouldn’t start building your dream home without having a solid blueprint. The same is true with vendor management. Leveraging vendor management tools and techniques without the proper foundation may provide some benefit in the short term, but in the long term it will ultimately be a house of cards waiting to collapse.

    Step 1.1: Mission statement and goals

    Identify why the VMI exists and what it will achieve.

    Whether you are starting your vendor management journey or are already down the path, it is important to know why the vendor management initiative exists and what it hopes to achieve. The easiest way to document this is with a written declaration in the form of a mission statement and goals. Although this is the easiest way to proceed, it is far from easy.

    The mission statement should identify at a high level the nature of the services provided by the VMI, who it will serve, and some of the expected outcomes or achievements. The mission statement should be no longer than one or two sentences.

    The complement to the mission statement is the list of goals for the VMI. Your goals should not be a reassertion of your mission statement in bullet format. At this stage it may not be possible to make them SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based), but consider making them as SMART as possible. Without some of the SMART parameters attached, your goals are more like dreams and wishes. At a minimum, you should be able to determine the level of success achieved for each of the VMI goals.

    Although the VMI’s mission statement will stay static over time (other than for significant changes to the VMI or organization as a whole), the goals should be re-evaluated periodically using a SMART filter and adjusted as needed.

    1.1.1: Mission statement and goals

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the reasons why the VMI will exist.
    2. Review external mission statements for inspiration.
    3. Review internal mission statements from other areas to ensure consistency.
    4. Draft and document your mission statement in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
    5. Continue brainstorming and identify the high-level goals for the VMI.
    6. Review the list of goals and make them as SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable/Attainable, Relevant, Time-Bound/Time-Based) as possible.
    7. Document your goals in the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals.
    8. Obtain sign-off on the mission statement and goals from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Input

    • Brainstorming results
    • Mission statements from other internal and external sources

    Output

    • Completed mission statement and goals

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.1 Mission Statement and Goals

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.2: Scope

    Determine what is in scope and out of scope for the VMI

    Regardless of where your VMI resides or how it operates, it will be working with other areas within your organization. Some of the activities performed by the VMI will be new and not currently handled by other groups or individuals internally; at the same time, some of the activities performed by the VMI may be currently handled by other groups or individuals internally. In addition, executives, stakeholders, and other internal personnel may have expectations or make assumptions about the VMI. As a result, there can be a lot of confusion about what the VMI does and doesn’t do, and the answers cannot always be found in the VMI’s mission statement and goals.

    One component of helping others understand the VMI landscape is formalizing the VMI scope. The scope will define boundaries for the VMI. The intent is not to fence itself off and keep others out but provide guidance on where the VMI’s territory begins and ends. Ultimately, this will help clarify the VMI’s roles and responsibilities, improve workflow, and reduce errant assumptions.

    When drafting your VMI scoping document, make sure you look at both sides of the equation (similar to what you would do when following best practices for a statement of work): Identify what is in scope and what is out of scope. Be specific when describing the individual components of the VMI scope, and make sure executives and stakeholders are on board with the final version.

    1.2.1: Scope

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the activities and functions in scope and out of scope for the VMI.
      1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
      2. Go back and forth between in scope and out of scope as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the in-scope items and then turn your attention to the out-of-scope items.
    2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity. An item may be in scope or out of scope but not both.
    3. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope, to document the results.
    4. Obtain sign-off on the scope from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Mission statement and goals

    Output

    • Completed list of items in and out of scope for the VMI

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.2 Scope

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.3: Strengths and obstacles

    Pinpoint the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.

    A SWOT analysis (strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats) is a valuable tool, but it is overkill for your VMI at this point. However, using a modified and simplified form of this tool (strengths and obstacles) will yield significant results and benefit the VMI as it grows and matures.

    Your output will be two lists: the strengths associated with the VMI and the obstacles facing the VMI. For example, strengths could include items such as smart people working within the VMI and executive support. Obstacles could include items such as limited headcount and training required for VMI staff.

    The goals are 1) to harness the strengths to help the VMI be successful and 2) to understand the impact of the obstacles and plan accordingly. The output can also be used to enlighten executives and stakeholders about the challenges associated with their directives or requests (e.g. human bandwidth may not be sufficient to accomplish some of the vendor management activities and there is a moratorium on hiring until the next budget year).

    For each strength identified, determine how you will or can leverage it when things are going well or when the VMI is in a bind. For each obstacle, list the potential impact on the VMI (e.g. scope, growth rate, and number of vendors that can actively be part of the VMI).

    As you do your brainstorming, be as specific as possible and validate your lists with stakeholders and executives as needed.

    1.3.1: Strengths and obstacles

    20-40 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use a brainstorming activity to list on a whiteboard or flip chart the VMI’s strengths and obstacles.
      1. Be specific to avoid ambiguity and improve clarity.
      2. Go back and forth between strengths and obstacles as needed; it is not necessary to list all of the strengths and then turn your attention to the obstacles.
      3. It is possible for an item to be a strength and an obstacle; when this happens, add details to distinguish the situations.
    2. Review the lists to make sure there is enough specificity.
    3. Determine how you will leverage each strength and how you will manage each obstacle.
    4. Use the Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles, to document the results.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the strengths and obstacles from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope

    Output

    • Completed list of items impacting the VMI’s ability to be successful: strengths the VMI can leverage and obstacles the VMI must manage

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/Flip Charts
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities

    Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

    One crucial success factor for VMIs is gaining and maintaining internal alignment. There are many moving parts to an organization, and a VMI must be clear on the various roles and responsibilities related to the relevant processes. Some of this information can be found in the VMI’s scope, referenced in Step 1.2, but additional information is required to avoid stepping on each other’s toes since many of the processes require internal departments to work together. (For example, obtaining requirements for a request for proposal takes more than one person or one department to complete this process.) While it is not necessary to get too granular, it is imperative that you have a clear understanding of how the VMI activities will fit within the larger vendor management lifecycle (which is comprised of many sub processes) and who will be doing what.

    As we have learned through our workshops and guided implementations, a traditional RACI* or RASCI* chart does not work well for this purpose. These charts are not intuitive, and they lack the specificity required to be effective. For vendor management purposes, a higher-level view and a slightly different approach provide much better results.

    This step will lead your through the creation of an OIC* chart to determine vendor management lifecycle roles and responsibilities. Afterward, you’ll be able to say, “Oh, I see clearly who is involved in each part of the process and what their role is.”

    *RACI – Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed
    *RASCI – Responsible, Accountable, Support, Consulted, Informed
    *OIC – Owner, Informed, Contributor

    This is an image of a table which shows an example of which role would be responsible for which step

    Step 1.4: Roles and responsibilities (cont.)

    Obtain consensus on who is responsible for what.

    To start, define the vendor management lifecycle steps or process applicable to your VMI. Next, determine who participates in the vendor management lifecycle. There is no need to get too granular – think along the lines of departments, subdepartments, divisions, agencies, or however you categorize internal operational units. Avoid naming individuals other than by title; this typically happens when a person oversees a large group (e.g. the CIO [chief information officer] or the CPO [chief procurement officer]). Be thorough, but the chart can get out of hand quickly. For each role and step of the lifecycle, ask whether the entry is necessary – does it add value to the clarity of understanding the responsibilities associated with the vendor management lifecycle? Consider two examples, one for roles and one for lifecycle steps: 1) Is IT sufficient or do you need IT Operations and IT Development? 2) Is “negotiate contract documents” sufficient or do you need “negotiate the contract” and “negotiate the renewal”? The answer will always depend on your culture and environment, but be wary of creating a spreadsheet that requires an 85-inch monitor to view it in its entirety.

    After defining the roles (departments, divisions, agencies) and the vendor management lifecycle steps or process, assign one of three letters to each box in your chart:

    • O – Owner – who owns the process; they may also contribute to it.
    • I – Informed – who is informed about the progress or results of the process.
    • C – Contributor – who contributes or works on the process; it can be tangible or intangible contributions.

    This activity can be started by the VMI or done as a group with representatives from each of the named roles. If the VMI starts the activity, the resulting chart should be validated by the each of the named roles.

    1.4.1: Roles and responsibilities

    1-6 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and configure the OIC Chart in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart.
      1. Review the steps or activities across the top of the chart and modify as needed.
      2. Review the roles listed along the left side of the chart and modify as needed.
    2. For each activity or step across the top of the chart, assign each role a letter – O for owner of that activity or step; I for informed; or C for contributor. Use only one letter per cell.
    3. Work your way across the chart. Every cell should have an entry or be left blank if it is not applicable.
    4. Review the results and validate that every activity or step has an O assigned to it; there must be an owner for every activity or step.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the OIC chart from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • A list of activities or steps to complete a project, starting with requirements gathering and ending with ongoing risk management
    • A list of internal areas (departments, divisions, agencies, etc.) and stakeholders that contribute to completing a project

    Output

    • Completed OCI chart indicating roles and responsibilities for the VMI and other internal areas

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.4 OIC Chart

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Representatives from other areas as needed
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives as needed

    Step 1.5: Process mapping

    Diagram the workflow.

    Although policies and procedures are important, their nature can make it difficult to grasp how things work at a high level (or even at the detail level). To help bridge the gap, map the applicable processes (determined by how deep and wide you want to go) involving the VMI. To start, look at the OIC chart from Step 1.4. You can expand the breadth and depth of your mapping to include the VMI scope, the 3-year roadmap (see Step 2.9), and the processes driven by the day-to-day work within the VMI.

    Various mapping tools can be used. Three common approaches that can be mixed and matched are:

    • Traditional flowcharts.
    • Swimlane diagrams.
    • Work breakdown structures.
    This is an example of a Workflow Process Map

    Step 1.5: Process mapping (cont.)

    Diagram the workflow.

    Your goal is not to create an in-depth diagram for every step of the vendor management lifecycle. However, for steps owned by the VMI, the process map should include sufficient details for the owner and the contributors (see Step 1.4) to understand what is required of them to support that step in the lifecycle.

    For VMI processes that don’t interact with other departments, follow the same pattern as outlined above for steps owned by the VMI.

    Whatever methodology you use to create your process map, make sure it includes enough details so that readers and users can identify the following elements:

    • Input:
      • What are the inputs?
      • Where do the inputs originate or come from?
    • Process:
      • Who is involved/required for this step?
      • What happens to the inputs in this step?
      • What additional materials, tools, or resources are used or required during this step?
    • Output:
      • What are the outputs?
      • Where do the outputs go next?

    1.5.1: Process Mapping

    1-8 hours (or more)

    1. Meet with the participants and determine which processes you want to map.
      1. For processes owned by the VMI, map the entire process.
      2. For processes contributed to by the VMI, map the entire process at a high level and map the VMI portion of the process in greater detail.
    2. Select the right charts/diagrams for your output.
      1. Flowchart
      2. Swimlane diagram
      3. Modified SIPOC (Supplier, Input, Process, Output, Customer)
      4. WBS (work breakdown structure)
    3. Begin mapping the processes either in a tool or using sticky notes. You want to be able to move the steps and associated information easily; most people don’t map the entire process accurately or with sufficient detail the first time through. An iterative approach works best.
    4. Obtain signoff on the process maps from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping, if desired.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Existing processes (formal, informal, documented, and undocumented)
    • OIC chart

    Output

    • Process maps for processes contributed to or owned by the VMI

    Materials

    • Sticky Notes
    • Flowchart/process mapping software or something similar
    • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.5 Process Mapping

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Procurement/Sourcing
    • IT
    • Representatives from other areas as needed
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.6: Charter

    Document how the VMI will operate.

    As you continue getting organized by working through steps 1.1-1.5, you may want to document your progress in a charter and add some elements. Basically, a charter is a written document laying out how the VMI will operate within the organization. It clearly states the VMI’s mission, goals, scope, roles and responsibilities, and vendor governance model. In addition, it can include a list of team members and sponsors.

    Whether you create a VMI charter will largely depend on:

    • Your organization’s culture.
    • Your organization’s formality.
    • The perceived value of creating a charter.

    If you decide to create a VMI charter, this is a good place in the process to create an initial draft. As you continue working through the blueprint and your VMI matures, update the VMI charter as needed.

    VMI Charter:

    • Purpose
    • Sponsors
    • Roles
    • Responsibilities
    • Governance

    1.6.1: Charter

    1-4 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the template in Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter.
    2. Determine whether the participants will use this template or add materials to your standard charter template.
    3. Complete as much of the charter as possible, knowing that some information may not be available until later.
    4. Return to the charter as needed until it is completed.
    5. Obtain sign-off on the charter from stakeholders and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope
    • Strengths and obstacles
    • OIC chart
    • List of stakeholders and executives and their VMI roles and responsibilities

    Output

    • Completed VMI charter

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.6 Charter
    • Your organization’s standard charter document

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.7: Vendor inventory

    Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

    As you prepare your VMI for being operational, it’s critical to identify all of your current vendors providing IT products or services to the organization. This can be tricky and may depend on how you view things internally. For example, you may have traditional IT vendors that are managed by IT, and you may have IT vendors that are managed by other internal departments (shadow IT or out-in-the-open IT). If it wasn’t determined with the help of stakeholders and executives before now, make sure you establish the purview of the VMI at this point. What types of vendors are included and excluded from the VMI?

    You may find that a vendor can be included and excluded based on the product or service they provide. A vendor may provide a service that is managed by IT and a service that is managed/controlled by another department. In this instance, a good working relationship and clearly defined roles and responsibilities between the VMI and the other department will be required. But, it all starts with compiling a list of vendors and validating the VMI’s purview (and any limitations) for the vendors with stakeholders and executives.

    Step 1.7: Vendor inventory (cont.)

    Compile a list of vendors and relevant vendor information.

    At a minimum, the VMI should be able to quickly retrieve key information about each of “its” vendors:

    • Vendor Name
    • Classification (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1)
    • Categories of Service
    • Names of Products and Services Provided
    • Brief Descriptions of Products and Services Provided
    • Annualized Vendor Spend
    • Vendor Contacts
    • Internal Vendor Relationship Owner

    Not all of this information will be available at this point, but you can begin designing or configuring your tool to meet your needs. As your VMI enters Phase 3: Run and continues to mature, you will return to this tool and update the information. For example, the vendor classification category won’t be known until Phase 3, and it can change over time.

    1.7.1: Vendor inventory

    1-10 hours

    Meet with the participants and review the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory. Determine whether the VMI wants to collect and/or monitor additional information and make any necessary modifications to the tool.

    Enter the “Annual IT Vendor Spend” amount in the appropriate cell toward the top of the spreadsheet. This is for IT spend for vendor-related activities within the VMI’s scope; include shadow IT spend and “non-shadow” IT spend if those vendors will be included in the VMI’s scope.

    Populate the data fields for your top 50 vendors by annual spend; you may need multiple entries for the same vendor depending on the nature of the products and services they provide.

    Ignore the “Classification” column for now; you will return to this later when classification information is available.

    Ignore the “Percentage of IT Budget” column as well; it uses a formula to calculate this information.

    Input

    • Data from various internal and external sources such as accounts payable, contracts, and vendor websites

    Output

    • List of vendors with critical information required to manage relationships with key vendors

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

    Participants

    • VMI team (directly)
    • Other internal and external personnel (indirectly)

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Step 1.8: Maturity assessment

    Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

    Knowing where you are and where you want to go are essential elements for any journey in the physical world, and the same holds true for your VMI journey. Start by assessing your current-state VMI maturity. This will provide you with a baseline to measure progress against. Next, using the same criteria, determine the level of VMI maturity you would like to achieve one year in the future. This will be your future-state VMI maturity. Lastly, identify the gaps and plot your course.

    The maturity assessment provides three main benefits:

    1. Focus – you’ll know what is important to you moving forward.
    2. 3-Year Roadmap (discussed more fully in Step 2.9) – you’ll have additional input for your short-term and long-term roadmap (1, 2, and 3 years out).
    3. Quantifiable Improvement – you’ll be able to measure your progress and make midcourse corrections when necessary.

    Step 1.8: Maturity assessment (cont.)

    Establish a VMI maturity baseline and set an ideal future state.

    The Info-Tech VMI Maturity Assessment tool evaluates your maturity across several criteria across multiple categories. Once completed, the assessment will specify:

    • A current-state score by category and overall.
    • A target-state score by category and overall.
    • A quantifiable gap for each criterion.
    • A priority assignment for each criterion.
    • A level of effort required by criterion to get from the current state to the target state.
    • A target due date by criterion for achieving the target state.
    • A rank order for each criterion (note: limit your ranking to your top 7 or 9).

    Many organizations will be tempted to mature too quickly. Resource constraints and other items from Step 1.3 (Strengths and Obstacles) will impact how quickly you can mature. Being aggressive is fine, but it must be tempered with a dose of reality. Otherwise, morale, perception, and results can suffer.

    1.8.1: Maturity assessment

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and use Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input, to complete the first part of this activity. Provide the required information indicated below.
      1. Review each statement in column B and enter a value in the “Current” column using the drop-down menus based on how much you disagree or agree (0-4) with the statement. This establishes a baseline maturity.
      2. Repeat this process for the “Future” column using a target date of one year from now to achieve this level. This is your desired maturity.
      3. Enter information regarding priority, level of effort, and target due date in the applicable columns using the drop-down menus. (Priority levels are critical, high, medium, low, and maintain; Levels of Effort are high, medium, and low; Target Due Dates are broken into timelines: 1-3 months, 4-6 months, 7-9 months, and 10-12 months.)
    2. Review the information on Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output; use the Distribution Tables to help you rank your top priorities. Enter a unique number into the Priority (Rank) column. Limit your ranking to the top 7 to 9 activities to provide focus.

    Input

    • Knowledge of current VMI practices and desired future states

    Output

    • VMI maturity baseline
    • Desired VMI target maturity state (in one year)
    • Prioritized areas to improve and due dates
    • Graphs and tables to identify maturity deltas and track progress

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Input
    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.8 Maturity Assessment Output

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 1.9: Structure

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    There are two parts to the VMI structure:

    1. Organization Structure. Who owns the VMI – where does it fit on the organization chart?
    2. Reporting Structure. What is the reporting structure within the VMI – what are the job functions, titles, and solid and dotted lines of accountability?

    VMI Organization Structure

    The decision regarding who owns the VMI can follow one of two paths:

    1. The decision has already been made by the board of directors, executives, senior leadership, or stakeholders; OR
    2. The decision has not been made, and options will be reviewed and evaluated before it is implemented.

    Many organizations overlook the importance of this decision. The VMI’s position on the organization chart can aid or hinder its success. Whether the decision has already been made or not, this is the perfect time to evaluate the decision or options based on the following question: Why is the VMI being created and how will it operate? Review the documents you created during Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors to answer this question.

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.8 and other factors, select where the VMI will be best located from the following areas/offices or their equivalent:

    • Chief Compliance Officer (CCO)
    • Chief Information Officer (CIO)
    • Chief Financial Officer (CFO)
    • Chief Procurement Officer (CPO)
    • Chief Operating Officer (COO)
    • Other area

    Without the proper support and placement in the organization chart, the VMI can fail. It is important for the VMI to find a suitable home with a direct connection to one of the sponsors identified above and for the VMI lead to have significant stature (aka title) within the organization. For example, if the VMI lead is a “manager” level who is four reporting layers away from the chief officer/sponsor, the VMI will have an image issue within and outside of the sponsor’s organization (as well as within the vendor community). While this is not to say that the VMI lead should be a vice president* or senior director, our experience and research indicate that the VMI and the VMI lead will be taken more seriously when the VMI lead is at least a director level reporting directly to a CXO.

    *For purposes of the example above, the reporting structure hierarchy used is manager, senior manager, director, senior director, vice president, CXO.

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    VMI Reporting Structure

    As previously mentioned, the VMI reporting structure describes and identifies the job functions, titles, and lines of accountability. Whether you have a formal vendor management office or you are leveraging the principles of vendor management informally, your VMI reporting structure design will involve some solid lines and some dotted lines. In this instance, the dotted lines represent part-time participation or people/areas that will assist the VMI in some capacity. For example, if the VMI sits within IT, a dotted line to Procurement will show that a good working relationship is required for both parties to succeed; or a dotted line to Christina in Legal will indicate that Christina will be helping the VMI with legal issues.

    There is no one-size-fits-all reporting structure for VMIs, and your approach must leverage the materials from Steps 1.1-1.8, your culture, and your needs. By way of example, your VMI may include some or all of the following functions:

    • Contract Management
    • Relationship Management
    • Financial Management
    • Asset Management
    • Performance Management
    • Sourcing/Procurement
    • Risk Management

    Step 1.9: Structure (cont.)

    Determine the VMI’s organizational and reporting structure.

    Once you’ve identified the functional groups, you can assign titles, responsibilities, and reporting relationships. A good diagram goes a long way to helping others understand your organization. Traditional organization charts work well with VMIs, but a target diagram allows for rapid absorption of the dotted-line relationships. Review the two examples below and determine an approach that works best for you.

    An organizational Chart is depicted.  At the top of the chart is: Office of the CIO.  Below that is: VMI: Legal; Accounting & Finance; Corporate Procurement; below that are the following: Vendor Risk Management; Vendor Reporting and Analysis; Asset Management; Performance Management; Contract Management; IT Procurement Three concentric circles are depicted.  In the inner circle is the term: VMI.  In the middle circle are the terms: Reporting & Analysis; Asset Mgmt; Contract Mgmt; Performance Mgmt; It Proc; Vendor Risk.  In the outer circle are the following terms: Compliance; Finance; HR; Accounting; Procurement; Business Units; Legal; IT

    1.9.1: Structure

    15-60 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review decisions that have been made or options that are available regarding the VMI’s placement in the organization chart.
      1. Common options include the Chief Information Officer (CIO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO), or Chief Procurement Officer (CPO).
      2. Less common but viable options include the Chief Compliance Officer (CCO), Chief Operating Officer (COO), or another area.
    2. Brainstorm and determine the job functions and titles
    3. Define the reporting structure within the VMI.
    4. Identify the “dotted line” relationships between the VMI and other internal areas.
    5. Using flowchart, org. chart, or other similar software, reduce your results to a graphic representation that indicates where the VMI resides, its reporting structure, and its dotted-line relationships.
    6. Obtain sign-off on the structure from stakeholders and executives as required. A copy of the final output can be kept in the Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure, if desired.

    Input

    • Mission statement and goals
    • Scope
    • Maturity assessment results (current and target state)
    • Existing org. charts
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Completed org. chart with job titles and reporting structure

    Materials

    • Whiteboard/flip chart
    • Sticky notes
    • Flowchart/org. chart software or something similar
    • (Optional) Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.9 Structure

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • VMI sponsor
    • Stakeholders and executives

    Phase 2: Build

    Create and Configure Tools, Templates, and Processes

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Charter

    1.7 Vendor Inventory

    1.8 Maturity Assessment

    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Configure and create the tools and templates that will help you run the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are a clear understanding of which vendors are important to you, the tools to manage the vendor relationships, and an implementation plan.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Human Resources
    • Legal
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 2: Build

    Create and configure tools, templates, and processes.

    Phase 2: Build focuses on creating and configuring the tools and templates that will help you run your VMI. Vendor management is not a plug-and-play environment, and unless noted otherwise, the tools and templates included with this blueprint require your input and thought. The tools and templates must work in concert with your culture, values, and goals. That will require teamwork, insights, contemplation, and deliberation.

    During this Phase, you’ll leverage the various templates and tools included with this blueprint and adapt them for your specific needs and use. In some instances, you’ll be starting with mostly a blank slate; while in others, only a small modification may be required to make it fit your circumstances. However, it is possible that a document or spreadsheet may need heavy customization to fit your situation. As you create your VMI, use the included materials for inspiration and guidance purposes rather than as absolute dictates.

    Step 2.1: Classification model

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

    One of the functions of a VMI is to allocate the appropriate level of vendor management resources to each vendor since not all vendors are of equal importance to your organization. While some people may be able intuitively to sort their vendors into vendor management categories, a more objective, consistent, and reliable model works best. Info-Tech’s COST model helps you assign your vendors to the appropriate vendor management category so that you can focus your vendor management resources where they will do the most good.

    COST is an acronym for Commodity, Operational, Strategic, and Tactical. Your vendors will occupy one of these vendor management categories, and each category helps you determine the nature of the resources allocated to that vendor, the characteristics of the relationship desired by the VMI, and the governance level used.

    The easiest way to think of the COST model is as a 2x2 matrix or graph. The model should be configured for your environment so that the criteria used for determining a vendor’s classification align with what is important to you and your organization. However, at this point in your VMI’s maturation, a simple approach works best. The Classification Model included with this blueprint requires minimal configuration to get you started and that is discussed on the activity slide associated with this Step 2.1.


    Speed
    Operational Strategic
    Commodity Tactical
    →→→
    Criticality and Risk to the Organization

    Step 2.1: Classification model (cont.)

    Configure the COST Vendor Classification Tool.

    Common Characteristics by Vendor Management Category

    Operational Strategic
    • Low to moderate risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
    • Product or service used by more than one area
    • Price is a key negotiation point
    • Product or service is valued by the organization
    • Quality or the perception of quality is a differentiator (i.e. brand awareness)
    • Moderate to high risk and criticality; moderate to high spend and switching costs
    • Few competitors and differentiated products and services
    • Product or service significantly advances the organization’s vision, mission, and success
    • Well-established in their core industry
    Commodity Tactical
    • Low risk and criticality; low spend and switching costs
    • Product or service is readily available from many sources
    • Market has many competitors and options
    • Relationship is transactional
    • Price is the main differentiator
    • Moderate to high risk and criticality; low to moderate spend and switching costs
    • Vendor offerings align with or support one or more strategic objectives
    • Often IT vendors “outside” of IT (i.e. controlled and paid for by other areas)
    • Often niche or new vendors

    Source: Compiled in part from Stephen Guth, “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More)”

    2.1.1: Classification Model

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the spend ranges in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration, for your environment.
    2. Sort the data from Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory, by spend; if you used multiple line items for a vendor in the Vendor Inventory tab, you will have to aggregate the spend data for this activity.
    3. Update cells F14-J14 in the Classification Model based on your actual data.
      1. Cell F14 – set the boundary at a point between the spend for your 10th and 11th ranked vendors. For example, if the 10th vendor by spend is $1,009,850 and the 11th vendor by spend is $980,763, the range for F14 would be $1,000,00+.
      2. Cell G14 – set the bottom of the range at a point between the spend for your 30th and 31st ranked vendors; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in F14.
      3. Cell H14 – set the bottom of the range slightly below the spend for your 50th ranked vendor; the top of the range will be $1 less than the bottom of the range specified in G14.
      4. Cells I14 and J14 – divide the remaining range in half and split it between the two cells; for J14 the range will be $0 to $1 less than the bottom range in I14.
    4. Ignore the other variables at this time.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    Input

    • Jump – Phase 1 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 1.7 Vendor Inventory

    Output

    • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.2: Risk assessment tool

    Identify risks to measure, monitor, and report on.

    One of the typical drivers of a VMI is risk management. Organizations want to get a better handle on the various risks their vendors pose. Vendor risks originate from many areas: financial, performance, security, legal, and many others. However, security risk is the high-profile risk and the one organizations often focus on almost exclusively, which leaves the organization vulnerable in other areas.

    Risk management is a program, not a project – there is no completion date. A proactive approach works best and requires continual monitoring, identification, and assessment. Reacting to risks after they occur can be costly and can have other detrimental effects on the organization. Any risk that adversely affects IT will adversely affect the entire organization.

    While the VMI won’t necessarily be quantifying or calculating the risk directly, it generally is the aggregator of risk information across the risk categories, which it then includes in its reporting function. (See Steps 2.12 and 3.8.)

    At a minimum, your risk management strategy should involve:

    • Identifying the risks you want to measure and monitor.
    • Identifying your risk appetite (the amount of risk you are willing to live with).
    • Measuring, monitoring, and reporting on the applicable risks.
    • Developing and deploying a risk management plan to minimize potential risk impact.

    Vendor risk is a fact of life, but you do have options for how you handle it. Be proactive and thoughtful in your approach, and focus your resources on what is important.

    2.2.1: Risk assessment tool

    30-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants to configure the risk indicators in Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool, Tab 1. Set Parameters, for your environment.
    2. Review the risk categories and determine which ones you will be measuring and monitoring.
    3. Review the risk indicators under each risk category and determine whether the indicator is acceptable as written, is acceptable with modifications, should be replaced, or should be deleted.
    4. Make the necessary changes to the risk indicators; these changes will cascade to each of the vendor tabs. Limit the number of risk indicators to no more than seven per risk category.
    5. Gain input and approval as needed from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Risk Assessment Tool

    Input

    • Scope
    • OIC Chart
    • Process Maps
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Configured Vendor Classification Tool

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Vendor Classification Tool, Tab 1. Configuration

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    A vendor management scorecard is a great tool for measuring, monitoring, and improving relationship alignment. In addition, it is perfect for improving communication between you and the vendor.

    Conceptually, a scorecard is similar to a report card you received when you were in school. At the end of a learning cycle, you received feedback on how well you did in each of your classes. For vendor management, the scorecard is also used to provide periodic feedback, but there are some different nuances and some additional benefits and objectives when compared to a report card.

    Although scorecards can be used in a variety of ways, the main focus here will be on vendor management scorecards – contract management, project management, and other types of scorecards will not be included in the materials covered in this Step 2.3 or in Step 3.4.

    Category 1 Score
    Vendor Objective A 4
    Objective B 3
    Objective C 5
    Objective D 4 !

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Anatomy

    The Info-Tech Scorecard includes five areas:

    • Measurement Categories. Measurement categories help organize the scorecard. Limit the number of measurement categories to three to five; this allows the parties to stay focused on what’s important. Too many measurement categories make it difficult for the vendor to understand the expectations.
    • Criteria. The criteria describe what is being measured. Create criteria with sufficient detail to allow the reviewers to fully understand what is being measured and to evaluate it. Criteria can be objective or subjective. Use three to five criteria per measurement category.
    • Measurement Category Weights. Not all of your measurement categories may be of equal importance to you; this area allows you to give greater weight to a measurement category when compiling the overall score.
    • Rating. Reviewers will be asked to assign a score to each criteria using a 1 to 5 scale.
    • Comments. A good scorecard will include a place for reviewers to provide additional information regarding the rating or other items that are relevant to the scorecard.

    An overall score is calculated based on the rating for each criteria and the measurement category weights.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Goals and Objectives

    Scorecards can be used for a variety of reasons. Some of the common ones are listed below:

    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Convey expectations to the vendor.
    • Identify and recognize top vendors.
    • Increase alignment between the parties.
    • Improve communication with the vendor.
    • Compare vendors across the same criteria.
    • Measure items not included in contract metrics.
    • Identify vendors for “strategic alliance” consideration.
    • Help the organization achieve specific goals and objectives.
    • Identify and resolve issues before they impact performance or the relationship.

    Identifying your scorecard drivers first will help you craft a suitable scorecard.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Info-Tech recommends starting with simple scorecards to allow you and the vendors to acclimate to the new process and information. As you build your scorecards, keep in mind that internal personnel will be scoring the vendors and the vendors will be reviewing the scorecard. Make your scorecard easy for your personnel to fill out and composed of meaningful content to drive the vendor in the right direction. You can always make the scorecard more complex in the future.

    Our recommendation of five categories is provided below. Choose three to five categories to help you accomplish your scorecard goals and objectives:

    1. Timeliness – responses, resolutions, fixes, submissions, completions, milestones, deliverables, invoices, etc.
    2. Cost – total cost of ownership, value, price stability, price increases/decreases, pricing models, etc.
    3. Quality – accuracy, completeness, mean time to failure, bugs, number of failures, etc.
    4. Personnel – skilled, experienced, knowledgeable, certified, friendly, trustworthy, flexible, accommodating, etc.
    5. Risk – adequate contractual protections, security breaches, lawsuits, finances, audit findings, etc.

    Some criteria may be applicable in more than one category. The categories above should cover at least 80% of the items that are important to your organization. The general criteria listed for each category is not an exhaustive list, but most things break down into time, money, quality, people, and risk issues.

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Additional Considerations

    • Even a good rating system can be confusing. Make sure you provide some examples or a way for reviewers to discern the differences between 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Don’t assume your “Rating Key” will be intuitive.
    • When assigning weights, don’t go lower than 10% for any measurement category. If the weight is too low, it won’t be relevant enough to have an impact on the total score. If it doesn’t “move the needle,” don’t include it.
    • Final sign-off on the scorecard template should occur outside of the VMI. The heavy lifting can be done by the VMI to create it, but the scorecard is for the benefit of the organization overall and those impacted by the vendors specifically. You may end up playing arbiter or referee, but the scorecard is not the exclusive property of the VMI. Try to reach consensus on your final template whenever possible.
    • You should notice improved ratings and total scores over time for your vendors. One explanation for this is the Pygmalion Effect: “The Pygmalion [E]ffect describes situations where someone’s high expectations improves our behavior and therefore our performance in a given area. It suggests that we do better when more is expected of us.”* Convey your expectations and let the vendors’ competitive juices take over.
    • While you’re creating your scorecard and materials to explain the process to internal personnel, identify those pieces that will help you explain it to your vendors as part of your vendor orientation (see steps 2.6 and 3.4). Leveraging pre-existing materials is a great shortcut.

    *Source: The Decision Lab, 2020

    Step 2.3: Scorecards and feedback (cont.)

    Design a two-way feedback loop with your vendors.

    Vendor Feedback

    After you’ve built your scorecard, turn your attention to the second half of the equation – feedback from the vendor. A communication loop cannot be successful without the dialogue flowing both ways. While this can happen with just a scorecard, a mechanism specifically geared toward the vendor providing you with feedback improves communication, alignment, and satisfaction.

    You may be tempted to create a formal scorecard for the vendor to use. Our recommendation is to avoid that temptation until later in your maturity or development of the VMI. You’ll be implementing a lot of new processes, deploying new tools and templates, and getting people to work together in new ways. Work on those things first.

    For now, implement an informal process for obtaining information from the vendor. Start by identifying information that you will find useful, information that will allow you to improve overall, to reduce waste or time, to improve processes, to identify gaps in skills. Incorporate these items into your business alignment meetings (see Steps 2.4 and 3.5). Create three to five good questions to ask the vendor and include these in the business alignment meeting agenda. The goal is to get meaningful feedback, and that starts with asking good questions.

    Keep it simple at first. When the time is right, you can build a more formal feedback form or scorecard. Don’t be in a rush though. So long as the informal method works, keep using it.

    2.3.1: Scorecards and feedback

    30-60 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for your scorecard measurement categories:
      1. What makes a vendor valuable to your organization?
      2. What differentiates a “good” vendor from a “bad” vendor?
      3. What items would you like to measure and provide feedback to the vendor to improve performance, the relationship, risk, and other areas?
    2. Select three, but no more than five, of the following measure categories: timeliness, cost, quality, personnel, and risk.
    3. Within each measurement category, list two or three criteria that you want to measure and track for your vendors; choose items that are as universal as possible rather than being applicable to one vendor or one vendor type.
    4. Assign a weight to each measurement category, ensuring that the total weight is 100% for all measurement categories.
    5. Document your results as you go in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Configured scorecard template

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Scorecard

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    2.3.2: Scorecards and feedback

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and brainstorm ideas for feedback to seek from your vendors during your business alignment meetings. During the brainstorming, identify questions to ask the vendor about your organization that will:
      1. Help you improve the relationship.
      2. Help you improve your processes or performance.
      3. Help you improve ongoing communication.
      4. Help you evaluate your personnel.
    2. Identify the top five questions you want to include in your business alignment meeting agenda. (Note: you may need to refine the actual questions from the brainstorming activity before they are ready to include in your business alignment meeting agenda.)
    3. Document both your brainstorming activity and your final results in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback. The brainstorming questions can be used in the future as your VMI matures and your feedback transforms from informal to formal. The final results will be used in Steps 2.4 and 3.5.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Feedback questions to include with the business alignment meeting agenda

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    A business alignment meeting (BAM) is a great, multi-faceted tool to ensure the customer and the vendor stay focused on what is important to the customer at a high level. BAMs are not traditional “operational” meetings where the parties get into the details of the contracts, deal with installation problems, address project management issues, or discuss specific cost overruns. The main focus of the BAM is the scorecard (see Step 2.3), but other topics are discussed and other purposes are served. For example, you can use the BAM to develop the relationship with the vendor’s leadership team so that if escalation is ever needed, your organization is more than just a name on a spreadsheet or customer list; you can learn about innovations the vendor is working on (without the meeting turning into a sales call); you can address high-level performance trends and request corrective action as needed; you can clarify your expectations; you can educate the vendor about your industry, culture, and organization; and you can learn more about the vendor.

    As you build your BAM agenda, someone in your organization may say, “Oh, that’s just a quarterly business review (QBR) or top-to-top meeting.” However, in most instances, an existing QBR or top-to-top meeting is not the same as a BAM. Using the term QBR or top-to-top meeting instead of BAM can lead to confusion internally. The VMI may say to the business unit, Procurement, or another department, “We’re going to start running some QBRs for our strategic vendors.” The typical response is, “There’s no need to do that. We already run QBRs/top-to-top meetings with our important vendors.” This may be accompanied by an invitation to join their meeting, where you may be an afterthought, have no influence, and get five minutes at the end to talk about your agenda items. Keep your BAM separate so that it meets your needs.

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    As previously noted, using the term BAM more accurately depicts the nature of the VMI meeting and prevents confusion internally with other meetings already occurring. In addition, hosting the BAM yourself rather than piggybacking onto another meeting ensures that the VMI’s needs are met. The VMI will set and control the BAM agenda and determine the invite list for internal personnel and vendor personnel. As you may have figured out by now, having the right customer and vendor personnel attend will be essential.

    BAMs are conducted at the vendor level … not the contract level. As a result, the frequency of the BAMs will depend on the vendor’s classification category (see Steps 2.1 and 3.1). General frequency guidelines are provided below, but they can be modified to meet your goals:

    • Commodity Vendors – Not applicable
    • Operational Vendors – Biannually or annually
    • Strategic Vendors – Quarterly
    • Tactical Vendors – Quarterly or biannually

    BAMs can help you achieve some additional benefits not previously mentioned:

    • Foster a collaborative relationship with the vendor.
    • Avoid erroneous assumptions by the parties.
    • Capture and provide a record of the relationship (and other items) over time.

    Step 2.4: Business alignment meeting agenda (cont.)

    Craft an agenda that meets the needs of the VMI.

    As with any meeting, building the proper agenda will be one of the keys to an effective and efficient meeting. A high-level BAM agenda with sample topics is set out below:

    BAM Agenda

    • Opening Remarks
      • Welcome and introductions
      • Review of previous minutes
    • Active Discussion
      • Review of open issues
      • Scorecard and feedback
      • Current status of projects to ensure situational awareness by the vendor
      • Roadmap/strategy/future projects
      • Accomplishments
    • Closing Remarks
      • Reinforce positives (good behavior, results, and performance, value added, and expectations exceeded)
      • Recap
    • Adjourn

    2.4.1: Business alignment meeting agenda

    20-45 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the sample agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.
    2. Using the sample agenda as inspiration and brainstorming activities as needed, create a BAM agenda tailored to your needs.
      1. Select the items from the sample agenda applicable to your situation.
      2. Add any items required based on your brainstorming.
      3. Add the feedback questions identified during Activity 2.3.2 and documented in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback.
    3. Gain input and approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as required or appropriate.
    4. Document the final BAM agenda in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.3 Feedback

    Output

    • Configured BAM agenda

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.4 BAM Agenda

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.5: Relationship alignment document

    Draft a document to convey important VMI information to your vendors.

    Throughout this blueprint, alignment is mentioned directly (e.g. business alignment meetings [Steps 2.4 and 3.5]) or indirectly implied. Ensuring you and your vendors are on the same page, have clear and transparent communication, and understand each other’s expectations is critical to fostering strong relationships. One component of gaining and maintaining alignment with your vendors is the relationship alignment document (RAD). Depending upon the scope of your VMI and what your organization already has in place, your RAD will fill in the gaps on various topics.

    Early in the VMI’s maturation, the easiest approach is to develop a short document (i.e. 1 page) or a pamphlet (i.e. the classic trifold) describing the rules of engagement when doing business with your organization. The RAD can convey expectations, policies, guidelines, and other items. The scope of the document will depend on 1) what you believe is important for the vendors to understand, and 2) any other similar information already provided to the vendors.

    The first step to drafting a RAD is to identify what information vendors need to know to stay on your good side. For example, you may want vendors to know about your gift policy (e.g. employees may not accept gifts from vendors above a nominal value such as a pen or mousepad). Next, compare your list of what vendors need to know and determine if the content is covered in other vendor-facing documents such as a vendor code of conduct or your website’s vendor portal. Lastly, create your RAD to bridge the gap between what you want and what is already in place. In some instances, you may want to include items from other documents to reemphasize them with the vendor community.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The RAD can be used with all vendors regardless of classification category. It can be sent directly to the vendors or given to them during vendor orientation (see Step 3.3)

    2.5.1: Relationship alignment document

    1-4 hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the RAD sample and checklist in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc.
    2. Determine:
      1. Whether you will create one RAD for all vendors or one RAD for strategic vendors and another RAD for tactical and operational vendors; whether you will create a RAD for commodity vendors.
      2. The concepts you want to include in your RAD(s).
      3. The format for your RAD(s) – traditional, pamphlet, or other.
      4. Whether signoff or acknowledgement will be required by the vendors.
    3. Draft your RAD(s) and work with other internal areas such as Marketing to create a consistent brand for the RADS and Legal to ensure consistent use and preservation of trademarks or other intellectual property rights and other legal issues.
    4. Review other vendor-facing documents (e.g. supplier code of conduct, onsite safety and security protocols) for consistencies between them and the RAD(s).
    5. Obtain signoff on the RAD(s) from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Marketing, and others as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Vendor-facing documents, policies, and procedures

    Output

    • Completed relationship alignment document(s)

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.5 Relationship Alignment Doc

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Marketing, as needed
    • Legal, as needed

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation; 02 - Reorientation; 03 - Debrief

    Your organization is unique. It may have many similarities with other organizations, but your culture, risk tolerance, mission, vision, and goals, finances, employees, and “customers” (those that depend on you) make it different. The same is true of your VMI. It may have similar principles, objectives, and processes to other organizations’ VMIs, but yours is still unique. As a result, your vendors may not fully understand your organization and what vendor management means to you.

    Vendor orientation is another means to helping you gain and maintain alignment with your important vendors, educate them on what is important to you, and provide closure when/if the relationship with the vendor ends. Vendor orientation is comprised of three components, each with a different function:

    • Orientation
    • Reorientation
    • Debrief

    Vendor orientation focuses on the vendor management pieces of the puzzle (e.g. the scorecard process) rather than the operational pieces (e.g. setting up a new vendor in the system to ensure invoices are processed smoothly).

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 01 - Orientation

    Orientation

    Orientation is conceptually similar to new hire orientation for employees at your organization. Generally conducted as a meeting, orientation provides your vendors with the information they need to be successful when working with your organization. Sadly, this is often overlooked by customers; it can take months or years for vendors to figure it out by themselves. By controlling the narrative and condensing the timeline, vendor relationships and performance improve more rapidly.

    A partial list of topics for orientation is set out below:

    • Your organization’s structure
    • Your organization’s culture
    • Your relationship expectations
    • Your governances (VMI and other)
    • Their vendor classification designation (commodity, operational, strategic, or tactical)
    • The scorecard process
    • Business alignment meetings
    • Relationship alignment documents

    In short, this is the first step toward building (or continuing to build) a robust, collaborative, mutually beneficial relationship with your important vendors.

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 02 - Reorientation

    Reorientation

    Reorientation is either identical or similar to orientation, depending upon the circumstances. Reorientation occurs for a number of reasons, and each reason will impact the nature and detail of the reorientation content. Reorientation occurs whenever:

    • There is a significant change in the vendor’s products or services.
    • The vendor has been through a merger, acquisition, or divestiture.
    • A significant contract renewal/renegotiation has recently occurred.
    • Sufficient time has passed from orientation; commonly 2 to 3 years.
    • The vendor has been placed in a “performance improvement plan” or “relationship improvement plan” protocol.
    • Significant turnover has occurred within your organization (executives, key stakeholders, and/or VMI personnel).
    • Substantial turnover has occurred at the vendor at the executive or account management level.
    • The vendor has changed vendor classification categories after the most current classification.

    As the name implies, the goal is to refamiliarize the vendor with your current VMI situation, governances, protocols, and expectations. The drivers for reorientation will help you determine its scope, scale, and frequency.

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    Vendor Orientation: 03 - Debrief

    Debrief

    To continue the analogy from orientation, debrief is similar to an exit interview for an employee when their employment is terminated. In this case, debrief occurs when the vendor is no longer an active vendor with your organization – all contracts have terminated or expired, and no new business with the vendor is anticipated within the next three months.

    Similar to orientation and reorientation, debrief activities will be based on the vendor’s classification category within the COST model. Strategic vendors don’t go away very often; usually, they transition to operational or tactical vendors first. However, if a strategic vendor is no longer providing products or services to you, dig a little deeper into their experiences and allocate extra time for the debrief meeting.

    The debrief should provide you with feedback on the vendor’s experience with your organization and their participation in your VMI. In addition, it can provide closure for both parties since the relationship is ending. Be careful that the debrief does not turn into a finger-pointing meeting or therapy session for the vendor. It should be professional and productive; if it is going off the rails, terminate the meeting before more damage can occur.

    End the debrief on a high note if possible. Thank the vendor, highlight its key contributions, and single out any personnel who went above and beyond. You never know when you will be doing business with this vendor again – don’t burn bridges!

    Step 2.6: Vendor orientation (cont.)

    Create a VMI awareness process to build bridges with your vendors.

    • As you create your vendor orientation materials, focus on the message you want to convey.
    • For orientation and reorientation:
      • What is important to you that vendors need to know?
      • What will help the vendors understand more about your organization … your VMI?
      • What and how are you different from other organizations overall … in your “industry”?
      • What will help them understand your expectations?
      • What will help them be more successful?
      • What will help you build the relationship?
    • For debrief:
      • What information or feedback do you want to obtain?
      • What information or feedback to you want to give?
    • The level of detail you provide strategic vendors during orientation and reorientation may be different from the information you provide tactical and operational vendors. Commodity vendors are not typically involved in the vendor orientation process. The orientation meetings can be conducted on a one-to-one basis for strategic vendors and a one-to-many basis for operational and tactical vendors; reorientation and debrief are best conducted on a one-to-one basis. Lastly, face-to-face or video meetings work best for vendor orientation; voice-only meetings, recorded videos, or distributing only written materials seldom hit their mark or achieve the desired results.

    2.6.1: Vendor orientation

    1 to several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation.
      1. Use the orientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your orientation meetings.
      2. Use the reorientation checklist to identify the materials you want to create for your reorientation meetings.
    2. The selections can be made by classification category (i.e. different items can apply to strategic, operational, and tactical vendors).
    3. Create the materials and seek input and/or approval from sponsors, stakeholders, and executives as needed.
    4. Use the debrief section of the tool to create an agenda, list the questions you want to ask vendors, and list information you want to provide to vendors. The agenda, questions, and information can be segregated by classification category.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Agendas and materials for orientation, reorientation, and debrief

    Materials

    • Phase Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.6 Vendor Orientation

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.7: Job descriptions

    Ensure new and existing job descriptions are up to date.

    Based on your work product from Steps 1.1-1.9, it’s time to start drafting new or modifying existing job descriptions applicable to the VMI team members. Some of the VMI personnel may be dedicated full-time to the VMI, while others may be supporting the VMI on a part-time basis. At a minimum, create or modify your job descriptions based on the categories set out below. Remember to get the internal experts involved so that you stay true to your environment and culture.

    01 Title

    This should align overall with what the person will be doing and what the person will be responsible for. Your hands may be tied with respect to titles, but try to make them intuitively descriptive if possible.

    02 Duties

    This is the main portion of the job description. List the duties, responsibilities, tasks, activities, and results expected. Again, there may be some limitations imposed by your organization, but be as thorough as possible.

    03 Qualifications

    This tends to be a gray area for many organizations, with the qualifications, certifications, and experience desired expressed in “ranges” so that good candidates are not eliminated from consideration unnecessarily.

    2.7.1: Job descriptions

    1 to several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the VMI structure from Step 1.9.
      1. List the positions that require new job descriptions.
      2. List the positions that require updated job descriptions.
    2. Review the other Phase 1 work product and list the responsibilities, tasks, and functions that need to be incorporated into the new and updated job descriptions.
    3. Review the sample VMI job descriptions and sample VMI job description language in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions, and identify language and concepts you want to include in the new and revised job descriptions.
    4. Using your template, draft the new job descriptions and modify the existing job descriptions to synchronize with the VMI structure. Work with other internal areas such as Human Resources to ensure cultural fit and compliance.
    5. Obtain input and signoff on the job descriptions from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Human Resources, and others as needed.
    6. Document your final job descriptions in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Existing job descriptions
    • Work product from Phase 1

    Output

    • Job descriptions for new positions
    • Updated job descriptions for existing positions

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.7 Job Descriptions

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Human Resources (as needed)
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Policies and procedures are often thought of as boring documents that are 1) tedious to create, 2) seldom read after creation, and 3) only used to punish people when they do something “wrong.” However, when done well, these documents:

    • Communicate expectations.
    • Capture institutional knowledge.
    • Provide guidance for decision making.
    • Help workers avoid errors and minimize risk.
    • Ensure regulatory and organizational compliance.
    • List the steps required to achieve consistent results.

    Definitions of Policies and Procedures

    Policies and procedures are essential, but they are often confused with each other. A policy is a rule, guideline, or framework for making decisions. For example, in the vendor management space, you may want a policy indicating your organization’s view on gifts from vendors. A procedure is a set of instructions for completing a task or activity. For example, staying in the vendor management space, you may want a procedure to outline the process for classifying vendors.

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Start With Your Policy/Procedure Template or Create One for Consistency

    When creating policies and procedures, follow your template. If you don’t have one (or want to see if anything is missing from your template) the following list of potential components for your governance documents is provided.* Not every concept is required. Use your judgment and err on the side of caution when drafting; balance readability and helpfulness against over documenting and over complicating.

    • Descriptive Title
    • Policy Number
    • Brief Overview
    • Purpose
    • Scope
    • The Policy or Procedure
    • Definitions
    • Revision Date
    • History
    • Related Documents
    • Keywords

    Step 2.8: Policies and procedures (cont.)

    Prepare policies and procedures for VMI functions.

    Although they are not ever going to be compared to page-turning novels, policies and procedures can be improved by following a few basic principles. By following the guidelines set out below, your VMI policies and procedures will contribute to the effectiveness of your initiative.*

    • Use short sentences.
    • Organize topics logically.
    • Use white space liberally.
    • Use mandatory language.
    • Use gender-neutral terms.
    • Write with an active voice.
    • Avoid jargon when possible.
    • Use a consistent “voice” and tone.
    • Use pictures or diagrams when they will help.
    • Write in the same tense throughout the document.
    • Use icons and colors to designate specific elements.
    • Make sure links to other policies and procedures work.
    • Define all acronyms and jargon (when it must be used).
    • Avoid a numbering scheme with more than three levels.

    *Adapted in part from smartsheet.com

    Info-Tech Insight

    Drafting policies and procedures is an iterative process that requires feedback from the organization’s leadership team.

    2.8.1: Policies and procedures

    Several hours

    1. Meet with the participants and review the sample policies and procedures topics in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
    2. Determine:
      1. The concepts you want to include in your policies and procedures; brainstorm for any additional concepts you want to include.
      2. The format/template for your policies and procedures.
    3. Draft your policies and procedures based on the sample topics and your brainstorming activity. Work with other internal areas such as Legal and Human Resources to ensure cultural and environmental fit within your organization.
    4. Obtain input and signoff on the policies and procedures from stakeholders, sponsors, executives, Legal, Human Resources, and others as needed.
    5. Document your final policies and procedures in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures.
    6. Publish your policies and procedures and conduct training sessions or awareness sessions as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Existing policies and procedures (if any)
    • Existing policies and procedures template (if any)
    • Scope
    • OIC chart
    • Process maps
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • VMI policies and procedures

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.8 Policies and Procedures

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Legal and Human Resources (as needed)
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.9: 3-year roadmap

    Plot your path at a high level.

    The VMI exists in many planes concurrently: 1) it operates both tactically and strategically, and 2) it focuses on different timelines or horizons (e.g. the past, the present, and the future). Creating a 3-year roadmap facilitates the VMI’s ability to function effectively across these multiple landscapes.

    The VMI roadmap will be influenced by many factors. The work product from Phase 1: Plan, input from executives, stakeholders, and internal clients, and the direction of the organization as a whole are great sources of information as you begin to build your roadmap.

    To start, identify what you would like to accomplish in Year 1. This is arguably the easiest year to complete: budgets are set (or you have a good idea what the budget will look like), personnel decisions have been made, resources have been allocated, and other issues impacting the VMI are known with a higher degree of certainty than any other year. This does not mean things won’t change during the first year of the VMI, but expectations are usually lower and the short event horizon makes things more predictable during the Year-1 ramp-up period.

    Years 2 and 3 are more tenuous, but the process is the same: identify what you would like to accomplish or roll out in each year. Typically, the VMI maintains the Year 1 plan into subsequent years and adds to the scope or maturity. For example, you may start Year 1 with BAMs and scorecards for three of your strategic vendors; during Year 2, you may increase that to five vendors; and during Year 3, you may increase that to nine vendors. Or, you may not conduct any market research during Year 1, waiting to add it to your roadmap in Year 2 or 3 as you mature.

    Breaking things down by year helps you identify what is important and the timing associated with your priorities. A conservative approach is recommended. It is easy to overcommit, but the results can be disastrous and painful.

    2.9.1: 3-year roadmap

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate Year 1 of your 3-year roadmap with your existing fiscal year or reporting year. Year 1 may be shorter or longer than a calendar year.
    2. Review the VMI activities listed in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap. Use brainstorming and your prior work product from Phase 1 and Phase 2 to identify additional items for the roadmap and add them at the bottom of the spreadsheet.
    3. Starting with the first activity, determine when that activity will begin and put an X in the corresponding column; if the activity is not applicable, leave it blank or insert N/A.
    4. Go back to the top of the list and add information as needed.
      1. For any Year-1 or Year-2 activities, add an X in the corresponding columns if the activity will be expanded/continued in subsequent periods (e.g. if a Year 2 activity will continue in Year 3, put an X in Year 3 as well).
      2. Use the comments column to provide clarifying remarks or additional insights related to your plans or “X’s.” For example, “Scorecards begin in Year 1 with three vendors and will roll out to five vendors in Year 2 and nine vendors in Year 3.”
    5. Obtain signoff from stakeholders, sponsors, and executives as needed.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.8 work product
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • High level 3-year roadmap for the VMI

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.9 3-Year Roadmap

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.10: 90-day plan

    Pave your short-term path with a series of detailed quarterly plans.

    Now that you have prepared a 3-year roadmap, it’s time to take the most significant elements from the first year and create action plans for each three-month period. Your first 90-day plan may be longer or shorter if you want to sync to your fiscal or calendar quarters. Aligning with your fiscal year can make it easier for tracking and reporting purposes; however, the more critical item is to make sure you have a rolling series of four 90-day plans to keep you focused on the important activities and tasks throughout the year.

    The 90-day plan is a simple project plan that will help you measure, monitor, and report your progress. Use the Info-Tech tool to help you track:

    • Activities
    • Tasks comprising each activity
    • Who will be performing the tasks
    • An estimate of the time required per person per task
    • An estimate of the total time to achieve the activity
    • A due date for the activity
    • A priority of the activity

    The first 90-day plan will have the greatest level of detail and should be as thorough as possible; the remaining three 90-day plans will each have less detail for now. As you approach the middle of the first 90-day plan, start adding details to the next 90-day plan; toward the end of the first quarter add a high-level 90-day plan to the end of the chain. Continue repeating this cycle each quarter and consult the 3-year roadmap and the leadership team as necessary.

    90 Days

    2.10.1: 90-day plan

    45-90 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and decide how to coordinate the first 90-day plan with your existing fiscal year or reporting cycles. Your first plan may be shorter or longer than 90 days.
    2. Looking at the Year 1 section of the 3-year roadmap, identify the activities that will be started during the next 90 days.
    3. Using the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan, enter the following information into the spreadsheet for each activity to be accomplished during the next 90 days:
      1. Activity description
      2. Tasks required to complete the activity (be specific and descriptive)
      3. The people who will be performing each task
      4. The estimated number of hours required to complete each task
      5. The start date and due date for each task or the activity
    4. Validate the tasks are a complete list for each activity and the people performing the tasks have adequate time to complete the tasks by the due date(s).
    5. Assign a priority to each activity.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • 3-year roadmap
    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.9 work product
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • Detailed plan for the VMI for the next quarter or 90 days

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.10 90-Day Plan

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Step 2.11: Quick wins

    Identify potential short-term successes to gain momentum and show value immediately.

    As the final step in the timeline trilogy, you are ready to identify some quick wins for the VMI. Using the first 90-day plan and a brainstorming activity, create a list of things you can do in 15 to 30 days that add value to your initiative and build momentum.

    As you evaluate your list of potential candidates, look for things that:

    • Are achievable within the stated timeline.
    • Don’t require a lot of effort.
    • Involve stopping a certain process, activity, or task; this is sometimes known as a “stop doing stupid stuff” approach.
    • Will reduce or eliminate inefficiencies; this is sometimes known as the war on waste.
    • Have a moderate to high impact or bolster the VMI’s reputation.

    As you look for quick wins, you may find that everything you identify does not meet the criteria. That’s ok … don’t force the issue. Return your focus to the 90-day plan and 3-year roadmap, and update those documents if the brainstorming activity associated with this Step 2.11 identified anything new.

    2.11.1: Quick wins

    15-30 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the 3-year roadmap and 90-day plan. Determine if any item on either document can be completed:
      1. Quickly (30 days or less)
      2. With minimal effort
      3. To provide or show moderate to high levels of value or provide the VMI with momentum
    2. Brainstorm to identify any other items that meet the criteria in step 1 above.
    3. Compile a comprehensive list of these items and select up to five to pursue.
    4. Document the list in the Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins.
    5. Manage the quick wins list and share the results with the VMI team and applicable stakeholders and executives.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • 3-year roadmap
    • 90-day plan
    • Brainstorming

    Output

    • A list of activities that require low levels of effort to achieve moderate to high levels of value in a short period

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.11 Quick Wins

    Participants

    • VMI team

    Step 2.12: Reports

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    Issuing reports is a critical piece of the VMI since the VMI is a conduit of information for the organization. It may be aggregating risk data from internal areas, conducting vendor research, compiling performance data, reviewing market intelligence, or obtaining relevant statistics, feedback, comments, facts, and figures from other sources. Holding onto this information minimizes the impact a VMI can have on the organization; however, the VMI’s internal clients, stakeholders, and executives can drown in raw data and ignore it completely if it is not transformed into meaningful, easily-digested information.

    Before building a report, think about your intended audience:

    • What information are they looking for … what will help them understand the big picture?
    • What level of detail is appropriate, keeping in mind the audience may not be like-minded?
    • What items are universal to all of the readers and what items are of interest to one or two readers?
    • How easy or hard will it be to collect the data … who will be providing it, how time consuming will it be?
    • How accurate, valid, and timely will the data be?
    • How frequently will each report need to be issued?

    Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    Use the following guidelines to create reports that will resonate with your audience:

    • Value information over data, but sometimes data does have a place in your report.
    • Use pictures, graphics, and other representations more than words, but words are often necessary in small, concise doses.
    • Segregate your report by user; for example, general information up top, CIO information below that on the right, CFO information to the left of CIO information, etc.
    • Send a draft report to the internal audience and seek feedback, keeping in mind you won’t be able to cater to or please everyone.

    Step 2.12: Reports (cont.)

    Construct your reports to resonate with your audience.

    The report’s formatting and content display can make or break your reports.*

    • Make the report look inviting and easy to read. Use:
      • Short paragraphs and bullet points.
      • A simple layout and uncluttered, wide margins.
      • Minimal boldface, underline, or italics to attract the readers’ attention.
      • High contrast between text and background.
    • Charts, graphs, and infographics should be intuitive and tell the story on their own.
    • Make it easy to peruse the report for topics of interest.
      • Maintain consistent design features.
      • Use impactful, meaningful headings and subheadings.
      • Include callouts to draw attention to important high-level information.
    • Demonstrate the impact of the accomplishments or success stories when appropriate.
    • Finish with a simple concise summary when appropriate. Consider adding:
      • Key points for the reader to takeaway.
      • Action items or requests.
      • Plans for next reporting period.

    *Sources: Adapted and compiled in part from: designeclectic.com, ahrq.gov, and 60secondmarketer.com.

    2.12.1: Reports

    15-45 minutes

    1. Meet with the participants and review the applicable work product from Phases 1 and 2; identify qualitative and quantitative items the VMI measures, monitors, tracks, or aggregates.
    2. Determine which items will be reported and to whom (by category):
      1. Internally to personnel within the VMI
      2. Internally to personnel outside the VMI
      3. Externally to vendors
    3. Within each category above, determine your intended audiences/recipients. For example, you may have a different list of recipients for a risk report than you do a scorecard summary report. This will help you identify the number of reports required.
    4. Create a draft structure for each report based on the audience and the information being conveyed. Determine the frequency of each report and person responsible for creating for each report.
    5. Document your final choices in Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports.

    Download the Info-Tech Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium

    Input

    • Brainstorming
    • Phase 1 work product
    • Steps 2.1-2.11 work product

    Output

    • A list of reports used by the VMI
    • For each report:
    • The conceptual content
    • A list of who will receive or have access
    • A creation/distribution frequency

    Materials

    • Jump – Phase 2 Tools and Templates Compendium, Tab 2.12 Reports

    Participants

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives (as needed)

    Phase 3: Run

    Implement Your Processes and Leverage Your Tools and Templates

    Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals
    1.2 Scope
    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles
    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities
    1.5 Process Mapping
    1.6 Charter
    1.7 Vendor Inventory
    1.8 Maturity Assessment
    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Begin operating the VMI. The main outcomes from this phase are guidance and the steps required to implement your VMI.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 3: Run

    Implement your processes and leverage your tools and templates.

    All of the hard work invested in Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build begins to pay off in Phase 3: Run. It’s time to stand up your VMI and ensure that the proper level of resources is devoted to your vendors and the VMI itself. There’s more hard work ahead, but the foundational elements are in place. This doesn’t mean there won’t be adjustments and modifications along the way, but you are ready to use the tools and templates in the real world; you are ready to begin reaping the fruits of your labor.

    Phase 3: Run guides you through the process of collecting data, monitoring trends, issuing reports, and conducting effective meetings to:

    • Manage risk better.
    • Improve vendor performance.
    • Improve vendor relationships.
    • Identify areas where the parties can improve.
    • Improve communication between the parties.
    • Increase the value proposition with your vendors.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors

    Begin classifying your top 25 vendors by spend.

    Step 3.1 sets the table for many of the subsequent steps in Phase 3: Run. The results of your classification process will determine: which vendors go through the scorecarding process (Step 3.4); which vendors participate in BAMs (Step 3.5); the nature and content of the vendor orientation activities (Step 3.3); which vendors will be part of the risk measurement and monitoring process (Step 3.8); which vendors will be included in the reports issued by the VMI (Step 3.9); and which vendors you will devote relationship-building resources to (Step 3.10).

    As you begin classifying your vendors, Info-Tech recommends using an iterative approach initially to validate the results from the classification model you configured in Step 2.1.

    1. Using the information from the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7), identify your top 25 vendors by spend.
    2. Run your top 10 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results.
      1. If the results are what you expected and do not contain any significant surprises, go to next page.
      2. If the results are not what you expected or contain significant surprises, look at the configuration page of the tool (Tab 1) and adjust the weights or the spend categories slightly. Be cautious in your evaluation of the results before modifying the configuration page – some legitimate results are unexpected or surprising based on bias. If you modify the weighting, review the new results and repeat your evaluation. If you modify the spend categories, review the answers on the vendor tabs to ensure that the answers are still accurate; review the new results and repeat your evaluation.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Review your results and adjust the classification tool as needed.

    1. Run your top 11 through 25 vendors by spend through the classification model and review the results. Identify any unexpected results or surprises. Determine if further configuration makes sense and repeat the process outlined in 2.b, previous page, as necessary. If no further modifications are required, continue to 4, below.
    2. Share the preliminary results with the leadership team, executives, and stakeholders to obtain their approval or adjustments to the results.
      1. They may have questions and want to understand the process before approving the results.
      2. They may request that you move a vendor from one quadrant to another based on your organization’s roadmap, the vendor’s roadmap, or other information not available to you.
    3. Identify the vendors that will be part of the VMI at this stage – how many and which ones. Based on this number and the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2), make sure you have the resources necessary to accommodate the number of vendors participating in the VMI. Proceed cautiously and gradually increase the number of vendors participating in the VMI.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Finalize the results and update VMI tools and templates.

    1. Update the Vendor Inventory tab (Step 1.7) to indicate the current classification status for the top 25 vendors by spend. Once your vendors have been classified, you can sort the Vendor Inventory tab by classification status to see all the vendors in that category at once.
    2. Review your 3-year roadmap (Step 2.9) and 90-day plans (Step 2.10) to determine if any modifications are needed to the activities and timelines.

    Additional classification considerations:

    • You should only have a few vendors that fit in the strategic category. As a rough guideline, no more than 5% to 10% of your IT vendors should end up in the strategic category. If you have a large number of vendors, even 5% may be too many. The classification model is an objective start to the classification process, but common sense must prevail over the “math” at the end of the day.
    • At this point, there is no need to go beyond the top 25 by spend. Most VMIs starting out can’t handle more than three to five strategic vendors initially. Allow the VMI to run a pilot program with a small sample size, work out any bugs, make adjustments, and then ramp up the VMI’s rollout in waves. Vendors can be added quarterly, biannually, or annually, depending upon the desired goals and available resources.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Align your vendor strategy to your classification results.

    As your VMI matures, additional vendors will be part of the VMI. Review the table below and incorporate the applicable strategies into your deployment of vendor management principles over time. Stay true to your mission, goals, and scope, and remember that not all of your vendors are of equal importance.

    Operational Strategic
    • Focus on spend containment
    • Concentrate on lowering total cost of ownership
    • Invest moderately in cultivating the relationship
    • Conduct BAMs biannually or annually
    • Compile scorecards quarterly or biannually
    • Identify areas for performance and cost improvement
    • Focus on value, collaboration, and alignment
    • Review market intelligence for the vendor’s industry
    • Invest significantly in cultivating the relationship
    • Initiate executive-to-executive relationships
    • Conduct BAMs quarterly
    • Compile scorecards quarterly
    • Understand how the vendors view your organization

    Commodity

    Tactical

    • Investigate vendor rationalization and consolidation
    • Negotiate for the best-possible price
    • Leverage competition during negotiations
    • Streamline the purchasing and payment process
    • Allocate minimal VMI resources
    • Assign the lowest priority for vendor management metrics
    • Conduct risk assessments biannually or annually
    • Cultivate a collaborative relationship based on future growth plans or potential with the vendor
    • Conduct BAMs quarterly or biannually
    • Compile scorecards quarterly
    • Identify areas of performance improvement
    • Leverage innovation and creative problem solving

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Be careful when using the word “partner” with your strategic and other vendors.

    For decades, vendors have used the term “partner” to refer to the relationship they have with their clients and customers. In many regards, this is often an emotional ploy used by the vendors to get the upper hand. To fully understand the terms “partner” and “partnership” let’s evaluate them through two more-objective, less-cynical lenses.

    If you were to talk to your in-house or outside legal counsel, you may be told that partners share in profits and losses, and they have a fiduciary obligation to each other. Unless there is a joint venture between the parties, you are unlikely to have a partnership with a vendor from this perspective.

    What about a “business” partnership … one that doesn’t involve sharing profits and losses? What would that look like? Here are some indicators of a business partnership (or preferably a strategic alliance):

    • Trust and transparent communication exist.
    • You have input into the vendor’s roadmap for products and services.
    • The vendor is aligned with your desired outcomes and helps you achieve success.
    • You and the vendor are accountable for actions and inactions, with both parties being at risk.
    • There is parity in the peer-to-peer relationships between the organizations (e.g. C-Level to C-Level).
    • The vendor provides transparency in pricing models and proactively suggests ways for you to reduce costs.
    • You and the vendor work together to make each party better, providing constructive feedback on a regular basis.
    • The vendor provides innovative suggestions for you to improve your processes, performance, the bottom line, etc.
    • Negotiations are not one-sided; they are meaningful and productive, resulting in an equitable distribution of money and risk.

    Step 3.1: Classify vendors (cont.)

    Understand the implications and how to leverage the words “partner” and “partnership.”

    By now you might be thinking, “What’s all the fuss? Why does it matter?” At Info-Tech, we’ve seen firsthand how referring to the vendor as a partner can have the following impact:

    • Confidences are disclosed unnecessarily.
    • Negotiation opportunities and leverage are lost.
    • Vendors no longer have to earn the customer’s business.
    • Vendor accountability is missing due to shared responsibilities.
    • Competent skilled vendor resources are assigned to other accounts.
    • Value erodes over time since contracts are renewed without being competitively sourced.
    • One-sided relationships are established, and false assurances are provided at the highest levels within the customer organization.

    Proceed with caution when using partner or partnership with your vendors. Understand how your organization benefits from using these terms and mitigate the negatives outlined above by raising awareness internally to ensure people understand the psychology behind the terms. Finally, use the term to your advantage when warranted by referring to the vendor as a partner when you want or need something that the vendor is reluctant to provide. Bottom line: Be strategic in how you refer to vendors and know the risks.

    Step 3.2: Conduct internal “kickoff” meeting

    Raise awareness about the VMI and its mission, vision, and goals.

    To be effective, your VMI needs executive support, a clear vision, appropriate governances and tools, personnel with the right skills, and other items discussed in this blueprint. However, the VMI doesn’t exist in a vacuum … it can’t sit back and be reactive. As part of being proactive, the VMI must be aware of its brand and “market” its services. An effective way to market the VMI is to conduct an internal kickoff meeting. There are at least a couple of ways to do this:

    • Host a meeting for stakeholders, executives, and others who will be contributing to the VMI processes (but are not part of the VMI). The meeting can be part of a townhall or standalone meeting; it can be done live or via a recorded video.
    • Attend appropriate staff meetings and make your presentation.

    With either approach above or one of your choosing, keep in mind the following objectives for your kickoff meeting:

    • Make sure you provide a way for those in attendance to ask questions at that time and later. You want to create and foster a communication loop with the people who will be impacted by the VMI or participating with it.
    • Raise awareness of your existence and personnel. Tell the VMI’s story by sharing your mission statement, goals, and scope; this will help dispel (or confirm) rumors about the VMI that often lead to confusion and faulty assumptions.
    • As you share the VMI’s vision, connect the story to how the VMI will impact the organization and individuals and to how they can help. The VMI tends to be the least autonomous area within an organization; it needs the assistance of others to be successful. Convey an atmosphere of collaboration and appreciation for their help.

    Host a kickoff meeting annually to kickoff the new year. Remind people of your story, announce successes from the past year, and indicate what the future year holds. Keep it brief, make it personal for the audience, and help them connect the names of VMI personnel to faces.

    Step 3.3: Conduct vendor orientation

    Introduce your VMI to your top vendors.

    Based on the results from your vendor classification (Step 3.1) and your VMI deployment timeline, identify the vendors who will participate in the initial orientation meetings. Treat the orientation as a formal, required meeting for the vendors to attend. Determine the attendee list for your organization and the vendors, and send out invites. Ideally, you will want the account manager, a sales director or vice president, the “delivery” director or vice president, and an executive from the vendor in the meeting. From the customer side, you may need more than one or two people from the VMI to entice the vendor’s leadership team to attend; you may need attendance from your own leadership team to add weight or credibility to the meeting (unfortunately).

    Before going into the meeting, make sure everyone on your side knows their roles and responsibilities, and review the agenda. Control the agenda or the meeting is likely to get out of hand and turn into a sales call.

    Conduct orientation meetings even if the participating vendors have been doing business with you for several years. Don’t assume they know all about your organization and your VMI (even if their other clients have a VMI).

    Run two or three orientation meetings and then review the “results.” What needs to be modified? What lessons have you learned? Make any necessary adjustments and continue rolling out the orientation meetings.

    Early in the VMI’s deployment, reorientation and debrief may not be in play. As time passes, it is important to remember them! Use them when warranted to help with vendor alignment.

    Step 3.4: Compile scorecards

    Begin scoring your top vendors.

    The scorecard process typically is owned and operated by the VMI, but the actual rating of the criteria within the measurement categories is conducted by those with day-to-day interactions with the vendors, those using or impacted by the services and products provided by the vendors, and those with the skills to research other information on the scorecard (e.g. risk). Chances are one person will not be able to complete an entire scorecard by themselves. As a result, the scorecard process is a team sport comprising sub-teams where necessary.

    The VMI will compile the scores, calculate the final results, and aggregate all of the comments into one scorecard. There are two common ways to approach this task:

    1. Send out the scorecard template to those who will be scoring the vendor and ask them to return it when completed, providing them with a due date a few days before you actually need it; you’ll need time to compile, calculate, and aggregate.
    2. Invite those who will be scoring the vendor to a meeting and let the contributors use that time to score the vendors; make VMI team members available to answer questions and facilitate the process.

    Step 3.4: Compile scorecards (cont.)

    Gather input from stakeholders and others impacted by the vendors.

    Since multiple people will be involved in the scorecarding process or have information to contribute, the VMI will have to work with the reviewers to ensure that the right mix of data is provided. For example:

    • If you are tracking lawsuits filed by or against the vendor, one person from Legal may be able to provide that, but they may not be able to evaluate any other criteria on the scorecard.
    • If you are tracking salesperson competencies, multiple people from multiple areas may have valuable insights.
    • If you are tracking deliverable timeliness, several project managers may want to contribute across several projects.

    Where one person is contributing exclusively to limited criteria, make it easy for the person to identify the criteria they are to evaluate. When multiple people from the same functional area will provide insights, they can contribute individually (and the VMI will average their responses) or they can respond collectively after reaching consensus among themselves.

    After the VMI has compiled, calculated, and aggregated, share the results with executives, impacted stakeholders, and others who will be attending the BAM for that vendor. Depending upon the comments provided by internal personnel, you may need to create a sanitized version of the scorecard for the vendor.

    Make sure your process timeline has a buffer built in. You’ll be sending the final scorecard to the vendor three to five days before the BAM, and you’ll need some time to assemble the results. The scorecarding process can be perceived as a low-priority activity for people outside of the VMI, and other “priorities” will arise for them. Without a timeline buffer, the VMI may find itself behind schedule and unprepared due to things beyond its control.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings

    Determine which vendors will participate and how long the meetings will last.

    At their core, BAMs aren’t that different from any other meeting. The basics of running a meeting still apply, but there are a few nuances that apply to BAMs Set out below are leading practices for conducing your BAMs; adapt them to meet your needs and suit your environment.

    Who

    Initially, BAMs are conducted with the strategic vendors in your pilot program. Over time, you’ll add vendors until all of your strategic vendors are meeting with you quarterly. After that, roll out the BAMs to those tactical and operational vendors located close to the strategic quadrant in the classification model (Steps 2.1 and 3.1) and as VMI resources allow. It may take several years before you are holding regular BAMs with all of your strategic, tactical, and operational vendors.

    Duration

    Keep the length of your meetings reasonable. The first few with a vendor may need to be 60 to 90 minutes long. After that, you should be able to trim them to 45 to 60 minutes. The BAM does not have to fill the entire time. When you are done, you are done.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Identify who will be invited and send out invitations.

    Invitations

    Set up a recurring meeting whenever possible. Changes will be inevitable, but keeping the timeline regular works to your advantage. Also, the vendors included in your initial BAMs won’t change for twelve months. For the first BAM with a vendor, provide adequate notice; four weeks is sufficient in most instances, but calendars will fill up quickly for the main attendees from the vendor. Treat the meeting as significant and make sure your invitation reflects this. A simple meeting request will often be rejected, treated as optional, or ignored completely by the vendor’s leadership team (and maybe yours as well!).

    Invitees

    Internal invitees should include those with a vested interest in the vendor’s performance and the relationship. In addition, other functional areas may be invited based on need or interest. Be careful the attendee list doesn’t get too big. Based on this, internal BAM attendees often include representatives from IT, Sourcing/Procurement, and the applicable business units. At times, Finance and Legal are included.

    From the vendor’s side, strive to have decision makers and key leaders attend. The salesperson/account manager is often included for continuity, but a director or vice president of sales will have more insights and influence. The project manager is not needed at this meeting due to the nature of the meeting and its agenda; however, a director or vice president from the “product or service delivery” area is a good choice. Bottom line: get as high into the vendor’s organization as possible whenever possible; look at the types of contracts you have with that vendor to provide guidance on the type of people to invite.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Prepare for the meetings and maintain control.

    Preparation

    Send the scorecard and agenda to the vendor five days prior to the BAM. The vendor should provide you with any information you require for the meeting five days prior as well.

    Decide who will run the meeting. Some customers like to lead and others let the vendor present. How you craft the agenda and your preferences will dictate who runs the show.

    Make sure the vendor knows what materials it should bring to the meeting or have access to. This will relate to the agenda and any specific requests listed under the discussion points. You don’t want the vendor to be caught off guard and unable to discuss a matter of importance to you.

    Running the BAM

    Regardless of which party leads, make sure you manage the agenda to stay on topic. This is your meeting – not the vendor’s, not IT’s, not Procurement’s or Sourcing’s. Don’t let anyone hijack it.

    Make sure someone is taking notes. If you are running this virtually, consider recording the meeting. Check with your legal department first for any concerns, notices, or prohibitions that may impact your recording the session.

    As a reminder, this is not a sales call, and this is not a social activity. Innovation discussions are allowed and encouraged, but that can quickly devolve into a sales presentation. People can be friendly toward one another, but the relationship building should not overwhelm the other purposes.

    Step 3.5: Conduct business alignment meetings (cont.)

    Follow these additional guidelines to maximize your meetings.

    More Leading Practices

    • Remind everyone that the conversation may include items covered by various confidentiality provisions or agreements.
    • Publish the meeting minutes on a timely basis (within 48 hours).
    • Focus on the bigger picture by looking at trends over time; get into the details only when warranted.
    • Meet internally immediately beforehand to prepare – don’t go in cold; review the agenda and the roles and responsibilities for the attendees.
    • Physical meetings are better than virtual meetings, but travel constraints, budgets, and pandemics may not allow for physical meetings.

    Final Thoughts

    • When performance or the relationship is suffering, be constructive in your feedback and conversations rather than trying to assign blame; lead with the carrot rather than the stick.
    • Look for collaborative solutions whenever possible and avoid referencing the contract if possible. Communicate your willingness to help resolve outstanding issues.
    • Use inclusive language and avoid language that puts the vendor on the defensive.
    • Make sure that your meetings are not focused exclusively on the negative, but don’t paint a rosy picture where one doesn’t exist.
    • A vendor that is doing well should be commended. This is an important part of relationship building.

    Step 3.6: Work the 90-day plan

    Monitor your progress and share your results.

    Having a 90-day plan is a good start, but assuming the tasks on the plan will be accomplished magically or without any oversight can lead to failure. While it won’t take a lot of time to work the plan, following a few basic guidelines will help ensure the 90-day plan gets results and wasn’t created in vain.

    90-Day Plan: Activity 1; Activity 2; Activity 3; Activity 4; Activity 5
    1. Measure and track your progress against the initial/current 90-day plan at least weekly; with a short timeline, any delay can have a huge impact.
    2. If adjustments are needed to any elements of the plan, understand the cause and the impact of those adjustments before making them.
    3. Make adjustments ONLY when warranted. The temptation will be to push activities and tasks further out on the timeline (or to the next 90-day plan!) when there is any sort of “hiccup” along the way, especially when personnel outside the VMI are involved. Hold true to the timeline whenever possible; once you start slipping, it often becomes a habit.
    4. Report on progress every week and hold people accountable for their assignments and contributions.
    5. Take the 90-day plan seriously and treat it as you would any significant project – this is part of the VMI’s branding and image.

    Step 3.7: Manage the 3-year roadmap

    Keep an eye on the future since it will feed the present.

    The 3-year roadmap is a great planning tool, but it is not 100% reliable. There are inherent flaws and challenges. Essentially, the roadmap is a set of three “crystal balls” attempting to tell you what the future holds. The vision for Year 1 may be fairly clear, but for each subsequent year, the crystal ball becomes foggier. In addition, the timeline is constantly changing; before you know it, tomorrow becomes today and Year 2 becomes Year 1.

    To help navigate through the roadmap and maximize its potential, follow these principles:

    • Manage each year of the roadmap differently.
      • Review the Year 1 map each quarter to update your 90-day plans (See steps 2.10 and 3.6).
      • Review the Year 2 map every six months to determine if any changes are necessary. As you cycle through this, your vantage point of Year 2 will be 6 months or 12 months away from the beginning of Year 2, and time moves quickly.
      • Review the Year 3 map annually, and determine what needs to be added, changed, or deleted. Each time you review Year 3, it will be a “new” Year 3 that needs to be built.
    • Analyze the impact on the proposed modifications from two perspectives: 1) What is the impact if a requested modification is made? 2) What is the impact if a requested modification is not made?
    • Validate all modifications with leadership and stakeholders before updating the 3-year roadmap to ensure internal alignment.

    Step 3.8: Measure and monitor risk

    Understand and manage risk levels.

    Using the configured Vendor Risk Assessment Tool (Step 2.2), confirm which risks you will be measuring and monitoring and identify the vendors that will be part of the initial risk management process. Generally, organizations start measuring and monitoring risk in two to five risk categories for two or three strategic vendors. Over time, additional risk categories and/or vendors can be added in waves. Resist the temptation to add risk categories or vendors into the mix too quickly. Expanding requires resources inside and outside of the VMI.

    The VMI will rely heavily on other areas to provide input or the risk data, and the VMI needs to establish good working relationships with those areas. For example, if legal risk is something being measured and monitored, the VMI will need data from Legal on the number and nature of any lawsuits filed by or against the applicable vendors; the VMI will need data from Legal, Contract Management, or Procurement/Sourcing on the number and nature of any agreed upon deviations from your organization’s preferred contract terms that increase legal risk.

    With respect to risk, the VMI’s main role is threefold: 1) take the data obtained from others (or in some instances the VMI may have the data) and turn it into useful information, 2) monitor the risk categories over time and periodically issue reports, and 3) work with other areas to manage the risk.

    Step 3.9: Issue reports

    Inform internal personnel and vendors about trends, issues, progress, and results.

    Issuing the reports created in Step 2.12 is one of the main ways the VMI 1) will communicate with internal and external personnel and 2) track trends and information over time. Even with input from the potential reviewers of the reports, you’ll still want to seek their feedback and input periodically. It may take a few iterations until the reports are hitting their mark. You may find that a metric is no longer required, that a metric is missing completely or it is missing a component, or a formatting change would improve the report’s readability. Once a report has been “finalized,” try not to change it until you are engaged in Phase 4: Review activities. It can be unsettling for the reviewers when reports change constantly.

    Whenever possible, find ways to automate the reports. While issuing reports is critical, the function should not consume more time than necessary. Automation can remove some of the manual and repetitive tasks.

    Internal reports may need to be kept confidential. An automated dashboard or reporting tool can help lock down who has access to the information. At a minimum, the internal reports should contain a “Confidential” stamp, header, watermark, or other indicator that the materials are sensitive and should not be disclosed outside of your organization without approval.

    Reports for vendors may not need to be sent as often as reports are generated or prepared for internal personnel. Establish a cadence by classification model category and stick to it. Letting each vendor choose the frequency will make it more difficult for you to manage. The vendors can choose to ignore the report if they so choose.

    This is an image of an example of a bar graph showing ROI and Benchmark for Categories 1-6

    Step 3.10: Develop/improve vendor relationships

    Drive better performance through better relationships.

    One of the key components of a VMI is relationship management. Good relationships with your vendors provide many benefits for both parties, but they don’t happen by accident. Do not assume the relationship will be good or is good merely because your organization is buying products and services from a vendor.

    In many respects, the VMI should mirror a vendor’s sales organization by establishing relationships at multiple levels within the vendor organizations – not just with the salesperson or account manager. Building and maintaining relationships is hard work, but the return on investment makes it worthwhile.

    Business relationships are comprised of many components, not all of which have to be present to have a great relationship. However, there are some essential components. Whether you are trying to develop, improve, or maintain a relationship with a vendor, make sure you are conscious of the following:*

    • Focus your energies on strategic vendors first and then tactical and operational vendors.
    • Be transparent and honest in your communications.
    • Continue building trust by being responsive and honoring commitments (timely).
    • Create a collaborative environment and build upon common ground.
    • Thank the vendor when appropriate.
    • Resolve disputes early, avoid the “blame game,” and be objective when there are disagreements.

    Step 3.11: Contribute to other processes

    Continue assisting others and managing roles and responsibilities outside of the VMI.

    The VMI has processes that it owns and processes that it contributes to. Based on the VMI scope (Step 1.2), the OIC chart (Step 1.4), and the process mapping activities (Step 1.5), ensure that the VMI is honoring its contribution commitments. This is often easier said than done though. A number of factors can make it difficult to achieve the balance required to handle VMI processes and contribute to other processes associated with the VMI’s mission and vision. Understanding the issues is half the battle. If you see signs of these common “vampires,” take action quickly to address the situation.

    • The VMI’s first focus is often internal, and the tendency is to operate in a bubble. Classifying vendors, running BAMs, coordinating the risk process, and other inward-facing processes can consume all of the VMI’s energy. As a result, there is little time, effort, or let’s be honest, desire to participate in other processes outside of the VMI.
    • It is easy for VMI personnel to get dragged into processes and situations that are outside of its scope. This often happens when personnel join the VMI from other internal areas or departments and have good relationships with their former teammates. The relationships make it hard to say “No” when out-of-scope assistance is being requested.
    • The VMI may have “part-time” personnel who have responsibilities across internal departments, divisions, agencies, or teams. When the going gets tough and time is at a premium, people gravitate toward the easiest or most comfortable work. That work may not be VMI work.

    Phase 4: Review

    Keep Your VMI Up to Date and Running Smoothly

    Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4
    1.1 Mission Statement and Goals


    1.2 Scope

    1.3 Strengths and Obstacles

    1.4 Roles and Responsibilities

    1.5 Process Mapping

    1.6 Charter

    1.7 Vendor Inventory

    1.8 Maturity Assessment

    1.9 Structure

    2.1 Classification Model
    2.2 Risk Assessment Tool
    2.3 Scorecards and Feedback
    2.4 Business Alignment Meeting Agenda
    2.5 Relationship Alignment Document
    2.6 Vendor Orientation
    2.7 Job Descriptions
    2.8 Policies and Procedures
    2.9 3-Year Roadmap
    2.10 90-Day Plan
    2.11 Quick Wins
    2.12 Reports

    3.1 Classify Vendors
    3.2 Conduct Internal “Kickoff” Meeting
    3.3 Conduct Vendor Orientation
    3.4 Compile Scorecards
    3.5 Conduct Business Alignment Meetings
    3.6 Work the 90-Day Plan
    3.7 Manage the 3-Year Roadmap
    3.8 Measure and Monitor Risk
    3.9 Issue Reports
    3.10 Develop/Improve Vendor Relationships
    3.11 Contribute to Other Processes

    4.1 Assess Compliance
    4.2 Incorporate Leading Practices
    4.3 Leverage Lessons Learned
    4.4 Maintain Internal Alignment
    4.5 Update Governances

    This phase will walk you through the following activities:

    Identify what the VMI should stop doing, start doing, and continue doing as it improves and matures. The main outcomes from this phase are ways to advance the VMI and maintain internal alignment.

    This phase involves the following participants:

    • VMI team
    • Applicable stakeholders and executives
    • Others as needed

    Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative

    Phase 4: Review

    Keep your VMI up to date and running smoothly.

    As the old adage says, “The only thing constant in life is change.” This is particularly true for your VMI. It will continue to mature; people inside and outside of the VMI will change; resources will expand or contract from year to year; your vendor base will change. As a result, your VMI needs the equivalent of a physical every year. In place of bloodwork, x-rays, and the other paces your physician may put you through, you’ll assess compliance with your policies and procedures, incorporate leading practices, leverage lessons learned, maintain internal alignment, and update governances.

    Be thorough in your actions during this Phase to get the most out of it. It requires more than the equivalent of gauging a person’s health by taking their temperature, measuring their blood pressure, and determining their body mass index. Keeping your VMI up to date and running smoothly takes hard work.

    Some of the items presented in this Phase require an annual review; others may require quarterly review or timely review (i.e. when things are top of mind and current). For example, collecting lessons learned should happen on a timely basis rather than annually, and classifying your vendors should occur annually rather than every time a new vendor enters the fold.

    Ultimately, the goal is to improve over time and stay aligned with other areas internally. This won’t happen by accident. Being proactive in the review of your VMI further reinforces the nature of the VMI itself – proactive vendor management, NOT reactive!

    Step 4.1: Assess compliance

    Determine what is functionally going well and not going well.

    Whether you have a robust set of vendor management-related policies and procedures or they are the bare minimum, gathering data each quarter and conducting an assessment each year will provide valuable feedback. The scope of your assessment should focus on two concepts: 1) are the policies and procedures being followed and 2) are the policies and procedures accurate and relevant. This approach requires parallel thinking, but it will help you understand the complete picture and minimize the amount of time required.

    Use the steps listed below (or modify them for your culture) to conduct your assessment:

    • Determine the type of assessment – formal or informal.
    • Determine the scale of the assessment – which policies and procedures will be reviewed and how many people will be interviewed.
    • Determine the compliance levels, and seek feedback on the policies and procedures – what is going well and what can be improved?
    • Review the compliance deviations.
    • Conduct a root cause analysis for the deviations.
    • Create a list of improvements and gain approval.
    • Create a plan for minimizing noncompliance in the future.
      • Improve/increase education and awareness.
      • Clarify/modify policies and procedures.
      • Add resources, tools, and people (as necessary and as allowed).

    Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices

    Identify and evaluate what external VMIs are doing.

    The VMI’s world is constantly shifting and evolving. Some changes will take place slowly, while others will occur quickly. Think about how quickly the cloud environment has changed over the past five years versus the 15 years before that; or think about issues that have popped up and instantly altered the landscape (we’re looking at you COVID-19 and ransomware). As a result, the VMI needs to keep pace, and one of the best ways to do that is to incorporate leading practices.

    At a high level, a leading practice is a way of doing something that is better at producing a particular outcome or result or performing a task or activity than other ways of proceeding. The leading practice can be based on methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, and other items. Leading practices change periodically due to innovation, new ways of thinking, research, and other factors. Consequently, a leading practice is to identify and evaluate leading practices each year.

    Step 4.2: Incorporate leading practices (cont.)

    Update your VMI based on your research.

    • A simple approach for incorporating leading practices into your regular review process is set out below:
    • Research:
      • What other VMIs in your industry are doing.
      • What other VMIs outside your industry are doing.
      • Vendor management in general.
    • Based on your results, list specific leading practices others are doing that would improve your VMI (be specific – e.g. other VMIs are incorporating risk into their classification process).
    • Evaluate your list to determine which of these potential changes fit or could be modified to fit your culture and environment.
    • Recommend the proposed changes to leadership (with a short business case or explanation/justification, as needed) and gain approval.

    Remember: Leading practices or best practices may not be what is best for you. In some instances, you will have to modify them to fit your culture and environment; in other instances, you will elect not to implement them at all (in any form).

    Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned

    Tap into the collective wisdom and experience of your team members.

    There are many ways to keep your VMI running smoothly, and creating a lessons learned library is a great complement to the other ways covered in this Phase 4: Review. By tapping into the collective wisdom of the team and creating a safe feedback loop, the VMI gains the following benefits:

    • Documented institutional wisdom and knowledge normally found only in the team members’ brains.
    • The ability for one team member to gain insights and avoid mistakes without having to duplicate the events leading to the insights or mistakes.
    • Improved methodologies, tools, processes, procedures, skills, and relationships.

    Many of the processes raised in this Phase can be performed annually, but a lessons learned library works best when the information is “deposited” in a timely manner. How you choose to set up your lessons learned process will depend on the tools you select and your culture. You may want to have regular “input” meetings to share the lessons as they are being deposited, or you may require team members to deposit lessons learned on a regular basis (within a week after they happen, monthly, or quarterly). Waiting too long can lead to vague or lost memories and specifics – timeliness of the deposits is a crucial element.

    Step 4.3: Leverage lessons learned (cont.)

    Create a library to share valuable information across the team.

    Lessons learned are not confined to identifying mistakes or dissecting bad outcomes. You want to reinforce good outcomes as well. When an opportunity for a lessons-learned deposit arises, identify the following basic elements:

    • A brief description of the situation and outcome.
    • What went well (if anything) and why did it go well?
    • What didn't go well (if anything) and why didn't it go well?
    • What would/could you do differently next time?
    • A synopsis of the lesson(s) learned.

    Info-Tech Insights

    The lessons learned library needs to be maintained. Irrelevant material needs to be culled periodically, and older or duplicate material may need to be archived.

    The lessons learned process should be blameless. The goal is to share insightful information … not to reward or punish people based on outcomes or results.

    Step 4.4: Maintain internal alignment

    Review the plans of other internal areas to stay in sync.

    Maintaining internal alignment is essential for the ongoing success of the VMI. Over time, it is easy to lose sight of the fact that the VMI does not operate in a vacuum; it is an integral component of a larger organization whose parts must work well together to function optimally. Focusing annually on the VMI’s alignment within the enterprise helps reduce any breakdowns that could derail the organization.

    To ensure internal alignment:

    • Review the key components of the applicable materials from Phase 1: Plan and Phase 2: Build with the appropriate members of the leadership team (e.g. executives, sponsors, and stakeholders). Not every item from those Phases and Steps needs to be reviewed, but err on the side of caution for the first set of alignment discussions, and be prepared to review each item. You can gauge the audience’s interest on each topic and move quickly when necessary or dive deeper when needed. Identify potential changes required to maintain alignment.
    • Review the strategic plans (e.g. 1-, 3-, and 5- year plans) for various portions of the organization if you have access to them or gather insights if you don’t have access.
      • If the VMI is under the IT umbrella, review the strategic plans for IT and its departments.
      • Review the strategic plans for the areas the VMI works with (e.g. Procurement, Business Units).
      • The organization itself.
    • Create and vet a list of modifications to the VMI and obtain approval.
    • Develop a plan for making the necessary changes.

    Step 4.5: Update governances

    Revise your protocols and return to the beginning of cyclical processes.

    You’re at the final Step and ready to update governances. This is comprised of two sequential paths.

    • First, use the information from Steps 4.1-4.4 to make any required modifications to the items in Phase 1: Plan, Phase 2: Build, and Phase 3: Run. For example, you may need to update your policies and procedures (Step 2.8) based on your findings in Step 4.1; or you may need to update the VMI’s scope (Step 1.2) to ensure internal alignment issues identified in Step 4.4. are accounted for.
    • Second, return to Phase 3: Run to perform the activities below; they tend to be performed annually, but use your discretion and perform them on an as-needed basis:
      • Reclassify vendors.
      • Complete a new maturity assessment.
      • Run reorientation sessions for vendors.
      • Conduct a kickoff meeting to update internal personnel.

    Other activities and tasks (e.g. scorecards and BAMs) may be impacted by the modifications made above, but the nature of their performance follows a shorter cadence. As a result, they are not specifically called out here in this Step 4.5 since they are performed on an ongoing basis. However, don’t overlook them as part of your update.

    Summary of Accomplishment

    Problem Solved

    Vendor management is a broad, often overwhelming, comprehensive spectrum that encompasses many disciplines. By now, you should have a great idea of what vendor management can or will look like in your organization. Focus on the basics first: Why does the VMI exist and what does it hope to achieve? What is its scope? What are the strengths you can leverage, and what obstacles must you manage? How will the VMI work with others? From there, the spectrum of vendor management will begin to clarify and narrow.

    Leverage the tools and templates from this blueprint and adapt them to your needs. They will help you concentrate your energies in the right areas and on the right vendors to maximize the return on your organization’s investment in the VMI of time, money, personnel, and other resources. You may have to lead by example internally and with your vendors at first, but they will eventually join you on your path if you stay true to your course.

    At the heart of a good VMI is the relationship component. Don’t overlook its value in helping you achieve your vendor management goals. The VMI does not operate in a vacuum, and relationships (internal and external) will be critical.

    Lastly, seek continual improvement from the VMI and from your vendors. Both parties should be held accountable, and both parties should work together to get better. Be proactive in your efforts, and you, the VMI, and the organization will be rewarded.

    If you would like additional support, have our analysts guide you through other phases as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Contact your account representative for more information

    workshops@infotech.com

    1-888-670-8889

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Prepare for Negotiations More Effectively

    Don't leave negotiation preparations and outcomes to chance. Learn how to prepare for negotiations more effectively and improve your results.

    Understand Common IT Contract Provisions to Negotiate More Effectively

    Info-Tech’s guidance and insights will help you navigate the complex process of contract review and identify the key details necessary to maximize the protections for your organization.

    Capture and Market the ROI of Your VMO

    Calculating the impact or value of a vendor management office (VMO) can be difficult without the right framework and tools. Let Info-Tech’s tools and templates help you account for the contributions made by your VMO.

    Bibliography

    “Best Practices for Writing Corporate Policies and Procedures.” PowerDMS, 29 Dec. 2020. Accessed 11 January 2022.

    Duncan. “Top 10 Tips for Creating Compelling Reports.” Design Eclectic, 11 October 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    Eby, Kate. “Master Writing Policies, Procedures, Processes, and Work Instructions.” 1 June 2018, updated 19 July 2021. Accessed 11 January 2022.

    “Enterprise Risk Management.” Protiviti, n.d. Accessed 16 Feb. 2017.

    Geller & Company. “World-Class Procurement — Increasing Profitability and Quality.” Spend Matters, 2003. Accessed 4 March 2019.

    Guth, Stephen. “Vendor Relationship Management Getting What You Paid for (And More).” Citizens, 26 Feb. 2015. Web.

    Guth, Stephen. The Vendor Management Office: Unleashing the Power of Strategic Sourcing. Lulu.com, 2007. Print.

    “ISG Index 4Q 2021.” Information Services Group, Inc., 2022. Web.

    “Six Tips for Making a Quality Report Appealing and Easy To Skim.” AHRQ, Oct. 2019. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    Tucker, Davis. “Marketing Reporting: Tips to Create Compelling Reports.” 60 Second Marketer, 28 March 2020. Accessed 29 March 2022.

    “Why Do We Perform Better When Someone Has High Expectations of Us?” The Decision Lab, 9 Sept. 2020. Accessed 31 January 2022.

    Security Strategy

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}42|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}42|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $33,431
    • member rating average days saved: 29
    • Parent Category Name: Security and Risk
    • Parent Category Link: /security-and-risk

    The challenge

    You may be experiencing one or more of the following:

    • You may not have sufficient security resources to handle all the challenges.
    • Security threats are prevalent. Yet many businesses struggle to embed systemic security thinking into their culture.
    • The need to move towards strategic planning of your security landscape is evident. How to get there is another matter.

    Our advice

    Insight

    To have a successful information security strategy, take these three factors into account:

    • Holistic: your view must include people, processes, and technology.
    • Risk awareness: Base your strategy on the actual risk profile of your company. And then add the appropriate best practices.
    • Business-aligned: When your strategic security plan demonstrates alignment with the business goals and supports it, embedding will go much more straightforward.

    Impact and results 

    • We have developed a highly effective approach to creating your security strategy. We tested and refined this for more than seven years with hundreds of different organizations.
    • We ensure alignment with business objectives.
    • We assess organizational risk and stakeholder expectations.
    • We enable a comprehensive current state assessment.
    • And we prioritize initiatives and build out a right-sized security roadmap.

     

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get up to speed

    Read up on why you should build your customized information security strategy. Review our methodology and understand the four ways we can support you.

    Assess the security requirements

    It all starts with risk appetite, yes, but security is something you want to get right. Determine your organizations' security pressures and business goals, and then determine your security program's goals.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 1: Assess Requirements
    • Information Security Requirements Gathering Tool (xls)
    • Information Security Pressure Analysis Tool (xls)

    Build your gap initiative

    Our best-of-breed security framework makes you perform a gap analysis between where you are and where you want to be (your target state). Once you know that, you can define your goals and duties.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 2: Assess Gaps
    • Information Security Program Gap Analysis Tool (xls)

    Plan the implementation of your security strategy 

    With your design at this level, it is time to plan your roadmap.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 3: Build the Roadmap

    Let it run and continuously improve. 

    Learn to use our methodology to manage security initiatives as you go. Identify the resources you need to execute the evolving strategy successfully.

    • Build an Information Security Strategy – Phase 4: Execute and Maintain
    • Information Security Strategy Communication Deck (ppt)
    • Information Security Charter (doc)

     

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}339|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $8,449 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 6 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Data Management
    • Parent Category Link: /data-management
    • Organizations are struggling to understand what's involved in the analytics developer lifecycle to generate reusable insights faster.
    • Discover what it takes to become a citizen analytics developer. Identify the proper way to enable self-serve analytics.
    • Self-serve business intelligence/analytics is misunderstood and confusing to the business, especially with regards to the roles and responsibilities of IT and the business.
    • End users are dissatisfied due to a lack of access to the data and the absence of a single source of truth.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Organizations that take data seriously should:

    • Decouple processes in which data is separated from business processes and elevate the visibility of the organization's data assets.
    • Leverage a secure platform where data can be easily exchanged for insights generation.
    • Create density for analytics where resources are mobilized around analytics ideas to generate value.

    Analytics is a journey, not a destination. This journey can eventually result in some level of sophisticated AI/machine learning in your organization. Every organization needs to mobilize its resources and enhance its analytics capabilities to quickly and incrementally add value to data products and services. However, most organizations fail to mobilize their resources in this way.

    Impact and Result

    • Firms become more agile when they realize efficiencies in their analytics operating models and can quickly implement reusable analytics.
    • IT becomes more flexible and efficient in understanding the business' data needs and eliminates redundant processes.
    • Trust in data-driven decision making goes up with collaboration, engagement, and transparency.
    • There is a clear path to continuous improvement in analytics.

    Establish an Analytics Operating Model Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief that outlines Info-Tech’s methodology for assessing the business' analytics needs and aligning your data governance, capabilities, and organizational structure to deliver analytics faster.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Define your analytics needs

    This phase helps you understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment so you gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 1: Define Your Analytics Needs

    2. Establish an analytics operating model

    This phase introduces you to data operating model frameworks and provides a step-by-step guide on how to capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 2: Establish an Analytics Operating Model
    • Analytics Operating Model Building Tool

    3. Implement your operating model

    This phase helps you implement your chosen analytics operating model, as well as establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    • Establish an Analytics Operating Model – Phase 3: Implement Your Analytics Operating Model
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Define Your Analytics Needs

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding and case for data analytics.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A successful analytics operating model starts with a good understanding of your analytical needs.

    Activities

    1.1 Review the business context.

    1.2 Understand your analytics needs.

    1.3 Draft analytics ideas and use cases.

    1.4 Capture minimum viable analytics.

    Outputs

    Documentation of analytics products and services

    2 Perform an Analytics Capability Assessment

    The Purpose

    Achieve a clear understanding of your organization's analytics capability and mapping across organizational functions.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Understand your organization's data landscape and current analytics environment to gain a deeper understanding of your future analytics needs.

    Activities

    2.1 Capture your analytics capabilities.

    2.2 Map capabilities to a hub-and-spoke model.

    2.3 Document operating model results.

    Outputs

    Capability assessment results

    3 Establish an Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Explore data operating model frameworks.

    Capture the right analytics operating model for your organization using a step-by-step guide.

    Activities

    3.1 Discuss your operating model results.

    3.2 Review your organizational structure’s pros and cons.

    3.3 Map resources to target structure.

    3.4 Brainstorm initiatives to develop your analytics capabilities.

    Outputs

    Target operating model

    4 Implement Your Analytics Operating Model

    The Purpose

    Formalize your analytics organizational structure and prepare to implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Implement your chosen analytics operating model.

    Establish an engagement model and communications plan.

    Activities

    4.1 Document your target organizational structure and RACI.

    4.2 Establish an analytics engagement model.

    4.3 Develop an analytics communications plan.

    Outputs

    Reporting and analytics responsibility matrix (RACI)

    Analytics engagement model

    Analytics communications plan

    Analytics organizational chart

    Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}334|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 10.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $25,535 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 18 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy and Organizational Design
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-organizational-design
    • IT needs a method to pinpoint which contact center solution best aligns with business objectives, adapting to a post-COVID world of remote work, flexibility, and scalability.
    • Scoring RFP and RFQ proposals is a complex process, and it is difficult to map and gap without a clear view of the organization’s needs. SOWs can contain pitfalls that cause expensive headaches for the organization in the long run. Guidance through a SOW is required to best represent the organization’s interests.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • “On-premises versus cloud” is a false dichotomy. Contact center architectures come in all shapes and sizes, and organizations should discern whether a hybrid option best meets their needs.
    • Contact centers should service customers – not capabilities. Capabilities must work for you, your agents, and your customers – not the other way around.
    • Deliverables and responsibilities should be a contract’s focal point. While organizations are right to focus on avoiding unanticipated license charges, it is more important to clearly define how deliverables and responsibilities will be divided among the organization, the vendor, and potential third parties.

    Impact and Result

    • Assess the array of contact center architectures with Info-Tech’s Contact Center Decision Points Tool to select a right-sized solution.
    • Build business requirements in a formalized process to achieve stakeholder buy-in.
    • Use Info-Tech’s Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool to evaluate and choose from a range of vendors.
    • Successfully navigate and avoid major pitfalls in a SOW construction.
    • Justify each stage of the process with this blueprint’s key deliverable: the Contact Center Playbook.

    Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to examine the current contact center marketspace, review Info-Tech’s methodology for choosing a right-sized contact center solution, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Assess Contact Center Architectures

    Establish your project vision and metrics of success before shortlisting potential contact center architectures and deciding which is right-sized for the organization.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 1: Assess Contact Center Architectures
    • Contact Center Playbook
    • Contact Center Decision Points Tool

    2. Gather Requirements and Shortlist Vendors

    Build business requirements to achieve stakeholder buy-in, define key deliverables, and issue an RFP/RFQ to shortlisted vendors.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 2: Gather Requirements and Shortlist Vendors
    • Requirements Gathering Documentation Tool
    • Lean RFP Template
    • Contact Center Business Requirements Document
    • Request for Quotation Template
    • Long-Form RFP Template

    3. Score Vendors and Construct SOW

    Score RFP/RFQ responses and decide upon a vendor before constructing a SOW.

    • Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution – Phase 3: Score Vendors and Construct SOW
    • Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool
    • Contact Center SOW Template and Guide
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Choose a Right-Sized Contact Center Solution

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Assess Architecture

    The Purpose

    Shortlist and decide upon a right-sized contact center architecture.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A high-level decision for a right-sized architecture

    Activities

    1.1 Define vision and mission statements.

    1.2 Identify infrastructure metrics of success.

    1.3 Confirm key performance indicators for contact center operations.

    1.4 Complete architecture assessment.

    1.5 Confirm right-sized architecture.

    Outputs

    Project outline

    Metrics of success

    KPIs confirmed

    Quickly narrow down right-sized architecture

    Decision on right-sized contact center architecture

    2 Gather Requirements

    The Purpose

    Build business requirements and define key deliverables to achieve stakeholder buy-in and shortlist potential vendors.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Key deliverables defined and a shortlist of no more than five vendors

    Sections 7-8 of the Contact Center Playbook completed

    Activities

    2.1 Hold focus groups with key stakeholders.

    2.2 Gather business, nonfunctional, and functional requirements.

    2.3 Define key deliverables.

    2.4 Shortlist five vendors that appear meet those requirements.

    Outputs

    User requirements identified

    Business Requirements Document completed

    Key deliverables defined

    Shortlist of five vendors

    3 Initial Vendor Scoring

    The Purpose

    Compare and evaluate shortlisted vendors against gathered requirements.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Have a strong overview of which vendors are preferred for issuing RFP/RFQ

    Section 9 of the Contact Center Playbook

    Activities

    3.1 Input requirements to the Contact Center RFP Scoring Tool. Define which are mandatory and which are desirable.

    3.2 Determine which vendors best meet requirements.

    3.3 Compare requirements met with anticipated TCO.

    3.4 Compare and rank vendors.

    Outputs

    An assessment of requirements

    Vendor scoring

    A holistic overview of requirements scoring and vendor TCO

    An initial ranking of vendors to shape RFP process after workshop end

    4 SOW Walkthrough

    The Purpose

    Walk through the Contact Center SOW Template and Guide to identify how much time to allocate per section and who will be responsible for completing it.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    An understanding of a SOW that is designed to avoid major pitfalls with vendor management

    Section 10 of the Contact Center Playbook

    Activities

    4.1 Get familiar with the SOW structure.

    4.2 Identify which sections will demand greater time allocation.

    4.3 Strategize how to avoid potential pitfalls.

    4.4 Confirm reviewer responsibilities.

    Outputs

    A broad understanding of a SOW’s key sections

    A determination of how much time should be allocated for reviewing major sections

    A list of ways to avoid major pitfalls with vendor management

    A list of reviewers, the sections they are responsible for reviewing, and their time allocation for their review

    5 Communicate and Implement

    The Purpose

    Finalize deliverables and plan post-workshop communications.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    A completed Contact Center Playbook that justifies each decision of this workshop

    Activities

    5.1 Finalize deliverables.

    5.2 Support communication efforts.

    5.3 Identify resources in support of priority initiatives.

    Outputs

    Contact Center Playbook delivered

    Post-workshop engagement to confirm satisfaction

    Follow-up research that complements the workshop or leads workshop group in relevant new directions

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}312|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.4/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $29,447 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 25 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Asset Management
    • Parent Category Link: /asset-management
    • Executives are often aware of the benefits asset management offers, but many organizations lack a defined program to manage their hardware.
    • Efforts to implement hardware asset management (HAM) are stalled because organizations feel overwhelmed navigating the process or under use the data, failing to deliver value.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Organizations often implement an asset management program as a one-off project and let it stagnate.
    • Organizations often fail to dedicate adequate resources to the HAM process, leading to unfinished processes and inconsistent standards.
    • Hardware asset management programs yield a large amount of useful data. Unfortunately, this data is often underutilized. Departments within IT become data siloes, preventing effective use of the data.

    Impact and Result

    • As the IT environment continues to change, it is important to establish consistency in the standards around IT asset management.
    • A current state assessment of your HAM program will shed light on the steps needed to safeguard your processes.
    • Define the assets that will need to be managed to inform the scope of the ITAM program before defining processes.
    • Build and involve an ITAM team in the process from the beginning to help embed the change.
    • Define standard policies, processes, and procedures for each stage of the hardware asset lifecycle, from procurement through to disposal.

    Implement Hardware Asset Management Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should Implement Hardware Asset Management, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Lay foundations

    Build the foundations for the program to succeed.

    • Implement Hardware Asset Management – Phase 1: Lay Foundations
    • HAM Standard Operating Procedures
    • HAM Maturity Assessment Tool
    • IT Asset Manager
    • IT Asset Administrator

    2. Procure & receive

    Define processes for requesting, procuring, receiving, and deploying hardware.

    • Implement Hardware Asset Management – Phase 2: Procure and Receive
    • HAM Process Workflows (Visio)
    • HAM Process Workflows (PDF)
    • Non-Standard Hardware Request Form
    • Purchasing Policy

    3. Maintain & dispose

    Define processes and policies for managing, securing, and maintaining assets then disposing or redeploying them.

    • Implement Hardware Asset Management – Phase 3: Maintain and Dispose
    • Asset Security Policy
    • Hardware Asset Disposition Policy

    4. Plan implementation

    Plan the hardware budget, then build a communication plan and roadmap to implement the project.

    • Implement Hardware Asset Management – Phase 4: Plan Implementation 
    • HAM Budgeting Tool
    • HAM Communication Plan
    • HAM Implementation Roadmap
    [infographic]

    Workshop: Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Workshops offer an easy way to accelerate your project. If you are unable to do the project yourself, and a Guided Implementation isn't enough, we offer low-cost delivery of our project workshops. We take you through every phase of your project and ensure that you have a roadmap in place to complete your project successfully.

    1 Lay Foundations

    The Purpose

    Build the foundations for the program to succeed.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Evaluation of current challenges and maturity level

    Defined scope for HAM program

    Defined roles and responsibilities

    Identified metrics and reporting requirements

    Activities

    1.1 Outline hardware asset management challenges.

    1.2 Conduct HAM maturity assessment.

    1.3 Classify hardware assets to define scope of the program.

    1.4 Define responsibilities.

    1.5 Use a RACI chart to determine roles.

    1.6 Identify HAM metrics and reporting requirements.

    Outputs

    HAM Maturity Assessment

    Classified hardware assets

    Job description templates

    RACI Chart

    2 Procure & Receive

    The Purpose

    Define processes for requesting, procuring, receiving, and deploying hardware.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Defined standard and non-standard requests for hardware

    Documented procurement, receiving, and deployment processes

    Standardized asset tagging method

    Activities

    2.1 Identify IT asset procurement challenges.

    2.2 Define standard hardware requests.

    2.3 Document standard hardware request procedure.

    2.4 Build a non-standard hardware request form.

    2.5 Make lease vs. buy decisions for hardware assets.

    2.6 Document procurement workflow.

    2.7 Select appropriate asset tagging method.

    2.8 Design workflow for receiving and inventorying equipment.

    2.9 Document the deployment workflow(s).

    Outputs

    Non-standard hardware request form

    Procurement workflow

    Receiving and tagging workflow

    Deployment workflow

    3 Maintain & Dispose

    The Purpose

    Define processes and policies for managing, securing, and maintaining assets then disposing or redeploying them.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Policies and processes for hardware maintenance and asset security

    Documented workflows for hardware disposal and recovery/redeployment

    Activities

    3.1 Build a MAC policy, request form, and workflow.

    3.2 Design process and policies for hardware maintenance, warranty, and support documentation handling.

    3.3 Revise or create an asset security policy.

    3.4 Identify challenges with IT asset recovery and disposal and design hardware asset recovery and disposal workflows.

    Outputs

    User move workflow

    Asset security policy

    Asset disposition policy, recovery and disposal workflows

    4 Plan Implementation

    The Purpose

    Select tools, plan the hardware budget, then build a communication plan and roadmap to implement the project.

    Key Benefits Achieved

    Shortlist of ITAM tools

    Hardware asset budget plan

    Communication plan and HAM implementation roadmap

    Activities

    4.1 Generate a shortlist of ITAM tools that will meet requirements.

    4.2 Use Info-Tech’s HAM Budgeting Tool to plan your hardware asset budget.

    4.3 Build HAM policies.

    4.4 Develop a communication plan.

    4.5 Develop a HAM implementation roadmap.

    Outputs

    HAM budget

    Additional HAM policies

    HAM communication plan

    HAM roadmap tool

    Further reading

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Build IT services value on the foundation of a proactive asset management program.

    ANALYST PERSPECTIVE

    IT asset data impacts the entire organization. It’s time to harness that potential.

    "Asset management is like exercise: everyone is aware of the benefits, but many struggle to get started because the process seems daunting. Others fail to recognize the integrative potential that asset management offers once an effective program has been implemented.

    A proper hardware asset management (HAM) program will allow your organization to cut spending, eliminate wasteful hardware, and improve your organizational security. More data will lead to better business decision-making across the organization.

    As your program matures and your data gathering and utility improves, other areas of your organization will experience similar improvements. The true value of asset management comes from improved IT services built upon the foundation of a proactive asset management program." - Sandi Conrad, Practice Lead, Infrastructure & Operations Info-Tech Research Group

    Our understanding of the problem

    This Research Is Designed For:

    • Asset Managers and Service Delivery Managers tasked with developing an asset management program who need a quick start.
    • CIOs and CFOs who want to reduce or improve budgeting of hardware lifecycle costs.
    • Information Security Officers who need to mitigate the risk of sensitive data loss due to insecure assets.

    This Research Will Help You:

    • Develop a hardware asset management (HAM) standard operating procedure (SOP) that documents:
      • Process roles and responsibilities.
      • Data classification scheme.
      • Procurement standards, processes, and workflows for hardware assets.
      • Hardware deployment policies, processes, and workflows.
      • Processes and workflows for hardware asset security and disposal.
    • Identify requirements for an IT asset management (ITAM) solution to help generate a shortlist.
    • Develop a hardware asset management implementation roadmap.
    • Draft a communication plan for the initiative.

    Executive summary

    Situation

    • Executives are aware of the numerous benefits asset management offers, but many organizations lack a defined ITAM program and especially a HAM program.
    • Efforts to implement HAM are stalled because organizations cannot establish and maintain defined processes and policies.

    Complication

    • Organizations often implement an asset management program as a one- off project and let it stagnate, but asset management needs to be a dynamic, continually involving process to succeed.
    • Organizations often fail to dedicate adequate resources to the HAM process, leading to unfinished processes and inconsistent standards.
    • Hardware asset management programs yield a large amount of useful data. Unfortunately, this data is often underused. Departments within IT become data siloes, preventing effective use of the data.

    Resolution

    • As the IT environment continues to change, it is important to establish consistency in the standards around IT asset management.
    • A current state assessment of your HAM program will shed light on the steps needed to safeguard your processes.
    • Define the assets that will need to be managed to inform the scope of the ITAM program before defining processes.
    • Build and involve an ITAM team in the process from the beginning to help embed the change.
    • Define standard policies, processes, and procedures for each stage of the hardware asset lifecycle, from procurement through to disposal.
    • Pace yourself; a staged implementation will make your ITAM program a success.

    Info-Tech Insight

    1. HAM is more than just tracking inventory. A mature asset management program provides data for proactive planning and decision making to reduce operating costs and mitigate risk.
    2. ITAM is not just IT. IT leaders need to collaborate with Finance, Procurement, Security, and other business units to make informed decisions and create value across the enterprise.
    3. Treat HAM like a process, not a project. HAM is a dynamic process that must react and adapt to the needs of the business.

    Implement HAM to reduce and manage costs, gain efficiencies, and ensure regulatory compliance

    Save & Manage Money

    • Companies with effective HAM practices achieve cost savings through redeployment, reduction of lost or stolen equipment, power management, and on-time lease returns.
    • The right HAM system will enable more accurate planning and budgeting by business units.

    Improve Contract Management

    • Real-time asset tracking to vendor terms and conditions allows for more effective negotiation.

    Inform Technology Refresh

    • HAM provides accurate information on hardware capacity and compatibility to inform upgrade and capacity planning

    Gain Service Efficiencies

    • Integrating the hardware lifecycle with the service desk will enable efficiencies through Install/Moves/Adds/Changes (IMAC) processes, for larger organizations.

    Meet Regulatory Requirements

    • You can’t secure organizational assets if you don’t know where they are! Meet governance and privacy laws by knowing asset location and that data is secure.

    Prevent Risk

    • Ensure data is properly destroyed through disposal processes, track lost and stolen hardware, and monitor hardware to quickly identify and isolate vulnerabilities.

    HAM is more than just inventory; 92% of organizations say that it helps them provide better customer support

    Hardware asset management (HAM) provides a framework for managing equipment throughout its entire lifecycle. HAM is more than just keeping an inventory; it focuses on knowing where the product is, what costs are associated with it, and how to ensure auditable disposition according to best options and local environmental laws.

    Implementing a HAM practice enables integration of data and enhancement of many other IT services such as financial reporting, service management, green IT, and data and asset security.

    Cost savings and efficiency gains will vary based on the organization’s starting state and what measures are implemented, but most organizations who implement HAM benefit from it. As organizations increase in size, they will find the greatest gains operationally by becoming more efficient at handling assets and identifying costs associated with them.

    A 2015 survey by HDI of 342 technical support professionals found that 92% say that HAM has helped their teams provide better support to customers on hardware-related issues. Seventy-seven percent have improved customer satisfaction through managing hardware assets. (HDI, 2015)

    HAM delivers cost savings beyond only the procurementstage

    HAM cost savings aren’t necessarily realized through the procurement process or reduced purchase price of assets, but rather through the cost of managing the assets.

    HAM delivers cost savings in several ways:

    • Use a discovery tool to identify assets that may be retired, redeployed, or reused to cut or reallocate their costs.
    • Enforce power management policies to reduce energy consumption as well as costs associated with wasted energy.
    • Enforce policies to lock down unauthorized devices and ensure that confidential information isn’t lost (and you don’t have to waste money recovering lost data).
    • Know the location of all your assets and which are connected to the network to ensure patches are up to date and avoid costly security risks and unplanned downtime.
    • Scan assets to identify and remediate vulnerabilities that can cause expensive security attacks.
    • Improve vendor and contract management to identify areas of hardware savings.

    The ROI for HAM is significant and measurable

    Benefit Calculation Sample Annual Savings

    Reduced help desk support

    • The length of support calls should be reduced by making it easier for technicians to identify PC configuration.
    # of hardware-related support tickets per year * cost per ticket * % reduction in average call length 2,000 * $40 * 20% = $16,000

    Greater inventory efficiency

    • An ITAM solution can automate and accelerate inventory preparation and tasks.
    Hours required to complete inventory * staff required * hourly pay rate for staff * number of times a year inventory required 8 hours * 5 staff * $33 per hour * 2 times a year = $2,640

    Improved employee productivity

    • Organizations can monitor and detect unapproved programs that result in lost productivity.
    # of employees * percentage of employees who encounter productivity loss through unauthorized software * number of hours per year spent using unauthorized software * average hourly pay rate 500 employees * 10% * 156 hours * $18 = $140,400

    Improved security

    • Improved asset tracking and stronger policy enforcement will reduce lost and stolen devices and data.
    # of devices lost or stolen last year * average replacement value of device + # of devices stolen * value of data lost from device (50 * $1,000) + (50 * $5,000) = $300,000
    Total Savings: $459,040
    1. Weigh the return against the annual cost of investing in an ITAM solution to calculate the ROI.
    2. Don’t forget about the intangible benefits that are more difficult to quantify but still significant, such as increased visibility into hardware, more accurate IT planning and budgeting, improved service delivery, and streamlined operations.

    Avoid these common barriers to ITAM success

    Organizations that struggle to implement ITAM successfully usually fall victim to these barriers:

    Organizational resistance to change

    Senior-level sponsorship, engagement, and communication is necessary to achieve the desired outcomes of ITAM; without it, ITAM implementations stall and fail or lack the necessary resources to deliver the value.

    Lack of dedicated resources

    ITAM often becomes an added responsibility for resources who already have other full-time responsibilities, which can quickly cause the program to lose focus. Increase the chance of success through dedicated resources.

    Focus on tool over process

    Many organizations buy a tool thinking it will do most of the work for them, but without supporting processes to define ITAM, the data within the tool can become unreliable.

    Choosing a tool or process that doesn’t scale

    Some organizations are able to track assets through manual discovery, but as their network and user base grows, this quickly becomes impossible. Choose a tool and build processes that will support the organization as it grows.

    Using data only to respond to an audit without understanding root causes

    Often, organizations implement ITAM only to the extent necessary to achieve compliance for audits, but without investigating the underlying causes of non-compliance and thus not solving the real problems.

    To help you make quick progress, Info-Tech Research Group parses hardware asset management into essential processes

    Focus on hardware asset lifecycle management essentials:

    IT Asset Procurement:

    • Define procurement standards for new hardware along with related warranties and support options.
    • Develop processes and workflows for purchasing and work out financial implications to inform budgeting later.

    IT Asset Intake and Deployment:

    • Define policies, processes, and workflows for hardware and receiving, inventory, and tracking practices.
    • Develop processes and workflows for managing imaging, change and moves, and large-scale rollouts.

    IT Asset Security and Maintenance:

    • Develop processes, policies, and workflows for asset tracking and security.
    • Maintain contracts and agreements.

    IT Asset Disposal or Recovery:

    • Manage the employee termination and equipment recovery cycle.
    • Securely wipe and dispose of assets that have reached retirement stage.

    The image is a circular graphic, with Implement HAM written in the middle. Around the centre circle are four phrases: Recover or Dispose; Plan & Procure; Receive & Deploy; Secure & Maintain. Around that circle are six words: Retire; Plan; Request; Procure; Receive; Manage.

    Follow Info-Tech’s methodology to build a plan to implement hardware asset management

    Phase 1: Assess & Plan Phase 2: Procure & Receive Phase 3: Maintain & Dispose Phase 4: Plan Budget & Build Roadmap
    1.1 Assess current state & plan scope 2.1 Request & procure 3.1 Manage & maintain 4.1 Plan budget
    1.2 Build team & define metrics 2.2 Receive & deploy 3.2 Redeploy or dispose 4.2 Communicate & build roadmap
    Deliverables
    Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)
    HAM Maturity Assessment Procurement workflow User move workflow HAM Budgeting Tool
    Classified hardware assets Non-standard hardware request form Asset security policy HAM Communication Plan
    RACI Chart Receiving & tagging workflow Asset disposition policy HAM Roadmap Tool
    Job Descriptions Deployment workflow Asset recovery & disposal workflows Additional HAM policies

    Asset management is a key piece of Info-Tech's COBIT- inspired IT Management and Governance Framework

    The image shows a graphic which is a large grid, showing Info-Tech's research, sorted into categories.

    Cisco IT reduced costs by upwards of $50 million through implementing ITAM

    CASE STUDY

    Industry IT

    Source Cisco Systems, Inc.

    Cisco Systems, Inc.

    Cisco Systems, Inc. is the largest networking company in the world. Headquartered in San Jose, California, the company employees over 70,000 people.

    Asset Management

    As is typical with technology companies, Cisco boasted a proactive work environment that encouraged individualism amongst employees. Unfortunately, this high degree of freedom combined with the rapid mobilization of PCs and other devices created numerous headaches for asset tracking. At its peak, spending on hardware alone exceeded $100 million per year.

    Results

    Through a comprehensive ITAM implementation, the new asset management program at Cisco has been a resounding success. While employees did have to adjust to new rules, the process as a whole has been streamlined and user-satisfaction levels have risen. Centralized purchasing and a smaller number of hardware platforms have allowed Cisco to cut its hardware spend in half, according to Mark Edmondson, manager of IT services expenses for Cisco Finance.

    This case study continues in phase 1

    The image shows four bars, from bottom to top: 1. Asset Gathering; 2. Asset Distribution; 3. Asset Protection; 4. Asset Data. On the right, there is an arrow pointing upwards labelled ITAM Program Maturity.

    Info-Tech delivers: Use our tools and templates to accelerate your project to completion

    HAM Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)

    HAM Maturity Assessment

    Non-Standard Hardware Request Form

    HAM Visio Process Workflows

    HAM Policy Templates

    HAM Budgeting Tool

    HAM Communication Plan

    HAM Implementation Roadmap Tool

    Measured value for Guided Implementations (GIs)

    Engaging in GIs doesn’t just offer valuable project advice, it also results in significant cost savings.

    GI Measured Value
    Phase 1: Lay Foundations
    • Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s tools and templates to assess current state and maturity, plan scope of HAM program, and define roles and metrics.
    • For example, 2 FTEs * 14 days * $80,000/year = $8,615
    Phase 2: Procure & Receive
    • Time, value, and resources saved by using Info-Tech’s tools and templates to build processes for hardware request, procurement, receiving, and deployment.
    • For example, 2 FTEs * 14 days * $80,000/year = $8,615
    Phase 3: Maintain & Dispose
    • Time, value, and resources saved by following Info-Tech’s tools and methodology to build processes and policies for managing and maintaining hardware and disposing or redeploying of equipment.
    • For example, 2 FTE * 14 days * $80,000/year = $8,615
    Phase 4: Plan Implementation
    • Time, value, and resources saved by following Info-Tech’s tools and methodology to select tools, plan the hardware budget, and build a roadmap.
    • For example, 2 FTE * 14 days * $80,000/year = $8,615
    Total savings $25,845

    Info-Tech offers various levels of support to best suit your needs

    DIY Toolkit

    “Our team has already made this critical project a priority, and we have the time and capability, but some guidance along the way would be helpful.”

    Guided Implementation

    “Our team knows that we need to fix a process, but we need assistance to determine where to focus. Some check-ins along the way would help keep us on track.”

    Workshop

    “We need to hit the ground running and get this project kicked off immediately. Our team has the ability to take this over once we get a framework and strategy in place.”

    Consulting

    “Our team does not have the time or the knowledge to take this project on. We need assistance through the entirety of this project.”

    Diagnostics and consistent frameworks used throughout all four options

    Guided Implementation overview

    1. Lay Foundations 2. Procure & Receive 3. Maintain & Dispose 4. Budget & Implementation
    Best-Practice Toolkit

    1.1 Assess current state & plan scope

    1.2 Build team & define metrics

    2.1 Request & procure

    2.2 Receive & deploy

    3.1 Manage & maintain

    3.2 Redeploy or dispose

    4.1 Plan budget

    4.2 Communicate & build roadmap

    Guided Implementation
    • Assess current state.
    • Define scope of HAM program.
    • Define roles and metrics.
    • Define standard and non-standard hardware.
    • Build procurement process.
    • Determine asset tagging method and build equipment receiving and deployment processing.
    • Define processes for managing and maintaining equipment.
    • Define policies for maintaining asset security.
    • Build process for redeploying or disposing of assets.
    • Discuss best practices for effectively managing a hardware budget.
    • Build communications plan and roadmap.
    Results & Outcomes
    • Evaluation of current maturity level of HAM
    • Defined scope for the HAM program including list of hardware to track as assets
    • Defined roles and responsibilities
    • Defined and documented KPIs and metrics to meet HAM reporting requirements
    • Defined standard and non- standard requests and processes
    • Defined and documented procurement workflow and purchasing policy
    • Asset tagging method and process
    • Documented equipment receiving and deployment processes
    • MAC policies and workflows
    • Policies and processes for hardware maintenance and asset security
    • Documented workflows for hardware disposal and recovery/redeployment
    • Shortlist of ITAM tools
    • Hardware asset budget plan
    • Communication plan and HAM implementation roadmap

    Workshop overview

    Contact your account representative or email Workshops@InfoTech.comfor more information.

    Phases: Teams, Scope & Hardware Procurement Hardware Procurement and Receiving Hardware Maintenance & Disposal Budgets, Roadmap & Communications
    Duration* 1 day 1 day 1 day 1 day
    * Activities across phases may overlap to ensure a timely completion of the engagement
    Projected Activities
    • Outline hardware asset management goals
    • Review HAM maturity and anticipated milestones
    • Define scope and classify hardware assets
    • Define roles and responsibilities
    • Define metrics and reporting requirements
    • Define standard and non-standard hardware requests
    • Review and document procurement workflow
    • Discuss appropriate asset tagging method
    • Design and document workflow for receiving and inventorying equipment
    • Review/create policy for hardware procurement and receiving
    • Identify data sources and methodology for inventory and data collection
    • Define install/moves/adds/changes (MAC) policy
    • Build workflows to document user MAC processes and design request form
    • Design process and policies for hardware maintenance, warranty, and support documentation handling
    • Design hardware asset recovery and disposal workflows
    • Define budgeting process and review Info-Tech’s HAM Budgeting Tool
    • Develop a communication plan
    • Develop a HAM implementation plan
    Projected Deliverables
    • Standard operating procedures for hardware
    • Visio diagrams for all workflows
    • Workshop summary with milestones and task list
    • Budget template
    • Policy draft

    Phase 1

    Lay Foundations

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    A centralized procurement process helped cut Cisco’s hardware spend in half

    CASE STUDY

    Industry IT

    Source Cisco Systems, Inc.

    Challenge

    Cisco Systems’ hardware spend was out of control. Peaking at $100 million per year, the technology giant needed to standardize procurement processes in its highly individualized work environment.

    Users had a variety of demands related to hardware and network availability. As a result, data was spread out amongst multiple databases and was managed by different teams.

    Solution

    The IT team at Cisco set out to solve their hardware-spend problem using a phased project approach.

    The first major step was to identify and use the data available within various departments and databases. The heavily siloed nature of these databases was a major roadblock for the asset management program.

    This information had to be centralized, then consolidated and correlated into a meaningful format.

    Results

    The centralized tracking system allowed a single point of contact (POC) for the entire lifecycle of a PC. This also created a centralized source of information about all the PC assets at the company.

    This reduced the number of PCs that were unaccounted for, reducing the chance that Cisco IT would overspend based on its hardware needs.

    There were still a few limitations to address following the first step in the project, which will be described in more detail further on in this blueprint.

    This case study continues in phase 2

    Step 1.1: Assess current state and plan scope

    Phase 1: Assess & Plan

    1.1 Assess current state & plan scope

    1.2 Build team & define metrics

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    1.1.1 Complete MGD (optional)

    1.1.2 Outline hardware asset management challenges

    1.1.3 Conduct HAM maturity assessment

    1.1.4 Classify hardware assets to define scope of the program

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/CFO
    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Security (optional)
    • Operations (optional)

    Step Outcomes

    • Understand key challenges related to hardware asset management within your organization to inform program development.
    • Evaluate current maturity level of hardware asset management components and overall program to determine starting point.
    • Define scope for the ITAM program including list of hardware to track as assets.

    Complete the Management & Governance Diagnostic (MGD) to weigh the effectiveness of ITAM against other services

    1.1.1 Optional Diagnostic

    The MGD helps you get the data you need to confirm the importance of improving the effectiveness of your asset management program.

    The MGD allows you to understand the landscape of all IT processes, including asset management. Evaluate all team members’ perceptions of each process’ importance and effectiveness.

    Use the results to understand the urgency to change asset management and its relevant impact on the organization.

    Establish process owners and hold team members accountable for process improvement initiatives to ensure successful implementation and realize the benefits from more effective processes.

    To book a diagnostic, or get a copy of our questions to inform your own survey, visit Info-Tech’s Benchmarking Tools, contact your account manager, or call toll-free 1-888-670-8889 (US) or 1-844-618-3192 (CAN).

    Sketch out challenges related to hardware asset management to shape the direction of the project

    Common HAM Challenges

    Processes and Policies:

    • Existing asset management practices are labor intensive and time consuming
    • Manual spreadsheets are used, making collaboration and automation difficult
    • Lack of HAM policies and standard operating procedures
    • Asset management data is not centralized
    • Lack of clarity on roles and responsibilities for ITAM functions
    • End users don’t understand the value of asset management

    Tracking:

    • Assets move across multiple locations and are difficult to track
    • Hardware asset data comes from multiple sources, creating fragmented datasets
    • No location data is available for hardware
    • No data on ownership of assets

    Security and Risk:

    • No insight into which assets contain sensitive data
    • There is no information on risks by asset type
    • Rogue systems need to be identified as part of risk management best practices
    • No data exists for assets that contain critical/sensitive data

    Procurement:

    • No centralized procurement department
    • Multiple quotes from vendors are not currently part of the procurement process
    • A lack of formal process can create issues surrounding employee onboarding such as long lead times
    • Not all procurement standards are currently defined
    • Rogue purchases create financial risk

    Receiving:

    • No formal process exists, resulting in no assigned receiving location and no assigned receiving role
    • No automatic asset tracking system exists

    Disposal:

    • No insight into where disposed assets go
    • Formal refresh and disposal system is needed

    Contracts:

    • No central repository exists for contracts
    • No insight into contract lifecycle, hindering negotiation effectiveness and pricing optimization

    Outline hardware asset management challenges

    1.1.1 Brainstorm HAM challenges

    Participants

    • CIO/CFO
    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Security
    • Operations (optional)

    A. As a group, outline the hardware asset management challenges facing the organization.

    Use the previous slide to help you get started. You can use the following headings as a guide or think of your own:

    • Processes and Policies
    • Tracking
    • Procurement
    • Receiving
    • Security and Risk
    • Disposal
    • Contracts

    B. If you get stuck, use the Hardware Asset Management Maturity Assessment Tool to get a quick view of your challenges and maturity targets and kick-start the conversation.

    To be effective with hardware asset management, understand the drivers and potential impact to the organization

    Drivers of effective HAM Results of effective HAM
    Contracts and vendor licensing programs are complex and challenging to administer without data related to assets and their environment. Improved access to accurate data on contracts, licensing, warranties, installed hardware and software for new contracts, renewals, and audit requests.
    Increased need to meet compliance requires a formal approach to tracking and managing assets, regardless of device type. Encryption, hardware tracking and discovery, software application controls, and change notifications all contribute to better asset controls and data security.
    Cost cutting is on the agenda, and management is looking to reduce overall IT spend in the organization in any possible way. Reduction of hardware spend by as much as 5% of the total budget through data for better forecasting and planning.
    Assets with sensitive data are not properly secured, go missing, or are not safely disposed of when retired. Document and enforce security policies for end users and IT staff to ensure sensitive data is properly secured, preventing costs much larger than the cost of only the device.

    Each level of HAM maturity comes with its own unique challenges

    Maturity People & Policies Processes Technology
    Chaos
    • No dedicated staff
    • No policies published
    • Procedures not documented or standardized
    • Hardware not safely secured or tagged
    • Hardware purchasing decisions not based on data
    • Minimal tracking tools in place
    Reactive
    • Semi-focused HAM manager
    • No policies published
    • Reliance on suppliers to provide reports for hardware purchases
    • Hardware standards are enforced
    • Discovery tools and spreadsheets used to manage hardware
    Controlled
    • Full-time HAM manager
    • End-user policies published
    • HAM manager involved in budgeting and planning sessions
    • Inventory tracking is in place
    • Hardware is secured and tagged
    • Discovery and inventory tools used to manage hardware
    • Compliance reports run as needed
    Proactive
    • Extended HAM team, including Help Desk, HR, Purchasing
    • Corporate hardware use policies in place and enforced
    • HAM process integrated with help desk and HR processes
    • More complex reporting and integrated financial information and contracts with asset data
    • Hardware requests are automated where possible
    • Product usage reports and alerts in place to harvest and reuse licenses
    • Compliance and usage reports used to negotiate software contracts
    Optimized
    • HAM manager trained and certified
    • Working with HR, Legal, Finance, and IT to enforce policies
    • Quarterly meetings with ITAM team to review policies, procedures, upcoming contracts, and rollouts; data is reviewed before any financial decisions made
    • Full transparency into hardware lifecycle
    • Aligned with business objectives
    • Detailed savings reports provided to executive team annually
    • Automated policy enforcement and process workflows

    Conduct a hardware maturity assessment to understand your starting point and challenges

    1.1.3 Complete HAM Maturity Assessment Tool

    Complete the Hardware Asset Management Maturity Assessment Tool to understand your organization’s overall maturity level in HAM, as well as the starting maturity level aligned with each step of the blueprint, in order to identify areas of strength and weakness to plan the project. Use this to track progress on the project.

    An effective asset management project has four essential components, with varying levels of management required

    The hardware present in your organization can be classified into four categories of ascending strategic complexity: commodity, inventory, asset, and configuration.

    Commodity items are devices that are low-cost, low-risk items, where tracking is difficult and of low value.

    Inventory is tracked primarily to identify location and original expense, which may be depreciated by Finance. Typically there will not be data on these devices and they’ll be replaced as they lose functionality.

    Assets will need the full lifecycle managed. They are identified by cost and risk. Often there is data on these devices and they are typically replaced proactively before they become unstable.

    Configuration items will generally be tracked in a configuration management database (CMDB) for the purpose of enabling the support teams to make decisions involving dependencies, configurations, and impact analysis. Some data will be duplicated between systems, but should be synchronized to improve accuracy between systems.

    See Harness Configuration Management Superpowers to learn more about building a CMDB.

    Classify your hardware assets to determine the scope and strategy of the program

    Asset: A unique device or configuration of devices that enables a user to perform productive work tasks and has a defined location and ownership attributes.

    • Hardware asset management involves tracking and managing physical components from procurement through to retirement. It provides the base for software asset management and is an important process that can lead to improved lifecycle management, service request fulfillment, security, and cost savings through harvesting and redeployment.
    • When choosing your strategy, focus on those devices that are high cost and high risk/function such as desktops, laptops, servers, and mobile devices.

    ASSET - Items of high importance and may contain data, such as PCs, mobile devices, and servers.

    INVENTORY - Items that require significant financial investment but no tracking beyond its existence, such as a projector.

    COMMODITY - Items that are often in use but are of relatively low cost, such as keyboards or mice.

    Classify your hardware assets to define the scope of the program

    1.1.4 Define the assets to be tracked within your organization

    Participants

    • Participants
    • CIO/CFO
    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Security (optional)
    • Operations (optional)

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 1 – Overview & Scope

    1. Determine value/risk threshold at which items should be tracked (e.g. over $1,000 and holding data).
    2. Divide a whiteboard or flip chart into three columns: commodity, asset, and inventory.
    3. Divide participants into groups by functional role to brainstorm devices in use within the organization. Write them down on sticky notes.
    4. Place the sticky notes in the column that best describes the role of the product in your organization.

    Align the scope of the program with business requirements

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Public Administration

    Source Client Case Study

    Situation

    A state government designed a process to track hardware worth more than $1,000. Initially, most assets consisted of end-user computing devices.

    The manual tracking process, which relied on a series of Excel documents, worked well enough to track the lifecycle of desktop and laptop assets.

    However, two changes upended the organization’s program: the cost of end-user computing devices dropped dramatically and the demand for network services led to the proliferation of expensive equipment all over the state.

    Complication

    The existing program was no longer robust enough to meet business requirements. Networking equipment was not only more expensive than end-user computing devices, but also more critical to IT services.

    What was needed was a streamlined process for procuring high-cost, high-utility equipment, tracking their location, and managing their lifecycle costs without compromising services.

    Resolution

    The organization decided to formalize, document, and automate hardware asset management processes to meet the new challenges and focus efforts on high-cost, high-utility end-user computing devices only.

    Step 1.2: Build team and define metrics

    Phase 1: Assess & Plan

    1.1 Assess current state & plan scope

    1.2 Build team and define metrics

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    1.2.1 Define responsibilities for Asset Manager and Asset Administrator

    1.2.2 Use a RACI chart to determine roles within HAM team

    1.2.3 Further clarify HAM responsibilities for each role

    1.2.4 Identify HAM reporting requirements

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO/CFO
    • IT Director
    • IT Managers
    • Asset Manager
    • Asset Coordinators
    • ITAM Team
    • Service Desk
    • End-User Device Support Team

    Step Outcomes:

    • Defined responsibilities for Asset Manager and Asset Administrator
    • Documented RACI chart assigning responsibility and accountability for core HAM processes
    • Documented responsibilities for ITAM/HAM team
    • Defined and documented KPIs and metrics to meet HAM reporting requirements

    Form an asset management team to lead the project

    Asset management is an organizational change. To gain buy-in for the new processes and workflows that will be put in place, a dedicated, passionate team needs to jump-start the project.

    Delegate the following roles to team members and grow your team accordingly.

    Asset Manager

    • Responsible for setting policy and governance of process and data accuracy
    • Support budget process
    • Support asset tracking processes in the field
    • Train employees in asset tracking processes

    Asset Administrator

    • The front-lines of asset management
    • Communicates with and supports asset process implementation teams
    • Updates and contributes information to asset databases
    Service Desk, IT Operations, Applications
    • Responsible for advising asset team of changes to the IT environment, which may impact pricing or ability to locate devices
    • Works with Asset Coordinator/Manager to set standards for lifecycle stages
    • The ITAM team should visit and consult with each component of the business as well as IT.
    • Engage with leaders in each department to determine what their pain points are.
    • The needs of each department are different and their responses will assist the ITAM team when designing goals for asset management.
    • Consultations within each department also communicates the change early, which will help with the transition to the new ITAM program.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Ensure that there is diversity within the ITAM team. Assets for many organizations are diverse and the composition of your team should reflect that. Have multiple departments and experience levels represented to ensure a balanced view of the current situation.

    Define the responsibilities for core ITAM/HAM roles of Asset Manager and Asset Administrator

    1.2.1 Use Info-Tech’s job description templates to define roles

    The role of the IT Asset Manager is to oversee the daily and long-term strategic management of software and technology- related hardware within the organization. This includes:

    • Planning, monitoring, and recording software licenses and/or hardware assets to ensure compliance with vendor contracts.
    • Forming procurement strategies to optimize technology spend across the organization.
    • Developing and implementing procedures for tracking company assets to oversee quality control throughout their lifecycles.

    The role of the IT Asset Administrator is to actively manage hardware and software assets within the organization. This includes:

    • Updating and maintaining accurate asset records.
    • Planning, monitoring, and recording software licenses and/or hardware assets to ensure compliance with vendor contracts.
    • Administrative duties within procurement and inventory management.
    • Maintaining records and databases regarding warranties, service agreements, and lifecycle management.
    • Product standardization and tracking.

    Use Info-Tech’s job description templates to assist in defining the responsibilities for these roles.

    Organize your HAM team based on where they fit within the strategic, tactical, and operational components

    Typically the asset manager will answer to either the CFO or CIO. Occasionally they answer to a vendor manager executive. The hierarchy may vary based on experience and how strategic a role the asset manager will play.

    The image shows a flowchart for organizing the HAM team, structured by three components: Strategic (at the top); Tactical (in the middle); and Operational (at the bottom). The chart shows how the job roles flow together within the hierarchy.

    Determine the roles and responsibilities of the team who will support your HAM program

    1.2.2 Complete a RACI

    A RACI chart will identify who should be responsible, accountable, consulted, and informed for each key activity during the consolidation.

    Participants

    • Project Sponsor
    • IT Director, CIO
    • Project Manager
    • IT Managers and Asset Manager(s)
    • ITAM Team

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedure.

    Instructions:

    1. Write out the list of all stakeholders along the top of a whiteboard. Write out the key initiative steps for the consolidation project along the left side (use this list as a starting point).
    2. For each initiative, identify each team member’s role. Are they:
      • Responsible? The one responsible for getting the job done.
      • Accountable? Only one person can be accountable for each task.
      • Consulted? Involved through input of knowledge and information.
      • Informed? Receive information about process execution and quality.
    3. As you proceed through the initiative, continue to add tasks and assign responsibility to this RACI chart.

    A sample RACI chart is provided on the next slide

    Start with a RACI chart to determine the responsibilities

    1.2.2 Complete a RACI chart for your organization

    HAM Tasks CIO CFO HAM Manager HAM Administrator Service Desk (T1,T2, T3) IT Operations Security Procurement HR Business Unit Leaders Compliance /Legal Project Manager
    Policies and governance A I R I I C I C C I I
    Strategy A R R R R
    Data entry and quality management C I A I C C I I C C
    Risk management and asset security A R C C R C C
    Process compliance auditing A R I I I I I
    Awareness, education, and training I A I I C
    Printer contracts C A C C C R C C
    Hardware contract management A I R R I I R R I I
    Workflow review and revisions I A C C C C
    Budgeting A R C I C
    Asset acquisition A R C C C C I C C
    Asset receiving (inspection/acceptance) I A R R I
    Asset deployment A R R I I
    Asset recovery/harvesting A R R I I
    Asset disposal C A R R I I
    Asset inventory (input/validate/maintain) I I A/R R R R I I I

    Further clarify HAM responsibilities for each role

    1.2.3 Define roles and responsibilities for the HAM team

    Participants

    • Participants IT Asset Managers and Coordinators
    • ITAM Team
    • IT Managers and IT Director

    Document

    1. Discuss and finalize positions to be established within the ITAM/HAM office as well as additional roles that will be involved in HAM.
    2. Review the sample responsibilities below and revise or create responsibilities for each key position within the HAM team.
    3. Document in the HAM Standard Operating Procedures.
    Role Responsibility
    IT Manager
    • Responsible for writing policies regarding asset management and approving final documents
    • Build and revise budget, tracking actual spend vs. budget, seeking final approvals from the business
    • Process definition, communication, reporting and ensuring people are following process
    • Awareness campaign for new policy and process
    Asset Managers
    • Approval of purchases up to $10,000
    • Inventory and contract management including contract review and recommendations based on business and IT requirements
    • Liaison between business and IT regarding software and hardware
    • Monitor and improve workflows and asset related processes
    • Monitor controls, audit and recommend policies and procedures as needed
    • Validate, manage and analyze data as related to asset management
    • Provide reports as needed for decision making and reporting on risk, process effectiveness and other purposes as required
    • Asset acquisition and disposal
    Service Desk
    Desktop team
    Security
    Infrastructure teams

    Determine criteria for success: establish metrics to quantify and demonstrate the results and value of the HAM function

    HAM metrics fall in the following categories:

    HAM Metrics

    • Quantity e.g. inventory levels and need
    • Cost e.g. value of assets, budget for hardware
    • Compliance e.g. contracts, policies
    • Quality e.g. accuracy of data
    • Duration e.g. time to procure or deploy hardware

    Follow a process for establishing metrics:

    1. Identify and obtain consensus on the organization’s ITAM objectives, prioritized if possible.
    2. For each ITAM objective, select two or three metrics in the applicable categories (not all categories will apply to all objectives); be sure to select metrics that are achievable with reasonable effort.
    3. Establish a baseline measurement for each metric.
    4. Establish a method and accountability for ongoing measurement and analysis/reporting.
    5. Establish accountability for taking action on reported results.
    6. As ITAM expands and matures, change or expand the metrics as appropriate.

    Define KPIs and associated metrics

    • Identify the critical success factors (CSFs) for your hardware asset management program based on strategic goals.
    • For each success factor, identify the key performance indicators (KPIs) to measure success and specific metrics that will be tracked and reported on.
    • Sample metrics are below:
    CSF KPI Metrics
    Improve accuracy of IT budget and forecasting
    • Asset costs and value
    • Average cost of workstation
    • Total asset spending
    • Total value of assets
    • Budget vs. spend
    Identify discrepancies in IT environment
    • Unauthorized or failing assets
    • Number of unauthorized assets
    • Assets identified as cause of service failure
    Avoid over purchasing equipment
    • Number of unused and underused computers
    • Number of unaccounted-for computers
    • Money saved from harvesting equipment instead of purchasing new
    Make more-effective purchasing decisions
    • Predicted replacement time and cost of assets
    • Deprecation rate of assets
    • Average cost of maintaining an asset
    • Number of workstations in repair
    Improve accuracy of data
    • Accuracy of asset data
    • Accuracy rate of inventory data
    • Percentage improvement in accuracy of audit of assets
    Improved service delivery
    • Time to deploy new hardware
    • Mean time to purchase new hardware
    • Mean time to deploy new hardware

    Identify hardware asset reporting requirements and the data you need to collect to meet them

    1.2.4 Identify asset reporting requirements

    Participants

    • CIO/CFO
    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 13: Reporting

    1. Discuss the goals and objectives of implementing or improving hardware asset management, based on challenges identified in Step 1.2.
    2. From the goals, identify the critical success factors for the HAM program
    3. For each CSF, identify one to three key performance indicators to evaluate achievement of the success factor.
    4. For each KPI, identify one to three metrics that can be tracked and reported on to measure success. Ensure that the metrics are tangible and measurable and will be useful for decision making or to take action.
    5. Determine who needs this information and the frequency of reporting.
    6. If you have existing ITAM data, record the baseline metric.
    CSF KPI Metrics Stakeholder/frequency

    Phase 1 Guided Implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 1: Lay Foundations

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Step 1.1: Assess current state and plan scope

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Review challenges.
    • Assess current HAM maturity level.
    • Define scope of HAM program.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Complete MGD (optional).
    • Outline hardware asset management challenges.
    • Conduct HAM maturity assessment.
    • Classify hardware assets to define scope of the program.

    With these tools & templates:

    HAM Maturity Assessment

    Standard Operating Procedures

    Step 1.2: Build team and define metrics

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Define roles and responsibilities.
    • Assess reporting requirements.
    • Document metrics to track.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Define responsibilities for Asset Manager and Asset Administrator.
    • Use a RACI chart to determine roles within HAM team.
    • Document responsibilities for HAM roles.
    • Identify HAM reporting requirements.

    With these tools & templates:

    RACI Chart

    Asset Manager and Asset Administrator Job Descriptions

    Standard Operating Procedures

    Phase 1 Results & Insights:

    For asset management to succeed, it needs to support the business. Engage business leaders to determine needs and build your HAM program around these goals.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    1.1.4 Classify hardware assets to define scope of the program

    Determine value/risk threshold at which assets should be tracked, then divide a whiteboard into four quadrants representing four categories of assets. Participants write assets down on sticky notes and place them in the appropriate quadrant to classify assets.

    1.2.2 Build a RACI chart to determine responsibilities

    Identify all roles within the organization that will play a part in hardware asset management, then document all core HAM processes and tasks. For each task, assign each role to be responsible, accountable, consulted, or informed.

    Phase 2

    Procure and Receive

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Step 2.1: Request and Procure Hardware

    Phase 2: Procure & Receive

    2.1 Request & Procure

    2.2 Receive & Deploy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    2.1.1 Identify IT asset procurement challenges

    2.1.2 Define standard hardware requests

    2.1.3 Document standard hardware request procedure

    2.1.4 Build a non-standard hardware request form

    2.1.5 Make lease vs. buy decisions for hardware assets

    2.1.6 Document procurement workflow

    2.1.7 Build a purchasing policy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • CFO or other management representative from Finance

    Step Outcomes:

    • Definition of standard hardware requests for roles, including core vs. optional assets
    • End-user request process for standard hardware
    • Non-standard hardware request form
    • Lease vs. buy decisions for major hardware assets
    • Defined and documented procurement workflow
    • Documented purchasing policy

    California saved $40 million per year using a green procurement strategy

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Government

    Source Itassetmanagement.net

    Challenge

    Signed July 27, 2004, Executive order S-20-04, the “Green Building Initiative,” placed strict regulations on energy consumption, greenhouse gas emissions, and raw material usage and waste.

    In compliance with S-20-04, the State of California needed to adopt a new procurement strategy. Its IT department was one of the worst offenders given the intensive energy usage by the variety of assets managed under the IT umbrella.

    Solution

    A green IT initiative was enacted, which involved an extensive hardware refresh based on a combination of agent-less discovery data and market data (device age, expiry dates, power consumption, etc.).

    A hardware refresh of almost a quarter-million PCs, 9,500 servers, and 100 email systems was rolled out as a result.

    Other changes, including improved software license compliance and data center consolidation, were also enacted.

    Results

    Because of the scale of this hardware refresh, the small changes meant big savings.

    A reduction in power consumption equated to savings of over $40 million per year in electricity costs. Additionally, annual carbon emissions were trimmed by 200,000 tons.

    Improve your hardware asset procurement process to…

    Asset Procurement

    • Standardization
    • Aligned procurement processes
    • SLAs
    • TCO reduction
    • Use of centralized/ single POC

    Standardize processes: Using standard products throughout the enterprise lowers support costs by reducing the variety of parts that must be stocked for onsite repairs or for provisioning and supporting equipment.

    Align procurement processes: Procurement processes must be aligned with customers’ business requirements, which can have unique needs.

    Define SLAs: Providing accurate and timely performance metrics for all service activities allows infrastructure management based on fact rather than supposition.

    Reduce TCO: Management recognizes service infrastructure activities as actual cost drivers.

    Implement a single POC: A consolidated service desk is used where the contact understands both standards (products, processes, and practices) and the user’s business and technical environment.

    Identify procurement challenges to identify process improvement needs

    2.1.1 Identify IT asset procurement challenges

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. As a group, brainstorm existing challenges related to IT hardware requests and procurement.
    2. If you get stuck, consider the common challenges listed below.
    3. Use the results of the discussion to focus on which problems can be resolved and integrated into your organization as operational standards.

    Document hardware standards to speed time to procure and improve communications to users regarding options

    The first step in your procurement workflow will be to determine what is in scope for a standard request, and how non-standard requests will be handled. Questions that should be answered by this procedure include:

    • What constitutes a non-standard request?
    • Who is responsible for evaluating each type of request? Will there be one individual or will each division in IT elect a representative to handle requests specific to their scope of work?
    • What additional security measures need to be taken?
    • Are there exceptions made for specific departments or high-ranking individuals?

    If your end-user device strategy requires an overhaul, schedule time with an Info-Tech analyst to review our blueprint Build an End-User Computing Strategy.

    Once you’ve answered questions like these, you can outline your hardware standards as in the example below:

    Use Case Mobile Standard Mac Standard Mobile Power User
    Asset Lenovo ThinkPad T570 iMac Pro Lenovo ThinkPad P71
    Operating system Windows 10 Pro Mac OSX Windows 10 Pro, 64 bit
    Display 15.6" 21.5" 17.3”

    Memory

    32GB 8GB 64GB
    Processor Intel i7 – 7600U Processor 2.3GHz Xeon E3 v6 Processor
    Drive 500GB 1TB 1TB
    Warranty 3 year 1 year + 2 extended 3 year

    Info-Tech Insight

    Approach hardware standards from a continual improvement frame of mind. Asset management is a dynamic process. Hardware standards will need to adapt over time to match the needs of the business. Plan assessments at routine intervals to ensure your current hardware standards align with business needs.

    Document specifications to meet environmental, security, and manageability requirements

    Determine environmental requirements and constraints.

    Power management

    Compare equipment for power consumption and ability to remotely power down machines when not in use.

    Heat and noise

    Test equipment run to see how hot the device gets, where the heat is expelled, and how much noise is generated. This may be particularly important for users who are working in close quarters.

    Carbon footprint

    Ask what the manufacturer is doing to reduce post-consumer waste and eliminate hazardous materials and chemicals from their products.

    Ensure security requirements can be met.

    • Determine if network/wireless cards meet security requirements and if USB ports can be turned off to prevent removal of data.
    • Understand the level of security needed for mobile devices including encryption, remote shut down or wipe of hard drives, recovery software, or GPS tracking.
    • Decide if fingerprint scanners with password managers would be appropriate to enable tighter security and reduce the forgotten-password support calls.

    Review features available to enhance manageability.

    • Discuss manageability goals with your IT team to see if any can be solved with added features, for example:
      • Remote control for troubleshooting and remote management of data security settings.
      • Asset management software or tags for bar coding, radio frequency identification (RFID), or GPS, which could be used in combination with strong asset management practices to inventory, track, and manage equipment.

    If choosing refurbished equipment, avoid headaches by asking the right questions and choosing the right vendor

    • Is the equipment functional and for how long is it expected to last?
    • How long will the vendor stand behind the product and what support can be expected?
      • This is typically two to five years, but will vary from vendor to vendor.
      • Will they repair or replace machines? Many will just replace the machine.
    • How big is the inventory supply?
      • What kind of inventory does the vendor keep and for how long can you expect the vendor to keep it?
      • How does the vendor source the equipment and do they have large quantities of the same make and model for easier imaging and support?
    • How complete is the refurbishment process?
      • Do they test all components, replace as appropriate, and securely wipe or replace hard drives?
      • Are they authorized to reload MS Windows OEM?
    • Is the product Open Box or used?
      • Open Box is a new product returned back to the vendor. Even if it is not used, the product cannot be resold as a new product. Open Box comes with a manufacturer’s warranty and the latest operating system.
      • If used, how old is the product?

    "If you are looking for a product for two or three years, you can get it for less than half the price of new. I bought refurbished equipment for my call center for years and never had a problem". – Glen Collins, President, Applied Sales Group

    Info-Tech Insight

    Price differences are minimal between large and small vendors when dealing with refurbished machines. The decision to purchase should be based on ability to provide and service equipment.

    Define standard hardware requests, including core and optional assets

    2.1.2 Identify standards for hardware procurement by role

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • Representatives from all other areas of the business

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 7: Procurement.

    1. Divide a whiteboard into columns representing all major areas of the business.
    2. List the approximate number of end users present at each tier and record these totals on the board.
    3. Distribute sticky notes. Use two different sizes: large sizes represent critically important hardware and small sizes represent optional hardware.
    4. Define core hardware assets for each division as well as optional hardware assets.
    5. Focus on the small sticky notes to determine if these optional purchases are necessary.
    6. Finalize the group decision to determine the standard hardware procurement for each role in the organization. Record results in a table similar to the example below:
    Department Core Hardware Assets Optional Hardware Assets
    IT PC, tablet, monitor Second monitor
    Sales PC, monitor Laptop
    HR PC, monitor Laptop
    Marketing PC (iMac) Tablet, laptop

    Document procedures for users to make standard hardware requests

    2.1.3 Document standard hardware request procedure

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • Representatives from all other areas of the business

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 6: End-User Request Process.

    Discuss and document the end-user request process:

    1. In which cases can users request a primary device?
    2. In which cases can users request a secondary (optional device)?
    3. What justification is needed to approve of a secondary device?
      1. E.g. The request for a secondary device should be via email to the IS Projects and Procurements Officer. This email should outline the business case for why multiple devices are required.
    4. Will a service catalog be available and integrated with an ITAM solution for users to make standard requests? If so, can users also configure their options?
    5. Document the process in the standard operating procedure. Example:

    End-User Request Process

    • Hardware and software will be purchased through the user-facing catalog.
    • Peripherals will be ordered as needed.
    • End-user devices will be routed to business managers for approval prior to fulfillment by IT.
    • Requests for secondary devices must be accompanied by a business case.
    • Equipment replacements due to age will be managed through IT replacement processes.

    Improve the process for ordering non-standard hardware by formalizing the request process, including business needs

    2.1.4 Build a non-standard hardware request form

    • Although the goal should be to standardize as much as possible, this isn’t always possible. Ensure users who are requesting non-standard hardware have a streamlined process to follow that satisfies the justifications for increased costs to deliver.
    • Use Info-Tech’s template to build a non-standard hardware request form that may be used by departments/users requesting non-standard hardware in order to collect all necessary information for the request to be evaluated, approved, and sent to procurement.
    • Ensure that the requestor provides detailed information around the equipment requested and the reason standard equipment does not suffice and includes all required approvals.
    • Include instructions for completing and submitting the form as well as expected turnaround time for the approval process.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Include non-standard requests in continual improvement assessment. If a large portion of requests are for non-standard equipment, it’s possible the hardware doesn’t meet the recommended requirements for specialized software in use with many of your business users. Determine if new standards need to be set for all users or just “power users.”

    Identify the information you need to collect to ensure a smooth purchasing process

    Categories Peripherals Desktops/Laptops Servers
    Financial
    • Operational expenses
    • Ordered for inventory with the exceptions of monitors that will be ordered as needed
    • Equipment will be purchased through IT budget
    • Capital expenses
    • Ordered as needed…
    • Inventory kept for…
    • End-user devices will be purchased through departmental budgets
    • Capital expenses
    • Ordered as needed to meet capacity or stability requirements
    • Devices will be purchased through IT budgets
    Request authorization
    • Any user can request
    • Users who are traveling can purchase and expense peripherals as needed, with manager approvals
    • Tier 3 technicians
    Required approvals
    • Manager approvals required for monitors
    • Infrastructure and applications manager up to [$]
    • CIO over [$]
    Warranty requirements
    • None
    • Three years
    • Will be approved with project plan
    Inventory requirements
    • Minimum inventory at each location of 5 of each: mice, keyboards, cables
    • Docking stations will be ordered as needed
    • Laptops (standard): 5
    • Laptops (ultra light): 1
    • Desktops: 5
    • Inventory kept in stock as per DR plan
    Tracking requirements
    • None
    • Added to ITAM database, CMDB
    • Asset tag to be added to all equipment
    • Added to ITAM database, CMDB

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Take into account the possibility of encountering taxation issues based on where the equipment is being delivered as well as taxes imposed or incurred in the location from which the asset was shipped or sent. This may impact purchasing decisions and shipping instructions.

    Develop a procurement plan to get everyone in the business on the same page

    • Without an efficient and structured process around how IT purchases are budgeted and authorized, maverick spending and dark procurement can result, limiting IT’s control and visibility into purchases.
    • The challenge many IT departments face is that there is a disconnect between meeting the needs of the business and bringing in equipment according to existing policies and procedures.
    • The asset manager should demonstrate how they can bridge the gaps and improve tracking mechanisms at the same time.

    Improve procurement decisions:

    • Demonstrate how technology is a value-add.
    • Make a clear case for the budget by using the same language as the rest of the business.
    • Quantify the output of technology investments in tangible business terms to justify the cost.
    • Include the refresh cycle in the procurement plan to ensure mission- critical systems will include support and appropriate warranty.
    • Plan technology needs for the future and ensure IT technology will continue to meet changing needs.
    • Synchronize redundant organizational procurement chains in order to lower cost.

    Document the following in your procurement procedure:

    • Process for purchase requests
    • Roles and responsibilities, including requestors and approvers
    • Hardware assets to purchase and why they are needed
    • Timelines for purchase
    • Process for vendors

    Info-Tech Insight

    IT procurement teams are often heavily siloed from ITAM teams. The procurement team is typically found in the finance department. One way to bridge the gap is to implement routine, reliable reporting between departments.

    Determine if it makes sense to lease or buy your equipment; weigh the pros and cons of leasing hardware

    Pros

    • Keeps operational costs low in the short term by containing immediate cost.
    • Easy, predictable payments makes it easier to budget for equipment over long term.
    • Get the equipment you need to start doing business right away if you’re just starting out.
    • After the leasing term is up, you can continue the lease and update your hardware to the latest version.
    • Typical leases last 2 or 3 years, meaning your hardware can get upgrades when it needs it and your business is in a better position to keep up with technology.
    • Leasing directly from the vendor provides operational flexibility.
    • Focus on the business and let the vendor focus on equipment service and updates as you don’t have to pay for maintenance.
    • Costs structured as OPEX.

    Cons

    • In the long term, leasing is almost always more expensive than buying because there’s no equity in leased equipment and there may be additional fees and interest.
    • Commitment to payment through the entire lease period even if you’re not using the equipment anymore.
    • Early termination fees if you need to get out of the lease.
    • No option to sell equipment once you’re finished with it to make money back.
    • Maintenance is up to leasing company’s specifications.
    • Product availability may be limited.

    Recommended for:

    • Companies just starting out
    • Business owners with limited capital or budget
    • Organizations with equipment that needs to be upgraded relatively often

    Weigh the pros and cons of purchasing hardware

    Pros

    • Complete control over assets.
    • More flexible and straightforward procurement process.
    • Tax incentives: May be able to fully deduct the cost of some newly purchased assets or write off depreciation for computers and peripherals on taxes.
    • Preferable if your equipment will not be obsolete in the next two or three years.
    • You can resell the asset once you don’t need it anymore to recover some of the cost.
    • Customization and management of equipment is easier when not bound by terms of leasing agreement.
    • No waiting on vendor when maintenance is needed; no permission needed to make changes.

    Cons

    • High initial cost of investment with CAPEX expense model.
    • More paperwork.
    • You (as opposed to vendor) are responsible for equipment disposal in accordance with environmental regulations.
    • You are responsible for keeping up with upgrades, updates, and patches.
    • You risk ending up with out-of-date or obsolete equipment.
    • Hardware may break after terms of warranty are up.

    Recommended for:

    • Established businesses
    • Organizations needing equipment with long-term lifecycles

    Make a lease vs. buy decision for equipment purchases

    2.1.4 Decide whether to purchase or lease

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • Representatives from all other areas of the business

    Document

    Document policy decisions in the Standard Operating Procedures – Section 7: Procurement

    1. Identify hardware equipment that requires a purchase vs. lease decision.
    2. Discuss with Finance whether it makes sense to purchase or lease each major asset, considering the following:
    • Costs of equipment through each method
    • Tax deductions
    • Potential resale value
    • Potential revenue from using the equipment
    • How quickly the equipment will be outdated or require refresh
    • Size of equipment
    • Maintenance and support requirements
    • Overall costs
  • The leasing vs. buying decision should take considerable thought and evaluation to make the decision that best fits your organizational needs and situation.
  • Determine appropriate warranty and service-level agreements for your organization

    Determine acceptable response time, and weigh the cost of warranty against the value of service.

    • Standard warranties vary by manufacturer, but are typically one or three years.
    • Next-day, onsite service may be part of the standard offering or may be available as an uplift.
    • Four-hour, same-day service can also be added for high availability needs.
    • Extended warranties can be purchased beyond three years, although not many organizations take advantage of this offering.
    • Other organizations lower or remove the warranty and have reported savings of as much as $150 per machine.

    Speak to your partner to see how they can help the process of distributing machines.

    • Internal components change frequently with laptops and desktops. If purchasing product over time rather than buying in bulk, ensure the model will be available for a reasonable term to reduce imaging and support challenges.
    • Determine which services are important to your organization and request these services as part of the initial quote. If sending out a formal RFQ or RFP, document required services and use as the basis for negotiating SLAs.
    • Document details of SLA, including expectations of services for manufacturer, vendor, and internal team.
    • If partner will be providing services, request they stock an appropriate number of hot spares for frequently replaced parts.
    • If self-certifying, review resource capabilities, understand skill and certification requirements; for example, A+ certification may be a pre-requisite.
    • Understand DOA policy and negotiate a “lemon policy,” meaning if product dies within 15 or 30 days it can be classified as DOA. Seek clarity on return processes.

    Consider negotiation strategies, including how and when to engage with different partners during acquisition

    Direct Model

    • Dell’s primary sales model is direct either through a sales associate or through its e-commerce site. Promotions are regularly listed on the website, or if customization is required, desktops and laptops have some flexibility in configuration. Discounts can be negotiated with a sales rep on quantity purchases, but the discount level changes based on the model and configuration.
    • Other tier-one manufacturers typically sell direct only from their e-commerce sites, providing promotions based on stock they wish to move, and providing some configuration flexibility. They rely heavily on the channel for the majority of their business.

    Channel Model

    • Most tier one manufacturers have processes in place to manage a smaller number of partners rather than billing and shipping out to individual customers. Deviating from this process and dealing direct with end customers can create order processing issues.
    • Resellers have the ability to negotiate discounts based on quantities. Discounts will vary based on model, timing (quarter or year end), and quantity commitment.
    • Negotiations on large quantities should involve a manufacturer rep as well as the reseller to clearly designate roles and services, ensure processes are in place to fulfill your needs, and agree on pricing scheme. This will prevent misunderstandings and bring clarity to any commitments.
    • Often the channel partners are authorized to provide repair services under warranty for the manufacturer.
    • Dell also uses the channel model for distribution where customers demand additional services.

    Expect discounts to reflect quantity and method of purchase

    Transaction-based purchases will receive the smallest discounting.

    • Understand requirements to find the most appropriate make and model of equipment.
    • Prepare a forecast of expected purchases for the year and discuss discounting.
    • Typically initial discounts will be 3-5% off suggested retail price.
    • Once a history is in place, and the vendor is receiving regular orders, it may extend deeper discounts.

    Bulk purchases will receive more aggressive discounting of 5-15% off suggested retail price, depending on quantities.

    • Examine shipping options and costs to take advantage of bulk deliveries; in some cases vendors may waive shipping fees as an extension of the discounting.
    • If choosing end-of-line product, ensure appropriate quantity of a single model is available to efficiently roll out equipment.
    • Various pricing models can be used to obtain best price.

    Larger quantities rolled out over time will require commitments to the manufacturer to obtain deepest discounts.

    • Discuss all required services as part of negotiation to ensure there are no surprise charges.
    • Several pricing models can be used to obtain the best price.
      • Suggested retail price minus as much as 20%.
      • Cost plus 3% up to 10% or more.
      • Fixed price based on negotiating equipment availability with budget requirements.

    If sending out to bid, determine requirements and scoring criteria

    It’s nearly impossible to find two manufacturers with the exact same specifications, so comparisons between vendors is more art than science.

    New or upgraded components will be introduced into configurations when it makes the most sense in a production cycle. This creates a challenge in comparing products, especially in an RFP. The best way to handle this is to:

    • Define and document minimum technology requirements.
    • Define and document service needs.
    • Compare vendors to see if they’ve met the criteria or not; if yes, compare prices.
    • If the vendors have included additional offerings, see if they make sense for your organization. If they do, include that in the scoring. If not, exclude and score based on price.
    • Recognize that the complexity of the purchase will dictate the complexity of scoring.

    "The hardware is the least important part of the equation. What is important is the warranty, delivery, imaging, asset tagging, and if they cannot deliver all these aspects the hardware doesn’t matter." – Doug Stevens, Assistant Manager Contract Services, Toronto District School Board

    Document and analyze the hardware procurement workflow to streamline process

    The procurement process should balance the need to negotiate appropriate pricing with the need to quickly approve and fulfill requests. The process should include steps to follow for approving, ordering, and tracking equipment until it is ready for receipt.

    Within the process, it is particularly important to decide if this is where equipment is added into the database or if it will happen upon receipt.

    A poorly designed procurement workflow:

    • Includes many bottlenecks, stopping and starting points.
    • May impact project and service requests and requires unrealistic lead times.
    • May lead to lost productivity for users and lost credibility for the IT department.

    A well-designed hardware procurement workflow:

    • Provides reasonable lead times for project managers and service or hardware request fulfillment.
    • Provides predictability for technical resources to plan deployments.
    • Reduces bureaucracy and workload for following up on missing shipments.
    • Enables improved documentation of assets to start lifecycle management.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Where the Hardware Asset Manager is unable to affect procurement processes to reduce time to deliver, consider bringing inventory onsite or having your hardware vendor keep stock, ready to ship on demand. Projects, replacements, and new-user requests cannot be delayed in a service-focused IT organization due to bureaucratic processes.

    Document and analyze your procurement workflow to identify opportunities for improvement and communicate process

    Determine if you need one workflow for all equipment or multiples for small vs. large purchases.

    Occasionally large rollouts require significant changes from lower dollar purchases.

    Watch for:

    • Back and forth communications
    • Delays in approvals
    • Inability to get ETAs from vendors
    • Too many requests for quotes for small purchases
    • Entry into asset database

    This sample can be found in the HAM Process Workflows.

    The image shows a workflow, titled Procurement-Equipment-Small Quantity. On the left, the chart is separated into categories: IT Procurment; Tier 2 or Tier 3; IT Director; CIO.

    Design the process workflow for hardware procurement

    2.1.6 Illustrate procurement workflow with a tabletop exercise

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • CFO or other management representative from Finance

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 7: Procurement

    1. In a group, distribute sticky notes or cue cards.
    2. Designate a space on the table/whiteboard to plot the workflow.
    3. Determine which individuals are responsible for handling non-standard requests. Establish any exceptions that may apply to your defined hardware standard.
    4. Gather input from Finance on what the threshold will be for hardware purchases that will require further approval.
    5. Map the procurement process for a standard hardware purchase.
    6. If applicable, map the procurement process for a non-standard request separately.
    7. Evaluate the workflow to identify any areas of inefficiency and make any changes necessary to improve the process.
    8. Be sure to discuss and include:
      • All necessary approvals
      • Time required for standard equipment process
      • Time required for non-standard equipment process
      • How information will be transferred to ITAM database

    Document and share an organizational purchasing policy

    2.1.7 Build a purchasing policy

    A purchasing policy helps to establish company standards, guidelines, and procedures for the purchase of all information technology hardware, software, and computer-related components as well as the purchase of all technical services.

    The policy will ensure that all purchasing processes are consistent and in alignment with company strategy. The purchasing policy is key to ensuring that corporate purchases are effective and the best value for money is obtained.

    Implement a purchasing policy to prevent or reduce:

    • Costly corporate conflict of interest cases.
    • Unauthorized purchases of non-standard, difficult to support equipment.
    • Unauthorized purchases resulting in non-traceable equipment.
    • Budget overruns due to decentralized, equipment acquisition.

    Download Info-Tech’s Purchasing Policytemplate to build your own purchasing policy.

    Step 2.2: Receive and Deploy Hardware

    Phase 2: Procure & Receive

    2.1 Request & Procure

    2.2 Receive & Deploy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    2.2.1 Select appropriate asset tagging method

    2.2.2 Design workflow for receiving and inventorying equipment

    2.2.3 Document the deployment workflow(s)

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Receiver (optional)
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Step Outcomes:

    • Understanding of the pros and cons of various asset tagging methods
    • Defined asset tagging method, process, and location by equipment type
    • Identified equipment acceptance, testing, and return procedures
    • Documented equipment receiving and inventorying workflow
    • Documented deployment workflows for desktop hardware and large-scale deployments

    Cisco implemented automation to improve its inventory and deployment system

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Networking

    Source Cisco IT

    Challenge

    Although Cisco Systems had implemented a centralized procurement location for all PCs used in the company, inventory tracking had yet to be addressed.

    Inventory tracking was still a manual process. Given the volume of PCs that are purchased each year, this is an incredibly labor-intensive process.

    Sharing information with management and end users also required the generation of reports – another manual task.

    Solution

    The team at Cisco recognized that automation was the key component holding back the success of the inventory management program.

    Rolling out an automated process across multiple offices and groups, both nationally and internationally, was deemed too difficult to accomplish in the short amount of time needed, so Cisco elected to outsource its PC management needs to an experienced vendor.

    Results

    As a result of the PC management vendor’s industry experience, the implementation of automated tracking and management functions drastically improved the inventory management situation at Cisco.

    The vendor helped determine an ideal leasing set life of 30 months for PCs, while also managing installations, maintenance, and returns.

    Even though automation helped improve inventory and deployment practices, Cisco still needed to address another key facet of asset management: security.

    This case study continues in phase 3.

    An effective equipment intake process is critical to ensure product is correct, documented, and secured

    Examine your current process for receiving assets. Typical problems include:

    Receiving inventory at multiple locations can lead to inconsistent processes. This can make invoice reconciliation challenging and result in untracked or lost equipment and delays in deployment.

    Equipment not received and secured quickly. Idle equipment tends to go missing if left unsupervised for too long. Missed opportunities to manage returns where equipment is incorrect or defective.

    Disconnect between procurement and receiving where ETAs are unknown or incorrect. This can create an issue where no one is prepared for equipment arrival and is especially problematic on large orders.

    How do you solve these problems? Create a standardized workflow that outlines clear steps for asset receiving.

    A workflow will help to answer questions such as:

    • How do you deal with damaged shipments? Incorrect shipments?
    • Did you reach an agreement with the vendor to replace damaged/incorrect shipments within a certain timeframe?
    • When does the product get tagged and entered into the system as received?
    • What information needs to get captured on the asset tag?

    Standardize the process for receiving your hardware assets

    The first step in effective hardware asset intake is establishing proper procedures for receiving and handling of assets.

    Process: Start with information from the procurement process to determine what steps need to follow to receive into appropriate systems and what processes will enable tagging to happen as soon as possible.

    People: Ensure anyone who may impact this process is aware of the importance of documenting before deployment. Having everyone who may be handling equipment on board is key to success.

    Security: Equipment will be secured at the loading dock or reception. It will need to be secured as inventory and be secured if delivering directly to the bench for imaging. Ensure all receiving activities are done before equipment is deployed.

    Tools: A centralized ERP system may already provide a place to receive and reconcile with purchasing and invoicing, but there may still be a need to receive directly into the ITAM and/or CMDB database rather than importing directly from the ERP system.

    Tagging: A variety of methods can be used to tag equipment to assist with inventory. Consider the overall lifecycle management when determining which tagging methods are best.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Decentralized receiving doesn’t have to mean multiple processes. Take advantage of enterprise solutions that will centralize the data and ensure everyone follows the same processes unless there is an uncompromising and compelling logistical reason to deviate.

    Evaluate the pros and cons of different asset tagging methods

    Method Cost Strengths Weaknesses Recommendation
    RFID with barcoding – asset tag with both a barcode and RFID solution $$$$
    • Secure, fast, and robust
    • Track assets in real time
    • Quick and efficient
    • Most expensive option, requiring purchase of barcode scanner with RFID reader and software)
    • Does not work as well in an environment with less control over assets
    • Requires management of asset database
    • Best in a controlled environment with mature processes and requirement for secure assets
    RFID only – small chip with significant data capacity $$$
    • Track assets from remote locations
    • RFID can be read through boxes so you don’t have to unpack equipment
    • Scan multiple RFID-tagged hardware simultaneously
    • Large data capacity on small chip
    • Expensive, requiring purchase of RFID reading equipment and software
    • Ideal if your environment is spread over multiple locations
    Barcoding only – adding tags with unique barcodes $$
    • Reasonable security
    • Report inventory directly to database
    • Relatively low cost
    • Only read one at a time
    • Need to purchase barcode scanners and software
    • Can be labor intensive to deploy with manual scanning of individual assets
    • Less secure
    • Can’t hold as much data
    • Not as secure as barcodes with RFID but works for environments that are more widely distributed and less controlled

    Evaluate the pros and cons of different asset tagging methods

    Method Cost Strengths Weaknesses Recommendation
    QR codes – two-dimensional codes that can store text, binary, image, or URL data $$
    • Easily scannable from many angles
    • Save and print on labels
    • Can be read by barcode scanning apps or mobile phones
    • Can encode more data than barcodes
    • QR codes need to be large enough to be usable, which can be difficult with smaller IT assets
    • Scanning on mobile devices takes longer than scanning barcodes
    • Ideal if you need to include additional data and information in labels and want workers to use smartphones to scan labels
    Manual tags – tag each asset with your own internal labels and naming system $
    • Most affordable
    • Manual
    • Tags are not durable
    • Labor intensive and time consuming
    • Leaves room for error, misunderstanding, and process variances between locations
    • As this is the most time consuming and resource intensive with a low payoff, it is ideal for low maturity organizations looking for a low-cost option for tagging assets
    Asset serial numbers – tag assets using their serial number $
    • Less expensive
    • Unique serial numbers identified by vendor
    • Serial numbers have to be added to database manually, which is labor intensive and leaves room for error
    • Serial numbers can rub off over time
    • Hard to track down already existing assets
    • Doesn’t help track location of assets after deployment
    • Potential for duplicates
    • Inconsistent formats of serial numbers by manufacturers makes this method prone to error and not ideal for asset management

    Select the appropriate method for tagging and tracking your hardware assets

    2.2.1 Select asset tagging method

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 8

    1. Define your asset tagging method. For most organizations, asset tracking is done via barcoding or QR codes, either by using one method or a combination of the two. Other methods, including RFID, may be applicable based on cost or tracking complexity. Overall, barcodes embedded with RFID are the most robust and efficient method for asset tagging, but also the most expensive. Choose the best method for your organization, taking into account affordability, labor-intensiveness, data complexity needs, and ease of deployment.
    2. Define the process for tagging assets, including how soon they should receive the tag, whose responsibility it is, and whether the tag type varies depending on the asset type.
    3. Define the location of asset tags according to equipment type. Example:
    Asset Type Asset Tag Location
    PC desktop Right upper front corner
    Laptop Right corner closest to user when laptop is closed
    Server Right upper front corner
    Printer Right upper front corner
    Modems Top side, right corner

    Inspect and test equipment before accepting it into inventory to ensure it’s working according to specifications

    Upon receipt of procured hardware, validate the equipment before accepting it into inventory.

    1. Receive - Upon taking possession of the equipment, stage them for inspection before placing them into inventory or deploying for immediate use.
    2. Inspect - The inspection process should involve at minimum examining the products that have been delivered to determine conformance to purchase specifications.
    3. Test -Depending on the type and cost of hardware, some assets may benefit from additional testing to determine if they perform at a satisfactory level before being accepted.
    4. Accept - If the products conform to the requirements of the purchase order, acknowledge receipt so the supplier may be paid. Most shipments are automatically considered as accepted and approved for payment within a specific timeframe.

    Assign responsibility and accountability for inspection and acceptance of equipment, verifying the following:

    • The products conform to purchase order requirements.
    • The quantity ordered is the same as the quantity delivered.
    • There is no damage to equipment.
    • Delivery documentation is acceptable.
    • Products are operable and perform according to specifications.
    • If required, document an acceptance testing process as a separate procedure.

    Build the RMA procedure into the receiving process to handle receipt of defective equipment

    The return merchandise authorization (RMA) process should be a standard part of the receiving process to handle the return of defective materials to the vendor for either repair or replacement.

    If there is a standard process in place for all returns in the organization, you can follow the same process for returning hardware equipment:

    • Call the vendor to receive a unique RMA number that will be attached to the equipment to be returned, then follow manufacturer specifications for returning equipment within allowable timelines according to the contract where applicable.
    • Establish a lemon policy with vendors, allowing for full returns up to 30 days after equipment is deployed if the product proves defective after initial acceptance.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure you’re well aware of the stipulations in your contract or purchase order. Sometimes acceptance is assumed after 60 days or less, and oftentimes the clock starts as soon as the equipment is shipped out rather than when it is received.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Keep in mind that the serial number on the received assed may not be the asset that ultimately ends up on the user’s desk if the RMA process is initiated. Record the serial number after the RMA process or add a correction process to the workflow to ensure the asset is properly accounted for.

    Determine what equipment should be stocked for quick deployment where demand is high or speed is crucial

    The most important feature of your receiving and inventory process should be categorization. A well-designed inventory system should reflect not only the type of asset, but also the usage level.

    A common technique employed by asset managers is to categorize your assets using an ABC analysis. Assets are classified as either A, B, or C items. The ratings are based on the following criteria:

    A

    A items have the highest usage. Typically, 10-20% of total assets in your inventory account for upwards of 70-80% of the total asset requests.

    A items should be tightly controlled with secure storage areas and policies. Avoiding stock depletion is a top priority.

    B

    B items are assets that have a moderate usage level, with around 30% of total assets accounting for 15-25% of total requests.

    B items must be monitored; B items can transition to A or C items, especially during cycles of heavier business activity.

    C

    C items are assets that have the lowest usage, with upwards of 50% of your total inventory accounting for just 5% of total asset requests.

    C items are reordered the least frequently, and present a low demand and high risk for excessive inventory (especially if they have a short lifecycle). Many organizations look to move towards an on-demand policy to mitigate risk.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Get your vendor to keep stock of your assets. If large quantities of a certain asset are required but you lack the space to securely store them onsite, ask your vendor to keep stock for you and release as you issue purchase orders. This speeds up delivery and delays warranty activation until the item is shipped. This does require an adherence to equipment standards and understanding of demand to be effective.

    Define the process for receiving equipment into inventory

    Define the following in your receiving process:

    • When will equipment be opened once delivered?
    • Who will open and validate equipment upon receipt?
    • How will discrepancies be resolved?
    • When will equipment be tagged and identified in the tracking tool?
    • When will equipment be locked in secure storage?
    • Where will equipment go if it needs to be immediately deployed?

    The image shows a workflow chart titled Receiving and Tagging. The process is split into two sections, labelled on the left as: Desktop Support Team and Procurement.

    Design the workflow for receiving and inventorying equipment

    2.2.2 Illustrate receiving workflow with a tabletop exercise

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • CFO or other management representative from Finance

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 8: Receiving and Equipment Inventory

    Option 1: Whiteboard

    1. Discuss the workflow and draw it on the whiteboard.
    2. Assess whether you are using the best workflow. Modify it if necessary.
    3. Use the sample workflow from this step as a guide if starting from scratch.
    4. Engage the team in refining the process workflow.
    5. Transfer data to Visio and add to the SOP.

    Option 2: Tabletop Exercise

    1. Distribute index cards to each member of the team.
    2. Have each person write a single task they perform on the index card. Be granular. Include the title or the name of the person responsible.
    3. Mark cards that are decision points. Use a card of a different color or use a marker to make a colored dot.
    4. Arrange the index cards in order, removing duplicates.
    5. Assess whether you are using the best workflow. Engage the team to refine it if necessary.
    6. Transfer data to Visio and add to the SOP.

    Improve device deployment by documenting software personas for each role

    • Improve the deployment process for new users by having a comprehensive list of software used by common roles within the organization. With large variations in roles, it may be impossible to build a complete list, but as you start to see patterns in requirements, you may find less distinct personas than anticipated.
    • Consider a survey to business units to determine what they need if this will solve some immediate problems. If this portion of the project will be deferred, use the data uncovered in the discovery process to identify which software is used by which roles.
    • Replacement equipment can have the software footprint created by what was actually utilized by the user, not necessarily what software was installed on the previous device.

    The image shows 4 bubbles, representing software usage. The ARC-GIS bubble is the largest, Auto CAD the second largest, and MS Office and Adobe CS equal in size.

    A software usage snapshot for an urban planner/engineer.

    • Once software needs are determined, use this information to review the appropriate device for each persona.
      • Ensure hardware is appropriate for the type of work the user does and supports required software.
      • If it is more appropriate for a user to have a tablet, ensure the software they use can be used on any device.
    • Review deployment methods to determine if there is any opportunity to improve the imaging or software deployment process with better tools or methodologies.
    • Document the device’s location if it will be static, or if the user may be more mobile, add location information for their primary location.
    • Think about the best place to document – if this information can be stored in Active Directory and imported to the ITAM database, you can update once and use in multiple applications. But this process is built into your add/move/change workflows.

    Maintain a lean library to simplify image management

    Simplify, simplify, simplify. Use a minimal number of desktop images and automate as much as you can.

    • Embrace minimalism. When it comes to managing your desktop image library, your ultimate goal should be to minimize the manual effort involved in provisioning new desktops.
    • Less is more. Try to maintain as few standard desktop images as possible and consider a thin gold image, which can be patched and updated on a regular basis. A thin image with efficient application deployment will improve the provisioning process.
    • Standardize and repeat. System provisioning should be a repeatable process. This means it is ripe for standardization and automation. Look at balancing the imaging process with software provisioning, using group policy and deployment tools to reduce time to provision and deliver equipment.
    • Outsource where appropriate. Imaging is one of the most employed services, where the image is built in-house and deployed by the hardware vendor. As a minimum, quarterly updates should still be provided to integrate the latest patches into the operating system.

    Document the process workflow for hardware deployment

    Define the process for deploying hardware to users.

    Include the following in your workflow:

    • How will equipment be configured and imaged before deployment?
    • Which images will be used for specific roles?
    • Which assets are assigned to specific roles?
    • How will the device status be changed in the ITAM tool once deployed?

    The image shows a workflow chart titled Hardware Deployment. It is divided into two categories, listed on the left: Desktop Support Team and Procurement.

    Large-scale deployments should be run as projects, benefitting from economies of scale in each step

    Large-scale desktop deployments or data center upgrades will likely be managed as projects.

    These projects should include project plans, including resources, timelines, and detailed procedures.

    Define the process for large-scale deployment if it will differ from the regular deployment process.

    The image is a graphic of a flowchart titled Deployment-Equipment-Large Quantity Rollout. It is divided into three categories, listed on the left: IT Procurement; Desktop Rollout Team; Asset Manager.

    Document the deployment workflow(s)

    2.2.3 Document deployment workflows for desktop and large-scale deployment

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • CFO or other management representative from Finance

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 9: Deployment

    Document each step in the system deployment process with notecards or on a whiteboard. Identify the challenges faced by your organization and strategize potential solutions.

    1. Outline each step in the process of desktop deployment. Be as granular as possible. On each card, describe the step as well as the individual responsible for it.
    2. When you are satisfied that each step is accurately captured, use a second color of notecard to document any challenges, inefficiencies, or pains associated with each step. Consider further documenting the time on each task.
    3. Examine each challenge or pain point. Discuss whether or not there is a clear solution to the problem. If yes, document the solution and amend the workflow. If not, engage in a broader discussion of possible solutions, taking into account people, processes, and available technology.
    4. Document separately the process for large-scale deployment if required.

    Look for opportunities to improve the request and deployment process with better communication and tools

    The biggest challenge in deploying equipment is meeting expectations of the business, and without cooperation from multiple departments, this becomes significantly more difficult.

    • Work with the procurement and the services team to ensure inventory is accessible, and regularly validate that inventory levels in the ITAM database are accurate.
    • Work with the HR department to predict (where possible) anticipated new hires. Plan for inventory ebbs and flows to match the hiring timelines where there are large variations.
    • If service catalogs will be made available for communicating options and SLAs for equipment purchases, work with the service catalog administrators to automate inventory checks and notifications. Work with the end-user device managers to set standards and reduce equipment variations to a manageable amount.
    • Where deployments are part of equipment refresh, ensure data is up to date for the services team to plan the project rollouts and know which software should be redeployed with the devices.
    • Infrastructure and security teams may have specific hardware assets relating to networking, data centers, and security, which may bypass the end-user device workflows but need to be tagged and entered into inventory early in the process. Work with these teams to have their equipment follow the same receiving and inventory processes. Deployment will vary based on equipment type and location.

    Automate hardware deployment where users are dispersed and deployment volume is high

    Self-serve kiosks (vending machines) can provide cost reductions in delivery of up to 25%. Organizations that have a high distribution rate are seeing reductions in cost of peripherals averaging 30-35% and a few extreme cases of closer to 85%.

    Benefits of using vending machines:

    • Secure equipment until deployed.
    • Equipment can be either purchased by credit card or linked to employee ID cards, enabling secure transactions and reporting.
    • Access rights can be controlled in real time, preventing terminated employees from accessing equipment or managing how many devices can be deployed to each user.
    • Vending machines can be managed through a cellular or wireless network.
    • Technology partners can be tasked with monitoring and refilling vending machines.
    • Employees are able to access technology wherever a vending machine can be located rather than needing to travel to the help desk.
    • Equipment loans and new employee packages can be managed through vending machines.

    Phase 2 Guided Implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 2: Request, Procure, Receive, and Deploy

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Step 2.1: Request & Procure

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Define standard and non-standard hardware.
    • Weigh the pros and cons of leasing vs. buying.
    • Build the procurement process.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Define standard hardware requests.
    • Document standard hardware request procedure.
    • Document procurement workflow.
    • Build a purchasing policy.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Standard Operating Procedures
    • Non-Standard Hardware Request Form
    • Hardware Procurement Workflow
    • Purchasing Policy

    Step 2.2: Receive & Deploy

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Determine appropriate asset tagging method.
    • Define equipment receiving process.
    • Define equipment deployment process.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Select appropriate asset tagging method.
    • Design workflow for receiving and inventorying equipment.
    • Document the deployment workflow(s).

    With these tools & templates:

    • Standard Operating Procedures
    • Equipment Receiving & Tagging Workflow
    • Deployment Workflow

    Phase 2 Insight: Bridge the gap between IT and Finance to build a smoother request and procurement process through communication and routine reporting. If you’re unable to affect procurement processes to reduce time to deliver, consider bringing inventory onsite or having your hardware vendor keep stock, ready to ship on demand.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    2.1.2 Define standard hardware requests

    Divide whiteboard into columns representing core business areas. Define core hardware assets for end users in each division along with optional hardware assets. Discuss optional assets to narrow and define standard equipment requests.

    2.2.1 Select appropriate method for tagging and tracking assets

    Discuss the various asset tagging methods and choose the tagging method that is most appropriate for your organization. Define the process for tagging assets and document the standard asset tag location according to equipment type.

    Phase 3

    Maintain and Dispose

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Cisco overcame organizational resistance to change to improve asset security

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Networking

    Source Cisco IT

    Challenge

    Cisco Systems had created a dynamic work environment that prized individuality. This environment created high employee satisfaction, but it also created a great deal of risk surrounding device security.

    Cisco lacked an asset security policy; there were no standards for employees to follow. This created a surplus of not only hardware, but software to support the variety of needs amongst various teams at Cisco.

    Solution

    The ITAM team at Cisco recognized that their largest problem was the lack of standardization with respect to PCs. Variance in cost, lifecycle, and software needs/compatibility were primary issues.

    Cisco introduced a PC leasing program with the help of a PC asset management vendor to correct these issues. The primary goal was to increase on-time returns of PCs. A set life of 30 months was defined by the vendor.

    Results

    Cisco engaged employees to help contribute to improving its asset management protocols, and the approach worked.

    On-time returns increased from 60% to 80%. Costs were reduced due to active tracking and disposal of any owned assets still present.

    A reduction in hardware and software platforms has cut costs and increased security thanks to improved tracking capabilities.

    This case study continues in phase 4

    Step 3.1: Manage, Maintain, and Secure Hardware Assets

    Phase 3: Maintain & Dispose

    3.1 Manage & Maintain

    3.2 Dispose or Redeploy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    3.1.1 Build a MAC policy and request form

    3.1.2 Build workflows to document user MAC processes

    3.1.3 Design process and policies for hardware maintenance, warranty, and support documentation handling

    3.1.4 Revise or create an asset security policy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    • Security Department

    Step Outcomes

    • Understanding of inventory management process best practices
    • Templates for move/add/change request policy and form
    • Documented process workflows for the user move/add/change process
    • Process and policies for hardware maintenance, warranty, and support documentation handling
    • Defined policies for maintaining asset security

    Determine methods for performing inventory audits on equipment

    Auto-discovery

    • Auto-discovery tools will be crucial to the process of understanding what equipment is connected to the network and in use.
    • The core functionality of discovery tools is to scan the environment and collect configuration data from all connected assets, but most tools can also be used to collect usage data, network monitoring, and software asset management data including software distribution, compliance, and license information.
    • These tools may not connect to peripheral devices such as monitors and external drives, will not scan devices that are turned off or disconnected from the network, may not inventory remote users, and will rarely provide location information. This often results in a need to complete physical audits as well.

    Info-Tech Insight

    One of the most common mistakes we see when it comes to asset management is to assume that the discovery tool will discovery most or all of your inventory and do all the work. It is better to assume only 80-90% coverage by the discovery tool and build ownership records to uncover the unreportable assets that are not tied into the network.

    Physical audit

    • The physical audit can be greatly improved with barcode, RFID, or QR codes, allowing items to be scanned, records opened, then updated.
    • If not everything is tagged or entered into the ITAM database, then searching closets, cabinets, and desk drawers may be required to tag and enter those devices into the database.
    • Provide the inventory team with exact instructions on what needs to be collected, verified, and recorded. Depending on the experience and thoroughness of the team, spot checks early in the process may alleviate quality issues often discovered at the end of the inventory cycle.

    Determine requirements for performing inventory audits on equipment

    Conduct an annual hardware audit to ensure hardware is still assigned to the person and location identified in your ITAM system, and assess its condition.

    Perform a quarterly review of hardware stock levels in order to ensure all equipment is relevant and usable. The table below is an example of how to organize this information.

    Item Target Stock Levels Estimated $ Value
    Desktop computers
    Standard issue laptops
    Mice
    Keyboards
    Network cables
    Phones

    Info-Tech Insight

    Don’t forget about your remotely deployed assets. Think about how you plan to inventory remotely deployed equipment. Some tools will allow data collection through an agent that will talk to the server over the internet, and some will completely ignore those assets or provide a way to manually collect the data and email back to the asset manager. Mobile device management tools may also help with this inventory process. Determine what is most appropriate based on the volume of remote workers and devices.

    Build an inventory management process to maintain an accurate view of owned hardware assets

    • Your inventory should capture which assets are on hand, where they are located, and who owns them, at minimum. Maintaining an accurate, up-to-date view of owned hardware assets allows you to see at any time the actual state of the components that make up your infrastructure across the enterprise.
    • Automated inventory practices save time and effort from doing physical inventories and also reduce the interruption to business users while improving accuracy of data.
    • If you are just starting out, define the process for conducting an inventory of deployed assets, and then define the process for regular upkeep and audit of inventory data.

    Inventory Methods

    • Electronic – captures networked asset information only and can be deployed over the network with no deskside service interaction.
    • Physical – captures environmental detail and must be performed manually by a service technician with possible disruption to users.
    • Full inventory – both physical and electronic inventory of assets.

    Internal asset information to collect electronically

    • Hardware configuration
    • Installed software
    • Operating system
    • System BIOS
    • Network configuration
    • Network drive mappings
    • Printer setups
    • System variables

    External asset information that cannot be detected electronically

    • Assigned user
    • Associated assets
    • Asset/user location
    • Usage of asset
    • Asset tag number

    IMAC (Install, Move, Add, Change) services will form the bulk of asset management work while assets are deployed

    IMAC services are usually performed at a user’s deskside by a services technician and can include:

    • Installing new desktops or peripherals
    • Installing or modifying software
    • Physically moving an end user’s equipment
    • Upgrading or adding components to a desktop

    Specific activities may include:

    Changes

    • Add new user IDs
    • Manage IDs
    • Network changes
    • Run auto-discovery scan

    Moves

    • Perform new location site survey
    • Coordinate with facilities
    • Disconnect old equipment
    • Move to new location
    • Reconnect at new location
    • Test installed asset
    • Obtain customer acceptance
    • Close request

    Installs and Adds

    • Perform site survey
    • Perform final configuration
    • Coordinate with Facilities
    • Asset tagging
    • Transfer data from old desktop
    • Wipe old desktop hard drive
    • Test installed asset
    • Initiate auto-discovery scan
    • Obtain customer acceptance
    • Close request

    A strong IMAC request process will lessen the burden on IT asset managers

    • When assets are actively in use, Asset Managers must also participate in the IMAC (Install-Move-Add-Change) process and ensure that any changes to asset characteristics or locations are updated and tracked in the asset management tool and that the value and usefulness of the asset is monitored.
    • The IMAC process should not only be reactive in response to requests, but proactive to plan for moves and relocations during any organizational change events.

    Recommendations:

    Automate. Wherever possible, use tools to automate the IMAC process.

    E-forms, help desk, ticketing, or change management software can automate the request workflow by allowing the requestor to submit a request ticket that can then be automatically assigned to a designated team member according to the established chain of command. As work is completed, the ticket can be updated, and the requestor will be able to check the status of the work at any time.

    Communicate the length of any downtime associated with execution of the IMAC request to lessen the frustration and impatience among users.

    Involve HR. When it comes to adding or removing user accounts, HR can be a valuable resource. As most new employees should be hired through HR, work with them to improve the onboarding process with enough advanced notice to set up accounts and equipment. Role changes with access rights and software modifications can benefit from improved communications. Review the termination process as well, to secure data and equipment.

    Build a MAC request policy and form for end users

    A consistent Move, Add, Change (MAC) request process is essential for lessening the burden on the IT department. MAC requests are used to address any number of tasks, including:

    • Relocation of PCs and/or peripherals.
    • New account setup.
    • Hardware or software upgrades.
    • Equipment swaps or replacements.
    • User account/access changes.
    • Document generation.
    • User acceptance testing.
    • Vendor coordination.

    Create a request form.

    If you are not using help desk or other ticketing software, create a request template that must be submitted for each MAC. The request should include:

    • The name and department of the requester.
    • The date of the request.
    • Severity of the request. For example, severity can be graded on a score of high, medium, or low where high represents a mission-critical change that could compromise business continuity if not addressed immediately, and low represents a more cosmetic change that will not negatively affect operations. The severity of the request can be determined by the service-level agreement (SLA) associated with the service.
    • Date the request must be completed by. Or at least, what would be the ideal date for completion. This will vary greatly depending on the severity of the request. For example, deleting the access of a terminated employee would be very time sensitive.
    • Item or service to be moved, added, or changed. Include location, serial number, or other designated identifier where possible.
    • If the item or service is to be moved, indicated where it is being moved.
    • It is a good idea to include a comments section where the requester can add any additional questions or details.

    Use Info-Tech’s templates to build your MAC policy and request form

    3.1.1 Build a MAC policy and request form

    Desktop Move/Add/Change Policy

    This desktop move/add/change policy should be put in place to mitigate the risk associated with unauthorized changes, minimize disruption to the business, IT department, and end users, and maintain consistent expectations.

    Move, Add, Change Request Form

    Help end users navigate the move/add/change process. Use the Move/Add/Change Request Form to increase efficiency and organization for MAC requests.

    Document the process for user equipment moves

    Include the following in your process documentation:

    • How and when will any changes to user or location information be made in the ITAM tool?
    • Will any changes in AD automatically update in the ITAM tool?
    • How should requests for equipment moves or changes be made?
    • How will resources be scheduled?

    The image shows a flowchart titled SErvice Request - User Moves. The chart of processes is split into three categories, listed on the left side of the chart: User Manager; IT Coordinator; and Tier 2 & Facilities.

    Build workflows to document user MAC processes

    3.1.2 Build MAC process workflows

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 10: Equipment Install, Adds, Moves, and Changes

    Document each step in the system deployment process using notecards or on a whiteboard. Identify the challenges faced by your organization and strategize potential solutions.

    1. Outline each step in the process of desktop deployment. Be as granular as possible. On each card, describe the step as well as the individual responsible for each step.
    2. When you are satisfied that each step is accurately captured, use a second color of notecard to document any challenges, inefficiencies, or pains associated with each step. Consider further documenting the time on each task.
    3. Examine each challenge or pain point. Discuss whether or not there is a clear solution to the problem. If so, document the solution and amend the workflow. If not, engage in a broader discussion of possible solutions, taking into account people, processes, and available technology.
    4. Document separately the process for large-scale deployment if required.

    Define a policy to ensure effective maintenance of hardware assets

    Effective maintenance and support of assets provides longer life, higher employee productivity, and increased user satisfaction.

    • Your asset management documentation and database should store equipment maintenance contract information so that it can be consulted whenever hardware service is required.
    • Record who to contact as well as how, warranty information, and any SLAs that are associated with the maintenance agreement.
    • Record all maintenance that hardware equipment receives, which will be valuable for evaluating asset and supplier performance.
    • In most cases, the Service Desk should be the central point of contact for maintenance calls to all suppliers.

    Sample equipment maintenance policy terms:

    • Maintenance and support arrangements are required for all standard and non-standard hardware.
    • All onsite hardware should be covered by onsite warranty agreements with appropriate response times to meet business continuity needs.
    • Defective items under warranty should be repaired in a timely fashion.
    • Service, maintenance, and support shall be managed through the help desk ticketing system.

    Design process and policies for hardware maintenance, warranty, and support documentation handling

    3.1.3 Design process for hardware maintenance

    Participants

    • Asset Manager
    • Purchasing
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Security
    • Operations (optional)

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Section 10

    1. Discuss and document the policy for hardware maintenance, warranty, and support.
    2. Key outcomes should include:
    • Who signs off on policies?
    • What is the timeline for documentation review?
    • Where are warranty and maintenance documents stored?
    • How will equipment be assessed for condition during audits?
    • How often will deployed equipment be reimaged?
    • How will equipment repair needs be requested?
    • How will repairs for equipment outside warranty be handled?
  • Document in the Standard Operating Procedure.
  • Use your HAM program to improve security and meet regulatory requirements

    ITAM complements and strengthens security tools and processes, improving the company’s ability to protect its data and systems and reduce operational risk.

    It’s estimated that businesses worldwide lose more than $221 billion per year as a result of security breaches. HAM is one important factor in securing data, equipment investment, and meeting certain regulatory requirements.

    How does HAM help keep your organization secure?

    • Educating users on best practices for securing their devices, and providing physical security such as cable locks and tracking mechanisms.
    • Best practices for reporting lost or stolen equipment for quickly removing access and remotely wiping devices.
    • Accurate location and disposal records will enable accurate reporting for HIPAA and PCI DSS audits where movement of media or hardware containing data is a requirement. Best practices for disposal will include properly wiping drives, recording information, and ensuring equipment is disposed of according to environmental regulations.
    • Secure access to data through end-user mobile devices. Use accurate records and MDM tools to securely track, remove access, and wipe mobile devices if compromised.
    • Encrypt devices that may be difficult to track such as USB drives or secure ports to prevent data from being copied to external drives.
    • Managed hardware allows software to be managed and patched on a regular basis.

    Best Practices

    1. Educate end users about traveling with equipment. Phones and laptops are regularly stolen from cars; tablets and phones are left on planes. Encourage users to consider how they store equipment on the way home from work.
    2. Cable locks used at unsecured offsite or onsite work areas should be supplied to employees.
    3. Equipment stored in IT must be secured at all times.

    Implement mobile device management (MDM) solutions

    Organizations with a formal mobile management strategy have fewer problems with their mobile devices.

    Develop a secure MDM to:

    • Provide connection and device support when the device is fully subsidized by the organization to increase device control.
    • Have loaner devices for when traveling to limit device theft or data loss.
    • Personal devices not managed by MDM should be limited to internet access on a guest network.
    • Limit personal device access to only internet access or a limited zone for data access and a subset of applications.
    • Advanced MDM platforms provide additional capabilities including containerization.

    The benefits of a deployed MDM solution:

    • Central management of a variety of devices and platforms is the most important advantage of MDM. Administrators can gain visibility into device status and health, set policies to groups of users, and control who has access to what.
    • Security features such as enforcing passcodes and remote wipe are also essential, given the increased risk of mobile devices.
      • Remote wipe should be able to wipe either the whole device or just selected areas.
    • Separation of personal data is becoming increasingly important as BYOD becomes the norm. This is a feature that vendors are approaching radically differently.
    • Device lock: Be able to lock the device itself, its container, or its SIM. Even if the SIM is replaced, the device should still remain locked. Consider remote locking a device if retrieval is possible.

    Mobile device management is constantly evolving to incorporate new features and expand to new control areas. This is a high-growth area that warrants constant up-to-date knowledge on the latest developments.

    What can be packed into an MDM can vary and be customized in many forms for what your organization needs.

    Secure endpoint devices to protect the data you cannot control

    Endpoint Encryption

    Endpoints Average None
    Desktop 73% 4%
    Laptops 65% 9%
    Smartphones 27% 28%
    Netbooks 26% 48%
    Tablets 16% 59%
    Grand average 41%

    Benefits from endpoint encryption:

    • Reduced risk associated with mobile workers.
    • Enabled sharing of data in secured workspace.
    • Enhanced end-user accountability.
    • Reduced number of data breach incidents.
    • Reduced number of regulatory violations.

    Ways to reduce endpoint encryption costs:

    • Use multiple vendors (multiple platforms): 33%
    • Use a single vendor (one platform): 40%
    • Use a single management console: 22%
    • Outsource to managed service provider: 26%
    • Permit user self-recovery: 26%

    Remote Wiping

    • If all else fails, a device can always be erased of all its data, protecting sensitive data that may have been on it.
    • Selective wipe takes it a step further by erasing only sensitive data.

    Selective wipe is not perfect.

    It is nearly impossible to keep the types of data separate, even with a sandbox approach. Selective wipe will miss some corporate data, and even a full remote wipe can only catch some of users’ increasingly widely distributed data.

    Selective wipe can erase:

    • Corporate profiles, email, and network settings.
    • Data within a corporate container or other sandbox.
    • Apps deployed across the enterprise.

    Know when to perform a remote wipe.

    Not every violation of policy warrants a wipe. Playing Candy Crush during work hours probably does not warrant a wipe, but jail breaking or removing a master data management client can open up security holes that do warrant a wipe.

    Design an effective asset security policy to protect the business

    Data security is not simply restricted to compromised software. In fact, 70% of all data breaches in the healthcare industry since 2010 are due to device theft or loss, not hacking. (California Data Breach Report – October, 2014) ITAM is not just about tracking a device, it is also about tracking the data on the device.

    Organizations often struggle with the following with respect to IT asset security:

    • IT hardware asset removal control.
    • Personal IT hardware assets (BYOD).
    • Data removal from IT hardware assets.
    • Inventory control with respect to leased hardware and software.
    • Unused software.
    • Repetitive versions of software.
    • Unauthorized software.

    Your security policy should seek to protect IT hardware and software that:

    • Have value to the business.
    • Require ongoing maintenance and support.
    • Create potential risk in terms of financial loss, data loss, or exposure.

    These assets should be documented and controlled in order to meet security requirements.

    The asset security policy should encompass the following:

    • Involved parties.
    • Hardware removal policy/documentation procedure.
    • End-user asset security responsibilities.
    • Theft/loss reporting procedure.
    • BYOD standards, procedures, and documentation requirements.
    • Data removal.
    • Software usage.
    • Software installation.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Hardware can be pricey; data is priceless. The cost of losing a device is minimal compared to the cost of losing data contained on a device.

    Revise or create an asset security policy

    3.1.4 Develop IT asset security policy

    Participants

    • CIO or IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Security
    • Operations (optional)

    Document

    Document in the Asset Security Policy.

    1. Identify asset security challenges within your organization. Record them in a table like the one below.
    Challenge Current Security Risk Target Policy
    Hardware removal Secure access and storage, data loss Designated and secure storage area
    BYOD No BYOD policy in place N/A → phasing out BYOD as an option
    Hardware data removal Secure data disposal Data disposal, disposal vendor
    Unused software Lack of support/patching makes software vulnerable Discovery and retirement of unused software
    Unauthorized software Harder to track, less secure Stricter stance on pirated software
    1. Brainstorm the reasons for why these challenges exist.
    2. Identify target policy details that pertain to each challenge. Record the outcomes in section(s) 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3 of the Asset Security Policy.

    Poor asset security and data protection had costly consequences for UK Ministry of Justice

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Legal

    Source ICO

    Challenge

    The Ministry of Justice (MoJ) in the UK had a security problem: hard drives that contained sensitive prisoner data were unencrypted and largely unprotected for theft.

    These hard drives contained information related to health, history of drug use, and past links to organized crime.

    After two separate incidents of hard drive theft that resulted in data breaches, the Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO), stepped in.

    Solution

    It was determined that after the first hard drive theft in October 2011, replacement hard drives with encryption software were provisioned to prisons managed by the MoJ.

    Unfortunately, the IT security personnel employed by the MoJ were unaware that the encryption software required manual activation.

    When the second hard drive theft occurred, the digital encryption could not act as a backup to poor physical security (the hard drive was not secured in a locker as per protocol).

    Results

    The perpetrators were never found and the stolen hard drives were never recovered.

    As a result of the two data breaches, the MoJ had to implement costly security upgrades to its data protection system.

    The ICO fined the MoJ £180,000 for its repeated security breaches. This costly fine could have been avoided if more diligence was present in the MoJ’s asset management program.

    Step 3.2: Dispose or Redeploy Assets

    3.1 Manage & Maintain

    3.2 Dispose or Redeploy

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    3.2.1 Identify challenges with IT asset recovery and disposal

    3.2.2 Design hardware asset recovery and disposal workflows

    3.2.3 Build a hardware asset disposition policy

    This step involves the following participants:

    • Infrastructure Director/Manager
    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Step Outcomes:

    • Defined process to determine when to redeploy vs. dispose of hardware assets
    • Process for recovering and redeploying hardware equipment
    • Process for safely disposing of assets that cannot be redeployed
    • Comprehensive asset disposition policy

    Balance the effort to roll out new equipment against the cost to maintain equipment when building your lifecycle strategy

    The image shows two line graphs. The graph on the left is titled: Desktop Refresh Rate by Company Size (based on Revenue). The graph on the right is titled: Laptop Refresh Rate by Company Size (based on Revenue). Each graph has four lines, defined by a legend in the centre of the image: yellow is small ($25mm); dark blue is Mid ($25-500MM); light blue is large ( data-verified=$500MM); and orange is Overall.">

    (Info-Tech Research Group; N=96)

    Determining the optimal length of time to continue to use equipment will depend on use case and equipment type

    Budget profiles Refresh methods

    Stretched

    Average equipment age: 7+ years

    To save money, some organizations will take a cascading approach, using the most powerful machines for engineers or scientists to ensure processing power, video requirements and drives will meet the needs of their applications and storage needs; then passing systems down to departments who will require standard-use machines. The oldest and least powerful machines are either used as terminals or disposed.

    Generous

    Average equipment age: 3 years

    Organizations that do not want to risk user dissatisfaction or potential compatibility or reliability issues will take a more aggressive replacement approach. These organizations often have less people assigned to end-user device maintenance and will not repair equipment outside of warranty. There is little variation in processing power among devices, with major differences determined by mobility and operating system.

    Cautious

    Average equipment age: 4 to 5 years

    Organizations that fit between the other two profiles will look to stretch the budget beyond warranty years, but will keep a close eye on maintenance requirements. Repairs needed outside of warranty will require an eye to costs, efforts, and subsequent administrative work of loaning equipment to keep the end user productive while waiting on service.

    Recommendations to keep users happy and equipment in prime form is to check condition at the 2-3 year mark, reimage at least once to improve performance, and have backup machines, if equipment starts to become problematic.

    Build a process to determine when and how to redeploy or dispose of hardware assets at end of use

    • When equipment is no longer needed for the function or individual to whom it was assigned, the Hardware Asset Manager needs to use data to ensure the right decision is made as to what to do with the asset.
    • End of use involves evaluating options for either continuing to use the equipment in another capacity or by another individual or determining that the asset has no remaining value to the organization in any capacity and it is time to retire it.
    • If the asset is retired, it may still have capacity for continued use outside of the organization or it may be disposed.

    Redeployment

    • Deliver the asset to a new user if it is no longer needed by the original user but still has value and usability.
    • Redeployment saves money and prevents unnecessary purchases.
    • Common when employees leave the company or a merge or acquisition changes the asset pool.

    VS.

    Disposal

    • When an asset is no longer of use to the organization, it may be disposed of.
    • Need to consider potential financial and public relations considerations if disposal is not done according to environmental legislation.
    • Need to ensure proper documentation and data removal is built into disposition policy.

    Use persistent documentation and communication to improve hardware disposal and recovery

    Warning! Poor hardware disposal and recovery practices can be caused by the following:

    1. Your IT team is too busy and stretched thin. Data disposal is one of many services your IT team is likely to have to deal with, but this service requires undivided attention. By standardizing hardware refreshes, you can instill more predictability with your hardware life cycles and better manage disposal.
    2. Poor inventory management. Outdated data and poor tracking practices can result in lost assets during the disposal phase. It only takes a single lost asset to cause a disastrous data breach in your supply chain.
    3. Obliviousness to disposal regulations. Electronic disposal and electronically stored data are governed by strict regulation.

    How do you improve your hardware disposal and recovery process?

    • A specific, controlled process needs to be in place to wipe all equipment and verify that it’s been wiped properly. Otherwise, companies will continue to spend money to protect data while equipment is in use, but overlook the dangerous implications of careless IT asset disposal. Create a detailed documentation process to track your assets every step of the way to ensure that data and applications are properly disposed of. Detailed documentation can also help bolster sustainability reporting for organizations wishing to track such data.
    • Better communication should be required. Most decommissioning or refresh processes use multiple partners for manufacturing, warehousing, data destruction, product resale, and logistics. Setting up and vetting these networks can take years, and even then, managing them can be like playing a game of telephone; transparency is key.

    Address three core challenges of asset disposal and recovery

    Asset Disposal

    Data Security

    Sixty-five percent of organizations cite data security as their top concern. Many data breaches are a result of hardware theft or poor data destruction practices.

    Choosing a reputable IT disposal company or data removal software is crucial to ensuring data security with asset disposal.

    Environmental

    Electronics contain harmful heavy metals such as mercury, arsenic, and cadmium.

    Disposal of e-waste is heavily regulated, and improper disposal can result in hefty fines and bad publicity for organizations.

    Residual value

    Many obsolete IT assets are simply confined to storage at their end of life.

    This often imposes additional costs with maintenance or storage fees and leaves a lot of value on the table through assets that could be sold or re-purposed within the organization.

    Identify challenges with IT asset recovery and disposal with a triple bottom line scorecard

    3.2.1 Identify challenges with IT asset recovery and disposal

    Participants

    • Infrastructure Director/Manager
    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)
    1. Divide the whiteboard into three boxes: Social, Economic, and Environmental.
    2. Divide each box into columns like the one shown below:
    Economic
    Challenge Objectives Targets Initiatives
    No data capture during disposal Develop reporting standards 80% disposed assets recorded Work with Finance to develop reporting procedure
    Idle assets Find resale market/dispose of idle assets 50% of idle assets disposed of within the year Locate resale vendor and disposal service
    1. Ask participants to list challenges associated with each area.
    2. Once challenges facing recovery and disposal have been exhausted from the group, assign a significance of 1-5 (1 being the lowest and 5 being the highest) to each challenge.
    3. Discuss the most significant challenges and how they might be addressed through the next steps of building recovery & disposal processes.

    Build a process for recovery and redeployment of hardware

    • Having hardware standards in place makes redeploying easier by creating a larger pool of possible users for a standardized asset.
    • Most redeployment activities will be carried out by the Help Desk as a service request ticket, so it is important to have clear communication and guidelines with the Help Desk as to which tasks need to be carried out as part of the request.

    Ensure the following are addressed:

    • Where will equipment be stored before being redeployed?
    • Will shipping be required and are shipping costs factored into analysis?
    • Ensure equipment is cleaned before it is redeployed.
    • Do repairs and reconfigurations need to be made?
    • How will software be removed and licenses harvested and reported to Software Asset Manager?
    • How will data be securely wiped and protected?

    The image shows a work process in flowchart format titled Equipment Recovery. The chart is divided into two sections, listed on the left: Business Manager/HR and Desktop Support Team.

    Define the process for safely disposing of assets that cannot be redeployed

    Asset Disposal Checklist

    1. Review the data stored on the device.
    2. Determine if there has been any sensitive or confidential information stored.
    3. Remove all sensitive/confidential information.
    4. Determine if software licenses are transferable.
    5. Remove any non- transferable software prior to reassignment.
    6. Update the department’s inventory record to indicate new individual assigned custody.
    7. In the event of a transfer to another department, remove data and licensed software.
    8. If sensitive data has been stored, physically destroy the storage device.
    • Define the process for retiring and disposing of equipment that has reached replacement age or no longer meets minimum conditions or standards.
    • Clearly define the steps that need to be taken both before and after the involvement of an ITAD partner.

    The image shows a flowchart titled Equipment Disposal. It is divided into two sections, labelled on the left as: Desktop Support Team and Asset Manager.

    Design hardware asset recovery and disposal workflows

    3.2.2 Design hardware asset recovery and disposal policies and workflows

    Participants

    • Infrastructure Director/Manager
    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager
    • Operations (optional)

    Document

    Document in the Standard Operating Procedures, Sections 11 and 12

    Document each step in the recovery and disposal process in two separate workflows using notecards or on a whiteboard. Identify the challenges faced by your organization and strategize potential solutions.

    1. Keeping in mind current challenges around hardware asset recovery and disposal, design the target state for both the asset recovery and disposal processes.
    2. Outline each step of the process and be as granular as possible.
    3. When you are satisfied that each step is accurately captured, use a second color of notecard to document any challenges, inefficiencies, or pains associated with each step. Consider further documenting the time on each task.
    4. Examine each challenge or pain point. Discuss whether or not there is a clear solution to the problem. If so, document the solution and amend the workflow. If not, engage in a broader discussion of possible solutions, taking into account people, processes, and available technology.
    5. Review the checklists on the previous slides to ensure all critical tasks are accounted for in your process workflows.

    Add equipment disposition to asset lifecycle decisions to meet environmental regulations and mitigate risk

    Although traditionally an afterthought in asset management, IT asset disposition (ITAD) needs to be front and center. Increase focus on data security and concern surrounding environmental sustainability and develop an awareness of the cost efficiencies possible through best-practices disposition.

    Optimized ITAD solutions:

    1. Protect sensitive or valuable data
    2. Support sustainability
    3. Focus on asset value recovery

    Info-Tech Insight

    A well-thought-out asset management program mitigates risk and is typically less costly than dealing with a large-scale data loss incident or an inappropriate disposal suit. Also, it protects your company’s reputation – which is difficult to put a price on.

    Partner with an ITAD vendor to support your disposition strategy

    Maximizing returns on assets requires knowledge and skills in asset valuation, upgrading to optimize market return, supply chain management, and packaging and shipping. It’s unlikely that the return will be adequate to justify that level of investment, so partnering with a full-service ITAD vendor is a no-brainer.

    • An ITAD vendor knows the repurpose and resale space better than your organization. They know the industry and have access to more potential buyers.
    • ITAD vendors can help your organization navigate costly environmental regulations for improper disposal of IT assets.

    Disposal doesn’t mean your equipment has to go to waste.

    Additionally, your ITAD vendor can assist with a large donation of hardware to a charitable organization or a school.

    Donating equipment to schools or non-profits may provide charitable receipts that can be used as taxable benefits.

    Before donating:

    • Ensure equipment is needed and useful to the organization.
    • Be prepared for an appraisal requirement. Receipts can only be issued for fair market value.
    • Prevent compromised data by thoroughly wiping or completely replacing drives.
    • Ensure official transfer of ownership to prevent liability if improper disposal practices follow.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Government assistance grants may be available to help keep your organization’s hardware up to date, thereby providing incentives to upgrade equipment while older equipment still has a useful life.

    Protect the organization by sufficiently researching potential ITAD partners

    Research ITAD vendors as diligently as you would primary hardware vendors.

    Failure to thoroughly investigate a vendor could result in a massive data breach, fines for disposal standards violations, or a poor resale price for your disposed assets. Evaluate vendors using questions such as the following:

    • Are you a full-service vendor or are you connected to a wholesaler?
    • Who are your collectors and processors?
    • How do you handle data wiping? If you erase the data, how many passes do you perform?
    • What do you do with the e-waste? How much is reused? How much is recycled?
    • Do you have errors and omissions insurance in case data is compromised?
    • How much will it cost to recycle or dispose of worthless equipment?
    • How much will I receive for assets that still have useful life?

    ITAD vendors that focus on recycling will bundle assets to ship to an e-waste plant – leaving money on the table.

    ITAD vendors with a focus on reuse will individually package salable assets for resale – which will yield top dollars.

    Info-Tech Insight

    To judge the success of a HAM overhaul, you need to establish a baseline with which to compare final results. Be sure to take HAM “snapshots” before ITAD partnering so it’s easy to illustrate the savings later.

    Work with ITAD partner or equipment supplier to determine most cost-effective method and appropriate time for disposal

    2-4 Two-to-four year hardware refresh cycle

    • Consider selling equipment to an ITAD partner who specializes in sales of refurbished equipment.
    • Consider donating equipment to schools or non-profits, possibly using an ITAD partner who specializes in refurbishing equipment and managing the donation process.

    5-7 Five-to-seven year hardware refresh cycle

    • At this stage equipment may still have a viable life, but would not be appropriate for school or non-profit donations, due to a potentially shorter lifespan. Consider selling equipment to an ITAD partner who has customers interested in older, refurbished equipment.

    7+ Seven or more years hardware refresh cycle

    • If keeping computers until they reach end of life, harvest parts for replacement on existing machines and budget for disposal fees.
    • Ask new computer supplier about disposal services or seek out ITAD partner who will disassemble and dispose of equipment in an environmentally responsible manner.

    Info-Tech Insight

    • In all cases, ensure hard drives are cleansed of data with no option for data recovery. Many ITAD partners will provide a drive erasure at DoD levels as part of their disposal service.
    • Many ITAD partners will provide analysts to help determine the most advantageous time to refresh.

    Ensure data security and compliance by engaging in reliable data wiping before disposition

    Failure to properly dispose of data can not only result in costly data breaches, but also fines and other regulatory repercussions. Choosing an ITAD vendor or a vendor that specializes in data erasure is crucial. Depending on your needs, there are a variety of data wiping methods available.

    Certified data erasure is the only method that leaves the asset’s hard drive intact for resale or donation. Three swipes is the bare minimum, but seven is recommended for more sensitive data (and required by the US Department of Defense). Data erasure applications may be destructive or non-destructive – both methods overwrite data to make it irretrievable.

    Physical destruction must be done thoroughly, and rigorous testing must be done to verify data irretrievability. Methods such as hand drilling are proven to be unreliable.

    Degaussing uses high-powered magnets to erase hard drives and makes them unusable. This is the most expensive option; degaussing devices can be purchased or rented.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Data wiping can be done onsite or can be contracted to an ITAD partner. Using an ITAD partner can ensure greater security at a more affordable price.

    Make data security a primary driver of asset disposition practices

    It is estimated that 10-15% of data loss cases result from insecure asset disposal. Protect yourself by following some simple disposition rules.

    1. Reconcile your data onsite
    • Verify that bills of landing and inventory records match before assets leave. Otherwise, you must take the receiver’s word on shipment contents.
  • Wipe data at least once onsite
    • Do at least one in-house data wipe before the assets leave the site for greater data security.
  • Transport promptly after data wiping
    • Prompt shipment will minimize involvement with the assets, and therefore, cost. Also, the chance of missing assets will drop dramatically.
  • Avoid third-party transport services
    • Reputable ITAD companies maintain strict chain of custody control over assets. Using a third party introduces unnecessary risk.
  • Keep detailed disposition records
    • Records will protect you in the event of an audit, a data loss incident, or an environmental degradation claim. They could save you millions.
  • Wipe all data-carrying items
    • Don’t forget cell phones, fax machines, USB drives, scanners, and printers – they can carry sensitive information that can put the organization at risk.
  • Only partner with insured ITAD vendors
    • You are never completely out of danger with regards to liability, but partnering with an insured vendor is potent risk mitigation.
  • Work these rules into your disposition policy to mitigate data loss risk.

    Support your HAM efforts with a comprehensive disposition policy

    3.2.3 Build a Hardware Asset Disposition Policy

    Implementation of a HAM program is a waste of time if you aren’t going to maintain it. Maintenance requires the implementation of detailed policies, training, and an ongoing commitment to proper management.

    Use Info-Tech’s Hardware Asset Disposition Policy to:

    1. Establish and define clear standards, procedures, and restrictions surrounding disposition.
    2. Ensure continual compliance with applicable data security and environmental legislation.
    3. Assign specific responsibilities to individuals or groups to ensure ongoing adherence to policy standards and that costs or benefits are in line with expectations.

    Phase 3 Guided Implementation

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Guided Implementation 3: Maintain & Dispose

    Proposed Time to Completion: 4 weeks

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Discuss inventory management best practices.
    • Build process for moves, adds, and changes.
    • Build process for hardware maintenance.
    • Define policies for maintaining asset security.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build a MAC policy and request form.
    • Build workflows to document user MAC processes.
    • Design processes and policies for hardware maintenance, warranty, and support documentation handling.
    • Build an asset security policy.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Standard Operating Procedures
    • Asset Security Policy

    Step 3.2: Dispose or Redeploy Assets

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Discuss when to dispose vs. redeploy assets.
    • Build process for redeploying vs. disposing of assets.
    • Review ITAD vendors.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Identify challenges with IT asset recovery and disposal.
    • Design hardware asset recovery and disposal workflows.
    • Build a hardware asset disposition policy.

    With these tools & templates:

    • Standard Operating Procedures
    • Asset Recovery Workflow
    • Asset Disposal Workflow
    • Hardware Asset Disposition Policy

    Phase 3 Insight: Not all assets are created equal. Taking a blanket approach to asset maintenance and security is time consuming and costly. Focus on the high-cost, high-use, and data-sensitive assets first.

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    3.1.4 Revise or create an asset security policy

    Discuss asset security challenges within the organization; brainstorm reasons the challenges exist and process changes to address them. Document a new asset security policy.

    3.2.2 Design hardware asset recovery and disposal workflows

    Document each step in the hardware asset recovery and disposal process, including all decision points. Examine challenges and amend the workflow to address them.

    Phase 4

    Plan Budget Process and Build Roadmap

    Implement Hardware Asset Management

    Cisco deployed an enterprise-wide re-education program to implement asset management

    CASE STUDY

    Industry Networking

    Source Cisco IT

    Challenge

    Even though Cisco Systems had designed a comprehensive asset management program, implementing it across the enterprise was another story.

    An effective solution, complete with a process that could be adopted by everyone within the organization, would require extensive internal promotion of cost savings, efficiencies, and other benefits to the enterprise and end users.

    Cisco’s asset management problem was as much a cultural challenge as it was a process challenge.

    Solution

    The ITAM team at Cisco began discussions with departments that had been tracking and managing their own assets.

    These sessions were used as an educational tool, but also as opportunities to gather internal best practices to deploy across the enterprise.

    Eventually, Cisco introduced weekly meetings with global representation to encourage company-wide communication and collaboration.

    Results

    By establishing a process for managing PC assets, we have cut our hardware costs in half.” – Mark Edmonson, Manager – IT Services Expenses

    Cisco reports that although change was difficult to adopt, end-user satisfaction has never been higher. The centralized asset management approach has resulted in better contract negotiations through better data access.

    A reduced number of hardware and software platforms has streamlined tracking and support, and will only drive down costs as time goes on.

    Step 4.1: Plan Hardware Asset Budget

    Phase 4: Plan Budget & Build Roadmap

    4.1 Plan Budget

    4.2 Communicate & Build Roadmap

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    4.1 Use Info-Tech’s HAM Budgeting Tool to plan your hardware asset budget

    This step involves the following participants:

    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Finance Department

    Step Outcomes

    • Know where to find data to budget for hardware needs accurately
    • Learn how to manage a hardware budget
    • Plan hardware asset budget with a budgeting tool

    Gain control of the budget to increase the success of HAM

    A sophisticated hardware asset management program will be able to uncover hidden costs, identify targets for downsizing, save money through redistributing equipment, and improve forecasting of equipment to help control IT spending.

    While some asset managers may not have experience managing budgets, there are several advantages to ITAM owning the hardware budget:

    • Be more involved in negotiating pricing with suppliers.
    • Build better relationships with stakeholders across the business.
    • Forecast requirements more accurately.
    • Inform benchmarks for hardware performance.
    • Gain more responsibility and have a greater influence on purchasing decisions.
    • Directly impact the reduction in IT spend.
    • Manage the asset database more easily and have a greater understanding of hardware needs.
    • Build a continuous rolling refresh.

    Use ITAM data to forecast hardware needs accurately and realistically

    Your IT budget should be realistic, accounting for business needs, routine maintenance, hardware replacement costs, unexpected equipment failures, and associated support and warranty costs. Know where to find the data you need and who to work with to forecast hardware needs as accurately as possible.

    What type of data should I take into account?

    Plan for:

    • New hardware purchases required
      • Planned refreshes based on equipment lifecycle
      • Inventory for break and fix
      • Standard equipment for new hires
      • Non-standard equipment required
      • Hardware for planned projects
      • Implementation and setup costs
      • Routine hardware implementation
      • Large hardware implementation for projects
      • Support and warranty costs

    Take into account:

    • Standard refresh cycle for each hardware asset
    • Amount of inventory to keep on hand
    • Length of time from procurement to inventory
    • Current equipment costs and equipment price increases
    • Equipment depreciation rates and resale profits

    Where do I find the information I need to budget accurately?

    • Work with HR to forecast equipment needs for new hires.
    • Work with the Infrastructure Manager to forecast devices and equipment needed for approved and planned projects.
    • Use the asset management database to forecast hardware refresh and replacement needs based on age and lifecycle.
    • Work with business stakeholders to ensure all new equipment needs are accounted for in the budget.

    Use Info-Tech’s HAM Budgeting Tool to plan your hardware asset budget

    4.1.1 Build HAM budget

    This tool is designed to assist in developing and justifying the budget for hardware assets for the upcoming year. The tool will allow you to budget for projects requiring hardware asset purchases as well as equipment requiring refresh and to adjust the budget as needed to accommodate both projects and refreshes. Follow the instructions on each tab to complete the tool.

    The hardware budget should serve as a planning and communications tool for the organization

    The most successful relationships have a common vocabulary. Thus, it is important to translate “tech speak” into everyday language and business goals and initiatives as you plan your budget.

    One of the biggest barriers that infrastructure and operations team face with regards to equipment budgeting is the lack of understanding of IT infrastructure and how it impacts the rest of the organization. The biggest challenge is to help the rest of the organization overcome this barrier.

    There are several things you can do to overcome this barrier:

    • Avoid using technical terms or jargon. Terms many would consider common knowledge, such as “WLAN,” are foreign to many.
    • Don’t assume the business knows how the technology you’re referring to will impact their day-to-day work. You will need to demonstrate it to them.
    • Help the audience understand the business impact of not implementing each initiative. What does this mean for them?
    • Discuss the options on the table in terms of the business value that the hardware can enable. Review how deferring refresh projects can impact user-facing applications, systems, and business unit operations.
    • Present options. If you can’t implement everything on the project list, present what you can do at different levels of funding.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Err on the side of inviting more discussion. Your budgeting process relies on business decision makers and receiving actionable feedback requires an ongoing exchange of information.

    Help users understand the importance of regular infrastructure refreshes

    Getting business users to support regular investments in maintenance relies on understanding and trust. Present the facts in plain language. Provide options, and clearly state the impact of each option.

    Example: Your storage environment is nearing capacity.

    Don’t:

    Explain the project exclusively in technical terms or slang.

    We’re exploring deduping technology as well as cheap solid state, SATA, and tape storage to address capacity.”

    Do:

    • Explain impact in terms that the business can understand.

    Deduplication technology can reduce our storage needs by up to 50%, allowing us to defer a new storage purchase.”

    • Be ready to present project alternatives and impacts.

    Without implementing deduplication technology, we will need to purchase additional storage by the end of the year at an estimated cost of $25,000.”

    • Connect the project to business initiatives and strategic priorities.

    This is a cost-effective technique to increase storage capacity to manage annual average data growth at around 20% per year.

    Step 4.2: Build Communication Plan and Roadmap

    Phase 4: Plan Budget & Build Roadmap

    4.1 Plan Budget

    4.2 Communicate & Build Roadmap

    This step will walk you through the following activities:

    4.2 Develop a HAM implementation roadmap

    This step involves the following participants:

    • CIO
    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Step Outcomes

    • Documented end-user hardware asset management policies
    • Communications plan to achieve support from end users and other business units
    • HAM implementation roadmap

    Educate end users through ITAM training to increase program success

    As part of your communication plan and overall HAM implementation, training should be provided to end users within the organization.

    All facets of the business, from management to new hires, should be provided with ITAM training to help them understand their role in the project’s success.

    ITAM solutions are complex by nature with both business process and technical knowledge required to use them correctly. Keep the message appropriate to the audience – end users don’t need to know the complete process, but will need to know policy and how to request.

    Management may have priorities that appear to clash with new processes. Engage management by making them aware of the benefits and importance of ITAM. Include the benefits and consequences of not implementing ITAM in your education approach. Encourage them to support efforts by reinforcing your messages to end users.

    New hires should have ITAM training bundled into their onboarding process. Fresh minds are easier to train and the ITAM program will be seen as an organizational standard, not merely a change.

    Policy documents can help summarize end users’ obligations and clarify processes. Consider an IT Resources Acceptable UsePolicy.

    "The lowest user is the most important user in your asset management program. New employees are your most important resource. The life cycle of the assets will go much smoother if new employees are brought on board." – Tyrell Hall, ITAM Program Coordinator

    Info-Tech Insight

    During training, you should present the material through the lens of “what’s in it for me?” Otherwise, you risk alienating end users through implementing organizational change viewed as low value.

    Include policy design and enforcement in your communication plan

    • Hardware asset management policies should define the actions to be taken to protect and preserve technology assets from failure, loss, destruction, theft, or damage.
    • Implementing asset management policies enforces the notion that the organization takes its IT assets and the management of them seriously, and will help ensure the benefits of ITAM are achieved.
    • Designing, approving, documenting, and adopting one set of standard ITAM policies for each department to follow will ensure the processes are enforced equally across the organization.
    • Good ITAM policies answer the “what, how, and why” of IT asset management, provide the means for ITAM governance, and provide a basis for strategy and decision making.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use policy templates to jumpstart your policy development and ensure policies are comprehensive, but be sure to modify and adapt policies to suit your corporate culture or they will not gain buy-in from employees. For a policy to be successful, it must be a living document and have participation and involvement from the committees and departments to whom it will pertain.

    Use Info-Tech’s policy templates to build HAM policies

    4.2.1 Build HAM policies

    Use these HAM policy templates to get started:

    Information Technology Standards Policy

    This policy establishes standards and guidelines for a company’s information technology environment to ensure the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of company computing resources.

    Desktop Move/Add/Change Policy

    This desktop move/add/change policy is put in place for users to request to change their desktop computing environments. This policy applies configuration changes within a company.

    Purchasing Policy

    The purchasing policy helps to establish company standards, guidelines, and procedures for the purchase of all information technology hardware, software, and computer-related components as well as the purchase of all technical services.

    Hardware Asset Disposition Policy

    This policy assists in creating guidelines around disposition in the last stage of the asset lifecycle.

    Additional policy templates

    Info-Tech Insight

    Use policy templates to jumpstart your policy development and ensure policies are comprehensive, but modify and adapt them to suit your corporate culture or they will not gain buy-in from employees. For a policy to be successful, it must be a living document and have participation from the committees and departments to whom it will pertain.

    Create a communication plan to achieve end-user support and adherence to policies

    Communication is crucial to the integration and overall implementation of your ITAM program. An effective communication plan will:

    • Gain support from management at the project proposal phase.
    • Create end-user buy-in once the program is set to launch.
    • Maintain the presence of the program throughout the business.
    • Instill ownership throughout the business from top-level management to new hires.

    Use the variety of components as part of your communication plan in order to reach the organization.

    1. Advertise successes.
    • Regularly demonstrate the value of the ITAM program with descriptive statistics focused on key financial benefits.
    • Share data with the appropriate personnel; promote success to obtain further support from senior management.
  • Report and share asset data.
    • Sharing detailed asset-related reports frequently gives decision makers useful data to aid in their strategy.
    • These reports can help your organization prepare for audits, adjust asset budgeting, and detect unauthorized assets.
  • Communicate the value of ITAM.
    • Educate management and end users about how they fit into the bigger picture.
    • Individuals need to know that their behaviors can adversely affect data quality and, ultimately, lead to better decision making.
  • Develop a communication plan to convey the right messages

    4.2.2 Develop a communication plan to convey the right messages

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Document

    Document in the HAM Communication Plan

    1. Identify the groups that will be affected by the HAM program as those who will require communication.
    2. For each group requiring a communication plan, identify the following:
    • Benefits of HAM for that group of individuals (e.g. better data, security).
    • The impact the change will have on them (e.g. change in the way a certain process will work).
    • Communication method (i.e. how you will communicate).
    • Timeframe (i.e. when and how often you will communicate the changes).
  • Complete this information in a table like the one below and document in the Communication Plan.
  • Group Benefits Impact Method Timeline
    Service Desk Improve end-user device support Follow new processes Email campaign 3 months
    Executives Mitigate risks, better security, more data for reporting Review and sign off on policies
    End Users Smoother request process Adhere to device security and use policies
    Infrastructure Faster access to data and one source of truth Modified processes for centralized procurement and inventory

    Implement ITAM in a phased, constructive approach

    • One of the most difficult decisions to make when implementing ITAM is: “where do we start?”
    • The pyramid to the right mirrors Maslow’s hierarchy of needs. The base is the absolute bare minimum that should be in place, and each level builds upon the previous one.
    • As you track up the pyramid, your ITAM program will become more and more mature.

    Now that your asset lifecycle environment has been constructed in full, it’s time to study it. Gather data about your assets and use the results to create reports and new solutions to continually improve the business.

    • Asset Data
    • Asset Protection: safely protect and dispose of assets once they are mass distributed throughout your organization.
    • Asset Distribution: determine standards for asset provisioning and asset inventory strategy.
    • Asset Gathering: define what assets you will procure, distribute, and track. Classifying your assets by tier will allow you to make decisions as you progress up the pyramid.

    ↑ ITAM Program Maturity

    Integrate your HAM program into the organization to assist its implementation

    The HAM program cannot perform on its own – it must be integrated with other functional areas of the organization in order to maintain its stability and support.

    • Effective IT asset management is supported by a comprehensive set of processes as part of its implementation.
    • For example, integration with the purchasing/procurement team is required to gather hardware and software purchase data to control asset costs and mitigate software license compliance risk.
    • Integration with Finance is required to support internal cost allocations and charge backs.

    To integrate your ITAM program into your organization effectively, a clear implementation roadmap needs to be designed. Prioritize “quick wins” in order to demonstrate success to the business early and gain buy-in from your team. Long-term goals should be designed that will be supported by the outcomes of the short-term gains of your ITAM program.

    Short-term goal Long-term goal
    Identify inventory classification and tool (hardware first) Hardware contract data integration (warranty, maintenance, lease)
    Create basic ITAM policies and processes Continual improvement through policy impact review and revision
    Implement ITAM auto-discovery tools Software compliance reports, internal audits

    Info-Tech Insight

    Installing an ITAM tool does not mean you have an effective asset management program. A complete solution needs to be built around your tool, but the strength of ITAM comes from processes embedded in the organization that are shaped and supported by your ITAM data.

    Develop an IT hardware asset management implementation roadmap

    4.2.3 Develop a HAM implementation roadmap

    Participants

    • CIO
    • IT Director
    • Asset Manager
    • Service Desk Manager

    Document

    Document in the IT Hardware Asset Management Implementation Roadmap

    1. Identify up to five streams to work on initiatives for the hardware asset management project.
    2. Fill out key tasks and objectives for each process. Assign responsibility for each task.
    3. Select a start date and end date for each task. See tab 1 of the tool for instructions on which letters to input for each stage of the process.
    4. Once your list is complete, open tab 3 of the tool to see your completed sunshine diagram.
    5. Keep this diagram visible for your team and use it as a guide to task completion as you work towards your future-state value stream.

    Focus on continual improvement to sustain your ITAM program

    Periodically review the ITAM program in order to achieve defined goals, objectives, and benefits.

    Act → Plan → Do → Check

    Once ITAM is in place in your organization, a focus on continual improvement creates the following benefits:

    • Remain in sync with the business: your asset management program reflects the current and desired future states of your organization at the time of its creation. But the needs of the business change. As mentioned previously, asset management is a dynamic process, so in order for your program to keep pace, a focus on continual improvement is needed.
      • For example, imagine if your organization had designed your ITAM program before cloud-based solutions were an option. What if your asset classification scheme did not include personal devices or tablets or your asset security policy lacked a section on BYOD?
    • Create funding for new projects through ITAM continual improvement: one of the goals is to save money through more efficient use of your assets by “sweating” out underused hardware and software.
      • It may be tempting to simply present the results to Finance as savings, but instead, describe the results as “available funds for other projects.” Otherwise, Finance may view the savings as a nod to restrict IT’s budget and allocate funds elsewhere. Make it clear that any saved funds are still required, albeit in a different capacity.

    Info-Tech Best Practice

    Look for new uses for ITAM data. Ask management what their goals are for the next 12-18 months. Analyze the data you are gathering and determine how your ITAM data can assist with achieving these goals.

    Phase 4 outline

    Call 1-888-670-8889 or email GuidedImplementations@InfoTech.com for more information.

    Complete these steps on your own or call us to complete a guided implementation. A guided implementation is a series of 2-3 advisory calls that help you execute each phase of a project. They are included in most advisory memberships.

    Step 4.1: Plan Budget

    Start with an analyst kick-off call:

    • Know where to find data to budget for hardware needs accurately.
    • Learn how to manage a hardware budget.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Plan hardware asset budget.

    With these tools & templates:

    HAM Budgeting Tool

    Step 4.2: Communicate & Roadmap

    Review findings with analyst:

    • Develop policies for end users.
    • Build communications plan.
    • Build an implementation roadmap.

    Then complete these activities…

    • Build HAM policies.
    • Develop a communication plan.
    • Develop a HAM implementation roadmap.

    With these tools & templates:

    HAM policy templates

    HAM Communication Plan

    HAM Implementation Roadmap

    If you want additional support, have our analysts guide you through this phase as part of an Info-Tech workshop

    Book a workshop with our Info-Tech analysts:

    • To accelerate this project, engage your IT team in an Info-Tech workshop with an Info-Tech analyst team.
    • Info-Tech analysts will join you and your team onsite at your location or welcome you to Info-Tech’s historic Toronto office to participate in an innovative onsite workshop.
    • Contact your account manager (www.infotech.com/account), or email Workshops@InfoTech.com for more information.

    The following are sample activities that will be conducted by Info-Tech analysts with your team:

    4.1.1 Build a hardware asset budget

    Review upcoming hardware refresh needs and projects requiring hardware purchases. Use this data to forecast and budget equipment for the upcoming year.

    4.2.2 Develop a communication plan

    Identify groups that will be affected by the new HAM program and for each group, document a communications plan.

    Insight breakdown

    Overarching Insights

    HAM is more than just tracking inventory. A mature asset management program provides data for proactive planning and decision making to reduce operating costs and mitigate risk.

    ITAM is not just IT. IT leaders need to collaborate with Finance, Procurement, Security, and other business units to make informed decisions and create value across the enterprise.

    Treat HAM like a process, not a project. HAM is a dynamic process that must react and adapt to the needs of the business.

    Phase 1 Insight

    For asset management to succeed, it needs to support the business. Engage business leaders to determine needs and build your HAM program around these goals.

    Phase 2 Insight

    Bridge the gap between IT and Finance to build a smoother request and procurement process through communication and routine reporting. If you’re unable to affect procurement processes to reduce time to deliver, consider bringing inventory onsite or having your hardware vendor keep stock, ready to ship on demand.

    Phase 3 Insight

    Not all assets are created equal. Taking a blanket approach to asset maintenance and security is time consuming and costly. Focus on the high-cost, high-use, and data-sensitive assets first.

    Phase 4 Insight

    Deploying a fancy ITAM tool will not make hardware asset management implementation easier. Implementation is a project that requires you focus on people and process first – the technology comes after.

    Related Info-Tech research

    Implement Software Asset Management

    Build an End-User Computing Strategy

    Find the Value – and Remain Valuable – With Cloud Asset Management

    Consolidate IT Asset Management

    Harness Configuration Management Superpowers

    IT Asset Management Market Overview

    Bibliography

    Chalkley, Martin. “Should ITAM Own Budget?” The ITAM Review. 19 May 2011. Web.

    “CHAMP: Certified Hardware Asset Management Professional Manual.” International Association of Information Technology Asset Managers, Inc. 2008. Web.

    Foxen, David. “The Importance of Effective HAM (Hardware Asset Management).” The ITAM Review. 19 Feb. 2015. Web.

    Foxen, David. “Quick Guide to Hardware Asset Tagging.” The ITAM Review. 5 Sep. 2014. Web.

    Galecki, Daniel. “ITAM Lifecycle and Savings Opportunities – Mapping out the Journey.” International Association of IT Asset Managers, Inc. 16 Nov. 2014. Web.

    “How Cisco IT Reduced Costs Through PC Asset Management.” Cisco IT Case Study. 2007. Web.

    Irwin, Sherry. “ITAM Metrics.” The ITAM Review. 14 Dec. 2009. Web.

    “IT Asset and Software Management.” ECP Media LLC, 2006. Web.

    Rains, Jenny. “IT Hardware Asset Management.” HDI Research Brief. May 2015. Web.

    Riley, Nathan. “IT Asset Management and Tagging Hardware: Best Practices.” Samanage Blog. 5 March 2015. Web.

    “The IAITAM Practitioner Survey Results for 2016 – Lean Toward Ongoing Value.” International Association of IT Asset Managers, Inc. 24 May 2016. Web.

    Effectively Manage CxO Relations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}384|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Manage Business Relationships
    • Parent Category Link: /manage-business-relationships

    With the exponential pace of technological change, an organization's success will depend largely on how well CIOs can evolve from technology evangelists to strategic business partners. This will require CIOs to effectively broker relationships to improve IT's effectiveness and create business value. A confidential journal can help you stay committed to fostering productive relationships while building trust to expand your sphere of influence.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Highly effective executives have in common the ability to successfully balance three things: time, personal capabilities, and relationships. Whether you are a new CIO or an experienced leader, the relentless demands on your time and unpredictable shifts in the organization’s strategy require a personal game plan to deliver business value. Rather than managing stakeholders one IT project at a time, you need an action plan that is tailored for unique work styles.

    Impact and Result

    A personal relationship journal will help you:

    • Understand the context in which key stakeholders operate.
    • Identify the best communication approach to engage with different workstyles.
    • Stay committed to fostering relationships through difficult periods.

    Effectively Manage CxO Relations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Effectively Manage CxO Relations Storyboard – A guide to creating a personal action plan to help effectively manage relationships across key stakeholders.

    Use this research to create a personal relationship journal in four steps:

    • Effectively Manage CxO Relations Storyboard

    2. Personal Relationship Management Journal Template – An exemplar to help you build your personal relationship journal.

    Use this exemplar to build a journal that is readily accessible, flexible, and easy to maintain.

    • Personal Relationship Management Journal Template

    Infographic

    Further reading

    Effectively Manage CxO Relations

    Make relationship management a daily habit with a personalized action plan.

    Analyst Perspective

    "Technology does not run an enterprise, relationships do." – Patricia Fripp

    As technology becomes increasingly important, an organization's success depends on the evolution of the modern CIO from a technology evangelist to a strategic business leader. The modern CIO will need to leverage their expansive partnerships to demonstrate the value of technology to the business while safeguarding their time and effort on activities that support their strategic priorities. CIOs struggling to transition risk obsolescence with the emergence of new C-suite roles like the Digital Transformation Officer, Chief Digital Officer, Chief Data Officer, and so on.

    CIOs will need to flex new social skills to accommodate diverse styles of work and better predict dynamic situations. This means expanding beyond their comfort level to acquire new social skills. Having a clear understanding of one's own work style (preferences, natural tendencies, motivations, and blind spots) is critical to identify effective communication and engagement tactics.

    Building trust is an art. Striking a balance between fulfilling your own goals and supporting others will require a carefully curated approach to navigate the myriad of personalities and work styles. A personal relationship journal will help you stay committed through these peaks and troughs to foster productive partnerships and expand your sphere of influence over the long term.

    Photo of Joanne Lee
    Joanne Lee
    Principal, Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    In today's unpredictable markets and rapid pace of technological disruptions, CIOs need to create business value by effectively brokering relationships to improve IT's performance. Challenges they face:

    • Operate in silos to run the IT factory.
    • Lack insights into their stakeholders and the context in which they operate.
    • Competing priorities and limited time to spend on fostering relationships.
    • Relationship management programs are narrowly focused on associated change management in IT project delivery.

    Common Obstacles

    Limited span of influence.

    Mistaking formal roles in organizations for influence.

    Understanding what key individuals want and, more importantly, what they don't want.

    Lack of situational awareness to adapt communication styles to individual preferences and context.

    Leveraging different work styles to create a tangible action plan.

    Perceiving relationships as "one and done."

    Info-Tech's Approach

    A personal relationship journal will help you stay committed to fostering productive relationships while building trust to expand your sphere of influence.

    • Identify your key stakeholders.
    • Understand the context in which they operate to define a profile of their mandate, priorities, commitments, and situation.
    • Choose the most effective engagement and communication strategies for different work styles.
    • Create an action plan to monitor and measure your progress.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Highly effective executives have in common the ability to balance three things: time, personal capabilities, and relationships. Whether you are a new CIO or an experienced leader, the relentless demand on your time and unpredictable shifts in the organization's strategy will require a personal game plan to deliver business value. This will require more than managing stakeholders one IT project at a time: It requires an action plan that fosters relationships over the long term.

    Key Concepts

    Stakeholder Management
    A common term used in project management to describe the successful delivery of any project, program, or activity that is associated with organizational change management. The goal of stakeholder management is intricately tied to the goals of the project or activity with a finite end. Not the focus of this advisory research.

    Relationship Management
    A broad term used to describe the relationship between two parties (individuals and/or stakeholder groups) that exists to create connection, inclusion, and influence. The goals are typically associated with the individual's personal objectives and the nature of the interaction is seen as ongoing and long-term.

    Continuum of Commitment
    Info-Tech's framework that illustrates the different levels of commitment in a relationship. It spans from active resistance to those who are committed to actively supporting your personal priorities and objectives. This can be used to baseline where you are today and where you want the relationship to be in the future.

    Work Style
    A reference to an individual's natural tendencies and expectations that manifest itself in their communication, motivations, and leadership skills. This is not a behavior assessment nor a commentary on different personalities but observable behaviors that can indicate different ways people communicate, interact, and lead.

    Glossary
    CDxO: Chief Digital Officer
    CDO: Chief Data Officer
    CxO: C-Suite Executives

    The C-suite is getting crowded, and CIOs need to foster relationships to remain relevant

    The span of influence and authority for CIOs is diminishing with the emergence of Chief Digital Officers and Chief Data Officers.

    63% of CDxOs report directly to the CEO ("Rise of the Chief Digital Officer," CIO.com)

    44% of organizations with a dedicated CDxO in place have a clear digital strategy versus 22% of those without a CDxO (KPMG/Harvey Nash CIO Survey)

    The "good news": CIOs tend to have a longer tenure than CDxOs.

    A diagram that shows the average tenure of C-Suites in years.
    Source: "Age and Tenure of C-Suites," Korn Ferry

    The "bad news": The c-suite is getting overcrowded with other roles like Chief Data Officer.

    A diagram that shows the number of CDOs hired from 2017 to 2021.
    Source: "Chief Data Officer Study," PwC, 2022

    An image of 7 lies technology executives tell ourselves.

    Info-Tech Insight

    The digital evolution has created the emergence of new roles like the Chief Digital Officer and Chief Data Officer. They are a response to bridge the skill gap that exists between the business and technology. CIOs need to focus on building effective partnerships to better communicate the business value generated by technology or they risk becoming obsolete.

    Create a relationship journal to effectively manage your stakeholders

    A diagram of relationship journal

    Info-Tech's approach

    From managing relationships with friends to key business partners, your success will come from having the right game plan. Productive relationships are more than managing stakeholders to support IT initiatives. You need to effectively influence those who have the potential to champion or derail your strategic priorities. Understanding differences in work styles is fundamental to adapting your communication approach to various personalities and situations.

    A diagram that shows from 1.1 to 4.1

    A diagram of business archetypes

    Summary of Insights

    Insight 1: Expand your sphere of influence
    It's not just about gaining a volume of acquaintances. Figure out where you want to spend your limited time, energy, and effort to develop a network of professional allies who will support and help you achieve your strategic priorities.

    Insight 2: Know thyself first and foremost
    Healthy relationships start with understanding your own working style, preferences, and underlying motivations that drive your behavior and ultimately your expectations of others. A win/win scenario emerges when both parties' needs for inclusion, influence, and connection are met or mutually conceded.

    Insight 3: Walk a mile in their shoes
    If you want to build successful partnerships, you need to understand the context in which your stakeholder operates: their motivations, desires, priorities, commitments, and challenges. This will help you adapt as their needs shift and, moreover, leverage empathy to identify the best tactics for different working styles.

    Insight 4: Nurturing relationships is a daily commitment
    Building, fostering, and maintaining professional relationships requires a daily commitment to a plan to get through tough times, competing priorities, and conflicts to build trust, respect, and a shared sense of purpose.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Supplement your CIO journey with these related blueprints.

    Photo of First 100 Days as CIO

    First 100 Days as CIO

    Photo of Become a Strategic CIO

    Become a Strategic CIO

    Photo of Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Improve IT Team Effectiveness

    Photo of Become a Transformational CIO

    Become a Transformational CIO

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Logo of Multicap Limited

    • Industry: Community Services
    • Source: Scott Lawry, Head of Digital

    Conversation From Down Under

    What are the hallmarks of a healthy relationship with your key stakeholders?
    "In my view, I work with partners like they are an extension of my team, as we rely on each other to achieve mutual success. Partnerships involve a deeper, more intimate relationship, where both parties are invested in the long-term success of the business."

    Why is it important to understand your stakeholder's situation?
    "It's crucial to remember that every IT project is a business project, and vice versa. As technology leaders, our role is to demystify technology by focusing on its business value. Empathy is a critical trait in this endeavor, as it allows us to see a stakeholder's situation from a business perspective, align better with the business vision and goals, and ultimately connect with people, rather than just technology."

    How do you stay committed during tough times?
    "I strive to leave emotions at the door and avoid taking a defensive stance. It's important to remain neutral and not personalize the issue. Instead, stay focused on the bigger picture and goals, and try to find a common purpose. To build credibility, it's also essential to fact-check assumptions regularly. By following these principles, I approach situations with a clear mind and better perspective, which ultimately helps achieve success."

    Photo of Scott Lawry, Head Of Digital at Multicap Limited

    Key Takeaways

    In a recent conversation with a business executive about the evolving role of CIOs, she expressed: "It's the worst time to be perceived as a technology evangelist and even worse to be perceived as an average CIO who can't communicate the business value of technology."

    This highlights the immense pressure many CIOs face when evolving beyond just managing the IT factory.

    The modern CIO is a business leader who can forge relationships and expand their influence to transform IT into a core driver of business value.

    Stakeholder Sentiment

    Identify key stakeholders and their perception of IT's effectiveness

    1.1 Identify Key Stakeholders

    A diagram of Identify Key Stakeholders

    Identify and prioritize your key stakeholders. Be diligent with stakeholder identification. Use a broad view to identify stakeholders who are known versus those who are "hidden." If stakeholders are missed, then so are opportunities to expand your sphere of influence.

    1.2 Understand Stakeholder's Perception of IT

    A diagram that shows Info-Tech's Diagnostic Reports and Hospital Authority XYZ

    Assess stakeholder sentiments from Info-Tech's diagnostic reports and/or your organization's satisfaction surveys to help identify individuals who may have the greatest influence to support or detract IT's performance and those who are passive observers that can become your greatest allies. Determine where best to focus your limited time amid competing priorities by focusing on the long-term goals that support the organization's vision.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understand which individuals can directly or indirectly influence your ability to achieve your priorities. Look inside and out, as you may find influencers beyond the obvious peers or executives in an organization. Influence can result from expansive connections, power of persuasion, and trust to get things done.

    Visit Info-Tech's Diagnostic Programs

    Activity: Identify and Prioritize Stakeholders

    30-60 minutes

    1.1 Identify Key Stakeholders

    Start with the key stakeholders that are known to you. Take a 360-degree view of both internal and external connections. Leverage external professional & network platforms (e.g. LinkedIn), alumni connections, professional associations, forums, and others that can help flush out hidden stakeholders.

    1.2 Prioritize Key Stakeholders

    Use stakeholder satisfaction surveys like Info-Tech's Business Vision diagnostic as a starting point to identify those who are your allies and those who have the potential to derail IT's success, your professional brand, and your strategic priorities. Review the results of the diagnostic reports to flush out those who are:

    • Resisters: Vocal about their dissatisfaction with IT's performance and actively sabotage or disrupt
    • Skeptics: Disengaged, passive observers
    • Ambassadors: Aligned but don't proactively support
    • Champions: Actively engaged and will proactively support your success

    Consider the following:

    • Influencers may not have formal authority within an organization but have relationships with your stakeholders.
    • Influencers may be hiding in many places, like the coach of your daughter's soccer team who rows with your CEO.
    • Prioritize, i.e. three degrees of separation due to potential diverse reach of influence.

    Key Output: Create a tab for your most critical stakeholders.

    A diagram that shows profile tabs

    Download the Personal Relationship Management Journal Template.

    Understand stakeholders' business

    Create a stakeholder profile to understand the context in which stakeholders operate.

    2.1 Create individual profile for each stakeholder

    A diagram that shows different stakeholder questions

    Collect and analyze key information to understand the context in which your stakeholders operate. Use the information to derive insights about their mandate, accountabilities, strategic goals, investment priorities, and performance metrics and challenges they may be facing.

    Stakeholder profiles can be used to help design the best approach for personal interactions with individuals as their business context changes.

    If you are short on time, use this checklist to gather information:

    • Stakeholder's business unit (BU) strategy goals
    • High-level organizational chart
    • BU operational model or capability map
    • Key performance metrics
    • Projects underway and planned
    • Financial budget (if available)
    • Milestone dates for key commitments and events
    • External platforms like LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter, Slack, Instagram, Meetup, blogs

    Info-Tech Insight

    Understanding what stakeholders want (and more importantly, what they don't) requires knowing their business and the personal and social circumstances underlying their priorities and behaviors.

    Activity: Create a stakeholder profile

    30-60 minutes

    2.1.0 Understand stakeholder's business context

    Create a profile for each of your priority stakeholders to document their business context. Review all the information collected to understand their mandate, core accountability, and business capabilities. The context in which individuals operate is a window into the motivations, pressures, and vested interests that will influence the intersectionality between their expectations and yours.

    2.1.1 Document Observable Challenges as Private Notes

    Crushing demands and competing priorities can lead to tension and stress as people jockey to safeguard their time. Identify some observable challenges to create greater situational awareness. Possible underlying factors:

    • Sudden shifts/changes in mandate
    • Performance (operations, projects)
    • Finance
    • Resource and talent gaps
    • Politics
    • Personal circumstances
    • Capability gaps/limitations
    • Capacity challenges

    A diagram that shows considerations of this activity.

    Analyze Stakeholder's Work Style

    Adapt communication styles to the situational context in which your stakeholders operate

    2.2 Determine the ideal approach for engaging each stakeholder

    Each stakeholder has a preferred modality of working which is further influenced by dynamic situations. Some prefer to meet frequently to collaborate on solutions while others prefer to analyze data in solitude before presenting information to substantiate recommendations. However, fostering trust requires:

    1. Understanding your preferred default when engaging others.
    2. Knowing where you need to expand your skills.
    3. Identifying which skills to activate for different professional scenarios.

    Adapting your communication style to create productive interactions will require a diverse arsenal of interpersonal skills that you can draw upon as situations shift. The ability to adapt your work style to dial any specific trait up or down will help to increase your powers of persuasion and influence.

    "There are only two ways to influence human behavior: you can manipulate it, or you can inspire it." – Simon Sinek

    Activity: Identify Engagement Strategies

    30 minutes

    2.2.0 Establish work styles

    Every individual has a preferred style of working. Determine work styles starting with self-awareness:

    • Express myself - How you communicate and interact with others
    • Expression by others - How you want others to communicate and interact with you

    Through observation and situational awareness, we can make inferences about people's work style.

    • Observations - Observable traits of other people's work style
    • Situations - Personal and professional circumstances that influence how we communicate and interact with one another

    Where appropriate and when opportunities arise, ask individuals directly about their preferred work styles and method for communication. What is their preferred method of communication? During a normal course of interaction vs. for urgent priorities?

    2.2.1 Brainstorm possible engagement strategies

    Consider the following when brainstorming engagement strategies for different work styles.

    A table of involvement, influence, and connection.

    Think engagement strategies in different professional scenarios:

    • Meetings - Where and how you connect
    • Communicating - How and what you communicate to create connection
    • Collaborating - What degree of involved in shared activities
    • Persuading - How you influence or direct others to get things done

    Expand New Interpersonal Skills

    Use the Business Archetypes to brainstorm possible approaches for engaging with different work styles. Additional communication and engagement tactics may need to be considered based on circumstances and changing situations.

    A diagram that shows business archetypes and engagement strategies.

    Communicate Effectively

    Productive communication is a dialogue that requires active listening, tailoring messages to fluid situations, and seeking feedback to adapt.

    A diagram of elements that contributes to better align intention and impact

    Be Relevant

    • Understand why you need to communicate
    • Determine what you need to convey
    • Tailor your message to what matters to the audience and their context
    • Identify the most appropriate medium based on the situation

    Be Consistent and Accurate

    • Say what you mean and mean what you say to avoid duplicity
    • Information should be accurate and complete
    • Communicate truthfully; do not make false promises or hide bad news
    • Don't gossip

    Be Clear and Concise

    • Keep it simple and avoid excessive jargon
    • State asks upfront to set intention and transparency
    • Avoid ambiguity and focus on outcomes over details
    • Be brief and to the point or risk losing stakeholder's attention

    Be Attentive and Authentic

    • Stay engaged and listen actively
    • Be curious and inquire for clarification or explanation
    • Be flexible to adapt to both verbal and non-verbal cues
    • Be authentic in your approach to sharing yourself
    • Avoid "canned" approaches

    A diagram of listen, observe, reflect.


    "Good communication is the bridge between confusion and clarity."– Nat Turner (LinkedIn, 2020)

    Exemplar: Engaging With Jane

    A diagram that shows Exemplar: Engaging With Jane

    Exemplar: Engaging With Ali

    A diagram that shows Exemplar: Engaging With Ali

    Develop an Action Plan

    Moving from intent to action requires a plan to ensure you stay committed through the peaks and troughs.

    Create Your 120-Day Plan

    An action plan example

    Key elements of the action plan:

    • Strategic priorities – Your top focus
    • Objective – Your goals
    • 30-60-90-120 Day Topics – Key agenda items
    • Meeting Progress Notes – Key takeaways from meetings
    • Private Notes – Confidential observations

    Investing in relationships is a long-term process. You need to accumulate enough trust to trade or establish coalitions to expand your sphere of influence. Even the strongest of professional ties will have their bouts of discord. To remain committed to building the relationship during difficult periods, use an action plan that helps you stay grounded around:

    • Shared purpose
    • Removing emotion from the situation
    • Continuously learning from every interaction

    Photo of Angela Diop
    "Make intentional actions to set intentionality. Plans are good to keep you grounded and focused especially when relationship go through ups and down and there are changes: to new people and new relationships."
    – Angela Diop, Senior Director, Executive Services, Info-Tech & former VP of Information Services with Unity Health Care

    Activity: Design a Tailored Action Plan

    30-60 minutes

    3.1.0 Determine your personal expectations

    Establish your personal goals and expectations around what you are seeking from the relationship. Determine the strength of your current connection and identify where you want to move the relationship across the continuum of commitment.

    Use insights from your stakeholder's profile to explore their span of influence and degree of interest in supporting your strategic priorities.

    3.1.1 Determine what you want from the relationship

    Based on your personal goals, identify where you want to move the relationship across the continuum of commitment: What are you hoping to achieve from the relationship? How will this help create a win/win situation for both you and the key stakeholder?

    A diagram of Continuum of Commitment.

    3.1.2 Identify your metrics for progress

    Fostering relationships take time and commitment. Utilizing metrics or personal success criteria for each of your focus areas will help you stay on track and find opportunities to make each engagement valuable instead of being transactional.

    A graph that shows influence vs interest.

    Make your action plan impactful

    Level of Connection

    The strength of the relationship will help inform the level of time and effort needed to achieve your goals.

    • Is this a new or existing relationship?
    • How often do you connect with this individual?
    • Are the connections driven by a shared purpose or transactional as needs arise?

    Focus on Relational Value

    Cultivate your network and relationship with the goal of building emotional connection, understanding, and trust around your shared purpose and organization's vision through regular dialogue. Be mindful of transactional exchanges ("quid pro quo") to be strategic about its use. Treat every interaction as equally important regardless of agenda, duration, or channel of communication.

    Plan and Prepare

    Everyone's time is valuable, and you need to come prepared with a clear understanding of why you are engaging. Think about the intentionality of the conversation:

    • Gain buy-in
    • Create transparency
    • Specific ask
    • Build trust and respect
    • Provide information to clarify, clear, or contain a situation

    Non-Verbal Communication Matters

    Communication is built on both overt expressions and subtext. While verbal communication is the most recognizable form, non-lexical components of verbal communication (i.e. paralanguage) can alter stated vs. intended meaning. Engage with the following in mind:

    • Tone, pitch, speed, and hesitation
    • Facial expressions and gestures
    • Choice of channel for engagement

    Exemplar: Action Plan for VP, Digital

    A diagram that shows Exemplar: Action Plan for VP, Digital

    Make Relationship Management a Daily Habit

    Management plans are living documents and need to be flexible to adapt to changes in stakeholder context.

    Monitor and Adjust to Communicate Strategically

    A diagram that shows Principles for Effective Communication and Key Measures

    Building trust takes time and commitment. Treat every conversation with your key stakeholders as an investment in building the social capital to expand your span of influence when and where you need it to go. This requires making relationship management a daily habit. Action plans need to be a living document that is your personal journal to document your observations, feelings, and actions. Such a plan enables you to make constant adjustments along the relationship journey.

    "Without involvement, there is no commitment. Mark it down, asterisk it, circle it, underline it."– Stephen Convey (LinkedIn, 2016)

    Capture some simple metrics

    If you can't measure your actions, you can't manage the relationship.

    An example of measures: what, why, how - metrics, and intended outcome.

    While a personal relationship journal is not a formal performance management tool, identifying some tangible measures will improve the likelihood of aligning your intent with outcomes. Good measures will help you focus your efforts, time, and resources appropriately.

    Keep the following in mind:

    1. WHAT are you trying to measure?
      Specific to the situation or scenario
    2. WHY is this important?
      Relevant to your personal goals
    3. HOW will you measure?
      Achievable and quantifiable
    4. WHAT will the results tell you?
      Intended outcome that is directional

    Summary of accomplishments

    Knowledge Gained

    • Relationship management is critical to a CIO's success
    • A personal relationship journal will help build:
      • Customized approach to engaging stakeholders
      • New communication skills to adapt to different work styles

    New Concepts

    • Work style assessment framework and engagement strategies
    • Effective communication strategies
    • Continuum of commitment to establish personal goals

    Approach to Creating a Personal Journal

    • Step-by-step approach to create a personal journal
    • Key elements for inclusion in a journal
    • Exemplar and recommendations

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Photo of Tech Trends and Priorities Research Centre

    Tech Trends and Priorities Research Centre

    Access Info-Tech's Tech Trend reports and research center to learn about current industry trends, shifts in markets, and disruptions that are impacting your industry and sector. This is a great starting place to gain insights into how the ecosystem is changing your business and the role of IT within it.

    Photo of Embed Business Relationship Management in IT

    Embed Business Relationship Management in IT

    Create a business relationship management (BRM) function in your program to foster a more effective partnership with the business and drive IT's value to the organization.

    Photo of Become a Transformational CIO

    Become a Transformational CIO

    Collaborate with the business to lead transformation and leave behind a legacy of growth.

    Appendix: Framework

    Content:

    • Adaptation of DiSC profile assessment
    • DiSC Profile Assessment
    • FIRO-B Framework
    • Experience Cube

    Info-Tech's Adaption of DiSC Assessment

    A diagram of business archetypes

    Info-Tech's Business Archetypes was created based on our analysis of the DiSC Profile and Myers-Briggs FIRO-B personality assessment tools that are focused on assessing interpersonal traits to better understand personalities.

    The adaptation is due in part to Info-Tech's focus on not designing a personality assessment tool as this is neither the intent nor the expertise of our services. Instead, the primary purpose of this adaptation is to create a simple framework for our members to base their observations of behavioral cues to identify appropriate communication styles to better interact with key stakeholders.

    Cautionary note:
    Business archetypes are personas and should not be used to label, make assumptions and/or any other biased judgements about individual personalities. Every individual has all elements and aspects of traits across various spectrums. This must always remain at the forefront when utilizing any type of personality assessments or frameworks.

    Click here to learn about DiSC Profile
    Click here learn about FIRO-B
    Click here learn about Experience Cube

    DiSC Profile Assessment

    A photo of DiSC Profile Assessment

    What is DiSC?

    DisC® is a personal assessment tool that was originally developed in 1928 by psychologist William Moulton Marston, who designed it to predict job performance. The tool has evolved and is now widely used by thousands of organizations around the world, from large government agencies and Fortune 500 companies to nonprofit and small businesses, to help improve teamwork, communication, and productivity in the workplace. The tool provides a common language people can use to better understand themselves and those they interact with - and use this knowledge to reduce conflict and improve working relationships.

    What does DiSC mean?

    DiSC is an acronym that stands for the four main personality profiles described in the Everything DiSC model: (D)ominance, (i)nfluence, (S)teadiness, (C)onscientiousness

    People with (D) personalities tend to be confident and emphasize accomplishing bottom-line results.
    People with (i) personalities tend to be more open and emphasize relationships and influencing or persuading others.
    People with (S) personalities tend to be dependable and emphasize cooperation and sincerity.
    People with (C) personalities tend to emphasize quality, accuracy, expertise, and competency.

    Go to this link to explore the DiSC styles

    FIRO-B® – Interpersonal Assessment

    A diagram of FIRO framework

    What is FIRO workplace relations?

    The Fundamental Interpersonal Relations Orientation Behavior (FIRO-B®) tool has been around for forty years. The tool assesses your interpersonal needs and the impact of your behavior in the workplace. The framework reveals how individuals can shape and adapt their individual behaviors, influence others effectively, and build trust among colleagues. It has been an excellent resource for coaching individuals and teams about the underlying drivers behind their interactions with others to effectively build successful working relationships.

    What does the FIRO framework measure?

    The FIRO framework addresses five key questions that revolve around three interpersonal needs. Fundamentally, the framework focuses on how you want to express yourself toward others and how you want others to behave toward you. This interaction will ultimately result in the universal needs for (a) inclusion, (b) control, and (c) affection. The insights from the results are intended to help individuals adjust their behavior in relationships to get what they need while also building trust with others. This will allow you to better predict and adapt to different situations in the workplace.

    How can FIRO influence individual and team performance in the workplace?

    FIRO helps people recognize where they may be giving out mixed messages and prompts them to adapt their exhibited behaviors to build trust in their relationships. It also reveals ways of improving relationships by showing individuals how they are seen by others, and how this external view may differ from how they see themselves. Using this lens empowers people to adjust their behavior, enabling them to effectively influence others to achieve high performance.

    In team settings, it is a rich source of information to explore motivations, underlying tensions, inconsistent behaviors, and the mixed messages that can lead to mistrust and derailment. It demonstrates how people may approach teamwork differently and explains the potential for inefficiencies and delays in delivery. Through the concept of behavioral flexibility, it helps defuse cultural stereotypes and streamline cross-cultural teams within organizations.

    Go to this link to explore FIRO-B for Business

    Experience Cube

    A diagram of experience cube model.

    What is an experience cube?

    The Experience Cube model was developed by Gervase Bushe, a professor of Leadership and Organization at the Simon Fraser University's school of Business and a thought leader in the field of organizational behavior. The experience cube is intended as a tool to plan and manage conversations to communicate more effectively in the moment. It does this by promoting self-awareness to better reduce anxiety and adapt to evolving and uncertain situations.

    How does the experience cube work?

    Using the four elements of the experience cube (Observations, Thoughts, Feelings, and Wants) helps you to separate your experience with the situation from your potential judgements about the situation. This approach removes blame and minimizes defensiveness, facilitating a positive discussion. The goal is to engage in a continuous internal feedback loop that allows you to walk through all four quadrants in the moment to help promote self-awareness. With heightened self-awareness, you may (1) remain curious and ask questions, (2) check-in for understanding and clarification, and (3) build consensus through agreement on shared purpose and next steps.

    Observations: Sensory data (information you take in through your senses), primarily what you see and hear. What a video camera would record.

    Thoughts: The meaning you add to your observations (i.e. the way you make sense of them, including your beliefs, expectations, assumptions, judgments, values, and principles). We call this the "story you make up."

    Feelings: Your emotional or physiological response to the thoughts and observations. Feelings words such as sad, mad, glad, scared, or a description of what is happening in your body.

    Wants: Clear description of the outcome you seek. Wants go deeper than a simple request for action. Once you clearly state what you want, there may be different ways to achieve it.

    Go to this link to explore more: Experience Cube

    Research Contributors and Experts

    Photo of Joanne Lee
    Joanne Lee
    Principal, Research Director, CIO Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Joanne is a professional executive with over twenty-five years of experience in digital technology and management consulting spanning healthcare, government, municipal, and commercial sectors across Canada and globally. She has successfully led several large, complex digital and business transformation programs. A consummate strategist, her expertise spans digital and technology strategy, organizational redesign, large complex digital and business transformation, governance, process redesign, and PPM. Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, Joanne was a Director with KPMG's CIO Advisory management consulting services and the Digital Health practice lead for Western Canada. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach to complex problems enabled by technology.

    Joanne holds a Master's degree in Business and Health Policy from the University of Toronto and a Bachelor of Science (Nursing) from the University of British Columbia.



    Photo of Gord Harrison
    Gord Harrison
    Senior Vice President, Research and Advisory
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Gord Harrison, SVP, Research and Consulting, has been with Info-Tech Research Group since 2002. In that time, Gord leveraged his experience as the company's CIO, VP Research Operations, and SVP Research to bring the consulting and research teams together under his current role, and to further develop Info-Tech's practical, tactical, and value-oriented research product to the benefit of both organizations.

    Prior to Info-Tech, Gord was an IT consultant for many years with a focus on business analysis, software development, technical architecture, and project management. His background of educational game software development, and later, insurance industry application development gave him a well-rounded foundation in many IT topics. Gord prides himself on bringing order out of chaos and his customer-first, early value agile philosophy keeps him focused on delivering exceptional experiences to our customers.



    Photo of Angela Diop
    Angela Diop
    Senior Director, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Angela has over twenty-five years of experience in healthcare, as both a healthcare provider and IT professional. She has spent over fifteen years leading technology departments and implementing, integrating, managing, and optimizing patient-facing and clinical information systems. She believes that a key to a healthcare organization's ability to optimize health information systems and infrastructure is to break the silos that exist in healthcare organizations.

    Prior to joining Info-Tech, Angela was the Vice President of Information Services with Unity Health Care. She has demonstrated leadership and success in this area by fostering environments where business and IT collaborate to create systems and governance that are critical to providing patient care and sustaining organizational health.

    Angela has a Bachelor of Science in Systems Engineering and Design from the University of Illinois and a Doctorate of Naturopathic Medicine from Bastyr University. She is a Certified CIO with the College of Healthcare Information Management Executives. She is a two-time Health Information Systems Society (HIMSS) Davies winner.



    Photo of Edison Barreto
    Edison Barreto
    Senior Director, Executive Services
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Edison is a dynamic technology leader with experience growing different enterprises and changing IT through creating fast-paced organizations with cultural, modernization, and digital transformation initiatives. He is well versed in creating IT and business cross-functional leadership teams to align business goals with IT modernization and revenue growth. Over twenty-five years of Gaming, Hospitality, Retail, and F&B experience has given him a unique perspective on guiding and coaching the creation of IT department roadmaps to focus on business needs and execute successful changes.

    Edison has broad business sector experience, including:
    Hospitality, Gaming, Sports and Entertainment, IT policy and oversight, IT modernization, Cloud first programs, R&D, PCI, GRDP, Regulatory oversight, Mergers acquisitions and divestitures.



    Photo of Mike Tweedie
    Mike Tweedie
    Practice Lead, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Michael Tweedie is the Practice Lead, CIO – IT Strategy at Info-Tech Research Group, specializing in creating and delivering client-driven, project-based, practical research, and advisory. He brings more than twenty-five years of experience in technology and IT services as well as success in large enterprise digital transformations.

    Prior to joining Info-Tech, Mike was responsible for technology at ADP Canada. In that role, Mike led several large transformation projects that covered core infrastructure, applications, and services and worked closely with and aligned vendors and partners. The results were seamless and transparent migrations to current services, like public cloud, and a completely revamped end-user landscape that allowed for and supported a fully remote workforce.

    Prior to ADP, Mike was the North American Head of Engineering and Service Offerings for a large French IT services firm, with a focus on cloud adoption and complex ERP deployment and management; he managed large, diverse global teams and had responsibilities for end-to-end P&L management.

    Mike holds a Bachelor's degree in Architecture from Ryerson University.



    Photo of Carlene McCubbin
    Carlene McCubbin
    Practice Lead, People and Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Carlene McCubbin is a Research Lead for the CIO Advisory Practice at Info-Tech Research Group covering key topics in operating models & design, governance, and human capital development.

    During her tenure at Info-Tech, Carlene has led the development of Info-Tech's Organization and Leadership practice and worked with multiple clients to leverage the methodologies by creating custom programs to fit each organization's needs.

    Before joining Info-Tech, Carlene received her Master of Communications Management from McGill University, where she studied development of internal and external communications, government relations, and change management. Her education honed her abilities in rigorous research, data analysis, writing, and understanding the organization holistically, which has served her well in the business IT world.



    Photo of Anubhav Sharma
    Anubhav Sharma
    Research Director, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Anubhav is a digital strategy and execution professional with extensive experience in leading large-scale transformation mandates for organizations both in North America and globally, including defining digital strategies for leading banks and spearheading a large-scale transformation project for a global logistics pioneer across ten countries. Prior to joining Info-Tech Research Group, he held several industry and consulting positions in Fortune 500 companies driving their business and technology strategies. In 2023, he was recognized as a "Top 50 Digital Innovator in Banking" by industry peers.

    Anubhav holds an MBA in Strategy from HEC Paris, a Master's degree in Finance from IIT-Delhi, and a Bachelor's degree in Engineering.



    Photo of Kim Osborne-Rodriguez
    Kim Osborne-Rodriguez
    Research Director, CIO Strategy
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Kim is a professional engineer and Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) with over a decade of experience in management and engineering consulting spanning healthcare, higher education, and commercial sectors. She has worked on some of the largest hospital construction projects in Canada, from early visioning and IT strategy through to design, specifications, and construction administration. She brings a practical and evidence-based approach to digital transformation, with a track record of supporting successful implementations.

    Kim holds a Bachelor's degree in Mechatronics Engineering from University of Waterloo.



    Photo of Amanda Mathieson
    Amanda Mathieson
    Research Director, People and Leadership
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Amanda joined Info-Tech Research Group in 2019 and brings twenty years of expertise working in Canada, the US, and globally. Her expertise in leadership development, organizational change management, and performance and talent management comes from her experience in various industries spanning pharmaceutical, retail insurance, and financial services. She takes a practical, experiential approach to people and leadership development that is grounded in adult learning methodologies and leadership theory. She is passionate about identifying and developing potential talent, as well as ensuring the success of leaders as they transition into more senior roles.

    Amanda has a Bachelor of Commerce degree and Master of Arts in Organization and Leadership Development from Fielding Graduate University, as well as a post-graduate diploma in Adult Learning Methodologies from St. Francis Xavier University. She also has certifications in Emotional Intelligence – EQ-i 2.0 & 360, Prosci ADKAR® Change Management, and Myers-Briggs Type Indicator Step I and II.

    Bibliography

    Bacey, Christopher. "KPMG/Harvey Nash CIO Survey finds most organizations lack enterprise-wide digital strategy." Harvey Nash/KPMG CIO Survey. Accessed Jan. 6, 2023. KPMG News Perspective - KPMG.us.com

    Calvert, Wu-Pong Susanna. "The Importance of Rapport. Five tips for creating conversational reciprocity." Psychology Today Magazine. June 30, 2022. Accessed Feb. 10, 2023. psychologytoday.com/blog

    Coaches Council. "14 Ways to Build More Meaningful Professional Relationships." Forbes Magazine. September 16, 2020. Accessed Feb. 20, 2023. forbes.com/forbescoachescouncil

    Council members. "How to Build Authentic Business Relationships." Forbes Magazine. June 15, 2021. Accessed Jan. 15, 2023. Forbes.com/business council

    Deloitte. "Chief Information Officer (CIO) Labs. Transform and advance the role of the CIO." The CIO program. Accessed Feb. 5, 2021.

    Dharsarathy, Anusha et al. "The CIO challenge: Modern business needs a new kind of tech leader." McKinsey and Company. January 27, 2020. Accessed Feb 2023. Mckinsey.com

    DiSC profile. "What is DiSC?" DiSC Profile Website. Accessed Feb. 5, 2023. discprofile.com

    FIRO Assessment. "Better working relationships". Myers Brigg Website. Resource document downloaded Feb. 10, 2023. myersbriggs.com/article

    Fripp, Patricia. "Frippicisms." Website. Accessed Feb. 25, 2023. fripp.com

    Grossman, Rhys. "The Rise of the Chief Digital Officer." Russell Reynolds Insights, January 1, 2012. Accessed Jan. 5, 2023. Rise of the Chief Digital Officer - russellreynolds.com

    Kambil, Ajit. "Influencing stakeholders: Persuade, trade, or compel." Deloitte Article. August 9, 2017. Accessed Feb. 19, 2023. www2.deloitte.com/insights

    Kambil, Ajit. "Navigating the C-suite: Managing Stakeholder Relationships." Deloitte Article. March 8, 2017. Accessed Feb. 19, 2023. www2.deloitte.com/insights

    Korn Ferry. "Age and tenure in the C-suite." Kornferry.com. Accessed Jan. 6, 2023. Korn Ferry Study Reveals Trends by Title and Industry

    Kumthekar, Uday. "Communication Channels in Project". Linkedin.com, 3 March 2020. Accessed April 27, 2023. Linkedin.com/Pulse/Communication Channels

    McWilliams, Allison. "Why You Need Effective Relationships at Work." Psychology Today Magazine. May 5, 2022. Accessed Feb. 11, 2023. psychologytoday.com/blog

    McKinsey & Company. "Why do most transformations fail? A conversation with Harry Robinson." Transformation Practice. July 2019. Accessed Jan. 10, 2023. Mckinsey.com

    Mind Tools Content Team. "Building Good Work Relationships." MindTools Article. Accessed Feb. 11, 2023. mindtools.com/building good work relationships

    Pratt, Mary. "Why the CIO-CFO relationship is key to digital success." TechTarget Magazine. November 11, 2021. Accessed Feb. 2023. Techtarget.com

    LaMountain, Dennis. "Quote of the Week: No Involvement, No Commitment". Linkedin.com, 3 April 2016. Accessed April 27, 2023. Linkedin.com/pulse/quote-week-involvement

    PwC Pulse Survey. "Managing Business Risks". PwC Library. 2022. Accessed Jan. 30, 2023. pwc.com/pulse-survey

    Rowell, Darin. "3 Traits of a Strong Professional Relationship." Harvard Business Review. August 8, 2019. Accessed Feb. 20, 2023. hbr.org/2019/Traits of a strong professional relationship

    Sinek, Simon. "The Optimism Company from Simon Sinek." Website. Image Source. Accessed, Feb. 21, 2023. simonsinek.com

    Sinek, Simon. "There are only two ways to influence human behavior: you can manipulate it or you can inspire it." Twitter. Dec 9, 2022. Accessed Feb. 20, 2023. twitter.com/simonsinek

    Whitbourne, Susan Krauss. "10 Ways to Measure the Health of Relationship." Psychology Today Magazine. Aug. 7, 2021. Accessed Jan. 30, 2023. psychologytoday.com/blog

    Enterprise Network Design Considerations

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}502|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Network Management
    • Parent Category Link: /network-management

    Security, risk, and trust models play into how networks are designed and deployed. If these models are not considered during network design, band-aids and workarounds will be deployed to achieve the needed goals, potentially bypassing network controls.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    The cloud “gold rush” has made it attractive for many enterprises to migrate services off the traditional network and into the cloud. These services are now outside of the traditional network and associated controls. This shifts the split of east-west vs. north-south traffic patterns, as well as extending the network to encompass services outside of enterprise IT’s locus of control.

    Impact and Result

    Where users access enterprise data or services and from which devices dictate the connectivity needed. With the increasing shift of work that the business is completing remotely, not all devices and data paths will be under the control of IT. This shift does not allow IT to abdicate from the responsibility to provide a secure network.

    Enterprise Network Design Considerations Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Enterprise Network Design Considerations Deck – A brief deck that outlines key trusts and archetypes when considering enterprise network designs.

    This blueprint will help you:

    • Enterprise Network Design Considerations Storyboard

    2. Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool – Build an infrastructure assessment in an hour.

    Dispense with detailed analysis and customizations to present a quick snapshot of the road ahead.

    • Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Enterprise Network Design Considerations

    It is not just about connectivity.

    Executive Summary

    Info-Tech Insight

    Connectivity and security are tightly coupled

    Security, risk, and trust models play into how networks are designed and deployed. If these models are not considered during network design, band-aids and workarounds will be deployed to achieve the needed goals, potentially bypassing network controls.

    Many services are no longer within the network

    The cloud “gold rush” has made it attractive for many enterprises to migrate services off the traditional network and into the cloud. These services are now outside of the traditional network and associated controls. This shifts the split of east-west vs. north-south traffic patterns, as well as extending the network to encompass services outside of enterprise IT’s locus of control.

    Users are demanding an anywhere, any device access model

    Where users access enterprise data or services and from which devices dictate the connectivity needed. With the increasing shift of work that the business is completing remotely, not all devices and data paths will be under the control of IT. This shift does not allow IT to abdicate from the responsibility to provide a secure network.

    Enterprise networks are changing

    The new network reality

    The enterprise network of 2020 and beyond is changing:

    • Services are becoming more distributed.
    • The number of services provided “off network” is growing.
    • Users are more often remote.
    • Security threats are rapidly escalating.

    The above statements are all accurate for enterprise networks, though each potentially to differing levels depending on the business being supported by the network. Depending on how affected the network in question currently is and will be in the near future, there are different common network archetypes that are best able to address these concerns while delivering business value at an appropriate price point.

    High-Level Design Considerations

    1. Understand Business Needs
    2. Understand what the business needs are and where users and resources are located.

    3. Define Your Trust Model
    4. Trust is a spectrum and tied tightly to security.

    5. Align With an Archetype
    6. How will the network be deployed?

    7. Understand Available Tooling
    8. What tools are in the market to help achieve design principles?

    Understand business needs

    Mission

    Never ignore the basics. Start with revisiting the mission and vision of the business to address relevant needs.

    Users

    Identify where users will be accessing services from. Remote vs. “on net” is a design consideration now more than ever.

    Resources

    Identify required resources and their locations, on net vs. cloud.

    Controls

    Identify required controls in order to define control points and solutions.

    Define a trust model

    Trust is a spectrum

    • There is a spectrum of trust, from fully trusted to not trusted at all. Each organization must decide for their network (or each area thereof) the appropriate level of trust to assign.
    • The ease of network design and deployment is directly proportional to the trust spectrum.
    • When resources and users are outside of direct IT control, the level of appropriate trust should be examined closely.

    Implicit

    Trust everything within the network. Security is perimeter based and designed to stop external actors from entering the large trusted zone.

    Controlled

    Multiple zones of trust within the network. Segmentation is a standard practice to separate areas of higher and lower trust.

    Zero

    Verify trust. The network is set up to recognize and support the principle of least privilege where only required access is supported.

    Align with an archetype

    Archetypes are a good guide

    • Using a defined archetype as a guiding principle in network design can help clarify appropriate tools or network structures.
    • Different aspects of a network can have different archetypes where appropriate (e.g. IT vs. OT [operational technology] networks).

    Traditional

    Services are provided from within the traditional network boundaries and security is provided at the network edge.

    Hybrid

    Services are provided both externally and from within the traditional network boundaries, and security is primarily at the network edge.

    Inverted

    Services are provided primarily externally, and security is cloud centric.

    Traditional networks

    Resources within network boundaries

    Moat and castle security perimeter

    Abstract

    A traditional network is one in which there are clear boundaries defined by a security perimeter. Trust can be applied within the network boundaries as appropriate, and traffic is generally routed through internally deployed control points that may be centralized. Traditional networks commonly include large firewalls and other “big iron” security and control devices.

    Network Design Tenets

    • The full network path from resource to user is designed, deployed, and controlled by IT.
    • Users external to the network must first connect to the network to gain access to resources.
    • Security, risk, and trust controls will be implemented by internal enterprise hardware/software devices.

    Control

    In the traditional network, it is assumed that all required control points can be adequately deployed across hardware/software that is “on prem” and under the control of central IT.

    Info-Tech Insight

    With increased cloud services provided to end users, this network is now more commonly used in data centers or OT networks.

    Traditional networks

    The image contains an example of what traditional networks look like, as described in the text below.

    Defining Characteristics

    • Traffic flows in a defined path under the control of IT to and from central IT resources.
    • Due to visibility into, and the control of, the traffic between the end user and resources, IT can relatively simply implement the required security controls on owned hardware.

    Common Components

    • Traditional offices
    • Remote users/road warriors
    • Private data center/colocation space

    Hybrid networks

    Resources internal and external to network

    Network security perimeter combined with cloud protection

    Abstract

    A hybrid network is one that combines elements of a traditional network with cloud resources. As some of these resources are not fully under the control of IT and may be completely “offnet” or loosely coupled to the on-premises network, the security boundaries and control points are less likely to be centralized. Hybrid networks allow the flexibility and speed of cloud deployment without leaving behind traditional network constructs. This generally makes them expensive to secure and maintain.

    Network Design Tenets

    • The network path from resource to user may not be in IT’s locus of control.
    • Users external to the network must first connect to the network to gain access to internal resources but may directly access publicly hosted ones.
    • Security, risk, and trust controls may potentially be implemented by a mixture of internal enterprise hardware/software devices and external control points.

    Control

    The hallmark of a hybrid network is the blending of public and private resources. This blending tends to necessitate both public and private points of control that may not be homogenous.

    Info-Tech Insight

    With multiple control points to address, take care in simplifying designs while addressing all concerns to ease operational load.

    Hybrid networks

    The image contains an example of what hybrid networks look like, as described in the text below.

    Defining Characteristics

    • Traffic flows to central resources across a defined path under the control of IT.
    • Traffic to cloud assets may be partially under the control of IT.
    • For central resources, the traffic to and from the end user can have the required security controls relatively simply implemented on owned hardware.
    • For public cloud assets, IT may or may not have some control over part of the path.

    Common Components

    • Traditional offices
    • Remote users/road warriors
    • Private data center/colocation space
    • Public cloud assets (IaaS/PaaS/SaaS)

    Inverted perimeter

    Resources primarily external to the network

    Security control points are cloud centric

    Abstract

    An inverted perimeter network is one in which security and control points cover the entire workflow, on or off net, from the consumer of services through to the services themselves with zero trust. Since the control plane is designed to encompass the workflow in a secure manner, much of the underlying connectivity can be abstracted. In an extreme version of this deployment, IT would abstract end-user access, and any cloud-based or on-premises resources would be securely published through the control plane with context-aware precision access.

    Network Design Tenets

    • The network path from resource to user is abstracted and controlled by IT through services like secure access service edge (SASE).
    • Users only need internet access and appropriate credentials to gain access to resources.
    • Security, risk, and trust controls will be implemented through external cloud based services.

    Control

    An inverted network abstracts the lower-layer connectivity away and focuses on implementing a cloud-based zero trust control plane.

    Info-Tech Insight

    This model is extremely attractive for organizations that consume primarily cloud services and have a large remote work force.

    Inverted networks

    The image contains an example of what inverted networks look like, as described in the text below.

    Defining Characteristics

    • The end user does not have to be in a defined location.
    • All central resources that are to be accessed are hosted on cloud resources.
    • IT has little to no control of the path between the end user and central resources.

    Common Components

    • Traditional offices
    • Regent offices/shared workspaces
    • Remote users/road warriors
    • Public cloud assets (IaaS/PaaS/SaaS)

    Understand available tooling

    Don’t buy a hammer and go looking for nails

    • A network archetype must be defined in order to understand what tools (hardware or software) are appropriate for consideration in a network build or refresh.
    • Tools are purpose built and generally designed to solve specific problems if implemented and operated correctly. Choose the tools to align with the challenges that you are solving as opposed to choosing tools and then trying to use those purchases to overcome challenges.
    • The purchase of a tool does not allow for abdication of proper design. Tools must be chosen appropriately and integrated properly to orchestrate the best solutions. Purchasing a tool and expecting the tool to solve all your issues rarely succeeds.

    “It is essential to have good tools, but it is also essential that the tools should be used in the right way.” — Wallace D. Wattles

    Software-defined WAN (SD-WAN)

    Simplified branch office connectivity

    Archetype Value: Traditional Networks

    What It Is Not

    SD-WAN is generally not a way to slash spending by lowering WAN circuit costs. Though it is traditionally deployed across lower cost access, to minimize risk and realize the most benefits from the platform many organizations install multiple circuits with greater bandwidths at each endpoint when replacing the more costly traditional circuits. Though this maximizes the value of the technology investment, it will result in the end cost being similar to the traditional cost plus or minus a small percentage.

    What It Is

    SD-WAN is a subset of software-defined networking (SDN) designed specifically to deploy a secure, centrally managed, connectivity agnostic, overlay network connecting multiple office locations. This technology can be used to replace, work in concert with, or augment more traditional costly connectivity such as MPLS or private point to point (PtP) circuits. In addition to the secure overlay, SD-WAN usually also enables policy-based, intelligent controls, based on traffic and circuit intelligence.

    Why Use It

    You have multiple endpoint locations connected by expensive lower bandwidth traditional circuits. Your target is to increase visibility and control while controlling costs if and where possible. Ease of centralized management and the ability to more rapidly turn up new locations are attractive.

    Cloud access security broker (CASB)

    Inline policy enforcement placed between users and cloud services

    Archetype Value: Hybrid Networks

    What It Is Not

    CASBs do not provide network protection; they are designed to provide compliance and enforcement of rules. Though CASBs are designed to give visibility and control into cloud traffic, they have limits to the data that they generally ingest and utilize. A CASB does not gather or report on cloud usage details, licencing information, financial costing, or whether the cloud resource usage is aligned with the deployment purpose.

    What It Is

    A CASB is designed to establish security controls beyond a company’s environment. It is commonly deployed to augment traditional solutions to extend visibility and control into the cloud. To protect assets in the cloud, CASBs are designed to provide central policy control and apply services primarily in the areas of visibility, data security, threat protection, and compliance.

    Why Use It

    You a mixture of on-premises and cloud assets. In moving assets out to the cloud, you have lost the traditional controls that were implemented in the data center. You now need to have visibility and apply controls to the usage of these cloud assets.

    Secure access service edge (SASE)

    Convergence of security and service access in the cloud

    Archetype Value: Inverted Networks

    What It Is Not

    Though the service will consist of many service offerings, SASE is not multiple services strung together. To present the value proposed by this platform, all functionality proposed must be provided by a single platform under a “single pane of glass.” SASE is not a mature and well-established service. The market is still solidifying, and the full-service definition remains somewhat fluid.

    What It Is

    SASE exists at the intersection of network-as-a-service and network-security-as-a-service. It is a superset of many network and security cloud offerings such as CASB, secure web gateway, SD-WAN, and WAN optimization. Any services offered by a SASE provider will be cloud hosted, presented in a single stack, and controlled through a single pane of glass.

    Why Use It

    Your network is inverting, and services are provided primarily as cloud assets. In a full realization of this deployment’s value, you would abstract how and where users gain initial network access yet remain in control of the communications and data flow.

    Activity

    Understand your enterprise network options

    Activity: Network assessment in an hour

    • Learn about the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool
    • Complete the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool

    This activity involves the following participants:

    • IT strategic direction decision makers.
    • IT managers responsible for network.
    • Organizations evaluating platforms for mission critical applications.

    Outcomes of this step:

    • Completed Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool

    Info-Tech Insight

    Review your design options with security and compliance in mind. Infrastructure is no longer a standalone entity and now tightly integrates with software-defined networks and security solutions.

    Build an assessment in an hour

    Learn about the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool.

    This workbook provides a high-level analysis of a technology’s readiness for adoption based on your organization’s needs.

    • The workbook then places the technology on a graph that measures both the readiness and fit for your organization. In addition, it provides warnings for specific issues and lets you know if you have considerable uncertainty in your answers.
    • At a glance you can now communicate what you are doing to help the company:
      • Grow
      • Save money
      • Reduce risk
    • Regardless of your specific audience, these are important stories to be able to tell.
    The image contains three screenshots from the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool.

    Build an assessment in an hour

    Complete the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool.

    Dispense with detailed analysis and customizations to present a quick snapshot of the road ahead.

    1. Weightings: Adjust the Weighting tab to meet organizational needs. The provided weightings for the overall solution areas are based on a generic firm; individual firms will have different needs.
    2. Data Entry: For each category, answer the questions for the technology you are considering. When you have completed the questionnaire, go to the next tab for the results.
    3. Results: The Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool provides a value versus readiness assessment of your chosen technology customized to your organization.

    The image contains three screenshots from the Enterprise Network Roadmap Technology Assessment Tool. It has a screenshot for each step as described in the text above.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Effectively Acquire Infrastructure Services

    Acquiring a service is like buying an experience. Don’t confuse the simplicity of buying hardware with buying an experience.

    Outsource IT Infrastructure to Improve System Availability, Reliability, and Recovery

    There are very few IT infrastructure components you should be housing internally – outsource everything else.

    Build Your Infrastructure Roadmap

    Move beyond alignment: Put yourself in the driver’s seat for true business value.

    Drive Successful Sourcing Outcomes With a Robust RFP Process

    Leverage your vendor sourcing process to get better results.

    Research Authors

    The image contains a photo of Scott Young.

    Scott Young, Principal Research Advisor, Info-Tech Research Group

    Scott Young is a Director of Infrastructure Research at Info-Tech Research Group. Scott has worked in the technology field for over 17 years, with a strong focus on telecommunications and enterprise infrastructure architecture. He brings extensive practical experience in these areas of specialization, including IP networks, server hardware and OS, storage, and virtualization.

    The image contains a photo of Troy Cheeseman.

    Troy Cheeseman, Practice Lead, Info-Tech Research Group

    Troy has over 24 years of experience and has championed large enterprise-wide technology transformation programs, remote/home office collaboration and remote work strategies, BCP, IT DRP, IT operations and expense management programs, international right placement initiatives, and large technology transformation initiatives (M&A). Additionally, he has deep experience working with IT solution providers and technology (cloud) startups.

    Bibliography

    Ahlgren, Bengt. “Design considerations for a network of information.” ACM Digital Library, 21 Dec. 2008.

    Cox Business. “Digital transformation is here. Is your business ready to upgrade your mobile work equation?” BizJournals, 1 April 2022. Accessed April 2022.

    Elmore, Ed. “Benefits of integrating security and networking with SASE.” Tech Radar, 1 April 2022. Web.

    Greenfield, Dave. “From SD-WAN to SASE: How the WAN Evolution is Progressing.” Cato Networks, 19 May 2020. Web

    Korolov, Maria. “What is SASE? A cloud service that marries SD-WAN with security.” Network World, 7 Sept. 2020. Web.

    Korzeniowski, Paul, “CASB tools evolve to meet broader set of cloud security needs.” TechTarget, 26 July 2019. Accessed March 2022.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}218|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Vendor Management
    • Parent Category Link: /vendor-management
    • As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.
    • It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.
    • Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Impact and Result

    • Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.
    • Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.
    • Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.
    • Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impact on Your Organization Deck – Use the research to better understand the negative financial impacts of vendor actions.

    Use this research to identify and quantify the potential financial impacts of vendors’ poor performance. Use Info-Tech’s approach to look at the financial impact from various perspectives to better prepare for issues that may arise.

    • Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization Storyboard

    2. “What If” Financial Risk Impact Tool – Use this tool to help identify and quantify the financial impacts of negative vendor actions.

    By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    • Financial Risk Impact Tool
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Identify and Manage Financial Risk Impacts on Your Organization

    Good vendor management practices help organizations understand the costs of negative vendor actions.

    Analyst Perspective

    Vendor actions can have significant financial consequences for your organization.

    Photo of Frank Sewell, Research Director, Vendor Management, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Vendors are becoming more influential and essential to the operation of organizations. Often the sole risk consideration of a business is whether the vendor meets a security standard, but vendors can negatively impact organizations’ budgets in various ways. Fortunately, though inherent risk is always present, organizations can offset the financial impacts of high-risk vendors by employing due diligence in their vendor management practices to help manage the overall risks.

    Frank Sewell
    Research Director, Vendor Management
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge

    As vendors become more prevalent in organizations, organizations increasingly need to understand and manage the potential financial impacts of vendors’ actions.

    It is only a matter of time until a vendor mistake impacts your organization. Make sure you are prepared to manage the adverse financial consequences.

    Common Obstacles

    Identifying and managing a vendor’s potential financial impact requires multiple people in the organization across several functions – and those people all need educating on the potential risks.

    Organizational leadership is often unaware of decisions on organizational risk appetite and tolerance, and they assume there are more protections in place against risk impact than there truly are.

    Info-Tech’s Approach

    Vendor management practices educate organizations on the different potential financial impacts that vendors may incur and suggest systems to help manage them.

    Prioritize and classify your vendors with quantifiable, standardized rankings.

    Prioritize focus on your high-risk vendors.

    Standardize your processes for identifying and monitoring vendor risks to manage financial impacts with our Financial Risk Impact Tool.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Companies without good vendor management risk initiatives will take on more risk than they should. Solid vendor management practices are imperative –organizations must evolve to ensure that vendors deliver services according to performance objectives and that risks are managed accordingly.

    Info-Tech’s multi-blueprint series on vendor risk assessment

    There are many individual components of vendor risk beyond cybersecurity.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and individual components of vendor risk branching off of it: 'Financial', 'Reputational', 'Operational', 'Strategic', 'Security', and 'Regulatory & Compliance'.

    This series will focus on the individual components of vendor risk and how vendor management practices can facilitate organizations’ understanding of those risks.

    Out of scope:
    This series will not tackle risk governance, determining overall risk tolerance and appetite, or quantifying inherent risk.

    Financial risk impact

    Potential losses to the organization due to financial risks

    In this blueprint, we’ll explore financial risks and their impacts.

    Identifying negative actions is paramount to assessing the overall financial impact on your organization, starting in the due diligence phase of the vendor assessment and continuing throughout the vendor lifecycle.

    Cube with each multiple colors on each face, similar to a Rubix cube, and the vendor risk component 'Financial' highlighted.

    Unbudgeted financial risk impact

    The costs of adverse vendor actions, such as a breach or an outage, are increasing. By knowing these potential costs, leaders can calculate how to avoid them throughout the lifecycle of the relationship.

    Loss of business represents the largest share of the breach

    38%

    Avg. $1.59M
    Global average cost of a vendor breach

    $4.2M

    Percentage of breaches in 2020 caused by business associates

    40.2%

    23.2% YoY
    (year over year)
    (Source: “Cost of a Data Breach Report 2021,” IBM, 2021) (Source: “Vendor Risk Management – A Growing Concern,” Stern Security, 2021)

    Example: Hospital IT System Outage

    Hospitals often rely on vendors to manage their data center environments but rarely understand the downstream financial impacts if that vendor fails to perform.

    For example, a vendor implements a patch out of cycle with no notice to the IT group. Suddenly all IT systems are down. It takes 12 hours for the IT teams to return systems to normal. The downstream impacts are substantial.

    • There is no revenue capture during outage (patient registration, payments).
      • The financial loss is significant, impacting cash on hand and jeopardizing future projects.
    • Clinicians cannot access the electronic health record (EHR) system and shift to downtime paper processes.
      • This can cause potential risks to patient health, such as unknown drug interactions.
      • This could also incur lawsuits, fines, and penalties.
    • Staff must manually add the paper records into the EHR after the incident is corrected.
      • Staff time is lost on creating paper records and overtime is required to reintroduce those records into EMR.
    • Staff time and overtime pay on troubleshooting and solving issues take away from normal operations and could cause delays, having downstream effects on the timing of other projects.

    Insight Summary

    Assessing financial impacts is an ongoing, educative, and collaborative multidisciplinary process that vendor management initiatives are uniquely designed to coordinate and manage for organizations.

    Insight 1 Vendors are becoming more and more crucial to organizations’ overall operations, and most organizations have a poor understanding of the potential impacts they represent.

    Is your vendor solvent? Do they have enough staff to accommodate your needs? Has their long-term planning been affected by changes in the market? Are they unique in their space?

    Insight 2 Financial impacts from other risk types deserve just as much focus as security alone, if not more.

    Examples include penalties and fines, loss of revenue due to operational impacts, vendor replacement costs, hidden costs in poorly understood contracts, and lack of contractual protections.

    Insight 3 There is always an inherent risk in working with a vendor, but organizations should financially quantify how much each risk may impact their budget.

    A significant concern for organizations is quantifying different types of risks. When a risk occurs, the financial losses are often poorly understood, with unbudgeted financial impacts.

    Three stages of vendor financial risk assessment

    Assess risk throughout the complete vendor lifecycle

    1. Pre-Relationship Due Diligence: The initial pre-relationship due diligence stage is a crucial point to establish risk management practices. Vendor management practices ensure that a potential vendor’s risk is categorized correctly by facilitating the process of risk assessment.
    2. Monitor & Manage: Once the relationship is in place, organizations should enact ongoing management efforts to ensure they are both getting their value from the vendor and appropriately addressing any newly identified risks.
    3. Termination: When the termination of the relationship arrives, the organization should validate that adequate protections that were established while forming a contract in the pre-relationship stage remain in place.

    Inherent risks from negative actions are pervasive throughout the entire vendor lifecycle. Collaboratively understanding those risks and working together to put proper management in place enables organizations to get the most value out of the relationship with the least amount of risk.

    Flowchart for 'Assessing Financial Risk Impacts', beginning with 'New Vendor' to 'Sourcing' to the six components of 'Vendor Management'. After a gamut of assessments such as ''What If' Game' one can either 'Accept' to move on to 'Pre-Relationship', 'Monitor & Manage', and eventually to 'Termination', or not accept and circle back to 'Sourcing'.

    Stage 1: Pre-relationship assessment

    Do these as part of your due diligence

    • Review and negotiate contract terms and conditions.
      • Ensure that you have the protections to make you whole in the event of an incident, in the event that another entity purchases the vendor, and throughout the entire lifecycle of your relationship with the vendor.
      • Make sure to negotiate your post-termination protections in the initial agreement.
    • Perform a due-diligence financial assessment.
      • Make sure the vendor is positioned in the market to be able to service your organization.
    • Perform an initial risk assessment.
      • Identify and understand all potential factors that may cause financial impacts to your organization.
      • Include total cost of ownership (TCO) and return of investment (ROI) as potential impact offsets.
    • Review case studies – talk to other customers.
      • Research who else has worked with the vendor to get “the good, the bad, and the ugly” stories to form a clear picture of a potential relationship with the vendor.
    • Use proofs of concept.
      • It is essential to know how the vendor and their solutions will work in the environment before committing resources and to incorporate them into organizational strategic plans.
    • Limit vendors’ ability to increase costs over the years. It is not uncommon for a long-term relationship to become more expensive than a new one over time when the increases are unmanaged.
    • Vendor audits can be costly and a significant distraction to your staff. Make sure to contractually limit them.
    • Many vendors enjoy significant revenue from unclear deliverables and vague expectations that lead to change requests at unknown rates – clarifying expectations and deliverables and demanding negotiated rate sheets before engagement will save budget and strengthen the relationship.

    Visit Info-Tech’s VMO ROI Calculator and Tracker

    The “what if” game

    1-3 hours

    Input: List of identified potential risk scenarios scored by likelihood and financial impact, List of potential management of the scenarios to reduce the risk

    Output: Comprehensive financial risk profile on the specific vendor solution

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Financial Risk Impact Tool to help drive discussion

    Participants: Vendor Management – Coordinator, IT Operations, Legal/Compliance/Risk Manager, Finance/Procurement

    Vendor management professionals are in an excellent position to collaboratively pull together resources across the organization to determine potential risks. By playing the “what if” game and asking probing questions to draw out – or eliminate – possible negative outcomes, everyone involved adds their insight into parts of the organization to gather a comprehensive picture of potential impacts.

    1. Break into smaller groups (or if too small, continue as a single group).
    2. Use the Financial Risk Impact Tool to prompt discussion on potential risks. Keep this discussion flowing organically to explore all potential risks but manage the overall process to keep the discussion on track.
    3. Collect the outputs and ask the subject matter experts for management options for each one in order to present a comprehensive risk strategy. You will use this to educate senior leadership so that they can make an informed decision to accept or reject the solution.

    Download the Financial Risk Impact Tool

    Stage 2.1: Monitor the financial risk

    Ongoing monitoring activities

    Never underestimate the value of keeping the relationship moving forward.

    Examples of items and activities to monitor include;

    Stock photo of a worker being trained on a computer.
    • Fines
    • Data leaks
    • Performance
    • Credit monitoring
    • Viability/solvency
    • Resource capacity
    • Operational impacts
    • Regulatory penalties
    • Increases in premiums
    • Security breaches (infrastructure)

    Info-Tech Insight

    Many organizations do not have the resources to dedicate to annual risk assessments of all vendors.

    Consider timing ongoing risk assessments to align with contract renewal, when you have the most leverage with the vendor.

    Visit Info-Tech’s Risk Register Tool

    Stage 2.2: Manage the financial risk

    During the lifecycle of the vendor relationship

    • Renew risk assessments annually.
    • Focus your efforts on highly ranked risks.
    • Is there a new opportunity to negotiate?
    • Identify and classify individual vendor risk.
    • Are there better existing contracts in place?
    • Review financial health checks at the same time.
    • Monitor and schedule contract renewals and new service/module negotiations.
    • Perform business alignment meetings to reassess the relationship.
    • Ongoing operational meetings should be supplemental, dealing with day-to-day issues.
    • Develop performance metrics and hold vendors accountable to established service levels.
    Stock image of a professional walking an uneven line over the words 'Risk Management'.

    Stage 3: Termination

    An essential and often overlooked part of the vendor lifecycle is the relationship after termination

    • The risk of a vendor keeping your data for “as long as they want” is high.
      • Data retention becomes a “forever risk” in today’s world of cyber issues if you do not appropriately plan.
    • Ensure that you always know where data resides and where people are allowed to access that data.
      • If there is a regulatory need to house data only in specific locations, ensure that it is explicit in agreements.
    • Protect your data through language in initial agreements that covers what needs to happen when the relationship with the vendor terminates.
      • Typically, all the data that the vendor has retained is returned and/or destroyed at your sole discretion.
    Stock image of a sign reading 'Closure'.

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock photo of two co-workers laughing. Design and Build an Effective Contract Lifecycle Management Process
    • Achieve measurable savings in contract time processing, financial risk avoidance, and dollar savings
    • Understand how to identify and mitigate risk to save the organization time and money.
    Stock image of reports and file folders. Identify and Reduce Agile Contract Risk
    • Manage Agile contract risk by selecting the appropriate level of protections for an Agile project.
    • Focus on the correct contract clauses to manage Agile risk.
    Stock photo of three co-workers gathered around a computer screen. Jump Start Your Vendor Management Initiative
    • Vendor management must be an IT strategy. Solid vendor management is an imperative – IT organizations must develop capabilities to ensure that services are delivered by vendors according to service level objectives and that risks are mitigated according to the organization's risk tolerance.
    • Gain visibility into your IT vendor community. Understand how much you spend with each vendor and rank their criticality and risk to focus on the vendors you should be concentrating on for innovative solutions.

    Contact Tymans Group

    We're here to get your IT Operations performant and resilient

    We have the highest respect for your person. We contact you only with responses to your questions. Our company ethics insist on transparency and honesty.

    Continue reading

    Project Management

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}48|cart{/j2store}
    • Related Products: {j2store}48|crosssells{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 9.7/10
    • member rating average dollars saved: $303,499
    • member rating average days saved: 42
    • Parent Category Name: Project Portfolio Management and Projects
    • Parent Category Link: /ppm-and-projects

    The challenge

    • Ill-defined or even lack of upfront project planning will increase the perception that your IT department cannot deliver value because most projects will go over time and budget.
    • The perception is those traditional ways of delivering projects via the PMBOK only increase overhead and do not have value. This is less due to the methodology and more to do with organizations trying to implement best-practices that far exceed their current capabilities.
    • Typical best-practices are too clinical in their approach and place unrealistic burdens on IT departments. They fail to address the daily difficulties faces by staff and are not sized to fit your organization.
    • Take a flexible approach and ensure that your management process is a cultural and capacity fit for your organization. Take what fits from these frameworks and embed them tailored into your company.

    Our advice

    Insight

    • The feather-touch is often the right touch. Ensure that you have a lightweight approach for most of your projects while applying more rigor to the more complex and high-risk developments.
    • Pick the right tools. Your new project management processes need the right tooling to be successful. Pick a tool that is flexible enough o accommodate projects of all sizes without imposing undue governance onto smaller projects.
    • Yes, take what fits within your company from frameworks, but there is no cherry-picking. Ensure your processes stay in context: If you do not inform for effective decision-making, all will be in vain. Develop your methods such that guide the way to big-picture decision taking and support effective portfolio management.

    Impact and results 

    • The right amount of upfront planning is a function of the type of projects you have and your company. The proper levels enable better scope statements, better requirements gathering, and increased business satisfaction.
    • An investment in a formal methodology is critical to projects of all sizes. An effective process results in more successful projects with excellent business value delivery.
    • When you have a repeatable and consistent approach to project planning and execution, you can better communicate between the IT project managers and decision-makers.
    • Better communication improves the visibility of the overall project activity within your company.

    The roadmap

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    Get started.

    Read our executive brief to understand why you should tailor project management practices to the type of projects you do and your company and review our methodology. We show you how we can support you.

    Lay the groundwork for project management success

    Assess your current capabilities to set the right level of governance.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 1: Lay the Groundwork for PM Success (ppt)
    • Project Management Triage Tool (xls)
    • COBIT BAI01 (Manage Programs and Projects) Alignment Workbook (xls)
    • Project Level Definition Matrix (xls)
    • Project Level Selection Tool (xls)
    • Project Level Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Project Management SOP Template (doc)

    Small project require a lightweight framework

    Increase small project's throughput.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 2: Build a Lightweight PM Process for Small Initiatives (ppt)
    • Level 1 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 1 Project Closure Checklist Template (doc)

    Build the standard process medium and large-scale projects

    The standard process contains fully featured initiation and planning.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 3: Establish Initiation and Planning Protocols for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Stakeholder and Impact Assessment Tool (xls)
    • Level 2 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Charter Template (doc)
    • Kick-Off Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Scope Statement Template (doc)
    • Project Staffing Plan(xls)
    • Communications Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Customer/Sponsor Project Status Meeting Template (doc)
    • Level 2 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Level 3 Project Status Report Template (doc)
    • Quality Management Workbook (xls)
    • Benefits Management Plan Template (xls)
    • Risk Management Workbook (xls)

    Build a standard process for the execution and closure of medium to large scale projects

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 4: Develop Execution and Closing Procedures for Medium-to-Large Projects (ppt)
    • Project Team Meeting Agenda Template (doc)
    • Light Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Detailed Project Change Request Form Template (doc)
    • Light Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Detailed Recommendation and Decision Tracking Log Template (xls)
    • Deliverable Acceptance Form Template (doc)
    • Handover to Operations Template (doc)
    • Post-Mortem Review Template (doc)
    • Final Sign-Off and Acceptance Form Template (doc)

    Implement your project management standard operating procedures (SOP)

    Develop roll-out and training plans, implement your new process and track metrics.

    • Tailor Project Management Processes to Fit Your Projects – Phase 5: Implement Your PM SOP (ppt)
    • Level 2 Project Management Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Process Costing Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Training Plan Template (doc)
    • Project Management Training Monitoring Tool (xls)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (MS Project)
    • Project Management Process Implementation Timeline Tool (xls)

     

     

    Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}583|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: 8.0/10 Overall Impact
    • member rating average dollars saved: $3,099 Average $ Saved
    • member rating average days saved: 4 Average Days Saved
    • Parent Category Name: Strategy & Operating Model
    • Parent Category Link: /strategy-and-operating-model
    • Traditional enterprise architecture management (EAM) caters to only 10% – the IT people, and not to the remaining 90% of the organization.
    • EAM practices do not scale well with the agile way of working and are often perceived as "bottlenecks” or “restrictors of design freedom.”
    • The organization scale does not justify a full-fledged EAM with many committees, complex processes, and detailed EA artifacts.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Architecture is a competency, not a function. Project teams, including even business managers outside of IT, can assimilate “architectural thinking.”

    Impact and Result

    Increase business value through the dissemination of architectural thinking throughout the organization. Maturing your EAM practices beyond a certain point does not help.

    Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Start here

    Improve benefits from your enterprise architecture efforts through the dissemination of architecture thinking throughout your organization.

    • Create Stakeholder-Centric Architecture Governance Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}168|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Endpoint Security
    • Parent Category Link: /endpoint-security
    • Threat actors are more innovative than ever before and developing sophisticated methods of endpoints attacks capable of avoiding detection with traditional legacy anti-virus software.
    • Legacy anti-virus solutions rely on signatures and hence fail at detecting memory objects, and new and mutating malware.
    • Combined with the cybersecurity talent gap and the sheer volume of endpoint attacks, organizations need endpoint security solutions capable of efficiently and accurately blocking never-before-seen malware types and variants.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    • Don’t make machine learning a goal in itself. Think of how machine learning can help you achieve your goals.
    • Determine your endpoint security requirements and goals prior to shopping around for a vendor. Vendors can easily suck you into a vortex of marketing jargon and sell you tools that your organization does not need.
    • Machine learning alone is not a solution to catching malware. It is a computational method that can generalize and analyze large datasets, and output insights quicker than a human security analyst.

    Impact and Result

    • Consider deploying an endpoint protection technology that leverages machine learning into your existing endpoint security strategy to counteract against the unknown and to quickly sift through the large volumes of data.
    • Understand how machine learning methods can help drive your organization’s security goals.
    • Identify vendors that utilize machine learning in their endpoint security products.
    • Understand use cases of where machine learning in endpoint security has been successful.

    Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions Research & Tools

    Start here – read the Executive Brief

    Read our concise Executive Brief to find out why you should consider machine learning in endpoint security solutions, review Info-Tech’s methodology, and understand the four ways we can support you in completing this project.

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Demystify machine learning concepts

    Understand basic machine learning concepts used in endpoint security.

    • Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions – Phase 1: Demystify Machine Learning Concepts

    2. Evaluate vendors that leverage machine learning

    Determine feature requirements to evaluate vendors.

    • Debunk Machine Learning Endpoint Security Solutions – Phase 2: Evaluate Vendors That Leverage Machine Learning
    • Endpoint Protection Request for Proposal
    [infographic]

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}487|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Service Desk
    • Parent Category Link: /service-desk

    The service desk is a major function within IT. Small enterprises with constrained resources need to look at designing a service desk that enables consistency in supporting the business and finds the right balance of documentation.

    Determining the right level of documentation to provide backup and getting the right level of data for good reporting may seem like a waste of time when the team is small, but this is key to knowing when to invest in more people, upgraded technology, and whether your efforts to improve service are successful.

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    It’s easy to lose sight of the client experience when working as a small team supporting a variety of end users. Changing from a help desk to a service desk requires a focus on what it means to be a customer centric service desk and a change to the way the technicians think about providing support.

    • Make the best use of the team. Clearly define roles and responsibilities and monitor those wearing multiple hats to make sure they don’t burn out.
    • Build cross training and documentation into your culture to preserve service levels while giving team members time off to recharge.
    • Don’t discount the benefit of good tools. As volume increases, so does the likelihood of issues and requests getting missed. Look for tools that will help to keep a customer focus.

    Impact and Result

    • Improved workload distribution for technicians and enable prioritization based on work type, urgency, and impact.
    • Improved communications methods and messaging will help the technicians to set expectations appropriately and reduce friction between each other and their supported end users.
    • Best practices and use of industry standard tools will reduce administrative overhead while improving workload management.

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Storyboard – A step-by-step guide to help you identify and prioritize initiatives to become more customer centric.

    This blueprint provides a framework to quickly identify a plan for service desk improvements. It also provides references to build out additional skills and functionality as a continual improvement initiative.

    • Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise Storyboard

    2. Maturity Assessment – An assessment to determine baseline maturity.

    The maturity assessment will provide a baseline and identify areas of focus based on level of current and target maturity.

    • IT Service Desk Maturity Assessment for Small Enterprise

    3. Standard Operating Procedure – A template to build out a clear, concise SOP right-sized for a small enterprise.

    The SOP provides an excellent guide to quickly inform new team members or contractors of your support approach.

    • Incident Management and Service Desk SOP for Small Enterprise

    4. Categorization Scheme – A template to build out an effective categorization scheme.

    The categorization scheme template provides examples of asset-based categories, resolution codes and status.

    • Service Desk Asset-Based Categories Template

    5. Improvement Plan – A template to present the improvement plan to stakeholders.

    This template provides a starting point for building your communications on planned improvements.

    • Service Desk Improvement Initiative
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Right-Size the Service Desk for Small Enterprise

    Turn your help desk into a customer-centric service desk.

    Analyst Perspective

    Small enterprises have many of the same issues as large ones, but with far fewer resources. Focus on the most important aspects to improve customer service.

    The service desk is a major function within IT. Small enterprises with constrained resources need to look at designing a service desk that enables consistency in supporting the business and finds the right balance of documentation.

    Evaluate documentation to ensure there is always redundancy built in to cover absences. Determining coverage will be an important factor, especially if vendors will be brought into the organization to assist during shortages. They will not have the same level of knowledge as teammates and may have different requirements for documentation.

    It is important to be customer centric, thinking about how services are delivered and communicated with a focus on providing self-serve at the appropriate level for your users and determining what information the business needs for expectation-setting and service level agreements, as well as communications on incidents and changes.

    And finally, don’t discount the value of good reporting. There are many reasons to document issues besides just knowing the volume of workload and may become more important as the organization evolves or grows. Stakeholder reporting, regulatory reporting, trend spotting, and staff increases are all good reasons to ensure minimum documentation standards are defined and in use.

    Photo of Sandi Conrad, Principal Research Director, Info-Tech Research Group. Sandi Conrad
    Principal Research Director
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Table of Contents

    Title Page Title Page
    Blueprint benefits 6 Incident management 25
    Start / Stop / Continue exercise 10 Prioritization scheme 27
    Complete a maturity assessment 11 Define SLAs 29
    Select an ITSM tool 13 Communications 30
    Define roles & responsibilities 15 Reporting 32
    Queue management 17 What can you do to improve? 33
    Ticket handling best practices 18 Staffing 34
    Customer satisfaction surveys 19 Knowledge base & self-serve 35
    Categorization 20 Customer service 36
    Separate ticket types 22 Ticket analysis 37
    Service requests 23 Problem management 38
    Roadmap 39

    Insight summary

    Help desk to service desk

    It’s easy to lose sight of the client experience when working as a small team supporting a variety of end users. Changing from a help desk to a service desk requires a focus on what it means to be a customer-centric service desk and a change to the way the technicians think about providing support.

    Make the best use of the team

    • Clearly define primary roles and responsibilities, and identify when and where escalations should occur.
    • Divide the work in a way that makes the most sense based on intake patterns and categories of incidents or service requests.
    • Recognize who is wearing multiple hats, and monitor to make sure they don’t burn out or struggle to keep up.
    • Determine the most appropriate areas to outsource based on work type and skills required.

    Build cross-training into your culture

    • Primary role holders need time off and need to know the day-to-day work won’t be waiting for them when they come back.
    • The knowledge base is your first line of defense to make sure incidents don’t have to wait for resolution and to avoid having technicians remote in on their day off.
    • When volumes spike for incidents and service requests, everyone needs to be prepared to pitch in. Train the team to recognize and step up to the call to action.

    Don’t discount the benefit of good tools

    • When volume increases, so does the likelihood of missing issues and requests.
    • Designate a single solution to manage the workload, so there is one place to go for work orders, incident reporting, asset data, and more.
    • Set up self-serve for users so they have access to how-to articles and can check the status of tickets themselves.
    • Create a service catalog to make it easy for them to request the most frequent items easily.

    Blueprint deliverables

    Each step of this blueprint is accompanied by supporting deliverables to help you accomplish your goals:

    Standard Operating Procedures

    Sample of the Standard Operating Procedures deliverable.

    Maturity Assessment

    Sample of the Maturity Assessment deliverable.

    Categorization scheme

    Sample of the Categorization scheme deliverable.

    Improvement Initiative

    Sample of the Improvement Initiative deliverable.
    Create a standard operating procedure to ensure the support team has a consistent understanding of how they need to engage with the business.

    Blueprint benefits

    IT benefits

    • Improve workload distribution for technicians and enable prioritization based on work type, urgency, and impact.
    • Improved communications methods and messaging will help the technicians set expectations appropriately and reduce friction between each other and their supported end users.
    • Best practices and use of industry-standard tools will reduce administrative overhead while improving workload management.

    Business benefits

    • IT taking a customer-centric approach will improve access to support and reduce interruptions to the way they do business.
    • Expectation setting and improved communications will allow the business to better plan their work around new requests and will have a better understanding of service level agreements.

    Guided Implementation

    A Guided Implementation (GI) is a series of calls with an Info-Tech analyst to help implement our best practices in your organization.

    A typical GI is six to ten calls over the course of three to four months.

    The current state discussion will determine the path.

    What does a typical GI on this topic look like?

    Current State & Vision

    Best Practices

    Service Requests & Incidents

    Communications

    Next Steps & Roadmap

    Call #1: Discuss current state & create a vision

    Call #2: Document roles & responsibilities

    Call #3:Review and define best practices for ticket handling Call #4: Review categorization

    Call #5: Discuss service requests & self-serve

    Call #6: Assess incident management processes
    Call #7: Assess and document reporting and metrics

    Call #8: Discuss communications methods

    Call #9: Review next steps

    Call #10: Build roadmap for updates

    For a workshop on this topic, see the blueprint Standardize the Service Desk

    Executive Brief Case Study

    Southwest CARE Center
    Logo for Southwest Care.
    INDUSTRY
    Healthcare

    Service Desk Project

    After relying on a managed service provider (MSP) for a number of years, the business hired Kevin to repatriate IT. As part of that mandate, his first strategic initiative was to build a service desk. SCC engaged Info-Tech Research Group to select and build a structure; assign roles and responsibilities; implement incident management, request fulfilment, and knowledge management processes; and integrate a recently purchased ITSM tool.

    Over the course of a four-day onsite engagement, SCC’s IT team worked with two Info-Tech analysts to create and document workflows, establish ticket handling guidelines, and review their technological requirements.

    Results

    The team developed a service desk standard operating procedure and an implementation roadmap with clear service level agreements.

    Southwest CARE Center (SCC) is a leading specialty healthcare provider in New Mexico. They offer a variety of high-quality services with a focus on compassionate, patient-centered healthcare.

    “Info-Tech helped me to successfully rebrand from an MSP help desk to an IT service desk. Sandi and Michel provided me with a customized service desk framework and SOP that quickly built trust within the organization. By not having to tweak and recalibrate my service desk processes through trial and error, I was able to save a year’s worth of work, resulting in cost savings of $30,000 to $40,000.” (Kevin Vigil, Director of Information Technology, Southwest CARE Center)

    The service desk is the cornerstone for customer satisfaction

    Bar charts comparing 'Dissatisfied' vs 'Satisfied End Users' in both 'Service Desk Effectiveness' and 'Timeliness'.
    N=63, small enterprise organizations from the End-User Satisfaction Diagnostic, at December 2021
    Dissatisfied was classified as those organizations with an average score less than 7.
    Satisfied was classified as those organizations with an average score greater or equal to 8.
    • End users who were satisfied with service desk effectiveness rated all other IT processes 36% higher than dissatisfied end users.
    • End users who were satisfied with service desk timeliness rated all other IT processes 34% higher than dissatisfied end-users.

    Improve the service desk with a Start, Stop, Continue assessment

    Use this exercise as an opportunity to discuss what’s working and what isn’t with your current help desk. Use this to define your goals for the improvement project, with a plan to return to the results and rerun the exercise on a regular basis.

    STOP

    • What service desk processes are counterproductive?
    • What service blockers exist that consistently undermine good results?
    • Are end-user relationships with individual team members negatively impacting satisfaction?
    • Make notes on initial ideas for improvement.

    START

    • What service process improvements could be implemented immediately?
    • What technical qualifications do individual staff members need to improve?
    • What opportunities exist to improve service desk communications with end users?
    • How can escalation and triage be more efficient?

    CONTINUE

    • What aspects of your current service desk are positive?
    • What processes are efficient and can be emulated elsewhere?
    • Where can you identify high levels of end-user satisfaction?

    Complete a maturity assessment to create a baseline and areas of focus

    The Service Desk Maturity Assessment tool helps organizations assess their service desk process maturity and focus the project on the activities that matter most.

    The tool will help guide improvement efforts and measure your progress.

    • The second tab of the tool walks through a qualitative assessment of your service desk practices. Questions will prompt you to evaluate how you are executing key activities. Select the answer in the drop-down menus that most closely aligns with your current state.
    • The third tab displays your rate of process completeness and maturity. You will receive a score for each phase, an overall score, and advice based on your performance.
    • Document the results of the efficiency assessment in the Service Desk Improvement Initiative.
    • The tool is intended for periodic use. Review your answers each year and devise initiatives to improve the process performance where you need it most.
    Sample of the Service Desk Maturity Assessment.

    Define your vision for the support structure

    Use this vision for communicating with the business and your IT team

    Consider service improvements and how those changes can be perceived by the organization. For example, offering multiple platforms, such as adding Macs to end-user devices, could translate to “Providing the right IT solutions for the way our employees want to work.”

    To support new platforms, you might need to look at the following steps to get there:
    • Evaluate skills needed – can you upskill generalists quickly, or will specialists be required? Determine training needs for support staff on new platforms.
    • Estimate uptake of the new platform and adjusting budgets – will these mostly be role-based decisions?
    • Determine what applications will work on the new platform and which will have a parity offering, which will require a solution like Parallels or VirtualBox, and which might need substitute applications.
    • What utilities will be needed to secure your solutions such as for encryption, antivirus, and firewalls?
    • What changes in the way you deploy and patch machines?
    • What level of support do you need to provide – just platform, or applications as well? What self-serve training can be made available?
    If you need to change the way you deploy equipment, you may want to review the blueprint Simplify Remote Deployment With Zero-Touch Provisioning

    Info-Tech Insight

    Identify some high-level opportunities and plan out how these changes will impact the way you provide support today. Document steps you’ll need to follow to make it happen. This may include new offerings and product sourcing, training, and research.

    Facilitate service desk operations with an ITSM tool

    You don’t need to spend a fortune. Many solutions are free or low-cost for a small number of users, and you don’t necessarily have to give up functionality to save money.

    Encourage users to submit requests through email or self-serve to keep organized. Ensure that reporting will provide you with the basics without effort, but ensure report creation is easy enough if you need to add more.

    Consider tools that do more than just store tickets. ITSM tools for small enterprises can also assist with:
    • Equipment and software license management
    • Self-serve for password reset and improving the experience for end users to submit tickets
    • Software deployment
    • Onboarding and offboarding workflows
    • Integration with monitoring tools
    Info-Tech Insight Buying rather than building allows you the greatest flexibility and can provide enterprise-level functionality at small-enterprise pricing. Use Info-Tech’s IT Service Management Selection Guide to create a business case and list of requirements for your ITSM purchase.
    Logo for Spiceworks.
    Logo for ZenDesk. Logo for SysAid.
    Logo for ManageEngine.
    Logo for Vector Networks.
    Logo for Freshworks.
    Logo for Squadcast.
    Logo for Jira Software.
    Logos contain links

    ITSM implementations are the perfect time to fix processes

    Consider engaging a partner for the installation and setup as they will have the expertise to troubleshoot and get you to value quickly.

    Even with a partner, don’t rely on them to set up categories, prioritizations, and workflows. If you have unique requirements, you will need to bring your design work to the table to avoid getting a “standard install” that will need to be modified later.

    When we look at what makes a strong and happy product launch, it boils down to a few key elements:
    • Improving customer service, or at least avoiding a decline
    • Improving access to information for technical team and end users
    • Successfully taking advantage of workflows, templates, and other features designed to improve the technician and user experience
    • Using existing processes with the new tools, without having to completely reengineer how things are done
    For a complete installation guide, visit the blueprint Build an ITSM Implementation Plan
    To prepare for a quick time to value in setting up the new ITSM tool, prioritize in this order:
    1. Categorization and status codes
    2. Prioritization
    3. Divide tickets into incidents and service requests
    4. Create workflows for onboarding and offboarding (automate where you can)
    5. Track escalations to vendors
    6. Reporting
    7. Self-serve
    8. Equipment inventory (leading to hardware asset management)

    Define roles looking to balance between customer service and getting things done

    The team will need to provide backfill for each other with high volume, vacations, and leave, but also need to proactively manage interruptions appropriately as they work on projects.
    Icon of a bullseye. First contact – customer service, general knowledge
    Answers phones, chats, responds to email, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for end users.
    Icon of a pie chart. Analyst – experienced troubleshooter, general knowledge
    Answers phone when FC isn’t available, responds to email, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for first contact, escalates to other technicians or vendors.
    Icon of a lightbulb. Analyst – experienced troubleshooter, specialist
    Answers phones only when necessary, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for anyone in IT, consults with peers, escalates to vendors.
    Icon of gear on a folder. Engineer – deep expertise, specialist
    Answers phones only when necessary, troubleshooting, creates knowledge articles for anyone in IT, consults with peers, escalates to vendors.
    Icon of a handshake. Vendor, Managed Service Providers
    Escalation point per contract terms, must meet SLAs, communicate regularly with analysts and management as appropriate. Who escalates and who manages them?
    Row of colorful people.

    Note roles in the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Keep customers happy and technicians calm by properly managing your queue

    If ticket volume is too high or too dispersed to effectively have teams self-select tickets, assign a queue manager to review tickets throughout the day to ensure they’re assigned and on the technician’s schedule. This is particularly important for technicians who don’t regularly work out of the ticketing system. Follow up on approaching or missed SLAs.

    • Separate incidents (break fix) and service requests: Prioritize incidents over service requests to focus on getting users doing business as soon as possible. Schedule service requests for slower times or assign to technicians who are not working the front lines.
    • First in/first out…mostly: We typically look to prioritize incidents over service requests and only prioritize incidents if there are multiple people or VIPs affected. Where everything is equal, deal with the oldest first. Pause occasionally to deal with quick wins such as password resets.
    • Update ticket status and notes: Knowing what tickets are in progress and which ones are waiting on information or parts is important for anyone looking to pick up the next ticket. Make sure everyone is aware of the benefits of keeping this information up to date, so technicians know what to work on next without duplicating each other’s work.
    • Implement solutions quickly by using knowledge articles: Continue to build out the knowledge base to be able to resolve end-user issues quickly, check to see if additional information is needed before escalating tickets to other technicians.
    • Encourage end users to create tickets through the portal: Issues called in are automatically moved to the front of the queue, regardless of urgency. Make it easy for users to report issues using the portal and save the phone for urgent issues to allow appropriate prioritization of tickets.
    • Create a process to add additional resources on a regular basis to keep control of the backlog: A few extra hours once a week may be enough if the team is focused without interruptions.
    • Determine what backlog is acceptable to your users: Set that as a maximum time to resolve. Ideally, set up automated escalations for tickets that are approaching target SLAs, and build flexibility into schedules to have an “all hands on deck” option if the volume gets too high.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Make sure your queue manager has an accurate escalation list and has the authority to assign tickets and engage with the technical team to manage SLAs; otherwise, SLAs will never be consistently managed.

    Best practices for ticket handling

    Accurate data leads to good decisions. If working toward adding staff members, reducing recurring incidents, gaining access to better tools, or demonstrating value to the business, tickets will enable reporting and dashboards to manage your day-to-day business and provide reports to stakeholders.
    • Provide an easy way for end users to electronically submit tickets and encourage them to do so. This doesn’t mean you shouldn’t still accept phone calls, but that should be encouraged for time sensitive issues.
    • Create and update tickets, but not at the expense of good customer service. Agents can start the ticket but shouldn’t spend five minutes creating the ticket when they should be troubleshooting the problem.
    • Update the ticket when the issue is resolved or needs to be escalated. If agents are escalating, they should make sure all relevant information is passed along to the next technician.
    • Update user of ETA if issue cannot be resolved quickly.
    • Update categories to reflect the actual issue and resolution.
    • Reference or link to the knowledge base article as the documented steps taken to resolve the incident.
    • Validate incident is resolved with client. Automate this process with ticket closure after a certain time.
    • Close or resolve the ticket on time.
    Ticket templates (or quick tickets) for common incidents can lead to fast creation, data input, and categorizations. Templates can reduce the time it takes to create tickets from two minutes to 30 seconds.
    Sample ticket template.

    Create a right-sized self-service portal

    Review tickets and talk to the team to find out the most frequent requests and the most frequent incidents that could be solved by the end user if there were clear instructions. Check with your user community to see what they would like to see in the portal.

    A portal is only as attractive as it is useful. Enabling ticket creation and review is the bare minimum and may not entice users to the portal if email is just as easy to use for ticket creation.

    Consider opening the portal to groups other than IT. HR, finance, and others may have information they want to share or forms to fill in or download where an employee portal rather than an IT portal could be helpful. Work with other departments to see if they would find value. Make sure your solution is easy to use when adding content. Low-code options are useful for this.

    Portals could be built in the ITSM solution or SharePoint/Teams and should include:

    • Easy ways to create and see status on all tickets
    • Manuals, how-to articles, links to training
    • Answers to common questions, could be a wiki or Q&A for users to help each other as well as IT
    • Could have a chatbot to help people find documents or to create a ticket

    Info-Tech Insight

    Consider using video capture software to create short how-to videos for common questions. Vendors such as TechSmith Snagit , Vimeo Screen Recorder, Screencast-O-Matic Video Recording, and Movavi Screen Recording may be quick and easy to learn.

    49%

    49% of employees have trouble finding information at work

    35%

    Employees can cut time spent looking for information by 35% with quality intranet

    (Source: Liferay)

    Use customer satisfaction surveys to monitor service levels

    Transactional surveys are tied to specific interactions and provide a means of communication to help users communicate satisfaction or dissatisfaction with single interactions.
    • Keep it simple: One question to rate the service with opportunity to add a comment is enough to understand the sentiment and potential issues, and it will be more likely that the user will fill it out.
    • Follow up: Feedback will only be provided if customers think it’s being read and actioned. Set an alert to receive notification of any negative feedback and follow up within one or two business days to show you’re listening.

    A simple customer feedback form with smiley face scale.

    Relationship surveys can be run annually to obtain feedback on the overall customer experience.

    Inform yourself of how well you are doing or where you need improvement in the broad services provided.

    Provide a high-level perspective on the relationship between the business and IT.

    Help with strategic improvement decisions.

    Should be sent over a duration of time and to the entire customer base after they’ve had time to experience all the services provided by the service desk. This can be done on an annual basis.

    For example: Info-Tech’s End User Satisfaction Diagnostic. Included in your membership.

    Keep categorizations simple

    Asset categorization provides reports that are straightforward and useful for IT and that are typically used where the business isn’t demanding complex reports.

    Too many options can cause confusion; too few options provide little value. Try to avoid using “miscellaneous” – it’s not useful information. Test your tickets against your new scheme to make sure it works for you. Effective classification schemes are concise, easy to use correctly, and easy to maintain.

    Build out the categories with these questions:
    • What kind of asset am I working on? (type)
    • What general asset group am I working on? (category)
    • What particular asset am I working on? (sub-category)

    Create resolution codes to further modify the data for deeper reporting. This is typically a separate field, as you could use the same code for many categories. Keep it simple, but make sure it’s descriptive enough to understand the type of work happening in IT.

    Create and define simple status fields to quickly review tickets and know what needs to be actioned. Don’t stop the clock for any status changes unless you’re waiting on users. The elapsed time is important to measure from a customer satisfaction perspective.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Think about how you will use the data to determine which components need to be included in reports. If components won’t be used for reporting, routing, or warranty, reporting down to the component level adds little value.

    Example table of categorizations.


    Need to make quick progress? Use Info-Tech Research Group’s Service Desk Asset-Based Categories template.

    1.1 Build or review your categories

    1-3 hours

    Input: Existing tickets

    Output: Categorization scheme

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers, Sample categorization scheme

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Discuss:

    • How can you use categories and resolution information to enhance reporting?
    • What level of detail do you need to be able to understand the data and take action? What level of detail is too much?
    • Are current status fields allowing you to accurately assess pending work at a glance?

    Draft:

    1. Start with existing categories and review, identifying duplicates and areas of inconsistency.
    2. Write out proposed resolution codes and status fields and critically assess their value.
    3. Test categories and resolution codes against a few recent tickets.
    4. Record the ticket categorization scheme in the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure.

    Download the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Separate tickets into service requests and incidents

    Tickets should be separated into different ticket types to be able to see briefly what needs to be prioritized. This may seem like a non-issue if you have a small team, but if you ever need to report how quickly you’re solving break-fix issues or whether you’re doing root cause analysis, this will save on future efforts. Separating ticket types may make it easier to route tickets automatically or to a new provider in the future.

    INCIDENTS

    SERVICE REQUESTS

    Icon of a bullseye.

    PRIORITIZATION

    Incidents will be prioritized based on urgency and impact to the organization. Service requests will be scheduled and only increase in prioritization if there is an issue with the request process (e.g. new hire start).
    Icon of a handshake.

    SLAs

    Did incidents get resolved according to prioritization rules? REPONSE & RESOLUTION Did service requests get completed on time? SCHEDULING & FULFILMENT
    Icon of a lightbulb.

    TRIAGE & ROOT CAUSE ANALYSIS

    Incidents will typically need triage at the service desk unless something is set up to go directly to a specialist. Service requests don’t need triage and can be routed automatically for approvals and fulfillment.

    “For me, the first key question is, is this keeping you from doing business? Is this a service request? Is it actually something that's broken? Well, okay. Now let's have the conversation about what's broken and keeping you from doing business.” (Anonymous CIO)

    Determine how service requests will be fulfilled

    Process steps for service requests: 'Request, Approve, Schedule, Fulfill, Notify requester, Close ticket'.

    • Identify standard requests, meaning any product approved for use and deployment in the organization.
    • Determine whether this should be published and how. Consider a service catalog with the ability to create tickets right from the request page. If there is an opportunity to automate fulfillment, build that into your workflow and project plans.
    • Create workflows for complicated requests such as onboarding, and build them into a template in the service desk tool. This will allow you to reduce the administrative work to deploy tasks.
    • Who will fulfill requests? There may be a need for more than one technician to be able to fulfill if volume dictates, but it’s important to determine what will be done by each level to quickly assign those tickets for scheduling. Define what will be done by each group of technicians.
    • Determine reasonable SLAs for most service requests. Identify which ones will not meet “normal” SLAs. As you build out a service catalog or automate fulfillment, SLAs can be refined.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Service requests are not as urgent as incidents and should be scheduled.

    Set the SLA based on time to fulfill, plus a buffer to schedule around more urgent service requests.

    1.2 Identify service requests and routing needs

    2-3 hours

    Input: Ticket data, Existing workflow diagrams

    Output: Workflow diagrams

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers, Visio

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Identify:

    1. Create your list of typical service requests and identify the best person to fulfill, based on complexity, documentation, specialty, access rights.
    2. Review service requests which include multiple people or departments, such as onboarding and offboarding
    3. Draw existing processes.
    4. Discuss challenges and critique existing process.
    5. Document proposed changes and steps that will need to be taken to improve the process.

    Download the Incident Management and Service Desk – Standard Operating Procedure Template

    Incident management

    Critical incidents and normal incidents

    Even with a small team, it’s important to define a priority for response and resolution time for SLA and uptime reporting and extracting insights for continual improvement efforts.

    • Mission-critical systems or problems that affect many people should always come first (i.e. Severity Level 1).
    • The bulk of reported problems, however, are often individual problems with desktop PCs (i.e. Severity Level 3 or 4).
    • Some questions to consider when deciding on problem severity include:
      • How is productivity affected?
      • How many users are affected?
      • How many systems are affected?
      • How critical are the affected systems to the organization?
    • Decide how many severity levels the organization needs the service desk to have. Four levels of severity is ideal for most organizations.
    Go to incident management for SE

    Super-specialization of knowledge is also a common factor in smaller teams and is caused by complex architectures. While helpful, if that knowledge isn’t documented, it can walk out the door with the resource and the rest of the team is left scrambling.

    Lessons learned may be gathered for critical incidents but often are not propagated, which impacts the ability to solve recurring incidents.

    Over time, repeated incidents can have a negative impact on the customer’s perception that the service desk is a credible and essential service to the business.

    Cover image for 'Incident Management for Small Enterprise'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    1.3 Activity: Identify critical systems

    1 hour

    Input: Ticket data, Business continuity plan

    Output: Service desk SOP

    Materials: Whiteboard/Flip charts, Markers

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Discuss and document:

    1. Create a list of the most critical systems, and identify and document the escalation path.
    2. Review inventory of support documents for critical systems and identify any that require runbooks to ensure quick resolution in the event of an outage or major performance issue. Refer to the blueprint Incident Management for Small Enterprise to prioritize and document runbooks as needed.
    3. Review vendor agreements to determine if SLAs are appropriate to support needs. If there is a need for adjustments, determine options for modifying or renegotiating SLAs.

    Download the Incident Runbook Prioritization Tool

    Prioritization scheme

    Keep the priority scheme simple and meaningful, using this framework to communicate and report to stakeholders and set SLAs for response and resolution.
    1. Focus primarily on incidents. Service requests should always be medium urgency, unless there is a valid reason to move one to high level.
    2. Separate major outages from all other tickets as these are a major factor in business impact.
    3. Decide how many levels of severity are appropriate for your organization.
    4. Build a prioritization matrix, breaking down priority levels by impact and urgency.
    5. Build out the definitions of “impact” and “urgency” to complete the prioritization matrix.
    6. Run through examples of each priority level to make sure everyone is on the same page.
    A matrix of prioritization with rows as levels of 'IMPACT' and columns as levels of 'URGENCY'. Ratings range from 'Critical' at 'Extensive/Critical' to 'Low' at 'Low Impact/Low'.

    Document escalation rules and contacts

    Depending on the size of the team, escalations may be mostly to internal technical colleagues or could be primarily to vendors.

    • Ensure the list of escalation rules and contacts is accurate and available, adding expected SLAs for quick reference
    • If tickets are being escalated but shouldn’t be, ensure knowledge articles and training materials are up to date
    • Follow up on all external escalations, ensuring SLAs are respected
    • Publish an escalation path for clients if service is not meeting their needs (for internal and external providers) and automate escalations for tickets breaching SLAs
    Escalation rules strung together.
    User doesn’t know who will fix the issue but expects to see it done in a reasonable time. If issue cannot be resolved right away, set expectations for resolution time.
    • Document information so next technician doesn’t need to ask the same questions.
    • Escalate to the right technician the first time.
    • Check notes to catch up on the issue.
    • Run tests if necessary.
    • Contact user to troubleshoot and fix.
    • Meet SLAs or update client on new ETA.
    • Provide complete information to vendor.
    • Monitor resolution.
    • Follow up with vendor if delays.
    • Update client as needed.
    • Vendor will provide support according to agreement.
    • Encourage vendor to provide regular updates to IT.
    • Review vendor performance regularly.
    • IT will validate issue is resolved and close ticket.
    Validate user is happy with the experience

    Define, measure, and report on service level agreements

    Improving communications is the most effective way to improve customer service
    1. Set goals for time to respond and time to resolve for different incident levels, communicate to the technical team, and test ability to meet these goals.
    2. Set goals for time to fulfil for most service requests, document exceptions (e.g. onboarding).
    3. Create reports to measure against goals and determine what information will be most effective for reporting to the business.
    4. Management: Communicate expectations to the business leaders and end users.
    5. Management: Set regular cadence to meet with stakeholders to discuss expectations and review relevant metrics.
    6. Management: Determine how metrics will be tracked and reviewed to manage technical partners.
    Keep messaging simple
    • Be prepared with detailed reporting if needed, but focus on a few key metrics to inform stakeholders of progress against goals.
    • Use trending to tell a story, especially when presenting success stories.
    • Use appropriate media for each type of message. For example: SLAs can be listed on automated ticket responses or in a banner on the portal.

    Determine what communications are most important and who will do them

    Icon of a bperson ascending a staircase.

    PROACTIVE, PLANNED CHANGES

    From: Service Desk

    Messaging provided by engineer or director, sent to all employees; proactive planning with business unit leaders.

    Icon of a bullseye.

    OUTAGES & UPDATES

    From: Service Desk

    Use templates to send out concise messaging and updates hourly, with input from technical team working on restoring services to all; director to liaise with business stakeholders.

    Icon of a lightbulb.

    UPDATES TO SERVICES, SELF-SERVE

    From: Director

    Send announcements no more than monthly about new services and processes.

    Icon of a handshake.

    REGULAR STAKEHOLDER COMMUNICATIONS

    From: Director

    Monthly reporting to business and IT stakeholders on strategic and project goals, manage escalations.

    1.4 Create communications plan

    2 hours

    Input: Sample past communications

    Output: Communications templates

    Materials: Whiteboard/flip charts, Markers

    Participants: CIO, Service desk manager, Technicians

    Determine where templates are needed to ensure quick and consistent communications. Review sample templates and modify to suit your needs:

    1. Proactive, planned changes
    2. Outages and updates
    3. Updates to services, self-serve
    4. Regular stakeholder communications

    Download the communications templates

    Create reports that are useful and actionable

    Reporting serves two purposes:

    1. Accountability to stakeholders
    2. Identification of items that need action

    To determine what reports are needed, ask yourself:

    • What are your goals?
    • What story are you trying to tell?
    • What do you need to manage day to day?
    • What do you need to report to get funding?
    • What do you need to report to your stakeholders for service updates?

    Determine which metrics will be most useful to suit your strategic and operational goals

    STRATEGIC GOAL (stakeholders): Improve customer service evidenced by:

    TIME

    • Aged backlog
    • Service requests solved within SLA (could also look for quick ones, e.g. tickets solved in one day, % solved within one hour)
    • Volume of incidents and time to solve each type
    • Critical incidents solved in 4 hours
    • Incidents solved same day

    QUALITY

    • Percentage of tickets solved at first contact
    • SLAs missed
    • Percentage of services available to request through catalog
    • Percentage of tickets created through portal (speaks to quality of experience)
    • Customer satisfaction survey results – transactional and annual

    RESOURCES

    • Knowledge articles used by technicians
    • Knowledge articles used by end users
    • Tickets resolved at each technician level (volume)
    • Non-standard requests evaluated and fulfilled by volume & time served
    • Volume of recurring incidents
    OPERATIONAL GOALS: Report to director & technicians

    What else can you do to improve service?

    Review the next few pages to see if you need additional blueprints to help you:
    • Evaluate staffing and training needs to ensure the right number of resources are available and they have the skills they need for your environment.
    • Create self-service for end users to get quick answers and create tickets.
    • Create a knowledge base to ensure backup for technical expertise.
    • Develop customer service skills through training.
    • Perform ticket analysis to better understand your technical environment.

    Be agile in your approach to service

    It’s easy for small teams to get overwhelmed when covering for vacations, illness, or leave. Determine where priorities may be adjusted during busy or short-staffed times.

    • Have a plan to cross-train technicians and create comprehensive knowledge articles for coverage during vacations and unexpected absences.
    • Know where it makes sense to bring in vendors, such as for managed print services, or to cover for extended absences.
    • Look for opportunities to automate functions or reduce administrative overhead through workflows.
    • Identify any risks and determine how to mitigate, such as managing or changing administrative passwords.
    • Create self-serve to enable ticket creation and self-solve for those users who wish to use it.

    Staff the service desk to meet demand

    • With increasing complexity of support and demand on service desks, staff are often left feeling overwhelmed and struggling to keep up with ticket volume, resulting in long resolution times and frustrated end users.
    • However, it’s not as simple as hiring more staff to keep up with ticket volume. IT managers must have the data to support their case for increasing resources or even maintaining their current resources in an environment where many executives are looking to reduce headcount.
    • Without changing resources to match demand, IT managers will need to determine how to maximize the use of their resources to deliver better service.

    Cover image for 'Staff the Service Desk to Meet Demand'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Create and manage a knowledge base

    With a small team, it may seem redundant to create a knowledge base, but without key system and process workflows and runbooks, an organization is still at risk of bottlenecks and knowledge failure.

    • Use a knowledge base to document pre-escalation troubleshooting steps, known errors and workarounds, and runbook solutions.
    • Where incidents may have many root causes, document which are the most frequent solutions and where variations are typically used.
    • Start with an inventory of personal documents, compare and consolidate into the knowledge base, and ensure they are accurate and up to date.
    • Assign someone to review articles on a regular basis and flag for editing and archiving as the technical environment changes.
    • Supplement with vendor-provided or purchased content. Two options for purchased content include RightAnswers or Netformx.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Appeal to a broad audience. Use non-technical language whenever possible to help less technical readers. Identify error messages and use screenshots where it makes sense. Take advantage of social features like voting buttons to increase use.

    Optimize the service desk with a shift-left strategy

    • “Shift left” is a strategy which moves appropriate technical work to users through knowledge articles, automation and service catalogs, freeing up time for technicians to work on more complex issues.
    • Many organizations have built a great knowledge base but fail to see the value of it over time as it becomes overburdened with overlapping and out-of-date information. Knowledge capture, updating, and review must be embedded into your processes if you want to keep the knowledge base useful.
    • Similarly, the self-service portal is often deployed out of the box with little input from end users and fails to deliver its intended benefits. The portal needs to be designed from the end user’s point of view with the goal of self-resolution if it will serve its purpose of deflecting tickets.

    Cover image for 'Optimize the Service Desk With a Shift-Left Strategy'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Customer service isn’t just about friendliness

    Your team will all need to deal with end users at some point, and that may occur in times of high stress. Ensure the team has the skills they need to actively listen, stay positive, and de-escalate.

    Info-Tech’s customer service program is a modular approach to improve skills one area at a time. Delivering good customer service means being effective in these areas:
    • Customer focus – Focus on the customer and use a positive, caring, and helpful attitude.
    • Listening and verbal communication skills – Demonstrate empathy and patience, actively listen, and speak in user-friendly ways to help get your point across.
    • Written communication skills – Use appropriate tone, language, and terms in writing (whether via chat, email, or other).
    • Manage difficult situations – Remain calm and in control when dealing with difficult customers and situations.
    • Go the extra mile – Go beyond simply resolving the request to make each interaction positive and memorable.

    Deliver a customer service training program to your IT department

    • There’s a common misconception that customer service skills can’t be taught, so no effort is made to improve those skills.
    • Even when there is a desire to improve customer service, it’s hard for IT teams to make time for training and improvement when they’re too busy trying to keep up with tickets.
    • A talented service desk agent with both great technical and customer service skills doesn’t have to be a rare unicorn, and an agent without innate customer service skills isn’t a lost cause. Relevant and impactful customer service habits, techniques, and skills can be taught through practical, role-based training.
    • IT leaders can make time for this training through targeted, short modules along with continual on-the-job coaching and development.

    Cover image for 'Deliver Customer Service Training Program to Your IT Department'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Improve your ticket analysis

    Once you’ve got great data coming into the ticketing system, it’s important to rethink your metrics and determine if there are more insights to be found.

    Analyzing ticket data involves:
    • Collecting ticket data and keeping it clean. Based on the metrics you’re analyzing, define ticket expectations and keep the data up to date.
    • Showing the value of the service desk. SLAs are meaningless if they are not met consistently. The prerequisite to implementing proper SLAs is fully understanding the proper workload of the service desk.
    • Understanding – and improving – the user experience. You cannot improve the user experience without meaningful metrics that allow you to understand the user experience. Different user groups will have different needs and different expectations of the level of service. Your metrics should reflect those needs and expectations.

    Analyze your service desk ticket data

    Properly analyzing ticket data is challenging for the following reasons:
    • Poor ticket hygiene and unclear ticket handling
    • Service desk personnel are not sure where to start with analysis
    • Too many metrics are tracked to parse actionable data from the noise
    Ticket data won’t give you a silver bullet, but it can help point you in the right direction.

    Cover image for 'Analyze Your Service Desk Ticket Data'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Start doing problem management

    Proactively focusing on root cause analysis will reduce the most disruptive incidents to the organization.

    • A focus on elimination of critical incidents and the more disruptive recurring incidents will reduce future workloads for the team and improve customer satisfaction.
    • This can be challenging when the team is already struggling with workload; however, setting a regular cadence to review tickets, looking for trends, and identifying at least one focus area a month can be a positive outcome for everyone.
    • Focus on the most impactful ticket or service first. The initial goal should be to reduce or eliminate critical and high-impact incidents. Once the high-stress situations are reduced, proactively scheduling the smaller but still time-consuming repeatable incidents can be done.
    • Where you have vendors involved, work with them to determine when root cause analysis must happen and where they’ll need to coordinate with your team or other supporting vendors.

    Problem management

    Problem management can be challenging because it requires skills and knowledge to go deep into a problem and troubleshoot the root cause of an issue, but it also requires uninterrupted time.
    • Problem management, however, can be taught, and the issue isn’t always hard to spot if you have time to look.
    • Using tried and true methods for walking through an issue step by step will enable the team to improve their investigative and troubleshooting skills.
    • Reduction of one or two major incidents and recurring incidents per month will pay off quickly in reducing reactive ticket volume and improve customer satisfaction.

    Cover image for 'Problem Management'.
    Click picture for a link to the blueprint

    Create your roadmap with high-level requirements

    Determine what tasks and projects need to be completed to meet your improvement goals. Create a high-level project plan and balance with existing resources.

    Roadmap of high-level requirements with 'Goals' as row headers and their timelines mapped out across fiscal quarters.

    Bibliography

    Taylor, Sharon and Ivor Macfarlane. ITIL Small Scale Implementation. Office of Government Commerce, 2005.

    “Share, Collaborate, and Communicate on One Consistent Platform.” Liferay, n.d. Accessed 19 July 2022.

    Rodela, Jimmy. “A Beginner’s Guide to Customer Self-Service.” The Ascent, 18 May 2022. Web.

    Get really good at resilience

    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A

    Why be resilient?

    Well, your clients demand it. And it makes business sense; it is much cheaper to retain a client than to acquire new ones. By all means, always expand your client base; just don't make it a zero-sum game by losing clients because you cannot provide decent service. 

    Although the term has existed since the 17th century, it has only received legal attention since 2020. Now, several years later, the EU and the US require companies to prove their resilience.

    To understand what resilience is, please read our article on resilience

    What does it take to become really good at IT resilience?

    IT resilience is a mindset, a collection of techniques, and people management focused on providing consistent service to clients, all rolled into one discipline. While we discuss IT resilience, it takes more than IT staff or IT processes to become a truly resilient business.

    Here are 10 themes relevant to the (IT) resilient organization:

    Transparent culture

    A transparent company culture empowers its people to act confidently, respond swiftly to challenges, and continuously learn and improve. This builds a strong foundation for resilience, enabling the organization to navigate disruption or adversity much more easily.

    At its core, transparency is about open communication, sharing information, and fostering a culture of honesty and trust. These traits directly influence the various aspects of resilience.

    Client service focus

    A client service focus isn't just about customer satisfaction; it's an integral part of a company's resilience strategy. Service stability and continuous value delivery are the elements that retain existing clients and attract new ones through reputation.  System outages, slowdowns, and errors lead to client frustration and erode confidence. In other words, client service focuses on making sure you are available. Once you have that, then you can look at enhancing and expanding services and products. 

    Resilient systems and processes often also include tools and capabilities for proactive communication with clients. This can include automated notifications during system maintenance or updates, providing transparency and minimizing inconvenience. A proactive approach to communication creates a sense of partnership, and it demonstrates that you value your clients' time and business.

    Adaptability

    Adaptable systems and processes give you the flexibility for rapid incident response and easy workarounds, bringing your service back to the level it is supposed to be at.

    In the bigger picture, when you design your systems for flexibility and modification, you can rapidly adjust to new market conditions, evolving customer demands, and technological advancements. This agility allows you to pivot swiftly, seizing opportunities while mitigating risks.

    In the same vein, adaptable processes, fostered by a culture of continuous improvement and open communication, empower teams to innovate and refine workflows in response to challenges. This constant evolution ensures the company remains competitive and aligned with its ever-changing environment.

    Robust change management

    When you establish standardized procedures for planning, testing, and implementing changes, IT change management ensures that every modification, no matter how seemingly small, is carefully considered and assessed for its impact on the broader IT ecosystem. This structured approach significantly reduces the risk of unexpected side effects, unforeseen conflicts, and costly downtime, protecting the company's operations and its reputation.

    It does not have to be a burdensome bureaucratic process. Modern processes and tools take the sting out of these controls. Many actions within change management can be automated without losing oversight by both the IT custodians and the business process owners.

    Redundancy and fault tolerance

    By having duplicates of essential components or systems in place, you ensure that even if one part fails, another is ready to take over. This helps you minimize the impact of unexpected events like hardware issues, software glitches, or other unforeseen problems. This might mean replicating critical policy data across multiple servers or data centers in different locations.

    Fault tolerance is all about your systems and processes being able to keep working even when facing challenges. By designing your software and systems architecture with fault tolerance in mind, you are sure it can gracefully handle errors and failures, preventing those small problems from causing bigger issues, outages, and unhappy clients.

    Security

    Clients entrust you with valuable information. Demonstrating a commitment to data security through resilient systems builds trust and provides reassurance that their data is safeguarded against breaches and unauthorized access.

    Monitoring and alerting

    Trusting that all working is good. making sure is better.  When you observe your systems and receive timely notifications when something seems off, you'll be able to address issues before they snowball into real problems. 

    In any industry, monitoring helps you keep an eye on crucial performance metrics, resource usage, and system health. You'll get insights into how your systems behave, allowing you to identify bottlenecks or potential points of failure before they cause serious problems. And with a well-tuned alerting system, you'll get those critical notifications when something requires immediate attention. This gives you the chance to respond quickly, minimize downtime, and keep things running smoothly for your customers.

    Monitoring is also all about business metrics. Keep your service chains running smoothly and understand the ebb and flow of when clients access your services. Then update and enhance in line with what you see happening. 

    Incident response processes

    Well-thought-out plans and processes are key. Work with your incident managers, developers, suppliers, business staff and product owners and build an embedded method for reacting to incidents. 

    The key is to limit the time of the service interruption. Not everything needs to be handled immediately, so your plan must be clear on how to react to important vs lower-priority incidents. Making the plan and process well-known in the company helps everybody and keeps the calm.

    Embedded business continuity

    Business continuity planning anticipates and prepares for various scenarios, allowing your company to adapt and maintain essential functions even in the face of unexpected disruptions.

    When you proactively address these non-IT aspects of recovery, you build resilience that goes beyond simply restoring technology. It enables you to maintain customer relationships, meet contractual obligations, and safeguard your reputation, even in the face of significant challenges.

    Business continuity is not about prevention; it is about knowing what to do when bad things happen that may threaten your company in a more existential way or when you face issues like a power outage in your building, a pandemic, major road works rendering your business unreachable and such events.

    Effective disaster recovery  

    Disaster recovery is your lifeline when the worst happens. Whether it's a major cyberattack, a natural disaster, or a catastrophic hardware failure, a solid disaster recovery plan ensures your business doesn't sink. It's your strategy to get those critical systems back online and your data restored as quickly as possible.

    Think of it this way: disaster recovery, just like business continuity, isn't about preventing bad things from happening; it's about being prepared to bounce back when they do. It's like having a spare tire in your car, you hope you never need it, but if you get a flat, you're not stranded. With a well-tested disaster recovery plan, you can minimize downtime, reduce data loss, and keep your operations running even in the face of the unexpected. That translates to happier customers, protected revenue, and a reputation for reliability even amidst chaos.

     

    Resilience is the result of a well-conducted orchestra. Many disciplines come together to help you service your clients in a consistent way.

    The operational lifeline of your company and the reason it exists in the first place is to provide your clients with what they need, when they need it, and be able to command a good price for it. And that will keep your shareholders happy as well.

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    • Buy Link or Shortcode: {j2store}506|cart{/j2store}
    • member rating overall impact: N/A
    • member rating average dollars saved: N/A
    • member rating average days saved: N/A
    • Parent Category Name: Storage & Backup Optimization
    • Parent Category Link: /storage-and-backup-optimization
    • You don’t understand the difference between a backup and an archive or when to use one or the other.
    • Data is not constant. It is ever-changing and growing. How do you protect it?
    • You just replaced an application that was in use since day one, and even though you have a fully functional replacement, you would like to archive that original application just in case.
    • You want to save money, so you use your backup solution to archive data, but you know that is not ideal. What is the correct solution?

    Our Advice

    Critical Insight

    Keep in mind that backups are for recovery while archives are for discovery. Backups and archives are often confused but understanding the differences can result in significant savings of time and money. Backing up and archiving may be considered IT tasks, but recovery and discovery are capabilities the business wants and is willing to pay for.

    Impact and Result

    Archives and backups are not the same, and there is a use case for each. Sometimes minor adjustments may be required to make the use case work. Understanding the basics of backups and archives can lead to significant savings at a monetary and effort level.

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives Research & Tools

    Besides the small introduction, subscribers and consulting clients within this management domain have access to:

    1. Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    What is the difference between a backup and a data archive? When should I use one over the other? They are not the same and confusing the two concepts could be expensive.

    • Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives Storyboard
    [infographic]

    Further reading

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    They are not the same, and confusing the two concepts could be expensive

    Analyst Perspective

    Backups and archives are not interchangeable, but they can complement each other.

    Photo of P.J. Ryan, Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations, Info-Tech Research Group.

    Backups and archives are two very different operations that are quite often confused or misplaced. IT and business leaders are tasked with protecting corporate data from a variety of threats. They also must conform to industry, geographical, and legal compliance regulations. Backup solutions keep the data safe from destruction. If you have a backup, why do you also need an archive? Archive solutions hold data for a long period of time and can be searched. If you have an archive, why do you also need a backup solution? Backups and archives used to be the same. Remember when you would keep the DAT tape in the same room as the argon gas fire suppression system for seven years? Now that's just not feasible. Some situations require a creative approach or a combination of backups and archives.

    Understand the difference between archives and backups and you will understand why the two solutions are necessary and beneficial to the business.

    P.J. Ryan
    Research Director, Infrastructure & Operations
    Info-Tech Research Group

    Executive Summary

    Your Challenge
    • You don’t understand the difference between a backup and an archive or when to use one over the other.
    • Data is not constant. It is ever-changing and growing. How do you protect it?
    • You just replaced an application that had been in use since day one, and even though you have a fully functional replacement, you would like to archive that original application just in case.
    • You want to save money, so you use your backup solution to archive data, but you know that is not ideal. What is the correct solution?
    Common Obstacles
    • Storage costs can be expensive, as can some backup and archiving solutions.
    • Unclear requirements definition to decide between backups or archives.
    • Historically, people referred to archiving as tossing something into a box and storing it away indefinitely. Data archiving has a different meaning.
    • Executives want retired applications preserved but do not provide reasons or requirements.
    Info-Tech’s Approach
    • Spend wisely. Why spend money on an archive solution when a backup will suffice? Don’t leave money on the table.
    • Be creative and assess each backup or archive situation carefully. A custom solution may be required.
    • Backup your production data for the purpose of restoring it and adhere to the 3-2-1 rule of backups (Naviko.com).
    • Archive your older data to an alternate storge platform to save space, allow for searchability, and provide retention parameters.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Keep in mind that backups are for recovery while archives are for discovery. Backups and archives are often confused but understanding the differences can result in significant savings of time and money. Backing up and archiving may be considered IT tasks but recovery and discovery are capabilities the business wants and is willing to pay for.

    Archive

    What it IS

    A data archive is an alternate location for your older, infrequently accessed production data. It is indexed and searchable based on keywords. Archives are deleted after a specified period based on your retention policy or compliance directives.

    What it IS NOT

    Archives are not an emergency copy of your production data. They are not any type of copy of your production data. Archives will not help you if you lose your data or accidentally delete a file. Archives are not multiple copies of production data from various recovery points.

    Why use it

    Archives move older data to an alternate location. This frees up storage space for your current data. Archives are indexed and can be searched for historical purposes, compliance reasons, or in the event of a legal matter where specific data must be provided to a legal team.

    Tips & Tricks – Archiving

    • Archiving will move older data to an alternate location. This will free up storage space in the production environment.
    • Archiving solutions index the data to allow for easier searchability. This will aid in common business searches as well as assist with any potential legal searches.
    • Archiving allows companies to hold onto data for historical purposes as well as for specific retention periods in compliance with industry and regional regulations such as SOX, GDPR, FISMA, as well as others (msp360.com).

    Backup

    What it IS

    A backup is a copy of your data from a specific day and time. It is primarily used for recovery or restoration if something happens to the production copy of data. The restore will return the file or folder to the state it was in at the time of the backup.

    Backups occur frequently to ensure the most recent version of data is copied to a safe location.

    A typical backup plan makes a copy of the data every day, once a week, and once a month. The data is stored on tapes, disk, or using cloud storage.

    What it IS NOT

    Backups are not designed for searching or discovery. If you backup your email and must go to that backup in search of all email pertaining to a specific topic, you must restore the full backup and then search for that specific topic or sender. If you kept all the monthly backups for seven years, that will mean repeating that process 84 times to have a conclusive search, assuming you have adequate storage space to restore the email database 84 times.

    Backups do not free up space.

    Why use it

    Backups protect your data in the event of disaster, deletion, or accidental damage. A good backup strategy will include multiple backups on different media and offsite storage of at least one copy.

    Tips & Tricks – Backups

    • Production data should be backed up on a regular basis, ideally once a day or more frequently if possible.
    • Backups are intended to restore data when it gets deleted, over-written, or otherwise compromised. Most restore requests are from the last 24 to 48 hours, so it may be advantageous to keep a backup readily available on disk for a quick restore when needed.
    • Some vendors and industry subject matter experts advocate the use of a 3-2-1 rule when it comes to backups:
      • Keep three copies of your production data
      • In at least two separate locations (some advocate two different formats), and
      • One copy should be offsite (nakivo.com)

    Cold Storage

    • Cold storage refers to a storage option offered by some cloud vendors. In the context of the discussion between backups and archives, it can be an option for a dedicated backup solution for a specific period. Cost is low and the data is protected from destruction.
    • If an app has been replaced and all data transferred to the replacement solution but for some reason the company wishes to hold onto the data, you want a backup, not an archive. Extract the data, convert it into MongoDB or a similar solution, and drop it into cheap cloud storage (cold storage) for less than $5 per TB/month.

    Case Study

    Understanding the difference between archives and backups could save you a lot of time and money

    INDUSTRY: Manufacturing | SOURCE: Info-Tech Research

    Understanding the difference between an archive and a backup was the first step in solving their challenge.

    A leading manufacturing company found themselves in a position where they had to decide between archiving or doing nothing.

    The company had completed several acquisitions and ended up with multiple legacy applications that had been merged or migrated into replacement solutions. These legacy applications were very important to the original companies and although the data they held had been migrated to a replacement solution, executives felt they should hold onto these applications for a period of time, just in case.

    Some of the larger applications were archived using a modern archiving solution, but when it came to the smaller applications, the cost to add them to the archiving solution greatly exceeded the cost to just keep them running and maintain the associated infrastructure.

    A research advisor from Info-Tech Research Group joined a call with the manufacturing company and discussed their situation. The difference between archives and backups was explained and through the course of the conversation it was discovered that the solution was a modified backup. The application data had already been preserved through the migration, so data could be accessed in the production environment. The requirement to keep the legacy application up and running was not necessary but in compliance with the request to keep the information, the data could be exported from the legacy application into a non-sequential database, compressed, and stored in cloud-based cold storage for less than five dollars per terabyte per month. The manufacturing company’s staff realized that they could apply this same approach to several of their legacy applications and save tens of thousands of dollars in the process.

    Understand the Difference Between Backups and Archives

    Backups

    Backups are for recovery. A backup is a snapshot copy of production data at a specific point in time. If the production data is lost, destroyed, or somehow compromised, the data can be restored from the backup.

    Archives

    Archives are for discovery. It is production data that is moved to an alternate location to free up storage space, allow the data to be searchable, and still hold onto the data for historical or compliance purposes.

    Info-Tech Insight

    Archives and backups are not the same, and there is a use case for each. Sometimes minor adjustments may be required to make the use case work. Understanding the basics of backups and archives can lead to significant savings at a monetary and effort level.

    Additional Guidance

    Production data should be backed up.

    The specific backup solution is up to the business.

    Production data that is not frequently accessed should be archived.

    The specific solution to perform and manage the archiving of the data is up to the business

    • Archived data should also be backed up at least once.
    If the app has been replaced and all data transferred, you want a backup not an archive if you want to keep the data.
    • Short term – fence it off.
    • Long term – extract into Mongo then drop it into cheap cloud storage.

    Case Study

    Using tape backups as an archive solution could result in an expensive discovery and retrieval exercise.

    INDUSTRY: Healthcare | SOURCE: Zasio Enterprises Inc.

    “Do not commingle archive data with backup or disaster recovery tapes.”

    A court case in the United States District Court for the District of Nevada involving Guardiola and Renown Health in 2015 is a good example of why using a backup solution to solve an archiving challenge is a bad idea.

    Renown Health used a retention policy that declared any email older than six months of age as inactive and moved that email to a backup tape. Renown Health was ordered by the court to produce emails from a period of time in the past. Renown estimated that it would cost at least $248,000 to produce those emails, based on the effort involved to restore data from each tape and search for the email in question. Renown Health argued that this long and expensive process would result in undue costs.

    The court reviewed the situation and ruled against Renown Health and ordered them to comply with the request (Zasio.com).

    A proper archiving solution would have provided a quick and low-cost method to retrieve the emails in question.

    Backups and archives are complementary to each other

    • Archives are still production data, but the data does not change. A backup is recommended for the archived data, but the frequency of the backups can be lowered.
    • Backups protect you if a disaster strikes by providing a copy of the production data that was compromised or damaged. Archives allow you to access older data that may have just been forgotten, not destroyed or compromised. Archives could also protect you in a legal court case by providing data that is older but may prove your argument in court.

    Archives and backups are not the same.

    Backups copy your data. Archives move your data. Backups facilitate recovery. Archives facilitate discovery.

    Archive Backup
    Definition Move rarely accessed (but still production) data to separate media. Store a copy of frequently used data on a separate media to ensure timely operational recovery.
    Use Case Legal discovery, primary storage reduction, compliance requirements, and audits. Accidental deletion and/or corruption of data, hardware/software failures.
    Method Disk, cloud storage, appliance. Disk, backup appliance, snapshots, cloud.
    Data Older, rarely accessed production data. Current production data.

    Is it a backup or archive?

    • You want to preserve older data for legal and compliance reasons, so you put extra effort into keeping your tape backups safe and secure for seven years. That’s a big mistake that may cost you time and money. You want an archive solution.
    • You replace your older application and migrate all data to the new system, but you want to hold onto the old data, just in case. That’s a backup, not an archive.
    • A long serving senior executive recently left the company. You want to preserve the contents of the executive's laptop in case it is needed in the future. That’s a backup.

    Considerations When Choosing Between Solutions

    1

    Backup or archive?

    2

    What are you protecting?

    3

    Why are you protecting data?

    4

    Solution

    Backup

    Backup and/or archive.
    Additional information required.
    Column 3 may help

    Archive

    Device

    Data

    Application

    Operational Environment

    Operational recovery

    Disaster recovery

    Just in case

    Production storage space reduction

    Retention and preservation

    Governance, risk & compliance

    Backup

    Archive

    Related Info-Tech Research

    Stock image of light grids and flares. Establish an Effective Data Protection Plan

    Give data the attention it deserves by building a strategy that goes beyond backup.

    Stock image of old fuse box switches. Modernize Enterprise Storage

    Current and emerging storage technologies are disrupting the status quo – prepare your infrastructure for the exponential rise in data and its storage requirements.

    Logo for 'Software Reviews' and their information on 'Compare and Evaluate: Data Archiving.'
    Sample of Info-Tech's 'Data Archiving Policy'. Data Archiving Policy

    Bibliography

    “Backup vs. archiving: Know the difference.” Open-E. Accessed 05 Mar 2022.Web.

    G, Denis. “How to build retention policy.” MSP360, Jan 3, 2020. Accessed 10 Mar 2022.

    Ipsen, Adam. “Archive vs Backup: What’s the Difference? A Definition Guide.” BackupAssist, 28 Mar 2017. Accessed 04 Mar 2022.

    Kang, Soo. “Mitigating the expense of E-discovery; Recognizing the difference between back-ups and archived data.” Zasio Enterprises, 08 Oct 2015. Accessed 3 Mar 2022.

    Mayer, Alex. “The 3-2-1 Backup Rule – An Efficient Data Protection Strategy.” Naviko. Accessed 12 Mar 2022.

    “What is Data-Archiving?” Proofpoint. Accessed 07 Mar 2022.